SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


OF THE 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES 


(INCLUDING THE CHINOOK JARGON) 
BY 


SAMES CONSTANTINE PILLING 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1893 


LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES ISSUED BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 


Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology. Catalogue of lin- 
guistic manuscripts in the library of the Bureau of ethnology. By 
James C. Pilling. 

In Bureau of ethnology first annual report; half-title as above p.553, text pp. 
555-577, Washington, 1881, royal 8°. 

Issued separately with cover title as follows: 

Catalogue | of | linguistic manuscripts | in the | library of the Bureau 
of ethnology | by | James C. Pilling | (Extracted from the first annual 
report of the Bureau | of ethnology) | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1881 

Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title as under entry next above p.553, 
text pp. 555-577, royal 8°. One hundred copies issued. 

Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology | J. W. Powell director 
| Proof-sheets | ofa | bibliography | of | the languages | of the | North 
American Indians | by | James Constantine Pilling | (Distributed only 
to collaborators) | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1885 

Title verso blank 1 1. notice (signed J. W. Powell) p. iii, preface (November 4, 1884) 
pp. v-viii, introduction pp. ix—x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of libraries re- 
ferred to by initials pp. xxxvii-xxxviii, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text pp. 
1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, index of languages and dialects pp. 
1091-1135, plates, 4°. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or 
first word of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of 
the-sheet only. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W, Powell, director 
| Bibliography | of the | Eskimo language | by | James Constantine 
Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1887 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (April 20, 1887) pp. ili-v, 
text pp. 1-109, chronologic index pp. 111-116, 8 fac-similes, 8°. An edition of 100 copies 
issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J.W. Powell, director 
| Bibliography | of the | Siouan languages | by | James Constantine 
Pilling | [| Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1887 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (September 1, 1887) pp. 
lii-y, text pp. 1-82, chronologic index pp. 83-87, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued 
in royal 8°, 

ILE 


IV LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES, BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 


Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director 
| Bibliography | of the | Iroquoian languages | by | James Constantine 
Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1888 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (December 15, 1888) 
pp. iii-vi, text pp. 1-180, addenda pp. 181-189, chronologic index pp. 191-208, 9 fac- 
similes, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director 
| Bibliography | of the | Muskhogean languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1889 

Cover title as above,titlé as above verso blank 1 1. preface (May 15, 1889) pp. iii-v, 
text pp. 1-103, chronologic index pp. 105-114, 8°. An edition of 100 copies issued in 
royal 8°. 

Bibliographic notes | on | Eliot’s Indian bible | and | on his other 
translations and works in the | Indian language of Massachusetts | 
Extract from a “Bibliography of the Algonquian languages” | 
[| Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1890 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-58, 21 fac-similes, 
royal 8°. Forms pp. 127-184 of the Bibliography of the Algonquian languages, title 
of which follows. Two hundred and fifty copies issued. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J.W. Powell, director 
| Bibliography | of the | Algonquian languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1891 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (June 1, 1891) pp. iii-iv, 
introduction p.v, index of languages pp. vii—viii, list of fac-similes pp. ix—x, text 
pp. 1-549, addenda pp. 551-575, chronologic index pp. 577-614, 82 fac-similes, 8°. An 
edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director 
| Bibliography | of the | Athapascan languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [ Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1892 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. [list of] linguistie bibliog- 
raphies issued by the Bureau of Ethnology pp. iii-iv, preface (June 15, 1892) pp. 
v-vii, introduction p. ix, index of languages pp. xi-xii, list of fac-similes p. xili, 
text pp. 1-112, addenda pp. 113-115, chronologic index pp. 117-125, 4 fac-similes, 8°. 
An edition of 100 copies issued in royal 8°. 


PREFACE. 


Vhe designation given the family of languages treated of in this 
bibliography is based upon the name of a tribe living near the mouth 
of the Columbia River, from whom a vocabulary was obtained by 
Gabriel Franchére, of the Pacific Fur Company, about 1812, and pub- 
lished in his “ Relation”! in 1820, under the name Chinouque ou 
Tehinouk. This vocabulary, consisting of thirty-three words, thirteen 
numerals, and eleven phrases, is given by Gallatin in his “Synopsis” 
with the spelling of the name anglicized to Chinook; and, though based 
upon the speech of but a single tribe, it was adopted by him as the 
name of a family of languages. 

The family includes a number of tribes whose habitat, to quote from 
Major Powell,’ “extended from the mouth of the river up its course for 
some 200 miles, or to The Dalles. According to Lewis and Clarke, our 
best authorities on the pristine home of this family, most of their vil- 
lages were on the banks of the river, chiefly upon the northern bank, 
though they probably claimed the land upon either bank for several 
miles back. Their villages also extended on the Pacific coast north- 
ward nearly to the northern extension of Shoalwater Bay, and to the 
south to about Tilamook Head, some 20 miles from the mouth of the 
Columbia.” 

As will be seen by reference to the list of tribal names given on a 
subsequent page, the number of languages embraced within the family 
is small; and the amount of material recorded under “Chinook” will 
be found to more than equal that given under the names of all the other 
divisions of the family combined. 

As a matter of fact, but little, comparatively, has been done in the 
collection of linguistic material relating to this family, a fact all the 
more surprising when it is considered that they have been long in 
contact with the whites. There has been no grammar of the language 
published, and until lately none has been compiled; there is but one 
printed dictionary—that of Gibbs—and the vocabularies are neither 
great in length nor wide in scope. There is hope of a better state of 


1Relation d’un voyage a la céte nord-ouest de l’ Amérique Septentrionale dans les 
années 1810, 1811, 1812, 1813 et 1814. Montreal, 1820. 

2Synopsis of the Indian tribes within the United States east of the Rocky Moun- 
tains,and inthe British and Russian possessions in North America. Cambridge, 1836. 

3Indian linguistic families of America, north of Mexico. Washington, 1891. 


Vv 


vi PREFACE. 


affairs, however; for Dr. Franz Boas, the latest and most thorough 
worker in the Chinookan field, has his grammar, dictionary, and texts 
in an advanced state of preparation for publication by the Bureau of 
Ethnology. His material, collected during 1890 and 1891, was gathered 
none too soon, for, as will be seen by the extract from the introduction 
to his legends, which he has kindly permitted me to make and which 
is given on page 7 of this paper, the opportunity for so doing would 
soon have passed. 


It needs but a glance through the accompanying pages to show the 
preponderance of material, both published and in manuscript, relating 
to the Jargon over that of the Chinookan languages proper, a prepon- 
derance so great that, were it proper to speak of the Jargon as an 
American language, a change of title to this bibliography would be 
necessary. Made up asit is from several Indian tongues, the Chinookan, 
Salishan, Wakashan, and Shahaptian principally, and from at least 
two others, the English and the French, the Chinook Jargon might 
with almost equal propriety have been included in a bibliography of 
any one of the other native languages entering into its composition. It 
is made a part of the Chinookan primarily because of its name and 
secondarily from the fact that that family has contributed a much greater 
number of words to its vocabulary than has any one of the others. 

Under various authors herein—Blanchet, Demers, Gibbs, Hale, 
Le Jeune, and others—will be found brief notes relating to the Jargon, 
trade language, or international idiom, as it is variously called; and 
the following succinct account of its origin from Dr. George Gibbs,} 
the first to attempt its comprehensive study, completes its history: 


The origin of this Jargon, a conventional language similar to the Lingua Franca 
of the Mediterranean, the Negro-English-Dutch of Surinam, the Pigeon English of 
China, and several other mixed tongues, dates back to the fur droguers of the last 
century. Those mariners, whose enterprise in the fifteen years preceding 1800 
explored the intricacies of the northwest coast of America, picked up at their gen- 
eral rendezvous, Nootka Sound, various native words useful in barter, and thence 
transplanted them, with additions from the English, to the shores of Oregon. Even 
bef oretheirday, the coasting trade and warlike expeditions of the northern tribes, 
themselvés a seafaring race, had opened up a partial understanding of each other’s 
speech; for when, in 1792, Vancouver’s officers visited Gray’s Harbor they found that 
the natives, though speaking a different language, understood many words of the 
Nootka. 

On the arrival of Lewis and Clarke at the mouth of the Columbia, in 1806, the 
new language, from the sentences given by them, had evidently attained some form. 
It was with the arrival of Astor’s party, however, that the Jargon received its prin- 
cipal impulse. Many more words of English were then brought in, and for the first 
time the French, or rather the Canadian and Missouri patois of the French, was 
introduced. The principal seat of the company being at Astoria, not only a large 
addition of Chinook words was made, but a considerable number was taken from 
the Chihalis, who immediately bordered that tribe on the north, each owning a 
portion of Shoalwater Bay. The words adopted from the several languages were, 


| Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. Washington, 1863, 


PREFACE. Vil 


naturally enough, those most easily uttered by all, except, of course, that objects 
new to the natives found their names in French or English, and such modifications 
were made in pronunciation as suited tongues accustomed to different sounds. Thus 
the gutturals of the Indians were softened or dropped and the f and r of the English 
and French, to them unpronounceable, were modified into p and l. Grammatical 
forms were reduced to their simplest expression and variations in mood and tense 
conveyed only by adverbs or by the context. The language continued to receive 
additions and assumed a more distinct and settled meaning under the Northwest 
and Hudson’s Bay Companies, who succeeded Astor’s party, as well as through the 
American settlers in Oregon. Its advantage was soon perceived by the Indians, and 
the Jargon became to some extent a means of communication between natives of 
different speech as well as between them and the whites. It was even used as such 
between Americans and Canadians. It was at first most in vogue upon the Lower 
Columbia and the Willamette, whence it spread to Puget Sound and with the 
extension of trade found its way far up the coast, as well as the Columbia and 
Fraser rivers; and there are now few tribes between the 42d and 57th parallels of 
latitude in which there are not to be found interpreters through its medium. Its 
prevalence and easy acquisition, while of vast convenience to traders and settlers, 
has tended greatly to hinder the acquirement of the original Indian languages; so 
much sv that, except by a few missionaries and pioneers, hardly one of them is 
spoken or understood by white men in all Oregon and Washington Territory. Not- 
withstanding its apparent poverty in number of words and the absence of grammat- 
ical forms, it possesses much more flexibility and power of expression than might be 
imagined and really serves almost every purpose of ordinary intercourse. 

The number of words constituting the Jargon proper has been variously stated. 
Many formerly employed have become in great measure obsolete, while others have 
been locally introduced. Thus, at The Dalles of the Columbia, various terms are 
common which would not be intelligible at Astoria or on Puget Sound. In making 
the following selection, I have included all those which, on reference to a number 
of vocabularies, I have found current at any of these places, rejecting on the, other 
hand such as individuals partially acquainted with the native languages have 
employed for their own convenience. The total number falls a little short of five 
hundred words. 


This international idiom, as it is called by Mr. Hale, is yet a live 
language, and, though lapsing into disuse—being superseded by the 
English—in the land of its birth, is gradually extending along the 
northwest coast, adding to its vocabulary as it travels, until it has 
become the means of intertribal communication between the Indians 
speaking different languages and between them and the white dwellers 
in British Columbia and portions of Alaska. Indeed, there seems 
to be almost a revival of the early interest shown in it, if we may judge 
from the amount of manuscript material relating to it now being made 
ready to put into print. 

One of the most curious and interesting of all the curious attempts 
which have been made to instruct and benefit the Indians by means of 
written characters, is that known as the Kamloops Wawa, a periodical 
described herein at some length under the name of its founder, Pere 
Le Jeune. Written in an international language, “set up” in steno- 
graphic characters, and printed on a mimeograph by its inventor, 
editor, reporter, printer, and publisher all in one, this little weekly 
seems to leave nothing in the way of novelty to be desired. The account 


Vili PREFACE. 


of the reverend father’s methods and purposes, quoted on page 48 from 
one of his papers, will well repay perusal. 


The present volume embraces 270 titular entries, of which 229 reiate 
to printed books and articles and 41 to manuscripts. Of these, 253 
have been seen and described by the compiler (222 of the prints and 31 
of the manuscripts), leaving 17 as derived from outside sources (7 of the 
prints and 10 manuscripts). Of those unseen by the writer, titles and 
descriptions have been received in all cases from persons who have 
actually seen the works and described them for him. 

So far as possible, direct comparison has been made with the works 
themselves during the proof-reading. For this purpose, besides his 
own books, the writer has had access to those in the libraries of Con- 
gress, the Bureau of Ethnology, the Smithsonian Institution, George- 
town University, and to several private collections in the city of Wash- 
ington. Mr. Wilberforce Eames has compared the titles of works con- 
tained in his own library and in the Lenox, and recourse has been had 
to a number of librarians throughout the country for tracings, photo- 
graphs, ete. 

I am indebted to the Director of the Bureau, Major Powell, for the 
unabated interest shown in my bibliographic work, for the opportu- 
nities he has afforded me to prosecute it under the most favorable cir- 
cumstances, and for his continued advice and counsel. 

Many items of interest have been furnished me by Dr. Franz Boas; 
the Rey. Myron Eells, Union City, Wash.; Mr. John K. Gill, Portland, 
Oregon; Hon. Horatio Hale, Clinton, Ontario; Father Le Jeune, Kam- 
loops, B. C.; Maj. Edmond Mallet, Washington, D.C.; Father St. Onge, 
Troy, N. Y., and Dr. T.S. Bulmer, Cedar City, Utah. It gives me pleas- 
ure to make record of my obligations to these gentlemen. 


WASHINGTON, D. C., March 10, 1893. 


IND Ree e rT lO N: 


In the compilation of this catalogue the aim has been to include every- 
thing, printed or in manuscript, relating to the Chinookan language 
and to the Chinook jargon—books, pamphlets, articles in magazines, 
tracts, serials, etc., and such reviews and announcements of publications 
as seemed worthy of notice. 

The dictionary plan has been. followed to its extreme limit, the subject 
and tribal indexes, references to libraries, etc., being included in one 
alphabetic series. The primary arrangement is alphabetic by authors, 
translators of works into the native languages being treated as authors. 
Under each author the arrangement is, first, printed works, and second, 
manuscripts, each group being given chronologically; and in the case 
of printed books each work is followed through its various editions 
before the next in chronologic order is taken up. 

Anonymously printed worksare entered under the name of the author, 
when known, and under the first word of the title, not an article or 
preposition, when not known. A cross-reference is given from the first 
words of anonymous titles when entered under an author and from the 
first words of all titles in the Indian languages, whether anonymous or 
not. Manuscripts are entered under the author when known, under 
the dialect to which they refer when he is not known. 

Each author’s name, with his title, etc.,is entered in full but once,i.e., 
in its alphabetic order; every other mention of him is by surname and 
initials only. 

All titular matter, including cross-references thereto, is in brevier, all 
collations, descriptions, notes, and index matter in nonpareil. 

In detailing contents and in adding notes respecting contents, the 
spelling of proper names used in the particular work itself has been 
followed, and so far as possible the language of the respective writers is 
given. In the index entries of the tribal names the compiler has adopted 
that spelling which seemed to him the best. 

As a general rule initial capitals have been used in titular matter in 
only two cases: first, for proper names, and, second, when the word 
actually appears on the title-page with an initial capital and with the 
remainder in small capitals or lower-case letters. In giving titles in the 
German language the capitals in the case of all substantives have been 
respected. 

In those comparatively few cases of works not seen by the compiler 
the fact is stated or the entry is followed by an asterisk within curves, 


and in either case the authority is usually given. 
Ix 


OPM EASE ths ames Ast 


" 
r Ps ; 
; agit ease Haas Pe ee es ¥ 7 coh : 
i 
F Aa A 
‘ oe U2 57 | ea? bine 8 F ; ’ ¥ i 
° Ui 2d a M 
RISA E et VAs PUL ati ‘ 
¢ * 
coy eset Fata  t aE if E 
SRIELAD phys F M 4 oe i) ivi « : i +) > 
TAKS aL wh ite 
3 > 
£ @ et iM . ; soit 
. 4 ‘ 
¥ i t + 
4 ( 
lg E | 


oy | eee ae 
i nit iz The fag net ¢ SOE 


4A 


‘i aa xg at 


: ” 
: i'4) ’ Pafrs? : 
: ‘7 b y * 
A, j ; (eg SEiii tis, f ;? f- phate. Begiiet peehe Le AF | ay 
tay ae, 7 OPE 17. Ps, CA LAe Ss? ast Lay Cie Firsdy 7 
; ae bt AEE Sass ity Rete seted ies PPS ease, 10h th ~ahhe aie ithe 
. timbeda util nd foros iii tie 


‘ * 


Lishiow ‘inttileak hase gal avigt etaliaes. eblint alate 
wool) onmle Sra De, aot eye lye lane: coe 
iltiy beg Cesiqe baie Gay ai ORE Bie an ee 
TSAR oithy ah eee epee ere f atohetioges arn 


raou ove aO¥ linia etl ty Ue To sade, St at ale iias see pasite 


Beas ( salinitira’r oli Yih sesh doe kate a wating. “ae viovBacelaaaell 
aso cidtive debe oa is bow alte? Bk Rebar 


Pair Xx OF LANGUAGES: 


Page. 
DEER ee Mi aes ee ae ee oS SUB tate oad bee ee oars ees 15 
NC ae ei eo, Pe bas SE a a iss Rar 13 
Oe 82 0h in s,s ee See A ee a RO 16 
EDIE LET OD 2 0802 5 ors ni Soong UL, ia as oR a's 2 wees eee 16 
8 SEY Soe ORS a Re ee Sere LE nr Pier EO 18 
EMR has tap ERS Ce oie SS wk She gy So Hate 18 
RENE et fetes oA MPS Coe oc a's eae BES foe OES, ES 56 
MRT etter Precis Tee A wy mo ee! Sa es eto oe Sh ORS eee Se 74 
MR as ie efoto Fe era eS are a Satya peal oye tete eae ee 74 
Rae gh ONE cy pee 2) ea aa A IS ay nee ae ore 74 
nMCREI  O0 et We. eer pee Oe ea ee Oe An 74 


Sa Ore VC ST MEL ES, 


Page. 
Title-page of Le Jeune’s Kamloops Wawa ........-.........4- . AT 
Title-page of Le Jeune’s Jargon Hymn Book................-... 50 
Mime -pace of Le Jeune’s Jargon Primer ...... 2.2 1-2-0502 =~ 0s 52 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 


By JAMES C. PILLING. 


(An asterisk within parentheses indicates that the compiler has seen no copy of the work referred to.) 


A. 


Allen (Miss A. J.) Ten years in | Allen (A.J.) — Continued. 


Oregon. | Travels and adventures | of 
| doctor E. White and lady | west of 
the Rocky mountains; | with | inci- 
dents of two sea voyages via Sandwich 
| Islands around Cape Horn; | contain- 
ing also a| brief history of the mis- 
sions and settlements of the country— 
origin of | the provisional govern- 
ment—number and customs of the 
Indians— | incidents witnessed while 
traversing and residing in the | terri- 
tory—description of the soil, produc- 
tion and | climate of the country. | 

Compiled by miss A. J. Allen. | 

Ithaca, N. Y.: | Mack, Andrus & co. 
printers. | 1848. 

Title verso copyright (1848) 1 1. introduction 
pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, text pp. 17-399, 8°. 

A few Chinook jargon sentences (from Lee 
and Frost, Ten years in Oregon), pp. 395-396. 

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum. 

A later edition with title-page as follows: 
— Ten years | in | Oregon. | Travels 
and adventures | of | doctor E. White 
and lady, | west of the Rocky moun- 
tains; | with | incidents of two sea 
voyages via Sandwich | Islands around 
Cape Horn; | containing, also, a | brief 
history of the missions and settlement 
of the country—or- | igin of the provi- 
sional government—number and cus- 
toms of | the Indians—incidents wit- 
nessed. while traversing | and residing 
in the territory—description of | the 
soil production and climate. | Compiled 
by miss A. J. Allen. | 

Ithaca, N. Y.: | press of Andrus, 
Gauntlett & Co. | 1850. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, 
contents pp. vii-xyi, text pp. 17-430, 12°. 


Anderson (Alexander Caulfield). 


Linguistic contentsas under titlenext above, 
pp- 395-396 . 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Dunbar. 
A later edition with title-page as follows: 
Thrilling adventures, | travels and 
explorations | of | doctor Elijah White, 
among the | Rocky mountains | and 
in the | far west. | With | incidents of 
two sea voyages via Sand-| wich 
Islands around Cape Horn; | contain- 
ing also a brief history of the missions 
and settlement of the country | — 
origin of the provisional governments 
of the western | territories—number 
and customs of the Indians—| incidents 
witnessed while traversing and re- | 
siding in the territories—description of 
| the soil, productions and climate. ' 
Compiled by miss A. J. Allen. | 

New York: | J. W. Yale. | 1859. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, 
contents pp. vii-xvi, text pp. 17-430, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
pp. 395-396. 

Copies seen : Bancroft, Congress. 


Price 
one dollar and fifty cents. | Hand-book 
| and | map | to| the gold region | of 
| Frazer’s and Thompson’s rivers, | 
with | table of distances. | By Alexan- 
der C. Anderson, | late chief trader 
Hudson bay co.’s service. | To which is 
appended | Chinook Jargon—language 
used etc., etc. | 

Published by J. J. Lecount, | San 
Francisco, | Entered [&c. two lines. ] 
[1858. ] 

Cover title, text pp. 1-31, map, 32°. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon, pp. 25-31, 
1 


2 


Anderson (A. C.) — Continued. 

In the only copy of this work I have seen, 
Mr. Anderson has appended a manuscript note 
as follows: ‘‘ This vocabulary, procured by the 
publisher from some one in S. F., is a miserable 
affair, and was appended without my knowl- 
edge. A.C. A.” 

Copies seen: Bancroft. 


— Vocabulary of the Chinook language. 


Manuscript, 14 pages folio; in the library of | 


the Bureau of Ethnology. Forwarded to Dr. 
Geo. Gibbs, Nov. 7, 1857. 
Contains about 200 words and phrases. 


Armstrong (A. N.) Oregon: | comprising 
a | brief history and full description | 


ington, | embracing the | cities, towns, 
rivers, bays, | harbors, coasts, moun- 
tains, valleys, | prairies and plains; 
together with remarks | upon the social 
position, productions, resources, and | 
prospects of the country, a dissertation 
upon | the climate, and a full descrip- 
tion of | the Indian tribes of the Pacific 
| slope, their manners, etc. | Inter- 
spersed with | incidents of travel and 
adventure. | By A. N. Armstrong, | for 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Armstrong (A. N.) — Continued. 
three years a government surveyor In 
Oregon. | 

Chicago: | published by Chas. Scott 
& co. | 1857. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. copy of correspond- 
ence pp. ili-iv, index pp. y—vi, text pp. 7-147, 12°. 

Chinook Jargon vocabulary (75 words and 
numerals 1-10, 20, 100, 1000), pp. 145-146. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Con- 
gress. 

Astor: This word followinga title or within paren- 
theses after a note indicates that a copy of the 
work referred to has been seen by the compiler 
in the Astor Library, New York City. 


| Authorities: 
of the territories of | Oregon and Wash- | ape 


See Dufossé (E.) 
Eells (M.) 
Field (T. W.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Leclere (C.) 
Ludewig (H. E.} 
Pilling (J. C.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Quaritch (B.) 
Sabin (J.) 
Steiger (E.) 
Triibner & co. 
Trumbull (J. H.) 
Vater (J.S.) 


B. 


Bancroft: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. H. H. Bancroft, San 
Francisco, Cal. 


Bancroft (Hubert Howe). The | native 
races|of|the Pacific states |of | North 
America. | By | Hubert Howe Bancroft. 

| Volume I. | Wild tribes[-V. | Prim- 
itive history]. | 

New York: |] D. Appleton and com- 
pany. | 1874[-1876]. 

5 vols. maps and plates, 8°. Vol. I. Wild 
tribes; II. Civilized nations; III. Myths and 
languages; IV Antiquities; V. Primitive his- 
tory. 

Some copies of vol. 1 are dated 1875. (Eames, 
Lenox.) 

About one-third of vol. 3 of this work is 
devoted to the languages of the west coast. 

Brief reference to the Chinook Jargon and 
its derivation, pp. 556-557.— Classification of the 
aboriginal languages of the Pacific states (pp. 
562-573) includes the Chinook, p. 565.—‘‘ The 
Chinook language’ (pp. 626-629) includes a gen” 
eral discussion, pp. 626-628; Personal pronouns 
in the Watlala dialect, p.628; Conjugation of 
the verbs to be cold and to kill, pp. 628-629.— 
Short comparative vocabulary of the Columbian 


Bancroft (H. H.) — Continued. 
and Mexican tongues includes seven words of 
the Waiilatpu, Molale, Watlala, Chinook, 
Calapooya, Aztec, and Sonora, p. 631.—The 
Chinook Jargon (pp. 631-635) includes a gen- 
eral discussion, pp. 631-634; Lord's prayer with 
interlinear English translation, p. 635. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Brinton, British 
Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, George- 
town, Powell. 

Priced by Leclere, 1878, no. 49, 150 fr. Bought 
by Quaritch at the Ramirez sale, no. 957, for 51. 
15s. and priced by him, no. 29917, 51. 

—— The | native races | of | the Pacific 
states | of | North America. | By | Hu- 
bert Howe Bancroft. | VolumeI. | Wild 
tribes[-V. | Primitive history]. | 

Author’s Copy. | San Francisco. 1874 
[-1876]. 

5 vols. 8°. Similar, except on title-page, to 
previous edition. One hundred copies issued. 

Copies seen: Bancrott, British Museum, Con- 
gress. 

In addition to the above the work has been 
issued with the imprint of Longmans, London; 
Maisonneuve, Paris; and Brockhaus, Leipzig; 
none of which have I seen. 

—— The works | of | Hubert Howe Ban- 
croft. | Volume I[-V], | The native 


CHINOOKAN 


Bancroft (H. H.) — Continued. 
races. | Vol. I. Wild tribes[-V. Primi- 
tive history]. | 

San Francisco: | A. L. Bancroft & 
company, publishers. | 1882. 

5 vols. 8°. 


tory of Central America, History of Mexico, 
etc., each with its own system of numbering, 


This series will include the His- | 


and also numbered consecutively in tke series. | 


Of these works there have been published 
vols. 1-39. The opening paragraph of vol. 39 
gives the following information: ‘‘ This volume 


closes the narrative portion of my historical | 
series; there yet remains to be completed the | 


’ 


biographical section.” 
Oopies scen: Bancroft, British 
Bureau of Ethnology, Congress. 


Museum, 


LANGUAGES. a 


Bates (H. W.) — Continued. 


‘Die Erde und ihre Vélker’ | Central 
America | the West Indies | and South 
America | Edited and extended | By H. 
W. Bates, | assistant-secretary[&c.two 
lines] | With | ethnological appendix 
by A. H. Keane, M. A. I. | Maps and 
illustrations | Third edition | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, 8. W. | 1885 

Collation and contents as in second edition, 


title and description of which are given above. 
Copies seen: Geological Survey. 


| Beach (William Wallace). The | “Indian 


| 
| 


Bates (Henry Walton). Stanford’s | com- 


pendium of geography and travel | 


based on Hellwald’s ‘ Die Erde und ihre | 


Vilker’ Central America | the West In- | 


dies |and | South America | Edited and | 
extended | By H. W. Bates, | assistant- 
secretary of the Royal geographical so- | 
ciety; | author of ‘The naturalist on — 
the river Amazons’ | With | ethnolog- | 


ical appendix by A. H. Keane, B.A. | 
Maps and illustrations | 


London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 


ing cross, 8.W.| 1878 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. frontispiece 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. 
vii-_xvi, listof illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of 
maps p. xix, text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443- 
561, index pp. 563-571, maps and plates, 8°. 

Keane (A. H.), Ethnography and philology 
of America, pp. 443-561. 

Copies seen: British Museum, 
Eames, Geological Survey, National Museum. 


phy and travel | based on Hellwald’s 


‘Die Erde und ihre Volker’ | Central , 


America| the West Indies | and | South 
America | Edited and extended | By H. 
W. Bates, | Author of [&c. two lines] 
| With | ethnological appendix by A. 
H. Keane, M. A. J. | Maps and illustra- 
tions | Second and revised edition | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, 8. W. | 1882 


Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 
1. preface pp. v—vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, list of | 
illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of maps p. xix, | 


text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443-561, index pp. 
563-571, maps and plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp. 443-561. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Harvard. 


—— Stanford’s | compendium of geogra- | 


phy and travel | based on Hellwald’s 


Congress, | 


Stanford’s | Compendium of geogra- | 


miscellany; containing | Papers on the 
History, Antiquities, Arts, Languages, 
Religions, Traditions and Superstitions 
| of | the American aborigines ; | with | 

Descriptions of their Domestic Life, 
Manners,~Customs, | Traits, Amuse- 
ments and Exploits; | travels and ad- 
ventures in the Indian country ; | Inci- 
dents of Border Warfare; Missionary 
Relations, etc. | Edited by W. W. 
Beach. | 

Albany: | J. Munsell, 82 State street. 

| 1877. 

Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 
11]. advertisement verso blank 11. contents pp. 
vii-viii, text pp. 9-477, errata p. 478, index pp. 
479-490, 8°. 

Gatschet (A. §.), Indian languages of the 
Pacific states and territories, pp. 416-447. 

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, British Museum, 
Congress, Eames, Geological Survey, George- 
town, Massachusetts Historical Society, 
Pilling, Wisconsin Historical Society. 

Priced by Leclerc, 1878 catalogue, no. 2663, 20 
fr.; the Murphy copy, no. 197, brought $1.25; 
priced by Clarke & co. 1886 catalogue, no. 6271, 
$3.50, and by Littlefield, Nov. 1887, no. 50, $4. 


Belden (Lieut. George P.) [Vocabulary 


of the Chinook Jargon. ] 

Manuscript, pp. 1-44, 12°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology, Washington. D.C. Re- 
corded in a blank book. 

Explanatory, p. 1.—Vocabulary, alphabet- 
ically arranged by English words, pp. 2-37.— 
Numerals 1-10, 20, 30, 100, 1000, p. 38.—Explana.- 
tory notes, pp. 39-44. 

A copy of the manuscript titled as follows: 


— Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon. | 


Collected by | Lieut. G. P. Belden. | 


Arranged by | J. Curtin. 

Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 
1-53,sm.4°; in the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology. Recorded in a blank book. 

The material is the same as in the original, 
but more systematically arranged, and the 
spelling is changed to more modern usage. 


=| 


4 


Berghaus (Dr. Heinrich). Allgemeiner 
| ethnographischer Atlas | oder | Atlas 
der Vélker-Kunde. | Eine Sammlung | 
von neiinzehn Karten, | auf denen die, 
um die Mitte des neiinzehnten Jahr- 
hunderts statt findende | geographische 


Verbreitung aller, nach ihrer Sprach- | 
verwandtschaft geord- | neten, Volker | 


des Erdballs, und ihre Vertheilung in 
die Reiche und Staaten | der alten wie 
der neiien Welt abgebildet und versinn- 
licht worden ist. | Ein Versuch | von | 
Dt Heinrich Berghaus. | 

Verlag von Justus Perthes in Gotha. 

| 1852. 

Title of the series (Dr. Heinrich Berghaus’ 
physikalischer Atlas, etc.) versol. Lrecto blank, 
title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-68, 19 
maps, folio. 


No. 17. ‘‘Oregon-Vélker” treats of the hab- | 
itat and linguistic relations of the peoples of 


that region, among others the Tshinuk and its 
dialects, p. 56.—Map no. 17 is entitled: ‘‘Ethno- 
graphische Karte von Nordamerika”’ ‘‘ Nach 
Alb. Gallatin, A. von Humboldt, Clavigero, 
Hervas, Hale, Isbester, &c.”’ 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology. 


Bergholtz (Gustaf Fredrik). The Lord’s 
Prayer | in the | Principal Languages, 
Dialects and | Versions of the World, | 


printed in | Type and Vernaculars of 


the | Different Nations, | compiled and 
published by | G. F. Bergholtz. | 
Chicago, Illinois, | 1884. 
Title verso copyright 1 1. contents pp. 3-7, 
preface p. 9, text pp. 11-200, 12°. 
The Lord's prayer in a number of American 
languages, among them the Chinook, p. 36. 
Copies seen: Congress. 
Bible history: 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 


See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
St. Onge (L. N.) 
Bible stories: 


Chinook Jargon See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 


[Blanchet (Rt. Rev. Francis Norbert).] | 


A Complete Dictionary of the Chinook 
Jargon (English-Chinook and Chinook- 
English) ; to which are added numerous 
Conversations, thereby enabling any 
person to speak the Chinook correctly. 
Third edition, published by S. J. 
M ‘Cormick. 

Portland, O. T. 1856. ¢*) 

24 pp. 24°. Title from Triibner’s Bibliograph- 
ical Guide to American Literature (1859), p. 249. 

I put this and following titles under this 
author's name upon information furnished by 
Mr. J. K. Gill, the compiler of the editions sub- 
sequent to the seventh, 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


| Blanchet (F. N.) — Continued, 


{[——] A Complete Dictionary of the 
Chinook Jargon. English-Chinook,and 
Chinook-English. To which is added 
numerous conversations, &e. Third 
edition. 

Portland, Oregon: published by 8. 
J.McCormick. [1862?] a) 


24 pp. 24°. The above title, omitting the 
date, is from Gibbs's Dictionary of the Chinook 
Jargon, where he says: ‘‘Several editions of 
this werk have been published; the last which 
I have seen, in 1862.” 


[——] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jar- 


gon, | to which is added | numerous 
conversations, | thereby enabling any 
person to | speak Chinook correctly. | 
Fourth Edition. | 

Portland, Oregon: | published by S. 
J. McCormick. | Franklin book store, 
Front-st. | 1868. 


Cover title as above, inside title as above 
verso name of printer 1 1. preface and rules for 
pronunciation p. [3], text pp. 4-21, 18°. 

Vocabulary, part I.—English and Chinook 
(alphabetically arranged, double columns), pp. 
4-13.—Numerals 1-1000, p. 138.—Vocabulary, 
part I. [sie]--Chinook and English (alphabet- 
ieally arranged, double columns), pp. 14-18.— 
Conversations (English and Chinook, parallel 
columns), pp. 19-21. 

Copies seen: Eames. 


[——] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jar- 


gon, | to which is added | Numerous 
Conversations, | thereby enabling any 
person to | speak Chinook correctly. | 
Sixth edition. | 

Portland, Oregon: | published by 8. 
J. M’Cormick, 19 First st. | Franklin 
book store. [18737] 

Cover title as above verso advertisement, 
title as above verso preface and rule for pro- 
nunciation 1 1. text pp. 3-24, 24°. 

Vocabulary. Part first. English-Chinook, 
(alphabetically arranged, double columns), pp. 
3-15.—Numerals, p. 15.—Part second. Chinook 
and English (alphabetically arranged, double 
columns), pp. 16-21,— Conversations, English- 
Chinook, pp. 22-24.—Lord’s prayer in Jargon, 
with interlinear English translation, p. 24. 

Copies seen: Ford. 


] Dietionary | of the | Chinook Jar- 
gon | to which is added | numerous 
conversations, | thereby enabling any 
person | to speak Chinook correctly. | 
Sixth edition. | 

Portland, Oregon: | F. L. MeCor- 
mick, publisher, 63 First street. | 1878, 

Title verso preface 1 1, text pp. 3-26, 24°, 


[ 


CHINOOKAN 


Blanchet (F. N.) — Continued. 

English-Chinook vocabulary, pp. 3-10.— 
Chinook-English vocabulary, pp. 17-23.—Con- 
yersations in English-Chinook, pp. 24-26.— 
Lord’s prayer in Jargon, p. 26. 

Copies seen : Bancroft. 

[——] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jar- 
gon, | to which is added | numerous 
conversations, | thereby enabling any 
person | to speak Chinook correctly. | 
Seventh edition. | 

Portland,Oregon. | F. L. McCormick, 
publisher, 91 Second street. | 1879. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso pref- 
ace 1 1. text pp. 3-26, 24°. 

English-Chinook vocabulary, pp. 3-16.— 
Chinook-English vocabulary, pp. 17-23.—Con- 
versations in English-Chinook, pp. 24-26.— 
Lord’s prayer in Jargon, p. 26. 

Copies seen: Congress, Georgetown, Welles- 
ley. 

For later editions, see Gill (J. K.) 


—— [Writings in the Chinook Jargon. ] 


In the preface to the Chinook Dictionary, | 


&e., by Father Demers and others, is a state- 
ment concerning the origin of the Chinook 
Jargon and those who have written therein, 
from which I make the following extract: 
“The Chinook Jargon was invented by the 


Hudson Bay Company traders, who were mostly | 


French-Canadians, Having to trade with the 


numerous tribes inhabiting the countries west | 


of the Rocky Mountains, it was necessary to 
have a language understood by all. Hence the 
idea of composing the Chinook Jargon. Fort 
Vancouver being the principal post, the traders 
of the twenty-nine forts belonging to the com- 
pany, on the western slope, and the Indians 
from every part of that immense country, had 
to come to Vancouver for the trading season. 
They used to learn the Chinook [Jargon], and 
then teach it to others. 
became universally known. 
‘The two first missionaries to Oregon, Rey. 
F. N. Blanchet, Vv. G., and his worthy com. 
panion, Rev. Mod. Demers, arrived from Canada 
to Vancouver, on the 24th of November, 1838. 


They had to instruct numerous tribes of 
Indians, and the wives and children of the 


whites, who spoke only the Chinook. The two 


In this manner, it | 


missionaries set to work to learn it, and in a | 


few weeks Father Demers had mastered it, 
and began to preach. 

**He composed a vocabulary which was very 
useful to other missionaries. He composed 
several canticles which the Indians learned and 
sang with taste and delight. He also translated 
all the Christian prayers in the same language. 

‘Such is the origin of the Chinook Jargon, 
which enabled the two first missionaries in the 
country todo a great deal of good among the 
Indians and half-breeds. The invention of the 
Catholie-Ladder, in April, 1839, by Very Rev. 
Blanchet, and its [oral| explanation in Chinook, 


LANGUAGES. 5 


Blanchet (I*. N.) — Continued. 


had a marvelous success, and gave the Catholic 
missionaries a great superiority and preponder- 
ance much envied by the missionaries belong- 
ing to other denominations. 

“Father Demers, afterwards Bishop of Van- 
couver’s Island, has now gone to enjoy the 
reward of his great labours and apostolic zeal. 
It would be too bad to lose his dictionary and 
other Chinook works. So Archbishop Blan- 
chet, who has himself made a compendium of 
the Christian Doctrinein the same language, has 
had the good inspiration to get the whole pub- 
lished with his corrections and additions.’’—St. 
Onge, in Demers’ Chinook Dictionary. 

Referring to the Catholic Ladder, ‘‘ and its 
explanation in Chinook,” mentioned in the 
above extract, Father St. Onge writes me as 
follows: ‘The Catholic Ladder, of which I 
sent you acopy, was, as you suggest, published 
by Father Lacombe; but it is only an embel- 
lished edition of the Ladder invented by Arch- 
bishop Blanchet, in April, 1889. The arch- 
bishop never printed any Chinook explanation 
of it, and in my preface to the Chinook Diction- 
ary the word oral should have been inserted.” 


—— See Demers (M.), Blanchet (F. N.) 


and St. Onge (L. N.) 

Bishop Blanchet was born at St. Pierre, 
Riviére-du-Sud, Quebec, Canada, September 5, 
1795: was educated in the Petit Séminaire, 
Quebec, and was ordained July 18, 1819, by 
Archbishop Plessis. In 1811 the Pacific Fur 
Company established a trading post, called 
Astoria, at the mouth of the Columbia River. 
After came the Hudson's Bay Company, em- 
ploying many Canadians, most of whom were 
Catholics. Many of them settled and inter- 
married with the Indians of the territory, and 
with these there was a demand for Catholic 
priests and Catholic worship. 

Application was first made to the Rt. Rev. 
J. N. Provencher, Bishop of Juliopolie (Red 
River). The demand for Catholic priests was 
earnestly indorsed by Sir George Simpson. 
governor of the Hudson Bay Company, 
writing from the British capital (1838). He 
applied to the Mt. Rev. Joseph Signay, then 
Archbishop of Quebec. At once, in April, 
1838, Bishop Signay instructed two of his 
missionaries, the Very Rey. F. N. Blanchet and 
the Rev. Modeste Demers, to take charge of the 
mission ‘‘situated between the Pacifie Ocean 
and the Rocky Mountains’’—a mighty charge 
for two men; but the men were apostles, and, 
therefore, as full of practical zeal as of prae- 
tical faith. Father Blanchet was vicar-general, 
with Father Demers as assistant. 

The journey of the devoted missionaries to 
their new mission was along and most laborious 
one, familiar enough in early Catholic American 
history, though almost incomprehensible to us 
in these days of rapid and easy transit. They 
labored on their ronte, baptizing and confirming 
in the faith many Indians, who, at various 
forts, thronged to meet the long-looked-for black 


6 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Blanchet (F. N.) —Continued. 


gowns. Their destination was Fort Vancouver, 
which they reached November 24, 1838. 
Vancouver wasat this time the principal fort 
of the Hudson Bay Company, and this the 
missionaries made their headquarters while for 


| 


four years they toiled unaided up and down 
the wide domain of their mission. The letters | 


of the fathers describing their work and sur- | 


roundings are full of interest and afford valu- 
able material for history. They learned the 
Indian tongue and taught the natives the sim- 
ple prayers and doctrines of the church in their 
own language; Father Demers attending more 
to the Indians, and Father Blanchet to the 
Canadians. 

With the rapid growth of the missions the 
Holy See, at the request of the Bishops of 
Quebec and Baltimore, erected Oregon into a 
vicariate-apostolic (December 1, 1843), appoint- 
ing Father Blanchet its vicar-apostolic. 
papal briefs arrived on November 4, and Father 
Blanchet, setting out for Canada, received his 
consecration in Montreal at the hands of the 
Archbishop of Quebec. Thence he went to 
Rome, which he reached in January, 1846, and 
set before the Pope the great wants of his 
vicariate. 

At his intercession, in July, 1846, after the 
accession of Pius IX., the vicariate of Oregon 


The | 


was erected into an ecclesiastical province, | 


with the three sees of Oregon City, Walla 


Walla (now Wallula), and Vancouver's Island. | 


The Rt. Rev. F. N. Blanchet was appointed to 
Oregon City; the Rt. Rev. A. M. A. Blanchet, 
his brother, to Walla Walla, and the Rt. Rev. 
M. Demers to Vancouver Island. The neces- 


sity of this division may be judged from the | 


result of the missionaries’ labors at the end of 
1844. Most of the Indian tribes of the Sound, 
Caledonia, and several of the Rocky Mountains 
and of Lower Oregon, had been won over to the 
faith. Nine missions had been founded—tive 
in Lower Oregon and four at the Rocky Moun- 
tains. 
erected—five in Lower Oregon, two in Cale- 
donia, and four at the Rocky Mountains. There 


Eleven churches and chapels had been | 


were two educational establishments—one for | 
boys and the other for girls. ‘Chere were fifteen ~ 


priests. secular and regular, besides the sisters. 
These figures may not look large to-day, but 
they were large at the time, and of great signif- 


icance in a rapidly populating and growing | 


region. 

Meanwhile the archbishop of Oregon City 
had been very active abroad in aid of his new 
province and its dioceses. He sought help on 
all sides, and returned in August, 1847, accom- 
panied by a colony of twenty persons, compris- 
ing seven sisters of Notre Dame de Namur, 
three Jesuit fathers, three lay brothers, five 
secular priests, two deacons, and one cleric. 

In 1855 the archbishop started for South 
America to collect for his needy diocese. 
traversed Chile, Bolivia, and Peru, returning in 
1857 after a successful expedition. Two years 
later he departed for Canada, returning the 


He | 


Boas (Dr. Franz). 


Blanchet (F. N.) — Continued. 


same year with twelve sisters of the Holy 
Names of Jesus and Mary for Portland, two 
Sisters of St. Ann for Victoria, some others for 
Vancouver, and three priests. 

In 1866 the archbishop attended the second 
Plenary Council of Baltimore, and, ever watech- 
ful for the cares of his diocese, returned with 
one priest and eight sisters. On July 18, 1869, 
he celebrated the fiftieth anniversary of his 
ordination to the priesthood, and four months 
later left for Rome to assist at the Vatican 
council, where he met his early brother mis- 
sionaries. He returned to Portland in 1870. 

On July 1, 1879, Archbishop Seghers, the 
coadjutor, arrived at Portland, and was received 
by the venerable founder of the diocese, sur- 
rounded by his clergy and faithful flock. In a 
few words of touching simplicity and sweetness 
the aged prelate received and welcomed his 
youthful colaborer to the field where he had 
planted and sowed and reaped so well. After 
initiating Archbishop Seghers into the work of 
the diocese, the venerable man chose wholly to 
retire from the scene of his active labors, and 
published his farewell pastoral on the 27th day 
of February, 1881.— Mallet. 


Chinook [Jargon] 
songs. 

In Journal of Am. Folk-lore, vol. 1, pp. 220- 
226, Boston and New York, 1888, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Thirty-eight songs, one verse each, with 
Knglish translation, pp. 221-224.—Three songs 
with music, p. 225.—One song in Chinook, 
except the last line, which is in Tlingit, p. 225.— 
Glossary of Chinook words (74), alphabetically 
arranged, pp. 225-226. 


—— Notes on the Chinook language. By 


Franz Boas. 


In American Anthropologist, vol. 6, pp. 55-63, 
Washington, 1893, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Tribal divisions, p.55.—Characters used to 
render the sounds of the Chinook language, pp. 
55-56.—Discussion of the language, p. 57.— 
Genders, with examples, pp. 57-58.—Plurals, 
with examples, pp. 58-59.—Cases, with exam- 
ples. pp. 59-60.—Numerals, p. 60.—Verbs, pp. 
60-62.— Word composition, pp. 62-63. 


{[Myths, legends, and texts in the 
Chinookan languages. ] 


Manuscripts, four note books, sm. 4°; in the 
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 

Note book no.1. Texts, ete.,in the Chinook 
dialect : Cikla, a creation myth, p. 1;Ckulkulotl, 
the salmon spear, p.15; The panther and the 
stick, p. 26.—Wasko text: Coyote ana eagle, p. 
32.—Clackamas text, p. 33.—Katiamat texts: 
Ak’asqénagéna, p.34; The flooa, ».48; Tiape- 
qoqot, p. 54.—Clatsop vocabulary, pp. 68-91. 

Note book no. 2. Explanation of Chinook 
texts, pp. 1-19.—Sentences and vocabulary, 
Chinook dialect, pp. 19-33.—Explanation of 
Katlamat texts, pp. 33-57.—Clackamas vocabu- 
lary, pp. 1-11.—Wasko vocabulary, pp. 1-11. 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 7 


Boas (F.) — Continued. 

Note book no. 3. Chinook texts with inter- 
linear translations left-hand pages, grammatic 
and lexicographic explanations on right-hand 
pages: Cikla, concluded, p.34; Okula/m, p 38; 
Entsq, p. 58; Crow and eagle, p. 70; The child of 
the West Wind, p. 75; Caqatl, p. 105; The 
salmon, p. 113; Customs referring to war, p. 
145; War between the Kwileyut and Clatsop, 
p. 146; The tirst visit of a ship, p. 150; The sea- 
lion hunters, p. 155; Raven and gull, p. 170; The 
skunk, p. 174; Bluejay and his sister go visit- 
ing (1), p.180; Marriage, p.193; Bluejay and 
robin, p. 197; Marriage, continued, p. 201; Blue- 
jay and his sister (2), p. 203; Bluejay and his 
sister (3), p. 214; Souls and Shamans, p. 228; 
Adolescence of girls, p. 262; Birth, p. 267; Death 
and sickness, p. 269; Whaling, p. 282; The elk 
hunter, p. 288; The coyote and the salmon, p. 
295; Potlatch, p.318; Gitla/unatlq, p.318; The 
erane, p. 331.—Katlamat texts. Visit to the 
sun, p. 31; The raccoon, p. 40; Coyote and 
badger, p. 55; Panther and lynx, p. 68; Emo- 
goalek, p.76; The seal, p. 87; Visit to the world 
of the souls, p. 92; Tlgu/lak. p.98; The mink, p. 
103; Robin and salmon berry, p.119; Panther 
and owl, p. 131; The coyote, p. 146; The famine, 
p. 151. 


Note book no. 4. Chinook explanations of 


texts, pp. 1-19.—Notes on Chinook dialect from 
the explanations of the Katlamet texts, pp. 19- 
32.—Katlametexplanations of texts, pp. 33-48.— 
Katlama; taken from explanations of Chinook 
texts, pp. 48-54. 

Since the above was put in type I have seen 
a portion of this material in a more advanced 
state of preparation for the press. It still 


requires about one hundred pages to make it | 


complete. It is headed as follows: 


— Chinook Texts| Told by Charles 
Cultee; | Recorded and translated | by 
| Franz Boas. 


Manuscript, ll. i-iv, 1-252 folio, written on 
one side only; in possession of its author. 

Introduction, ll. i-ii.—[Sounds of] letters, ll. 
lii-iv.—Cikla, their myth, with literal inter- 
linear translation into English, ll. 1-13; a free 
English translation, ll. 14-20.—Okula’m, her 
myth, with literal interlinear translation into 
English, ll. 21-33; a free English translation, ll. 
34-42._Anéktiyo/lemiy, her myth, with inter- 
linear English translation, ll. 48-59; English 
translation, ll. 59-70.—The salmon, his myth, 
with interlinear English translation, ll. 72-90; 
English translation. Il. 91-102.—Raven and gull, 
theirmyth, withinterlinear English translation, 
il. 104-106; English translation, Il. 107-108.— 
Coyote, his myth, with interlinear English 
translation, ll. 109-119; English translation, 11. 
119-123.—The crane, his myth, with interlinear 
English translation, Il. 125-128; English trans- 
lation, ll. 129-130.—-Enstiy, his myth, with inter- 
linear English translation, 1]. 131-137; English 
translation, ll. 137-142.—The crow, his story, 
with interlinear English translation. ll. 143-145; 


Boas (F.) — Continued. 


English translation, ll. 145-147.— Caxas, his 
myth, with interlinear English translation, ll. 
148-152; English translation, 152-155.—Stikna, 
her myth, with interlinear English translation, 
1]. 156-164 ; English translation, ll. 164-168.—The 
skunk, his story, with interlinear Englishtrans- 
lation, ll. 169-172; English translation, l1.172-173. 
—Robin, their myth, and Bluejays, with inter- 
linear English translation, ll. 175-177; English 
translation, ll. 178-179.—Bluejay and Loi, their 
myth (1), withinterlinear English translation, ll. 
180-186; English translation, ll. 186-190.—The 
same (2), IL. 191-199, 199-202.—The same (3), ll. 
203-215 (ll. 209-214 missing).—L1. 216-235 miss- 
ing.—The soul, withinterlinear English transla- 
tion, Il. 236-247; English translation, ll. 248-252. 

At the close of each myth will appear explan- 
atory notes. 

I copy the following notes from the Intro- 
duction ; 


The following texts were collected in the 
summers of 1890 and 1891. While studying the 
Salishan languages of Washington and Oregon 
I heard that the dialects of the Lower Chinook 
were on the verge of disappearing; that only a 
few individuals of the once powerful tribes of 
the Clatsop and Chinook survived who remem- 
bered their languages. This fact determined 
me to make an effort to collect what little 
remained of these languages. I first went to 
Clatsop, where a small band of Indians is 
located near Seaside, Clatsop County, Oregon. 
Although a number of them belonged to the 
Clatsop tribe, they had all adopted the Nehelim 
language, a dialect of the Salishan Tillamook. 
This change of language was brought about by 
frequent intermarriages with the Nehelim. I 
found one middle-aged man and two old women 
who still remembered the Clatsop language, 
but I found it impossible to obtain morethan a 
vocabulary and a few sentences. The manhad 
forgotten too great a part of the language, while 
the women were not able to grasp what I 
wanted. They claimed to have forgotten their 
myths and traditions, and could not or would 
not give me any connected texts. One old 
Clatsop woman, who had been married to a Mr. 
Smith, was too sick to be seen and died soon 
after my visit. The few remaining Clatsop 
had totally forgotten the history of their tribe 
and even maintained that no allied dialect was 
spoken north of Columbia River and on Shoal- 
water Bay. They assured me that the whole 
country was occupied by the Chihalis, another 
Salishan tribe. They told me, however, that a 
few of their relations, who still continued to 
speak Clatsop, lived on Shoalwater Bay among 
the Chihalis. I went tosearch for these people 
and found them located at Bay Center, Pacific 
County, Washington. They proved to be the 
last survivors of the Chinook, who at one time 
occupied the greater part of Shoalwater Bay 
and the northern bank of Columbia River as 
far as Grey's Harbor. The tribe has adopted 
the Chihalis language in the same way in which 


8 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Boas (I’.) — Continued. 


—— [Grammar and dictionary of the | 


the Clatsop have adopted the Nehelim. The 
only ones who spoke Chinook were Joseph 
Cultee and Katharine. While I was unable to 
obtain anything from the latter, Cultee proved 
to bea veritable storehouse of information. His 
wife is a Chihalis and he speaks now-a-days 
exclusively Chihalis, which is also the language 
of his children. He has lived for along time 
in Katlamat, his mother’s town, and speaks for 
this reason the Katlamat dialect as well as the 
Chinook dialect. He uses this dialect in con- 
versing with Samson,a Katlamat Indian, who 
is also located at Bay Center. Until a few 
years ago he spoke Chinook with one of his 
relations, while he uses it now only when con- 
versing with Katharine, who lives a few miles 
from Bay Center. 

Possibly this Chinook is to a certain extent 
mixed with Katiamat expressions, but from a 
close study of the material I have reached the 
conclusion that it is. on the whole, pure and 
trustworthy. 


i have also obtained from Cultee a series of | 


Katlamat texts, which I believe are not quite 
as good as the Chinook text, but nevertheless 
give a good insight into the differences of the 
two dialects. It may be possibly to obtain 
material on this dialect from other sources. 

My work of translating and explaining the 
texts was greatly facilitated by Cultee’s remark- 
able intelligence. After he had once grasped 
what I wanted he explained tome the gram- 
matical structure of the sentences by means of 
examples and elucidated the sense of difficult 
periods. This work was the more difficult as 
we conversed only by means of the Chinook 
Jargon. 

The following pages contain nothing but the 
texts with notes and translations. The gram- 
marand dictionary of the language will contain 
acomparison of all the dialects of the Chinookan 
stock. I have translated the first two texts 
almost verbatim, while in the latter texts I only 
endeavored to render the sense accurately, for 
which purposes short sentences have been 
inserted, others omitted. 


Chinook Franz 

Boas. | Ga) 
Manuscript, in possession of its author, who 

is preparing it for publication. See note above. 


language. 


By Dr. 


—— See Bulmer (T. 5S.) 


Franz Boas was born in Minden, Westphalia, 
Germany, July 9,1858. From 1877 to 1882 he 
attended the universities of Heidelberg, Bonn, 
and Kiel. The year 1882 he spent in Berlin 
preparing for an Arctic voyage, and sailed 
June, 1883, to Cumberland Sound, Baffin Land, 
traveling in that region until September, 1884, 
returning via St. Johns, Newfoundland, to New 
York. The winter of 1884-1885 he spent in 
Washington, preparing the results of his 
journey for publication and in studying in. the 


Boulet (fev. Jean-Baptiste), editor. 


Boas (F.) — Continued. 


National Museum. From 1885 to 1886 Dr. Boas 
was an assistant in the Royal Ethnographical 
Museum of Berlin, and Docent of Geography at 
the University of Berlin. In the winter of 1885- 
1886 he journeyed to British Columbia under 
the auspices of the British Association for the 
Advancement of Science, for the purpose of 
studying the Indians. During 1886-1888 Dr. 
Boas was assistant editor of ‘‘ Science,’ in New 
York, and from 1888 to 1892 Docent of Anthro. 
pology at Clark University, Worcester, Mass. 
During these years he made repeated journeys 
to the Pacific coast with the object of contin- 
uing his researches among the Indians. In 1891 
Kiel gave him the degree of Ph. D. ’ 

Dr. Boas’s principal writings are: Baffin 
Land, Gotha, Justus Perthes, 1885; The Central 
Eskimo (in the 6th Annual Report of the 
Bureau of Ethnology); Reports to the British 
Association for the Advancement of Science on 
the Indians of British Columbia, 1888-1892; 
Volkssagen aus Britisch Columbien, Verh. der 
Ges. fiir Anthro pologie, Ethnologie und Urge- 
schichte in Berlin, 1891. 


Bolduc: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Rey. J.-B. Z, Boldue, 
Quebee, Canada. 


Bolduc (Pére Jean-Baptiste Zacarie). 


Mission | de la | Colombie. | Lettre et 
journal | de | Mr. J.-B. Z. Boldue, | mis- 
sionnaire de la Colombie. | [Picture of 
a church. | | 

Quebec: | de Vimprimerie de J.-B. 
fréchette, pere, | imprimeur-libraire, 
No. 13, rune Lamontagne. [1843.] 

Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-95,16°. The 
larger part of the edition of this work was 
burned in the printing office, and if is, in con- 
sequence, very scarce. 

Lord’s prayer in T'chinoue Jargon with inter- 
linear French translation, p. 94.—Quelqnes mots 
[14], French, Tchinoues [Jargon] et Sneomaus, 
p. 95. 

Copies seen: Bolduc, Mallet, Wellesley. 


Boston Atheneum: These words following a title 


or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of that institution, 
Boston, Mass. 


Boston Public: These words following a title or 


within parentheses after a note indicate that a 
copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in that library, Boston, Mass. 
See 
Youth’s Companion. 


Brinton: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Dr. D. G. Brinton, Phila- 
delphia, Pa. 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 9 


Brinton (Dr. Daniel Garrison). The lan- 
yuage of paleolithic man. 
In American Philosoph. Soc. Proc. vol. 25, pp. 
212-225, Philadelphia, 1888, 8°. 
Terms for J, thou, man, divinity, in Chinook, 
p. 216. 
Issued separately as follows: 


— The language | of | paleolithic man. 
| By | Daniel G. Brinton, M. D., | Pro- 
fessor of American Linguistics and Ar- 
cheology in the University of Pennsyl- 
vania. | Read before the American Phil- 
osophical Society, | October 5, 1888. | 
Press of MacCalla & co., | Nos. 237-9 
Dock Street, Philadelphia. | 1888. 


Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 
11. text pp. 3-16, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next 
above, p. 7. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

This article reprinted in the following: 

— Essays of an Americanist. | I. Eth- 
nologie and Archologic. | II. Mythol- 
ogy and Folk Lore. | III. Graphic Sys- 
tems and Literature. | IV. Linguistic. 
| By | Daniel G. Brinton, A.M.,M.D., | 
Professor [&c. nine lines. ] | 

Philadelphia: | Porter & Coates. | 
1890. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, 
contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 17-467, index of 
authors and authorities pp. 469-474, index of 
subjects pp. 475-489, 8°. A collected reprint of 
some of Dr. Brinton’s more important essays. 

Theearliest form of human speech as revealed 
by American tongues (read betore the American 
Philosophical Society in 1885 and published in 
their proceedings under the title of ‘* The lan- 
guage of paleolithic man’’), pp. 390-409. 

Linguistic contents as under titles next 
above, p. 401. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 

— The American Race: | A Linguistic 
Classification and Ethnographic | De- 
scription of the Native Tribes of | 
North and South America. | By | Damel 
G. Brinton,A.M.,M.D., | Professor [&c. 
ten lines. ] | 

New York: |N. D. C. Hodges, Pub- 
lisher, | 47 Latayette Place. | 1891. 

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 11. preface pp. ix-xii, contents pp. 
xili-xvi, text pp. 17-332, linguistic appendix pp. 
333-364. additions and corrections pp. 365-368, 
index of authors pp. 369-373. index of subjects 
pp. 374-392, 8°. 

A brief discussion of the north Pacific coast 
stocks (pp. 103-117) includes a list of the divi- 
sions of the Chinook linguistic stock, p. 108. 


Brinton (D.G.)— Continued. 


Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 

Daniel Garrison Brinton, ethnologist, born in 
Chester County, Pa., May 13, 1837. He was 
graduated at Yale in 1858 and at the Jefferson 
Medical College in 1861, after which he spent a 
year in Europe in study and in travel. On his 
return he entered the army, in August, 1862, as 
acting assistant surgeon. In February of the 
following year he was commissioned surgeon 
and served as surgeon-in-chief of the second 
division, eleventh corps. He was present at the 
battles of Chancellorsville, Gettysburg, and 
other engagements, and was appointed medical 
director of bis corps in October, 1863. In conse- 
quence of a sunstroke received soon after the 
battle of Gettysburg he was disqualified for 
active service, and in the autumn of that year he 
became superintendent of hospitals at Quincy 
and Springfield, Il., until August, 1865, when, 
the civil war having closed, he was brevetted 
lieutenant-colonel and discharged. He then 
settled in Philadelphia, where he became editor 
of ‘The Medical and Surgical Reporter,” and 
also of the quarterly ‘‘Compendium of Medical 
Science.” Dr. Brinton has likewise been a 
constant contributor to other medical journals, 
chiefly on questions of public medicine and 
hygiene, and has edited several volumes on 
therapeutics and diagnosis, especially the pop- 
ular series known as ‘‘ Napheys’s Modern Ther- 
apeutics,”” which has passed through many 
editions. In the medical controversies of the 
day, he has always taken the position that med- 
ical science should be based on the results of 
clinical observation rather than on physiological 
experiments. He has become prominent as a 
student and a writer on American ethnology, 
his work in this direction beginning while he 
was astudent in college. The winter of 1856-’57, 
spent in Florida, supplied him with material for 
his first published book on the subject. In 1884 
he was appointed professor of ethnology and 
archeology inthe Academy of Natural Sciences, 
Philadelphia. For some years he has been pres- 
ident of the Numismatic and Antiquarian Soci- 
ety of Philadelphia, and in 1886 he was elected 
vice-president of the American Association for 
the Advancement of Science, to preside over 
the section on anthropology. During the same 
year he was awarded the medal of the ‘ Société 
Américaine de France” for his ‘‘ numerous and 
learned works on American ethnology,” being 
the first native of the United States that has 
been so honored. In 1885 the American pub- 
lishers of the ‘* lconographie Encyclopedia” 
requested him to edit the first volume, to con- 
tribute to it the articles on ‘* Anthropology” 
and ‘‘ Ethnology,” and to revise that on ‘‘ Eth- 
nograhy,”’ by Professor Gerland, of Strpasburg. 
He also contributed to the second volume of the 
same work an essay on the ‘‘ Prehistoric Archie- 
ology of both Hemispheres.” Dr. Brinton has 
established a library and publishing house of 
aboriginal American literature, for the purpose 


Bulmer (Dr. Thomas Sanderson). 


10 


Brinton (D. G.) — Continued. 


tic materials for the study of the languages and 
culture of the native races of America. Each 


work is the production of native minds and is | 


printed in the original. The series, most of 


which were edited by Dr. Brinton himself, | 


includes ‘‘ The Maya Chronicles” (Philadelphia, 
1882); ‘‘ The Iroquois Book of Rites” (1883) ; 
“The Giiegiience: A Comedy Ballet in the 
Nahuatl Spanish Dialect of Niearagua”’ (1883) ; 
‘““\ Migration Legend of the Creek Indians” 
(1884) ; ‘* The Lenape and Their Legends” (1885) ; 
“The Annals of the Cakchiquels”’ (1885). 
[‘‘ Ancient Nahuatl Poetry’? (1887); ‘ 
Veda Americanus (1890).] Besides publishing 
numerous papers, he has contributed valuable 


Dep. 
o 
ug 


reports on his examination of mounds, shell- | 
heaps, rock inscriptions, and other antiquities. | 
He is the author of ‘‘ The Floridian Peninsula: | 
Its Literary History, Indian Tribes, and Antiq- | 
uities’’ (Philadelphia, 1859); ‘* The Myths of | 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF 


THE 


| Bulmer (T. 8.) — Continued. 
of placing within the reach of scholars authen- 


| 


the New World: A Treatise on the Symbolism | 
and Mythology of the Red Race of America”? | 


(New York, 1868); ‘‘ The Religions Sentiment: 
A Contribution to the Science and Philosophy 
of Religion”? (1876) ‘‘ American Hero Myths: 
A Study in the Native Religions of the Western 


Continent”’ (Philadelphia, 1882); ‘‘ Aboriginal | 


American Authors and their 


Especially those in the Native Languages” 


Productions, 


(1883); and ‘‘ A Grammarof the Cakchiquel | 


Language of Guatemala” 
Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


(1884).—A ppleton’s 


British Museum: These words following a title or 


within parentheses after a note indicate that a 

copy of the work referred to has been seen by 

the compiier in the library of that institution, 

London, Eng. 

Chi- 

nook Jargon | grammar and dictionary 
| compiled by | T..S. Bulmer, M.D., 


C.M., F. 8S. A., London, | Surgeon- | 


Accoucheur, Royal College of 
geons, England. | Author of [&c. four 
lines. } i) 


Manuscriptin possession of its author, Cedar 


Sur- | 


City, Utah, who furnished me the above tran- | 


script of the title-page, and who writes me, 


October, 1891, concerning it as follows: ‘* I shall | 


issue it on Hall's typewriter, and then dupli- 
eate copies with another special machine, and 
use various types on the machine, testing the 
uses of each. 


Fifty pages will be | 


devoted to the origin of the language from all 


sources. 
langnages will be given. 


Examples of hymns from various 


— Chinook Jargon language. | Part II. 
| [f'wo lines Chinook Jargon.] | To be 
completed in 1X parts. | compiled by | 
TS. Bulmer, MoD? CC. Ms E.S)-A.'Sc: 
A., London. | Ably assisted by | Rev'd 
M. Eells, D. D., and Rev’d Pére N.L. 


St. Onge, (formerly missionary to the 
| Yakama Indians). 

Manuscript; title as above verso blank 1 1. 
text ll. 1-124,4°. In possession of Dr. Bulmer. 

Preface in English, ll. 1-3; in Jargon, with 
interlinear English translation, ll, 4-12.— 
Eulogy of the Chinook Jargon, in English, ll. 
13-15; in Jargon (with interlinear translation 
into English) by My. Eells, ll. 16-19.—The 
Chinook Jargon (general remarks, with inter- 
linear English translation), ll. 20-22.—Special 
notes on the Chinook, 11. 23-2t.—Bibliography 
of the Chinook Jargon, ll. 24a-24b.—Origin of 
certain Indian words, 1. 25.—Remarks on ono- 
matopeeia, ll. 26-27.—Rise and progress of the 
written language of the Chinook Jargon, 1. 28.— 
Changes in the language, with vocabulary, ll, 
28-35.—Some words in Yakama, with a resem- 
blanee to the Jargon, ll. 36-40.—Words in the 
Niskwalli having some resemblance to the 
Chinook Jargon, 1. 41.—Some words from the 
Cree, 1.42.—A list of verbs found in the Jar- 
gon, alphabetically arranged, 1. 42.—Adverbs, 
prepositions, conjunctions, and interjections, 
ll. 51-54.—List of the principal adjectives, 11. 55- 
59.— Grammatical constructién of the Chinook 
Jargon. Il. 61-63.—Comparison of languages (20 
words and phrases) in Tlaoquatch and Nootka, 
with the Columbian and Chinook, Il, 634-64.— 
Cree wordsin theJ argon, ll. 65-74.—On the posi- 
tionof words, 1. 75.—Remarks on the translation 
ot abstract words, ll. 76-79.—The alphabet, Il. 
80-85.—Partial list of compound words, alpha- 
hetically arranged, ll. 86-92.— Inflections, ll. 93- 
96—Adjectives, ll. 96-98.—General rules on 
tenses, ll. 98-112.—Personal pronouns, ll. 113- 
122.—Numerals, ll. 123-124. 


—— The Chee-Chinook language | or | 


Chinook Jargon. In | 1X | parts. | Part 
Ill. | English-Chinook dictionary. | 
First edition. | By T. 8S. Bulmer, ably 
assisted by | the Revd. M. Eells, D.D., 
& the Revd Pére Saint Onge, both 
missionaries to the Indians in Wash- 
ington & Oregon states. 

Manuscript; title verso blank.1 1. preface 
verso blank 1 1. special note for readers verso 
blank 1 1. *‘memos to guide thereader”’ 2 IL. text 
alphabetically arranged by English words ll, 
1-189, written on one side only, folio. In posses- 
sion of its author, who kindly loaned it to me 
for examination. In his ‘‘memos” the author 
gives a listof letters used to indicate the origin 
of the respective words C, NV, 1, E, F, Ch. Yak., 
Chinook, Nootka, Indian, English, French, Chi- 
halis,and Yakama; and a second list of per- 
sons from whom the words were obtained and 
localities in which they were used. 

‘Tn my selection of the term Chee-Chinook 
I merely intend to convey to students that it 
has its principal origin in the Old or Original 
Chinook language; and although it contains 
many other Indian words, as well as French 


CHINOOKAN 


Bulmer (T.S.)— Continued. 


[ 


and English, yet itcame forth from its mother 
as an hybrid,and as such has been bred and 


LANGUAGES. 


11 


| Bulmer (T.S.) — Continued. 
[——] Special scientifie notes. 


nourished as a nursling from the parent stem. | 
: E a : | 
I therefore designate it a chee or new Chinook— | 


the word chee being a Jargon word for lately, 
just now, new.” 


] Chinook Jargon dictionary. Part 
III. Chinook-English. 


Manuscript; 121 leaves, folio, written on one 
side only, interspersed with 40 blank leaves 
inserted for additions and corrections. 
possession of its author. 

The dictionary occupies 106 leaves, and many 
of the words are followed by their equivalents 
in the languages from which they are derived, 
and the authority therefor. Following the 
dictionary are the following: Original Indian 
names of town-sites, rivers, mountains, etc., in 
the western parts of the State of Washington: 
Skokomish, 2 ll.; Chemakum, Lower Chihalis, 
Duwamish, 1 1.; Chinook, 2 11.; miscellaneous, 2 
ll.—Names of various places in the Klamath 
and Modoc countries, 3 11.—Camping places 
and other localities around the Upper Klamath 
Lake, 5 11. 


In 


[——] Appendix to Bulmer’s Chinook 


[ 


Jargon grammar and dictionary. 
Manuscript, ll. 1-70, 4°, in possession of its 
author. 
General phrases, as literal as_ possible, 
Chinook and English, ll. 6-26.—Detached sen- 
tences, ll. 27-29.—Prayer in English, ll. 30-31; 


same in Jargon, ll. 32-33.—‘' History” in Eng- | 


lish, 11. 34-36; same in Jargon (by Mr. Eells), 
with interlinear English translation, ll. 837-43.— 
An address, in English, ll. 44-46; same in Jar- 
gon, with interlinear English translation, ll. 47— 
53.—A sermon in English, ll. 54-55; same in 
Jargon, with interlinear English translation, 11. 
56-61.—Address in Jargon to the Indians of 


Puget Sound, by Mr. Eells, with interlinear | 


English translation, ll. 62-66.—Address ‘On 


Man," in English, 1.67; same in Jargon, with | 


interlinear English translation, ll. 68-70. 


| Part II | of | Bulmer’s Appendix | 
to the Chee-Chinook | Grammar and 
Dictionary. 

Manuscript, 57 ll. 4°, in possession of its 
author. 

Form of marriage, ll. 2-3.—Solemnization of 
the marriage service, ll. 4-10. These two articles 
are in Jargon, with interlinear English transla- 
tion.—Address, in English, ll. 11-12; the same 
in Jargon, with interlinear English translation, 


ll. 13-17.—‘‘ From Addison,’ in Jargon, with 


interlinear English translation, ll. 18-19.—An 
oration in English, 1. 20; the same in Twana by 
Mr. Fells, with interlinear English translation, 
ll. 21-22.—A Twana tradition, by Mr. Eells, 


with interlinear English translation, 1.23; the | 


same in English, ll. 24-25.—Legends in Jargon, 
by Pére L. N. St. Onge, with interlinear English 
translation, ll, 26-57. 


Manuscript, ll. 1-77, 4°, in possession of its 
author. 

General remarks on Indian languages, Il. 1- 
3.—Origin of languages, ll. 4-11.— Scientific 
notes on the European and Asiatic languages, 
ll. 12-35.—American Indian languages, ll. 35- 
63, includes remarks upon and examples in the 
Iroquois, Cherokee, Sahaptin, Algonkin, 
Nahuatl, Shoshone, Cree, Sioux, and Jargon.— 
List of words in the Chinock Jargon the same 
as in Nitlakapamuk, Il. 64-67.—Selish numerals 
1-18, 1. 65.—List of tribes of Alaska and its 
neighborhood, 1. 66.—T wana verbs, |. 67.—Nisk- 
wally verbs, 1. 68.— Clallam verbs, 1. 69. — Re- 
marks on the Yakama, II. 70-77. 

]) The Christian prayers | in Chi- 
nook [Jargon]. 

Manuscript; 61 11. 4°, in the possession of its 
author. 

Prayers in Chinook Jargon, ll. 1-5.—Lessons 
1-17 in Chinook Jargon, with English headings, 
ll. 6-23.—List of special words adopted by 
Fathers Blanchet and Demers in connection 
with the service of the mass, ll. 24-25.—Trans- 
lation of the Chinook prayers into English, ll. 
26-38.—Copy of a sermon preached by Rey. Dr. 
Eells tothe Indians at Walla- Walla, with inter- 
linear English translation, ll. 39-46. ‘Of the 
97 words used, 46 are of Chinook origin, 17 
Nootka, 3 Selish, 23 English, 2 Jargon, and 6 in 
French.—Articles of faith of the Congrega- 
tional church at Skokomish, Washington, in 
the Jargon with interlinear English translation, 
ll. 47-52.—Oration in Chinook Jargon with in- 
terlinear English translation, 1]. 53-54.—Prayers 
to God in English blank verse, 1]. 55-56; the 
same in Jargon with interlinear English trans- 
lation, ll. 57-61. 


— [Hymns, songs, ete., in the Chinook 


Jargon and other languages. ] 

Manuscript; no title-page; text 77 leaves, 
4°, in possession of its author. 

Songs, l. 1.—Song with musie, ll. 2-3.—School 
songs by Mr. Eells, ll. 4-5.—Songs from Dr. 
Boas, ll. 6-12.—Hymns by Mr. Eells, ll. 13-32. 
All the above are in Jargon with English 
translations. — Hymns in Niskwalli by Mr. 
Kells, 1. 33.—Hymns in Jargon by Pére St. 
Onge, ll. 34-45.—Hymn in Yakama, by Pére St. 
Onge, ll. 45-46; the same in English, ll. 57-64.— 
Yakama prose song by Father Pandosy, with 
French translation, ll. 65-69.—Hymns in Jargon 
by Mr. Eells, ll. 70-71.—Hymn in Yakama with 
interlinear English translation, ll. 72-73.—Song 


in English, l. 74; same in Siwash, ll. 75-77. 


—— [The Lord’s prayer in various Indian 


languages. ] 

Manuscript; no title-page; text 24 unnum- 
bered leaves, written on one side only, 4°. 

The Lord’s prayerin Chinook Jargon, 1.1; in 
Yakama,* 1. 2; in Miemae, 1. 3.—Ave Maria in 
Micmac, ].3.—Lord’s prayerin Penobscot, |. 4; 


12 


Bulmer (T.S.) — Continued. 


in Mareschite, 1. 5; in Passamaquoddy (two ver- 
sions) 1.5; Micmac (ancient), 1. 6; Montagnais, 
1, 6; Abenaki, ll. 6-7; pure Mareschite, 1. 7; 
Snohomish, 1.7; Niskwalli, * 1.8; Clallam,*1.9; 
Twana,*l.10; Sioux, 1.11; Flathead,*1.12; Cas- 
cade, *1. 12; Tlallam,1.13; Huron, 1.13; Black- 
toot, ]. 13; A benaki, 1. 14; Choctaw, 1. 14; Ottawa, 
1.14; Assiniboine, 1.15; Seneca, 1.15; Caughna- 
waga, l. 15; other Micmac, 1. 16; Totonac, 1. 16; 
Cora, 1.16; Mistek,* 1.17; Maya, * 1.17; Algon- 
quin, * 1. 22._Hymn in Snohomish, Il. 23-24. 

Those prayers marked with an asterisk are 
accompanied by an interlinear English trans- 
lation. 

The compiler of this paper informs me it is 
his intention toadd one hundred other versions 
of the Lord’s prayer, from the Californian and 
Mexican languages. 

In addition to the above papers, Dr. Bulmer is 
also the author of a number of articles appear- 
ing in Father Le Jeune’s Kamloops Wawa, q. 0. 

i am indebted to Dr. Bulmer for the notes 
upon which is based the following account: 

Thomas Sanderson Bulmer was bornin 1834, in 
Yorkshire, England. He was educated at Pres- 
ton grammar school, Stokesley, and at Newton 
under Brow, was advanced under Rev. C. Cator 
and Lord Beresford’s son at Stokesley, and 
afterwards was admitted a pupil of the York 
and Ripon diocesan college. He was appointed 
principal of Doncaster union agricultural 
schools, but soon after emigrated to New York. 
There he took charge, as head master, of Gen- 
eral Hamilton's free school. Thence he went 
to Upper Canada and was appointed one of the 
professors in L'Assomption Jesuit College. 
From there he went to Rush Medical College 
and Lind University, Chicago; thence to the 
Keole Normale, Montreal; thence to Toronto 
University, medical department. Later he con- 
tinued his studies in the Ecole de Médecine 
and McGill University, Montreal, and gradu- 
ated in medicine at Victoria University. In 
1868 hecrossed to London, whence he proceeded 
to New Zealand,and was appointed superin- 
tendent of quarantine at Wellington. In Tas- 
mania and Australia he held similar positions. 
His health failing, he went to Egypt, and later 
returned to England. ‘the English climate not 
agreeing with him, he took a tour of the Med- 
iterranean ports. Returning to London, the 
Russian grippe attacked him, and he was 
warned to seek a new climate. He returned to 
Montreal, en route for the Rocky Mountains, 
where he sought Indian society for a consider- 
able time. Finding winter disastrous to him, 
he proceeded to Utah in search of health. For 
the last two years he has been engaged in 
writing up his Chinook books, as well as com- 
pleting his Egyptian Rites and Ceremonies, in 
which he has been assisted by English Egyp- 
tologists. Dr. Bulmer is a member of several 
societies in England and Americaand the author 
of a number of works on medical and scientitic 
subjects. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Bureau of Ethnology: These words following a 
title or within parentheses after a note indicate 
thatacopy of the work referred to has been seen 
by the compiler in the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology, Washington, D. C. 


Buschmann (Johann Carl Eduard), 
Die Vélker und Sprachen Neu-Mex- 
iko’s und der Westseite des britischen 
Nordamerika’s, dargestellt von Hrn. 
Busehmann. 

In Koénigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, 
Abhandlungen, aus dem Jahre 1857, pp. 209-414, 
3erlin, 1858, 4°. 

A few words of Chinook and Cathlascon 
(from Sconler), pp. 373-374. Vocabulary of sev- 
eral Indian languages compared with the: 
pseudo-Chinook (Cathlascon?) from Scouler,. 
pp. 375-378. 

Issned separately with title-page as follows: 


— Die Volker und Sprachen | Neu-: 
Mexico’s | und | der Westseite | des | 
britischen Nordamerika’s | dargestellt: 
| von | Joh. Carl Ed. Buschmann, | Aus: 
den Abhandlungen der kénigl. Akade- 
mie der Wissenschaften | zu Berlin 
1857. | 

Berlin | gedruckt in der Buchdruck-- 
ereider kénigl, Akademie | der Wissen-: 
schaften | 1858. | In Commission bei F.. 
Diimmler’s Verlags-Buchhandlung. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso) 
notice 1 1. text pp. 209-404, Inhalts-Ubersicht. 
pp. 405-413, Verbesserungen p. 414, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above:. 

Copies seen: Astor,Congress, Eames, Pilling,, 
Trumbull. : 

The copy at the Fischer sale, catalogue no.. 
270, brought 14s.; at the Field sale, catalogue: 

no. 235, 75 cents; priced by Leclerc, 1878, no.. 

3012, 12 fr.and by Triibner, 1882, 15s. 


—— Die Spuren der aztekischen Sprache: 
im nordlichen Mexico und héherem 
amerikanischen Norden. Zugleich eine: 
Musterung der Volker und Sprachen des: 
nérdlichen Mexico’s und der Westseite: 
Nordamerika’s von Guadalaxara an bis: 
zum EKismeer. Von Joh, Carl Ed. Buseh-- 
mann. 

In Kénigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Beglin, Ab-- 
handlungen aus demJahre 1854, zweiter Supp.-- 
Band, pp. 1-819 (forms the whole volume), Ber-- 
lin, 1859, 4°. 

List of words in the Waiilatpa, Molele, Wat-- 
lala, two dialects of the Chinook, and Calapuya,, 
pp. 620-625.—Supplementary vocabulary of the: 
Chinuk and Calapuya (from Parker, Scouler,, 
Rafinesque, and Gallatin), pp. 625-626.—Lord’s: 
prayer in Chinook (from Dutlot de Mofras), p.. 
626. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows= 


CHINOOKAN 


Buschmann (J.C. E.) — Continued. 

—— Die | Spuren deraztekischen Sprache 
| im nérdlichen Mexico | und héheren 
amerikanischen Norden. | Zugleich | 
eine Musterung der Vélker und Spra- 
chen | des nérdlichen Mexico’s | und 
der Westseite Nordamerika’s | von Gua- 
dalaxara an bis zum Eismeer. | Von | 
Joh. Carl Ed. Buschmann. | 

Berlin. | Gedruckt in der Buchdruck- 
ereider Kénig]. Akademie | der Wissen- 
schaften. | 1859. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. general title of the 
series verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank | 
1 1. abgekurtze Inhalts-ubersicht pp. vii-xii, | 


LANGUAGES. ts 


Buschmann (J.C. E.) — Continued. 
text pp. 1-713, Einleitung in das geographische 
Register pp. 714-718, geographische Register 
pp. 718-815. vermischte Nachweisungen pp. 816- 
818, Verbesserungen, p. 819, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under titlenext above. 

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, Eames, Maison- 
neuve, Pilling, Quaritch, Smithsonian, Trum- 
bull. 

Published at 20 Marks. An uncut half-mo- 
rocco copy was sold at the Fischer sale, cata- 
logue no. 269, to Quaritch, for 2U.11s.; the latter 
prices two copies, catalogue no. 12552, one 21. 2s. 
the other 2. 10s.; the Pinart copy, catalogue no, 
178, brought 9 fr.; Koehler, catalogue no. 440, 
prices it 13 M.50 pf.; priced again by Quaritch, 
no. 30037, 20. 


C. 


Cascade: 
Hymns See Lee (ID.) and Frost (J. H.) 
Sentences Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) 
Lord’s prayer Youth's. 
Prayer Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) 
Catechism: 


Chinook Jargon See Demers (M.) et al. 


Cathlascon: 


Vocabulary See Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Vocabulary Scouler (J.) 

Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) 

Words Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Words Latham (R. G.) 


Catlin (George). A descriptive cata- 
logue | of | Catlin’s Indian collection, 
| containing | portraits, landscapes, 

‘costumes, &c., | and | representations 
of the manners and customs | of the | 
North American Indians. | Collected 
and painted entirely by Mr. Catlin, 
during eight years’ travel amongst | 
forty-eight tribes, mostly speaking 
different languages. | Also | opinions of 
the press in England, France, and the 
United States. | 

London: | published by the author, | 
at his Indian collection, No. 6, Water- 
loo place. | 1848. 

Title verso names of printers 1 ]. note and 
certificates pp. 3-7, text pp. 8-92, 8°. | 

Proper names of a number of individuals in | 
various North American languages. among 
them a few of the Chinook. 

Copies seen: Harvard, Wellesley. 

Priced by Maisonneuve & co. in 1889, 2 fr. 

The descriptive catalogue is reprinted in the 
various editions of Catlin’s Notes of eight years’ | 
travel and residence in Europe, for titles of 
whieh see below. | 

— North and South American Indians. 
| Catalogue | descriptive and instruc- | 


Catlin (G.)— Continued. 
tive | of | Catlin’s | Indian Cartoons. | 
Portraits, types, and customs [sic]. | 
600 paintings in oil, | with | 20,000 full 
length figures | illustrating their vari- 
ous games, religious ceremonies, and 
| other customs, | and | 27 canvas 
paintings | of | Lasalle’s discoveries. | 
New York: | Baker & Godwin, Print- 
ers, | Printing-house square, | 1871. 
Abridged title on cover, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. remarks verso note 1 1. text pp. 5-92, 
certificates pp. 93-99, 8°. 
Linguistic contents as in edition of 1848, 
titled next above. 
Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Eames, Wel- 
lesley, Wisconsin Historical Society. 
The Catlin Indian collection, contain- 
ing portraits, landscapes, costumes, 
&c.,and representations of the manners 
and customs of the North American 
Indians. Presented to the Smithsonian 
Institution by Mrs. Thomas Harrison, 
of Philadelphia, in 1879. A descriptive 
catalogue. By George Catlin, the artist. 
In Rhees (W .J.), Visitor’s guide tothe Smith- 
sonian Institution and United States National 
Museum, in Washington, pp. 70-89, Washing- 
ton, 1887, 8°. 
Linguistic contents as under title next above, 


p- 76. 
Copies seen: Pilling, Powell. 


Part V. The George Catlin Indian 
gallery in the National Museum (Smith- 
sonian Institution), with memoir and 
statistics. By Thomas Donaldson. 


In Annual Report of the Board of Regents of 
the Smithsonian Institution July, 
1885, part 2 (half-title 1 1. pp. i-vii, 3-939), Wash- 
ington, 1886, 8°. 


* 


14 


Catlin (G.) —Continued. 


Descriptive catalogue of Indian portraits 


(pp. 13-230) includes the Chinook, p. 99. 

Issued separately, with title-page as follows: 

—— The | George Catlin Indian gallery | 

in the | U.S. National Museum |(Smith- 
sonian Institution), | with | memoir 
and statistics. | By | Thomas Donald- 
son. | Fromthe Smithsonian report for 
1885. | 

Washington: | Government printing 
office. | 1587. 


Title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. i-iii, illus- | 
trations pp. v-vii, text pp. 3-915, index pp. 917- | 


939, 8°. 
Linguistic contents as under title nextabove. 
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Smithsonian. 
Issued also with title-page as follows: 

—— The | George Catlin | Indian gal- 
lery, | in the | U. S. National Museum, 
| (Smithsonian Institution.) | With 
memoir and _ statistics. 
Donaldson. | 


Washington, D. C. | W. H. Lowder- | 


milk & Co. | 1888. 

Title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. i-iii, illus- 
trations pp. v-vii, text pp. 3-915, index pp. 917- 
939, 8°. 

Linguistic coptents as under titles above. 

Copies seen : Lowdermilk. 

—  Catlin’s notes | of 
travels and residence | In Europe, | 


with his | North American Indian col- | 


lection: | with anecdotes and incidents 


of the travels and adventures of three | 
| different parties of American Indians 


whom he introduced | to the courts of | 
England, France and Belgium. | In two 
volumes octavo. | Vol. I{-II]. | With 
numerous illustrations. | 

New-York: | Burgess, Stringer & co., 
222 Broadway. | 1848. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
copyright 1 1. preface pp. v-ix, contents pp. xi- 
xvi, text pp. 1-296; half-title verso blank 1 1. 


title verso copyright 1 1. contents pp. v-xii, text | 


995 


pp. 1-325, appendix pp. 327-336, 8°. 

A descriptive catalogue of Catlin’s Indian 
collection (vol. 1, pp. 248-296) ineludes proper 
names in anumber of Indian languages, among 
them a few of the Chinook, p. 264. 


Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Powell, | 


Watkinson. 


At the Fischer sale a copy, no. 350, brought | 


2s.; the Field copy, no. 305, sold for $2.50. 

— Catlin’s notes | of | eight years’ 
travels and residence | In Europe, | 
with his | North American Indian col- 
lection: | with anecdotes and incidents 


By Thomas | 


| eight years’ | 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


' Catlin (G.)— Continued. 
of the travels and adventures of three 

| different parties of American Indians 
_ whom he introduced | to the courts of | 
England, France,and Belgium. | Intwo 
volumes octavo. | Vol. I[-II]. | With 
numerous illustrations. | 

New York: | published by the anthor. 

| To be had at all the bookstores. | 1848. 


2 vols.: pp. i-xvi, 1-296; i-xii, 1-336; plates, 


80. 
Linguistic contents as under title next above. 
Copies seen: Congress. 

Catlin’s notes | of | eight years’ 
travels and residence | in Europe, | 
with his | North American Indian col- 
lection. | With | anecdotes and _ inci- 
dents of the travels and adventures of 

| three different parties of American 
Indians whom he | introduced to the 
courts of | England, France, and Bel- 
gium. | In two volumes, octavo. | Vol. 
I{-l]. | With numerous illustrations. 
| Second edition. | 
: London: | published by the author, | 

at his Indian collection, No.6, Water- 
| loo place. | 1848. 

é 2vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. frontispiece 
11. title verso names of printers 1 1. preface pp- 
v-ix, contents pp. xi-xvi, text pp. 1-202, appen- 
dix pp. 203-247, catalogue pp. 248-296; half-title 
verso blank 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 
1. contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 1-325, appendix 
pp. 327-336, plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Lenox, Wisconsin Historical Society. 

Some copies, otherwise as above, have ‘“Third 
edition’’ (Congress); others ‘‘ Fourth edition” 
(Bureau of Ethnology, Lenox), both with the 
same date. 


_—— Adventures | of the | Ojibbewayand 
| Toway Indians | in | England, France, 
and Belgium; | being notes of | eight 
years’ travels and residence in Europe | 
with his | North American Indian col- 
lection, | by Geo. Catlin. | In two vol- 
umes. | Vol. I[-I1]. | With numerous 
Engravings. | Third edition. | 

London: | published by the author, | 
at his Indian collection, no. 6, Water- 
loo place. | 1852. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
blank 1 1. preface pp. v-ix, contents pp. xi-xvi, 
text pp. 1-296; half-title verso blank 1 1. title 
verso names of printers 1 1. contents pp. v-xil, 
text pp. 1-325, appendices pp. 327-336, 8°. 

A reprint of Notes of eight years’ travels in 
Europe. 


CHINOOKAN 


Catlin (G.) — Continued. 
Linguistic contents as under titles above. 
Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Bu- 
reau of Ethnology, Wisconsin Historical Soci- 
ety. 


George Catlin, painter, born in Wilkesbarre, | 


Pa., in 1796, died in Jersey City, N. J., Decem- 
ber 23, 1872. Hestudied law at Litchfield, Conn., 


but after a few years’ practice went to Phila- | 


delphia and turned his attention to drawing 
and painting. As anartist he was entirely self- 
taught. In 1832 he went to the Far West and 
spenteight years among the Indians of Yellow- 
stone River, Indian Territory, Arkansas, and 
Florida, painting a unique series of Indian por- 
traits and pictures, which attracted much atten- 
tion on their exhibition both in this country 
and in Europe. 
length portraits and a large number of pictures 
illustrative of Indian life and customs, most of 
which are now preserved in the National 
Museum, Washington. In 1852-1857 Mr. Catlin 
traveled in South and Central America, after 


Among thése were 470 full- | 


which he lived in Europe until 1871, when he 


returned to the United States. One hundred 
and twenty-six of his drawings illustrative of 
Indian life were at the Philadelphia exposition 
of 1876.—Appleton’s Oyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Chaltin (Rev. W.C.) See Gill (J. K.) 
Chamberlain (Alexander Francis). 


Words of Algonkian origin [in the | 


Chinook Jargon]. 
' In Seience, vol. 18, pp. 260-261, New York, 
1891,4°. (Pilling.) 

A list of words found in the Jargon vocabu- 
laries of Winthrop, Gibbs, and Hale, which are 
of Algonquian origin. 

The Eskimo race and language. 
Their origin and relations. By A. F. 
Chamberlain, B. A. 

In Canadian Inst. Proc. third series, vol. 6, 

pp. 261-337, Toronto, 1889, 8°. 


Comparative Eskimo and Indian vocabu- | 


laries (pp. 318-322) containa number of Chinook 
and Watlala words (from Tolmie and Dawson, 
and from Hale), pp. 318-320. 


spoken in the Kootenay District, South 
Eastern British Columbia, by A. F. 
Chamberlain, M. A. Ph. D. 

Manuscript, 7 unnumbered pages, written on 
one side only; in possession of its author, who 
has kindly sent it to me for inspection. 

A vocabulary of 150 Jargon words. 

Alexander Francis Chamberlain was born 


at Kenninghall, Norfolk, England, Jan. 12, 1865, | 
and came to New York with his parents in | 
1870, removing with them to Canada in 1874. | 


He matriculated from the Collegiate Institute, 
Peterboro, Ontario, into the University of 
Toronto, in 1882, from which institution he 
graduated with honors in modernlanguages and 
ethnology in 1886, From 1887 to 1890 he was 


Notes on the Chinook Jargon as | 


LANGUAGES. 


Chase (Pliny Earle). 


Chinook. The Chinook Jargon, 


Chinook 


15 


Chamberlain (A. F.) — Continued. 


fellow in modern languages in University Col- 
lege. Toronto, and in 1889 received the degree 
of M. A. from his alma mater. In 1890 he was 
appointed fellow in anthropology in Clark Uni- 
versity, Worcester, Mass., where he occupied 
himself with studies in the Algonquian lan- 
guages and the physical anthropology of Amer- 
ica. In June, 1890, he went to British Colum- 
bia, where, until the following October, he was 
engaged in studying the Kootenay Indians 
under the auspices of the British Association 
for the Advancement of Science. A summary 
of the results of these investigations appears 
in the proceedings of the association for 1892. 
A dictionary and grammar of the Kootenay 
language, together with a collection of texts of 
myths, are also being proceeded with. In 1892 
Mr. Chamberlain received from Clark Univer- 
sity the degree of Ph. D. in anthropology, his 
thesis being: ‘‘ The Language of the Mississa- 
gasof Skugog: A contribution to the Linguis- 
tics of the Algonkian Tribes of Canada,” em- 
bodying the results of his investigations of 
these Indians: 

Mr. Chamberlain, whose attention was, early 
in life, directed to philologic and ethnologic 
studies, has contributed to the scientific jour- 
nals of America, from time to time, articles on 
subjects connected with linguistics and folk- 
lore, especially of the Algonquian tribes. He 
has also been engaged in the study of the 
Low-German and French Canadian dialects, 
the results of which will shortly appear. Mr. 
Chamberlain is a member of several of the 
learned societies of America and Canada and 
fellow of the American Association for the 
Advancement of Science. 

In 1892 he was appointed lecturer in anthro- 
pology at Clark University. 


Charencey (Comte Charles Félix Hya- 


cinthe Gouhier de). [Review of] An 
international idiom, a manual of the 
Oregon trade languages or Chinook 
Jargon, by Mr. Horatio Hale. 

In Le Muséon, vol. 10, pp. 273-274, Louvain, 
1891, 8°. 

On the radical 
significance of numerals. 

In American Philosoph. Soc. Proc. vol. 10, pp. 
18-23, Philadelphia, 1869, 8°. 

Examples in several Indian languages, 
among them the Chinook Jargon (from Gibbs). 
and 
English and French equivalent forms. 

In the Steamer Bulletin, San Francisco, June 
21, 1858. (*) 

Contains an unarranged vocabulary of 354 
words and phrases. 

Title and note from Gibbs's Dictionary of the 
Chinook Jargon. 

For notice of a reprint see Hazlitt (W. C.) 
{[Jargon] dictionary. See 


Coones (S. F.) 


16 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Chinook. [Vocabularies of some of the 
Indian languages of northwest Amer- 
ica. | 


Manuscript, 2 vols. 82 pages folio. Bought 
for the Library of Congress, Washington, D. C., 
at the sale of the library of the late Mr. Geo. 
Brinley, the catalogue of which says they came 
“from the library of Dr. John Pickering, to 
whom, probably, they were presented by Mr. 
Duponceau. They were presented ‘to Peter 5. 
Duponceau, with J. K. Townshend's 
respects. Fort Vancouver, Columbia River, 
September, 1835.’”” 

Contains linguistic material relating to a 
number of the peoples in the vicinity of Puget 
Sonnd, amongst them a Chinook vocabulary of 
194 words and phrases, and a Chinook Jargon 
vocabulary, ‘‘used as the means of communica- 


esq., 


tion between the Indians and whites on Colum- | 


bia River,” of 146 words. 


Chinook: 


Classification See Bates (H. W.) y 


Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
Geographic names 
Grammar 


Domenech (E. H. D.) 
Gairdner (—) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Keane (A. H.) 
Jehan (L. F.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Priest (J.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Rafinesque (C.S.) 
Sayce (A. H.) 
Boas (F.) 

Gibbs (G.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Beach (W. W.) 
Berghaus (H.) 
Brinton (D. G.) 
Duncan (D.) 
Eells (M.) 
Featherman (A.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Hale (H.) 
Sproat (G. M.) 
Whymper (F.) 
Gibbs (G.) 

Boas (F.) 


Grammatic comments Gallatin (A.) 
Grammatic comments Hale (H.) 


Grammatic treatise 
Grammatic treatise 
Hymus 

Hymns 

Legends 

Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 

Prayers 

Proper names 
Proper names 
Sentences 

Songs 


Boas (F.) 

Miiller (F.) 

Blanchet (F. N.) 
Tate (C. M.) 

Boas (F.) 

Bergholtz (G. F.) 
Dutlot de Mofras (E.) 
Boas (F.) 

Duflot de Mofras (E.) 
Eells (M.) 

Haldeman (8. 5.) 
Ross (A.) 

Blanchet (F. N.) 
Catlin (G.) 

Stanley (J. M.) 
Franchére (G.) 

Boas (F.) 


Chinook — Continued. 


Songs See Eells (M.) 
Texts Boas (F.) 
Tribal names Boas (F.) 


Tribal names 
Tribal names 


Douglass (J.) 
Haines (E. M.) 


Vocabulary Anderson (A. C.) 
Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Vocabulary Chinook. 
Vocabulary Domenech (E. H. D.) 
Vocabulary Dunn (J.) 
Vocabulary Franchére (G.) 
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Knipe (C.) 
Vocabulary Montgomerie (J. E.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Priest (J.) 
Vocabulary Rafinesque (C.S.) 
Vocabulary Ross (A.) 
Vocabulary Scouler (J.) 
Vocabulary Shortess (R.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Vocabulary Wabass (W. G.) 
Words Bancroft (H. H.) 
Words Brinton (D. G.) 
Words Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Words Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Words Daa (L. K.) 
Words Grasserie (R. de la). 
Words Haines (E. M.) 
Words Latham (R. G.) 
Words Platzmann (J.) 
Words Pott (A. F.) 
Words Smith (8. B.) 
Words Tylor (E. B.) 
Words Youth's. 


Chinook Jargon. 

In American Homes, illustrated, vol. 4, pp. 
338-339, Chicago, 1873, 8°. (Lenox.) 

Contains specimens of a dialogue and the 
Lord’s prayer with English word for word 
translation. 

Chinook Jargon: 
Bible history 
Bible history 
Bible stories 


See Durieu (P.) 
St. Onge (L. N.) 
LeJeune (J. M. R.) 


Catechism Demers (M.) et al. 
Dictionary (8d ed. 1856) Blanchet (1°. N.) 
Dictionary (3d ed. 1862?) Blanchet (F.N.) 
Dictionary (4th ed. 1868) Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary (6th ed. 1873?) Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary (6th ed. 1878) Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary (7th ed. 1879) Blanchet (F. N,) 
Dictionary (Mss. 1891) Bulmer (T.5.) 
Dictionary (1891) Coones (8S. F.) 
Dictionary (1871) Demers (M.,) et al, 
Dictionary (1862) Dictionary, 
Dictionary (1865) Dictionary, 
Dictionary (1871?) Dictionary. 
Dictionary (1873) Dictionary, 
Dictionary (1877?) Dictionary, 
Dictionary (1883) Dictionary. 
Dictionary (1887) Dictionary, 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 


Chinook Jargon — Continued. 


Dictionary (1887) 
Dictionary (1889) 
Dictionary (1886) 
Dictionary (189%) 
Dictionary (Mss. 1893) 
Dictionary (Mss. 1884) 
Dictionary (Wash.,1863) 
Dictionary (N. Y.,1863,8°) 
Dictionary (N. Y.,1863,4°) 
Dictionary (9th ed. 1882) 
Dictionary (10th ed. 1884) 
Dictionary (11th ed. 1887) 
Dictionary (12th ed. 1889) 
Dictionary (13th ed. 1891) 
Dictionary (1880) 
Dictionary (1858) 
Dictionary (1890) 
Dictionary (1872) 
Dictionary (1886) 
Dictionary (1892) 
Dictionary (1853) 
Dictionary (1888) 
Dictionary (Mss. 1893) 
Dictionary (1865) 
Dictionary (1889) 
Dictionary (1860) 


General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
yeneral discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 


Grammar 


Grammatiec comments 
Grammatic comments 
Grammatic comments 
Grammatic treatise 
Grammatic treatise 


Hymn book 
Hymn book 
Hymns 
Hymns 
Hymns 
Hymns 
Hymns 
Hymns 
Hymns 
Legends 
Lord's prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord's prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord's prayer 


CHIN 


2 


Dictionary. 
Dictionary. 
Durieu (P.) 
Durieu (P.) 
Eells (M.) 
Everette (W. E.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Gibbs (G.) 

Gill (J. K.) 

Gill (J. K.) 

Gill (J. K.) 

Gill (J. K.) 

Gill (J. K.) 
Good (J. B.) 
Guide. 

Hale (H.) 
Langvein (H. L.) 
LeJeune (J. M. R.) 
LeJeune (J. M. R.) 
Lionnet (—) 
Probsch (T. W.) 
St. Onge (L. N.) 
Stuart (G.) 

Tate (C. M.) 
Vocabulary. 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Beach (W. W.) 
Clough (J. C.) 
Drake (S. G.) 
Eells (M.) 
Gatschet (A.58.) 
Haines (E. M.) 
Hale (H.) 

Nicoll (E. H.) 
Reade (J.) 
Sproat (G. M.) 
Swan (J.G.) 
Western. 
Wilson (D.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Crane (A.) 

Eells (M.) 

Hale (H.) 
Demers (M.) e¢ al. 
Hale (H.) 

Eells (M.) 


Le Jeune (J. M. RB.) | 


Bulmer (T.S.) 
Demers (M.) e¢ al. 
Everette (W. E.) 
Eells (M.) 

Hale (H.) 
Macleod (X. D.) 
St. Onge (L. N.) 
St. Onge (L. N.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Boldue (J. B. Z.) 
Bulmer (1.8.) 
Chinook. 
Dictionary. 
Eéils (M.) 
Everette (W. E.) 
Gibbs (G.) 

Gill (J. K.) 


17 


Chinook Jargon — Continued. 


Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord's prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Periodical 
Prayers 
Prayers 
Prayers 
Primer 
Review 
Review 
Review 
Review 
Review 
Sermons 
Sermons 
Sermons 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Songs 
Songs 

Ten commandments 
Text 

Text 

Text 

Text 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 


Good (J. B.) 


See Hale (H.) 


Marietti (P.) 
Nicoll (E. F.) 

Cox (R.) 
Dictionary. 

Gill (J. K.) 

Good (J. B.) 
Haines (E. M.) 
Hale (H.) 

Hazlitt (W.C.) 
Montgomerie(J.E.) 
Nicoll (E. H.) 
Palmer (J.) 
Parker (S.) 
Richardson (A. D.) 
Stuart (G.) 

Swan (J. G.) 

Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Bulmer (T. 58.) 
Demers (M.) et al. 
Tate (C.M.) 

Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Charencey (H. de). 
Crane (A.) 

Leland (C. G.) 
Reade (J.) 
Western. 
Eells (M.) 
Hale (H.) 
New. 
Allen (A.) 
Chinook. 
Dictionary. 
Eells (M.) 
Green (J.S.) 

Hale (H.) 

Leland (C. G.) 
Mactie (M.) 
Macdonald (D.G. F.) 
Stuart (G.) 


Bulmer (T.5.) 
Crane (A.) 
Everette (W. E.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Demers (M.) et al, 


Dictionary. 

Eells (M.) 
Anderson (A. C,) 
Armstrong (A. N,) 
Belden (G. P.) 
Boldue (J. B. Z.) 
Chamberlain(A.F,) 
Chinook. 

Cox (R,) 
Dictionary. 

Eells (M.) 

Everette (W, E.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Gibbs (G.) 

Guide. 

Haines (E. M.) 
Hale (H.) 

Hazlitt (W.C.) 

Le Jeune (J, M, R.) 


18 


Chinook Jargon — Continued. 


Vocabulary See Lionnet (—) 
Vocabulary Macdonald (D.G. F.) 
Vocabulary Palmer (J.) 
Vocabulary Parker (S.) 
Vocabulary Richardson (A. D.) 
Vocabulary voss (A.) 
Vocabulary Schooleraft (H. 1.) 
Vocabulary Scouler (J.) 
Vocabulary Sproat (G. M.) 
Vocabulary Swan (J. G.) 
Vocabulary Vocabulary. 
Vocabulary Winthrop (T.) 
Words Chamberlain (A.F.) 
Words Chase (P. E.) 
Words Crane (A.) 
Words Eells (M.) 
Words Latham (R. G.) 
Words Leland (C. G.) 
Words Norris (P. W.) 
Words Tylor (EK. B.) 
Words Wilson (D.) 
Clakama: 
Proper names See Stanley (J. M.) 
Sentences Gatschet (A. S.) 
Vocabulary Gatschet (A. 5.) 
Classification : 
Chinook See Bates (H. W.) 
Chinook Domenech (E. H. D.) 
Chinook Gairdner (—) 
Chinook Gallatin (A.) 
Chinook Jehan (L. F.) 
Chinook Keane (A. H.) 
Chinook Latham (R. G.) 
Chinook Priest (J.) 
Chinogk Powell (J. W.) 
Chinook Rafinesque (C.S.) 
Chinook Sayce (A. H.) 
Clatsop: 
Vocabulary See Emmons (G. F.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Lee (D.) and Frost 
(J. H.) 
Vocabulary Semple (J. E.) 


Clough (James Cresswell). On | the | 


existence | of | mixed languages | 
being | an examination of the funda- 


mental axioms of the | foreign school of | 
modern philology, more | especially as | 


applied to the English | Prize Essay | 
by | James Cresswell Clough | fellow of 


the Royal historical society | member | 


of the English dialect society ; assistant 
at’ Huddersfield college | late modern 
master at Liverpool college | [Greek 
quotation, one line] | 

London | Longmans, Green, and co | 
1876 | All rights reserved 

Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. title 
verso blank 11. preface p. [v], statements ete. 
p. [vi], contents pp. [vii]-vili, text pp. 1-125, 
postscript p. [126], 8°. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


| Clough (J. C.) -—- Continued. 

Some account of the Chinook Jargon, with 
specimen words (from Wilson's Prehistoric 
man), pp. 7-9. 

Copies seen: Kames. 


| Complete Chinook Jargon. See Probsch 

can CONV es) 

Complete dictionary of the Chinook Jar- 
gon. (1856-1862.) See Blanchet (F. N.) 


Complete dictionary of the Chinook 
| Jargon. (1882.) See Gill (J. K.) 


| Congress: This word following a title or within 
| parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the Library of Congress, Washington, 
{i ed DEK Cy 


| [Coones (8. F.)] Dictionary | of the | 
Chinook Jargon | as spoken on | Puget 
sound and the northwest, | with | 
original Indian names for prominent 
places | and localities with their mean- 
ings, | historical sketch, ete. | 

Published by | Lowman & Hanford 
| stationery & printing co., | Seattle, 
Wash. [1891.] 


Cover title: Chinook Dictionary | and | orig- 
inal Indian names | of | western Washington. 

| (Picture. ] | 

Lowman & Hanford | stationery & | print- 
ing company. [1891.] 

Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 
(8-4], p.5 blank, key to pronunciation p. [6], 
numerals p. [7]. text pp. 9-38, 24°. 

Numerals, p. [7].—Chinook-English diction- 
ary alphabetically arranged, pp. 9-32.—English 
conversation and interrogatories, answered in 
Chinook, pp. 33-34.—The oath, p. 34. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


Cornell: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler, belonging to the library of that uni- 
versity, Ithaca, N. Y. 

Cox (Ross). Adventures |on _ the | 
Columbiariver, | including | the narra- 
tive of a residence | of six years on the 
western side of | the Rocky mountains, 

| among | various tribes of Indians | 
hitherto unknown: | together with | a 
journey across the American continent. 
| By Ross Cox. | In two volumes. | 
Vol. I[-I1). | 
London: | Henry Colburn and Rich- 
ard Bentley, | New Burlington street. | 
1831. 


2 vols.: title verso name of printer 1 1. dedi- 
cation verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-ix, intro- 
duction pp. xi-xx, contents of vol. 1 pp. xxi- 
| xxiv, text pp. 1-388; title verso name of printer 


CHINOOKAN 


Cox (R.) — Continued. 
11. contents pp. v-viil; text pp. 1-393, appendix 
pp. 395-400, 8°. 

Numerals 1-12, 20, and a short vocabulary (7 
words and 3 phrases) in Chinook Jargon, vol. 2, 
p- 134. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress. 

Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 17267, mentions a 
“second edition, London, 1832, 8°”. 


LANGUAGES. 


19 


| Crane (A.) — Continued. 


— The | Columbia river; | or, | scenes | 


and adventures | during | a residence 


of six years on the western | side of the | 


Rocky mountains | among | various | 


tribes of Indians | hitherto unknown; 

| together with | a journey across the 
American continent. | By Ross Cox. | 
In two volumes. | Vol. I[-Ii]. | Third 
edition. | 


London: | Henry Colburn and Rich- | 


ard Bentley. | New Burlington street. 
| 1882. 


2 vols.: title verso names of printers 1 1. | 


dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v—vi, 
‘introduction pp. vii-xvi, contents pp. xvii_xx. 
text pp. 1-333; title verso names of printers 11. 
contents pp. ili-vi, text pp. 1-350, 8°. 
Linguistic contents as under title next 
above, vol. 2, pp. 117-118, 
Copies seen: Greely. 


-—— Adventures | on the | Columbia 
river, | including | the narrative of a 
residence | of six years on the western 
side of | the Rocky mountains, | among 
| various tribes of Indians | hitherto 
unknown: | together with | a journey 
across the American continent. | By 
Ross Cox. | 

New York: | printed and published 
by J. & J. Harper, 82 Cliff-street. | And 
sold by the principal booksellers 
throughout the United States. | 1832. 

Title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v—vi, intro- 
duction pp. vii-s, contents pp. xi-xv, text pp. 
25-331, appendix pp. 333-335, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
pp. 225-226, 

Copies seen: Baucroft, Congress, Harvard, 
Mallet, Pilling. 
Crane (Agnes). The Chinook J argon. 

In the Brighton Herald, no. 4883, p. 4, 
Brighton, England, July 12, 1890, folio. (Pilling.) 


A review of Hale (H.), Manual of the Oregon 
trade language. It occupies a column and a 
_half of the Herald and contains a number of 
Jargon words with their derivations, a brief 


outline of phonetics and grammar of the lan- 
guage, and one verse of a song, with English 
translation. 


| Curtin (Jeremiah). [Words, phrases, 
| 


and sentences in the Wasko language. ] 
Manuscript, pp. 77-228, 4°. in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethnolozy. Recorded at Warm 
Spring, Oregon, in 1884,in a copy of Powell’s 
Introduction to the Study of Indian Languages, 
second edition. The Bureau alphabet is used. 
Of the schedules, nos. 1-4, 6-8. 16, 18-29 are 
well filled; nos. 5, 10, 12-14, and 17 partially so; 
and nos. 9,11, 15, and 30 have no entries. 
Jeremiah Curtin was born in Milwaukee, 
Wis., about 1835. He had little education in 
childhood, but at the age of twenty or twenty- 
one prepared himself to enter Phillips Exeter 
Academy, made extraordinary progress, and 
soon entered Harvard College, where he was 
graduated in 1868. By this time he had become 
noted among his classmates and acquaintances 
for his wonderful facility asalinguist. Onleay- 
ing college he had acquired a good knowledge 
of French, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, 
Roumanian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Icelandic, 
Gothic, German, and Finnish, besides Greek and 
Latin. He had also made considerable progress 
in Hebrew, Persian. and Sanskrit, and was 
beginning to speak Russian. When Admiral 
Lissofsky’s fleet visited this country, in 1864, 
Curtin became acquainted with the officers and 
accompanied the expedition on its return to 
Russia. In St. Petersburg he obtained employ- 
ment as a translator of polyglot telegraphic 
dispatches, but he was presently appointed by 
Mr. Seward to the oftice of secretary of the 
United States legation, and he held this place 
till 1868. During this period he became familiar 
with the Polish, Bohemian, Lithuanian, 
Lettish, and Hungarian languages, and made a 
beginning in Turkish. From 1868 till 1877 he 
traveled in eastern Europe and in Asia, appar- 
ently in the service of the Russian government. 
In 1873, at the celebration at Prague of the 500th 
anniversary of the birth of John Huss, he 
delivered the oration, speaking with great elo- 
quence in the Bohemian language. During his 
travels in the Danube country he learned to 
speak Slavonian, Croatian, Servian, and Bulga- 
rian. He lived for some time in the Caucasus, 
where he learned Mingrelian, Abkasian, and 
Armenian. At the beginning of the Russo- 
Turkish war in 1877, he left the Russian domin- 
ions, and, after a year in London, returned to 
his native country. Since then he has been 


studying tbe languages of the American 
Indians and has made valuable researches 


under the auspices of Maj. John W. Powell and 
the Bureau of Ethnology. He is said to be 
acquainted with more than fifty languages.— 


Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


20 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


19. 


Daa (Ludwig Kristensen). On the affin- | Demers (M.) — Continued. 
ities between the languages of the | The dogma is first given in Latin, followed 


northern tribes of the old and new con- | 


tinents. 
Christiania, Norway. (Read December 
the 20th.) 


By Lewis Kr. Daa, Esq., of 


| 
| 
| 


In Philological Soc. [of London] Trans. 1856, 


pp. 251-294, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) 
Comparative tables showing affinities be- 

tween Asiatic and American languages, pp. 
264-285, contain words from many North Amer- 
ican languages, among them a few of the 
Tschinuk. 

Dawson (Dr. George Mercer). See 
Tolmie (W.F.) and Dawson (G. M.) 


George Mercer Dawson was born at Pictou, 


Nova Scotia, August 1, 1849, andisthe eldest son | 
of Sir William Dawson, principal of McGill | 


University, Montreal. 
MeGill College and the Royal School of Mines ; 
held the Dukeof Cornwall's scholarship, given 
by the Prince of Wales; and took the Edward 
Forbes medal in paleontology and the Mur- 
chison medal in geology. He was appointed 
geologist and naturalist to Her Majesty’s North 
American Boundary Commission in 1873, and 
atthe close of the commission’s work, in 1875, he 
published a report under the title of ‘‘ Geology 
and Resources of the Forty-ninth Parallel.” In 


July, 1875, he received an appointment on the | 
From 1875 to 1879 | 


geologicalsurvey of Canada, 
he was occupied in the geological survey and 
exploration of British Columbia, and subse- 
quently engaged in similar work both in the 


He was educated at | 


Northwest Territory and British Columbia. Dr. | 
Dawson is the author of numerous papers on | 


geology, natural history,and ethnology, pub- 
lished in the Canadian Naturalist, Quarterly 
Journalof the Geological Society, Transactions 
of the Royal Society of Canada, etc. He was in 
1887 selected to take charge of the Yukon expe- 
dition. 


Definitio Dogmatis . 
Tchinook. See Demers (M.) 


Jargon 


De Horsey (Lieut. Algernon Frederick | 


Rous). See Montgomerie (J. E.) and 
De Horsey (A. F. R.) 


[Demers (Bishop Modeste).] Definitio 
Dogmatis Immaculate Conceptionis 
Beatissime Virginis Marie | a SS. D. 
N. Pio PP. IX. 


Second heading: Eadem in eam Lin- | 


guam translata que vulgo Jargon 


Tehinook | dicitur, queque obtinet in | 
tota Oregonensi Provincia; | auctore | 


Episcopo Vancouveriensis Insule. 


Solophon : Typis Joannis Marie Shea, | 


Neo Eboracensis. [18607] 
No title-page, headings only; text 1 leaf verso 
blank, 12°, 


by the translation into the Chinook Jargon. 
Copies seen: Georgetown, Pilling. 


Blanchet (F. N.) and St. Onge (L. 
N.) J. M. J.| Chinook [Jargon] | 
Dictionary, Catechism, | prayers and 
hymns. | Composed in 1838 & 1839 by 
| rt. rev. Modeste Demers. | Revised, 
corrected and completed, | in 1867 by 
| most rey. F. N. Blanchet. | With mod- 
ifications and additions by | Rey. L. N. 
St. Onge Missionary | among the Yaka- 
mas and other Indian Tribes. | 
Montreal, | 1871. 


Cover title: The | missionary’s companion | 
onthe | Pacific coast. | [Picture.] | [Three lines 
of scripture—Mat. xxiii. 19.] 

Cover title, frontispiece verso blank 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. plate 1 1. preface (by Father 
St. Onge, unsigned) pp. 7-9, text pp. 9-65, ad- 
denda p.66, table [of contents] p. 67, errata p. ; 
68, 16°. 

Short account of the origin of the Chinook 
Jargon, pp. 7-8.—Rules of the language, pp. 9- 
10.—Of the nouns, pp..11-12.—Orthography, p. 
12.—Chinook [Jargon] dictionary (pp. 18-32) in 
double columns, underthe following heads, each 
alphabetically arranged by Jargon words: 
Nouns, pp. 18-22; Adjectives, pp. 23-25; Num- 
bers, pp. 25-26; Pronouns, p. 26; Verbs, pp. 26- 
29; Adverbs, prepositions, conjunctions, and 
interjections, pp. 30-31.—Appendix, pp. 31-32.— 
The Christian prayers in Chinook [Jargon], 
pp. 33-38.— Hymns (in Jargon with French 
headings), pp. 39-46.—Catechism (in Jargon 
with English headings), pp. 47-65.—Addenda [a 
short vocabulary ], p. 66. 

‘The Chinook Jargon was invented by the 
Hudson Bay Company traders, who were 
mostly French Canadians. Having to trade with 
the numerous tribes inhabiting the countries 
west of the Rocky Mountains, it was necessary 
to have a language understood by all. Hence, 
the idea of composing the Chinook Jargon. 
Fort Vancouver being the principal post, the 
traders of the twenty-nine forts belonging to 
the company, on the western slope, and the 
Indians from every part of that immense 
country, had to come to Vancouver for the 
trading season. They used to learn the Chinook 
and then teach it to others. In this manner it 
became universally known. 

“The two first missionaries to Oregon, Rev. 
F.N. Blanchet, V.G., and his worthy compan- 
ion, Rey. Mod. Demers, arrived from Canada to 
Vancouver onthe24thof November, 1838. They 
had to instruct numerous tribes of Indians, 
and the wives and children of the whites, who 
spoke only the Chinook. The two missionaries 
set to work to learn it,and in a few weeks 
Father Demers had mastered it and began to 
preach 


CHINOOKAN 


Deiners (M.) — Continued. 

‘“Hecomposed a vocabulary which was very 
useful to other missionaries. He composed sev- 
eral canticles, which the Indians learned and 
sang with taste and delight. He also translated 
all the Christian prayers inthe same language. 

‘Such is the origin of the Chinook Jargon. 
which enabled the two tirst missionaries in the 
country to do a great deal of good among the 
Indians and half-breeds. The invention of the 
Catholic Ladder, in April, 1839, by Very Rey. 
Blanchet, and its [oral] explanation in Chinook, 
had a marvelous success and gave the Catholic 
missionaries a great superiority and preponder- | 
ance much envied by the missionaries belong- | 
ing to other denominations. 

‘* Father Demers, afterwards Bishop of Van- 
couvers Island, has now gone to enjoy the 
reward of his great labours and apostolic zeal. 
It would be too bad to lose his Dictionary and 
other Chinook works. So, Archbishop Blan- 
chet, who has himself made a compendium of 
the Christian doctrine in the same language, has 
had the good inspiration to get the whole pub- 
lished with his corrections and additions.’’— 
Preface by Father St. Onge. 

Concerning the preparation and publication 
of this work, Father St. Onge writes me as fol- 
lows: 

‘Bishop Demers’s littié book, which was 
corrected by Archbishop Blanchet, was never 
printed. The archbishop gave me the mann- 
script, which I arranged. I made the spelling 
uniform and overhauled it completely. I was 
in the hospital at Montreal at the time, where 
my bishop had sent me because of ill health. 
When I got alittle stronger, time being hard | 
to pass, I procured a small press, went to work | 
and printed this Chinook book and the Yakama | 
eatechism. It was hard work for an invalid, 
and I made the dictionary as short as possible. 

“The Catholic Ladder, of which I send you 
a copy, was, as you suggest, published by 
Father Lacombe; but it is only an embellished 
edition of the Ladder invented by Archbishop 
Blanchet in April, 1839. The archbishop 
never printed any Chinook explanation of it, 
and in my preface to the Chinook Dictionary 
the word oral should have been included. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Trumbull, 
Wellesley. 

Modeste Demers, R.C. bishop, born in Can- 
ada, died in Vancouver's Island in 1871. He 
went to the Northwest Territory in 1838 and 
was engaged in missionary duty among the 
Indians until 1847, when he was consecrated 
bishop of Vancouver’s Island. — Appleton’s 
Cyelop. of Am. Biog. 


Dickinson (—). See Everette (W. E.) 


Dictionary | of | Indian Tongues | con- 
taining most of the words and terms | 


used in the | Tsimpsean, Hydah, & 
. . . . . | 
Chinook, | with their meaning or equiv- | 
| 
alent | in the | English Language. | 


LANGUAGES. 21 


Dictionary — Continued. 

Pubiished by Hibben & Carswell, | 
Victoria, V. I. | Printed at the office of 
the Daily Chronicle, | Government 
Street. | 1862. (*) 

Title 11. text pp. 1-15, 16°. 

Hydah vocabulary. pp. 1-3. — Tsimpsean 
vocabulary, grammatic notes and phrases, pp. 
3-10.—Chinook Jargon, pp. 11-15. 

Title trom Dr. Franz 
possession. 


30as from copy in his 


Dictionary | of | Indian tongues, | con- 
taining | Most of the Words and Terms 
| used in the | Tshimpsean, Hydah, and 
Chinook,| with their meaning or equiv- 
alent | in the | English language. | 

Published by | Hibben & Carswell, 
| Victoria, V. I. | Printed at the Brit- 
ish colonist office. | 1865, 

Cover title verso advertisement, no inside 
title, text pp. 1-14, sq. 16°. 

Chinook Jargon-English vocabulary, double 
columns, pp. 1-4.—Chinook examples (phrases 
and sentences), p.5.— Hydah-English vocabu- 
lary, double columns, pp. 6-7.—English-Tshiim- 
shean [sie] vocabulary, verbal conjugations, 
phrases and sentences, double columns, pp. 8- 
14. 

Copies seen: Astor, Hames. 


Dictionary. A | dictionary | of the | 
Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade 
Language, | Of the North Pacifie Coast. 

| [Picture of an Indian. ] | 

Published by T.N. Hibben & Co., | 
Victoria, B. C. | Colonist print—Vie- 
toria, B.C. [18712] 

Cover title as above, no inside title, text pp. 
1-29, advertisement on back cover, 8°. 

Chinook- English, pp.1-18.— English-Chinook, 
pp. 19-29.—Lord’s prayer in Jargon with inter- 
linear English translation, p. 29. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Cornell, Eames, Trum- 
bull, Wellesley. 

For the most part areprint, with omissions, of 
Gibbs (G.), Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. 

Reprinted in: British Columbia; Report of 
the Hon. H. L. Langvein, C. B. Ministerof Pub- 

,lic ° Works, pp. 161-182, Ottawa, 1872, 8°. 
(Georgetown.) 


Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | 
or, | Indian Trade Language | of the 
| north Pacifie coast. | 

Victoria, B. C.:|T. N. Hibben & 
co., publishers, | Government street. 
[1877 2] 

Cover titie: Dictionary |! of the | Chinook 
Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | of the 
| north Pacific coast. | [Picture.] | 

Victoria, B.C.:| Published by ‘Tl. N. Hibben 
& Co., | Government Street. [1877?] 


22 


Dictionary — Continued. 

Cover title, title verso copyright notice (1877) 
and name of printer 1 1. text pp. 5-33, 8°. 

Part I. Chinook-English, alphabetically 
arranged, pp. 5-23.—Part IIT. English Chinook, 
double columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 
23-83.—Lord’s prayer in Jargon, with inter- 
linear English translation, p. 33. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | 
or | Indian Trade Language | of the | 
north Pacific coast. | 

Victoria, B. C. | T.N. Hibben & Co., 
publishers, |Government Street. | 1883. 

Cover title: New Edition. | Dictionary | of 
the | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Lan- 
guage |of the | north Pacific coast. | [Pic- 
ture.] | 

Victoria, B. C.: | Published by T. N. Hibben 
& Co. | Government street. [1883.] 

Cover title, title verso copyright notice (1877) 
and name of printer 1 1. text pp. 5-35, 8°. 

Part I. Chinook-English, pp. 5-24-—Part IT. 
English-Chinook, pp. 24-34. — Lord’s prayer 
in Jargon with English interlinear translation, 
p. 35. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | 
or | Indian Trade Language | of the | 
north Pacifie coast. | 

Victoria, B. C. | T. N. Hibben & co., 
Publishers, | Government Street. | 1887. 

Cover title: New Edition. | Dictionary | of the 
| ChinookJargon, | or | Indian Trade Language 
| of the | north Pacific coast. | [ Picture. ] | 

Victoria, B.C.:| Published by T. N. Hibben 
& Co. | Government street. [1887.] 

Cover title verso advertisement, title verso 
copyright notice (1887) and name of’ printer 1 1. 
text pp. 3-33, 8°. 

Part I. Chinook-English, alphabetically 
arranged, pp. 3-21.—Part IT. English-Chinook, 
alphabetically arranged, pp. 22-32. — Lord's 
prayer in Jargon with interlinear English 
translation, p. 33. 

Copies seen: Ford. 

Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | 
or | Indian Trade Language | of the 
north Pacific coast. | 

Victoria, B. C. | B. C. stationery co., 
Publishers, | Government Street, | 1887. 

Cover title: Dictionary | of the | Chinook 
Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Language | of the 

| north Pacific coast. | New edition. | 

B. C. stationery co., Publishers, | Govern- 
ment Street, | Victoria, B. C. | 1887. 

Cover title, title verso copyright notice (1877, 
by T. N. Hibben) and name of printer 1 1. text 
pp. 3-33, 8°. 

Part I. Chinook-English, 


alphabetically 


arranged, pp. 38-21.—Part IL. English-Chinook, | 


double columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


| Dictionary of 


OF THE 


Dictionary — Continued. 
22-32.—Lord’s prayer in Jargon, with inter - 
linear English translation, p. 33. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon, | 
or | Indian Trade Language, | of the | 
north Pacific coast. | [Vignette.] | 

Victoria, B. C. | T. N. Hibben [&] 
co., Publishers. | Government Street, | 
1889. 

Cover title: New Edition. | Dictionary | of 
the | Chinook Jargon, | or | Indian Trade Lan- 
guage | of the| north Pacifie coast. | [Picture.] | 

Victoria, B.C. | Published by T. N. Hibben 
& co. | Government street. [1889.] 

Cover title, title verso copyright (1877) and 
name of printer 1 1. text pp. 3-32, 8°. 

Part I. Chinook-English, alphabetically 
arranged, pp. 3-21.—Part II. English-Chinook, 
alphabetically arranged, double columns, pp. 
21-32.—Lord’s prayer in Jargon with interlin- 
ear English translation, p. 32. 

Copies seen: Pilling, 

Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jargon | 
or | Indian trade language | now in 
general use on | the north-west coast. 

| Adapted for general business. | 

Olympia, W. T. | T. G. Lowe & co., 
publishers and stationers. | 1873. | 
Printed at the Courier job rooms, 
Olympia, W. T. 

Title verso blank 1 ]. text pp. 1-32, 12°. 

Part I. Chinook-English, pp. 1-20.—Part II. 
English-Chinook, pp. 21-32. 

Copies seen: Bancroft. 

Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. 
(1868-1879.) See Blanchet (F.N.) 


the Chinook 
(1891.) See Coones (S. F.) 


Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. 
(1882-1887.) See Gill (J. K.) 


Dictionary of the Chinook . 


Jargon. 


. trade 


language. See Probsch (T. W.) 
Dictionary: 

Chinook See Boas (F.) 

Chinook Gibbs (G.) 
‘ Jargon (3d ed.1856) Blanchet (F. N.) 
‘“ Jargon (3d ed. 1862?) Blanchet (F. N.) 
‘“ Jargon (4th ed.1868) Blanchet (F. N.) 
‘ Jargon (6th ed.1873?) Blanchet (F. N.) 


(6th ed. 1878) 
(7th ed. 1879) 
(Mss. 1891) 


Blanchet (F. N.) 
Blanchet (F. N.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 


‘“ Jargon 
“ Jargon 
‘“ Jargon 


Jargon (1891) Coones (S. F.) 
Jargon (1871) Demers (M.) et al. 
Jargon (1862) Dictionary. 
“Jargon (1865) Dictionary. 
Jargon (1871?) Dictionary. 
Jargon (1873) Dictionary. 
Jargon (1877?) Dictionary. 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. Zo 


Dictionary — Continued. 
Chinook—-Continued. 


Domenech (E. H. D.) — Continued. 


‘ Jargon (1883) Dictionary. 

“ Jargon (1887) Dictionary. 

‘“ Jargon (1887) Dictionary. 

“ Jargon (1889) Dictionary. 

‘© Jargon (1886) Durieu (P.) 

“ Jargon (1892) Durieu (P.) 
Jargon (Mss. 1893) Eells (M.) 
Jargon (Mss. 1884) Everette (W. E.) 


Jargon (Wash., 1863) Gibbs (G.) H 
“ Jargon (N. Y., 1863,8°) Gibbs (G.) 
Jargon (N. Y.,1863,4°) Gibbs (G.) 
Jargon (9th ed.1882) Gill (J. K.) 
“ Jargon (10th ed.1884) Gill(J.K.) 
‘“* Jargon (11th ed.1887) Gill (J. K.) 
‘* Jargon (12th ed. 1889) Gill (J.K.) 
“ Jargon (13th ed. 1891) Gill (J. K.) 


“ Jargon (1880) Good (J. B.) 
“Jargon (1858) Guide. 
‘ Jargon (1890) Hale (H.) 
“ Jargon (1872) Langvein(H.L.) | 
“ Jargon (1886) LeJeune(J.M.R.) | 
“ Jargon (1892) LeJeune(J.M.R.) 
“ Jargon (1853) Lionnet (—) | 
“ Jargon (1888) Probsch (T. W.) | 
“ Jargon (Mss. 1893) St. Onge (L. N.) 
“Jargon (1865) Stuart (G.) 
“Jargon (1889) ‘Tate (C. M.) 
Jargon (1860) Vocabulary. 


Domenech (4bbé Emanuel Henri Dieu- 
donné). Seven years’ residence | in the 
great | deserts of North America| by the | 
| abbé Em. Domenech | Apostolical Mis- 
sionary: Canon of Montpellier: Mem- 
ber of the Pontifical Academy Tiberina, 
| and of the Geographical and Ethno- 
graphical Societies of France, &e. | 
Illustrated with fifty-eight woodeuts by | 
A. Joliet, three | plates of ancient Indian | 
music, and a map showing the actual 
situation of | the Indian tribes and the 
country described by the author. | In 
Two Volumes | Vol. I[-II]. | 

London | Longman,Green, Longman, 
and Roberts | 1860 | The right of trans- | 
lation is reserved. 


2 vols.: half-title verso names of printers 1 1. 
title verso blank 1 1. dedication pp. v—vi, preface 
pp. Vii-xili, contents pp. xv-xxi. list of illus- 
trations pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 1-445; half-title 
verso names of printers 1 1. title verso blank 1 | 
l. contents pp. v-xii, text pp. 1-465, colophon | 
p. [466], map, plates, 8°. 

List of Indian tribes of North America, vol. 
1, pp. 440-445. Vocabularies, ete. vol. 2, pp. 164— 
189, contain 84 words of the Chinook. | 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Brit- | 
ish Museum, Congress, Watkinson. 

At the Field sale a copy,no.550, brought $2.37, 
and at the Pinart sale, no.328,6fr. Clarke & | 
co. 1886, no. 5415, price a copy $5. 


| Douglass (Sir James). 


Emanuel Henri Dieudonné Domenech, French 
author, was born in Lyons, France, November 4, 
1825; died in France in June, 1886. He became 
a priest in the Roman Catholic church, and was 
sent as a missionary to Texas and Mexico. Dur- 
ing Maximilian’s residence in America, Dome- 
nech acted as private chaplain to the emperor, 
and he was also almoner to the French army 
during its occupation of Mexico. On his return 
to France he was made honorary canon of Mont- 
pellier. His ‘‘ Manuscrit pictographique améri- 
cain, précédé d'une notice sur Vidéographie des 
Peaux Rouges’’ (1860) was published by the 
French government, with a facsimile of a man- 
uscript in the library of the Paris arsenal, 
relating,as he claimed, tothe American Indians; 
but the German orientalist, Julius Petzholdt, 
declared that it consisted only of scribbling and 
incoherent illustrations of a local German dia- 
lect. Domenech maintained the authenticity of 
the manuscript in a pamphlet entitled “La 
vérité sur le livre des sauvages”’ (1861), which 
drew forth a reply from Petzholdt, translated 
into French under the title of ‘‘ Le livre des 
sauvages an point de vue de la civilisation 
francaise” (Brussels, 1861). During the latter 
part of his life he produced several works per- 
taining to religion and ancient history.— A pple- 
ton'’s Cyclop. of Aim. Biog. 


Private papers | 
of Sir James Douglass. | Second series. 


Manuscript, pp. 1-36, folio; in the Bancrott 
Library, San Francisco, Cal. 

Contains lists of native tribes from Puget 
Sound northward to Cross Sound, Alaska, 
with traders’ and native tribal names, grouped 
according to languages, pp. 7-33. 
33 and 34 are 14 blank pages. 

This manuscript was copied from the orig- 
inal papers in Sir James’s possession; in Indian 
names the copyist has nniversally substituted 
an initial R for the initial K. 


Between pp. 


Drake (Samuel Gardner). The | Aborig- 


inal races | of | North America; | com- 
prising | biographical sketches of emi- 
nent individuals, | and | an historical 
account of the different tribes, | from 
| the first discovery of the continent | 
to | the present period | with a disser- 
tation on their | Origin, Antiquities, 
Manners and Customs, | illustrative 
narratives and anecdotes, | and a | 
copious analytical index | by Samuel 
G.Drake. Fifteenth edition, | revised, 
with valuable additions, | by Prof. H. 
L. Williams. | [Quotation, six lines. ] | 
New York. | Hurst & company, pub- 
lishers. | 122 Nassau Street. [1882.] 
Title verso copyright 1 1. preface pp. 3-4, 
contents pp. 5-8, Indian tribes and nations pp. 


24 


Drake (S. G.) — Continued. 
9-16, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 19-767, 
index pp. 768-787, 8°. 

Gatschet (A. S.), Indian languages of the 
Pacitic States, pp. 748-763. 

Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Wisconsin 
Historical Society. 

Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6377, price a copy $3. 
Duflot de Mofras (Eugéne). Exploration 
| du territoire | de l’Orégon, | des Cali- 
fornies | et de la mer Vermeille, | exé- 
cutée pendant les années 1840, 1841 et 
1842, | par | M. Duflot de Mofras, | At- 
taché a la légation de France 4 Mexico ; 
| ouvrage publié par ordre du roi, | sous 
les auspices de M. le maréchal Soult, 
due de Dalmatie, | Président du Conseil, 
| et de M. le ministre des affaires 


étrangéres. Tome premier[-second]. | - 


Paris, | Arthus Bertrand, éditeur, | 
libraire de la Société de géographie, | 
Rue Hautefeuille, n° 23. | 1844. 

2vols.: frontispiece 11. half-title verso names 
of printers 11. title verso blank 11. dedication 
verso blank 1 1. avant-propos pp. vii-xii, aver- 
tissement verso note 1 |. nota verso blank 11. 
text pp. 1-518, table des chapitres pp. 519-521, 
table des cartes pp. 523-524; half-title verso 
names of printers 11. title verso blank 1 1. text 
pp. 1-500, table des chapitres pp. 501-504, table 
des cartes pp. 505-506, tablealphabétique et ana- 
lytique des matiéres pp. 507-514, 8°, atlas folio. 

Chapitre xiii, Philologie, diversités de lan- 
gues, etc. (vol. 2, pp. 387-484), includes the 
Lord’s prayer in langue Tchinouk du Rio Co- 
lombia, p.390; numerals 1-10 of the Tchinooks, 


p. 401. 
Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 


meun, British Museum, Congress, Geological 
Survey. 

Dufossé (E.) Americana | Catalogne de 
livres | relatifs 4 ’ Amérique | Europe, 
Asie, Afrique | etOcéanie | [&c. thirty- 
four lines] | 


Librairie ancienne et moderne de E. | 
Dufossé | 27, rue Guénégaud, 27 | prés | 


le Pont-neuf | Paris [1887] 


Cover title as above, no inside title, table des | 


divisions 1 1. text pp. 175-422, 8°. 

Contains, passim, titles of a few works 
relating to the Chinookan languages. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

This series of catalogues was begun in 1876. 


Dunbar: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after anote indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. John B. Dunbar, 
Bloomfield, N.J., which is now dispersed. 


Duncan (David). American races. Com- 


piled and abstracted by Professor Dun- 
can, M, A. 


Dunn (John). 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Duncan (D.) — Continued. 


Forms Part 6 of Spencer (H.), Descriptive 
sociology, London, 1878, folio. (Congress.) 

Under the heading ‘‘ Language,” pp. 40-42, 
there are given comments and extracts from 
various authors upon native tribes, including 
examples of the Chinook, p. 42. 

Some copies have theimprint: New York, D. 
Appleton & co. [n.d.] (Powell.) 


History | of | the Oregon 
territory | and British North-American 
| fur trade; | with | an account | of the 
habits and customs of the principal 
native | tribes on the northern conti- 
nent. | By John Dunn, | late of the 
Hudson’s bay company; | eight years 
a resident in the | country. | 

London: | Edwards and Hughes, Ave 
Maria lane. | 1844. 

Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-vi, contents pp. vii-vili, text pp. 1-359, map, 
8°, 

A vocabulary (32 words and 9 phrases) of the 
language of the Chinook tribe, p. 359. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress. 

There is an edition of this work: Philadel- 
phia, Zeiber & cv , 1845, which does not contain 
the vocabulary. (Boston Athen#um, British 
Museum, Harvard.) 

Reprinted, omitting the linguistics, in 
Smith’s Weekly Volume, vol. 1, pp. 382-416, 
Philadelphia, 1845, 4°. (Mallet.) 


—— History | of | the Oregon territory | 


and British North-American | fur trade; 
| with | an account | of the habits and 
customs of the principal native | tribes 
on the northern continent. | By John 
Dunn, | late of the Hudson bay com- 
pany, | eight years a resident in the 
country. | Second edition. | 

London: | Edwards and Hughes, Ave- 
Maria lane. | 1846. 

Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-vi, contents pp. vii-viii, text pp. 1-359, map, 
8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
p. 359. 

Copies seen: Astor. 


| [Durieu (Bishop Paul).] Bible history 


| containing the most | remarkable 
events | of the | old and new testa- 
ment. | To which is added a compen- 
dium of | church history. | For the use 
of the Catholic schools | in the United 
States. | By | right rev. Richard Gil- 
mour, D.D.,| Bishop of Cleveland. 
[Translated into the Chinook Jargon 
by right rev. Paul Durieu, Bishop of 
British Columbia.] | [ Vignette. } | 


CHINOOKAN 


Durieu (P.) — Continued. 
New-York, Cincinnati, and Chicago: 
| Benziger brothers, | printers to the 
holy apostolic see. [n.d.] [Kamloops, 
B.C.: 1898.] 

Frontispiece verso 1. 1 recto blank, title verso 
letter from Pope Leo XIII and copyright notice 
(1869) 1 1. “‘approbations to Bishop Gilmour's 
bible history” 3 ll. preface pp. v—vi, text in 
English, pp. 7-56+, in Chinook Jargon, steno- 
graphic characters, pp. 1-60+,12°. In course 
of publication, and will contain 330 pages: in 
English and about 400 in Jargon. 

This work is an outcome of the enterprise 
of Father Le Jeune, of Kamloops, British 


Columbia, who has transcribed Bishop Duriew’s | 


Jargon translation of the bible history into the 
characters adopted by him for teaching his 
Indian charges to read and write; a description 
of which will be found in this bibliography 
under his name. His notes have been repro- 
duced by him, with the aid of the mimeograph, 


on sheets the size of those in the edition of the | 
bible history in English, with which they have 


been interleaved. When finished it will be 
issued in an edition of 200, that number of 
copies of the edition in English having been 
furnished by Father St. Onge, of Troy, N. Y. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

I have in my library a copy of each of two 
editions of a ‘Chinook Vocabulary,’ with 
imprints of 1886 and 1892, on the respective title 


pages of which appears the name of Bishop | 


Durieu. These [had placed under his name, 


Eames: This word following a title or within par- 

~ entheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. Wilberforce Eames, 
New York City. 

Eells: This word following a title or within paren- 
theses after a note indicates that a copy of the 
work referred to has been loaned to me for 
collation and description by Rev. Myron Eells, 
Union City. Mason County, Washington. 


Eells (fev. Myron). How languages grow. 
In the Advance, March 25 and July 8, 1875, 
Chicago, 1875, folio. (*) 
Relates wholly to the Chinook Jargon. 
Title and note furnished by Mr. Eells. 


— Art. IV. The Twana Indians of the 
Skokomish reservation. By Rey. M. 
Eells, Missionary among these Indians. 

In Hayden (F. V.}, Bulletin, vol. 3, pp. 57-114, 
Washington, 1877, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Four songs in Chinook, with English trans- 
lations, pp. 91-92. 

Issued separately with cover title as follows: 


— Avthor’s edition. | Department of 
the interior. | United States geological 


Aj 


LANGUAGES. 25 


Durieu (P.) — Continued. 


but ina letter to me, dated November 16, 1892, 
the bishop modestly disclaims their authorship, 
which he attributes to Father J. M. R. 
Le Jeune, under whose name, with accompa- 
nying explanations, they will be found in this 
bibliography. 


See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 


The Rey. A. G. Morice, of Stuart’s Lake 
Mission, British Columbia, a famous Athapas- 
ean scholar, has kindly furnished me the fol- 
lowing brief account of this writer: 

‘‘Bishop Paul Durieu was born at St. Pal-de- 
Mous, in the diocese of Puy, France, December 
3,1830. After his course in classics he entered 
the novitiate of the Oblates at Notre Dame de 
l’Ozier in 1847 and made his religious profession 
in 1849. He was ordained priest at Marseilles 
March 11, 1854, and was sent to the missions of 
Oregon, where he occupied, successively, sev- 
eral posts. At the breaking out of the rebellion 
among the Yakama Indians he had to leave tor 
the Jesuit mission at Spokane. He was after- 
wards sent to Victoria and then to Okanagan 
by his superiors. Thence he was sent as 
superior of the Fort Rupert Mission, and when, 
on June 2, 1875, he was appointed coadjutor 
bishop of British Columbia, he was superior of 
St. Charles House at New Westminster. On 
June 8, 1890, he succeeded Bishop L. Y. D’Her- 
bainez as vicar apostolic of British Columbia. 

‘He understands but does not speak several 
Salishan dialects, and he is especially noted for 
his unqualified success among the Indians.” 


Eells (M.) — Continued. 


and geographical survey. | F. V. Hay- 
den, U. 8. Geologist-in-Charge. | The | 
Twana Indians | of the | Skokomish 
reservation in Washington territory. | 
By | rev. M. Eells, | missionary among 
these Indians. | Extracted from the 
bulletin of the survey, Vol. III, No.1. | 

Washington, April 9, 1877. 

Cover title as above. no inside title, text pp. 
57-114, 8°. 

Linguistic contents asunder title next above. 


Copies seen: Brinton, Eames, National 
Museum, Pilling. 


— Hymns |in the | Chinook Jargon 


Language | compiled by | rev. M. 
Eels[sic], | Missionary of the American 
Missionary Association. | [Vignette. ] | 

Portland, Oregon: | publishing house 
of Geo. H. Himes. | 1878. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
copyright notice (1878) 1 1. note p. 3, text pp. 4— 
30, sq. 169. 

Hymns (alternate pages Jargon, with Eng- 
lish headings, and English translation), pp. 4— 


26 


Bells (M.)—Continued. 

27.—Lord’s prayer, with interlinear English 
translation, pp. 28-29.—Blessing before meals, 
with interlinear English translation, p. 30. 

Copies seen: Dunbar, Eames, Georgetown, 

Pilling, Wellesley. 
-— Hymns | inthe | Chinook+Jargon-+ 
Language | compiled by | rev. M. 
Kells | Missionary of the American Mis- 
sionary Association. | Second edition. | 
Revised and Enlarged. | 

Portland, Oregon: | David Steel, suc- 
cessor to Himes the printer, | 169-171 
Second Street, | 1889. 

Cover title as above verso note, title as above 
verso copyright notice (1878 and 1889) 1 1, note 
p. 3, text pp. 4-40, sq. 16°. 

Hymns (alternate pages Jargon, with Eng- | 
lish headings and English translation), pp. 4—- 
31.—Hymn in the ‘wana or Skokomish lan- 
guage, p. 32; English translation, p. 33 —Hymn 
in the Clallam language, p. 34; English trans- 
lation, p. 85.—Hymn in the Nisqually language, 
p. 36; English translation, p. 37.—Medley in 
four languages (Jargon, Skokomish, Clallam, 
and English), p.36; English translation, p. 37.— 
Lord’s prayer in Jargon, with interlinear Eng- | 
lish translation, pp. 88-29.—Blessing before 
meals, in Jargon, with interlinear English 
translation, p. 40. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 
—The Twana language of Washington 
territory. By rev. M. Eells. 

In American Antiquarian, vol. 3, pp. 296-303. 
Chicago, 1880-1881, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) | 

A grammatic treatise upon several Indian 
languages of Washington Territory, among 
them the Chinook Jargon, p. 303. 

The Chinook Jargon. 
In the Seattle Weekly Post-Intelligencer, | 


— Indians of Puget Sound. 


vol. 1, no. 52, p. 4, column 8, Seattle, Washington 
Ty., September 29, 1882. (Pilling.) 

Explains the origin of ‘‘that miserable 
Chinook,’’ defends it as a useful intertribal 
language and for intercourse between the 
Indians and white men, gives the derivation of 


several words of the language and some gram- 
matic notes. 

- History of | Indian missions | on the 
Pacific coast. | Oregon, Washington 
and Idaho. | By | rev. Myron Eells, | 
Missionary of the American Missionary 
Association. | With | an introduction 

| by | rev. G. H. Atkinson, D.D. | | 

Philadelphia: | the American Sunday- | 
school union, | 1122 Chestnut Street. | 
10 Bible house, New York. [1882.] 

Frontispiece, title verso copyright (1882) 11. | 
dedication verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-vi, | 
introduction by G. H. Atkinson pp. vii-xi, pref- | 
ace (dated October, 1882) pp. xiii-xvi, text pp. 
17-270, 12°. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Eells (M.) — Continued. 


Chapter v, Literature, science, education, 
morals, and religion (pp. 202-226), contains a 
short list of books, papers, and manuscripts 
relating to the Indians of the northwest coast, 
among them the Chinook and Chinook Jargon, 
pp. 203-207, 209-211. 

Copies seen: Congress, Pilling. 


—— Ten years | of | missionary work | 


among the Indians | at | Skokemish, 
Washington territory. | 1874-1884. | By 
Rey. M. Eells, | Missionary of the 
American Missionary Association. | 

Boston: | Congregational Sunday- 
School Publishing Society, | Congrega- 
tional house, | Corner Beacon and Som- 
erset Streets. [1886.] 

Half-title (Ten years at Skokomish) verso 
blank 11. frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright 
(1886) and names of printers 1 1. preface 11. 
dedication verso note 1 1. contents pp. vii-x, 
introduction pp. 11-13, text pp. 15-271, 12°. 

Hymn (three verses) in Chinook Jargon, 
with Enelish translation, pp. 248-249.,—Speci- 
men lines of a Jargon hymn, pp. 253-254. 

Copies seen: Congress, Pilling. 


(Sixth 
paper.) Measuring and valuing. 

In American Antiquarian, vol. 10, p. 174-178, 
Chicago, 1888, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) 

Numerals, and remarks concerning the 
numeral system of quite a number of the lan- 
gnages of Washington Territory, among them 
the Chinook. 

The preceding articles of the series, all of 
which appeared in the American Antiquarian, 
contain no linguistic material. It was the 
intention of the editor of the Antiquarian, 
when the series should be finished, to issue 
them in book form. So far as they were 
printed in the magazine they were repaged and 
perhaps a number of signatures struck off. 
The sixth paper, for instance, titled above, I 
have in my possession, paged 44-48. 


— The Twana, Chemakum, and Klallam 


Indians of Washington Territory. By 
Rev. Myron Eells. 

In Smithsonian Institution, Annual Rept. of 
the Board of Regents for 1887, part i, pp. 605- 
681, Washington, 1889, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Numerals 1-10 of a number of Indian lan- 
guages of Washington Territory, among them 
the Chinook Jargon, p. 644.—Remarks on the 
same, p. 645.—Three words of the Chinook Jar- 
gon not found in Gibbs’s dictionary, p. 652.— 
Word for God in Twana, Nisqually, Klallam, 
and Chinook, p. 679. 

“The Chinook Jargon has been ably com- 
piled by Hon. G. Gibbs. I know of but three 
words in this locality of Indian origin which 
are not in his dictionary. Out of about 
800 words and phrases which answer for words 


CHINOOKAN 


Eells (M.)— Continued. 

given by him, only about 470 are used here’ 
which shows how the same language will vary 
in different localities.” 

This article was issued separately, also, 
without change. And again as follows: 
——The Twana, Chemakum, and Klallam 
Indians of Washington territory. By 
Rev. Myron Eells. 

In Smithsonian Institution, Mise. Papers 
relating to anthropology, from the Smithsonian 
report for 1886-’87, pp. 605-681, Washington, 
1889, 8°. (Eames, Pilling.) 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 


— Aboriginal geographic names in the 
state of Washington. By Myron Eells. 

In American Anthropologist, vol. 5, pp. 27- | 
35, Washington, 1892, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Arranged alphabetically and derivations | 
given. The languages represented are: Chin- 
ook, Chinook Jargon, Nez Percé, Chehalis, 
Clallam, Twana, Calispel, Cayuse. Puyallup, 
and Spokane. 


[Dictionary of the Chinook Jar- 
gon. ] ‘ah 
Under date of January 9, 1893, Mr. Eells 
writes me, concerning this work, as follows: 

‘Thave been at work for the last ten months, 
as I have had spare time, on a Chinook Jargon- 
English and English-Chinook Jargon Diction- 
ary, with introduction, remarks about the lan- 
guage,and grammar. Iam gathering all the 
words I ean find, whether obsolete or not, from 
about fifteen Chinook dictionaries which have 
been issued since 1838 with the various spell- | 
ings, marking, as far as I can, all those now in 
use; also introducing all which have been 
adopted into the language of late years from the 
English and all phrases which can be used as 
words. I have gonethrough with the English- 
Chinook part and have nearly three thousand 
words; have gone through with the Chinook- 
English part except S and 7 and have about 
two thousand; I hope to finish it this winter, 
though it is much more of a task than I sup- 
posed it would be when I began. I hardly 
expect it will ever be published, but will keep 
it in manuscript, having done it largely to pre- 
serve the language in its present transitional 
form, which is quite different from what it was 
thirty or forty years ago. 

“T hardly know whether it is worth while for 
you to mention this, as it is in such an untin- 
ished state; still I have even now put far more 
work on it than I have on all my other Chinook 
Jargon writings.” 


[Words, phrases and sentences in 
the Chinook Jargon. ] C) 
Manuscript in possession of its author. 
Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction to 
the study of Indian languages, second edition, 
pp. 77-103, 105, 109-111, 113-125, 127, 129, 132-188, | 
189-227. On p. 228 isa translation of John iii, 16. 


LANGUAGES. 27 


| Bells (M.) — Continued. 


[Sermons in the Chinook Jar- 
gon. ] (*) 

Manuscript, 26 pages, 8°, in possession of its 
author. 

“About 16 years ago,in 1875, when I was 
learning to talk the language, I wrote four ser 
mons in the Chinook Jargon which I still have. 
Since that time I have preached a great deal in 
the language, but do it so easily that I simply 
make a few headings in English and talk 
extempore. On looking over these sermons I 
find that were I to use them again I should 
need to revise them and to change many 
expressions so as to make them clearer.” 

Titles and notes of these three manuscripts 
furnished me by Mr. Eells. 


See Bulmer (T.S.) 


Rev. Myron Eells was born at Walker's 
Prairie, Washington Territory, October 7, 1823; 
he is the son of Rey. Cushing Eells, D. D., and 
Mrs. M. F. Eells, who went to Oregon in 1838 as 
missionaries to the Spokane Indians. He left 
Walker’s Prairie in 1848 on account of the 
Whitman massacre at Wallawalla and Cayuse 
war, and went to Salem, Oregon, where he began 
to go to school. In 1849 he removed to Forest 
Grove, Oregon; in 1851 to Hillsboro, Oregon, and 
in 1857 again to Forest Grove, at which places 
he continued his school life. In 1862 he removed 
to Wallawalla, spending the time in farming 
and the wood business until 1868, except the 
falls, winters, and springs of 1863-64, 1864-65, 
and 1865-66, when he was at Forest Grove in 
college, graduating from Pacific University in 
1866, in the second class which ever graduated 
from that institution. In 1868 he went -to 
Hartford, Conn., to study for the ministry, 
entering the Hartford Theological Seminary 
that year, graduating from it in 1871, and being 
ordained at Hartford, June 15,1871,as a Con- 
gregatioral minister. He went to Boisé City 
in October, 1871, under the American Home 
Missionary Society, organized the First Con- 
gregational church of that place in 1872, and 
was pastor of it until he left in 1874. Mr. Eells 
was also superintendent of its Sunday school 
from 1872 to 1874 and president of the Idaho 
Bible Society from 1872 to 1874. He went to 
Skokomish, Washington, inJ une, 1874, and has 
worked aS missionary of the American Mis- 
sionary Association ever since awong the Sko- 
komish or Twana, and Clallam Indians; pastor 
of Congregational church at Skokomish Reser- 
vation since 1876, and superintendent of Sun- 
day school at Skokomish since 1882. He 
organized a Congregational church among the 
Clallams in 1882,of which he has since been 
pastor, and another among the whites at Sea- 
beck in 1880, of which he was pastor until 1886. 
In 1887 he was chosen trustee of the Pacific 
University, Oregon; in 1885 was elected assist- 
ant secretary and in 1889 secretary of its board 
of trustees. He delivered the address before 
the Gamma Sigma society of that institution in 


28 


Eells (M.) — Continued. 


1876, before the alumni in 1890,and preached 
the baccalaureate sermon in 1886. In 1888 he 
was chosen trustee of Whitman College, Wash- 
ington, delivered the commencement address 
there in 1888, and received the degree of D.D. 
from that institution in 1890. In 1888 he was 
elected its financial secretary, and in 1891 was 
asked to become president of the institution, 
but declined both. 

He was elected an associate member of the 
Victoria Institute of London in 1881, and a 
corresponding member of the Anthropological 
Society at W ashington in 1885, to both of which 
societies he has furnished papers which have 
been published by them. He was also elected 
vice-president of the Whitman Historical 
Society at Wallawalla in 1889. From 1874 to 
1886 he was clerk of the Congregational Asso- 
ciation of Oregon and Washington. 

Mr. Fells at present (1893) holds the position 
of superintendent of the department of ethnol- 
ogy for the State of Washington at the World’s 
Columbian Exposition. 


Emmons (George Falconer). Replies to 
inquities respecting the Indian tribes 
of Oregon and California. By George 
Falconer Emmons, U.S.N. 

In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian Tribes, vol. 3, 
pp. 200-225, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°. 

Vocabulary of the Clatsop dialect (about 40 
words), pp. 223-224. 

‘‘Many words in this language, I presume, 
are cominon to the Chinook language, and per- 
haps to the Chickeelis and Kilamukes, who mix 
with and appear to understand each other.” 


Everette (Dr. Willis Eugene). Compar- 
ative literal translation of the ‘‘ Lord’s 
Prayer” in the T¢ituk or Chinook Jar- 
gon with English. ce) 

Manuscript; recorded ‘from personal 
knowledge of the language. Written at Chil- 
cat, Alaska, 1884. Corrected word by word by 
Sitka and Chileat Indians.” 


— Comparative literal translation of 
the Ten Commandments in the T¢inuk 
or Chinook Jargon with English. (*) 
Manuscript; recorded ‘from personal 
knowledge of the language. Written at Pyra- 
mid Harbor, Alaska, in May, 1884, and cor- 
rected word by word by repeating to Chilcat, 
Sitka, and British Columbia Indians until they 
were thoroughly satisfied with each word and 
its meaning, as well as a full understanding of 
each sentence.” 
—— A Dictionary of the Language of the 
“linkit” (Klingi’t) or Chileat Indians 
of Alaska, together with that of the 
T¢inuk, or Chinook Trade Jargon used 
on the North American Pacific Coast 
compared with English. @) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF 


THE 


Everette (W. E.) — Continued. 


Manuscript; 1,000 words, alphabetically 
arranged. Recorded ‘‘ from personal knowledge 
of the language, and corrected word by word 
by the Indian trader, Mr. Dickinson, and 
Chileat and Sitka Indians, during April, 1884, 
at Pyramid Harbor, Alaska.” 

Titles and notes concerning the above manu- 
scripts furnished by the author. 


— Hymn in the Chinook Jargon as 


sung by the Indians of Lake Chelan, 
Washington territory, U.S. A. 

Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°,in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

The hymn, which is written in black ink, is 

accompanied by an English interlinear trans- 
lation in red. 
The Lord’s Prayer | in | Chinook 
Jargon | asspoken by the Indian Tribes 
that live on the Pacifie coast of West- 
ern Oregon, U.S.A. 

Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

Tue prayer in Jar gon is written in black, 
with an English interlinear translation in red. 

The two last mentioned manuscripts were 
transmitted to the Bureau of Ethnology from 
the Yakama Indian Agency, August 15, 1883. 

From notes kindly furnished me by the sub- 
ject of this sketch, 1 have compiled the follow- 
ing: 

Dr. Willis Eugene Everette was born in 
Brooklyn, New York, in 1855. He was placed 
under the care of tutors at an early age, and 
when his parents died, at the close of the war, 
he began to plan for his own education and 
future life work. After eight years of study 
under private tutors and in various schools of 
learning, he resolved to attempt to investigate 
the origin of the aboriginal races of North 
America. He went direct into the field among 
the Indians of the western shores of Hudson 
Bay, where he wintered. Here he began study- 
ing the languages, manners, and customs of the 
Cree, Athabasca, and Chippewa. Thence he 
journeyed amongst the Saulteux, Blood, Piegan, 
and Blackfeet; the Sioux, Gros-Ventres, Man- 
dan, Assiniboine, and Crow; the Paiute and 
Klamath people; the Rogue River, Alzea, and 
Siletz Indians; the Umatilla and Nez Percé 
people; the Klikitat and Yakima tribes; the 
Indians of Puget Sound; thence up along the 
British Columbia’ coast to Chileat, Alaska, 
where the Tlinkit, Sheetkah, and other Alaskan 
races were found; thence across the main 
range of Alaska into the headwaters of the 
Yukon River, and down the Yukon throughout 
the interior of Alaska to the Arctic sea coast, 
among the Kutcha-Kutchin, Kvichpatshi, and 
Yukoniyut people, of the valley of the Yukon 
River and seacoast of Norton Sound; and, 
finally, down to the Aleutian Archipelago, 
among the Aleuts of Unalaska, thus com- 
pleting a chain of investigation from the 


CHINOOKAN 


Everette (W. E.)— Continued. 


northern extremities of the United States and 


LANGUAGES. 


29 


| Everette (W. E.) — Continued. 


along the Pacific coast to the northwestern | 
part of North America. From time to time he 


returned to civilization for the purpose of 


making studies in geology, medicine, chem- 


istry, law, and mineralogy. 

He is now writing up bis numerous explora- 
‘tions as fast as his mining and law practice 
will permit. 
scripts, personally collected, of the languages, 


F. 


Featherman (A.) Social history | of the 

| races of mankind. | First division: | 
Nigritians[-Third division: | Aoneo- 
Maranonians]. | By | A. Featherman. | 
[Two lines quotation. ] | 


| 


London :|Triibner & co., Ludgate Hill. | 


| 1885 [-1889]. | (All rights reserved. ) 

3 vols. 8°. 

A general discussion of a number of North 
American families of speech occurs in volume 


3, among them the Chinook, which oceupies pp. | 


369-378, and which includes a brief account of | 


their language on p. 373. 

Copies seen: Congress. 
Field (Thomas Warren). An _ essay | 
towards an | Indian bibliography. | 
Being a|catalogue of books, relating 
to the | history, antiquities, languages, 
customs, religion, | wars, literature, 
and origin of the | American Indians, 
| in the library of | Thomas W. Field. 
| With bibliographical and historical 


He has several hundred mann- | 


notes, and | synopses cf the contents of | 


some of | the works least known. | 

New York: | Scribner, Armstrong, 
and co. | 1873. 

Title verso names of printers 1 1. preface pp. 
jii-iv, text pp. 1-430, 8°. 

Vitles and descriptions of works in orrelating 
to the Chinookan languages passim. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. 

Atthe Field sale,no. 688, acopy brought$4.25; 
atthe Menzies sale. no. 718, a‘ half-crushed, red 
levant morocco, gilt top, uncut copy,”’ brought 
$5.50. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, 18 fr.; by Quar- 
itch, no. 11996, 15s.; at the Pinart sale, no. 368, 
it brought 17 fr.; at the Murphy sale, no. 949, 
$4.50. Priced by Quaritch, no. 30224, 10. 


— Catalogue | of the | library | belong- 
ing to | Mr. Thomas W. Field. | To be 
sold at auction, | by | Bangs, Merwin 
& co., | May 24th, 1875, | and following 
days. | 

New York. | 1875. 


Cover title 22 lines, title as above verso blank 
1 1, notice ete. pp. iii-viii, text pp. 1-376, list of 


Franchére (Gabriel). 


manners, customs, and traditions of the North 
American aborigines, and is in hopes that some 
day he will have leisure enough to reduce them 
into a set of about ten quarto volumes. 
Although mining geology and mining law is 
his profession, his actual life work has been the 
study of the anthropology of our North Ameri- 
can aborigines, and he devotes all his spare 
time to the latter. His present location is 
‘Tacoma, Washington. 


Field (T. W.) — Continued. 


prices pp. 377-393, supplement pp. 1-59, 8°. Com- 
piled by Mr. Joseph Sabin, mainly from Mr. 
Field's Essay, title of which is given above. 

Contains titles of a number of works in and 
relating to the Chinookan languages. 

Copies scen: Bureau of Ethnology, Con- 
gress, Hames. 

At the Squier sale, no, 1178,an uneut copy 
brought $1.25. 


Ford: This word following a title or inclosed 


within parentheses after a note indicates that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler, belonging to the library of Mr. 
Paul L. Ford, Brooklyn, N. Y. 


Relation | d’un | 
voyage | a la céte du | nord-ouest | de 
| VAmérique Septentrionale, | dans les 
années | 1810, 11, 12, 13, et 14. | Par G. 
Francheére, fils. | 

Montreal: | de limprimerie de C. B. 
Pasteur. | 1820. 

Half-title (Relation d’un voyage) verso blank 
1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 5-6, avant 
propos pp. 7-10, text pp, 11-284, 8°. 

Quelques mots (46) de la langue Chinonque 
ou Tchinouk, pp. 204-205.—Eleven phrases in 
the same, p. 205. 

Copies seen: Georgetown, Jacques Cartier 

School, Mallet. 
Narrative | of a | voyage | to | the 
northwest coast of America |in the 
years 1811, 1812, 1813, and 1814 | orthe | 
first American settlement on the Pacific 
| By Gabriel Franchere | Translated 
and edited by J. V. Huntington | 
[Vignette] | 

Redfield | 110 and 112 Nassau street, 
New York | 1854. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright and 
name of stereotyper 1 1. preface to the second 
edition pp. 3-7, preface [in English] to the 
French edition pp. 9-10, contents pp. 11-16, in- 
troduction pp. 17-22, text pp. 23-376, 16°. 

A brief reference to the Chinook language, 
p. 262. The vocabulary and phrases are omitted 
in this edition. 


30 


Franchére (G.) — Continued. 
Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Georgetown, Mallet, Pilling, Trumbull. 
Gabriel Franchére was born on November 3, 
1786,in Montreal, where his father had estab- 
lished himself as a merchant. His early life 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


| Pranchére (G.)— Continued. 


appears to have been spent at school and | 


behind his father’s counter. 
In the spring of 1810 Franchére sought 


employment in the Pacific Fur Company, and 
on May 24 he signed articles of engagement | 


with one of the company’s partners. 
agreement he bound himself to the service of 
the company, as a clerk, for five years. In July 
he left home, with a number of his young com- 
patriots, in canoes for New York. 

The Pacific Fur Company was equipping 
two expeditions for the Columbia country— 
one overland, from St. Lonis, and the other by 
sea, around Cape Horn, and Franchére was 
assigned to the party going by sea. September, 
1810, the ship Tonquin, Jonathan Thorn, lieu- 
tenant U.S. Navy, master, set sail for the Pacific 
coast. On April 12 the party were landed on 
the south side of the Columbia, ten miles from 
its mouth, and the company’s principal port, 
called Astoria, was founded. 

Franchére exhibited a wonderful talent for 
acquiring the Indian languages of the country, 
and otherwise made himself so useful that he 
was retained at headquarters most of the 
time, although he made a number of excursions 
up the Columbia, the Cowlitz, and the Willa- 
mette. 

After the disbandmentof the Pacific Fur Com- 
pany he entered temporarily into the service of 
the Northwest Company; but, although bril- 


G. 


Gairdner (Dr. —). 
raphy of the Columbia River. 
late Dr. Gairdner. 

In Royal Geog. Soc. Jour. vol. 11, pp. 250-257, 
London, 1841, 8°. (Congress.) 

Notes on the Indian tribes of the upper and 


Notes on the Geog- 
By the 


By this | 


lower Columbia, pp. 255-256, contains a list of | 
the peoples of that locality, with their habitat, | 


among them the divisions of the Chinook. 


Gallatin (Albert). A synopsis of the In- 


dian tribes within the United States | 
east of the Rocky Mountains and in | 


the British and Russian possessions in 
North America. By the Hon. Albert 
Gallatin. 


In American Antiquarian Soc. ‘Trans. 


(Archeologia Americana), vol. 2, pp. 1-422, Cam- | 


bridge, 1836, 8°. 
A vocabulary of 33 words, and the numerals 


1-12, 20, in Chinook (mouth of the Columbia). | 


p. 379. 


liant offers were made to him, as soon as oppor- 
tunity offered he determined to return to 
Montreal by the Canadian overland route up the 
Columbia, across the Rocky Mountains through 
the Athabasca Pass, down the Athabasca, 
across the marshes, down the Saskatchewan, 
across Lake Winnipeg, up Winnipeg and 
Rainy rivers, down the Kaministiqua, across 
Lakes Superior and Huron, up the French 
River, across the height of lands at Lake Nipis- 
sing, down the Mattawan, and finally down the 
Ottawa to the St. Lawrence, a distance of five 
thousand miles, traveled in canoes and on foot. 
He appeared under the paternal roof on the 
evening of September 1, 1814, greatly to the 
surprise of his family, who had received no 
intelligence of him since he had left New York, 
four years previously, and who mourned him 
as dead, since they imagined he had perished 
in the ill-fated Tonquin, off the coast of New 
Caledonia. 

Franchére removed to Sault Ste. Marie with 
his young family in 1834 and engaged in the 
fur trade. Later he became a partner in the 
noted commercial house of P. Choteau, Son & 
Co., of St. Louis, and later still he established 
himself in New York City as the senior partner 
in the firm of G. Franchére & Co. 

He died at the residencé of his son-in-law, 
Hon. John §. Prince, mayor of St. Paul, Minn., 
at the uge of seventy years, the last survivor 
of the celebrated Astor expeditions.—Mallet, in 
Catholic Annual, 1887, 


Frost (J. H.) See Lee (D.) and Frost 


(J, H.) 


Gallatin (A.) — Continued, 
—— Hale’s Indians of North-west Amer- 


ica,and vocabularies of North America; 
with an introduction. By Albert Gal- 
latin. 

In American Ethnological Soc. Trans. vol. 2, 
pp. xxiii-clxxxviii, 1-130, New York, 1848, 8°. 

General account of the Tsinuk, or Chinooks, 
pp. 15-17.— The Tshinuk family (pp. 56-58) 
includes pronunciation, p.56; personal pronouns 
of the Watlala, p. 56; possessive pronouns, 
p.57; partial conjugation of the verb to be cold, 
p.57; transitive inflections, p. 58; pluralization 
of nouns in the Waiwaikum, p. 58.—The ‘‘ Jar- 
gon’’ or trade language of Oregon (pp. 62-70) 
includes a general account of tie language, pp. 
62-64; Jargon words (41) derived from the 
English, p. 64; derived from the French (33), p. 
65; formed by onomatopeia (12), p. 65; alpha- 
betical English meaning of the words of the 
Jargon (165), p.66; grammatic treatise, pp.66-70. 

“All the words thus brought together and 
combined in this singularly constructed speech 


CHINOOKAN 


Gallatin (A.) — Continued. 

[Jargon] are about two hundred and fifty in 
number. Of these, 110,including the numer- 
als, are from the Tshinuk, 17 from the Nootkas, 
38 from either the one or the other, but doubt- 
ful from which; 33 from the French, and 41 
from the English. These two last are sub- 
joined, as well as the words formed by onoma- 
topeia; and an alphabetical English list of all 
the other words is added, which will show of 
what materials the scanty vocabulary consists.” 

Vocabulary of the lower Chinook (179 words), 
pp. 89-95.—Vocabulary of the Watlala (60 
words), p. 121. 

Table of generic Indian families of 
languages. 

In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian tribes, vol. 3, 
pp. 397-402, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°. 

Includes the Tshinook, p. 402. 

Albert Gallatin was born in Geneva, Switzer- 
land, January 29, 1761, and died in Astoria, L. I., 
August 12,1849. He was descended from an 
ancient patrician family of Geneva, whose name 
had long been honorably connected with the 
history of Switzerland. Young Albert had 
been baptized by the name of Abraham Alfonse 
Albert. In 1773 he was sent to a boarding 
school and a year later entered the University 
of Geneva, where he was graduated in 1779. He 
sailed from L’Orient late in May, 1780, and 
reached Boston on July 14. He entered Con- 
gress on December 7, 1795, and continued a 
member of that body until his appointment as 
Secretary of the Treasury in 1801, which oftice 
he held continously until 1813. His services 
were rewarded with the appointment of min- 
ister to France in February, 1815; he entered 
on the duties of this office in January, 1816. In 
1826, at the solicitation of President Adams, he 
accepted the appointment of envoy extraordi- 
nary to Great Britain. On his return to the 
United States he settled in New York City, 
where, from 1831 to 1839, he was president of the 
National Bank of New York. In 1842 he was 
associated in the establishment of the American 
Ethnological Society, becoming its first presi- 
dent, and in 1843 he was elected to hold a simi- 
lar oftice in the New York Historical Society, an 
honor which wasannuallyconferred on him until 
his death.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Gatschet: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. Albert S. Gatschet, 
Washington, D.C. 
Gatschet (Albert Samuel). Indian lan- 
guages of the Pacific states and terri- 
tories. 

In Magazine of American Hist. vol.1, pp. 
145-171, New York, 1877, sm. 4°. (Pilling.) 

Short account of the Chinook language and 
its dialects, p. 167.—Same of the Chinook Jar- 
gon, p. 168. 

Issued separately with half-title as follows: 


LANGUAGES. OL 


Gatschet (A.8.) — Continued. 

—— Indian languages | of the | Pacific 
states and territories | by | Albert 8. 
Gatschet | Reprinted from March [1877] 
Number of The Magazine of American 
History 


[New York: 1877.] 

Half-tifle verso blank 1 1. text pp. 145-171, 
sm. 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Astor, Eames, Pilling, Welles- 
ley. 

Reprinted in the following works : 

Beach (W.W.), Indian Miscellany, pp. 416- 
447, Albany, 1877, 8°. 

Drake (S. G.), Aboriginal races of North 
America, pp. 748-763, New York, 1882, 8°. 

A supplementary paper by the same author 
and with the same title, which appeared in the 
Magazine of American History, vol. 8, contains 
no Chinookan material. 


— Vocabulary of the Clackama lan- 
guage, 

Manuscript, 7 leaves, 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at the Grande 
Ronde Reserve, Yamhill Co., Oregon, in Decem- 
ber, 1877, from Frank Johnson, a Clackama 
Indian, and recorded on one of the Smithsonian 
forms (no. 170) of 211 words. About 150 words 
and phrases are given. 


Words, phrases, and sentences in 
the Clackama language. 

Manuscript; recorded in a copy of Intro- 
duction to the Study of Indian Languages, Ist 
edition. Material collected at Grande Ronde 
reservation, Yamhill County, Oregon, Decem- 
ber, 1877. 

Vocabulary of the Wasco and Wace- 
canéssisi dialects of the Chinuk family. 

Manuscript,7 pp.folio. Taken at the Kla- 
math Lake Agency, Oregon, in 1877. 

Albert Samuel Gatschet was born in St. Beat- 
enberg, in the Bernese Oberland, Switzerland, 
October 3, 1832. His propedeutic education was 
acquired in the lyceums of Neuchatel (1843- 
1845) and ot Berne (1846-1852), after which he 
followed courses in the universities of Berne 
and Berlin (1852-1858). His studies had for 
their object the ancient world in all its phases of 
religion, history, language. and art, and thereby 
his attention was at an early day directed to 
philologic researches. In 1865 he began the pub- 
lication of a series of brief monographs on the 
local etymology of his country, entitled ‘ Orts- 
etymologische Forschungen aus der Schweiz” 
(1865-’67). In 1867 he spent several months in 
London pursuing antiquarian studies in the 
British Museum, In 1868 hesettledin New York 
and became a contributor to various domestic 
and foreign periodicals, mainly on scientific 
subjects. Drifting into amore attentive study 
of the American Indians, he published several 
compositions upon their languages, the most 


32 


Gatschet (A. 8.)— Continued. 

important of which is ‘‘ Zwolf Sprachen aus 
dem Siidwesten Nordamerikas,’’ Weimar, 1876. 
This led to his being appointed to the position 
of ethnologist in the United States Geological 
Survey, under Maj. John W. Powell, in March, 
1877, when he removed to Washington, and first 
employed himself in arranging the linguistic 
manuscripts of the Smithsonian Institution, 
now the property of the Bureau of Ethnology, 
which forms a part of the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion. Mr. Gatschet has ever since been actively 
connected with that bureau. To increase its 
linguistic collections and to extend his own 


studies of the Indian languages, he has made | 


extensive trips of linguistic and ethnologic 
exploration among the Indians of North Amer- 
ica. After returning from a six months’ 


sojourn among the Klamaths and Kalapnyas | 


of Oregon, settled on both sides of the Cascade 
Range, he visited the Kataba in South Carolina 
and the Cha’hta and Shetimasha of Louisiana 
in 1881-82, the Kayowe, Comanche, Apache, 
Yattassee, Caddo, Naktche, Modoc, and other 
tribes in the Indian Territory, the Tonkawe 
and Lipans in Texas, and the Atakapa Indians 
of Louisiana in 1884-’85. In 1886 he saw the 
Tlaskaltecs at Saltillo, Mexico, a remnant of the 
Nahua race, brought there about 1575 from 
Anahuac, and was the first to discover the atiin- 
ity of the Biloxi language with the Siouan fam- 
ily. 
or Louica language of Louisiana, never before 


investigated and forming a linguistic family of | 


itself. Excursions to other partsof thecountry 
brought to his knowledge other Indian lan- 


guages: the Tuskarora, Canghnawagag@Penob- | 


scot, and Karankawa. 

Mr. Gatschet has compiled an extensive 
report embodying his researches among the 
Klamath Lake and Modoc Indians of Oregon, 
which forms Vol. II of Contributions to North 
American Ethnology. Among the tribes and 
languages discussed by him in separate publi- 
cations are the Timucua (Florida), Tonkawé 
(Texas), Yuma (California, Arizona, Mexico), 
Chuméto (California), Beothuk (Newfound- 
land), Creek, and Hitchiti (Alabama). His 
numerous papers are scattered through the 
publications of the various learned societies, 
the magazines, and government reports. 


General discussion: 


Chinook See Bancroft (H. H.) 
Chinook Beach (W. W.) 
Chinook Berghaus (H.) 
Chinook Brinton (D. G.) 
Chinook Duncan (D.) 
Chinook Eells (M.) 
Chinook Featherman (A.) 
Chinook Gallatin (A.) 
Chinook Gatschet (A. 58.) 
Chinook Hale (H.) 
Chinook Sproat (G. M.) 
Chinook Whymper (F.) 


Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 


Bancroft (H. H.) 
Beach (W. W.) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


General discussion — Continued. 


Chinook Jargon See Clough (J. C.) 


Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 


Drake (S. G.) 
Eells (M.) 


He also committed to writing the Tuniyka | 


Chinook Jargon Gatschet (A.S.) 
Chinook Jargon Haines (E. M.) : 
Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 
Chinook Jargon Nicoll (E. H.) 
Chinook Jargon Reade (J.) 
Chinook Jargon Sproat (G. M.)° 
Chinook Jargon Swan (J.G.) 
Chinook Jargon Western. 
Chinook Jargon Wilson (D.) 


Geographic names: 


Chinook See Gibbs (G.) 


Geological Survey: These words following a title 
or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of the United States 
Geological Survey, Washington, D.C. 


Georgetown: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Georgetown University, 
Washington, D.C. 


| Gibbs (Dr. George). Smithsonian miscel- 
laneous collections. | 161] A | dictionary 
| of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | trade 
language of Oregon. | Prepared for the 
Smithsonian institution. | By | George 
Gibbs. | [Seal of the institution. ] | 

Washington: | Smithsonian institu- 
tion: | March, 1863. 

Title verso advertisement 1 1. contents p. iii, 
preface pp. v-xi, bibliography pp. xiii—xiv, half- 
title (Part I. Chinook-English) verso note 1 1. 
text pp. 1-29, half-title (Part II. English- 
Chinook) p. 31, text pp. 33-44, 8°. 

General discussion of the language and its 
derivation, pp. v-viili.— Short comparative 
vocabulary (eighteen words and phrases) of 
English, Tlaoquatch and Nutka, and Colum- 
bian, p.ix.—Analogies between the Chinook 
and other languages (Haeltzuk, Belbella, Clat- 
sop, Nutka, Cowlitz, Kwantlen, Selish, Chi- 
halis, Nisqually, Yakama and Klikatat), p. x.— 
Bibliography of the Chinook Jargon (sixteen 
entries), pp. xiii-xiv.—Dictionary of the Chin- 
ook Jargon: Chinook-English, pp. 1-29; Eng- 
lish-Chinook, pp. 33-43.—The Lord's prayer in 
Jargon, with interlinear English translation, p. 
[44]. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, 
Eames, Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

‘‘Some years ago the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion printed a small vocabulary of the Chinook 
Jargon, furnished by Dr. B. R. Mitchell, of the 
U. S. Navy, and prepared, as I afterwards 
learned, by Mr. Lionnet, a Catholic priest, for 
his own use while studying the language at 
Chinook Point. It was submitted by the Insti- 
tution. for revision and preparation for the 
press, to the late Professor W. W. Turner. 


Dunbar, 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. oo 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 

Although it received the critical examination 
of that distinguished philologist, and was of 
use in directing attention to the language, it 
was deficient im the number of words in use, 
contained many which did not properly belong 
to the Jargon, and did not give the sourees 
from which the words were derived. 

“Mr. Hale had previously given a vocabulary 
and account of this Jargon in his ‘ Ethnography 
of the United States Exploring Expedition,’ 
which was noticed by Mr. Gallatin in the 
Transactions of the American Ethnological 
Society, vol. ii. He however fell into some 
errors in his derivation of the words, chiefly 
from ignoring the Chehalis element of the Jar- 
gon,and the number of words given by him 
amounted only to about two hundred and fifty. 

“A copy of Mr. Lionnet’s vocabulary having 
been sent to me with a request to make such 
corrections as itmight require, I concluded not 
merely to collate the words contained in this 
and other printed and manuscript vocabularies, 
but to ascertain, so far as possible, the lan- 
guages which had contributed to it, with the 
original Indian words. This had become the 
more important as its extended use by differ- 
ent tribes had led to ethnological errors in the 
classing together of essentially distinct fami- 
lies."—Preface. 

Issued also with title-page as follows: 


—— A | dictionary | of the | Chinook 
Jargon, | or, | trade language of 
Oregon. | By George Gibbs. | 

New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1863. 


Half-title (Shea’s Library of American Lin- 
guistics. XII.) verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 
11. preface pp. v-xi, bibliography of the @hinook 
Jargon pp. xiii-xiv, half-title of part I verso 
note 1 1. Chinook-English dictionary pp. 1-29, 
half-title of part II verso blank 1 1. English- 
Chinook dictionary pp. 33-43, the Lord’s prayer 
in Jargon p. [44], 8°. 

Oopies seen: Astor, Boston Athenzum, 
Congress, Dunbar, Harvard, Lenox, Smith- 
sonian, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

Some copies (twenty-five, I believe) were 
issued in large quarto form with no change of 
title-page. (Pilling, Smithsonian.) 

See Hale (H.) 

—— Alphabetical vocabulary | of the 

| Chinook language. | By | George 
Gibbs. | [Small design, with motto in 
Trish and Latin. ] | 

New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1863. 

Title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. ili-v, orthog- 
raphy p. vi, bibliography pp. vii-viii, text pp. 
9-23, 8°. 

Vocabulary (English-Chinook), pp. 9-20.— 
Local nomenclature, pp. 21-23. 

Oopies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Eames, Harvard, Lenox, 
Smithsonian, Trumbull, Wellesley, 


CHIN 3 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 


Some copies contain a loose half-title (Shea’s 
| library of American linguistics. | VIII.) 
inserted afterwards. (Lenox.) 

There was a small edition (twenty-five 
copies, I believe) issued in large quarto form, 
with title slightly changed, as follows: 


—— Alphabetical vocabulary | of the | 


Chinook language. | By | George 
Gibbs. | Published under the auspices 
of the Smithsonian institution. | 

New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1863. 


Title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. iii-v, 
orthography p. vi, bibliography pp. vii-viii, 
text pp. 9-23, 4°. 

Vocabulary alphabetically arranged by 
English words, double columns, pp. 9-20.— 
Local nomenclature, pp. 21-23. 

Copies seen: Eames, Lenox, Pilling, Smith- 
sonian. 


Bibliography of the Chinook Jargon. 
In Gibbs (G.), Dictionary of the Chinook 
Jargon, pp. xiii-xiv, Washington, 1863, 8°. 
Contains sixteen titular entries, chronolog- 
ically arranged. 
Reprinted in the same work: New York, 1863, 
8° and 4°, titled above. 


Bibliography [of the Chinook lan- 
guage]. 

In Gibbs (G.), Alphabetical vocabulzry of the 
Chinook language, pp. vii-viii, New York, 1863, 
8° and 4°. 

Contains six titular entries only. 


Chinook Jargon Vocabulary. Com- 
piled by Geo. Gibbs, Esq. 

Manuscript, 38 pages, 8°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded in a blank 
book; alphabetically arranged by Jargon words. 
Contains 481 entries. 


George Gibbs, the son of Col. George Gibbs, 
was born on the17th of July, 1815, at Sunswick, 
Long Island, near the village of Halletts Cove, 
now known as Astoria. At seventeen he was 
taken to Europe, where he remained two years. 
On his return from Europe he commenced the 
reading of law, and in 1838 took his degree of 
bachelor of law at Harvard University. In 1848 
Mr. Gibbs went overland from St. Louis to 
Oregon and established himself at Columbia. 
In 1854 he received the appointment of collector 
of the port of Astoria, which he held during 
Mr. Fillmore’s administration. Later he 
removed from Oregon to Washington Territory, 
and settled upon a ranch a few miles from Fort 
Steilacoom. Here he had his headquarters for 
several years, devoting himself to the study of 
the Indian languages and to the collection of 
vocabularies and traditions of the northwest- 
ern tribes. During a great part of the time 
he was attached to the United States Govern- 
ment Commission in laying the boundary, as 
the geologist or botanist of the expedition. He 


34 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 

was also attached as geologist to the survey of 
a railroad route to the Pacific, under Major 
Stevens. In 1857 he was appointed to the 
northwest boundary survey under Mr. Archi- 
bald Campbell, as commissioner. In 1860 Mr. 
Gibbs returned to New York, and in 1861 was 
on dutyin Washington in guarding the Capital. 
Later he resided in Washington, being mainly 
employed in the Hudson Bay Claims Commis- 
sion, to which he was secretary. He was also 
engaged in the arrangement of a large mass of 
manuscript bearing upon the ethnology and 
philology of the American Indians. His services 
were availed of by the Smithsonian Institution 
to superintend its labors in this field, and to his 
energy and complete knowledge of the subject 
it greatly owes its success in this branch of the 
service. The valuable and laborious service 
which he rendered to the Institution was 
entirely gratuitous, and in his death that estab- 
lishment as well as the cause of science lost an 
ardent friend and an important contributor to 
its advancement. In 1871 Mr. Gibbs married 
his cousin, Miss Mary K. Gibbs, of Newport, 
R.I., and removed to New Haven, where he 
died on the 9th of April, 1873. 

[Gill (John Kaye).] Dictionary | of the 
| Chinook Jargon | with examples of | 
Use in Conversation. | (Compiled from 
all vocabularies, and greatly improved 
| by the addition of necessary words 
| never before published.) | Ninth 

edition. | 

Portland, Oregon: | published by J. 
K. Gill & co. | 93 First Street. [1882.] 

Cover title: A complete | dictionary | of the 

| Chinook Jargon. | English-Chinook and 
Chinook-English. | Ninth edition. | Revised, 
Corrected and Enlarged. | 

Portland, Oregon. | J. K. Gill & co., publish- 
ers. | 1882. | Himes the printer. 

Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 
3-4, text pp. 5-62, 18°. 

English and Chinook, double columns, 
alphabetically arranged, pp. 5-33.—Numerals 
1-12, 20, 30, 100, 1000, p.33.—Chinook and Eng- 
lish, alphabetically arranged, pp. 34-57.Con- 
versations, pp. 58-60.—The Lord's prayer, with 
interlinear English translation, pp. 61-62. 

‘ Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

In the preparation of this dictionary Mr. 
Gill had, he informs me, the assistance of Rey. 
W. C. Chaltin. An eighth edition was pub- 
lished in 1878, in continuation of those issued 
by the firm of S.J. McCormick (see Blanchet 
(F. N.), whose stock was purchased by the firm 
of which Mr. Gill was a member. Of that 
edition I have been unable to locate a copy. 

“The first attempt at publication of the 
trappers’ and traders’ Indian Jargon in use 
among the coast and interior tribes of the 
Northwest was made in 1825, by a sailor [John 
R. Jewitt] who was captured from the ship 


[——] Dictionary | of 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 


Boston, which was surprised by the Indians at 
Nootka Sound, her captain and crew murdered, 
the sailor who issued his adventures under 
the title, ‘The Captive in Nootka’ and later 
the ‘ Traders’ Dictionary,’ being the only sur- 
vivor. 

‘* Several little books, mostly for traders’ use, 
have been printed in this Jargon. A worthy 
missionary [Rev. Myron Eells] published quite 
a number of hymns translated from English, in 
Chinook, which has been the only use of the 
language in the field of belles-lettres. 

“The language of the native Indians is sel- 
dom heard. The progressive English is forcing 
its way even into the lodges of the most savage 
tribes; and many of the original Indiandialects 
of the coast, of which Chinook was the most 
important, have disappeared entirely, with the 
nations that spoke them. 

“Of the ancient languages of the Chinooks, 
but two hundred words are given in the present 
dictionary, the remainder being words from 
other coast tribes, Yakimas, Wascos, Nez 
Percés, and other tongues.” — Preface. 

Mr. Gill's statement in regard to the “first 
attempt at publication of the trappers’ and 
traders’ Indian Jargon,” quoted above, needs a 
word of correction. Jewitt’s work, first issued 
under the title of ‘A journal kept at Nootka 
Sound,” Boston, 1807, contains no linguistic 
material. Later itwas published with thetitle 
‘A narrative of the adventures and sufferings 
of John R. Jewitt,’’ Middletown, Connecticut, 
1815, and went through a number of editions. 
This work does not contain a Jargon vocabu- 
lary at all, but one in the Nootka language 
(Wakashan family). The work entitled ‘‘ The 
Captive in Nootka” is not by Jewitt, but is a 
compilation from his work by 8. G. Goodrich 
(Peter Parley), and was first issued, so far as I 
know, Philadelphia, 1832. It contains a few 
Nootka words and phrases passim, but no 
vocabulary. Of the Traders’ Dictionary, by 
Jewitt, of which Mr. Gill speaks, I have been 
unable to trace a single copy. 


the | Chinook 
Jargon | with examples of | Its Use in 
Conversation. |Compiled from all exist- 
ing vocabularies, and greatly | im- 
proved by the addition of necessary | 
words never before published. | Tenth 
edition. | 

Portland, Oregon: | published by J. 
K. Gill & co. | 1884. 

Oover title: Gill's | complete dictionary | of 
the | Chinook Jargon. | English-Chinook and 
Chinook-English. | Tenth edition, | Revised, 
Corrected and Enlarged. | 

Portland, Oregon: | J. K. Gill & co., publish- 
ers. | 1884. 

Cover title, title verso name of printer 1 1. 
preface signed J. K. Gill & co. pp. 5-6, text pp. 
7-60, 18°. 


CHINOOKAN 


Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 

English-Chinook dictionary, double columns, 
alphabetically arranged, pp. 7-32.—Numerals, 
p. 82.—Chinook-English dictionary, alphabeti- 
cally arranged, pp. 33-54.—Conversations, En- 
glish-Chinook, pp. 55-58.—Lord’s prayer, with 
interlinear English translation, pp. 59-60. 

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, British 
Museum, Eames, Pilling. 


{[——] Dictionary | of the | Chinook Jar- 
gon | with examples of | Use in Con- 
versation. | (Compiled from all vocab- 
ularies, and greatly im-| proved by 
the addition of necessary words | never 
before published.) | Eleventh edition. | 

1887. | Portland, Oregon: | published 
by J.K.Gill & co., | Booksellers and 


Stationers. 

Cover title: Dictionary | of the| Chinook 
Jargon, | [Design] | English-Chinook and 
Chinook-English. | Eleventh edition. | Revised, 
Corrected and Enlarged. | 

Portland, Oregon; | J. K. Gill & co., publish- 
ers. | 1887. 

Cover title, title verso blank 11. explanatory 
suggestions verso blank 1 1. preface (unsigned 
and dated Jan. 1, 1887) pp. 5-6, text pp. 7-60, 18°. 

Linguistic contents as in tenth edition titled 
next above. 

Copies seen: Harvard. 


—— Gill’s | dictionary | of the | Chinook 
Jargon | with examples of | Use in 
Conversation. | (Compiled from all 
vocabularies, and greatly im- | proved 
by the addition of necessary words | 
never before published.) | Twefth edi- 
tion. | 

1889. | Portland, Oregon: | published 
by J.K.Gill & co., | Booksellers and 


Stationers. 

Cover title: Gill’s | dictionary | of the | 
Chinook Jargon, | [Picture of an Indian.] | 
English-Chinook and Chinook- English. | 
Twelfth edition. | Revised, Corrected and En- 
larged. | 

Portland, Oregon: | J. K. Gill & co., publish- 
ers. | 1889. | Swope & Taylor, printers. 

Cover title, title verso copyright (1889) 1 1. 
explanatory suggestions pp. 3-4, preface pp. 5-— 
6, text pp. 7-63, 18°. 

English-Chinook dictionary, double columns, 
alphabetically arranged, pp. 7-32.—Numerals, 
p. 32.Chinook-English vocabulary, alphabet- 
ically arranged, pp. 33-54.—Conversation, Eng- 
lish-Chinook, pp. 55-58.—Lord’s prayer in Jar- 
gon, with interlinear English translation, pp. 
59-60. — Appendix, English-Chinook, double 
columns, alphabetically arranged, pp. 61-63. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


— Gill’s | dictionary | of the | Chinook 
Jargon | with examples of | Use in Con- 


LANGUAGES. 35 


Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 


versation. | (Compiled from all vocab- 
ularies, and greatly im- | proved by the 
addition of necessary words | never 
before published.) | Thirteenth edi- 
tion. | 

Portland, Oregon: | Published by J. 
K. Gill & Co., | Booksellers and Sta- 
tioners. | 1891. 


Cover title: Gill’s dictionary | of the | 
Chinook Jargon. | [Picture of an Indian.] | 
English -Chinook and Chinook - English. | 
Thirteenth edition. | Revised, corrected and 
enlarged. | 

Portland, Oregon: | J. K. Gill & co., publish- 
ers. | 1891. | 8. C. Beach, printer. 

Cover title, title verso copyright (1891) 1 1. 
explanatory suggestions pp. 3-4, preface pp. 5- 
6, text pp. 7-63, 18°. 

English-Chinook, double columns, alphabet- 
ically arranged, pp. 7-32.— Numerals 1-12, 20, 
30, 100, 1000, p. 32.—Chinook-English, alphabet- 
ically arranged, pp. 33-54.—Conversation, pp. 
55-58.—The Lord’s prayer, with interlinear 
English translation, pp. 58-60.— Appendix, 
English-Chinook, pp. 61-63. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


In response to certain inquiries of mine, Mr. 
Gill writes me, under date of November 19, 1891, 
as follows: 

“In your favor of October 27th you request 
us to supply you with a copy of each edition of 
the Chinook Jargon which we have published, 
and also to state what we may be ableinregard 
tothe bibliography of the Chinookan languages. 

“So far as the Chinook Dictionary published 
by McCormick is concerned [see Blanchet (F. 
N.)], we doubt very much whether we could 
find, without advertising, a single copy of it at 
this time. We received from McCormick & 
Co. some dozens of them of different dates of 
publication, but uniform as to contents, when 
we bought the dictionary from them. Weeither 
disposed of or destroyed them years ago. It is 
now about twelve years since we began the 
publication of our Dictionary of Chinook. The 
dictator of this letter compiled our dictionary 
and added hundreds of necessary words to the 
vocabulary of the English-Chinook, which is 
yet quite insufficient as a dictionary for ordi- 
nary civilized people, but more than equal to 
the demands of the Indians and settlers for 
whom it was intended. It is, atleast, quite as 
extensive as need be, but not, perhaps, so well 
selected. I flatter myself that the dictionary 
we produced in 1878, which I believe was our 
earliest publication of it, was the first one 
based upon a right conception of the origin of 
many of the words comprising the Chinook 
vocabulary, and also’a phonetic basis which 
should produce the form of all Chinook words 
and the simplest style corresponding to our 
method of writing English. We have just 
issued a thirteenth edition of this dictionary, 


36 


Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 

which corresponds with the last two. We also 
send you a copy of the ninth edition, which I 
believe represents the previous eight editions 
and the succeeding ones up to the eleventh. 
The work was stereotyped when we got out our 
first edition, and the only change has been in 
the preface and appendix. I have learned 
much about the Chinook Jargon and other 
Indian tongues since the compilation of the 
first dictionary, and if it were to be rewritten 
to-day I should make some very slight changes 
in the book. I do not think the changes 
required would affect more than twelve of the 
root-words of the Chinook, but I should make 
some research into the literature of the early 
part of this century and pass some time among 
the Indians most proficient in the Chinook to 
find if possible the words used intertribally for 
‘coyote,’ ‘rock,’ ‘fir,’ ‘maple,’ ‘mountain,’ ‘hill,’ 
the names of different parts of the human 
body, its diseases, and many other subjects and 
things which must have been referred to by 
words in common use before the white people 
came to this region, but which the compilers 
of the early dictionaries seem to have entirely 
neglected. 

‘When I began the compilation of our own 
it was only because we had to have a new edi- 
tion of the dictionary. The head of our firm 
considered the old one was ‘plenty good 
enough,’ and for that reason my labors in 
increasing the vocabulary, both Chinook and 
English, were greatly curtailed. His view of 
the matter was a business one, however, and 
mine the impracticable side of it. Probably 
within the time we have been publishing this 
dictionary (thirteen years) the Indians who 
were restricted to the use of Chinook in con- 
versation with the settlers of the North Pacific 
coast have decreased more than one-half in 
number. <A great portion of these have died 
or been killed by our enterprising settlers (the 
probable reason for this killing being that the 
Indians lived upon lands our people wanted; 
an example which they have had before them 
since the settlement of Manhattan and which 
they have not been slow to follow). Chinook 
is becoming a jokeon the Pacific coast. White 
people learn it for the sake of attempting to talk 
with Indians, who speak just as good English 
as their would-be patrons and interlocutors. 
The sale for the books slowly decreases also. 

“You are probably aware that during the 
last year a valuable book upon the Chinook was 
issued in London, written by Horatio Hale, 
M.A., F. R.S. C. It is the most ambitious 
publication on this subject which has ever 
been attempted, and to me it is a marvel that 
this work should have seen the light in Lon- 
don, so remote from any apparent interest in, 
or knowledge of, the Chinook. If you have it 
you will find that Mr. Hale has followed nearly 
the same system of spelling as that [ adopted 
a dozen years ago. I judge that my dictionary 
was his model, to some extent, from the fact 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 


that he spells the word kloshe as I do; also 
klone, klook, ete., which in some of the other 
vocabularies have been spelled with a ‘ec’ 
instead of ‘k’ and with a final ‘se’ instead of 
‘she,’ and, in fact, three or four different ways 
of spelling for the same word. Mr. Hale uses 
kluh for the verb to tear, to rend, to plow, ete. 

‘‘Now, this word, as I hear it spoken among 
the Indians, ends gutturally, and for that rea- 
son I spelled it as I have heard it pronounced, 
klugh. Mr. Hale accents the last syllable of 
klahane and spells the last syllable nie, 
which would make his pronounciation of the 
word very different from mine. Mine, I know, 
is the common, in fact, universal expression. I 
am often moved to open a correspondence with 
Mr. Hale on the subject of his book because of 
hisiconoclasm. He attempts to prove too much, 
as I believe, and would make it appear that 
Chinook did not exist as anintertribal language 
prior to its necessity for the use of the trapper 
and the trader. Iam convinced of the contrary. 
Within the year I have talked with an Indian 
who was a man grown when Lewis and Clarke 
came to this country, and have his assurance 
that the Klikitat, Multnomah, Clatsop, Chinook, 
and other tribes all talked to each other in this 
ancient Volapiik upon matters of business or 
any other inter-tribal affairs, while each tribe 
had its own language. I have said something 
on this subject in the preface to our dictionary. 
Mr. Hale’s book has given me much pleasure in 
reading over his collectionof Chinook romantic 
songs and examples of the common use of the 
language. It is not strange if there should be 
a wide difference in the pronunciation and use 
of the language between San Francisco Bay 
and Sitka, between the mouth of the Columbia 
and the top of the Rocky Mountains. 

“Mr. Hale mentions one or two books or 
pamphlets which I have not seen, but shall 
take my first opportunity to procure, giving 
more space to the Chinook. 

‘*T inclose you several books which I think 
you will be glad to get. = 

“You will see that none of these different 
books attempt to give the accent, and leave the 
learner entirely at a loss as to the force of 
the words. For instance, the Chinook word 
for blanket, pasesee (spelled in two or three 
ways by the different publishers), is properly 
pronounced with the accent on the second syl- 
lable. You will see how very different the 
word becomes if you attempt to accent the first 
or last syllables. I can assure you that there 
are no differences in our publications of the 
Chinook dictionary excepting what I have 
referred to in the two examples sent you. The 
books from other sources which I send are the 
only editions which had appeared at the time 
I procured them and I think they have none of 
them been duplicated since.” 

In response to criticism made by mein regard 
to the above, more especially of that portion of 
it relating to Jewitt’s work (see under first 


CHINOOKAN 


’ 


Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 
Gill title above), Mx. Gill writes me, under date 
of October 6, 1892, as follows: 

“As to my argument that the Jargon was of 
an earlier date than 1820,I have to say that I 
went rapidly last evening through my copy of 
Jewitt’s ‘“‘Captive of Nootka’ (1861), and 
found scattered through the following words, 
which I am sure have a relation more than 
accidental to the present Chinook. 

“Jewitt uses the word pow for the firing of a 
gun. Hespeaks of an edible root called qua- 
noose and another, yama, the latter doubtless 
a form of kamas and the former probably of 
kouse, both of which roots are still eaten by 
many of our primitive Indians. Tyee is identical 
with the present word for the deity or any- 
thing great. Pelth-pelth is evidently pil-pil; 
peshak (bad) is also identical. Three other words 
used by Jewitt, kutsak, quahootze, and ahwelth, 
are all rather familiar to me in sound, and if I 
had time to hunt them up I believe I could 
connect two of them with Chinook readily. 

“Now, I do not claim that the Chinook Jar- 
gon originated at the mouth of the Columbia 
River, where the Chinook Indians lived, but 
that it was an intertribal language of quite 
ancient date, and used at first by the coast 
tribes, whose intercourse was much more fre- 
quent than those of the interior. Itspread by 
the Columbia River and through waterways, at 
last reaching the Rocky Mountains, and cov- 
ered the coast from San Francisco Bay to the 
Arctic. As the trading was done largely at 
Nootka Sound a century ago, that language 
would naturally be largely represented in such 
a jargon, but the fact that the oldest white 
people who have made any records of this 
Oregon region have used tyee as a name for God, 
chuck for water, kloshe for good, ete., and that 
the same things are found in the Nootka and 
other northern tongues, other than the original 
Jargon, seems to me only to prove my position. 
Jewitt encountered these words as long ago as 
1803, which certainly gives me reason for my 
theory that the Chinook is of an earlier date 
than opponents concede. The whole of Jewitt’s 
narrative is so palpably that of a simple, old- 
time sailor spinning his yarn, which bears 
internal evidence of its truth, and which agrees 
with established facts and circumstances on 
this northwest coast, that it leaves us no doubt 
as to the existence of most of the things he 
speaks of, though he was not a man of suffi- 
cient observation and experience to make the 
best use of his opportunities. When he wrote 
yama for kamass it may have been days or 
months from the time of hearing it, and wrote 
hisremembrance, perhaps, of a word whichmay 
have been pronounced differently when he 
actually heard it. Authors who have edited 
Jewitt’s work have taken some liberties with his 
text, and improved, according to their notions, 
upon it. Like that Scotch pastor who, hearing 
Shakespeare’s ‘Sermons in stones, books in the 
Tunning brooks,’ and being convinced tbat the 


LANGUAGES. | 37 


Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 


printer had done the poet injustice, said: ‘Ay, 
he meant sermons in books, stones in the run- 
ning brooks,’ so many a simple story is made 
to serve the purpose of pedagogism and quite 
loses its intended character. 

““The Nootka Indians in 1803, when Jewitt 
was among them, were in the habit of using the 
words which I have quoted above among them- 
selves. There were no whites in the country 
excepting Jewitt and his companions, and the 
inference is that the Indians used only the lan- 
guage which was familiar to them, and not in 
any sense to accommodate their expression to 
Jewitt’s comprehension. In speaking with 
strangers of other tribes, however, they would 
probably do what Americans who converse 
with Germans sometimes do, that is, interpolate 
German words (if they know any) in their 
English conversation, with the idea that they 
exhibit their own knowledge, or that they set 
their auditor at ease. As Jewitt was of a dif- 
ferent race, the use of the words above may 
have been impressed upon him rather than the 
words which may have been in use for the 
same things in the native tongue of the Nootkas. 
But if the words are Nootka, as you insist, and 
Iam willing to admit they may be, there is no 
doubt about their having been transplanted to 
the mouth of the Columbia and having spread 
into the interior of the Pacific Slope—a trans- 
planting which may have been from either 
source, as you can readily see. Andas the earliest 
whites on the Columbia heard the same words 
in use by Indians who spoke languages which 
were Greek to the Indians on Puget Sound and 
Vancouver Island, the fact is all the more cer- 
tainly established that many words were com. 
mon among a number of tribes who had their 
own native words also for the same things. As 
Jewitt gives but a dozen or less Indian words 
altogether in the edition of his book which I 
have, and at least six of them are congeners of 
the Chinook, I am inclined to think thatif he 
had used sixty words of the people among whom 
he lived, he might have shown us the same 
proportion of Chinook words, and it is but fair 
to consider that he would not have chosen only 
words which were of this common Jargon.” 

Mr. Gill’s comments were forwarded by me 
to Mr. Horatio Hale, the author of the ‘‘ Manual 
of the Oregon trade language or Chinook Jar- 
gon”’ referred to by Mr. Gill, who comments as 
follows: 

“In preparing my account of the Chinook 
Jargon for the enterprising London publishers, 
Messrs. Whittaker & Co., I had not the advan- 
tage of being able to refer to Mr. Gill’s dic- 
tionary, which I have never seen. From his 
account of it, I have no doubt that it would 
have been of material service in my task. His 
care in marking the accented syllables is a 
scholarly precaution which compilers of such 
vocabularies are too apt to neglect. 

‘““My materials were derived mainly from 
my own collections, made in Oregon in 1841, 


38 


Gill (J. K.) — Continued. 
and published in 1846 in my volume of the U. 
S. Exploring Expedition series. These were 
supplemented by later information obtained 
from the excellent dictionary of George Gibbs 
and from the letters and publications of Mr. 
Fells and Dr. Boas. I should have preferred to 
retain the ‘scientific orthography’ (consonants 
as in English, vowels as in Italian) which was 
adopted in my former work; but as the Jargon 
has now become, through its use by the mis- 


sionaries and others, a written language with } 


the English orthography, it seemed proper to 
adopt that spelling, merely adding the scien- 
tific forms in parentheses as a guide to the pro- 
nunciation. 

“The word meaning out, which Mr. Gill 
spells klahane (dividing it in his dictionary, I 
presume, to show that it is a trisyllable) is 
written by Mr. Eells in his sermon printed in 
my Jargon volume (p. 32) klahanie (klahanie 
kopa town, out of town), and by Mr. Gibbs, klah- 
hanie, or klagh-anie, with the accent affixed to 
the last syllable. The Jargon has several tri- 
syllables of this sort, such as saghalie or sah- 
halie, above, keekwilee, below, illahie, earth, 
which are variously written, and are accented 
indifferently on the first or on the last syllable. 

“In Mr. Gill’s suggestion that ‘Chinook 
existed as an intertribal language prior to the 
necessity of the use of the trapper and trader,’ 
he evidently confounds, as many do, the proper 
Chinook language with the Jargon, or artificial 
trade language. The Indians of Oregon terri- 
tory were quick in learning languages, and 
some of them could speak five or six native 
idioms. The genuine Chinook, being spoken 
by a tribe holding a central position along the 
Columbia River, and much given to trade, would 
naturally be known to many natives of other 
tribes, and would be frequently spoken in inter- 
tribal intercourse, like the Chippewa among 
the eastern Indians and the Malay in the East 
Indian Archipelago. This was doubtless what 
was meant by Mr. Gill’s aged native informant 
in referring to the Chinook as the common 
medium of intercourse before the white traders 
visited the country. That he could have 
referred to the Jargon is simply impossible, as 
the internal evidence of its structnre suffi- 
ciently shows. 

‘‘ Both philology and ethnography are much 
indebted to the thoughtful labors of intelligent 
inquirers like Mr. Gillin preserving these inter- 
esting relics of vanishing idioms and aboriginal 
customs. I ought, perhaps, to add that though 
the use of the Jargon is dying out, for the rea- 
son which Mr. Gill so pithily gives, in the 
country of its origin—the Pacific coast region 
south of Puget Sound—it is extending in 
British Columbia and Alaska, and seems 
likely to do good service there for many years 
to come.” 


Gill’s complete dictionary of the Chinook 
Jargon, See Gill (J, K.) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Gill’s dictionary of the Chinook Jargoii. 
(1889-1891.) See Gill (J. K.) 
Good (fev. John Booth). A vocabulary 
| and | outlines of grammar | of the | 
Nitlakapamuk | or | Thompson tongue, 
| (The Indian language spoken 
between Yale, Lillooet, | Cache Creek 
and Nicola Lake.) | Together with a 
| Phonetic Chinook Dictionary, | 
Adapted for use in the Province of | 
British Columbia. | By J. B. Good, §. 
P.G. missionary, Yale-Lytton. | By aid 
of a Grant from the Right Hon. Superin- 
tendent of Indian | Affairs,Ottawa. | 
Victoria: | Printed by the St. Paul’s 
Mission Press, (8. P. C. K.) | Collegiate 
School, 1880. 


Cover title differing from the above in one 
line of the imprint only (‘‘ Victoria, B.C.:’’), 
title as above verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 5-6, 
text pp. 8-46, 8°. : 

Chinook [Jargon] dictionary. English-Chin- 
ook, alphabetically arranged, in double col- 
umns, containing about 750 words and the 
numerals 1-11, 20, 30, 100, 1000, occupies the even 
numbered pages 8-30, the Thompson vocabu- 
lary occurring on the alternate, odd-numbered 
pages.— Conversations, English-Chinook, pp. 
32, 34.—The Lord's prayer in Jargon, with inter- 
linear translation in English, p. 34. 


Copies seen: Bancroft, Dunbar, Eames, 
Mallet, Pilling, Wellesley. 
Grammar: 
Chinook See Boas (F.) 
Grammatic comments: 
Chinook See Gallatin (A.) 
Chinook Hale (H.) 
Chinook Jargon Crane (A.) 
Chinook Jargon Eells (M.) 
Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 
Watilala Bancroft (H. H.) 
Grammatic treatise: 
Chinook See Boas (F.) 
Chinook Miller (F.) 
Chinook Jargon Bulmer (T.5.) 
Chinook Jargon Demers (M.) et al. 
Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 


Grasserie (Raoul de la). Etudes | de | 
grammaire comparée | Des relations 
grammaticales | considérées dans leur 
concept et dans leur expression | ou de 
la | catégorie des cas | par | Raoul de 
la Grasserie | docteur en droit | Juge 
au Tribunal de Rennes | Membre de la 
Société de Linguistique de Paris, | 

Paris | Jean Maisonneuve, éditeur | 
25, quai Voltaire, | 25 | 1890 


Printed coveras above, half-title verso blank 
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-344, contents pp. 345- 
351, 8°, 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 39 


Grasserie (R.) — Continued. 

Examples from several North American lan- 
guages are made use of by the author: Nahuatl, 
Dakota, Othomi, Maya, Quiché, Totonaque, 
Iroquois, Athapaske, Chiapanéque, Sahaptin, 
Tcherokess, Algonquin, Tarasque, Esquimau, 
Tehinuk, Choctaw, pp. 17, 68, 69, 70, 71, 72, 73, 74, 
84, 129-132, 133, 177, 325-326, 394, 395. 

Copies seen: Gatschet: 


Greely: This word following a title ot within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Gen. A. W. Greely, 
Washington, D.C. 


Green (J.S.) Extracts from the report 
of an exploring tour on the northwest 
coast of North America in 1829, by Rev. 
J.S. Green. 

Inthe Missionary Herald, vol. 26, pp. 343-345, 
Boston [1830], 8°. (Pilling.) 

“Their language,’ p. 344, includes four 
phrases in the language of Queen Charlotte 
Island compared with the same in the Jargon 


of the tribes. 


H- 


Haines (Elijah Middlebrook). The | 
American Indian | (Uh-nish-in-na-ba). 

| The Whole Subject Complete in One | 
Volume | Illustrated with Numerous 
Appropriate Engravings. | By Elijah 
M. Haines. | [Design.] | 

Chicago: | the Mas-sin-nd-gan com- 
pany, | 1888. 

Title verso copyright notice (1888) etc. 1 1. 
preface pp. vii-viii, contents and list of illus- 
trations pp. 9-22, text pp. 23-821, large 8°. 

Chapter vi, Indian tribes, pp. 121-171, gives 
special lists and a general alphabetic list of the 
tribes of North America, derivations of tribal 
names being frequently given; among them 
the Chinook, pp. 131-132.—Chapter ix. Indian 
languages (pp. 184-212) contains much lin- 
guistic material relating to the North Ameri- 
can péoples; amongst it ‘‘the Chinook Jargon,” 
which includes a general discussion of the lan- 
guage, p. 211, and a vocabulary of 90 words, 
alphabetically arranged by English words, pp. 
211-212.—Chapter xxxvi. Numerals and the use 
of numbers (pp. 433-451) includes the numer- 
als 1-12, 20, 100 (from Schooleraft), p. 445.— 
Chapter lv. Vocabularies (668-703) includes a 
‘Vocabulary comparing pronouns and other 
-parts of speech (J, thou, he, yes,no) in the dia- 
jlects of various Indian tribes, among them the 
«Chinook, p. 676. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. 
‘Haldeman (Samuel Stehman). Analytic 
orthegraphy :|an | investigation of the 
sounds.ef the voice, | and their | alpha- 
‘betic notation; | including | the mech- 
sanismof speech, | and its bearing upon 


Guide-Book to the Gold Regions of 


Frazer River. With a map of the dif- 
ferent routes, &c. 

New York, 1858. (*) 

55 pp. 24°: 

A vocabulary of the Jatgon, pp. 45-55. 

Title and note from Gibbs’s Dictionary of 
the Chinook Jargon. 


Guide | to the province of | British Co- 


lumbia, | for | 1877-8. | Compiled from 
the latest and most authentic sources | 
of information. | 

Victoria: | T.N. Hibben & co., pub- 
lishers. | 1877. 

Title verso copyright notice (1877) and name 
of printer 1 1. preface verso blank 1 1. contents 
pp. v-xii, text pp. 1-374, advertisements pp. 
375-410, 8°. 

Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. Indian 
trade language of the Pacific coast. Part I. 
Chinook-English, pp. 232-239.—Part II. Eng- 
lish-Chinook, pp. 240-249. Each alphabetically 
arranged. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames, Pilling. 


Haldeman (S. 8.) — Continued. 


| etymology. | By | S.S. Haldeman, A. 
M., | professor in Delaware college; | 
member [&c. six lines. ] | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & co. 

| London: Triibner & co. Paris: Ben- 
jamin Duprat. | Berlin: Ferd. Diimm- 
ler. | 1860. 

Half-title (Trevelyan prize essay) verso blank 
11. title verso blank11. preface pp.v—vi,contents 
pp. vii-viii, slip of additional corrections, text 
pp. 5-147, corrections and additions p. 148, 4°. 

Numerals 1-10in a number of American lan- 
guages, among them the Chinook, ‘‘ dictated 
by Dr. J. K. Townsend,”’ p. 146. 


Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, British Mu- 
seum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Trumbull. 

First printed in American Philosoph. Soc. 
Trans. new series, vol.11. (*) 


Samuel Stehman Haldeman, naturalist, was 
born in Locust Grove, Lancaster County, Pa., 
August 12,1812; died in Chickies, Pa., Septem- 
ber 10,1880. He was educated at a classical 
school in Harrisburg and then spent two years 
in Dickinson College. In 1836 Henry D. 
Rogers, having been appointed State geologist 
of New Jersey, sent for Mr. Haldeman, who 
had been his pupil at Dickinson, to assist him. 
A year later, on the reorganization of the 
Pennsylvania geological survey, Haldeman 
was transferred to his own State, and was 
actively engaged on the survey until 1842. He 
made extensive researches among Indian dia- 
lects and also in Pennsylvania Dutch, besidesin- 
vestigations in the English, Chinese, and other 
languages.—Appleton’s Qyclop. of Am. Biog. 


— United 


40 


Hale (Horatio). United States | explor- 
ing expedition. | During the years | 
1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842, | Under the 
command of | Charles Wilkes, U.S.N. 
| Vol. VI. | Ethnography and philol- 
ogy. | By | Horatio Hale, | philologist 
of the expedition. | 

Philadelphia; | printed by C. Sher- 
man. | 1846. 


Half-title (United States exploring expedi- 
tion, by authority of Congress) verso blank 1 1. 
title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-vii, alphabet 
pp. ix-xii, half-title verso blank 1 J. text pp. 3- 
666, map, 4°. 

Languages of northwestern America (pp. 
553-650) contains general remarks and exam- 
ples of the languages of the peoples of that 
region, including the Tshinuk family, pp. 562- 
564.—Remarks on the vocabularies, pp. 567— 
568. — Vocabulary (600 words) of the Tshinuk 
(Watlala or Cascade Indians, Nihaloitih or 
Echeloots, Tshinuk, Tlatsop or Clatsops, 
Wakaikam or Wahkyecums), pp. 570-629.—The 
“Jargon”’ or trade language of Oregon (pp. 
635-650) contains remarks on its origin, pp. 635- 
636.—Lists of 17 words derived from the 
Nootka, 41 words from the English, 100 words 
from the Tshinuk, 33 words from the French, 
12 words by onomatopeia, and 38 doubtful, pp. 
636-639.—Remarks on the phonology, grammar, 
etc. (including the numerals 1-10, 100, and the 
pronouns), pp. 640-644.—Short sentences with 
English equivalents, pp. 644-646.— Vocabulary 
(English-Chinook, about 325 words), pp. 646-650. 

For a reprint of much of this material see 
Gallatin (A.) 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Lenox, Trumbull. 

At the Squier sale, no. 446, a copy brought 
$13; at the Murphy sale, no. 1123, half maroon 
morocco, top edge gilt, $13. 

Issued also with the following title: 


States | exploring expedi- 
tion. | During the years | 1838, 1839, 


1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the command | 
of | Charles Wilkes, U.S. N. | Ethnog- | 
raphy and philology. | By | Horatio | 


Hale, | philologist of the expedition. | 


Philadelphia; | Lea and Blanchard. | 


| 1846. 


Half-title (United States exploring expedi- | 
tion) verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. con- | 
tents pp. v—-vii, alphabet pp. ix-xii, half-title | 


verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-666, map, 4°. 
Linguistic contents as under title next above. 
Copies seen: Eames, Lenox. 


— Was America peopled from Poly- | 


nesia? 

In Congrés Int. des Américanistes, Compte- 
rendu, 7th session, pp. 375-387, Berlin, 1890, 8°. 
(Eames, Pilling.) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Hale (H.)— Continued. 


Table of the pronouns J, thou, we (inc.), we 
(exc.), ye, and they in the languages of Polynesia 
and of western America, pp. 386-387, includes 
the Tshinuk, p. 386, line 21. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows: 


Was America peopled from Polyne- 
sia? | A study in comparative Philol- 
ogy. | By | Horatio Hale. | From the 
Proceedings of the International Con- 
gress of Americanists | at Berlin, in 
October 1888. | 

Berlin 1890, | Printed by H.S. Her- 
mann, 


Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-15, 8°. 

Pronouns in the languages of Polynesia and 
of western America, including the Tshinuk, p. 
14. 

Copies seen: Pilling, Wellesley. 


An international idiom. | A manual 
of the | Oregon trade language, | or | 
“‘Chinook Jargon.” | By Horatio Hale, 
M.A., F. R. 8.C., | member [&c. six 
lines. ] | 

London: | Whittaker & co., White 
Hart Street, | Paternoster square. | 
1890. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names 
of printers 1 1. prefatory note verso extract 
from a work by Quatrefages 1 1. contents verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 1-63, 16°. 

The Oregon trade language, pp. 1-3.—Its 
origin and composition, pp. 3-9,—Orthography 
and pronunciation (pp. 9-12) includes threeshort 
comparative vocabularies—Chinook, Chinook 
Jargon, and meaning; English, Jargon, and 
meaning; French, Jargon, and meaning, pp. 9- 
11.—Grammar, including numerals and a list 
of pronouns, pp. 12-19.—T he past and future of 
the Jargon, pp. 19-21.—The language as spoken 
(pp. 22-38) includes a list of sentences and 
phrases, pp. 22-23; songs (from Swan and Boas) 
with English translations, pp. 24-25; hymns 
(from Eells), with English translation, pp. 26-27 ; 
sermon (from Eells’s manuscript), in English, 
pp. 28-31; the same in Jargon, with interlinear 
English translation, pp. 32-37; the Lord’s 
prayer (from Eells) in Jargon, with interlinear 
translation into English, pp. 87-38.—Trade lan- 
guage, alphabetically arranged, in double col- 
umns, by Jargon words, pp. 39-52.—English 
and trade lan guage, alphabetically arranged, in 
double columns, by English words, pp. 53-63. 

‘“‘This dictionary, it should be stated, is, in 
the main, a copy (with some additions and cor- 
rections) of that of George Gibbs [q.v.], pub- 
lished by the Smithsonian Institution in 1863, 
and now regarded asthe standard authority, so 
far as any can be said to exist; butit may be 
added that the principal part of that collection 
was avowedly derived by the estimable com- 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. Al 


Hale (H.) — Continued. 
piler from my own vocabulary, published seven- 
teen years before.” 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

For critical reviews of this work, see Cha- 
rencey (H. de), Crane (A.), Leland (C. G.), 
Reade (J.), and Western. 

Horatio Hale, ethnologist, born in Newport, 
N. H., May3, 1817, was graduated at Harvard in 
1837 and was appointed in the same year philolo- 
gist to the United States exploring expedition 
under Capt. Charles Wilkes. In this capacity 
he studied a iarge number of the languages of 
the Pacific islands, as well as of North and 
South America, Australia, and Africa, and also 
investigated the history, traditions, and cus- 
toms of the tribes speaking those languages. 
The results of his inquiries are given in his 
Ethnography and Philology (Philadelphia, 
1846), which forms the seventh volume of the 
expedition reports. He has published numerous 
memoirs on anthropology and ethnology, is a 
member of many learned societies, both in 
Europe and in America, and in 1886 was vice- 
president of the American Association for the 
Advancement of Science, presiding over the 
section of anthropology.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of 
Am. Biog. 


Harvard: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Harvard University, 
Cambridge, Mass. 
[Hayden (Ferdinand Vandever)], in 
charge. Department of the interior. | 
Bulletin | of | the United States | Geo- 
logical and geographical survey | of | 
the territories. | No. 1[-Vol. VI}. | 

Washington: | Government printing 
office. | 1874[-1881}. 

6 vols. 8°. 

Eells (M.), The Twana Indians, vol. 3, pp. 57- 


114. 
Copies seen: Geological Survey. 


Hazlitt (William Carew). British 
Columbia, | and | Vancouver island; | 

comprising | a historical sketch of the 
British settlements | in the north-west 
coast of America; | And a Survey of 
the | physical character, capabilities, 
climate, topography, | natural history, 
geology and ethnology | of that region ; 
| Compiled from Official and other 


Hazlitt (W. C.) — Continued. 
Authentic Sources. | By | William 
Carew Hazlitt, | author of [&c. two 
lines.] | With a map. | 

London: | G. Routledge & co., Far- 
ringdon street. | New York: | 18 Beek- 
man street. | 1858. | (The author 
reserves the right of Translation. ) 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names 
of printers 1 1. preface pp. v—vi, contents pp. 
vii-viii, text pp. 1-240, appendix pp. 241-247, 
colophon p. 248, 16°. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon (365 
words and phrases, and the numerals 1-12, 100, 
1000) from the San Francisco Bulletin, June 4 
[1858], pp. 241-243. See Chinook. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Harvard. 

—— The | great gold fields of | Cariboo; 
| with an authentic description, 
brought down | to the latest period, | 
of | British Columbia | and | Vancouver 
island. | By William Curew Hazlitt, | 
of the Inner temple, barrister-at-law. | 
With an accurate map. | 

London: | Routledge, Warne, and 
Routledge, | Farringdon street. | New 
York: 56, Walker street. | 1862. 

Title verso names of printers 11. preface pp. 
iii_v, contents pp. vii-vili, text pp. 1-165, appen- 
dices pp. 166-184, 16°. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon as noted 
under title next above, pp. 179-180. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
neum. 

This author’s Cariboo, the newly discovered 
gold fields of British Columbia, London, 1862, 
does not contain the vocabulary. 


Hymn-book: 
Chinook Jargon See Eells (M.) 
Chinook Jargon Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Hymns: 
Cascade See Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) 
Chinook Blanchet (F. N.) 
Chinook Tate (C. M.) 


Chinook Jargon Bulmer (T.5.) 
Chinook Jargon Demers (M.) et al. 
Chinook Jargon Everette (W. E.) 
Chinovk Jargon Eells (M.) 
Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 
Chinook Jargon Macleod (X. D.) 
Chinook Jargon St. Onge (L. N.) 


42 


J. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Jacques Cartier School: These words following a | Jéhan (L. F.) — Continued. 


title or inclosed within parentheses after a note 
indicate that a copy of the work referred to 
has been seen by the compiler in the library of 
that institution, Montreal. 


Jéhan (Louis-Francois). Troisitme et 
derniére | Encyclopédie théologique, | 
[&c. twenty-four lines] | publiée | par 
M. Vabbé Migne | [&c. six lines.] | 
Tome trente-quatriéme. | Dictionnaire 
de linguistique, | Tome unique, | Prix: 
7 francs. | 


S’Imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, 
éditeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue 
d’Amboise, au Petit-Montrouge, | Bar- 
riére d’enfer de Paris. | 1858. 


Second title: Dictionnaire | de | linguistique 
| et | de philologie comparée. | Histoire de 
toutes les langues mortes et vivantes, | ou | 
traité complet d’idiomographie, | embrassant | 
l’examen critique des systémes et de toutes les 
questions qui se rattachent | 4 Vorigine et dla 
filiation des langues, A leur essence organique 
| et A leurs rapports avec l'histoire des races 

humaines, de leurs migrations, etc. | Précédé 
d’un | Essai sur le réle du langage dans 1’évo- 
lution de l'intelligence humaine. | Par L.-F. 
Jéhan (de Saint-Clavien), | Membre de la Soci- 
été géologique de France, de |’ Académie royale 
des sciences de Turin, etc. | [Quotation, three 
lines.] | Publié | parM.1’ Abbé Migne, | éditeur 
de la Bibliothéque universelle du clergé, | ou | 
des cours complets sur chaque branche de la 
science ecclésiastique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 
‘7 francs. | 

S'Imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, édi- 
teur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue d’ Amboise, 
‘au Petit-Montrouge, | Barriére d’enfer de 
Paris. | 1858. 

Outside title 1 1. titles as above 2 11. columns 
‘(two to a page) 9-1448, large 8°. 

See under title next below for linguistic con 
tents. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 


-—— Troisiéme et derniere | Encyclopédie | 


| théologique, | ou troisiéme et der- 
niere | serie de dictionnaires sur toutes 
les parties de la science religieuse, | 
‘offrant:en francais, et par ordre alpha- 
‘bétique,!|Ila plus claire, la plus facile, 
‘la;plus:eommode, la plus variée | et la 
iplus ceomplete des théologies: | [&e. 


seventeen lines] | publiee | parM./’abbé 
Migne, | [&c. six lines.] | Tome trente- 
quatriéme. | Dictionnaire de linguis- 
tique. | Tomeunique. | Prix: 8francs. | 
S’imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, 
éditeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue 
d’Amboise, 20, au Petit-Montrouge, | 
autrefois Barriére d’enfer de Paris, 
maintenant dans Paris. | 1864 


Second title: Dictionnaire | de | linguistique 
Jet | de philologie comparée. | Histoire de 
toutes | les langues mortes et vivantes, | ou | 
traité complet d’idiomographie, | embrassant | 
lYexamen critique des systémes et de toutes les 
questions qui se rattachent | a lorigine et « la 
filiation des langues, a leur essence organique 
| et aleurs rapports avec l'histoire des races 
humaines, de leurs migrations, etc. | Précédé 
d’un | Essai sur le réle du langage dans l’éyo- 
lution de lintelligence humaine. | Par L.-F. 
Jéhan (de Saint-Clavien), | Membre de la Soci- 
été géologique de France, del’ Académie royale 
des sciences de Turin, etc. | [Quotation, three 
lines.] | Publié | par M.1]’abbé Migne, éditeur 
de la Bibliothéque universelle du clergé, | ou | 
; des cours complets sur chaque branche de la 
' science ecclésiastique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 
., @ francs. | 
4 S’imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, édi- 
: teur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue d’ Amboise, 
(, 20,au Petit-Montrouge, | autrefois Barriére 

d'enfer de Paris, maintenant dans Paris. | 1864 
} First title verso “‘avis important” 1 1. second 
¥ title verso printer 1 1. introduction numbered 
’ by columns 9-208, text in double columns 209- 
; 1250,notes additionnelles columns 1249-1432, 
} table des matiéres columns 1433-1448, large 8°. 

The article ‘‘Colombienne,”’ columns 435-436, 
contains a brief enumeration only of the tribes 
speaking languages of five different families, 
of which two are Chinook, viz: 

2° Colombienne inferieure, including the dia- 
lects of the Echeloots, the Skilloots, the Wah- 
kiacum, the Cathlamahs, the Chinnooks, the 
Clatsops, and the Chilts. 

3°;Multnomah, including the dialects of the 
Multnomah, the Cathlacumup, the Cathlanah- 
quiah, the Cathlacomatup, the Clannahmina- 
mum, the Clahnaquah, the Quathlapottes, the 
Shotos, the Cathlahaws, and the Clackumos. 

Copies seen: Eames. 


Johnson (Frank). See Gatschet (A. 8S.) 
Jiilg (B.) See Vater (J.S.) 


+ hee 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 43 


K. 


| Keane (A. H.) — Continued. 
— American Indians. 


Keane (Augustus H.) Ethnography 
and philology of America. By A. H. 


Keane. 


In Bates (H. W.), Central America, the West 
Indies, etc. pp. 443-561, London, 1878, 8°. 

General scheme of American races and Jan- 
guages (pp. 460-497) includes a list of the 
branches of the Chinookan family, divided into 
languages and dialects, p. 474. —Alphabetical 


list of all known American tribes and lan- | 


guages, pp. 498-561. 


Reprinted in the 1882 and 1885 editions of the / 


same work and on the same pages. 


L. 


Latham (R. G.) —Continued. 


Langevin (H.L.) British Columbia. | 
Report of the hon. H. L. Langevin, C. 
B.,| minister of public works. | Printed 
by order of parliament.| [Vignette. ] | 

Ottawa: | printed by I. B. Taylor, 29, 
31 and 35, Rideau street. | 1872. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. contents pp. iii-iv, [list of] appen- 
dices pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-55, appendices pp. 56- 
246, 8°. 

Appendix CC. A dictionary of the Chinook 
Jargon, or Indian trade language of the rorth 
Pacific coast. Published by T. N. Hibben and 
Co., Victoria, B.C. Part I. Chinook-English, 
pp. 161-173. Part Il. English-Chinook, pp. 174- 
182. 

Copies seen: Georgetown. 

Latham (Robert Gordon). Miscellaneous 
contributions to the ethnography of 
North America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. 

In Philological Soc. [of London], Proc. vol. 2, 
pp. 31-50 [London], 1846, 8°. (Congress.) 

Contains a number of Cathlascon terms in 
the comparative lists of words. 

Reprinted in the same author’s Opuscula, pp. 
275-297, for title of which see below. 


—— On the languages of the Oregon ter- 
ritory. By R.G. Latham, M.D. Read 
before the Society on the 11th Decem- 
ber, 1844. 

In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 1, 
pp. 154-166, Edinburgh [1848], 8°. (Congress.) 

A vocabulary of the Shoshonee, showing 
‘affinities (such as they are)’’ with a number 
of American languages, among them the 
Chinook and Cathlascon, pp. 159-160. 

This article reprinted in the same author's 
Opuscula, pp. 249-264, for title of which see 
below. 


— The | natural history | of | the varie- 
ties of man. | By| Robert Gordon 


In Encyclopedia Britannica, ninth edition, 
vol. 12, pp. 822-830, New York, 1881, royal 8°. 

Columbia Races, p. 826, includes thedivisions 
of the Chinookan. 


| Knipe (fev. C.) [Comparative vocabn- 


lary of the Chinook and Tahkaht. } 

Manuscript, 3 leaves, folio, written on one 
side only; in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 
nology. Included in an article by Mr. Knipe, 
entitled: Notes on the Indian tribes of the 
northwest coast of America. 


Latham, M. D., F.R.S., | late fellow of 
King’s college, Cambridge; | one of the 
vice-presidents of the Ethnological soci- 
ety, London; | corresponding member 
to the Ethnological society, | New 
York, etc. | [Monogram in shield. ] | 
London: | John Van Voorst, Pater- 
noster row. | M. D. CCCL [1850]. 


Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names 
of printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. 
preface pp. vii-xi, bibliography pp. xiii-xv, 
explanation of plates verso blank1 1. contents 
pp. Xix-xxviii, text pp. 1-566, index pp. 567-574, 
list of works by Dr. Latham verso blank 1 1. 8°. 

Division F, American Mongolide (pp. 287- 
460) includes a classification of a number of 
North American families, among them the 
Chinicks, pp. 316-323. This includes a general 
discussion, pp. 316-321; Jargon words of Eng- 
lish origin (26), of French origin (22), and 
derived by onomatopceia (8), pp. 321-322. 

Copies seen: Bureau ot Ethnology, Con- 
gress, Eames. 


On the languages of Northern, West- 
ern, and Central America. By R. G. 
Latham, M.D. (Read May the 9th.) 

In Philological Soc. [of London], Trans. 1856, 
pp. 57-115, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) 

Brief references to the Chinook and its rela- 
tion to other northwest languages. 

This article reprinted in the same author’s 
Opuscula, pp. 326-377, for title of which see’ 
below. 

Opuscula. | Essays | chiefly | philo- 
logical and ethnographical | by | Rob- 
ert Gordon Latham, | M.A., M.D., F. 
R.S., etc. | late fellow of Kings college, 
Cambridge, late professor of English | 
in University college, London, late 


44 


Latham (R. G.) —Continued. 
assistant physician | at the Middlesex 
hospital. | 

Williams & Norgate, | 14 Henrietta 
street, Covent garden, London | and | 
20 South Frederick street, Edinburgh. 
| Leipzig, R. Hartmann. | 1860. 


Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-iv, contents pp. v—vi, text pp. 1-377, addenda 
and corrigenda pp. 378-418, 8°. 

A reprint of a number of papers read before 
the ethnological and philological societies of 
London, among them the following, which 
include Chinookan material: 

On the languages of Oregon territory (pp. 
249-264) contains a comparative vocabulary of 
the Shoshonie with other languages, among 
them the Chinook and Cathlascon, pp. 255-256. 

Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnog- 
raphy of North America (pp. 275-297) contains 
a number of Cathlascon words in the compara- 
tive lists. 

On the languages of northern, western, and 
central America (pp. 326-377) contains brief 
references to the Chinook and its relation to 
other languages. 

Addenda and corrigenda, 1859 (pp. 378-418) 
contains brief comments on the Chinook, p. 388; 
Chinook words, p. 389; short vocabulary (12 
words) of the Chinook compared with Selish 
and Shoshonie, pp. 415-416. 


Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, Brinton, | 


Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling, 
Watkinson. 

At the Squier sale a presentation copy, no. 

639, brought $2.37. The Murphy copy, no. 1438, 
sold for $1. 
Elements | of | comparative philol- 
ogy. | By | R.G. Latham, M.A., M.D., 
F.R.S., &ce., | late fellow of Kings Col- 
lege, Cambridge; and late professor of 
English | in University college, Lon- 
don. | 

London :| Walton and Maberly,' Upper 
Gower street, and Ivy lane, Paternoster 
row; | Longman, Green, Longman, 
Roberts, and Green, | Paternoster row. 


| 1862. | The Right of Translation is | 


Reserved. 


Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. 
preface pp. vii-xi, contents pp. xiii-xx, tabular 
view pp. xxi-xxxii, errata p. [xxxiii], text pp. 
1-752, addenda pp. 753-757, index pp. 758-774, 8°. 

Vocabulary of 48 words, and the numerals 
1-10in the Watlala language, pp. 402-403. 


Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Eames, Watkinson. 

Dufossé, 1887 catalogue, no. 24564, priced a 
copy 20 fr., and Hiersemann, no. 36 of cata- 
logue 16, 10 M. 


Leclerc (Charles). 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Latham (R. G.) — Continued. 


Robert Gordon Latham, the eldest son of the 
Rey. Thomas Latham, was born in the vicarage 
of Billingsborough, Lincolnshire, March 24, 
1812. In1819hewasenteredat Eton. Two years 
afterwards he was admitted on the foundation, 
and in 1829 went to Kings, where he took his 
fellowship and degrees. Ethnology was his 
first passion and his last, though for botany 
he had a very strong taste. Hedied March 9, 
1888.—Theodore Watts in The Athenewm, March 
17, 1888. 


Bibliotheca | ameri- 
cana | Catalogue raisonné | d’une trés- 
précieuse | collection de livres anciens 
| et modernes | sur Amérique et les 
Philippines | Classés par ordre alpha- 
bétique de noms d’Auteurs. | Rédigé 
par Ch. Leclerc. | [Design.] | 

Paris | Maisonneuve & Ci | 15, quai 
Voltaire | M.D. CCC. LX VII [1867] 

Cover title as above, half-title verso details of 
sale 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. v-vii, catalogue pp. 1-407, 8°. 

Includes titles of a number of works contain- 
ing material relating to the Chinookan lan- 
guages. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. 

At the Fischer sale, a copy, no. 919, brought 
10s.; at the Squier sale, no. 651, $1.50. Leclere, 
1878, no. 345, prices it 4 fr. and Maisonneuve, in 
1889,4 fr. The Murphy copy, no. 1452, brought 
$2.75. 


—— Bibliotheca | americana | Histoire, 


eéographie, | voyages, archéologie et 
linguistique | des | deux Amériques | 
et | des iles Philippines | rédigée | Par 
Ch. Leclere | [Design] | 

Paris | Maisonneuve et C*, libraires- 
éditeurs | 25, quai Voltaire, 25. | 1878 

Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. avant-propos 
pp. i-xvii, table des divisions pp. xviii-xx, cat- 
alogue pp. 1-643, supplément pp. 645-694, index 
pp. 695-737, colophon verso blank 1 1. 8°. 

The linguistic part.of this volume occupies 
pp. 537-643; it is arranged under families, and 
contains titles of books in many American lan- 
guages, among them the following: 

Langues américaines en général, pp. 537-550; 
Chinook, p. 565. 

Copies seen: Boston Athenzum, Eames, Pil- 
ling. 

Priced by Quaritch, no, 12172, 12s.; another 
copy, no. 12173, large paper, 1l. 1s. Leclere’s 
Supplement, 1881, no. 2831, pricesit15fr., andno. 
2832, a copy on Holland paper, 30 fr. A large 
paper copy is priced by Quaritch, no. 30230, 12s. 
Maisonneuve in 1889 prices it 15 fr. 


Lee (Daniel) and Frost (J. H.) Ten 


years in Oregon. | By D. Lee and J. H. 
Frost, | late of the Oregon mission of 


CHINOOKAN 


Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.)— Cont'd. 


the Methodist episcopal church. | 
(Picture. ] | 
New-York: | published for the 


authors: 200 Mulberry-street. 
‘Collord, Printer. | 1844. 

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface pp. 
3-6, contents pp. 7-11, text pp. 13-344, 12°. 

Specimen of an Indian [Cathlascon] prayer 
with English translation, pp. 184-185.—A num- 
ber of sentences and grace before meals in the 
language of the Indians of the Cascades, p. 204. 
—Hymn (two verses) in the Cascade with 


ees 


English translation, p. 205.—Vucabulary (50 | 


words) of the Clatsop [Chinook Jargon], south 
side of the Columbia River, pp. 343-344. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenz#um, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Pilling, Trumbull. 


A few sentences in Chinook Jargon from this | 
work are reprinted in Allen (J.), Ten Years in | 


Oregon. 
Legends: 
Chinook See Boas (F.) 
Chinook Jargon St. Onge (L. N.) 


[Le Jeune (Pere Jean-Marie Raphael). } 


Practical | Chinook [Jargon] vocabu- | 
lary | comprising | all & the only usual | 


words of that wonderful | Language 
arranged in a most | advantageous 


order for the speedily learning of | the | 


same, after the plan of | right rev. 


bishop Durieu O M I. | the most experi- | 


enced Missionary & Chinook | speaker 
in British Columbia. | 
St. Louis’ mission | Kamloops. | 1886. 


Cover title verso directions for pronouncia- 
tion, no inside title; text pp. 1-16, 16°. 


The vocabulary, which is Chinook Jargon, is | 


arranged by lessons, i-xviii, without headings. 
They comprise: i, numerals; ii, the firmament, 
seasons, and days of the week; iii, geographic 
features, &c.; iv, the family and relationships ; 
vy, animals; vi, implements and utensils; vii, 


nationalities; viii, nouns; ix,money; x, parts | 


of the body; xi, wearing apparel; xii, domestic | 


utensils; xiii, nouns; xiv, adjectives; xv, pro- 


nouns ; xvi,adverbs; xvii, verbs; xviii, scripture | 


names and church terms. 

Copies seen: Eells, Pilling. 

A later edition with title-page as follows: 
— Chinook [Jargon] Vocabulary. | 
Chinook-English. | From the Original 
of Rt. Rey. | Bishop Durieu, O. M. I. | 
With the Chinook Words in Phonog- 
raphy | By | J. M. R. Le Jeune O.M. I. 

| Second Edition. | 


Mimeographed at Kamloops. | Octo- | 


ber 1892. 

Cover title verso ‘‘ Duployan Phonetic Alpha- 
bet,’ no inside title, text (triple columns, 
Chinook Jargon in italics alphabetically 


LANGUAGES, 


45 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 


arranged, Jargon in stenographic characters, 
and English in italics) pp. 1-16, prayer in Jar- 
gon, stenographic characters, on recto of back 
cover, verso list of publications by Father 
Le Jeune. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

Early in October, 1892, I wrote to Bishop 
Durieu requesting a copy of the 1886 edition of 
the ‘Chinook Vocabulary,’’ composed by him, 
and received in reply (November 1) a state- 
ment to the effect that he would be glad to 
oblige me, but that he had written no such 
book. Transcribing the title-page of the little 
book in question, I sent it to him asking an 
explanation, as his name was given thereon. 
The following is his response: 

NEW WESTMINISTER, B. C., 
Nov. 16, 1892. 

DEAR SiR: In answer to your favor of the 
11th inst., I beg to state that what I wrote you 
in my lastis but the truth. I have not written 
anything in the Indian language or in the 
Chinook. What you have enumerated under 
my name, because my name is mentioned on the 
title of the work, must be placed under the 
name of Rey. Father Le Jeune asthe publisher 
and the author. But to make sure of it, and 
in order that your bibliography may be correct, 
I will serd this letter to Rey. Father Le Jeune, 
of Kamloops, begging him to give you the 
name of the author of those works you have 
placed under my name. 

I have the honor to be. dear sir, 
Your humble servant, 
PAUL DURIEU. 


This was sent me with the following explan- 

atory letter by Father Le Jeune: 
KAMLOOPS, B. C., Nov. 21, 1892. 

DEAR Sir: Bishop Durieu gave me those les- 
sons in Chinook, in a few flying sheets, over 
twelve years ago (September, 1879). Of course 
those sheets are lost long ago. As his lordship 
does not want to appear as the author of those 
little pamphlets, you had better mention them 
as arranged by myself out of lessons received 
from his lordship. 


Yours, 
FATHER LE JEUNE. 


[——] [Two lines stenographic charac- 


ters.] | No. 1. Kamloops Wawa May 2. 
91 [—67. 26 Feb. 93] 

A periodical in the Chinook Jargon, steno- 
graphic characters, intended as a weekly, but 
issued in its early stages at irregular intervals, 
at Kamloops, British Columbia, under the edi- 
torship of Father LeJeune, and reproduced by 
him with the aid of the mimeograph. See fac- 
simile of the first page of the initial issue. 

The first three numbers are in triple col- 
wmns, Jargon in italics, Jargon in shorthand 
characters, and English in italies; the fourth 
number is in double columns, Jargon in short- 
hand and English in italics; the subsequent 
issues are in shorthand with headings in Eng- 


46 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 
lish. All the issues are in 16° except nos. 5-6 
and 7-8 (double numbers), which are in 32°. At 
the beginning each issue consisted of 8 pages, 
with continuous pagination, but occasionally 
the parts were separately paged. Beginning 
with no. 33, the first issue of vol. 2, all the num- 
bers consist of 4 pages each. 

The following is a detailed list of the issues, 
made up from my copy, which is the only one 
I have seen, giving number, date of issue, and 


pagination: 
No.1 May 2,'91, pp. 1-8, 16°. 
2 ONS" 1-16, 16°. 
3 16, 91, 17-24, 16°. 
4 Aug. 5,91, 25-32, 16°. 
5-6 Sept. ‘91, 1-32, 32°a. 
[7-8 Oct. ‘91, 1-32], 32°a. 
9 Feb. 1,'92, 1-4, 16a°. 
10 6, '92, 5-8, 16°. 
11 14, '92, 9-12, 169°. 
12 21, '92, 13-16, 16°. 
13 28)792) 17-20, 16°. 
14 Mch. 6, '92, 21-24, 16°. 
15 13, '92, 25-29], 17-200, 16°. 
16 20, '92, 33-34, 21-24b, 39-40, 16°. 
17 27,92; 41-48, 16°. 
18 Apr. 3,'92, 49-52, 1-4c, 16°. 
19 10, 92, 25-28b (57-60 lacking), 
16°. 
20 10, 92, 65-66, 29-32b, 71-72, 16°. 
21 17-24, '92, 73-74, 33-36b, 79-80, 16°. 
22 24,192, 81-82 (83-86 lacking), 87- 


88, 16°. 


23 May 1, ’'92, 89-90, 37-40b, 95-96, 16°. 


24 8, '92, 105-112 (97-104 lacking), 
16°. | 

25 15, 92, 113-114, 41-446, 119-120, 
16°. 

26 22, '92, 12J—122, 123-1260, 127-128, 
45-48b, 16°. 

27 26, '92, 129-130, 131-134b, 135-186, 
16°. 


28 June 5,'92, 137-138, 139-1426, 139-142, 


bis b, 1438-144, 16°. 


29 12, ’92, 145-146, 147-150b, 151-152, 
16°. 

30 19, 92, 155-158 [sic] b, 16°. 

31 26, '92, 153-154, 159-160, 163-166), 
16°. 

32 30,'92, (167-168 lacking) 169- 
172b, 16°. 

Vol. 2 

33 July 3,92, 1-4, 16°. 

34 10, '92, 5-8, 16°. 

35 17, '92, 9-12, 16°. 

36 24, ’92, 13-16, 16°. 

37 31, '92, 17-20, 16°. 

38 Aug. 7,'92, 21-24, 16°. 


Supplement to nos. 33-38, pp. 1-24d, 16°. 
39 Aug.14, 92, pp. 25-28, 16°. 
40 21, ’92, 29-32, 16°. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.)— Continued. 


No. 41 <Aug.28, '92, pp. 33-36, 16°. 


42 Sept. 4,°92, 37-40, 16°. 
43 Lilet 41-44, 16°. 
4d 18,’92, 45-48, 16°. 
45 25, °92, 49-52, 16°. 
46 Oct. 2,792, 53-56, 16°. 
47 16 (sic) 57-60, 16°. 
48 16,’92, 61-64, 16°. 
49 23, ’92, 65-68, 16°. 
50 30, ’92, 69-72, 16°. 
51 Nov. 6,92, 73-76, 16°. 
52 13,°92, 77-80, 16°. 
53 20, ’92, 81-84, 16°. 
54 27,92, 85-88, 16°.. 
55 Dec. 4,792, 89-92, 16°. 
56 1 ee 93-96, 16°. 
57 18, '92, 97-100, 16°. 
58 25, 792, 101-104, 16°. 
Vol. 3: 
59 Jan. 1, 93, 1-4, 16°. 
60 8,93, 5-8, 16°. 
61 15,°93, 9-12, 12°. 
62 22, '93, 13-16, 16°. 
63 29, '93, 17-20, 16°. 
64 Feb.” 5, 93, 21-24, 16°. 
65 12,93, 25-28, 16°. 
66 19,93, 29-32, 16°. 
67 26,193, 33-36, 16°. 


The breaks in the pagination, beginning in 
no. 15, are due to the intention of the editor to 
make separates of different series of articles, 
one of which, entitled Sacred History, runs 
through many of the issues, beginning with no. 
9, each with its special heading, ‘‘ The creation 
of the world,” ‘‘Adam and Eve,’ ete. In all 
the later numbers of vol. 1, beginning with no. 
15, the middle sheet (4 pages) has its own head- 
ing, name of the paper, date, etc., as on the first 
sheet. The Sacred History series runs as fol- 
lows, page 17 in no. 15 connecting, it will be 
seen from the table below, with the sixteen 
pages, variously numbered, appearing in the 
earlier numbers: 


No. 9, pp. 2-4 No. 22, lacking. 
10, 648 23, pp. 37-40 
1], 10-12 24, none 
12, 16 25, 41-44 
18, 18-20 26, 123-126 
14, 22-24 27, 131-134 
15, 17-20 28, 139-142 
16, 21-24 28, 139-142 bis 
17, none 29, 147-150 
18, none 30, 155-158 
19, 25-28 31, 163-166 
20, 29-32 32, 169-172 
21, 33-36 


Referring to this list it will be seen that in 
no. 26 the author added four extra pages (45-48), 
after which the separate pagination was discon: 
tinued. In no. 28 also four extra pages (139- 
142 bis) are included. 


aNos. 5-6 are entitled Chinook Hymns; nos. 7-8, Elements of shorthand; for titles see below. 


b Sacred history pages. 
cNight prayers in the Shushwap language, 


dHistory of the old testament; for title see St. Onge (L. N.) 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. AT 


iD Kamla Wawa Mea 


| 7405 paper 
“kee 204 Ed 
NEM 2 a Maen) Cit fog 
Kom toons “3b of WOAVh | 
Wan CO , £& 4 born 
Chi 4le|rs f° lusl now 
uA. hake ney ee 
[: XA S Oe ey 3 rp 2 
Laka bekel a, = wants 
Be OO NL os 
MA PIA ULE Se ae 5 i 
Sonday, | 3-= |b dt wie 
Mopa Mana ON AA weak Lo 
Pe a pO) ag = Pop 
Ce K 2 hak ay Poa w rece. fa S 
Kota. : 
Sank WIA o: ~~ 
Rouk Pepa ih: } a na kbep 
Kat bx sh ees yy they be 
pous lek lal, ~Y white Men, 


PDA Ld 


os ee ONS 8, 


FACSIMILE QF THE FIRST PAGE OF THE KAMLOOPS WAWA. 


48 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) —Continued. Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 


In a few numbers the article on Sacred His- 
tory is omitted. Of these no. 17 contains in lieu 
four pages of hymns set to music; no. 18, night 
prayer in Shushwap; in no. 22 nothing was 
substituted; no. 24, list of subscribers, etc. 

In explanation of these irregularities Father 
Le Jeune, under date of July 13, 1892, writes 
me as follows: 

“Concerning your remarks on missing pages 
and numbers, let me say: There are only 4 
pages of no. 19, pp. 25-28; it was a mistake; no. 
18is Ap.3 and no. 20, which should have been 
no.19,is Ap.10. It was too late to correct the 
error, so I continued counting from no. 20 
upward. In the same way you will find no. 21, 
‘Sacred History,’ § 64-70, pages 33-36, is the 
same date as no. 22, Ap. 24. The list of sub- 
scribers can go in no. 24 as pages 97-100, and 
my French letter of Ap. 1st as pages 101-104. 

“‘T am ashamed that there should be so 
much confusion in the pagination of the little 
paper; as you see, I was trying to carry out 
two things at the same time—first to make the 
regular pages with the calendar of the week 
and second the four pages of Sacred History. 
These were not issued at the same time, but in 
two series, as I wished to have the Sacred His- 
tory bound separately. Then I am not sitting 
at rest in an office, but traveling throughout 
my mission, over 500 miles, taking my dupli- 
cating outfit with me, with much besides to 
do, as, for instance, 300 confessions to hear at 
Kamloops at Easter, 400 last month at the 
Shushwap, etc. 

“You will see that with July I began the 
second volume, and hereafter the pages, four 
to each number, will be numbered in succes- 
sion. The Sacred History will be given 
monthly only—16 pages to each number. I 
commence again from the very beginning, 
having Father St. Onge’s translation.” 

Most of the matter given is of a religious 
character, the Sacred History series of articles 
being the most extensive. Beginning with no. 
13, each issue contains a list of the feast and 
fast days for the ensuing week, and with no. 15 
the gospels of the various Sundays are given. 

A. Chinook vocabulary appears in the first 
three numbers, and a list of phrases in the 
fourth. 

During October, 1892, I received from Father 
Le Jeune copies of a reissue of nos. 1-8 of the 
Wawa, paged 1-40, all in 16°, and containing for 
the most part the material given in the origi- 
nals. They are dated May, June, July, 
August, September, November, and December, 
1892, and January, 1893, four pages each, con- 
secutively paged. To these is added a sup- 
plemental signature, paged 33-40, headed 
““Suceess of the Duployan Shorthand among 
the natives of British Columbia.” 

There have also been issued two ‘‘ Supple- 
ments to the Kamloops Wawa’’ ‘“‘ Chicago 
World’s Fair Notes,’’ numbered 1 and 2, and 
dated respectively November 1 and 8, 1892, each 


containing four pages, numbered 1-8. The first 
contains an illustration of a U.S. coast line 
battle ship, the second one of the Manufactures 
and Liberal Arts Building. 

There is also a third of these extras, a single 
quarto page headed: ‘Chicago News, Supple- 
ment to the Kamloops Wawa. No.1, Nov. Ist, 
1892,” at the top of which is the picture of the 
battle ship. 

My inquiries in regard to these stray issues 


met with the following response from Father 


Le Jeune: 


“In answer to your letter of Nov.1, 1892, 
pages 1-40 you mention are simply a new edi- 
tion of the first eight numbers. As yuu see by 
the first numbers I sent you, I did not exactly 
know what my little paper was going to be. 
Now that the Indians want their papers bound, 
I find those first numbers exhausted. Besides, 
numbers 5, 6,7, and 8 were never properly num- 
bered; so I made this new edition of eight 
numbers to be used as heading for the volume. 
Iendeavored to get into these eight numbers 
what constitutes the first text-book for Indian 
students, so that they can be used separately. 
Now the collection follows in consecutive num- 
bers, 1, 2, 3, ete., to 18, no. 19 [except the sacred 
history supplement] being skipped by mistake ; 
then 20-31, supplements to nos. 15-32, save no. 
22, omitted also by mistake; then from no. 320n 
in regular order. I reprint some of the run-out 
numbers of vol. I to complete the sets sent me 
for binding, and redress as much as I can my 
former incorrectness of pagination. Concern- 
ing the pages ‘‘ Success of the Duployan,”’ etc., 
I have given up the idea of embodying them 
into something else; so they remain as they 
are, a letter of information to correspondents, 
The ‘Chicago News ’’ supplement and any other 
I may hereafter produce are separate pages 
which I shall issue at my convenience to inter- 
est the Indians and give them some useful 
information, but without binding myself. to 
issue them regularly. They are rather essays 
than anything else.”’ 

The supplemental signature of no.8 of the 
reissue of the Wawa contains so many interest- 
ing facts bearing upon Father Le Jeune’s work 
and upon the methods used in this new depart- 
ure in periodical making that I give it here- 
with in full. 

Success of the Duployan Shorthand among the.’ 
natives of British Columbia. 


“The Duployan system of stenography made 
its apparition in France in 1867. The 
orginators are the Duploye brothers, two of 
whom are members of the clergy and two 
others eminent stenographers in Paris. Father 
Le Jeune became acquainted with the system 
in 1871, being then 16 years old, and learned in 
a few hours. Two or three days after he 
wrote to Mr. E.Duploye and by return mail 
received a very encouraging letter. He found 
the knowledge of shorthand very profitable. 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 49 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 

ever since, either for taking down notes or for 
correspondence. It was only in July, 1890, that 
the idea first came to try the shorthand as an 
easy phonetic writing forthe Indians of British 
Columbia. The first trial became a success. 
At the end of September, 1890,a poor Indian 
eripple, named Charley-Alexis Mayoos, from 
the Lower Nicola, saw the writing for the first 
time, and got the intuition of the system at first 
sight. Heset to decipherafew pagesof Indian 
prayers in shorthand. In less than two months 
he learned every word of them, and he soon 
began to communicate “his learning to his 
friends and relatives. 

‘Through his endeavors some eight or ten 
Indians at Coldwater, Nicola, B. C., became 
thoroughly acquainted with the writing system 
before April 1st, 1891. In July, 1891, the first 
lessons were given to the Shushwap Indians; 
they lasted an hour every day for four or five 
days. Three or four of the best young men 
went on studying what they had learned, and 
were delighted to find themselves able to 
correspond in shorthand in the early fall. 
During the winter months they helped to prop- 
agate the system of writing among their people. 
In the meantime Mayoos had come to Kam- 
loops and was pushing the work ahead among 
the young people there. 

**In December, 1891, the system was intro- 
duced to the North Thomson Indians; in Jan- 
uary, 1892, to those at Douglas Lake; in Febru- 
ary at Spuzzum and North Bend; and, last of 
all, in March, to those at Deadman’s Creek, 
near Sarvina. Soon after, Indian letters came 
from William’s Lake. In May, 1892, a few 
lessons were given at St. Mary’s Mission to 
the Lower Fraser and seacoast Indians. Now 
the Indians teach each other and are very 
anxious to learn on all sides. The most 
advanced understand the value of the letters 
and the spelling of the words; but the greatest 
number begin by reading the words, then learn 
the syllables by comparing the words together, 
and at last come to the letters. They learn by 
analysis and much quicker than by synthesis. 

‘“The ‘Kamloop Wawa’ was first issued in 
May, 1891, and in eight monthly numbers gave 
the rudiments of stenography and the Chinook 
hymns as first Chinook reader. 

“Withno. 9, February 1st, 1892, it has become 
weekly, and has ever since continued to reach 
every week the ever increasing number of sub- 
scribers. It is now issued at 250 copies, 4 
pages, 12mo, weekly. A supplement of equal 
size issued whenever convenient. The first 
volume of the Kamloops Wawa closed last 
June with number 32. Vol. II will terminate 
with no. 58, Dec. 25, 1892. Contents: 1° Ele- 
ments of Stenography in Chinook and English. 
2° Chinook and Latin Hymns. 3° A number of 
Indian news. 4° Beginning of Sacred History. 
5° Weekly Calendar beginning with March Ist, 
92. 6° Gospel for every Sunday. 7° Some 


prayers in Shushwap. 8° A few hymns in 


CHIN 4 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 


Shushwap and Chinook. 9° A few English 
lessons. See nos. 33, 34,35. 10° Narratives of 
early Church History, St. Mary Magdalen, St. 
James, ete. 

‘“The Kamloops Phonographer had its first 
number issued in June, 1892. Six numbers are 
now ready, illustrating: 1° How shorthand is 
taught to the natives. 2° Alphabet and rules 
of shorthand. 3° Syllables and syllabical 
tables. 4° Ist reading books of shorthand—16 
pages monthly. The intention is, in the follow- 
ing numbers, to make a study of abbreviative 
phonography, showing how outlines can be 
made according to the Duployan system. Wé 
do not pretend to teach shorth. ex professo, but 
only to give to those interested all the informa- 
tion that we can concerning our little work. 

[Seven numbers are issued, the last in Janu- 
ary, 1893, none containing Chinookan material. ] 

‘In preparation: 1° A second edition of the 
Chinook and English Vocabulary. 2° Al- 
manac for 1893, of which these pages are 
intended to become a part. 3° A Chinook trans- 
lation, by Rt. Rev. Bishop Durieu [q. v.] from 
New Westminster, of Bishop Gilmour’s Bible 
History. 200 copies of the English text have 
been received through the kindness of Rey. L. 
N. St. Onge, Troy, N.Y. These will be inter- 
leaved with the Chinook text so as to present 
the illustrations of the original, and the English 
text opposite its Chinook version. 

“Some will ask: How are all these works 
issued? Up to date nearly all the work, auto- 
graphing and duplicating on the mimeograph, 
has been done by the author during the leisure 
hours of his missionary labors. But that course 
can not be carried on any longer. Hired work 
has to be taken in. A few Indian women are 
already trained to do the printing. With their 
codperation 16 pages can be printed on 200 to 
250 copies inaday. But that work has to be 
paid for; and the resources are at an end. Peo- 
ple have first wondered at the work; some find 
fault with it; very little thus far has been done 
to help it. 

‘ Now is the time for the friends of-a good 
cause to see if something better could not be 
done in favor of this little work. Voluntary 
donations will be accepted as a providential 
blessing. Subscriptions to papers are also a 
powerful means of support and improvement. 
Many say: ‘‘We do not want to study the pho- 
nography.”’ But could they not take the papers 
as specimens of curiosity, etc., in theirlibraries ? 
The first volume of the Kamloops Wawais now 
bound, and would make a very interesting item 
in any library. Price only $1.50. Send $2.50 
and have the numbers of the Kamloops Pho- 
nographer as well. Please induce your friends 
to contribute according to their means. By 
doing so, you by all means shall help to 
enlighten many who are still sitting in dark- 
ness and in the shadow of death.” 

The periodical is almost entirely the work of 
Pére Le Jeune, but few contributions of Jar- 


50 


ie. 
jo YC 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF 


THE 


CXL, C0 


K, aN loops 


~ 


— 


Wa we, 


Sep rember 184) 


Nos 


said 


~~, 


CAinoo & Hy mms, 


a ae = 


FACSIMILE OF COVER TITLE OF LE JEUNE’S JARGON HYMN BOOK. 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 


gon material appearing from other hands. The 
only exceptions I have discovered are short 


articles in nos. 24,34, and 35,from the pen of 


Dr. T. S. Bulmer, and occasionally one from 
Father St. Onge. 

An independent issue of the Wawa appeared 
under date of June 1,1891, numbered 1; and 
two of the issues are in double numbers, 5-6, 
and [7-8]; these latter, 32° in size, lack the 
heading as given in the periodical proper and 
evidently were not intended originally as a part 
of the series. The titles of these three issues 
are as follows: 


[ 


] [Two lines stenographie charac- 
ters.] | No.1. Kamloops Wawa. 1 Ju.’91 
No title page, heading on cover as above; 
text, headed ‘‘ Chinook Vocabulary,” pp. 1-32, 
advertisement on back cover, 16°. 
On the front cover following the heading are 
two columns of matter, one in English, italic 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) —Continued, 


characters, headed “Chinook vocabulary,” the 
second in Jargon, stenographie characters. 
The vocabulary, alphabetically arranged, triple 
columns, Jargon, shorthand, and English, pp. 
1--21.—Chinook hymns, pp. 23-32. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


[——] [Two lines stenographic charae- 
ters.] | Kamloops Wawa, | September, 
1891 | Nos 5 & 6. | Chinook Hymns, | 
[One line stenographic characters. ] 

[Kamlodps, B. C.: 1891.] 


Cover title verso the alphabet, no inside title; 
text (in stenographic characters, headings in 
Jargon and Latin in italics) pp. 1-32, alphabet 
and numerals on recto of back cover, list of 
publications by Father Le Jeune verso of back 
See the facsimile of the cover title. 
Copies seen: Pilling. 

Issued also with cover title as follows: 


cover, 32°. 


CHINOOKAN 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 
[——] [Two lines stenographic charac- 
ters.] | Chinook Hymns. | 
Kamloops. B. C. | 1891 


Cover title verso alphabet and numerals, no 
inside title; text in stenographic characters 
pp. 1-32, alphabet recto of back cover, list of 
publications by Father Le Jeune versoof back 
cover, 32°. 

Contents as under title next above; the verso 
of the front cover in the one edition forms the 
recto of the back cover in the other, 

Copies seen: Pilling, : 

[——] Elements | of | short hand. | Part 
I. | 

Kamloops. | 1891 

Cover title verso the alphabet, text pp. [1-32], 
alphabet and numerals recto of back cover, list 
of publications by Father Le Jeune verso of 
back cover, 32°. Inserted by Father Le Jeune 
as a substitute for the lacking nos.7-8 of the 
Kamloops Wawa, Oct., 1891. 

Contains no Chinookan material. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

[——] Chinook | primer. | By which | 
The Native of British Columbia | and 
any other persons | Speaking the Chi- 
nook | are taught | to read and write 
Chinook | in Shorthand | in the Space 
of a few hours. | Price: 10 Cents. | 

Mimeographed at|St Louis Mis- 
sion. | Kamloops, B.C. | May, 1892. 

Cover title as above, verso advertisement, no 
inside title; text pp. 1-8, advertisement recto of 
back cover. verso list of publications by Father 
Le Jeune, 16°. 

See p. 52 for facsimile of the cover title. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

A comparison of the facsimiles of the title- 
pages of the hymn book and primer with the 
printed text of the same will show a few differ- 
ences of punctuation. The printed text is cor- 
rect; the facsimiles are defective in that re- 
spect. 

A play | in Chinook. | Joseph and 
his Brethren. | Act I.| By J. M. R. 
Le Jeune O.M.I. 

Kamloops, B.C. | July 15+ 1892. 

Cover title (manuscript, in the handwriting 
of its author), no inside title; text (in Chinook 
Jargon, stenographic characters) pp. 1-20, 16°. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

— Chinook | First Reading Book | in- 
cluding | Chinook Hymns, Syllabary | 

and Vocabulary. |B7\|J.M.R. Le Jeune 
O. M. I.| Price: 10 Cents. | [Fight 
lines stenographic characters, ] | 

Kamloops. | 1893 

Title verso Chinook alphabet 1 1. text in 
stenographic characters, with headings in Eng- 
lish and Jargon in italics, pp. 1-[18], 16°. 


LANGUAGES. 51 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) -- Continued. 
Hymns, pp. 1-11. — Exercises, pp. 12-15.— 
Vocabulary, pp. 16-18. 
Copies seen: Pilling. 


—— See Durieu (P.) 


Pére Jean-Marie Raphael Le Jeune was born 
at Pleybert Christ, Finistére, France, April 12, 
1855, and came to British Columpia as a mis- 
sionary priest in October,1879. He made his 
first acquaintance with the Thompson Indians 
in June, 1880,and has been among them ever 
since. He began at once to study their lan- 
guage and was able to express himself easily 
in that language after a few months. When he 
first came he found about a dozen Indians that 
knew afew prayers and a little of a catechism 
in the Thompson language, composed mostly 
by Right Rey. Bishop Durieu, O. M. I., the 
present bishop of New Westminster. From 
1880 to 1882 he traveled only between Yale and 
Lytton, 57 miles, trying to make acquaintance 
with as many natives as he could in that dis- 
trict. Since 1882 he has had to visit also the 
Nicola Indians, who speak the Thompson lan- 
guage and the Douglas Lake Indians, who 
are a branch of the Okanagan family, and had 
occasion to become acquainted with the Okan- 
agan language, in which he composed and 
revised most of the prayers they have in use up 
to the present. Since June 1, 1891, he has also 
had to deal with the Shushwap Indians, and, 
as the language is similar to that in use by the 
Indians of Thompson River, he very soon 
became familiar with it. 

He tried several years ago to teach the In- 
dians to read in the English characters, but 
without avail, and two years ago he undertook 
to teach them in shorthand, experimenting first 
upon a young Indian boy who learned the short- 
hand after a single lesson and began to help 
him teach the others. The work went on 
slowly until last winter, when they began to be 
interested in it all over the country, and since 
then they have been learning it with eagerness 
and teaching it to one another. 


Leland (Charles Godfrey). The Chinook 
Jargon. 


In St. James Gazette, vol. 17, no. 2529, p. 6, 
London, July 18, 1888, folio. (Pilling.) 

General remarks concerning the language, 
with words, phrases, and sentences therein. 


[ 


] An international idiom. 


In the Saturday Review, vol. 30, no. 1822, pp. 
377-378, London, Sept. 27, 1890, folio. 

A review of Hale (H.), An international 
idiom, giving a number of examples. 


Lenox: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the Lenox Library, New York City. 


[Lionnet (Pére —).] Vocabulary | of the 
| Jargon or trade language | of Oregon. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


, 
CHINOOK ; 


PRIMER, 


By uur ALR | 
The Natives Be British Columbia 
nd ~ ane other persons 


Speak ny ihe Ne hinvoek { 


are argh F 

to read amd, Hey Ghimook | 
we Sharthowrd 

mth, spac of a fow howss. | 


ere | 
Pria pm Cemts. | 


Mime raphed al 
st Louis Mission. 
Kawdoops, Ae Oe 
May 1692. 


” FACSIMILE OF COVER TITLE OF LE JEUNE’S JARGON PRIMER. 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 53 


Lionnet (Pere —) — Continyed. Ludewig (H. E.) — Continued. 


Colophon: Published by the Smith- 
sonian institution, | Washington, D. 
C., | April, 1853. 

No title page, heading only; letter of Prof. 
Henry and report of Prof. W. W. Turner 1 1. 
text pp. 1-22, 8° form on 4° page. 

French, English, and Jargon vocabulary, 
alphabetically arranged by French words, pp. 
1-22. 

“Dr. B. Rush Mitchell, of the United States 
Navy, recently presented to the Smithsonian 
Institution a manuscript vocabulary, in French 
and Indian, obtained in Oregon, and said to 
have been compiled by a French Catholic priest. 
It was submitted for critical examination to 
Prof.W. W. Turner, and in accordance with his 
suggestion the vocabulary has been ordered to 
be printed for distribution in Oregon.’’—Daxtract 
from letter of Prof. Henry. 

‘‘Some years ago the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion printed a small vocabulary of the Chinook 
Jargon, furnished by Dr. R. B. Mitchell, of the 
U. S. Navy, and prepared, as I afterward 
learned, by Mr. Lionnet, a Catholic priest, for 
his own use while studying the language at 
Chinook Point.’’—2ztract from the preface of 
Gibbs's Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. 

Copies seen: Georgetown, Pilling, Smithson- 
jan. 


Lord’s prayer: 


Cascade See Youth's. 
Chinook Bergholtz (G. F.) 
Chinook Duflot de Mofras (E.) 


Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 


Bancroft (H. H.) 
Boldue (J. B. Z.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 


Chinook Jargon Chinook. 
Chinook Jargon Dictionary. 
Chinook Jargon Eells (M.) 
Chinook Jargon Everette (W. E.) 
Chinook Jargon Gibbs (G.) 
Chinook Jargon Gill (J. K.) 
Chinook Jargon Good (J. B.) 
Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 
Chinook Jargon Marietti (P.) 
Chinook Jargon Nicoll (E. F.) 


Lowdermilk: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the bookstore of W.H. Lowder- 
milk & Co., Washington, D. C. 
Ludewig (Hermann Ernst). The | liter- 
ature | of | American aboriginal lJan- 
guages. | By | Hermann E. Ludewig. | 
With additions and corrections | by 
professor Wm. W. Turner, | Edited by 
Nicolas Triibner. | 

London:| Triibner and co., 60, Pater- 
noster row. | MDCCCLVIII [1858]. 

Half-title ‘“‘Triibner’s bibliotheca glottica 
I” verso blank 1 1. title as above verso printer 
11. preface pp. v-viii, contents verso blank 1 1. 


editor’s advertisement pp. ix—xii, biographical 
memoir pp. xiii-xiv, introductory bibliograph- 
ical notices pp. xv-xxiv, text pp. 1-209, addenda 
pp. 210-246, index pp. 247-256, errata pp. 257-258, 
8°, Arranged alphabetically by languages. 
Addenda by Wm. W. Turner and Nicholas 
Triibner, pp. 210-246. 

Contains a listof grammars and vocabularies 
of the languages of the American peoples, 
among them the following: 

American languages generally, pp. XV-xxiv; 
Chinuk and Chinuk Jargon, pp. 40-41, 47. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology,Congress, 
Eames, Georgetown, Pilling. 

At the Fischer sale, no. 990, a copy bronght 5s. 
6d.; at the Field sale, no. 1403, $2.63; at the 
Squiersale, no. 699, $2.62; another copy, no. 1906, 
$2.38. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 2075, 15 fr. 
The Pinart copy, no. 565, sold for 25 fr., and 
the Murphy copy, no. 1540, for $2.50. 


“Dr. Ludewig bas himself so fully detailed 
the plan and purport of this work that little 
more remains for me to add beyond the mere 
statement of the origin of my connection with 
the publication and the mention of such addi- 
tions for which I am alone responsible, and 
which, during its progress through the press, 
have gradually accumulated to about one-sixth 
of the whole. This is butanactof justice tothe 
memory of Dr. Ludewig, because at the timeof 
his death, in December, 1856,no more than 172 
pages were printed off, and these constitute the 
only portion of the work which had the benefit 
of his valuable personal and final revision. 

‘Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay 
in New York in 1855, to an intimacy with Dr. 
Ludewig, during which he mentioned that he, 
like myself, had been making bibliographical 
memoranda for years of all books which serve 
to illustrate the history of spoken language. 
As a first section of a more extended work on 
the literary history of language generally, he 
had prepared a bibliographical memoir of the 
remains of aboriginal languages of America. _ 
The manuscript had been deposited by him in 
the library of the Ethnological Society at New 
York, but at my request he at once most kindly 
placed it at my disposal, stipulating only that 
it should be printed in Europe, under my per- 
sonal superintendence. 

‘‘Upon my return to England, I lost no time 
in carrying out the trust thus confided to me, 
intending then to confine myself simply to pro- 
ducing acorrect copy of my friend’s manuscript. 
But it soon became obvious that the transcript 
had been hastily made, and but for the valuable 
assistance of literary friends, both in this 
country and in America, the work would prob- 
ably have been abandoned. My thanks aremore 
particularly due to Mr. E. G. Squier, and to 
Prof. William W. Turner, of Washington, by 
whose considerate and valuable coéperation 
many difficulties were cleared away and my edi- 
torial labors greatly lightened. This encouraged 
me to spare neither personal labor nor expense 


54 


Ludewig (HI. E.) — Contintied. 

in the attempt to render the work as perfect as 
possible, with what success must be left to 
the judgment of those who can fairly appreciate 
the labors of a pioneer in any new field of lit- 
erary research.’ —Hditor’s advertisement. 

“Dr. Ludewig, though but little known in 
this country [England], was held in consider- 
ableesteem as a jurist, bothin Germany and the 
United States of America. Born at Dresden in 
1809, with but little exception he continued to 
reside in his native city until 1844, when he emi- 
grated to America; but, though in both coun- 
tries he practiced law as a profession, his bent 
was the study of literary history, which was 
evidenced by his ‘Livre des Ana, Essai de 
Catalogue Manuel,’ published at his own cost 
in 1837, and by his ‘ Bibliothekonomie,’ which 
appeared a few years later. 

‘*But even while thus engaged he delighted 
ininvestigating the rise and progress of the land 
of his subsequent adoption, and his researches 
into the vexed question of the origin of the peo- 
pling of America gained him the highest consid- 
eration. on both sides of the Atlantic, as a man 
of original and inquiring mind. He was a 
contributor to Naumann’s ‘Serapzum;’ and 
among the chief of his contributions to that 
journal may be mentioned those on ‘American 
Libraries,’ on the ‘Aids to American Bibliog- 
raphy,’ and on the ‘Book Trade of the United 
States of America.’ In 1846 appeared his ‘ Lit- 
erature of American Local History,’ a work of 
much importance and which required no small 
amount of labor and perseverance, owing tothe 
necessity of consulting the many and widely 
scattered materials, which had to be sought out 
from apparently the most unlikely channels. 

““These studies formed a natural introduc- 
tion to the present work on ‘The Literature of 
American Aboriginal Languages,’ which occu- 
pied his leisure concurrently with the others, 
and the printing of which was commenced in 


M. 


Macdonald (D. G. F..) — Continued. 


Macdonald (Duncan George Forbes). 
British Columbia | and | Vancouver’s 
island | comprising | a description of 
these dependencies: their physical | 

character, climate, capabilities, popu- 
lation, trade, natural history, | geology, 
ethnology, gold-fields, and future pros- 
pects | also | An Account of the Man- 
ners and Customs of the Native Indians 
| by | Duncan George Forbes Macdon- 
ald, C. E. | (Late of the Government 
Survey Staff of British Columbia, 
and of the International Boundary | 

Line of North America) Author of 
‘What the Farmers may do with the | 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Ludewig (H. E.)— Continued. 


August, 1856, but which he did not live to see 
launched upon the world; for at the date of his 
death, on the 12th of December following, only 
172 pages were in type. It had been a labor of 
love with him for years; and,if ever author 
were mindful of the nonum prematur in annum, 
he was when he deposited his manuscriptin the 
library of the American Ethnological Society, 
diffident himself as to its merits and value on a 
subject of such paramount interest. He had 
satisfied himself that in due time the reward of 
his patient industry might be the production of 
some more extended national work on the sub- 
ject, and with this he was contented; for it was 
a distinguishing feature in his character, not- 
withstanding his great and varied knowledge 
and brilliant acquirements, to disregard his 
own toil, even amounting to drudgery if need- 
ful, if he could in any way assist the promul- 
gation of literature and science. 

‘*Dr. Ludewig was a corresponding member 
of many of the most distinguished European 
and American literary societies, and few men 
were held in greater consideration by scholars 
bothin Americaand Germany, as will readily be 
acknowledged should his voluminous corre- 
spondence ever see the light. In private life he 
was distinguished by the best qualities which 
endear a man’s memory to those who survive 
him: he was a kind and affectionate husband 
and a sincere friend. Always accessible and 
ever ready to aidand counsel those who applied 
to him for advice upon matters pertaining to 
literature, his loss will long be felt by a most 
extended circle of friends, and in him Germany 
mourns one of the best representatives of her 
learned men in America, a genuine type of a 
class in which, with singular felicity, to genius 
of the highest order is combined a painstaking 
and plodding perseverance but seldom met with 
beyond the confines of the ‘ Fatherland.’ ’’—Bio- 
graphic memoir. 


Land’ ‘The Paris Exhibition’ ‘Deci- 
mal Coinage’ &ec. | With a comprehen- 
sive map. | 

London | Longman,Green, Longman, 
Roberts, & Green | 1862. 


Half-title verso name of printer 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-vii, contents pp. 
ix-xiii, text pp. 1-442, appendices pp. 443-524, 
map, 8°. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon and Eng- 
lish equivalent terms (375 words and 10 phrases 
and sentences), pp. 394-398. 


Copies seen: British Museum, Congress. 
Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 43149, mentions: See- 
ond edition, London, Longmans, 1863, 8°, 


CHINOOKAN 


Macfie (Matthew). Vancouver Island 
and | British Columbia. | Their this- 
tory, resources, and prospects. | By | 
Matthew Macfie, F. R. G.S. | Five years 
resident in Victoria, V.I. | 

London: | Longman, Green, Long- 
man, Roberts, & Green. | 1865. 

Half-title verso name of printer 1 1. frontis- 
piece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso 
blank 1 1. preface pp. ix—xii, contents pp. xii- 
xxi, list of illustrations verso blank 1 1. text pp. 
1-518, appendix pp. 519-558, index pp. 559-574, 8°. 

A few sentences in the Chinook Jargon, pp. 
472-473. 

Oopies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athen#um, 
British Museum, Congress, Geological Survey, 
Pilling. 

Macleod (Rev. Xavier Donald). History 
of the devotion | to the | blessed virgin 
Mary | in| North America. | By | the 
rey. Xavier Donald Macleod, | professor 
[&c. two lines.] | With a memoir of 
the author, | by | the most rev. John B. 
Purcell, D. D., | archbishop of Cincin- 
nati. | 

New York: | Virtue & Yorston, | 12 
Dey street. [Copyright 1866. ] 

Frontispioce, title verso copyright notice 1 1. 
publishers’ notice pp. iii-iv, inscription to the 
memory of the author verso blank 1 1. contents 
pp. 5-7, verso blank, memoir by Purcell pp. 
ix-xxiii verso blank, engraving, text pp. 1-461 
verso blank, index pp. 463-467, 8°. 

Hymn to the Blessed Mary, in the Chinook 
Jargon, p. 255. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Georgetown. 


History | of | Roman Catholicism | 
in | North America. | By | the rev. 
Xavier Donald MacLeod, | professor 
[&e. one line.] | With a memoir of the 
author, | by | the most rev. John B. 
Purcell, D. D., | archbishop of Cincin- 
nati. | 

New York: | Virtue & Yorston, | 12 


Dey street. [186-?] 

Portrait 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. publishers’ 
notice pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v-vii, dedication 
verso blank 1 1. memoir pp. ix-xxiil, text pp. 
1-461, index pp. 463-467, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
DP. 255. 

Copies seen : Boston Athenzeum. 

Xavier Donald McLeod, author, born in New 
York city, November 17, 1821; died near Cincin- 
nati, Ohio, July 20,1865; studied at Columbus, 
and surprised his family and friends by taking 
orders in the Protestant Episcopal church in 
1845. After spending a few years in a country 
parish, he went in 1850 to Europe, where he 


LANGUAGES. 55 

Macleod (X. D.) — Continued. 
traveled and studied until 1852. The result of 
his European visit was his conversion to the 
Roman Catholic faith. In 1857 he became edi- 
torially connected with the St. Louis ‘‘ Leader.” 
Subsequently he was ordained a priest, and 
appointed professor of rhetoric and belles- 
lettres at Mount St. Mary’s college, Ohio. He 

_ met his death in a railroad accident.—Apple- 
ton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 

Maisonneuve: This word following a title or 
included within parentheses after a note .ndi- 
cates that a copy of the work referred to has 
been seen by the compiler in the bookstore of 
Maisonneuve et Cie., Paris, France. 

Mallet: This word following a title or inclosed 
within parentheses after a note indicates that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of Major Edmond 
Mallet, Washington, D.C. 


Marietti (Pietro), editor. Oratio Domi- 
nica |in CCL. lingvas versa | et | CLXXx. 
charactervm formis| vel nostratibvs vel 
peregrinis expressa | cvrante | Petro 
Marietti| Eqvite Typographo Pontificio 

| Socio Administro | Typographei | 8. 
Consilii de Propaganda Fide | [Print- 
er’s device] | 

Romae | Anno M. DCCC, LXX [1870]. 

Half-title 1 1. title 1 1. dedication 3 1. pp. xi- 
xxvii, 1-319, indexes 4 ll. 49. 

Includes 59 versions of the Lord’s prayer in 
various American dialects, among them the 
Oregonice, p. 303. 

Copies seen: Trumbull. 


Massachusetts Historical Society: These words 
following a title or within parentheses after a 
note indicate that a copy of the work referred 
to has been seen by the compiler in the library 
of that society, Boston, Mass. 


Missionary’s Companion. See Demers 
(M.) et al. 


Montgomerie (Liewt. John Eglinton) and 
De Horsey (A. F.R.) A | few words | 
collected from the | languages | spoken 
by the Indians | in the neighbourhood 
of the | Columbia River & Puget’s 
Sound. | By John E. Montgomerie, 
Lieutenant R.N. | and Algernon F. R. 
De Horsey, Lieutenant, R. R. | 

London: | printed by George Odell, 
18 Princess-street, Cavendish-square. | 
1848. 


Title verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. iii-iv, 
text pp. 5-30, 12°. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook, Clikitat, Cas- 
cade and Squally languages, pp. 1-23.—Numer- 
als in Chinook Jargon, p. 23.—Numerals in 


56 


Montgomerie (J. E.) — Continued. 
Squally, p.24.—Chinook proper and Chehalis 
numbers, p. 24.—Names of places, pp. 25-28.— 
Corruptions used in the trading language, pp. 
28-30. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Sir Thomas 
Phillips, Cheltenham, England. 

Miller (Friedrich). Grundriss | der | 
Sprachwissenschaft | von | D'. Fried- 
rich Miiller | Professor[&c. three lines. ] 

| I. Band | I. Abtheilung. | Einleitung 
in die Sprachwissenschaft[-IV. Band. 
| I. Abtheilung. | Nachtrige zum Grund- 
riss aus den Jahren | 1877-1887]. | 

Wien 1876[-1888].| Alfred Hélder | K. 
K. Universitiits-Buchhiindler, | Roth- 
enthurmstrasse 15. 


4vols. (vol.1 in 2 parts, vol. 2 originally in 4 
divisions, vol. 3 originally in 4 divisions, vol. 4 


N. 


Norris (P. W.)— Continued. 


National Museum: These words following atitle 
or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen 
by the compiler in the library of that institu- 
tion, Washington, D.C. 


New. The New Testament in Chinook. 
In the New York Times, Oct. 12, 1890. 
(Eames.) 
A short extract from asermon in the Chinook 
Jargon, with literal English translation. 
Copied from The Academy. (*) 


New edition. Dictionary of the Chinook 
Jargon. See Dictionary. 


Nicoll (Edward Holland). The Chinook 


language or Jargon. 

In Popular Science Monthly, vol. 35, pp. 257- 
261, New York, 1889, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology, 
Pilling.) 

A conversation in Chinook Jargon, with 
English translation, p. 257.— Origin of the 
Chinook Jargon, showing many words derived 


from the English, French, Chinook, Chehalis, 
etc., onomatopeeia, prefixes, etc., pp. 257-259.— 
Numerals 1-11, 20, 100, p. 260.—Lord’s prayer, 
with interlinear English translation, p. 260. 


Nihaloth: 


Vocabulary See Hale (H.) 


Norris (Philetus W.) The|calumet ofthe 
Coteau, |and other | poetical legends of 


the border. | Also, | a glossary of Indian | 


names, words, and | western provin- 
cialisms. | Together with | aguide-book 
| of the | Yellowstone national park. | 
By P. W. Norris, | five years superin- 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Miiller (F.) — Continued. 


part 1 all published), each part and division 
with an ontside title and two inside titles, 8° 

Vol. 2, part 1, which includes the American 
languages, was originally issued in two divi- 
sions, each with the following special title: 

DieSprachen | der | schlichthaarigen Rassen 
| von | D". Friedrich Miller | Professor [&e. 
eight lines.] | I. Abtheilung. | DieSprachen der 
australischen, der hyperboreischen | und der 
amerikanisehen Rasse [sic]. | 

Wien 1879[-1882]. | Alfred Holder |X. K. 
Hof-und Universitits-Buchhindler | Rothen- 
thurmstrasse 15. 

Die Sprache der Tshinuk, vol. 2, part 1, 
division 2 (pp. 254-256) includes: Die Laute, p. 
254.—Das Nomen, p. 254.—Das Pronomen, p. 
255.—Das Verbum, pp. 255-256.—Die Zahlen- 
ausdriicke, p. 256. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Eames, Watkinson. 


tendent of the Yellowstone national 
park. | All rights reserved. | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
co. | 1883. 


Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 
11. dedication verso blank 1 1. poem verso blank 
1 1. introduction pp. 9-12, contents pp. 13-14, 
illustrations verso blank 1 1. text pp. 17-170, 
notes pp. 171-221, glossary pp. 223-233, guide 
book pp. 235-275, map, sm. 8°. 

Glossary of Indian words and provincialisms, 
pp. 223-233, contains a number of Chinook 
Jargon words. 

Copies seen: National Museum, Pilling, Pow- 
ell. 


Numerals: 
Chinook See Boas (F.) 
Chinook Duflot de Mofras (E.) 
Chinook Fells (M.) 
Chinook Haldeman (S. 8.) 
Chinook Ross (A.) 
Chinook Jargon Cox (R.) 
Chinook Jargon Dictionary. 
Chinook Jargon Gill (J. K.) 
Chinook Jargon Good (J. B.) 
Chinook Jargon Haines (E. M.) 
Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 


Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 


Hazlitt (W.C.) 
Montgomerie (J. E.) 
Nicoll (E. F.) 
Palmer (J.) 

Parker (S.) 
Richardson (A. D.) 
Stuart (G.) 

Swan (J. G.) 

Tate (C. M.) 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 57 


|e 


Palmer (J.) — Continued. 


Palmer (Joel). Journal of travels | over 
the | Rocky mountains,| to the | 
mouth of the Columbia river; | made 
during the years 1845 and 1846: | con- 
taining minute descriptions of the | 
valleys of the Willamette, Umpqua, 
and Clamet; | a general description of 
| Oregon territory; | its inhabitants, 
climate, soil, ‘productions, ete., ete. ; 
| a list of | necessary outfits for emi- 
grants; | and a]| Table of Distances 
from Camp to Camp on the Route. | 
Also; | A Letter from the Rey. H. H. 
Spalding, resident Missionary, for the 
last ten years, | among the Nez Percé 
Tribe of Indians, on the Koos-koos-kee 
River; The | Organic Laws of Oregon 
Territory; Tables of about 300 words 
of the Chinook | Jargon, and about 200 
Words of the Nez Percé Language; a 
Description of | Mount Hood; Inci- 
dents of Travel, &c., &c.| By Joel 
Palmer. | 

Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, 
Walnut street, | between Fourth and 
Fifth. | 1847. 

Cover title: Journal of travels | over the | 
Rocky mountains, |to the|mouth of the 
Columbia river; | made during the years 1845 
and 1846. | By Joel Palmer. | 

Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, Walnut | 
street, | between Fourth and Fifth. | 1847. 

Cover title, title verso copyright notice ete. 1 
1. publishers’ statement pp. iii-iv, text pp. 9-189, 
errata slip, 12°. 

Words (200) used in the Chinook Jargon, 
alphabetically arranged by Jargon words, pp. | 
147-151.—Chinook mode of computing numbers 
(1-500), p. 152. | 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Harvard. 


Journal of travels | over the | Rocky | 
mountains, | to the| mouth of the 
Columbia river ;| made during the years 
1845 and 1846: | containing minute 
descriptions of the | valleys of the 
Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; | a 
general description of | Oregon terri- 
tory; | its inhabitants, climate, soil, 
productions, ete., ete.;|a list of | 
necessary outfits for emigrants; | and 
a| Table of Distances from Camp to 
Camp on the Route. | Also; | A Letter 
from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident 
Missionary, for the last ten years,— 


among the Nez Percé Tribe of Indians, 
on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | 
Organic Laws of Oregon Territory ; 
Tables of about 300 words of the Chi- 
nook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of 
the Nez Pereé Language; a Description 
of | Mount Hood; Incidents of Travel, 
&c., &e. | By Joel Palmer. | 
Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, 
Walnut street, | between Fourth and 
Fifth. | 1850. 
Title verso copyright notice ete. 11. publish- 
ers’ statement pp. lii-iv, text pp. 9-189, 12°. 
Linguistic contents as under titlenext above. 
Copies seen: British Museum. 


Journal of travels | over the | Rocky 
mountains, | to the |mouth of the 
Columbia river ;| made during the years 
1845 and 1846: | containing minute 
descriptions of the | valleys of the 
Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; | a 
general description of | Oregon terri- 
tory; |its inhabitants, climate, soil, 
productions, etc., etc.;|a list of | 
necessary outfits for emigrants; | and 
a| Table of Distances from Camp to 
Camp on the Route. | Also; | A Letter 
from the Rev. H. H. Spalding, resident 
Missionary, for the last ten years, | 
among the Nez Percé Tribe of Indians, 
on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | 
Organic Laws of Oregon Territory; 
Tables of about 300 words of the Chi- 
nook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of 
the Nez Percé Language; a Description 
of | Mount Hood; Incidents of Travel, 
&c., &c. | By Joel Palmer. | 

Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, 
Walnut street, | between Fourth and 
Fifth. | 1851. 

Title verso copyright notice ete. 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. publishers’ advertisement 
pp. v-vi, index [contents] pp. 7-viii [sie], text 
pp. 9-189, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 
Copies seen: Boston Athenzeum. 


—— Journal of travels | over the | Rocky 


mountains, | to the | mouth of the 
Columbia river ; | made during the years 
1845 and 1846: | containing minute 
descriptions of the | valleys of the 
Willamette, Umpqua, and Clamet; Ja 


58 


Palmer (J.)— Continued. 

general description of | Oregon terri- 
tory; | its inhabitants, climate, soil, 
productions, etc., etc.;|a list of 
necessary outfits for emigrants; | and a 
| Table of Distances from Camp to 
Camp on the Route. | Also; | A Letter 
from the Rey. H. H. Spalding, resident 
Missionary, for the last ten years, | 

among the Nez Percé Tribe of Indians, 
on the Koos-koos-kee River; The | 

Organic Laws of Oregon Territory ; 
Tables of about 300 words of the Chin- 
ook | Jargon, and about 200 Words of 
the Nez Percé Language; a Description 
of | Mount Hood; Incidents of Travel, 
&c., &c. | By Joel Palmer. | 

Cincinnati: | J. A. & U. P. James, 
Walnut street, | between Fourth and 
Fifth. | 1852. 

Title verso copyright notice etc. 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. publishers’ advertisement 
pp. v-vi, index [contents] pp. 7-viii [sic], text 
pp. 9-189, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Parker (fev. Samuel). Journal | of an 
| exploring tour | beyond the Rocky 
mountains, | under the direction of the 
| A. B. C. F. M. | Performed in the 
years | 1835, 36, and 37; | containing 
| a description of the geography, geol- 
ogy, climate, and | productions; and 
the number, manners, and | customs of 
the natives. | With a | map of Oregon 
territory. | By Rev. Samuel Parker, 
A. M. | 

Ithaca, N. Y. | Published by the 
author. | Mack, Andrus, & Woodruff, 
Printers. | 1838. 

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-vi, contents pp. vii-xii, text pp. 13-371, map 
and plates, 12°. 

Vocabulary (90 words) of the Chinook [Jar- 
gon] language as spoken about Fort Vancouver, 
pp. 336-338.—Numerals 1-10, 20, 40, 100, p. 338. 

Copies seen: Boston Athenzeum, Boston Pub- 
lic, British Museum, Congress, Eames, Mallet, 
Trumbull. 

Journal | of an| exploring tour | 
beyond the Rocky mountains, | under 
the direction of the| American board of 
commissions [sic] for foreign missions, 
| in the years 1835, 736, and 737; | con- 
taining | a description of the geog- 
raphy, geology, climate, productions | 
of the country, and the number, man- 
ners, and | customs of the natives: | 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Parker (S.) — Continued. 


with a | map of Oregon territory. | By 
rev. Samuel Parker, A. M. | Second 
edition. | 

Ithaca, N. Y.| Published by the 
author. | Mack, Andrus, & Woodruff, 
printers. | 1840. 

Title verso copyright notice 11. recommen- 
dations pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v—viii, preface to 
the second edition pp. ix—x, contents pp. xi-xvi, 
text pp. 17-384, appendix pp. 385-399, addenda 
pp. 399-400, map and plate, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp. 396-398. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Geological 


The edition: Edinburgh, 1841, 8°, does not 
contain the Chinook Jargon material. (Con- 
gress.) 


— Journal | of an| exploring tour | 


beyond the Rocky mountains, | under 
the direction of the | A. B.C. F. M. | in 
the years 1835, ’36, and ’37; | containing 
| a description of the geography, ge- 
ology, climate, produc- | tions of the 
country, and the numbers, manners, | 
and customs of the natives: | with a | 
map of Oregon territory. | By rey. 
Samuel Parker, A.M. | Third edition. | 

Ithaca, N. Y.| Mack, Andrus, & 
Woodruff. | Boston: Crocker & Brew- 
ster.—New-York: Dayton & Saxton; | 
Collins, Keese, & co.—Philadelphia: 
Grigg & Elliot. | London: Wiley & 
Putnam, | 1842. 

Title verso copyright notice (1838) and names 
of printers 1 ]. recommendations pp. ili-iv, 
preface pp. v—viii, preface to the second and 
third editions pp. ix—x, contents pp. xi-xvVi, 
text pp.17-394, appendix pp. 395-408, map and 
plate, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 
405-408. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenzum, 
Eames, Geological Survey, Mallet. 


Journal | of an | exploring tour | 
beyond the Rocky mountains, | under 
the direction of the| A. B. C. F. M.| con- 
taining |a description of the geography, 
geology, climate, pro- | ductions of the 
country, and the numbers, man- | ners, 
and customs of the natives: | with a | 
map of Oregon territory. | By rev. Sam- 
uel Parker, A. M. | Fourth edition. | 
Ithaca, N. Y. | Andrus, Woodruff, & 
Gauntlett. | Boston: Crocker & Brew- 
ster.—New York: Huntington & Sav- 
age; | Robinson, Pratt, & Co.—Phila- 


— 


CHINOOKAN 


Parker (S.)— Continued. 


delphia: Thomas, Cowper- | thwait & 
Co.—London: Wiley & Putnam, | 1844. 

Pp. i-xvi, 17-416, map, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 
413-416. 

Copies seen: One in the library of W. W. 
Beach, Yonkers, N. Y. 


— Journal j of an | exploring tour | 


beyond the Rocky mountains, | under 
the direction of the| A. B. C. F. M.| con- 
taining|a description of the geography, 
geology, climate, | productions of the 
country, and the numbers, | manners, 
and customs of the natives: | with a | 
map of Oregon territory. | By rev. Sam- 
uel Parker, A. M. | Fifth edition. | 

Auburn: | J.C. Derby & co.; | New- 
York: Mark H. Newman & co.,—Gen- 
eva: G. H. Derby & co. | Cincinnati: 
Derby, Bradley & co. | 1846. 

Title verso copyright notice etc. 11. recom- 
mendations pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v-vii, preface 
to the fifth edition p. ix, contents pp. xi-xvi, 
text pp. 17-422, map and plate, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
pp. 419-421. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Georgetown, 


' Harvard. 


Samuel Parker, clergyman, born in Ashfield, 
N. H., April 23. 1779; died in Ithaca, ‘N. Y., 
March 24,1866. He was graduated at Williams 
in 1806 and at Andover Theological Seminary 
in 1810, became a missionary in western New 
York, and subsequently was in charge of Con- 
gregational churches in Massachusetts and 
New York. Mr. Parker originated the mission 
of the American board in Oregon, traveled there 
in 1835-1837, subsequently lectured in many 
eastern States on the character of that territory, 
and did much to establish the claims of the 
United States Government to the lands, and to 
induce emigrants to settle there. He is also 
said to have been the first to suggest the possi- 
bility of constructing a railroad through the 
Rocky mountains to the Pacific ocean.—A pple- 
ton's Cyclop, of Am. Biog. 


Periodical: 


Chinook Jargon See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 


Pilling: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that acopy of 
the work referred to is in the possession of the 
compiler of this catalogue. 


Piiling (James Constantine). Smithson- 


ian institution—Bureau of ethnology | 
J. W. Powell director | Proof-sheets | of 
a | bibliography | of | the languages | 
of the | North American Indians | by | 
James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib- 
uted only to collaborators) | 


LANGUAGES. 59 


Pilling (J. C.) — Continued. 

Washington | Government printing 
office | 1885 

Title verso blank 1 1. notice signed J. W. 
Powell p. iii, preface pp.v—viii, introduction pp. 
ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of 
libraries referred to by initials pp. xxxvii- 
xxxviii, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix—xl, text 
pp. 1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, 
index of languages and dialects pp. 1091-1135, 
plates, 4°. 

Arranged alphabetically by name of author, 
translator, or first word of title. One hundred 
and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side 
ot the sheet only. 


Pinart (Alphonse L.) [Linguistic mate- 
rial relating to the Chinookan fam- 


ily.] *) 

Manuscripts in possession of their author, 
who, some years ago, in response to my request 
for a list of his linguistic material,}wrote me as 
follows: 

‘“‘T have collected, during my fifteen years of 
traveling vocabularies, texts, songs, general 
linguistic material, etc.,in the following lan- 
guages and dialects . . . and some relating 
to the Chinook. It is impossible at present to 
give you the number of pages, etc., as most of 
it is contained in my note-books, and has not 
as yet been put into shape. 

Platzmann (Julius). Verzeichniss | einer 
Auswahl | amerikanischer | Gramma- 
tiken, | Woérterbiicher, Katechismen | 
u. s, w. | Gesammelt | von | Julius 
Platzmann. | 

Leipzig, 1876. | K. F. Koéhler’s anti- 
quarium, | Poststrasse 17. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. quotation 
from Rouquette verso blank 11. text, alphabet- 
ically arranged by family names, pp. 1-38, 8°. 

List of works in Chinuk, p. 10. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling, 
Trumbull, Wellesley. 

Pott (August Friedrich). Doppelung | 
(Reduplikation, Gemination) | als | 
eines der wichtigsten Bildungsmittel 
der Sprache, | beleuchtet | aus Sprachen 
aller Welttheile | durch | Aug. Friedr. 
Pott, Dr. | Prof. der Allgemeinen 
Sprachwiss. an der Univ. zu Halle [&c. 
two lines. ] | 

Lemgo & Detmold, | im Verlage der 
Meyer’schen Hof buchhandlung 1862. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso quo- 
tation11.Vorwort pp.iii-iv, Inhaltsverzeichniss 
pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-304, list of books on versoof 
back cover, 8°. 

Reduplicate words in Chinook, p. 114; in 
Lower Chinook, pp. 37, 41, 60, 61, 62, 90. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Eames. 


60 


Pott (A. F.) — Continued. [ 
Kinleitung in die allgemeine Sprach- | 
| 


wissenchaft. 

In Internationale Zeitschrift fiir allgemeine 
Sprachwissenschaft, vol. 1, pp. 1-68, 329-354, vol. | 
2, pp. 54-115, 209-251, vol. 3, pp. 110-126, 249-275, | 
Supp. pp. 1-193, vol. 4, pp. 67-96, vol. 5, pp. 3- 
18, Leipzig, 1884-1887, and Heilbronn, 1889, large | 
8°. 

The literature of American linguistics, vol. 4, 
pp. 67-96. This portion was published after Mr. 
Pott’s death, which occurred July 5,1887. The | 
general editor of the Zeitschrift, Mr. Techmer, 
states in a note that Pott’s paper is continued 
from the manuscripts which he left, and that it 
is to close with the languages of Australia. In | 
the section of American linguistics publica- 
tions in all the more important stocks of North 
America are mentioned, with brief characteri- 
zation. 


Powell: This word following a title or within | 
parentheses after a note indicates that acopyof | 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piier in the library of Major J. W. Powell, 
Washington, D.C. 


Powell (Maj. John Wesley). Indian lin- 
guistic families of America north of | 
Mexico. By J. W. Powell. | 


In Bureau of Ethnology, seventh annual | 
report, pp. 1-142, Washington, 1891, royal 8°. 
Chinookan family, with a list of synonyms | 
and principal tribes, derivation’of the name, | 
habitat, ete., pp. 63-65. 
Issued separately with title-page as follows: | 


Indian linguistic families of America | 
| north of Mexico | by | J. W. Powell | 
| Extract from the seventh annual 
report of the Bureau of ethnology | 
[Design] | 

Washington | Government printing 
office | 1891 

Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title | 
p. 1, contents pp. 3-6, text pp. 7-142, map, royal 
les 

Linguistic contents as under title nextabove. | 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling, Powell. 


Practical Chinook [Jargon] vocabulary. 
See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 


Prayers: 
Cathlascon See Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) 
Chinook Blanchet (I. N.) 


Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 


Bulner (T.S.) 
Demers (M.) et al. 


Priest (Josiah). American antiquities, | 
and | discoveries in the west: | being | 
an exhibition of the evidence | that an 
ancient population of partially civilized | 
nations,| differing entirely from those of 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Priest (J.) — Continued. 

the present In- | dians, peopled America, 
many centuries before | its discovery by 
Columbus. | And | inquiries into their 
origin, | with a | copious description | 
Of many of their stupendous Works, 
now in ruins. | With | conjectures of 
what may have | become of them. | Com- 
piled | from travels, authentic sources, 
and the researches | of | Antiquarian 
Societies. | By Josiah Priest. | 

Albany: | printed by Hoffman and 
White, No. 71, State-Street. | 1833. 

Folded frontispiece, title verso copyright 
notice 11. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v-viii, 
text pp. 9-400, map and plates, 8°. 

Rafinesque (C. 8.), Languages of Oregon— 
Chopunish and Chinue, pp. 395-397. 

Copies seen; Harvard. 


American antiquities, | and | dis- 
coveries in the west: | being | an exhi- 
bition of the evidence | that an ancient 
population of partially civilized na- 
tions, | differing entirely from those of 
the present In-| dians, peopled America, 
many centuries before | its discovery by 
Columbus. | And | inquiries into their 
origin,| with a | copious description | Of 
many of their stupendous Works, now 
in ruins. | With| conjectures concerning 
what may have| become of them. | Com- 
piled | from travels, authentic sources, 
and the researches | of | Antiquarian 
Societies. | By Josiah Priest. | Third 
Edition Revised. | 

Albany: | printed by Hoffman and 
White, | No. 71, State-Street. | 1833. 

Folded frontispiece, title verso copyright 
notice 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v—viii, 
text pp. 9-400, map and plate, 8°. 

Rafinesque (C. S.), Tabular view of the 
American generic languages, pp. 309-312. 
Languages of Oregon—Chopunish and 
Chinue, pp. 395-397. 


Copies seen: Boston Public, Congress, Eames, 
Harvard, Massachusetts Historical Society. 

The Brinley copy, no. 5435, sold for $1.50. 

These articles are omitted in the later editions 
of Priest’s work. 


Primer: 


Chinook Jargon See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 


Proper names : 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Clakama 


See Catlin (G.) 
Stanley (J. M.) 
Stanley (J. M.) 


[Prosch (Thomas W.)] The complete 
| Chinook Jargon | or | Indian trade 


CHINOOKAN 


Prosch (T. W.) — Continued. 
language | of | Oregon, Washington, 
British Co- | lumbia, Alaska, Idaho | 
And other ports of the North Pacific | 
Coast. | The best yet issued. | 

G. Davies & co., | publishers. | 709 
Front street, Seattle, | 1888. 

Cover title: Dictionary | of the | Chinook, | the 
| Indian trade language | of | Oregon, Washing- 
ton, Idaho, | British Columbia and | Alaska. | 
Chinook-English and English-Chinook. | 


LANGUAGES. 61 
Prosch (T. W.) — Continued. 
1888. | G. Davies & co., | publishers, | Seattle, 
W.'T. | Copyright 1888 by G. Davies. 
Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 
3-5, text pp. 7-40, 18°. 
Chinook-English, alphabetically arranged, 
pp. 7-26.—English-Chinook, double columns, 
alphabetically arranged, pp. 27-38.—Conversa- 
tion in Chinook, free translation, pp. 89-40.— 
Lord's prayer with interlinear English trans- 
lation, p. 40. 
Copies seen: Pilling. 


Q. 


Quaritch: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the bookstore of Bernard Quaritch, 
London, Eng. 

Quaritch (Bernard). Catalogue | of 
books on the | history, geography, | 
and of | the philology | of | America, 
Australasia, Asia, Africa. | I. Historical 
geography, voyages, and | travels. | II. 
History, ethnology, and philology | of 
America. | ILI. History, topography, 
and ethnology | of Asia, Polynesia, and 
Africa. | Offered for Cash at the affixed 
net prices by | Bernard Quaritch. | 

London: | 15 Piccadilly, June 1885 to 
October 1886. | 1886. 


Title verso contents 1 1. catalogue pp. 2747- 
3162, index pp. i-lxii, 8°. Lettered on the back: 
QUARITCH’S | GENERAL | CATALOGUE | PART XII. 
| VOYAGES | AND | TRAVELS | AMERICANA | AND | 
ORIENTALIA | LONDON 1886. This volume com- 
prises nos. 362-364 (June, July,and August, 1885) 


of the paper-covered series, with the addition of | 


a special title and a general index. 

American languages, pp. 3021-3042, contains 
two titles of books under the heading Chinook, 
p. 3026. 

The complete ‘‘General Catalogue,” of which 
the above is a portion, comprises 15 parts, each 
bound in red cloth, paged consecutively 1-4066, 


and a sixteenth part containing a general index | 


of 427 pages in treble columns. Each volume 


has its own special title and index, with the — 


Quaritch (B.) — Continued. 
title of the series and the number of the part 
lettered on the back. Excepting the index, it 
was originally issued as nos. 332-375 of the 
paper-covered series, from November, 1880, to 
August, 1887, at which date the publication 
was discontinued. ‘The index is dated 1892. 
Copies seen: Kames. 
A large-paper editign with title as follows: 


—— A general | catalogue of books | offered 
to the public at the affixed prices | by 
| Bernard Quaritch | Vol. I[-VIT] | 
London :|15 Piccadilly, | 1887[-1892]. 
7 vols. royal 8°. 
American languages, as under the preceding 
title, vol. 5, pp. 3021-3042. 
Copies seen: Lenox. 
This edition was published at 15/. for the set, 
including the seventh or index volume. 


—— No. 86. London, December, 1887. | A 
rough list| of | valuable and rare books, 
| comprising | the choicest portions of 
Various Libraries, and many very cheap 
works of every class of Literature, | at 
greatly reduced prices, | offered by | 
Bernard Quaritch, 15, Piccadilly, W. 
Cover title: ‘‘The miscellaneous and the 
musical library of Mr. William Chappell,” ete., 
catalogue with heading as above, pp. 1-128, 8°. 
American languages, pp. 1-13, contains titles 
of afew works giving information relating to 
the Chinook Jargon, p. 7. 
Copies seen; Eames, Pilling. 


62 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


R. 


Rafinesque (Constantine Samuel). At- 
lantic journal, | and | friend of knowl- 
edge. | In eight numbers. | Containing 
about 160 original articles and tracts on 
Natural and | Historical Sciences, the 
Description of about 150 New Plants, | 
and 100 New Animals or Fossils. Many 
Vocabularies of Langua- | ges, Histor- 
ical and Geological Facts, &c. &c. &e. 
| By C.S. Rafinesque, A.M... Ph.D. 
| Professor of Historical and Natural 
Sciences, Member of seve- | ral learned 
societies in Europe and America, &c. | 
[Quotation and list of figures, six 


lines. ] | 
Philadelphia: | 1832-1833. | (Two 


dollars.) 


Tabular view recto blank 1 1. title verso in- 
dex 1 ]. iconography and illustrations etc.1 1. 
text pp. 1-202, 205-212, 8°. Originally issued in 
numbers (1-8, and extra of no. 3), from the 
‘spring of 1832” to the ‘‘ winter of 1833.” 

American history. Tabular View of the Amer- 
ican Generic Languages, and Original Nations, 
including the Chinue, pp. 6-8. 

Languages of Oregon, Chopunish and Chinuc 
(pp. 133-134) contains a vocabulary, English 
and Chinuc, thirty-three words (including 
numerals 1-10), from Cox, Lewis, and other 
sources, p. 134. 

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, British Mu- 
seum, Congress, Eames. 

These two articles reprinted in: 

Priest (J.), American antiquities, pp. 309-312, 
395-397, Albany, 1833, 8°. 

Constantine Samuel Rafinesque, botanist, 
born in Galatz, a suburb of Constantinople, 
Turkey, in 1784, died in Philadelphia, Pa., Sep- 
tember 18,1842. He was of French parentage, 
and his father, amerchant, died in Philadelphia 
about 1791. The son came to Philadelphia with 
his brother in 1802, and, after traveling through 
Pennsylvania and Delaware, returned with a 
collection of botanical specimens in 1805 and 
went to Sicily, where he spent ten years as a 
merchant and in the study of botany. In 1815 
he sailed for New York, but was shipwrecked 
on the Long Island coast, and lost his valuable 
books, collections, manuscripts, and drawings. 
In 1818 he went to the west and became pro- 
fessor of botany in Transylvania University, 
Lexington, Ky. Subsequently he traveled and 
lectured in various places, endeavored to estab- 
lish a magazine and botanic garden, but with- 
out success, and finally settled in Philadelphia, 
where he resided until his death, and where he 
published The Atlantic Journal and Friend of 
Knowledge; a Cyclopedic Journaland Review, 
of which only eightnumbers appeared (1832-33). 
The number of genera and species that he 


Rafinesque (C. 8.) — Continued. 
introduced into his works produced great con- 
fusion. A gradual deterioration is found in 
Rafinesque’s botanical writings from 1819 till 
1830, when the passion for establishing new 
genera and species seems to have become a 
monomania with him. He assumed thirty to 
one hundred years as the average time required 
for the production of a new species and five 
hundred to a thousand years for a new genus. 
It is said that he wrote a paper describing 
‘“twelve new species of thunder and lightning.” 
Inaddition to translations and unfinished botan- 
ical and zodlogical works, he was the author of 
numerous books and pamphlets.—Appleton’s 
Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


[Reade(John).] Chinook versus Greek. 
In Montreal Gazette, vol. 119, no. 239, p. 4, 
Montreal, October 6, 1890. (Pilling.) 
A review of Hale (H.), An international 
idiom. 
Contains a general discussion of the Chinook 
Jargon, with a number of examples. 


Reviews: 
Chinook Jargon See Charencey (C. de.) 
Chinook Jargon Crane (A.) 
Chinook Jargon Leland (C. G.) 
Chinook Jargon Reade (J.) 
Chinook Jargon ‘Western. 


Richardson (Albert Deane). Beyond the 
Mississippi: | from the great river to 
the great ocean. | Life and adventure 
| on the | prairies, mountains, and 
Pacific coast. | With more than two 
hundred illustrations, from photo- 
graphs and original | sketches, of the 
prairies, deserts, mountains, rivers, 
mines, | cities, Indians, trappers, pion- 
eers, and great natural | curiosities of 
the new states and territories. | 1857- 
1867. | By | Albert D. Richardson, | 
author of ‘Field, dungeon and escape.’ 
| [Iwo lines advertisement. ] | 
Hartford, Conn., | American pub- 
lishing company. | National publishing 
company, | Philadelphia, Pa., Cincin- 
nati, O., Chicago, Il1., St. Louis, Mo., | 
New Orleans, La., Atlanta, Ga., Rich- 
mond, Va.| Bliss & company, New 


York. | 1867. 

Engraved title: Beyond | the | Mississippi | 
Albert D. Richardson. 

Map, engraved title verso blank, title verso 
copyright notice 1 1. extracts from Whittier and 
Longfellow verso blank 1 1. prefatory pp. i-il, 
illustrations pp. iii-vii, contents pp. ix—xvi, text 
pp. 17-572, 8°. 

Short vocabulary (20 words, alphabetically 


CHINOOKAN 


‘Richardson (A. D.) — Continued. 


arranged by English words) of the Chinook 
Jargon, and the numerals 1-10, 20,30, 100, 1000 
in the same, pp. 502-503. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenzum, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Trumbull. 

Some copies vary slightly in the imprint, 
and omit the date. (Eames, Harvard.) Another 
edition: Hartford, 1869, 8°. (*) 

A later edition with title-page as follows: 


— Beyond the Mississippi: | from the 


great river to the great ocean. | Life 
and adventure |on the | prairies, moun- 
tains, and Pacific coast. | With more 
than two hundred illustrations, from 
photographs and original | sketches, 
of the prairies, deserts, mountains, 
rivers, mines, | cities, Indians, trap- 
pers, pioneers, and great natural | 
curiosities of the new states and terri- 
tories. | New edition. | Written down 
to summer of 1869. | By | Albert D. 
Richardson, | author of ‘Field, dun- 
geon and escape,’ and ‘Personal | his- 
tory of Ulysses 8. Grant,’ | [Two lines 
advertisement. } | 

Hartford: | American publishing 
company, | 1875. 

2 p. ll. pp. i-xvi, 17-572, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Trumbull. 


Albert Deane Richardson, journalist, born 
in Franklin, Mass., October 6, 1833, died in 
New York city December 2, 1869. He was edu- 
cated at the district school of his native village 
and at Holliston academy. At eighteen years 
of age he went to Pittsburg, Pa., where he 
formed a newspaper connection, wrote a farce 
for Barney Williams, and appeared a few times 
on the stage. In 1857 he went to Kansas, 
taking an active part in the political struggle 
of the territory, attending antislavery meet- 
ings, makingspeeches, and corresponding about 
the issues of the hour with the Boston Journal. 
He was also secretary of the territorial legisla- 
ture. Two years later he went to Pike’s Peak, 
the gold fever being then at its height, in com- 
pany with Horace Greeley, between whom and 
Richardson a lasting friendship was formed. In 
the autumn of 1859 he made a journey through 
the southwestern territories, and sent accounts 
of his wanderings to eastern journals. During 
the winter that preceded the civil war he vol- 
unteered to go through the south as secret cor- 
respondent of the Tribune, and returned, after 
many narrow escapes, just before the firing on 
Sumter. He next entered the field as war cor- 
respondent, and for two years alternated 
between Virginia and the southwest, being 
present at many battles. On the night of May 
3, 1863, he undertook, in company with Junius 
Henri Browne, a fellow correspondent of the 


LANGUAGES. 63 


Richardson (A. D.) — Continued. 


Tribune, and Richard T. Colburn, of the New 
York World, to run the batteries of Vicksburg 
on two barges, which were lashed to a steam 
tug. After they had been under fire for more 
than half an hour, a large shell struck the tug, 
and, bursting in the furnace, threw the coals on 
the barges and then set them on fire. Out of 
34 men, 18 were killed or wounded and 16 were 
captured, the correspondents among them. ‘The 
Confederate government would neither release 
nor exchange the Tribune men, who, after 
spending eighteen months in seven southern 
prisons, escaped from Salisbury, N.C.,in the 
dead of winter, and, walking 400 miles, arrived 
within the national lines at Strawberry Plains, 
Tenn., several months before the close of the 
war.—Appleton's Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Ross (Alexander). Adventures | of the 


first settlers on the | Oregon or Colum- 
bia river: | being | a narrative of the 
expedition fitted out by | John Jacob 
Astor, | to establish the | ‘‘ Pacific fur 
company;” | with an account of some 
| Indian tribes on the coast of the 
Pacific. | By Alexander Ross, | one of 
the adventurers. | 

London: | Smith, Elder and co., 65 
Cornhill. | 1849. 


Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-v, contents pp. vi-xv, errata p. [xvi], text pp. 
1-352, 12°. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook (200 words) and 
numerals (1-5000), pp. 342-348.—Vocabulary of 
the Chinook Jargon (30 words), p. 349. 


Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston 
Atheneum, British Museum, Bureau of Eth- 
nology, Congress, Trumbull. 


Alexander Ross, author, born in Nairnshire, 
Scotland, May 9, 1783, died in Colony Gardens 
(now in Winnipeg, Manitoba), Red River Set- 
tlement, British North America, October 23, 
1856. He came to Canada in 1805, taught in 
Glengarry, U. C., and in 1810 joined John Jacob 
Astor’s expedition to Oregon. Until 1824 he 
was a fur-trader and in the service of the Hud- 
son Bay Company. About 1825 he removed to 
the Red River settlement and was 4 member 
of the council of Assineboia, and was sheriff 
of the Red River settlement for several years. 
He was for fifteen years a resident in the territo- 
ries of the Hudson Bay Company, and has given 
the result of his observations in the works: 
Adventures of the First Settlers on the Oregon 
or Columbia Iiver; being a Narrative of the 
Expedition fitting out by John Jacob Astor to 
establish the Pacific Fur Company, with an 
Account of some Indian Tribes on the Coast of 
the Pacific (London, 1849) ; The Fur-Hunters of 
the Far West, a Narrative of Adventures in 
the Oregon and Rocky Mountains (2 vols. i855), 
and The Red River Settlement (1856).—A pple- 
ton’s Oyclop.of Am. Biog. 


64 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


S. 


Sabin (Joseph). A | dictionary | of | 
Books relating to America, | from its 
discovery to the present time. | By 
Joseph Sabin. | Volume I[-XX]. | 
[Three lines quotation. ] | 

New-York: | Joseph Sabin, 84 Nassau 
street. | 1868[-1892]. 

20 vols. 8°. Still in course of publication. 
Parts exv-exvi, which begin vol. 20, reach the 
article ‘‘Smith.’’ Now edited by Mr. Wilber- 
force Eames. 

Contains, passim, titles of books in and 
relating to the Chinookan languages. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Geological 
Survey, Lenox. 


— See Field (T. W.) 


[St. Onge (Rev. Louis Napoleon).] His- 

tory of the old testament. | Age I. | 

From Adam to Abraham, | Containing 

2083 Years. 

[Kamloops, B. C.: 1892.] 

No title-page, heading only; text in the 
Chinook Jargon, stenographic characters, with 
English headings in italics, pp. 1-24, 16°. 

Forms a supplement to Le Jeune (J. M. R.), 
Kamloops Wawa, vol. 2, nos. 1-6 (nos. 33-38 of 
the series), July 3-August 7, 1892. 

Oopies seen: Pilling. 

— + | Bible history | translated | into 
the Chinook Jargon by | the Rey. L. N. 
Saint Onge Missionary | among the 
Yakamas and other Indian tribes of 
the Territo-| ries of Washington, 
Idaho, Montana, and of | Oregon. | A. 
M.D.G. | 1892. 

Manuscript; title verso blank 11. preface 13 
leaves, written on one side only, text (in the 
Jargon with interlinear English translation, 
written on both sides) Il. 1-142, 4°. In possession 
of Dr. T. 8. Bulmer, Cedar City, Utah, who 
intends incorporating it in one of his publica- 

_ tions on the Chinook Jargon. Father St. Onge 
informs me that he intends publishing this 
paper separately also, under the title of 
‘*Chinook Jargon translation of the Epitome 
Historie Sacre.” 

—- Chinook Jargon Dictionary | by | L. 

N. Saintonge, Ptre. | English-Chinook 

Jargon. | Part first. | 

TOY eNe pi.) Wis Sa Asi | O92.al PAC ae, 
D.G. 

Manuscript; title verso note 1 1, text (alpha- 
betically arranged by English words) pp. 1-184, 
8°. Recorded in a blank book bound in leather. 
In possession of its author. 

Chinook Wawa [writing], pp. 1-181.—Sounds 
of the letters used, pp. 182-184, 


St. Onge (L. N.) — Continued. 

The dictionary contains probably 6,000 words. 

Concerning the second part of this work, 
Father Saintonge writes me, under date of 
January 24, 1893, as follows: 

‘“T am not now working at my dictionary 
(second part) because I am not well enough, but 
I intend to finish if as soon as Ican. Iecan not 
have it published now because I have not the 
means for that purpose. You may say it is 
intended for publication some time in the 
future. The second part will not be so volu- 
minous as the first; the list of words will not 
be so great, but the definitions will take greater 
space, as I shall give the etymology and source 
from which each Jargon word comes.” 


— Hymns in the Chinook Jargon. 
In Bulmer (T. S8.), Hymns, songs, &c., in 
Chinook Jargon (manuscript), ll. 34-45. 


—— [Legends in the Chinook Jargon. ] 
In Bulmer (T. S8.), Appendix to Bulmer’s 
Chinook Jargon grammar and dictionary (man- 
uscript) ll. 26-57, 4°. 
Accompanied by an interlinear translation in 
English. 


— See Bulmer (T.S.) 


—— See Demers (M.), Blanchet (F.N.) 
and St. Onge (L.N.) 


‘The subject of this sketch, the Rey. Louis 
N. St. Onge, of St. Alphonse de Liguori parish, 
was born [in the village of St. Cesaire] a few 
miles south of Montreal, Canada, April 14, 1842. 
He finished his classical course when yet very 
young, after which he studied law for two 
years. Feeling called to another field, he gave 
up this career in order to prepare himself to 
work for God’s glory as an Indian missionary 
in the diocese of Nesqually, Washington Terri- 
tory. 

‘A year and a half before his ordination, 
Right Rev. A. M. Blanchet, his bishop, ordered 
him to Vancouver, W. T., where he was occu- 
pied as a professor of natural philosophy, 
astronomy, and other branches in the Holy 
Angel's College. All his spare time was conse- 
crated to the study of the Indian languages, in 
which he is to-day one of the most expert, so 
that he was ready to go on active missionary 
work a3 soon as ordained. 

‘‘The first years of his missionary life were 
occupied in visiting different tribes of Indians 
and doing other missionary work in the Terri- 
tories of Washington, Idaho, Montana, and 
other Rocky Mountain districts, among Indians 
and miners. After such labors he was then 
appointed to take charge of the Yakamas, 
Klikitats, Winatchas, Wishrams, Pshwanwa- 
pams, Narchez, and other Indian tribes inhab- 
iting the central part of Washington Territory. 
Having no means of support in his new mis- 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 65 


St. Onge (L. N.) — Continued. 

Sion, Bishop Blanchet, in his self-sacrificing 
charity for the Indians of his extensive diocese, 
furnished hini with the necessary outfit; and 
with a number of willing though unskilled 
Indians as apprentice carpenters, the young 
missionary set to work to rebuild the St. 
Joseph's mission, destroyed in 1856 by a party 
of vandals called the Oregon Volunteers, who 
had been sent to fight the Yakamas. 

“After four years of labor, he and his 
devoted companion, Mr. J. B. Boulet (now 
ordained and stationed among the Tulalip In- 
dians) had the satisfaction to see not only a 
comfortable residence, but also a neat church, 
erected, and a fine tract of land planted with 
fruit trees, and in a profitable state of cultiva- 
tion, where formerly only ruin and desolation 
reigned. 

“His health breaking down entirely, he was 
forced to leave his present and daily increasing 
congregation of neophites. Wishing to give him 
the best medical treatment, Bishop Blanchet 
sent Father St. Onge to his native land with a 
leave of absence until his health would be 
restored. During his eighteen months’ stay in 
a hospital he, however, utilized his time by 
composing and printing two small Indian 
books, containing rules of grammar, catechism, 
hymns, and Christian prayers in Yakama and 
Chinook languages—the former for children, 
the latter for the use of missionaries on the 
Pacific coast. 

“By the advice of his physician he then 
undertook a voyage to Europe, where he spent 
nearly a year in search of health. Back again 
to this country, he had charge of a congregation 
for a couple of years in Vermont; and now he 
is the pastor of the two French churches of 


Glens Falls and Sandy Hill, in the diocese of 


Albany, New York. 

“Father St. Onge, though aman of uncom- 
mon physical appearance, stoutly built and six 
feet and four inches in height, has not yet 
entirely recovered his health and strength. The 
French population of Glens Falls have good 
cause for feeling very much gratified with the 
present condition of the affairs of the parish of 
St. Alphonse de Liguori, and should receive the 
hearty congratulations of the entire commu- 
nity. Father St. Onge, aman of great erudition, 
a devoted servant to the church, and possessing 
a personality whose geniality and courtesy 
have won him a place in the hearts of his peo- 
ple, has by his faithful application to his 
parish developed it and brought out all that 


was to inure to its benefit and further advance | 


its interests.” —Glens Falls (N. Y.) Republican, 
March 28, 1889. 

Father St. Onge remained at Glens Falls until 
October, 1891, when increasing infirmities com- 


pelled him to retire permanently from the min- | 


istry. He is now living with his brother, the 
rector of St. Jean Baptiste church, in Troy, N. 
Y. Since his retirement he has compiled an 
English-Chinook Jargon dictionary of about 


CHIN 5 


St. Onge (L. N.) — Continued. 
six thousand words, and this he intends to 
supplement with a corresponding Jargon-Eng- 
lish part. He has also begun the preparation 
of a Yakama dictionary, which he hopes to 
make much more complete than that of Father 
Pandosy, published in Dr. Shea’s Library of 
American linguistics. 

I have adopted the spelling of his name as it 
appears on the title-page of Bishop Demers’s 
Chinook Jargon dictionary, though the true 
spelling, and the one he uses now, is Saint- 
onge—that of a French province in which his 
ancestors lived and from which four or five 
families came in 1696, all adopting the name. 
His family name is Payant. 

Sayce (Archibald Henry). Introduction 
to the | science of language. | By | A. 
H. Sayce, | deputy professor of compar- 
ative philology in the university of 
Oxford. | In two volumes, | Vol.I[-IT]. 

| [Design.] | 

London: | C. Kegan Paul & co., 1, 
Paternoster square. | 1880. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
quotation and notice 1 1. preface pp.v—viii, table 
of contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-441, colo- 
phon verso blank 1 1.; half-title verso blank 11. 
title verso quotation and notice 1 1. table of con- 
tents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-352, selected list 
of works pp. 353-363, index pp. 365-421, 12°. 

A classification of American languages (vol. 
2, pp. 57-64) includes the Chinook, p. 60. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames. 


Schoolcraft (Henry Rowe). Historical | 
and | statistical information, | respect- 
ing the | history, condition and pros- 
pects | of the | Indian tribes of the 
United States: | collected and prepared 
under the direction | of the | bureau 
of Indian affairs, | per actof Congress 
of March 3d, 1847, | by Henry R. School- 
craft, LL.D. | ustrated by 8. Eastman, 
capt. U.S. A. | Published by Authority 
of Congress. | Part I[-VI]. | 

Philadelphia: | Lippincott,Grambo & 
company, | (successors to Grigg, Elliot 
& co.) | 1851[-1857]. 

Engraved title: [Engraving.] | Historical | 
and | statistical information | respecting the | 
history, condition and prospects|of the| Indian 
tribes of the United States: | Collected and pre. 
pared under the | direction of the bureau of 
Indian affairs, per act of Congress | of March 
311847 | by Henry R. Schoolcraft L.L.D. | Illus, 
trated by | S. Eastman, capt. U.S. army. | [Coat 
of arms.] | Published by authority of Con- 
gress. | Part 1 [-VI]. | 

Philadelphia: | Lippincott, Grambo & co. 

6 vols. 4°. Beginning with vol. 2 the words 
‘Historical and statistical’ are left off the 


66 


Schoolcraft (1. R.) — Continued. 
title-pages, both engraved and printed. Subse- 
quently (1853) vol. 1 was also issued with the 
abridged title beginning ‘‘ Information respect- 
ing the history, condition, and prospects of the 
Indian tribes,” making it uniform with the 
other parts. 

Two editions with these title-pages were pub- 
lished by the same house, one on thinner and 
somewhat smaller paper, of which but vols 1-5 
were issued. 


Part 1, 1851. Half-title (Ethnological re- 
searches, | respecting | the red man of America) 
verso blank 1 1. engraved title as above verso 
blank 1 1. printed title as above verso blank 1 1. 
introductory documents pp. ili-vi, preface pp. 
vii-x, list of plates pp. xi—xii, contents pp. xili- 
xviii, text pp. 13-524, appendix pp. 525-568, 


plates, colored lithographs and maps numbered 


1-76. 
Part 11, 1852. Half-title (as in part I) verso 
blank 11. engraved title (Information respecting 


the history, condition and prospects, etc.) verso | 


blank 11. printed title (Information respecting 
the history, condition and prospects, etc.) verso 
printers 11. dedication verso blank1 1. introduc- 


tory document pp.vii-xiv, contents pp. xv-xxii, | 


list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 17-608, 
plates and maps numbered 1-29, 31-78, and 2 
plates exhibiting the Cherokee alphabet and its 
application. 

Part ul, 1853. Half-title (as in part 1) verso 
blank11.engraved title (as in part 11) verso blank 
11. printed title (as in part 11) verso printer 11. 
third report pp. v—viii, list of divisions p. ix, 
contents xi-xv, list of plates pp. xvii- xviii, 
text pp. 19-635, plates and maps numbered 
1-21, 25-45. 

Part Iv, 1854. Half-title (as in part I) verso 
blank 11. engraved title (asin part) verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in part 11) verso blank 1 1. 
dedication pp. v—vi, fourth report pp. vii-x, list 
of divisions p. xi, contents pp. xiii-xxiii, list of 
piates pp. xxv-xxvi, text pp. 19-668, plates and 
maps numbered 1-42. 

Part v, 1855. Half-title (as in part I) verso 
blank11. engraved title (as in part) verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in part 1) verso blank 11. 
dedication pp. vii-viii, fifth report pp. ix—xii, list 
of divisions p, xiii, synopsis of general contents 
of vols. I-V pp. Xv-xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxii, 
list of plates pp. xxili-xxiv, text pp. 25-625, ap- 
pendix pp. 627-712, plates and maps numbered 
1-8, 10-36. 

Part VI, 1857. Half-title (General history | of 
the | North American Indians) verso blank 1 1. 
portrait 11. printed title (History | of the| Indian 
tribes of the United States: | their | present 
condition and prospects, | and a sketch of their 

| ancient status. | Published by order of con- 
gress, |under the direction of the department of 
the interior—Indian bureau. | By | Henry Rowe 
Schooleraft, LL. D. | Member [ &c. six lines.] | 
With Illustrations by Eminent Artists. | Inone 
volume. | Part vi of the series. | Philadelphia: 

| J. B. Lippincott & co. | 1857.) verso blank 1 1. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Schoolcraft (H. R.)— Continued. 
inscription verso blank 1 1. letter to the presi- 
dent pp. vii—viii, report pp. ix—x, preface pp. xi- 
xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxvi, list of plates pp. 
Xxvii-xxviii, text pp. 25-744, index pp. 745-756, 
fifty-seven plates, partly selected from the other 
volumes, and three tables. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook Jargon (340 words 
alphabetically arranged by English words) 
vol. 5, pp. 548-551. 

Emmons (G. F.), Replies to inquiries respect- 
ing the Indian tribes of Oregon and California, 
vol. 3, pp. 200-225. 

Gallatin (A.), Table of generic Indian fami- 
lies of speech, vol. 3, pp. 397-402. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
neum, British Museum, Congress, Eames, 
National Museum, Powell, Shea, Trumbull, 

At the Fischer sale, no.1581, Quaritch bought 
acopy for 4l.10s. The Field copy, no. 2075, sold 
for $72; the Menzies copy, no. 1765, for $132; the 
Squier copies, no. 1214, $120; no. 2032, $60; the 
Ramirez copy, no. 773 (5 vols.), 5U. 5s.; the Pinart 
copy, no. 828 (5 vols. in 4), 208 fr.; the Murphy 
copy, no. 2228, $69. Priced by Quaritch, no. 30017, 
101. 10s.; by Clarke & co, 1886, $65; by Quaritch, 
in 1888, 151. 

Reissued with title-pages as follows: 


—— Archives| of | Aboriginal Knowledge. 


| Containing all the | Original Papers 

laid before Congress | respecting the | 
History, Antiquities, Language, Eth- 
nology, Pictography, | Rites, Supersti- 
tions, and Mythology, | of the | Indian 
Tribes of the United States | by| Henry 
R. Schooleraft, LL. D. | With Illustra- 
tions. | Onendun ih ieu muzzinyegun 
un.—Algonquin. | In six volumes. | 
Volume I[-VI]. | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
Co. | 1860. 

Engraved title: Information | respecting the 
| History, Condition and Prospects | of the | 
Indian Tribes of the United States: | Collected 
and prepared under the| Bureau of Indian 
Affairs | By Henry R. Schooleraft L. L. D. | 
Mem: Royal Geo. Society, London. Royal An- 
tiquarian Society. Copenhagen. Ethnological 
Society, Paris, &c. &c. | Illustrated by | Cap.t 
S. Eastman, U.S.A. and other eminent artists. | 
[Vignette.] | Published by authority of Con- 
gress. | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & Co. 

6 vols. maps and plates, 4°. 

This edition agrees in the text page for page 
with the original titled above, and contains in 
addition an index to each volume. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Partially reprinted with title as follows: 


[——] The | Indian tribes| of the| United 


States: | their | history, antiquities, cus- 
toms, religion, arts, language, | tradi- 


CHINOOKAN 


Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued. 
tions, oral legends, and myths. | Edited 
by |Francis 8. Drake. | Illustrated with 
one hundred fine engravings on steel. 
| In two volumes. | Vol. I{-I/]. | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
co. | London: 16 Southampton street, 
Covent Garden. | 1884. 


2 vols.: portrait 1 1. title verso copyright 
notice 11. preface pp. 3-5, contents pp. 7-8, list 
of plates pp. 9-10, introduction pp. 11-24, text 
pp. 25-458; frontispiece 1 1. title verso copy- 
right notice 1 1. contents pp. 3-6, list of plates 
p. 7, text pp. 9-445, index pp. 447-455, plates, 4°. 

“Tn the following pages the attempt has been 
made to place before the public in a convenient 
and accessible form the results of the life-long 
labors in the field of aboriginal research of the 
late Henry R. Schooleraft.”’ 

Chapter U1, Language, literature, and pie- 
tography, vol. 1, pp. 47-63, contains general 
remarks on the Indian languages. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Priced by Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6376, $25. 

Henry Rowe Schoolcraft, ethnologist, born in 
[Watervliet] Albany county, N. Y., March 28, 
1793, died in Washington, D. C., December 10, 
1864. Was educated at Middlebury college, 
Vermont, and at Union, where he pursued the 


studies ofchemistry and mineralogy. In1817—18 | 


he traveled in Missouri and Arkansas, and 


returned with a large collection of geological 
and mineralogical specimens. In 1820 he was 
appointed geologist to Gen. Lewis Cass’s explor- 
ing expedition to Lake Superior and the head- 
waters of Mississippi River. 


at Chicago, and, after a journey through Illi- 
nois and along Wabash and Miami rivers, was 
in 1822 appointed Indian agent for the tribes 
of the lake region, establishing himself at 
Sault Sainte Marie, and afterward at Mack- 
inaw, where, in 1823, he married Jane Johnston, 
granddaughter of Waboojeeg, a noted Ojibway 
chief, who received her education in Europe. In 
1828 he founded the Michigan historical society 


and in 1831 the Algic society. From 1828 till | 


1832 he was a member of the territorial legisla- 
tureof Michigan. In 1832 heled a government 
expedition, which followed the Mississippi 
River up to its source in Itasca Lake. In 1836 
he negotiated a treaty with the Indians on the 
upper lakes for the cession to the United States 
of 16,000,000 acres of their lands. He was then 
appointed acting superintendent of Indian 
affairs, and in 1839 chief disbursing agent for 
the northern department. On his return from 
Europe in 1842 he made a tour through western 
Virginia, Ohio, and Canada. He wasappointed 
by the New York legislature in 1845 a commis- 
sioner to take the census of the Indians in the 
state and collect information concerning the 
Six Nations. After the performance of this 
task, Congressauthorized him, on March 3, 1847, 
to obtain through the Indian bureau reports 


He was secre- | 
tary of a commission to treat with the Indians | 


LANGUAGES. 


67 


Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued. 


relating to all the Indian tribes of the country, 
and to collate and edit the information. In this 
work he spent the remaining years of his life. 
Through his influence many laws were enacted 
for the protection and benefit of the Indians. 
Numerous scientific societies in the United 
States and Europe elected him to membership, 
and the University of Geneva gave him the 
degree of LL.D. in 1846. He was the author of 
numerous poems, lectures, and reports on 
Indian subjects, besides thirty-one larger 
works. Two of his lectures before the Algic 
society at Detroit on the ‘‘Grammatical Con- 
struction of the Indian Languages” were trans- 
lated into French by Peter 8. Duponceau, and 
gained for their author a gold medal from the 
French institute. . To the five volumes 
of Indian researches compiled under the direc- 
tion of the war department he added a sixth, 
containing the post-Columbian history of the 
Indians and of their relations with Europeans 
(Philadelphia, 1857). He had collected material 
for two additional volumes, but the Govern- 
ment suddenly suspended the publication of 
the work.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Scouler (Dr. John). Observations on the 


indigenous tribes of the N. W. coast of 
America. By John Scouler, M. D., F. 
L. S., &e. 

In Royal Geog. Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 11, 
pp. 215-251, London, 1841, 8°. (Congress.) 

Includes vocabularies of a number of the 
languages of the region named, among them 
the Chinook (entrance to Columbia River) and 
Cathlascon (banks of the Columbia), pp. 242- 
247. Furnished the author by Dr. W. F. Tolmie. 

Extracts from these vocabularies appear in 
Gibbs (G.), Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. 


—— On the Indian Tribes inhabiting the 


North-West Coast of America. By John 
Scouler, M.D., F.L. 8. Communicated 
by the Ethnological Society. 

In Edinburgh New Philosoph. Jour. vol. 41, 
pp. 168-192, Edinburgh, 1846, 8°. (Congress.) 

Vocabulary (19 words) of the Chikeelis [Chi- 
nook Jargon], compared with the Tlaoquatch 
(of Tolmie) and the Nootkan (of Mozino) p. 176. 

Reprinted in the Ethnological Soc. of Lon- 
don Jour. vol. 1, pp. 228-252, Edinburgh, n. a., 
8°, the vocabulary occurring on p, 236. 


Semple (J. E.) Vocabulary of the Clat- 


sop language. 

Manuscript, 1 leaf,4°,in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D.C. Col- 
lected in 1870 near Fort Stevens, Oregon. 

Contains 35 words only. 


Sentences: 
Cascade See Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) 
Chinook Francheére (G.) 
Chinook Jargon Allen (A.) 
Chinook Jargon Chinook. 


Chinook Jargon Dictionary. 


68 


Sentences — Continued. 


Chinook Jargon See Eells (M.) 


Chinook Jargon Green (J.8.) 
Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 
Chinook Jargon Leland (C. G.) 
Chinook Jargon Macfie (M.) 


Chinook Jargon Macdonald (D.G. F.) 

Chinook Jargon Stuart (G.) 

Clakama Gatschet (A.58.) 
Sermons: 

Chinook Jargon See Eells (M.) 

Chinook Jargon Hale (H.) 

Chinook Jargon New. 


Shortess (Robert). 

Lower Chinook. 
Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. text 5 Il. 

written on one side only, folio; in the library of 

the Bureau of Ethnology. Collected in 1853. 
Contains 180 words. 


Smith (Silas B.) On the Chinook names 
of the salmon in the Columbia River. 
By Silas B. Smith. 

In National Museum Proc. vol. 4, pp. 391-392, 
Washington, 1882, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Comprises a half-dozen names only. 


Vocabulary of the 


Smithsonian Institution: These words following 


a title or within parentheses after a note indi- 
cate that a copy of the work referred to has 
been seen by the compiler in the library of that 
institution, Washington, D.C. 


Songs: 
Chinook See Boas (F.) 
Chinook Eells (M.) 
Chinook Jargon Bulmer (T.S.) 
Chinook Jargon Crane (A.) 


Sproat (Gilbert Malcolm). Scenes and 
studies | of savage life. | By | Gilbert 
Malcolm Sproat. | [Two lines quota- 
tion.] | 


London: Smith, Elder and co. | 1868. 


Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-x, preface 
pp. xi-xii, text pp. 1-310, appendix pp. 311-317, 
colophon p. [318], 12°. 

Chapter xv. Intellectual capacity and lan- 
guage (pp. 119-143) includes a vocabulary of 14 
words showing affinities between the Chinook 
Jargon and Aht, p. 189.—General discussion of 
the languages, including the Chinook Jargon, 
with examples, pp. 139-142.—Note on the Chi- 
nook and Jargon- Chinook, pp. 313-314. 

Oopies seen: Bancroft, Boston Public, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Eames, Georgetown. 


Stanley (J. M.) Portraits | of | North 
American Indians, | with sketches of 
scenery, etc. | painted by | J. M. Stan- 
ley. | Deposited with | the Smithsonian 
institution.| [Seal of the institution. ] | 

Washington: | Smithsonian institu- 
tion. | December, 1852. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF 


Stuart (Granville). 


THE 


Stanley (J. M.) — Continued. 


Cover title as above, title as above verso 
names of printers 1 |. preface verso contents 11. 
text pp. 5-72, index pp. 73-76, 8°. 

Forms Smithsonian Institution Miscellaneous 
Collections, 53; also part of vol. 2 of the same 
series, Washington, 1862. 

Contains the names of personages of many 
Indian tribes of the United States, toanumber 
of which is added the English signification. 
Among the peoples represented are the Chi- 
nooks, p. 60; Clackamas, p. 61. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Geological Survey, Pilling, Smithsonian, Wel- 
lesley. 


Steiger (E.) Steiger’s | bibliotheca glot- 


tica, | part first. | A catalogue of | Dic- 
tionaries, Grammars, Readers, Exposi- 
tors, etc. |of mostly |modern languages 

| spoken in all parts of the earth, | 
except of | English, French, German, 
and Spanish. | First division: | Abenaki 
to Hebrew. | 

E. Steiger, | 22 & 24 Frankfort Street, 

| New York. [1874.] 

Half-title on cover, title as above verso name 
of printer 1 1. notice dated Sept. 1874 verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 1-40, advertisements 2 Il. col- 
ophon on back cover, 12°. 

Titles of works relating to American lan- 
guages generally, p.3; Chinook. p. 24. 

The second division of the first part was not 
published. Part second is on the Enylish lan- 
guage and part third on the German language. 

In his notice the compiler states: ‘‘ This com- 
pilation must not be regarded as an attempt at 
acomplete linguistic bibliography, butsolely as 
a bookseller’s catalogue for business purposes, 
with special regard to the study of philology 
in America.” 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


Montana as it is; | 

being | a general description of its re- 
sources,| both mineral and agricultural, 
| including a | complete description of 
the face of the | country, its climate, 
etc.,| illustrated with a | map of the ter- 
ritory, | drawn by capt. W.W. De Lacy, 
| showing the different roads and the 
location of | the different mining dis- 
tricts. | To which is appended, | a 
complete dictionary | of | the Snake 
language, | and also of the | famous 
Chinnook [sic] Jargon, | with | numer- 
ous critical and explanatory notes, | 

concerning the habits, superstitions, 
etc., of | these Indians, | with | itiner- 
aries of all the routes across the plains. 
| By Granville Stuart. | 


CHINOOKAN 


Stuart (G.) — Continued. 
New York: |C. 8. Westcott & co., 
printers, | No. 79 John street. | 1865. 


LANGUAGES. 


69 


| Swan (J. G.) — Continued. 


Half-title: A | dictionary | of the | Chinnook 


Jargon, | in use among the tribes of | Oregon, 
Washington territory, British Columbia, | and 
the north Pacific coast, | with | critical and 
explanatory notes. | By Granville Stuart. 

Cover title as above, large folded map, title 
as above verso copyright notice 1 1]. preface pp. 
3-4, text pp. 5-98, half-title verso blank 1 1. 
preface verso rules of pronunciation pp. 101- 
102, text pp. 103-175, 8°. 

Dictionary of the Chinnook Jargon, alpha- 
betically arranged by English words, pp. 103- 
119.—Numerals 1-10, 20, 30, 100, 1000, p. 119.— 
Short dialogue in Chinnook Jargon, pp. 120- 
121.—Explanatory notes, pp. 122-127. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, 
Eames, Georgetown. 


Congress, 


Swan (James Gilchrist), The | north- 
west coast; | or, | three years’ resi- 


dence in Washington | territory. | By | 


James G. Swan. | [Territorial seal.] | 
With numerous illustrations. | 

New York: | Harper & brothers, 
publishers, | Franklin square. | 1857. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 
11. dedication verso blank 11. introduction pp. 
y-vii, contents pp. ix—xiv, list of illustrations p. 
{xv], map, text pp. 17-409, appendix pp. 411-429, 
index pp. 431-435, 12°. 

Language of the Indians (pp. 306-326) con- 
tains remarks on the Jargon, different methods 
of spelling words by writers, difficulty of 
rightly understanding the Jargon, etc., 
including a comparative vocabulary of Nootka, 
Chenook dialect or Jargon, and English (11 
words), p. 307; explanation of a number of 
Jargon words, pp. 316-317.—Vocabulary of the 
Chenook or Jargon (about 250 words, alphabet- 
ically arranged) and numerals 1-1000, pp. 415- 
421.—Comparative list of 12 words in Nootka, 
and Chenook or Jargon, p. 422.—_Many Chinook 
terms passim. 

Copies seen: Astor, 


Bancroft, British 


T. 


Tate (Rev. Charles Montgomery), Chi- 
nook | As Spoken by the Indians | 
of | Washington Territory, British 
Columbia | and Alaska. | For the use 
of Traders, Tourists and others | who 
have business intercourse with | the 
Indians. | Chinook-English. English- 
Chinook. | By | rev. C. M. Tate, | 

Published by M. W. Waitt & co., | 
Victoria, B.C. [1889.] 


Cover title (as above, with the addition of the 
following around the border: Bourchier & 
Higgins, | real estate brokers. | Insurance 


Museum, Congress, Eames, Geological Survey, 
Harvard, Pilling. 
Issued also with title-page as follows: 


| —— The | northwest coast; | or, | three 


years’ residence in Washington | terri- 
tory. | By | James G. Swan. | With 
numerous illustrations. | 

London: | Sampson Low, Son & co., 
47 Ludgate hill. | New York: Harper 
& brothers. | 1857. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title 1 1. dedication verso 
blank 1 1. introduction pp. v—vii, contents pp. 
ix-xiv, list of illustrations p. xv, map, text pp. 
17-409, appendix pp. 411-429, index pp. 431- 
435, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Charles L. Woodward, New 
York City. 

Mr. James Gilchrist Swan was born in Med- 
ford, Mass., January 11,1818, and was educated 
at an academy in that place. In 1833 he went to 

3oston to reside, and remained there until 1849, 
when heleft forSan Francisco, where he arrived 
in 1850. In 1852 he went to Shoalwater Bay, 
where he remained until 1856, when he returned 
east. In 1859 he returned to Puget Sound; since 
then Port Townsend has been his headquarters. 
In 1860 Mr. Swan went to Neah Bay. InJune, 
1862, he was appointed teacher of the Makah 
Indian Reservation, where he remained till 1866. 
In 1869 he went to Alaska, and in May, 1875, he 
went a second time to Alaska, this time under 
the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, as 
a commissioner to purchase articles of Indian 
manufacture for the Philadelphia Centennial 
Exposition. This fine collection is now in the 
U.S. National Museum at Washington. July 
31, 1878, Mr. Swan was appointed an inspector 
of customs at Neah Bay, Cape Flattery, and 
remained there until August, 1888, addingmuch 
to our knowledge of the Makah Indians, which 
was reported to Prof. Baird and published in a 
bulletin of the U.S. National Museum. In 1883 
he went to Queen Charlotte Islands for the 
Smithsonian Institution and made another col- 
lection for the U.S. National Museum. 


Tate (C. M.) — Continued. 


agents. | Financial agents), title as above verso 
copyright notice (1889) and name of printer 11. 
preface (May 17, 1889) verso blank 11. text pp. 
5-47, 16°. 

Part I. Chinook [Jargon]-English, alphabet- 
ically arranged, pp. 5-23.—Part II. English- 
Chinook [Jargon], alphabetically arranged, pp. 
24-47.—Numerals, 1-12, 20, 50, 100, p. 47. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


—— [Hymn in the Chinook language. } 


Manuscript, 1 leaf, 8°, in the possession of the 
compiler of this bibliography. 

One v erse and chorus of the hymn ‘‘ Nothing 
but the blood of Jesus.” 


70 


Tate (C. M.) — Continued. 


‘‘Mr. Tate came to British Columbia from 


Northumberland, England, in 1870. Heengaged | 


in mission work among the Flathead Indians 
at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island,in 1871, where 
he learned the Aukaménum language spoken 
by the Indian tribes on the east coast of Van- 
couver Island,lower Fraser River, and Puget 
Sound. Here he spent three years, when he 
removed to Port Simpson, on the borders of 
Alaska, among the Tsimpsheans. He next 
moved to the Fraser River and spent seven 
years amongst the Flathead tribes between 
Yale and Westminster, frequently visiting the 
Indians on the Nootsahk River in Washington 
Territory. Mr. Tate spent four years, 1880 to 
1883, among the Bella-Bellas, returning in the 
latter year to the mission on Fraser River.” 


Ten commandments: 


Chinook Jargon See Everette (W. E.) 


Texts: 


Chinook 
Chinook Jargon 


See Boas (F.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 


Chinook Jargon Demers (M.) 
Chinook Jargon Dictionary. 
Chinook Jargon Eells (M.) 


Tolmie (Dr. William Fraser). [Vocabu- 
laries of certain languages of the 


northwest coast of America. ] 

In Scouler (J.), Observations on the indig- 
enous tribes of northwest America, in Royal 
Geog. Soc. of London Jour. vol. 11, pp. 215-251, 
London, 1841, 8°. 

Includes, among others, vocabularies of the 
Chenook and Cathlascon, pp. 242-247. 


— and Dawson(G.M.) Geological and 
natural history survey of Canada. | 
Alfred R. C. Selwyn, F.R.S., F.G.S., 
Director. | Comparative vocabularies 
| of the | Indian tribes | of | British 
Columbia, | with a map illustrating dis- 
tribution. | By | W. Fraser Tolmie, | 
Licentiate of the Faculty of Physicians 
and Surgeons,Glasgow. | And | George 
M. Dawson, D.S.,A.S.R.M., F.G.S., &c. 
| [Coat of arms.] | Published by author- 
ity of Parliament. | 

Montreal: | Dawson brothers. | 1884. 

Cover title nearly as above, title as above 
verso blank 1]. letter of transmittal signed by 
G. M. Dawson verso blank 1 1. preface signed by 
G. M. Dawson pp. 5b-7b, introductory note 
signed by W. F. Tolmie pp. 9b-12b, text pp. 14b- 
1316, map, 8°. 

Vocabulary (243 words) of the Tshinook 
tribe and of the Tilhilooit or upper Tshinook, 
pp. 50b-61b.—Comparison of words in various 
Indian languages of North America, among 
them a few in the Chinook, pp. 128b-130b. 

Copies seen: Eames, Georgetown, Pilling, 
Wellesley. 


Townsend (Dr. J. K.) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Tolmie (W. F.)— Continued. 


William Fraser Tolmie was born at Inver: 
ness, Scotland, February 3, 1812, and died De- 
cember§8, 1886, after anillness of only threedays, 
at his residence, Cloverdale, Victoria, B.C. He 
was educated at Glasgow University, where he 
graduated in August, 1832. On September 12 
of the same year he accepted a position as sur- 
geon and clerk with the Hudson’s Bay Com- 
pany, and left home for the Columbia River, 
arriving in Vancouver in the spring of 1833. 
Vancouver was then the chief post of the Hud- 
son’s Bay Company on this coast. In 1841 he 
visited his native land, but returned in 1842 
overland via the plains and the Columbia, and 
was placed in charge of the Hudson’s Bay posts 
on Puget Sound. He here took a prominent part, 
during the Indian war of 1855—'56, in pacifying 
the Indians. Being an excellent linguist, he 
had acquired a knowledgeof the native tongues 
and was instrumental in bringing about peace 
between the Americans and the Indians. He 
wasappointed chief factor of the Hudson’s Bay 
Company in 1855, removed to Vancouver Island 
in 1859, when he went into stock-raising, being 
the first to introduce thoroughbred stock into 
British Columbia; was a member of the local 
legislature two terms, until 1878; was a member 
of the first board of education for several years, 
exercising a great interest in educational mat- 
ters; held many offices of trust, and was always 
a valued and respected citizen. 

Mr. Tolmie was known to ethnologists for his 
contributions to the history and linguistics of 
the native races of the West Coast, and dated 
his interest in ethnological matters from his 
contact with Mr. Horatio Hale, who visited the 
West Coast as an ethnologist to the Wilkes 
exploring expedition. He afterwards trans- 
mitted vocabularies of a number of the tribes 
to Dr. Scouler and to Mr. George Gibbs, some 
of which were published in Contributions to 
North American Ethnology. In 1884 he pub- 
lished, in conjunction with Dr. G. M. Dawson, a 
nearly complete series of short vocabularies of 
the principal languages met with in British 
Columbia, and his name is to be found fre- 
quently quoted as an authority on the history of 
the Northwest Coast and its ethnology. He fre- 
quently contributed to the press upon public 
questions and events now historical. 


See Haldeman 
(S. 8.) 


Treasury. The Treasury of Languages. 


| A | rudimentary dictionary | of | 
universal philology. | Daniel iii. 4. | 
[One line in Hebrew.] | 
Hall and Co., 25, Paternoster row, 
London. | (Allrightsreserved.) [1873 ?] 
Colophon: London: | printed by Grant and 
co., 72-78, Turnmill street, E. C. 


Title verso blank 1 1. advertisement (dated 
February 7th, 1873) verso blank 11. introduction 


GHINOOKAN 


Treasury — Continued. 
(signed J. B.and dated October 31st, 1873) pp. 
Liv, dictionary of languages (in alphabetical 
order) pp. 1-301, list of contributors p. [302], 
errata verso colophon 1 1. 12°. 

Edited by James Bonwick, Esq.,F. R.G.S., 
assisted by about twenty-two contributors, 
whose initials are signed to the most important 
of their respective articles. In the compila- 
tion of the work free use was made of Bagster’s | 
Bible of Every Land and Dr, Latham’s £le- 
ments of Comparative Philology. There are also 
references to an appendix, concerning which 
there is the following note on p.301: ‘‘ Notice.-- 
Owing to the unexpected enlargement of this 
Book in course of printing, the Appendix is 
necessarily postponed ; and the more especially 
as additional matter has been received sufficient 


to make a second volume. And it will be pro- 
ceeded with so soon as an adequate list of Sub- 
scribers shall be obtained.”’ Under the name of 
each language is a brief statement of the family 
or stock to which it belongs, and the country 
where it is or was spoken, together with refer- 
ences, in many cases, to the principal author- 
ities on the grammar and vocabulary. An 
addenda is given at the end of each letter. 

Seattered references to the dialects of the 
Chinookan. 

Copies seen : Eames. 


Tribal names: 


Chinook See Boas (F.) 
Chinook Douglass (J.) 
Chinook Haines (EK. M.) 


Triibner & Co. Bibliotheca Hispano- 
Americana. | A | catalogue | of | Span- 
ish books | printed in | Mexico, Guate- 
mala, Honduras, the Antilles, | Vene- 
zuela, Columbia, Ecuador, Peru, Chili, 

| Uruguay, and the Argentine Repub- 
lic; | and of | Portuguese books printed 
in Brazil. | Followed by a collection of 
| works on the aboriginal languages 
j of America. | 

On Sale at the affixed Prices, by | 
Triibner & co., | 8 & 60, Paternoster 
row, London. | 1870. | One shilling and 
sixpence. 

Cover title as above verso contents 1 1. no in- 
side title; catalogue pp. 1-184, colophen verso 
advertisements 1 1. 16°. 

Works on the aboriginal languages of Amer- 
ica, pp. 162-184, contains a list of books (alpha- 
vetically arranged by languages) on this sub- 
ject, including general works, pp. 162-168; — 
Chinuk, pp. 169-170. 

Copies seen; Eames, Pilling. 


— A | catalogue | of | dictionaries and» 
grammars |of the Principal Languages 
and Dialects | of the World. | For sale 
dy | Triibner & co. | 


LANGUAGES. 71 


Triibner & Co.— Continued. 
London: | Triibner & co., 8 & 60 Pa- 


ternoster row. | 1872. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
names of printers 1 1. notice verso blank 11. 
catalogue pp. 1-64, addenda and corrigenda 1 Ie 
advertisements verso blank 1 1. a list of works 
relating to the science of language etc. pp. 
1416, 8°. 

Contains titles of a few works in or relating 
to the Chinookan languages, p. 12. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

A later edition with title-page as follows: 


Triibner’s | catalogue | of | dictiona- 
ries and grammars | of the | Principal 
Languages and Dialects of the World. | 
Second edition, | considerably enlarged. 
and revised, with an alphabetical in- 
dex. | A guide for students and book- 
sellers. | [Monogram. ] | 

London: | Triibner & co,, 57 and 59, 
Ludgate hill. | 1882. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso list of 
catalogues 11. notice and preface to the second 
edition p.iii, index pp. iv—viii, text pp. 1-168, 
additions pp. 169-170, Triibner’s Oriental & 
Linguistie Publications pp. 1-95, 8°. 

Contains titles of works in American lan- 
guages (general), pp. 3, 169; Chinook, p. 37. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

Trumbull: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Dr.J, Hammond Trum- 
bull, Hartford, Conn. 

[Trumbull (Dr. James Hammond).] Cat- 
alogue | of the | American Library | of 
thelate | mr. George Brinley, | of Hart- 
ford, Conn. | Part I. | America in gen- 
eral | New France Canada ete. | the 
British colonies to 1776 | New England | 
[-Part IV. | Psalms and hymns music 
science and art | [&c. ten lines] | 

Hartford | Press of the Case Lock- 
wood & Brainard Company | 1878 
[-1886] 

4 parts, 8°. Compiled by Dr. J. H. Trumbull. 
The fifth and last part is said to be in prepara- 
tion. 

Indian languages: general treatises and col- 
lections, part 3, pp. 123-124; Northwest coast, 
p. 141. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

James Hammond Trumbull, philologist, was 
born in Stonington, Conn., December 20, 1821. 
He entered Yale in 1838, and though, owing to 
ill health, he was not graduated with his class, 
his name was enrolled among its members ip 
1850 and he was given the degree of A.M. He 
settled in Hartford ip 1847 and jas asgistant 


72 


Trumbull (J. H.) — Continued. 


secretary of state in 1847-1852 and 1858-1861, | 


and secretary in 1861-1864, also state librarian in 
1854. Soon after going to Hartford he joined the 
Connecticut Historical Society, was its corre- 
sponding secretary in 1849-1863, and was elected 
its president in 1863. He has been a trustee of 
the Watkinson free library of Hartford and its 
librarian since 1863, and has been an officer of 
the Wadsworth atheneum since 1864. Dr.'Trum- 
bull was an original member of the American 
Philological Association in 1869, and its presi- 
dent in 1874-1875. He has been a member of the 
American Oriental Society since 1860 and the 
American Ethnological Society since 1867, and 
honorary member of many State historical soci- 
eties. In 1872 he was elected to the National 
Academy of Sciences. Since 1858 he has devoted 
special attention to the subject of the Indian 
languages of North America. He has prepared 
a dictionary and vocabulary to John Eliot’s 
Indian bible, and is probably the only Amer- 
ican scholar that is now able to read that work. 
In 1873 he was chosen lecturer on Indian lan- 


guages of North America at Yale, but loss of | 


health and other labors soon compelled his 
resignation. The degree of LL.D. was con- 
ferred on him by Yale in 1871 and by Harvard 
in 1887, while Columbia gave him an L. H.D. 
in 1887.—Appleton’s Oyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Tylor (Edward Burnett). Primitive 


culture: | Researches into the develop- | 


ment of mythology, philosophy, | reli- 
gion, art, and custom. | By | Edward 
Bb. Tylor, | author of “‘ Researches into 
the early history of mankind,” &e. | 


[Two lines quotation.] | In two vol- | 


umes. | Vol. I[-II]. | 


London: | John Murray, Albemarle | 


street. | 1871. | (Rights of Translation | 


and reproduction reserved. ) 
2 vols.: title versonames of printers 11. pref- 


ace pp. V-vi, contents pp. vii-x, text pp. 1-453; | 
half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of | 


printers 1 1. contents pp. v—viii, text pp. 1-410, 
index pp. 411-426, 8°. 

Emotional and imitative language (chapters 
v and vi, vol.1, pp. 145-217) contains, passim, 
words in a number of North American lan- 
guages, among them the Chinook and Chinook 
Jargon, pp. 167, 170, 174, 184, 186, 189, 191, 193. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
National Museum. 


Primitive Culture | Researches into 
the development of | mythology, phi- 
losophy, religion, | language, art and 
custom | By | Edward B. Tylor, LL.D., 
F. R. S| Author of [&c. one line] | 
[Five lines quotation] | First Amer- 
ican, from the second English edition | 
In two volumes | Volume I[-IT] | 
[Design] | 


} 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Tylor (E. B.) — Continued. 


Boston | Estes & Lauriat | 143 Wash- 
ington Street | 1874 

2 vols.: half-title (Primitive culture) verso 
blank 1 1. title verso ‘‘ Author’s edition” 1 1. 
preface to the first edition pp. v—vi, preface 
to the second edition pp. vii-viii, contents pp. 
ix—xii, text pp. 1-502; half-title verso blank 1 1. 
title verso ‘‘Author’s edition’ 1 1. contents pp. 
v-viii, text pp. 1-453, index pp. 455-470,8°. 

Emotional and imitative language (chapters v 
and vi, vol. 1, pp. 160-239) contains afew Chinook 
and Jargon words on pp. 179, 184, 205, 208, 213. 

Copies seen: National Museum, Powell. 


—— Primitive Culture | Researches into 


the development of | mythology, phi- 
losophy, religion, | language, art and 
custom | By | Edward B. Tylor, LL.D., 
TF. R. S| Author of ‘‘ Researches into 
the Early History of Mankind,” &e | 
[Quotation five lines] | First American, 
from the second English edition | In 
two volumes | Volume I[-IT] | 

New York | Henry Holt and company 
| 1874 

2 vols. 8°. Collation and linguistic contents 


as under title above. 
Copies seen: Powell. 


Primitive Culture | Researches: into 
the development of | mythology, phi- 
losophy, religion, | language, art and 
custom | By | Edward B. Tylor, LL.D., 
F.R.S | Author of ‘Researches into 
the Early History of Mankind,” &c | 
[ Quotation five lines] | Second Ameri- 
can, from the second English edition | 
In two volumes | Volume I{-II] | 
[Design] | 

New York |Henry Holt and company 
| 1877 

2 vols.: half-title (Primitive culture) verso 
blank 1 1. title verso ‘‘Author’s edition” 1 1. 
preface to t he first edition pp. v--vi, preface to 
the second edition pp. vii-viii, contents pp. ix— 
xii, text pp. 1-502; half title (Primitive culture) 
verso blank 11. title verso ‘‘ Author's edition” 
11. contents pp. v-vili, text pp. 1-453, index pp. 
455-470, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen: Geological Survey. 

Third edition: London, John Murray, 1891, 2 
vols. 8°. 


—— Anthropology: | an introduction to 


the study of | man and civilization. | 
By | Edward B. Tylor, D.C. L., F. R ¢. 
| With illustrations. |» 
London: | Macmillan and co. | 1883. 
| The Right of Translation and Repro- 
duction is Reserved. 


CHINOOKAN 


Tylor (E. B.) — Continued. 
Half-title verso design 1 1. title verso names 
of printers 1 1. preface pp.v—viii, contents pp. ix— 
xii, list of illustrations pp.xiii-xv, text pp.1-440— 
selected books pp.441-442, index pp. 443-448, 12°. 
' A few words, passim, in a number of North 
American languages, among them the Chinook, 
pp. 125, 126. 
Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, 
Museum, Congress. 
Anthropology: | an introduction to 
the study of | man and civilization. | 
By | Edward B.Tylor, D.C. L., F.R.S. 


| With illustrations. | 


British 


New York: | D. Appleton and com- 


pany, | 1,3, and 5 Bond street. | 1881. 
Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 
1. preface pp. v—vii, contents pp. ix—xii, list of 
illustrations pp. xiii-xv, text pp. 1-440, selected 
books pp. 441-442, index pp. 443-448, 12°. 
Linguistic contents as under title next above. 
Copies seen: Congress, Geological Survey, 
National Museum. 
Einleitung | in das | Studium der 
Anthropologie | und | Civilisation | 
von | Dr. Edward B. Tylor, | [&c. one 
line.] | Deutsche [&e. five lines.] | 
Braunschweig, | Druck und Verlag 
von Friedrich Vilwig und Sohn. | 1883. 
Pp. i-xix, 1-538, 8°. 
Chapters 4 and 5, Die Sprache, pp. 134-178. 
Copies seen: British Museum. 


LANGUAGES. 73 

Tylor (E. B.) — Continued. 

—— The international scientific series | 
Anthropology | An introduction to the 
study of | man and civilization | By 
Edward B. Tylor, D.C.L., F.R.S. | 
With illustrations | 

New York | D. Appleton and com- 

| pany | 1888 
Half-title of the series verso blank 1 1. title 

as above verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v—vii, con- 

tents pp. ix—xii, list of illustrations pp. xili-xv, 

text pp. 1-440, selected books pp. 441-442, index 

pp. 443-448, 8°. 
Linguistic contents as under titles above. 
Copies seen: Harvard. 


—— Anthropology: | an introduction to 
the study of | man and civilization. | 
By | Edward -B. Tylor, D.C. L., F. R.8. 

| With illustrations. | Second edition, 
revised. | 

London: | Macmillan and co. | and 
New York. | 1889. | The Right of Trans- 
lation and Reproduction is Reserved. 

Half-title verso design 1 1. title verso names 
of printers etc. 1 1. preface pp. v—vii, contents 
pp. ix-xii, list of illustrations pp. xiii—xv, text 
pp. 1-440, selected books ete. pp. 441-442, index 
pp. 443-448, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen: Eames. 


Ne: 


Vater (Dr. Johann Severin). Litteratur 
| der | Grammatiken, Lexika | und | 
Wortersammlungen | aller Sprachen 
der Erde | von | Johann Severin Vater. 
| Zweite, vollig umgearbeitete Aus- 

gabe | von | B. Jiilg. | 

Berlin, 1847. | In der Nicolaischen 
Buchhandlung. 

Title verso blank 1 |. dedication verso blank 1 
]. vorwort (signed B. Jilg and dated 1. Decem- 
ber, 1846) pp. v—x, titles of general works on the 
subject pp. xi-xii, text (alphabetically arranged 
by names of languages) pp. 1-450, nachtrige 
und berichtigungen pp. 451-541, sachregister 
pp. 542-563, antorenregister pp. 564-592, verbes- 
serungen 2 ll. 8°. 

Titles of works in or containing material 
relating to the Cathlascon, p. 472; Chinuk, pp. 
69, 474. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Harvard. 

At the Fischer sale, no. 1710, a copy sold for 1s. 

The earlier edition, Berlin, 1815, contains no 
Chinookan material. 


Vocabulary | of the | Chinook Jargon: 
| the complete language | used | by the 
| Indians of Oregon, | Washington ter- 
ri- | tory and British possessions. | 


| Vocabulary — Continued. 

San Francisco:| published by Hutch- 
ings & Rosenfield, | 146 Montgomery 
street. | Towne & Bacon, printers, 125 
Clay street, cor. Sansome. | 1860. 

Cover title as above. no inside title; text pp. 
1-8, 16°. 

Chinook [Jargon]-English vocabulary, pp. 


1-6.—Table of distances, pp. 7-8. 
Copies seen: Bancroft. 


Vocabulary of the Jargon. See Lionnet 
a) 


Vocabulary: 
Cathlascon See Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Cathlascon Scouler (J.) 
Cathlascon Tolmie (W. F.) 
Chinook Anderson (A. C.) 
Chinook Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Chinook Chinook. 
Chinook Domenech (E. H. D.) 
Chinook Dunn (J.) 
Chinook Franchére (G.) 
Chinook Gallatin (A.) 
Chinook Hale (H.) 
Chinook Knipe (C.) 
Chinook Montgomerie (J. E.) 
Chinoek Pinart (A. L.) 


74 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Vocabulary — Continued. 


Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 


Chinook 

Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 


See Priest (J.) 
Ratinesque (C.8.) 
Ross (A.) 

Scouler (J.) 

Shortess (R.) 

Tolmie (W. F.) 

Tolmie (W. F.) and Daw- 
son (G. M.) 

Wabass (W. G.) 

Anderson (A. C.) 

Armstrong (A. N.) 

Belden (G. P.) 


Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 


Vocabulary — Continued. 


Lionnet (—) 
Macdonald (D. G, F.) 
Palmer (J.) 
Parker (8.) 
Richardson (A. D.) 
Ross (A.) 
Schooleratt (H. R.) 
Scouler (J.) 

Sproat (G. M.) 
Swan (J. G.) 
Vocabulary. 
Winthrop (T.) 


Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 


Boldue (J.-B. Z.) 
Chamberlain (A. F.) 


Chinook Jargon Cox (R.) 
Chinook Jargon Dictionary. 
Chinook Jargon Eells (M.) 


Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 


Everette (W. E.) 
Gallatin (A.) 

Gibbs (G * 

Guide. 

Haines (E. M.) 
Hale (H.) 

Hazlitt (W.C) 

Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 


W. 


Wabass (Dr. W.G.) Vocabulary of the 
Chinook language. 
Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C. 
Recorded at Cowlitz landing, Feby., 1858. 
A list of 23 English words with Chinook and | 
Cowlitz equivalents. 


Watkinson: This word following a title or within 
parentheses aftera note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler inthe Watkinson library, Hartford, Conn. 

Watiala: , 

Grammatie comments See Bancroft (H.H.) 


Wahaikan: 
Vocabulary See Gatschet (A.S.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
W appo: | 
Vocabulary See Gatschet (A.S.) | 
Wasko: 
Vocabulary See Curtin (J.) | 
| 


Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Words Bancroft (H. H.) 


Wellesley: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after anote indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- | 
piler, belonging to the library of Wellesley col- | 
lege, Wellesley, Mass. 


Western. A Western Volapiik. | 
In the Critic, vol. 14, pp. 201-202, New York, | 
1890,4°. (Pilling.) 


Clakama Gatschet (A.S.) 
Clatsop Emmons (G. T.) 
Clatsop Hale (H.) 
Clatsop Lee (D.) and Frost (J.H.) 
Clatsop Semple (J. E.) 
Nihaloth Hale (H.) 
Wahaikan Gatschet (A.S.) 
Wahaikan Hale (H.) 
Wappo Gatschet (A.8.) 
Wasko Curtin (J.) 
Watlala Gallatin (A.) 
Watlala Hale (H.) 
Watlala Latham (R. G.) 


Western — Continued. 

A review of Hale (H.), An international 
idiom. 

A. general discussion, including a number of 
examples, with meanings, of the Chinook Jar- 
gon. 

Whymper (Frederick). Travel and ad- 
venture | in the | territory of Alaska, | 
formerly Russian America—now ceded 
to the | United States—and in various 
other | parts of the north Pacific. | By 
Frederick Whymper.|[Design.] | With 
map and illustration. | 

London: | John Murray, Albemarle 
street. | 1868. | The right of Translation 
is reserved. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title versonames of 
printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. vii-ix, contents pp. xi-xix, list of illustra- 
tions p. [xx], text pp. 1-306, appendix pp. 307- 
331, map, plates, 8°. 

A brief discussion of the Chinuk language, 
with a few examples, pp. 21, 24. 

Copies seen: Boston Public, British Museum, 
Congress. 

At the Field sale, catalogue no. 2539, a copy 
sold for $2.75. 

An American edition titled as follows: 


Travel and adventure | in the | 
territory of Alaska, | formerly Russian 
America—now ceded to the | United 


CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 15 
Whymper (F.) — Continued. 


States—and in various other | parts of 


Wilson (D.)— Continued. 
—— Prehistoric man | Researches into 


the north Pacific. | By Frederick 
Whymper. | [Picture.] | With map and 
illustrations. | 

New York: | Harper & brothers, 
publishers, | Franklin square. | 1869. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 11. preface pp. xi-xii, contents 
pp. xili-xviii, list of illustrations p. xix, text 
pp. 21-332, appendix pp. 333-353, map and 
plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as in the London edition, 
titled next above, pp. 39, 42. 

Copies seen: Bancioft, Boston Athenzun, 
Geological Survey, Powell. 

Reprinted, 1871, pp. xix, 21-353, 8°. 

A French edition titled as follows: 


— Frédérick Whymper | Voyages et 
aventures | dans | Alaska (ancienne 


Amérique russe) | Ouvrage traduit de | 


PAnglais | avee Vautorisation, de 
Yauteur | par Emile Jonveaux | Ilus- 


tré de 37 gravures sur bois | et accom- | 


pagné (une carte | 

Paris | librairie Hachette et Ci | 
boulevard Saint-Germain, 79 | 1871 | 
Tous droits réservés 

Cover title as above, half-title verso name of 


printer 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. i-ii, | 
half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp.3-405, table | 


des chapitres pp. 407-412, map, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
pp. 29-30. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 
Wilson (Daniel). Prehistoric man | Re- 
searches into the origin of civilisation 
| in the old and the new world | By | 


Daniel Wilson, LL. D. | professor of | 


history and English literature in Uni- 
versity college, Toronto; | author of the 
“Archeology and prehistoric annals of 
Scotland,” etc. | In two volumes. | 
Volume I[-IJ}. | 

Cambridge: | Macmillan and co., | 
and 23, Henrietta street, Covent gar- 
den, | London, | 1862. | (The right of 
Translation is reserved. ) 

2vols.: half-title verso design 1 1. colored 
frontispiece 1 1. title verso name of printer 11. 
dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii-xvi, 
contents pp. xvii-xviii, text pp. 1-488, plan; 
half-title verso design 1 1. colored frontispiece 
11. title verso name of printer 11]. contents pp. 
v-vi, text pp. 1475, appendix pp. 478-483, index 
pp. 485-499, verso advertisement, 8°. 

Remarks on the Chinook Jargon, with exam- 
ples, vol. 2, pp. 429-432. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Eames, Watkinson. 


Winthrop (Theodore). 


the origin of civilisation | in the old 
and the new world | By | Daniel Wil- 
son, LL.D. | professor [&e. two lines. ] 
| Second edition. | 

London: | Macmillan and co, | 1865. | 
(The right of Translation is reserved.) 

Half-title verso design 1 ].colored frontispiece 
1 1. title verso name of printer 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 |. contents pp. vii-xiii, colored 
plate 1 1. illustrations pp. xv-xvi, preface (dated 
29th April 1865) pp. xvii-xviii, preface to the 
first edition pp. xix-xxvi, half-title verso blank 
1 1. text pp. 1-622, index pp. 623-635, 8°. 

Remarks on the Oregon Jargon, with exam- 
ples, pp. 586-588. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames. 


—— Prehistoric man | Researches into 


the Origin of Civilisation | in the Old 
and the New World. | By | Daniel Wil- 
son, LL. D., F. R. 8. E. | professor [&<. 
two lines.] | Third edition, revised and 
enlarged, | with illustrations. | In two 
volumes. | Vol. I (-II]. | 
London :| Macmillan and Co. | 1876. | 
(The right of Translation is reserved. ) 


2 vols.: half-title verso design 1 1. colored 
frontispiece 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 
1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface (dated 18th 
November 1875) pp. vii-viii, contents pp. ix- 
xiii, illustrations pp. xiv-xv, text pp. 1-399; 
half-title verso design 11. colored frontispiece 
1 1. title verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-ix, 
illustrations pp. x-xi, text pp. 1-386, index pp. 
387-401, list of works by the same author ete. 
11. 8°. 

Remarks on the Chinook language or Oregon 
Jargon, with examples, vol. 2, pp. 334-338. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames, Har- 
vard. 


The canoe and 
the saddle, | adventures among the 
northwestern | riversand forests; | and 
Isthmania. | By Theodore Winthrop, | 
author of [&c. two lines. ] | 

Boston: | Ticknor and Fields. | 1863. 


Title verso copyright notice and names of 
printers 1 1. contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 
5-375, 16°. 

A partial vocabulary (about 275 words and 
phrases, alphabetically arranged) of the Chi- 
nook Jargon, pp. 299-302. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenzeum, 
Congress, Harvard, Mallet. 

I have seen mention of an edition: 
York, 1876, 16°. 

Theodore Winthrop, author, born in New 
Haven, Conn., September 22, 1828, died near 
Great Bethel, Va., June 10, 1861, was the son of 


New 


Youth's. 


76 


Winthrop (T.) — Continued. 

Francis Bayard Winthrop. He was graduated 
at Yale in 1848, with the Clark scholarship, on 
which he continued there a year, studying 
mental science, languages, and history. In 1849 
he went to recruit his health in Europe, where 
he remained until January, 1851. There he 
became acquainted with William H. Aspin- 
wall, whose children he taught for some time, 
and through him Winthrop entered the employ 
of the Pacific Mail Steamship Company, to 
whose offices in Panama he was transferred in 
1852. In the following year he visited Cali- 
fornia and Oregon, and thence he returned over- 
land to New York. In December, 1853, he 
joined, as a volunteer, the expedition under 
Lieut. Isaac G. Strain, to survey a canal route 
across the Isthmus of Panama, and soon after 
his return, in March, 1854, he began to study 
law with Charles Tracy. He was admitted to 
the bar in 1855. At the opening of the civil 
war Winthrop enlisted in the Seventh New 
York regiment, which he accompanied to Wash- 
ington. Soon afterward he went with Gen. 
Benjamin F. Butler to Fort Monroe as military 
secretary, with the rank of major, and with his 
commanding officer he planned the attack on 
Little and Great Bethel, in which he took part. 
During the action at the latter place he sprang 
upon a log to rally his men and received a 
bullet in his heart.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. 
Biog. 


¥; 


Youth's — Continued. 


The youth’s | companion: | A 
juvenile monthly Magazine published 
for | the benefit of the Puget Sound 
Catholic Indian | Missions; and set to 
type, printed and in part | written by 
the pupils of the Tulalip, Wash. Ty. | 

Indian Industrial Boarding Schools, 
under | the control of the Sisters of 
Charity. | Approved by the Rt. Rev. 
Bishop [ #gidius, of Nesqualy. ]| Vol. I. 
May, 1881. No.1[-Vol. V. May, 1886. 


No. 60]. 
[Tulalip Indian Reservation, Snoho- 


mish Co. W. T.] 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE CHINOOKAN LANGUAGES. 


Wisconsin Historical Society: These words, fol- 


lowing a title or within parenthesis aftera note, 
indicate that a copy of the work referred to has 
been seen by the compiler in the library of that 
institution, Madison, Wis. 


Words: 
Cathlascon See Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Cathlasecon Latham (R. G.) 
Chinook Bancroft (H. H.) 
Chinook Brinton (D. G.) 
Chinook Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Chinook Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Chinook Daa (L. K.) 
Chinook Grasserie (R. de la). 
Chinook Haines (E. M.) 
Chinook Latham (R. G.) 
Chinook Platzmann (J.) 
Chinook Pott (A. F.) 
Chinook Smith (8. B.) 
Chinook Tylor (E. B.) 
Chinook Youth’s. 


Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Crane (A.) 

Chase (P. E.) 

Eells (M.) 

Latham (R. G.) 
Leland (C. G.) 
Norris (P. W.) 
Tylor (E. B.) 
‘Wilson (D.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 


Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Chinook Jargon 
Watlala 


Edited by Rev. J. B. Boulet. Insteadof being 
paged continuously, continued articles have a 
separate pagination dividing the regular num- 
bering. For instance,in no. 1, pp. 11-14, Lives 
of the saints, are numbered 1-4 and the article 
is continued in no.2 on pp. 5-8, taking the place 
of pp. 41-44 of the regular numbering. Dis- 
continued after May, 1886, on accountof the 
protracted illness of the editor. 


Lord’s prayer in the Cascade language, p. 
284.—The name of God in 70 different lan- 
guages, among them the Chinook, vol. 2, p. 247. 

Copies seen: Congress, Georgetown, Welles- 
ley. 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX, 


1820 Chinook Vocabulary Franchére (G.) 
1830 Jargon Sentences Green (J.S.) 
1831 Jargon Vocabulary Cox (R.) 

1832 Jargon Vocabulary Cox (R.) 
1832-1833 Chinook Vocabulary Rafinesque (C.S.) 
1833 Chinook Vocabulary Priest (J.) 

1835 Chinook and Jargon Vocabularies Chinook. 

1836 Chinook Vocabulary Gallatin (A.S.) 
1838 Jargon Vocabulary Parker (S.) 
1840 Jargon Vocabulary Parker (S.) 
1840-184? Jargon Various Blanchet (F.N.) 
1841 Chinook Tribal names Gairdner (—). 
1841 Chinook and Cathlascon Vocabularies Scouler (J.) 

1841 Chinook and Cathlascon Vocabularies Tolmie (W. F.) 
1842 Jargon Vocabulary Parker (S.) 
1843 Jargon Vocabulary Bolduc (J.-B. Z.) 
1844 Cathlascon Various Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) 
1844 Chinook T.ord’s prayer, etc. Duflot de Mofras (E.) 
1844 Chinook Vocabulary Dunn (J.) 

1844 Jargon Vocabulary Parker (S.) 
1846 Cathlascon Words Latham (R. G.) 
1846 Chinook Vocabulary Dunn (J.) 

1816 Jargon Vocabulary Parker (S.) 

1846 Jargon Vocabulary Scouler (J.) 

1846 Various Various Hale (H.) 

1846 Various Various Hale (H.) 

1847 Jargon Vocabulary Palmer (J.) 

1847 Various Bibliographic Vater (J.S.) 
1848 Chinook Proper names Catlin (G.) 

1848 Chinook and Cathlascon Words Latham (R. G.) 
1848 Chinook and Jargon Vocabularies Montgomerie (J. E.) 
1848 Jargon Sentences Allen (A. J.) 
1848 Various Various Gallatin (A.) 
1849 Chinook and Jargon Vocabularies Ross (A.) 

1850 Jargon Sentences Allen (A. J.) 
1850 Jargon Vocabulary Latham (R.G.) 
1850 Jargon Vocabulary Palmer (J.) 

1851 Jargon Vocabulary Palmer (J.) 
1851-1857 Chinook Classification Schoolcraft (H. R.) 
1852 Chinook General Ciscussion Berghaus (H.) 
1852 Chinook Proper names Catlin (G.) 

1852 Chinook and Clakama Proper names Stanley (J. M.) 
1852 Jargon Vocabulary Palmer (J.) 
18538 Chinook Classification Gallatin (A.) 
1853 Chinook e Vocabulary Shortess (1%.) 
1853 Clatsop Vocabulary Emmons (G. F.) 
1853 Jargon Vocabulary Lionnet (—)- 
1854 Jargon Vocabulary Franchére (G.) 
1856 Chinook General discussion Latham (R. G.) 
1856 Jargon Dictionary Blanchet (F.N.) 
1857 (Shinook Words Daa (L. K.) 


77 


78 


1857 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1859 
1859 
1860 
1860 
1860 
1860? 
1860 
1860 
1862 
1862? 
1862 
1862? 
1862 
1862 
1862 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1864 
1865 
1865 
1865 
1865 
1866 
1867 
1867 
1868 
1868 
1868 
1868-1892 
1869 
1869 
1869 
186? 
1870 
1870 
1870 
1871 
1871 
1871 
1871 
1871? 
1872 
1872 
1873 
1873? 
1873 
1874 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 


Chinook and Jargon 
Chinook and Jargon 
Jargon 

Jargon 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook and Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Various 
Chinook 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Watlala 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jarzon 
Jargon 
Chinook 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Chinook and Jargon 
Jargon 

Chinook 

Jargon 

Jargon 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Jargon 

Jargon 

Jargon 

Chinook 

Clatsop 

Jargon 

Chinook 

Chinook 

Chinook and Jargon 
Jargon 

Jargon 

Chinook 

Jargon 

Chinook and Jargon 
Jargon 

Jargon 

Chinook and Jargon 


Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Classification 
Vocabulary 
Bibliographic 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Sentences 
Vocabulary, ete. 
Classification 
Numerals 
Vocabulary, ete. 
Text 
Vocabulary 
Various 

Words 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
General discussion 
Vocabulary 
Bibliographic 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Bibliographic 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Classification 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
General discussion 
Sentences 
Hymns 
Bibliographic 
Vocabulary 
General discussion 
Dictionary 
Vocabulary 
Bibliographic 
General discussion 
Numerals 
Vocabulary 
Hymns 
Bibliographic 
Vocabulary 
Lord’s prayer 
General discussion 
Proper names 
Words 
Dictionary, etc. 
Dictionary 
Bibliographic 
Dictionary 
Bibliographic 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Words 


Swan (J. G.) 

Swan (J. G.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Armstrong (A. N.) 
Jéhan (L. F.)° 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Ludewig (H. E.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Chinook. 
Guide-book. 
Hazlitt (W. C.) 
Wabass (W.G.) 
Allen (A. J.) 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Schoolcraft (H. R.) 
Haldeman (S.S.) 
Domenech (KE. H. D.) 
Demers (M.) 
Vocabulary. 
Latham (R. G.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary. 

Gibbs (G.) 
Macdonald (D. G. F.) 
Wilson (D.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Gibbs (G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Gibbs (G.), note. 
Macdonald (D. G. F.), note. 
Winthrop (T.) 
Jéhan (L. F.) 
Dictionary. 

Stuart (G.) 

Wilson (D.) 

Macfie (M.) 
Macleod (X. D.) 
Leclere (C.) 
Richardson (A. D.) 
Whymper (F.) , 
Blanchet (¥. N.) 
Sproat (G. M.) 
Sabin (J.) 
Whymper (F.) 
Chase (P. E.) 
Richardson (A. D.), note. 
Macieod (X. D.) 
Triibner & Co. 
Semple (J. E.) 
Marietti (P.) 
Whymper (F.) 
Catlin (G.) 

Tylor (E. B.) 
Demers (M.), et al. 
Dictionary. 
Triibner & Co. 
Langevin (H. L.) 
Field (T. W.) 
Blanchet (F. N.) 
Dictionary. 

Tylor (E. B.) 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 79 


1874 Chinook and Jargon Words Tylor (E. B.) 

1874-1876 Various Various Bancroft (H. H.) 

1875 Chivook and Jargon Bibliographic Field (L. W.) 

1875 Jargoiu General discussion Fells (M.) 

1875 Tar gor Ssiiiidiis Fells (M.) 

1875 Jargon Vocabulary Richatdson (A. D.) 

1876 Chinook Bibliographic Platzmaiini (J.) 

1876 Jargon General discussion Wilson (D.) 

1876 Jargon Words Clough (J. C.) 

1877 Chinook General discussion Gatschet (A.5.) 

1877 Chinook Songs Fells (M.) 

1877 Chinook General discussion Beach (W. W.) 

1877 Chinook and Jargon Words Tylor (E. B.) 

1877 Clakawia Vocabulary Gatschet (A.S.) 

1877? Jargou Dictionary Dictionary. 

1877 Jargon Dictionary Guide. 

1877 Wasco Vocabulary Gatschet (A. 8.) 

1877-1887 Chinook Grammatic Miiller (F.) 

1878 Chinook Classification Keane (A. H.) 

18738 Chinook General discussion Bates (H. W.) 

1878 Chinook Words Duncan (D.) 

1878 Chinook and Jatgon Bibliographic Leclere (C.) 

1878 Jargon Dictionary Blanchet (F. N.) 

1878? Jargon Dictionary Gill (J. K.), note. 

1878 Jargon Hymn book Eells (M.) 

1878-1886 Various Bibliographic Trumbull (J. H.) 

1879 Jargon Dictionary Blanchet (F. N.) 

1880 Chinook Classification Sayce (A. H.) 

1880 Jargon Dictionary Good (J. B.) 

1880-1881 Jargon Grammatic Eells (M.) 

1881 Chinook and Jargon Words Tylor (E. B.) 

1881 Chinook and Jargon Words Tylor (E. B.) 

1881-1886 Cascade Vocabulary Youth's. 

1882 Chinook Bibliographic Triibner & Co. 

1882 Chinook Classification Keane (A. H.), note. 

1882 Chinook General discussion Bates (H. W.) 

1882 Chinook General discussion Drake (S. G.) 

1882 Chinook Words Smith (S. B.) 

1882 Chinook and Jargon Bibliographic Eells (M.) 

1882 Jargon Dictionary Gill (J. K.) 

1882 Various Various Bancroft (H. H.) 

1883 Chinook and Jargon Words Tylor (E. B.) 

1883 Jargon Dictionary Dictionary. 

1883 Jargon Lord's prayer Everette (W. E.) 

1883 Jargon Lord's prayer Everette (W. E.) 

1883 Jargon Words Norris (P. W.) 

1884 Chinook General discussion Schooleraft (H. R.) 

1884 Chinook Vocabularies Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson 
(G. M.) 

1884 Chinook Lord’s prayer Bergholtz (G. F.) 

1884 Jargon Dictionary Gill (J. K.) 

1881 Jargon Hymns Everette (W. E.) 

1884 Jargon Ten commandments Everette (W. E.) 

1884 Wasco Vocabulary Curtin (J.) 

1884-1887 Chinook Bibliographic Pott (A. F.) 

1885 Chinook Classification Keane (A. H.), note. 

1885 Chinook General discussion Bates (H. W.) 

1885 Various Bibliographic Pilling (J. C.) 

1885-1889 Chinook General discussion Featherman (A.) 

1886 Chinook Proper names Catlin (G.) 

1886 Jargon Dictionary Durieu (P.), note. 

1886 Jargon Dictionary Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 

1886 Jargon Hymns Kells (M.) 

1886 Various Bibliographie Quaritch (B.) 

1887 Chinook Proper names Catlin (G.) 

1887 Chinook Proper names Catlin (G.) 


80 


iss? 
1887 
1as7 
1887 
1887 
1887 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1859 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
i891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891-1893 
1892 
1892 
1892 
1892 
1892 
1893 
1893 
1893 
1893 
1893 
1893 
1893 
1893 
1893 
1893 
1893 
1893 
1892 
1893 
1893 
1893 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 


Jargoti 
J argon 
Jargon 
Various 
Various 
Various 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook and Jargon 
Chinook and Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Chinook and Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Sargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Various 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Chinook 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 
Jargon 


Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Bibliographic 
Bibliographic 
Bibliographic 
Numerals 
Proper names 
Words 
Words 
Various 
Words 
Dictionary 
General discussion 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Songs 

Words 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Hymn book 
Numerals 
Vocabulary 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Dictionary, eto. 
Review 
Review 
Review 
Sermon 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Hymn book 
Periodical 
Periodical 
Periodical 
Review 
Words 
Periodical 
Bible history 
Dictionary 
Play 

Primer 
Geographic names 
Grammar, dictionary 
Grammatic 
Texts 
Various 
Bible history 
Bible history 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Dictionary 
Grammar, dictionary 
Hymns 
Hymns, songs 
Legends 


Dictionary. 
Dictionary. 
Gill (J. K) 
Dufossé (E.) 
Quaritch (B.) 
Quaritch (B.) 
Eells (M.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Brinton (D.G.) 
Brinton (D. G.) 
Haines (E. M.) 
Tylor (E. B.) 
Prosch (T. W.) 


. Leland (C. G.) 


Eells (M.) 

Eells (M.), note. 
Boas (F.) 

Tylor (E. B.) 
Dictionary. 

Gill (J. K.) 

Tate (C. M.) 

Eells (M.) 

Eells (M.) 

Nicoll (E. H.) 
Brinton (D. G.) 
Grasserie (R. de la). 
Hale (H.) 

Hale (H.) 

Hale (H.) 

Crane (A.) 

Leland (C. G.) 
Western. 

New. 

Brinton (D. G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Coones (5S. F.) 

Gill (J. K.) 

Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Charencey (H. de). 
Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. BR.) 
St. Onge (L. N. ) 

Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Eells (M.) 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Durieu (P.) 

St. Onge (L. N.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Bulmer (T.58.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Eells (M.) 

St. Onge (L. N.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 

St. Onge (L. N.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 

St. Onge (L. N.) 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 


Jargon 

Jargon 

Jargon 

Jargon 

Jargon 

Chinook 

Chinook and Jargon 
Jargon 

Jargon 

Various 


CHIN——6 


Lord’s prayer 
Prayers 
Reader 
Various 
Vocabulary 
Hymns 
Vocabularies 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Tribal names 


81 


Bulmer (T.S.) 
Bulmer (T.5.) 

Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Tate (C. M.) 

Pinart (A. L.) 
Belden (G. P.) 

Eells (M.) 

Douglass (J.) 


- 
be 
| 


» Filet; 
gant a) 
bis 
.- 


4 f bogie 
ae 
*: : 


‘ 


a 


at 


miei: 
ee 
t 
=— 
Ad 


At 


ft 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


OF THE 


meLIoHAN LANGUAGES 


BY 


JAMES CONSTANTINE PILLING 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1893 


7? Te oF 


LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES ISSUED BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 


Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology. Catalogue of lin- 
guistic manuscripts in the library of the Bureau of ethnology. By 
James C. Pilling. 

In Bureau of ethnology first annual report; half-title as above p. 553, text pp. 
595-577, Washington, 1881, royal 8°. 

Issued separately with cover title as follows: 

Catalogue | of | linguistic manuscripts | in the | library of the Bureau 
of ethnology | by | James C. Pilling | (Extracted from the first annual 
report of the Bureau | of ethnology) | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1881 

Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title as under entry next above p. 553, 
text pp. 555-577, royal 8°. One hundred copies issued. 

Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology | J. W. Powell di- 
rector | Proof-sheets | of a | bibliography | of | the languages | of the 
| North American Indians | by | James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib- 
uted only to collaborators) | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1885 

Title verso blank 1 1. notice (signed J. W. Powell) p. iii, preface (November 4, 1884) 
pp. v—-viii, introduction pp. ix—x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of libraries re- 
ferred to by initials pp. xxxvii-xxxviii, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text pp. 
1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, index of languages and dialects pp. 
1091-1135, plates, 4°. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or 
first word of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of 
the sheet only. 

‘Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di- 
rector | Bibliography | of the | Eskimo language | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [ Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1887 


Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. preface (April 20, 1887) pp.iii-v, 
text pp. 1-109, chronologic index pp. 111-116, 8 fac-similes, 8°. An edition of 100 
copies was issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di- 
rector | Bibliography | of the | Siouan languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1887 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (September 1, 1887) 
pp. iii-v, text pp. 1-82, chronologic index pp. 83-87, 8°, An edition of 100 copies 
Was issued in royal 8°, 

I 


IV LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 


Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director | 
| Bibliography | of the | Iroquoian languages | by | James Constantine — 
Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1888 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (December 15, 1888) pp. 
iii—vi, text pp. 1-180, addenda pp. 181-189, chronologic index pp. 191-208, 9 fac-similes, 
8°. An edition of 100 copies was issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director 

| Bibliography | of the | Muskhogean languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [| Vignette] | 5; 

Washington | Government printing office | 1889 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (May 15, 1889) pp. iii-y, 
text pp. 1-103, chronologic index pp. 105-114, 8°. An edition of 100 copies was issued 
in royal 8°. 

Bibliographic notes | on | Eliot’s Indian bible | and | on his other 
translations and works in the | Indian language of Massachusetts | 
Extract from a “Bibliography of the Algonquian languages” | [ Vig- 
nette| | 

Washington | Government printing office 


1890 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1]. text pp. 1-58, 21 fac-similes, 
royal 8°, i“orms pp. 127-184 of the Bibliography of the Algonquian languages, title 
of which follows. Two hundred and fifty copies issued. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director 
| Bibliography | of the | Algonquian languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [ Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1891 


Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (June 1, 1891) pp. ili-iv, 
introduction p. v, index of languages pp. vii—viii, list of facsimiles pp. ix—x, text 
pp. 1-549, addenda pp. 551-575, chronologic index pp. 577-614, 82 facsimiles, 8°. An 
edition of 100 copies was issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director 

| Bibliography | of the | Athapascan languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [| Vignette] | : 

Washington | Government printing office | 1892 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. [list of] linguistie bibliog- 
raphies issued by the Bureau of Ethnology pp. ili-iv, preface (June 15, 1892) pp. 
y-vii, introduction p. ix, index of languages pp. xi-xii, list of facsimiles p. xiii, text 
pp. 1-112, addenda pp. 115-115, chronologic index pp. 117-125, 4 facsimiles, 8°. An 
edition of 100 copies was issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director 

| Bibliography | ofthe | Chinookan languages | (including the Chinook 
Jargon) | by | James Constantine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1893 y 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. [list of] linguistie bibliog- 
raphies issued by the Bureau of Ethnology pp. iii-iv, preface (March 10, 1893) pp. 
v-viii, introduction p, ix, index of languages p, xi, list of facsimiles p. xiii, text pp. 
1-76, chronologic index pp, 77-81, 3 facsimiles, 8°. An edition of 100 copies was issued 
in royal 8°, , 


i» 


; 
> 
4 
¢ 


PREFACE. 


Of the numerous stocks of Indians fringing the coast of northwest 
America few have been as thoroughly studied or their languages so 
well recorded as the Salishan. As early as 1801 Mackenzie published 
a short vocabulary of each of two dialects of this stock, and a glance 
at the chronologic index appended to this catalogue will show that ad- 
ditions or reprints have been made at short intervals ever since. The 
more modern efforts of Gibbs, Hale, Eells, Gatschet, Tolmie, Dawson, 
and Boas, especially those of the last named, have resulted in the col- 

lection of a body of material which has enabled us to differentiate the 
dialects of this family of speech to a degree more minute than usual. 

The knowledge gained from the studies of these gentlemen, and from 
those of others, also, has greatly extended our information concerning 
the geographic distribution of these people. Quoting from Major Pow- 
ell’s article on the Linguistic Families of North America in the seventh 
annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology: 


The extent of the Salish or Flathead family was unknown to Gallatin, as indeed 
appears to have been the exact locality of the tribe of which he gives an anonymous 
vocabulary from the Duponceau collection. The tribe is stated to have resided 
upon one of the branches of the Columbia River, ‘‘which must be either the most 
southern branch of Clarke’s River or the most northern branch of Lewis’s River.” 
The former supposition was correct. As employed by Gallatin the family embraced 
only a single tribe, the Flathead tribe proper. The Atnah, a Salishan tribe, were 
considered by Gallatin to be distinct, and the name would be eligible as the family 
name; preference, however, is given to Salish. HS a 

The most southern outpost of the family, the Tillamook and Nestucca, were estab- 
lished on the coast of Oregon, about 50 miles to the south of the Columbia, where 
they were quite separated from their kindred to the north by the Chinookan tribes. 
Beginning on the north side of Shoalwater Bay, Salishan tribes held the entire north- 
western part of Washington, including the whole of the Puget Sound region, except 
only the Macaw territory about Cape Flattery, and two insignificant spots, one 
near Port Townsend, the other on the Pacific coast to the south of Cape Flattery, 
which were occupied by Chimakuan tribes. Eastern Vancouver Island to about 
midway of its length was also held by Salishan tribes, while the great bulk of their 
territory lay on the mainland opposite and included much of the upper Columbia 
On the south they were hemmed in mainly by the Shahaptian tribes. Upon the 
east Salishan tribes dwelt to a little beyond the Arrow lakes and their feeder, one 
of the extreme north forks of the Columbia. Upon the southeast Salishan tribes 
extended into Montana, including the upper drainage of the Columbia. They were 
met here in 1804 by Lewis and Clarke. On the northeast Salish territory extended 
to about the fifty-third parallel. In the northwest it did not reach the Chileat 
River. 

¥; 


VI PREFACE, 


Within the territory thus indicated there is considerable diversity of customs and 
a greater diversity of language. The language is split into a great number of dia- 
lects, many of which are doubtless mutually unintelligible. 

The relationship of this family to the Wakashan is a very interesting problem. 
Evidences of radical affinity have been discovered by Boas and Gatschet, and the 
careful study of their nature and extent now being prosecuted by the former may 
result in the union of the two, though until recently they have been considered 
quite distinct. 

With the exception of the Chinookan family the Salishan dialects 
have contributed a greater number of words to the Chinook jargon 
than have any other of the languages of the coast—so many indeed 
that it was a question whether the literature of the jargon should not 
be included herein. This has not been done, however, except in the 
case of those books and papers which distinetly mark the Salishan 
elements entering into the composition of the jargon; this course be- 
ing pursued because a list of the jargon literature appears in the Bibli- 
ography of the Chinookan Languages. 

This bibliography embraces 320 titular entries, of which 259 relate 
to printed books and articles and 61 to manuscripts. Of these, 311 
have been seen and collated by the writer (257 prints and 54 manu- 
scripts); titles and descriptions of two of the prints and ‘seven of the 
manuscripts have been obtained from outside sources. 

As far as possible, in the proof-reading of these pages comparison 
has been made direct with the works themselves. Much of the mate- 
rial is in the library of the writer, and he has had access for the pur- 
pose to the libraries of Congress, the Smithsonian Institution, the 
Bureau of Ethnology, Georgetown University, as well as several well- 
stocked private collections in the city of Washington. Mr. Wilber- 
force Eames, whose library is so rich in Americana, has compared the 
titles of works contained therein, as also those in the Lenox Library, 
of which he now has charge. 


Washington, D. C., June 24, 1893. 


ne 


Me 


z 


INE EOPwU Clio wn. 


In the compilation of this series of catalogues the aim has been to 
include in each bibliography everything, printed or in manuscript, relat- 
ing to the family of languages to which it is devoted: books, pamph-' 
lets, articles in magazines, tracts, serials, etc., and such reviews and 
announcements of publications as seemed worthy of notice. 

The dictionary plan has been followed to its extreme limit, the sub- 
ject and tribal indexes, references to libraries, etc., being included in 
one alphabetic series. The primary arrangement is alphabetic by 
authors, translators of works into the native languages being treated as 
authors. Under each author the arrangement is, first, by printed works, . 
and second, by manuscripts, each group being given chronologically ; 
and in the case of printed books each work is followed through its 
various editions before the next in chronologic order is taken up. 

Anonymously printed works are entered under the name of the author, 
when known, and under the first word of the title not an article or 
preposition when not known. A cross-reference is given from the first 
words of anonymous titles when entered under an author, and from the 
first words of all titles in the Indian languages, whether anonymous or 
not. Manuscripts are entered under the author when known, under 
the dialect to which they refer when he is not known. 

Each author’s name, with his title, etc., is entered in full but once, 
i. e., in its alphabetic order. Every other mention of him is by sur- 
name and initials only, except in those rare cases when two persons of 
the same surname have also the same initials. 

All titular matter, including cross-reference thereto, is in brevier; all 
collations, descriptions, notes, and index matter in nonpareil. 

In detailing contents and in adding notes respecting contents, the 
spelling of proper names used in the particular work itself has been 
followed, and so far as possible the language of the respective writers 
is given. In the index entries of the tribal names the compiler has 
adopted that spelling which seemed to him the best. 

As a general rule initial capitals have been used in titular matter in 
only two cases: first, for proper names; and second, when the word 

VII 


VEL INTRODUCTION. 


actually appears on the title page with an initial capital and with the 
remainder in small capitals or lower-case letters. In giving titles in the 
German language the capitals in the case of all substantives have beea 
respected. 

When titles are given of works not seen by the compiler the fact is 
stated or the entry is followed by an asterisk within curves, and in 
either*case the authority is usually given. 


Peo: OF LA NG. BrArGues.. 


Ciatcie Wilalsie alas) = his 6 «sels oe «= © 6 ais 20 0 « © «(e/a = ns =) am, a ae a oe sas © Oe 8s « 


Belacoola. See Bilkula. 
Bilechula. See Bilkula. 


Bilkula 


Bilqula. See Bilkula. 


Catoltq 


. See Komuk. 


9 ES ee eee ae ey eS Le raed Aah aE 
Chihalis. See Chehalis. 

Clallam. See Klallam. 

Coeur d’ Aléne. See Skitsuish. 

Colville. See Skoyelpi. 


Comux. 


See Komuk. 


Cowitchen. See Kawichen. 

Cowlitz. See Kaulits. 

EMER et ee Pets os So LS ens we na Wale = ee 
Flathead. See Salish. 

MEME ECG Soi crain a oa Sale s Win sa actos wea te ome san ee ee 
NII ST 2h oh es 05 Pio a8) a5 278d Se ls God ve ie oe 8 - 


Kaulits 


LE te el gio at en an ee gg A bee eet ete 
Kilamook. See Tilamuk. 
ea Sy ci A Os ge ee 3 


Kowelits. See Kaulits. 
Kuwalitsk. See Kaulits. 


SI age ape 2 OS. a. 8 ref aroe ds « ASA en Sess ME 
SCR a Aa eee ie Omen ty Reeteer Sec greet Sane re 
Liloeet. See Lilowat. 

PEER Sly te tee ag he 5 ee a ae ke oo 
L’kungen. See Songish. 

I EN etna aw. Go Se ke oe Sc a Sale cw okies 
Nanaimoo. See Snanaimuk. 

a NA Si al ag nie st sop a one 
Neklakapamuk. See Netlakapamuk. 

MMT Sa Ser ope gel a NEE ie al BOS ote s oda 


Nicoutemuch. See Nikutamuk. 


14 


x INDEX OF LANGUAGES. 


Page. 
Malknsamiuk. .....: 0s cseseodecea see caeeereess eee ee 49 
NGS WALL... 2. occu dee SRR t ad eee ee 49 
Nisqualli. See Niskwalli. 
Nooksahk. See Nuksahk. 
Noosdalum. See Klallam. 
Nsietshawus. See Tilamuk. 
Mukeahle 422. 6..002 5004 ceocs eco eee Pee ae ee 49 
Nuk walimuk oo. o.s2. 22.4 Seles eeeeee ee oe eee 49 
Nusdalum. See Klallam. 
Nuskiletemh. See Nukwalimuk. 
Wusulph 2.22.2 oid Soka te ota pie Sete Bee ee ae 49 
QAM aRAN es oe eaten ese Os de + oS ae Ghee 50 
Pend d’Oreille. See Kalispel. 
WPentlash ee i. sc 2 oe ee Se See See ee ee ee 50 
PipeWwaANE oo otc SS cee eee ee oF 
Pisquous. See Piskwau. 
Ponderay. See Kalispel. 
Payaling. . 2... 822 b ne ee OE Se aaa ee cee enn 53 
Queniult. See Kwinaiutl. 
SS AMI SH Wi aeieic ws) lon Oe Pe Se ee bares oe See ae 55 
SoSH Vitis) Sawa idee aeenl Ae oe PE ee 56 
Schwapmuth. See Shiwapmuk. 
Schwoyelpi. See Skoyelpi. 
DMIWAPMUK si S2esceil se eee s eet ees ae rr 60 
Shooswap. See Shuswap. 
PIS WAP so 2. eA Solo coe eh oe od ee 2 60 
menthol es Soee es ete CL LAL See SCR Saeee eR Ce re 60 
HENS cores Geet See ee Bete eRe ee oe 60 
Pane Ye ye eee cre ee Se es 60 
Skitsamish. See Skitsuish. 

P ORTUSMIOM. 22 ct etek Rl tee TRS PERLE RS setae ets Seok 2 eee 60 
ROM OMMSH: 2% oi. Se SA RE S08 ee Lee ee re 61 
BKOVEN NN. 2.26 5 22S - - ele e sln s e Re ae a ae ee 61 
CW ORIN ooo 2 See ite Welie sb ule welee ake oe 61 


Skwale. See Niskwalli. 

Skwallyamish. See Niskwalli. 

EW AMIS. 8220 hee aes rE A 61 
Skwaxon. See Skwaksin. 

Snanaimoo. See Snanaimuk. 


PMAMAINGHE So. 32 ed POS Ste eae See ee eee Oe ee 65 
SHOHOMESH 0. es Se osc re oe eee ee fee 65 
SONGISH 2. 2h05¢ fs oUAd as os SOR Se et See 65 
SpPOKAN.: 2500S eee ee vs ee ee ee 65 


Squallyamish. See Niskwalli. 
Squoxon. See Skwaksin. 


INDEX OF LANGUAGES. 


NIE 2 ote SS eS Seek where od oa at sre. s 


NEE Sore sgern oo Nee oe MN oe ea ese teense ; 


Tillamook. See Tilamuk. 


NITE So rior er) Pn ee Poe Lot 


Tsihalis. See Chehalis. 


Bae es re el oe ee ee a oes ae es 


Wakynakane. See Okinagan. 
Winatsha, See Piskwau. 


be . 
- 
a ee 
{ 
; \ 
\ 
\ 
t 
' 
“ 
a 
Pa 
+e | 
’ 


a 


Bish OF -PACSIEMILES: 


First page of Duriew’s Skwamish Prayers..............- 
First page of the Kamloops Wawa. ...............-...- 
First page of Le Jeune’s Thompson Prayers .......-... 
Title-page of Walker and Hells’s Spokan Primer........ 


Be fest ee 4) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


By JAMES C. PILLING. 


(An asterisk within parentheses indicates that the compiler has seen no copy of the work referred to.) 


A. 


A ha a skoainjuts [Ntlakapmoh]. See | Anderson (A. C.) — Continued. 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Adelung (Johann Christoph) [and Vater 
(J. S.)]. Mithridates | oder | allge- 
meine |Sprachenkunde|mit|dem Vater 
Unser als Sprachprobe | in bey nahe | 
fiinfhundert Sprachen und Mundarten, 
| von | Johann Christoph Adelung, | 
Churfiirstl. Siichsischen Hofrath und 
Ober-Bibliothekar. | [Two lines quota- 
tion.] | Erster[-Vierter] Theil. | 

Berlin, |in der Vossischen Buchhand- 
lung, | 1806[-1817]. 

4 vols. (vol. 3 in three parts), 8°. 

Atnah-Fitzhugh-Sund, vol. 3, pt. 3, pp. 215- 
217, is a general discussion of the language of 
these peopleand includes (p. 216) avocabulary of 
11 words (from Mackenzie) and one of 6 words 
of the language spoken at Friendly Village, 
from the same source. 

Oopies seen: Astor, Bancroft, British Mu- 
seum, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, 
Lenox, Trumbull, Watkinson. 

Priced by Triibner (1856), no. 503, 10. 16s. 

Sold at the Fischer sale, no. 17, for 11.; another 
copy, no. 2042, for16s. At the Field sale, no. 16, 
it brought $11.85; at the Squier sale, no. 9, $5. 
Leclere (1878) prices it, no. 2042,50 fr. At the 
Pinart sale, no. 1322, it sold for 25 fr. and at the 
Murphy sale, no. 24, a half-calf, marble-edged 
copy brought $4. 
Anderson (Alexander Caulfield). Notes 
on the Indian tribes of British North 
America, and the northwest coast. 
Communicated to Geo. Gibbs, esq. By 
Alex. C. Anderson, esq., late of the Hon. 
H. B. Co. And read before the New York 
Historical Society, November, 1862, 


SAL——1 


In Historical Magazine, first series, vol. 7, pp. 
73-81, New York and London, 1863, sm. 4°. 
(Eames.) 

Includes a discussion of the Saeliss or Shew- 
hapmush language. 


Appendix to the Kalispel-English dic- 


tionary. See Giorda (J.) 


Astor: This word following a title or within paren- 


theses after a note indicates that a copy of the 
work referred to has been seen by the compiler 
in the Astor Library, New York City. 


Atna: 


General discussion See Adelung (J.C.) and 
Vater (J.S.) 
General discussion Hale (H.) 


Tribal names Latham (R. G.) 


Vocabulary Adelung (J.C.) and 
Vater (J.S.) 
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Howse (J.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Vocabulary Mackenzie (A.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Words Daa (L. K.) 
Words Schomburgk (R. H.) 
Authorities: 


See Dufossé (E.) 
Field (T. W.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Leclere (C.) 
Ludewig (H. E.) 
Pilling (J. C.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Sabin (J.) 
Steiger (E.) 
Triibner & Co. 
Trumbull (J. H.) 
Vater (J.S.) 


2 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


iB. 


Baker (Theodor). Uber die Musik | der | Bancroft (H. H.) — Continued. 


| nordamerikanischen Wilden | von | 
Theodor Baker. | [Design.] | 

Leipzig, | Druck und Verlag von 
Breitkopf & Hiirtel. | 1882. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents 1 1. text 
pp. 1-81, table p. 82, plates, 8°. 

Songs with music in the Twana and Clallam 
languages (from Eells in the American Anti- 
quarian), pp. 75-77. 

Oopies seen: Boston Athenzum, 
Dorsey, Geological Survey, Pilling. 

Some copies have title-page as follows: 
——Uber die Musik | der | nordameri- 
kanischen Wilden. | Eine Abhandlung 

| zur | Erlangung der Doctorwiirde | 
an der | Universitit Leipzig | von | 
Theodor Baker. | 

Leipzig, | Druck von Breitkopf & 
Hirtel. | 1882. 

Title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, con- 
tents and errata 11. text pp. 1-82, vita 11. plates, 
seh 

Linguistic conten ts as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Lenox. 


Brinton, 


Bancroft: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Mr. H. H. Bancroft, 
San Francisco, Cal. 

Bancroft (Hubert Howe). The | native 
races |of | the Pacific states | of | 
North America. | By | Hubert Howe 
Bancroft.| Volume I. | Wild tribes[-V. 
Primitive history]. | 

New York: | D. Appleton and com- 
pany. | 1874[-1876]. 

5 vols. maps and plates, 8°. Vol. I. Wild 
tribes; II. Civilized nations; III. Myths and 
languages; IV. Antiquities; V. Primitive his- 
tory. 

Some copies of vol. 1 are dated 1875. (Eames, 
Lenox.) 

Classification of the aboriginal languages of 
the Pacific states (vol. 3, pp. 562-573) includes 
the Salish, p. 565.—Vocabulary (16 words) of 
Bellacoola compared with the Chimsyan, p. 
607.—The first three of the ten commandments 
and the Lord's prayer in the Nanaimo lan- 
guage (furnished by J. H. Carmany), pp. 611- 
612.— Comments on the Clallam, Cowichin and 
the Indians of Fraser River and Thompson 
River, pp. 612-613.—Comments on the Neetlak- 
apamuch, conjugation (partial) of the verb to 
give, the Lord’s prayer withinterlinear English 
translation (all from Rey. J. B. Good), pp. 613- 
615.—The Salish languages (pp. 615-620) 
includes a general discussion, p. 616; conjuga- 


tion (partial) of the verb to be angry, pp. 616- 
617; the Lord’s prayer with interlinear Eng- 
lish translation (all the above from Menga- 
rini), p. 617; the Lord’s prayer in Pend 
d’Oreille with interlinear translations into 
English (from De Smet), pp. 617-618.—Gencral 
discussion, with examples of the various Salish 
languages—Skitsuish, Pisquouse, Nsietshaw, 
Niskwallies, Chehalis, Clallam, Lummi, etce., 
pp. 618-620. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Brinton, Brit- 
ish Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, 
Eames, Powell. 

Issued also with title-pages as follows: 


—— The | native races | of | the Pacific 


states | of | North America. | By | Hu- 
bert Howe Bancroft. | Volume I. | Wild 
tribes[-V. Primitive history]. | 

Author’s Copy. | San Francisco. 1874 
[-1876]. 

5 vols. 8°. One hundred copies issued. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Lenox. 

In addition to the above the work has been 
issued with the imprint of Longmans, London; 
Maisonneuve, Paris; and Brockhaus, Leipzig; 
none of which have I seen. 

Issued also with title-pages as follows: 


The works | of | Hubert Howe Ban- 
croft. | Volume I[-V]. | The native 
races. | Vol. I. Wild tribes[-V. Primi- 
tive history]. | 

San Francisco: | A. L. Bancroft & 
company, publishers. | 1882. 

5 vols.8°. This series will include the His- 
tory of Central America, History of Mexico, 
etc., each with its own system of numbering 
and also numbered consecutively in the series. 

Of these works there have been published 
vols. 1-39. The opening paragraph of vol. 39 
gives the following information: ‘‘ This volume 
closes the narrative portion of my historical 
series; there yet remains to be completed the 
biographical section.” 

Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum, 
Bureau of Ethnology, Congress. 


Bates (Henry Walton). Stanford’s | com- 


pendium of geography and travel | 

based on Hellwald’s ‘ Die Erde und ihre 
Volker’ | Central America| the West In- 
dies | and|South America | Edited and 
extended | By H. W. Bates, | assistant- 
secretary of the Royal geographical 
society ; | author of ‘The naturalist on 
the river Amazons’ | With | ethnolog- 
ical appendix by A. H. Keane, B, A, | 

Maps and illustrations I 


“v's 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. a 


Bates (H. W.) —Continued. 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, 8. W. | 1878 

Half-title verso blank 11. title verso blank 1 
1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, list of 
illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of maps p. xix, 
text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443-561, index pp. 
563-571, maps, 8°. 

Keane (A. H.), Ethnography and Philology 
of America, pp. 443-561. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Eames, Geological Survey, National Museum. 
Stanford’s | Compendium of geogra- 
phy and travel | based on Hellwald’s 
‘Die Erde und ihre Volker’ | Central 
America | the West Indies|and | South 
America | Edited and extended | By H. 
W. Bates, | Author of [&c. two lines] 

| With | ethnological appendix by A. 
H. Keane, M. A. J. | Maps and illustra- 
tions | Second and revised edition. | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, 8. W. | 1882. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 
1. preface pp. v—vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, list of 
illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of maps p. xix, 
text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443-561, index pp. 
563-571, maps, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titlenext above. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Harvard. 

— Stanford’s | Compendium of geogra- 
phy and travel | based on Hellwald’s 
‘Die Erde und ihre Volker’ | Central 
America | the West Indies | and South 
America | Edited and extended | By H. 
W. Bates, | assistant-secretary [&c. two 
lines] | With | ethnological appendix by 
A. H. Keane, M. A.I. | Maps and illus- 
trations | Third edition | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, S. W. | 1885 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 
1. preface pp. v—vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, list of 
illustrations pp. xvii-xvili, list of maps p. xix, 
text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443-561, index pp. 


Belacoola. 


Berghaus (Dr. Heinrich). 


Beach (W. W.) —Continued. 


Albany: | J. Munsell, 82 State street. 
| 1877. 

Title verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 
11. advertisements verso blank 1 1]. contents pp. 
vii-viii, text pp. 9-477, errata 1 p. index pp. 479- 
490, 8°. 

Gatschet (A. S.), Indian languages of the 
Pacific states and territories, pp. 416-447. 

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, British Museum, 
Congress, Eames, Geological Survey, Massa- 
chusetts Historical Society, Pilling, Wisconsin 
Historical Society. 

Priced by Leclere, 1878 catalogue, no. 2663, 20 
fr.; the Murphy copy, no. 197, brought $1.25; 
priced by Clarke & co. 1886 catalogue, no. 6271, 
$3.50, and by Littlefield, Nov. 1887, no. 50, $4. 


See Bilkula. 


Allgemeiner 
| ethnographischer Atlas | oder | Atlas 
der Vélker-Kunde. | Eine Sammlung | 
von neiinzeln Karten, | auf denen dic, 
um die Mitte des neiinzehnten Jahrhun- 
derts statt findende | geographische 
Verbreitung aller, nach ihrer Sprach- 
verwandtschaft geord- | neten, Volker 
des Erdballs, und ihre Vertheilung in 
die Reiche und Staaten | der alten wie 
der neiien Welt abgebildet und versinn- 
licht worden ist. | Ein Versuch | von | 
D° Heinrich Berghaus. | 

Verlag von Justus Perthes in Gotha. 

| 1852. 

Title of the series (Dr. Heinrich Berghaus’ 
physikalischer Atlas, etc.) verso 1.1 recto blank, 
title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-68, 19 
maps, folio. 

No. 17. Die Oregon-Vélker treats of the 
habitat and linguistic relations of the peoples 
of that region, including among others the 
Tsihaili-Selesh, with its dialects, p. 56.—Map 
no. 17 is entitled ‘‘ Ethnographische Karte von 
Nordamerika,” ‘‘ Nach Alb. Gallatin, A. von 
Humboldt, Clavigero, Hervas, Hale, Isbester, 
&o."" 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology. 


563-571, maps, 8°. Bible: 
Linguistic contents as under titles nextabove. Matthew Spokan See Walker (E.) 
Copies seen: Geological Survey. leHiniaatonas. 
Beach (William Wallace). The | Indian | Kalispel See Giorda (J.) 
miscellany ;| containing | Papers on the | Big Sam. See Eells (M.) 
History, Antiquities , Arts, Languages | | Bitechula. See Bilkala. 
Religions, Traditions and Superstitions | Bilkula: 


|of | the American aborigines; | with | 
Descriptions of their Domestic Life, 
Manners, Customs,| Traits, Amusements 
and Exploits; | travels and adventures | 


General discussion See Boas (F.) 

General discussion 3uschmann (J.C. E.) 

General discussion Tolmie (W. TF.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 


in the Indian country; | Incidents of | eres) ; eee: 

7 Pee E Grammatic treatise Boas (F.) 
Border Warfare; Missionary Relations, | Numerals Boas (F.) 
etc, | Edited by W, W, Beach, | ' Numerals 


Latham (KR, G.) 


ont 


1 


Bilkula — Continued. 


Numerals Scouler (J.) 
Numerals Tolmie (W. F.) 
Relationships Boas (F.) 
Sentences Scouler (J.) 
Tribal names Latham (R. G.) 
Vocabulary Bancroft (H. H.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Vocabulary Scouler (J.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Words Boas (F.) 
Words Brinton (D.G.) 
Words Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Words Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Words Daa (L. K.) 
Words Latham (R. G.) 
Words Stumpff (C.) 
Bilqula. See Bilkula. 


Boas: This word following a title or within paren- | 


theses after a note indicates that a copy of the 
work referred to has been seen by the compiler 
belonging to the library of Dr. Franz Boas. 
Boas (Dr. Franz). The language of the 

Bilhoola in British Columbia. 

In Science, vol. 7, p. 218, New York, 1886, 4°. 
(Geological Survey, Pilling.) 

Grammatie discussion, numeral system, and 
comments upon their vocabulary. 


Sprache der Bella-coola-Indianer. 
In Berlin Gesselschaft fiir Anthropologie, 
Ethnologie und Urgeschichte, Verhandlungen, 
vol. 18, pp. 202-206, Berlin, 1886, 8°. (Bureau of 
Ethnology.) 

Grammatic discussion of the Bellacoola lan- 
guage. 
Myths and legends of the Catloltq of 
Vancouver Island. 
In American Antiquarian, vol. 10 pp. 201- 
211, Chicago, 1888, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) 
Catloltq terms passim. 
Issued separately, with half-title as follows: 
— Myths and Legends of the Catloltq, 
| by Dr. Franz Boas. | Reprinted from 
American Antiquarian for July, 1888. 
[Chicago, 1888. ] 
Half-title on cover, no inside title, text pp. 
201-211, 8°. 
Linguistic contents asundertitlenext above. 
Copies seen: Wellesley. 


— Die Mythologie der nord-west- 
amerikanischen Kiistenvélker. 


302, 315-319; vol. 54, pp. 10-14, Braunschweig: 
1888, 4°, (Geological Survey.) 


| 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


B oas (F.) — Continued. 
Terms of the native languages of the north- 
west coast of British America, including afew 
of the Bilqula, passim. ; 


The Indians of British Columbia. 
By Franz Boas, Ph.D. (Presented by 
Dr. T. Sterry Hunt, May 30, 1888.) 

In Royal Soc. Canada, Trans. vol. 6, section 2, 
pp. 47-57, Montreal, 1889, 4°. (Pilling.) 

General comments upon the Salish linguistic 
divisions, with examples, pp. 47-48. Compara- 
tive vocabulary (40 words, alphabetically 
arranged by English words) of the Lk’ungen, 
Snanaimugq, Skq0’/mic, Si/ciatl, Péntlate, and 
@atlo'ltq, p. 48.—Comments on the Bilqula, p. 
49. — Comparative vocabulary (20 words) of 
the Bilqula and Wik’énok, the latter ‘‘a tribe 
of Kwakiutl lineage,”’ which has ‘‘ borrowed” 
many words from the Bilqula and vice versa, p. 
49.—‘‘ English-Bilqula vocabulary, with refer- 
ence to other Salish dialects,’’ being a compar- 
ative vocabulary of 55 words, alphabetically 
arranged by English words, of the Bilqula, 
Lku/ngen, Snanaimug, Skq6/mic, Syi’ciatl, 
Péntlate, and Catlo/ltq, p. 50. 
Notes on the Snanaimuq. 
Franz Boaz. 

In American Anthropologist, vol. 2, pp. 321- 
328, Washington, 1889, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Names of the Snanimugq clans, p. 321.—Prayer 
to the sun, with English translation, p. 326. 

Issued separately with heading as follows: 


By Dr. 


(From the American Anthropologist 
for October, 1889.) Notes on the Snan- 
aimuq. By Dr. Franz Boas. 

No title-page, heading only; text pp. 321- 
328, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titlenext above. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

— Preliminary notes on the Indians of 
British Columbia. 

In British Ass. for Ady. Sci. Report of the 
fifty-eighth meeting, pp. 233-242, London, 1889, 
8°. (Geological Survey.) 

General discussion of the Salishan peoples 
and their linguistic divisions, with a statement 
of material collected, pp. 234, 236.—Salishan 
terms passim. 

Issued also as follows: 


Preliminary notes on the Indians of 
British Columbia. 

In British Ass. Ady. Sci. Fourth Report of 
the committee appointed for the pur- 
pose of investigating and publishing reports 
on the northwestern tribes of the 
Dominion of Canada, pp. 4-10 [London, 1889], 
8°. (Eames, Pilling.) 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 


p- 5-7. 


In Globus, vol. 53, pp. 121-197, 153.157, 290. | >, Pinst General Repors omtBe ies 


of British Columbia, 
Boas, 


By Dr, Franz 


— Second General 


— Second General 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 5 


Boas (F.) — Continued. 
In British Ass. Ady. Sci. Rept. of the fifty- 


ninth meeting, pp. 801-893, London, 1890, 8°. 
(Geological Survey.) 

List of Salishan divisions with their habitat, 
pp. 805-806.—A Snanaimuq legend (in English) 
pp. 835-836, contains a number of Salish terms 
passim.—Salish terms, pp. 847-848. 

Issued also as follows: 


—— First General Report on the Iadians 


of British Columbia, 
Boas. 

In British Ass. Ady. Sci. Fifth report of the 
committee . appointed for the purpose of 
investigating and publishing reports on the 

. northwestern tribes of the Dominion of 
Canada, pp. 5-97, London [1890], 8°. (Pillirg.) 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 

pp. 9-10, 39-40, 51-52. 


By Dr. Franz 


Report on the 
Indians of British Columbia. By Dr. 
Franz Boas. 

In British Ass. Adv. Sci. Report of the 
sixtieth meeting, pp. 562-715, London, 1891, 8°. 
(Geological Survey.) 

The Lku‘figen (pp.563 582) contains a list of 
gentes, p. 569; nobility names, p. 570; terms 
used in gambling and pastimes, p. 571; in birth, 
marriage and death, pp. 572-576; medicine, 
omens and beliefs, pp. 576-577; verse with 
music in Cowitchin, p. 581.—The Shushwap, 
pp. 632-647, contains a few words passim.—The 
Salish languages of British Columbia (pp. 679- 
688) treats of the Bilqula, including partial 
conjugations, pp. 679-680; the Snanaimuq, 
giving pronouns and verbs with partial conju- 
gations, pp. 680-683; the Shushwap, with a 
vocabulary and grammatic treatise, pp. 683-685 ; 
the Stla‘tlumh with sketch of the grammar, 
pp. 685-686; the Okina’k-én with numerals, 
pronouns, and verbs, pp. 687-688.—Terms of 
relationship of the Salish languages (pp. 688- 
692) includes the Sk’q6’mic, pp. 688-689; the 
Bilqula, p. 689; the Stla/tlemh, pp. 689-690; the 
Shushwap, pp. 690-691; the Okana/kén, pp. 
691-692.—Comparative vocabulary of eighteen 
languages spoken jn British Columbia, pp, 692- 
715, includes the following Salishan languages, 
numbered respectively 7-17: Bilqula, Catloltq, 
Pentlate, Siciatl, Snanaimuq, Sk-q0/mic, Lku’i- 
gen, Ntlakyapamuq, Stlatlumh, Sequapmuq, 
and Okana’k-en. 

Issued also as follows: 


Report on the 
Indians of British Columbia. By Dr. 
Franz Boas. 

In British Ass. Adv. Sci. Sixth report on 
the northwestern tribes of Canada, pp. 10-163, 
London [1891], 8°. (Pilling.) 

Linguistic contents as under titlenext above, 
pp. 17. 18, 19, 20-24, 24-25, 29, 80-95, 127-128, 128- 
181, 131-133, 133-134, 135-136, 136-137, 137, 187- 
138, 188-189. 139-140, 140-163. 


Boas (I*.) — Continued. 


Third Report on the Indians of Brit- 
ish Columbia. By Dr. Franz Boas. 

In British Ass. Adv. Sci. Report of the sixty- 
first meeting, pp. 408-449, 4 folding tables 
between pp. 436-437, London, 1892, 8°. (Geolog- 
ical Survey.) 

List of the villages, ancient and modern, of 
the Bilqula, pp.408-409.—-Gentes of the Nugi- 
Imukh, Nusk’életemh, and Taliémh, p. 409. 

Issued also as follows: 


Third Report on the Indians of Brit- 


ish Columbia. By Dr. Franz Boas. 

In British Ass. Adv. Sci. Seventh report on 
the northwestern tribes of Canada, pp. 2-43, 
London [1892], 8°. (Eames, Pilling.)| 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp- 2-3, 3. 


—— [Texts in the Péntlate language. ] 


Manuscript, 9 ll. folio, written on one side 
only; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnol- 
ogy. Collected in 1886. 

Six legends in the Péntlite language, accom- 
panied by an interlinear, literal translation into 
English. 

The original manuscript, in possession of its 
author, is in Péntlate-German. (*) 


Texts in the Catloltq language. 

Manuscript, 27 unnumbered 11. folio, written 
on one side only; in the library of the Bureau 
of Ethnology. 

The texts (legends and stories) are accom- 
panied by a literal interlinear English transla- 
tion. 

— Vocabulary of the Catloltq (Comux) 
language; Vancouver Island. 

Manuscript, 36 unnumbered leaves, folio, 
written on one side only; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

Contains about 1,000 entries. 

The original slips of this vocabulary, num- 
bered 1-1097, one word on each slip, are in the 
same library. 


[Grammatic notes on the Catloltq 


language. ] 


Manuscript, 14 unnumbered leaves, folio, 
written on one side only; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 


Nee‘lim texts obtained at Clatsop 
Plains, from ‘‘John’”: July, 1890. 
Manuscript, pp. 1-2, 8°; recorded in a blank 
book; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnol- 
ogy. 
Two stories in the Neé/lim language with 
interlinear translation into English. 


Siletz texts obtained from ‘“ Old 
Jack” at the Siletz Reservation, June, 
1890. 


Manuscript, pp. 1-10, 8°; recorded in a blank 
book; inthe library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 

A legend in the Siletz language, with inter- 
linear literal translation into English. 


6 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Boas (F.) — Continued. 
— Tilamook texts obtained from Haies 


John and Louis Fuller at the Siletz 
Reservation, June, 1890. 
Manuscript, pp. 1-37, 8°; recorded in a blank 
book; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 
Five stories in the Tilamook language with 
interlinear literal translation into English. 


— [Vocabularies of various Salishan 


languages. ] 
Manuscript, ll. 1-30, folio, written on one side 
only; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 
Leaves 1-11 (numbered I) in double columns, 
contain in the first a Neé/lim and Tilamook 
vocabulary of 275 entries, the words of the 
respective dialects being indicated by an initial 
N or T; the second column contains a vocabu- 
lary of 250 words in the Siletz language. 
Leaves 12-18 (numbered II) are headed 
Neé/lim and contain about 425 entries. A note 
states that the letter 7 following a word means 
that it is common to the Neé‘lim and the Tila- 
mook. Obtained at Clatsop from ‘‘Johnny.” 
Leaves 19-30 (numbered IIT) are headed Til- 
amook and contain about 1.000 entries. An 
accompanying note says the letter V following 
a word indicates that it is common to the Tila- 
mook and Neé/lim dialects. Collected at Siletz 
from Louis Fuller and verified at Clatsop with 
the aid of the Indians. 


—— Vocabulary of the Skgo’mic lan- 


guage. 

Manuscript (numbered IV), ll. 1-6, folio, writ- 
ten on one side only; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

List of the sixteen septs of the Skgé’mice, 1. 
1.—Formation of words (roots and derivatives), 
Il. 2-6. 


[Material relating to the Snanaimugq 
language. ] 

Manuscript (numbered V), ll. 1-19, folio, 
written on one side only; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

List of Snanaimugq septs (5), 1. 1—Names 
of tribes as given by the Snanaimug, 1. 1.— 
Phonology, 1. 2.—Grammatie notes, ll. 3-12.— 
Formation of words, ll. 12-15.—Texts with 
interlinear literal translation into English, ll. 
16-19. 


Materialen zur Grammatik des Vil- 
xula, gesammelt im Januar 1888 in 
Berlin, von Dr. F. Boas. 

Manuscript, 14 unnumbered leaves, folio, 
written on one side only; in the library of the 

3ureau of Ethnology, Washington, D.C. 

Franz Boas was born in Minden, Westphalia, 
Germany, July 9,1858. From 1877 to 1882 he 
attended the universities of Heidelberg, Bonn, 
and Kiel. The year 1882 he spent in Berlin pre- 
paring for an Arctic voyage, and sailed June, 
1883, to Cumberland Sound, Baftin Land, travel- 
ing inthat region until September, 1884, return- 
ing via St. Johns, Newfoundland, to New York. 


Boas (F..) — Continued. 


The winter of 1884~’85 he spent in Washing- 
ton, preparing the results of his journey for 
publication and in studying in the National 
Museum. From 1885 to 1886 Dr. Boas was an 
assistant in the Royal Ethnographical Museum 
of Berlin and docent of geography at the Uni- 
versity of Berlin. Inthe winter of 1885—'86 he 
journeyed to British Columbia under the 
auspices of the British Association for the 
Advancement of Science, for the purpose of 
studying the Indians. During 1886-’88 Dr. 
Boas was assistant editor of Science, in New 
York, and from 1888 to 1892 docent of anthro- 
pology at Clark University, Worcester, Mass. 
During these years he made repeated journeys 
to the Pacific coast with the object of continuing 
his researches among the Indians. In 1891 
Kiel gave him the degree of Ph. D. 


Dr. Boas’s principal writings are: Baffin- 


Land, Gotha, Justus Perthes, 1885; The Central 
Eskimo (inthe6th Annual Report of the Bureau 
of Ethnology); Reports to the British Associa- 
tion for the Advancement of Science on the 
Indians of British Columbia, 1888-1892; Volks- 
sagenaus Britisch Columbien, Verh. der Ges. fiir 
Anthropologie, Ethnoiogie und Urgeschichte 
in Berlin, 1891. 


Bolduc: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Rey. J.-B. Z. Boldue, 
Quebec, Canada. 


Bolduc (Pére Jean-Baptiste Zacarie). 


Mission | de la | Colombie. | Lettre et 
journal | de | Mr. J.-B. Z. Bolduc, | mis- 
sionnaire de la Colombie. | [Picture of 
a church. ] | 

Quebec: | de Vimprimerie de J.-B. 
Fréchette, pere, | imprimeur-libraire, 
No. 13, rue Lamontagne. [1845.] 

Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 38-95, 16°. The 
larger part of the edition of this work was 
burned in the printing office, and it is, in con- 
sequence, very scarce. 

Quelques mots (14), French, Tchinoues [J ar- 
gon] et Sneomus, p. 95. 

Copies seen: Bolduc, Mallet, Wellesley. 


Boston Atheneum: These words following a title 


or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
acopy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of that institution, 
Boston, Mass. 


Boston Public: These words following a title or 


within parentheses after a note indicate that a 
copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in that library, Boston, Mass. 
[Boulet (Pere Jean-Baptiste).] Prayer 

book | and | catechism | in the | Sno- 
homish language. | [Picture.] | 

Tulalip, W. T. | 1879. 

Cover title: Prayer book | and | catechism | 
in the | Snohomish language. | [Picture.] | 

Tulalip mission press. | 1879. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Boulet (J.-B.) —Continued. 

Cover title, dedication verso picture ete. 11. 
title verso introductory remarks 1 1. text pp. 5- 
31, contents p. 32, back cover with picture and 
two lines in Snohomish, 18°. 

Some copies have printed at the top of the 
cover title the words: Compliments of the 
Compiler, | J. B. Boulet. (Eames, Pilling.) 

Morning and evening prayers with headings 
in English, pp. 5-15.—Catechism, pp. 16-31.— 
Appendix; Hymn for the funeral of adults, p. 
31. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling, Shea, 
Wellesley, Wisconsin Historical Society. 


, editor. See Youth's Companion. 
Brinley (George). See Trumbull (J. H.) 


Brinton: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Dr. D. G. Brinton, Phila- 
delphia, Pa. 

Brinton (Dr. Daniel Garrison). The lan- 
guage of paleolithic man. 

In American Philosoph. Soe. Proc. vol. 25, pp. 
212-225, Philadelphia, 1888, 8°. 

Terms for I, thou, man, divinity, in Bilhoola 
and Kawitshin, p. 216. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows: 


— The language | of | paleolithic man. 
| By | Daniel G. Brinton, M. D., | Pro- 


fessor of American Linguisties and Ar- | 


chology in the University of Pennsyl- 


vania. | Read before the American Phil- | 


osophical Society, | October 5, 1888. | 


Press of MacCalla & co., | Nos. 237-9 | 


Dock Street, Philadelphia. | 1888. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 
11. text pp. 3-16, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title nextabove, 
pail. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

This article reprinted in the following: 


—— Essays of an Americanist. | I. Eth- | 
nologic and Archzeologic. | II. Mythol- | 
ogy and Folk Lore. | III. Graphic Sys- | 
tems and Literature. | IV. Linguistic. — 


| By | Daniel G. Brinton, A.M., M.D., | 
Professor [&c. nine lines. ] | 

Philadelphia: | Porter & Coates. | 
1890. 


Title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface | 


pp. lii-iv, contents pp.v-xii, text pp. 17-467 
index of authors and authorities pp. 469-474, 
index of subjects pp. 475-489, 8°. A collected 
reprint of someot Dr.Brinton’s more important 
essays. 

Theearliest form of human speech asrevealed 


by American tongues (read before the American | 


Philosophical Society in 1885 and published in 
their proceedings under the title of ‘‘ The lan- 
guages of paleolithic man”’), pp. 390-409. 


Brinton (D. G.) — Continued. 


Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 
396. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 


—— The American Race: | A Linguistic 


Classification and Ethnographic | De- 
scription of the Native T ribes of | North 
and South America. | By | Daniel G. 
Brinton, A. M., M. D., | Professor [&c. 
ten lines.] | 

New York: | N. D. C. Hodges, Pub- 
lisher, | 47 Lafayette Place. | 1891. 


Title verso copyright notice (1891) 1 1. dedi- 
cation verso blank 1 1. preface pp. ix-xii, con- 
tents pp. xiii-xvi, text pp. 17-3 32, linguistic 
appendix pp. 333-364, additions and corrections 
pp. 365-368, index of authors pp. 369-373, index 
of subjects pp. 374-392, 8°. 

A brief discussion of the north Pacific coast 
stocks (pp. 103-117) includes a list of the divi- 
sions of the Salishan family, p. 108. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 


— Studies in South American Native 


Languages. By Daniel G. Brinton, M. 
D. (Read before the American Philo- 
sophical Society, February 5, 1892.) 

In American Philosoph. Soe. Proc. vol. 30, 
pp. 45-105, Philadelphia, 1892, 8°. (Bureau of 
Ethnology.) 

Vocabulary of 22 words, Spanish and Catolq, 
and numerals 1-10 in Catolq, pp. 84-85.—The 
same vocabulary translated from Spanish into 
English, and alphabetically arranged, p. 85. 


Studies | in | South American Native 

| Languages. | From mss and rare 
printed sources. | By Daniel G. Brin- 
ton, A. M., M. D., LL. D., | Professor of 
American Archeology and Linguistics 
in the | University of Pennsylvania. | 

Philadelphia: | MacCalla & Com- 
pany, Printers, 237-9 Dock Street. | 
1892. 

Title verso blank 1 1. prefatory note verso 
blank 1 1. contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 7- 
67, $9. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp 46-47. 

“Among the manuscripts in the British 
Museum there is one in Spanish (Add. Mss., 
No. 17631) which was obtained in 1848 from the 
Venezuelan explorer, Michelenay Rojas (author 
of the Exploracion del America del Sur, pub- 
lished in 1867). It contains several anonymous 
accounts, by different hands, of a voyage (or 
voyages) to the east coast of Patagonia, ‘ desde 
Cabo Blanco hasta las Virgines,’ one of which 
is dated December, 1789. Neither the name of 
the ship nor that of the commander appears. 
“Among the material are two vocabularies 


8 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Brinton (D. G.) — Continued. 


of the Tsoneca or Tehuelhet dialect, comprising 
about sixty words and ten numerals. These 
correspond closely with the various other lists 
of terms collected by travelers. At the close 
of the MS., however, there is a short vocabu- 
lary of an entirely different linguistic stock, 
without name of collector, date or place, unless 
the last words ‘‘a la Soleta,”’ refer to some 
locality. Elsewhere the same numerals are 
given, and a few words, evidently from some 
dialect more closely akin to the Tsoneca, and 
the name Hongote is applied to the tongue. 
This may be a corruption of ‘Choonke,’ the 
name which Ramon Lista and other Spanish 
writers apply to the Tsoneca (Hongote=Chon- 
gote=Choonke=Tsonéca). 

‘The list which I copy below, however, does 
not seem closely allied to the Tehuelhet, nor to 
any other tongue with which I have compared 
it. The MS. is generally legible, though to a 
few words I have plaved an interrogation mark, 
indicating that the handwriting was uncertain. 
The sheet contains the following [Salishan 
vocabulary]”’. 

In the issue of Science of May 13, 1892, Dr. 
Brinton publishes the following note, the sub- 


stance of which also appears in the Proceed- | 
ings of the American Philosophical Society for | 


April, 1892: 

“Tn aseries of ten studies of South American 
languages, principally from MS. sources, which 
I published in the last number of the Proceed- 
ings of the American Philosophical Society, 
one was partly devoted to the ‘ Hongote’ lan- 
guage, a vocabulary of which I found ina mass 
of documents in the British Museum stated to 
relate to Patagonia. I spoke of it as an inde- 
pendent stock, not related to other languages 
of that locality. In a letter just received from 
Dr. Franz Boas he points out to me that the 
‘Hongote’ is certainly Salish and must have 
been collected in the Straits of Fuca, on the 
northwest coast. How it came to be in the 
MS. referred to I cannot imagine, but I hasten 
to announce the correction as promptly as pos- 
sible.” 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 

Daniel Garrison Brinton, ethnologist, born in 
Chester County, Pa., May 18, 1837. He was 
graduated at Yale in 1858 and at the Jefferson 
Medical College in 1861, after which he spent a 
year in Europe in study and in travel. On his 
return he entered the army, in August, 1862, as 
acting assistant surgeon. In February of the 
following year he was commissioned surgeon 
and served as surgeon in chief of the second 
division, eleventh corps. Hewas present at the 
battles of Chancellorsville, Gettysburg, and 
other engagements, and was appointed medical 
director of his corps in October, 1863. In con- 
sequence of a sunstroke received soon after the 
battle of Gettysburg he was disqualified for 
active service, and in the autumn of that year he 
became superintendent of hospitals at Quincy 


Brinton (D. G.) — Continued. 


and Springfield, I1l., until August, 1865, when, 
the civil war having closed, he was brevetted 
lieutentant-colonel and discharged. He then 
settled in Philadelphia, where he became editor 
of The Medical and Surgical Reporter, and 
also of the quarterly Compendium of Medical 
Science. Dr. Brinton has likewise been a 
constant contributor to other medical journals, 
chiefly on questions of public medicine and 
hygiene, and has edited several volumes on 
therapeutics and diagnosis, especially the pop- 
ular series known as Napheys’s Modern Ther- 
apeutics, which has passed through so many 
editions. In the medical controversies of the 
day, he has always taken the position that med- 
ical science should be based on the results of 
clinical observation rather than on physiological 
experiments. He has become prominent as a 
student and a writer on American ethnology, 
his work in this direction beginning while he 
was astudent in college. The winter of 1856-57, 
spent in Florida, supplied him with material 
for his first published book on the subject. In 
1884 he was appointed professor of ethnology 
and archeology in the Academy of Natural 
Sciences, Philadelphia. For some years he has 
been president of the Numismatic and Anti- 
quarian Society of Philadelphia, and in 1886 he 
was elected vice-president of the American 
Association for the Advancement of Science, to 
preside over the section on anthropology. Dur- 
ing the same year he was awarded the medal 
of the Société Américaine de France for his 
‘numerous and learned works on American 
ethnology,” being the first native of the United 
States that has been so honored. In 1885 the 
American publishers of the Iconographic En- 
cyclopzdia requested him to edit the first vol- 
ume, to contribute to it the articles on ‘‘Anthro- 
pology”’ and ‘‘ Ethnology” and to revise that on 
‘‘Ethnography,’’by Professor Gerland, of Stras- 
burg. He also contributed to the second vol- 
ume of the same work an essay on the “ Prehis- 
toric Archeology of both Hemispheres.’ Dr. 
Brinton has established a library and publish- 
ing house of aboriginal American literature, 
for the purpose of placing within the reach of 
scholars authentic materials for the study of 
the languages and culture of the native races of 
America. Each workis the production of native 
minds and is printed in the original. The 
series, most of which were edited by Dr. Brinton 
himself, include The Maya Chronicles (Phila- 
delphia, 1882); The Iroquois Book of Rites 
(1883); The Giiegiience: A Comedy Ballet in 
the Nahuatl Spanish Dialect of Nicaragua 
(1883); A Migration Legend of the Creek In- 
dians (1884); The Lenape and Their Legends 
(1885); The Annals of the Cakchiquels (1885) ; 
[Ancient Nahuatl Poetry (1887); Rig Veda 
Americanus (1890)]. Besides publishing numer- 
ous papers he has contributed valuable reports 
on his examinations of mounds, shell-heaps, 
rock inscriptions, and other antiquities. He is 
the author of The Floridian Peninsula: Its Lit- 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 9 


Brinton (D. G.) — Continued. 


erary History, Indian Tribes, and Antiquities 
(Philadelphia, 1859); The Myths of the New 
World: A Treatise on the Symbolism and 
Mythology of the Red Race of America (New 
York, 1868); The Religious Sentiment: A Con- 
tribution to the Science and Philosophy of 
Religion (1876); American Hero Myths: A 
Study in the Native Religions of the Western 
Continent (Philadelphia, 1882); Aboriginal 
American Authors and their Productions, 
Especially those in the Native Languages 
(1883) and A Grammar of the Cakchiquel Lan- 
guage of Guatemala (1884).—Appleton’s Cyclop. 
of Am. Biog. 


British Museum: These words following a title or 


within parentheses after a note indicate that a 
copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of that institution, 
London, Eng. 


Bulmer(Dr.Thomas Sanderson). Chinook 


Jargon | grammar and _ dictionary | 
compiled by | T.S. Bulmer, M.D.,C.M., 
F.S. A., London, |Surgeon-Accoucheur, 
Royal Coilege of Surgeons, England. | 
Author of [&c. four lines. } (Ga) 

Manuscript in possession of its author, Salt 
Lake City, Utah, who furnished me the above 
transcript of the title-page, and who writes me, 
October, 1891, concerning it as follows: ‘‘I shall 
issue it on Hall’s typewriter, and then duplicate 
copies with another special machine, and use 
various types on the machine, testing the uses 
of each. . Fifty pages will be devoted 
to the origin of the language from all sources. 
Examples of hymns from various languages 
will be given.’ 

Contains many words of Salishan origin, 
some of which are so indicated. 
Chinook Jargon language. | Part IT. 

| [T'wo lines Chinook Jargon.] | To be 
completed in IX parts. | Compiled by | 
T. S. Bulmer, M.D., C. M., F.S. A. Se. 
A., London. | Ably assisted by | Rev’d 
M. Eells, D.D., and Rev’d Pere N. L. 
St. Onge, (formerly missionary to the 
| Yakama Indians). 

Manuscript; title as above verso blank 1 1. 
text ll. 1-124,4°. In possession of Dr. Bulmer. 

Words in the Niskwalli having some resem- 
blance to the Chinook Jargon, 1. 41. 
The Chee-Chinook language | or | 
Chinook Jargon. | In | IX parts. | Part 
Ill. | English-Chinook dictionary. | 
First edition. | By T. S. Bulmer, ably 
assisted by | the Revd. M. Eells, D.D., 
& the Revd Pere Saint Onge, both mis- 
sionaries to the Indians in Washington 
& Oregon states. 

Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. preface 
verso blank 1 1. special note for readers verso 
blank 1 1. ‘*memos to guide the reader"’ 2 IL. text 


Bulmer (T. S.) — Continued. 


[ 


[ 


[ 


alphabetically arranged by English words ll. 
1-189, written on one side only, folio. In posses- 
sion of its author, who kindly loaned it to me 
for examination. In his ‘‘memos”’ the author 
gives a list of letters used to indicate the origin 
of the respective words C, N, J, E, F, Ch. Yak., 
Chinook, Nootka, Indian, English, French, Chi- 
halis, and Yakama; and a second list of per- 
sons from whom the words were obtained and 
localities in which they were used. 

“In my selection of the term Chee-Chinook 
I merely intend to convey to students that it 
has its principal origin in the Old or Original 
Chinook language; and although it contains 
many other Indian words as well as French and 
English, yet it came forth from its mother as an 
hybrid, and as such has been bred and nourished 
as anursling from the parentstem. I therefore 
designate it as a chee or new Chinook—the word 
chee being a Jargon word for lately, just now, 


” 


new. 
] Chinook Jargon dictionary. Part 
III. Chinook-English. 

Manuscript; 121 leaves folio, written on one 
side only, interspersed with 40 blank leaves 
inserted for additions and corrections. In 
possession of its author. 

The dictionary occupies 106 leaves, and many 
of the words are followed by their equivalents 
in the languages from which they are derived, 
and the authority therefor. Following the 
dictionary are the following: Original Indian 
names of town-sites, rivers, mountains, etc., in 
the western parts of the State of Washington: 
Skokomish, 2 ll.; Chemakum, Lower Chihalis, 
Duwamish, 1 1.; Chinook, 2 ll.; miscellaneous, 2 
ll.—Names of various places in the Klamath 
and Modoc countries, 3 1l.—Camping places 
and other localities around the Upper Klamath 
Lake, 511. 

] Appendix to Bulmer’s Chinook 
Jargon grammar and dictionary. 

Manuscript, IL. 1-70, 4°, in possession of its 
author. 

General phrases, as literal as possible, Chi- 
nook and English, ll. 6-26.—Detached sentences, 
ll. 27-29.—Prayer in English, Il. 30-31; same in 
Jargon, ll. 32-33.—‘‘ History” in English, Il. 34- 
36; same in Jargon (by Mr. Eells), with inter- 
linear English translation, ll. 37-43.— An 
address in English, ll. 4446; same in Jargon, 
with interlinear English translation, 11.47-53.— 
A sermon in English, ll. 54-55; same in Jargon, 
with interline ar English translation, 11. 56-61.— 
Address in Jargon to the Indians of Puget 
Sound, by Mr. Eells, with interlinear English 
translation, ll. 62-66.—Address ‘‘On Man,” in 
English, 1. 67; same in Jargon, with interlinear 
English translation, ll. 68-70. 

Contains many words of Salishan origin, 
some of which are so indicated. 

] Part IL | of | Bulmer’s Appendix | 
to the Chee-Chinook | Grammar and 
Dictionary. 


10 


Bulmer (T. 8.) — Continued. 


Manuscript, 57 Il. 4°, in possession of its 
author. 


Form of marriage, Il. 2-3.—Solemnization of 


the marriage service,]1.4-10. These two articles 
arein Jargon, with interlinear English transla- 
tion.—Address, in English, ll. 11-12; thesamein 
Jargon, with interlinear English translation, ll. 
13-17.—‘‘ From Addison,’’ in Jargon, with inter- 
linear English translation,11. 18-19. —An oration 
in English, 1.20; the same in Twana by Mr. 
Eells, with interlinear English translation, 11. 
21-22.—A Twana tradition, by Mr. Eells, with 
interlinear English translation, 1.23; the same 
in English, ll. 24-25.—Legends in Jargon, by 
Pére L. N. St. Onge, with interlinear English 
translation, 1]. 26-57. 

Contains a number of words of Salishan 
origin, many of which are so indicated. 


[ 


] Special scientific notes. 

Manuscript, Il. 1-77,4°, in possession of its 
author. 

General remarks on Indian languages, ll. 1- 
3.—Origin of languages, ll. 4-11.— Scientific 
notes on the European and Asiatic languages, 
1]. 12-35. American Indian languages, 11. 35-63, 
includes remarks upon §nd examples in the Iro- 
quois, Cherokee, Sahaptin, Algonkin, Nahuatl, 
Shoshone, Cree, Sioux, and Jargon.—List of 
words in the Chinook Jargon the same as in 
Nitlakapamuk, ll. 64-67.—Selish numerals, 1-18, 
1. 65.—List of tribes of Alaska and its neigh- 
borhood, 1. 66.—T wana verbs, 1. 67.—Niskwally 
verbs, 1. 68.—Clallam verbs, 1. 69.—Remarks on 
the Yakama, 1]. 70-77. 


[——] The Christian prayers | in Chi- 

nook [Jargon]. 

Manuscript; 61 11. 4°, in the possession of its 
author. ‘ 

Prayers in Chinook Jargon, 11. 1-5.—Lessons 
1-17 in Chinook Jargon, with English headings, 
ll. 6-23.—List of special words adopted by 
Fathers Blanchet and Demers in connection 
with the service of the mass, ll. 24-25.—Trans- 
lation of the Chinook prayers into English, ll. 
26-38.—Copy of a sermon preached by Rey. Dr. 
Eells to the Indians at Wallawalla, with inter- 
linear English translation, 11. 39-46. ‘‘Of the 97 
words used, 46 are of Chinook origin, 17 Nootka, 
3 Selish, 23 English, 2 Jargon, and 6 in 
French.”—Articles of faith of the Congrega- 
tional church at Skokomish, Washington, in 
the Jargon with interlinear English transla- 
tion, ll. 47-52.—Orationin Chinook Jargon with 
interlinear English translation, ll. 53-54.— 
Prayers to God in English blank verse, Il. 55- 
56; the same in Jargon with interlinear English 
translation, ll. 57-61. 


— [Hymuns, songs, etc., in the Chinook 
Jargon and other languages. ] 
Manuscript; no title-page; text 77 leaves, 4°, 
in possession of its author. 
Songs, 1. 1.—Song with music, 1]. 2-3.—School 
songs by Mr. Eells, ll. 4-5.—Songs from Dr, 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Bulmer (T.S.) — Continued. 


Boas, ll. 6-12.—Hymns by Mr. Eells, 1]. 13-32. 
All the above are in Jargon with English trans- 
lations. Hymns in Niskwalli by Mr. Eells, 1. 
33.—Hymns in Jargon by Pére St. Onge, Il. 34— 
45.—Hymn in Yakama, by Pére St. Onge, ll. 45- 
46; the same in English, Il. 57-64.—Yakama 
prose song by Father Pandosy, with French 
translation, ll. 65-69.—Hymns in Jargon by 
Mr. Fells, ll. 70-71.—Hymn in Yakama with 
interlinear English translation, 1]. 72-73.—Song 
in English, 1.74; same in Siwash, 11. 75-77. 


—— [The Lord’s prayer in various Indian 


languages. ] 


Manuscript; no title-page; text 24 unnum- 
bered leaves, written on one side only, 49. 

The Lord's prayer in Chinook Jargon, 1.1; in 
Yakama,* 1.2; in Miemac, l.3.—Ave Maria in 
Micmac, 1. 3.—Lord’s prayer in Penobscot, 1. 4; 
in Mareschite, ]. 5; in Passamaquoddy (two ver- 
sions) 1.5; Micmac (ancient), 1.6; Montagnais, 
1. 6; Abenaki, ll. 6-7; pure Mareschite, 1.7; 
Snohomish, 1. 7; Niskwalli,* 1.8; Clallam,* 1.9; 
Twana,* 1.10; Sioux, 1.11; Flathead,* 1. 12; Cas- 
eade,* 1.12; Tlallam,1.13; Huron,1.13; Black- 
foot, 1.13; Abenaki, 1. 14; Choctaw.1. 14; Ottawa, 
1. 14; Assiniboine, 1. 15; Seneca, 1.15; Caughna- 
waga, 1.15; other Micmac, 1.16; Totonac, 1. 16; 
Cora, 1. 16; Mistek,*1.17; Maya,*1. 17; Algon- 
quin,* 1. 22.—Hymn in Snohomish, 11. 23-24. 


Those prayers marked with an asterisk are 


accompanied by an interlinear English trans- 
lation. 

The compiler of this paper informs me it is 
his intention to add one hundred other versions 
of the Lord’s prayer, from the Californian and 
Mexican languages. 

In addition to theabove papers, Dr. Bulmeris 
also the author of anumberof articles appearing 
in Father Le Jeune’s Kamloops Wawa, q.»v. 

I am indebted to Dr. Bulmer for the notes 
upon which is based the following account: 

Thomas Sanderson Bulmer wasborn in 1834,in 
Yorkshire, England. He was educated at Pres- 
ton grammar school, Stokesley, and at Newton 
under Brow, was advanced under Rev. C. Cator 
and Lord Beresford’s son at Stokesley, and afier- 
wards was admitted a pupil of the York and 
Ripon diocesan college. He was appointed prin- 
cipal of Doncaster union agricultural schools, 
but soon after emigrated to New York. There 
he took charge, as head master, of General 
Hamilton’s free school. Thence he went to 
Upper Canada and was appointed one of the pro- 
fessors in L’ Assomption Jesuit College. From 
there he went to Rush Medical College and Lind 
University, Chicago; thence to the Ecole Nor- 
male, Montreal; thence to Toronto University, 
medical department. Later he continued his 
studies in the Ecole de Médecine and McGill 
University, Montreal, and graduated in medi- 
cine at Victoria University. In 1868 he went 
to London, whence he proceeded to New Zea- 
Jand, and was appointed superintendent of 
quarantine at Wellington. In Tasmania and 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 0: | 


Bulmer (T. 8S.) — Continued. 

Australia he held similar positions. His health 
failing, he went to Egypt, and later returned to 
England. The English climate not agreeing 
with him, he took a tour of the Mediterranean 
ports. Returning to London, the Russian 
grippe attacked him, and he was warned to seek 
anew climate. He returned to Montreal, en 
route for the Rocky Mountains, where he sought 
Indian society for a considerable time. Finding 
winter disastrous to him, he proceeded to Utah 
in search of health. For the last two years he 
has been engaged in writing up his Chinook 
books, as wellas completing his Egyptian Rites 
and Ceremonies, in which he has been assisted 
by English Egyptologists. Dr. Bulmer is a 
member of several societies in England and 
America and the author of a number of works 
on medical and scientific subjects. 


Bureau of Ethnology: These words following a 


title or within parentheses after a note indicate 
thatacopy of the work referred to has been seen 
by the compiler in the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology, Washington, D. C. 


Buschmann (Johann Carl Eduard). Die 
Volker und Sprachen Neu-Mexico’s 
und der Westseite des britischen Nord- 
amerika’s, dargestellt von Hrn. Busch- 


mann. 

In Konigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, 
Abhandlungen, aus dem Jahre 1857, pp. 209- 
414, Berlin, 1858. 4°. 

Wortverzeichniss des Tlaoquatch, Kawitchen, 
Noosdalum, Squallyamish, und pseudo Chinook 
(Cathlascon?) pp. 375-378.—Comments on the 
Billechoola, p. 382.—Wortverzeichness der 
Hailtsa (from Tolmie and from Hale) und Bille- 
choola, pp. 385-389.—Comments on the Hailtsa, 


Billechoola, and Kawitchen, with a few exam- | 


ples, p. 390. 
Issued separately with title-page as follows: 


— Die Volker und Sprachen | Neu- 
Mexico’s | und | der Westseite | des | 
britischen Nordamerika’s | dargestellt 
|von | Joh. Carl Ed. Buschmann. | Aus 
den Abhandlungen der kénigl. Akade- 
mie der Wissenchaften | zu Berlin 
1857. | 

Berlin | gedruckt in der Buchdruck- 
erei der kinigl. Akademie | der Wissen- 
schaften | 1858. | In Commission bei F. 
Diimmler’s Verlags-Buchhandlung. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
notice 1 1. text pp. 209-401, Inhalts-Ubersicht 


pp. 405-413, Verbesserungen p. 414, 4°. 
Linguistic contents as under title next above. 


Buschmann (J.C. E.) — Continued. 

Copies seen: Astor,Congress, Eames, Pilling, 
Trumbull. 

The copy at the Fischer sale, catalogue no. 
270, brought 14s.; at the Field sale, catalogue 
no. 235,75 cents; priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 
3012, 12 fr. and by Triibner, 1882, 15s. 

—— Die Spuren der aztekischen Sprache 
im nordlichen Mexico und hdéheren 
amerikanischen Norden. Zugleich eine 
Musterung der Vélker und Sprachen des 
nordlichen Mexico’s und der Westseite 
Nordamerika’s von Guadalaxara an bis 
zum Eismeer. Von Joh. Carl Ed. Busch- 
mann. 

In Ko6nigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, 
Abhandlungen aus dem Jahre 1854, Zweiter 
Supp.-Band, pp. 1-819 (forms the whole volume), 
Berlin, 1859, 4°. 

A general discussion of the peoples of Oregon 
and Washington (pp. 658-662) includes the 
Tsihali-Selish, with its tribal and linguistic 
divisions, habitat, etc., pp. 658-660.—Speech of 
Puget Sound, Fuca Strait, etc., p. 70, includes 
the Salishan divisions. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows: 


—— Die | Spuren deraztekischen Sprache 
| im nérdlichen Mexico | und héheren 
amerikanischen Norden. | Zugleich | 
eine Musterung der Vélker und Spra- 
chen | des nérdlichen Mexico’s | und 
der Westseite Nordamerika’s | von Gua- 
dalaxara an bis zum Eismeer. | Von | 
Joh. Carl Ed. Buschmann. | 

Berlin. | Gedruckt in der Buchdruck- 
ereider kiénigl. Akademie | der Wissen- 
schaften. | 1859. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. general title of the 
series verso blank 1 1.title as above verso blank 
1 1. abgekiirtze Inhalts-Ubersicht pp. vii-xii, 
text pp.1-713, Einleitung in das geographische 
Register pp. 714-718, geographische Register 
pp. 718-815, vermischte Nachweisungen pp. 816- 
818, Verbesserungen, p. 819, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, Eames, Maison- 
neuve, Pilling, Quaritch, Smithsonian, Trum- 
bull. 

Published at 20 Marks. An uncut, half-mo- 
rocco copy was sold at the Fischer sale, cata- 
logue no. 269, to Quaritch, for 2l. 11s.; the latter 
prices two copies, catalogue no. 12552, one 21. 2s. 
the other 27. 10s. ; the Pinart copy, catalogue no. 
178, brought 9 fr.; Koehler, catalogue no. 440, 
prices it 13 M. 50 Pf.; priced again by Quaritch, 
no. 30037, 21. 


12 


C. 


Canadian Indian — Continued. 


C. (J. F.) A Happy Indian Village. 

In the Ave Maria, vol. 26, pp. 444-445, Notre 
Dame, Indiana, May 12, 1888,sm.4°. (Pilling.) 

The Ave Maria in the Kalispel language, p. 
445, 

Reprinted in St. Joseph’s Advocate, sixth 
year, pp. 394-395, Baltimore, July, 1888, sm. 4°. 
(Bureau of Ethnology.) 


Campbell (John). Origin of the aborig- 
ines of Canada. A paper read before 
the society, 17th December, 1880, by 
Prof. J. Campbell, M.A. 


In Quebec Lit. and Hist. Soc. Trans., session 
1880-1881, pp. 61-93, and appendix pp. i-xxxiv, 
Quebec, 1882, 12°. (Pilling.) 

The first part of this paper is an endeavor to 
show a resemblance between various families 
of the New World, and between these and 
various peoples of the Old World. 

Comparative vocabulary (90 words) of the 
Niskwalli and the Malay-Polynesian lan- 
guages, pp. XXXii-xxxiy. 


Issued separately with title-page as follows: 


—— Origin | of the | aborigines of Can- 
ada. | A paper read before the Literary 
and historical society, | Quebec, | by | 


prof. J. Campbell, M. A., | (of Mon- | 


treal,) | Délégué Général de l’Institu- 
tion Ethnographique de Paris. | 


Quebec: | printed at the ‘‘ Morning | 


chronicle” office. | 1881. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. text pp. 
1-33, and appendix pp. i-xxxiv, 8°. Twenty-five 
copies printed. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Wellesley. 

Canadian Indian. Vol. I. October, 1890. 
No. I[-Vol. I. September, 1891. No. 12]. 
| The | Canadian | Indian | Editors | 
rey. E. F. Wilson | H. B. Small. | Pub- 
lished under the Auspices of | the Can- 
adian Indian Researchal [sic] | society 
|Contents | [&c. double columns, each 
eight lines.] | Single Copies, 20 Cents. 

Annual Substription, $2.00. | 


Printed and Published by Jno. Ruth- 


erford, Owen Sound, Ontario[Canada]. 
(1890-1891. ] 


12 numbers: cover title as above, text pp. 1- 
356, 8°. A continuation of ‘‘Our Forest Chil- 
dren,” described in the Bibliography of the 
Algonquian languages. The publication was 
suspended with the twelfth number, with the 
intention of resuming it in January, 1892. It 
has been found impracticable to carry ont the 
project. The word ** Researchal” on the cover 


|i 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


of the first number was changed to Research 
in the following numbers. 

Wilson (KE. F.), A comparative vocabulary, 
vol. 1, pp. 104-107. 

Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 


[Canestrelli (Kev. Philip).] Catechism 


| of | Christian Doctrine | prepared 
and enjoined | by order of the | Third 
Plenary Council of Baltimore | Trans- 
lated into Flat-head | by a father of 
the Society of Jesus | 

Woodstock college [Md.] | 1891 

Title verso blank 1 1. text (entirely in the 
Kalispel language with the exception of a few 
headings in English) pp. 3-100, errata pp. 101- 
102, sq. 16°. 

Catechism, pp. 3-88.—Prayers, pp. 89-100. 

Copies seen: Kames, Piliing. 


| Interrogationes | faciend a sacer- 
dote | ad baptismum conferendum | 
procedente. 

Colophon: S. Ignatii, in Montanis. 
Typis missionis. [1891.] 

Frontispiece (vignette of the Virgin and child 
with the inscription N.S. del Carmen) recto 1. 
1, text with heading above, and with other 
Latin headings scattered throughout, pp. [2-4], 
24°, Printed by the school boys at St. Ignatius 
Mission. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


—— [Litany and prayer in the Kalispel 


L 


language. 

St. Ignatius Print, Montana, 1891.] 

Frontispiece (vignette of the Virgin and child 
with the inscription N. 8S. del Carmen) recto 
1. 1, text pp. [2-3], 12°. Printed by the school 
boys at St. Ignatius Mission. 

Lu Skuskuests lu t St. Marie, p. [2].—Oratio 
Leonis P. P. XIII ad 8. Joseph, p. [3]. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 
] Nehaumen | Lu kaeks-auaum 
1-4gal | potu hoi la sainte messe | lu tel 
kae-pogét | le pape. 

Colophon: St. Ignatius Print, Mon- 
tana. [1891.] 

One leaf, printed on one side only, 8°. Printed 
by the school boys at St. Ignatius Mission. 

Three prayers in the Kalispel language. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


{[——] Stabat mater [in the Kalispel lan- 


guage. | 
[St. Ignatius Print, Montana, 1891.] 
1 leaf, 8°, printed on one side only. Printed 
by the school boys at St. Ignatius Mission. 
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Carmany (J.H.) [The first three of the 
ten commandments, and the Lord’s 
prayer in the Nanaimo language. ] 

In Bancroft (H. H.), Native races of the 
Pacific states, vol. 3, pp. 611-612, New York, 
1875, 8°. 

Reprinted in the various editions of the same 
work. 


[Caruana (Rev. J. M.)] Promissiones 
Domini Nostri Jesu Christi factae B. 
Marg. M. Alacoque. | Enpotéenet la 
Jesus Christ zogomshitem la | npiilg- 
hues Margherite Marie Alacoque le | 
chesnkuéitemistos la ghul potenzutis, 
ghul | sengastus la ezpoz. 

Colophon: P.A. Kemper, Dayton, O. 
(N. America.) [1890.] (Cceur d’Alene, 
Indian. ) 

A small card, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as 
above, and containing twelve ‘Promises of 
Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary,” in the 
Ceeur d'Alene language. On the verso is a 
colored picture of the sacred heart, with four 
lines inscription beneath, in English. 

Mr. Kemper has issued a similar card in 


many languages. 
Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 


Catalogue of the American library. See 


Trumbull (J. H.) 


Catechism: 


Kalispel See Giorda (J.) 
Netlakapamuk Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Salish Canestrelli (P.) 
Snohomish Boulet (J. B.) 


Catechism .. . translated into Flat- 
head. See Canestrelli (P.) 


Catlin (George). North and South Amer- 
ican Indians. | Catalogue | descriptive 
and instructive | of | Catlin’s | Indian 
Cartoons. | Portraits, types, and cus- 
toms. | 600 paintings in oil, | with | 
20,000 full length figures | illustrating 
their various games, religious cere- 
monies, and | other customs, | and | 27 
canvas paintings | of | Lasalle’s dis- 
coveries. | 

New York: | Baker & Godwin, Print- 
ers, | Printing-house square, | 1871. 

Abridged title on cover, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. remarks verso note 1 1. text pp. 5-92, 
certificates pp. 93-99, 8°. 

Proper names with English significations in 
a number of American languages, among them 
a few of the Spokan and Selish. 

Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Eames, Welles- 
ley, Wisconsin Historical Society. 

George Catlin, painter, born in Wilkesbarre, 


Pa., in 1796, died in Jersey City, N,J., Decem- 


13 


Catlin (G.) — Continued. 

ber 23, 1872. He studied law at Litchfield,Conn., 
but after a few years’ practice went to Phila- 
delphia and turned his attention to drawing 
and painting. As an artist he was entirely self- 
taught. In 1832 he went to the Far West and 
spent eight years among the Indians of Yellow- 
stone River, Indian Territory, Arkansas, and 
Florida, painting a unique series of Indian por- 
traits and pictures, which attracted much 
attention, on their exhibition, both in this 
country and in Europe. Among these were 470 
full-length portraits and a large number of 
pictures illustrative of Indian life and customs, 
most of which are now preserved in the 
National Museum, Washington. In 1852-1857 
Mr. Catlin traveled in South and Central 
America, after which he lived in Europe until 
1871, when he returned to the United States. 
One hundred and twenty-six of his drawings 
illustrative of Indian life were at the Philadel- 
phia exposition of 1876. He was the author of 
Notes of Eight Years in Europe (New York, 
1848) ; Manners, Customs, and Condition of the 
North American Indians (London, 1857); The 
Breath of Life, or Mal-Respiration (New York, 
1861); and O-kee-pa: A Religions Ceremony, 
and other Customs of the Mandans (London, 
1867).—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Catloltq. See Komuk. 


Chamberlain (Alexander Francis). The 
Eskimo race and language. Their 
origin and relations. By A. F. Cham- 
berlain, B. A. 


In Canadian Inst. Proc. third series, vol. 6, 
pp. 261-337, Toronto, 1889, 8°. 

Comparative Eskimo and Indian vocabularies 
(pp. 318-322) contains a number of words in 
Kawitchen, Selish, Niskwalli, Bilkula, Kow- 
clitsch, and Skwale (from Tolmie and Dawson 
and from Hale), pp. 318-320. 


[——] Numerals, Vocabulary, and Sen- 
tences in the Language of the Colville 
Indians at Nelson, British Columbia. 


Manuscript, pp. 1-7 of a blank book, 8°; in 
possession of its author. 

Numerals 1-20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 
300, pp. 1-2.— Vocabulary (60 words), pp. 3-5.— 
Phrases and sentences, pp.5-7.— Pronouns, p. 9. 


Alexander Francis Chamberlain was born at 
Kenninghall, Norfolk, England, January 12, 
1865, and came to New York with his parents 
in 1870, removing with them to Canada in 1874. 
He matriculated from the Collegiate Institute, 
Peterboro, Ontario, into the University of 
Toronto in 1882, from which institution he 
graduated with honors in modern languages and 
ethnology in 1886. From 1887 to 1890 he was 
fellow in modern languages in University Col- 
lege, Toronto, and in 1889 received the degree 
of M. A.from his alma mater. In 1890 he was 
appointed fellow in anthropology in Clark Uni- 
yersity, Worcester, Mass., where he occupied 


~ 


14 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Chamberlain (A. F.) — Continued. | Chirouze (/’r. —). Vocabulary of the 
himself with studies in the Algonquian lan- Snohomish language. (é9)) 
guages and the physical anthropology of Amer- 
ica. In June, 1890, he went to British Colum- 
bia, where, until the following October, he was 
engaged in studying the Kootenay Indians | Clallam. See Klalam. 
under the auspices of the British Association 


Manuscript, oblong 12°; in possession of M. 
Alph. L. Pinart. 


; é Classification : 
for the Advancement of Science. A summary h ; q 
of the results of these investigations appears Salish See Bancroft (H. H-) 
in the proceedings of the association for 1892. Salish Bates (H. W.) 
A dictionary and grammar of the Kootenay Salish Beach (W. Ws) 
language, together with a collection of texts of ss Berghaus (H.) 
myths, are also being proceeded with. In 1892 Salish Boas Ce 
Mr. Chamberlain received from Clark Univer- | Salish Brinton (DG) 
sity the degree of Ph. D.in anthropology, his | Salish Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
thesis being: ‘‘The Language of the Mississagas palish Dawson (G- Hf) 
of Skigog: A contribution tothe Linguistics of Sees Drake (5:69 
the Algonkian Tribes of Canada,” embodying | Sak oe he 
the results of his investigations of these | a Cue aes ) 
neha | Salish Gibbs (G.) 

Mr. Chamberlain, whose attention was, early Salish Haines (E. M.) 
in life, directed to philologic and ethnologic Salish Keane (A. H.) 
studies, has contributed to the scientific jour- Salish Latham (R. G.) 
nals of America, from time to time, articles on Sclish Powell (J. W.) 
subjects connected with linguistics and folk- Salish Prichard (J. C.) 
lore, especially of the Algonquian tribes. He Salish Sayce (A. H.) 
has also been engaged in the study of the Low- Salish Schoolcraft (H. R.) 
German and French Canadian dialects, the Salish Trumbull (J. H.) 


results of which willshortly appear. Mr.Cham- | ; 
berlain is a member of several of the learned | Clip (John). See Hells (M.) 
societies of America and Canada and fellow of 


the American Association for the Advancement Ceur d’Alene. See Skitsuish. 


of Science. Colville. See Skoyelpi. 
In 1892 he was appointed lecturer in anthro- 3 : E 
pology at Clark University. Comparative vocabularies. See Gibbs 
v 
Chehalis: (Go) 
General discussion See Hale (H.) i Comux. See Komuk. 
General discussion Swan (J. G.) : : - ae, 
omeenl eee cain Tolmie (W. F.) and Congress: This word following a title or within 
Dees (G M ) parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
Cenraviic tomes aca t T ¢ ‘ , of the work referred to has been seen by the 
hee henner Fells 2 or compiler in the Library of Congress, Washing- 
tle J J. « 4 . 
Grammatic treatise Gallatin (A.) fou, DE 
Grammatic treatise Hale (H.) [Coones (8. F.)] Dictionary | of the | 
palace te Bess (a ae Chinook Jargon | as spoken on | Puget 
Sane ee 3G ) et: sound and the northwest, | with | orig- 
Ree ane Sans (J. G.) inal Indian names for prominent places 
Vocabulary Eells (M.) | and localities with their meanings, | 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) historical sketch, ete. | 
‘ Latha aiGus * 
Shee ne eee Published by | Lowman & Hanford 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) stationery & printing Co., | Seattle, 
Vocabulary Smet (P. J. de). Wash. [1891.] 
Vocabulary Syiae (J. G.) Cover title: Chinook Dictionary | and | orig- 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and inal Indian names | of | western Washington. 
Dawson (G. M.) | [Picture.] | 
Words Bancroft (H. H.) Lowman & Hanford | stationery & | printing 
Words Gibbs (G.) company. 
Words Nicoll (E. H.) Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. 
See also Salish. | [8-4], p. 5 blank, key to pronunciation p. [6], 
Ohinalian Seolehenarie: | numerals p. [7], text pp. 9-38, 18°. 


‘ ip ; Eells (M.), Original Indian names of town- 
Chinook [Jargon] dictionary, See sites, etc., pp. 35-38. 


Coones (8, F.) Copies seen; Eames, Pilling, 
~w eee 


Davis (Marion). 


Cowlitz. 


Daa (Ludwig Kristensen). 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Cooper (J.G.) Vocabulary of the Tsi- 
ha-lish. 

Manuscript, 3 pages, 4°; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected in 1854. Con- 
sists of 180 words. 

In the same library is a copy of this manu- 
script, 3 pages, 4°, made by its compiler, and a 
partial one, two leaves, folio,made by Dr. Geo. 
Gibbs. 


Cowitchen. See Kawichen, 


See Kaulits, 


D. 


On the affin- 
ities between the languages of the 
northern tribes of the old and new con- 
tinents. By Lewis Kr. Daa, Esq., of 
Christiania, Norway. (Read December 
the 20th.) 

In Philological Soe. [of London] Trans. 1850, 
pp. 251-294, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) 

Comparative tables showing affinities be- 
tween Asiatic and American languages, pp. 264— 
285, contains words from many North American 
languages, the Salishan being represented by 
the Tsehaili, Selish, Okanagen, Atnah, Kawi- 
tchen, Noosdalum, Squalyamish, and Bille- 
choola, 


See Eells (M.) 


Dawson (Dr. George Mercer). Notes on 


dime cmegat ts. 


the Shuswap People of British Colum- 
bia. By George M. Dawson, LL. D., 
F.R.S., Assistant Director Geological 
Survey of Canada. (Read May 27, 1891.) 

In Royal Soe. of Canada, Proc. and Trans. for 
1891, vol. 9, section 2, pp. 3-44, Montreal, 1892, 
map, 4°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) 

General discussion of the people, references 
to published and unpublished linguistic mate- 
rial, etc., pp. 3-4.—Tribal subdivisions, with 
etymologies, names given other tribes, etc. 
(partly by Mackay), pp. 4-7.—Villages and 
houses, pp. 7-10, contain a number of native 
terms.—Measures of length employed by the 
Shuswap (6 terms), p.19.—Plants used as food 
and for other purposes, pp. 19-23, includes a 
number of native terms passim.—Historical 
notes (pp. 23-26) includes a number of personal 
names, a vocabulary (13 words) and numerals 
1-9, p. 25.—Vocabulary (11 words) obtained 
from Joyaska, a native, p. 26.—Account of the 
first knowledge of the whites (from Mackay), 
pp. 26-28, contains a number of personal and 
geographic names.—Mythology, pp. 28-35, con- 
tains a number of native words and phrases 
(partly from Mackay).—Stories attaching to 
particular localities, pp. 35-38, includes a num- 
ber of bird and geographic names.—Names of 
the stars and months, pp. 29-40.—List of 220 
place-names in the Shuswap country, with 


anal pst 


15 


Craig (Dr. R.O.) Vocabulary of the Ska- 


git. 

Manuscript, 2 pages, 4°; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Collected at Ft. Bel- 
lingham, Washington Ty., Sept., 1858. Con- 
tains 72 words only. 

A copy of this vocabulary, made by Dr. Geo. 
Gibbs, is in the same library. 


— Vocabulary of the Snohomish. 


Manuscript, 4 pages folio; in thelibrary of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Contains 45 words only- 


Dawson (G. M.) — Continued. 


meanings: 1, Shuswap names (130) of places 
on the Kamloops sheet, pp. 40-42; 2, Shuswap 
names (64) of places beyond the limits of the 
Kamloops sheet, pp. 43-44; 3, Shuswap names 
(20) of inhabited villages, p.44.—A few (7) of 
the principal villages beyond the limits of the 
Kamloops sheet, p. 44. 

“T am indebted to Mr. W. Mackay, Indian 
agent at Kamloops, for several interesting con- 
tributions, which will be found embodied in the 
following pages.” 

Issued separately, with half-title as follows: 

Notes on the Shuswap people of 
British Columbia. | By George M. Daw- 
son, LL.D., F. R.S.| Assistant Director, 
Geological Survey of Canada. 

[Montreal: Dawson brothers. 1892.] 

Half-title on cover, no inside title, text pp. 3- 
44, map, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


—— See Tolmie (W.F.) and Dawson (G. 


(M.) 

George Mercer Dawson was born at Pictou, 
Nova Scotia, August 1, 1849, and is the eldest son 
of Sir William Dawson, principal of McGill 
University, Montreal. He was educated at 
McGill College and the Royal School of Mines; 
held the Duke of Cornwall's scholarship, given 
by the Prince of Wales; and took the Edward 
Forbes medal in paleontology and the Murch- 
ison medal in geology. He was appointed geol- 
ogist and naturalist to Her Majesty's North 
American Boundary Commission in 1873, and at 
the close of the commission’s work, in 1875, he 
published a report under the title of ‘‘ Geology 
and Resources of the Forty-ninth Parallel.’’ In 
July, 1875, he received an appointment on the 
geological survey of Canada. From 1875 to 1879 
he was occupied in the geologica! survey and 
exploration of British Columbia, and subse- 
quently engaged in similar work, both in the 
Northwest Territory and British Columbia. Dr. 
Dawson is the author of numerous papers on 
geology, natural history, and ethnology, pub- 
lished in the Canadian Naturalist, Quarterly 
Journal of the Geological Society, Transactions 


16 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Dawson (G. M.)— Continued. 
of the Royal Society of Canada, etc. He was 
in 1887 selected to take charge of the Yukon 
expedition. 

De Horsey (Lieut. Algernon F. R.) See 
Montgomerie (J. E.) and De Horsey 
(A. F. R.) 


De Smet (fev. Peter John). See Smet 
Pe Jide): 


Dictionary: 
Kalispel See Giorda (J.) 
Niskwali Gibbs (G.) 
Niskwali Powell (J. W.) 
Twana Eells (M.) 


Dictionary of the Chinook Jargon. See 
Coones (8S. F.) 


Dictionary of the Kalispel. See Giorda 
(J.) 

Drake (Samuel Gardiner). The | Aborig- 
inal races | of | North America; | com- 
prising | biographical sketches of emi- 
nent individuals, | and | an historical 
account of the different tribes, | from | 
the first discovery of the continent | to 

| the present period | with a disserta- 
tion on their | Origin, Antiquities, Man- 
ners and Customs, | illustrative narra- 
tives and anecdotes, | and a | copious 
analytical index | by Samuel G. Drake. 
| Fifteenth edition, | revised, with val- 
uable additions, | by Prof. H. L. Wil- 
liams. | [Quotation, six lines. ] | 

New York. | Hurst & company, pub- 
lishers. | 122 Nassau Street. [1882.] 

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. preface pp. 
3-4, contents pp. 5-8, Indian tribes and nations 


pp. 9-16, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 19- 
767, index pp. 768-787, 8°. 


Gatschet (A. S.), Indian languages of the 
Pacific states and territories, pp. 748-763. 


Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Wisconsin His- 
torical Society. 

Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6377, price a copy $3. 

Dufossé (E.) Americana | Catalogue de 

livres | relatifs 4 Amérique | Europe, 
Asie, Afrique | et Océanie | [&c. thirty- 
four lines] | 

Librairie ancienne et moderne de E. 
Dufossé | 27, rue Guénégaud, 27 | pres 
le Pont-neuf | Paris [1887] 

Cover title as above,no inside title, tables 
des divisions 1 1. text pp. 175-422, 8°. 

Contains, passim, titles of works relating to 
the Salishan languages. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


This series of catalogues was begun in 1876, 


« 


Dunbar: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library, now dispersed, of Mr. John 
B. Dunbar, Bloomfield, N. J. 


Durieu (Bishop Paul). By Rt. Rev. 


Bishop Durieu. O.M.I. | Skwamish. | 
Morning Prayers. 


[Kamloops, B. C.: 1891.] 

No title-page, heading only; text pp. 1-32, 
16°. See fac-simile of first page. 

Translated by Bishop Durieu into Skwam- 
ish and transcribed into shorthand by Father 
Le Jeune, editor of the Kamloops Wawa, who 
printed it on the mimeograph. 

Morning prayers, pp. 1-12.—Night prayers, 
pp. 12-16.—Preparation for confession, pp. 17- 
Be ehiel seen: Pilling. 

Prayers in Stalo by Rt. Rey. 
Bishop Durieu.|0O. M. I. | Stalo. | 
Morning Prayers. 

[Kamloops, B. C.: 1891.] 

No title-page, heading only ; text pp.1-16, 16°. 
Translated into Stalo by Bishop Durieu, and 
transcribed into shorthand by Father Le Jeune, 
editor and publisher of the Kamloops Wawa, 
who reproduced it by aid of the mimeograph. 

Morning prayers, pp. 1-13.—The rosary, pp. 
13-16. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

The Rev. A. G. Morice, of Stuart’s Lake Mis- 
sion, British Columbia, a famous Athapascan 
scholar, has kindly furnished me the following 
brief account of this writer: 

Bishop Paul Durieu was born at St. Pal-de- 
Mous, in the diocese of Puy, France, December 
38,1850. After his course in classics he entered 
the novitiate of the Oblates at Notre Dame de 
1’ Ozier in 1847 and made his religious profession 
in 1849. He was ordained priest at Marseilles 
March 11, 1854, and was sent to the missions of 
Oregon, where he occupied, successively, sev- 
eral posts. At the breaking out of the rebellion 
among the Yakama Indians he had to leave for 
the Jesuit mission at Spokane. He was after- 
wards sent to Victoria and then to Okanagan by 
his superiors. Thence he was sent as superior 
of the Fort Rupert Mission, and when, on June 
2, 1875, he was appointed coadjutor Bishop of 
British Columbia, he was superior of St.Charles 
House at New Westminster. On June 3, 1890, 
he succeeded Bishop L. Y. D’Herbainez as vicar 
apostolic of British Columbia. 

Bishop Durieu understands, but does not 
speak, several Salishan dialects, and he is 
especially noted for his unqualified success 
among the Indians. 


Dwamish: 
Geographic names See Bulmer (T.S.) 
Geographic names Coones (S. F.) 
Geographic names Eells (M.) 
Vocabulary Salish, 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES, 


17 


tae By. Rt-Rev. Bishop Durren OM. 
SAWara sh. 


Moy RY fray er § ss 


rte ee ew 


FACSIMILE OF FIRST PAGE OF DURIEU’S SKWAMISH PRAYERS, 


SAL 2 


18 THE 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF 


E. 


Hells (C.)— Continued. 


Eames: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. Wilberforce Eames, 
Brooklyn, N. Y. 


Eells (Rev. Cushing). 
and Hells (C.) 


At my request Rev. Myron Eells, a son of 
the above, has furnished me the following bio- 
graphic notes: 

Rey. Cushing Eells was born at Blandford, 
Mass., February 16, 1810; was the son of Joseph 
and Elizabeth Warner Eells; was brought up 
at Blandford; prepared for college at Monson 
Academy, Mass.; entered Williams College in 
1830, from which he graduated four years later, 
and from East Windsor (Conn.) Theological 
Seminary in 1837, and was ordained at Bland- 
ford, Mass., as a Congregational minister, Octo- 
ber 25, 1837. 

He was married March 5, 1838, to Miss Myra 
Fairbank, who was born at Holden, Mass., May 
26,1805. Having offered themselves to the 
American Board of Commissioners for Foreign 
Missions, they were first appointed to the Zulu 
mission in Africa, but owing to a war there 
among the natives they were delayed, until the 
call from Oregon became so urgent that they 
were sent there, leaving home in March and 
arriving at Wallawalla August 29, 1838. They 
spent the next wirter at Wallawalla, and the 
following spring with Rev. E. Walker opened 
a new station among the Spokan Indians at 
Tshimakain, Walkers Prairie, Washington. 
Here they remained until 1848. Mr. Eells 
taught a small school part of the time, besides 
preaching and doing general missionary work. 
The results as they appeared at that time were 
not satisfactory, but thirty-five years later it 
was plain that the seed then sowed had grown 
until two churches of one hundred and thirty- 
seven members were the result. During the 
Cayuse war of 1848 and the Yakama war of 
1855-1856 the tribe remained friendly to the 
whites, although strongly urged by the hostiles 
to join them. As the Government could not 
assure them of protection from the hostile 
Cayuse, they found it necessary to move to the 
Willamette Valley in 1848, under an escort of 
Oregon volunteers. 

Mr. Eells did not immediately sever his con- 
nection with the missionary board, hoping that 
the way would open to return to the Spokan 
Indians, but it never did. For many years most 
of his time was spent in teaching school at 
Salem, Oregon, 1848-1849; at Forest Grove, Ore- 
gon, 1848-1851, and 1857-1860; at Hilisboro, Ore- 
gon, 1851-1857; and at Wallawalla, Wash., 


See Walker (E.) 


1867-1870. Here he founded Whitman College, | 


of whose board of trustees he has been presi- 


Hells (Rev. 


dent from the beginning (1859) to the time of 
his death. He has since 1872 preached at a 
large number of places in Washington as a 
general self-supporting missionary, but mainly 
at Skokomish, among the Indians, and among 
the whites at Colfax, Medical Lake, and 
Cheney, and the results of his labors have been 
the organization of Congregational churches at 
those places and at Sprague and Chawelah. Not 
till 1891, at the age of about 81, did he give up 
active preaching. He has given to Whitman 
College nearly $10,000, besides securing for it 
about $12,000 more by a canvass in the east in 
1883-1884 (the only time he has visited the east 
since he first went west), to various churches 
in Oregon and Washington over $7,000, and to 
various missionary societies about $4,000. 

He received the degree of D.D. from Pacific 
University, on account of his work for Whit- 
man College. and was assistant moderator of 
the National Congregational Council, at Con- 
cord, N. H.,in 1883. He died at Tacoma Febru- 
ary 16, 1893, on hiseighty-third birthday. Mrs. 
Eells died at Skokomish, Wash., August 9, 1878, 
aged 73 years. He left two sous, both of whom 
have been at work among the Indians at Puget 
Sound, one as Indian agent since 1871, and the 
other as missionary since 1874. 


Myron). Art. IV. Twana 
Indians of the Skokomish reservation 
in Washington territory. By rev. M. 
Kells, Missionary among these Indians. 

In Hayden (F.V.), Bulletinof the U.S. Geol. 
and Geog. Survey of the Territories, vol. 3, pp. 
57-114, Washington, 1877, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Section 8, Measuring and valuing (pp. 86- 
88), contains the numerals 1-1000, pp. 86-87; 
names of days, months, and points of the com- 
pass, pp. 87-88.—-Section 13, Language and liter- 
ature (pp. 93-101), contains a Twana vocabulary 
of 211 words, pp. 93-98. 

Issued separately with cover title as follows: 


— Author’s edition. | Department of 


the interior. | United States geological 
and geographical survey. | F. V. Hay- 
den, U.S. Geologist-in-Charge. | The | 
Twana Indians | of the | Skokomish 
reservation in Washington territory. | 
By | rev. M. Eells, | missionary among 
these Indians. | Extracted from the 
bulletin of the survey, Vol. III, No. 1. 
| Washington, April 9, 1877. 

Cover title as above, no inside title, text pp. 
57-114, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 


Copies Brinton, Eames, National 
Museum, Pilling. 


seen: 


Eells (M.) —Continued. 
— Indian music. By rev. M. Eells. 
In American Antiquarian, vol. 1, pp. 249-253, 
Chicago, 1878-79, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) 
Short songs in Clallam and Chemakum, with 
music, p. 252. 


- ee 


— The Twana language of Washington 


territory. By rev. M. Eells. 
In American Antiquarian, vol. 3, pp. 296-303, 
Chicago, 1880-’81, 8°. (Burean of Ethnology.) 
Grammatic forms of the Twana or Skoko- 
mish, pp. 296-298; of the Skwaksin dialect of 
the Niskwally, pp. 298-299; of the Claliam, pp. 
299-301; of the Spokane, pp. 302-303. 


— History of | Indian missions | on the 
Pacific coast. | Oregon, Washington 
and Idaho. | By | rev. Myron Eells, | 
Missionary of the American Missionary 
Association. | With | anintroduction | 
by | rev. G. H. Atkinson, D.D. | 

Philadelphia: | the American Sunday- 
school union, | 1122 Chestnut Street. | 
10 Bible house, New York. [1882.] 


Frontispiece | 1. title verso copyright notice 
(1882) 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. contents 
pp. v-vi, introduction by G. H. Atkinson pp. 
vii-xi, preface (dated October, 1882) pp. xiii- 
xvi, text pp. 17-270, 12°. 

Chapter v, Literature, science, education, 
morals, and religion (pp. 202-226) contains a 
short list of books, papers, and manuscripts 
relating to the Indians of the northwest coast, 
among them the Salishan, pp. 203-207, 209-211. 

Oopies seen: Congress, Pilling. 

— The Indian languages of Puget 
Sound. 

In the Seattle Weekly Post-Intelligencer, 
vol. 5, no. 8, p. 4, Seattle, Washington Ty., 
November 26, 1885. (Pilling, Wellesley.) 

Remarks on the peculiarities and grammatic 
forms of the Snohomish, Nisqually, Clallam, 
Chemakum, Upper Chehalis, and Lower Che- 
halis languages.—Partial conjugation of the 
verb to drink in Snohomish. 


Ten years | of | missionary work | 
among the Indians | at | Skokomish, 
Washington territory. | 1874-1884. | By 
Rey. M. Eells, | Missionary of the 
American Missionary Association. | 

Boston: | Congregational Sunday- 
School Publishing Society, | Congrega- 
tional house, | Corner Beacon and Som- 
erset Streets. [1886. | 

Half-title (Ten years at Skokomish) verso 
blank 1 1. frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright 
notice (1886) and names of printers 11. preface 
11. dedication verso note 1 1. contents pp. vii-x, 
introduction pp. 11-13, text pp. 15-271, 12°. 

Indian hymns (pp. 244-255) contains a two- 
verse hymn in Twana with English transla- 
tion, pp. 250-251; one in Clallam with English 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 19 


Eells (M.) — Continued. 


translation, pp. 251-252; and one in the Squaxon 
dialect of the Nisqually, p. 252; seven different 
ways of expressing I will go home in Clallam, 
pp. 253; a hymn in Twana and Clallam, pp. 253- 
254. 

Copies seen: Congress, Pilling. 


— Indians of Puget Sound. (Sixth 


paper.) Measuring and valuing. 
In American Antiquarian, vol. 10, pp. 174-178, 
Chicago, 1888, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) 
Numerals, and remarks concerning the 
numeral system of quite a number of the lan- 
guages of Washington Territory, among them 
the following divisions of the Salishan family: 
Twana, Nisqually, Skokomish, Kwinaielt, 
Skagit, Clallam, Lummi, Cowichen,' Chehalis, 
Tait, Kuwalitsk, Snanaimo, Kwantlen, Songis, 
Shiwapmukh, Shooswap, Nikutemukh, Sko- 
yelpi, Spokane, Pisquaus, Kalispelm, Coeur 
d’ Alene, Flathead, Lilowat, and Komookh. 
The preceding articles of the series, all of 
which appeared in the American Antiquarian, 
contain no linguistic material, It was the inten- 
tion of the editor of the Antiquarian, when the 
series should be finished, to issue them in book 
form. So far as they were printed in the maga- 
zine they were repaged and perhaps a number 
of signatures struck off. The sixth paper, for 
instance, titled above, I have in my possession, 
paged 44-48. 
Hymns | inthe | Chinook+Jargon+ 
Language | compiled by | rev. M. Eells, 

| Missionary of the American Mission- 
ary Association. | Second edition. | 
Revised and Enlarged. | 

Portland, Oregon: | David Steel, sue- 
cessor to Himes the printer, | 169-171 
Second Street, | 1889. 

Covertitle as above verso note, titleas above 
verso copyright notice (1878 and 1889) 11. note 
p. 3, text pp. 4-40, sq. 16°. 

Hymn in the Twana or Skokomish language, 
p. 32; English translation, p.33.—Hymn in the 
Clallam language, p. 34; English translation, p. 
35.—Hymn in the Nisqually language, p. 36; 
English translation, p. 37.—Medley in four lan- 
guages (Chinook Jargon, Skokomish, Clallam, 
and English), p. 36. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

The first edition of this work, Portland, 1878, 
contains no Salishan material. (Eames, Pilling, 
Wellesley.) 


The Twana, Chemakum, and Klallam 
Indians of Washington Territory. By 
Rev. Myron Eells. 

In Smithsonian Institution Annual Rep. of 
the Board of Regents for 1887, part 1, pp. 605- 
681, Washington, 1889, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Measures and values (pp. 643-686) contains 
the numerals 1-10 of a number of Indian lan- 


guages of Washington Ty., among them the 
Twana, Niskwalli, Snohomish, Chehalis, Kwi- 


20 ' BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Eells (M.) — Continued. 


naiult, Klallam, and Cowichan, p. 644; Lummi 


Helis (M.) — Continued. 
— [Words, phrases, and sentences in 


and Skawit, p. 645.—Remarks on the same, pp- 
645-646.—The word for God in Twana, Nisk” 
walli, and Klallam, v. 679. 

This article was issued separately, without 
change, and again as follows: 


The Twana, Chemakum, and Klallam 
Indians of Washington territory. By 
Rey. Myron Eells. 


In Smithsonian Inst. Mis. Papers relating 
to anthropology, from the Smithsonian report 
for 1886-’87, pp. 605-681, Washington, 1889, 8°. 
(Eames, Pilling.) 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 


Original Indian names of town sites, 
rivers, mountains, etc., of western 
Washington. 

In Coones (S. F.), Dictionary of the Chinook 
Jargon, pp. 35-38, Seattle [1891], 18°. 

Names (13) in the Twana or Skokomish lan- 
guage, p.35; Nisqually (25), including Squak- 
son, Puyallup, and Snohomish languages, p. 36; 
Clallam language (8), p. 37; Duwamish lan- 
guage (25), pp. 37-38. 

—— Aboriginal geographic names in the 
state of Washington. By Myron Eells. 

In American Anthropologist, vol. 5, pp. 27-35, 
Washington, 1892, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Arranged alphabetically and derivations 
given. The languagesrepresented are : Chinook, 
Chinook Jargon, Nez Percé, Chehalis, Clallam, 
Twana, Calispel, Cayuse, Puyallup, and Spo- 
kane. 

The Indians of Puget Sound. By 


Rey. Myron Eells. 

Manuscript, pp. 1-705,sm.4°; in possession 
of its author. 

Chapter xii, Measuring and valuing, pp. 249- 
271, contains the numerals in Twana, Nisk- 
walli, Clallam, Upper and Lower Chehalis, 
Chemakum, Kwill-li-ut, Hoh, Cowichan, Chi- 
nook Jargon, and Lummi, with remarks on the 
same. 

Chapter xvi, Writing and language, pp. 306- 
352, includes a grammatic treatise of the Twana, 
Niskwalli, Snokomish, Clallam, Chemakiun, 
Upper and Lower Chehalis, and of the Chinook 
Jargon, with a comparison of these languages. 
[Words, phrases, and sentences in 
the Klallam language; recorded by 
Rey. Myron Eells, Washington Terri- 
tory, February-June, 1878. | 

Manuscript, pp. 8-102 and 3 unnumbered 
leaves, 4°; in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 
nology, Washington, D. C. 

Recorded in a copy of Powell’s Introduction 
to the study of Indian languages, first edition. 
Schedules 1,3, 6-12, 14-21, 28, and 24 are each 
nearly filled; schedules 4, 5, 18, and 22 partially 
so. The unnumbered leaves at the end treat 


of nouns, gender, possessive case, pronouns, 
adjectives, and verbs with conjugations. 


the Niskwalli language, Skwaksin dia- 
lect; recorded by Rev. Myron Eells, 
Washington Territory, February-Sep- 
tember, 1878.] 


Manuscript, pp. 8-102, and 4 unnumbered 
leaves at the end, 4°; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D.C. 

Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction 

to the study of Indian languages, first edition. 
Most of the schedules given therein have been 
completely filled, the remainder partially so. 
The unnumbered leaves at the end treat of 
nouns, possessive case, gender, diminutives, 
adjectives, pronouns, and verbs with conjuga- 
tions. 
[Words, phrases, sentences, and 
grammatic material relating to the 
Twana language. Recorded by Rev. 
Myron Eells, Washington Territory, 
1878. ] 


Manuscript, pp. 8-102 and 2 unnumbered 
leaves at the end, 4°; in possession of its 
author. 

Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction 

to the study of Indian languages, first edition, 
all the schedules of which are filled or nearly 
so. The unnumbered leaves at the end treat 
of nouns, their plural forms, possessive ease, 
gender, comparison of adjectives, possessive 
case of pronouns, and partial conjugations of 
the Twana synonyms of the verbs to eat and to 
drink. 
[ Words, phrases, and sentences in 
the language of the lower Tsi-hé-lis 
(Chehalis) of the southwestern portion 
of Washington Territory. Recorded by 
Rev. Myron Eells, March, 1882. 

Manuscript, pp. 8-102, 4°; in possession of 
its author. 

Recorded in a copy of Powell’s Introduction 
to the study of Indian languages, first edition. 

‘*Collected with the aid of John Clip, an 
Indian doctor who talks good English.” 
[Words, phrases, sentences, and 
graimmatic material of the language of 
the upper Chehalis Indians of the 
western portion of Washington Terri- 
tory. Recorded by Rev. Myron Eells, 
January-March, 1885. ] 

Manuscript, pp. 77-228 and 2 unnumbered 
leaves, 49; in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 
nology, Washington, D.C. 

Recorded in a copy of Powell's Introduction 
to the study of Indian languages, second edi- 
tion. Schedules 1-8,10,13, 16, 20-29 are each 
nearly filled; numbers 12, 14, 17, 19, partially so, 
and the remaining schedules are blank. The 
unnumbered leaves at the end treat of adjec- 
tives and their comparison, pronouns, and con- 
jugations of verbs. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 21 


Eells (M.) — Continued. 

“This Chehalis tribe lies next south of the 
Twanas. Ihave notlived with them, but have 
obtained my information from Chehalis 
Indians whe have at times lived among the 
Twanas, namely, from Marion Davis, assisted 
by Big Sam, the former an educated young 
man, the latter an uneducated old one.” 


The Twana language. By Rev. M. 
Eells. (*) 

Manuscript, pp. 1-232, 8°, in possession of its 
author, who has kindly furnished me adescrip- 
tion of it under date of August 12, 1892, as fol- 
lows: 


VolumeI. Part 1, Grammar. Part 2, Twana- 
English Dictionary, 151 pages, 8°. Vol. II, 
Part 3, English-Twana Dictionary. Part 4, 
Hymns and prayers (not published anywhere), 
84 pages, 8°. 

“Some years ago I thought of learning this 
language, and proceeded far enough to acquire 
one or two hundred words and a few sentences 
and obtain alittle idea of the construction. The 
material lay in a box of old papers until lately, 
and I have thought it worth while to enlarge 
itand put it into good shape, not for publica- 
tion, but for preservation in my library. The 
larger number of the nouns are the same as 
those I furnished Major Powell in a copy of his 
Introduction to the study of Indian languages 
some years ago.” 


An oration in the Twana language. 
In Bulmer (T.), Part II of Bulmer’s appen- 
dix to the Chee-Chinook Grammar and Dic- 
tionary, ll. 20-22. (Manuscript.) 
Orationin English, 1. 20.—The samein Twana 
with interlinear English translation, 11. 21-22. 


— A tradition in the Twana language. 
In Bulmer (T. S.), Part IL of Bulmer’s 

Appendix to the Chee-Chinook Grammar and 

Dictionary, ll. 23-25. (Manuscript.) 

Tradition in Twana with interlinear English 
translation, 1. 23.—The same in English, ll. 24- 
25. 

Copy of a sermon preached to the 
Indians of Walla-Walla. 

In Bulmer (T. S8.), Christian prayers in 
Chinook, 11. 39-46. (Manuscript.) 

“Of the 97 words used 46 are of Chinook 
origin, 17 Nootka, 3 Salish, 23 English, 2 Jar- 
gon, and 6 in French.”’ 

These three manuscripts are in possession of 
Dr. Bulmer, Salt Lake City, Utah. 


Rey. Myron Eells was born at Walker’s 
Prairie, Washington Territory, October 7, 1843; 
he is the son of Rey. Cushing Eells, D, D., and 
Mrs. M. F. Eells, who went to Oregon in 1838 as 
missionaries to the Spokan Indians. He left 
Walker's Prairie in 1848 on accountof the Whit- 
man massacre at Wallawalla and Cayuse war, 
and went to Salem, Oregon, where he began to 
go to school. In 1849 he moved to Forest Grove, 


Eells (M.) — Continued. 


Oregon; in 1851 to Hillsboro, Oregon, and in 
1857 again to Forest Grove, at which places he 
continued his school life. In 1862 he moved to 
Wallawalla, spending the time in farming and 
the wood business until 1868, except the falls, 
winters, and springs of 1863-'64, 1864-’65, and 
1865-66, when he wasat Forest Grove in college, 
graduating from Pacific University in 1866, in 
the second class which ever graduated from 
that institution. In 1868 he went to Hartford, 
Conn., to study for the ministry, entering the 
Hartford Theological Seminary that year, grad- 
uating from it in 1871, and being ordained at 
Hartford, June 15, 1871, as a Congregational 
minister. He went to Boisé City in October, 
1871, under the American Home Missionary 
Society, organized the First Congregational 
church of that place in 1872, and was pastor of 
it until he left in 1874. Mr. Eells was also 
superintendent of its Sunday school from 1872 
to 1874 and president of the Idaho Bible Society 
from 1872 to 1874. He went to Skokomish, 
Washington, in June, 1874, and has worked as 
missionary of the American Missionary Asso- 
ciation ever since among the Skokomish or 
Twanaand Klallam Indians, pastor of Congre- 
gationalchurchatSkokomish Reservation since 
1876, and superintendent of Sabbath school at 
Skokomish since 1882. He organized a Congre- 
gational church among the Klalams in 1882, of 
which he has since been pastor, and another 
among the whites at Seabeck in 1880, of which 
he was pastor until 1886. In 1887 he was chosen 
trustee of the Pacifie University, Oregon; in 
1885 was elected assistant secretary and in 1889 
secretary of its board of trustees. Hedelivered 
the address before the Gamma Sigma society 
of that institution in 1876, before the alumni in 
1890, and preached the baccalaureate sermon in 
1886. In 1888 he was chosen trustee of Whit- 
man College, Washington, delivered the com- 
mencement address there in 1888 and received 
the degree of D.D. from that institution in 
1890. In 1888 he was elected its financial secre- 
tary and in 1891 was asked to become president 
of the institution, but declined both. 

He was elected an associate member of the 
Victoria Institute of London in 1881, and a 
corresponding member of the Anthropological 
Society at Washington in 1885, to both of which 
societies he has furnished papers which have 
been published by them. He was also elected 
vice-president of the Whitman Historical Soci- 
ety at Wallawalla in 1889. From 1874 to 1886 
he was clerk of the Congregational Association 
of Oregon and Washington. 

Mr. Eells at present (1893) holds the position 
of Superintendent of the Department of Eth- 
nology for the State of Washington at the 
World’s Columbian Exposition. 


Ellis (Dr.—). -See Good (J. B.) 
Etshiit thlu sitskai 


[Spokan]. See 
Walker (E.) and Eells (C.) 


oe: BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


os 


Featherman (A.) Social history | of the 
| races of mankind. | First division: | 
Nigritians[-Third division: | Aoneo- 
Maranonians]. | By | A. Featherman. | 

[Two lines quotation. ] | 

London: | Triibner & co., Ludgate 
Hill. | 1885[-1889]. | (All rights re- 
served.) 

3 vols. 8°. 

A general discussion of a number of North 
American families occurs in vol. 3, among them 
the Nisquallis, p.356; the Salish proper, pp. 
360-369. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Field (Thomas Warren). An essay | 
towards an| Indian bibliography. | 
Being a | catalogueof books, | relating 
tothe | history, antiquities, languages, 
customs, religion, |wars, literature, and 
origin of the | American Indians, | in 
the library of | Thomas W. Field. | With 
bibliographical and historical notes, 
and | synopses of the contents of some 
of | the works least known. | 

New York: | Scribner, Armstrong, 
and co. | 1873. 

Title verso names of printers 11. preface pp. 
lii-iv, text pp. 1-430, 8°. 

Titles and descriptions of works relating to 
the Salishan languages passim. 

Copies seen : Congress, Eames, Pilling. 

At the Field sale, no. 688, a copy brought 
$4.25; at the Menzies sale, no. 718, a ‘ half- 
crushed, red levant morocco, gilt top, uncut 
copy,” brought $5.50. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, 


Field (T. W.) — Continued. 
18 fr.; by Quaritch, no. 11996, 15s.; at the Pinart 
sale, no. 368, it brought 17 fr.; at the Murphy 
sale, no. 949, $4.50. Priced by Quaritch, no. 
302 24, 10. 


Catalogue | ofthe | library | belong- 
ing to | Mr. Thomas W. Field. | To be 
sold at auction, | by | Bangs, Merwin 
& co., | May 24th, 1875, | and following 
days. | 

New York. | 1875. 

Cover title 22 lines, title as above verso blank 
1 l. notice ete. pp. iii-viii, text pp. 1-376, list of 
prices pp. 377-393, supplement pp. 1-59, 2°. Com- 
piled by Joseph Sabin, mainly from Mr. Field’s 
Essay, title of which is given above. 

Contains titles of a number of works relating 
to the Salishan languages. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology,Congress, 
Eames. 

At the Squier sale, no. 1178, an uneut copy 
brought $1.25. 


First catechism in Thompson language. 
See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Flathead. See Salish. 


Friendly Village: 
General discussion See Gallatin (A.) 


Vocabulary Adelung (J. C) and 
Vater (J.S.) 
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Vocabulary Mackenzie (A.) 


Frost (J. H.) See Lee (D.) and Frost 
(J. H.) 


Fuller (Louis). See Boas (F.) 


G. 


Gabelentz (Hans Georg Conor von der). 
Die Sprachwissenschaft, | ihre Auf- 
gaben, Methoden | und | bisherigen 
Ergebnisse. |Von | Georg von der Gabe- 
lentz. | [Vignette.] | 

Leipzig, | T.O. Weigel nachfolger | 
(Chr. Herm. Tauchnitz). | 1891. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 
1 1. Vorwort pp. iii-vii, Inhalts- Verzeichniss 
pp. vili-xx, text pp. 1-466, Register pp. 467-502, 
Berichtigungen p. 502, 8°. 

Brief discussion and a few examples of the 
Selish language, pp. 34, 368. 

Copies seen: Gatschet. 


Gallatin (Albert). A synopsis of the In- 
dian tribes within the United States 
east of the Rocky Mountains and in 
the British and Russian possessions in 
North America. By the Hon. Albert 
Gallatin. 

In American Antiquarian Soe. Trans. 
(Archeeologia Americana), vol. 2, pp. 1-422,Cam- 
bridge, 1836, 8°. 

Brief reference to the language of the Indians 
of Friendly Village, p. 15; to the Salish or 
Flat Heads, p. 134.—Vocabulary of the Salish, 
lines 53, pp. 305-367.—Vocabulary (25 words) of 
the language of the Indians of Friendly Vil- 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES, 


Gallatin (A.) — Continued. 
lage of Salmon River, Pacific Ocean, and of the 
Atnah or Chin Indians (both from Mackenzie), 
p. 378. 


— Hale’s Indians of North-west Amer- 
ica,and vocabularies of North America; 
with an introduction. By Albert Gal- 
latin. 

In American Eth. Soc. Trans. vol. 2, pp. xxiii- 
elxxxviii, 1-130, New York, 1848, 8°. (Pilling.) 

The families of languages as far as ascer- 
tained (pp. xcix-c) includes the Tsihaili-Selish, 
p. ¢.—North Oregon division, p. 6, includes 
mentionof the Selish.—The Tsihaili-Selish (pp. 
10-13) includes a general discussion, pp. 10-13; 
names of the months in Pisquaus and Selish, 
p. 13.—Philology, the Tsihaili-Selish (pp. 26-34) 
includes pronominal suftixes in Shushwap and 
Selish, p. 27; affixes in Shushwap, Selish, Tsi- 
hailish, and Nsietshawus, p. 27; vocabulary (9 
words) of the Tsihailish, Squale, etc., and the 
Nsietshawus, p. 28; the most important 
grammatical peculiarities of the Selish tongue, 
including prefixes, pluralization of adjectives, 
diminutives, personal pronouns, possessive 
affixes, tenses, modes, paradigms, transitions, 
derivatives, etc., pp. 28-34.—Vocabulary (179 
words) of the Selish (Flathead) pp. 88-94.— 
Vocabulary of the Bilechocla (33 words and 
numerals 1-10), p. 103.—Comparative vocabu- 
lary of the Tsihaili-Selish tongues (50 words 
and numerals 1-10), including the Atnahs, 
Skitsuish, Piskwaus, Skwale, Tsihailish, 
Kowelitsk, and Nsietshawus, pp. 118-120. 


—— Table of generic Indian families of 
languages. 
In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian tribes, vol. 3, 
pp. 397-402, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°. 
Includes the Jelish, p. 402. 


Albert Gallatin was born in Geneva, Switzer- 
land, January 29, 1761, and died in Astoria, L.I., 
August 12,1849. He was descended from an 
ancient patrician family of Geneva, whose name 
had long been honorably connected with the 
history of Switzerland. Young Albert had 
been baptized by the name of Abraham Alfonse 
Albert. In 1773 he was sent to a boarding 
school and a year later entered the University 
of Geneva, where he was graduated in 1779. He 
sailed from L’Orient late in May, 1780, and 
reached Boston on July 14. He entered Con- 
gress on December 7, 1795, and continued a 
member of that body until his appointment as 
Secretary of the Treasury in 1801, which office 
he held continuously until 1813. His services 
were rewarded with the appointment of min- 
ister to France in February, 1815; he entered 
on the duties of this office in January, 1816. In 
1826, at the solicitation of President Adams, he 
accepted the appointment of envoy extraordi- 
nary to Great Britain. On his return to the 
United States he settled in New York City, 
where, from 1831 to 1839, he was president of the 
National Bank of New York. In 1842 he was 


23 


Gallatin (A.) — Continued. 
associated in the establishment of the American 
Ethnological Society, becoming its first presi- 
dent, and in 1843 he was elected to hold a simi- 
lar ofticein the New York Historical Society, an 
honor which wasannuallyconferred on him until 
his death.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 

Gatschet: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. Albert S. Gatschet, 
Washington, D.C. 

Gatschet (Albert Samuel). Indian lan- 
guages of the Pacific states and terri- 
tories. 

In Magazine of Am. History, vol. 1, pp. 145- 
171, New York, 1877, sm. 4°. 

A general discussion of the peoples of the 
region with examples, passim. The Salishan 
family with its linguistic divisions is treated of 
on pp. 169-170. 

Issued separately with half-title as follows: 

— Indian languages | of the | Pacific 
states and territories | by | Albert S. 
Gatschet | Reprinted from March Num- 
ber of The Magazine of American 
History 

[New York: 1877.] 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 145-171, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Astor,Congress, Eames, Pilling, 
Wellesley. ‘ 

Reprinted in the following works: 

Beach (W. W.), Indian Miscellany, pp. 416- 
447, Albany, 1877, 8°. 

Drake (S. G.), Aboriginal races of North 
America, pp. 748-763, New York, [1882], 8°. 

A later article with similar title as follows: 

—— Indian languages of the Pacific 
states and territories and of the Pueblos 
of New Mexico. 

In Magazine of Am. History, vol. 8, pp. 254- 
263, New York, 1882,4°. (Pilling.) 

Brief reference to the Selish stock (Oregon- 
ian dialects), p. 256. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows: 

—— Indian languages | of the | Pacific 
states and territories | and of | The 
Pueblos of New Mexico. | By Albert 
S. Gatschet. | Reprinted from the Mag- 
azine of American History, April, 
1882. | 

New York: | A.S. Barnes & co. | 1882. 

Cover title, no inside title, text 5 unnum- 
bered leaves, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, Eames, National 
Museum, Wellesley. 

— Winke fiir das Studium der ameri- 
kanischen Sprachen. Von Albert 5S. 
Gatschet, in Washington, Dist. Col, 


24 


Gatschet (A. S.)— Continued. 
Separat-Abdruck aus dem Correspondenz- 
Blatt der Deutschen anthropologischen Gesell- 
schaft, pp. 20-23, nos. 3-4, 1892, 4°. (Pilling.) 
A general disenssion of the grammatic pecul- 
jiarities of a number of American languages, 
_ among them the Salishan. 


—— [Vocabulary of the Nonstéki or | 


Nestucca language. Collected by A.S. 
Gatschet in Tillamuk county, Oregon, 


November, 1877. ] 

Manuscript, 10 11.49. Injthe library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded on a blank 
form (no. 170) issued by the Smithsonian Insti- 
tution. It contains about 220 words. 

Tn the same library is a copy of this vocabu- 


lary, made by its compiler, 7 ll. folio, written on ~ 


one side only. 

Albert Samuel Gatschet was born in St. Beat- 
enberg, in the Bernese Oberland, Switzerland, 
October 3, 1832. His propedeutic education was 
acquired in the lyceums of Neuchatel (1843- 
1845) and of Berne (1846-1852), after which he 
followed courses in the universities of Berne 
and Berlin (1852-1858). His studies had for 
their object the ancient world in all its phases of 
religion, history, language, and art, and thereby 
his attention was at an early day directed to 
philologic researches. In 1865 he began the pub- 
lication of a series of brief monographs on the 
local etymology of his country, entitled ‘‘ Orts- 


etymologische Forschungen aus der Schweiz” 


(1865-1867). In 1867 he spent several months 
in London pursuing antiquarian studies in the 
British Museum. In 1868 he settledin New York 
and became a contributor to various domestic 
and foreign periodicals, mainly on scientific 
subjects. Drifting into amore attentive study 
of the American Indians, he published several 
compositions upon their languages, the most 
important of which is ‘‘ Zwolf Sprachen aus 
dem Siidwesten Nordamerikas,’’ Weimar, 1876. 
This led to his appointment to the position 
of ethnologist in the United States Geological 
Survey, under Maj. John W. Powell, in March, 
1877, when he removed to Washington, and first 
employed himself in arranging the linguistic 
manuscripts of the Smithsonian Institution, 
now the property of the Bureau of Ethnology, 
which forms a part of the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion. Mr. Gatschet has ever since been actively 
connected with that bureau. To increase its 
linguistic collections and to extend his own 
studies of the Indian languages, he has made 
extensive trips of linguistic and ethnologic 
exploration among the Indians of North Amer- 
ica. After returning from a six months’ 
sojourn among the Klamaths and Kalapuyas 
of Oregon, settled on both sides of the Cascade 
Range, he visited the Kataba in South Carolina 
and the Cha’hta and Shetimasha of Louisiana 
in 1881-82, the Kayowe, Comanche, Apache, 
Yattassee, Caddo, Naktche, Modoc, and other 
tribes in the Indian Territory, the Tonkawe 


and Lipans in Texas, and the Atakapa Indians | 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Gatschet (A.S.) — Continued, 


of Louisiana in 188485. In 1886 he saw the 
Tlaskaltecs at Saltillo, Mexico, a remnant of the 
Nahua race, brought there about 1575 from 
Anahuae, and was the first to discover the aftin- 
ity of the Biloxi language with the Siouan fam- 
ily. He also committed to writing the Tunixka 
or Touica language of Louisiana, never before 
investigated and forming a linguistic family of 
itself. Excursions to other partsof thecountry 
brought to his knowledge other Indian lan- 
guages: the Tuskarora, Caughnawaga, Penob- 
scot, and Karankawa. 


Mr. Gatschet has written an extensive report 
embodying his researches among the Klamath 
Lake and ModocIndians of Oregon, which forms 
Vol. II of “Contributions to North American 
Ethnology.” It is in two parts, which aggre- 
gate 1,520 pages. Among the tribes and lan- 
guages discussed by him in separate publi- 
cations are the Timucua (Florida), Toikawe 
(Texas), Yuma (California, Arizona, Mexico), 
Chiméto (California), Beothuk (Newfound- 
land), Creek, and Hitchiti (Alabama). His 
numerous publications are scattered through 
magazines and government reports, some being 
contained in the Proceedings of the American 
Philosophical Society, Philadelphia. 


Gendre (Pére—). Composed by | Father 


Gendre O. M.I. | Prayers | in Shuswap. 

[ Kamloops, B. C.: 1891.] 

No title-page; text, with heading as above, 
pp. 5-12, 32°. Written in Shuswap by Father 
Gendre and transliterated into shorthand by 
Father Le Jeune, editor and publisher of the 
Kamloops Wawa, who reproduced it by aid of 
the mimeograph. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


General discussion: 


Friendly Village 


Atna See Adelung (J. C.) and 
Vater (J.S.) 
Atna Hale (H.) 
| Bilkula Boas (F.) 
| Bilkula Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Bilkula Tolmie (W. F.) and 
| Dawson (G. M.) 
Chehalis Hale (H.) 
Chehalis Swan (J.G.) 
Chehalis Tolmie (W. F.) and 


Dawson (G. M.) 
Gallatin (A.) 


Kalispel Smalley (E.V.) 
Kaulits Hale (H.) 
Kawichen Bancroft (H. H.) 
Kawichen Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Kawichen Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Klallam Bancroft (H. H.) 
Klallam Eells (M.) 
Netlakapumuk Bancroft (H. H.) 
Niskwalli Featherman (A.) 
Niskwalli Hale (H.) 
Niskwalli Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Piskwaus Hale (H.) 


: : 
4 
t 
* 
' 


— .-. = 


Geographic names: 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


General discussion — Continued. 


Salish See Anderson (A. C.) 
Salish Bancroft (H. H.) 
Salish Beach (W. W.) 
Salish Berghaus (H.) 
Salish Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Salish Drake (S. G.) 
Salish Featherman (A.) 
Salish Gabelentz (H. C. G.) 
Salish Gallatin (A.) 
Salish Fyatschet (A. 8.) 
Salish Hale (H.) 
Salish Miiller (F.) 
Shuswap Dawson (G. M.) 
Shuswap Hale (H.) 
Skitsuish Hale (H.) 
Tilamuk Hale (H.) 
Gentes: 
Bilkula See Boas (F.) 
Nukwalmuk Boas (F.) 
Snanaimuk Boas (F.) 
Songish Boas (F.) 
Tilamuk Boas (F.) 


Chehalis See Bulmer (T.S.) 
Dwamish Bulmer (T.5S.) 
Dwamish Coones (S. F.) 
Dwamish Eells (M.) 
Kalispel Eells (M.) 
Klallam Coones (5S. F.) 
Wdallam Eells (M.) 
Klallam Gibbs (G.) 
Lummi Gibbs (G.) 
Niskwalli Coones (S. F.) 
Niskwalli fells (M.) 
Niskwalli Wickesham (J.) 
Puyallup Coones (S. F.) 
Puyallup Eells (M.) 
Salish Bulmer (T.S.) 
Shuswap Dawson (G. M.) 
Skokomish Eells (M.) 
Skwaksin Coones (S. F.) 
Skwaksin Eells (M.) 
Snohomish Coones (S. F.) 
Snohomish Eells (M.) 
Spokan Eells (M.) 
Twana Coones (S. F.) 
Twana Fells (M.) 


Geological Survey: These words following a title 
or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 


the compiler in the library of the United States | 


Geological Survey, Washington, D.C. 
Georgetown: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Georgetown University, 
Washington, D.C. 
Gibbs (George). 
laries | of the | Clallam and Lummi. | 
By | George Gibbs. | [Vignette.] | 
New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1863. 
Half-title (Shea’s library of American lin- 
guisties, XI), verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 
11. preface pp. v—vii, text pp. 9-40, large 8°. 


Alphabetical yocabu- | 


| 
| 


25 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 

Vocabulary of the Clallam, double columns, 
alphabetically arranged by English words, pp. 
9-19.—Local nomenclature of the Clallam tribe, 
p. 20.—Vocabulary of the Lummi, double col- 
umns, alphabetically arranged by English 
words, pp. 21-36.—Local nomenclature of the 
Lummi tribe, pp. 37-39.—Names of Lummi 
chiefs, p. 40. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenzeum, Con- 
gress, Dunbar, Eames, National Museum, 
Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

Another issue with title-page as follows: 


—— Alphabetical vocabularies | of the 
| Clallayy and Lummi. | By | George 
Gibbs. | Published under the auspices 
of the Smithsonian institution. | 
New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1863. 
Title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v—vii, text 
pp. 9-40, octavo form on large quarto. 
Linguistic contents as under title next above. 
Copies seen: Georgetown, Lenox, Pilling, 
Smithsonian. 


Smithsonian miscellaneous collec- 
tions. | 160 | Instructions | for research 
relative to the | ethnology and philol- 
ogy | of | America. | Prepared for the 
Smithsonian institution. | By | George 
Gibbs. | [Seal of the institution. ] | 

Washington: | Smithsonian institu- 
tion: | March, 1863. 

Title verso blank 11. contents verso blank 11. 
introduction p.1, text pp. 2-51,8°. Also forms 
part of vol. 7, Smithsonian Institution Miscel- 
laneous Collections. Prepared for and distrib- 
uted to collectors, resulting in the securing of 
many manuscripts, mostly philologic, which 
are now in the library of the Bureau of Ethnol- 
ogy. 

Numerals 1-10 of the Selish or Flathead, 
two sets, one ‘‘relating to things,”’ the other 
‘relating to persons’”’ (both from Mengarini), 
p. 42.—Numerals 1-10 of the Nisqualli, two 
sets, one ‘‘ applied to men,”’ the other ‘‘applied 
to money,”’ p. 42. 


— Smithsonian 


Copies seen: Astor, Eames, National Mu- 
sewn, Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. . 

At the Field sale, no. 810, a copy brought 30 
ets.; at the Squier sale, no. 415, 45 cts.; at the 
Pinart sale, no. 406,1 fr. Priced by Koehler, 
catalogue 465, no. 233, 1 M.50 Pf. 

teprinted, in part, as follows: 


—— Indian Systems of Wanecalee ” 


In Historical Magazine, first series, vol. 9, pp. 
249-252, New York, 1865, sm. 4°. 
Survey.) 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
p- 250. 


(Geological 


miscellaneous collec- 
tions. | 161 | A | dictionary | of the | 
Chinook Jargon, | or | trade language 


26 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 
of Oregon. | Prepared for the Smith- 
sonian institution. | By | George Gibbs. 
| [Seal of the institution. ] | 

Washington: | Smithsonian institu- 
tion: | March, 1865. 

Title verso advertisement 1 1. contents p. iii, 
preface pp. v-xi, bibliography pp. xiii-xiv, half- 
title (Part I. Chinook-English) verso note 1 1. 
text pp. 1-29, half-title (Part II. English- 
Chinook) p. 31, text pp. 33-44, 8°. 

Analogies between the Chinook and other 
native languages includes words in the Cow- 
litz, Kwantlen, Selish, Chihalis, and Nisqually, 
p. x.—The Chinook-English and English- 
Chinook dictionary, pp. 1-43, contains 39 words 
of Salishan origin, and are so designated. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Dunbar, 
Eames, Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

““Some years ago the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion printed a small vocabulary of the Chinook 
Jargon, furnished by Dr. B. R. Mitchell, of the 
U. S. Navy, and prepared, as I afterwards 
learned, by Mr. Lionnet, a Catholic priest, for 
his own use while studying the language at 
Chinook Point. It was submitted by the 


Institution, for revision and preparation for 


the press, to the late Prof. W. W. Turner. 
Although it received the critical examination 
of that distinguished philologist and was of 
use in directing attention to the language, it 
was deficient in the number of words in use, 
contained many which did not properly belong 
to the Jargon, and did not give the sources 
from which the words were derived. 

“Mr. Hale had previously given a vocabulary 
and account of this Jargon in his ‘ Ethnography 
of the United States Exploring Expedition,’ 
which was noticed by Mr. Gallatin in the 
Transactions of the American Ethnological 
Society, vol. ii. He however fell into some 
errors in his derivation of the words, chiefly 
from ignoring the Chehalis element of the Jar- 
gon,and the number of words given by him 
amounted only to about two hundred and fifty. 

“A copy of Mr. Lionnet’s vocabulary having 
been sent to me with a request to make such 
corrections as itmight require, I concluded not 
merely to collate the words contained in this 
and other printed and manuscript vocabularies, 
but to ascertain, so far as possible, the lan- 
guages which had contributed to it, with the 
original Indian words. This had become the 
more important as its extended use by differ- 
ent tribes had led to ethnological errors in the 
classing together of essentially distinct fami- 
lies.’’——Preface. 

Issued also with title-page as follows: 

— A | dictionary | of the | Chinook 
Jargon, | or, | trade language of 
Oregon. | By George Gibbs. | 

New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1863. 

Half-title (Shea’s Library of American Lin- 
guistics. XII) verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 


11. preface pp. v-xi, bibliography of the Chinook 
Jargon pp. xiii-xiv, half-title of part I verso 
note 1 1. Chinook-English dictionary pp. 1-29, 
half-title of part II verso blank 1 1. English- 
Chinook dictionary pp. 33-43, the Lord’s prayer 
in Jargon p. [44], 8°. 

Salishan contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenzeum, 
Congress, Dunbar, Eames, Harvard, Lenox, 
Smithsonian, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

Some copies (twenty-five, I believe) were 
issued in large quarto form with no change of 
title-page. (Pilling, Smithsonian.) 

See Hale (H.) 

[Terms of relationship used by the 
Spokane (Sinhu ‘‘ people wearing red 
paint on their cheeks”’) collected at 
Steilacoom, Washington Ty., Novem- 
ber, 1860. ] 

In Morgan (L. H.), Systems of consanguinity 


and affinity of the human family, lines 69, pp. 
293-382, Washington, 1871, 4°. 


[——] Comparative vocabularies. Family 

xx. Selish (Eastern Branches). 

[Washington, D. C.: Smithsonian 
Institution.] January, 1873. 

No title-page, headings only; text ll. 1-3, 
printed on one side only, 4°. Proof sheets of 
an unfinished and unpublished volume. 

In four columns, containing in the first col- 
umn 180 numbered English words, with equiy- 
alents in the other columns of: 1. Shiwapmukh 
(by George Gibbs), 2. Shooswaap (by Dr. Wm. 
F. Tolmie), and 3. Nikutemukh (by George 
Gibbs). 

At the time of his death, April 9, 1873, Mr. 
Gibbs ‘‘was engaged in superintending the 
printing for the Smithsonian Institution of a 
quarto volume of American Indian yocabu- 
laries, and had fortunately arranged and care- 
fully criticised many hundred series before his 
death. ‘This publication will continue under 
the direction of Prof. W. D. Whitney, J. H. 
Trumbull, LU.D., and Prof. Roehrig.—Smith- 
sonian Annual Report for 1873, p. 224. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

These vocabularies, with others, appear in 
the following: 

Department of the interior. U.S. 
geographical and geological survey of 
the Rocky mountain region. J. W. 
Powell, Geologist in Charge. Part II. 
Tribes of western Washington and 
northwestern Oregon. By George 
Gibbs, M.D. 

In Powell (J. W.), Contributions to North 
American Ethnology, vol. 1, pp. 157-241, Appen- 
dix, Linguistics, pp. 243-361, Washington, 1877, 
4°. 

Geographical distribution (pp. 163-170) in- 
cludes the habitat of the tribal divisions of 


__ 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 

the Selish, pp. 166-170.—Notices of particular 
tribes, pp. 170-181, includes the _ Selish 
divisions. — Comparative vocabulary of the 
Shihwapmukh (from a woman of the tribe), 
Nikutemukh (from a man of the tribe), 
Okindkén, Shwoyelpi, Spokan (from a chief of 
the tribe), and Piskwaus or Winatsha, pp. 252-- 
265.—Comparative vocabulary of the Kilispelm 
(from a man of the tribe), Belhoola (from a 
woman of the tribe), Lilowat (from a chief of 
the village), Tait (from a woman), Komookhs 
(from aman), and Kuwalitsk, pp. 270-283.— 
Dictionary of the Niskwalli, I. Niskwalli- 
English (double columns, alphabetically 
arranged), pp. 28*-307; II. English-Niskwalli 
(alphabetically arranged, with many etymolo- 
gies and derivatives), pp. 309-361. 


— Account of Indian tribes upon the | 


northwest coast of America. 


Manuscript, 10 leaves folio, in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethnology. 
Contains words in a number of Salishan lan- 
guages, passim. 
— Comparison of the languages of the 
Indians of the nerth-west. 


Manuscript, 23 leaves, 4°. and folio (odds and | 


ends), in the library of the Bureau of Ethnol- 
ogy. 

Contains words and grammatic notes in a 
number of Salishan languages. 


Local Indian names, partly Selish. 


Manuscript,4 unnumbered leaves folio; in 
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 

Contains the names of about 120 geographic 
points on the northwest coast. Nearly all are 
Salishan, and 30 of them are in the Lummi 
language. 


Miscellaneous notes on the Eskimo, 
Kinai and Atnah languages. 


Manuscript, 25 leaves, 4° and folio (odds and 
ends); in the library of the Bureau of Ethnol- 
ogy. 

Notes on the language of the Selish 
tribes. 

Manuscript, 10 leaves, folio; in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethhology. 

Fragmentary matter, evidently jotted down 
from time to time as memoranda. 


Vocabularies. Washington Terr’y. 

Manuscript, 141 unnumbered leaves, most of 
which are written on both sides, and some few 
of which are blank, 12°; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Most of the vocabu- 
laries were copied on separate forms by Mr. 
Gibbs. Those belonging to the Salishan family 
are as follows: Lilowat, 8 pages; Saamena, 12 
pages; Taieet, 8 pages; Chilohweck, 3 pages; 
Bilhoola, 9 pages; Okinaken, 6 pages; Simil- 
kameen, 13 pages; Piskwouse, 13 pages; Spo- 
kane, 22 pages; Kalispelm, 12 pages; Shooswap, 
4 pages; Nooksahk, 1 page; Niskwally, 4 pages. 


27 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 
— Vocabulary of the Clallam. 
Manuscript,3 unnumbered leaves folio; in 
the library of the Burean of Ethnology. Col- 
lected at Port Townsend, in 1858. 
Recorded on a blank form of 180 words, 
equivalents of all of which are given. 


[Vocabulary of the Kwantlen lan- 


guage; Fraser River, around Fort 
Langley. ] 
Manuscript, 5 unnumbered leaves folio, 


written on one side only; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded July, 1858. 
Contains about 200 words. 


Vocabulary of the Kwillehyute, and 
of the Cowlitz. 


Manuscript, 10 unnumbered leaves, 4°; in the 
library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded 
on a blank form prepared and issued by H. R. 
Schoolcraft. 

Each vocabulary contains about 200 words. 


— Vocabulary of the Lummi. 


Manuscript, 3 unnumbered leaves, folio; in 
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Col- 
lected at Bellingham Bay, Jan., 1854. Recorded 
ona blank form of 180 words, equivalents of all 
of which are given. 


— Vocabulary of the Nooksahk. 
Manuscript, 3 unnumbered leaves folio; in 
the library of the Bureau of Ethnology 
Recorded on a blank form of 180 words, equiv- 
alents of all of which are given. 


Vocabulary of the Noosolup’h, and 
of the Kwinaiutl. 

Manuscript, pp. 1-25, 4°; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

Recorded on a form containing 350 English 
words and the numerals 1-1,000,000,000, pre- 
pared and issued by H. R. Schoolcraft. About 
one-half the English words have their equiva- 
lents in the two languages above mentioned. 


— Vocabulary of the Toanhooch of 
Port Gamble. 


Manuscript, 3 unnumbered leaves folio, 
written on one side only; in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. Recorded on a blank 
form of 180 words, equivalents of all of which 
are given. 

“This was obtained first, I think. at Port 
Gamble, in 1854, and afterwards corrected at 
Olympia, with the assistance of ‘Jim,’ a sub- 
chief.” 

George Gibbs, the son of Col. George Gibbs, 
was born on the17th of July, 1815, at Sunswick, 
Long Island, near the village of Halletts Cove, 
now known as Astoria. At seventeen he was 
taken to Europe, where he remained two years. 
On his return from Europe he commenced the 
reading of law, and in 1838 took his degree of 
bachelor of law at Harvard University. In 1848 
Mr. Gibbs went overland from St. Louis to 
Oregon and established himself at Columbia. 


28 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 


In 1854 he received the appointment of collector 
of the port of Astoria, which he held during 
Mr. Fillmore’s administration. Later he re- 
moved from Oregon to Washington Territory, 
and settled upon a ranch a few miles from Fort 
Steilacoom. Here he had his headquarters for 


several years, devoting himself to the study of | 


the Indian languages and to the collection of 
vocabularies and traditions of the northwest- 
ern tribes. During a great part of the time 
he was attached to the United States Govern- 
ment Commission to determine the boundary, 
as the geologist and botanist of the expedition. 


He was also attached as geologist to the survey | 


of arailroad route to the Pacific, under Major 
Stevens. In 1857 he was appointed to the 
northwest boundary survey under Mr. Archi- 
bald Campbell, as commissioner. In 1860 Mr. 
Gibbs returned to New York, and in 1861 was 
on duty in Washington guarding the Capital. 
Later he resided in Washington, being mainly 


employed in the Hudson Bay Claims Commis- | 


sion, to which he was secretary. He was also 
engaged in the arrangement of a large mass of 


manuscript bearing upon the ethnology and | 
philology of the American Indians. His services | 


were availed of by the Smithsonian Institution 
to superintend its labors in this field, and to his 
energy and complete knowledge of the subject 
it greatly owes its success in this branch of the 
service. The valuable and laborious service 
which he rendered to the Institution was 
entirely gratuitous, and in his death that estab- 
lishment as well as the cause of science lost an 
ardent friend and an important contributor to 
its advancement. In 1871 Mr. Gibbs married 
his cousin, Miss Mary K. Gibbs, of Newport, 
R.I., and removed to New Haven, where he 
died on the 9th of April, 1873. 


[Giorda (Rev. Joseph).] <A | dictionary 


L 


| of the | Kalispel or Flat-head Indian 
Language, | compiled by the | mission- 
aries of the Society of Jesus | Part I | 
Kalispel-English. | 
St.Ignatius Print, Montana.) 1877-8-9. 
Title verso copyright notice (by Rev. J. 


Giorda, 1879) 11. preface (unsigned) verso blank 
11. text pp. 1-644, 8°. 


The author owes much to the manuscript | 


dictionary of Rey. G. Mengarini, who, first of 
all the Jesuit missionaries, possessed himself 
of the genius of this language, and, besides 
speaking it with the perfection of a native 
Indian, reduced it also to the rules of gram- 
mar.—Preface. 

Copies seen: Congress, Dunbar, Eames, 
Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

Appended is the following: 


] Appendix | to the | Kalispel- 
English Dictionary.-| Compiled by the 
| missionaries of the Society of Jesus | 
St. Ignatius Print, Montana, | 1879 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Giorda (J.) — Continued. 

Title verso blank 1 1. preface (unsigned) 11. 
text pp. 1-36, 8°. 

The verb to be with substantives, pp. 1-2; 
with double possessive personal pronouns, p. ~ 
3; with an adjective, p.5.—Verb transitive to 
be mad, pp. 6-9.—Verb transitive indefinite to 
work, pp. 10-14.—Verb transitive to work, p. 
18.—Verb transitive to catch, p.19.—Conjuga- 
tion of the first verb relative to look, pp. 20-23; 
of the second verb relative to pray, pp. 23-25; 
of the third verb relative to bring, pp. 26, 28; to 
guard, pp. 27, 29.—Verb impersonal, pp. 30-31.— 
Verb passive, pp. 32-34. — Reduplication of 
letters in the verb, pp. 34-35.—List of several 
terminations of verbs, p. 36. 

Copies seen: Congress, Dunbar, Eames, 
Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. 


] A | dictionary | of the | Kalispel 
or Flat-head Indian Language, | com- 
piled by the | missionaries of the 
Society of Jesus | Part II. | English- 
Kalispel. | 

St. Ignatius Print, Montana.| 1877-8-9. 


Title verso copyright notice (by Rev. J. 
siorda, 1879) 1 1. preface (unsigned) verso blank 
1 1. key to the pronounciation of the Indian 
alphabet used in this dictionary 1 page, key to 
both parts of the dictionary 2 pages, verso of the 
last one blank, text pp. 1-456, 8°. 

Copies seen: -Congress, Dunbar, Eames, 
Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. 


[ 


[ 


] Lu | tel kaimintis kolinzuten | 
kuitlt smiimii. | Some Narratives, From 
the Holy Bible, in Kalispel. | Compiled 
by the | missionaries of the Society of 
Jesus. | 

St. Ignatius Print, Montana. | 1879. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
“Part I’ 11. copyright notice (1879, by Rey. J. 
M. Cataldo) verso ‘‘ preface of the publishers” 
1 1. text pp. 1-36, half-title ‘‘ Part II” verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 39-140, contents part first (in 
English) pp. 1-2, contents of part second (in 
English) pp.3-7, index of the gospels of the 
Sundays pp. 8-9, errata pp. 10-14, 8°. 

Copies seen: Congress, Dunbar, Eames, 
Pilling, Wellesley. 


[——] Szmiméie-s Jesus Christ. | + | A 
catechism | of the | Christian doctrine 
| in the | Flat-Head or Kalispél Lan- 
guage | composed by the | missionaries 
of the Society of Jesus. | 

St. Ignatius print, Montana. | 1880 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
copyright notice (1880, by Rev. J. Bandini) 1 1. 
half-title ‘Part I” recto blank 1 1. text pp. 1- 
17, half-title ‘‘ Part II,” p. 18, text pp. 19-45, 8°. 

Catechism, pp. 1-33.—Hymns, pp 35-45. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling, Trum- 
bull, Wellesley. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 29 


Giorda (J.) — Continued. 


These works were put in type and printed 
by the Indian school boys at St. [gnatius. 

In reply to a communication asking the 
authorship of the works titled above, Father 
Leopold Van Gorp, one of the superintendents 
of the Roman Catholic missions in the north- 
west, wrote me under date of Jan. 4, 1887, as 
follows: ‘‘ Father Giorda may very properly be 


considered the author of all the works which | 


we have printed in the Kalispel or Flathead 
language. About 225 copies of each were 
printed.” 


“The Saint Ignatius mission maintains two 
schools for Indian boys and girls, at the Flat- 
head Agency, on the Jocko reservation in Mon- 
tana. From a population of about 2,000 Indians 
are collected enough pupils to make anaverage 
attendance of 150, who are taught industrial 
pursuits as well as letters. The agent reports 
that the art of printing is also taught in a neat 


- little printing office, where dictionaries of the 


Kalispel language, the gospels, and innumer- 
able pamphlets and circulars have been neatly 
printed.’’— Bible Soc. Record, Nov. 17, 1887. 
Rey. Father Joseph Giorda, 8. J.,who died of 
heart disease at Desmet Mission, among the 
Ceeur d’Aléne Indians, about the beginning of 
August, 1882, was a native of Piedmont; born 
March 19, 1823. He joined the Jesuit order 
when twenty-two years old, and for some time 
filled the chair of divinity and held other 
important offices in the colleges of the society 
in Europe. In 1858 Father Giorda arrived in 
St. Louis, and soon after started for the wilds 
of the northwest as superior general of the 


| 


Rocky Mountain missions, which office he held | 


until increasing infirmities, due to arduous 


labors and constant exposure, obliged those in | 


authority to relieve him of it. While superior 
he established many new missions among the 


whites and Indians throughout Montana and | 


the adjoining Territories. He had a wonderful 
aptitude for languages, and, besides speaking 
fluently the principal continental languages, 
mastered, during his manifold duties, the 
Blackfoot, Nez Percé, Flathead, Yakama, Koot- 
enay, and Gros Ventre dialects, and preached 
to the different tribes in all these languages. 
For several years he was pastor of the Church 
of the Sacred Heart at St. Ignatius, Montana.— 
Van Gorp. 


God save the Queen [Netlakapamuk]. 


See Good (J. B.) 


[Good (Kev. John Booth).] The Morning 


and Evening Prayer, | And the Litany, 
| With Prayers and Thanksgivings, | 
translated into the | Neklakapamuk | 
Tongue, | for the use of the Indians of 


the | St. Paul’s mission, | Lytton, Brit- | 


ish Columbia. | 
Victoria, B.C. | Printed by the St. 
Paul’s mission press. | 1878. 


Good (J. B.) — Continued. 


Oover title: The Morning and Evening 
Prayer, | And the Litany, | Also Prayers and 
Thanksgivings, | with | Office for the Holy 
Communion, and | Select Hymns. | Translated 
into the | Neklakapamuk Tongue | for the use 
of the Indians of the | St. Paul’s mission, | 
Lytton, British Columbia. | 

Victoria, B. C.| Printed by the St. Paul’s 
mission press. | 1878. 

Cover title, title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-48, 
12°, 

Morning and evening prayer, pp. 3-33.—Ad- 
ministration of the Lord's supper, pp. 34-48. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Wellesley. 

The latter portion of this work was issued 
separately, with title-page as follows: 


] The Office for the Holy Com- 
munion | translated into the | Nekla- 
kapamuk | tongue, | for the use of the 
Indians of the | St. Paul’s mission, | 
Lytton, British Columbia. | 

Victoria, B. C. | Printed by the St. 
Paul’s mission press. | 1878. 

Cover title: The | Office for the Holy Com- 
munion, and | Select Hymns. | Translated into 
the Neklakapamuk Tongue, | for the use of the 
Indians of the | St. Paul’s mission, | Lytton, 
British Columbia. | 

Victoria, B. C.| Printed by the St. Paul’s 
mission press. | 1878. 

Cover title, title p. [33] verso beginning of 
text which occupies pp. 34-48, 12°. 

Lord’s prayer, Prayer for duty, p.34.—Ten 
commandments, pp. 35-36.— Prayer for the 
Queen, pp. 36-37.— The creed, pp. 37-38.—The 
offertory sentences, p. 38.—Prayer for the 
church iilitant, pp. 38-40.—Exhortation, p. 
41.—The confession, pp. 41-42.—The absolution, 
the invitation, pp. 42-43.—Sursum corda, p. 
43.—Preface to the sanctus, p.43.—Prayer of 
humble access, pp. 43-44.—Prayer for conserva- 
tion, p. 44.—The communion, the Lord’s prayer, 
p.45.—The thanksgiving, pp. 46-47.—The bless- 
ing, p.47.—Hymns and doxology, pp.47-48.— 
Office for the reception of catechumens, p. 48. 

Copies seen: Wellesley. 


| [-—] The | Office for Public Baptism | 


And the Order of Confirmation, | with 
| select hymns and prayers | translated 
intothe | Neklakapamuk | or | Thomp- 
son tongue | for the use of the Indians 
of the | St. Paul’s mission, | Lytton, 
3ritish Columbia. | (By aid of the 
Venerable society for promoting chris- 
tian | knowledge.) | 

Victoria, B. C., | printed by the S. 
Paul’s mission press (S. P. C. K.) | Col- 
legiate school. | 1879. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
beginning of text, which occupies pp. 2-32, 8°. 

The ministration of public baptism of 


30 


Good (J. B.) — Continued. 

infants, pp. 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 14, 16,18 (p. 8 blank) .- 
The ministration of baptism to such as are of 
riper years and able to answer for themselves, 
pp. 3, 5,7, 9, 11, 17, 19 (pp. 13 and 15 blank).— 
Select hymns for the office, p. 20.—The order of 
confirmation, pp. 21-24.— Select hymns, psalms, 
and prayers, pp. 25-32. 

Copies seen : Dunbar, Eames, Pilling, Welles- 
ley. 

Offices for the | solemnizat[iJon of 
matrimony | the visitation of the sick, 
|and| The Burial of the Dead. | 
Translated into the | Nitlakapamuk | 
or | Thompson Indian Tongue. | By J. 
B. Good, 8. P. G. missionary, Yale-Lyt- 
ton. | By aid of a Grant from the Ven. 
Society for Promoting | Christian 

Knowledge. | 

Victoria, B. C. | Printed by the St. 
Paul’s Mission Press, (8. P. C. K.) | Col- 
legiate School, 1880. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 11. text with headings in English pp. 3- 
15, 8°. 

The form of solemnization of matrimony, pp. 
3-6.—Order for the visitation of the sick, pp. 
7-9.—The order for the burial of the dead, pp. 
10-14.—Collects, p. 15. 

Copies scen: Bancroft, Eames, Pilling, 
Wellesley. 

A vocabulary | and | outlines of 
grammar | of the | Nitlakapamuk | or 
| Thompson tongue, | (The Indian lan- 
guage spoken between Yale, Lillooet, 
| Cache Creek and Nicola Lake.) | 
Together with a| Phonetic Chinook 
Dictionary, | Adapted for use in the 
Province of | British Columbia. | By J. 
B.Good, S. P. G. missionary, Yale- 
Lytton. | By aid of a Grant from the 
Right Hon. Superintendent of Indian 
| Affairs, Ottawa. | 

Victoria: | Printed by the St. Paul’s 
Mission Press, (S. P. C. K.) | Collegiate 
School, 1880. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 11. preface pp. 5-6, text pp. 8-46, 8°. 

Chinook Dictionary. English-Chinook, pp. 
8-30 (even-numbered pages). — Thompson vo- 
eabulary, English-Nitlakapamuk, pp. 9-31 
(odd numbered pages).—Chinook numerals, p. 
30.—Nitlakapamuk numerals, etc., p. 31.—Con- 
versations, English-Chinook, pp. 32,34; Eng- 
lish-Nitlakapamuk, pp. 33, 35.—Lord’s prayer in 
Jargon, p. 34; in Thompson, p. 35.—Outlines 
of [the Nitlakapamuk] grammar, (pp. 37-46) | 


| 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Good (J. B.) —Continued. 
includes a story in five parts with interlinear 
English translation, furnished by Dr. Ellis, of 
Yale, pp. 38-40. F 
Copies seen: Bancroft, Dunbar, Eames, Mal- 
let, Pilling, Wellesley. 


[——] God save the Queen. 

A seven-line verse in the Netlakapamuk or 
Thompson Indian tongue, with heading in 
English as above, on one side of a small slip, 
which looks as though it were struck off as a 
proof-sheet. 

Copies seen: Wellesley. 

See Bancroft (H. H.) 


Grammar: 
Salish See Mengarini (G.) 
Twana Kells (M.) 

Grammatic treatise: 
Bilkula See Boas (F.) 
Chehalis Eells (M.) 
Chehalis Gallatin (A.) 
Chehalis Hale (H.) 
Kalispel (dorda (J.) 
Klallam Bulmer (T.S.) 
Klallam Eells (M.) 
Komuk Boas (F.) 
Netlakapamuk Bancroft (H. H.) 
Netlakapamuk Good (J. B.) 
Niskwalli ; Bulmer (T.S8.) 
Niskwalli Fells (M.) 
Okinagan Boas (F.) 
Puyallup McCaw (S. R.) 
Salish Bancroft (H. H.) 
Salish Gallatin (A.) 
Salish Hale (H.) 
Salish Petitot (E. F. S.J.) 
Salish Shea (J. G.) 
Shuswap Boas (F.) 
Shuswap Gallatin (A.) 
Shuswap Hale (H.) 
Skwaksin Eells (M.) 
Snanaimuk Boas (F.) 
Snohomish Eells (M.) 
Spokan Eells (M.) 
Stailakum Boas (F.) 
Tilamuk Gallatin (A.) 
Tilamuk Hale (H.) 
Twana Bulmer (T.S.) 
Twana Eells (M.) 


Grant (Walter Colquhoun). Description 
of Vancouver Island. By its first Colo- 
nist, W. Colquhoun Grant, Esq., F. R. 
G.S8., of the 2nd Dragoon Guards, and 
late Lieut.-Col. of the Cavalry of the 
Turkish Contingent. 

In Royal Geog. Soc. Jour. vol. 27, pp. 268-320, 
London [1858], 8°. (Geological Survey.) 

Brief discussion of the language of Van- 
couver Island, and numerals 1-10,100, of the 
Tsclal]ums, p. 295, 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 31 


He 


Haines (Elijah Middlebrook). The| | Hale (H.)— Continued. 


American Indian | (Uh-nish-in-na-ba). 

| The Whole Subject Complete in One 
Volume | Illustrated with Numerous 
Appropriate Engravings. | By Elijah 
M. Haines. | [Design.] | 

Chicago: | the Mas-sin-na-gan com- 
pany, | 1888. 

Title verso copyright notice (1888) ete. 1 1. 
preface pp. vii-viii, contents and list of illus- 
trations pp. 9-22, text pp. 23-821, large 8°. 

Chapter vi, Indian tribes ](pp. 121-171), gives 
special lists and a general alphabetic list of the 
tribes of North America, which includes the 
tribes of the Pacific coast, pp. 129-131; Wash- 
ington territory west of the Cascade Moun- 
tains, pp. 132-133 ; Washington territory around 
Puget Sound, p. 133. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. 
Hale (Horatio). United States | explor- 
ing expedition. | During the years | 
1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the 
command of | Charles Wilkes, U.S.N. 

| Vol. VI. | Ethnography and philol- 
ogy. | By | Horatio Hale, | philologist 
of the expedition. | 

Philadelphia: | printed by C. Sher- 
man. | 1846. 

Half-title (United States exploring expedi- 
tion, by authority of Congress) verso blank 11. | 
title verso blank 11. contents pp. v—vii, alphabet 
pp. ix-xii, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3- 
666, map, 4°. 

General remarks on the Tsihaili-Selish fam- 
ily (E. Shushwapumsh, or Shushwaps, or 
Atnahs; F. Selish, Salish, or Flatheads; G. 
Skitsuish, or Coeur d’Aléne Indians; H. Pisk- 
waus or Piscous; I. Skwale or Nisqually; J. | 
Tsihailish or Chikailish; K. Kawelitsk or 
Cowelits; L. Nsietshawus or Killamuks, pp. 
205-212, containing some scattered words in t he 
several dialects, and on p. 211 the names of the | 
twelve months in Piskwaus and in Selish. 

Tsihaili-Selish family (EZ. Cugwapume; F. 
Séli¢ [c. Kilespelm; d. Tsukaetsitlin; e. Syo- 
aiatxlpi] ; G. Skitsuic; H. Piskwaus; I. Skwiale ; 
J. Tsxailic [f. Tsxailic; g. Kwaiantyl; h. Kwe- 
naiwitxl]; K. Kawelitsk; L. Nsietgawis), pp. 
535-542, comprising a comparative grammar of | 
the Shushwap, Selish, Tsihailish, and Nsiet- 
shawus, with especial reference to the Selish. 

Vocabularies of Tsihaili-Selish; northern 
branch: E. Shushwapumsh (Shushwaps, 
Atnahs), F.Selish (Flatheads) [c. Kullespelm | 
(Ponderays), d. Tsakaitsitlin (Spokan Inds.), 
e. Soaiatlpi (Kettle-falls, &c.)], G. Skitsuish 
(Ceeur d’Anéne), H. Piskwaus (Piscous); mid- 
dle branch: I. Skwale (Nasqually); western | 
branch: J. Tsihailish (Chickailis, Chilts) [f. 


Tsihailish, g. Kwaiantl, 2. Kwenaiwitl, k. 


Kawelitsk (Cowelits)]; southern branch: L. 
Nsietshawus (Killamuks), pp. 569-629, contain- 
ing on an average about three words of each 
dialect on a page, in the lines designated by the 
above-named letters. 

‘All these vocabularies (with the exception 
of the Skwale, which was received from an 
interpreter) were obtained from natives of the 
respective tribes, generally under favourable 
circumstances. For the Selish, Skitsuish, and 
Piskwaus, we are indebted to the kindness of 
Messrs. Walker and Eels, missionaries of the 
American Board at Tshamakain, near the Spo- 
kan River. It was through the interpretation 
of these gentlemen, and the explanations which 
their knowledge of the Selish enabled them 
to give, that the words of all three languages, 
and the numerous sentences in the Selish, 
illustrative of the grammatical peculiarities of 
that tongue, were correctly written. 

‘The languages of this family are all harsh, 
guttural, and indistinct. It is to the latter 
quality that many of the variations in the vocab- 
ularies are owing. In other cases, these pro- 
ceed from dialectical differences, almost every 
clan or sept in a tribe having some peculiarity 
of pronunciation. In the Selish, three dialects 
have been noted,and more might have been 
given, had it not been considered superfluous. 
These three are first, the Kullespelm, spoken 
by a tribe who live upon a river and about a 
lake known by that name. They are called by 
the Canadians Pend-Oreilles, which has been 
corrupted to Ponderays; secondly, that of the 
proper Selish, or Flatheads, as they are called, 
and of the Spokan Indians; and that of the 
Soaiatlpi, Okinakain, and other tribes upon the 
Columbia. 

“Of the Tsihailish, also, three dialects are 
given, which differ considerably from one 
another. The Quaiautl reside upon a river of 
the same name, north of the Tsihailish (or 
Chikailish) proper, and the Kwenaiwitl, in 
like manner, are north of the Kwaiantl, not far 
from the entrance to the Straits of Fuca.” 

Copies scen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Lenox, Trumbull. 

At the Squier sale, no. 446, a copy brought 
$13; at the Murphy sale, no. 1123, half maroon 
morocco, top edge gilt, $13. 

Issued also with the following title-page: 


United States | exploring expedi- 
tion. | During the years | 1838, 1839, 
1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the command 
of Charles Wilkes, U. S. N. | Ethnog- 
raphy and philology. | By | Horatio 
Hale, | philologist of the expedition. | 

Philadelphia: | Lea and Blanchard, 
| 1846, 


Se BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Hale (H.)— Continued. 

Half-title (United States exploring expedi- 
tion) verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. con- 
tents pp. v-vii, alphabet pp. ix—xii, half-title 
verso blank 11. text pp. 3-666, map, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under titlenext above. 

Copies seen: Eames, Lenox. 

— Was America peopled from Poly- 
nesia? 

In ongrés Int. des Américanistes, Compte- 
rendu, 7th session, pp. 375-387, Berlin, 1890, 8°. 
(Eames, Pilling.) 

Table of the pronouns J, thou, we (inc.), we 


(exc.), ye, and they inthe languages of Polynesia | 


and of western America, pp. 386-387, includes 
the Selish. 
Issued separately with title-page as follows: 
— Was America peopled from Polyne- 
sia? | A study in comparative Philol- 
ogy. | By | Horatio Hale. | From the 
Proceedings of the International Con- 
gress of Americanists | at Berlin, in 
October 1888. | 
Berlin 1890. | Printed by H.S. Her- 
mann. 
Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-15, 8°. 
Pronouns in the languages of Polynesia and 
of western America, including the Selish, p. 14. 
Copies seen: Pilling, Wellesley. 
—— An international idiom. | A manual 
of the | Oregon trade language, | or | 
“Chinook Jargon.” | By Horatio Hale, 


M.A., F. R. S.C., | member [&c. six | 


lines. | | 


London: | Whittaker & co., White | 


Hart Street, | Paternostersquare. 1890. 
Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names 
of printers 1 1. prefatory note verso extract 
from a work by Quatrefages 11. contents verso 
blank 11. text pp. 1-63, 16°. 
Trade language and English dictionary, pp. 
39-52; and the English and trade language, pp. 


53-63, each contain a number of words of 
Salishan origin; in the first portion these words | 


are marked with the letter S. 


“This dictionary, it should be stated, is,in | 
the main, a copy (with some additions and cor- | 


rections) of that of George Gibbs [q.v.], pub- 
lished by the Smithsonian Institution in 1863, 
and now regarded as the standard authority, so 
far as any can be said to exist; butit may be 
added that the principal part of that collection 
was avowedly derived by the estimable com- 


piler from my own vocabulary, published seven- | 


teen years before.’’—Note, p. 39. 
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


For critical reviews of this work, see Cha- | 


rencey (H. de), Crane (A.), Leland (C. G.), 
Reade (J.), and Western. 
See Gallatin (A.) 
Horatio Hale, ethnologist, born in Newport, 
N. H., May 3, 1817, was graduated at Harvard in 


Hale (H.) — Continued. 


1837 and was appointed in the same year philolo- 
gist to the United States expioring expedition 
under Capt. Charles Wilkes. In this capacity 
he studied a large number of the languages of 
the Pacific islands, as well as of North and 


South America, Australia, and Africa, and also © 


investigated the history, traditions, and cus- 
toms of the tribes speaking those languages. 
The results of his inquiries are given in his 
Ethnography and Philology (Philadelphia, 
1846), which forms the seventh volume of the 
expedition reports. He has published numerous 
memoirs on anthropology and ethnology, is a 
member of many learned societies, both in 
Europe and in America, and in 1886 was vice- 
president of the American Association for the 
Advancement of Science, presiding over the 
section of anthropology.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of 
Am. Biog. 


Harvard: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Harvard University, 
Cambridge, Mass. 


[Hayden (Ferdinand Vandever)], in 


charge. Department of the interior. | 
Bulletin | of | the United States-| Geo- 
logical and geographical survey | of | 
the territories. | No. 1[-Vol. VI]. | 

Washington: | Government printing 
office. | 1874[-1881]. 

5 vols. and two numbers of vol. 6,8°. It was 
not the intention, when these bulletins were 
started, to collect them into volumes; conse- 
quently the first volume is irregularly paged 
and titled. 

Eells (M.), The Twana Indians, vol. 3, pp. 57- 
114. 

Copies seen: Geological Survey. 


Henry (Alexander). Journal | of | Alex- 


ander Henry | to | Lake Superior, Red 

River,| Assiniboine, Rocky Mountains, | 

Columbia, and the Pacific, | 1799 to 1811, 
| to establish the fur trade. CG 

Manuscript, about 1,700 pp. foolseap, pre- 
served in the library of Parliament, Ottawa, 
Canada. For its description I am indebted to 
the kindness of Mr. Charles N. Bell, of Winni- 
peg, who writes: ‘‘ The sheets are evidently not 
the original ones used by Alexander Henry, but 
are rewritten from his journals by one George 
Coventry, who seems to have been a family 
friend. No date is given to the copying, nor is 
there any intimation where the original docu- 
ments are to be found.” 

The journal extends from 1799 to 1812, and 
between the dates 1808 and 1809 are vocabularies 
of the Ojeebois, Knistineaux, Assiniboine, Slave, 
and Flat Head, about 300 words each of the first 
three and a somewhat larger number of the last 
two. Copies of these have been furnished the 
Bureau of Ethnology by Mr. Bell, the Flathead 
occupying 8 pages, folio. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. oa 


Hoffman (Dr. Walter James). Selish 


——s 


myths. By W. J. Hoffman, M. D. 

In Essex Inst. Bull., vol. 15, pp. 23-40, Salem, 
1884,8°. (Geological Survey.) 

A myth in the Selish language, with inter- 
linear English translation, pp. 24-25.—Notes on 
some of the Selish words, p. 40. 


Bird names of the Selish, Pah Uta, 
and Shoshoni Indians. By W.J. Hoff- 
man, M.D. 


In the Auk, a quarterly journal of ornithol- 
ogy, vol. 2, pp. 7-10, Boston, 1885, 8°. (Geological 
Survey.) 

A list of 49 bird names; Selish equivalents 
of 34 are given. 

Issued separately, with half-title as follows: 


—— (From the Auk, vol. II, No. 1, Janu- 


ary, 1885). | Bird names of the Selish, 
Pah Uta and | Shoshoni Indians. | By 
W.J. Hoffman, M. D. 

[Boston : 1885. ] 


Half-title on cover, no inside title; text pp. 
7-10, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


— Vocabulary of the Selish Language. 


By W.J. Hoffman, M.D., Washington, 
D.C. (Read before the American Phil- 
osophical Society, March 19, 1886.) 

In American Philosoph. Soc. Proc. vol. 23, 
pp. 361-371, Philadelphia, 1886, 8°. (Geological 
Survey.) 

Vocabulary (300 words), pp. 361-369.—Phrases 
(22), p. 369.—Numerals 1-1000, pp. 369-370.— 
Myth with interlinear English translation, p. 
370—List of tribes known to be Selish, p. 371. 

Walter J. Hoffman was born in Weidas- 

ille, Pa., May 30,1846; studied medicine with 
his father (the late Dr. Wm. F. Hoffman, of 
Reading, Pa.), and graduated from Jefferson 
Medical College, Philadelphia, Pa., March 10, 
1866. Practiced his profession in Reading, Pa., 
until the summer of 1870, when, at the outbreak 
of the Franco-Prussian war, he received a com- 
mission of surgeon in the Prussian army and 
was assigned to the Seventh Army Corps, 
located near Metz. For ‘‘distinguished services 
rendered’? he was decorated by the Emperor 
William I, and after his return to America he 
was appointed, in 1871, acting assistant sur- 
geon, U.S. A.,and naturalist to the expedition 
for the exploration of Nevada and Arizona, 
Lieutenant (now Major) Wheeler, U.S. Engineer 
Corps, commanding. Dr. Hoffman was ordered, 
in August, 1872, to the military post at Grand 
River Agency (now North) Dakota, where he 
served as post surgeon and _ prosecuted 
researches in the language and mythology of 
the Dakota Indians. In thespring of 1873, Dr. 
Hoffman was detailed toaccompany the Seventh 
U.S. Cavalry. General Custer commanding, and 
was later transferred to the T'wenty-second 
Infantry, the regiment of which General Stan- 


SAL 3 


Hoffman (W. J.) — Continued. 

ley was then colonel. Returning to Reading, 
Pa., Dr. Hoffman resumed the practice of med- 
icine in November, 1873, and continued until 
the autumn of 1877,when he was placed by 
Professor Hayden, then director of the U.S. 
Geological Survey, incharge of the ethnological 
and mineralogical material. In this capacity 
he continued nntil the organization of the 
Bureau of Ethnology in 1879, when he was 
appointed assistant ethnologist, which oftice he 
fills at this date. 

Dr. Hoffman has made special investigation 
with the organization (existing among all 
tribes of Indians, insome form or other) usually 
denominated the Grand Medicine Society, and 
for this purpose, as well as for the collection of 
anthropomorphic and other ethnologic data, 
has visited most of the aboriginal tribes of the 
United States and the northwest coast of 
America. In 1881 he visited the Mandans, 
Hidatsa, and Arikara, to study the sign lan- 
guage, pictographs, and secret society of the 
Arikara. In 1882 he made a trip to the Cali- 
fornia and Nevada tribes and all known loeal- 
ities abounding in pictographs, gathered vocab- 
ularies of Smtiwitsh (Santa Barbara), Kawi‘ah 
(at Tulle River), ete. In 1883 he visited Ottawa, 
near Mackinaw, Mich., and Mdewakantawan, 
at Mendota, Minn., studying pictographs and 
linguistics, ete. In 1884 he studied the tribes 
of Vancouver's Island, B. C., Washington, 
Oregon, California, and Nevada, especially their 
pictography, sign language, and tattooing. In 
1886 he visited petroglyphs in West Virginia, 
Virginia, North Carolina, Ohio, Tennessee, and 
Pennsylvania. In 1887-1890 he made visits to 
the Ojibwa of Minnesota, to study their Grand 
Medicine ritual and initiation. In 1890-’91 he 
visited the Menomini of Wisconsin and Ojibwa 
of Minnesota, to study their ritual and medi- 
cine society. 


Howse (Joseph). Vocabularies of cer- 
tain North American languages. By 
T.(J.?) Howse, Esq. 

In Philological Soc. [of London] Proe. vol. 4, 
pp. 191-206, London, 1850, 8°. (Congress.) 


Vocabulary of the Flathead, Okanagen, and 
Atna or Shoushwhap, pp. 199-206. 


Hymn-book: 
Netlakapamuk See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 

Hymns: 
Kalispel See Giorda (J. B.) 
Klallam Eells (M.) 
Netlakapamuk Good (J. B.) 
Netlakapamuk Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Niskwalli Bulmer (T.S.) 
Niskwalli Eells (M.) 
Okinagan Tate (C. M.) 
Skwaksin Eells (M.) 
Snohomish Boulet (J. B.) 
Twana Eells (M.) 


Hymns in the Thompson tongue, See 
Le Jeune (J, M. BR.) 


34 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


I. J. K. 


Interrogationes faciende [Kalispel]. 
See Canistrelli (P.) 


Jilg (B.) See Vater (J.8.) 


Kalispel : 
Bible stories See Giorda (J.) 
Catechism Giorda (J.) 
Dictionary Giorda (J.) 


General discussion 
Geographic names 
Hymns 


Smalley (E. V.) 
Eells (M.) 
Giorda (J.) 


Litany 

Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 


Canestrelli (P.) 
Shea (J. G.) 
Smalley (EZ. V.) 
Smet (P.J. de). 
Van Gorp (L.) 


Numerals Fells (M.) 
Prayers C (J. ¥F.) 
Prayers Canestrelli (P.) 
Prayers Smet (P. J. de). 
Text Lettre. 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A.L.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (¥. L. 0.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Words Youth's. 


Kane (P.) —Continued. 


on a tour of art exploration through the unset- 
tled regions of the northwest. He traveled 
many thousands of miles in this country, from 
the confines of old Canada to the Pacific Ocean, 
and was eminently successful in delineating 
the physical peculiarities and appearance of 
the aborigines, as well as the wild scenery of 
the far north. He returned to Toronto in 
December, 1848, having in his possession one of 
the largest collections of Indian curiosities 
that was ever made on the continent, together 
with nearly four hundredsketches. From these 
he painted a series of oil pictures, which are now 
in the possession of George W.Allen, of Toronto, 
and embrace views of the country from Lake 
Superior to Vancouver's Island.—Appleton’s 
Oyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Kamloops Wawa. See Le Jeune (J.-M. 
R.) 


Kane (Paul). Wanderings of an artist | 


among the | Indians of North America 
| from Canada | to Vancouver’s island 
and Oregon | through the Hudson’s 
bay company’s territory | and | back 
again. | By Paul Kane. | 

London | Longman, Brown, Green, 
Longmans, and Roberts. | 1859. 

Half-title verso name of printer 1 |. frontis- 


piece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso 
blank 1 1. preface pp. v—x, contents pp. xi-xvii, 
list of illustrations p, [xviii], text pp. 1-455, 
appendix 4 11. 8°. 

List of peoples in the northwest, inciuding 
the Salishan tribes, 4 unnumbered leaves at end. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenxum, 
British Museum, Congress, Harvard. 


The edition: Les Indiens de la Baie Hudson, | 
Paris, 1861, contains no linguistic material. | 


(British Museum.) 

Paul Kane, Canadian artist, born in Toronto 
in 1810, died there in 1871. He early evinced 
a love of art, and after studying in Upper 
Canada college he visited the United States in 
1836 and followed his profession there till 1840, 
when he went to Europe. There he studied in 
Rome, Genoa, Naples, Florence, Venice, and 
Bologna. He finaliy returned to Toronto in 
the spring of 1845, and after a short rest went 


Kaulits: 


Gencral discussion See Hale (H.) 


Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Vocabulary Wabass (W. G.) 
Words Gibbs (G.) 
Kawichen: 


General discussion See Bancroft (H. H.) 

General discussion Buschmann (J. C. E.) 

General discussion Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 


Keane (Augustus H.) 


Lord’s prayer Youth's. 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Numerals Scouler (J.) 
Numerals Tolmie (W. F.) 
Sentences Scouler (J .) 
Sentences Tolmie (W. F.) 
Songs Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Scouler (J.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Words Brinton (VD. G.) 
Words Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Words Chamberlain (A, F.) 
Words Daa (L. K.) 
Words Latham (R. G.) 


Ethnography 
and philology of America. By A. H. 
Keane. 

In Bates (H. W.), Central America, the West 
Indies, ete., pp. 443-571, London, 1878, 8°. 

General scheme of American races and lan- 
guages (pp. 460-497) includes a list of the 
Columbian races, embracing the Salish or Flat- 
head, p. 474. —Alphabetical list of all known 
American tribes and languages, pp. 498-545. 

Reprinted in the 1882 and 1885 editions of the 
same work and on the same pages. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Keane (A. H) — Continued. 


of the Salishan. 


Kilamook. See Tilamuk. 
Klallam: 


—— American Indians. 
In Encyclopedia Britannica, nixth edition, 
pp. 822-830, New York, 1881, royal 8°. 
of Ethnology, Pilling.) 
Columbian races, p. 826, includes the divisions 


General discussion See Bancroft (H. H.) 


General discussion 


Geographic names 
Geographic names 
Geographic names 


Grammatic treatise 
Grammatie treatise 


Hymns 
Lord's prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Sentences 
Songs 

Songs 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Words 


Latham (Robert Gordon). Miscellaneous | 


Hells (M.) 
Coones (S. F.) 
Eells (M.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Eells (M.) 
Eells (M.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Youth's. 

Eells (M.) 
Grant (W. C.) 
Seouler (J.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Seouler (J.) 
Baker (T.) 
Eells (M.) 
Eells (M.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Scouler (J.) 
Tolmie (W.F.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 


(Bureau 


35 


Klallam — Continued. 


Words Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Words Daa (L. K.) 
Words Latham (R. G.) 
Words Youth’s. 

Komuk: 


Grammatic treatise See Boas (F.) 


Legends Boas (F.) 
Numerals Brinton (D.G.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Texts Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Brinton (D. G.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Words Boas (F.) 


Kowelits. See Kaulits. 


Kuwalitsk. See Kaulits. 


Kwantlen: 
Numerals See Eells (M., 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Words Gibbs (G.) 
Kwinaiutl : 
Numerals See Eells (M.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Words Willoughby (C.) 


L. 


Latham (R. G.) —Continued. 


contributions to the ethnography of 
North America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. 


In Philological Soc. [of London] Proc. vol. 2, 
pp. 31-50, [London], 1846, 8°. 

Contains a number of Kawitchen, Noosda 
lum, and Salish words in the comparative lists. 

This article reprinted in the same author’s 
Opuscula, for title of which see below. 


—— On the languages of the Oregon ter- 
ritory. By R.G. Latham, M.D. 
In Ethnological Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 1, 
pp. 154-166, Edinburgh [1848], 8°. (Congress.) 
Comparative vocabulary (11 words) of 
Friendly Village (from McKenzie) and the 
Billechoola (from Tolmie), p. 155.—Numerals 
2-7,10 of the Billechoola compared with those 
of Fitzhugh Sound, and Haeltzuk, p. 155.— 
Comparative vocabulary (10 words) of the Atna 
(from McKenzie) and Noosdalum, p. 157.— 
Comparative vocabulary (12 words and numer- 
als 1-10) of the Salish (from Gallatin), and 
Okinagen (from Tolmie), p. 158 —Vocabulary 
of the Shoshoni (24 words) showing affinities 
with a number of other languages, among them 


the Kawitchen, pp. 159-160.—Table of words 
showing affinities between the Eskimo and 
other languages, among them the Billechoola, 
Kawitchen, and Squallyamish, pp. 164-165. 
This article reprinted in the same author's 
Opuscula, with added notes; for title see below. 


—— The | natural history | of | the varie- 


ties of man. | By | Robert Gordon 
Latham, M. D., F.R.S., | late fellow of 
King’s college, Cambridge; | one of the 
vice-presidents of the Ethnological soci- 
ety, London; | corresponding member 
to the Ethnological society, | New 
York, ete. | [Monogram in shield. ] | 
London: | John Van Voorst, Pater- 
noster row. | M.D. CCCL [1850]. 
Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names 
of printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. 
preface pp. vii-xi, bibliography pp. xiii-xv, 
explanation of plates verso blank 1 1. contents 
pp. xix-xxviii, text pp. 1-566, index pp. 567-574, 
list of works by Dr. Latham verso blank 11. 8°. 
A comparative vocabulary (10 words) of the 


36 


Latham (R. G.) — Continued. 


Friendly Village (from McKenzie) and Bille- 
choola (from Tolmie), p. 300.—Comparative 
vocabulary (12 words) of the Piskwaus (from 
Gallatin) and Salish, p. 314.— Comparative 
vocabulary (19 words) of the Chekeeli and 
Wakash (from Scouler), p. 315. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Con- 

gress, Eames. 
—— The | ethnology | of | the British 
colonies | and | dependencies. | By | R. 
G. Latham, M. D., F. R. &., | corre- 
sponding member to the Ethnological 
society, New York, | etc. ete. | [Mono- 
gram in shield. ] | 

London: | John Van Voorst, Pater- 
noster row. | M. DCCC. LI [1851]. 

Title verso names of printers 1 1. contents 
pp. v-vi, preface verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-264, 
list of works by Dr. Latham, ete, 1 1. 16°. 

Chapter vi. Dependencies in America, pp. 
224-264, contains a list of the divisions and 
subdivisions of the Billechula. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Congress, Eames. 

— On the languages of northern, west- 
ern, and central America. By R. G. 
Latham, M. D. 

In Philological Soe. [of London] Trans. 1856, 
pp. 57-115, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) 

A general discussion of the Atna group 
(including the Tsihali-Selish), with a list of its 
linguistic divisions, pp. 71-72; of the Bille- 
chula, p. 72. 

This article reprinted in the same author’s 
Opuscula, for title of which see below. 
Opuscula. | Essays | chiefly | philo- 
logical and ethnographical | by | Rob- 
ert Gordon Latham, | M.A., M.D., F. 
R.S., etc. | late fellow of Kings college, 
Cambridge, late professor of English | 
in University college, London, late 
assistant physician | at the Middlesex 
hospital. | 

Williams & Norgate, | 14 Henrietta 
street, Covent garden, London | and | 
20 South Frederick street, Edinburgh. 

| Leipzig, R. Hartmann. | 1860. 


Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 


iii-iv, contents pp. v—vi, text pp. 1-377, addenda | 


and corrigenda pp. 378-418, 8°. 

A reprint of a number of papers read before 
the ethnological and philological societies of 
London, among them the following: 

On the languages of the Oregon territory (pp. 
249-265) contains: Comparative vocabulary (10 
words) of the language of Friendly Village 
(from McKenzie) and Billechula (from Tol- 
mie), p. 250.—Vocabulary (10 words) of the 
Atnah (from McKenzie) and of the Noosda- 
lum, compared, p. 252.—Vocabulary (12 words 
and numerals 1-10) of the Salish (from Galla- 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Latham (R. G.) — Continued. 


tin) and Okinagen (from Tolmie), pp. 253-254.— 
List of words showing affinities between the 
languages of Oregon territory and the Eskimo 
includes words of the Billechoola and Okina- 
gen, pp. 260-263. 

Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnog- 
raphy of North America, pp. 275-297, contains 
a number of Salishan words in the compara- 
tive lists. « 

Addenda and corrigenda, 1859 (pp. 378-418) 
contains a few additional remarks upon the 
Atna group and the Billechula, p. 388.—Short 
Selish vocabulary (12 words), pp. 415-416. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, Brinton, 
Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling. 
Watkinson. 

At the Squier sale a presentation copy, no. 
639, brought $2.37. The Murphy copy, no. 1438, 
sold for $1. 


—— Elements | of | comparative philol- 


ogy. | By | R.G. Latham, M.A., M.D., 
F.R.S., &e., | late fellow of King’s col- 
lege, Cambridge; and late professor of 
English | in University college, Lon- 
don. | 

London: Waltonand Maberly,| Upper 
Gower street, and Ivy lane, Paternoster 
row; | Longman, Green, Longman, 
Roberts, and Green, | Paternoster row. 
| 1862. | The Right of Translation is 
Reserved. 

Half-title verso name of printer 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. 
preface pp. vii-xi, contents pp. xiii-xx, tabular 
view of languages and dialects pp. xxi-xxviii, 
chief authorities pp. ‘xxix—xxxii, errata verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 1-752,addenda and corri- 
genda pp. 753-757, index pp. 758-774, list of 
works by Dr. Latham verso blank 1 1. 8°. 

General account of the Tsihali-Selish, with a 
list of linguistic divisions, p. 399.—Compara- 
tive vocabulary (50 words and numerals 1-10) 
of the Atna (from Hale), Piskwaus, Skwali, 
and Kowelitsk, pp. 399-400.—Vocabulary (50 
words and numerals 1-10) of the Nsietshawus 
or Kilamuk, a language of the Selish or Atna 
group, compared with the Watlala and Nutka, 
pp. 402-403. — Vocabulary (12 words) of the 
Selish commpared wlth the Tshintik and Sho- 
shoni, p. 404. 

Copies seen; Astor, British Museum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Watkinson. 


Robert Gordon Latham, the eldest son of the 
Rey. Thomas Latham, was born in the vicarage 
of Billingsborough, Lincolnshire, March 24, 
1812. In 1819 he wasenteredat Eton. Two years 
afterwards he was admitted on the foundation, 
and in 1829 went to Kings, where he took his 
fellowship and degrees. Ethnology was his 
first passion and his last, though for botany 
he had a very strong taste. Hedied March 9, 
1888.—Theodore Watts in The Atheneum, March 
17, 1888. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Leclerc (Charles). Bibliotheca | ameri- 
cana | Catalogue raisonné | d’une trés- 
précieuse | collection de livres anciens 
| et modernes | sur l’Amérique et les 
Philippines | Classés par ordre alpha- 
bétique de noms d’Auteurs. | Rédigé 
par Ch. Leclerc. | [Design.] | 

Paris | Maisonneuve & Ci | 15, quai 
Voltaire | M. D. CCC. LXVII [1867] 

Cover titleas above, half-title verso details of 
sale 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. v-vii, catalogue pp. 1-407, 8°. 

Includes titles of a number of works contain- 
ing material relating to the Salishan lan- 
guages. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. 

At the Fischer sale, a copy, no. 919, brought 

10s.; at the Squier sale, no. 651, $1.50. Leclerc, 
1878, no. 345, prices it 4 fr.and Maisonneuve, in 
1889,4 fr. The Murphy copy, no. 1452, brought 
$2.75. 
—— Bibliotheca | americana | Histoire, 
géographie, | voyages, archéologie et 
linguistique | des | deux Amériques | 
et | des iles Philippines | rédigée | Par 
Ch. Leclere | [Design] | 

Paris | Maisonneuve et C*, libraires- 
éditeurs | 25, quai Voltaire, 25. | 1878 

Cover title as above, half-title verso blank 
1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. avant-propos 
pp. i-xvii, table des divisions pp. xviii-xx, cat- 
alogue pp. 1-643, supplément pp. 645-694, index 
pp. 695-737, colophon verso blank 11. 8°. 

The linguistic part of this volume occupies 
pp. 537-643; it is arranged under names of lan- 
guages and contains titles of books relating to 
the following : Langues américaines en général, 
pp. 537-550; Clallam et Lummi, p. 568. 

Copies seen: Boston Athenzum, Congress, 
Eames, Harvard, Pilling. 

Priced by Quaritch, no. 12172, 12s.; another 
copy, no. 12173, large paper, 1l. 1s. Leclere’s 
Supplement, 1881, no. 2831, pricesit15fr., andno. 
2832,a copy on Holland paper,30 fr. <A large 
paper copy is priced by Quaritch, no. 30230, 12s. 
Maisonneuve in 1889 prices it 15 fr. 

Lee (Daniel) and Frost (J. H.) Ten 
years in Oregon. | By D. Lee and J. H. 
Frost, | late of the Oregon mission of 


the Methodist episcopal church. | 
[Picture. ] | 
New-York: | published for the 


authors: 200 Mulberry-street. 
Collord, Printer. | 1844. 

Title verso copyright notice (1844) 11. preface 
pp.3-6, contents pp. 7-11. text pp. 13-337, appen- 
dix pp. 339-344, map, 12°. 

Vocabulary of the Killemook (80 words and 
phrases), pp. 339-341.—Vocabulary of the Che- 
ealish (65words), pp. 341-343. 


| Ae 


Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Brit- | 


ish Museum, Congress, Pilling, Trumbull. 


[ 


37 


Legends: 
Komuk See Boas (F.) 
Pentlash Boas (F.) 
Salish Hoffman (W.J:) 
Silets Boas (F.) 
Snanaimuk Boas (F.) 
Twana Bulmer (T.S.) 
Twana Eells (M.) 


[Le Jeune (Pére Jean-Marie Raphael). ] 
A haa skoainjwts a Jesu-Kri oa Ste. 
Marguerite-Marie | Alacoque. <A joat 
k’oe iamit oa N’jhoakwk: 

Colophon: P. A. Kemper, Dayton, O. 
(N. America.) [1890.] (Ntlakapamoh, 
Br. Columbia.) 


A small card, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as 
above and containing twelve ‘‘Promises of 
Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary,’ in the 
Ntlakapamoh language. On the verso is a 
colored picture of the sacred heart, beneath 
which is a five-line verse in English. 

Copies seen: Pilling. Wellesley. 

Some issues are printed on cards which have 
the verse beneath the picture in French. 
(Eames.) 


— Nelh te skoalwtz Jesu-Kri | n Ste. 


Marguerite Mali Alacok. Shoat koe 
lamhal a tn sptenosem. 

Colophon: P. A. Kemper, Dayton, O. 
(N. America.) [1890.] Lillooet, Br. 
Columbia. 


A small card, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as 
above and containing twelve ‘‘ Promises of 
Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary” in the 
Lillooet language. On the verso is a colored 
picture of the sacred heart, beneath which is a 
five-line verse in English. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

Mr. Kemper has issued similar cards in many 
languages. 


[——] [Two lines stenographic charac- 


ters.] | No. 1. Kamloops Wawa May 2. 
*91[-No. 76 30, Apr. 1893]. 

A periodical in the Chinook Jargon, steno- 
graphic characters, intended as a weekly, but 
issued in its early stages at irregular intervals, 
at Kamloops, British Columbia, under the edi- 
torship of Father Le Jeune, and reproduced by 
him with the aid of the mimeograph. See fac- 
simile of the first page of the initial issue, p. 38. 

A detailed description of the issues and their 
contents to no. 67, inclusive, is given in the 
Bibliography of the Chinookan languages. 

Night prayers in Shushwap, no. 9, pp. 1-4 (pp. 
51-54 of the series). 


] Prayers in | Shushwap. | I. Night 
Prayers. 

[Kamloops, B. C.: 1892.] 

No title-page, heading as above; text (in the 
Shushwap language, stenographic characters, 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Oukiek TY > TAS pp a 
(a. ahakliv, ey |7 72244 C0 
en > Lo | Xam ope 

Kom oons " WOAnVAL , 
Wawa | WoO, | ¢& “a born 
He LUA\| As f? lush new 
tec Kt, Chor hee ny 
(An S% A ody jos Jf 4 
Laka behe rv ~y\, wuarls 
WIAWH.. ' Q ae 4 a Mp CR ‘ 
Ke ee RL Spear, 
KPI B ULE SO v ; ) 
= >) oe ZL wuso 
OO, AH Want fe 
AR, Ate teary Fo 
Ty (See wrice fers 


Son edly , 
at VOPR Kia = 
we. Klay SK 
be Keak 
Koya x. 


one) 


path wn: 
WOUR PEP she No wna blep 

Kuthash| pean |F foe be 
pous Cekop while men, 


, 
PLIPLOP i aI PS IPL Pe nce, 


FACSIMILE OF THE FIRST PAGE OF THE KAMLOOPS WAWA. 


SALISHAN 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) -— Continued. 
with English and Latin headings in italics, 
reproduced by the mimeograph), pp-1-16, 169°. 


Veni Sancti, p. 1.—Act of faith, p.1; of hope, | 
p.2; of love, pp. 2-3; of contrition, p. 3; of | 


adoration, pp. 3-4; of thanksgiving, pp. 4-5.— 


Prayer for light, pp. 5-6; examen, pp. 6-7; firm | 
purpose, pp. 7-8; confietor, p. 9.—Misereatur | 


and Indulgentiam, p.10.—The ten command- 
ments, pp. 10-11.—Precepts of the church, pp. 
11-12.—Seven capital sins, p. 12.—Night offer- 
ing, p. 13.—Prayer for the living and the dead, 
pp. 14-15.—Sub tuum, pp. 15-16. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


Subsequently incorporated in the following: | 


|——] Prayers in Shushwap. | Morning 
Prayers. 

([Kamloops, B. C.: 1892.] 

No title-page, heading as above; text (in the 
Shushwap language, stenographie characters, 
with English and Latin headings in italics, 
reproduced by the mimeograph), pp. 1-48, 16°. 

Morning Prayers: VeniSancte, p. 1.—Adora- 
tion, p. 1.—Thanksgiving, p. 2.—Resoiution, 
pp. 2-3.—Petition, p.3.—Pater, pp. 3-4.—Ave 


Maria, p, 4.—Credo, pp. 4-5.—Seven sacra- | 
ments, p.6.—Act of faith, p.6; of hope, pp. 6-7, | 


of love, p.7; of contrition, pp. 7-8.—To the 
blessed Virgin, etc., pp. 8-9.—Angelus, pp. 9- 
10.—Gloria patri, p.11.—Sub tuum, p. 11.—The 
rosary, pp. 12-16. 


Night prayers: Detailed contents as under | 


title next above. pp. 17-32. 


Prayers before communion: Hymn, pp.33- | 


34.—Act of faitlr, pp. 34-35; of humility, pp. 
35-36; of contrition, pp. 36-37; of love, p.37; of 
desire, pp. 38-39. 

After communion: Prayer, p. 40.—'Thanks- 
giving, p. 41.—Petition, p. 42.—Resolution, pp. 
43-44.--Offering, pp. 44-45.—Intercession, p. 
45.—Hymns, pp. 46-48. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


—— Prayers in Thompson. | by J. M.R. 
Le Jeune O.M. I. 
[Kamloops, B. C.: 1891.] 


No title-page, heading only; text (entirely 
in the language of the Indians of Thompson 
river, stenographic characters, reproduced by 
the mimeograph), pp. 1-32,16°. See facsimile 
of the first page, p. 40. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


[——] Prayers. | in Thompson. | or Mtla- | 


kapmah. | Morning Prayers. 

[Kamloops, B. C.: 1892.] 

No title-page, heading only; text (in the 
Mtlakapmah, stenographie characters, with 
English headings in italics; reproduced by the 
mimeograph), pp. 1-16, 16°. 

Veni Sancte, p. 1.—Adoration, p. 2.—Thanks- 
giving, pp. 2-3.—Resolution, pp. 3-4.—Petition, 
pp. 4-5.—Pater, pp. 5-6.—Ave, p. 6.—Credo, pp. 
7-8.—Septem sacramenta, p.8.—Act of faith, 
pp. 8-9.—Act of hope, p. 9.—Act of love and of 


LANGUAGES. 


ao 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 
contrition, p. 10.—Invocation, p. 11.—To the B. 
Virgin, p.11.—To the guardian angel, pp. 11- 
12.—To the saints, p. 12.—Angelus, p. 13.— 
Oremus, ad Gloria Patri, p.14.—Sub tuum, p. 
15.—Offering of the mass, pp. 15-16. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


L 


] Primer and 1* Lessons in Thomp- 
son. | by. J. M. R. Le Jeune O. M.I. 

{Kamloops, B. C.: 1891.] 

No title-page. headings only; text (in steno- 
graphic characters, with headings in English 
and Latin in italics, reproduced on the mimeo- 
graph) 4 unnumbered pages, 16°. 

Passion hymn, p. 1.—Primer lesson, pp. 2-3.— 
O ia St Joseph, p. 4. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


— [Hymns in the Thompson tongue. 

By Rev. J. M. R. Le Jeune, O. M. I. 

Kamloops, B. C.: 1891.] 

No title-page, text (in stenographic charac- 
ters, reproduced by the aid of the mimeograph), 
4 unnumbered pages, 16°. 

Passion hymn, pp. 1-2.—Hoe kanmentam, p. 
3.—O ia St. Joseph, p. 4. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


Shorthand primer for the Thompson 
Language | by J. M. R. Le Jeune 
OD Nia 

[ Kamloops, B. C.: 1891.] 

No title-page, heading only; text (in steno- 
graphic characters and italics, reproduced by 
the mimeograph) 4 unnumbered pages, 16°. 

Copies seen: Pilling. ‘ 


[——] First Catechism, | 
Language. 

[Kamloops, B. C.: 1892.] 

No title-page, heading only; text (in the lan- 
guage of the Indians of Thompson River, 
stenographic characters, reproduced by the 
mimeograph), pp. 1-32, 16°. 

Eight chapters, referring respectively to: 
God, Trinity, pp 1-2; Creation, pp. 2-4; Jesus 
Christ, pp. 4-8; Sin, pp.8-10; Baptism, pp. 11- 
12; Confirmation, pp. 12-14; Penance, pp. 14-28; 
Holy Eucharist, pp. 28-32. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


in | Thompson 


[——] First Catechism | in Shushwap. 

[Kamloops, B. C.: 1893.] 

No title-page, heading only; text (in the 
Shushwap language, stenographic characters, 
with headings in English in italies, reproduced 
by the mimeograph), pp. 1-82, 16°. 

Nine chapters, headed respectively: God, 
Trinity, creation, etc., pp. 1-2.—Creation, pp. 
2-3.—Jesus Christ, pp.’3-6.—On sin, pp. 6-7.— 
Death, pp. 7-9.—Penance, pp. 9-16.—Eucharist, 
pp. 17-18.—Confirmation, pp. 18-19.—Questions 
from another catechism, not included in the 
above, pp. 19-32. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


AO BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Proyers (yw Thompson. 
eer Be ay? STWR elena. 10 


DP Gy 


ten. 2) 


. 5 ‘ - -¢ 
LY SOOO S| ee ale 
Livny a 6 KH Ber, ae Os ~/e 


LV") Dg <. gece ome BS foes 
pane Cee a Sh, ps 


3 
ae CF “OD “rr 19 ae 


SO EO ee er tt a ee See ag OO ar oe 
— 
PA Ny 
- wa . 
j \ : & \ OS 
: z ' 
e* ‘ 
x 
fs 
I 
- 


eee anya fan au < “oe AL 


fc A tig 


FACSIMILE OF THE FIRST PAGE OF LE JEUNE’S THOMPSON PRAYERS. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) — Continued. 
—— Prayers. | in Okonagon Language. 

[Kamloops, B. C.: 1893.] 

No title-page, heading only; text (in the 
Okonagon language, stenographic characters, 
with Latin and English headings in italics, 
reproduced by the mimeograph), pp. 1-48, 16°. 

Morning prayers, pp. 1-16.— Night prayers, 
pp. 17-32.—Prayers for communion, pp. 33-48. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

A somewhat lengthy statement of Father 
Le Jeune’s methods and purposes is given in 
the Bibliography of the Chinookan Languages, 
pp. 45-51. 

Pére Jean-Marie Raphael Le Jeune was born 
at Pleybert Christ, Finistére, France, April 12, 
1855, and came to British Columbia as a mis- 
sionary priest in October,1879. He made his 
first acquaintance with the Thompson Indians 
in June, 1880,and has been among them ever 
since. He began at once to study their lan- 
guage and was able to express himself easily 
in that language after a few months. When he 
first came he found about a dozen Indians who 
knew a few prayers and a little of a catechism 
in the Thompson language, composed mostly 
by Right Rey. Bishop Durieu, O. M. I., the 
present bishop of New Westminster. From 
1880 to 1882 he traveled only between Yale and 
Lytton, 57 miles, trying to make acquaintance 
with as many natives as he could in that dis- 
trict. Since 1882 he has had to visit also the 
Nicola Indians, who speak the Thompson lan- 
guage,and the Douglas Lake Indians, who 
are a branch of the Okanagan family, and had 
occasion to become acquainted with the Okan- 
agan language, in which he composed and 
revised most of the prayers they have in use up 
to the present. Since June 1, 1891, he has also 
had to deal with the Shushwap Indians, and, 
as the language is similar to that in use by the 
Indians of Thompson River, he very soon 
became familiar with it. 

He tried several years ago to teach the In- 
dians to read in the English characters, but 
without avail, and two years ago he undertook 
toteach them in shorthand, experimenting first 
upon a young Indian boy who learned the short- 
hand after a single lesson and began to help 
him teach the others. The work went on 
slowly until last winter, when they began to be 
interested in it all over the country, and since 
then they have been learning it with eagerness 
and teaching it to one another. 


Lenox: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the Lenox Library, New York City. 


Lettre au Saint-Pére en Langue Kalis- 
pel, (Anglice Flathead. ) 

In Société Philologique, Actes, vol. 15, pp. 
110-112, Alengon, 1877,8°. (Bureau of Ethnol- 
ogy, Pilling.) 

Three versions, Latin, English, and Kalispel, 
of a letter to the Pope. 


Al 


Liloeet. See Lilowat. 
Lilowat: 
Numerals See Eells (M.) 

' Prayers Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Text Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and 

Dawson (G. M.) 

Litany: 
Kalispel See Canestrelli (P.) 
Netlakapamuk Good (J. B.) 

L’kungen. See Songish. 

Lord’s prayer: 
Kalispel See Shea (J. G.) 
Kalispel Smalley (E. V.) 
Kalispel S met (P. J. de). 
Kalispel Van Gorp (L.) 
Kawich en Youth's. 
Klallam Bulmer (T.58.) 
Klallam Youth’s. 
Lilowat Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Lummi Youth’s. 
Netlapakamuk Bancroft (H. H.) 
N etlapakamuk Good (J. B.) 
Netlapakamuk Youth's. 
Niskwalli Bulmer (T.S.) 
Niskwalli Youth’s. 
Salish Bancroft (H. H.) 
Salish Bulmer (T.S.) 
Salish Marietti (P.) 
Salish Shea (J. G.) 
Salish Smet (P.J. de). 
Salish Youth’s. 
Samish Smet (P. J. de). 
Snanaimuk Bancroft (H. H.) 
Snanaimuk Carmany (J.H.) 
Snohomish Bulmer (T.S.) 
Snohomish Youth's. 
Twana Bulmer (T.8.) 


Lu Skusskuests [Kalispel]. See Canes- 
trelli (P.) 

Lu tel kaimintis [Kalispel]. See Giorda 
(J.) 

Lubbock (Sir John). The | origin of 
civilisation | and the | primitive con- 
dition of man. | Mental and social con- 
dition of savages. | By | sir John Lub- 
bock, Bart., M. P., F. R. S. | author 
[&c. two lines. ] | 

London: | Longmans, Green, and co. 

| 1870. 

Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. front- 
ispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v— 
viii, contents p. ix, list of illustrations pp. xi- 
xii, list of principal works quoted pp. xiii-xvi, 
text pp. 1-323, appendix pp. 325-362, notes pp. 
363-365, index pp. 367-380, four other plates, 8°. 

A few words in the Niskwalli language, p. 
288. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Eames. Harvard. 


A2 


Lubbock (J.) — Continued. 
—— The | origin of civilisation | and the 
| primitive condition of man. | Mental 
and social condition of savages. | By | 
sir John Lubbock, Bart., M. P., F. R.S. 
| author[&c. two lines. ] | 
New York: | D. Appleton and com- 
pany, | 90, 92 & 94 Grand street. | 1870. 


Half-title verso blank 11. frontispiece 1 1. title 
verso blank 11. preface to the American edition 
pp. iii-iv, preface pp. v—-viii, contents p. ix, 
illustrations pp. xi-xii, list of principal works 
quoted pp. xiii-xvi, text pp. 1-323, appendix pp. 
325-362, notes pp. 363-365, index pp. 367-380, four 
other plates, 12°. 

Linguisticcontents as under title next above. 

Oopies seen: Harvard, Pilling. 


—— The | origin of civilisation | and the 
| primitive condition of man. | Mental 
and social condition of savages. | By | 
Sir John Lubbock, Bart., M. P., F. B.S. 
| author [&c. two lines.] | Second 
edition, with additions. | 
London: | Longmans, Green, and co. 
| 1870. 

Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. front- 
ispiece 1 1]. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v- 
viii, contents pp. ix-xiii, illustrations pp. xv- 
xvi, list of principal works quoted pp. xvii-xx, 
text pp. 1-367, appendix 369-409, notes pp. 411- 
413, index pp. 415-426, list of books 11. five other 
plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 
327. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Kames, Har- 
vard. 


-—— The | origin of civilisation | and the 
| primitive condition of man. | Mental 
and social condition of savages. | By | 
sir John Lubbock, Bart., M. P., F. R. 
S. | vice-chancellor [&c. three lines. ] 
| Third edition, with numerous addi- 
tions. | 


London: | Longmans, Green, and co. 
| 1875. 

Half-title verso names of printer 1 1. frontis- 
piece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v—viii, 
contents pp. ix—xiii, illustrations pp. xv—xvi, 
list of the principal works quoted pp. xvii-xx, 
text pp. 1-463, appendix pp. 465-507, notes pp. 
509-514, index pp. 515 -528, five other plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 
416. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames. 


— The | origin of civilisation | and the 
| primitive condition of man. | Mental 
and social condition of savages. | By | 
Sir John Lubbock, Bart. M. P. F.R.S. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Lubbock (J.) — Continued. 


| D.C. L. LL.D. | President [&e. five 
lines.] | Fourth edition, with numerous 
additions. | 

London: | Longmans, Green, and co. 

| 1882. 

Half-title verso list of works ‘‘ by the same 
author’ 1 1. frontispiece 1 1. title verso names 
of printers 1 1. preface pp. v—viii, contents pp. 
ix-xiii, illustrations pp. xv—xvi, list of the prin- 
cipal works quoted pp. xvii-xx, text pp. 1-480, 
appendix pp. 481-524, notes pp. 525-533, index 
pp. 535-548, five other plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 
427. - 

Copies seen: Boston Athenzum, Eames, 
Harvard. 


The | origin of civilisation | and the 
| primitive condition of man | Mental 
and social condition of savages | By | 
Sir John Lubbock, bart. | M. P., F. R. 
8., D.C. L., LL. D. | author [&e. four 
lines] | Fifth Edition, with numerous 
Additions j 


London | Longmans, Green, and co | 
1889 | All rights reserved 


Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. frontis- 
piece 1]. title verso blank 11. preface (February, 
1870) pp. vii-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, illustrations 
pp. xvii-xviii, list of principal works quoted 
pp. xix-xxiii, text pp. 1-486, appendix pp. 487- 
529, notes pp. 531-539, index pp. 541-554, list of 
works by the same author verso blank 1 1. five 
other plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 
432. 

Copies seen: Eames. 


Ludewig (Hermann Ernst). The | liter- 


ature | of | American aboriginal lan- 
guages. | By | Hermann E. Ludewig. | 
With additions and corrections | by 
professor Wm. W. Turner. | Edited by 
Nicolas Triibner. | 

London:| Triibner and co., 60, Pater- 
noster row. | MDCCCLVIII [1858]. 

Half-title ‘‘Triibner’s bibliotheca glottica 
I” verso blank 11. title as above verso name of 
printer 1 1. preface pp. v—vili, contents verso 
blank 11. editor’s advertisement pp. ix—xii, bio- 
graphicul memoir pp. xiii-xiv, introductory 
bibliographical notices pp. xv—xxiv, text pp. 1- 
209, addenda pp. 210-246, index pp. 247-256, 
errata pp. 257-258,8°. Arranged alphabetically 
by languages. Addenda by Wm. W. Turner 
and Nicolas Triibner, pp. 210-246. 

Contains a listof grammars and vocabularies 
and among others of the following peoples : 

American languages generally, pp. XV-xxiv; 
Ainah or Kinn, pp. 15,212; Flathead, Selish 
(Atnah, Schouschusp), pp. 72-74, 216, 221; 
Kawitschen, p. 91; Squallaymish, p, 239. 


SALISHAN 


Ludewig (II. E.) — Continued. 


Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology,Congress, 
Eames, Georgetown, Pilling. 

At the Fischer sale, no. 990, acopy brought5s. 
$d.; at the Field sale, no. 1403, $2.63; at the 
Squiersale, no. 699, $2.62; another copy, no. 1906, 
$2.38. Priced by Leclerc, 1878, no. 2075, 15 fr. 
The Pinart copy, no. 565, sold for 25 fr., and 
the Murphy copy, no. 1540, for $2.50. 


“Dr. Ludewig bas himself so fully detailed 
the plan and purport of this work that little 
more remains for me to add beyond the mere 
statement of the origin of my connection with 
the publication and the mention of such addi- 
tions for which I am alone responsible, and 
which, during its progress through the press, 
have gradually accumulated to about one-sixth 
of the whole. Thisis but anactof justice to the 
memory of Dr. Ludewig. because at the time of 
his death, in December, 1856,no more than 172 
pages were printed off, and these constitute the 
only portion of the work which had the benefit 
of his valuable personal and final revision. 

‘‘Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay 
in New York in 1855, to an intimacy with Dr. 
Ludewig, during which he mentioned that he, 
like myself, had been making bibliographical 
memoranda for years of all books which serve 
to illustrate the history of spoken language. 
As a first section of a more extended work on 
the literary history of language generally, he 
had prepared a bibliographical memoir of the 
remains of aboriginal languages of America. 
The manuscript had been deposited by him in 
the library of the Ethnological Society at New 
York, but at my request he at once most kindly 
placed it at my disposal, stipulating only that 


it should be printed in Europe, under my per- | 


sonal superintendence. 

“Upon my return to England, I lost no time 
in carrying out the trust thus confided to me, 
intending then to confine myself simply to pro- 
ducing acorrect copy of my friend’s manuscript. 
But it soon became obvious that the transcript 
had been hastily made, and but for the valuable 


assistance of literary friends, both in this | 


country and in America, the work would prob- 
ably have been abandoned. My thanks aremore 
particularly due to Mr. E. G. Squier, and to 
Prof. William W. Turner, of Washington, by 
whese considerate and valuable coéperation 
many difficulties were cleared away and my edi- 
toriallabors greatly lightened. This encouraged 
me to spare neither personal labor nor expense 
in the attempt to render the work as perfect as 
possible, with what success must be left to 
the judgmentof those who can fairly appreciate 
the labors of a pioneer in any new field of lit- 
erary research.’"’—Hditor’s advertisement. 

“Dr. Ludewig, though but little known in 
this country [England], was held in consider- 
ableesteem as a jurist, bothin Germany and the 
United States of America. Born at Dresden in 
1809, with but little exception he continued to 
reside in his native city until 1844, when he emi- 
grated to America; but, though in both coun- 


LANGUAGES. 43 


Ludewig (H. E.) — Continued. 
tries he practiced law as a profession, his bent 
was the study of literary history, which was 
evidenced by his Livre des Ana, Essai de Cata- 
logue Manuel, published at his own cost in 1837, 
and by his Bibliothekonomie, which appeared 
a few years later. 

‘But even while thus engaged he delighted 
in investigating the riseand progress of the land 
of his subsequent adoption, and his researches 
into the vexed question of the origin of the peo- 
pling of America gained him the highest consid- 
eration, on both sides of the Atlantic, as a man 
of original and inquiring mind. He was a 
contributor to Naumann’s Serapwum; and 
amongst the chief of his contributions to that 
journal may be mentioned those on ‘ American 
libraries.’ on the ‘Aids to American bibliog- 
raphy,’ and on the ‘ Book trade of the United 
States of America.’ In 1846 appeared his Lit- 
erature of American Local History, a work of 
much importance and which required no small 
amount of labor and perseverance, owing to the 
necessity of consulting the many and widely 
scattered materials, which had to be sought out 
from apparently the most unlikely channels. 

‘““These studies formed a natural introduc- 
tion to the present work on The Literature of 
American Aboriginal Languages, which oceu- 
pied his leisure concurrently with the others, 
and the printing of which was commenced in 
August, 1856, but which he did not live to see 
launched upon the world; for at the dateof his 
death, on the 12th of December following, only 
172 pages were in type. It had been a labor of 
love with him for years; and,if ever author 
were mindful of the nonwm prematur in annum, 
he was when he deposited hismanuscriptin the 
library of the American Ethnological Society, 
diffidert himself as to its merits and value on a 
subject of such paramount interest. He had 
satisfied himself that in due time the reward of 
his patient industry might be the production of 
some more extended national work on the sub- 
ject, and with this he was contented; for it was 
a distinguishing feature in his character, not- 
withstanding his great and varied knowledge 
and brilliant acquirements, to disregard his 
own toil, even amounting to drudgery if need- 
ful, if he could in any way assist the promul- 
gation of literature and science. 

‘“Dr, Ludewig was acorresponding member 
of many of the most distinguished European 
and American literary societies, and few men 
were held in greater consideration by scholars 
bothin Americaand Germany, as will readily be 
acknowledged should his voluminous corre- 
spondence ever see the light. In private life he 
was distinguished by the best qualities which 
endear a man’s memory to those who survive 
him; he was a kind and affectionate husband 
and a sincere friend. Always accessible and 
ever ready to aidand counsel those who applied 
to him for advice upon matters pertaining to 
literature, his loss will long be felt by a most 
extended circle of friends, and in him Germany 


44 


Ludewig (H. E.)— Continued. 


mourns one of the best representatives of her 
learned menin America, a genuine type of aclass 
in which, with singular felicity, with genius 
of the highest order is combined a painstaking 
and plodding perseverance but seldom met with 
beyond the confines of the Fatherland,” —Bio- 
graphic memoir. 


M. 


McCaw (Samuel R.) [Words, phrases, 
sentences, and grammatic material 
relating to the Puyallup language. ] 

Manuscript, pp. 77-228,and 4 unnumbered 
leaves, 4°. In the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology. Recorded in a copy of Powell’s 
Introduction to the study of Indian languages, 
second edition. Collected in Pierce county, 
Washington, during 1886. 

While but few of the schedules given in the 
work are completely filled, nearly all of them 
are partly so. The four leaves at the end con- 
tain verbal conjugations. 


Macdonald (Duncan George Forbes). 
British Columbia | and | Vancouver’s 
island | comprising | a description of 
these dependencies: their physical | 
character, climate, capabilities, popu- 
lation, trade, natural history, | geology, 
ethnology, gold fields, and future pros- 
pects | also | An Account of the Man- 
ners and Customs of the Native Indians 

| by | Duncan George Forbes Macdon- 
ald, C. E. | (Late of the Government 
Survey Staff of British Columbia, and 


the International Boundary | Line of 


North America) Author of ‘What the 
Farmers may do with the | Land’ ‘The 
Paris Exhibition’ ‘Decimal Coinage’ 
&c. | With a comprehensive map. 

London | Longman,Green, Longman, 
Roberts, & Green | 1862. 


Half-title verso name of printer 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v—vii, contents pp. 
ix-xiii, text pp. 1-442, appendices pp. 445-524, 
map, 8°. 

Proper names of thirteen members of the 
Songish tribe, pp. 164-165. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress. 

Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 43149, mentions: See- 
ond edition, London, Longmans, 1863, 8°. 


McEvoy (J.) See Dawson (G. M.) 


Mackay (J. W.) See Dawson (G.M.) 


| 
| 
| 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Lummi: 
Geographic names See Gibbs (G.) 
Lord’s prayer Youth's. 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
‘Words Bancroft (H. H.) 
Words Youth’s. 


Mackenzie (Sir Alexander). Voyages i 


from | Montreal, | on the river St. 
Laurence, | through the | continent of 
North America, | to the | Frozen and 
Pacific oceans; | In the Years 1789 and 
1793. | With a preliminary account | of 
the rise, progress, and present state of 
| the fur trade | of that country. | Dlus- 
trated with maps.|By Alexander 
Mackenzie, esq. | > 

London: | printed for T. Cadell, jun. 
and W. Davies, Strand; Cobbett and 
Morgan, | Pall-mall; and W. Creech, at 
Edinburgh. | By R. Noble, Old-Bailey. 

| M. DCCC. T [1801]. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. portrait 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. 
preface pp. iii-viii, general history of the fur 
trade etc. pp. i-cxxxii, text pp. 1-412, errata 1 1. 
3 maps, 4°. 

Vocabulary of the Atnah or Carrier Indians 
(25 words), pp. 257-258.—Vocabulary of the 
Indians of Friendly Village (25 words), p. 376. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
neum, British Museum, Congress, Dunbar, 
Eames, Geological Survey, Harvard, Trumbull, 
‘Watkinson. 

Stevens’s Nuggets, no. 1775, priced a copy 10s. 
6d. At the Fischer sale, no. 1006, it brought 5s. ; 
another copy, no. 2532, 2s. 6d.; at the Field sale, 
no. 1447, $2.38; at the Squier sale, no. 709, $1.62; 
at the Murphy sale, no. 1548, $2.25. Priced by 
Quaritch, no. 12206, 7s. 6d.; no. 28953, a half- 
russia copy, 1l.; Clarke & co. 1886, no. 4049, 
$5.50; Stevens, 1887, priced a copy 1l. 7s. 6d. 


— Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the 


river St. Laurence, | through the| conti- 
nentof North America, | to the | Frozen 
and Pacific oceans: | in the years 1789 
and 1793. | With a preliminary account 
of | the rise, progress, and present state 
of | the fur trade | of | that country. | 
Illustrated with a map. | By Alexander 
Mackenzie, esq. | First American edi- 
tion. | 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 45 


Mackenzie (A.) — Continued. 

New-York: | Printed and Sold by G. 
F. Hopkins, at Washington’s Head, No. 
118, Pearl-street. | 1802. 


Title verso blank 11]. dedication verso blank | 


11. preface to the London edition pp. v—viii, text 
(General history of the fur trade) pp. 1-94, 
(Journal of a voyage) pp. 1-296, map, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp. 186, 271 (second pagination). 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum. 
Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the 
river St. Laurence, | through the | conti- 
nent of North America, | to the | Frozen 
and Pacitic oceans; | in the years 1789 
and 1793. | Witha preliminary account 
| of the rise, progress, and present state 
| of | the fur trade | of that country. 
| Illustrated with | a general map of 
the country. | By sir Alexander Mac- 
kenzie. | 

Philadelphia: | published by John 
Morgan. | R. Carr, printer. | 1802. 

2 vols. in one: half-title verso blank 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. pref- 
ace pp. i-viii, text pp. i-exxvi, 1-113; 115-392, 
map, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as in the London edition 
of 1801 titled above, pp. exiii-cxxvi, 246. 

Copies seen: Geological Survey, Harvard. 


Some copies have on the title-page the words: | 


“Tilustrated with a general map of the country 
and a portrait of the author.” @) 


At the Field sale,a copy, no. 1448, brought | 


$2.62. 

Voyages | D’Alex.‘"e Mackenzie; | 
dans Vintérieur | de | VAmérique Sep- 
tentrionale, | Faits en 1789, 1792 et 
1793; | Le 1.°°, de Montréal au fort Chi- 
piouyan et 4 la mer Glaciale; | Le 2.™¢, 
du fort Chipiouyan jusqu’aux bords de 
VOcéan | pacifique. | Précédés dun Ta- 
bleau historique et politique sur | le 


commerce des pelleteries, dans le Ca- | 


nada, | Traduits de l’Anglais, | Par J. 
Castéra, | Avec des Notes et un Itiné- 
raire, tirés en partie des | papiers du 
vice-amiral Bougainville. | Tome Pre- 
mier[-IIT]. | 

Paris, | Dentu, Imprimeur-Libraire, 
Palais du Tribunal, | galeries de bois, 
n.° 240. | An X.—1802. 

3 vols. maps, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as in the first edition 
titled above, vol. 3, p. 20, 277. 

Copies seen: Astor, Congress. 

At the Fischer sale, no. 2533, a copy brought 
1s. Priced by Gagnon, Quebec, 1888, $3. 

For title of an extract from this edition see 
under date of 1807 below. 


Mackenzie (A.) — Continued. 
—— Alexander Mackenzie’s Esq. | Reisen 
| von | Montreal durch Nordwestame- 
rika | nach dem | Eismeer und der Siid- 
See | in den Jahren 1789 und 1793. | 
Nebst | einer Geschichte des Pelzhan- 
dels in Canada. | Aus dem Englischen. 
| Mit einer allgemeinen Karte und dem 
Bild- | nisse des Verfassers. | 
Berlin und Hamburg. | 1802. 
Pp. i-x, 11-408, map, 8°. 
Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
pp. 365, 480. 
Copies seen: British Museum. 


Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the 
river St. Laurence, | through the | conti- 
nent of North America, | to the | Frozen 
and Pacific oceans; | In the Years 1789 
and1795. | With a preliminary account 
| of the rise, progress, and present state 
of | the fur trade | of that country. | 
With original notes by Bouguixville, 
and Volney, | Members of the French 
senate. | Illustrated with maps. | By 
Alexander Mackenzie, esq. | Vol. 
I[-It}. | 

London: | printed for T, Cadell, jun. 
and W. Davies, Strand; | Cobbett and 
Morgan, Pall-mall; and W. Creech, | at 
Edinburgh. | By R. Noble, Old-bailey. | 
M. DCCC. II [1802]. 

2 vols. in one; half-title verso blank 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. pref- 
ace pp. vii-xiv, text pp. 1-284, contents pp. 285- 
290; half-title verso blank 1 1. title (varying 
somewhat in punctuation from that of vol. 1) 
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 5-310 (wrongly num- 
bered 210), notes pp.311-312, appendix pp. 313- 
325, contents pp. 326-332, maps, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as in the first edition, 
titled above, vol. 2, pp. 148-149, 273. 

Copies seen: Congress, Geological Survey, 
Harvard. 

Clarke & co., 1886, priced a copy, no. 4050, at 
$3.50. 

—— Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the 
river St. Laurence, |through the} conti- 
nent of North-America, |to the | Frozen 
and Pacific oceans: | in the years 1789 
and 1793. | Witha Preliminary Account 
of | the rise, progress, and present state 
of the | fur trade | of that country. | 
illustrated with amap. | By Alexander 
Mackenzie, esq. | Third American edi- 
tion. | 

New - York: | published by Evert 
Duyckinek, bookseller. | Lewis Nichols, 
printer. | 1803. 


46 


Mackenzie (A.) — Continued. 
Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 
11. preface pp. v-viii, text pp. 9-437, 16°. 
Linguistic contents as in previous editions 
titled above, pp. 314, 409. 
Copies seen: Congress. 
— Tableau | historique et politique | 
du commerce des pelleteries | dans le 
Canada, | depuis 1608 jusqu’a nos jours. 
| Contenant beaucoup de détails sur 
les nations sau- | vages qui Vhabitent, 
et sur les vastes contrées qui y | sont 
contigués; | Avec un Vocabulaire de la 
langue de plusieurs peuples de ces | 
vastes contrées. | Par Alexandre Mac- 
kenzie. | Traduit de l’Anglais, | par J. 
Castéra.| Orné du portrait de auteur. | 

Paris, | Dentu, Imprim.-Lib."®,rue du 
Pont-de-Lody, n.° 3. | M. D. CCC. VII 
[1807]. 

Half-title 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1- 
310, table des matiéres 1 unnumbered page, 8°. 
An extract from vol.1 of the Paris edition of 
1802, titled above. 

Linguistic contents as in previous editions, 
titled above, pp. 304-310. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Leclere, 1867, sold a copy, no. 920, for 4 fr.; 
priced by him, 1878, no. 756, 20 fr. 

Voyages | from | Montreal, | on the 
river St. Laurence, | through the|conti- 
nent of North America, | to the | Frozen 
and Pacific oceans; | in the years 1789 
and 1793. | With a preliminary account 
| of the rise, progress, and present state 
| of | the fur trade | of that country. | 
Illustrated with maps and a portrait of 
the author, | By sir Alexander Mac- 
kenzie. | Vol. I[-IZ]. | 

New-York: | published by W. B. Gil- 
ley. | 1814. 

2 vols.: 3 p. ll. pp. i-vili, i-exxvi, 1-118; 11. 
pp. 115-392, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under previous titles, 
vol. 1, pp. 247, 358-359. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Sir Alexander Mackenzie, explorer, born in 
Inverness, Scotland, about 1755, died in Dal- 
housie, Scotland, March 12,1820. In his youth 
he emigrated to Canada. In June, 1789, he set 
out on his expedition. At the western end of 
Great Slave Lake he entered a river, to which 
he gave his name, and explored it until July 12, 
when he reached the Arctic Ocean. He then 
returned to Fort Chippewyan, where hearrived 
on September27. In October, 1792, he undertook 
amore hazardous expedition to the western coast 


of North America and succeeded in reaching | 


Cape Menzies, on the Pacific Ocean. He returned 
I 


to England in 1801 and was knighted the fol- | 


lowing year.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Mallet: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compilerin the library of Major Edmond Mallet, 
Washington, D.C. 


Marietti (Pietro), editor. Oratio Domi- 
nica|in CCL. lingvas versa | et | CLXXX. 
charactervm formis| vel nostratibvs vel 
peregrinis expressa | cvrante | Petro 
Marietti| Eqvite Typographo Pontificio 

| Socio Administro | Typographei | 8. 
Consilii de Propaganda Fide | [Print- 
er’s device] | ‘ 


Romae | Anno M. DCCC. LXX [1870]. 

Half-title 1 1. title 1 1. dedication 3 1. pp. xi- 
xxvii, 1-319, indexes 4 1]. 4°. 

Includes 59 versions of the Lord’s prayer in 
various American dialects, among them the 
Oregonice, Which may or may not be Salishan, 
p. 303. I havehad no recent opportunity to 
investigate the matter. 

Copies seen: Trumbull. 


Massachusetts Historical Society: These words 
following a title or within parentheses after a 
note indicate that a copy of the work referred 
to has been seen by the compiler in the library 
of that society, Boston, Mass. 


Maximilian (Alexander Philipp) Prinz 
von Wied-Neuwied. Reise | in | das in- 
nere Nord-America | inden Jahren 1832 
bis 1854 | von | Maximilian Prinz zu 
Wied. | Mit 48 Kupfern, 33 Vignetten, 
vielen Holzschnitten und einer Charte. 

| Erster[-Zweiter] Band. | 

Coblenz, 1839[-1841]. | Bei J. Hel- 
scher. 

2 vols.: title verso blank 1 1. dedication 1 1. 
half-title verso blank 11. Vorwort pp. vii-xiv, 
Inhalt pp. xv-xvi, half-title verso blank 1 1. text 
pp. 3-630, Anhang pp. 631-653, errata p. 654, colo- 
phon verso blank 1 1.; title verso blank 11. half- 
title verso blank 11. list of subscribers pp.v-xvi, 
Inhalt pp. xvii-xix, list of plates pp. xx-xxii, 
errata 1 1. text pp. 1-425, Anhang pp. 427-687, 
colophon p. [688], 4°. Atlas in folio. 

Einige Worts (25) der Flatheads in den 

tocky Mountains, vol. 2, pp. 501-502, 

Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Eames. 

At the Field sale, no. 1512, a copy of this 
edition, together with one of the London, 1843 
edition, brought $40.50. 


Voyage | dans Vintérieur | de | 
VAmérique du Nord, | exécuté pendant 
les années 1832, 1833 et 1834, | par | le 
prince Maximilien de Wied-Neuwied. | 
Ouvrage | accompagné d’un Atlas de 80 
planches environ, | format demi-colom- 
bier, | dessinées sur les lieux | Par M. 
Charles Bodmer, | et | gravées par les 


ee 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. AT 


Maximilian (A. P.) — Continued. 


plus habiles artistes de Paris et de 
Londres. |Tome premier[-troisiéme]. | 

Paris, | chez Arthus Bertrand, édi- 
teur, | libraire de la Société de géo- 
graphie de Paris | et de la Société royale 
des antiquaires du nord, | rue Haute- 
feuille, 25. | 1840[-1843]. 

3 vols. 8°. 

Notice sur les langues de différentes nations 
au nord-ouest de l' Amérique, vol. 3, pp. 373-398, 
contains a vocabulary of 19 words of the 23 
different languages treated in the German edi- 
tion, pp. 379-382. The Flathead occupies lines 
no. 8.—De la langue des signes en usage chez 
les Indiens, pp. 389-398. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

The English edition, London, 1843, 4°, con- 
tains no Salishan linguistics. (Astor, Boston 
Atheneum, Congress, Lenox, Watkinson.) 

Alexander Philipp Maximilian, Prince of 
Neuwiced, German naturalist, born in Neuwied 
Sept. 23, 1782, died there, Feb. 3, 1867. In 1815, 
after attaining the rank of major-general in the 
Prussian army, he devoted nearly three years 
to explorations in Brazil. In 1833 he traveled 
through the United States, giving especial 
attention to ethnological investigations con 
cerning the Indian tribes.—Appleton’s Cyclop. 
of Am. Biog. 


Mengarini (fev. Gregory). A | Selish or 


Flat-head | grammar.| By the | rev. 
Gregory Mengarini, | of the Society of 
Jesus. | [Design.] | 

New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1861. 

Second title: Gramimatica | lingue Selice. | 
Auctore | P. Gregorio Mengarini, | Soc. Jesu. | 

Neo-Eboraci. | 1861. 

Halt-title (Library of American linguistics, 
TI) verso blank 1 1. English title verso blank 1 
1. Latin title verso blank 1 1. procemium pp.vii- 
viii, text in Selish and Latin pp. 1-122, 8°. 

Pars prima Grammatica linguie Selicex, pp. 
1-62.—Pars secunde, Dilucidationes in rudi- 


menta, pp. 62-78.—Pars tertia. Introductio ad | 
syntaxin, pp. 79-116.—Appendix, pp. 117-121.— | 


Oratio dominicales, with interlinear Latin 
translation, pp. 122. 


Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Brit- | 


ish Museum. Congress, Dunbar, Eames, Lenox, 
Wellesley. 


— Indians of Oregon, etc. (Note from 


Rev. Gregory Mengarini, 8. J., Vice- 
President of the College of Santa 
Clara, California. Communicated by 
Geo. Gibbs, esq.) 

In Anthropological Inst. of New York Jour. 
vol. 1, pp. 81-88, New York, 1871-1872, 8°. (Con- 
gress.) 

Numerals 1-10 of the Flathead and of the 
“South Indians,” p. 83.—A number of Salishan 
terms passim. 


Mengarini (G.) —Continued. 
—— Vocabulary of the Skoylpeli. 


In Powell (J. W.), Contributions to N. A. 
Ethnology, vol. 1, pp. 253-265, Washington, 1877, 
4°. 

Contains 180 words, those called for on one 
of the Smithsonian blank forms. 
Vocabulary of the S’chitzui or Coeur 
d’Aléne, and of the Selish proper or 
Flathead. 

In Powell (J. W.), Contributions to N. A. 
Ethnology, vol. 1, pp. 270-282, Washington, 1877, 
4°, 

Contain 180 words each, those called for on 
one of the Smithsonian blank forms. 


See Gibbs (G.) 


— See Giorda (J.) 
Montgomerie (Lieut. John Eglinton) and 


De Horsey (A. F.R.) A | few words | 
collected from the | languages | spoken 
by the Indians | in the neighbourhood 
of the | Columbia River & Puget’s 
Sound. | By John E. Montgomerie, 
Lieutenant R.N. | and Algernon F.R. 
De Horsey, Lieutenant R. R. | 

London :| printed by George R. Odell, 
18 Princess-street, Cavendish-square. | 
1848. 

Title verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. iii-iv, 
text pp. 5-30, 12°. 

Vocabulary of the Chinook, Clikitat, Cascade 
and Squally languages, pp. 1-23. Numerals in 
Squally, p.24.—Chinook proper and Chehalis 
numbers, p. 24.—Names of places, pp. 25-28. 


Copies seen: British Museum, Sir Thomas 
Phillips, Cheltenham, England. 


Morgan (Lewis Henry). Smithsonian 


Contributions to Knowledge. | 218 | 
Systems | of | consanguinity and affin- 
ity | of the | human family. | By | 
Lewis H. Morgan. | 

Washington city: | published by the 
Smithsonian institution. | 1871. 

Colophon: Published by theSmithsonian in- 
stitution, | Washington city, | June, 1870. 

Title on cover as above, inside title differing 
from above in imprint verso blank 1 1. adver- 
tisement p. iii, preface pp. v-ix verso blank, 
contents pp. Xi-xii, text pp. 1-583, index pp. 
585--590, 14 plates, 4°. 

Also forms vol. 17 of Smithsonian Contribu- 
tions to Knowledge. Such issues have no cover 
title, but-the general title of the series and 6 
other prel. ll. preceding the inside title. 

The Salish Nations (pp. 244-249) is a general 
discussion of ‘‘the Salish stock language, 
spoken in the seventeen dialects above enumer- 
ated” and contains many examples from Gibbs’ 
manuscripts, pp. 245-246, and Mengarini’s 
Selish Grammar, pp. 246-249. 


48 


Morgan (L. H.) — Continued. 

Terms of relationship used by the Okinaken, 
collected by Mr. Morgan at Red River Settle- 
ment, from an Okinaken woman. lines 70, pp. 
293-382. 

Gibbs (G.), Terms of relationship used by 
the Spokane, lines 69, pp. 293-382. 

Copiesseen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling, Trum- 
bull. 

At the Squier sale,no.889, a copy sold for $5.50. 
Quaritch, no. 12425,* priced a copy 41. 

Lewis H. Morgan was born in Aurora, Cayuga 
County, N.Y., November 21, 1818. He was grad- 
uated by Union College, Schenectady, in the 
class of 1840. Returning from college to Aurora, 
Mr. Morgan joined a secret society composed of 
the young men of the village and known as the 
Grand Order of the Iroquois. This had a great 
influence upon his future career and studies. 
The order was instituted for sport and amuse- 
ment, but its organization was modeled on the 
governmental system of the Six Nations; and, 
chiefly under Mr. Morgan’s direction and lead- 
ership, the objects of the order were extended, 
if not entirely changed, and its purposes 
improved. To become better acquainted with 
the social polity of the Indians, young Morgan 
visited the aborigines remaining in New York, 
a mere remnant, but yet retaining to a great 
extent their ancient laws and customs; and he 
went so far as to be adopted as a member by the 
Senecas. Before the council of the order, in 
the years 1844, 1845, and 1846, he read a series of 
papers on the Iroquois, which were published 
under the nom de plume of ‘‘Skenandoah.” Mr. 
Morgan died in Rochester, N. Y., December 17, 
1881. | 


N. 


Wanaimoo. See Snanaimuk. 


National Museum: These words following a title 
or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen 
by the compiler in the library of that institu- 
tion, Washington, D.C. | 


Nechaumen lu kaeks-auatm [Kalispell]. 
See Canestrelli (P.) 


Wehelim: 
Texts See Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 


Neklakapamuk. See Netlakapamuk. 


Nelh te skoalwtz Jesu-kri [Lilowat]. 
See Le Jeune (J.M. R.) 


Wetlakapamuk: 
Catechism 
General discussion 
Grammatic treatise 


See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 


Miiller (Friedrich). 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Morning and evening prayer ... 


Neklakapamuk, See Good (J. B.) 


Grundriss | der | 
Sprachwissenschaft | von | D". Fried- 
rich Miller | Professor[&c. three lines. ] 

| I. Band | I. Abtheilung. | Einleitung 
in die Sprachwissenschaft[-IV. Band. 
| I. Abtheilung. | Nachtriige zum Grund- 
riss aus den Jahren | 1877-1887]. | 

Wien 1876[-1888]. | Alfred Holder | K. 
K. Universitiits-Buchhindler, | Roth- 
enthurmstrasse 15. 

4 vols. (vol.1 in 2 parts, vol. 2 originally in 4 
divisions, vol.3 originally in 4 divisions, vol. 4 
part 1 all published), each part and division 
with an outside title and two inside titles, 8°. 

Vol. 2, part 1, which includes the American 
languages, was originally issued in two divi- 
sions, each with the following special title: 


Die Sprachen | der | schlichthaarigen Rassen 
| von | D". Friedrich Muller | Professor [&c. 
eight lines.] | I. Abtheilung. | DieSprachen der 
australischen, der hyperboreischen | und der 
amerikanischen Rasse [sie]. | 

Wien 1879[-1882]. | Alfred Hélder| &. K. 
Hof- und Universitats-Buchhindler | Rothen- 
thurmstrasse 15. 

Title verso ‘alle Rechte vorbehalten” 1 1. 
dedication verso blank 11. Vorrede pp. vii-viii, 
Inhalt pp. ix-x, text pp. 1-440, 8°. 

Die Sprache der Tsibaili-Selisch, vol. 2, part 
1, division 2, p. 243. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Eames, Watkinson, 


Netlakapamuk — Continued. 


Grammatic treatise Good (J. B.) 
Hymn-book Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Hymns Good (J. B.) 
Hymns Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Litany Good (J. B.) 


Lord’s prayer Bancroft (H. H.) 


Lord's prayer 
Lord's prayer 
Numerals 
Prayer book 
Prayer book 


Good (J. B.) 
Youth’s. 

Good (J. B.) 
Good (J. B.) 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 


Prayers Good (J. B.) 
Prayers Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Primer Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Ten commandments Good (J. B.) 

Text Good (J. B.) 

Text Le Jeune (J. M. BR.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 

Words Bulmer (T.S,) 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Nicoll (Edward Holland). The Chinock | Nuksahk: 


49 


language or Jargon. Vocabulary See Gatschet (A.S.) 
In Popular Science Monthly, vol. 35, pp. 257- Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
261, New York, 1889, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology, Winey Bochug (B. L.0.) 
Pilling.) Nukwalimok: 
Origin of the Chinook Jargon, including Gentes See Boas (F.) 
words from a number of sources, among them 
the Chehalis, pp. 257-259. righ 
Bilkula See Boas (F.) 
Wicoutemuch. See Nikutamuk. Bilkula Latham (R. G.) 
rie ttarn ule: Bilkula Scouler (J ) 
Numerals See Eells (M.) ae eee (W. FE.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) ee a sede ie (J. E.) 
= > - 1enhalis Lon gomerie od. . 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) Chehalis Swan (J.G.) 
Niskwalli: Kalispel Eells (M.) 
Dictionary See Gibbs (G.) Kawichen Eells (M.) 
Dictionary Powell (J. W.) Kawichen Scouler (J.) 
General discussion Featherman (A.) Kawichen Tolnie (W. F.) 
General discussion Hale (H.) Klallam Fells (M.) 
General discussion Tolmie (W. F.) and Klallam Grant (W.C.) 
Dawson (G. M.) Kdallam Seouler (J.) 
Geographic names _—_Coones (S. F.) Klallam Tolmie (W. F.) 
Geographic names Eells (M.) Komuk Brinton (D. G.) 
Geographic names Wickersham (J.) Komuk Eells (M.) 
Grammatic treatise Bulmer (T.S.) Kwantlen Eells (M.) 
Grammatic treatise Eells (M.) Kwinaiutl Eells (M.) 
Hymns Bulmer (T.S.) Lilowat Eells (M.) 
Hymns Eells (M.) Lummi Eells (M.) 
Lord’s prayer Bulmer (T.S.) Netlakapamuk Good (J. B.) 
Lord’s prayer Youth's. Nikutamuk Eells (M.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) Niskwalli Eells (M.) 
Numerals Gibbs (G.) Niskwalli Gibbs (G.) 
Numerals Montgomerie (J. E.) Niskwalli Montgomerie (J. E.) 
Numerals Scouler (J.) Niskwalli Scouler (J.) 
Vocabulary Campbell (J.) Niskwalli Tolmie (W. F.) 
Vocabulary Canadian. Okinagan Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Fells (M.) Okinagan Scouler (J.) 
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) Okinagan Tolmie (J.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) Piskwau Fells (M.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) Salish Bulmer (T.S.) 
Vocabulary Montgomerie (J. E.) Salish Eells (M.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) Salish Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Salish. Salish Hoffman (W.J.) 
Vocabulary Scouler (J.) Salish Mengarini (G.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) Salish Salish. 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and Shiwapmuk Fells (M.) 
Dawson (G. M.) Shuswap Dawson (G. M.) 
Vocabulary Wickersham (J.) Shuswap Eells (M.) 
Vocabulary Wilson (E. F.) Skagit Eells (M.) 
Words Bancroft (H. H.) Skitsuish Eells (M.) 
Words Bulmer (T.S.) Skokomish Eells (M.) 
Words Buschmann (J. C. E.) Skoyelpi Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Words Chamberlain (A. F.) Skoyelpi Eells (M.) 
Words Daa (L. K.) Snanaimuk Eells (M.) 
W ords Gibbs (G.) Songish Fells (M.) 
Words Latham (R. G.) Spokan Eells (M.) 
Words Lubbock (J.) Tait Eells (M.) 
Words Pott (A. F.) Twana Eells (M.) 
Words Youth’s. 


WNusdalum. See Klallam. 


Wisqualli. See Niskwalli. Nuskiletemh. See Nukwalimuk. 


Nooksahk. See Nuksahk. 


Nusulph: 
Noosdalum. See Klallam. Vocabulary See Gibbs (G.) 
Wsietshawus. See Tilamuk. Vocabulary toehrig (F. L. 0.) 


SAL 4 


50 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


O. 


Office for public baptism . . . Nekla- | Okinagan — Continued. 


kapamuk. See Good (J. B.) 


Office for the holy communion . 
Neklakapamuk. See Good (J. B.) 


Okinagan: 
Grammatic treatise See Boas (F.) 
Hymns Tate (C. M.) 
Numerals Boas (F.) 
Numerals Scouler (J.) 
Numerals Tolmie (W. F.) 
Prayers Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Proper names Ross (A.) 
Proper names Stanley (J. M.) 
Relationships Boas (F.) 
Relationships Morgan (L. H.) 
Relationships Ross (A.) 
Sentences Scouler (J.) 
Sentences Tolmie (W. F.) 


rt 


Petitot (KE. F. S.J.) — Continued. 


[Palladine (Rev. L.)] Promissiones 
Domini Nostri Jesu Christi factae B. 
Marg. M. Alacoque. | T kaekolinzuten 
Jesus Christ | zogshits lu pagpagt 
Margarite Marie Alacoque | neu I’shei 
m’ageists lu potenzitis | lu spoosz 
Jesus Christ. 

Colophon: P. A. Kemper, Dayton, O. 
(N. America.) [1890.] Selish, Indian. 

A small ecard, 3 by 5 inches in size, headed as 
above and containing twelve ‘‘ Promises of 
Our Lord to Blessed Margaret Mary” in the 
Selish language. On the verso is a colored 
picture of the sacred heart, with five-line 
inscription below in English. 

Mr. Kemper has issued a similar card in 
many languages. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

Pend d’Oreille. See Kalispel. 


Pentlash: 
Legends See Boas (}F'.) 
Text Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Words Boas (F.) 


Petitot (Pére Emile Fortuné Stanislas 
Joseph). Monographie | des | Dene- 
Dindjié | par | le r. p. E. Petitot | Mis- 
sionnaire-Oblat de Marie-Immaculée, 
Officier d’Académie, | Membre corre- 
spondant de l’Académie de Nancy, | de 
la Société d’ Anthropologie | et Membre 
honoraire de la Société de Philologie 
et d’Ethnographie de Paris. | 

Paris | Ernest Leroux, éditeur | li- 
braire de la Société asiatique de Paris, | 


Texts Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (¥F.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Howse (J.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
‘Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Vocabulary Scouler (J.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) 
Words Daa (L. K.) 


Oppert (Gustav). On the classification 


of languages. <A contribution to com-. 
parative philology. 

In Madras Journal of Literature and Science 
for 1879. pp. 1-137, London, 1879, 8°. 


Relationships of the Selish family (from 
Morgan), pp. 110-112. 


de Vécole des langues orientales vi- 
vantes et des Sociétés asiatiques de Cal- 
cutta, | deNew-Haven (Etats-Unis), de 
Shanghai (Chine) | 28, rue Bonaparte, 
28 | 1876 


Cover title as above, half-title verso name of 
printer 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. text 
pp. 1-109, list of publications 1 1. 8°. 

Verbal conjugations in Wakish (Tétes 
Plates), p. 104.—Vocabulary (8 words) of the 
same, p. 105. 

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, Eames, Pilling. 


De la formation du langage; mots 
formés par le redoublement de racines 
hétérogénes, quoique de signification 
synonyme, c’est-a-dire par réitération 
copulative. 

In Association francaise pour l’avancement 
des sciences, compte-rendu, 12th session (Rouen, 
1883), pp. 697-701, Paris, 1884,8°. (Geological 
Survey, Pilling.) 

Contains examples in a number of North 
American languages, among them the Stahkin. 


mile Fortunas Stanislas Joseph Petitot was 
porn December 3, 1838, at Grancey-le-Chateau, 
department of Céte-d’Or, Burgundy, France. 
His studies were pursued at Marseilles, first at 
the Institution St. Louis and later at the higher 
seminary of Marseilles, which he entered in 1857. 
He was made deacon at Grenoble, and priest at 
Marseilles March 15, 1862. A few days thereafter 
he went to Englandand sailed for America. At 
Montreal he found Monseigneur Taché, bishop 
of St. Boniface, with whom he set out for the 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 51 


Petitot (E. F. S.J.) — Continued. 

Northwest, where he was continuously engaged 
in missionary work amoug the Indians and 
Eskimos until 1874, when he returned to France 
to supervise the publication of some of his 


works on linguistics and geography. In 1876 | 


he returned to the missions and spent another 
period of nearly six years in the Northwest. In 
1882 he once more returned to his native 
country, where he has since remained. In 1886 
he was appointed to the curacy of Mareuil, 


near Meaux, which he still retains. The many 


years he spent in the inhospitable Northwest 
were busy and eventful ones and afforded an 
opportunity for geographic, linguistic, and 
ethnologic observations and studies such as 
few have enjoyed. He was the first missionary 
to visit Great Bear Lake, which he did for the 
first time in 1866. He went on foot from Good 
Hope to Providence twice and made many tours 
in winter of forty or fifty days’ length on snow- 
shoes. He was the first missionary to the 
Eskimos of the Northwest, having visited them 
in 1865, at the mouth of the Anderson, likewise 
in 1868 at the mouth of the Mackenzie, and in 
1870 and again in 1877 at Fort McPherson on 
Peel River. In 1870 his travels extended into 
Alaska. In 1878 an attack of blood-spitting 
eaused him to return south. He went on foot to 
Athabaska, whence he passed to the Saskatch- 
ewan in a bark. In 1879 he established the 
mission of St. Raphael, at Angling Lake, for 
the Chippewayans of that region, where he 
remained until his final departure for France 
in January, 1882. 

For an account of his linguistic work among 
the Eskimauan, Algonquian, and Athapascan 
see the bibliographies of these families. 


Pilling: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to is in the possession of the 
compiler of this bibliography. 


Pilling (James Constantine). Smithson- 
ian institution—Bureau of ethnology | 
J. W. Powell director | Proof-sheets | of 
a | bibliography | of | the languages | 
of the | North American Indians | by | 
James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib- 
uted only to collaborators) | 

Washington | Government printing 
office | 1885 


Title verso blank 1 1. notice signed J. W. 
Powell p. iii, preface pp. v—viii, introduction pp. 
ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of 
libraries referred to by initials pp. xxxvii- 
xxxviii, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix—xl, text 
pp. 1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, 
index of languages and dialects pp. 1091-1135, 
plates, 4°. 

Arranged alphabetically by name of author, 
translator, or first word of title. One hundred 
and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side 
of the sheet only. 


Pinart (Alphonse L.) Vocabulary of the 


Atnah language. @) 

Manuscript, 9C pages folio; in possession of 
its author. Russian and Atnah; collected at 
Kadiak in 1872. Whether itis Athapascan or 
Salishan I do not know; probably the latter. 

Some years ago,in response to my request, 
Mr. Pinart furnished me with arough listof the 
linguistic manuscripts in his possession, col- 
lected by himself, embracing vocabularies, 
texts andsongs. Circumstancesprevented him 
from giving me detailed descriptions of this ma-, 
terial, which embraced the following Salishan 
languages: Comux, Nanaimo, Belahoola, Cowit- 
chin, Shushwap (several dialects), Clallam, 
Lummi, Kwinault (two dialects), Chehalis, 
Niskwali, Spokan, Cceur d’Alene, Pend 
d‘Oreille, and Kalispel. 


Piskwau: 
General discussion See Hale (H.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Words Bancroft (H. H.) 
Words Gallatin (A.) 
Words Hale (H.) 


Pisquous. See Piskwau. 


Platzmann (Julius). Verzeichniss | einer 
Auswahl | amerikanischer | Gramma- 
tiken, | Worterbiicher, Katechismen | 
u. s. w. | Gesammelt | von | Julius 
Platzmann. | 

Leipzig, 1876. | K. F. Kéhler’s .Anti- 
quarium, | Poststrasse 17. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. quotation 
from Rouquette verso blank 1 1. text (alphabet- 
ically arranged by family names) pp. 1-38, 8°. 

List of works in Clallam, p.12; in Selish, pp. 
36-37. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling, Trum- 
bull, Wellesley. 


Ponderay. See Kalispel. 


Pott (August Friedrich). Doppelung | 
(Reduplikation, Gemination) | als | 
eines der wichtigsten Bildungsmittel 
der Sprache, | beleuchtet| aus Sprachen 
aller Welttheile | durch | Aug. Friedr. 
Pott, Dr. | Prof. der Allgemeinen 
Sprachwiss. an der Univ. zu Halle [&e. 
two lines. ] | 

Lemgo & Detmold, | im Verlage der 
Meyer’schen Hof buchhandlung 1862. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso quo- 
tation 1 1. preface pp.iii-iv, contents pp. v—vi, 
text pp. 1-304, list of books on verso of back 
cover, 8°, 


52 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Pott (A. I.) — Continued. Powell (J. W.) — Continned. 


Contains examples of reduplication in many 
North American languages, among them the 
Flathead, pp. 42, 60,62,90; Nsietschaw, pp. 54, 
62; Selish, pp. 183, 184; Skitsuish, p. 42; Skwale, 
p. 42. 

Jopies seen: Astor, British Museum, Eames. 


— Einleitung in die allgemeine Sprach- 
wissenschaft. 

In Internationale Zeitschrift fiir allgemeine 
Sprachwissenschaft, vol. 1, pp. 1-68, 329-354, vol. 
2, pp. 54-115, 209-251, vol. 3, pp. 110-126, 249-275, 
Supp. pp. 1-193, vol. 4, pp. 67-96, vol. 5, pp. 3-18, 
Leipzig, 1884-1887, and Heilbronn, 1889, large 8°. 

The literature of American linguistics, vol. 4, 
pp. 67-96. This portion was published after Mr. 
Pott’s death, which occurred July 5,1887. The 
general editor of the Zeitschrift, Mr. Techmer, 
states in a note that Pott’s paper is continued 
from the manuscripts which he left and that it 
is to close with the languages of Australia. In 
the section of American linguistics publica- 
tions in all the more important stocks of North 
America are mentioned, with brief characteri- 
zation. 


Powell: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after anote indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piier in the library of Major J. W. Powell, 
Washington, D.C. 


Powell (Maj. John Wesley). Indian lin- 


guistic families of America north of 
Mexico. By J. W. Powell. 


In Bureau of Ethnology, seventh annual 
report, pp. 1-142, Washington, 1891, royal 8°. 

Salishan family, with a list of synonyms and 
principal tribes, derivation of the name, hab- 
itat, etc., pp. 102-105. 

Issued separately with cover title as follows: 
—— Indian linguistic families of America 
| north of Mexico | by | J. W. Powell 
| Extract from the seventh annual 
report of the Bureau of ethnology | 
[Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing 
office | 1891 


Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title 


p- 1, contents pp. 3-6, text pp. 7-142, map, royal | 


8°. 
Linguistic contents as under title next above. 


Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, | 


Pilling, Powell. 
in charge. Department of the inte- 
rior. | U. 8S. geographical and geolog- 
ical survey of the Rocky mountain 
region. | J. W. Powell, Geologist in 
Charge. | Contributions | to | North 
American ethnology. | VolumeI[-VIIJ]. 
| [Seal of the department. ] | 
Washington: | Government printing 
office. | 1877[-1890]. 


7 vols. 4°. Vol. I, 1877; vol. II (parts 1 and 2), 
1890; vol. III, 1877; vol. IV, 1881; vol. V, 1882; 
vol. VI, 1890; vol. VII, 1890. 

Gibbs (G.), Vocabulary of the Shihwapmukh, 

vol. 1, pp. 252-265. 
— Vocabulary of the Nikutemukh, vol. 1, 
pp. 252-265. 
Vocabulary of the Okinaken, vol. 1, pp. 
252-265. 
— Vocabulary of the Shwoyelpi, vol. 1, pp. 
252-265, 
— Vocabulary of the Spokan, vol. 1, pp. 252- 
265. 
— Vocabulary of the Piskwaus, vol. 1, pp. 

252-265. 

—— Vocabulary of the Kalispelm, vol. 1, pp. 

270-283. 

Vocabulary of the Bilhoola, vol. 1, pp. 270- 

283. 

-— Vocabulary of the Lilowat, vol. 1, pp. 270- 
233. 

— Vocabulary of the Tait, pp. 270-283 

—— Vocabulary of the Komookhs, vol. 1, pp. 
270-283. 

Vocabulary of the Kuwalitsk, vol. 1, pp. 
270-283. 

—— Dictionary of the Niskwalli: Niskwalli- 
English, vol. 1, 285-307. 

—— Dictionary of the Niskwalli: English- 
Nisk walli, vol. 1, pp. 309-361. 

Mengarini (G.), Vocabulary of the Skoyelpeli, 
vol. 1, pp. 252-265. 

— Vocabulary of the Schitzui, vol. 1, pp. 270- 
283. 

— Vocabulary of the Selish proper, vol. 1, 
pp. 270-283. 

Tolmie (W. F.), Vocabulary of the Shoos- 
waap, vol. 1, pp. 252-265. 

— Vocabulary of the Wakynakaine, vol. 1, 
pp. 252-265. 

—— Vocabulary of the Kullespelm, vol. 1, pp. 

270-283. 


Prayer book: 


Netlakapamuk See Good (J. B.) 
Netlakapamuk Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Shuswap Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Snohomish Boulet (J. B.) 


Prayer book and catechism .. ; 


Snohomish. See Boulet (J. B.) 


Prayers: 
Kalispel See Canestrelli (P.) 
Kalispel Smet (P. J. de). 
Netlakapamuk Good (J. B.) 
Netlakapamuk Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Okinagan Le Jeune (J. M. RB.) 
Salish Canestrelli (P.) 
Salish Palladine (L.) 
Samish Smet (P. J. de). 
Shuswap Gendre (—) 
Shuswap Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Skitsuish Caruana (J. M.) 
Skwamish Durieu (P.) 
Snanaimuk Boas (F.) 
Stalo Durieu (P.) 
Twana Eells (M.) 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 53 


Prayers in Shushwap. See Le Jeune (J. 
M. R.) 
Prayers in Shuswap. See Gendre (—). 
Prayers in Thompson. See Le Jeune 
(J.M. R.) 
Prichard (James Cowles). Researches | 
into the | physical history | of | man- 
kind. | By | James Cowles Prichard, 
M.D. F.R.S. M.R.I. A. | correspond- 
ing member [&c. three lines.] | Third 
edition. | Vol. I[-V]. | 

London: | Sherwood, Gilbert, and 
Piper, | Paternoster row; | and J. and 
A. Arch, | Cornhill. | 1856[-1847]. 


5 vols. 8°. The words ‘‘ Third edition,” which 
are contained on the titles of vols. 1-4 (dated 
respectively 1836, 1837, 1841, 1844), are noton the 
title of vol. 5. Vol. 3 was originally issued with a 
title numbered ‘‘Vol. IJI.—Part I.” This title 
was afterward canceled and a new one (num- 
bered ‘‘Vol. II1.’’) substituted in its place. Vol. 
1 was reissued with a new title containing the 
words ‘‘Fourth edition’ and bearing the im- 
print ‘‘ London: | Sherwood, Gilbert, and Piper, 
| Paternoster row. | 1841.’ (Astor); and again 
“Fourth edition. | Vol. 1. | London: | Houlston 
and Stoneman, | 65, Paternoster row. | 1851.” 
(Congress, Harvard.) According to Sabin’s 
Dictionary (no. 65477, note), vol. 2 also appeared 
in a ‘‘ Fourth edition,” with the latter imprint. 
These several issues differ only in the insertion 
of new titles in the placés of the original titles. 

Brief reference to the Salishan family, its 
divisions and affinities, vol. 5, pp. 437-438. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenzum, 
Congress, Eames. 

The earlier editions, London, 1813, 8°, and 
London, 1826,2 vols.. 8°, contain no Salishan 
material. 

Naturgeschichte | des | Menschen- 
geschlechts | von | James Cowles Prich- 


ard, | Med. D. [ &c. three lines.] | Nach 


Prichard (J. C.) — Continued. 

der [&c. three lines] | von | Dr. Ru- 
dolph Wagner, | [&c. one line.]| Erster 
[-Vierter] Band. | 

Leipzig, | verlag von Leopold Bosk. 

| 1840[-1848]. | 

4 vols.; vol. 4in two parts, 12°. A translation 
of the 5 vol. edition of the Physical History. 

Discussion of American languages, vol. 4, pp. 
311-341, 357-363, 458. 

Copies seen; British Museum. 


Primer: 
Netlakapamuk See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Spokan Walker (#.) 2nd Eells(C.) 


Primer. . . in Thompson. See 
Le Jeune (J. M.R.) 


Promissiones Domini Nostri Jesu 
Christi [Cceur d’Aléne]. See Caruana 
(J.M.) 


Promissiones Domini Nostri Jesu 
Christi [Lilowat and Netlapamuk]. 
See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 


Promissiones Domini Nostri Jesu 
Christi[Salish]. See Palladine (L.) 


Proper names: 


Okinagan See Ross (A.) 
Okinagan Stanley (J.M.) 
Salish Catlin (G.) 
Shuswap Dawson (G. M.) 
Songish Macdonald (D. G. F.) 
Spokan Catlin (G.) 
Spokan Stanley (J. M.) 
Puyallup: 
Geographic names See Coones (S. F.) 
Geographic names Eells (M.) 
Grammatic treatise McCaw (S. R.) 
Sentences McCaw (S. R.) 
Vocabulary McCaw (S. R.) 
Vocabulary Salish. 


Q. R. 


Queniult. See Kwinaiutl. 


Relationships: 

Bilkula’ See Boas (F.) 
Okinagan Boas (F.) 
Okinagan Morgan (L. H.) 
Okinagan Ross (A.) 
Salish Oppert (G.} 
Shuswap Boas (I.) 
Skokomish Boas (F.) 
Spokan Gibbs (G.) 
Spokan Morgan (L. H.) 


Report of the governor of Washington 
territory. See Squire (W.C.) 


Roehrig (F. L.O.) Comparative vocab- 
ulary of the Selish languages. 

Manuscript, 47 leaves folio, written on one 
side only. In the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology. 

The vocabulary, consisting of 180 words, is 
arranged by English words as headings, equiv- 
alents in the following languages being given 
under each: Selish proper or Flathead, Kalis- 
pelm, Spokan, Skoyelpi, Okinaken, Schitsui, 
Schwapmuth, and Piskwaus. 

Comparative Vocabulary of the 
Selish languages. IInd series. Ithaca, 
N.Y. November 15th, 1870. 


54 


Roehrig (F. L. O.) — Continued. 

Manuscript, 86 leaves, 4°, written on one side 
only. In the library of the Bureau of Ethnol- 
ogy. 

The vocabulary, consisting of 180 words, is 
arranged by English words as headings, equiv- 
alents in the following languages being given 
under each: Clallam, Lummi, Nooksahk, 
Nanaimook, Kwantlen, and Tait. 


-—— Synoptical vocabulary of the Selish 
languages. 

Manuscript, 
written on both sides. 
Bureau of Ethnology. 

The vocabulary, consisting of 180 words, is 
arranged in 15 columns as follows: English, 
Clallam, Lummi, Noeoksahk, Nanaimook, 
Kwantlen, Tait, Toanhooch, Noosolupsh, 
Skagit, Komookh, Kwinaiutl, Cowlitz, Lilowat, 
and Belhboola. 


8 unnumbered leaves folio, 
In the library of the 


Ross (Alexander). Adventures | of the 
first settlers on the | Oregon or Colum- 
bia river: | being | a narrative of the 
expedition fitted out by | John Jacob 
Astor, | to establish the | ‘‘ Pacific fur 
company ;” | with an account of some 
| Indian tribes on the coast of the 
Pacific. | By Alexander Ross, | one of 
the adventurers. | 

London: | Smith, Elder and co., 65, 
Cornhill. | 1849. 


S. 


Sabin (Joseph). <A | dictionary | of | 
Books relating to America, | from its 
discovery to the present time. | By 
Joseph Sabin. | Volume I[-XXj]. | 
[Three lines quotation. ] | 

New-York: | Joseph Sabin, 84 Nassau 
street. | 1868[-1892]. 

20 vols. 8°. Still in course of publication. 
Parts exv-cxvi, which begin vol. xx, reach the 
article ‘‘Smith.’? Now edited by Mr. Wilber- 
force Eames. 

Contains titles of a number of books in and | 
relating to the Salishan languages. l 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Geological 
Survey, Lenox. 

See Field (T. W.) 
St. Onge (Rev. Louis Napoleon). 
Bulmer (T.S.) 

“The subject of this sketch, the Rev. Louis | 
N. St. Onge, of St. Alphonse de Liguori parish, 
was born [in the village of St. Cesaire] a few | 
miles south of Montreal, Canada, April 14, 1842. 


He finished his classical course when yet very 
young, after which he studied law fortwoyears. | 


See 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Ross (A.) — Continued. 


Title verso names of printers 11. preface pp. 
lii-v, contents pp. vii-xv, errata p. [xvi], text 
pp. 1-352, map, 12°. 

Relationships of the Okinackens and per- 
sonal names, p. 326. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Ath- 
eneum, British Museum, Bureauof Ethnology, 
Congress, Trumbull. 


Alexander Ross, author, born in Nairnshire, 
Scotland, May 9, 1783, died in Colony Gardens 
(now in Winnipeg, Manitoba), Red River Settle- 
ment, British North America, October 23, 1856. 
He came to Canada in 1805, taught in Glengarry, 
U.C.,and in 1810 joined John Jacob Astor’s 
expendition to Oregon. Until 1824 he was a fur- 
trader and in the service of the Hudson Bay 
Company. About 1825 he removed to the Red 
River settlement and was a member of the 
councilof Assineboia, and was sheriff of the Red 
River settlement for several years. He was for 
fifteen years a resident in the territories of the 
Hudson Bay Company, and has given the result 
of his observations in the works: Adventures 
of the First Settlers on the Oregon or Columbia 
River; being a Narrative of the Expedition 
fitting out by John Jacob Astor to establish 
the Pacific Fur Company, with an Account of 
some Indian Tribes on the Coast of the Pacific 
(London, 1849); The Fur-Hunters of the Far 
West, a Narrative of Adventures in the Oregon 
and Rocky Mountains (2 vols. 1855),and The Red 
River Settlement (1856).—Appleton’s Cyclop. of 
Am. Biog. 


St. Onge (L. N.) — Continued. 


Feeling called to another field, he gave up this 
career in order to prepare himself to work for 
God’s glory as an Indian missionary in the 
diocese of Nesqually, Washington Territory. 

“A year and a half before his ordination, 
Right Rey. A. M. Blanchet, his bishop, ordered 
him to Vancouver, W. T., where he was occupied 
as a professor of natural philosophy, astron- 
omy, and other branches in the Holy Angel’s 
College. All his spare time was consecrated to 
the study of the Indian languages, in which he 
is to-day one of the most expert, so that he was 
ready to go on active missionary werk as soon 
as ordained. 

‘The first years of his missionary life were 
occupied in visiting different tribes of Indians 
and doing other missionary work in the Terri- 
toriesof Washington, Idaho, Montana, and other 
Rocky Mountain districts, among Indians and 
miners. Aftersuchlabors he was thenappointed 
to take charge of the Yakamas, Klikitats, 
Winatchas, Wishrams, Pshwanwapams, Nar- 
chez, and other Indian tribes inhabiting the 
central part of Washington Territory. Having 
no means of support in his new mission, Bishop 


a 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 55 


St. Onge (L. N.) — Continued. 


Blanchet, in his self-sacrificing charity for the 
Indians of his extensive diocese, furnished him 
witb the necessary outfit; and with anumber of 
willing though unskilled Indians as apprentice 
carpenters, the young missionary set to work to 
rebuild the St. Joseph’s mission, destroyed in 
1856 by a party of vandals called the Oregon 
Volunteers, who had been sent to fight the 
Yakamas. 

“‘ After four years of labor, he and his devoted 
companion, Mr. J. B. Boulet (now ordained and 
stationed among the Tulalip Indians) had the 
satisfaction to see not only a comfortable resi- 
dence, but also a neat church, erected, and a 
fine tract of land planted with fruit trees, and 
in a profitable state of cultivation, where 
formerly only ruin and desolation reigned. 

‘* His health breaking down entirely, he was 
forced to leave his present and daily increasing 
congregation of neophites. Wishing to give him 
the best medical treatment, Bishop Blanchet 
sent Father St. Onge to his native land with a 


leave of absence until his health would be | 
restored. During his eighteen months’ stayin | 


a hospital he, however, utilized his time by 


composing and printing two small Indian 


books, containing rulesof grammar, catechism, 


- hymns, and Christian prayers in Yakama and 


Chinook languages, the former for children, the 
latter for the use of missionaries on the Pacific 
coast. 

‘* By the advice of his physician he then 
undertook a voyage to Europe, where he spent 
nearly a year in search of health. Back again 
to this country, he had charge of acongregation 


for a couple of years in Vermont; and now heis | 


the pastor of the two French churches of Glens | 


Falls and Sandy Hills, in the diocese of Albany, 
New York. 


‘Father St. Onge, though a man of uncom- | 
mon physical appearance, stoutly built and six | 


feet and four inches in height, has not yet 


entirely recovered his health and strength. The | 


French population of Glens Falls have good | 


cause for feeling very much gratified with the 
present condition of the affairs of the parish of 
St. Alphonse de Liguori, and should receive the 


hearty congratulations of the entire commu- | 
nity. Father St. Onge, aman of great erudition, | 


adevoted servant to the church, and possessing 


a personality whose geniality and courtesy | 


haye won him a place in the hearts of his peo- 


ple, has by his faithful application to his parish | 


developed it and brought out all that was to 
jnure to its benefit and further advance its inter- 
ests.”—Glens Falls (N. Y.) Republican, Mareh 
28, 1889. 


Father St. Onge remained at Glens Falls until 
October, 1891, when increasing infirmities com- 
pelled him to retire permanently from the min 
istry. He is now living with his brother, the 
rector of St. Jean Baptiste church, in Troy, N. 
Y. Since his retirement he has compiled an 
English-Chinook Jargon dictionary of about six 
thousand words, and this he intends to supple- 


Salish. 


St. Onge (L. N.) —Continued. 


ment with a corresponding Jargon-English 
part. He has also begun the preparation of a 
Yakama dictionary, which he hopes to make 
much more compiete than that of Father Pan- 
dosy, published in Dr. Shea’s Library of Amer- 
ican linguistics. 

T have adopted the spelling of his nameas it 
appears on the title-page of his work ‘“‘Yakama 
Alphabet,” etc., though the true spelling, and 
the one he uses now, is Saintonge—that of a 
French province in which his ancestors lived 
and from which four or five families came in 
1696, all adopting the name. His family name 
is Payant. 


[Vocabularies of some of the 


Indian tribes of Northwest America. ] 

Manuscript, 2 vols., 82 pages folio. Bought 
by the Library of Congress at Washington, at 
the sale of the library of the late Mr. Geo. Brin- 
ley, the sale catalogue of which says they came 
from the library of Dr. John Pickering, to 
whom, probably, they were presented by Mr. 
Duponceau. They were presented ‘‘ to Peter 
S. Duponceau, Esq., with J. K. Townshend’s 
respects. Fort Vancouver, Columbia River, 
September, 1835.” 

“Specimens [72 words] of a language 
spoken by the following tribes in Puget Sound, 
viz: the Nisqually, Poo-yal-aw-poo, Tough-no- 
waw-mish, Lo-qua-mish, Skay-wa-mish, and 
Too-wanne-noo.”’ 


Salish. Vocabulary of the language of the 
Salish or the Flathead nation occupy- 


ing the sources of the Columbia. 

Manuscript, in the library of the American 
Philosophical Society, Philadelphia, Pa. It 1s 
a copy made by Mr. Duponcean, and forms no. 
lxiii of a collection recorded by him in a folio 
account book, of which it occupies pp. 219-220. 
It is written four columns to the page, two in 
English, two in Salishan, and contains about 120 
words and the numerals 1-10. 


Salish: 
Catechism See Canestrelli (P.) 
Classification Bancroft (H. H.) 
Classification Bates (H. W.) 
Classification Beach (W. W.) 
Classification Berghaus (1H.) 
Classification Boas (F.) 
Classification Brinton (D.G.) 
Classification Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Classification Dawson (G. M.) 
Classification Drake (S. G.) 
Classification Eells (M.) 
Classification yallatin (A.) 


Gatschet (A. 8.) 
Gibbs (G.) 


Classification 
Jassification 


Classification Haines (E. M.) 
Classification Keane (A. H.) 
Classification Latham (R. G.) 
Classification Platzmann (J.) 
Classification Powell (J. W.) 
Classification Prichard (J. C.) 
Classification Sayce (A. H.) 


Salish — Continued. 


Classification 
Classification 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
Geographic names 
Grammar 
Grammatic treatise 
Grammatic treatise 
Grammatic treatise 
Grammatic treatise 
Grammatic treatise 
Legends 

Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 

Prayers 

Prayers 

Proper names 
Relationships 
Relationships 
Sentences 
Sentences 
Sentences 

Text 

Text 

Tribal names 
Tribal names 
Tribal names 
Tribal names 
Tribal names 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Words 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Schooleraft (H. R.) 
Trumbull (J. H.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Beach (W. W.) 
Berghaus (H.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Drake (S. G.) 
Featherman (A.) 
Gabelentz (H. G. C.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Gatschet (A.S.) 
Hale (H.) 
Miiller (F.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Mengarini (G.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Hale (H.) 
Petitot (E. F. S.J.) 
Shea (J. G.) 
Hoffman (W.J.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Marietti (P.) 
Shea (J. G.) 
Smet (P. J. de). 
Youth’s. 

Bulmer (T.S8.) 
Fells (M.) 

Gibbs (G.) 
Hoffman (W. J.) 
Mengarini (G.) 
Salish. 
Canestrelli (P.) 
Palladine (L.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Morgan (L. H.) 
Oppert (G.) 
Hoffman (W.J.) 
Smet (P. J. de). 
Whymper (F.) 
Canestrelli (P.) 
Pallad ine (L.) 
Hoffman (W. J.) 
Kane (P.) 

Keane (A. H.) 
Sullivan (R. G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Canadian. 
Cooper (J. G.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Gibbs (G). 
Henry (A.) 
Hottman (W. J.) 
Howse (J.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Maximilian (A. P.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Salish. 

Smet (P. J. de). 
Wilkes (C.) 
‘Wilson (E. F.) 
Boas (F.) 


Salish — Continued. 


Words Bulmer (T.5.) 
Words Daa (LL. K.) 
‘Words Gallatin (A.) 
Words Gibbs (G.) 
‘Words Hale (H.) 
Words Hoffman (W.J.) 
W ords Latham (R. G.) 
Words Mengarini (G.) 
Words Pott (A. F.) 
Words Smet (P.J. de). 
Words Squire (W. G.) 
Words Swan (J. G.) 
Words Treasury. 
Words Tylor (E. B.) 


See also Chehalis. 


Samish: 


Lord’s prayer 
Prayers 


See Smet (P.J. de). 
Smet (P. J. de). 


Sayce (Archibald Henry). Introduction 
to the | science of language. | By | A. 
H. Sayce, | deputy professor of compar- 
ative philology in the university of 
Oxford. | In two volumes. | Vol.I[-IT]. 

| [Design.] | 

London: | C. Kegan Paul & co., 1, 
Paternoster square. | 1880. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
quotation and notice 11. preface pp.v—viii, table 
of contents verso blank 11. text pp. 1-441, colo- 
phon verso blank 11.; half-title verso blank 11. 
title verso quotation and notice 1 1. table of con- 
tents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-352, selected list 
of works pp. 353-363, index pp. 365-421, 12°. 

A classification of American languages (vol. 
2, pp. 57-64) includes the Selish, pp. 57-60. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames. 

Introduction to the | science of lan- 
guage. | By | A. H.. Sayce, | deputy- 
professor of comparative philology, 
Oxford, | Hon. LL. D. Dublin. | In two 
volumes. | Vol. I[-II].] [Design.] | 
Second edition. | 

London: | Kegan Paul, Trench, & 
co., 1, Paternoster square, | 1883. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
quotation and notice 11. table of contents verso 
blank 1 1. preface to the second edition pp. v-xv 
verso blank, preface pp. xvii-xx, text pp. 1-441, 
colophon verso blank 1 1.; half-title verso blank 
1 1. title verso quotation and notice 1 1. table of 
contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-352, selected 
list of works pp. 353-363 verso blank, index pp. 
365-421, 12°. 

Linguistics as in the first edition, vol. 2, pp. 
57-60. 

Copies seen: Eames. 

Schomburgk (Sir Robert Herman). Con- 
tributions to the Philological Ethnog- 
raphy of South America. By Sir R. H. 
Schomburgk. 


Schomburgk (R. H.)— Continued. 

In Philological Soc. [of London] Proc. vol. 3, 

pp. 228-237, London, 1848, 8°. 

Affinity of words in the Guinau with other 
languages and dialects in America, pp . 236-237, 
contains, among others, examples in Atnah. 

These examples may be of the Athapascan 
_ stock or of the Salishan. I have had no oppor- 
tunity rec ently to examine into the matter. 


Schoolcraft (Henry Rowe). Historical | 
and | statistical information, | respect- 
ing the | history, condition and pros- 
pects | of the | Indian tribes of the 
United States: | collected and prepared 
under the direction | of the | bureau 
of Indian affairs, | per actof Congress 
of March 3d, 1847,| by Henry R. School- 
eraft, LL.D. | Illustrated by S. Eastman, 
capt. U.S. A. | Published by Authority 
of Congress. | Part I[-VI]. | 

Philadelphia: | Lippincott,Grambo & 
company, | (successors to Grigg, Elliot 
& co.) | 1851[-1857]. 

Engraved title: [Engraving.] | Historical | 
and | statistical information | respecting the | 
history, condition and prospects| of the| Indian 
tribes of the United States: | Collected and pre- 
pared under the | direction of the bureau of 
Indian affairs, per act of Congress | of March 
3™1847,| by Henry R. Schooleraft L.L.D. | Ilus- 
trated by | S. Eastman, capt. U.S. army. | [Coat 
of arms.] | Published by authority of Con- 
gress. | Part I[-VI]. | 

Philadelphia: | Lippincott,Grambo & co. 

6 vols. 4°. Beginning with vol. 2 the words 
“Historical and statistical’ are left off the 
title-pages, both engraved and printed. Subse- 
quently (1853) vol. 1 was also issued with the 
abridged title beginning ‘‘Information respect- 
ing the history, condition, and prospects of the 
Indian tribes,” making it uniform with the 
other parts. 

Two editions with these title-pages were pub- 
lished by the same house, one on thinner and 
somewhat smaller paper, of which but vols. 1-5 
were issued. 

Part 1, 1851. Half-title (Ethnological re- 
searches, | respecting | the red manof America) 
verso blank 1 1. engraved title as above verso 
blank 11. printed title as above verso blank 1 1. 
introductory documents pp. ili-vi, preface pp. 
vii-x, list of plates pp. xi-xii, contents pp. xili- 
xviii, text pp. 13-524, appendix pp. 525-568, 
plates, colored lithographs and maps numbered 
1-76. 

Part 1, 1852. Half-title (as in part I) verso 
blank 11. engraved title (Information respecting 
the history, condition and prospects, etc.) verso 
blank 11. printed title (Information respecting 
the history, condition and prospects, etc.) verso 
printers 11. dedication verso blank] 1. introduc- 
tory document pp.vii-xiv, contents pp. xv-xxii, 
list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 17-608, 


: 


— 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 57 


Schoolcraft (H. R.)— Continued. 
plates and maps numbered 1-29, 31-78, and 2 
plates exhibiting the Cherokee alphabet andits 
application. 

Part m1, 1853. Half-title (as in part 1) verso 
blank11.engraved title (as in part 1) verso blank 
11. printed title (as in part 11) verso printer 11. 
third report pp. v-viii, list of divisions p. ix, 
contents pp. xi-xy, list of plates pp. xvii-xviii, 
text pp. 19-635, plates and maps numbered 
1-21, 25-45. 

Part Iv, 1854. Half-title (as in part 1) verso 
blank 11. engraved title (asin parti) verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in part II) verso blank 1 1. 
dedication pp. v—vi, fourth report pp. vii-x, list 
of divisions p. xi, contents pp. xiii—-xxiii, list of 
piates pp. xxv-xxvi, text pp. 19-668, plates and 
maps numbered 1-42. 

Part v, 1855. Half-title (as in part I) verso 
blank11. engraved title (as in parti) verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in part 11) verso blank 1 1. 
dedication pp.vii-viii, fifth report pp. ix—xii, list 
of divisions p, xiii, synopsis of general contents 
of vols. I-V pp. Xv-xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxii, 
list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiy, text pp. 25-625, ap- 
pendix pp. 627-712, plates and maps numbered 
1-8, 10-36. 

Part Vi, 1857. Half-title (General history | of 
the | North American Indians) verso blank 11. 
portrait 11. printed title (History | of the| Indian 

tribes of the United States: | their | present 
conditionand prospects, | and a sketch of their 
| ancient status. | Published by order of Con- 
gress, | under the direction of the department of 
the interior—Indian bureau. | By | Henry Rowe 
Schoolcraft, LL. D. | Member [&c. six lines.] | 
With Illustrations by Eminent Artists. | Inone 
volume. | Part VI. of the series. | Philadelphia: 
| J. B. Lippincott & co. | 1857.) verso blank 11. 
inscription verso blank 11. letter to the Presi- 
dent pp. vii-viii, report pp. ix-x, preface pp. xi- 
xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxvi, list of plates pp. 
XXvii-xxviii, text pp. 25-744, index pp. 745-756, 
fifty-seven plates, partly selected from the other 
volumes, and three tables. 

Gallatin (A.), Table of generic Indian fami- 
lies of languages, vol. 3, pp. 397-402. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
neum, British Museum, Congress, Eames, 
National Museum, Powell, Shea, Trumbull. 

At the Fischer sale, no. 1581, Quaritch bought 
acopy for 4/.10s. The Field copy, no. 2075, sold 
for $72; the Menzies copy, no. 1765, for $132; the 
Squier copies, no. 1214,$120; no. 2032, $60; the 
Ramirez copy, no. 773 (5 vols.), 51. 5s.; the Pinart 
copy, no. 828 (5 vols. in 4), 208 fr.; the Murphy 
copy, no. 2228, $69. Priced by Quaritch, no. 30017, 
101.10s.; by Clarke & co. 1886, $65; by Quaritch, 
in 1888, 157. 

Reissued with title-pages as follows: 


—— Archives| of| Aboriginal Knowledge. 
| Containing all the | Original Papers 
laid before Congress | respecting the | 
History, Antiquities, Language, Eth- 
nology, Pictography, | Rites, Supersti- 


58 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Schoolcraft (H. R.) —Continued. Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued. 


tions, and Mythology, | of the | Indian 
Tribes of the United States | by | Henry 
R. Schoolcraft, LL. D. | With Ilustra- 
tions. | Onzendun ih ieu muzzinyegun 
un.—Algonquin. | In six volumes. | 
Volume I[-VI]. | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
Co. | 1860. 


Engraved title: Information | respecting the 
| History, Condition and Prospects | of the | 
Indian Tribes of the United States: | Collected 
and prepared under the| Bureau of Indian 
Affairs | By Henry R. Schooleraft L. L. D. | 
Mem: Royal Geo. Society, London. Royal An- 
tiquarian Society. Copenhagen. Ethnological 
Society, Paris, &c. &c. | Illustrated by | Cap.' 
S. Eastman, U.8.A.and other eminent artists. | 
[Vignette.] | Published by authority of Con- 
gress. | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & Co. 

6 vols. maps and plates, 4°. 

This edition agrees in the text page for page 
with the original titled above, and contains in 
addition an index to each volume. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Partially reprinted with title as follows: 


[——] The | Indian tribes] of the] United 
States :| their | history, antiquities, cus- 
toms, religion, arts, language, | tradi- 
tions, oral legends, and myths. | Edited 
by |Francis §. Drake. | Illustrated with 
one hundred fine engravings on steel. 

| In two volumes. | Vol. I[-IT]. | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
co. | London: 16 Southampton street, 
Covent Garden. | 1884, 


2 vols.: portrait 1 1. title verso copyright 
notice 11. preface pp. 3-5, contents pp. 7-8, list 
of plates pp. 9-10, introduction pp. 11-24, text 
pp. 25-458; frontispiece 1 1. title verso copy- 
right notice 1 1. contents pp. 3-6, list of plates 
p.7, text pp. 9-445, index pp. 447-455, plates, 4°. 

“Tn the following pages the attempt has been 
made to place before the public in a convenient 
and accessible form the results of the life-long 
labors in the field of aboriginal research of the 
late Henry R. Schooleraft.”’ 

Chapter 11, Language, literature, and pic- 
tography, vol. 1, pp. 47-63, contains general 
remarks on the Indian languages. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Priced by Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6376, $25. 

Henry Rowe Schoolcraft, ethnologist, born in 
[Watervliet] Albany County, N. Y., March 28, 
1793, died in Washington, D. C., December 10, 
1864. Was educated at Middlebury College, 
Vermont, and at Union, where he pursued the 
studies ofchemistry and mineralogy. In 1817-18 
he traveled in Missouri and Arkansas, and 
returned with a large collection of geological 
and mineralogical specimens. In 1820 he was 
appointed geologist to Gen. Lewis Cass’s explor- 


ing expedition to Lake Superior and the head- 
waters of Mississippi River. He was secre- 
tary of a commission to treat with the Indians 
at Chicago, and, after a journey through Mlli- 
nois and along Wabash and Miami rivers, was 
in 1822 appointed Indian agent for the tribes 
of the lake region, establishing himself at 
Sault Sainte Marie, and afterward at Mack- 
inaw, where, in 1823, he married Jane Johnston, 
granddaughter of Waboojeeg, a noted Ojibway 
chief, who had received her educationin Europe. 
In 1828 he founded the Michigan historical soci- 
ety and in 1871 the Algic society. From 1828 till 
1832 he was a member of the territorial legisla- 
tureof Michigan. In 1832 heled a government 
expedition, which followed the Mississippi 
River up to its source in Itasca Lake. In 1836 
he negotiated a treaty with the Indians on the 
upper lakes for the cession to the United States 
of 16,000,000 acres of their lands. He was then 
appointed acting superintendent of Indian 
affairs, and in 1839 chief disbursing agent for 
the northern department. On his return from 
Europe in 1842 he made a tour through western 
Virginia, Ohio, and Canada. He wasappointed 
by the New York legislature in 1845 a commis- 
sioner to take the census of the Indians in the 
State and collect information concerning the 
Six Nations. After the performance of this 
task, Congress authorized him, on March 3, 1847, 
to obtain through the Indian bureau reports 
relating to all the Indian tribes of the country 
and to collate and edit the information. In this 
work he spent the remaining years of his life. 
Through his influence many laws were enacted 
for the protection and benefit of the Indians. 
Numerous scientific societies in the United 
States and Europe elected him to membership, 
and the University of Geneva gave him the 
degree of LL.D, in 1846. He was the author of 
numerous poems, lectures, and reports on 
Indian subjects, besides thirty-one larger 
works. Two of his lectures before the Algic 

society at Detroit on the ‘‘Grammatical Con- 
struction of the Indian Languages”’ were trans- 
lated into French by Peter S. Duponceau and 
gained for their author a gold medal from the 
French institute. . . . To the five volumes 
of Indian researches compiled under the direc- 
tion of the war department he added a sixth, 

containing the post-Columbian history of the 

Indians and of their relations with Europeans 

(Philadelphia, 1857). Hehad collected material 
for two additional volumes, but the govern- 
ment suddenly suspended the publication of 
the work.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 

Schwapmuth. See Shiwapmuk. 

Schwoyelpi. See Skoyelpi. 

Scouler (Dr. John). Observations on the 
indigenous tribes of the N. W. coast of 
America. By John Scouler, M. D., F. 
L.&., &e. 

In Royal Geog. Soc. of London, Jour, vol. 11, 


pp. 215-251, London, 1841,8°. (Geological Sur- 
vey.) 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 59 


Scouler (J.) — Continued. 

Vocabulary of the Billechoola, Salmon 
River, lat. 53° 30’ N. (numerals 1-1000 and 150 
words and phrases), pp. 230-235.—Vocabulary 
of the Okanagan spoken on Fraser’s River 
(numerals 1-100 and 105 words and phrases), 
pp. 236-241.—Vocabularies of the Kawitchen. 
spoken at the entrance of Trading River, oppo- 
site Vancouver's Island, Noosdalum of Hood’s 
Canal, and Squallyamish of Puget’s Sound 
(numerals 1-100 and 150 words and phrases), 
pp. 242-247. 

The vocabularies were furnished by Dr. W. 


F. Tolmie. Dr. Scouler’s comments upon them 
are scattered through pp. 218-229. 
Sentences: 
Bilkula See Scouler (J.) 
Chehalis Swan (J. G.) 
Kawichen Scouler (J.) 
Kawichen Tolmie (W. F.) 
Klallam Scouler (J.) 
Okinagan Scouler (J.) 
Okinagan Tolmie (W.F.) 
Puyallup McCaw (S. R.) 
Salish Hoffman (W.J.) 
Salish Smet (P.J. de). 
Salish Whymper (F.) 
Skoyelpi Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Snohomish Youth's. 
Tilamuk Lee (D.) and Frost (J. H.) 


Shea (John Gilmary). History | of the 
| Catholic missions | among the | In- 
dian tribes of the United States, | 1529- 
1854. | By John Gilmary Shea, | author 
[&c. three lines.] | [Design.] | 

New York: | Edward Dunigan & 
brother, |151 Fulton-street, near Broad- 
way. | 1855. 

Engraved title: Catholic missions | among 
the Indian tribes | of the United States, | [en- 
graving with the words ‘‘Catharine Tehgak- 
wita’’] | by John G. Shea. | 

New York: | E. Dunigan & brother, 151 Ful- 
ton st. 

Portrait of John Bapst 1 1. engraved title as 
above verso blank 1 1. printed title as above 
verso copyright notice (1854) 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 1. contents pp.5-13, preface pp. 
15-17, text pp. 19-495, appendix pp. 497-506, 
index pp. 507-514, fac-similes pp. i-iv, four other 
portraits (Peyri, Brebeuf, Jogues, De Smet),12°. 

The Lord’s prayer in Flathead and Pends 
d’Oreilles (from De Smet), footnote, p. 468. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Eames, Trumbull. 

At the Field sale a copy, no. 2112*, sold for 
$2.25; at the Murphy sale, no. 2264, for $3.25. 


—— History | of the|Catholic missions | 
among the | Indian tribes of the United 
States, | 1529-1854. | By John Gilmary 
Shea, | author [&c. three lines.] | [De- 
sign. | | 


Shea (J. G.) — Continued. 

New York: | Edward Dunigan and 
brother, | (James B. Kirker.) | 151 Ful- 
ton street, near Broadway. | 1857. 

Engraved title: Catholic missions | among 
the Indian tribes| of the United States, | 
[engraving with the words ‘Catharine Teh- 
galkwita’’] | by John G. Shea. | 

New York: | E, Dunigan & brother, 151 Ful- 
ton st. 

Portrait of Anthony Peyri 1 |. engraved title 
as above verso blank 11. printed title as above 
verso copyright notice (1854) 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 I. contents pp. 5-13, preface pp. 15- 
17, text pp. 19-495, fac-similes pp. i-iv, appendix 
pp. 497-506, index pp. 507-514, two other por- 
traits (Brebeuf, Jogues), 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Eames. 

Geschichte | der | katholischen Mis- 
sionen | unter den | Indianer-Stiimmen 
der Vereinigten Staaten. | 1529-1860. | 
Von | John Gilmary Shea, | Verfasser 
[&c. two lines.] | Aus dem Englischen 
iibersetzt | von | J. Roth. | Sr. Heilig- 
keit Papst Pius IX gewidmet. | Mit 6 
Stahlstichen. | 

Wiirzburg. | Verlag von C. Etlinger. 
[1858. ] ©) 

Pp. 1-668,12°. Title from the author. 

—— History |of the | Catholic missions | 
among the | Indian tribes of the United 
States, | 1529-1854. | By John Gilmary 
Shea, | author of [&c. three lines.] | 
[Design.] | 

New York: | T. W. Strong, | Late Ed- 
ward Dunigan & brother,|Catholic pub- 
lishing house, | 599 Broadway. [1870.] 

Bngraved title: Catholic missions | among 
the Indian tribes | of the United States, | 
[engraving with the words ‘‘Catherine Teh- 
gakwita’’] | by John G. Shea. | 

New York:! E. Dunigan & brother, 599 
Broadway. [n.d.] 

Frontispiece, engraved title verso blank 1 1. 
printed title as above verso copyright notice 1 
1. dedication verso blank 1 L. contents pp. 5-13, 
preface pp. 15-17, text pp. 19-495, appendix pp. 
497-506, index pp. 507-514, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen : Congress, Powell. 

Priced by Clarke and co. 1886, no. 6620, $2. 

—— History| of the | Catholic missions | 
among the | Indian tribes of the United 
States, | 1529-1854. | By John Gilmary 
Shea, | author[&c. three lines.] | [De- 
sign. ] | 

New York: | P. J. Kenedy, | Excel- 
sior Catholic publishing house, | 5 
Barclay Street, [n. d.] 


60 


Shea (J. G.) — Continued. 

Engraved title: Catholic missions | among 
the Indian tribes | of the United States, | 
{engraving with the words ‘Catherine Teh- 
gakwita’’] | by John G. Shea. | 

New York:|E. Dunigan & brother, 599 
Broadway. [n.d.] 

Engraved title verso blank 1 1. printed title 
verso copyright notice (1854) 1 1. dedication 
verso blank 1 1. contents pp. 5-13, preface pp. 
15-17, text pp. 19-495, appendix pp. 497-506, 
index pp. 507-514, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


— Languages of the American Indians. 

In American Cyclopedia, vol. 1, pp. 407-414, 
New York, 1873, 8°. 

Contains grammatic examples of a number 
of American languages, among them the Selish 
or Flathead. 

John Dawson Gilmary Shea, author, born in 
New York City July 22,1824; [died in Eliza- 
beth, N. J., 1891]. He was educated at the 
grammar school of Columbia College, of which 
his father was principal, studied law, and was 
admitted to the bar, but has devoted himself 
chiefly to literature. He edited the Historical 
Magazine from 1859 till 1865, was one of the 
founders and first president of the United 
States Catholic Historical Society, is a member 
or corresponding member of the principal his- 
torical societies in this country and Canada, 
and corresponding member of the Royal Acad- 
emy of History, Madrid. He has received the 
degree of LL. D. from St. Francis Xavier Col- 
lege, New York, and St. John’s College, Ford- 
ham. His writings include The Discovery and 
Exploration of the Mississippi Valley (New 
York, 1853); History of the Catholic Missions 
Among the Indian Tribes of the United States 
(1854; German translation, Wiirzburg, 1856); 
The Fallen. Brave (1861); Early Voyages up 
and down the Mississippi (Albany, 1862); 
Novum Belgium, an Account of the New Neth- 
erlands in 1643-44 (New York, 1862); The Oper- 
ations of the French Fleet under Count de 
Grasse (1864); The Lincoln Memorial (1865) ; 
Translations of Charlevoix’s History and 
General Description of New France (6 
vol., 1866-1872); Hennepin’s Description of 
Louisiana (1880) ; Le Clereq’s Establishment of 
the Faith (1881), and Penalosa’s Expedition 
(1882); Catholic Church in Colonial Days 
(1886); Catholic Hierarchy of the United 
States (1886); and Life and Times of Arch- 
bishop Carroll (1888). He also translated 
De Courcey’s Catholic Church in the United 
States (1856) and edited the Cramoisy series 
of narratives and documents bearing on the 
early history of the French-American colonies 
(26 vols., 1857-1868); Washington’s Private 
Diary (1861); Cadwallader Colden’s History of 
the Five Indian Nations, edition of 1727 (1866) ; 

Alsop’s Maryland (1869) ; a series of grammars 
and dictionaries of the Indian languages (15 
\Wols., 1860-1874), and Life of Pius IX (1875). He 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


| Shea (J. G.) — Continued. 


has also published Bibliography of American 
Catholic Bibles and Testaments (1859), corrected 
several of thé very erroneous Catholic Bibles, 
and revised by the Vulgate Challoner’s original 
Bible of 1750 (1871), and has issued several 
prayer-books, school histories, Bible diction- 
aries, and translations.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of 
Am. Biog. 


Shiwapmuk: 
Numerals See Eells (M.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 


Shooswap. See Shuswap. 


Shorthand primer .. . 
See Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 


Shuswap: 
General discussion See Dawson (G. M.) 


Thompson. 


General discussion Hale (H.) 
Geographic names Dawson (G. M.) 
Grammatic treatise Boas (F.) 
Grammatic treatise Gallatin (A.) 
Grammatic treatise Hale (H.) 
Numerals Dawson (G. M.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Prayers Gendre (—) 
Prayers Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Proper names Dawson (G. M.) 
Relationships Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Dawson (G. M.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Howse (J.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) 
Words Boas (F.) 
Sicatl : 
Vocabulary See Boas (F.) 
Words Boas (F.) 
Silets: 
Legend See Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Skagit: 
Numerals See Eells (M.) 
Vocabulary Craig (R. O.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Skitsamish. See Skitsuish. 
Skitsuish: 
General discussion See Hale (H.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Prayers Caruana (J. M.) 
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Mengarini (G.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Vocabulary Smet (P. J. de). 
Words Bancroft (H. H.) 
Words Pott (A. F.) 


iy eeu 


‘ 
pie sete Spar abate te Nal Dra 


EE 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 61 


Skokomish: 
Geographic names See Eells (M.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Relationships Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Salish. 
Words Boas (F.) 

Skoyelpi: 
Numerals See Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Sentences Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Vocabulary Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Mengarini (G.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 

Skwaksin: 


Geographic names See Coones (S. F.) 

Geographic names Eells (M.) 

Grammatic treatise Eells (M.) 

Hymns Eells (M.) 
Skwale. See Niskwalli. 


Skwallyamish. See Niskwalli. 


Skwamish: 
Prayers See Durieu (P.) 
Vocabulary Salish. 


Skwaxon. See Skwaksin. 


Smalley (Eugene Virgil). The Kalispel 


country. 
In the Century Illustrated Magazine, vol. 29, 


’ pp. 447-455, New York and London, 1885, 8°. 


(Pilling.) 

General remarks on the Kalispel language, 
character of vowel sounds, and letters lacking 
in the language, pp. 454-455.—Lord's prayer in 
Kalispel (from Van Gorp), p. 455. 

Eugene Virgil Smalley, journalist, born in 
Randolph, Portage County, Ohio, July 18, 1841. 
He was educated in the public schools of Ohio 
and New York,and passed one year in New 
York central college at McGrawvyille. He 
enlisted at the beginning of the civil war in the 
Seventh Ohio Infantry and frequently sent let- 
ters about different engagements to the news- 
papers, for which descriptions he had shown a 
predilection before entering the field. He 
served until nearly the close of the struggie, 
when he was discharged on account of wounds, 
and as soon as he was able went to Washing- 
ton, D. C., where, in 1865, he was appointed 


clerk of the military committee of the House of 


Representatives. He retained the post until 
1873. In 1882 he entered the employment of the 
Northern Pacific Railroad and in 1884 estab- 
lished the ‘‘ Northwest,” an illustrated maga- 
zine,in St. Paul, Minn., of which he is still 


(1888) the editor and publisher.—Appleton’s 


Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Smet (/ev. Peter John de). Letters and 


sketches | with | anarrative of a year’s 
residence | among | the Indian tribes | 
of | The Rocky Mountains. | By | P. J. 
De Smet, 8S. J. | 


Smet (P. J.) — Continued. 


Philadelphia: | published by M. 
Fithian, 61 n. Second street. | 1843. 


Frontispiece recto blank 1 1. title verso blank 
1 1. preface pp. v-ix, half-title verso blank 1 1. 
text pp. 13-252, 12°. 

A few Flathead words and phrases, p. 190. 

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, Eames, 

Georgetown, Harvard. 
Voyages | aux | montagnes Rocheu- 
ses, | et | une année de séjour | chez 
les tribus indiennes | du vaste terri- 
toire de VOrégon, | dépendant | des 
Etats-Unis d’ Amérique, | par le R. P. 
Pierre de Smet, | missionnaire de la 
compagnie de Jésus. | [Vignette.] | 

Malines. | P. J. Hanieq, imprimeur 
du saint siége, de la sacrée congréga- 
tion | de la propagande et de l’arche- 
véché de Malines.—1844. 

Cover title nearly as above, half-title verso 
blank 1 1. portrait of the author 1 1. title as 
above verso imprimatur 1 1. ‘‘avis’’ and 
‘““ préface de lVédition américaine”’’ pp. ili-vi, 
plate (‘‘vue de St. Louis du Missouri’’) 1 1. text 
pp. 1-304, cighteen other plates, folded map, 12°. 

Priéres en langue Téte-Plate et Pondéras, 
containing the sign of the cross, the Pater 
noster, the Ave Maria,and the Credo, with 
interlinear French translation, pp. 80-82. 

This is the first French edition of Letters 
and Sketches. It contains details notin the 
Philadelphia edition. 

Copies seen: Eames. 

Sabin’s Dictionary mentions a Dutch trans- 
lation: Reis naar het Rotsgebergte, Deventer, 
bij J. W. Robijus en Comp. [1844?] 129. 


Voyages | aux | montagnes Rocheu- 
ses, | chez les tribus indiennes du vaste 
territoire de l’Orégon, | dépendant des 
Etats-Unis d@’Amérique, | Par le R. P. 
de Smet. | [Ornament. ] | 

Lille. |L. Lefort, imprimeur-libraire, 

| rue Esquermoise, 55, | 1845. 

Cover title: Voyages | aux | montagnes 
Rocheuses. | 

Lille. | L. Lefort, imp. libraire, | rue Esquer- 
moise, 55. 

Cover title; half-title verso blank 1 1. frontis- 
piece 1 1. title verso blank 1 l.avis sur cette 
édition pp. vii—viii, préface de l’édition améri- 
caine pp. ix-xii, text pp. 9-268, list of publica- 
tions 2 1l. list on back cover, 12°. 

Priéres en langue Téte-Plate et Pondéras, as 
in the preceding edition, pp. 265-268. 

Copies seen: Eames. 

Sabin’s Dictionary mentions editions of 
Lille, 1846, and Quatriéme édition, Lille: L. 
Lefort, 1858; also an Italian translation, 
Palermo, 1847. 


—— Voyages | aux | montagnes Rocheu- 


ses | chez les tribus indiennes du vaste 


62 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Smet (P. J.) — Continued. 

territoire de ’Orégon, | dependant des 
Etats-Unis d’Amérique. | Parle R. P. de 
Smet. | Quatriéme édition. | 

Lille. |L. Lefort, imprimeur-libraire, 

| MDCCCLIX[1859]. 

Pp. i-vi, 7-240, 12°. 

Priéres (Pater, Ave, Credo) en langue Téte- 
Plate et Ponderas. 

Copies seen: Bancroft. 

A German translation as follows: 


Reisen | zu | den Felsen-Gebirgen | 
und|ein Jahr | unter den | wilden 
Indianer-Stiimmen des Oregon-Gebietes 
| von | P. J. de Smet, S. J. | Aus dem 
Franzoésischen  iibersetzt | von | L. 
Hinssen, Priester. | 

St. Louis, Mo. | Druck und Verlag 
von Franz Saler. | 1865. 

Title verso blank 11. Vorwort pp. iii-iv, text 
pp. 1-220, 12°. 

Lord’s prayer, Ave, and Credo in the language 
of the Flathead and Ponderas, with interlinear 
German translation, pp. 64-65. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames. 

Voyages | aux | montagnes Rocheu- 
ses|et séjour chez les | tribus  in- 
diennes de V’Orégon | (Etats-Unis) | 
par | le R. P. de Smet | dela Compagnie 
de Jésus | Nouvelle édition | revue et 
considérablement augmentée | 

Bruxelles | Victor Devaux et Ci | 26, 
rue Saint-Jean, 26 | Paris | H. Repos 
et Ci*, éditeurs | 70, rue Bonaparte, 70 

| 1873 

Cover title as above, half-title verso licence 
etc. 11. portrait of the author 1 1. title as above 
verso blank 1 |. préface pp. v-xii, itinéraire 
abrégé pp. xili-xxxv, plate of St. Louis 1 1. text 
pp. 1-405, table des maticres pp. 407-408, folded 
map, printed notice on back cover, 12°. 

Pater, Ave, et Credo en langue Téte Plate et 
Ponderas, with interlinear French translation, 
pp. 97-99. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames. 

Sabin’s Dictionary mentions an edition, 

Lille, 1875. ; 
Voyages | aux | montagnes Rocheu- 
ses | Chez les tribus indiennes du 
vaste territoire de VOrégon | dépen- 
dant des Etats-Unis d’Amérique. | Par 
de Smet | Huitiéme édition | [Design 
with monogram J. L.] | 

Librairie de J. Lefort | imprimeur 
éditeur | Lille | rue Charles de Muys- 
sart, 24 | Paris | rue des Saints-Péres, 


30 | Propriété et droit de traduction | 


réservés. [1887.] 
Colophon; Lille. Typ. J. Lefort. 1887. 


Smet (P. J.) — Continued. 


Cover title: Le R. P.de Smet | Voyages | aux 
| montagnes | Rocheuses | chez les tribus 
indiennes du vaste territoire de l’Orégon 
dépendant | des Etats-Unis d’Amérique. | 

Librairie de J. Lefort, éditeur | a Lille | rue 
Charles de Muyssart, 24|a Paris | rue des 
Saints-Péres, 30 

Cover title, half-title verso frontispiece 1 1. 
title verso blank 11. préface de l’édition amér- 
icaine pp. v-vi, text pp. 7-237, tableand colophon 
verso blank 1 1. list of publications on back 
cover, 8°. 

Priéres en langue Téte-Plate et Ponderas, 
with interlinear French translation, as in the 
previous editions, pp. 235-237. 

Copies seen: Eames. 

There is another issue of this same edition, 
with a new cover title as follows: 

Le R. P. de Smet | Voyages | aux|montagnes 
| Rocheuses | chez les tribus indiennes du 
vaste territoire de l’Orégon | dépendant des 
Btats-Unis d’ Amérique. | 

Librairie de J. Lefort | imprimeur éditeur | 
Lille | rue Charles de Muyssart, 24 | Paria | rue 
des Saints-Péres, 30. [1887.] 

Copies seen: Eames. 


—— Oregon missions | and | Travels | 


over the Rocky mountains, | in 1845-46. 
| By | father P. J. de Smet, | Of the 
Society of Jesus. | 

New-York: | published by Edward 
Dunigan, | 151, Fulton-street. | M DCCC 
XLVII[1847]. 

Engraved title: Oregon missions | and Tray- 
els over the | Rocky mountains, | in 1845-46. | 
[ Vignette of *‘ Mary Quille in the battle against 
the Crows.’’] | by Father P. J. De Smet. | of the 
Society of Jesus. | 

New York, | Published by Edward Dunigan 
| 1847. 

Half-title (Oregon missions.)verso blank 1 1. 
portrait of Flathead chief recto blank 1 1. en- 
graved title verso blank 1 1. title verso copy- 
right notice (1847) 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 
1. preface pp. xi-xii, map, text pp. 13-408, Lord’s 
prayer, etc.,in several Indian languages, 2 ll. 
twelve other plates, 16°. 

Sign of the cross and the Lord’s prayer in 
the Flathead and Pend d Oreille language, 
with interlinear English translation, p. [409,]— 
Vocabulary (23 words) of {he Flathead, p. [412.] 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, 
British Museum, Congress, Eames, George- 
town, Harvard, Pilling. 

At the Fieldsale, a copy, no. 2159, brought $3 ; 
at the Brinley sale, no. 5612, $3.75; at the Mur- 
phy sale, no. 785, $5.50. 


Missions de ’Orégon | et Voyages | 
aux montagnes Rocheuses | aux sources 
| de la Colombie, de l’Athabasea et du 
Sascatshawin, | en 1845-46.| [Picture of 
‘¢Marie Quillax dans la bataille contre 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 63 


Smet (P. J.) — Continued. 

les Corbeaux,” etc.] | Par le pere P.J. 

de Smet, | de la Société de Jésus. | 
Gand, | impr. & lith. de V°. Vander 

Schelden, | éditeur. [1848. ] 


Cover title: Missions | de l’Orégon | et | voy- 
ages | auxmontagnes-Rocheuses, | aux sources 
de | la Colombie, del’ Athabasea | et du Sascat- 
shawin;/| pendant l’année 1845-46. | Par le pére 
P.-J. de Smet, | de la Compagnie de Jésus. | 
Ouvrage orné de 16 gravures et de 3 cartes. | Il 
se vend au profit de la mission. | 

Gand, | chez V.* Vander Schelden, | Im- 
primeur-Editeur. 

Cover title portrait of a Flathead chief 1 1. 
engraved title verso blank 1 1. license to print 
(dated 20 feb.1848) verso 2 lines of text 1 1. 
dedication (dated Gand, 20 février 1848) pp. i- 
ii, préface de l’éditeur pp. iii-ix. map, notice 
sur le territoire de 1’Orégon pp. 9-39, half-title 
(Missions de l’Orégon | et | voyages | aux 
montagnes-Rocheuses | aux sources de | la 
Colombie, de |’ Athabasca et du Sascatshawin, 

|] en 1845-46. | Par le Pere P.-J.de Smet, de la 
Comp. de Jésus.) verso blank 1 1. text pp. 41- 
350, notre pére etc. in several Indian languages 
pp. 351-359, origine des Américains pp. 360-378, 
table pp. 379-380, notice on back cover, two 


other maps and fourteen other plates, 16°. The 
date of publication, 1848, is printed on the back | 


of the volume. The notice on the back cover 
reads: ‘‘Sous presse chez le méme: Le méme 
ouvrage en flamand. avec gravures et cartes.” 

Le signe de la croix et Notre pére en langue 
Téte-Plate et Pend d’Oreille, with interlinear 


French translation, p. 331.— Vocabulary (11 | 


words) of the Téte-Plate and of the Checalish, 
p. 338. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Congress, Eames, 
Georgetown. 

This translation was probably made under 
the supervision of the author. It contains some 
additional matter and notes, three important 
maps, and new plates, which differ in style from 
those in the New York edition of 1847. The 
following is a different version: 


— Missions | de l’Orégon | et voyages 
| dans les montagnes Rocheuses | en 
1845 et 1846, | par le pere P.J.de Smet, 
| de la Société de Jésus. | Ouvrage tra- 
duit de Vanglais, | Par M. Bourlez. | 
(Ornament. ] | 

Paris | librairie de Poussielgue-Ru- 
sand, | rue du Petit-Bourbon Saint-Sul- 
pice, 3. | A Lyon, chez J. B. Pelagaud et 
Cie, | 1848 

Enyraved title: Missions de 1’Orégon. | Et 
Voyages aux |montagnes Rocheuses | en 1845 
& 46. | [Vignette of ‘‘ Marie Plume dans la ba- 
taille contre les Corbeaux’’] | Par | lepére P. J. 
de Smet. | de la Société de | Jesus. 

Cover title: Missions | de l’Orégon | et voy- 
ages | dans les montagnes Rocheuses | en 1845 


Smet (P. J.) — Continued. 
et 1846, | par le pére P. J. de Smet, | de la Société 
de Jésus. | Ouvrage traduit de l'anglais, | Par 
M. Bourlez. | [Ornament.] 1 

Paris, | librairie de Poussielgue-Rusand, | 
rue du Petit-Bourbon Saipt Sulpice, 3; | a Lyon, 
chez J. B. Pélagaud et Cie. | 1848 

Covertitle, half-title (Missions | de l’Orégon.) 
verso name of printer 11. portrait of Fiathead 
chief recto blank 1 1. engraved title verso blank 1 
1. title verso blank 11. préface pp. i-ii, text pp. 7- 
366, notre pére etc.in several Indian languages 
pp. 367-375, origine des Américains pp. 376-395, 
postface pp. 399-406, table pp. 407-408, twelve 
other plates, list of publications on back 
cover, 12°. 

Le signe de la croix et Notre pére en langue 
Téte-Plate et Pend d’Oreille, with interlinear 
French translation, p. 367.—Vocabulary (11 
words) of the Téte-Plate, and of the Checalish, 
p. 374. 

The greater part of this translation was made 
from the New York edition. The latter part of 
the volume, however, follows the other version 
published at Ghent in the same year, from 
which the supplementary matter is evidently 
taken. The illustrations are identical with 
those in the original American edition, the only 
change being in the inscriptions. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Georgetown. 

At the Field sale, no. 2158,a copy brought 
$3.25. 

—— Missien van den Orégon | en Reizen 
| naer de Rotsbergen | en de bronnen | 
der Colombia, der Athabasca en Sas- 
catshawin, | in 1845-46. | [Picture of 
“Maria Quillac in den stryd tegen de 
Corbeaux,” etc.] | Door den pater P. J. 
de Smet, | Van de Societeit van Jesus, 
| uit het fransch | door een klooster- 

ling van Latrappe. | 

Gent, | Boek- en Steendrukkery van 
Wwe. Vander Schelden, | Onderstraet, 
Ne 37. | 1849. 

Cover title: Missién | vanden | Orégon | en | 
Reizen naar de Rotsbergen, | door | pater P.-J. 
de Smet, | van de societeit van Jesus. | Versierd 

» met 16 platen en 3 kaarten. | [Ornament.] | 

Gent, | huis heiligen Joseph, | boekdrukkerij 

van H. Vander Schelden, | Onderstraat, 26. 

Jover title, portrait of a Flathead chief 1 1. 
engraved title verso blank~1 1. license to print 
(dated 11 Oct. 1848) verso 2 lines of text 11. ded- 
ication (dated Gent,den 20 february 1848) pp. 
vii-viii, vorrede van den uitgever pp. ix—xv, 
map, verslag over het grondgebied van den 
Orégon pp. 17-49, half-title verso blank 1 1. text 
pp. 53-382, het onze vader etc. in several Indian 
languages pp. 383-391, oorsprong der Ameri- 
kanen pp. 392-411, inhoud pp. 413-423, list of 
publications on back cover, two other maps and 
fourteen other plates, 16°. 

Het onze vader (and Het teeken des kruises) 
in de tael Téte-Plate en Pend d’Oreille, with 


64 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Smet (P. J.) — Continued. 
interlinear Dutch translation, p. 383.—-Vocabu- 
lary (11 words) of the Téte-Plate, and of the 
Checalish, p. 390. 
Copies seen: Eames. 
The French version, ‘‘ Troiséme édition,”’ 
Bruxelles et Paris, 1874 (Eames), does not con- 
tain the above-mentioned linguistics. 
New Indian sketches. | By | rev. P 
J. de Smet, S. J. | 

New York: | D.& J. Sadlier & co., 
31 Barclay-st. | Boston—128 Federal- 
street. |Montreal—cor. Notre-dame and 
St. Francis Xavier sts. | 1863. 


Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 11. preface | 


pp. 5-6, contents pp. 7-8, text pp. 9-175, plate 
opposite p. 54, 16°. 

“The short Indian catechism in use among 
the Flatheads, Kalispels, Pend d’Oreilles, and 
other Rocky Mountain Indians,” alternate 
pages Indian and English, pp. 148-175. 

Copies seen: Eames, Georgetown. 

A later edition with title-page as follows: 

— New Indian sketches. | By | rev. P. 
J. de Smet, 8. J. | 
New York: | D. & J. Sadlier & co., 
31 Barclay-st. | Boston — 128 Federal- 
street. | Montreal—cor. Notre-dame 
and St. Francis Xavier sts. | 1865. 
Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. 5-6, contents pp. 7-8, text pp. 9-175, 16°. 
Linguistic contents as under titlenextabove. 
Copies seen: Boston Athenzum, Eames, 
Pilling. 
Sabin’s Dictionary mentions an edition of 
[1877]. 
A later edition with title-page as follows: 
New Indian sketches. | By | rev. P. 
J. de Smet, 8. J. | 

New York: | D. & J. Sadlier & co., 
31 Barclay-st. | Montreal—cor. Notre- 
dameandSt. Francis Xaviersts. [1885. ] 

Cover title: Sadliers’ Household Library. | 
No. 91. Price 15 cts. | New Indian Sketches. | 
By rey. P. J. de Smet, 8. J. | Complete and una- 
bridged edition. | 

New York: | D. & J. Sadlier & co., 31 Barclay 
st. | Montreal: 275 Notre dame street. [1885.] 

Cover title, title verso copyright (1885) 1 1. 
preface pp. 5-6, contents pp. 7-8, text pp. 9-175, 
16°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Brinton, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Eames, Georgetown, Pilling. 
Lettres | choisies | du révérend 
péere | Pierre-Jean de Smet | de la 
Compagnie deJésus | missionnaire aux 
Etats-Unis d’Amérique | 1855-1861 | 
Troisi¢me édition |soigneusement revue 
et corrigée Waprés les manuscrits | de 
Vauteur | et augmentée de nombreuses 
notes | 


Smet (P. J.) — Continued. 

Bruxelles | I’. Haenen, libraire-édi- 
teur | 8, rue des Paroissiens, 8 | Paris | 
H. Repos et Cie, éditeurs | 70 Rue Bona- 
parte, 70 | 1876 


Cover title as above, half-title (Lettres | 
choises | du révérend pére| Pierre-Jean de 
Smet) verso approbation 1 1. titleas above verso 
names of printers 1 1. preface pp. v-x, text pp. 
1-414, table des matiéres pp. 415-416, list on back 
cover, 12°. 

Names of animals in the Ceeur d’Aléne lan- 
guage, about a dozen words, with definitions in 
French, foot-note on p. 397. 

Copies seen: Eames. 

The first series of these ‘‘ Lettres choisies,”’ 
1849-1857, Bruxelles, 1875 (Eames), contains no 
Salishan linguistics. 


—— Lettres | choisies | du révérend pére 


| Pierre-Jean de Smet |de la Com- 
pagnie de Jésus| missionnaire aux Etas- 
Unis [sic] d’Amérique | Troisiéme série 
| Troisitme édition | soigneusement 
revue et corrigée (apres les manuscrits 
| de auteur | et augmentée de nom- 
breuses notes | 
Bruxelles | M. Closson et Ci, édi- 
teurs | 26, rue de Joncker, 26 | Paris | 
H. Repos et Ci, éditeurs | 70, rue Bona- 
parte, 70 | 1877 


Cover title as above, half-title (Lettres | 
choises | du révérend pére! Pierre-Jean de 
Smet) verso approbation 1 1. title as above verso 
names of printers 1 1. préface pp. v—xi, text pp. 
1-414, tabledes matiéres pp. 415-416, list on back 
cover, 12°. 

Names of esculent roots and fruits in the 
Coeur d’Aléne language, about 28 words, with 
definitions in French, footnote on pp. 58-59. 

Sign of the cross and Lord’s prayer “‘enlangue 
des Ricarries ou Sanish (le peuple primitif),”’ 
pp. 412-413. 

Copies seen: Eames. 

The continuation, Lettres choisies, ‘‘ qua- 
tridéme et derniére série,’’ Bruxelles, 1878 
(Eames), contains no Salishan material. 


The | Linton | Albvm. | By | P. 8. 
[sic] De Smet | 8. J. 

Manuscript belonging in 1887 to the late Col. 
John Mason Brown, Louisville, Ky.; embel- 
lished cover with title as above, no inside title, 
pp. 1-84,4°. Pen and water-color sketches on 
pp. 1. 3, 15, 33, 55, 61, and 65. 

The Lord’s prayer in the Flathead language, 
p. 69. 

Peter John De Smet, missionary, born in Ter- 
monde, Belgium, December 31, 1801, died in St. 
Louis, Mo., in May, 1872. He studied in the 
Episcopal Seminary of Mechlin, and while there 
he feltcalled to devote himself to the conversion 
of the Indians. When Bishop Nerinx visited 


Snanaimoo. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Smet (P. J.) —Continued. 

Belgium in search of missionaries, De Smet, 
with five other students, volunteered to accom- 
pany him, and sail from Amsterdam in 1821. 
After a short stay in Philadelphia, De Smet 
entered the Jesuit novitiate at Whitemarsh, 
Md. Here he took the Jesuit habit. In 1828 
he went to St. Louis and took part in establish- 
ing the University of St. Louis,in which he 
was afterwards professor. In 1838 he was sent 
to establish a mission among the Pottawatta- 
mies on Sugar Creek. He built a chapel, 
erected a school, which was soon crowded with 
pupils, and in a short time converted most of 
the tribe. In 1840 he begged the bishop of St. 
Louis to permit him to labor among the Flat- 
heads of the Rocky Mountains, and set out on 
April 30,1840. He arrived on July 14 in the 
camp of Peter Valley, where about 1,600 Indians 
had assembled to meet him. With the aid of an 
interpreter he translated the Lord’s prayer, the 
Creed, and the Commandments into their lan- 
guage, and in a fortnight all the Flatheads 
knew these prayers and commandments, which 
were afterward explained to them. In the 
spring of 1841 he set out again, and, after pass- 
ing through several tribes, crossed the Platte 
and met at Fort Hall a body of Flatheads who 
had come 800 miles to escort the missionaries. 
On September 24 the party reached Bitterroot 
River, where it was decided to form a permanent 
settlement. The lay brothers built a church 
and residence, while De Smet went to Colville 
to obtain provisions. On his return . he 
remained in the village, familiarizing himself 
with the language, into which he translated the 
catechism. He then resolved to visit Fort 
Vancouver; on his return to 
Mary’s he resolved to cross the wilderness 
again to St.Louis. There he laid the condition 
of his mission before his superiors, who 
directed him to go to Europe and appeal for aid 
tothe people of Belgium and France. He sailed 
from Antwerp in December, 1843, with five 
Jesuits and six sisters, and reached Fort Van- 
couver in August, 1844. In 1845 he began aseries 
of missions among the Zingomenes, Sinpoils, 
Okenaganes, Flatbows, and Koetenays, which 
extended to the watershed of the Saskatchewan 


and Columbia, the camps of the wandering | 


Assiniboins and Creeks, and the stations of 
Fort St.Anneand Bourassa. He visited Europe 
several times in search of aid for his missions. 
During his last visit to Europe he met with a 
severe accident, in which several of his ribs 
were broken, and on his return to St. Louis he 
wasted slowly away.—Appleton's Cyclop. of 
Am. Biog. 


See Snanaimuk. 


Snanaimuk: 


See Boas (F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 


Gentes 

Grammatic treatise 
Legends 

Lord's prayer 


SAL——5 


St. | 


Lord’s prayer 
Numerals 
Prayers 


Ten commandments 


Snanaimuk— Continued. 
Carmany (J. H.) 


Eells (M.) 
Boas (F.) 


Bancroft (H. H.) 


65 


Ten commandments Carmany (J. H.) 


Texts Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Words Boas (F.) 
Snohomish: 
Catechism See Boulet (J. B.) 
Geographic names Coones (S. F.) 
Geographic names Eells (M.) 
Grammatio treatise Eells (M.) 


Boulet (J. B.) 
Bulmer (T.8.) 


Hymns 
Lord's prayer 


Lord's prayer Youth’s. 
Prayer book Boulet (J. B.) 
Sentences Youth's. 
Vocabulary Boldue (J. B. Z.) 
Vocabulary Chirouze (—) 
Vocabulary Craig (R. O.) 
Words Boas (F.) 
Words Youth’s. 
Songish: 
Gentes See Boas (F.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Proper names Macdonald (D. G. F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Words Boas (F.) 
Songs: 
Kawichen See Boas (F.) 
Klallam Baker (T.) 
Klallam Eells (M.) 
Twana Baker (T.) 
Spokan: 


Bible, Matthew See Walker (E.) 


Geographic names Eells (M.) 
Grammatic treatise Eells (M.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Primer Walker (E.) and Eells 


(C.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Stanley (J.M.) 


Proper names 
Proper names 


Relationships Gibbs (G.) 
Relationships Morgan (L. H.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 


Squallyamish. See Niskwalli. 


[Squire (Gor. Watson C.)] Report | of 
the | governor of Washington territory 
| for | the year 1884. | 


66 


Squire (W. C.) — Continued. 
Washington: | Government printing 
office. | 1884. 


Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 3-62, map, 8°. 

A few Salish plant and fish names, pp. 12, 13. 

Copies seen: Eames, Gatschet, Pilling. 


See Skwaksin. 


Stabat mater [Kalispel]. 
trelli (P.) 


Squoxon. 


See Canes- 


Stailakum: 
Grammatic treatise See Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Stalo: 
Prayers See Durieu (P.) 


Stanley (J. M.) Portraits | of | North 
American Indians, | with sketches of 
scenery, etc., | painted by | J. M. Stan- 
ley. | Deposited with | the Smithsonian 
institution.| [Sealof the institution. ] | 

Washington: | Smithsonian institu- 
tion. | December, 1852. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
names of printers 1 1. preface verso contents 1 1. 
text pp. 5-72, index pp. 73-76, 8°. 

Forms Smithsonian Institution Miscellaneous 
Collections, 53; also part of vol. 2 of the same 
series, Washington, 1862. 

Contains the names of personages of many 


Indian tribes of the United States, toanumber | 


of which is added the English signification. 


Among the peoples represented are the Spo- | 


kanes, pp. 68-71; Stony Island Indians, p. 71; | 


Okinagans, p. 72. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
(Geological Survey, Pilling, Powell, Smithsonian 
‘Institution. 


[Steiger (E.) Steiger’s | bibliotheca glot- 
“tica, | part first. | A catalogue of | Dic- 


tionaries, Grammars, Readers, Exposi- | 


tors, etc. |of mostly |modern languages 
|| spoken in all parts of the earth, | 
except of | English, French, German, 
an@ Spanish. | First division: | Abenaki 
to Hebrew. | 

KE. Steiger, | 22 & 24 Frankfort Street, 

| New York. [1874.] 

Half-title on cover, title as above verso name 
of printer 1 1. notice dated Sept. 1874 verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 1-40, advertisements 2 11. col- 
ophon on back cover, 12°. 


Titles of works relating to American lan- 
guages generally, p.3; to the Clallam, p. 24. 


The second division of the first part was not | 


published. Part second is on the Enylish lan- 


guage and part third on the German language. | 


In his notice the compiler states : ‘‘ This com- 
pilation must not be regarded as an attempt at 
a complete linguistic bibliography, but solely as 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Steiger (E.) — Continued. 
a bookseller’s catalogue for business purposes, 
with special regard to the study of philology 
in America.” 
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


Stillacum. See Stailakum. 


Stumpf (C.) Lieder der Bilakula 
Indianer. Von C. Stumpf. 


In Vierteljahrschrift fiir Musik-Wissen- 
schaft, vol. 2, p. 408 [1885 ?] (*) 


Swan (James Gilchrist). The | north- 
west coast; | or, | three years’ resi- 
dence in Washington | territory. | By - 
James G. Swan. | [Territorial seal.] | 
With numerous illustrations. | 

New York: | Harper & brothers, 
publishers, | Franklin square. | 1857. 


Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 
(1857) 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. introduc- 
tion pp. v-vii, contents pp. ix-xiv, list of illus- 
trations p. [xv], map, text pp. 17-409, appendix 
pp. 411-429, index pp. 431-435, 12°. 

Chapter xviii, Language of the Indians (pp. 
306-326), contains a comparison of Chehalis 
words with the Mexican, p.313; general dis- 
cussion with examples of the Chehalis lan- 
guage, pp. 315-317.—_Vocabulary of the Che- 
halis (180 words and sentences), alphabetically 
arranged by Chehalis words, pp. 412-415.— 
Numerals 1-1000 of the Chehalis, pp. 420-421.— 
Many Chehalis terms passim. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston 
Athenzum, British Museum, Congress, Eames, 
Geological Survey, Harvard, Mallet, Pilling. 

Issued also with title-page as follows: 


j 


—— The | northwest coast; | or, | three 
years’ residence in Washington | terri- 
tory. | By | James G. Swan. | With 
numerous illustrations. | 

London: | Sampson Low, Son & co., 
47 Ludgate hill. | New York: Harper 
& brothers. | 1857. 


Frontispiece 11. title 1 1. dedication verso 
blank 1 1. introduction pp. v-vi, contents pp. 
ix-xiv, list of illustrations p. [xv], map, text 
pp. 17-409, appendix pp. 411-429, index pp. 431- 
435, 12°. : 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Charles L. Woodward, New 
York City. 

Mr. James Gilchrist Swan was born in Med- 
ford, Mass., January 11, 1818, and was educated 
at anacademy in that place. In 1833 he went tc 
Boston to reside, and remained there until 1849, 
when heleft forSan Francisco, where he arrived 
in 1850. In 1852 he went to Shoalwater Bay, 
where he remained until 1856, when he returned 
east. In 1859 he returned to Puget Sound; since 
then Port Townsend has been his headquarters. 
In 1860 Mr. Swan went to Neah Bay. InJune, 
1862, he way appointed teacher of the Makah 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Swan (J. G.) — Continued. 

Indian Reservation, where he remained till 1866. 
In 1869 he went to Alaska, and in May, 1875, he 
went a second time to Alaska, this time under 
the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, as 
a commissioner to purchase articles of Indian 
manufacture for the Philadelphia Centennial 
Exposition. This fine collection is now in the 
U.S. National Museum at Washington. July 
31, 1878, Mr. Swan was appointed an inspector 
of customs at Neah Bay, Cape Flattery, and 


D. 


Tait: Thompson River Indians. 


Numerals See Eells (M.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 


Talimoh. See Tilamuk. 


Tate (Rev. Charles Montgomery). [Hymn 
in the Aukamenum language of Fraser 
River, British Columbia. ] 

Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, in the possession of the 
compiler of this bibliography. 

Two verses and chorus of the hymn ‘‘Sweet 
bye and bye.” 

Mr. Tate came to British Columbia from 
Northumberland, England, in 1870. He engaged 


67 


| Swan (J. G.)— Continued. 


in mission work among the Flathead Indians | 


at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island,in 1871, where 
he learned the Aukaménum language spoken 
by the Indian tribes on the east coast of Van- 
couver Island, lower Fraser River, and Puget 
Sound. Here he spent three years, when he 
removed to Port Simpson, on the borders of 
Alaska, among the Tsimpsheans. He next 


remained there until August, 1888, adding much 
to our knowledge of the Makah Indians, which 
was reported to Prof. Baird and published in a 
bulletin of the U.S. National Museum. In 1883 
he went to Queen Charlotte Islands for the 
Smithsonian Institution and made another col- 
lection for the U.S. National Museum. 


Szmiméie-s Jesus Christ [Kalispell]. See 


Giorda (J.) 


See Netlakapamuk. 


Tilamuk: 
General discussion See Hale (H.) 
Gentes Boas (F.) 
Grammiatic treatise Gallatin (A.) 
Grammatic treatise Hale (H.) 
Sentences Lee (D.) and Frost (J. 
H.) 
Texts Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Vocabulary Lee (D.) and Froat (J. 
H.) 
Words Bancroft (H. H.) 
Words Pott (A. F.) 
Tillamook. See Tilamuk. 
| Toanhuch: 
Vocabulary See Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Vocabulary Salish. 


| Tolmie (Dr. William Fraser). 


moved to the Fraser River and spent seven | 


years amongst the Flathead tribes between 
Yale and Westminster, frequently visiting the 
Indians on the Nootsahk River in Washington 
Territory. Mr. Tate spent four years, 1880 to 
188+, among the Bella-Bellas, returning in the 
latter year to the mission on Fraser River. 


Ten commandments: 


Netlakapamuk See Good (J. B.) 

Snanaimuk Bancroft (H. H.) 

Snanaimuk Carmany (J. H.) 
Texts: 

Kalispel See Lettre. 

IKomuk Boas (F.) 

Lilowat Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 

Nehelim Boas (F.) 

Netlakapamuk Good (J. B.) 

Netlakapamuk Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 

Okinagan Boas (F.) 

Pentlash Boas (F.) 

Salish Canestrelli (P.) 

Salish Palladine (L.) 

Snanaimuk Boas (F.) 

Tilamuk Boas (F.) 

Twana Bulmer (T.S,) 

Twana Eells (M,) 


[ Vocabu- 
laries of the northwest coast of North 
America. | 

In Royal Geog. Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 11, 
pp. 230-246, London, 1841, 8°. (Geological Sur- 
vey.) 

These vocabularies occur in an article by 
Scouler (J.), Observations on the indigenous 
tribes of the northwest coast of America, and 
are as follows: 

Vocabulary of the Billechoola, spoken by 
coast tribes from lat. 50° 30/ to 53° 30/ (numerals 
1-1000, and 150 words and phrases), pp. 230- 
235.—Vocabulary of the Okinagen, spoken on 
Fraser's River (numerals 1-100 and 105 words 
and phrases), pp. 236-241.—Vocabulary of the 
Kawitchen, spoken at the entrance of Trading 
River, opposite Vancouver Island; Noosdalum, 
Hood’s Canal; and Squallyamish, Puget 
Sound (numerals 1-100 and 150 words and 
phrases), pp. 242-247. 


—— Vocabulary of the Shooswap. 


In Gibbs (G.), Comparative vocabularies, ll. 
1-3, Washingt on, 1873, 4°. 


—— Vocabulary of the Shooswap, and of 


the Wa-ky-ni-kaine, 


68 


Tolmie (W. F.)— Continued. 

In Powell (J. W.), Contributions to N. A. 
Hthnology, vol. 1, pp. 252-265, Washington, 1877, 
4°, 

Each contains the 180 words called for on the 
Smithsonian standard form. 


— Vocabulary of the Kulleespelm. 

In Powell (J. W.), Contributions to N. A. 
Ethnology, vol. 1, pp. 270-282, Washington, 1877, 
4°, 

—— [A list of prepositions in the Nis- 
qually language. ] 

Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, written on one side 
only; inthelibrary of the Bureau of Ethnology. 
Recorded April 21, 1856. 


and Dawson(G.M.) Geological and 
natural history survey of Canada. | 
Alfred R. C. Selwyn, F.R.S., F.G.S., 
Director. | Comparative vocabularies 
| of the | Indian tribes | of | British 
Columbia, | with a map illustrating dis- 
tribution. | By | W. Fraser Tolmie, | 
Licentiate of the Faculty of Physicians 
and Surgeons,Glasgow. | And | George 
M. Dawson, D.S.,A.S.R.M., F.G.S., &c. 


| [Coat of arms.] | Published by author- | 


ity of Parliament. | 
Montreal: | Dawson brothers. | 1884. 


Cover title nearly as above, title as above 
verso blank 1]. letter of transmittal signed by 
G. M. Dawson verso blank 1 1. preface signed by 
G. M. Dawson pp. 5B-7B, introductory note 
signed by W.¥.Tolmie pp. 9B-12B, text pp. 
148-1318, map, 8°. 

Vocabularies (240 words) of the Kawitshin 
(Kowmook or Tlathool, by Tolmie), Kawitshin 
(Snanaimooh tribe, by Tolmie), Kawitshin 
(Songis tribe, by Tolmie and Dawson), and 
Kawitshin (Kwantlin sept, by Tolmie and Daw- 
son), pp. 38B-49B.— Vocabularies (240 words) of 

‘ the Niskwalli(Sinahomish. by Tolmieand Daw- 
son), and Tsheheilis (Staktamish, by Tolmie), 
pp. 50B-61B.—Vocabulary (230 words) of the 
Bilhoola (Noothlakimish, by Tolmie and Daw- 
son), and Selish (Lillooet tribe, by Dawson), 
pp. 62B-73B.—Vocabulary (211 words) of the 
_Selish (Kullespelm tribe, by Tolmie and Daw- 
gon), pp. 78B-86B8.—Notes on the vocabularies: 
Kawitshin, pp. 119B-120B; Niskwalli and Tshe- 
heilis, p,121B; Bilhoola, p. 1228; Selish, p. 123B- 
1248.— Appendix IT. ‘‘ Comparative table of a 
few (68) words in the foregoing dialects,”’ viz: 
Selish (Kulléspelm), Nishwalli (Sinahomish), 
Kawitshin (Songis), Kawitshin (Kwantlin), Bil- 
hoola (Noothlakimish), p.127B8.—Appendix IIT. 
Comparison of afew words in various languages 
of North America, pp. 128B-130B, ineludes a few 
Niskwalli, Selish, and Kawitshin. 
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 


William Fraser Tolmie was born at Inver- 


ness, Scotland, February 3, 1812, and died De- 
cember 8, 1886, after anillness of only threedays, 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE > 


Tolmie (W. F.) — Continued. 

at his residence, Cloverdale, Victoria, B.C. He 
was educated at Glasgow University, where he 
graduated in August, 1832. On September 12 
of the same year he accepted a position as sur- 
geon and clerk with the Hudson’s Bay Com- 
pany, and left home for the Columbia River, 
arriving in Vancouver in the spring of 1833. 
Vancouver was then the chief post of the Hud- 
son’s Bay Company on this coast. In 1841 he 
visited his native land, but returned in 1842 
overland via the plains and the Columbia, and 
was placed in charge of the Hudson’s Bay posts 
on Puget Sound. He here took a prominent part, 
during the Indian war of 1855-56, in pacifying 
the Indians. Being an excellent linguist, he 
had acquired a knowledgeof the native tongues 
and was instrumental in bringing about peace 
between the whites and the Indians. He was 
appointed chief factor of the Hudson’s Bay 
Company in 1855, removed to Vancouver Island 
in 1859, when he went into stock-raising, being 
the first to introduce thoroughbred stock into 
British Columbia; was a member of the local 
legislature two terms, until 1878; was a member 
of the first board of education for several years, 
exercising a great influence in educational mat- 
ters; held many offices of trust, and was always 
a valued and respected citizen. 

Mr. Tolmie was known to ethnologists for his 
contributions to the history and linguistics of 
the native races of the West Coast, and dated 
his interest in ethnological matters from his 
contact with Mr. Horatio Hale, who visited the 
West. Coast as an ethnologist to the Wilkes 
exploring expedition. He afterwards trans- 
mitted vocabularies of a number of the tribes 
to Dr. Scouler and to Mr. George Gibbs, some 
of which were published in Contributions to 
North American Ethnology. In 1884 he pub- 
lished, in conjunction with Dr. G. M. Dawson, a 
nearly complete series of short vocabularies of 
the principal languages met with in British 
Columbia, and his name is to be found fre- 
quently quoted as an authority on the history of 
the Northwest Coast and its ethnology. He tre- 
quently contributed to the press upon public 
questions and events now historical. 


Toughwamish. See Dwamish. 


Treasury. The Treasury of Languages. 
| A | rudimeutary dictionary | of | 
universal philology. | Daniel iii. 4. | 
[One line in Hebrew.] | 

Hall and Co., 25, Paternoster row, 
London. | (All rightsreserved.) [18737] 

Colophon: London: | printed by Grant and 
co., 72-78, Turnmill street, E. C. : 

Title verso blank 1 1. advertisement (dated 
February 7th, 1873) verso blank 11. introduction 
(signed J. B.and dated October 31st, 1873) pp. 
i-iv, dictionary of languages (in alphabetical 
order) pp. 1-301, list of contributors p. [302], 
errata verso colophon 1 1. 12°. 

Edited by James Bonwick, Esq.,F. R.G.5., 
assisted by about twenty-two contributors, 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 69 


‘Treasury — Continued. 


whose initials are signed to the most important 
of their respective articles. In the compila- 
tion of the work free use was made of Bagster’s 
Bible of Every Land and Dr.Latham’s Llements 
of Comparatwe Philology. ‘There are also 
references to an appendix, concerning which 
there is the following note on p.301: ‘t Notice.— 
Owing to the unexpected enlargement of this 
Book in course of printing, the Appendix is 
necessarily postponed; and the more especially 
as additional matter has been received sufficient 
to make a second volume. And it will be pro- 
ceeded with so soon as an adequate list of Sub- 
scribers shall be obtained.’’ Under the name of 
each languageis a brief statement of the family 
or stock to which it belongs, and the country 
where it is or was spoken, together with refer- 
ences, in many cases, to the principal author- 
itieson the grammar and vocabulary. Addenda 
follow at the end of each letter. 

Contains scattered references to various dia- 
lects of the Salishan. 

Oopies seen : Eames. 


Tribal names: 


Atna See Latham (R. G.) 
Bilkula Latham (R. G.) 
Salish Hoffman (W.J.) 
Salish Kane (P.) 
Salish Keane (A. H.) 
Salish Latham (R. G.) 
Salish Powell (J. W.) 


Triibner (Nicolas). See Ludewig (H. E. ) 
Triibner & Co. Registered for Trans- 


mission Abroad.| Triibner’s | American 
and Oriental Literary Record. | A 
monthly register ; Of the most impor- 
tant Works published in North and 
South America, in | India, China, and 
the British Colonies: with occasional 
Notes on German, | Dutch, Danish, 
French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, 
and Russian Books. | No. 1[—Nos. 145-6. 
Vol. XII. Nos. 11 & 12]. March 16, 
1865[—December, 1879]. Price6d. | Sub- 
scription | 5s. per Annum, | Post Free. 

[London: Triibner & co. 1865-1879. ] 

12 vols.in 9, large 8°. No title-pages, head- 
ingsonly. No.1 tonos. 23 & 24 (March 30, 1867) 
are paged 1-424; no. 25 (May 15, 1867) to no. 60 
(August 25, 1870) are paged 1-816. The number- 
ing by volumes begins with no. 61 (September 
26, 1870), which is marked vol. VI,no.1. Vols. 
VIto XII contain pp.1-196; 1-272; 1-204; 1-184; 
1-176; 1-152; 1-164. Inaddition thereisaspecial 
number for September, 1874 (pp. 1-72), and an 
extra no, 128* for October, 1877 (pp. 1-16) ; also 
supplementary and other leaves. Continued 
under the following title: 

Triibner’s | American, European & Oriental 
| Literary Record. | A register of the most im- 
portant works | published in | Northand South 
America, India, China, Europe, | and the British 


Triibner & Co.— Continued. 


colonies. | With Occasional Notes on German, 
Duteh, Danish, French, Italian, Spanish, | Por- 
tuguese, Russian, and Hungarian Literature. | 
New series. Vol. I{-IX]. | January to Decem- 
ber, 1880[-January to December, 1888]: | 

London: | Triibner & co., 57 and 59, Ludgate 
hill. [1880-1888.] 

9 vols. large8°, Including no. 147-8 tono. 242. 
each volume with a separate title and leat of 
contents and its own pagination. Continued as 
follows: 

Triibner’s record, | a journal | devoted to the 
| Literature of the East, | with notes and lists 
of current | American, European and Colonial 
Publications. | No. 243[-251]. Third series. Vol. 
I. Parti[-Vol.II. Part3]. Price 2s. 

[London: Triibner & co. March, 1889-April, 
1891.] 

2 vols.; printed covers as above, no title- 
pages, large 8°. No more published. 

Titles of works in and relating to the Sali- 
shan languages are scattered through the 
periodical, together with notes on the subject. 
A list of ‘‘ Works on the aboriginal languages 
of America,” vol.8 (first series), pp. 185-189, 
includes titles under the special heading of 
Clallam and Lummi, p. 186; Selish, p. 189. 

Copies seen: Hames. 


Bibliotheca Hispano-Americana. | A 
‘catalogue|of | Spanish books | printed 
in | Mexico, Guatemala, Honduras, the 
Antilles, | Venezuela, Columbia, Ecua- 
dor, Peru, Chili, | Uruguay, and the 
Argentine Republic; | and of | Portu- 
guese books printed in Brazil. | Fol- 
lowed by a collection of | works on the 
aboriginal languages | of America. | 

On Sale at the affixed Prices, by | 
Triibner & co., | 8 & 60, Paternoster 
row, London. | 1870. | One shilling and 
sixpence. 

Cover title as above verso contents 1 1. noin- 
side title; catalogue pp. 1-184, colophon verso 
advertisements 1 1. 16°. 

Works on the aboriginal languages of Amer- 
ica, pp. 162-184, contains a list of books (alpha- 
betically arranged by languages) on this sub- 
ject, including: General works, pp. 162-168; 
Clallam and Lummi, p. 170; Selish, p. 184. 
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


—— A | catalogue | of | dictionaries and 


grammars |of the| Principal Languages 
and Dialects | of the World. | For sale 
by | Triibner & co. | 

London: | Triibner & co., 8 & 60 Pa- 
ternoster row. | 1872. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
names of printers 1 1. notice verso blank 1 1. 


catalogue pp. 1-64, addenda and corrigenda 1 1. 
advertisements verso blank 1 1. a list of works 


70 


Triibner & Co.— Continued. 


relating to the science of language etc. pp. 
1-16, 8°. 

Contains titles of a few works in Clallam 
and Lummi, p. 12; in Selish, p. 54. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

A later edition with title-page as follows: 


— Triibner’s | catalogue | of | dictiona- 


ries and grammars | of the | Principal 
Languages and Dialects of the World. | 
Second edition, | considerably enlarged 
and revised, with an alphabetical in- 
dex. | A guide for students and book- 
sellers. | [Monogram. ] | 

London: | Triibner & co., 57 and 59, 
Ludgate hill. | 1882. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso list of 
catalogues 1 1. notice and preface to the second 
edition p.ili, index pp. iv—viii, text pp. 1-168, 
additions pp. 169-170, Triibner’s Oriental & 
Linguistic Publications pp. 1-95, 8°. 

Contains titles of works in American lan- 
guages (general), p.3; Clallam, p. 38; Selish, p. 
142. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


—No. 1[-12]. January 1874[-May, 


1875]. | A catalogue | of | choice, rare, 
and curious books, | selected from the 
stock | of | Triibner & Co., | 57 & 59, 
Ludgate hill, London. 

[London: Triibner & co. 1874-1875. ] 


12 parts; no titles. headings only; catalogue 
(paged continuously) pp. 1-192, large 8°. This 
series of catalogues was prepared by Mr. James 
xeorge Stuart Burges Bohn. See Triibner’s 
American, European, & Oriental Literary Mec- 
ord, new series, vol. 1, pp.10-11 (February, 1880). 

Works on the aboriginal languages of Amer- 
ica, no. 8, pp. 113-118, including titles under the 
headings Clallam and Lummi, and Selish. 

Copies seen: Eames. 


Trumbull: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates thata copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Dr. J. Hammond Trum- 
bull, Hartford, Conn. 


Trumbull (Dr. James Hammond). Indian 


[ 


languages of America. 

In Johnson's New Universal Cyclopedia, 
vol.2, pp. 1155-1161, New York, 1877, 8°. (Bureau 
of Ethnology, Congress.) 

A general discussion of the subject, in- 

eluding linguistic divisions, ete., treating 
among others the Salishan. 
] Cataiogue | of the | American Li- 
brary | of the late | mr. George Brinley, 
| of Hartford, Conn. | Part I. | America 
in general | New France Canada ete. | 
theBritish colonies to 1776 | New Eng- 
land | [-Part V. | General and miscel- 
laneous. | [&c. eight lines. ] 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Trumbull (J. H.) — Continued. 

Hartford | Press of the Case Lock- 
wood & Brainard Company | 1878 
[-1893] 

5 parts, 8°. Compiled by Dr. J. H. Trumbull. 

Indian languages: general treatises and col- 
lections, part 3, pp. 123-124; Northwest coast, 
p. 141. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

James Hammond Trumbull, philologist, was 
born in Stonington, Conn., December 20, 1821. 
He entered Yale in 1838, and though, owing to 
ill health, he was not graduated with his class, 
his name was enrolled among its members in 
1850 and he was given the degree of A.M. He 
settled in Hartford in 1847, and was assistant 
secretary of state in 1847-1852 and 1858-1861, 
and secretary in 1861-1864, also state librarian in 
1854. Soon after going to Hartford he joined the 
Connecticut Historical Society, was its corre- 
sponding secretary in 1849-1863, and was elected 
its president in 1863. He has been a trustee of 
the Watkinson free library of Hartford and its 
librarian since 1863, and has been an oflicer of 
the Wadsworthathenzeum since 1864. Dr. Trum- 
bull was an original member of the American 
Philological Association in 1869 and its presi- 
dent in 1874-1875. He has been a member of the 
American Oriental Society since 1860 and of the 
American Ethnological Society since 1867, and 
honorary member of many State historical soci- 
eties. In 1872 he was elected to the National 
Academy of Sciences. Since 1858 he has devoted 
special attention to the subject of the Indian 
languages of North America. He has prepared 
a dictionary and vocabulary to John Eliot's 
Indian bible and is probably the only Amer- 
ican scholar that is now able to read that work. 
In 1873 he was chosen lecturer on Indian lan- 
guages of North America at Yale, but loss of 
health and other labors soon compelled his 
resignation. The degree of LL. D. was con- 
ferred on him by Yale in 1871 and by Harvard 
in 1887, while Columbia gave him an L. H.D. 
in 1887.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 

Tsihalis. See Chehalis. 
Turner (William Wadden). See Lude- 


wig (H. E.) 


Twana: 

Dictionary See Eells (M.) 
Geographic names Coones (5. F.) 
Geographbie names Eells (M.) 
Grammar Eells (M.) 
Grammatic treatise Bulmer (T.S.) 
Grammatic treatise Eells (M.) 
Hymns Fells (M.) 
Legends Bulmer (T.S.) 
Legends Eells (M.) 
Lord's prayer Bulmer (T.5.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Prayers Eells (M.) 
Songs Baker (T.) 
Text Bulmer (T.8.) 
Text Fells (M.) 


Vocabulary Eells (M.) 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 71 


Tylor (Edward Burnett). Anthropol- 
ogy: | an introduction to the study of 
| man and civilization. | By | Edward 
B. Tylor, D.C. L., F. R.S. | With illus- 
trations. | 

London:| Maemillan and co. | 1881. | 
The Right of Translation and Repro- 
duction is Reserved. 

Half-title verso design 1 1. title verso names 


of printers 11. preface pp.v-vii, contents pp. ix- 
xii, list of illustrations pp. xiii-xiv, text pp. 1- 


440, selected books pp.441—442, index pp. 443-448, 


12°. 

A few words in the language of Vancouver 
Island, pp. 134, 141. 

Copies seen: Boston Athenzeum, British 
Museum, Congress. 


—— Anthropology: | an introduction to 
the study of | man and civilization. | 
By | Edward B.Tylor, D.C. L., F.R.S. 
| With illustrations. | 
New York: ; D. Appleton and com- 
pany, | 1,3, and 5 Bond street. | 1881. 
Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 
1. preface pp. v-vii, contents pp. ix—xii, list of 
illustrations pp. xiii-xv, text pp. 1-440, selected 
books pp. 441-442, index pp. 443-448, 12°. 
Linguistic contents as under title next above. 
Copies seen: Congress, Geological Survey, 
National Museum. 


— Kinleitung | in das | Studium der 
Anthropologie | und | Civilisation. | 
Von | Dr. Edward B. Tylor, | [&c. two 
lines.] | Deutsche [&c. four lines. ] | 


¥ 


Van Gorp (fev. L.) The Lord’s prayer 
in the Kalispel language. 
In Smalley (E. V.), The Kalispel Country, in 


the Century Magazine, vol. 29, p. 455, New 
York and London, 1883, 8°. 


Vater (Dr. Johann Severin). Linguarum 
totius orbis | Index | alphabeticus, | 
quarum | Grammaticae, Lexica, | col- 
lectiones vocabulorum | recensentur, | 
patria significatur, historia adum- 
bratur | a| Joanne Severino Vatero, | 
Theol. Doct. et Profess. Bibliothecario 
Reg., Ord. | S. Wladimiri equite. | 

Berolini | In officina libraria Fr. 
Nicolai. | MDCCCXV[1815]. 

Second title: Litteratur | der | Grammatiken, 
Lexica | und | Wortersammlungen | aller 
Sprachen der Erde | nach | alphabetischer Ord- 
nung der Sprachen, | mit einer | gedriingten 
Uebersicht | des Vaterlandes, der Schicksale | 


Tylor (E. B.) — Continued. 


Braunschweig, | Druck und Verlag 
von Friedrich Viewig und Sohn. | 1883. 

Pp. i-xix, 1-538, 8°. 

Chapters iv, v, Die Sprache, pp. 134-178. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 


—— The international scientific series | 


Anthropology | an introduction to the 
study of | man and civilization | By 
Edward B. Tylor, D.C.L., F.R.S. | 
With illustrations | 

New York | D. Appleton and com- 
pany | 1888 

Half-title of the series verso blank 1 1. title 
as above verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v—vili, con- 
tents pp. ix—xii, listof illustrations pp. xiii-xiv, 
text p p. 1-440, selected books pp. 441-442, index 
pp. 4 43-448, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen: Harvard. 


— Anthropology: | an introduction to 


the study of | man and civilization. | 
By | Edward B. Tylor, D.C. L., F. B.S. 
| With illustrations. | Second edition, 
revised. | 

London: | Macmillan and co. | and 
New York. | 1889. | The Right of Trans- 
lation and Reproduction is Reserved. 

Half-title verso design 1 1. title verso names 
of printers etc. 1 1. preface pp. v—vii, contents 
pp. ix-xii, list of illustrations pp. xiii-xv, text 
pp. 1-440, selected books etc. pp. 441-442, index 
pp. 443-448, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen: Eames. 


Vater (J.S.) — Continued. 


und Verwandtschaft derselben | von { Dr. 
Johann Severin Vater, | Professor und Biblio- 
thekar zu Koénigsberg des 8S. Wladimir- | Or- 
dens Ritter. | 

Berlin | in der Nicolaischen Buchhandlung. 

| 1815. 

Latin title verso l. 1 recto blank, German title 
recto 1.2 verso blank, dedication verso blank 1 
l]. address to the king 1 1. preface pp. i-ii, to 
the reader pp. iii-iv, half-title verso blank 1! 1. 
text pp. 3-250, 8°. Alphabetically arranged by 
names of languages, double columns, German 
and Latin. 

Notices of works relating to the Atnah lan- 
guage, p. 21. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 

A later edition in German titled as follows: 
Litteratur | der| Grammatiken, Lex- 


ika | und | Woértersammlungen | aller 
Sprachen der Erde | von | Johann Se- 


72 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Vater (J. S.) —Continued. 
verin Vater. | Zweite, vollig umgear- 
beitete Ausgabe | von | B. Jiilg. | 
Berlin, 1847. | In der Nicolaischen 


Buchhandlung. 


Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 
1. Vorwort (signed B. Jiilg and dated 1. Decem- 
ber 1846) pp. v-x, titles of general works on the 
subject pp. xi-xii, text (alphabetically arranged 
by names of languages) pp. 1-450, Nachtrage 
und Berichtigungen pp. 451-541, Sachregister 
pp. 542-563, Autorenregister pp. 564-592, Verbes- 


serungen 2 II. 8°. 


List of works relating to the Atnah, pp. 38, 
459; Billechoola, p. 490; Flathead, p. 483; 
Friendly Village, p. 490; Kawitschen, p. 503; 
Nusdalum, p. 528; Okanagan, p. 335; Spokan- 
Indianer, p. 483; Squallyamish, p. 382. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Harvard. 

Atthe Fischer sale, no. 1710, a copy sold for 1s. 


Vocabulary: 
Atna 


Atna 
Atna 
Atna 
Atna 
Atna 
Atna 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 


Chehalis 
Chehalis 
Chehalis 
Chehalis 
Chehalis 
Chehalis 
Chehalis 


Dwamish 
Friendly Village 


Friendly Village 
Friendly Village 
Friendly Village 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 


See Adelung (J. C) and Vater (J.8.) 


See Adelung (J. C.) and 


Vater (J.5.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Hale (H.) 

Howse (J.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Boas (F.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Powell (J. W-) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Scouler (J.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) and 

Dawson (G. M.) 

Eells (M.) 

Hale (H.) 

Latham (R. G.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 

Smet (P. J. de). 

Swan (J. G.) 

Tolmie (W. F.) and 

Dawson (G. M.) 
Salish. 

Adelung (J. C.) and 

Vater (J.S.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Gibbs (G.) 

Hale (H.) 

Pinart (A. L.) 

Powell (J. W.) 

Roehrig (F. L. O.) 

Tolmie (W. F.) 

Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 


Vocabulary — Continued. 


Kaulits 
Kaulits 
Kaulits 
Kaulits 
Kaulits 
Kaulits 
Kaulits 
Kawichen 
Kawichen 
Kawichen 
Kawichen 


Klallam 
Klallam 
Klallam 
Klallam 
Klallam 
Klallam 
Klallam 
Komuk 
Kkomuk 
Komuk 
Komuk 
Komuk 
Komuk 
Kwantlen 
Kwantlen 
Kwantlen 


Kwinaiutl 
Kwinaiutl 
Kwinaiutl 
Kwinaiutl 
Lilowat 
Lilowat 
Lilowat 
Lilowat 
Lilowat 


Lummi 

Lummi 
Lummi 
Nehelim 
Netlakapamuk 
Netlakapamuk 
Netlakapamuk 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 


Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Nuksahk 

Nuksahk 

Nuksahk 

Nusalph 


Gallatin (A.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Hale (H.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Wabass (W. G.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Scouler (J.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Eells (M.) - 
Gibbs (G.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Scouler (J.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Brinton (D.G.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Pinart (A L.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Hale (H.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Boas (F.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 


Tolmie (W. F.) and 


Dawson (G. M.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Boas (F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Campbell (J.) 
Canadian. 
Eells (M.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Hale (H.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Montgomerie (J. E.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Salish. 
Scouler (J.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) and 

Dawson (G. M.) 
Wickersham (J.) 
Wilson (E. F.) 
Gatschet (A.S.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Gibbs (G.) 


, 


oe i ee A Cae en I ee SS 


Seer 


Wakynakane. 


Nusalph 
Okinagan 
Okinagan 
Okinagan 
Okinagan 
Okinagan 
Okinagan 
Okinagan 
Okinagan 
Pentlash 
Piskwau 
Piskwau 
Piskwau 
Piskwau 
Piskwau 
Piskwau 
Puyallup 
Puyallup 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Shiwapmuk 
Shiwapmuk 
Shiwapmuk 
Shuswap 
Shuswap 
Shuswap 
Shuswap 
Shuswap 
Shuswap 
Shuswap 
Shuswap 
Sicatl 
Silets 
Skagit 


ae 
Cowlitz language. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


Vocabulary — Continued. 


Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 

Boas (F.) 

Gibbs (G.) 
Howse (J.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (I. L. 0.) 
Scouler (J.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Gibbs (G.) 

Hale (H.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
McCaw (S. R.) 
Salish. 

Candian. 

Cooper (J. G.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Henry (A.) 
Hoftman (W. J.) 
Howse (J.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Maximilian (A. P.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F, L. 0.) 

Salish. 

Smet (P. J. de) 
Wilkes (C.) 
Wilson (E. F.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Boas (F.) 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Gibbs (G.) 

Hale (H.) 
Howse (J.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Craig (R. 0.) 


73 


Vocabulary — Continued. 


Skagit 
Skitsuish 
Skitsuish 
Skitsuish 
Skitsuish 
Skitsuish 
Skitsuish 
Skitsuish 
Skokomish 
Skokomish 
Skoyelpi 
Skoyelpi 
Skoyelpi 
Skoyelpi 
Skoyelpi 
Skoyelpi 
Skwamish 
Snanaimuk 
Snanaimuk 
Snanaimuk 
Snanaimuk 


Snohomish 
Snohomish 
Snohomish 
Songish 
Songish 


Spokan 
Spokan 
Spokan 
Spokan 
Spokan , 
Stailakum 
Tait 

Tait 
Tait 
Tilamuk 
Tilamuk 
Tilamuk 
Tilamuk 
Tilamuk 


Toanhuch 
Toanhueh 
Toanhuch 
Twana 


W. 


Wabass (Dr. W.G.) Vocabulary of the 


Manuscript, 1 leaf, 4°, in the library of the 
Bureau of Ethnology, Washington, D. C. 
Recorded at Cowlitz landing, February, 1858. 

A list of 23 English words with Cowlitz and 


Chinook equivalents. 


See Okinagan. 
Walker (fev. Elkanah). 


[A portion of 


the gospel of Matthew in the Flathead 
or Spokan language. ] Ged) 


Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Hale (H.) 
Mengarini (G.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Smet (P. J. de.) 
Boas (F.) 
Salish. 
Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Hale (H.) 
Mengarini (G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Salish. 
Boas (F.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Boldue (J.-B. Z.) 
Chirouze (—) 
Craig (R. O.) 
Boas (F.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) and 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Hale (H.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Boas (F.) 
sibbs (G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Roehrig (F. L. 0.) 
Boas (F.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Hale (H.) 
Latham (R.G.) 
Lee (D.) and Frost (J. 
H.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
toehrig (F. L. O.) 
Salish. 
Eells (M.) 


Walker (E.)— Continued. 

Manuscript, 20 pages, 8°, belonging to Rey. 
Myron Eells, Union City, Wash., who has 
kindly described it for me as follows: 

‘“ Translated from the original Greek by Rev. 
Elkanah Walker, missionary of the American 
Board of Commissioners for Foreign Missions, 
in accordance with a vote of the Oregon mis- 
sion passed at a meeting held in May, 1845, 
Jan. 1st, 1846. I copied it from an older manu- 
script, which I believe my father had, and 
which I presume has been burned. It contains 


74 


Walker (E.) — Continued. 

only chapters 1-3 and chapter 4, verses 1-23. It 
was never printed, I believe, nor am I aware 
that the translation was ever finished.”’ 


and Eells (C.)] Etshiit | thlu | 
sitskai | thlu | siais| thlu | Sitskai- 
sitlinish. | [Picture.] | 

Lapwai: | 1842. 


Literal translation: First | the | writes | the 
| lesson | the | writes Creator. 

Title p. 1, text in the Spokan language pp. 2- 
16,sq.16°. This is said to be the third book 
printed in the United States west of the Rocky 
Mountains. 

Key to the alphabet, p. 2.—Siais [spelling les- 
sons] i-iii, pp. 8-4.—Siais [reading lessons] iv- 
xii, pp. 5-16. See the facsimile of the title-page. 

Copies seen: Eames, Eells, Pilling, Wicker- 


sham (Tacoma, Wash.), Pacific University (For- | 


est Grove, Oregon). The last mentioned is the 
only perfect copy Ihave seen. Prof. J.W.Marsh, 
the president of the wniversity, kindly per- 
mitted me to photograph the first four pages, in 
order to complete the other copies mentioned. 

I am indebted to Rey. Myron Eells for the 
following notes: 

“Rey. Elkanah Walker was born at North 
Yarmouth, Me., August 7,1805. Converted at 
the age of 26, he soon began to study for the 
ministry. Hetook an academic course, but did 
not go to college. He graduated from Bangor 


Theological Seminary, Me., in 1837,and gave | 


hinself to the foreign missionary work under 
the American Board of Commissioners for 
Foreign Missions. At first he was appointed 
to South Africa with Rev. C. Eells, but a fierce 


war between two native chiefs detained them, | 


and in the meantime the call from Oregon 


became so urgent that, with their consent, their | 


destination was changed. 


“He was ordained at Brewer, Me.,as a Con- | 


gregational minister in February, 1833, and was 


married March 5, 1838, to Miss Mary Richard- | 


son, who was born at Baldwin, Me., April 1, 
1811. Before her engagement to Mr. Walker 


she was appointed as a missionary to Siam; but | 


after that event her destination was changed 
first to Africa and then to Oregon. March 6, 
1838, they started to cross the continent, in 


company with three other missionaries and | 


their wives, where no white women had ever 


Whymper (Frederick). 


been except Mrs. Whitman and Mrs. Spalding. | 
Krom Missouri to Oregon the journey was on | 
horseback. They reached Wallawalla August | 
29, 1838, where they wintered. and the next | 


spring went to Tshimakain, Walkers Prairie, 
among the Spokan Indians, with Rev. C. Eells 
and wife. The next ten years were spent at this 
place. Atfirst the Indians were much interested, 
but, when they found that Christianity meant 
that they should give up gambling, incanta- 
tions,and the like, their interest grew less, so 
that none united with the church before they 
left. Subsequent events have shown, however, 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Walker (E.)— Continued. 


that many of them were Christians, for their 
lives have proved it. 

“Mr. Walker studied the Spokan language 
quite thoroughly and learned its scientific and 
grammatic construction more thoroughly than 
his colaborer. He prepared [with the assist- 
ance of Rey. Cushing Eells] a small primer in 
the language, which was printed in 1842 at 
Lapwai, Idaho, the only book ever printed in 
that language. [See title next above.] 

‘*On account of the Whitman massacre, in 
1847, at Wallawalla, he was obliged to remove, 
with his family, to the Willamette Valley, 
Oregon, in 1848. Until 1850 he made his home 
at Oregon City, and from that time until his 
death at Forest Grove. In 1848 he aided in 
organizing the Congregational Association of 
Oregon. The same year he assisted in found- 
ing Tualatin Academy and Pacific University, 
at Forest Grove, to which he gave $1.000 and of 
which he was a trustee eleven years previous 
to his death. He preached at Forest Grove 
and in the vicinity nearly all the time he lived 
there, and during his pastorate of the Congre- 
gational church at that place the church build- 
ing there was erected which cost $7,000, of 
which he gave $1,000. In 1870 he returned to 
Maine, on his only visit east. He died at Forest 
Grove, November 21, 1877, aged 72 years. His 
wife still lives there (1892), andof his eight chil- 
dren seven are living; five have been engaged 
in active Christian work among the Indians 
of the Pacific coast, and one is a missionary in 
China. The eldest one is the first white boy 
born in Oregon, Idaho, or Washington.” 


Watkinson: This word following a title or within 


parentneses aftera note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the Watkinson library, Hartford, Conn. 


Wellesley: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that acopy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Wellesley college, Wel- 
lesley, Mass. 

Travel and ad- 
venture | in the | territory of Alaska, | 
formerly Russian America—now ceded 
to the | United States—and in various 
other | parts of the north Pacific. | By 
Frederick Whymper.|[Design.] | With 
map and illustrations. | 

London | John Murray, Albemarle 
street. | 1868. | The right of Translation 
is reserved. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of 
printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. vii-ix, contents pp. xi-xix, list of illustra- 
tions p. [xx], text pp. 1-806, appendix pp. 307- 
331, map, plates, &°. 

A few Salishan phrases, pp. 43, 47. 

Copies seen : Boston Public, British Museum, 
Congress. 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 


THLU ia 
SITSKATL 
- THLU 


SIAIS 


“TRLY | 
Sitskeisitlinish. 


FACSIMILE OF THE TITLE-PAGE OF THE SPOKAN PRIMER, 


15 


76 


Whymper (I.) — Continued. 
At the Field sale, catalogue no. 2539, a copy 
brought $2.75. 
An American edition titled as follows: 


Travel and adventure | in the | 
territory of Alaska, | formerly Russian 
America—now ceded to the | United 
States—and in various other | parts of 
the north Pacific.| By Frederick 
Whymper. | [Design.] ) With map and 
illustrations. | 

New York: | Harper & brothers, pub- 
lishers, | Franklin square. | 1869. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. preface pp. xi-xii, contents 
pp. xili-xviil, list of illustrations p. xix, text 
pp. 21-332, appendix pp. 333-353, map and 
plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp- 63, 66. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenzum, 
Geological Survey, Powell. 
Reprinted, 1871, pp. xix, 21-353, 8*. (*) 


—— Frédérick Whymper | Voyages et 
aventures | dans | l’Alaska | (ancien 
Amérique russe) | Ouvrage traduit de 
VYAnglais | avec JVautorisation de 
Vauteur | par Emile Jonveaux | Ilus- 
tré de 37 gravures sur bois | et accom- 
pagné une carte. 

Paris | librairie Hachette et Cie | 
boulevard Saint-Germain, 79 | 1871 | 
Tous droits reservés 

Cover title as above, half-title verso names of 
printers 1 1. titleas above verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. i-ii, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-405, 
table des chapitres pp. 407-412, map, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
pp. 58, 65, 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


Wickersham (Judge James). The name 
is ‘‘ Tacoma.” 
In the Weekly Ledger, Tacoma, Warhington, 
Friday, February 10,1893. (Pilling.) 
A discussion concerning the name of the 
mountain, ‘‘Is it Tacoma or Rainier.” 
Niskwalli and Puyallup geographic terms. 
Reprinted, with additions, as follows: 


Proceedings | of the | Tacoma acad- 
emy of science, | February 6, 1893. | 


[Ornament.] | Paper by Hon. James | 
Wickersham. | Is it ‘‘Mt. Tacoma” or | 


“Rainier.” | What Do History and 
Tradition Say? | [Ornament.] | 
Tacoma: | Puget Sound Printing 
Company. | 1893. 
Cover title as above verso names of officers, 
no inside title, text pp. 1-16, 8°. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Wickersham (J.)— Continued. 


Names of a number of geographic features 
passim, mainly ‘‘ Nisquslly-Puyallup’’.—Ety- 
mology of the word Tacoma, p. 16. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 


—— [Material relating to the Nisqually 
language. | 


In response to my inquiries, Judge Wicker- 
sham, of Tacoma, Wash., writes me under date 
of November 14, 1892, as follows: 


“You ask for the title and full description of 
manuscript, ete., relating to the Nisqually lan- 
guage. As yet it has no title and consists of 
about 200 pages of words. definitions, legends, 
names, etc.,collected from a Nisqually Indian by 
the name of Leschi, who is the son of the cele- 
brated chief Quiemuth and nephew of Leschi, 
the war chief of the combined Nisqually, Pu- 
yallup, Klikitat, and Yakama war of 1855-’56 
on Puget Sound. Iam getting, in the best pos- 
sible manner, a complete vocabulary of the 
Nisqually, simon pure, and intend to keep at it 
until I have everything obtainable. 

‘“My idea now is to prepare the history of 
these people since the advent of the whites, 
their legends and myths, their language, hab- 
its, form of government, etc., in a small volume 
for preservation. It will have, of course, only a 
local interest, except to ethnologists, but it can 
still be made of so great interest to the people 
of our State as to become practically a history 
of the State of Washington.” 


James Wickersham was born in Marion 
county, Illinois, in 1857; received a common- 
school education. At 20 went into law office of 
Senator John M. Palmer, Springfield; Ill., and 
in 1880 was admitted to the bar upon examina- 
tion before the supreme court of Illinois. Was 
employed on census of 1880 under Special 
Agent Fred. H. Wines, engaged on statistical 
work in connection with the defective, delin- 
quent, and dependent classes in the United 
States. Upon the completion of this work, 
having married meanwhile, in 1883 moved to 
Tacoma, Wash.,where he began the practice of 
law. In 1884 was elected probate judge of 
Pierce county; was re-elected in 1886; since 
expiration of term has been engaged in the law 
practice at Tacoma. He made an exploration 
of the earthworks of mound-builders in Sanga- 
mon county, Illinois, in 1882 (see Smithsonian 
Rep., 1883, pp. 825-835), and has since been inter- 
ested in anthropological matters. Was one of 
the charter members of the Tacoma Academy of 
Science, and takes an active interest in its work. 
Mr. Wickersham makes a specialty of history 
of the northwest coast, and has gathered a fine 
library on that subjectas wellas ethnology. Has 
written Nisqually Indian languages, legends, 
etc., also the Chinese language on plan adopted 
by Smithsonian in collecting Indian vocabu- 
laries. Heis now engaged in arranging a com- 
parative list of words from the American 
Indian and some of the Mongolian langanges. 


—_—_— 


! = a 


Wilkes (Charles). 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 77 


Narrative | of the | 
United States | exploring expedition. | 
During the years | 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 
1842. | By | Charles Wilkes, U.S.N., | 
commander of the expedition, | mem- 
ber of the American philosophical 
society, etc. | In five volumes, and an 
atlas. | Vol. I[-V]. | 

Philadelphia: | printed by C. Sher- 
man. | 1844. 

5 vols. and atlas, maps, plates and steel 
vignettes, 4°. 

Names of the months in the Flathead lan- 
guage, vol. 4, p. 478. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Lenox. 

Only a limited number of this issue, 75 
copies, I believe, were printed, and these were 
for presentation. The copies of the quarto edi- 
tion issued for sale are dated 1845, as described 
in the next following title. Titles of several 
octavo editions are also given below. 

The quarto series was continued by the pub- 
lication of the scientific results of the expedi- 
tion to volume 24,of which vols. 18,19, 21, and 
22 are yet unpublished. They havea slightly 
changed title, beginning: United States explor- 
ing expedition. The only one containing lin- 
guistic matter is Hale (Horatio), Philology, 
vol. 6, Philadelphia, 1846, for title of which see 
p. 31 of this bibliography. 


— Narrative | of the | United States | 


exploring expedition. | During the 
years | 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | By 
| Charles Wilkes, U.S. N., | commander 
of the expedition, | member of the 
American philosophical society, ete. | 
In five volumes, and an atlas. | Vol. 
I[-V]. | 

Philadelphia: | Lea & Blanchard, | 
1845. 

5 vols. and atlas, maps, plates, and steel 
vignettes, 4°. 

This is the same edition as the preceding, 
but with new title. 

Names of the months in the Flathead lan- 
guage, vol. 4, p. 478. 

Copies seen: Eames, Lenox. 

The following are reprints: 


— Narrative | of the | United States | 


exploring expedition. | During the 
years | 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | By 
| Charles Wilkes, U.S. N. | commander 
of the expedition, | member of the 
American philosophical society, ete. | 
In five volumes, and an atlas. | Vol. 
I[-V]. | 

Philadelphia: | Lea & Blanchard. | 
1845. 


Wilkes (C.)—Continued. 


5 vols. and atlas, maps, plates, and steel 
vignettes, royal 8°. 

Names of the months in Flathead, with mean- 
ings, vol. 4, p. 450. : 

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, British 
Museum, Congress, Geological Survey, Lenox. 


—— Narrative | of the | United States | 


exploring expedition. | During the 
years | 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | By 
| Charles Wilkes, U.S. N. | commander 
of the expedition, | member of the 
American philosophical society, etc. | 
In five volumes and an atlas. | Vol. 
I[-V]}. | 

- London: | Wiley and Putnam. | 
(Printed by C. Sherman, Philadelphia, 
U.S. A.) | 1845. 


5 vols. and atlas, maps, plates, royal 8°. 

Names of the months in Flathead, with mean- 
ings, vol. 4, p. 450. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Harvard. 


—— Narrative | of the | United States | 


exploring expedition. | During the 
years | 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | By 
| Charles Wilkes, U.S. N. | commander 
of the expedition, | member of the 
American philosophical society, etc. | 
With illustrations and maps. | Vol. 
lea aips 

Philadelphia: | Lea & Blanchard. | 
1845. 

5 vols. maps, plates, 8°. 

This edition differs from the quarto and 
royal octavo editions in that woodcuts have 
been substituted for the 47 steel vignettes, in 
having only 11 of the 14 maps bound in, in 
being printed on somewhat thinner paper, in 
the omission in most copies of the 64 plates, and 
in not being accompanied by the atlas. 

Names of the months in Flathead, with mean- 
ings, vol. 4, p. 450. 

Copies seen : Congress. 
Narrative | of the | United States | 
exploring expedition. |.During the 
years | 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | By 
| Charles Wilkes,U.S. N. | commander 
of the expedition, |member of the 
American philosophical society, ete. | 
In five volumes, with thirteen maps. | 
Vol. I[-V]. | 

Philadelphia: | 1850. 

5 vols. maps, plates, 8°. 

Names of the months in Flathead, with mean- 
ings, vol. 4, p. 450. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Con- 
gress, National Museum. 

The edition of the Narrative: [London] 
Ingram, Cooke & Co.,1852, 2 vols. sq. 16° (Boston 
Atheneum), does not contain the linguistics, 


78 


Wilkes (C.)— Continued. 

I have seen mention of ‘‘a new edition,”’ 
New York, 1856. 

Charles Wilkes, naval officer, born in New 
York City, April 8, 1798, died in Washington, 
D.C., February 8,1877. He entered the navy 
as amidshipman January 1, 1818, and was pro- 
moted to lieutenant, April 28, 1826. He was 
appointed to the department of charts and 
instruments in 1830 and was the first in the 
United States to set up fixed astronomical in- 
struments and observe with them. On August 
18, 1838, hesailed from Norfolk, Va., in command 
of a squadron of five vessels and # storeship, to 
explorethesouthern seas. He visited Madeira, 


| 
| 
| 
| 


the Cape Verde Islands, Rio de Janeiro, Ti- | 
erra del Fuego, Valparaiso, Callao, the Pau- | 


motou group, Tahiti, the Samoan group (which 


he surveyed and explored), Wallis Island, and | 


Sydney in New South Wales. He left Sydney 
in December, 1839, and discovered what he 
thought to be an Antarctic continent, sailing 
along vast ice fields for several weeks. In 1840 


he thoroughly explored the Fiji group and | 


visited the Hawaiian Islands, where he meas- 
ured intensity of gravity by means of the pen- 
dulum on the summit of Mauna Loa. In 1841 
he visited the northwestern coast of America 
and Columbia and Sacramento rivers, and on 
November 1 set sail from San Francisco, visited 
Manila, Sooloo, Borneo, Singapore, the Cape of 


Good Hope, and St. Helena, and cast anchor at | 
Charges preferred | 


New York on June 10, 1842. 
against him by some of his officers were investi- 
gated by a court-martial, and he was acquitted 
of all except illegally punishing some of his 


crew, for which he was reprimanded. Heserved 


on the coast survey in 1842-43, was promoted to 
commander July 13, 1843, and employed in con- 
nection with the report on the exploring expe- 
dition at Washington in 1844-1861. He was 
commissioned a captain September 14, 1855, 
and when the civil war opened was placed in 
command of the steamer San Jacinto in 1861 
and sailed 


privateer Sumter. On November 8, 1861, he 


intercepted at sea the English mail steamer | 


Trent, bound from Havana to St. Thomas, W. 
I., and sent Lieut. Donald M. Fairfax on board 
to bring off the Confederate commissioners, 
John Slidell and James M. Mason, with their 
secretaries. The officials were removed to the 
San Jacinto, in which they were taken to Fort 
Warren, in Boston Harbor. The navy depart- 
ment gave Capt. Wilkes an emphatic commen- 
dation, Congress passed aresoiution of thanks, 
and his act caused great rejoicing throughout 
the north, where he was the hero of the hour. 
But, on the demand of the British government 
that Mason and Slidell should be given up, See- 
retary Seward complied, saying in his dispatch 
that, although the commissioners and their 
papers were contraband of war, and therefore 


in pursuit of the Confederate | 


Wilkes was right in capturing them, he should | 


have taken the Trent into port as a prize for | 
| Winatsha, 


adjudication, As he had failed to do so and 


Willoughby (C.) 


Wilson (Rev. Edward Francis). 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Wilkes (C.) —Continued. 


had constituted himself a judge in the matter, 
to approve his act would be to sanction the 
“right of search,’’ which had always been 
denied by the United States Government. The 
prisoners were therefore released. In 1862 
Wilkes commanded the James River flotilla 
and shelled City Point. He was promoted to 
commodore July 16, 1862,and took charge of a 
special squadron in the West Indies. He was 
placed on the retired list because of age, June 
25, 1864, and promoted to rear-admiral on the 
retired list July 25,1866. For his services to 
science as an explorer he received a gold medal 
from the Geographical Society of London. The 


reports of the Wilkes exploring expedition were’ 


to consist of twenty-eight quarto volumes, but 
nine of these were not completed. Of those 
that were published, Capt. Wilkes was the 
author of the ‘‘ Narrative” of the expedition (6 
vols., 4to, also 5 vols., 8vo, Philadelphia, 1845; 
abridged ed., New York, 1851) and the volumes 
on ‘Meteorology’? and ‘ Hydrography.” 
Admiral Wilkes was also the author of West- 
ern America, Including California and Oregon 
(Philadelphia, 1849), and Theory of the Winds 
(New York, 1856).—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. 
Biog. 


Indians of the Qui- 
naielt agency, Washington territory. 
By C. Willoughby. 


In Smithsonian Inst. Ann. Rept. for 1886, part 
1, pp. 267-282, Washington, 1889, 8°. (Pilling.) 
A few Quinaielt terms passim. 


A com- 
parative vocabulary. 


In Canadian Indian, vol. 1 (no. 4), pp. 104-107, 
Owen Sound, Ontario, January, 1891, 8°. 

A vocabulary of ten words in about 56 lan- 
guages, mostly North American, and including 
the Flathead and Nisqually. 


Rey Edward Francis Wilson, son of the late 
Rey. Daniel Wilson, Islington, prebendary of 
St. Paul’s cathedral, and grandson of Daniel 
Wilson, bishop of Caleutta, was born in Loudon 
December 7, 1844, and at the age of 17 left school 
and emigrated to Canada for the purpose of lead- 
ing an agricultural life; soon after his arrival 
he was led to take an interest in the Indians 
and resolved to become a missionary. After two 
years of preparation, much of which time was 
spent among the Indians, he returned to 
England, and in December, 1867, was ordained 
deacon. Shortly thereafter it was arranged 
that he should return to Canada as a missionary 
to the Ojibway Indians, under the auspices of 
the Church Missionary Society, which he did in 


July, 1868. He has labored among the Indians - 
ever since, building two homes—the Shingwauk 


Home, at Sault Ste. Marie, and the Wawanosh 
Home, two miles from the former—and pre: 
paring linguistic works, 


See Piskwau, 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES. 79 


lowing atitle or within parentheses after a note 
indicate that a copy of the work referred to has 
been seen by the compiler in the library of that 
institution, Madison, Wis. 


Words: 
Atna See Daa (L K.) 
Atna Schomburgk (Kh. H.) 
Bilkula Boas (F.) 
Bilkula Brinton (D. G.) 
Bilkula Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Bilkula Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Bilkula Daa (L. K.) 
Bilkula Latham (R. G.) 
Bilkula Stumpf (C.) 
Chehalis Bancroft (H. H.) 
Chehalis Gibbs (G.) 
Chehalis Nicoll (E. H.) 
Kalispel Youth’s. 
Kaulits Gibbs (G.) 
Kawichen Brinton (D.G.) 
Kawichen Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Kawichen Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Kawichen Daa (L. K.) 
Kawichen Latham (R. G.) 
Klallam Bancroft (H. H.) 
Klallam Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Klallam Daa (L. K.) 
Klallam Latham (R. G.) 
Klallam Youth's. 
Komuk Boas (F.) 
Kwantlen Gibbs (G.) 
Kwinaiutl Willoughby (C.) 
Lummi Bancroft (H. H.) 
Lummi Youth's. 
Netlakapamuk Bulmer (T. 8.) 
Niskwalli Bancroft (H. H.) 
Niskwalli Bulmer (T.S8.) 
Niskwalli Buschmann (J.C. E.) 


ae 


Yale: This word following a title or within paren- 
theses after a note indicates that a copy of the 
work referred to has been seen by the compiler 
inthelibrary of Yale College, New Haven, Conn. 
Youth’s. The youth’s | companion: | A 
juvenile monthly Magazine published 
for | the benefit of the Puget Sound 
Catholic Indian | Missions; and set to 
type, printed and in part | written by 
the pupils of the Tulalip, Wash. Ty. | 
Indian Industrial Boarding Schools, 
under | the control of the Sisters of 
Charity. | Approved by the Rt. Rev. 
Bishop [#gidius, of Nesqualy]. | Vol. 
I. May, 1881. No. 1[-Vol.V. May, 
1886. No. 60]. 

(Tulalip Indian Reservation, Snoho- 
mish Co. W. T.] 


Wisconsin Historical Society: These words fol- | Words — Continued. 


Niskwalli Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Niskwalli Daa (L. K.) 
Niskwalli Gibbs (G.) 
Niskwalli Latham (R. G.) 
Niskwalli Lubbock (J.) 
Niskwalli Pott (A. F.) 
Niskwalli Youth's. 
Okinagan Daa (L. K.) 
Pentlash Boas (F.) 
Piskwau Bancroft (H. H.) 
Piskwau Gallatin (A.) 
Piskwau Hale (H.) 
Salish Boas (F.) 

Salish Bulmer (T.5.) 
Salish Daa (L. K.) 
Salish Gallatin (A.) 
Salish Gibbs (G.) 
Salish Hale (H.) 
Salish Hotfman (W. J.) 
Salish Latham (R. G.) 
Salish Mengarini (G.) 
Salish Pott (A. F.) 
Salish Smet (P. J. de). 
Salish Squire (W.G.) 
Salish Swan (J. G.) 
Salish Treasury. 
Salish Tylor (E. B.) 
Shuswap Boas (F.) 

Sicatl Boas (F.) 
Skitsuish Bancroft (H. H.) 
Skitsuish Pott (A. F.) 
Skokomish Boas (F.) 
Snanaimuk Boas (F.) 
Snohomish Boas (F.) 
Snohomish Youth's. 
Songish Boas (F.) 
Tilamuk Bancroft (H. H.) 
Tilamuk Boas (F.) 


Youth’s— Continued. 


Edited by Rev. J. B. Boulet. Instead of 
being paged continuously, continued articles 
have a separate pagination dividing the regu- 
larnumbering. For instance, in no. 1, pp. 11-14 
(Lives of the saints) are numbered 1-4 and the 
article is continued in no. 2 on pp.5-8, taking 
the place of 41-44 of the regular numbering. 
Discontinued after May, 1886, on account of the 
protracted illness of the editor. 

The Lord’s prayer in Snohomish, vol.., p. 
228: in Flathead, p. 256; in Nitlakapamuk of 
British Columbia, p.301; in Lummi, vol. 2, p. 
28; in Clallam, p.86; in Cowlitch, p. 106.—The 
name for God in seventy different languages, 
including the Nootsack, Kalispel, Lummi, 
Snohomish, and Clallam, vol. 2, p. 156.—Sen- 
tence in ‘‘ Indian”’ [Snohomish], vol. 2, p. 247. 

Copies seen: Congress, Georgetown, Pilling, 
Wellesley, 


1801 
1802 

1802 

1802 

1802 

1802 

1808 
1806-1517 
1807 
1807-1809 
1814 
1815 
1835? 
1836 
1836-1547 
1839-1841 
1840-1548 
1841 

1841 

1841 

1842 
1848 

1843 

1844 

1844 

1844 

1845 

1845 

1845 

1845 

1845 

1846 

1846 

1846 

1846 

1847 

1847 

1848 

1848 

1848 

1848 

1848 

1848 

1849 

1849 


1850 
1850 
1850 
1851 
1852 
1852 
1853 


SAL 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX, 


Atna and Friendly Village 
Atna and Friendly Village 
Atna and Friendly Village 
Atna and Friendly Village 
Atna and Friendly Village 
Atna and Friendly Village 
Atna and Friendly Village 
Atna and Friendly Village 
Atna and Friendly Village 
Salish 

Atna and Friendly Village 
Salish 

Various 

Various 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Various 

Various 

Spokan 

Salish 

Snohomish 

Salish and Kalispel 

Salish 

Tilamuk and Chehalis 
Salish and Kalispel 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Spokan 

Various 

Various 

Various 

Salish 

Salish and Kalispel 

Atna 

Niskwalli and Chehalis 
Salish and Kalispel 

Salish and Kalispel 
Various 

Various 

Okinagan 

Salish and Kalispel 


Salish 
Various 
Various 
Bilkula 
Salish 
Various 
Salish 


6 


Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Bibliographic 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Classification 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Classification 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Primer 
Words 
Vocabulary 
Prayers 
Words 
Vocabulary 
Prayers 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Matthew 


Grammatic and vocabularies 


Mackenzie (A.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Adelung (J. C.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Henry (A.) 
Mackenzie (A.) 
Vater (J.S.) 
Salish. 

Gallatin (A.) 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Maximilian (A.) 
Maximilian (A.) 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Scouler (J.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Walker (E.) 
Smet (P. J. de). 

Boldue (J. B. Z.) 

Smet (P. J. de). 

Wilkes (C.) 

Lee (D.) and Frost (J.) 
Smet (P.J.de). 

Wilkes (C.) 

Wilkes (C.) 

Wilkes (C.) 

Wilkes (C.) 

Walker (E.) 

Hale (H.) 


Grammatic and vocabularies Hale (1.) 


Words 

Bibliographic 

Prayers and vocabulary 
Words 

Vocabulary 


Prayers and vocabulary 


Prayers and vocabulary 
Various 

Various 

Relationships 

Lord’s 

ries 

Words 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Classification 
Classification 
Proper names 
Classification 


prayer and yocabula- 


Latham (R. G.) 
Vater (J.S.) 

Smet (P. J. de). 
Schomburgk (R. H.) 
Montgomerie (J. E.) 
Smet (P. J. de). 
Smet (P. J. de). 
Gallatin (A.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Ross (A.) 

Smet (P. J. de). 


Wilkes (C.) 
Howse (J.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Latham (R.G.) 
Berghaus (H.) 
Stanley (J. M.) 
Gallatin (A.) 


81 


and Eells (C.) 


82 


1853 
1854 
1854 
1854 
1855 
1856 
1856 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1859 
1859 
1859 
1859 
1860 
1860 
1860 
1861 
1862 
1862 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1865 
1865 
1865 
1865-1879 
1867 
1868 
1868-1892 
1869 
1870 
1870 
1870 
1870 
1870 
1870 
1870? 
1870? 
1871 
1871 
1871 
1871 
1871 
1871-1872 
1872 
1872 
1873 
1873 
1873 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 
Salish Classification 
Chehalis Vocabulary 
Lummi Vocabulary 
Toanhuch Vocabulary 
Salish and Kalispel Lord's prayer 
Atna Classification 
Niskwalli Words 
Salish and Kalispel Lord’s prayer 
Various Vocabularies 
Various Vocabularies 
Various Words and numerals 
Various Words and numerals 
Various Words 
Kaulitz Vocabulary 
Klallam Numerals 
Wallam Vocabulary 
Kwantlen Vocabulary 
Skagit Vocabulary 
Salish Bibliographic 
Salish and Kalispel Lord’s prayer 
Snohomish Vocabulary 
Various Vocabularies 
Various Vocabularies 
Salish Classification 
Salish Classification 
Salish Classification 


Salish and Kalispel 
Salish 

Salish 

Various 

Salish 

Songish 

Various 

Wallam and Lumini 
Niskwalli and Salish 
Salish 

Salish and Kalispel 
Salish 

Niskwalli and Salish 
Salish and Kalispel 
Salish and Kalispel 
Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 

Salish 

Salish? 

Various 

Various 

Various 

Okinagan 

Salish 

Salish 

Spokan and Salish 
Spokan 

Salish 

Atna 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 


Lord’s prayer 
Classification 
Classification 
Vocabularies 
Grammar 

Proper names 
Words 

Vocabulary 
Numerals 

General discussion 


Prayers and vocabulary 


Words 
Numerals 
Prayers 


Prayers and vocabulary 


Bibliographie 
Bibliographic 
Phrases 
Bibliographic 
Phrases 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Bibliographic 
Lord’s prayer 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Relationships 
Phrases 
Phrases 
Proper names 
Relationships 
Numerals 
Vocabular 
Bibliographic 
Bibliographic 
General discussion 
General discussion 


Schoolcraft (H. R.) 
Cooper (J. G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Shea (J. G.) 

Latham (R.G.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 

Shea (J. G.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Buschmann (J.C. FE.) 
Swan (J. G.) 

Swan (J. G.) 

Daa (L. K.) 

Wabass (W. G.) 
Grant (W. C.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Craig (R. O.) 
Ludewig (H. E.) 
Shea (J.G.) 

Craig (R. O.) 
3uschmann (J. C. E.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Kane (P.) 

Smet (P. J. de) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Schoolcraft (H. R.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Mengarini (G.) 
Macdonald (D. G. F.) 
Pott (A. F.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Anderson (A. C.) 
Smet (P. J. de). 
Gibbs (G.) 

Gibbs (G.) 

Smet (P. J. de). 
Smet (P. J. de). 
Triibner & Co. 
Leclere (C.) 
Whymper (F.) 

Sabin (.J.) 

Whymper (F.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Triibner & Co. 
Marietti (P.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Roehrig (F. L. O.) 
Roebrig (F. L. 0.) 
Morgan. 

Whymper (F.) 
Whymper (F.) 
Collin (C.) 

Gibbs (G.) 
Mengarini (G.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Triibner & Co. 

Field (T. W.) 

Shea (J. G.) 
Treasury. 


1873 
1873 
1873 
1874 
1874-1875 
1874-1876 
1874-1876 
1874-1881 
1875 
1875 
1875 
1876 
1876 
1876 
1877 
1877 
1877 

1877 

1877 

1877 

1877 

1877 

1877 

1877 

1877 

1877 

1877 

1877 

1877 
1877-1879 
1877-1879 
1877-1887 
1878 
1878 

1878 

1878 
1878 

1878 

1878 
1878-1879 
1878-1893 
1879 
1879 

1879 

1879 

1879 
1886 
1880 

1880 
1880 
1880-1881 
1881 
1881 

1881 
1881-1886 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 


Salish and Kalispel 
Shuswap 
Various 
Salish 
Salish 
Various 
Various 
Twana 
Niskwalli 
Salish 
Snanaimuk 
Salish 
Salish 
Skitsuish 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Niskwalli 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Skitsuish 
Skoyelpi 
Shuswap 
Skitsuish 
Tilamuk 
Twana 
Various 
Various 
Kalispel 


_ Kalispel 


Salish 
Klallam 
Netlakapamuk 
Netlakapamuk 
Niskwalli 
Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Klallam 

Salish 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Netlakapamuk 
Salish 
Snohomish 
Kalispel 
Netlapakamuk 
Netlapakamuk 
Salish 

Various 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Various 
Chehalis 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli 
Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 


Prayers 
Vocabulary 
Vocabularies 
Bibliography 
Bibliography 
Various 
Various 
General discussion 
Words 
Bibliographic 
Text 
Bibliographic 
Vocabulary, ete. 
Vocabulary 
Text 
Vocabulary 
Dictionary 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
General discussion 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Various 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Grammar 
Grammar 
General discussion 
Dictionary 
Prayer book 
Prayer book 
Dictionary 
Bibliographic 
Classification 
Classification 
Songs 
sibliographic 
Bible stories 
Dietionary 
Prayer book 
Relationships 
Prayer book 
Catechism 
Prayer book 
Vocabulary, ete. _ 
Classification 
Grammatic treatise 
Classification 
Words 
Words 
Lord’s prayer 
Dictionary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Words 
Bibliographic 
Bibliographic 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 


Smet (P. J. de). 
Tolmie (F. W.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Steiger (E.) 
Triibner & Co. 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Hayden (F. V.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Field (T. W.) 
Caruana (J. M.) 
Platzmann (J.) 
Petitot (E. F.S. J.) 
Smet (P. J. de). 
Lettre. 

Tolmie (W. F.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Gatschet (A.5.) 
Gatschet (A.5.) 
Beach (W. W.) 
Trumbull (J. H.) 
Mengarini (G.) 
Mengarini (G.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Smet (P. J. de). 
Gatschet (A.S.) 
Eells (M.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
(viorda (J.) 
Giorda (J.) 
Miiller (F.) 
Fells (M.) 

Good (J. B.) 
Good (J. B.) 
Eells (M.) 
Leclere (C.) 
Bates (H. W.) 
Keane (A. H.) 
Eells (M.) 
Trumbull (J. H.) 
Giorda (J.) 
Giorda (J.) 
Good (J. B.) 
Oppert (G.) 
Boulet (J. B.) 
Giorda (J.) 
Good (J. B.) 
Good (J. B.) 
Sayce (A. H.) 
Eells (M.) 
Keane (A. H.) 
Tylor (E. B.) 
Tylor (E. B.) 


Youth’s Companion, 


Fells (M.) 
Campbell (J.) 
Campbell (J.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Eells (M.) 
Triibner & Co. 
Bates (H. W.) 
Drake (S. G.) 
Gatschet (A.3.) 
Gatschet (A. 5.) 


83 


84 


1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1883 
1883 
1884 
1884 
1884 
1884 


1884-1889 
1885 
1885 
1885 
1885 
1885 
1885 
1885 
1885 
1885 
1885 
1885-1889 
1886 
1886 
1886 
1886 
1886 
1886 
1886 
1886 
1886 
1886 
1887 
1887 
1887 
1887 
1887 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1890 
1890 
1890 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 


Salish 

Twanaand Klallam 
Twana and Klallam 
Various 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Stahkin 

Various 


Salish 
Bilkula 
Chehalis 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish and Kalispel 
Various 
Salish 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Komuk 
Komuk 
Komuk 
Pentlash 
Puyallup 
Salish 
Various 
Various 
Salish 
Salish and Kalispel 
Various 
Various 
Various 
Bilkula 
Bilkula 
Bilkula and Kawichen 
Bilkula and Kawichen 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Komuk 
Komuk 
Salish 
Salish 
Skokomish 
Snuanaimuk 
Various 
Chehalis 
Kwinaiutl 
Niskwalli 
Salish 
Salish 
Salish 
Skoyelpi 
Snanaimuk 
Snanaimuk 
Various 
Various 
Various 
Bilkula and Kawichen 
Lilowat 
Nehelim 


Classification 
Songs 

Songs 
Various 
Classification 
‘Words 
Legends 
Words 
Words 
Vocabularies 


sibliographic 
Words 
Dictionary 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Bird names 

3ibliographic 
Classification 
Classification 


Prayers and vocabularies 


Grammatie 
Classification 
Grammatic 
Grammatie 
Grammatic 
Texts 
Vocabulary 
Texts 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Hymns 
Vocabularies 
Bibliographic 
Prayers 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Grammatic 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Lord’s prayer 


_ Lord’s prayer 


Words 
Words 
Classification 
Words 
Vocabulary 
Texts 
Numerals 
‘Words 
Words 
Words 
Classification 
Classification 
Words 


Vocabulary, ete. 


Gentes 
Gentes 
Hymns 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
‘Words 

Text 

Texts 


Keane (A. H.), note. 
Baker (T.) 

Baker (T.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Sayce (A. H.) 
Tylor (E. B.) 
Hoffman (W. J.) 
Squire (W. C.) 
Petitot (E. F. S. J.) 


Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson 
(G. M.) 


Pott (A. F.) 
Stumpf (C.) 

Eells (M.) 

Smalley (E. V.) 
Van Gorp (L.) 
Hoffman (W. J.) 
Pilling (J. C.) 
Bates (H. W.) 
Keane (A. H.), note. 
Smet (P. J. de). 

Jells (M.) 
Feathermann (A.) 
Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

McCaw (S. R,) 
Hoffman (W. J.) . 
Eells (M.) 
Boas (F.) 
Dufossé (E.) 
Smet (P. J. de). 
Kells (M.) 
Eells (M.) 

Eells (M.), note. 
Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 
Brinton (D. G.) 

srinton (D. G.) 

C (J. F.) 
C (J. F.), note. 
Boas (F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Haines (E. M.) . 
Tylor (KE. B.) 

30as (F.) 

Boas (¥.) 

Eells (M.) 

Nicoll (E. H.) 
Willoughby (C.) 
Lubbock (J.) 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Tylor (E. B.) 
Chamberlain (A, F.) 
Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Eells (M.) 

Boas (F.) 
Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Brinton (D. G.) 

Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Boas (F.) 


1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890-1893 
1890-1893 
1890-1893 
1890-1893 
1890-1893 
1890-1893 
1890-1893 
1890-1893 
1890-1893 
1891 
1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 

1891 
1891-1893 
1892 
1892 

1892 

1892 

1892 

1892 

1892 

1892 

1892 

1892 

1892 

1892 

1892 

1892 


- 
: 


BARR ae es 


BAAAAB A 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 


Netlakapamuk 
Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Silets 
Snanaimuk 
Snanaimuk 
Tilamuk 
Klallam 
Niskwalli 
Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Salish 

Various 
Various 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Kalispel 
Netlakapamuk 
Netlakapamuk 
Netlakapamuk 
Niskwalli 
Salish 

Salish 

Salish and Niskwalli 
Salish 
Shuswap 
Skwamish 
Stalo 

Various 
Various 
Various 
Various 
Shuswap 
Netlakapamuk 
Netlakapamuk 
Salish 

Salish 
Shuswap 
Shuswap 
Shuswap 
Shuswap 
Twana 

Twana 

Twana 
Various 
Various 
Various 
Niskwalli 
Niskwalli and Puyallup 
Niskwalli and Puyallup 
Okinagan 
Shuswap 

Atna 
Netlakapamuk 
Nuksahk 
Nusulph 
Salish 

Salish and Kalispel 
Salish 

Salish 


Texts 

Texts 

Words 
Words 
Words 

Texts 
Legends 
Legends 
Texts 

Lord’s prayer 
Words 
Hymns 
Words 
Words 

Words 
Words 
Geographic names 
Numerals 
Catechism 
Catechism 
Litany 
Prayers 
Prayers 
Hymns 
Primer 
Primer 
Vocabulary 
Classi-ication 
Classification 
Vocabulary 
Words 
Prayers 
Prayers 
Prayers 
Geographic names 
Geographic names 
Grammatic 
Grammatic 
Prayers 
Catechism 
Prayers 
Grammatic 
Vocabulary 
Prayers 
Prayers 
Various 
Various 

Text 

Text 

Text 
Geographic names 
Gentes 
Gentes 
Dictionary 
Words 

Words 
Prayers 
Catechism 
General Ciscussion 
Hymn 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
General discussion 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord's prayer 
Vocabulary 


Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Palladine (L.) 
Hale (H.) 
Hale (H.) 
Hale (H.) 
Boas (F.) 
Boas (F.) 
30as (F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Bulmer (T. 8.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
3ulmer (T.S.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Bulmer (T.S8.) 
Bulmer (T.58.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Canestrelli (P.) 
Canestrelli (P.) 
Canestrelli (P.) 
Canestrelli (P.) 
Canestrelli (P.) 
Le Jeune (J. M.R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Canadian. 
Brinton (D.G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Wilson (E. F.) 
Gabelentz (H. G. C.) 
Gendre (—). 
Durieu (P.) 
Durieu (P.) 
Coones (S. F.) 
Eells (M.) 
Boas (F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Gatschet (A. 8.) 
Brinton (D. G.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Dawson (G.M.) 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Eells (M.) 
Eells (M.) 
Eells (M.) 
Eells (M.) 
Boas (F.) 
Boas (F.) 
Wickersham (J.) 
Wickersham (J.) 
Wickersham (J.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Le Jeune (J. M. R.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Good (J. B.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
tibbs (G.) 
Shea (J. G.) 
Smet (P. J. de), 
Salish, 


85 


ue) 


N.d. 
N.d. 
N.d. 
N.d. 
N.d. 


Salish 
Salish | 
Salish 
Snohomish 
Twana 
Various 
Various 
Various 


Words 
Words 
‘Words 
Vocabulary 
Grammatie 
Various 
‘Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 


o) 


Eells (M.) 
Eells (M.) 


Gibbs (G:) 
Pinart (A.L.) 
Le Sie 


ae ¥ 


LIBRARY CATALOGUE SLIPS. 


Smithsonian institution. Bureau of ethnology. 


S Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell 
a director | —| The | Pamunkey indians of Virginia | by | Jno. 
é Garland Pollard | [Vignette] | 
2 Washington | government printing office | 1894 

8°. 19 pp. 

Pollard (John Garland). 

é Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, 
= director | — | The | Pamunkey indians of Virginia | by | Jno. 
5 Garland Pollard | [Vignette] | 
= Washington | government printing office | 1894 
< 8°. 19 pp. 


[SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. Bureau of ethnology.| 


Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, 
director | — | The | Pamunkey indians of Virginia | by | Jno. 
Garland Pollard | [Vignette] | 

Washington | government printing office | 1894 

8°, 19 pp. 

[SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. Bureau of ethnology. ] 


Yitle for subject entry. 


5 : mits ts Tere en oe 
pe he te 2 AES TILES 2 Tele FEE 


jodie ee 
rif B08 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


TEL 


PAMUNKEY INDIANS OF VIRGINIA 


BY 


JNO. GARLAND POLLARD 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1894 


CrOICE NOTES: 


Page 

CERIN UNC GG)2 = o2 5. Jo pawsis aes J ass eg aaa aemieee oes eae ome Sere 5 
CUI ORO Se A ERs Bee ecn eRe es cen aiase! Saar Seno SE eo aee seasee ac Tf 
Parivehishory ot whe Pamunkey Indians -.----.--<2---.--- = 2. == 22 == nae ee 9 
Pie usubln’) Jean 3 a Be St eS an ere ener ee aeons ace 10 
aremrlee NarLCLeristiCSiea-2 es ss5 5-55-5522 -fea es ee ee Bee ecewas neta eee 10 
Lili? access oe oe eee Boe ee nee ae ee Ran Pama arma aar net 12 
MEMISENUDSISbENCO — a2 seen Sse area heen a ae ieee ~ ae eeineee 14 
oo PSTN RTO Bes COS C8 Se See eee Bee Bee Dene Cae Seino mrt aoe ee me ae eoesec S 15 
Peete chits Of HNC TDG. 2-5. S 5s 20+ Soc oped = ot eee Se = wine ee 15 
TLE TLE AS ee re a Se Re Rees SIE eS eo ene 16 
PE Ie arora te aaa 2 ae cele snes ose clae aes malas Somat mere ese at eas es 7 


PRE FA), © E., 


By W J McGEE. 


The most conspicuous stock of American Indians in early history is 
the Algonquian. Not only was the area occupied by the Algonquian 
peoples larger than that of any other stock, but the tribes and confed- 
eracies were distributed along the Atlantic coast and the rivers, estu- 
aries, and bays opening into this ocean from Newfoundland to Cape 
Hatteras. The Pilgrim Fathers of New England, the Dutch traders 
and merchants of Manhattan island and the Hudson, the Quaker colo- 
nists of Pennsylvania, the Jesuit missionaries and Cavalier grantees 
of Maryland and Virginia, all encountered the native tribes and con- 
federacies of this great stock. Further northward and in the interior 
Champlain, le Sieur du Lhut, Pére la Salle, and other explorers, came 
chiefly in contact with related peoples speaking a similar tongue. So 
the American Indian of early history, of literature and story, is largely 
the tribesman of this great northeastern stock. 

One of the most prominent among the confederacies of Indian tribes 
belonging to the Algonquian stock, in the history of the settlement of 
our country, was the Powhatan confederacy of tidewater Virginia and 
Maryland. The prominence of this confederacy in our early history is 
partly due to the fact that Capt. John Smith was writer as well as 
explorer, and left permanent records of the primitive people whose 
domain he invaded; but these and other records indicate that Pow- 
hatan was a chief of exceptional valor and judgment, and that the con- 
federacy organized through his savage genius was one of the most 
notable among the many unions of native American tribes; also that 
Powhatan’s successor, Opechancanough, was a native ruler of remark- 
able skill and ability, whose characteristics and primitive realm are 
well worthy of embalming in history. Capt. John Smith was followed 
by other historians, and England and the continent, as well as the 
growing white settlements of America, were long interested in follow- 
ing the fortunes of the great tribal confederacy as the red men were 
gradually driven from their favorite haunts and forced into forest fast- 
nesses by the higher race; and in later years Thomas Jefferson and 
other leaders of thought recorded the movements and characteristics 


0 


6 BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 


of the people, while John Esten Cooke and his kind kept their memory 
bright with the lamp of literature. So the native king Powhatan, the 
ill-starred princess Pocahontas, and the people and the land over which 
they ruled, are well known, and the Powhatan confederacy has ever 
been prominent in history and literature. 

The leading tribe of the Powhatan confederacy was that from which 
Pamunkey river in eastern Virginia takes its name. Strongest in 
numbers, this tribe has also proved strongest in vitality; a few trifling 
remnants and a few uncertain and feeble strains of blood only remain 
of the other tribes, but. the Pamunkey Indians, albeit with modified 
manners, impoverished blood, and much-dimmed prestige, are still rep- 
resented on the original hunting ground by a lineal remnant of the 
original tribe. The language of Powhatan and his contemporaries is 
lost among their descendants; the broad realm of early days is reduced 
to a few paltry acres; the very existence of the tribe is hardly known 
throughout the state and the country; yet in some degree the old pride 
of blood and savage aristocracy persist—and itis undoubtedly to these 


characteristics that the present existence of the Pamunkey tribe is to — 


be ascribed. 

sy reason of the prominent and typical place of the Powhatan con- 
federacy in history and literature, it seems especially desirable to ascer- 
tain and record the characteristics—physical, psychical, and social—of 
the surviving remnant of the race. It was with this view that John 
Garland Pollard, esq., of Richmond, a former attaché of the Smithson- 
ian Institution, was encouraged to make the investigation recorded in 
the following pages; and it is for this reason that the record is offered 
to the public. 


o2 m-AS 


THE PAMUNKEY INDIANS OF VIRGINIA. 
By JNO. GARLAND POLLARD. 


INTRODUCTORY NOTE. 


The information here given to the public concerning the present con- 
dition of the Pamunkey Indians was obtained by the writer during re- 
cent visits to their reservation. He wishes to acknowledge his indebt- 
edness to the tribe for the kindness with which they have treated him, 
and to make special mention of Mr. Terrill Bradby, Mr. William Bradby, 
and Chief C. 8S. Bradby, who have made a willing response to all of his 
inquiries. 

As to the past condition of the tribe, the authorities consulted were 
the following: 


The True Travels, Adventures, and Observations of Captain John 
Smith: Richmond, 1819. 


Notes on the State of Virginia, by Thomas Jefferson: Philadelphia, 
1801. 


Historical Recollections of Virginia, by Henry Howe: Charleston, 
1849. 


Virginia, by John Esten Cooke: Boston, 1883. 
RICHMOND, Va., October 5, 1893. 


per, aa nn a hae 
Sook : 


t. ne 
on oe Fe 
i * 
‘ a a -, % 
mr - * eye < ? ; eh os aoe oy 
ibe ym oan ae rt A 2) & a a al 
> ye a i : oe er - <'¢ 
: -“ ‘ PW SF ot Pa 
. ‘ « 7 Se 4 7 yes f 
= 
™ 
z ‘2 
| \ 
Lee ri 
é De Ce a! a ota ie 
‘ F ae | et fas 
~~ a hints : 
i Ca 
i 
2 
, 
4 
=a | 
. ’ f Ys? z id “y ’ 
a . 
Yat a t os 
’ ie. ae My ey F rie 
> 
q - Ld *< 
. ‘ { » ; 
} j ; tort i: 
: feet bette te 
- Z fe 
— . 4 ‘wu ths 
ey 
e ‘ i , eat 
ae 
cy 
F 
- 
e : 
bp ~ 
. 


EARLY HISTORY OF THE PAMUNKEY INDIANS. 


At the time of the settlement of Jamestown, in 1607, that region lying 
in Virginia between Potomac and James rivers was occupied by three 
great Indian confederacies, each of which derived its name from one of 
itsleading tribes. They were (1) the Mannahoac, who lived on the head- 
waters of Potomac and Rappahainock rivers; (2) the Monocan, who 
occupied the banks of the upper James, and (3) the Powhatan, who in- 
habited all that portion of the tidewaterregion lying north of the James. 
The last-named powerful confederacy was composed of thirty warlike 
tribes, having 2,400 warriors, whose disastrous attacks on the early set- 
tlers of Virginia are well known to history. The largest of the tribes 
making up the Powhatan confederacy was the Pamunkey, their entire 
number of men, women, and children in 1607 being estimated at about 
1,000, or one-eighth of the population of the whole confederacy. 

The original seat of the Pamunkey tribe was on the banks of the 
river which bears theirname, and which flows somewhat parallel with 
James river, the Pamunkey being about 22 miles north of the James. 
This tribe, on account of its numerical strength, would probably from 
the beginning have been the leader of its sister tribes in warfare, had 
it not been for the superior ability of the noted chief Powhatan, who 
made his tribe the moving spirit of attack on the white settlers. 

On the death of Powhatan, the acknowledged head of the confed- 
eracy which bore his name, he was succeeded in reality, though not 
nominally, by Opechancanough, chief of the Pamunkey. John Smith, 
in his history of Virginia (chapter 9, page 215), gives an interesting 
account of his contact with this chief, whose leadership in the massa- 
cre of 1622 made him the most dreaded enemy which the colonists of 
that period ever had. In 1669, 50 persons, remnants of the Chicka- 
hominy and Mattapony tribes, having been driven from their homes, 
united with the Pamunkey. The history of these Pamunkey Indians, 
whose distinction it is to be the only Virginia tribe* that has sur- 
vived the encroachments of civilization, furnishes a tempting field of 
inquiry, but one aside from the writer’s present purpose, which is 
ethnologie rather than historical. 


“There are a few Indians (Dr. Albert S. Gatschet found 30 or 35 in 1891) living 
on a small reservation of some 60 or 70 acres on Mattapony river, about 12 miles 
north of the Pamunkey reservation. They are thought by some to be the remnant 
of the Mattapony tribe, but the writer is of a different opinion. He believes that 
the territory of the Pamunkey once extended from the Mattapony to Pamunkey 
river, and that the land between gradually passed into the possession of the white 
man, thus dividing the tribe, leaving to each part a small tract on each of the 


above named rivers. 
9 


PRESENT HOME. 


The Pamunkey Indians of to-day live at what is known as “ Indian- 
town,” which is situated on and comprises the whole of a curiously- 
shaped neck of land, extending into Pamunkey river and adjoining 
King William county, Virginia, on the south. The “town,” as it is 
somewhat improperly called, forms a very small part of their original 
territory. It is almost entirely surrounded by water, being connected 
with the mainland by a narrow strip of land. The peculiar protection 
which is afforded in time of war by its natural position in all proba- 
bility accounts for the presence of these Indians in this particular 
spot;eand, indeed, I doubt not that to this advantageous situation is 
due their very existence. 

Indiantown is about 21 miles east of Richmond immediately on the 
line of the York river division of the Richmond and Danville railroad. 
It consists of about 800 acres, 250 of which are arable land, the remain- 
ing portion being woodland and low, marshy ground. This tract was 
secured to the Pamunkey Indians by act of the colonial assembly, and 
they are restrained from alienating the same. 

From a census taken by the writer in 1895 there were found to be 
90 Indians then actually present on the reservation. There are, how- 
ever, about 20 others who spend a part of the year in service in the 
city or on some of the steamers which ply the Virginia waters. There 
are, therefore, about 110 Pamunkey Indians now living. 

The population of the “town” has varied little in the last century. 
Jefferson, writing in 1781, estimated their number to be 100, and Howe, 
nearly seventy years later, placed it at the same figure. 


INDIVIDUAL CHARACTERISTICS. 


No member of the Pamunkey tribe is of full Indian blood. While 
the copper-colored skin and the straight, coarse hair of the aboriginal 
American show decidedly in some individuals, there are others whose 
Indian origin would not be detected by the ordinary observer. There 
has been considerable intermixture of white blood in the tribe, and not 
a little of that of the negro, though the laws of the tribe now strictly 
prohibit marriage to persons of African descent. 

No one who visits the Pamunkey could fail to notice their race pride. 
Though they would probably acknowledge the whites as their equals, 
they consider the blacks far beneath their social level. Their feeling 
toward the negro is well illustrated by their recent indignant refusal 
to accept a colored teacher, who was sent them by the superintendent 

10 


det he 


THE PAMUNKEY INDIANS OF VIRGINIA. ie: 


of public instruction to conduct the free school which the State 
furnishesthem. They are exceedingly anxious to keep their blood free 
from further intermixture with that of other races, and how to accom- 
plish this purpose is a serious problem with them, as there are few mem- 
bers of the tribe who are not closely related to every other person on 
the reservation. To obviate this difficulty the chief and councilmen 
have been attempting to devise a plan by which they can induce immi- 
gration from the Cherokee Indians of North Carolina. The Indian blood 
in the Pamunkey tribe is estimated at from one-fifth to three-fourths. 

The Pamunkey, as a tribe, are neither handsome nor homely, long 
nor short, stout nor slim; in fact, they differ among themselves in these 
respects to the same degree found among the members of a white com- 
munity of the same size. They are not particularly strong and robust, 
and their average longevity is lower than that of their neighbors. 
These facts are perhaps in a measure attributable to the frequent mar- 
riages between near relatives. 

The average intelligence of these Indians is higher than that of the 
Virginia negro. Withafew exceptions the adults among them can read 
and write. In view of their limited advantages they are strikingly 
well informed. <A copy of one of their State papers will serve to give 
an idea of the maximum intelligence of the tribe. It reads as follows: 


PAMUNKEY INDIAN RESERVATION, 
King William County, Va., June 26, 1893. 

We, the last descendants of the Powhatan tribe of Indians, now situated ona 
small reservation on the Pamunkey river, 24 miles from Richmond, Va., and one 
mile east of the historic White House, where Gen. George Washington was married 
to his lovely bride in the St. Peter’s Church. We are now known as the Pamunkey 
tribe of Indians, following the customs of our forefathers, hunting and fishing, 
partly with our dugout canoes. 

We hereby authorize Terrill Bradby to visit the Indian Bureau in Washington and 
in all other Departments and Indian tribes, and also to visit the Columbian Exposi- 
tion in Chicago. 

We, the undersigned, request that whenever this petition is presented, the holder 
may meet with the favorable approbation of the public generally. 

C. S. BrapBy, Chief. 
J. T. DENNIS, 

W. G. Sweat, 

R. L. SAMPSON, 


T. Brappsy, 
Council, 
RK. W. Mirus; 


“Town Clerk. 
Jas. H. JOHNSON, 
We tT. Neat, 
B. Ricwarps, M. D., 


Trustees 
E. R. ALLMOND, 


A. J. PAGE, 
G. M. Coox, 
W. A. BRADBY, 
ee RNINIS 
Members of the Tribe. 


12 _ BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 


The Pamunkey Indians are temperate, moral, and peaceable. Il 
feeling between the tribe and their neighbors is almost unknown. 
‘They are exceeding proud of their lineage, and love to tell how bravely 
and stubbornly their forefathers resisted the encroachment of the 
whites. Opechancanough is their hero. They take special delight in 
relating the familiar story of how this noted chief, when old and in4Srm, 
was carried on a litter to battle, that his presence might inspire his 
men to deeds of bravery. 

It may not be amiss to give here a tradition concerning this tribe, 
which is related as explanatory of the name of a certain ferry that crosses 
Pamunkey river about ten miles above the reservation. The name of 
the ferry is Pipe-in-tree, now spelled Pipingtree. The tradition runs 
thus: On one oceasion the Pamunkey braves met a committee of white 
settlers at this place and negotiated a treaty. When all the terms 
had been agreed to, the consummation of the treaty was solemnized in 
usual Indian fashion by handing around the same pipe to the repre- 
sentatives of both nations, each taking a puff as indicative of friendship 


and good faith. The pipe was then deposited in a hollow tree near by, 


and ever afterward, when the colonists disregarded their agreement, 
the poor Indians would remind them of “ pipe-in-tree.” 

Aside from their mode of subsistence there is nothing peculiar in the 
manners and customs of these people, except, perhaps, an inclination 
to the excessive use of gaudy colors in their attire. Their homes are com- 
fortable and well kept. The houses are weatherboarded, and are, as a 
rule, one-story-and-a-half high, and consist of from one to four rooms. 
The best structure on the reservation is their church building, where 
services are held every Sabbath. The church receives the hearty sup- 
port of the whole tribe, the membership of the church and that of the 
tribe being almost coextensive. As to their creed, they are all of one 
mind in adhering to the tenets of the Baptist denomination. 


LANGUAGE. 

One visiting Indiantown at the present day would not find a vestige 
of the Pamunkey language, even in the names of persons or things. 
In 1844 Rev. E. A. Dalrymple collected the following seventeen 
words,* which, so far as the writer can ascertain, are all that remain 
of the language of the Pamunkey Indians proper: 


Tonshee, son. Nikkut, one. 
Nucksee, daughter. Orijak, two. 
Petucka, cat. Kiketock, three. 
Kayyo, thankfulness. Mitture, four. 
O-ma-yah, O my Lord. Nahnkitty, five. 
Kenaanee, friendship. Vomtally, six. 
Baskonee, thank you. Talliko, seven. 
Keskut, go out, dog. Tingdun, eight. 


Yantay, ten. 


* Historical Magazine (New York), first series, 1858, Vol. 1, p. 182. 


THE PAMUNKEY INDIANS OF VIRGINIA. 


13 


The vocabulary recorded by Captain John Smith* as that of the 


Powhatan people is of interest in this connection. 


with its original title, is as follows: 


This vocabulary, 


Because many doe desire to know the manner of their Language, I haue 
inserted these few words. 


Kakatorawines yowo. What call 
you this. 

Nemarough, a man. 

Crenepo, a woman. 

Marewanchesso, a boy. 
“ehawkans, Houses. 

Matcheores, Skins or garments. 

Mockasins, Shooes. 

Tussan, Beds. Pokatawer, Vire. | 

Attawp, A bow. Attonce, Arrowes. 

Monacookes, Swords. 

Aumoughhowgh, A target. 

Pawceussacks, Gunnes. 

Tomahacks, Axes. 

Tockahacks, Pickaxes. 

Pamesacks, Kniues. 

Accowprets, Sheares. 

Pawpecones, Pipes. 

Mattassin, Copper. 

Vssawassin, Iron, Brasse, Silver, 
any white mettall. 

Musses, Woods. 

Attasskuss, 
grasse. 

Chepsin, Land. 

Shacquohocan, A stone. 

Wepenter, A cookold. 

Suckahanna, Water. 

Noughmass, Fish. 

Copotone, Sturgeon. 

Weghshaughes, Flesh. 

Sawwehone, Bloud. 

Netoppew, Friends. 

Marrapough, Enemies. 

Maskapow, the worst of the enemies. 

Maachick chammay, The best of. 
friends. 

Casacunnakack, peya quagh acquin- 
tan vttasantasough, In how many 


Leaues, weeds, or 


“Travels, ete., Richmond, 16, 1819, Vol. 1, pp. 147, 148. 


daies will there come hither any 
more English Ships. 
Their numbers. 


| Necut, 1. Ningh, 2. Nuss, 3. Yough, 
4, Paranske, 5 Comotinch, 6. Top- 
_pawoss,7. Nusswash,8. Kekatawgh, 
9. Kaskeke, 10. 


They count no more but by tennes as 
followeth. 


_ Case, how many. 


Ninghsapooeksku, 20. 

Nussapooeksku, 30. 

Yowghapooeksku, 40. 

Parankestassapooeksku, 50. 

Comatinchtassapooeksku, 60. 

Nussswashtassapooeksku, 70. 

Kekataughtassapooeksku, 90. 

Necuttoughtysinough, 100. 

Necuttwevnquaough, 1000. 

Rawcosowghs, Dayes. 

Keskowghes, Sunnes. 

Toppquough, Nights. 

Nepawweshowghs, Moones. 

Pawpaxsoughes, Yeares. 

Pummahumps, Starres. 

Osies, Heavens. 

Okees, Gods. 

Quiyoughcosoughs, VPettie Gods 
and their affinities. 

Righcomoughes, Deaths. 

Kekughes, Lines. 

Mowchick woyawgh tawgh noeragh 
kaqueremecher,Lam very hungry? 

what shall I eate ? 


Tawnor nehiegh Powhatan, Where 


dwels Powhatan. 

Mache, nehiegh yourowgh, Orapaks. 
Now he dwels a great way hence 
at Oropaks. 


14 BUREAU OF 


Vittapitchewayne anpechitchs ne- 


hawper Werowacomoco, You lie, | 
hestayed ever at Werowacomoco. | 


Kator nehiegh mattagh neer vttap- 
itchewayne, Truely he is there I 
doe not lie. 


Spaughtynere keragh werowance | 


mawmarinough kekate wawgh pe- 
yaguaugh. Kun you then to the 
King Mawmarynough and bid 
him come hither 


For purposes of comparison the 


ETHNOLOGY. 


Vtteke, e peya weyack wighwhip, 
Get you gone, and come againe 
quickly. 

Kekaten Pokahontas Patiaquagh 
niugh tanks manotyens neer mow- 
chick rawrenock audowgh, Bid 
Pokahontas bring hither two 
little Baskets, and I will gime her 
white Beads to make her a 
Chaine. 


FINIS. 


meager vocabulary of the Pampti- 


cough (Pamlico) Indians, collected by Lawson, may be introduced. 
The Pamticough tribe were the southernmost tribe of the Algonquian 
stock in the middle Atlantic slope. The list* (excluding the “ Tuske- 
ruro” and ‘* Woccon”) is as follows: 

One, Weembot. 

Two, Neshinnauh. 

Three, Nish-wonner. 

Four, Yau-Ooner. 

Five, Umperren. 

Six, Who-yeoe. 

Seven, Top-po-osh. 

Hight, Nau-haush-shoo. 

Nine, Pach-ie-conk. 

Ten, Cosh. 

Rum, Weesaccon. 

Blankets, Mattosh. 

White, Wop-poshamnosh. 

Red, Mish-cosk. 

Black or Blue, idem, Mow-cotto- 

wosh. 


Knife, Rig-cosq. 
Tobacco, Hoohpau. 
Hat, Mottau-quahan. 
Fire, Tinda. 

Water, Umpe. 

Goat, Taus-won. 

Awl or Needle, Moc-cose. 
A Hoe, Rosh-shoequon. 
Salt, Chuwon. 

Paint, Mis-kis-’su. 
Ronoak, Ronoak. 

Peak, Gau hooptop. 
Gun, Gun tock seike. 
Gun-lock, Hinds. 
Flints, Rappatoc. 

A Flap, Maachone. 


Gunpowder, Pungue. 
Shot, Ar-rounser. 
Ax, Tomma-hick. 


A Pine Tree, Onnossa. 
Englishman, Tosh-shonte. 
Indians, Nuppin. 


The most extended known vocabulary of the Indians of the Pow- 
hatan confederacy is that of Strachey, published in the Hakluyt collec- 
tions; but, like that of Smith, it includes various dialects. 


MODE OF SUBSISTENCE. 


The Pamunkey Indians make their living for the most part in true 


aboriginal style. 


Their chief occupations are hunting and fishing, 


*Lawson, History of North Carolina, reprint by Strother & Marcom, Raleigh, 


1860, pp. 366-369. 


tee. 


THE PAMUNKEY INDIANS OF VIRGINIA. lb 


and although they do not neglect their truck patches, they cherish a 
hearty dislike for manual labor and frequently hire negroes to come in 
and work their little farms. The deer, the raccoon, the otter, the musk- 
rat, and the mink are captured on the reservation. As many as sixteen 
deer have been killed in this small area in one season. The skins of all 
these animals are a good source of income, and the flesh, except of the 
mink and otter, is used for food. Perch, herring, bass, chub, rock, 
shad, and sturgeon are caught in large numbers by means of seines. 
Sora (reedbirds), wild geese, ducks, and turkeys are abundant. 

In the autumn sora are found in the marshes in great numbers, and 
the Indian method of capturing them is most interesting: They have 
what they strangely call a ‘‘sora horse,” strongly resembling a peach 
basket in size and shape, and made of strips of iron, though they were 
formerly molded out of clay. The ‘‘ horse” is mounted on a pole which 
is stuck in the marsh or placed upright in a foot-boat. A fire is then 
kindled in the “horse.” The light attracts the sora and they fly around 
it in large numbers, while the Indians knock them down with long pad- 
dles. This method is, of course, used only at night. Every year, many 
white hunters visit the reservation and employ the Indians as their 
guides in hunting this same toothsome bird. They, however, use the 
slower but more sportsmanlike method of shooting them on the wing. 

One of the clay ‘‘sora horses” above referred to may be found in the 
National Museum as part of a collection which the writer made from 
the Pamunkey in behalf of the Smithsonian Institution. 

The Pamunkey farm on a very small scale. They do little more 
than furnish their own tables. They also raise a few horses, cattle, 
sheep, and hogs. 

A general merchandise store is conducted on the reservation by a 
jomt stock company, composed of members of the tribe. Their fish, 
game, furs, and the few farm products not consumed at home, find mar- 
ket in Richmond and Baltimore. 


GOVERNMENT. 


LEGAL STATUS OF THE TRIBE. 


In government the tribe is a true democracy, over which, however, 
the State of Virginia* exercises a kindly supervision. The State 
appoints five trustees to look after the interest of the Indians. No 
reports of these trustees could be found on file at the office of the gov- 
ernor of Virginia, and their only function that could be ascertained to 
have been performed was the disapproval of certain sections in the 
Indian code of laws. Laws thus disapproved are expunged from the 


*The writer has been unable -to find any statute or judicial decision fixing the 
relation of the tribe to the State. What is here stated on this subject is the view 
taken by the chief and council men of the tribe, 


16 BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 


statute book. The tribe is not taxed, but they pay an annual tribute 
to the State by presenting through their chief to the governor of Vir- 
ginia a number of wild ducks or other game. 

As regards the internal government of the Pamunkey, the executive 
power is vested in a chief, while the legislative and judicial functions 
are performed by the chief together with a council composed of four men. 
The chief was formerly elected for life, but now both chief and council 
are elected every four years by vote of the male citizens. Their method 
of balloting for their executive officer is unique. The council names 
two candidates to be voted for. Those favoring the election of candi- 
date number 1 must indicate their choice by depositing a grain of corn 
in the ballot-box at the schoolhouse, while those who favor the election 
of candidate number 2 must deposit a bean in the same place. The 
former or the latter candidate is declared chosen according as the grains 
of corn or the beans predominate. 

The chief and council are the judge and jury to try all who break 
the law, and to settle disputes between citizens. Their jurisdiction is 
supposed to extend to all cases arising on the reservation and which 
concern only the residents thereon, with the exception of trial for homi- 
cide, in which case the offender would be arraigned before the county 
court of King William county. The Indians claim, however, that it 
would be their privilege to use the courts of the commonwealth of 
Virginia to settle such difficulties as could not be efficiently dealt with 
by their own courts, provided such difficulty arose from a breach of a 
State law. The writer does not know on what this claim is based. 
As may be seen from the printed transcript (verbatim et literatim) of 
the written laws of the Pamunkey which follows, they impose only fine 
or banishment as penalties. There is no corporal punishment either by 
chastisement or incarceration. 


TRIBAL LAWS. 


The Laws of the Pamunkey Indian Town written here in Sept. 25 1887 

The following Laws made and approved by chief and council men Feb. 18th 1886. 
for the Ruling of the Pamunky Tribe of Indians. 

1st Res. No Member of the Pamunkey Indian Tribe shall intermarry with anny 
Nation except White or Indian under penalty of forfeiting their rights in Town. 

2nd No non-resident shall be allowed to be hired or sheltered more than 3 months— 
and if anny person are known to hire or shelter anny sutch persons shall pay 50c pr. 
day for every day over the above mentioned time. Amendment. Should sutch person 
persons be quiet and agreeable they may be hire 30 or 60 day under good behavior. 

3rd Anny person slandering another without sufficient evidence shall be fined in 
the 1st offence $5 Second $10 and in the 3rd they are to be removed from the place 
by the Trustees chief and councle men. 

4th No nun-resident shall be taught in our free school except the concen of chief 
counclmen or any other Indian Tribe. 

5th Anny party or person found guilty of stealing anny thing be longing to anny 
one else they shall pay the party for the amt. that are stolen from them and also 
shall be fined from $1 to $5. 3rd time they are to be removed from the place. 

6th If anny person shall depridate or Trespass on another ons premises and shall 
break down gates or destroy fences or anny other property shall be made to pay or 


THE PAMUNKEY INDIANS OF VIRGINIA. 17 


replace all damages and if any miner are engaged in sutch, their parent shall be 
responsible for their acts and each and anny that are found guilty Shall be fined 
from $1 to $5. 

7th be it known that each road of Indian Town shall be 30 ft. wide and al] person 
that has moved their fence in the road shall have 30 days to move them out and if 
they are not moved they are to be moved by the chief and the councl men and the 
expence paid by the Trespasser. 

8thif anny citizen are notifide to attend anny meeting and fails to do so with 
without sufficient excuse shall be fined from $1 to $1.50. 

9th be it known that all the citizens age 16 to 60 of Indian Town shall work on the 
road as far as red hill and anny member refuse to work shall be fined 75c and Jacob 
Miles to be Road Master and he to be paid $1 pr. year. 

10th Be it known that no person be allowed to swear on the high way of Indian 
Town and if so they are to be fined from $1 to $2. (Amendment) 1st offence 25 2nd 
75 3rd 100. 

1ith Be it known that anny person or persons seen or known to be fighting upon 
the highways or else where of Indian Town in the Town the one found guilty of 
first breaking the peace shall be fined not less than $3. nor more than $5 dollars. 

12th Resolve that each male citizen of Indian Town owning a piece of land shall 
pay $1°° pr. year or the value in produce to the Treasurer of Indian Town yearly 
for her benefits. 

13th beit known that the Hall Sein Shore of Indian Town shall be rented out 
yearly for the benefit of the Treasury of Indian Town and if anny person are known 
to set anny obstruction in the way shall be fined $5 in each offence. 

14th If anny person owning a piece of land and do not build and live upon it in 
18m it shall be considered as town property and the person shall be allowed 20 days 
to move what they has thereon off; then it shall be considered as Town Property 
and the Town can allow any one else the same privelege under the above obligations. 

15th Anny person that become rude and corrupt and refuse to be submissive to 
the Laws of Indian Town shall be removed by the Trustees, chief and counclmen. 

16th Anny person that are in debt to the town and refuse to pay the amt. enoug 
of their property shall be sold to satisfy the claim. 

17th be it known that we shall have a fence law and it shall be4 ft. high ona ditch 
Bank and 5 ft. high on a levil and the holes are to be 1 foot 4 in hole 2 ft 6 in holes 
3 ft 8 in hole and Remainder to the judgement of the fencer. 

18th An amendment to Resolution all male citizens of Indian from 18 year upward 
shall pay $1.00 pr. year and until the amt is paid they will not be given no land. 


Besides these written laws, there are others which have not been 
committed to writing, the most important of which relate to the tenure 
of land. The reservation belongs to the tribe as a whole. There is no 
individual ownership of land. The chief and council allot a parcel of 
cleared ground of about 8 acres to the head of each family. The oceu- 
pant is generally allowed to keep the land for life, and at his death it 
goes back to the tribe to be realloted, unless the deceased should leave 
helpless dependents, in which case the land is rented for their benefit. 
The houses on the reservation are individual property and can be 
bought and sold at pleasure. 


ARTS. 


In 1891 the writer was sent by the Smithsonian Institution to visit 
the Pamunkey Indians and make a collection of specimens of their 
952 2 


18 BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 


arts. Few articles could be found which were distinctively Indian pro- 
ductions. Of their aboriginal arts none are now retained by them ex- 
cept that of making earthenware and “dugout” canoes. 

Until recent years they engaged quite extensively in the making of 
pottery, which they sold to their white neighbors, but since earthen- 
ware has become so cheap they have abandoned its manufacture, so 
that now only the oldest of the tribe retain the art, and even these 
can not be said to be skillful. The clay used is of a dirty white color, 
and is found about 6 feet beneath the surface. It is taken from the 
Potomac formation of the geologic series, which yields valuable pot- 
tery clays at different localities in Virginia and Maryland, and partiec- 
ularly in New Jersey. Mr. Terrill Bradby, one of the best informed 
members of the tribe, furnished, in substance, the following account 
of the processes followed and the materials used in the manufacture 
of this pottery. 

In former times the opening of a clay mine was a great feast day 
with the Pamunkey. The whole tribe, men, women, and children, 
were present, and each family took home a share of the clay. The 
first steps in preparing the clay are to dry it, beat it up, pass it 
through a sieve, and pound it in a mortar. Fresh-water mussels, flesh 
as well as shell, having been burnt and ground up, are mixed with the 
clay prepared as above, and the two are then saturated with water 
and kneaded together. This substance is then shaped with a mussel 
shell to the form of the article desired and placed in the sun and dried; 
then shaped with a mussel shell and rubbed with a stone for the pur- 
pose of producing a gloss. The dishes, bowls, jars, ete., as the case 
may be, are then placed in a circle and tempered with a slow fire; then 
placed in the kiln and covered with dry pine bark and burnt until the 
smoke comes out in a clear volume. This is taken as an indication 
that the ware has been burnt sufficiently. It is then taken out and is 
ready for use. The reasons for the successive steps in this process, 
even the Indians are unable to explain satisfactorily. 

The collection above referred to as having been made for the Smith- 
sonian Institution was put on exhibition at the World’s Columbian 
Exposition. It consists almost altogether of earthenware. Besides 
the various articles for table and kitchen use, there are in the collection 
(1) a * sora horse” nade of clay, and already described under the head 
of mode of subsistence, and (2) a “ pipe-for-joy,” also made of clay. In 
the bowl of this pipe are five holes made for the insertion of five stems, 
one for the chief and one each for the four council men. Before the 
days of peace these leaders used to celebrate their victories by 
arranging themselves in a circle and together smoking the “ pipe-for- 
joy.” The collection comprised also a ‘dugout’ canoe, made of a 
log of wood, hollowed out with metal tools of white man’s manufacture. 
Such canoes were formerly dug out by burning, and chopping with a 
stone axe, 


- 


THE PAMUNKEY INDIANS OF VIRGINIA. 19 


A mortar, used in pounding dry clay as above referred to, could not 
be obtained for the collection. They are, however, made of short gum 
logs, in one end of which the basin of the mortar is burnt out. The 
pestle accompanying it is made of stone. 

Of the arts of the white man the Pamunkey Indians have not been 
ready imitators. There is hardly a skilled artisan among them. 


o) 


. a 


3 lien 5 
‘ eva. f 
re em Kee ab ca x 


Author title. Series title. 


Title for subject entry. 


LIBRARY CATALOGUE SLIPS. 


Smithsonian institution. Bureau of ethnology. 


Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, 
director | — | The Maya year | by | Cyrus Thomas | [Vignette] | 

Washington | government printing office | 1894 

8°. 64 pp. i pl. 


Thomas (Cyrus). 


Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, 
director | — | The Maya year | by | Cyrus Thomas | [Vignette] | 

Washington | government printing office | 1894 

8°. 64.pp. 1 pl. 

[SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. Bureau of ethnology. | 


Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, 
director |— | The Maya year | by | Cyrus Thomas | [Vignette] | 

Washington | government printing office | 1894 

8°. 64 pp. 1 pl. 

[SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. Bureau of ethnology.] 


Youisras- Whanars 


7. ear 
¥ Ww 4 fo yest Ae 
; ‘ yee : 
93 Thetis hited C-tid ort emer shia 4 
‘ vig gS age et ’ i rte iE 
; ‘ i ae 
: : we ‘ ‘ ‘Jone soe hte 
: At, era 
. svinder shes sr aaa ted 
rk ' ; mo) Syaieyass 
. 


le oo 4 ' ¥ 
ees) HE 
, 
& 
y . ‘ 
° * 
» - 
x 
u as * Ps 
: an 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


fea MAYA Y HAR 


BY 


CMR US “Peoe 2S 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1894 


4 ay le. Fe ae 4 
7. A! ioe, 
a . ns ‘ 
vas 


puree 
ms 
Pig 
ae 
a. aed! 
oe, 

i 

' 


- Pf y : - 2 , rrsy 
243. ce Ba ee 

PSR Ra fae eee 
G75 (=. 2 Oe aa eee 


CONTENTS. 


Page 

eon yen OLE (DA Wr GGCG))<.0.— ncn. aaa Pan ec e no eet see cee sacle c's ee cosas 5 
Mirae ere ICO Ti ore ete ee cele ie ei cy ane Se ee eM OS nee tein ee ate 15 
CHAPTER I. Discussion of the time series of the Dresden codex .....--s.---.--.- 16 
MES DISCUSsIOM Of Obhersbime SCMies=4s.c225 6-8 Ste ces Seo ee 50 
MiaGalendanot theinseripwons:-<4i.c.2 ssa q ten ok kee se os eee 5D 

Men Origimiot theGalenGar <- 2: 32.2 sas wastes els a Seas Sete eioe oe ee 57 

ILLUSTRATION. 
PEAKS Copy of plate50, Dresden codexi¢+.) 2525 6-5. 2 ace s5e- ee ee eee 18 


9g 
oo 


PREFATORY NOTE. 


By W J McGer. 


E 


In many respects the aboriginal. culture of the Western Hemisphere 
attained highest development in Yucatan, the land of the Maya. Here 
the Spanish explorers found cities of peculiar yet noble architecture; 
a people of great individuality and native force, yet of refined manners, 
clothed in woven and dyed cotton stuffs; a definitely organized sys- 
tem ot government; a literature and history inscribed on animal and 
vegetal parchments and carved in stone or painted on walls; and even 
a highly developed calendaric and chronologic system. Despite the 
greed and bigotry of théinvaders, who saw nothing good beyond their 
own selfish aims, despite the diversity of tongues and modes of thought, 
the civilization of the East and that of the West stood so near the same 
plane as to blend at some points; and the cities of Copan, Palenque, 
Chichen Itza, and Uxmal came to be known throughout the world of 
growing civilization. 

Although Columbus appears to have encountered representatives of 
the Maya people in his fourth voyage, it was not until 1517 that the 
Spaniards, under Francisco Hernandez de Cordova, first landed on the 
shores of Yucatan. They found that peninsula divided into eighteen 
or nineteen independent petty states or provinces, each ruled by a 
hereditary chief, the villages in each province having a subordinate 
organization under a local ruler, frequently a junior member of the 
reigning family; the partition of land being communal and changing 
from year to year. The several provinces were feebly united in a con- 
federation; but this major institutional element was less perfectly 
developed than among the Aztecs and several other American peoples. 

While the appellation ‘“‘ Maya” applies specifically to the aboriginal 
inhabitants found in Yucatan and their descendants, the same appella- 
tion, or the compound term Maya-Kiche, is usually applied to the 
various peoples of the same linguistic stock, including several tribes 
in or bordering on Guatemala and Mexico. The languages of these 
several tribes are closely related and, despite certain common elements 

vo 


6 PREFATORY NOTE. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


with the Aztec and perhaps with other neighboring stocks, markedly 
distinct from all others. 

The early history of the Maya people is lost in the unwritten past; 
but from the few remaining Maya and Aztec traditions and codices, 
from the modern native books of Yucatan and Mexico, and from the early 
Spanish chronicles it appears that the people were not autochthonous, 
but entered Yucatan from northward, probably as one of the two prin- 
cipal branches of a race represented also by the Aztecs. Evidence of 
this relation is found also in the existence of a prominent branch of the 
Maya linguistic family, the Huastecas, a formerly populous tribe found 
by the Spaniards on the shores of the Gulf of Mexice about the river 
Panuco; for the Huastecas play a prominent part in the Aztee tradi- 
tions and records. The descendants of the ancient Mayas remain an 
important element in the population of Yucatan. In 1862 it was esti- 
mated that there were nearly or quite 200,000 pure-blood Indians and 
perhaps 100,000 mixed bloods using the Maya tongue. 

The Maya language may be characterized as analytic rather than 
synthetic. In comparison with the native American languages gener- 
ally it is remarkably simple in construction. It is largely monosyl- 
Jabic and, like the English, is essentially a language of vocables, the 
formal grammar being simple and inconspicuous. Phonetically, also, it 
is highly developed, the Spaniards finding but six phonetic elements 
new to their tongue. For these reasons the language is remarkably 
facile. Ithas long been observed that foreigners acquire the Maya more 
readily than the Spanish; and the remarkable persistence of the tongue 
in comparative purity attests an inherent strength which can be ascribed 
only to its economy as a vehicle of expression. In its simplicity of con- 
struction, its wealth of vocabulary and dearth of formal grammar, in the 
differentiation of its phonetic elements, and in several minor respects 
the Maya tongue is analogous to the English. So in language as in 
culture, and indeed in physical development, the Maya may be regarded 
as the Saxon of the Western Hemisphere. 

The graphic system of the ancient Mayas was from the first diserimi- 
nated by the Spaniards from that of Mexico. Itis exemplified in manu. 
script books and codices, as well as in tablets and inscriptions carved in 
the stones or painted on the plaster of the walls of their domiciles, palaces, 
and temples. The system was largely hieroglyphic and known chiefly 
or solely by priests and nobles. The Spanish chronicles, as well as the 
records themselves, so far as interpreted, indicate that it was a com- 
posite system comprising pictures, ideograms, and phonetic characters. 
Irom the rounded forms of the characters the system has been called 
caleuliform. 

The Maya numeral system is elaborate. Its basis is vigesimal, the 
cardinal numbers running from one to twenty; and the higher numera- 
tion is also vigesimal, each unit comprising twenty of the next lower 
order and forming one-twentieth of the next higher. According to 


a THE MAYA CODICES AND BOOKS. 7 


THOMAS 


Berendt and Brinton, the numeration was definite and expressed in 
specific terms up to 64,000,000. The vigesimal character and some of 
the terms indicate that the system was initiated through counting on 
the fingers, and perhaps also on the toes; but the concepts of the count 
appear to have interacted with industrial, calendaric, and, perhaps, myth- 
ologic concepts, and so the stages in the development of the system, 
like those of our own Arabic system, are lost, probably never to be 
regained. 

The Maya calendar system recorded by the Spanish conquerors was 
of highly elaborate character, being determined apparently (1) by the 
system of numeration, (2) by the seasons, and (3) by the phases of the 
moon, together with the customary recognition of the day as a primary 
unit; but in this system, too, the stages of development are sometimes 
obseure. It is to be observed that hitherto the calendar system of the 
codices has been, in some respects, inharmonious with that of the modern 
Maya and Spanish chronicles. 


LS 


The autographic records or records proper of the Mayas are of two 
classes: (1) codices written in the aboriginal graphic system, chiefly or 
wholly before the Conquest; (2) ‘“ Books of Chilan Balam” and other 
manuscripts written in the Maya language but in characters introduced 
by the early missionaries and conquerors. According to Brinton, Chilan 
Balam “ * * * is nota proper name, ‘but a title, and in ancient 
times designated the priest who announced the will of the gods and 
explained the sacred oracles.” ! 

The latter records were at one time numerous, probably every village 
being supplied with one and the name of the village being added to 
the title; but by far the greater part have disappeared. The earliest 
were composed before the close of the sixteenth century; many were 
added during the seventeenth century; but most were written during 
the later half of the eighteenth century. The records comprise chron- 
icles of events of local or general nature, prophecies, astrologic and 
divinatory inscriptions, and a variety of matters of little consequence 
Save as indices to modes of thought and methods of expression. Stu- 
dents of the subject are under a profound obligation to Dr. Daniel G. 
Brinton, of Philadelphia, for the publication of a number of these 
“books,” with translations and notes, in the first volume of his Library 
of Aboriginal American Literature, under the title, ‘The Maya Chroni- 
cles.” 

The codices, which are of special importance as autographic records 
of perhaps the highest aboriginal culture on the Western Hemisphere, 
existed in considerable numbers at the time of the Conquest. Unhap- 
pily their value was not appreciated by the conquistadores, and they 
fell under the ban of the missionaries and most of them were destroyed 


'The Maya Chronicles, Philadephia, 1882, p. 70. 


8 PREFATORY NOTE. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


or secreted and lost. Diego de Landa, the second bishop of Yucatan, 
alone burned 27 aboriginal codices among other articles relating to the 
early condition of the Mayas. A few of these invaluable records are 
said to remain in private possession, and a very few, preserved in pub- 
lic institutions, are accessible to students. 


The accessible codices are formed of a peculiar paper made by macer- 


ating the leaves of the maguey (or century plant) and beating or felt- 
ing the fiber and afterward sizing with a white varnish. Each codex 
consists of a long sheet, folded backward and forward like a screen or 
map, or like the ordinary Japanese book; but, unlike the Oriental 
books, both sides of the paper were used and the sheet was not bound 
save by attaching boards to the outer folds as in dissected maps. The 
records comprise figures and characters inscribed or painted in bril- 
liant colors, forming chronicles much like the books of Chilan Balam. 

Probably by reason of the proscription of the codices, the few. that 
reached Europe seem to have been conveyed surreptitiously in private 
hands and to have found their way, accidentally and unnoted, into 
libraries and museums where three, four, or five of them were subse- 
quently discovered by appreciative students. These are as follows: 

1. The Dresden codex, preserved in the Royal Library at Dresden. 
It comprises 39 leaves, of which 35 are inscribed on both sides and 4 
on one side only. Although existing in two unequal parts, this codex 
was long regarded as a unit; but Férstemann gives strong reasons for 
considering each part a séparate document, either complete in itself or 
a portion of a distinct book. This codex is reproduced in Lord Kings- 
borough’s work, and was photographed in colors by Férstemann in 
1880. It is chiefly from this codex, or from the principal part if there 
are two, that Dr. Thomas’s conclusions are drawn. 

2, The Codex Troano, named from its possessor, Don Juan de Tro y 
Ortolano of Madrid. It comprises 35 leaves or 70 pages, and is probably 
incomplete. It was reproduced by chromolithography in Paris under 
the direction of the Abbé Brasseur (de Bourbourg) in 1869, 

3. The Codex Cortesianus, named from the family of the conqueror, 
which is by some supposed to be a second part of the Codex Troano. 
It is preserved in the Royal Archeologic Museum of Madrid. This 
codex was reproduced by photography in Paris in 1883, and another 
edition, in colors, has recently been published. 

4, The Codex Peresianus, of the Bibliotheque Nationale, Paris, named 
by Rosny from an inscription including the word ‘ Perez,” which ac- 
companied the document and whichis supposed to be the name of a 
former owner. Thisis merely a fragment, comprising 11 leaves or 22 pages. 
A reproduction of this codex also has been published. The inscription 
is highly artistic. 


In addition to the codices and the books of Chilan Balam, autographie 
records of the Maya are found in mural inscriptions and sculptures, 


ee 


MAYA * é 
REAL THE ORIGIN OF CALENDARS. 9 


and many of these have been reproduced by photography and other 
methods, notably in the excellent drawings by Catherwood. Many of 
the mural records remain to be transcribed by future students, though 
they are rapidly disappearing under the influence of a torrid climate 
and the neglect of an inappreciative population; but these various data 
for the history of one of the most remarkable peoples of the Western 
Hemisphere have not been finally systemized. The works of Kings- 
borough and Catherwood, of Berendt and Brinton, of Thomas, Seler, 
and Férstemann, and of other students of the Maya are, however, 
noteworthy and important. 


Il. 


The most primitive peoples take note of days, or rather of the nights 
by which activity is arrested; and in this recognition of a natural 
alternation of events, calendars and chronologic systems take root. 
Most primitive peoples, too, like many of the lower animals, take note 
of the march of the seasons; and some savage races reckon time rudely 
by summers, or perhaps rather by winters, during which the activity of 
the year is arrested. The recognition of these diurnal and annual 
periods gives rise to solar calendars, though no cases are known in 
which the solar calendar has become an important element in chro- 
nology except in conjunction with other elements. 

Many savages, and probably all barbarous peoples, take note of the 
phases of the moon, and some of them reckon time by moons, although, 
as in the solar reckoning, it is commonly the dark or change of the moon 
that fixes the time unit. These Innations form the basis for lunar ecal- 
endars; but no cases are known in which a lunar calendar alone has 
determined a complete chronologic system. 

A day measures the rotation and a year the revolution of the earth; 
and while the periods are not commensurable, the discrepancy (some- 
thing less than a quarter of a day) is so slight as to escape attention 
save in the higher stages or under peculiar conditions of barbarism, or 
in civilization. A lunation measures the revolution of the moon, and 
this cycle is not commensurable with either of the terrestrial move- 
ments; yet the earth, sun, and moon are so related in space and in 
movement that eclipses occasionally occur, and the eclipse, being a 
striking phenomenon and one mysterious to the primitive mind, gives 
another basis for time reckoning, and from this basis lunisolar calen- 
dars have sprung in different countries; and most important calendars 
forming the warp of the chronology of the world are of this character, 
The ancient Chaldeans and the Chinese and the astronomers of ancient 
Greece carried observation of eclipse cycles to high perfection, and the 
Chaldean saros of eighteen years, the Chinese tchang and Grecian 
Metonic cycle of nineteen years, the Grecian Callippic cycle (known long 
before in China) extending over seventy-six years, the Chaldean naros 
of six hundred years, and perhaps also the Chinese Great Year, com- 


3 7 BUREAU OF 
10 PREFATORY NOTE. ETHNOLOGY 


prising four thousand six hundred and seventeen solar years, indicate 
the delicacy of observation and the accuracy of record at the dawn of 
civilization; even the Aztecs, neighbors, and kinfolk of the Mayas, 
were said by Houzeau to have had a lunisolar calendar more exact 
than the Julian calendar, though this is doubted by many. 

The real or apparent motions of the planets have also given rise to 
calendaric elements, particularly in the astrologic and mystical systems 
which have clung to the chronologic calendar in all stages of develop- 
ment even up to the present time; and it has been suggested that plan- 
etary elements enter subordinately into the Mayacalendar. The plan- 
etary calendar is not known, however, to alone form a useful basis for 
chronology. 

Although the incommensurability of terrestrial rotation and revolu- 
tion is inconspicuous, yet when the observation of barbarous peoples is 
sharpened by chronologic records based on the lunisolar calendar, they 
perceive that the zenith or sunrise star of the new year gradually 
changes its apparent position and slowly circles the heavens through 
the centuries to resume its old relative position in nearly a millennium 
and a half; and thus a basis is afforded for a highly exact calendar, 
independent of the eclipse cycle, which may be called sidero-solar. This 
period is the Sothic cycle of the ancient Egyptians; and Zelia Nuttall 
finds indications of its recognition by the ancient Aztecs. 

While all definite calendars forming the basis of chronology among 
primitive and eultured peoples have grown out of these astronomic 
cycles, other elements have commonly been introduced. These elements 
are of diverse character; days of rest or feasting are fixed through 
religious observance and market days through domestic needs, and 
thus weeks of five, seven, thirteen, or some other number of days are 
impressed on the calendar; seasons of planting and harvesting, with 
the times of feasting dependent thereon, come to be recognized through 
their relations to agriculture, and are also impressed on the calendar; 
and in some cases the time-periods for the maturing of crops and for 
fetal development appear also to enter the calendaric system. So 
through the multiplication of astronomic bases and through the infu- 
sion of artificial bases, the calendars of cultured peoples become highly 
complex and long periods are required for their development. 

Among the results of this complexity of calendars may be mentioned 
a tendency toward the development of mysticism, a tendency exem- 
plified by the astrology of our own budding eivilization and the hiero- 
glyphics of Egypt and Yucatan, which were understood of the few only. 
Indeed, even in our own day, though the calendaric bases are free to 
all, it is but the few who take the time to comprehend them while the 
many are content with the applications wrought out for their use. Thus 
the development of calendars marks an early stage in that differentia- 
tion of function among individuals which began in savagery, waxed in 
barbarism and earlier civilization, and culminates in enlightenment. 


poe ll THE MAYA CALENDAR. cial 


The hybrid origin and mystical character of early calendaric systems 
is constantly to be borne in mind in the study of the symbols in which 
the aboriginal calendars of the Western Hemisphere are recorded. 


The early Spanish chronicles and the books of Chilan Balam, written 
in the Maya language but in Spanish characters, indicate that the native 
calendar system of Yucatan was highly elaborate. 

The days were grouped in two ways: First, they were named in four 
series of five each up to 20, this grouping probably representing an out- 
growth of the vigesimal system of numeration, though the group was 
called wu (moon or month); and 18 of these months, with five intercalary 
days, formed the year, which was apparently determined (as indicated 
by the intercalation) by more or less refined astronomic observation. 
Thus there were 73 five-day periods (which might be called ‘ weeks” 
were not that term preoccupied in a less desirable way) in a year, on four 
and only four of which the year might begin; and accordingly (1) these 
four days—Kan, Mulue, Ix, Cauac—were especially designated as domini- 
cal days or “year-bearers,” and also came to hold special place in relig- 
ious and domestic observance; and (2) the years were grouped in series 
of four, each distinguished by the day on which it began, ‘“ Year Kan,” 
“Year Muluc,”etc. Thus this grouping of the days would seem, 
except for the name “month,” to represent a nearly pure solar cal- 
endar modified by ar bitrary time distinctions springing originally 
from the vigesimal system of counting, both calendar and counting 
being strengthened and more firmly fixed by the interaction. In 
the second place the days were numbered in groups of 13, and 
such a group is commonly called by students of the Maya calen- 
dar a “week”, and 28 of these “weeks,” with one day added, formed 
the year. This arrangement gave rise (1) to a series of 13 years, form- 
ing a period called by the Mayas a “katun of days” and by the 
Spaniards an “indiction;” and (2) to a longer series of 52 years elaps- 
ing before a “ year-bearer” of given name and number would again form 
the new year. The origin of the essential part of this arrangement is 
obscure; possibly the primary period of 13 days represents a semi- 
lunation (perhaps introduced from the sacred year); but it is also pos- 
sible that it represents a curious concept found among various prinitive 
and some higher peoples, in which seven is a mystical or perfect num- 
ber that on doubling (or recounting) becomes 13, the central unit in 
the group of objects or directions being reckoned in the first counting 
but not in the second. But whatsoever the origin of this number, the 
other elements in the grouping grow out of the arbitrary adjustment 
of the initial element to the solar year. It is significant that a 52-year 
cycle was recognized among other aboriginai peoples of the Western 
Hemisphere. 

In addition to the arrangement growing out of the grouping of days, 
the years were grouped arbitrarily either through the vigesimal system 


12 PREPATORY NOTE. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


of counting or for some obseure reason in such manner as to give a long 
cycle recorded in the Spanish chronicles and in the books of Chilan 
Balam, though there is doubt as to its duration. According to some 
students 20 years were grouped as a “katun” which was divided into 
five series of four years each (independent of the four-year groups deter- 

mined by the dominical days), called “tzuc” by the Mayas, ‘“‘lustros” 

by the Spaniards; and it was the custom to record or verify the chro- 
nology by erecting carved stones, each called like the period a ‘“ katun,” 
at the end of each twentieth year, in a historical monument. Now 
since the days of the “week” were numbered from 1 to 13 and the 
years of the “katun” from 1 to 20, a new ‘“ katun” could not commence 
on the same number-day until a period of 13x20 years had elapsed; 
and in this way a cycle of 260 years was formed. This period, devel. 
oped trom the chronicles by Brinton, was called an “ ahau katun,” or 
chief cycle, collectively, though each 20-year period within it bore the 
same name; and “each * * * was represented in the native eal- 
endar by the picture or portrait of a particular personage who in some. 
way was identified with the katun, and his name was given to it.”* 
According to later students, notably Juan Pio Perez and Dr. Thomas, 
the katun comprised 24 years, which would make the duration of the 
ahau katun 312 years. The 13 katuns in this long cycle were numbered 
in the following curious order, which has been ,a subject of much discus- 
s1IOn— 


13, 14, 9575/58, AS AO, BG Ave 


The foregoing grouping of days and years constitutes what may be 
called the secular calendar and the basis for the chronology of the 
Mayas; but there was another and more mystical or sacred calendar 
system employed to some extent, which is by some regarded as the 
original or essential system. In this system the 13-day ‘‘ weeks” were 
grouped in series of 20 forming a 260-day period called the sacred year, 
or what is known among the Zuiis, according to Cushing, as the “kernel 
of the year.” There is some question whether these 260-day periods 
were used independently as a consecutive time-measure parallel though 
not coincident with the secular calendar; but it seems more probable 
that this esoteric time-measure grew out of industrial and domestic 
requirements formulated by priests or chiefs, and that it represented an 
arbitrarily chosen period of 10 lunations (20 semi-lunations) in each year 
during which crops were developed or gestation was completed, or 
during which ceremonies connected with these natural processes ran 
their course. Whatever be the origin of this subordinate calendaric 
system, there seems insufficient reason for believing that it subserved 
important chronologic purposes. 


* Maya Chronicles, p. 58. 


MAYA r > 
is THE MAYA YEAR. 13 


It is clearly to be understood that knowledge of the calendaric system 
of the Mayas is derived chiefly from the Spanish and modern Maya 
chronicles rather than from the codices. Hitherto it has not been 
known that the year of the codices included 365 days; and it is Dr. 
Thomas’ purpose in the present publication to demonstrate that, prop- 
erly interpreted, the Dresden codex comprises records of 365-day years. 
In thus harmonizing the autographic chronicles of the ancient Mayas 
with the sometimes ambiguous chronicles of the Spaniards and modern 
Mayas, Dr. Thomas not only makes a useful addition to our knowledge 
of a highly interesting people but corroborates strongly the authen- 
ticity of the codices and the accuracy of both series of chronicles. 


7 tae rene | ~ A 
SPST VE? ake a 


e ; He 
.] 
> * 
? - 
t 
Peer 
. ; 
: ; oe, : s 
ae 
2 > hes 
ex. 


> 


Rees, noe Ste ne ere ese, hat: Pets Rien ane j Y 
itt. HESS atch PU as one bhinr 2 Fen 
A Pr VET ENS At ta eee nae oe NS , 


perp hoes 


a che a | if Y A" ?? tate ee. us ee bP 
“Frere Of y lee te od 
f a: ap iv ty , & 
eye: es oe 3 
~ - ie zt ¥ aS: 


THE MAYA YEAR 


By Cyrus THOMAS 


INTRODUCTION. 


According to the earlier authors whose works have been preserved, 
the calendar system found in use among most of the tribes of Mexico 
and Central America at the time of the Conquest was as follows: 
The year consisted of eighteen months of twenty days each, with five 
supplemental days added at the close of the eighteenth month, or of 
365 days. Each day of the month had a name, and they were also 
numbered, but up to thirteen only, the year being thus divided into 
what may be called ‘“‘weeks” of thirteen days each. This peculiar 
arrangement resulted in forming four year-series—that is, years com- 
mencing with four different days. As the years, without some arbi- 
trary change, could begin only with these four days, following one 
another in definite order, they are denominated the ‘“dominical days,” 
or ‘‘year-bearers.” 

An examination of the codices has shown that the months referred 
to in the time series contain twenty days, each day having its distinct 
syinbol and all numbered as above stated; and that eighteen months 
were counted to the year. If, therefore, it can be shown that the year 
used consisted of 365 days the system of the codices will be brought 
into complete harmony with the authorities referred to. 

The object of this paper is to present what is believed to be clear 
and positive proof that the time system of the Dresden codex is based 
on the year of 365 days, which necessarily results in forming four 
series of years, each with its particular year-bearer or dominical day. 
Some evidence is also presented to show that the same calendar system 
was used in the inscriptions at Palenque, Lorillard, and Tikal. 


I desire to acknowledge here my indebtedness to Dr. E. Férstemann, 
of Dresden, for his suggestion to me, in a private communication, that 
a more thorough examination of the series on plates 46-50 of the Dres- 
den codex might result in determining the length of the year. 

15 


CHAPTER I, 


DISCUSSION OF THE TIME SERIES OF THE DRESDEN 
CODEX. 


A somewhat extended discussion of the numerals on plates 46-50 of 
the Dresden codex will be found on pages 294-305 of the paper entitled 
‘‘Notes on the Maya Codices,” in the Sixth Annual Report of the 
Bureau of Ethnology. There is, however, one point connected with 
these plates which is of more importance than anything else found on 
them, but of which only incidental mention was made. This relates to 
the month symbols and the numbers attached thereto. Since writing 
that article I have discovered the significance of these numbers, and 
from them have obtained positive evidence that, in this instance, the 
author of the codex refers to a year of 365 days (which requires the 
addition of five supplementary days to the year of eighteen 20-day 
months), and to the four year-series having the four different ‘ year- 
bearers.” To avoid going over the discussion again, the reader is 
referred to that paper. It is necessary, however, in order that what 
follows may be understood, to repeat in part the statements made 
therein. As pointed out in that paper, these five plates are peculiar, 
and seem to have no direct relation to any other part of the codex. 

In the upper left-hand corner of each plate there are four day col- 
umns, all more or less injured. Each column evidently contained origin- 
ally thirteen days, or, more correctly speaking, the symbol for one 
day repeated thirteen times. In every case the day in the first (left- 
hand) column and that in the third column are the same. As the num- 
bers attached to them are absolutely unreadable in Kingsborough and 
partly obliterated in the photograph, I give here restorations (table 1) 
for the benefit of those studying this codex. This restoration is easily 
made by finding the order of the series, which can be obtained from 
plates 49 and 50 of the photographie copy. 

The red numerals at the bottom of each of these plates of the codex 
are as follows: 

Ag 4 ry 0 
16 10 10 8 


The upper numbers stand for months, the lower ones for days. These 
are counters used to denote the intervals between the corresponding 
days in the columns, thus: From II Cib (first column, plate 46) to II 
Cimi (second column, same plate) is 4 months and 10 days; from II 
Cimi to V Cib (third column) is 12 months and 10 days; from V Cib to 
XIU Kan (fourth column) is 8 days; and from XIII Kan (last column, 
plate 46) to If Ahau (first column, plate 47) is 11 months and 16 days. 
This holds good throughout to the last column on plate 50, using the 
first day in each column. It is also true if the second day or any other 
day in thecolumn is used, provided the count is carried through the entire 
16 


~ 


Pe mas THE TIME SERIES. 17 


series with the corresponding (horizontal) days; that is to say, if the 
count begins with the fifth day of the first column of plate 46, the fifth 
day of each column must be used successively, taking the plates in the 
order of numbering. This shows that the whole is one continuous 
series, and that after the count has gone through the first cross line (or 
top line) of the five plates it goes back to the commencement of the 
second line, then to the third, next to the fourth, and so on until the 
last name in the right hand column of plate 50 is reached. 

For present purposes it will be necessary to use only one of these 
lines or series. The first or top days of the columns, commencing with 
III Cib (or,3 Cib),* may therefore be selected. 

It is necessary now to give the names of the months and the numbers 
attached to them exactly in the order in which they stand on the plates, 
placing over them the corresponding first days of the columns above 
(see table2). The counters or intervals are also added below. Itis to 
be understood that the counter below a column indicates the interval 
between the day over the preceding column and the day over the column 
under which itis found, For example, 4 (months) and 10 (days) un- 
der the second column of plate 46 indicate the interval between 3 Cib, 
first column, and 2 Cimi, second column. 

In this table the portions of the series found on a plate are given 
together, with the plate number over them, as ‘ plate 46,” “ plate 47,” 
ete. The upper cross line of each plate is the upper line of days of the 
day columns; the next line below this gives the months and numbers 
of the days of the month of the first month series. These two upper 
lines and the two lines at the bottom, consisting of months and days 
and forming the counters or intervals, are all that will be used in the 
explanation which follows. 

In order that the reader may observe the positions which the symbols 
corresponding with these names and numbers occupy on the plates, a 
facsimile of plate 50 is introduced (plate I). 

Attention should be confined to the left half of theplate. Thetwo cross 
lines of open dots and short lines at the bottom (colored in the original) 
are the counters referred to. Immediately over these is the bottom line 
of hieroglyphs corresponding with the lowest line of months on plate 
50 as given in table 2, viz, “ [20] Xul- 10 Zac-15Tzec-3 Xul.” The 
sixth cross line of hieroglyphs, on plate 50, counting from the bottom 
upward, corresponds with the second line of months as given in table 
2, viz, “15 Cumhu — [20] Tzec -10 Kayab-18 Kayab.” Then, moving 
up over the lines of black numerals to the fifth line of hieroglyphs 
above them, which line stands immediately below the day columns, we 
find the symbols representing the upper line of months in the table, 
viz, “10 Kankin — [20] Cumhu — 5 Mae - 13 Mac.” 


*For convenience the Arabic numerals will be used throughout this paper, except 
where necessity requires the introduction of Roman notation. 
BULL. S=19 2 


BUREAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


[ 


CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. 


18 


neqy I 
neqy IA 
neqy Ix 
neqy Tit 
neqy IITA 
neqy IIx 
nVeyy A 
neyy X 
LU eT 
neqy IIA 
neqy IIx 
TEM CAT 
neqy XI 


i a a AG a wa 
WEIS Ar A tr XT 
Tdi. At Tx Gat 
APTA aie AY Oa TA 
Wate e a xX Gore 
OM Aw 10 Thea Go TT 
eX. — AL IAs GE TTA 
We TE A JX Wa TIE 
CHeITA S53 AT = Gel. 
OG TEx a: Sl R= OT ox 
Cae AT <e MEAT qa II 
Vox AT LA ~ aa ILA 
qa I gl guia Hal BG 
‘0G ALVId 
yemery AT ueqy XI 
qeuiery XT neyy I 
qvulery | ueyy LA 
qeume'y TA ney IX 
quue'y TX neyy IIT 
yey TIT neqy TILA 
yemey JITA weqy IX 
qemey TTX uveqy A 
qvue'y A neyy X 
qeuey X neyy I 
qeue'y TI neyy ILA 
qemey ITA  uvyy TIX 
jemey TIX  neqy AI 


VP TLVTg 


q10 II 
qt0 IIA 
410 TIX 
qo AI 
qtpO XI 
qIOrr 
ato ITA 
(IO IX 
(tO Ill 
qtO IITA 
qtO TTX 
qt A 
qo X 


90 IA 
°0 IX 
%O III 
90 IIIA 
90 IIIX 
90 A 
90 X 
90 II 
90 IIA 
90 IIx 
90 AI 
90 XI 
20 I 


‘(CHYOLSaU) XXGOD NAGSaUd AHL AO SNWATOD AVG 


qeue'y TTA = qeuezy AT 
qemey TIX qvuezgy XT 
qvuey AT  qeuezy | 
yeuey XI = quuezg TA 
query J] qvuezg IX 
qeuvey TA = qeueeg TIT 
yeuvy TX qvuezay TTA 
qeue'y JIT qevuezg TTX 
qeuey IITA qraezy A 
quuleyy JITX qeurzy x 
qeuey A = quuezyy I] 
qeueyy X  qeuezg ITA 
yeu] JT = quaezy ITX 
‘67 ALVIG 
ueqy ITA uvy A 
nvyy IITX UG yy ME 
neqy AT uey, TI 
neqy XI Wey ITA 
neyqy I uey ITX 
nvqy TA uey AT 
neyy TX uvyy XI 
neqy IT wey [ 
uvyy ITA | wey TA 
nvyy IX | uey x 
ney A uey III 
neqy X uey IITA 
neqy I | uey TTX 


FE 9190 


qeuey A 
qeue'y X 
qvue'y IT 
qvuery ITA 
qeue'y JIX 
yeuery AT 
qeuery XT 
query J 
ywuleryy TA 
qvunery TX 
qeue'y TIT 
qeuue'y TITA 


yemey TTX | 


qo X 
ho: Td 


QT) ITA 
tO) 11x 


qi AI 
Qt) XI 
q1O I 

IO: TA 
qtO IX 
qt) III 


qtO IITA 
at) IIx 


qo A 


NAG 
a 
da I 
(oH 


SUC § 


III wry TA XT A 
IIA Uey IIIX XI Xx 
IIx ury A XI II 
uvy X XI ITA 
uvy IT XI IIX 
uvy IIA XI AT 
TA. U8y TEX) “ST RT 
TTX) Dey ATS Aya 
AI ‘War XT Se SsbA 
XI wey] XJ IX 
uey IA XI XIII 
TA. U8 Tee ew 
EX <)SO Ja Se 
‘SF DLVIg 
wary) ITA q10 IITA 
rut TIX 410 TX 
TUL) AT qyoA 
TULL) XT Toes 
uy T qt II 
TU) TA to ILA 
Tuy) TX qi TIX 
iw TIT qt) AI 
Tul) TILA qt XI 
uty TTX qt) I 
Tu) A qt). IA 
Tuli X Gl b:¢ 
mut) TI qt) IIT 


‘OF ULV Td 


uy TA 
uy IX 
uey TIT 
uey IITA 
uvMy TITX 
uCcy A 
Uey xX 
uey II 
uey ILA 
uey TIX 
uey Al 
wey XT 
Uuvy fT 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 
- 


iL B EE BB CB. 

6B o@) DAG SHOE 
ii WK 

1 9.18 QO new 

MK OI@2O 

MEPS 2 


: He : of Ag Cr re aE 


CS 
pS de = @. oes e re = - 
ae lt EY é, 
f£GLAl Ke 


[see <a) 
Sar ASAD 
PUDEL S| Deboss 
oa °G SS SAE GA 
SII S75: Zid 


ss 0 KES 


Os 
= == = 4S 


COPY OF PLATE 50 DRESDEN CODEX. 


I, 


THOMAS THE MONTHS AND DAYS. 19 


Where there are no numbers attached to the months, the twentieth 
or last day is to be understood, as, for example, in the last line above 
mentioned, where the month “ Cumhu” is given without any number, 
20 Cumhu is to be understood. We have prefixed the numeral in 
brackets, thus indicating its absence in the original. 

As we shall have occasion to refer to it repeatedly, I introduce the 
compound calendar (table 3) adopted in my previous works to avoid 
the necessity of writing out the long series of days of the years referred 
to. But instead of commencing with the usual year-bearers, Kan, 
Mulue, Ix, Cauac, this table, as will be evident to those familiar with 
the Maya calendar, begins with the days with which, in the usual plan, 
the months close; viz, Akbal, Lamat, Ben, Ezanab. The reason for 
this will be given further on. 

For a full explanation of the Maya calendar the reader is referred to 
my previous works*; the following brief explanation is given for the 
benefit of readers who may not have an opportunity of referring to 
these works. . 

The Maya year, according to the early Spanish authors, contained 
three hundred and sixty-five days and consisted of two unequal parts, 
as follows: Three hundred and sixty days, or the year proper, divided 
into eighteen months of twenty days each; and the five intercalary 
days required to complete the number three hundred and sixty-five 
added at the end. 

The eighteen months were named and numbered as follows: 1 Pop, 
2 Uo, 3 Zip, 4 Tzoz, 5 Tzec, 6 Xul, 7 Yaxkin, 8 Mol, 9 Chen, 10 Yax, 
11 Zac, 12 Ceh, 13 Mac, 14 Kankin, 15 Muan (or Moan), 16 Pax, 17 
Kayab, 18 Cumhu (or Cumku). As the year always commenced with 
the month Pop, the others following in the order given, the number of 
each is readily ascertained from the name, and the name from the 
number. 

Each month consisted of twenty days, named as follows: Kan, Chic- 
chan, Cimi, Manik, Lamat, Muluc, Oc, Chuen, Eb, Ben (or Been), Ix, 
Men, Cib, Caban, Ezanab, Cauac, Ahau, Ymix, [k, Akbal. The order 
or sequence here given was always maintained, though the month did 
not always begin with the same day, since, according to the peculiar 
arrangement of the calendar, it might begin with Kan, Muluc, Ix, or 
Cauac; or, as appears to be the rule in the Dresden codex and as given 
in our table 3, with Akbal, Lamat, Ben, and Ezanab.t If it began 
with Kan, the second day would be Chicchan, the others following as 
given above; if with Mulue, then Oc would be the second day, Chuen 
the third, and so on; if with Ix, then Men would be the second day, 


*A Study of the Manuscript Troano” (Contributions to North American Ethnol- 
ogy, Vol. v), 1882, pp. 7-12; ‘“‘Aids to the Study of the Maya Codices,” 6th Ann. Rep. 
Bur. Eth., 1888, p. 275. : 

+It is probable, as will be shown hereafter, that this system was derived from 
the Tzental calendar. 


. 


BUREAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


[ 


CODEX. 


DRESDEN 


CALENDAR OF THE 


20 


ATpoyqnopun st ‘opqvordde st og e107. JOTqQu} ONbue[Vg OY} UO pue XEepod SI} UL posn SI ALIBI, 


“ABIISE LOpvIT OY} PROT JSUT srqy se ‘1099¥] ONY 
JO OUIVE Of} JAOSUL 0} WET} STG} OATS 0} 19}}0q FYSNOY ST 4T ‘Jou soop JoquUIAS OY} OLOT_M SOOMLISUT OMY OY} UI OYVP ONIY OF} SEATS SorlIEs OYJ UL yUNOD eTy Sy “uoMTsoddns srry 
WO 4QNOp SWOS SOIT} ‘OJP ONT} OY} SUTMOYS JVYY 0} JOU PUL ‘SMOT[OF TOT YJUOUT OY} Jo [oquTAs oY} 07 poToLyye SI 4I GaATy JO JNO S9dUISUT OY UT FVTy Jor oy 904 fonIy 


‘0% oF oquIAS B SI XYord SIT} 4VqY SeAsIpaq JeTeG ‘Iq ‘NX 0% Sl oyep yoa1100 


eTL “Xyord ze[noayo e]qnop oy} ITAA [AX YIWOU oY} Jo yyy St ‘I oJBT Fo JoJOVIVYO JoUION puLy-IJo] IEMOT OY} 07 Sursrezor Aq woos eq Avu sv “Qurod s1yy ye Joquds oyyt 
NYyWNyY 0Z Sf eyep redoad oy} nq ‘xyord avpnoaro etqnop oy} WIIM dog YyZUOU eT4 Jo yyy St Jarod sty} 4v [oquiAs ory, | 
‘wey 0s ATQVMOYSenbun sv stoyepaodoid oy, “Sepoato [[VUIS O44 Fo ULIOF OY UL xYord v GIA XB Y}WOUL ogy Jo IvTY ATquuoysenbun st xepoo oy} ur yurod siqy 4e [oquiAs oN, x 


‘shup g  ‘skep OT ‘sAvp OL ‘sAvp oT ‘skep 8 ‘sAUp OT ‘skUp OT ‘sep OL | ‘shup @ ‘sAvp OL ‘skup OT ‘sdep of 
‘STJUOM - ‘SUJUOM ZT ‘SYJWOUL P ‘SYJUOTI TT ‘syQUOM Q ‘syJUOM ZIT ‘syjZUOME F ‘syJUOW TT | ‘syZUOUT ( ‘SqQUOTA ZI ‘SyQUOU F ‘syyUOM TT 
Vx € 0025, GI § 97 OL t1Mx (04) OVI 6 ovN tT nym) gf Uryuey 9 | Of) OT MIO ee WABI JIE adrz 2 
qvdey st qvdey oT  9027,(03) nymnyD ct MX 6T MXIT Og UAXeA OT | WyUEY Ss = OPW LT dog L wen 
0 ral z ae. | OT 8 8I 8 ie. BBE P ia g 
G il L G | 8 8 &1 6 ENE ar G 91 
8 8 L L 2 9 ; 9 Sees g if P i & 
owN St OPW G fuquINO [0g] UYULY OT on FT on 9 TOW T diz 11 | «wou [og] wey GE ue L xX LT 
neuyV 6 (HT 1 EE (aH ot qio OL Jeuvy G qvuezy Gl FVUL'T ET dH TT UB & XT 61 ueyl T 
‘0G ALVId ‘6h HLVIg ‘Sy ZLVId 
‘sup 8 ‘skUp OT ‘sfep OT ‘shUp OT | ‘skep Q ‘sABP OT ‘sAvp OT “sABP OT 
‘sqjuow ‘sTQuOu ZT = “Squou F ‘sqjuom TT | ‘sqjyuout ¢ ‘sqjuow ZT = ‘syjuow F ‘sqQUOUL TT 
wogD 9T weap 8 ueny € KCK EI | qudvy & xd FL ZOZI, V qudvy 61 
az 9 ee SLB PMESh: = oul. Ss : UK GL xBk T uenW 6L 0vZ 8 
8 0 OL 0 v 9T 9 91 
y v 6 g IT OT oT II 
& aes & G 6 qT T 
qvavy 9 XUd 81 ZOZT, 8 nquiny) ¢ mx L 09Z1, 61 BZ FT UlyxXeX FP 
qvuey GT neqy 7 XOY neqvVv G ueM &T qio g TUT) G “QIN & 
‘YP DLVId ‘OF ALVId 


‘SHINO, AHL AO SHAAWON ONY SHNVN 


6 999 


es | THE INTERCALARY DAYS. 91 


Cib the third, and so on to Akbal; then followed Kan, just as we would 
name the seven days of our week, commencing, for instance, with 
Wednesday, then Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Sunday, Monday, ete. 
As each month contained twenty days, each having a name, it follows 
that each month of a given year would begin with the first day of that 
year. If the year began with Kan, the last day of the eighteenth 
month—Cumhu—would, as a matter of course, be Akbal, the last of 
the twenty. 

The five added days were named in regular order, following the close 
of the month Cumhu, and in the year beginning with Kan would be 
Kan, Chiechan, Cimi, Manik, and Lamat. The next day—Muluc— 
would begin the following year, and hence all the months of that year 


Table 3. 


Days AND MONTHS OF THE FOUR SERIES OF YEARS. 


| Num- 
Akbal Lamat Ben Ezanab | 9 bers 
column. column. column. column. le 15 4 ue 3 G7 | 8). | 20) 38) d2).t8 of the 

| 
months. 

| 
Days of 
| month. 
Akbal Lamat Ben Ezanab |1/| 8) 2) 9| 3 |10 | 4 |11 | 5 |12 | 6 j13 | 7 1 
Kan Muluc ee Cauac 2a Ya) fi iY ME A Oy (3 2 
Chicchan Oc Men Ahau SLO) 4 Le) *5 12 CHS Sh ane 9 3 
Cimi Chuen Cib Ymix 4a Soe eGo ea ek ee a Gel sil 4 
Manik Eb Caban Ik Bde) Galks eo) 8) | 2 | 9/3 /10 | 4 }11 a 
Lamat Ben Ezanab Akbal 6113} 7)/1)8)2)91)3 10) 4 11 | 5 |12 6 
Mulue Ix Cauac Kan 7/1/8/ 2] 9] 3 |10 | 4 |11 | 5 [12 | 6 {18 7 
Oc Men Ahau Chicchan | 8 | 2/9] 3/10! 4 /11 | 5 /12| 6/13 | 7] 1 8 
Chuen Cib Ymix Cimi |} 9) 3 |10 | 4 |11 | 5 12 | 6/138 | 7) 1] 8) 2 9 
Eb Caban Ik Manik HOS Aye S22 | Gas) | ATS 2a Sie 10 
Ben Ezanab Akbal Lamat (11 | 5 12) 6 113} 7/1)8) 2/9) 3 10) 4 11 
ex Cauac Kan Mulue 12|}6}138|}7/1)8)]2)9)| 3 |10| 4/11) 5 12 
Men Ahau Chiechan | Oc 13 }7)1/8}|2]94| 3/10} 4 /11 | 5/12] 6 13 
Cib Ymix Cimi Chuen }1)8}|2)]9| 3 10 | 4 |11 | 5 12 | 6 j13 | 7 14 
Caban Ik Manik | Eb 1219) 3 10) 4°11 | 5 \12) 6 13 | 7) 1) 8 15 
Ezanab Akbai Lamat | Ben }3 110} 4111 |5 12|6113!17!1)812]9 16 
Cauac Kan | Mulue ex | 4/11 | 5 |12 | 6 (13 | 7] 1 |8|2]9]|3 10 LF 
Ahau Chicchan | Oc Men 52) 6913 17 | 1 | 8; 2/]9]3 10) 4 {11 18 
Ymix Cimi Chuen Cib G13. Ta} 85) 2.1.9 | 3 }10 | 4 |11 | 5 }12 19 
Ik | Manik Eb Caban =| 7/1/8| 2) 9/3 10 | 4 |11 | 5 /12 | 6 |13 20 

| \ | | 


would begin with Muluc. Mulue being the first day, Lamat would 
necessarily be the last, and the five added days at the end of the year 
would be Mulue, Oc, Chuen, Eb, and Ben, making Ix the first of the fol- 
lowing year. Then, Ix being the first, Ben would be the last day; and 
the five added days being Ix, Men, Cib, Caban, and Ezanab, the fol- 
lowing year would begin with Cauac. Cauac in turn being the first 
day, Ezanab would be the last, and the five added days would then 
be Cauac, Ahau, Ymix, Ik, and Akbal, making Kan the first of the next 
year, thus completing the series in four years, and beginning anew 
with the fifth.* The numbering of the days, however, was peculiar, 


¥ It aS be jiacas i in mind that this description apilios Ss ae a eeel Naga calen- 
dar; and that to adapt it to what, as stated above, appears to be the rule in the 
Dresden codex, wherever Kan, Muluc, Ix, and Cauac are spoken of as dominical 
days, or first days of the month, Akbal, Lamat, Ben, and Ezanab must be substi- 
tuted. Therefore the month given would begin with 1 Akbal and end with 7 Ik. 


22 CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. bch Sl 


and did not correspond with the number in a month, but was limited 
to thirteen. To illustrate this, a list of the days of one month, num- 
bered according to this method, commencing with 1 Kan (see table 4) 
is introduced. 


Table 4. 


DayYs OF THE MONTH. 


1 Kan 6 Mulue ib lb-< 3 Cauac 
2 Chicchan 7 Oc 12 Men 4 Ahau 
3 Cimi 8 Chuen 13 Cib 5 Ymix 
4 Manik 9 Eb 1 Caban 6 Ik 

5 Lamat 10 Ben 2 Ezanab 7 Akbal. 


As will be seen on inspection of this table, the year in this instance 
commences with Kan, the other nineteen days, following in regular 
order as heretofore given, numbered consecutively from one to thirteen, - 
then commencing again with one, the month ending with 7 Akbal. 
The second month, Uo, begins with 8 Kan; the day numbered 13 is now 
Mulue, and is followed by 1 Oc, and so on to the end of the year. 
The last day of Cumhu in this case (in which the year begins with 1 
Kan) will be 9 Akbal, and the last of the five intercalary days will be 
1 Lamat; it follows, therefore, that the first day of the next year will 
be 2 Muluc. Running through this second year in the same way, com- 
meneing it with 2 Mulue, followed by 5 Oc, 4 Chuen, and so on, it is 
found that the third year will begin with 3 Ix; continuing this process, 
it may be ascertained that the fourth year will commence with 4 Cauae, 
the fifth with 5 Kan, the sixth with 6 Muluc, the seventh with 7 Ix, the 
eighth with 8 Cauac, the ninth with 9 Kan, the tenth with 10 Mulue, 
the eleventh with 11 Ix, the twelfth with 12 Cauac, the thirteenth with 
13 Kan, the fourteenth with 1 Muluc, the fifteenth with 2 Ix, the six- 
teenth with 3 Cauac, and so on. 

It is evident from this enumeration that no year, after the first, com- 
mences with a day numbered 1 until thirteen have been completed, 
thus forming a period of thirteen years, or, as it is designated, “ A week 
of years” or “Indiction.” By continuing the above process, it is found 
that no year will again commence with 1 Kan until 52 (or 13 by 4) are 
completed. 

The accompanying table for one year (table 5) shows the order of 
the numbers attached to the days. This, however, like table 5, com- 
mences with what, in the usual method of counting, is the last instead 
of the first day of the month—in this case Akbal instead of Kan is the 
initial day. 


The object in view at present is to prove from the codices the follow- 
ing points, viz, first, that the year consisted of 365 days, which number 
was made up by adding five days at the end of the eighteenth month; 
second, that the four year-series, commencing with the four different 


Sere THE CALENDAR FOR A YEAR. 23 


year-bearers, was the system followed. If these points car be demon- 
strated, the calendar system of the codices will be settled beyond dis- 
pute, and another link connecting this ancient script with the Mayas 
will be furnished. 

As the demonstration of these points depends chiefly on the series 
running through plates 46-50 of the Dresden codex, in which the 
months are introduced, thus fixing absolutely the dates, there is 


Table 5. 


THE MONTHS, DAys, AND NUMERALS FOR ONE YEAR. 


ee | & | eS ee, | aig 
8. ssi (ibaa eager PRE Fat 3 ae. = 3 8 

mow Jel lel lela lels|2/alel4lala|8)8/e| = 
ae Ss AL lip ene Cu lepton Nt een So le Aa Re Re 

| | | | j 
Days j1|2 Sie el Ge te Soe Oe 14/1 | 1918. | 14 115. |-16)) £21, 18 

a : | i roel 
Akbal eS lee Ph Bel TS eS) IS ey 1 Sek leis 
Kan Popova ae iene! Gi da el Dts St 2) 9 oS toe 
Ginechan, | 3 10°) 410) 5} 126 13 | Th,1) 8S! 21-9] 8110) 4) 41) 5 
Cimi periitleor ne | Gsietse Po iP Sots 2S | St TO) A TL Ba lates 
Manik Pate ea ee S | 2.) Oak PIO) As tt | 5 12 6 Rae 
Lamat 6113)/7)1/8|/2/9/3)10, 4/11} 5/12) 6|13| 7] 1] 8 
Mulue 7) Sh Soa) Se anOr 4 EE |B del 6 IS FT Lh eS ieee 
Oc Sra oa elon canide re | 12 | 6 ase B Lk Be) De ely SO 
Chuen pg Ae CG 0) i se Ue Ue <a ge | 
Eb PLA EL} fe Sr he Gate OD Le Pe) Buh eS Pe a Bh LO) 4k edge loth ae 
Ben 1 5 Sh GSH ee a Oo fee ic ol 0 Jan a a i IS 
ix 12° G. (lsite Bap be eS Or) Sei Teh 4s! Tl Bulb Ge Wael Pak ot 
Men i Sly Ta 0 a Ws 
Cib BS SS Oe Se aa) Taste Et Seal Ohne 
Caban 2 Oe Oe Ue Se Oe Glee el edt gal 2h OS. latOul <4 
Ezanab S10 | 21h |S (92) 6 3 PS Ee Se 2 18.9.1 31-100) 4 | ee 
Cauac Ae 2, |) 613, Th Le elle eles Oe Sr etOl | Add | Sea G 
Ahau G2 613.) Ft} 8 | 2) Oe Sakae, 2A ite | 12 | GAS 7 
Ymix ls ey Bea Ss |B) Oe St OP eae ee Dee py By 18) othe de 8 
Ik CLS. | Bot 9 eS: 10 | 4 Deere Gonna T lL. |) Sle rr 
| P | 

Akbal 10 
| Kan 11 
Intercalary days ¢< Chicchan 12 
) Cimi 13 


inserted in table 6 a continuous series of days running through the eight 
years and two months covered by one line of the series above mentioned 
—that is, one line commencing with the left column of plate 46 and 
ending with the right column of plate 50. This is given because it will 
require considerable study and familiarity with this complicated system 
to follow the discussion, if table 3 (page 21) alone is used, though it 
will be necessary to refer to that table to understand some of the state- 
ments given below. 


24 CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. 


Table 6. 


BUREAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


A CONTINUOUS SERIES OF DAYS FOR EIGHT YEARS. 


Days. Months. 
9 Lamat Pop 
10 Mulue 
11 Oc 
12 Chuen 
13 kb 
1 Ben 
2 Ix 
3 Men 
4 Cib 
5 Caban 
6 Ezanab 
7 Cauac 
8 Ahau 
9 Ymix 
10 Ik 
11 Akbal 
12 Kan 
13 Chiechan 
1 Cimi 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat Uo 
4 Mulue 
5 Oc 
6 Chuen 
TEb 
*8 Ben 
9 Ix 
10 Men 
1 Sub 
12 Caban 
13 Ezanab 
1 Canae 
2 Ahau 
3 Ymix 
4 1k 
5 Akbal 
6 Kan 
7 Chicchan 
8 Cini 
9 Manik 
10 Lamat Zip 
11 Mulue 
12 Oc 
13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
i be 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Canac 
9 Ahau 
10 Ymix 
11 Ik 
12 Akbal 
13 Kan 
1 Chicchan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat Tzoz 
5 Mulue 
6 Oc 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 


Days. Months. 
9 Ben 
10 Ix 
11 Men 
12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 


7 Kan 
8 Chicchan 
9 Cimi 
10 Manik 
11 Lamat Tzee 
12 Mulue 
13 Oc 
1 Chuen 
2 Eb 
3 Ben 
4 Ix 
5 Men 
6 Cib 
7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Cauac 
10 Ahau 
il Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 
1 Kan 
2 Chicchan 
3 Cimi 
4 Manik 
5 Lamat Xul 
6 Mulue 
7 Oc 
8 Chuen 
9 Eb 
10 Ben 
1109 be 
12 Men 
13 Cib 
1 Caban 
2 Ezanab 
3 Cauac 


8 Kan 

9 Chiechan 
10 Cimi 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat 
13 Mulue 
1 Oc 

2 Chuen 
3 Eb 

4 Ben 

5 Ix 

6 Men 

7 Cib 

8 Caban 


Yaxkin 


Days. Months. 
9 Ezanab 
10 Cauac 
11 Ahau 
12 Ymix 
13 Ik 
1 Akbal 
2 Kan 
3 Chicchan 
4 Cimi 
5 Manik 
6 Lamat Mol 
7 Mulue 
8 Oc 
9 Chuen 
10 Eb 
11 Ben 
12 Ix 
13 Men 
1 Cib 


9 Kan 
10 Chiechan 
11 Cimi 
12 Manik 
13 Lamat Chen 
1 Mulue 
2 Oc 
3 Chuen 
4 Eb 
5 Ben 
6 Ix 
7 Men 
8 Cib 
9 Caban 
10 Ezanab 
11 Cauac 
12 Ahau 
13 Ymix 
ile 
2 Akbal 
3 Kan 
4 Chiechan 
5 Cimi 
6 Manik 
7 Lamat Yax 
8 Mulue 
9 Oe 
10 Chuen 
11 Eb 
12 Ben 
Ho eiex 
1 Men 
2 Cib 
3 Caban 
4 Ezanab 
5 Cauae 
6 Ahau 
7 Imix 
8 Ik 


* 


MAYA 


THOMAS 


Days. Months. 


9 Akbal , 
10 Kan 
11 Chicchan 
12 Cimi 
13 Manik 
1 Lamat Zac 
2 Mulue 
3 Oe 
4 Chuen 
5 Eb 
6 Ben 
alex 
8 Men 
9 Cib 
10 Caban 
11 Ezanab 
12 Caunac 
13 Ahau 
1 Ymix 
21k 
3 Akbal 
4 Kan 
5 Chicchan 
6 Cimi 
7 Manik 
8 Lamat Ceh 
9 Mulue 
10 Oc 
11 Chuen 
12 Eb 
13 Ben 
iL br 
2 Men 
3 Cib 
4 Caban 
5 Ezanab 
6 Cauac 
7 Ahau 
8 Ymix 
9 Ik 
10 Akbal 
11 Kan 
12 Chicchan 
13 Cimi 
1 Manik 
2 Lamat Mac 
3 Mulue 
4 Oc 
5 Chuen 
6 Eb 
7 Ben 
8 Ix 
9 Men 
10 Cib 
11 Caban 
12 Ezanab 
13 Canac 


5 Kan 

6 Chicchan 
7 Cimi 

8 Manik 


9 Lamat Kankin 


10 Mulue 
11 Oc 
12 Chuen 


Days. Months. 
13 Eb 
1 Ben ‘ 
2.x 
3 Men 
4 Cilb 
5 Caban 
6 Ezanab 
7 Cauac 
8 Ahau 
9 Ymix 
10 Ik 
11 Akbal 
12 Kan 
13 Chiechan 
1 Cimi 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat Muan 
4 Mulue 
5 Oc 
6 Chuen 
7 Eb 
8 Ben 
9 Ix 
10 Men 
11 Cib 
12 Caban 
13 Ezanab 
1 Cauac 
2 Ahau 
3 Ymix 
41k 
5 Akbal 
6 Kan 
7 Chicchan 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 
10 Lamat Pax 
11 Mulue 
12 Oc 
13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
sid be 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauac 
9 Ahau 
10 Ymix 
11 Ik 
12 Akbal 
13 Kan 
1 Chicchan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 


4 Lamat Kayab 


5 Mulue 
6 Oc 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 
9 Ben 
10 Ix 
11 Men 
12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 
3 Ahau 


Five inter- 
calary days. 


CONTINUOUS SERIES OF DAYS. 


Days. 

4 Ymix 

5 bk 

6 Akbal 

7 Kan 

8 Chicchan 
9 Cimi 
10 Manik 
11 Lamat 
12 Mulue 
13 Oc 

1 Chuen 

2 Eb 

3 Ben 

4 Ix 

5 Men 

6 Cib 

7 Caban 

8 Ezanab 

9 Cauac 
10 Ahau 
11 Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 

1 Kan 

2 Chicchan 

3 Cimi 

4 Manik 


6 Mulue 
7 Oc 
8 Chuen 
9 Eb 


10 Ben 
3B bz 
12 Men 
13 Cib 
1 Caban 
2 Ezanab 
3 Cauac 
4 Ahau 
5 Ymix 
6 Ik 
7 Akbal 
8 Kan 
9 Chicchan 
10 Cimi 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat 
i3 Mulue 
1 Oc 
2 Chuen 
3 Eb 


[5 Lamat 
J 
\ 


4 Cib 

8 Caban 

9 Ezanab 
10 Cauae 
11 Ahau 
12 Ymix 
13 Ik 

1 Akbal 

2 Kan 

3 Chicchan 

4 Cimi 

5 Manik 

6 Lamat 


26 


Days. 
7 Mulue 
8 Oc 
9 Chuen 
10 Eb 
11 Ben 
12 Tx 
13 Men 
1 Cib 
2 Caban 
3 Ezanab 


10 Chiechan 
11 Cimi 
12 Manik 
13 Lamat 
1 Mulue 
2 Oc 
3 Chuen 
4 Eb 
5 Ben 
6 Ix 
7 Men 
8 Cib 
9 Caban 
10 Ezanab 
11 Canae 
12 Ahau 
13 Ymix 
1 Ik 
2 Akbal 
3 Kan 
4 Chicchan 
5 Cimi 
6 Manik 
7 Lamat 
8 Mulue 
9 Oc 
10 Chuen 
11 Eb 
12 Ben 
13 Ix 
1 Men 
2 Cib 
3 Caban 
4 Ezanab 


10 Kan 
11 Chicchan 
12 Cimi 
13 Manik 
1 Lamat 
2 Mulue 
3 Oc 
4 Chuen 
5 Eb 
6 Ben 
ales: 
8 Men 
9 Cib 
10 Caban 


CALENDAR OF 


Months. Days. 
11 Ezanab 
12 Cauac 
13 Ahau 

1 Ymix 
2 Ik 
3 Akbal 
4 Kan 
5 Chiechan 
6 Cimi 
7 Manik 
8 Lamat 
9 Mulue 
10 Oc 
11 Chuen 
12 Eb 
13 Ben 
1 Ik 
2 Men 
2 83 (Oil) 
4 Caban 
5 Ezanab 
6 Cauac 
7 Ahau 
8 Ymix 
9 Ik 
10 Akbal 
11 Kan 
12 Chicchan 
13 Cimi 
1 Manik 
2 Lamat 
3 Mulue 
4 Oc 
5 Chuen 
6 Eb 
7 Ben 
8 Ix 
9 Men 
10 Cib 
11 Caban 
12 Ezanab 
13 Cauac 
1 Ahau 
2 Ymix 
3 Ik 
4 Akbal 
5 Kan 
6 Chiecchan 
7 Cimi 
8 Manik 
9 Lamat 
10 Mulue 
11 Oc 
12 Chuen 
13 Eb 
1 Ben 
2 Ix 
3 Men 
4 Cib 
5 Caban 
6 Ezanab 
7 Cauae 
8 Ahau 
9 Ymix 
10 Ik 
11 Akbal 
2 Kan 
13 Chiechan 
_1 Cimi 


Zip 


Tz0z 


Tzec 


Xul 


Months. 


Yaxkin 


Mol 


Chen 


THE DRESDEN 


ok 


BUREAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


CODEX. 


Days. » Months. 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat 
4 Mulue 
5 Oc 
6 Chuen 
7 Eb 
8 Ben 
Qik 

10 Men 

11 Cib 

12 Caban 

13 Ezanab 
1 Cauac 
2 Ahau 
3 Ymix 
4 Ik 
5 Akbal 
6 Kan 
7 Chicchan 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 

10 Lamat 

11 Mulue 

12 Oc 

13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
ay ibe 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauae 
9 Ahau 

10 Ymix 

ua Sl 

12 Akbal 

13 Kan 
1 Chiechan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat 
5 Mulue 
6 Oc 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 
9 Ben 

10 Ix 

11 Men 

12 Cib 

13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 
3 Ahau 
4 Ymix 
5 Ik 
6 Akbal 
7 Kan 
8 Chicchan 
9 Cimi 

10 Manik 

11 Lamat 

12 Mulue 

13 Oc 
1 Chuen 
2 Eb 
3 Ben 
4 Ix 
5 Men 


Yax 


Zac 


Ceh 


Mae 


pecaaa | CONTINUOUS SERIES 
Days. Months. Days. Months. 
6 Cib 10 Chicchan 
7 Caban 11 Cimi 
8 Ezanab 12 Manik 
9 Cauac 13 Lamat 
10 Ahau 1 Mulue 
11 Ymix 2 Oc 
12 Ik 3 Chuen 
13 Akbal 4 Eb 
1 Kan 5 Ben Kayab 
2 Chicchan 6 Ix 
3 Cimi 7 Men 
4 Manik 8 Cib 
5 Lamat 9 Caban 
6 Mulue 10 Ezanab 
7 Oc 11 Cauac 
8 Chuen 12 Ahau 
9 Eb 13 Ymix 
10 Ben Kankin imate 
Th 6: 2 Akbal 
12 Men 3 Kan 
13 Cib 4 Chiechan 
1 Caban 5 Cimi 
2 Ezanab 6 Manik 
3 Cauac 7 Lamat 
4 Ahau 8 Mulue 
5 Ymix 9 Oc 
6 Ik 10 Chuen 
7 Akbal 11 Eb 
8 Kan 12 Ben Cumhu 
9 Chiechan 13 Ix 
10 Cimi 1 Men 
11 Manik 2 Cib 
12 Lamat 3 Caban 
13 Mulue 4 Ezanab 
1 Oc 5 Cauac 
2 Chuen 6 Ahau 
3 Eb 7 Ymix 
4 Ben Muan 8 Ik 
avi ire 9 Akbal 
6 Men 10 Kan 
7 Cib 11 Chiechan 
& Caban 12 Cimi : 
9 Ezanab 13 Manik 
10 Cauac 1 Lamat 
11 Ahau 2 Mulue 
12 Ymix 3 Oc 
13 Ik 4 Chuen 
z Akbal 5 Eb 
Kan a] 
3 Chicchan 8 Z| een 
4 Cimi ac = 
: wal 7 8 Men 
5 Manik oo } 9 Cib 
6 Lamat a iS 10 On h 
7 Mulue ms | chun 
8 Oc 11 Ezanab Pop 
9 Chuen 12 Cauac 
10 Eb 13 Ahau 
11 Ben Pax 1 Ymix 
12 Ix 2 Ik 
13 Men 3 Akbal 
1 Cib 4 Kan 
2 Caban 5 Chicchan 
3 Ezanab 6 Cimi 
4 Caunac 7 Manik 
5 Ahau 8 Lamat 
6 Ymix 9 Mulue 
71k 10 Oe 
8 Akbal 11 Chuen 
9 Kan 12 Eb 


OF DAYS. 


Days. Months. 
13 Ben 

iM be 

2 Men 

3 Cib 

4 Caban 

5 Ezanab Uo 


6 Cauac 


12 Chicchan 
13 Cimi 

1 Manik 

2 Lamat 

3 Mulue 

4 Oc 

5 Chuen 

6 Eb 

7 Ben 

8 Ix 

9 Men 

10 Cib 
11 Caban 
12 Ezanab Zip 


6 Chicchan 
7 Cimi 
8 Manik 
9 Lamat 
10 Mulue 
11 Oc 
12 Chuen 
13 Eb 
1 Ben 
2 Ix 
3 Men 
4 Cib 
5 Caban 
6 Ezanab 
7 Cauac 
8 Ahau 
9 Yinix 
10 Ik 
11 Akbal 
12 Kan 
13 Chiecchan 
1 Cimi 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat 
4 Mulue 
5 Oc 
6 Chuen 
7 Eb 
8 Ben 
9 Ix 
10 Men 
11 Cib 
12 Caban 
13 Ezanab 
1 Cauac 
2 Ahau 
3 Ymix 


Tz0z 


Tzee 


27 


28 


Days. 
4 1k 
5 Akbal 
6 Kan 
7 Chiecchan 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 
10 Lamat 
11 Mulue 
12 Oc 
13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
lex. 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauac 
9 Ahan 
10 Ymix 
11 Ik 
12 Akbal 
13 Kan 
1 Chiecechan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat 
5 Mulue 
6 Oe 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 
9 Ben 
10 Ix 
11 Men 
12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 
3 Ahau 
4 Ymix 
5 Ik 


7 Kan 
8 Chiechan 
9 Cini 
10 Manik 
11 Lamat 
12 Mulue 
13 Oe 
1 Chuen 
2 Eb 
3 Ben 
Holts 
5 Men 
6 Cib 
7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Cauac 
10 Ahau 
i vamnisc 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 
1 Kan 
2 Chiecchan 
3 Cimi 
4 Manik 
5 Lamat 
6 Mulue 
7 Oe 


CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. 


Months. 


Xul 


Yaxkin 


Mol 


Days. 
8 Chuen 
9 Eb 
10 Ben 
111A bere 
12 Men 


9 Chicchan 
10 Cimi 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat 
13 Mulue 

1 Oc 

2 Chuen 

3 Eb 

4 Ben 

by IB 

6 Men 

7 Cib 

8 Caban 

9 Ezanab 
10 Cauac 
11 Ahan 
12 Ymix 
13 Ik 

1 Akbal 

2 Kan 

3 Chicchan 

4 Cimi 

5 Manik 

6 Lamat 

7 Mulue 

8 Oc 

9 Chuen 
10 Eb 
11 Ben 
12 Ix 
13 Men 

i Ori 

2 Caban 

3 Ezanab 


9 Kan 
10 Chieehan 
11 Cimi 
12 Manik 
13 Lamat 

1 Mulue 

2 Oc 

3 Chuen 

4 Eb 

5 Ben 

6 Ix 

7 Men 

8 Cib 

9 Caban 
10 Ezanab 
11 Cauac 


Months. 


Chen 


Yax 


Zac 


Ceh 


Days. 
12 Ahau 
13 Ymix 

eb 
2 Akbal 
3 Kan 
4 Chicchan 
5 Cimi 
6 Manik 
7 Lamat 
8 Mulue 
9 Oe 
10 Chuen 
11 Eb 
12 Ben 
AS alex: 
1 Men 
2 Cib 
3 Caban 
4 Ezanab 


11 Chicchan 
12 Cimi 
13 Manik 
1 Lamat 
2 Mulue 
3 Oe 
4 Chuen 
5 Eb 
6 Ben 
VOL bs 
8 Men 
9 Cib 
10 Caban 
11 Ezanab 
12 Cauac 


5 Chiechan 
6 Cimi 
7 Manik 
8 Lamat 
9 Mulue 
10 Oc 
11 Chuen 
12 Eb 
13 Ben 
j A bse 
2 Men 
3 Cib 
4 Caban 
5 Ezanab 
6 Cauac 
7 Ahau 
‘ea Geaib-¢ 
9 Ik 
10 Akbal 
11 Kan 
12 Chicchan 
13 Cimi 
1 Manik 
2 Lamat 


(ee OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


Months. 


Mac 


Kankin 


Muan 


4 


6 Caban 


paoMas CONTINUOUS SERIES 
Days. Months. Days. Months. 
aad om ae 7 Ezanab 
4 £2 | 8 Cauac 
5 Chuen ay 5 quan : 
Eee au 
aE © | 10 Ymix 
7 Ben Ze | 111k 
8 Ix mS 
9 Men 12 Akbal Pop 
10 Cib 13 Kan 
11 Caban 1 Chicchan 
12 Ezanab Pax 2 Cimi 
13 Cauac 3 Manik 
1 Ahau 4 Lamat 
2 Ymix 5 Mulue 
3 Ik 6 Oe 
4 Akbal 7 Chuen 
5 Kan 8 Eb 
6 Chicchan 9 Ben 
7 Cimi 10 Ix 
8 Manik 11 Men 
9 Lamat 12 Cib 
10 Mulue 13 Caban 
11 Oc 1 Ezanab 
12 Chuen 2 Cauac 
13 Eb 3 Ahau 
1 Ben 4 Ymix 
2 Ix 5 Ik 
3 Men 6 Akbal Uo 
4 Cib 7 Kan 
5 Caban 8 Chicchan 
6 Ezanab Kayab 9 Cimi 
7 Cauac 10 Manik 
8 Ahau 1i Lamat 
9 Ymix 12 Mulue 
10 Ik 13 Oc 
* 11 Akbal 1 Chuen 
12 Kan 2 Eb 
13 Chicchan 3 Ben 
1 Cimi 4 Ix 
2 Manik 5 Men 
3 Lamat 6 Cib 
4 Mulue 7 Caban 
5 Oc 8 Ezanab 
6 Chuen 9 Cauac 
7 Eb 10 Ahau 
8 Ben 11 Ymix 
9 Ix 12 Ik 
10 Men 13 Akbal Zip 
11 Cib ms 1 Kan 
12 Caban 2 Chiechan 
13 Ezanab Cumhu 3 Cimi 
1 Cauac 4 Manik 
2 Ahan 5 Lamat 
3 Ymix 6 Mulue 
41k 7 Oc 
5 Akbal 8 Chuen 
6 Kan 9 Eb 
7 Chicchan 10 Ben 
8 Cimi al b: 
9 Manik 12 Men 
10 Lamat 13 Cib 
11 Mulue 1 Caban 
12 Oc 2 Ezanab 
13 Chuen 3 Cauac 
1 Eb 4 Ahan 
2 Ben 5 Ymix 
aul bs 6 Ik 
4 Men 7 Akbal Tz0z 
5 Cib 8 Kan 


9 Chicchan 


OF DAYS. 


Days. Months. 
10 Cimi 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat 
13. Mulue 
1 Oc 
2 Chuen 
3 Eb 
4 Ben 
nab 
6 Men 
7 Cib 
8 Caban 
9 Ezanab 
10 Cauac 
11 Ahau 
12 Ymix 
13 Ik 
1 Akbal 
2 Kan 
3 Chicchan 
4 Cimi 
5 Manik 
6 Lamat 
7 Mulue 
8 Oc 
9 Chuen 
10 Eb 
11 Ben 
12 Ix 
13 Men 
1 Cib 
2 Caban 
3 Ezanab 
4 Cauac 
5 Ahau 


T zee 


8 Akbal Xul 
9 Kan 
10 Chicchan 
11 Cimi 

12 Manik 
13 Lamat 

1 Mulue 

2 Oe 

3 Chuen 

4 Eb 

5 Ben 

6 Ix 

7 Men 

8 Cib 

9 Caban 
10 Ezanab 
11 Cauac 

12 Ahau 


Yaxkin 
3 Kan 
4 Chicchan 
5 Cimi 
6 Manik 
7 Lamat 
8 Mulue 
9 Oc 
10 Chuen 
il Eb 
12 Ben 
Is 


29 


30 CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. 


Days. Months. 


1 Men 
2 Cib 
3 Caban 


10 Kan 
11 Chiechan 
12 Cimi 
13 Manik 
1 Lamat 
2 Mulue 
3 Oc 
4 Chuen 
5 Eb 
6 Ben 
els 
8 Men 
9 Cib 
10 Caban 
11 Ezanab 
12 Cauac 
13 Ahan 
1 Ymix 
21k 
3 Akbal Chen 
4 Kan 
5 Chicchan 
6 Cimi 
7 Manik 
8 Lamat 
9 Mulue 
10 Oc 
11 Chuen 
12 Eb 
13 Ben 
ile b:< 
2 Men 
3 Cib 
4 Caban 
5 Ezanab 
6 Cauac 


10 Akbal Yax 
11 Kan 
12 Chicchan 
13 Cimi 

1 Manik 

2 Lamat 

3 Mulue 

4 Oc 

5 Chuen 

6 Eb 

7 Ben 

Silex 

9 Men 
10 Cib 
11 Caban 
12 Ezanab 
13 Cauac 


3 Ik 
4 Akbal Zac 


Days. 
5 Kan 
6 Chiechan 
7 Cimi 
8 Manik 
9 Lamat 
10 Mulue 
11 Oc 
12 Chuen 
13 Eb 
1 Ben 
2 Ix 
3 Men 
4 Cib 
5 Caban 
6 Ezanab 
7 Cauac 
8 Ahau 
9 Ymix 
10 Ik 
11 Akbal 
12 Kan 
13 Chicchan 
1 Cimi 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat 
4 Mulue 
5 Oe 
6 Chuen 
7 Eb 
8 Ben 
9 Ix 
10 Men 
11 Cib 
12 Caban 
13 Ezanab 
1 Cauac 


6 Kan 
7 Chicchap 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 
10 Lamat 
11 Mulue 
12 Oc 
13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
3 Ix 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauac 
9 Ahau 
10 Ymix 
Tale ke 
12 Akbal 
13 Kan 
1 Chiecchan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat 
5 Muluc 
6 Oc 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 


Months. 


Ceh 


Mac 


Kankin 


Days. Months. 
9 Ben 
10 Ix 
11 Men 
12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 
3 Ahau 
4 Ymix 
5 Ik 
6 Akbal Muan 
7 Kan 
8 Chiechan 
9 Cimi 
10 Manik 
11 Lamat 
12 Mulue 
TiOe 
1 Chuen 
2 Eb 
3 Ben 
ASG 
5 Men 
6 Cib 
7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Cauac 
10 Ahau 
11 Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal Pax 
1 Kan 
2 Chicchan 
3 Cimi 
4 Manik 
5 Lamat 
6 Mulue 
7 Oc 
8 Chuen 
9 Eb 
10 Ben 
Thy be 
12 Men 
13 Cib 
1 Caban 
2 Ezanab 
3 Cauac 
4 Ahan 
5 Ymix 
6 Ik 
7 Akbal 
8 Kan 
9 Chiechan 
10 Cimi 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat 
18 Mulue 
1 Oc 
2 Chuen 
3 Eb 
4 Ben 
5 Ix 
6 Men 
7 Cib 
8 Caban 
9 Ezanab 
10 Cauac 
11 Ahau 
12 Ymix 


Kayab 


‘BUREAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


ee 


MAYA 
THOMAS 


Days. 
13 Ik 
1 Akbal 
2 Kan 
3 Chicchan 
4 Cimi 
5 Manik 
6 Lamat 
7 Mulue 
8 Oc 
9 Chuen 
10 Eb 
11 Ben 
12 Ix 
13 Men 
1 Cib 
2 Caban 
3 Ezanab 
4 Cauac 
5 Ahau 
6 Ymix 
T1k 


8 Akbal 

9 Kan 

10 Chiechan 
11 Cimi 
12 Manik 


Five inter- 
calary days. 


13 Lamat Pop 


1 Mulue 

2 Oc 

3 Chuen 

4 Eb 

5 Ben 

6 Ix 

7 Men 

8 Cib 

9 Caban 
10 Ezanab 
11 Cauac 


3 Kan 
4 Chiechan 
5 Cimi 
6 Manik 
7 Lamat Uo 
8 Muluec 
9 Oc 
10 Chuen 
11 Eb 
12 Ben 
iS iex: 
1 Men 
2 Cib 
3 Caban 
4 Ezanab 


10 Kan 

11 Chiechan 

12 Cimi 

13 Manik 
1Lamat Zip 
2 Mulue 


Months. 


Cumhu 


Days. 

3 Oc 

4 Chuen 

5 Eb 

6 Ben 

Tix 

8 Men 

9 Cib 
10 Caban 
11 Ezanab 


5 Chiecchan 
6 Cimi 
7 Manik 
8 Lamat © Tz0z 
9 Mulue 
10 Oc 
11 Chien 
12 Eb 
13 Ben 
gM bye 
2 Men 
3 Cib 
4 Caban 
5 Ezanab 
6 Cauac 


11 Kan 
12 Chiechan 
13 Cimi 

1 Manik 

2 Lamat Tzec 
3 Mulue 

4 Oc 

5 Chuen 

6 Eb 

7 Ben 

8 Ix 

9 Men 
10 Cib 
11 Caban 
12 Ezanab 
13 Cauac 


6 Chicchan 
7 Cimi 
8 Manik 
9 Lamat Xul 
10 Mulue 
11 Oc 
12 Chuen 
13 Eb 
1 Ben 
2 Ix 
3 Men . 
4 Cib 
5 Caban 
6 Ezanab 


Months. 


CONTINUOUS SERIES OF DAYS. 


Days. Months. 
7 Cauac 
8 Ahau 
9 Ymix 

10 Ik 

11 Akbal 

12 Kan 

13 Chicchan 
i Cm 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat 
4 Muluc 
5 Oc 
6 Chuen 
7 Eb 
8 Ben 
9 Ix 

10 Men 

11 Cib 

12 Caban 

13 Ezanab 
1 Cauac 


Yaxkin 


7 Chicchan 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 
10 Lamat Mol 
11 Mulue 
12 Oc 
13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
aS 1B 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauac 
9 Ahau 
10 Ymix 
11 Ik 
12 Akbal 
13 Kan 
1 Chicchan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat 
5 Mulue 
6 Oc 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 
9 Ben 
10 Ix 
11 Men 
12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 


Chen 


7 Kan 
8 Chiechan 
9 Cimi 

10 Manik 


31 


32 


Days. Months. 


11 Lamat Yax 
12 Mulue 
13 Oe 
1 Chuen 
2 Eb 
3 Ben 
4 Ix 
5 Men 
6 Cib 
7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Cauac 
10 Ahau 
11 Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 
1 Kan 
2 Chicchan 
3 Cimi 
4 Manik 
5 Lamat Zac 
6 Mulue 
7 Oc 
8 Chuen 
9 Eb 
10 Ben 
i Wl be 
12 Men 
13 Cib 
1 Caban 
2 Ezanab 


7 Akbal 
8 Kan 
9 Chicchan 
10 Cini 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat Ceh 
13 Mulue 
1 Oc 
2 Chuen 
3 Eb 
4 Ben 
5 Ix 
6 Men 
7 Cib 
8 Caban 
9 Ezanab 
10 Cauac 
11 Ahau 
12 Ymix 
13 Ik 
1 Akbal 
2 Kan 
3 Chicchan 
4 Cimi 
5 Manik 
6 Lamat Mac 
7 Mulue 


13 Men 


CALENDAR OF 


THE DRESDEN CODEX. pat 
Days. Days. Months. 
MCip 4 Kan 
2 Caban 5 Chicchan 
3 Ezanab 6 Cimi 
4 Cauac 7 Manik 
5 Ahau 8 Lamat Kayab 
6 Ymix 9 Mulue 
Ak 10 Oc 
8 Akbal 11 Chuen 
9 Kan 12 Eb 
10 Chicchan 13 Ben 
11 Cimi | b:< 
12 Manik 2 Men 
13 Lamat 3 Cib 
1 Mulue 4 Caban 
2 Oc 5 Ezanab 
3 Chuen 6 Cauae 
4 Eb 7 Ahau ' 
5 Ben 8 Ymix 
6 Ix 9 Ik 
7 Men 10 Akbal 
8 Cib 11 Kan 
9 Caban 12 Chicchan 
10 Ezanab 13 Cimi 
11 Cauac 1 Manik 
12 Ahau 2 Lamat Cumhu 
13 Ymix 3 Mulue 
11k 4 Oc 
2 Akbal 5 Chuen 
3 Kan 6 Eb 
4 Chiechan 7 Ben 
5 Cimi 8 Ix 
6 Manik 9 Men 
7 Lamat 10 Cib 
8 Mulue 11 Caban 
9 Oc 12 Ezanab 
10 Chuen 13 Cauac 
11 Eb 1 Ahau 
12 Ben 2 Ymix 
elex 3 Ik 
1 Men 4 Akbal 
2 Cib 5 Kan 
3 Caban 6 Chiechan 
4 Ezanab 7 Cimi 
5 Canae , 8 Manik 
: ae s Be f 9 Lamat 
stk = | 10 Mulue 
9 Akbal ip chp: 
10 Kan PS 12 Chuen 
11 Chicchan mS | 13 Eb 
2 Cimi 1 Ben pop 
13 Manik 2. Ix 
1 Lamat 3 Men 
2 Mulue 4 Cib 
3 Oc 5 Caban 
4 Chuen 6 Ezanab 
5 Eb 7 Cauac 
6 Ben 8 Ahau 
7B 9 Ymix 
8 Men 10 Ik 
9 Cib 11 Akbal 
10 Caban 12 Kan 
11 Ezanab 13 Chiechan 
12 Cauac 1 Cimi 
13 Ahau 2 Manik 
1 Ymix 3 Lamat 
2 1k 4 Mulue 
3 Akbal 5 Oe 


MAYA 
THOMAS 


Days. 

6 Chuen 
7TEb 
8 Ben Uo 
9 Ix 

10 Men 

11 Cib 

12 Caban 

13 Ezanab 


7 Chiechan 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 
10 Lamat 
11 Mulue 
12 Oc 
13 Chuen 
1Eb 
2 Ben Zip 
ail 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Cauac 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauae 
9 Ahau 
10 Ymix 
11 1k 
12 Akbal 
13 Kan 
1 Chicechan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat 
5 Mulue 
6 Oc 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 
9 Ben Tz0z 
10 Ix 
11 Men 
12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 
3 Ahau 
4 Ymix 
5 Ik 
6 Akbal 
7 Kan 
8 Chicchan 
9 Cimi 
10 Manik 
11 Lamat 
12 Mulue 
13 Oc 
1 Chuen 
2Eb 
3 Ben Tzee 
4 Ix 
5 Men 
6 Cib 
7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Cauac 


Months. 


CONTINUOUS SERIES OF 


Days. Months. 
10 Ahau 
11 Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 
1 Kan 
2 Chicchan 
3 Cimi 
4 Manik 
5 Lamat 
6 Muluc 
7 Oc 
8 Chuen 
9 Eb 
10 Ben Xul 
11 Ix 
12 Men 
13 Cib 
1 Caban 
2 Ezanab 
3 Cauac 
4 Ahau 
5 Ymix 
6 1k 
7 Akbal 
8 Kan 
9 Chicehan 
10 Cimi 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat 
13 Mulue 
1 Oc 
2 Chuen 
3 Eb 
4 Ben 
Gy be 
6 Men 
TCib 
8 Caban 
9 Ezanab 
10 Cauac 
11 Abau 
12 Ymix 
13 Ik 
1 Akbal 
2 Kan 
3 Chiechan 
4 Cimi 
5 Manik 
6 Lamat 
7 Mulue 
& Oc 
9 Chuen 
10 Eb 
11 Ben Mol 
13 Ix: 
13 Men 
1 Cib 
2 Caban 
3 Ezanab 
4 Cauac 


Yaxkin 


9 Kan 
10 Chicchan 
11 Cimi 
12 Manik 
13 Lamat 


BULL. S=19——3 


DAYS. 


Days. 

1 Mulue 
2 Oc 

3 Chuen 
4 Eb 

5 Ben 

6 Ix 

7 Men 

8 Cib 

9 Caban 
10 Ezanab 
11 Cauac 
12 Ahau 
13 Ymix 
a Se 


3 Kan 
4 Chicchan 
5 Cimi 
6 Manik 
7 Lamat 
8 Mulue 
9 Oc 
10 Chuen 
11 Eb 
12 Ben 
VEYA bre 
1 Men 
2 Cib 
3 Caban 
4 Ezanab 
5 Cauac 


10 Kan 
11 Chiechan 
12 Cimi 
13 Manik 
1 Lamat 
2 Mulue 
3 O¢e 
4 Chuen 
5 Eb 
6 Ben 
Onlex: 
38 Men 
9 Cib 
10 Caban 
11 Ezanab 
12 Cauac 
13 Ahau 
1 Ymix 
ie 
a Akbal 
4 Kan 
5 Chicchan 
6 Cimi 
7 Manik 
8 Lamat 
9 Mulue 
10 Oe 
11 Chuen 
12 Eb 
13 Ben 
iss 
2 Men 
3 Cib 
4 Caban 


Months. 


Chen 


Yax 


Zac 


Ceh 


33 


34 


Days. Months. 
5 Ezanab 
6 Cauac 
7 Ahau 
8 Ymix 
O1k 

10 Akbal 

11 Kan 

12 Chiechan 

13 Cimi 
1 Manik 
2 Lamat 
3 Mulue 
40c¢ 
5 Chuen 
6 Eb 
7 Ben 
Six 
9 Men 

10 Cib 

11 Caban 

12 Ezanab 


Mace 


5 Kan 
6 Chicchan 
7 Cimi 
8 Manik 
9 Lamat 
10 Mulue 
11 Oc 
12 Chuen 
13 Eb 
1 Ben 
2 Ix 
3 Men 
4 Cib 
5 Caban 
6Ezanab 
7 Cauac 
8 Ahau 
9 Ymix 
10 Ik 
11 Akbal 
12 Kan 
13 Chicckhan 
1 Cini 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat 
4 Mulue 
5 Oc 
6 Chuen 
7Eb 
8 Ben 
9 Ix 
10 Men 
11 Cib 
12 Caban 
13 Ezanab 
1 Cauac 
2 Ahau 
3 Ymix 
41k 
5 Akbal 
6 Kan 


Kankin 


Miuan 


Days. 
7 Chiecchan 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 
10 Lamat 
11 Mulue 
12 Oc 
13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
By bie 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Canac 
9 Ahau 
10 Ymix 
11 Ik 
12 Akbal 
13 Kan 
1 Chiechan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat 
5 Mulue 
6 Oc 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 
9 Ben 
10 Ix 
11 Men 
12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 
3 Ahau 
4 Ymix 
5 Ik 
6 Akbal 
7 Kan 
8 Chiechan 
9 Cimi 
10 Manik 
11 Lamat 
12 Mulue 
13 Oe 
1 Chuen 
2 Eb 


7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Cauae 
10 Ahau 
11 Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 
1 Kan 

2 Chicchan 
3 Cimi 

4 Manik 
5 Lamat 
6 Muluc 
7 Oc 

8 Chuen 


Months. 


Pax 


Kayab 


Cumhu 


Five inter- 
calary days. 


CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. 


ac es ween Nes eran 


BUREAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


Days. Months. 
9 Eb 


9 Chicchan 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat 
13 Mulue 
1 Oe 
2 Chuen 
3 Eb 
4 Ben 
5 Ix 
6 Men 
7 Cib 
8 Caban 
9 Ezanab 
10 Cauac 
11 Ahau 
12 Ymix 
13 Ik 
1 Akbal 
2 Kan 
8 Chicchan 
4 Cimi 
5 Manik 
6 Lamat 
7 Mulue 
8 Oc 
9 Chuen 
10 Eb 
11 Ben 
i PAI be 
13 Men 
1 Cib 
2 Caban 
3 Ezanab 
4 Cauac 
5 Ahau 
6 Ymix 
71k 
8 Akbal 
9 Kan 
10 Chicechan 
11 Cimi 
12 Manik 
*13 Lamat 
1 Mulue 
2 Oe 
3 Chuen 
4 Eb 
5 Ben 
6 Ix 
7 Men 
8 Cib 
9 Caban 


Uo 


Zip 


7" — 


: 


MAYA 
THOMAS 


Months. 
Tz0z 


Days. 
10 Ezanab 


3 Kan 
4 Chicchan 
5 Cimi 
6 Manik 
7 Lamat 
8 Mulue 
9 Oc 
10 Chuen 
11 Eb 
12 Ben 
es) ox 
1 Men 
2 Cib 
3 Caban 


4 Ezanab Tzee 


10 Kan 
11 Chicchan 
12 Cimi 
13 Manik 
1 Lamat 
2 Mulue 
3 Oc 
4 Chuen 
5 Eb 
6 Ben 
Tox: 
8 Men 
9 Cib 
10 Caban 
11 Ezanab Xul 


5 Chiecchan 
6 Cimi 
7 Manik 
8 Lamat 
9 Muluce 
10 Oc 
11 Chuen 
12 Eb 
13 Ben 
il bee 
2 Meu 
BOn 
4 Caban 


5 Ezanab Yaxkin 


11 Kan 
12 Chicchan 
13 Cimi 


CONTINUOUS SERIES 


Days. 
1 Manik 
2 Lamat 
3 Mulue 
40O¢e¢ 
5 Chuen 
6 Eb 
7 Ben 
8 Ix 
9 Men 
10 Cib 
11 Caban 
12 Ezanab Mol 
13 Cauac 


5 Kan 
6 Chicchan 
7 Cimi 
8 Manik 
9 Lamat 
10 Mulue 
11 O¢ 
12 Chuen 
13 Eb 
1 Ben 
2 Ix 
3 Men 
4 Cib 
5 Caban 
6 Ezanab 
7 Cauac 
8 Ahan 
9 Ymix 
10 Ik 
11 Akbal 
12 Kan 
13 Chiechan 
1 Cimi 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat 
4 Mulue 
5 Oe 
6 Chuen 
7 Eb 
8 Ben 
9 Ix 
10 Men 
11 Cib 
12 Caban 
13 Ezanab Wane 
1 Cauac 
2 Ahau 
3 Ymix 
4 1k 
5 Akbal 
6 Kan 
7 Chicchan 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 
10 Lamat 
11 Mulue 
12 Oc 
13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
3 ix 
4 Men 


Chen 


Months. 


OF DAYS. 


Days. 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauac 
9 Ahau 
10 Ymix 
11 Ik 
12 Akbal 
13 Kan 
1 Chicchan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat 
5 Muluc 
6 Oc 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 
9 Ben 
10 Ix 
11 Men 
12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 
3 Ahau 
4 Ymix 
5 Ik 
6 Akbal 
7 Kan 
8 Chicchan 
9 Cimi 
10 Manik 
11 Lamat 
12 Mulue 
13 Oc 
1 Chuen 
2 Eb 
3 Ben 
4 Ix 
5 Men 
6 Cib 
7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Cauac 
10 Ahau 
11 Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 
1 Kan 
2 Chicchan 
3 Cini 
4 Manik 
5 Lamat 
6 Mulue 
7 Oc 
8 Chuen 
9 Eb 
10 Ben 
Mix: 
12 Men 
13 Cib 
1 Caban 
2 Ezanab 
3 Cauac 
4 Ahau 
5 Ymix 
6 Ik 
7 Akbal 
8 Kan 


Months. 


Zac 


Ceh 


Mac 


Kankin 


36 CALENDAR OF 
Days. Months. Days. 
9 Chieechan 1 x 
10 Cini 1 Men 
11 Manik 2 Cib 
12 Lamat 3 Caban 
13 Mulue 4 Ezanab 
1 Oc 5 Cauac 
2 Chuen 6 Ahau 
gEb 7 Ymix 
4 Ben 8 Ik 
5 Ix 9 Akbal 
6 Men 10 Kan 
7 Cib 11 Chicechan 
8 Caban 12 Cimi 
§ Ezanab Muan 13 Manik 
10 Canac 1 Lamat 
11 Ahau 2 Muluc 
12 Yinix 3 Oe 
13 Ik 4 Chuen 
1 Akbal 5 Eb 
2 Kan 6 Ben 
3 Chicchan Tmlox: 
4 Cini 8 Men 
5 Manik 9 Cib 
6 Lamat 10 Caban 
jee «© (11 Ezanab 
8 Oc = = | 12 Canac 
9 Chuen uShS 13 Al 
10 Eb eee 
OF Yai 
11 Ben eal 5 Ik 
12 Ix aS | > 
13 Men 3 Akbal 
1 Cib 4 Kan 
2? Caban 5 Chiechan 
3 Ezanab Pax 6 Cimi 
4 Cauac 7 Manik 
5 Ahau 8 Lamat 
6 Ymix 9 Mulue 
71k 10 Oc 
8 Akbal 11 Chuen 
9 Kan 12 Eb 
10 Chicchan 13 Ben 
11 Cimi lex: 
12 Manik 2 Men 
13 Lamat 3 Cib 
1 Mulue 4 Caban 
2:0c¢ 5 Ezanab 
3 Chuen 6 Cauac 
4Eb 7 Ahau 
5 Ben 8 Ymix 
6 Ix 9 Ik 
7 Men 10 Akbal 
& Cib 11 Kan 
9 Caban 12 Chicchan 
10 Ezanab Kayab 13 Cimi 


11 Canac 
12 Ahau 


3 Kan 

4 Chiechan 
5 Cini 

6 Manik 

7 Lamat 

8 Mulue 

9 Oc 
10 Chuen 
11 Eb 
12 Ben 


1 Manik 
*2 Lamat 
3 Mulue 
4 Oc 
5 Chuen 
6 Eb 
7 Ben 
8 Ix 
9 Men 
*10 Cib 
11 Caban 
12 Ezanab 
13 Cauac 
1 Ahan 
2 Ymix 


THE DRESDEN 


Months. 


Cumbhu 


Pop 


Uo 


BUREAU OF 


CODEX. ETHNOLOGY 


Days. Months. 
3 Ik 
4 Akbal Zip 
5 Kan 
6 Chicchan 
7 Cimi 
8 Manik 
9 Lamat 
10 Muluce 
11 Oc 
12 Chuen 
13 Eb 
1 Ben 
Doles 
3 Men \ 
4 Cib 
5 Caban 
6 Ezanab 
7 Cauac 
8 Ahau 
9 Ymix 
10 Ik 
11 Akbal 
12 Kan 
13 Chiechan 
1 Cimi 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat 
4 Mulue 
5 Oc 
6 Chuen 
7 Eb 
8 Ben 
9 Ix 
10 Men 
11 Cib 
12 Caban 
13 Ezanab 
1 Cauac 
2 Ahau 
3 Ymix 
4 Ik 
5 Akbal 
6 Kan 
7 Chicchan 
8 Cini 
9 Manik 
10 Lamat 
11 Mulue 
12 Oc 
13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
By Ibe 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauac 
9 Ahau 
10 Ymix 
11 Ik 
12 Akbal 
13 Kan 
1 Chiechan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat 
5 Mulue 
6 Oc 


Tzoz 


Tzee 


Xul 


MAYA 
THOMAS 


Days. 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 
9 Ben 
10 Ix 
11 Men 
12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Canac 
3 Ahau 
4 Ymix 
aya te 
6 Akbal 
7 Kan 
8 Chiechan 
9 Cimi 
10 Manik 
11 Lamat 
12 Mulue 
13 Oe 
1 Chuen 


6 Cib 
7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Cauac 
10 Ahan 
11 Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 
1 Kan 
2 Chiechan 
3 Cimi 
4 Manik 
5 Lamat 
6 Mulue 
7 Oc 
8 Chuen 
9 Eb 
10 Ben 
1H be 
12 Men 
13 Cib 
1 Caban 
2 Ezanab 
3 Cauac 
4 Ahau 
5 Ymix 


9 Chieehan 
10 Cimi 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat 
13 Mulue 

10¢e 

2 Chuen 

3 Eb 

4 Ben 

5 Ix 

6 Men 

7 Cib 

8 Caban 

9 Ezanab 
10 Cauac 


Months. 


Yaxkin 


Mol 


Chen 


CONTINUOUS SERIES 


Days. 
11 Ahau 
12 Ymix 
13 Ik 

1 Akbal Yax 
2 Kan 
3 Chicchan 
4 Cimi 
5 Manik 
6 Lamat 
7 Mulue 
8 Oc 
9 Chuen 
10 Eb 
11 Ben 
12 Ix 
13 Men 
1 Cib 
2 Caban 
3 Ezanab 
4 Cauae 
5 Ahau 
6 Ymix 
71k 
8 Akbal Zae 
9 Kan 
10 Chiechan 
11 Cimi 
12 Manik 
13 Lamat 
1 Mulue 
2 Oc 
3 Chuen 
4 Eb 
5 Ben 
6 Ix 
7 Men 
8 Cib 
9 Caban 
10 Ezanab 
11 Cauac 


3 Kan 

4 Chiechan 
5 Cimi 

6 Manik 

7 Lamat 

8 Mulue 

9 Oe 
10 Chuen 
11 Eb 
12 Ben 
13 Ix 

1 Men 

2 Cib 

3 Caban 

4 Ezanab 
5 Cauae 

6 Ahau 

7 Ymix 

8 Ik 

9 Akbal Mae 
10 Kan 

11 Chicchan 
12 Cimi 
13 Manik 

1 Lamat 


Months. 


OF 


DAYS. 


Days. 
2 Mulue 
3 Oc 
4 Chuen 
5 Eb 
6 Ben 
(fbr 
8 Men 
9 Cib 
10 Caban 
11 Ezanab 
12 Cauae 
13 Ahau 
1 Ymix 
2 Ik 
3 Akbal 
4 Kan 
5 Chiechan 
6 Cimi 
7 Manik 
8 Lamat 
9 Mulue 
10 Oc 
11 Chuen 
12 Eb 
13 Ben 
L Tx 
2 Men 
3 Cib 
4 Caban 
5 Ezanab 
6 Cauac 
7 Ahau 
8 Ymix 
9 Ik 
10 Akbal 
11 Kan 
12 Chiechan 
13 Cimi 
1 Manik 
2 Lamat 
3 Mulue 
4 O¢ 
5 Chuen 
6 Eb 
7 Ben 
8 Ix 
9 Men 
10 Cib 
11 Caban 
12 Ezanab 
13 Cauac 


Muan 


4 Akbal Pax 
5 Kan 

6 Chiechan 

7 Cimi 

8 Manik 

9 Lamat 
10 Mulue 
11 Oe 
12 Chuen 

13 Eb 


5 Caban 


Months. 


Kankin 


37 


38 XALENDAR OF THE 


Days. Months. 
6 Ezanab 
7 Cauac 
8 Ahau 
9 Ymix 

10 Ik 

11 Akbal 

12 Kan 

13 Chicchan 
1 Cimi 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat 
4 Mulue 
5 Oc 
6 Chuen 
7 Eb 
8 Ben 
9 Ix 

10 Men 

11 Cib 

12 Caban 

13 Ezanab 
1 Cauac 
2 Ahau 
3 Ymix 
41k 
5 Akbal 
6 Kan 
7 Chicchan 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 

10 Lamat 

11 Mulue 

12 Oc 

13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
33 ibs 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauac 
9 Ahan 

10 Ymix 

11 Ik 


12 Akbal 
13 Kan 


Kayab 


Cumhu 


Five inter- 
calary days. 


oe 
= | 
= 
> | 
Me 


12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 
3 Ahau 
4 Ymix 
5 Ik 
6 Akbal 
7 Kan 
8 Chiechan 


Days. 
9 Cimi 
10 Manik 
11 Lamat 
12 Mulue 
13 Oc 
1 Chuen 
2 Eb 
3 Ben 
ATK 
5 Men 
6 Cib 
7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Cauac 
10 Ahau 
11 Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 
1 Kan 
2 Chicchan 
3 Cimi 
4 Manik 
5 Lamat 
6 Mulue 
7 Oe 
8 Chuen 
9 Eb 
10 Ben 
11 Ix 
12 Men 


9 Chiechan 
10 Cimi 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat 
13 Mulue 

1 Oc 

2 Chuen 

3 Eb 

4 Ben 

5) | Bre 

6 Men 

7 Cib 

8 Caban 

9 Ezanab 
10 Cauac 
11 Ahau 
12 Ymix 
13 Ik 

1 Akbal 

2 Kan 

3 Chiechan 

4 Cimi 

5 Manik 

6 Lamat 

7 Muluce 

8 Oc 

9 Chuen 
10 Eb 
11 Ben 
12 Ix 


Months. 


Uo 


Zip 


Tzoz 


Tzec 


DRESDEN CODEX. 


BUREAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


Days. Months. 
13 Men 

1 Cib 

2 Caban 

3 Ezanab 

4 Cauac 

5 Ahan 


10 Chicchan 
11 Cimi 
12 Manik 
13 Lamat Xul 
1 Mulue 
2 Oe 
3 Chuen 
4 Eb 
5 Ben 
6 Ix 
7 Men 
8 Cib 
9 Caban 
10 Ezanab 
11 Cauac 
12 Ahau 
13 Ymix 
11k 
2 Akbal 
3 Kan 
4 Chiechan 
5 Cimi 
6 Manik 
7 Lamat 
8 Mulue 
9 Oe 
10 Chuen 
11 Eb 
12 Ben 
13 Ix 
1 Men 
2 Cib 
3 Caban 
4 Ezanab 
5 Cauac 
6 Ahau 
7 Ymix 
8 Ik 
9 Akbal 
10 Kan 
11 Chicchan 
12 Cimi 
13 Manik 
1 Lamat Mol 
2 Mulue 
3 Oe 
4 Chuen 
5 Eb 
6 Ben 
fil B< 
8 Men 
9 Cib 
10 Caban 
11 Ezanab 
12 Cauac 
13 Ahua 
Tyan 
21k 
3 Akbal 


Yaxkin 


MAYA 
THOMAS 


Days. Months. 
4 Kan 
5 Chicehan 
§ Cimi 
7 Manik 
8 Lamat 
9 Mulue 
10 Oc 
11 Chuen 
12 Eb 
13 Ben 
sx: 
2 Men 
3 Cib 
4 Caban 
5 Ezanab 
6 Cauac 
7 Ahau 
8 Ymix 
91k 
10 Akbal 
11 Kan 
12 Chiecchan 
13 Cimi 
1 Manik 
2 Lamat 
3 Mulue 
4 Oc 
5 Chuen 
6 Eb 
7 Ben 
8 Ix 
9 Men 
10 Cib 
11 Caban 
12 Ezanab 
13 Cauae 


Chen 


Yax 


6 Chiechan 
7 Cimi 
8 Manik 
9 Lamat 
10 Mulue 
11 Oc 
12 Chuen 
13 Eb 
1 Ben 
2Ix 
3 Men 
4 Cib 
5 Caban 
6 Ezanab 
7 Cauaec 
8 Ahau 
9 Ymix 
10 Ik 
11 Akbal 
12 Kan 
13 Chiechan 
1 Cimi 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat 
4 Mulue 
5 Oc 
6 Chuen 


Zac 


Ceh 


CONTINUOUS SERIES 


Days. Months. 
7 Eb 
8 Ben 
9 Ix 
10 Men 
11 Cib 
12 Caban 
13 Ezanab 
1 Cauac 
2 Ahau 
3 Ymix 
41k 
5 Akbal 
6 Kan 
7 Chicchan 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 
10 Lamat 
11 Mulue 
12 Oc 
13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
Bibs 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauac 
9 Ahau 
10 Ymix 
11 Ik 
12 Akbal 
13 Kan 
1 Chiechan 
2 Cimi 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat 
5 Mulue 
6 Oe 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 
9 Ben 
10 Ix 
11 Men 
12 Cib 
13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauac 
3 Ahau 
4 Ymix 
5 Ik 
6 Akbal 
7 Kan 
8 Chiechan 
9 Cimi 
10 Manik 
11 Lamat 
12 Mulue 
13 Oc 
1 Chuen 
2 Eb 
3 Ben 
4 Ix 
5 Men 
6 Cib 
7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Cauac 


Mae 


[End] 


Kankin 


Muan 


OF 


DAYS. 


Days. 
10 Ahau 
11 Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 

1 Kan 
2 Chiechan 
3 Cimi 
4 Manik 
5 Lamat 
6 Mulue 
7 Oc 
8 Chuen 
9 Eb 
10 Ben 
dm! b:< 
12 Men 
13 Cib 
1 Caban 
2 Ezanab 
3 Cauac 
4 Ahau 
5 Ymix 
6 Ik 
7 Akbal 
8 Kan 
9 Chiechan 
10 Cimi 
11 Manik 
12 Lamat 
13 Mulue 
1 Oc 
2 Chuen 
3 Eb 
4 Ben 
yA Br 
6 Men 
7 Cib 
8 Caban 
9 Ezanab 
10 Cauae 
11 Ahau 
12 Ymix 
13 Ik 
1 Akbal 
2 Kan 
3 Chiechan 
4 Cimi 
5 Manik 
6 Lamat 
7 Mulue 
8 Oc 
9 Chnen 
10 Eb 
11 Ben 
12 Ix 
13 Men 
Erb 
2 Caban 
3 Ezanab 
4 Canac 


8 Akbal 

9 Kan 
10 Chiechan 
11 Cimi 

12 Manik 


Months. 


Pax 


Kayab 


Cumhu 


40) 


Five inter- 
ealary days. 


J 
| 
| 
{ 


CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. 


Days. 


13 Lamat 
1 Mulue 
2 Oc 
3 Chuen 
4 Eb 


5 Ben 
6 Ix 
7 Men 
8 Cib 
9 Caban 
10 Ezanab 
11 Cauae 
12 Ahau 
13 Ymix 
WAN 
2 Akbal 
3 Kan 
4 Chiechan 
5 Cimi 
6 Manik 
7 Lamat 
8 Mulue 
9 Oe 
16 Chuen 
11 Eb 
12 Ben 
13 Tx 
1 Men 
2 Cib 
3 Caban 
4 Ezanab 
5 Cauae 
6 Ahau 
7 Ymix 
total ee 
9 Akbal 
10 Kan 
11 Chiechan 
12 Cimi 
13 Manik 
1 Lamat 
2 Mulue 
3 Oc 
4 Chuen 
5 Eb 
6 Ben 
T Ix 
8 Men 
9 Cib 
10 Caban 
11 Ezanab 
12 Cauac 
13 Ahau 
1 Ymix 
2 Ik 
3 Akbal 
4 Kan 
5 Chiechan 
6 Cimi 
7 Manik 
8 Lamat 
9 Mulue 
10 Oc 
11 Chuen 
12 Eb 


Pop 


Uo 


Zip 


Months. 


Days. 
ola 
4 Caban 
5 Ezanab 
6 Cauae 
7 Ahau 
8 Ymix 
9 Ik 
10 Akbal 
11 Kan 
12 Chicchan 
13 Cimi 
1 Manik 
2 Lamat 
3 Mulue 
4 Oc 
5 Chuen 
6 Eb 
7 Ben 
8 Ix 
9 Men 
10 Cib 
11 Caban 
12 Ezanab 
13 Canac 
1 Ahan 
2 Ymix 
3 Ik 
4 Akbal 
5 Kan 
6 Chiechan 
7 Cimi 
8 Manik 
9 Lamat 
10 Mulue 
11 Oc 
12 Chuen 
13 Eb 
1 Ben 
lex 
3 Men 
4 Cib 
5 Caban 
6 Ezanab 
7 Cauae 
8 Ahau 
9 Ymix 
10 Ik 
11 Akbal 
12 Kan 
13 Chiechan 
1 Cimi 
2 Manik 
3 Lamat 
4 Mulue 
5 Oc 
6 Chuen 
7 Eb 
8 Ben 
9 Ix 
10 Men 
seb lCGnils) 

12 Caban 
13 Ezanab 
1 Cauae 
2 Ahau 
3 Ymix 

41k 
5 Akbal 
6 Kan 


Months. 


Tzee 


Xul 


Yaxkin 


BUREAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


Days. Months. 
7 Chiechan 
8 Cimi 
9 Manik 

10 Lamat 

11 Mulue 

12 Oe 

13 Chuen 
1 Eb 
2 Ben 
3 Ix 
4 Men 
5 Cib 
6 Caban 
7 Ezanab 
8 Cauac 
9 Ahau 

10 Ymix 

Sk 

12 Akbal 

13 Kan 
1 Chieehan 
2 Cini 
3 Manik 
4 Lamat 
5 Mulue 
6 Oc 
7 Chuen 
8 Eb 
9 Ben 

10 Ix 

11 Men 

12 Cib 

13 Caban 
1 Ezanab 
2 Cauae 
3 Ahau 
4 Yinix 
5 Ik 
6 Akbal 
7 Kan 
8 Chieechan 
9 Cimi 

10 Manik 

11 Lamat 

12 Mulue 

13 Oc 
1 Chuen 
2 Eb 


Mol 


Chen 


Yax 


7 Caban 
8 Ezanab 
9 Canae 
10 Ahau 
11 Ymix 
12 Ik 
13 Akbal 
1 Kan 

2 Chiechan 
3 Cimi 

4 Manik 
5 Lamat 
6 Mulue 
7 Oc 

8 Chuen 
9 Eb 


10 Ben Zae 


ay CONTINUOUS SERIES OF DAYS. 4] 


Days. Months. Days. Months Days. Months. 

UNG b- 11 Manik 11 Ahau 
12 Men 12 Lamat 12 Ymix 
13 Cib 13 Mulue 13 Ik 

1 Caban 1 Oe 1 Akbal 

2 Ezanab 2 Chuen ; 2 Kan 

3 Cauaec 3 Eb 3 Chiecchan 
4 Ahau 4 Ben Ceh 4 Cimi 

5 Ymix 53 2 5 Manik 

6 Ik 6 Men 6 Lamat 

7 Akbal 7 Cib 7 Mulue 

8 Kan 8 Caban 8 Oc 

9 Chiechan 9 Ezanab 

* 10 Cimi 10 Canae 


The reader, in making use of this list, must bear in mind that it is 
one continuous series of consecutive days, without a single break from 
beginning to end. The second column on each page follows the end of 
the first, and the third the end of the second; and the first column of 
each page follows the third column of the preceding page throughout 
thetable. The reason for commencing the list with 9 Lamat will appear 
hereafter. 


Before proceeding further it is necessary to give the reasons for con- 
eluding that in the series now under consideration the count is not 
from the first day of the month, that is to say, from Kan, Mulue, Ix, 
and Cauac, as appears to have been the usual custom, but from the 
last days, that is to say, from Akbal, Lamat, Ben, and Ezanab. Refer- 
ring to table 2, under plate 46, it will be seen that 3 Cib is there given 
as the fourth day of the month Yaxkin, and 5 Cib as the nineteenth 
day of the month Tzec. Now, if the year, and consequently the months 
also, began with [x, then Cib would be the third day; but if it com- 
menced with Ben, as shown in the “Ben column” in table 3, it would 
be the fourth day. If the year commenced with Kan, then Cib would 
be the thirteenth day, and the fourteenth if it commenced with Akhal. 
If the year began with Mulue, it would be the eighth day, and the 
ninth if it commenced with Lamat. If the year began with Cauac, Cib 
would be the eighteenth day, and the nineteenth if it commenced with 
Ezanab. 

It is evident, therefore, that the dates given can be explained only on 
the theory that the count began with the day usually considered the 
jast of the month in Ix years. This being true, it may be, as main- 
tained by Dr. Seler, that at the time and place where the Dresden 
codex was formed it was the custom to commence the years with 
Akbal, Lamat, Ben, and Ezanab, instead of with Kan, Muluc, Ix, and 
Cauac, which would make the count begin with the last day of the 
month. wl tod 

Although | have heretofore expressed some doubt concerning this 
point, yet, since the series can be traced on either plan, I have con- 
cluded to follow Dr. Seler’s suggestion, and have constructed the pre- 
ceding calendar tables on this plan. This obviates the necessity of 
using double dates, and also brings this system into harmony with the 
Tzental calendar. 


ay ‘ 7 nied a , i nel 1 Pin a BUREAU OF 
42 CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. peg? 


Referring now to table 2 (page 20), and beginning with 3 Cib, on plate 
46, the days may be counted, using the intervals at the bottom of the 
plate—11 months, 16 days; 4 months, 10 days; 12 months, 10 days; 
and 0 months, 8 days—which are given in red symbols in the origi- 
nal. According to these intervals, 4 months and 10 days must be 
counted from 3 Cib, the fourth day of Yaxkin, to reach 2 Cimi, the 
fourteenth day of Zac. From this point 12 months and 10 days must 
be counted to reach 5 Cib, the nineteenth day of the month Tzee; then 
8 days to reach 13 Kan, the seventh day of the month Xul; next 11 
months and 16 days to reach 2 Ahan, the third day of the os Cumhu 
on plate 47; and so on. 

AS Hereeanire explained, the counter under a column indicates the 
interval between the day over the preceding column and the day over 
the column under which it stands. As there is a counter under the 
first (left-hand) column of plate 46, with which the record begins, it 
must denote that the count commences with a day 11 months and 16 
days preceding 3 Cib, the fourth day of Yaxkin. It may also be 
observed in the figure columns between the upper and lower lines of 
month names that the first column is 11 months and 16 days; hence the 
Series must begin with a day 11 months and 16 days preceding that over 
this column. 

In counting intervals of time, as is well understood, the first inter- 
val includes the first and last days thereof, while those which follow 
exclude the last day reached and commence with the following day. 
Thus, from Sunday to Saturday is seven days; to the next Saturday 
is seven days, and so on. So it is necessary to commence with 3 
Cib, the fourth day of Yaxkin, which is marked on the list of days 
(table 6) with an asterisk, and count back 11 months and 16 days, or 
236 days. As Yaxkin is always the seventh month of the year, then 
from the commencement of the year to the fourth day of Yaxkin 
(including both days) must be 6 months and 4 days, or 124 days. 
Counting back this number of days from 3 Cib, 10 Ben (the first day 
of the month Pop) is reached, and this is the first day of the year. 
This year is, therefore, 10 Ben, according to the system adopted, and 
by turning to table 3 it is seen that Cib can be the fourth day of the 
month only in Ben years. Counting back the five intercalary days of 
the preceding year 4 Manik, the last day of the preceding year proper, 
and consequently of the months, is next reached. Lamat must, there- 
fore, be the first day of the months and of the year. One hundred and 
twenty-nine days being now counted, 107 more remain, and these, com- 
mencing with 4 Manik, bring us to 2 Ymix, the fourteenth day of the 
month Mac. The count therefore begins, in fact, with 2 Ymix, which is 
the fourteenth day of the month Mae, the thirteenth month of the year 
9 Lamat. 

That Ymix was generally placed as the first of the series among the 
Maya tribes is evident from the lists which have been preserved by 


— ae 


MAYA ] 
THOMAS 


THE MAYA CALENDAR. 


43 


early authors. For example, the Maya, Tzental, and Quiché-Cakehi- 
quel lists are usually given as follows: 


Usual day names in the Maya, Tzental, and Quiche-Cakchiquel dialects. 


MAYA. TZENTAL. QUICHE-CAK. 

1 Ymix (or Inix) Imox Imox 

2 Ik Igh Ik 

3 Akbal Votan Akbal 
4 Kan Ghanan Kat 

5 Chiechan Abagh Can 

6 Cimi Tox Camey 
7 Manik Moxie Queh 
8 Lamat Lambat Canel 
9 Mulue Molo Toh 

10 Oe Elab Tzi 
11 Chuen Batz Batz 
12 Eb Euob Ke 

13 Ben Been Ah 

14 Ix (or Hix) Hix Balam 
15 Men Tziquin Tziquin 
16 Cib Chabin Ahmak 
17 Caban Chie Noh 

18 Ezanab Chinax Tihax 
19 Cauac Cahogh Caok 
20 Ahau Aghaual Hunahpu 


Why Ymix was not chosen as one of the “ year-bearers” is a mystery 
which is not yet solved. It is probable, however, that this order came 
down from a time previous to the adoption of the four-year series. It 
is evident from Landa’s language and from some series in the codices 
that Ymix was selected as the day with which to begin certain chrono- 
logic periods. This author’s language, which is somewhat peculiar, is 
as follows: 

It is curious to note how the dominical letter always comes up at the beginning 
of its year, without mistake or failing, and that none of the other twenty letters 
appear. They also use this method of counting in order to derive from certain let- 
ters a method of counting their epochs and other things, which, though interesting to 


them, does not concern us much here. Itis enough to say that the character or letter 
with which they begin their computation of the days of their calendar is always one 


Ymix, which is this, (Fm) which has no certain or fixed day on which it falls. Be- 
cause each one changes its position according to his own count; yet, or all that, the 


dominical letter of the year which follows does not fail to come up correctly.’ 


It seems probable that a wrong inference has been drawn from this 
language by writers. It does not declare that the ‘‘dominical let- 
ter” was Ymix; on the contrary, a careful analysis of his language 


*Relacion de las Cosas de Yucatan, p. 236. 


44 CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. eee 


shows clearly that he refers thereby to the year bearers, as he says, 
“They also use this method of counting in order to derive from cer- 
tain letters a method of counting their epochs and other things.” But 
the list of days commenced with ‘one Ymix,” and this was consid- 
ered the commencement of their calendar as Ce Cipactli was of the 
Nahautl calendar. He also expressly distinguished the ‘ dominical 
letter” from this day. As he says, it “ * * * has no certain or 
fixed day on which it falls. Because each one changes its position 
according to his fits] own count; yet, for all that, the dominical letter of 
the year which follows does not fail to come up correctly.” Now it is 
apparent from this language that by ‘“ dominical letter” he alludes to 
the year-bearer and not to Ymix. It is possible, therefore, that the 
ilustration given him was from a series like that now under considera- 
tion, which started with this day. 


Returning now to 5 Cib in the list of days (table 6), the count must 
be carried forward 4 months and 10 days (or 90 days). As this is the 
fourth day of the seventh month (Yaxkin), this should reach the four- 
teenth day of Zac, the eleventh month; this is 2 Cimi, which agrees 
with the record, plate 46. Now, counting forward 12 months and 10 
days, it will require (since 2 Cimi is the fourteenth day of the eleventh 
month, Zac) 7 months and 6 days to reach the end of the year, which 
in this case, not counting the five intercalary days, will be 5 Eb. 
If there were no intercalary days, then the next year would commence 
with 6 Ben, as the days must always follow one another in regular 
sequence. As 5 months and 4 days remain to make up the 12 months 
and 10 days, if the count is continued, commencing with 6 Ben and 
without allowing for the five intercalary days, 5 Cib is reached, and 
this is the proper day as given in the third column of plate 46. But 
instead of being the nineteenth day of the fifth month, Tzec, itis the 
fourth day of the sixth month, Xul, for the months of this year would 
all commence five days earlier than is given in the table. As this 
extends five days beyond the date given in the codex (third column, 
plate 46), it proves beyond controversy that the five days should be 
added before commencing the next year. In order to make this clear, 
the several steps of the count forward, from 2 Cimi, the fourteenth day 
of the eleventh month, Zac, will be noted. 

Counting 6 days, 8 Eb. the last day of Zac is reached; then follows 
the month Ceh, 20 days; Mac, 20 days; Kankin, 20 days; Muan, 20 
days; Pax, 20 days; Kayab, 20 days; and Cumhu, 20 days, ending 
with 5 Eb, making in all 7 months and 6 days (or 146 days). Adding 
to these the 5 intercalary days—6 Ben, 7 Ix, 8 Men, 9 Cib, and 10 
Caban—the sum is 7 months and 11 days (or 151 days), leaving 4 
months and 19 days (or 99 days) of the 12 months and 10 days to be 
counted, The reader will also observe that the next day of the list is 
11 Ezanab, the first day of the month Pop, and consequently the first 


AY 7 > mre mm ‘ Ny ZI AFB 
eas THE TEST OF THE RECKONING. 45 


day of a new year; therefore the count of this year begins with 11 
Ezanab. It would be well in this connection to refer to the calendar, 
table 3 (page 21), as occasion will arise to use it. We count now the 
month Pop, 20 days; Uo, 20 days; Zip, 20 days; Tzoz, 20 days; then 
to the nineteenth day of the month Tzec makes 4 months and 19 days 
to complete the 12 months and 10 days. This carries the count to 5 
Cib, the nineteenth day of the month Tzec, which agrees with the date 
over the third column, plate 46. Hight days more reach 13 Kan, the 
seventh day of the month Xul, the date over the fourth column of 
plate 46. Counting 11 months and 16 days from 15 Kan, the seventh 
day of Xul, 2 Abau, the third day of the eighteenth month, Cumhu, is 
reached. This accords with the date over the first column of plate 47. 
As the next count is 4 months and 10 days it is evident that it runs 
into the next year, which, as the present is 11 Ezanab, should, under 
the system above outlined, be 12 Akbal. Counting 17 days, 6 Caban, 
the last day of the month is reached; five more carry the count to 11 
Ik, the last of the intercalary days, and the close of the complete year. 

As the next day is 12 Akbal, the first of the month Pop, it is the 
commencement of another year. As 22 days, or 1 month and 2 days, 
have now been counted, there remain of the 4 months and 10 days 
only 3 months and 8 days (or 68 days). These bring the count to 1 
Oc, the eighth day of the month Tzoz, the date over the second column of 
plate 47. Continuing the count, 12 months and 10 days more we reach 
4 Ahau, the eighteenth day of the month Pax, the date over the third 
column of plate 47. Hight days more extend to 12 Lamat, the sixth 
day of the month Kayab. The count must now be carried forward 11 
months and 16 days in order to reach the first day of the first column 
in plate 48. Counting forward from this point 1 month and 14 days 
(or 34 days), we reach 7 Ik, the end of Cumhu, and hence the close of 
the year proper. Adding the five intercalary days—8 Akbal, 9 Kan, 
10 Chicchan, 11 Cimi, and 12 Manik,—13 Lamat, the first day of the 
mouth Pop is reached, and with it the beginning of another year. As 
1 month and 19 days have now been counted, there remain of the 11 
months and 16 days, the period of 9 months and 17 days. Starting 
with 13 Lamat, the first day of Pop, this brings the reckoning to 1 
Kan, the seventeenth day of the month Yax, the date over the first 
column of plate 48. Four months and 10 days more extend to 13 Ix, 
the seventh day of Muan, the date over the second column of plate 48. 
Twelve months and ten days more would extend to 3 Kan, the twelfth 
day of Chen; but as this runs into the next year, the steps are noted. 

Counting forward from 13 Ix, the seventh day of Muan, to 8 Manik, 
the last day of Cumhu, there are found to be 3 months and 13 days; 
and the five intercalary days reach 15 Eb, the last day of the year. 
Following this is 1 Ben, the first day of the month Pop, and also of the 
next year. As3 months and 18 days have been counted, there remain 8 
months and 12 days out of the 12 months and 10 days. Counting these, 


46 CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


3 Kan, the twelfth day of Chen (the date over the third column of plate 
48) is reached; and 8 days more terminate with 11 Eb, the twentieth 
day of Chen, which is the date over the fourth column of plate 48. 

The method of reckoning having been set forth in the preceding 
paragraphs, the further count may now be indicated more briefly. 

Starting with the last mentioned date, 11 months and 16 days extend 
to 13 Lamat, the eleventh day of Zip, the date over the first column of 
plate 49. This count passes from a Ben year to an Ezanab year, includ- 
ing the five intercalary days. It is needful also to note the order and 
number of the years in passing, as this is a very important part of the 
Maya calendar. By looking back over the list of days, and noting the 
first day of the month Pop in the different years, the names and num- 
bers of the years are found. Beginning with 9 Lamat, the year contain- 
ing 2 Ymix, the first day of our series, 10 Ben follows, next 11 Ezanab, 
then 12 Akbal, 13 Lamat, 1 Ben, and 2 Ezanab, the year now reached. 

Counting forward 4 months and 10 days from 13 Lamat, 12 Ezanab, 
the first day of Mol is reached, the date over the second column of 
plate 49. Then 12 months and 10 days extend to 2 Lamat, the sixth 
day of Uo,in the year 3 Akbal; and eight days more reach 10 Cib, the 
fourteenth day of Uo, the date over the fourth column of plate 49. 
Eleven months and 16 days more reach 12 Eb, the tenth day of Kan- 
kin, the date over the first column of plate 50; and 4 months and 10 
days more end with 11 Ik, the twentieth day of Cumhu. Counting now 
12 months and 10 days (including the five intercalary days), 1 Eb, the 
fifth day of the month Mae, in the year 4 Lamat is reached; and eight 
days more carry the count to 9 Ahau, the thirteenth day of Mac, the 
date over the fourth column of plate 50. 

This is the end of the series formed by the top line of days of the col- 
umns on plates 46-50, reading from left to right, and taking the plates in 
the order of numbering. This line, and the order in which the dates 
have been taken, is shown in table 1 (page 18). 

That it is necessary to count the five intercalary days at the end of 
each year is rendered evident by the following facts: 

1. The dates given on the plates can not be assigned to any year- 
series in which all the years commence with a given day, which must 
necessarily be the case if but 360 days are counted to a year. As 
evidence of this, it is only necessary to call attention again to the fact 
that Cib is the fourth day of the month only in the years beginning 
with the day Ben; while Ahau (first column, plate 47) is the third day 
of the month only in years commencing with the day Ezanab, and is 
the eighteenth day (third column, plate 47) only in years beginning with 
the day Akbal; while Kan is the seventeenth day (first column, plate 
48) only in years beginning with the day Lamat. 

2. As has been shown by the list of days, the dates given can be 
reached (using the counters on the plates) only by adding the five sup- 
plemental days at the end of each year, 


A ry’ 1 
demas THE PROOF OF THE INTERCALATION. 47 


3. As shown by this list, the years follow each other in the order 
heretofore given, that is to say, 9 Lamat, 10 Ben, 11 Ezanab, 12 Akbal, 
13 Lamat, 1 Ben, 2 Ezanab, 3 Akbal, and 4 Lamat, the upper line of 
days ending with 9 Ahau, the thirteenth day of the thirteenth month, 
Mae; of the last named year. 

The entire series, commencing with 2 Ymix, the thirteenth day of 
Mae, in the year 9 Lamat, and ending with 9 Ahan, the twelfth day of 
Mace, in the year 4 Lamat, consists of 2,920 days, or precisely eight 
years of 365 days each.* 


Having reached the end of the series consisting only of the top days 
of the columns, the question arises, Does the series continue to the 
second line of days, and so on to the end of the bottom, or thirteenth 
horizontal line? If so, counting 11 months and 16 days from 9 Ahau, 
over the last column of plate 50, should reach 11 Cib, the fourth day 
of Yaxkin, which is the second day of the first column of plate 46, and 
the beginning of the second horizontal line of days. This line, as 
will be seen by turning to the series of columns heretofore given in 
table 1 (page 18), is as follows: 


Plate 46-11 Cib. 10 Cimi. 13 Cib. 8 Kan. 
47-10 Ahau. 9 Oe. 2 Ahau. 7 Lamat. 
48— 9 Kan. sid Be 11 Kan. 6 Eb. 
49- 8 Lamat. 7 Ezanab. 10 Lamat. 5 Cib. 
50- 7 Eb. 6 Ik. 9 Kb. 4 Ahau. 


The lines follow each other in a single continuous series. Turning 
now to 9 Ahau (in table 6, page 39) the thirteenth day of Mac, in the 
year 4 Lamat, the day with which the first line ended, and counting 
from this 11 months and 16 days, including the five supplemental days 
at the end of the year, 11 Cib, the fourth day of Yaxkin in the year 
of 5 Ben is reached. This is the second day of the first column on plate 
46. A count of 4 months and 10 days more reaches 10 Cimi, the four- 
teenth day of the month Zac, which is the second day of the second 
column of plate 46. And so the count may be continued to 1 Ahau, the 
last day of the fourth column on plate 50, and the last of the complete 
series of thirteen lines, covering in alla period of 104 years, or two 
cycles. But to complete this series only the upper line of months on 
table 2 has been used. This series, as above stated, ends with 1 
Ahau, the thirteenth day of Mac, the thirteenth month of the year 
9 Lamat, but a year of a different cycle from that in which the 
count began. If the count is carried 11 months and 16 days from this 
date it will reach 3 Cib, the fourth day of Yaxkin in the year 10 Ben, 
precisely the year in which the first 3 Cib is found. This shows that 
the series is complete, as it returns to the starting point. 


*It will be seen by reference to my paper entitled ‘‘ Aids to the study of the Maya 
codices,” 6th Ann. Rep. Bur. Ethn., p. 302, that the conclusion there reached is 
shown by the discovery here explained to be incorrect. I had not found at that 
time satisfactory evidence of the introduction of the five supplemental days or of 
the four series of years. 


48 CALENDAR OF THE DRESDEN CODEX. tenes 


ETHNOLOGY 


This result must necessarily be true, as the series comprises exactly 
two cycles (i. e., between Cib and Cib—the count back to Yinix being 
arbitrary); moreover, it contravenes the supposition that one or more 
days are added after certain periods to compensate for the fraction of a 
day required to render the year exact. Even were these added days 
without names, the numbering would go on, and would become manifest 
inthe count. To assume that they were added without name or number 
is amere hypothesis. If the count runs through 104 years according 
to theregular system, without the loss or addition of a day, very posi- 
tive evidence will be required to show the addition of these compen- 
sating days. 

It may be said that the foregoing count has not extended through 
the entire series, and that added days may be found somewhere before 
the end is reached. But the contrary is readily shown by referring to 
table 1. As all the days in a column are the same, and the intervals 
the same for all the horizontal lines, it is evident that the number of 
days in each horizontal line is the same. It is therefore certain that 
there are no supernumerary days in the entire series. 

The count given above also shows that the series just examined, 
which is basedon the upper line of month symbols, does not form a con- 
nection with thatof thesecondline of month symbols which commences 
with 3 Cib, the ninth day of the month Zac* in the year 3 Lamat. 
This series, although using the same day columns and the same 
counters or intervals as those of the first line of month symbols, must 
necessarily be distinet; for if continuous it should commence with pre- 
cisely the same date as the first, since it starts a new cycle, or perhaps 
more correctly at the same point in the cycle as the first. If this sec- 
ond series is traced through in the same way as the first, it is necessary 
to remember to count back 11 months and 16 days from 3 Cib, the ninth 
day of Zac, to ascertain the initial day of the series. This is found to 
be 2 Ymix, the nineteenth day of the month Kayab in the year 2 Akbal. 
It is worthy of notice that here also the count begins with Ymix, and, 
like the other, 2 Ymix; but a study of the system will make it apparent 
that this result must necessarily follow unless there is an arbitrary 
break, or a duplication of one or more days. 

The lowest of the three series, in which the first date on plate 46 is 
3 Cib, the nineteenth day of Kayab, if traced back is found also to 
commence with 2 Ymix. As 3 Cib, the nineteenth day of Kayab, falls 
in the year 3 Ezanab, counting back 11 months and 16 days reaches 
2 Ymix, the fourth day of the month Xul of the same year. 


“The 3 Te in athe eed, oun ee Aree c ait ie. A) ate 46, is an ev idence mistake 
on the part of the scribe, as Cib can never be the eighth day of the month, according 
to the calendar followed above. According to the usual system, where the years 
begin with Kan, Mulue, Ix, Cauac, it would be the eighth day of the Muiue years. 
This looks a little like a slip back to a usual method, where the scribe was trying 
to follow an unusual system. 


eens | RELATIONS OF THE SERIES. 49 


As each of the three series consists of 104 years, the three together 
make 512 years, the length of one grand cycle. However, as they do 
not form a continuous series, it can not be maintained that they were 
intended to embrace that period; in fact, if arranged consecutively, in 
the order of time, there will be a break or interval between the close 
of the first series and the commencement of the second amounting to 
19 years, and between the second and third a break of 27 years. It is 
therefore probable that all these series cover substantially the same 
period, that is, that they overlap one another. I shall not enter, at 
present, into a discussion of Dr. Férstemann’s opinion that this series 
refers to the revolution of the planet Venus. 


Buea ————4. 


CHAPTER II. 
DISCUSSION OF OTHER TIME SERIES. 


An examination of other series which can be traced, and are of suffi- 
cient length to furnish a test, shows very clearly that they can all be 
explained in accordance with the year of 365 days and the four-year 
system, and that they contain nothing inconsistent therewith. In fact, 
as will be seen below, every series which does not give the days of the 
month, like that discussed in the previous chapter, will fit into the 
year of 365 days and the four year-series, and also into the year of 360 
days. But the latter must always begin with the same day; for it is 
evident to everyone that years of 360 days, consisting of eighteen 
months of twenty days each, the twenty days having each a distinet 
name and always following one another in the same order, must com- 
mence with the same day, unless there is an arbitrary change. 


On plate 30 of the Dresden codex there are the four day-columns here 
given, with the red numeral XI over each. This red numeral, as 
explained in a former paper,* is the ‘‘ week” number to be joined to each 
day of the column over which it is placed. The record is as follows: 


5.& xi XI b.& 
Ahau Chiechan Oc Men 
Caban Ik Manik Eb 
Ix Cauae Kan Mulue 
Chuen Cib Ymix Cimi 
Lamat Ben Ezanab Akbal 


Extending from the right of this group, and running through the 
lowest division to the middle of plate 33, there is a numeral series con- 
sisting of nine pairs of numbers, each pair the same (13 and X1), the 
former black, the latter red. The black is the counter or interval, and 
the red the week number of the day reached. The sum of the black 
numbers (9x13) is 117, which is the interval between the successive 
days of each column; thus, from 11 Ahau to 11 Caban is 117 days, and 
so on down to Lamat, the last day of the left-hand column. From 11 
Lamat to 11 Chicchan, the first day of the second column, is also 117 
days, and so on to the last day of the fourth column. These four col- 
umns, therefore, form one continuous series of 2,223 days, commencing 
with 11 Ahau and ending with 11 Akbal; but by adding 117 more days 


*«€ Aids to the Study of the Maya Codices,” op. cit., pp. 290-291. 
50 


weouas SERIES IN PLATE XXX, DRESDEN CODEX. 51 


to complete the cycle to 11 Ahau—which appears to be the plan of these 
series—the total is 2,340 days, or 9 cycles of 260 days each, or, in other 
words, nine sacred years. 

Turning now to table 3 (page 21), and selecting 11 Ahau in either col- 
umn and counting forward continuously, using the same day column 
without adding the five days, it will be seen that the proper days will 
be reached.* For example, Ahau, the third day in the Ezanab column, 
may be selected, and the count may be carried from 11 opposite in the 
fourth number column. Continuing from this 117 days, 11 Caban, the 
twentieth day of the ninth number column is reached; 117 days from 
this (going back to the first column when the thirteenth is completed) 
ends with 11 Ix, the seventeenth day of the second number column; 117 
more with 11 Chuen, the fourteenth day of the eighth number column; 
117 more with 11 Lamat, the eleventh day of the first column; and soon 
to the end. It is evident, therefore, that the series can be traced in 
years of 360 days, if these years begin with the same day. 

An attempt will now be made to trace it in accordance with the 
usual calendar system. However, as it appears to be usual in this 
codex to begin the years and months with the days usually considered 
the last, as has been found true of the series on plates 46-50, it may be 
taken for granted that the same rule holds good here. If the reader 
has learned how to count by the compound calendar, table 3, it may be 
used in following the explanation. As there is nothing whatever in 
the series to indicate the years to which it is applied, it must be 
considered of general application, and may begin in any year. The 
year 1 Akbal, in which 11 Ahau falls on ‘the eighteenth day of the 
thirteenth month, Mac, may therefore be selected. Carrying the count 
forward from this date 117 days, or five months and seventeen days, 
the next year, which should be 2 Lamat, isentered. Counting now five 
months and two days (or 102 days), 9 Ik, the last day of the year proper, 
is reached, and five days more end with 1 Manik, the last of the added 
days; 2 Lamat will therefore be the first day of the next year. As 107 
days have now been counted, the further count of 10 days, commencing 
with 2 Lamat, extends to 11 Caban, the second day in the left-hand 
column of our series. This is the tenth day of the first month, Pop, of 
the year 2 Lamat. Counting forward trom this, 117 days reaches 11 
Ix, the seventh day of the seventh month, Yaxkin. As this is the 
third day in the series, the count is carried forward 117 days more and 
reaches 11 Chuen, the fourth day of the thirteenth mouth, Mac; and 117 
days more reaches 11 Lamat, the last day of the column. This is found 
to be the first of the supplemental days of the year 2 Lamat. In taking 
the next step, four days are counted in this year and 113 days in the 
year 3 Ben. This period of 117 days closes with 11 Chicchan, the first 
day of the second column of the series given above. 


” 


Manuscript Troano,” op. cit., pp. 11-13. 


= = . 4a BUREAU OF 
te | OTHER TIME SERIES. ace 

It is manifest from this examination that all series constructed on 
the plan of this one are adjustable to the calendar system with the 
year of 365 days and the four year-series. 


Referring now to the long series on plates 53-58 of the same codex, 
the first five columns from the commencement in the upper division of 
plate 53 are given, inserting two corrections in the upper numerals 
which the counters below show to be required. These corrections, 
however, which were first made by Dr. Férstemann, and are absolutely 
necessary to the order of the series, in no way affect the question now 
at issue. The series is as follows: 


1 2 

8 17 7 15 6 
ik, 14 2 14 16 

6 Kan 1 Ymix 6 Muluc 1 Cimi 9 Akbal 

7 Chicchan 2 Ik 7 Oc 2 Manik 10 Kan 

8 Cini 3 Akbal 8 Chuen 3 Lamat 11 Chicchan 
8 8 fi 8 8 
17 Selly 8 17 17 


The numbers below the columns denote the intervals in months and 
days; thus, from 6 Kan to 1 Yinix, is 8 months and 17 days; from 1 
Ymix to 6 Mulue is 7 months and 8 days; from 6 Muluc to 1 Cimi is 8 
months and 17 days; and so on. As there is also an interval of 8 
months and 17 days under the first column, it is necessary to count 
back 8 months and 17 days from 6 Kan to find the initial day of the 
series. The numerals over the columns indicate the sum of the inter- 
vals, at any given column, from the initial day of the series. Thus the 
numbers in the lowest line may be considered days, or units of the first 
order, of which twenty make one unit of the second order; the second 
line may be considered months, or, as Dr. Férstemann holds, units of 
the second order, of which eighteen make a unit of the third order; 
and the upper line years (of 360 days), or units of the third order, one 


1 
s; 
2 


over the third column equal 360414042 -— 502 days, or 1 year (of 365 
days), 6 months and 17 days. 

As there is nothing in the series to indicate the year in which it 
begins, it may be assumed to commence in a year in which Kan is the 
seventeenth day of the month. This is feund to be a Lamat year, and 
counting back 8 months and 17 days from 6 Kan, 12 Lamat is reached; 
and this, as it is the first day of a month, may be assumed to be the first 
day of a year. According to this reckoning 6 Kan of the first column 
of the series will be the seventeenth day of the ninth month, Chen, 
of the year 12 Lamat. Counting forward from this day, 8 months and 
17 days carries the reckoning to 1 Ymix, the fourteenth day of the 
eighteenth month, Cumhu, which is the first day of the second column 


of which equals 360 units of the first order. Hence, the numbers 


nHoMas | SERIES IN PLATES LITI-LVIII. 


of the series. Counting forward from this 7 months and 8 days, 6 
Mulue, the first day of the third column should be reached, but the count 
passes into the second year. Counting forward 6 days which remain 
of the month Cumhu and the 5 intercalary days, 12 Ebis reached; hence 
the next year must begin with 8% Ben. Having counted 11 days, 
there remain 6 months and 17 days of the period of 7 months and 8 
days. Commencing with 15 Ben, the first day of the month Pop, this 
period closes with 6 Mulue, which is the seventeenth day of the seventh 
month Yaxkin. i 

It is evident, therefore, that this series and all those similarly con- 
structed can be explained according to the usual calendar system; and 
this will hold good if the count is begun in any one of the four years. 
It will be found true in the example just given if the reckoning begins 
with 6-Kan of the Akbal, Ben, and Ezanab years. A little study of the 
calendar will show that this must necessarily be true of all series regu- 
larly formed in which the months and days of the month are not given. 
As proof of this a short series arbitrarily formed for illustration, in 
which the intervals differ from one another, is presented: 


: 1 
6 12 3 
i 1 a 
1 Kan 11 Chuen 8 Chiechan 10 Mulue 
6 5 9 
7 14 4 


In this, as in the last example, the numbers below indicating the 
intervals are given in months and days. Turning to table 3 (page 21), 
1 Kan, the second day of the year 13 Akbal, may be selected. It is, 
therefore, the second day of the month Pop. Counting forward, 6 
months and 7 days we reach 11 Chuen, the ninth day of the month Yax- 
kin; then 5 months and 14 days end with 8 Chicchan, the third day of 
the thirteenth month, Mac. Assuming that the year consists of 365 
days, there will remain to be counted in this year (13 Akbal) 5 months 
and 17 days, and the 5 intercalary days. This leaves to be counted 3 
months and 2 days of the interval of 9 months and 4 days under the 
last column of the series. As the next year must, according to the 
rule, be 1 Lamat, the count commences with 1 Lamat, the first day of 
the month Pop; and being carried forward 3 months and 2 days extends 
to 10 Mulue, the second day of the fourth month Tzoz of the year 1 
Lamat, and the last day of the series. 

As proof that this series is constructed on the same plan as that on 
plates 53-58 of the Dresden codex, except that the intervals are arbi- 
trarily given, it may be pointed out that each may also be traced on 
the theory that the year consisted of 360 days which always commenced 
with the same day. As the method of proving this has been shown 
above, further demonstration would seem to be unnecessary. 


54 OTHER TIME SERIES. ee 


We conclude, therefore, that the only satisfactory proof from the cod- 
‘ices in regard to the calendar system used therein is to be found in series 

which, like that on plates 46-50 of the Dresden codex, give the months 
and days of the month. Nevertheless it can readily be seen how the dates 
given in the other series may become fixed and determinate as regards 
their practical use if they were intended for this purpose. Referring 
again to that portion of the series on plates 53-58 of the Dresden 
codex, given above, the third column, in which the days are 6 Mulue, 
7 Oc, 8 Chuen, may be selected. Let us suppose the priest wishes to 
determine at what time in the year the ceremony or observance 
referred to by this column and the written characters above is to take 
place. Ofcourse he knows the name and number of the passing year. 
Let us suppose itis 2 Ben. By turning to his calendar or by counting 
the days he soon ascertains that 6 Muluc, 7 Oc, and $ Chuen ean fall, 
in this year, only on the seventeenth, eighteenth, and nineteenth days 
of the third month, Zip, and sixteenth month, Pax. 

It is apparent, therefore, that if intended for any practical use, the 
time of year in which any of the dates of the series will fall can readily 
be determined for the passing year. There are, however, several of 
the numeral series of the Dresden codex which must have been 
inserted for other than a practical purpose in the sense indicated. In 
fact, some of them appear, so far as our knowledge yet extends, to have 
been given rather as exhibitions of the scribe’s mathematical attain- 
ments than otherwise. Perhaps, however, Dr. Férstemann may be 
right in supposing they refer to the time periods of heavenly bodies. 


As the chief object of this paper is accomplished in presenting the evi- 
dence that the various series of the codices can be traced according to 
the usual Maya calendar with the simple change of one day in begin- 
ning the list, and that the series on plates 46-50 of the Dresden codex 
can be explained only in accordance with that calendar, it is unneces- 
sary to enter at present into a discussion of the objects and uses of 
these time periods. It is probable that these questions will not receive 
entirely satisfactory answers except through the interpretation of the 
written characters. The same is probably true of the signification of 
the day and month names which has recently occupied the attention 
of Dr. Edward Seler and Dr. D. G. Brinton. 

Although they have added to our knowledge of the relation of the 
various calendars to one another, and have shown that probably most, 
if not all, of the corresponding day names are intended to express sub- 
stantially the same ideas, yet the uncertainty which hangs about most 
of the definitions given is not likely to be dispelled until further 
advancement has been made in deciphering the written characters or 
further information has been obtained in regard to the origin and devel- 
opment of the calendar. 


CHAPTER ITI. 
CALENDAR OF THE INSCRIPTIONS. 


One important result of the proof herein presented—i. e., that the cal- 
endar system of the Dresden codex was based on the year of 365 days 
and the four year-series commencing with the days Akbal, Lamat, Ben, 
and Ezanab—is that it enables students to decide positively that the 
same system was used in the inscriptions of Palenque, Lorillard City, 
and Tikal. 

As proof of this, reference may be made first to the following com- 
binations of day and month symbols on the Palenque tablet. The 
order in which the glyphs of this inscription are to be read, as first 
shown in my “Study of the Manuscript Troano” and now generally 
admitted, is by double columns, from left to right, commencing at the 
top; thus one reads across the top glyphs of the first two columns, 
then the next two glyphs, and so on to the bottom. The scheme of 
numbering the characters for reference is that adopted by Dr. Rau in 
his ‘‘ Palenque Tablet.” 

On the right slab at T8 is the symbol 1 Kan, followed at S9 by 2 
Kayab. This gives the year 6 Akbal. At S10 is 11 Lamat, followed 
at T10 by 6 Xul. As Lamat is the sixth day of the month only in 
Akbal years, this gives 19 Akbal as the year. Attention is also called 
to the fact that Kan is the second day of the month only in years com- 
mencing with Akbal. It is evident, therefore, that the calendar sys- 
tem of the Dresden codex is followed here. At U17,is 5 Kan, followed 
by 12 Kayab, which refers to the year 12 Ben. But one month symbol 
can be determined with certainty on the left slab. At D3 is 4 Ahan, 
followed at C4 by 8 Cumhu, giving the year8 Ben. There are other com- 
binations on this tablet by which the year series in which they are found 
may be ascertained, but the number of the year can not be determined 
as the month symbols are as yet unknown. For example, at X10 is 7 
Kan, followed at W11 by 17 —(?) [month unknown]. As Kan is the 
seventeenth day of the month only in Lamat years (see table 3, page 
21), itis known to belong to this year series, but the number of the 
year can not be determined without knowing the month referred to. 
It is possible that the month names used in this inscription are not the 
same throughout as those which have come down to us; or it may be 
that the symbols of some differ from those found in the Dresden codex. 
However, the symbols for Kayab, Xul, and Cumhu can be determined 
with reasonable if not positive certainty, a fact which, together with 
the other agreements noticed, renders it quite certain that the system 
followed in the two records is substantially the same. It is also sig- 


55 


ee 


ele 
we a pe 


56 CALENDAR OF THE INSCRIPTIONS. peel 


nificant that if the four years above determined are placed in proper 
order, they will all fall in the same decade; thus: 

6 Akbal 7 (Lamat) 8 Ben 9 (Ezanab) Pe 

10 Akbal 11 (Lamat) 12 Ben 13 (Ezanab) 
Those in italics are the years determined by the symbols; the others 
are introduced to show the order in which they must follow one another. 

On one of the casts made at Lorillard City by Charney, we find 3 
Ymix followed by 14 —(?) [month not determined]. By turning to table 
3, the reader will observe that Ymix can be the fourteenth day of the 
month only in Lamat years. As the aame of the month is unknown, 
the number of the year can not be given. 

It may be observed in passing that there appear, from Charney’s 
casts, to be two classes of inscriptions at this locality, one of which is 
much older than the other, the former allied to but apparently older 
than those at Palenque, and the other allied to those of Tikal. These 
differences on the one hand and similarities on the other are quite 
marked. 

On one of the Bernoulli inscriptions of Tikal,3 Ahau is followed by 
3 Mol(?). Although the identification of the month symbol is not 
beyond question, itis known that Ahau can be the third day of the 
month only in Ezanab years. In the same inscription 15 Akbal is fol- 
lowed by 1 —(?)-[month unknown]. By reference to table 3, it will be 
seen that this must be the first day of the first or fourteenth month of 
the year 13 Akbal. On the same inscription also 11 Ik is followed by 
15 —(?) [month unknown]. As Ik can be the fifteenth day of the 
month only in Lamat years, three out of the four year-series are thus 
ascertained. The proof is therefore positive that the same calendar 
system was used in the inscriptions at the three places named as in the 
Dresden codex. 

It may of course be claimed that it does not necessarily follow from 
the identity in form of the day symbols that the names were the same. 
However, the evidence appears to be sufficient to prove that the calen- 
dar system was the same, and to render it highly probable if not certain 
that the significations of the day names, so far as determined, are sub- 
stantially the same as those of the Maya calendar. It is true, though, 
that several symbols are found in these inscriptions which have 
numerals attached and apparently stand for days and months, yet are 
wholly different from any found in the Maya codices; and this fact 
indicates that the day and month names are not the same throughout, 
and hence pertain to other but closely allied calendars. 

According to Dr. Brinton,* the dominical days or year-bearers of the 
Tzental calendar were Lambat (= Lamat), Ben, Chinax (= Ezanab), 
and Votan (= Akbal). This is in precise agreement with the calendar 
system of the Dresden codex and the inscriptions. 


*«The Native Calendar of Central America and Mexico,” p. 12. 


CHAPTER IV. 
ORIGIN OF THE CALENDAR. 


I had not intended to offer at this time any suggestions in regard to 
the origin of the singular calendar described in the foregoing pages; 
but since the subject has recently been brought into discussion, both 
in this country and in Europe, it would seem fitting to refer to some 
data which apparently have a bearing on the question. According to 
Dr. Brinton :* 


We know to a certainty that essentially the same calendar system was in use 
among the Nahbuas of the valley of Mexico and other tribes of the same linguistic 
family resident in Tlascallan and Meztitlan, Soconusco, Guatemala, and Nicaragua; 
that it prevailed among the Mixtecs and Zapotecs; and that of the numerous Mayan 
tribes, it was familiar to the Mayas proper of Yucatan, the Tzentals and Zotzils of 
Chiapas, the Quichés and Cackchiquels of Guatemala, and to their ancestors, the 
builders of the ruined cities of Copan and Palenque. There is no direct evidence 
that it had extended to the Huastecas of Maya lineage, on the Rio Panuco; but it 
was in vogue among the Totonacos, their neighbors to the south, on the Gulf of Mex- 
ico. The Pirindas, Matlazincas, and Tarascos of Michoacan Lad also accepted it, 
though perhaps not in a complete form. The Chiapanecs or Mangues, part of whom 
lived in Nicaragua and part in Chiapas, had also adopted it. The tribes above 
named belong to seven entirely different linguistic stocks, but were not geographi- 
cally distant. Outside of the area which they occupied no traces of the calendar 
system, with its many and salient peculiarities, have been found, either in the 
New or Old World. 

Two things are to be noted in any attempt to trace this singular 
calendar to its origin: first, that wherever we have found it, the pecu- 
liarities are substantially developed; and, second, that we find no 
traces of it among other American tribes than those named. It would 
be rash, however, to assume from these facts that it was not gradually 
developed from a simpler form. Where is this bud, this germ to 
be found? Notwithstanding the derision such propositions usually 
encounter, I present briefly some reasons for believing that we must 
look beyond the borders of our continent for it. 

The special features of this calendar (though not all peculiar to it) 
are as follows: The division of the year into 18 months of 20 days, each 
day of the month having its special name; the intercalation of 5 days 
at the end of the last month to complete the 365; the method of count- 
ing by thirteens; the 9 “ Lords of the night;” and the sacred period of 
260 days. 

I think we may safely assume that the natural basis of the division 
into months, or rather of the count by months, was the revolution and 


*Native Calendar, op. cit., p.5. 
57 


Ze ____IN OF THE CALENDAR. Riese 2 


phases of the moon; that the mathematical basis was the count by the 
fingers, five being the primary week or period; and that a mystical 
reference to the cardinal points played a prominent part in its forma- 
tion. The want of conformity of this system to the return of the sea- 
sons and the rising of certain constellations becoming apparent, the 
year of definite or approximately definite length, determined chiefly 
by the stars, came into use. 

The religious festivals and ceremonies being governed chiefly by the 
phases of the moon, the effort properly to adjust the lunar and sidereal 
periods has given rise to different calendar systems, the approach to 
accuracy depending largely on the advance in culture and reliance on 
the sidereal measure. 


Although the references to the calendars in use among the Polynesians 
and Melanesians are brief and incomplete, and generally confused from 
a lack on the part of writers of a correct knowledge of the system, 
yet, when carefully studied, they seem to furnish a clue to the origin 
of the Mexican and Central American calendar. As proof of this state- 
ment we present here some references, culled from the voluminous 
literature relating to the Pacific islands and their inhabitants. 

Rev. Sheldon Dibble, who was the teacher of history in the Mission 
Seminary at Lahainaluna, writes as follows in his ‘History of the 
Sandwich Islands”: * 


Before proceeding further with the narrative it may be proper here to notice their 
ancient division of time and some few ancient traditions. 

It is said that their division of time was made by their first progenitor, Wakea, 
at the time of his domestic quarrel, to which we have already alluded. Be this 

-true or false, the tradition shows that their division of time was very ancient. 

In their reckoning, there were two seasons, summer and winter. When thesun was 
perpendicular and moved toward the north, and the days were long, and the trees 
bore fruit, and the heat was prevalent—that was summer. But when the sun was 
perpendicular and moved toward the south, and the nights were lengthened, and the 
trees without fruit, and the cold came—that was winter. There were also six months 
ineachseason. Those of the summer were: Ikiki, Kaaona, Hinaiaeleele, Kamahoemua, 
Kamahoehope, and Ikua. The wintermonths were: Welehu, Makalii, Kaelo, Kaulua, 
Nana, and Welo. These twelve months united constituted one year. Welehu was 
the completion of the year, and from Makalii the new year was reckoned. [none year 
there were nine times forty nights. The nights were counted by the moon. There 
were thirty nights in each month, seventeen of which were not very light, and thirteen 
were; the different nights (and days) deriving their names from the different aspects 
of the moon, while increasing, at the full, and waning. The first night was called 
Hilo (to twist), because the part then seen was a mere thread; the next, a little 
more plain, Hoaka (erescent); then Kukahi, Kulua, Kukolu, Kupua, Olekukahi, 
Olekulua, Olekukolu, Olekupau. When the sharp points were lost in the moon’s 
first quarter, the name of that night was Huna (to conceal); the next, on its becom- 
ing gibbous, Mohalu, then Hua; and when its roundness was quite obvious, Akua. 
The nights in which the moon was full or nearly so, were Hoku, Mahealani, and 
Kolu. Laaukukahi was the name of the night in which the moon’s decrease became 
perceptible. As it continued to diminish the nights were called Olaaukulua, Laan- 
pau, Olekukahi, Olekulua, Olepau, Kaloakukahi, Kaloakulna, Kaloapau. When the 


*Edition of 1843, pp, 24-26. 


| 


ih Sh HAWAIIAN CALENDAR. 
moon was very small the night was Mauli, and that in which it disappered, Muku. 
The month of thirty days is thus completed. 

From each month four periods were selected, in which the nights were consecrated, 
or tabu. The following are the names: Kapuku, Kapublua, Kapukaloa, and Kapu- 
kane. The first consisted of three nights, commencing with Hilo and terminating 
with Kulua; the second was a period of two nights, beginning with Mohalu and 
ending with Akua; the two nights, from Olepau to Kaloakulua; the fourth from 
Kane to Mauli. 

It is mostly in reference to the sacred seasons that I have here introduced their 
division of time. The method of reckoning by the moon led, of course, to many 
irregularities. Ona future page I may perhaps notice some of them. 

On another page he makes the following statement: * 

Those who took the most care in measuring time measured it by means both of the 
moon and fixed stars. They divided the year into twelve months, and each month 
into thirty days. They had a distinct name for each of the days of the month, as 
has been shown on a former page, and commenced their numbering on the first day 
that the new moon appeared in the west. This course made it necessary to drop a 
day abont once in two months, and thus reduce their year into twelve Innations 
instead of three hundred and sixty days. This being about eleven days less than 
the sidereal year, they discovered the discrepancy and corrected their reckoning by 
the stars. In practice, therefore, the year varied, being sometimes twelve, sometimes 
thirteen, lunar months. So, also, they sometimes numbered twenty-nine and some- 
times thirty days in a month. 

Though their system was thus broken and imperfect, yet, as they could tell the 
name of the day and the name of the month when any great event occurred, their 
time can be reduced to ours by a reference to the phase of the moon at the time. 
But when the change of the moon takes place about the middle of our calendar 
month, then we are liable to a mistake of a whole month. We are liable to another 
mistake of a day from the uncertainty of the day that the moon was discovered in 
the west. Having nothing to rely upon except merely their memories, they were 
also liable to numerous mistakes from that source. 

Although it is evident from this language that the author did not 
thoroughly understand the system, a careful examination will enable 
students to get at the main points, and, by the aid of a later writer. to 
gain a tolerably correct idea of the calendar. It is distinctly stated in 
each extract, notwithstanding the apparent contradiction in the latter, 
that the year consisted of twelve months and that there were thirty 
days (or nights) in each month. This, if there was no intercalation, 
would give 360 days to the year. This is confirmed by the additional 
statement that ‘‘in one year there were nine times forty nights,” which 
J am inclined to believe would have been more correctly given by say- 
ing ‘“‘there were forty times nine nights in a year.” 

Jt will be observed that in the second extract the author tries to 
explain the relation of the lunations to the twelve divisions of the sidereal 
year, arriving at the conclusion that “in practice” the years, and also 
the months, varied in length. Yet he states distinctly that those who 
took most care in measuring time (probably the priests) ‘‘measured it 
by means both of the moon aud fixed stars;” and that at length having 
discovered a discrepancy of eleven days in their reckoning, they correeted 


P03: 


60 ORIGIN OF THE CALENDAR. State 


it “by the stars.” It is apparent, therefore, that the Hawaiians had a 
determinate sidereal year, and as he again avers that each of the thirty 
days of the month had its specific name (though he does not give them 
all), we may suppose that this error arose from a failure to intercalate 
the proper number of days, and not by dropping from an extra month. 
This supposition we find is confirmed by Judge Fornander in his * Poly- 
nesian Race,” * who says: “Itis known that the Hawaiians who counted 
twelve months cf thirty days each, intercalated five days at the end 
of the month Welehu, about December 20, which were tabu days 
dedicated to the festival of the god Lono; after which the new year 
began with the first day of the month Makalii.”. He also quotes from 
Dibble the second extract given above and corrects it thus: “Mr. Dibble 
omits to mention that the ‘correction’ of their reckoning ‘by the stars’ 
was made by the intercalation [the five days| I have referred to.” “It 
thus appears,” he continues, ‘that the Hawaiians employed two modes 
of reckoning—by the lunar cycles, whereby the monthly feasts or kapu- 
days were regulated; and the sidereal cycle, by which the close of the 
year and the annual feast of Lono was regulated.”+ The same writer 
asserts that the public sacrifices and kapu days were observed only 
during eight months of the year, and discontinued during the months 
of Ikuwa, Welehu, Makalii, and Kaela, when in the month of Kaulua 
they recommenced. 
The names of the months and aays as given by him are as follows: 


MONTHS. 
1 Makalii 4 Nana 7 Kaaona 10 Hilinama 
2 Kaela 5 Welo 8 Hinaieleele 11 Ikuwa 
3 Kaulua 6 Tkiiki 9 Hilinehnu 12 Welehu 
DAYS. 

1 Hilo 11 Huna 21 Ole-ku-kahi 

2 Hoaka 12 Mohalu 22 Ole-ku-lua 

3 Kukahi 13 Hua 23 Ole-pau 

4 Ku-lua 14 Akua 24 Kaloa-ku-kahi 

5 Ku-kolu 15 Hoku 25 Kaloa-kulua 

6 Ku-pan 16 Mahealani 26 Kaloa-pau 

7 Ole-ku-kahi 17 Kulu 27 Kane 

8 Ole-ku-lua 18 Laau-ku-kahi 28 Lono 

9 Ole-ku-kolu 19 Laau-ku-lua 29 Mauli 

10 Ole-ku-pan 20 Laau-pau 30 Muku 


Now, the points in which this Hawaiian calendar agrees with that of 
Mexico and Central America may be specially noted, since the former 
may have furnished the basis of some of the peculiarities of the latter. 

First, attention is called to the fact that the Hawaiians had two 
periods—one the sidereal year of 365 days, or twelve months of thirty 
days each and five added days; the other the sacred period of about 240 


*Vol. 1, p.119 (1878). +Vol. 1, p. 120, note. 


<i CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN THE CALENDARS. 61 


THOMAS 


days, or eight months. The Mexicans and Central Americans had their 
regular or sidereal year of 365 days, consisting, however, of eighteen 
months of twenty days each and five added days; and they, too, 
had a sacred year or period of 260 days. There are, however, four 
points in what has been mentioned in which they agree: The length of 
the year; the intercalation of five days; the fact that this intercalation 
was by adding the five days at the end of the last month; and in 
having a sacred period of about two-thirds of the year. As this sacred 
period included eight months of thirty days, or 240 days, it varied but 
little in length from that of the Mexicans, which embraced 260 days. 
The Zunis, according to Mr. Cushing, had a sacred period of between 
eight and nine lunar months. This period was the portion of the year 
considered sacred, or during which religious observances of a certain 
character took place. Possibly this was not strictly observed in prac- 
tice at the time of the Spanish conquest, but used, nevertheless, as a 
period in their calendar system. If one such period was included in each 
year then the system is not comparable with the Hebrew and Chai- 
deo-Assyrian twofold manner of commencing the year; nor with the 
Egyptian system by which the lunar and solar years were made to 
coincide at the end of each “Apis period” of twenty-five years. 

That this sacred period was included in, or formed a part of, each 
year among the Hawaiians is positively stated in the above extract 
from Judge Fornander’s work. Mr. Cushing also informs me that it 
was so with the Zunis. That it was also true in regard to the Mexican 
calendar seems to be indicated in some of the time series in the Mexi- 
can codices. For example, in the Borgian codex (and all were formed 
on the same plan) the time series on plates 31-38 (to be read to the left) 
is bordered above and below by a line of symbolic figures, each line 
containing 52, or the two together 104. These added to the 260 of the 
five interior lines, give 364, lacking but one day of the complete year. 
As they exactly fill out the spaces according to the scheme, we may 
suppose this to be the reason why the odd day was omitted; or it is 
possible there was some other reason understood by the priests. At 
any rate, the explanation given is not a rash one. It is a singular 
coincidence that in an ancient Javanese manuscript five days of the 
calendar are represented in the same manner by syinbolie figures.* 

Bastian, speaking of the Maori, makes a remark which implies 
that this people also had a sacred period. He says, “They * * * 
reckoned nine months and then three months from the tenth month or 
Ngakuru, the unemployed months (March, April, May,)in which season 
the Kumara were harvested and the planting began again in June.” t 
Although apparently relating to agricultural pursuits, we must bear in 
inind the fact that these among aboriginal tribes were largely regu- 
lated by religious ceremonies. 

*Crawfurd, “Indian Archipelago,” vol. I, plate 7. 
tInselgruppen, p. 199. 


| 
| 
RIGIN OF THE CALENDAR. Reddit 


A statement by Crawfurd leads to the belief that there was also a 
portion of the year considered sacred by the Javanese. It is as follows: 

For astrological purposes the thirty wukus are divided into six periods, each of 
which is considered to be unpropitious to some portion of animal or vegetable nature. 
The first is considered unpropitious to man, the second to quadrupeds, the third to 
trees, the fourth to birds, the fifth to seeds or vegetables, and the sixth to fishes. 
Each of these divisions has been said to consist of thirty-five days or seven Javan- 
ese weeks, which would make the ancient Javanese year a cycle of 210 days. I 
rather suspect that it consisted of twice that number, or 420, and that the wukus 
expressed fortnights or half lunations. This interesting point would be determined 
by investigations conducted in the island of Bali, where I have reason to believe 
that this civil, or rather ritual year or period still obtains. * 

The second point in which the Hawaiian calendar resembles the 
Mexican is the intercalation of five days—which were considered tabu 
days—at the end of the last month to complete the year. The fact that 
this was true in reference to the calendars of some of the peoples of the 
Old World does not affect the bearing of this fact on the question 
under discussion, as the Polynesians (at least the lighter-colored race; 
and it is among them only that these more advanced calendars are 
found) are admitted to have had their origin at some point in south- 
eastern Asia; in other words, that they probably pertain to the Malay 
race. Hence it is not impossible or even improbable that some Poly- 
nesian customs may be traced back to the Old World. The same may 
be said of the fact that each day of the month has its name, another 
point in which the calendars of Hawaii and Mexico agree. It is true 
that in the former the month consisted of thirty days, while in the lat- 
ter it contained only twenty; but of this we shall speak farther on. 

This naming of the days was true of other Polynesian calendars, as 
that of Society Islands, of Marquesas, Samoa, New Zealand, etc., also 
of the old Javanese calendar. In some cases the days appear to have 
had two names, one series being that of the deities supposed to preside 
over them. This appears to have been true of the old Samoan, New 
Zealand, and Javanese calendars, and Dr. Seler states that the same 
was true of the Mexican calendar. The importance of this fact in this 
connection is that Mr. Taylor gives us, in his ‘““Te tka a Maui,”+ the 
names of the thirty deities who preside over the days of the month, 
together with the things over which they preside. In this list we tind 
the pigeon (though the corresponding word in the Hawaiian language 
signifies the kite); also the shark, stone, dog, lizard, wind, dew, and 
birds or bird in the general sense. Now it is a somewhat strange 
coincidence that we find the following among the Mexican days: An 
unknown sea monster which may be a shark, swordfish, or alligator 
(the same uncertainty applies to the Maori day); wind; water; dog; 
the eagle (in the corresponding Tzental and Quiché names “ bird in 
general”); lizard, and flint. Is this coincidence merely accidental? If 
it stood alone, it would be best to assume this to be the case, but when 


* Op. cit., p. 295. tPp. 1385-136. 


eaié CORRESPONDENCE IN DIVISIO! 


it is in line with the other coincidences mentioned such an explana- 
tion is not satisfactory. 

The statement in the preceding quotation from Dibble, that “in one 
year there were nine times forty nights,” would certainly not have been 
used by him unless there had been a method of counting by nines. This 
brings at once to mjnd the method the Mexicans had of counting, for 
some special purposes, by nines. This count, as in the Hawaiian calen- 
dar, referred to the nights, and the period was supposed to be ruled 
over by the so-called “Nine lords of the night.” These periods are 

marked on the time series of the Mexican codices by footprints. 

Another statement iu the same quotation, which, to say the least, is 
remarkable, is that ‘‘There were thirty nights in each month, seventeen 
of which were not very light and thirteen were.” Why this division 
unless it accorded with some method the natives had of dividing the 
month? It is this method of counting by thirteens in the Mexican and 
Central American calendar which Dr. Brinton rightly regards as one 
of its most puzzling features. He says, “It has usually been stated 
that the number 13 represents one-half the number of days during 
which the moon is visible between its heliacal conjunctions, and that it 
owed its selection to this observation.” This, however, he does not 
deem entirely satisfactory, as there is, he remarks, an obvious diffi- 
culty in this theory since “ According to it the calendar ought not to 
take note of the days when the moon is in conjunction, as otherwise 
after the very first month it will no longer correspond with the sequence 
of natural events from which it is assumed to be derived; but as these 
days are counted, it would appear, although the Junar relations of the 
calendar in later days can not be denied, that it had some other origin.”* 

If we had a full explanation of the division to which Mr. Dibble 
alludes, it is quite probable we could solve the riddle. In fact, the lit- 
tle that is given seems to meet precisely the objection which Dr. Brin- 
tou interposes. That the number was used in some mythical sense, or 
had some reference to religious ceremonies, is quite probable. At any 
rate, the fact that the Hawaiians counted thirteen nights of the moon as 
light is sufficient to raise the presumption that from this fact it came 
into use. The fact, however, that this number was in use among the 
Hawaiians as a time counter forms another link connecting the calen- 
dars of the two regions. 

1 do not find in any of the authorities I have at hand that the five- 
day period, so often used in connection with the Mexican and Central 
American calendar, was in vogue among the Polynesians; but, accord- 
ing to Crawfurd,t the Javanese week formerly consisted of five days. 

In this connection we may mention a very singular coincidence in 
reference to the assignment of days and oe to the cardinal points. 


*Native Gatona: At, Op. .Cli., 1p. 11 
tIndian Archipelago, vol. 1, p. 289. Rienzi’s account in Oceanie is simply a repe- 
tition of Crawfurd’s remarks. 


64 _ORIGIN OF THE CALENDAR. Eee 


According to Mr. Cushing the Zunis assigned a special color to each of 
the cardinal points (a custom by no means uncommon), while to the center 
or focus was assigned a mixed color, or, as they termed it, “speckled.” 
Now, Crawfurd says: * 

The Javanese consider the names of the [five] days of their native week to 
have a mystical relation to colors, and to the divisions of the horizon. According 
to this whimsical interpretation, the first means white, and the east; the second 
red, and the south; the third yellow, and the west; the fourth black, and the north; 
and the fifth, mixed color and focus or center.” 

A precisely similar assigninent is seen in the Mexican codices, as, for 
example, on plate 12 of the Borgian codex, where a striped personage 
is placed in the center. 

Thus it will be seen that the Polynesian calendar, or at least that of 
Hawaii, possesses almost every essential feature of that in use among 
the Mexicans and Central Americans. The only important feature of 
the latter which has no parallel in the former is the division of the 
year into eighteen months of twenty days each. So far no satisfactory 
explanation of this peculiarity has been suggested. I am strongly 
inclined to believe that it was not one of gradual growth, but made arbi- 
trarily, by the priests, at some reformation of the calendar. If, as I 
have suggested, the chief points of the calendar were obtained from 
the Polynesians, probably at a comparatively recent date, the lunar 
month, or month of thirty days, would have been the one received. On 
the other hand, if it is of native growth, there can be but little doubt 
that the month was originally based on the moon’s revolution. In 
either case, the change to a “month” of twenty days is difficult to 
account for, except on the supposition that it was arbitrarily made to 
bring into harmony the various divisions and numbers used in the cal- 
endar. Be the true explanation what it may, the evidence we have 
presented of its relation to the Polynesian calendar is too strong to be 
set aside as inerely accidental. If my supposition proves to be well 
founded, we must suppose the Zapotec to be the American original. 

The fact that the native Mexican and Central American calendar has 
spread geographically over only the area designated by Dr. Brinton 
in the above extract from his paper, but is not confined to one particu- 
lar stock, indicates that it had its origin in this area, or was intro- 
duced here after the stocks found in this region had been differentiated 
‘and had become located in this area. This, however, is not the place 
to take up the discussion of the question of contact of the western 
coast tribes with the Polynesians, except as related to the calendar. 
It may be observed merely that I expect to show in a paper relating to 
the origin and signification of the symbols and names of the days and 
months of the Central American calendar that some of the names were 
probably derived from Polynesian sources. 


*Indian Archipelago, vol. 1, p. 290. 


=) 


< a Bee 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


OF THE 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES 


JAMES CONSTANTINE PILLING 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1894 


od peasy 6:2 


er PG Be Oe 


bad aa 


+= 


LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES ISSUED BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 


Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology. Catalogue of lin- 
guistic manuscripts in the library of the Bureau of ethnology. By 
James C. Pilling. 

In Bureau of ethnology first annual report; half-title as above p. 553, text pp. 
555-577, Washington, 1881, royal 8°. 

Issued separately with cover title as follows: 

Catalogue | of | linguistic manuscripts | in the | library of the Bureau 
of ethnology | by | James C. Pilling | (Extracted from the first annual 
report of the Bureau | of ethnology) | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1881 


Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title as under entry next above p. 553, 
text pp. 555-577, royal 8°. One hundred copies issued. 

Smithsonian institution—Bureau of ethnology | J. W. Powell di- 
rector | Proof-sheets | of a | bibliography | of | the languages | of the 

| North American Indians | by | James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib- 
uted only to collaborators) | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1885 

Title verso blank 1 1. notice (signed J. W. Powell) p. iii, preface (November 4, 1884) 
pp. v-viii, introduction pp. ix—x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of libraries re- 
ferred to by initials pp. xxxvii-xxxviii, list of fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text pp. 
1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, index of languages and dialects pp. 
1091-1135, plates, 4°. Arranged alphabetically by name of author, translator, or 
first word of title. One hundred and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side of 
the sheet only. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di- 
rector | Bibliography | of the | Eskimo language | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1887 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1]. preface (April 20, 1887) pp.iii-v, 
text pp. 1-109, chronologic index pp. 111-116, 8 fac-similes, 8°. An edition of 100 
copies was issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, di- 
rector | Bibliography | of the | Siouan languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [ Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1887 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (September 1, 1887) 
pp. iii-v, text pp. 1-82, chronologic index pp. 83-87, 8°. An edition of 100 copies 
was issued in royal 8°, 

III 


Iv LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. 


Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J.W. Powell, director 
| Bibliography | of the | Iroquoian languages | by | James Constantine 
Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1885 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (December 15, 1888) pp. 
iii-vi, text pp. 1-180, addenda pp. 181-189, chronologic index pp. 191-208, 9 fac-similes, 
8°. An edition of 100 copies was issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director 
| Bibliography | ofthe | Muskhogean languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1889 


Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. preface (May 15, 1889) pp. iii—y, 
text pp. 1-103, chronologic index pp. 105-114,8°, Anedition of 100 copies was issued 
in royal 8°. 

Bibliographic notes | on | Eliot’s Indian bible | and | on his other 
translations and works in the | Indian language of Massachusetts | 
Extract from a “ Bibliography of the Algonquian languages” | [Vig- 
nette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1890 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 11. text pp. 1-58, 21 fac-similes, 
royal 8°, Yorms pp. 127-184 of the Bibliography of the Algonquian languages, title 
of which follows. Two hundred and fifty copies issued. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J.W. Powell, director 

| Bibliography | of the | Algonquian languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1891 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank i 1. preface (June 1, 1891) pp. iii-iv, 
introduction p. v, index of languages pp. vii—viii, list of facsimiles pp. ix-x, text 
pp. 1-549, addenda pp. 551-575, chronologic index pp. 577-614, 82 facsimiles, 8°. An 
edition of 100 copies was issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J.W. Powell, director 

| Bibliography | of the | Athapascan languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [Vignette] | 

Washington | Government printing office | 1892 

Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. [list of] linguistic bibliog- 
raphies issued by the Burean of Ethnology pp. ii-iv, preface (June 15, 1892) pp. 
v-vii, introduction p. ix, index of languages pp. xi-xii, list of facsimiles p. xiii, text 
pp. 1-112, addenda pp. 113-115, chronologic index pp. 117-125, 4 facsimiles, 8°. An 
edition of 100 copies was issued in royal 8°. 

Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director 

| Bibliography | ofthe | Chinookan languages | (including the Chinook 
Jargon) | by | James Constantine Pilling | [Vignette] | 
Washington | Government printing office | 1893 


Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. [list of] linguistic bibliog- 
raphies issued by the Bureau of Ethnology pp. iii-iv, preface (March 10, 1893) pp. 
y-vyili, introduction p. ix, index of languages p. xi, list of facsimiles p. xiil, text pp. 
1-76, chronologic index pp. 77-81, 3 facsimiles, 8°, An edition of 100 copies was issued 
in royal 8°. 


: 


ee 


LINGUISTIC BIBLIOGRAPHIES BY THE BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY. V 


Smithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J.W. Powell, director 
| Bibliography | of the | Salishan languages | by | James Constantine 
Pilling | [| Vignette] | 
Washington | Government printing office | 1893 
Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. [list of] linguistic bibliog- 
raphies issued by the Bureau of Ethnology pp. iil-iv, preface (June 24, 1893) pp. 
v-vi, introduction pp. vii—viii, index of languages pp. ix-xi, list of facsimiles p. xiii, 
text pf. 1-79, chronologic index pp. 81-86, 4 facsimiles, 8°. An edition of 100 copies 
was issued in royal 8°. 
Sminithsonian institution | Bureau of ethnology: J. W. Powell, director 
| Bibliography | of the | Wakashan languages | by | James Constan- 
tine Pilling | [ Vignette] | 
Washington | Government printing office | 1894 
Cover title as above, title as above verso blank 1 1. [list of] linguistic bibliog- 
raphies issued by the Bureau of Ethnology pp. iil-v, preface (March 15, 1894) pp. 
vii-vili, introduction pp. ix—x, index of languages p. xi, list of facsimiles p. xi, text 
pp. 1-65, chronologic index pp. 67-70, 2 facsimiles, 8°. An edition of 100 copies was 
issued in royal 8°, 


PREFACE! 


The derivation of the term used to designate the family which 
embraces the group of languages treated of in the present paper is 
from the Nutka word waukash, meaning good, and when heard by 
Captain Cook at Friendly Cove, Nootka Sound, was supposed to be the 
tribal name. 

As the name of a family it was first used by Gallatin, in his Synopsis 
of the Indian Tribes, published in the Transactions of the American 
Antiquarian Society in 1836, based upon a vocabulary taken from 
Jewitt’s Narrative of Adventures and Sufferings. in this article he 
gives, from Galiano, a vocabulary of the Maka, one of the Wakashan 
dialects, as a family of itself, under the name of Straits of Fuca. In 
his later article, Hale’s Indians of Northwest America, published in the 
Transactions of the American Ethnological Society in 1848, Mr. Gallatin 
retains the name Wakash as a family designation, using a vocabulary 
of the Niwiti as a basis; but two of its dialects, the Hailtsa and Haelt- 
muk, he includes under the Nass family. Indeed, until recently the 
Maka, Hailtsuk, and Kwakiutl dialects have not been embraced in the 
Wakashan family by any writer, the first one to do so being Dr. Franz 
Boas, who has made extensive studies among these northwest peoples 
and collected vocabularies of many of them. Intermediate writers 
have used a number of names to designate this family, the principal 
ones adopting Nootka and Nootka-Columbian. 

The geographic distribution of the tribes forming this family, accord- 
ing to Major Powell, in his Indian Linguistic Families North of Mexico, 
published in the seventh annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology, in 
1891, is as follows: 


The tribes of the Aht division of this family are confined chiefly to the west coast 
of Vancouver Island. They range to the north as far as Cape Cook, the northern 
side of that cape being occupied by Haeltzuk tribes, as was ascertained by Dr. Boas, 
in 1886. On the south they reached to a little above Sooke Inlet, that inlet being 
in possession of the Soke, a Salishan tribe. 

The neighborhood of Cape Flattery, Washington, is occupied by the Makah, one 
the Wakashan tribes, who probably wrested this outpost of the family from the 
Salish (Clallam) who next adjoin them on Puget Sound, 

The boundaries of the Haleltzuk division of this family are laid down nearly as 
they appear on Tolmie and Dawson’s linguistic map of 1884. The west side of King 
Island and Cascade Inlet are said by Dr. Boas to be inhabited by Haeltzuk tribes, 
and are colored accordingly. 


vil 


Vill PREFACE. 


The accompanying paper embodies 251 titular entries, of which 220 
relate to printed books and articles and 31 to manuscripts. Of these, 
238 have been seen and described by the compiler, 215 of the prints 
and 23 of the manuscripts; leaving as derived from outside sources 5 
of the prints and 8 of the manuscripts. 

In addition to these, there are given in full a number of engraved 
titles, etc., all of which have been seen and described by the compiler; 
while in the notes mention is made of 25 printed and manuscript works, 
of which 14 have been seen and described by the writer. 

So far as possible, in reading the proof of this paper comparison has 
been made direct with the books and articles themselves. In this work 
access was had to the public and private libraries of this city, and Mr. 
Wilberforce Eames, librarian of the Lenox Library, New York, has 
kindly performed the same labor respecting books in his own and the 
Lenox Library. 

In the course of the work every facility has been given by Major J. 
W. Powell, Director of the Bureau; and, as is the case with all the 
previous papers of the series, Mr. P. C. Warman has contributed his 
valuable services. 


WASHINGTON, D. C., March 15, 1894. 


INTRODUCTION. 


In the compilation of this series of catalogues the aim has been to 
include in each bibliography everything, printed or in manuscript, relat- 
ing to the family of languages to which it is devoted: books, pamph- 
lets, articles in magazines, tracts, serials, etc., and such reviews and 
announcements of publications as seemed worthy of notice. 

The dictionary plan has been followed to its extreme limit, the sub- 
ject and tribal indexes, references to libraries, etc., being included in 
one alphabetic series. The primary arrangement is alphabetic by 
authors, translators of works into the native languages being treated as 
authors. Under each author the arrangement is, first, by printed works, 
and second, by manuscripts, each group being given chronologically; 
and in the case of printed books each work is followed through its 
various editions before the next in chronologic order is taken up. 

Anonymously printed works are entered under the name of the author, 
when known, and under the first word of the title not an article or 
preposition when not known. <A cross-reference is given from the first 
words of anonymous titles when entered under an author, and from the 
first words of all titles in the Indian languages, whether anonymous or 
not. Manuscripts are entered under the author when known, under 
the dialect to which they refer when he is not known. 

Each author’s name, with his title, etc., is entered in full but once, 
i. e., in its alphabetic order. Every other mention of him is by sur- 
name and initials only, except in those rare cases when two persons of 
the same surname have also the same initials. 

All titular matter, including cross-reference thereto, is in brevier; all 
collations, descriptions, notes, and mdex matter in noupareil. 

In detailing contents and in adding notes respecting contents, the 
spelling of proper names used in the particular work itself has been 
followed, and so far as possible the language of the respective writers 
is given. In the index entries of the tribal names the compiler has 
adopted that spelling which seemed to him the best. 

As a general rule initial capitals have been used in titular matter in 
only two cases: first, for proper names; and second, when the word 

Ix 


xX INTRODUCTION. 


actually appears on the title page with an initial capital and with the 
remainder in small capitals or lower-case letters. In giving titles in the 
German language the capitals in the case of all substantives have beea 
respected. 

When titles are given of works not seen by the compiler the fact is 
stated or the entry is followed by an asterisk within curves, and in 
either case the authority is usually given, 


INDEX OF LANGUAGES. 


Aht. See Tokoaat. 

Bellabella. See Hailtsuk. 

Cape Flattery Indians. See Maka. 

Claoquat. See Klaokwat. 

Coquilth. See Kwakiutl. 

Fuca Straits Indians. See Maka. 

oka Se a ee as, See leant eerie ae ee 27 
Hancock Harbor Indians. See Klaokwat. 

Kagutl. See Kwakiuti. 

King George Sound Indians. See Nutka. 


EIEN EMIT Yio ere One, ice NESS wee Ie te a ee NOR Os Sone oe eae 38 
Kwakiool. See Kwakiutl. 

ENTS tg ong en ae AP ne ah cp eee hoa Aad Sx a Deis HPS 39 
ELE: cle ee RAR IN ot a a ne ee 42 
Ears SOP in pe he Pesto Sit? PAS a edhe oa Sie e meh win Dawe 45 
Millbank Sound Indians. See Hailtsuk. 

OE RS Ole ene cL rao ems FPO wa en” eee wide Ae es eters ee 45 
REN AS eile aS ho ee wine La PEE ee Beas Ge A LP te hye ¢ 45 
UNM rete Se A Re EP Baie, eh eats Sere a ee Late ee 46 


Qagutl. See Kwakiutl. 

Quoquols. See Kwakiutl. 

ETERS hoo CPS Aa 2 ee, ete aiee at derte ty 7 Ta 56 
MUMMINROPPREE ere ec SO es 2 55, ok ee Cm es tue oe 57 
Tahkaht. See Tokoaat. 

Tlaoquatch. See Klaokwat. 


0S FEN OR aS RN ee 8 AS cat a a 59 
Uealta. See Ukwulta. 

Sc be a Be ng oo Ree ee 61 
Vancouver Island Indians. See Nutka. 

RUE SROEIEUFES, 200 5a° = ceo’ Shs,> aia pet I es PO SS eee 62 
MWikenak .... . Ge PEE ok Bey ie Aon as 63 


Yokultat. See Ukwulta. 
Yukulta. See Ukwulta. 


LIST: OF SEACSIMELES. 


Title-page of Hall’s Qa-guti translation of Matthew .... .... .-.-. 30 
Title-page of New York [1816?| edition of Jewitt’s Narrative.... 35 
x 


oo 


* 


' 


Mae 


oP ae 


wa. 


oY Arad 
% 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


By JAMES 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 


C. PILLING. 


(An asterisk within parentheses indicates that the compiler has seen no copy of the work referred to.) 


A 


Adelung (Johann Christoph) [and Vater | 


(J. S.)]. Mithridates | oder | allge- 
meine|Sprachenkunde|mit|dem Vater 
Unser als Sprachprobe | in bey nahe | 
fiinfhundert Sprachenund Mundarten, 
| von | Johann Christoph Adelung, | 
Churfiirstl. Siichsischen Hofrath und 
Ober-Bibliothekar. | [Two lines quota- 
tion.] | Erster[—Vierter] Theil. | 


Berlin, in der Vossischen Buchhand- | 


lung, | 1806[-1817]. 

4 vols. (vol. 3 in three parts), 8°. 

Numerals 1-3 of the Nutka (from Cook, 
Dixon, and Humboldt), vol. 3, part 3, p. 215.— 
Vocabulary (16 words from Cook) of the 


Nutka, vol. 3, part 3, p.2i5.—Numerals 1-10 of | 


the language spoken at King George Sound 
(from Portlock and Dixon), vol. 3, part 2, p. 215. 
Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, British Mu- 


seum, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, | 
’ >. 


Trumbull, Watkinson. 


Priced by Triibner (1856), no. 503, 11. 16s. | 


Sold at the Fischer sale, no. 17, for 1/.; another 
copy, no. 2042, for16s. At the Field sale, no, 16 


it brought $11.85; at the Squier sale, no. 9, $5) | 
Leclerc (1878) prices it, no. 2042,50 fr. At the | 
Pinart sale, no. 1322, it sold for 25 fr. and at the | 
Murphy sale, no. 24, a half-calf, marble-edged | 


copy brought $4. 


Aht. See Tokoaat. 


Alcala-Galiano (D. Dionisio). See 


Galiano (D. Alcala). 


Anderson (Alexander Caulfield). Notes 


onthe Indian tribes of British North- 
America, and the northwest coast. 
Communicated to Geo. Gibbs, esq. By 


Alex. C. Anderson, esq., lateof the Hon. | 


W Ak 1 


Anderson (A. C.) — Continued. 
H. B. Co. And read before the New York 
Historical Society, November, 1862. 

In Historical Magazine, first series, vol. 7, pp. 
73-81, New York and London, 1863, sm. 49. 
(Hames.) 

Includes a discussion of the Hailtins, Ucaltas, 
Hailtsa, and Coquilth. 

A rough manuscript of this article, aecom- 
panied by a letter from Mr. Anderson to Dr. 
Gibbs from Cathlamet, Wash, Ty., dated 
November, 1857, is in the library of the Bureau 
of Ethnology. 


Anderson (William). [Vocabularies and 
| numerals of the language of Nootka or 
King George Sound. ] 

In Cook (J.) and King (J.), Voyages to the 
Pacific Ocean, vol. 2, pp. 335-336, and vol. 3, pp. 
540-546, London, 1784, 4°. 

Short vocabulary (5 words) of the Nootka, 
vol. 2, p. 335.—Numerals 1-10, vol. 2, p.336.— 
Vocabulary (250 words and phrases), vol. 3, pp. 
540-546. 

Reprinted in the various editions of Cook 
(J.) and King (J.); also in whole or in part in 

Buschmann (J. C. E.), Die Vélker und 
Sprachen Neu-Mexico's. 

Fleurieu (C. P. C.), Voyage autour du monde. 

Fry (E.), Pantographia. 

Kerr (R.), General history and collection of 
voyages. 

La Harpe (J. F. de), Abrégé de l'histoire. 


Armstrong (A.N.) Oregon: | comprising 
a | brief history and full description | 
of the territories of | Oregon and Wash- 
ington, | embracing the | cities, towns, 
rivers, bays, | harbors, coasts, moun- 
tains, valleys, | prairies and plains; 

ii 


2 


Armstrong (A. N.) — Continued. 
together with remarks || upon the social 
position, productions, resources, and | 
prospects of the country, a disse1tation 
upon | the climate, and a full descrip- 
tion of | the Indian tribes of the Pacific 

| slope, their manners, etc. | Inter- 
spersed with | incidents of travel and 
adventure. | By A. N. Armstrong, | for 


three years a government surveyor in | 


Oregon. | 
Chicago: | published by Chas. Scott 
& co. | 1857. 


Title verso copyright 11. copy of correspond- | 


ence pp. iii-iv, index pp. v—vi, text pp. 7-147,12°. 
Vocabulary (44 words) of the Nootka lan- 
guage, pp. 146-147. 


iB: 


Bachiller y Morales (Antonio). Antig- 
iiedades Americanas. | Noticias | que 
tuvieron los Europeos de la América | 
4ntes del descubrimiento | de Crist6- 
balColon, | recogidas | por A. Bachiller 
y Morales. | Individuo corresponsal de 
mérito de la Academia Arqueolégico- 
Matriten- | se, de mérito de la Real 
Sociedad Econémica de la Habana, y 
corresponsal | de lade Puerto-Rico &c. 
| [Picture. ] | 

Habana. | Oficina del Faro Indus- 
trial, |Calledel Obispo num. 9. | 1845. 

Cover title 1 1. pp. 1-134, 11. map, sm. 4°. 

Word for hierro (iron) in a number of Amere 


ican languages, among them the Nutka, p. 100. 
Copies seen: Astor. 


Balbi (Adrien). Atlas | ethnographique 
du globe. |ou|classification des peuples 
| anciens et modernes | d’aprés leurs 
langues, | précédé | d’un discours sur 
Vutilité et Vimportance de l’étude des 
langues appliquée a4 plusieurs branches 
des connaissances humaines; d’un 
aper¢u | sur les moyens graphiques em- 
ployés par les différens peuples de la 
terre; d’un coup-d’ceil sur Vhistoire | de 
la langue slave, et sur la marche pro- 
gressive de la civilisation | et de la lit- 
térature en Russie, | avec environ sept 


cents vocabulaires des principaux idi- | 


omes connus, |et suivi | du tableau phy- 
sique, moral et politique | des cing par- 
ties du monde, | Dédié | 4S. M. l’Em- 
pereur Alexandre; |par Adrien Balbi, | 

ancien professeur de géographie, de 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Armstrong (A. N.)—Continued. 
Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenz#um, Con- 
gress. 


| Astor: This word following a title or within paren- 


theses after a note indicates that a copy of the 
work referred to has been seen by the compiler 
in the Astor Library, New York City. 


Authorities: 

See Dufossé (E.) 
Field (T. W.) 
Ludewig (H. E.) 
M’Lean(J.) 
Pilling (J. C.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Sabin (J.) 
Trumbull (J. 4.) 
Vater (J.S.) 


Balbi (A.)—Continned. 

physique et de mathématiques, | mem- 
bre correspondant de  Athénée de Tré- 
vise, etc. etc. | [Design.] | 

A Paris, | Chez Rey et Gravier, 
libraires, Quai des Augustins, N° 55. | 
M.DCCC.XXVI [1826]. | Imprimé chez 
Paul Renouard, rue Garenciére, N° 5, 
F.-S.-G. 


Half-title 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedication 
2 ll. table synoptique 1 1. text plates i-xli (single 
and double), table plates xlii-xlvi, additions 
plates xlvii-xlix, errata 1 p. folio. 

Langues de la céte occidentale de 1’Amér- 
ique du Nord, plate xxxy, includes, under no. 
846, the Wakash or Nootka, with a brief dis- 
cussion upon that language.— Tableau poly- 
glotte des langues americaines, [plate xli, 
includes avocabulary of the Nootkaor Wakash. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Eames, Powell, Watkinson. 


Bancroft: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Mr. H. H. Bancroft, 
San Francisco, Cal. 


Bancroft (Hubert Howe). The | native 
races | of | the Pacific states | of | 
North America. | By | Hubert Howe 
Bancroft.| Volume I. | Wild tribes[-V. 
Primitive history]. | 

New York: | D. Appleton and com- 
pany. | 1874[-1876]. 

5 vols. maps and plates, 8°. Vol. I. Wild 
tribes; I. Civilized nations; III. Myths and 
languages; IV. Antiquities; V. Primitive his- 
tory. 

Some copies of vol. 1 are dated 1875. (Kames, 
Lenox.) 


WAKASHAN 


Bancroft, (H. H.)—Continued. 

Personal pronouns of the Nass, Hailtsa, and 
Sebasas, vol. 3, p.606.—A few sentences (from 
Dunn), p. 607.—A few ‘‘ words in common” of 
the Hailtsa and Belacoola, p. 607.—The Nootka 
language of Vancouver Island, a general dis- 
cussion with examples, pp. 609-611. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Brinton, British 
Museum, Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, 
Eames, Lenox, Powell. 


The | native races | of | the Pacific 
states | of | North America. | By | Hu- 
bert Howe Bancroft. | Volume I. | Wild 
tribes[-V. Primitive history]. | 

Author’s Copy. | San Francisco. 1874 


[-1876]. 

5 vols. 8°. Similar, except on title-page, to 
edition titled above. One hundred copies 
issued. 


Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum, Con- 
gress. 

In addition to the above the work has been 
issued with the imprint of Longmans, London; 
Maisonneuve, Paris; and Brockhaus, Leipzig; 
none of which have I seen. 

Issued also with title-pages as follows: 


— The works | of | Hubert Howe Ban- 
eroft. | Volume I[-V]. | The native 
races. | Vol. I. Wild tribes[-V. Primi- 
tive history]. | 


LANGUAGES. 3 


| Bartlett (J. R,) — Continued, 


San Francisco: | A. L. Bancroft & | 


company, publishers. | 1882. 

5 vols. 8°. 
tory of Central America, History of Mexico, 
ete., each with its own system of numbering 
and also numbered consecutively in the series. 

Of these works there have been published 
vols. 1-39. The opening paragraph of vol. 39 
(1890) gives the following information: ‘‘ This 
volume closes the narrative portion of my his- 
torical series; there yet remains to be com- 
pleted the biographical section.” 

Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum, 
Bureau of Ethnology, Congress. 


Bartlett (John Russell). 
the Makah language. 
Manuscript, 1 page, folio; in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethnology. 
Includes the numerals 1-20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 
80, 90, 100. 


— Vocabulary of the Makah language. 
Manuscript, 6 leaves, folio, written on one 
side only; in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 
nology. 
Contains 180 words, recorded on one of the 
forms issued by the Smithsonian Institution. 
Equivalents of nearly all the words are given. 


John Russell Bartlett, author, born in Proy- 
idence, R.I., 23 Oct., 1805, died there 28 May, 
1886. He was educated for a mercantile career, 
entered the banking business at an early age, 


Numerals of 


This series will include the His- 


and was for six years cashier of the Globe bank 
in Providence. His natural bent appears to 
have been in the direction of science and belles: 
lettres, for he was prominent in founding the 
Providence athenzum and was an active ment- 
ber of the Franklin society. In1837 he engaged 
in business with a New York house, but was 
not successful, and entered the book-importing 
trade under the style of Bartlett & Welford. 
He became amember and was for several years 
corresponding secretary of the New York his- 
torical society, and was a member of the Amer- 
ican ethnographical society. In 185 President 
Taylor appointed him one of the commissioners 
to fix the boundary between the United States 
and Mexico under the treaty of Guadaloupe 
Hidalgo. This serviceoccupied him until 1853, 
when he was obliged to leave the work incom- 
plete, owing to the failure of the appropriation. 
He became secretary of state for Rhode Island 
in May, 1855, and held the office until 1872. He 
had charge of the John Carter Brown libraryin 
Providence for several years, and prepared a 
four-volume catalogue of it, of which one hun- 
dred copies were printed in the highest style of 
the art.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Bates (Henry Walton). Stanford’s | com- 


pendium of geography and travel | 
based on Hellwald’s‘ Die Erde und ihre 
Volker’ | Central America| the West In- 
dies | and|South America | Edited and 
extended | By H. W. Bates, | assistant- 
secretary of the Royal geographical 
society; | author of ‘The naturalist on 
the river Amazons’ | With | ethnolog- 
ical appendix by A. H. Keane, B. A. | 
Maps and illustrations | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, 8. W. | 1878 

Half-title verso blank 11. title verso blank 1 
1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, list of 
illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of maps p. xix, 
text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 448-561, index pp. 
563-571, maps, 8°. 

Keane (A. H.), Ethnography and Philology 
of America, pp. 443-561. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Eames, Geological Survey, National Museum. 
Stanford’s | compendium of geogra- 
phy and travel | based on Hellwald’s 
‘Die Erde und ihre Volker’ | Central 
America | the West Indies |and | South 
America | Edited and extended | By H. 
W. Bates, | Author of [&c. two lines] 
| With | ethnological appendix by A. 
H. Keane, M. A. J. | Maps and illustra- 
tions | Second and revised edition. | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, S. W. | 1882. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 


4 


B 


Bellabella. 


B 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


ates (H. W.) — Continued. 

1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, list of 
illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of maps p. xix, 
text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443-561, index pp. 
563-571, maps, 8°. 


Linguistic article as under title next above. | 


Copies seen: British Museum, Harvard. 


—— Stanford’s | compendium of geogra- 


phy and travel | based on Hellwald’s 


‘Die Erde und ihre Vélker’ | Central | 
America | the West Indies | and South | 


America 


Edited and extended | By H. | 


W. Bates, | assistant-secretary [&e.two | 


lines] | With | ethnological appendix by 
A. H. Keane, M. A.I. | Maps and illus- 
trations | Third edition | 

London | Edward Stanford, 55, Char- 
ing cross, S. W. | 1885 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 


1. preface pp. v-vi, contents pp. vii-xvi, list of | 


illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of maps p. xix, 
text pp. 1-441, appendix pp. 443-561, index pp. 
563-571, maps, 8°. 
Uinguistic article as under titles next above. 
Copies seen: Geological Survey. 


Beach (William Wallace). The | Indian 


miscellany ;| containing | Papers on the 
History, Antiquities, Arts, Languages, | 


Religions, Traditions and Superstitions | 
with |. | 


of | the American aborigines; 


Descriptions of their Domestic Life, | 
Manners, Customs,| Traits, Amusements | 
and Expleits; | travels and adventures | 
in the Indian country; | Incidents of | 


Border Warfare; Missionary Relations, 
etc, | Edited by W. W. Beach. | 

Albany: | J. Munsell, 82 State street. 

| 1877. 

Title verso blank 11. dedication verso blank 
11. advertisement verso blank 1 1. contents pp. 
vii-viii, text pp. 9-477, errata 1 p. index pp. 479- 
490, 8°. 

Gatschet (A. 5.), Indian languages of the 
Pacific states and territories, pp. 416-447. 

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, British Museum, 
Congress, Eames, Geological Survey, Massa- 
chusetts Historical Society, Pilling, Wisconsin 
Historical Society. 

Priced by Leclere, 1878 catalogue, no. 2663, 20 


Blenkinsop (George). 


OF THE 


| Berghaus (H.) — Continued. 


Verbreitung aller, nach ihrer Sprach- 
verwandtschaft geord- | neten, Volker 
des Erdballs, und ihre Vertheilung in 
die Reiche und Staaten | der alten wie 
derneiien Welt abgebildet und versinn- 
licht worden ist. | Ein Versuch | von | 
D° Heinrich Berghaus. | 

Verlag von Justus Perthes in Gotha. 

| 1852. 

Title of the series (Dr. Heinrich Berghaus’ 
physikalischer Atlas, ete.)verso 1.1 recto blank, 
title as above verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-68, 19 
maps, folio. 

Trausmontaine Gruppe treats of the habitat 
and linguistic relations of the peoples of the 
northwest coast, among them the Wakash and 
its tribal divisions, p. 56.—Map no. 17is entitled 
‘‘Ethnographische Karte von Nordamerika,”’ 
Nach von Alb. Gallatin, A. von Humboldt, 
Clavigero, Hervas, Hale, Isbester, ete. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology. 


Bergholtz (Gustaf Fredrik). The Lord’s 


Prayer | in the | Principal Languages, 
Dialects and | Versions of the World, | 
printed in | Type and Vernaculars of 
the | Different Nations, | compiled and 
published by | G. F. Bergholtz. 

Chicago, Illinois, | 1884. 

Title verso copyright 1 1. contents pp. 3-7, 
preface p. 9, text pp. 11-200, 12°. 

The Lord's prayer in a number of American 
languages, among them the Qagutl (from Hall), 
p. 148. 

Copies seen: Congress. 


Bible: 


See Hall (A. J.) 
Hall (A. J.) 


Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 


Matthew 
John 


Bible passages: 


Kwakiutl See British. 

Kwakiutl Gilbert (—) and Rivington (—). 
See Dawson (G. 
M.) 


Boas: This word following a title or within paren- 


theses after a note indicates that the compiler 
has seen a copy of the work referred to belong- 
ing to the library of Dr. Franz Boas. 


| Boas(Dr. Franz). On certain songs and 


fr.; the Murphy copy, no. 197, brought $1.25; | 


priced by Clarke & co. 1886 catalogue, no. 6271, 
$3.50, and by Littlefield, Nov. 1887, no. 50, $4. 
See Hailtsuk. 


erghaus (Dr. Heinrich), Allgemeiner 
| ethnographischer Atlas | oder | Atlas 
der Volker-Kunde. | Eine Sammlung | 
von neiinzehn Karten, | auf denen die, 
um die Mitte des neiinzehnten Jahrhun- 
derts statt findende | geographische 


dances of the Kwakiutl of British 
Columbia. [Signed Franz Boas. ] 
In Journal ot Am. Folk-lore, vol. 1, pp. 49- 
64, Boston and New York, 1888, 8°. (Pilling.) 
Songs with music, verses with interlinear 
English translation, proper names, mythic 
terms, ete. 


| —— Poetry and music of some North 


American tribes. 

In the Swiss Cross, vol. 2, pp. 146-148, New 
York, 1888, sm.4°. (Pilling.) 

A song, with music. of the [Wakashan] 
Indians of British Columbia, p. 148. 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 5 


Boas (F.)— Continued. 
— The Indians of British Columbia. 
By Dr. Franz Boas. 

In Popular Science Monthly, vol. 32, pp. 628- 
636, New York, 1888, 8°. (Pilling.) 

A few Kwakiutl terms passim. 

— Die Mythologie der nord-west-amer- 
ikanischen Kiistenvélker. 

In Globus, vol. 53, pp. 121-127, 1538-157, 299- 
302, 315-319; vol. 54, pp. 10-14, Braunschweig, 
1888, 4°. (Geological Survey.) 

Terms of the native languages of the north- 
west coast of British America, including afew 
of the Kwakiutl, with meanings, passim. 

The houses of the Kwakiutl Indians, 

British Columbia. By Dr. Franz Boas. 
In National Museum Proce. for 1888, pp. 197- 

213, Washington, 1889, 8°. (Pilling.) 
Kwakiutl terms, with meanings, passim. 


— The Indians of British Columbia. 


By Franz Boas, Ph.D. (Presented by 
Dr. T. Sterry Hunt, May 30, 1888.) 


In Royal Soc. of Canada, Trans. vol. 6, sec- / 


tion 2, pp. 47-57, Montreal, 1889, 4°. (Puilling.) 
A short vocabulary (18 words) of the Wik’- 

é nok, showing affinities with the Bilqula, p. 

49.—K wakiutl and Wik’é nok terms, pp. 53-55. 


—— Preliminary notes on the Indians of | 


British Columbia. 

In British Ass. Ady. Sci. report of the fifty- 
eighth meeting, pp. 233-242, London, 1889, 8°. 
(Geological Survey.) 

Kwakiutl and Heiltsuk terms, pp. 238-239. 

Tssued also as follows: 


Preliminary notes on the Indians of 
British Columbia. 


In British Ass. Ady. Sci. fourth report of the 


committee appointed for the purpose 
of investigating and publishing reports on the 


northwestern tribes of the Dominion of 


Canada, pp.4-10 [London, 1889], 8°. 
Pilling.) 


(Eames, | 


Linguistic contents as under title next above, 


pp. 7-8. 

— First General Report on the Indians 
of British Columbia. By Dr. Franz 
Boas. 

In British Ass. Adv. Sci. report of the fifty- 
ninth meeting, pp. 801-893, London, 1890, 8°. 
(Geological Survey.) 

The Kwakiutl, with a list of dialects, totems, 
terms, and emblems, pp. 827-829.— Names, with 
meanings, of the Kwakiutl groups, p. 849. 

Issuved also as follows: 


First General Report on the Indians 
of British Columbia. By Dr. Franz 
Boas. 

In British Ass. Adv. Sci. fifth report of the 
committee appointed for the purpose 
of investigating and publishing reports on the 


Boas (F.) — Continued. 
northwestern tribes of the Dominion of 
Canada, pp. 5-97, London [1890], 8°. (Pilling.) 
Linguistic contents as under titlenext above, 

pp. 31-33, 53. 

Second General 
Indians of British Columbia. 
Franz Boas. 

In British Ass. Adv. Sci. report of the six- 
tieth meeting, pp. 562-715, London, 1891, 8°. 
(Geological Survey.) 

The Nootka (pp. 582-604) includes the follow- 
ing: A list of the tribes and their habitat, p. 
583.—Names, with meanings, of the septs of 
the different Nootka tribes, p.584.—Names of 
the chiefs of the septs, pp. 585-587.—Songs set 
to music, with translation, and many Nootka 
terms passim, pp. 588-604. 

The Kwakiutl (pp. 604-632) ineludes: Listof 
tribes, their gentes, habitat, etc., pp. 604-607.— 
Social organization, with many terms passim, 
pp. 608-614.—Secret societies, with lists, songs 
with interlinear translations, and many terms 
passim, pp. 614-632. 

Kwakiutl linguistics (Kwakiutl and Héilt- 
suk’ dialects) includes: Comparative vocabula- 
ries, numerals, grammatic notes on nouns, 
adjectives, pronouns, verbs with conjugations, 
formation of words, ete., pp. 668-678. —Compar- 
ison between the Kwakiutl and Nootka lan- 
guages, pp. 678-679. 

Comparative vocabulary of eighteen lan- 
guages spoken in British Columbia, pp. 692- 
715, includes three dialects of the Kwakiutl- 


Report on the 
By Dr. 


Nootka, viz, Heiltsuk, Kwakiutl, Nootka- 
Ts’éciath. 
Tssued also as follows: 
/——Second General Report on the 
Indians of British Columbia. By Dr. 


Franz Boas. 

In British Ass. Adv. Sci. sixth report on the 
northwestern tribes of Canada, pp. 10-163, Lon- 
don [1891], 8°. (Pilling.) 

Linguistic contents as under titlenext above, 
pp. 31, 32, 35, 35, 36-52, 52-55, 56-62, 62-80, 103-116, 
117-127, 140-163. 

— Vocabulary of the Kwakiutl In- 
dians. By Dr. Franz Boas. 

In American Philosoph. Soc. Proc. vol. 31, pp. 
34-82, Philadelphia, 1893, 8°. (Geological Sur- 
vey.) 

General account of the Kwakiutl and their 
language, pp. 34-35. — Vocabulary, alphabeti- 
cally arranged, pp. 36-82. 


[Linguistic material relating to the 
Kwakiutl language. } (GS) 
Manuscript, 227 pages, 4°, in possession of 
its author, who writes me, December, 1893, 
concerning it, as follows: Collected at Chicago 
during the World’s Columbian Exposition and 
r.corded in a blank book. The book contains 
songs and legends, with lexical and grammat- 
ical explanations, vocabularies, and grammat- 


6 


Boas (F.) — Continued. 


— Vocabulary of the Nootka dialect. (*) 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


ical notes. 
follows: 
1. Kwakiutl tribe: 
Thirteen old songs belonging to the 
Tsetsaeka ceremonial. | 
Thirty-one songs of Tsetsaeka dances. 
Fifteen songs belonging to Tsetsaeka masks. 
Three Potlatsh songs. 
Two songs frotn traditions. 
Five shaman’s songs. 
Three Laolaxa songs. 
Two prayers to the sun. 
Three love songs. 
Two morning songs. 
Two children’s songs. 
2. Nimkish tribe: 
Five songs of Tsetsaeka dances. 
3. Koskimo tribe: | 
One song of Tsetsaeka dance. / 
4. Newette tribe: 
Four old songs belonging to the Tsetsaeka 
ceremonial. 
Eleven songs of Tsetsaeka dances. 
Nine songs of Nonleow dances. 
Three war songs. 
5. Traditions: 
Q'a/nigilak. 
Mink and the wolves. 


The contents may be described as 


Bourgoing (Jean Francois). 


Mink and the sun. 
Mink’s burial. 

Mink and otter. 
Kuekuaxa/oe. 
Lelaxa. 

Om'axtalase. 
Nomasényélis. 
Seé/niae. 

The deer and his son. 


Manuscript, 42 pages, folio, in possession 
of its author, who informs me it consists of 
about 1,400 words. 

Franz Boas was born in Minden, Westphalia, | 
Germany, July 9, 1858. From 1877 to 1882 he 
attended the universities of Heidelberg, Bonn, 
and Kiel. The year 1882 he spent in Berlin, pre- 
paring for an Arctic voyage, and sailed June, 
1883, to Cumberland Sound, Baffin Land, travel- 
ing inthat region until September, 1884, return- 
ing via St. Johns, Newfoundland, to New York. 
The winter of 1884-’85 he spent in Washing- 
ton, preparing the results of his journey for 
publication and in studying in the National 
Museum. From 1885 to 1886 Dr. Boas was an 
assistant in the Royal Ethnographical Museum 
of Berlin and docent of geography at the Uni- 
versity of Berlin. Inthe winter of 1885-’86 he 
journeyed to British Columbia, under the 
auspices of the British Association for the 
Advancement of Science, for the purpose of 
studying the Indians. During 1886-88 Dr. 
Boas was assistant editor of Science, in New 
York, and from 1888 to 1292 docent of anthro- 
pology at Clark University, Worcester, Mass. 
During these years he made repeated journeys 
to the Pacific coast, with the object of con- 


Brabant (Jtev. A. J.) 


Boas (F..)—Continued. 


tinuing his researches among the Indians. In 
1881 Kiel gave him the degree of Ph. D. 
Dr. Boas’s principal writings are: Baffin 


Land, Gotha, Justus Perthes, 1885; The Central 


Eskimo (intheéth Amnual Report of the Bureau 
of Ethnology); Reports to the British Associa- 


tion for the Advancement of Science on the - 


Indians of British Columbia, 1888-1892; Volks- 
sagen aus Britisch Columbien, Verh. der Ges. 
fiir Anthropologie, Ethnoiogie und Urge- 
schichte in Berlin, 1891. 


Boston Athenzum: These words following atitle 


or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
acopy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of that institution, 
Boston, Mass. 


Boston Public: These words following a title or 


within parentheses after a note indicate that a 
copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in that library, Boston, Mass. 


Boulet (fev. Jean-Baptiste), editor. See 


Youth’s, 


Relation 
(Wun voyage récent des Espagnols sur 
les cétes nord-ouest de V Amérique sep- 
tentrionale, 1792. 

In Archives Littéraires de l'Europe, vol. 2, 
pp. 54-89, Paris, 1804, 8°. (British Museum.) 


Numerals 1-10 of the Eskelen, Nutka, and 


Rumsien (from Humboldt), pp. 78, 79, 87. 


[Linguistic mate- 
rial in and relating to the Neskwiat or 
Nutka language. } 

Manuscript in possession of its author, who 
writes me from the Nesquat mission, British 
Columbia, under date of December 14, 18938, as 
follcws: 

‘“T had spent about three months of the sum- 
mer of 1874 with Right Rev. Bishop Seghers 
among the natives of this coast, when the pre- 
late concluded to establish a mission at Hes- 
quiat, the entrance to Nootka Sound, and com- 
missioned me to take charge of it in May, 1875. 
You inquire about my work on the language. I 
give you the information you ask for withmuch 
pleasure. 

‘‘As I had no books that I could consult, and 
in fact I haveup to this day seen nothing about 
the language worth consulting, I selected two 
Indians who knew a few words of Chinook, and 
with the help of the Jargon began to collect a 
number of familiar words and expressions. 
After a while I noticed that these people when 
speaking observed certain rules and forms, and 
so I set to work and marked down anything in 
that line I could notice. Of course as time and 
my knowledge of the language advanced the 
task was rendered much more easy; and finally 
I put my notes alittle in shape, not with the 
idea of having anything published, but for my 
own satisfaction and for the use of any of our 
priests who, being stationed among these 


ee. 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 1 


Brabant (A. J.) — Continued. Brinton (Dr. Daniel Garrison). The 


Indians, may feel a desire to use my notes to 
facilitate for themselves the study of the lan- 
guage. I have followed the order generally 
adopted in the writing of a grammar, beginning 
with the nouns, their gender, number, etc.; 
then the adjectives, degrees of comparison, 
diminutives, the numerals; next come the pro- 
nouns, followed by the verbs, with their differ- 
ent forms of conjugation. This part is proper 
to the Hesquiats, Mowachats, and Makchelats, 
the aftix slightly differing in the language of 
the other tribes. 
about the adverbs; but I have collected several 
hundred affixes and prefixes which play an 


I have only a short chapter | 


important role in the use of the language. These | 


are amply explained by examples. 

“While teaching school I translated our class 
book, Learning to spell, to read, to wrile, and to 
compose, by J. A. Jacobs, A. M., principal of 
the Kentucky Institution for the Education of 
Deaf Mutes. 

‘Bishop Seghers in 1874 translated some of 
the Catholic prayers, but under very unfavor- 
able circumstances. A few years later I was 
instructed by his successor to overhaul them 
and put them in their present shape. I trans- 
lated the small Chinook catechism of Bishop 
Demers, afterwards selecting the principal 
parts and putting it into a more succinct form 
for the use of adults. 

“En passant, lagree with you that the name 
of the language of this coast ought to remain 
the Nutka language; the term Aht, which has 
been adopted lately by certain parties, being a 
useless innovation, calculated to cause confu- 
sion, besides not conveying the sound or the 
meaning which it is intended to convey. 

“T may add that the word Nutka is the fre- 
quentative of Nutkshitl, which means to go 
round (French faire le tour de), i. e., Nutka 
Island, a word that would likely have been used 
by the natives upon the white men asking, 
through signs, the name of Nutka Sound or 
Island. The term used for over a century 
ought to remain.” 


The Lord’s prayer in the Nesquiat or 
Nootka language. 


‘ Manuscript in the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology. It is acopy written on the back of 
a letter dated September 19, 1889, from the Rev. 
J. B. Boulet, Sehome, Wash. In a subsequent 
letter Father Boulet informs me that ‘it was 
copied from a copy I have in my possession, 
written by the Rey. A.J. Brabant, a missionary 
on the west coast of Vancouver Island. In all 
probability the reverend gentleman is himself 
the translator, as he has been on that coast for 
twenty years.” 


Brinley (George). See Trumbull (J. H.) 


Brinton: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates that acopy of | 


the work referred to has been seen by the com- 


piler in the library of Dr. D. G. Brinton, Phila. | 


delphia, Pa. 


American Race: | A Linguistic Classi- 
fication and Ethnographic | Descrip- 
tion of the Native Tribes of | North 
and South America. | By | Daniel G. 
Brinton, A. M., M.D., | Professor [&e. 
ten lines.] | 

New York: | N. D. C. Hodges, Pub- 
lisher, | 47 Lafayette Place. | 1891. 

Title verso copyright notice 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. preface pp. ix-xii, con- 
tents pp. xiii-xvi, text pp. 17-332, linguistic 
appendix pp. 333-364, additions and corrections 
pp. 365-368, index of authors pp. 369-373, index 
of subjects pp. 374-392, 80, 

Linguistic classification of the North Pacific 
stocks (pp. 108-109) includes the Kwakiootl or 
Haeltzukian (Heiltzuk, Kwakiutl, Quaisla), 
and Nutka or Wakashan (Aht, Nootka, 
Wakash), p. 108. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 

Daniel Garrison Brinton, ethnologist, born in 
Chester County, Pa., May 13, 1837. He was 
graduated at Yale in 1858 and at the Jefferson 
Medical College in 1861, after which he spent a 
year in Europe in study and in travel. On his 
return he entered the army, in August, 1862, as 
acting assistant surgeon. In February of the 
following year he was commissioned surgeon 
and served as surgeon in chief of the second 
division, eleventh corps. Hewas present at the 
battles of Chancellorsville, Gettysburg, and 
other engagements, and was appointed medical 
director of his corps in October, 1863. In con- 
sequence of a sunstroke received soon after the 
battle of Gettysburg he was disqualified for 
active service, and in the autumn of that year he 
became superintendent of hospitals at Quincy 
and Springfield, I1l., until August, 1865, when, 
the civil war having closed, he was brevetted 
lieutenant-colonel and discharged. He then 
settled in Philadelphia, where he became editor 
of The Medical and Surgical Reporter, and 
also of the quarterly Compendium of Medical 
Science. Dr. Brinton has likewise been a 
constant contributor to other medical journals, 
chiefly on questions of public medicine and 
hygiene, and has edited several volumes on 
therapeutics and diagnosis, especially the pop- 
ular series known as Napheys’s Modern Ther- 
apeutics, which has passed through many 
editions. In the medical controversies of the 
day, he has always taken the position that med- 
ical science should be based on the results of 
clinical observation rather thanon ph ysiological 
experiments. He has become prominent as a 
student and a writer on American ethology, 
his work in this direction beginning while he 
was astudent in college. The winter of 1856-57, 
spent in Florida, supplied him with material 
for his first published book on the subject. In 
1884 he was appointed professor of ethnology 
and archeology in the Academy of Natural 
Sciences, Philadelphia. For some years he has 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Brinton (D. G.) — Continued. 

been president of the Numismatic and Anti- 
quarian Society of Philadelphia, and in 1886 he 
was elected vice-president of the American 
Association for the Advancement of Science, to 
preside over the section on anthropology. Dur- 
ing the same year he was awarded the medal 
of the Société Américaine de France for his 
“numerous and learned works on American 
ethnology,” being the first native of the United 
States that has been so honored. In 1885 the 
American publishers of the Iconographie En- 
cyclopedia requested him to edit the first vol- 
ume, to contribute to it the articles on ‘‘Anthro- 


ology” and ‘‘ Ethnology,” and to revise that on | 
bao T mJ? 


‘‘Ethnography,’’by Professor Gerland, of Stras- 
burg. He also contributed to the second vol- 


ume of the same work an essay on the ‘‘ Prehis- | 
toric Archeology of both Hemispheres.” Dr. | 


Brinton bas established a library and publish- 
ing house of aboriginal American literature, 
for the purpose of placing within the reach of 
scholars authentic materials for the study of 
the languages and culture of the native races of 
America. Each workis the production of native 
minds and is printed in the original. The 
series, mostof which were edited by Dr. Brinton 
himself, include The Maya Chronicles (Phila- 
delphia, 1882); The Iroquois Book of Rites 
(1883); The Giiegiience: A Comedy Ballet in 
the Nahuatl Spanish Dialect of Nicaragua 
(1883); A Migration Legend of the Creek In- 
dians (1884); The Lenape and Their Legends 
(1885); The Annals of the Cakchiquels (1885) ; 
{Ancient Nahuatl Poetry (1887); Rig Veda 
Americanus (1890)]. Besides publishing numer- 
ous papers he has contributed valuable reports 
on his exaninations of mounds, shell-heaps, 
rock inscriptions, and other antiquities. He is 
the author of The Floridian Peninsula: Its Lit- 
erary History, Indian Tribes, and Antiquities 
(Philadelphia, 1859); The Myths of the New 
World: A Treatise on the Symbolism and 
Mythology of the Red Race of America (New 
York, 1868); The Religious Sentiment: A Con- 
tribution to the Science and Philosophy of 
Religion (1876); American Hero Myths: A 
Study in the Native Religions of the Western 
Continent (Philadelphia, 1882); Aboriginal 
American Authors and their Productions, 
Especially those in the Native Languages 
(1883) and A Grammar of the Cakchiquel Lan- 
guage of Guatemala (1884).—Appleton’s Cyclop. 
of Am. Biog. 


British and Foreign Bible Society: These words | 


following a title or within parentheses after a 
note indicate that a copy of the work has been 
seen by the compiler in the library of that insti- 
tution, 146 Queen Victoria Street, London, Eng. 
British and Foreign Bible Society. 
Esaur. oTb Joanna, ra. 3ii cr. 16.| OOpasypi 
TepeBOAOBb CBAMEHHAaro MNCaHiA, | 134anAbix’ | 

BeANKOOPUTAHCKOMS UM WHOCTPAHHbIM | On0.1e- 
iickHM1 ooOmjectBOM®. | [Design and one line 
quotation. } | 


British and Foreign Bible Society.— 


Continued. 

Heyarano JA OpntTanckaro O MnHocTpannaro 
BudsjeiicKaro | oOujectBa, | y Coabdepta un Pa- 
Buurrona (Limited), 52, Cr. Axoncs Creeps, 

Aon job. | 1885. 

Literal translation: The gospel by John, 3d 
chapter, 16th verse. | Samples | of the transla- 
tions of the holy scripture, | published | by the 
British and foreign | bible society. | [Design.] 

| ‘‘God’s word endureth forever.” | 

Printed for the British and foreign bible | 
society, | at Gilbert & Rivington’s (Limited), 
52, St. John’s Square, London. | 1885. 

Printed covers (title as above on front one 
verso quotation and notes), contents pp. 5-7, 
text pp. 9-68, 16°. 

Matthew, xi, 28, in the Ka-gutl (Vancouver 
Island), no. 107, p. 36. 

Copies secn: Pilling. 

The earlier issues of this work, titles of which 
will be found in the Bibliography of the Algon- 
quian Languages, contain no Wakashan mate- 
rial. 


— Ey.St. Joh. iii. 16. | in den meisten 


der| Sprachen und Dialecte in welchen 
die | Britische und Auslindische Bibel- 
gesellschaft | die heilige Schrift druckt 
und verbreitet. | [Design and one line 
quotation.] |. Vermehrte Auflage. | 

London: | Britische und Ausliindische 
Bibelgesellschaft, | 146 Queen Victoria 
Street, E.C. | 1885. 

Title as above on cover reverse a quotation, 
contents pp. 1-4, text pp. 5-67 (verso of p. 67 
notes), remarks, officers, agencies, ete. 3 ll. 16°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
no. 98, p. 52. 

Copies seen: Pilling, 

In this edition and in those titled below the 
languages are arranged alphabetically. 


—— St. Jean III. 16, &c. | Spécimens | de 


la traduction de ce passage dans la plu- 
part | des langues et dialectes | dans 
lesquels la | Société Biblique Britan- 
nique et Etrangére | a imprimé ou mis 
en circulation les saintes écritures. | 
[Design and one line quotation. ] | 

Londres: | Société biblique britan- 
nique et étrangere, | 146, Queen Vic- 
toria Street, E.C. | 1885. 

Title on cover as above reverse quotation, 
contents pp. 1-4, text pp. 5-67 (verso of p. 67 
observations), remarks etc. 3 1]. 16°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible Soci- 
ety, Pilling. 


—— St. John iii. 16, &c. | in most of the | 


languages and dialects | in which the | 
British and foreign bible society | has 


— | 


WAKASHAN 


British and Foreign Bible Society—C’ td. 
printed or circulated the holy serip- | 
tures. | [Design and one line quota- 
tion.) | Enlarged edition. | 

London: | the British and foreign 
bible society, | 146, Queen Victoria 
Street, London, E.C. | 1885. 

Title as above verso quotation and notes, 
contents pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-67, remarks ete. | 
verso p. 67 and two following 11. 16°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 
Copies seen; British and Foreign Bible Soci- 
ety, Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 
Some copies, otherwise unchanged, are dated 

1886. (Pilling.) 

—— St. John iii. 16, &c. | inmostof the | 
languages and dialects | in which the | 
British and foreign bible society | has 
printed or circulated the holy scrip- 
tures.: [ Design and one line quotation. | 
| Enlarged edition. | 

London: | the British and foreign 
bible society, | 146, Queen Victoria | 
Street, London, E.C. | 1888. 

Frontispiece (fac-simile of the Queen’s text) 

1 1. title as above verso quotation and notes, 
contents pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-67, remarks etc. | 
verso p. 67 and two following Il. 16°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above. 

Copies seen: Kames, Pilling, Wellesley. 
—— St. John iii. 16, &c. | in most of the | 
languages and dialects | in which the | 
British and foreign bible society | has 
printed or circulated the holy scrip- 
tur and one line quotation. | 
| Enlarged edition. | 

London: | the British and foreign | 
bible society, | 146 Queen Victoria | 
Street, London, E. C. | 1889. 

Title as above verso notes ete. 1 1. contents | 
pp- 3-4, text pp. 5-83, historical sketch ete. 211. | 
16°. | 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, | 
no. 156, p. 48. 

Copies seen : 

Some copies are dated 1890. 


Hames, Pilling, Wellesley. 
(Pilling.) 
— St. John iii. 16, &c. | in mostof the | 
languages and dialects | in which the | 
British anit foreign bible society | has 
printed or circulated the holy serip- | 
tures. | [Design and one line quotation. | 
| With an appendix of new versions. | 
London: | the British and _ foreign | 
bible society, | 146 Queen Victoria | 
Street, London, E.C. | 1893. | 
Cover titie, title as above verso notes etc. 1 
1. text pp. 5-83, list of additions p. 84, appendix | 
of new versions pp. 85-90, colophon verso | 
picture 11. sketch of the society 1 1. 


—— The Chee-Chinook 


LANGUAGES. 9 


_ British and Foreign Bible Society—C td. 


Linguistic contents as under title nextabove. 
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


| British Museum: These words following a title or 


within parentheses after a note indicate that a 
copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of that institution, 
London, Eng. 


Brown: This word following a title or within pa 


rentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of the late John Carter 
3rown, Providence, R. I. 


Bulmer(Dr.Thomas Sanderson). Chinook 


Jargon | grammar and dictionary | 
compiled by | T.S. Bulmer, M.D.,C.M., 
F.S. A., London, Surgeon-Accoucheur, 
Royal Coilege of Surgeons, England. | 
Author of [&c. four lines. ] (*) 

Manuscript in possession of its author, Salt 
Lake City, Utah, who furnished me the above 
transcript of the title-page, and who wrote me, 
October, 1891, concerning it as follows: “Ishall 
issue it on Hall's typewriter, and then duplicate 
copies with another special machine, and use 
various types on the machine, testing the uses 
of each. Fifty pages will be devoted 
to the origin of the language from all sources. 
Examples of hymns from various languages 
will be given.” 

Contains many words of Wakashan origin, 
some of which are so indicated. 


—— Chinook Jargon language. | Part II. 


| [Two lines Chinook Jargon.] | To be 
completed in IX parts. | Compiled by 
| T.S. Bulmer, M. D., C.M., F.S. A. Se. 
A., London. | Ably assisted by | Rev’d 
M. Eells, D. D., and Rey’d Pere N. L. 
St. Onge, (formerly missionary to the 
| Yakama Indians), 

Manuscript; title as above verso blank 1 1. 
text ll. 1-124, 4°. In possession of Dr. Bulmer. 

Comparison of languages (20 words and 
phrases) in Tlaoquatch and Nootka, with the 
Columbian and Chinook, ll. 634-64.—Wakashan 
words passim. 
language 
Chinook Jargon. | In | IX parts. 
III. | English-Chinook dictionary. | 
First edition. | By TS. Bulmer, ably 
assisted by | the Revd. M. Eells, D. D., 
& the Revd. Pére Saint Onge, both mis- 
sionaries to the Indians in Washington 
& Oregon states. 

Manuscript; title verso blank 1 1. preface 
verso blank 1 1. special note for readers verso 
blank 1 1. ‘‘ memos to guide the reader” 211. text 
alphabetically arranged by English words ll. 


1-189, writtenon one side only. folio. 
sion of its author, 


In posses- 
who kindly loaned it to me 


10 


Bulmer (T. S.) — Continued. 

for examination. In his ‘‘memos” the author 
gives a listof letters used to indicate the origin 
of the respective words OC, N, I, E, F, Ch, Yak., 
Chinook, Nootka, Indian, English, French, Chi- 
halis, and Yakama; and a second list of per- 
sons from whom the words were obtained and 
localities in which they were used. 

“In my selection of the term Chee-Chinook 
I merely intend to convey to students that it 


has its principal origin in the Old or Original | 


Chinook language; and although it contains 


many other Indian words as wellas Frenchand | 


English, yet it came forth from its mother as an 
hybrid, andas such has been bred and nourished 
asanursling from the parent stem. I therefore 
designate it as a chee or new Chinook—the word 
chee being a Jargon word for lately, just now, 
new” 

] Chinook Jargon dictionary. Part 
III. Chinook-English. 

Manuscript; 121 leaves folio, written on one 
side only, interspersed with 40 blank leaves 
inserted for additions and corrections. In 
possession of its author. 

The dictionary occupies 106 leaves, and many 
ofthe words are followed by their equivalents 


[ 


in the languages from which they are derived, | 


and the authority therefor. Appended to the 

dictionary are the following: Original Indian 

names of town sites, rivers, mountains, etc., in 
the western parts of the State of Washington: 

Skokomish, 2 ]l.; Chemakum, Lower Chihalis, 

Duwamish, 11.; Chinook, 2 11.; miscellaneous, 2 

ll.—Names of various places in the Klamath 

and Modoc countries, 3 ll.—Camping places 
and other localities around the Upper Klamath 

Lake, 5 ll. 

] Appendix to Bulmer’s Chinook- 

Jargon grammar and dictionary. 
Manuscript; ll. 1-70, 4°; in possession of its 

author. 

Contains a number of words of Wakashan 
origin, some of which are so indicated. 

] Part II | of | Bulmer’s Appendix | 
to the Chee-Chinook | Grammar and 
Dictionary. 

Manuscript; 57 11. 4°; in possession of its 
author. 
Wakashan words passim. 

[——] The Christian prayers | in Chin- 
ook [Jargon]. 

Manuscript; 61 ll. 4°; in possession of its 
author. 

Prayers in Chinook Jargon, ll. 1-5.—Lessons 
1-17in Chinook Jargon, with English headings, 
l). 6-23.—List of special words adopted by 
Fathers Blanchet and Demers in connection 
with the service of the mass, ll. 24~25.—Trans- 
lation of the Chinook prayers into Enelish, 1]. 
26-38.—Copy of a sermon preached by Rev. Dr. 
Fells to the Indians at Wallawalla, with inter- 
linear English translation, 11.39-46. ‘‘Of the 97 
words used, 46 are of Chinook origin, 17 Nootka, 
3 Selish, 23 English, 2 Jargon, and 6 in 


[ 


[ 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Bulmer (T. 8.) — Continued. 
French.’’—Articles of faith of the Congrega- 
tional church at Skokomish, Washington, in 
the Jargon with interlinear English transla- 
tion, ll. 47-52.—Oration in Chinook Jargon with 
interlinear English translation, ll. 53-54.— 
Prayers to God in English blank verse, ll. 55- 
56; the same in Jargon with interlinear English 
translation, ll. 57-61. 

In addition tothe above papers, Dr. Bulmer is 
also the author of a number of articles appear- 
iug in Father Le Jeune’s Kamloops Wawa, q. v. 

I am indebted to Dr. Bulmer for the notes 
upon which is based the following account: 

Thomas Sanderson Bulmer wasborn in 1834,in 
Yorkshire, England. He was educated at Pres- 
ton grammar school, Stokesley, and at Newton 
under Brow, was advanced under Rey. C. Cator 
and Lord Beresford’s son at Stokesley, and after- 
wards was admitted a pupil of the York and 
Ripon diocesan college. He was appointed prin- 
cipal of Doncaster union agricultural schools, 
but soon after emigrated to New York. There 
he took charge, as head master, of General 
Hamilton's free school; thence he went to 
Upper Canada and was appointed one of the pro- 
fessors in L’Assomption Jesuit College. From 
there he went to Rush Medical College and Lind 
University, Chicago; thence to the Ecole Nor- 
male, Montreal; thence to Toronto University, 
medical department. Later he continued his 
studies in the Ecole de Médecine and McGill 
University, Montreal, and graduated in medi- 
cine at Victoria University. In1868 he crossed 
to London, whence he proceeded to New Zea- 
land, and was appointed superintendent of 
quarantine at Wellington. In Tasmania and 
Australia he held similar positions. His health 
failing, he went to Egypt, and later returned to 
England. The English climate not agreeing 
with him, he took a tour of the Mediterranean 
ports. Returning to London, the Russian 
grippe attacked him, and he was warned to seek 
a new climate. He returned to Montreal, en 
route for the Rocky Mountains, where hesought 
Indian society for a considerable time. Finding 
winter disastrous to him, he proceeded to Utah 
in search of health. For the last two years he 
has been engaged in writing up his Chinook 
books, as wellas completing his Egyptian Rites 
and Ceremonies, in which he has been assisted 
by English Egyptologists. Dr. Bulmer is a 
member of several societies in England and 
America and the author of a number of works 
on medical and scientific subjects. 


Bureau of Ethnology: These words following a 
title or within parentheses after a note indicate 
thatacopy of the work referred to has been seen 
by the compiler in the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology, Washington, D.C. 


Buschmann (Johann Car] Eduard). Die 
Vélker und Sprachen Neu-Mexico’s 
und der Westseite des britischen Nord- 
amerika’s, dargestellt von Hrn. Busch- 
mann. 


= —— soe a ——— 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 11 


Buschmann (J. C. E.) — Continued. Buschmann (J. C.E.) — Continued. 


In Konigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, 
Abhandlungen, aus dem Jahre 1857, pp. 209- 
414, Berlin, 1858, 4°. 

Varias palabras del idioma que se habla en la 
BocaS. del Canal de Fuca (from Alcala Galiano) 
includes a vocabulary of 27 words of Fuca 
Strasse and 9 words of Nutka, p. 324.—Konig- 
Georgs-Sund, Quadra- und Vancouver- Insel 
(pp. 325-329) includes: Numerals 1-10 of King 
George Sound, compared with those of Prince 
William Sound and Norfolk [Sitka] Sound (all 
from Dixon), p. 326.—Tribal divisions, refer- 
ences to authorities, etc., pp. 327-329. 

Nutka, general discussion and references to 
authorities, pp. $29-335.—Nootka Sound vocab- 
ulary (about 104 words, from Hale), pp. 336- 
337.—Neootka vocabulary (about 250 words, 
phrases, and numerals, from Anderson), pp.337- 
341.—Nootka vocabulary (120 words, phrases, 
and numerals, from Jewett), pp. 341-343.— 
Nootka vocabulary (400 words, from Alcala- 
Galiano), pp. 343-347.Substantives, pronouns, 
geographic names, etc., pp. 347-349.—A Iphabet- 
ische Verzeichnung der Nutka-Wéorter (from 
Cook, Hale, Jewett, and Alcala-Galiano), pp. 
350-354.—Substantives, adjectives, and verbs, 
alphabetically arranged by English words (from 
Hale, Cook, Jewett, and Alcala-Galiano), pp. 
355-357.—Generai discussion on the foregoing, 
with examples, pp. 357-363.—General discus- 
sion of the Nootka and Tlaoquatch, with exam- 
ples, pp. 363--365.— Vocabulary (31 words) of the 
Nootka (from Hale, Cook, and Aleala-Galiano, 


and of the Tlaoquatch, pp. 365-366.—Compari- | 


sen of Nootka words with those of the Haelt- 
zuk, Hailtsa, Eskimo, Haidah, Cora, Cahita, 
Tepeguana, and Aztek, pp. 366-371.—Vocabu- 
lary (70 words) of the 'Tlaoquatch (alphabet- 
ically arranged by English words) compared 
with those of the Kawitchen, Noosdalum, 
Squallyamish, and pseudo-Chinook (Cathlas- 
con?), pp. 375-377._-Numerals 1-100, pronouns, 
adjectives, and phrases of the above-named 
languages, pp. 3%/-378.—General discussion of 
the same, p. 379.—Numerals 1-10 of the Hailtsa, 
and of the Indians of Fitzhugh Sound, p. 381.— 
General discussion of the Hailtsa, pp. 383-385.— 
Comparative vocabulary of substantives, 
adjectives, and adverbs (130 words, alphabet- 
ically arranged by English words) of the 
Hailtzuk (from Tolmie), Hailtsa (from Hale), 
and Bellachoola, pp. 385-388.—Numerals 1-100 
of the same, pp. 388-389.—Pronouns, adverbs, 
and interjections of the same, p. 389.—General 
discussion and analogies of the same, p. 390. 
Issued separately with title-page as follows: 


— Die Vélker und Sprachen | Neu- 


Mexico’s | und | der Westseite | des | 
britischen Nordamerika’s | dargestellt 
|von | Joh. Carl Ed. Buschmann. | Aus 
den Abhandlungen der Koénig]. Akade- 
mie der Wissenschaften | zu Berlin 
1857. | 


Berlin | Gedruckt in der Buchdruck- 
erei der Kénig]. Akademie | der Wissen- 
schaften | 1858. | In Commission bei F. 
Diimmler’s Verlags-Buchhandlung. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
note 1 1. text pp. 209-404, Inhalts-Ubersicht 
pp. 405-413, Verbesserungen p. 414, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen; Astor, Congress, Eames, Pilling, 
Trumbull. 

The copy at the Fischer sale, catalogue no. 
270, brought 14s.; at the Field sale, catalogue 
no. 235,75 cents; priced by Leclere, 1878, no. 
3012, 12 fr. and by Triibner, 1882, 15s. 


Die Spuren der aztekischen Sprache 
im nordlichen Mexico und héheren 
amerikanischen Norden. Zugleich eine 
Musterung der Vélker und Sprachen des 
nérdlichen Mexico’s und der Westseite 
Nordamerika’s von Guadalaxara an 
bis zum Eismeer. Von Joh. Carl Ed. 
Buschmann. 

In Ko6nigliche Akad. der Wiss. zu Berlin, 
Abhandlungen, aus dem Jahre 1854, Zweiter 
Supp.-Band, pp. 1-819 (forms the whole volume), 
Berlin, 1859, 4°. 

People and speech of Puget Sound, Fuca 

Straits, etc., includes the Wakashan and its 
divisions, p. 671. 
Issued separately with title-page as follows: 
Die | Spuren deraztekischen Sprache 
| im nérdlichen Mexico | und héheren 
amerikanischen Norden. | Zugleich | 
eine Musterung der Volker und Spra- 
chen | des nérdlichen Mexico’s | und 
der Westseite Nordamerika’s | von Gua- 
dalaxara an bis zum Eismeer. | Von | 
Joh. Carl Ed. Buschmann. | 

Berlin. | Gedruckt in der Buchdruck- 
erei der Konig]. Akademie | der Wissen- 
schaften. | 1859. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. general title of the 
series verso blank 1 1. title as above verso blank 
1 1. abgekiirtzte Inhalts-Ubersicht pp. vii-xii, 
text pp. 1-713, Kinleitung in das geographische 
Register pp. 714-718, geographische Register 
pp. 718-815, vermischte Nachweisungen pp. 816- 
818, Verbesserungen p. 819, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Astor, Brinton, Eames, Maison- 
neuve, Pilling, Quaritch, Smithsonian, Trum- 
bull. 

Published at 20 Marks. An uncut half-mo- 
rocco copy was sold at the Fischer sale, cata- 
logue no. 269, to Quaritch, for 2/. 11s.; the latter 
prices two copies, catalogue no. 12552, one 21. 2s. 
the other 27. 10s.; the Pinart copy, catalogue no. 
178, brought 9 fr.; Koehler, catalogue no. 440, 
prices it 13 M. 50 pf.; priced again by Quaritch, 
no. 30037, 2. 


12 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


C. 


Campbell (Rev. John). Origin of the 
aborigines of Canada. A paper read 
before the society, 17th December, 
1880, by Prof. J. Campbell, M. A. 

In Quebec Lit.and Hist. Soc. Trans. session 
1880-1881, pp. 61-93, and appendix pp. i-xxxiv, 
Quebec, 1882, 12°. (Pilling.) 

The first part of this paper is an attempt to 
show resemblances between various families 
of the New World, and between these and 
various peoples of the Old World. 

Comparative vocabulary (70 words) of the 
Hailtzukh and Malay-Polynesian families, pp. 
XXVi-Xxxvili. Comparative vocabulary (70 
words) of the Nootka and Malay-Polynesian 
languages, pp. XXIX-XxXxi. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows: 


Origin | of the | aborigines of Can- 
ada. | A paper read before the Literary 
and historical society, | Quebec, | by | 
prof. J. Campbell, M. A., | (of Mon- 
treal,) | Délégué Général de l’Institu- 
tion Ethnographique de Paris. | 

Quebec: | printed at the ‘“‘ Morning 
chronicle” office. | 1881. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. text pp. 
1-33, and appendix pp. i-xxxiv, 8°. Twenty-five 
copies printed. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 
Copies seen: Wellesley. 


CanadianIndian. Vol. I. October, 1890. 
No. I [-Vol. I. September, 1891. No. 12]. 
| The | Canadian | Indian | Editors | 
rey. E. F. Wilson | H. B. Small. | Pub- 
lished under the Auspices of | the Cana- 
dian Indian Researchal [sic] | Society 
| Contents | [&c. double columns, each 
eight lines.] | Single Copies, 20 cents. 
Annual Subscription, $2.00. | 
Printed and Published by Jno. Ruth- 
erford, Owen Sound, Ontario [Canada]. 
[1890-1891. ] 
12 numbers: cover title as above, text pp. 1- 
356, 8°. A continuation of Our Forest Children, 
title and collation of which will be found in the 
Bibliography of the Algonquian languages. 
The publication was suspended with the 
twelfth number, with the intention of resuining 
it in January, 1892. The word ‘‘ Researchal”’ 
on the cover of the first number was changed 
to ‘‘ Research” in the following numbers. 
Wilson (E. F.), A comparative vocabulary, 
vol. 1, pp. 104-107. 
Copies seen : Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 
Cape Flattery Indians. Sce Maka. 
Catechism: 
Nutka See Brabant (A. J.) 


Catlin (George). North and South Amer- 
ican Indians. | Catalogue | descriptive 
and instructive | of | Catlin’s | Indian 
Cartoons. | Portraits, types, and cus- 
toms. | 600 paintings in oil, | with | 
20,000 full length figures | illustrating 
their various games, religious cere- 
monies, and | other customs, | and | 27 
canvas paintings | of | Lasalle’s dis- 
coveries. | 

New York: | Baker & Godwin, Print- 
ers, | Printing-house square, | 1871. 


Abridged title on cover, title as above verso 
blank 1 1. remarks verso note 1 1. text pp. 5-92, 
certificates pp. 93-99, 8°. 

Proper names with English significations in 
a number of American languages, among them 
a few of the Klah-o-qnaht, p. 30. 

Copies seen : Astor, Congress, Eames, Welles- 
ley, Wisconsin Historical Society. 

George Catlin, painter, born in Wilkesbarre, 
Pa., in 1796; died in Jersey City, N. J., Decem- 

. ber 23, 1872. He studied law at Litchfield,Conn., 
but after a few years’ practice went to Phila- 
delphia and turned his attention to drawing 
and painting. Asan artist he was entirely self- 
taught. In 1832 he went to the Far West and 
spent eight years among the Indians of Yellow- 
stone River, Indian Territory, Arkansas, and 
Florida, painting a unique series of Indian por- 
traits and pictures, which attracted much 
attention, on their exhibition, both in this 
country and in Europe. Among these were 470 
full-length portraits of a large number of 
pictures illustrative of Indian life and customs, 
most of which are now preserved in the 
National Museum, Washington. In 1852-1857 
Mr. Catlin traveled in South and Central 
America, after which he lived in Europe until 
1871, when he returned to the United States. 
One hundred and twenty-six of his drawings 
illustrative of Indian life were at the Philadel- 
phia exposition of 1876. He was the author of 
Notes of Eight Years in Europe (New York, 
1848); Manners, Customs, and Condition of the 
North American Indians (London, 1857); The 

3reath of Life, or Mal-Respiration (New York, 
1861); and O-kee-pa: A Religions Ceremony, 
and other Customs of the Mandans (London, 
1867).—Appleton’s Oyclop. of Am. Biog. 

Chamberlain (Alexander Francis). The 
Eskimo race and language. Their 
origin and relations. By A. F. Cham- 
berlain, B. A. 

In Canadian Inst. Proc. third series, vol. 6, 
pp. 261-337, Toronto, 1889, 8°. 

Comparative Indian vocabularies, pp. 318- 


322, contain words in Kwakiool and Alt (from 
Tolnie and Dawson, and Hale). 


WAKASHAN 


Chamberlain (A. F.) — Continued. 


Alexander Francis Chamberlain was born at 
Kenninghall, Norfolk, England, January 12, 
1865, and came to New York with his parents 
in 1870, removing with them to Canada in 1874. 


LANGUAGES. 13 


He matriculated from the Collegiate Institute, | 


Peterboro, Ontario, into the University of 
Toronto in 1882, from which institution he 
graduated with honors in modern languages and 
ethnology in 1886. From 1887 to 1890 he was 
fellow in modern languages in University Col- 


lege, Toronto, and in 1889 received the degree | 


of M. A. from his alma mater. In 1890 he was 
appointed fellow in anthropology in Clark Uni- 
versity, Worcester, Mass., where he occupied 
himself with studies in the Algonquian lan- 
guages and the physical anthropology of Amer- 
ica. In June, 1890, he went to British Colum- 
bia, where, until the following October, he was 
engaged in studying the Kootenay Indians 
under the auspices of the British Association 


for the Advancement of Science. A summary | 


of the results of these investigations appears 


in the proceedings of the association for 1892. | 
A dictionary and grammar of the Kootenay | 
_language, together with a collection of texts of | 
myths, are also being proceeded with. In 18$2 | 


Mr. Chamberlain received from Clark Univer- 
sity the degree of Ph. D.in anthropology, his 
thesis being: ‘*The Language of the Mississagas 


of Skugog: A contribution to the Linguistics | 
of the Algonkian Tribes of Canada,’ embody- | 
ing the results of his investigations of these | 


Indians. 

Mr. Chamberlain, whose attention was, early 
in life, directed to philologic and ethnologic 
studies, has contributed to the scientific jour- 
nals of America, from time to time, articles on 
subjects connected with linguisties and folk- 
lore, especially of the Algonquian tribes. He 


has also been engaged in the study of the Low- | 


German and French Canadian dialects, the 
resultsof which willshortly appear. Mr. Cham- 
berlain is a member of several of the learned 
societies of America and Canada and fellow of 


the American Association for the Advance- | 


ment of Science. 


In 1892 he was appointed lecturer in anthro- | 


pology at Clark University. 


Claoquat. See Klaokwat. 
Claret de Fleurieu (C.P.) See Fleurieu | 


(C. P.C.) 


Classical. The | classical journal; | for 


| September and December | 1811. | Vol. 
IV. | [Two lines quotation in Greek 
and a monogrammatic device. ] | 

London: | printed by A.J. Valpy, | 
Took’s court, Chancery lane; | sold by 
| Sherwood, Neely, | and Jones, Pater- 
noster row; | and all other booksellers. 
[1811.] 

Title verso blank 1 1. contents (of no. vii) pp. 
iii-iv, text pp. 1-526, index pp. 527-537, verso p. 
537 colophon giving date 1811, 8°. 


Classical — Continued. 

A chart of ten numerals in two hundred 
tongues (pp. 105-119), includes a number of 
American languages, among them the Nutka 
Sound (from Dixon), p. 241; Cook, vol. 2, p. 336; 
and Humboldt’s Travels, vol. 2, p. 346), p. 115. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Congress: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the Library of Congress, Washing. 
ton, D.C. 

Cook (Captain James) and King (J.) A 
| voyage | to the | Pacific ocean. | 
Undertaken, | by the command of his 
majesty, | for making | Discoveries in 
the Northern Hemisphere. | Performed 
under the Direction of Captains Cook, 
Clerke, and Gore, |in His Majesty’s 
Ships the Resolution and Discovery; 
in the Years 1776, 1777, 1778. 1779, and 
1780. | In three volumes. | Vol. I. and 
II. written by Captain James Cook, 
F.R. 8. | Vol. III. by Captain James 
King LL. D. and F. R. S. | Published 
by Order of the Lords Commissioners of 
the Admiralty. | [Vignette.] | Vol. I 

[-IIT]. | 

London: | printed for G. Nicol, book- 
seller to his majesty, in the | Strand; 
and T. Cadell, in the Strand. | 
M. DCC. LXXXIV [1784]. 

3 vols. 4°, maps and plates, and atlas, folio. 

Anderson (W.), Vocabularies and numerals 
of the Nootka language, vol. 2, pp. 335, 336; vol. 
3, pp. 540-546. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress, 
Geological Survey. 


A | voyage | to the | Pacific 
ocean. | Undertaken, | by thecommand 
of his majesty, | for making | Discov- 
eries in the Northern Hemisphere. | To 
determine | The Position and Extent of 
the West Side of North America; | its 
Distance from Asia; and the Practica- 
bility of aj| Northern Passage to 
Europe. | Performed under the direc- 
tion of | Captains Cook, Clerke, and 
Gore, | in his majesty’s Ships the Reso- 
lution and Discovery. | In the Years 
1776, 1777, 1778, 1779, and 1780. | In three 
volumes. | Vol. I and IL written by 
Captain James Cook, F. R.S. | Vol. III 
by Captain James King, LL. D. and F. 
R. §. | Illustrated with Maps and 
Charts from the Original Drawings 


made by Lieut. Henry Roberts, | under 
the Direction of Captain Cook; and 


14 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Cook (J.) and King (J.)—Continned. | Cook (J.) and King (J.)— Continued. 


with a great Variety of Portraits of | 


Persons, Views | of Places, and Histor- 
ical Representations of Remarkable 
Incidents, drawn by Mr. | Webber 


during the Voyage, and engraved by | 
the most eminent Artists. | Published | 
by Order of the Lords Commissioners | 


of the Admiralty. | Vol. I[-I11}. | 
London: | printed by W. and A. 
Strahan: | for G. Nicol, bookseller to his 
majesty, in the Strand; | and T. Cadell, 
in the Strand: | MDCCLXXXIV/[1784]. 


3 vols. maps and plates, 4°, and atlas, folio. 


Linguistic contents as under titlenext above, 


vol. 2, pp. 335, 336, vol. 3, pp. 542-546. 
Oopies seen: Astor, Bancroft, British 
Museum, Greely, Harvard, Lenox, Watkinson. 


A | voyage | to the | Pacific 
ocean. | Undertaken, | by the command 


of his majesty, for making | Discoy- 


eries in the Northern Hemisphere. | To 
determine | The Position and Extent of 
the West Side of North America; | its 


Distance from Asia; and the Practica- | 
Passage to | 


bility of a| Northern 
Europe. | Performed under the direc- 
tion | of Captains Cook, Clerke, and 
Gore, | In his majesty’s Ships the Res- 


olution and Discovery. | In the Years | 


1776, 1777, 1778, 1779, and 1780. | In three 
volumes. | Vol. I and II written by 
Captain James Cook, F.R.S. | Vol. II 
by Captain James King, LL. D. and F. 
R. S. | Illustrated with Maps and 
Charts, from the Original Drawings 
made by Lieut. | Henry Roberts, under 
the Direction of Captain Cook. | Pub- 
lished by Order of the Lords Commis- 
sioners of the Admiralty. | Vol. 
I{-I1]}. | 

Dublin: Printed for H. Chamberlaine, 
W. Watson, Potts, Williams, | Cross; 
[&c. six lines.] | M,DCC.LXXXIV 
[1784]. 

3 vols. maps and plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, vol. 
2, pp. 335, 236, vol. 3, pp. 542-546. 

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, 
Museum, Congress, Harvard. 
A | voyage | to the ; Pacific 
ocean; | Undertaken by Command of 
his majesty, | for making | discoveries 
|in the northern hemisphere: | Per- 
formed under the Direction of | Cap- 
tains Cook, Clerke, and Gore, | In the 
Years 1776, 1777, 1778, 1779, and 1780. | 


British 


Being a copious, comprehensive, and 
satisfactory abridgment of the | voy- 
age | written by | Captain James Cook, 
F. R. 8. | and | Captain James King, 
LL.D. and F.R.S. | Illustrated with 
Cuts. | In four volumes. | Vol. I[-IV]. 
| [Monogram. ] | 

London: printed for John Stockdale, 
Seratcherd, and’ Whitaker, John Field- 
ing, and John Hardy. | MDCCLXXXIV 
[1784]. 

4 vols. plates, 8°. 

Brief remarks on the language of the Indians 
of Nutka Sound, ineluding a few examples, 
vol. 2, pp. 274-275. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, British Museum, Har- 
vard. 


A | voyage | to the | Pacific 
ocean. | Undertaken, | by the command 
of his majesty, | for making | Discoy- 
eries in the Northern Hemisphere. | 
Performed under the Direction .of 
Captains Cook, Clerke, and Gore, | in 
His Majesty’s Ships the Resolution and 
Discovery ; in the Years 1776, 1777, 1778, 
1779,and 1780. | Inthree volumes, | Vol. 
I. and II. written by Captain James 
Cook, F. R. 8. | Vol. III. by Captain 
James King, LL. D. and F.R.S. | Pub- 
lished by the Order of the Lords Com- 
missioners of the Admiralty. | The 
second edition. | [Portrait of Cook.] 
| Vol. I[-IIT). 

London: | printed by H. Hughs, | for 
G. Nicol bookseller to his majesty, in 
the Strand; | and T. Cadell, in the 
Strand. | M. DCC. LXXXV[1785]. 

3 vols. maps and plates, 4°, and atlas folio. 

This edition contains ‘‘A defence of the 
arguments advanced in the Introduction to 
Captain Cook’s last voyage,’ which does not 
appear in the earlier editions. 

Anderson (W.), Vocabularies and numerals 
of the Nootka language, vol. 2, pp. 335, 336, vol. 
3, pp. 540-546. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Lenox. 


Troisiéme voyage | de Cook, | 
ou | Voyage a Vocean Pacifique, | 
ordonné parle Roi d’ Angleterre, | Pour 
faire des Découvertes dans l’ Hemisphere 
Nord, | pour determiner la position & 
Vétendue de la Céte-Ouest de | ?Amé- 
rique Septentrionale, sa distance l’Asie, 
| & résoudre la question du passage au 
Nord. | Exécenté sous la direction des 
Capitaines Cook, Clerke & Gore, | sur 


eS 


WAKASHAN 


Cook (J.) and King (J.) — Continued. 
les Vaisseaux la Reésolution & la 
Découverte, en 1776, 1777, 1778, 1779 & 
1780, | Traduit de V’Anglois par M. 
D[emeunier]. | Ouvrage enrichi [&e. 
five lines.]| Tome premier [-qua- 
trieme]. | [Pictures.] | 

A Paris, | Hétel de Thou, rue des 
Portevins. | M. DCC. LXXXV[1785]. | 
Avec approbation et privilege du roi. 

4 vols. 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
vol. 3, pp. 103, 105, 157-158. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum. 
Troisitme voyage | de Cook | 
ou | voyage a l’ocean Pacifique, | 
ordonné par le roi d’Angleterre, | pour 
faire [&c. seven lines.] | Traduit de 
l’Anglois, par M. D[emeunier]. | Tome 
premier [—quatriéme]. | [Scroll.] | 

A Paris, | Hétel de Thou, rue des 
Portevins. | M. DCC. LXXXV[1785]. | 
Avec approbation et privilege du roi. 

4 vols. 8°. 

Linguisticcontentsas under titles next above, 
vol. 3, pp. 126, 129, 191-192. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 


A | voyage to the Pacific ocean 
| Undertaken | by command of his 


majesty for making | discoveries in the | 


northern hemisphere | Performed | 


under the direction of captains Cook, | 


Clerke and Gore | In the Years 1776, 7, 
8, 9 and 80. | In four volumes. Volume 
1t(-IV ?]. | [Design.] | 

Perth. | Printed by R. Morrison, jun’. 
for R. Morrison & son. | 1785[—?]. 

4 (?) vols.16°. I have seen the first volume 
only; see title next below. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 


A | voyage | to the | Pacific 
ocean; | Undertaken by command of 
his majesty, | for making discoveries 
in the | northern hemisphere. | Per- 
formed under the direction of | captains 
Cook, Clerke, and Gore, | In the Years, 
1776, 7, 8, 9, and 80. | Compiled from 
the various accounts of that | voyage 
hitherto published. | In four volumes. 
| The second edition. | Vol. [1?-]IV. | 
Embellished with copper-plates. | 

Perth. | Printed by R. Morrison, 
junr, | for R. Morrison and son, J. 
Lockington, Lon- | don; and J. Binns, 
Leeds. | 1787. 


4(?) vols. 16°. I have seen no copy of the 
first volume. It may be possible that it is a 


LANGUAGES. 15 


| Cook (J.) and King (J.) — Continued. 


continuation of the set of which the title of 
the first volume is given next above. 

Brief remarks and a few examples in the lan- 
guage of the Indians of Nootka Sound, vol. 2, 
pp. 231-237. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 

—— —— Der Capitain Jacob Cook’s | 
dritte | Entdeckunge-Reise | welche 
derselbe | aus Besche und Kosten der 
Groskbrittanischen Regierung | in das 
Stille Meer | und nach dem Nordpol 
hinauf | unternommen | und mit den 
Schiffen Resolution und Discovery | 
wihrend der Jahre 1776 bis 1780 | [&e. 
five lines.] | Aus dem Englischen iiber- 
setzt | von Georg Forster | [&c. five 
lines.] | Erster[-Zweiter Band]. | 

Berlin | bei Haude und Spener. 1787 
[-1788]. 

2vols.: 4 p.ll. pp. i-xvi, 1-504, 2 11.; 7 p. 11. 
1-532, maps and plates, 4°. 

A brief discussion, with a few examples, of 
the language of the Indians of Nootka Sound, 
vol. 2, pp. 59, 60. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 

There is an edition: Captain Cook’s three 
voyages, Boston, 1795-1797, 2 vols., 16°, which 
contains no linguistic material. 


IlytemectBie Bb cChsepablit THxiit 
oKeanb, m0 moBerbait0 Kopoia Teopria IL 
ypequpiatoe, Asa olpedrsenia mno70menia 
3anaqubIXb Beperoph Cbhsepwoii AmepuKn, 
pasctomnia ono orb Asin, mu Bosmoatnocra 
cbpepnaro mpoxoja u3b Tuxaro Bb 
ATaJanTHyeckili OKeanb, NOJb Nav.1bCTBOM' 
Kimnranopb Kyka, Kaepka uu Topa, na 
cy jax Pesosoyiii 1 AnckoBepu, Bb MpoAorKenie 
1776, 77, 78, 79 u 1780 rogops. Cb Aura. 
YT. AJorrunt To1sequwyesb-Kyty30B5. 


CauKtuetepoyprb 1805 u 1810. @) 
300, 209 pp. 4°. 10 charts, 


Translation.—Voyage to the North Pacific 
Ocean, undertaken by direction of King George 
III, to determine the situation of the western 
shores of North America, their distances from 
Asia and the possibility of a northern passage 
from the Pacific to the Atlantic ocean, under 
the direction of captains Cook, Clerke, andGore 
in the ships Resolution and Discovery during 
the years 1776, 77, 78,79 and 1780. [Translated] 
from the English by Mons. Loggin Golenit- 
shott-Kutuzoff. 

St. Petersburg, 1805 and 1810. 

Title from Sokoloff’s Bibliography in the 
Journal of the Russian Navy Department, vol. 
8, p. 411, St. Petersburg, 1850, 8°. 

There is an edition in English: Philadelphia, 
De Silver, 1818, 2 vols, 8°, which contains no 
linguistics. (Bancroft, Lenox.) 


16 


Cook (J.) and King (J.)— Continued. | 
A voyage to the Pacific ocean, 
undertaken by the | command of his | 
majesty, for making disceveries | in 

the northern hemisphere; to determine 

the | position and extent of the west | 
side of North | America, its distance | 
from Asia, and the prac- | ticability of 
a northern passage to Europe. | Per- | 
formed under direction of Captains | 

Cook, Clerke, and Gore, in his majesty’s 
ships | the Resolution and Discovery, 
in the years | 1776, 1777, 1778, 1779, & | 
1780. | 

In Kerr (R.), A general history and collection 
of voyages, vol. 15, pp. 114-514, vol. 16, and vol. | 
17, pp. 1-311, Edinburgh, 1811-1816, 17 vols. | 
folio. (Congress, Lenox.) 

Anderson (W.), Vocabularies and numerals 
of the Nootka language, vol. 16, pp. 255-257, 
yol. 17, pp. 800-309. 

Reprinted in the later edition of Kerr (R.), 
General history and collection of voyages, 
London, 1824, 18 vols. 8°, in the same volumes 
and pages. 

There is an edition of the ‘Voyages around | 
the world performed by Captain Cook,” Boston, | 
Whitaker, 1828, 2 vols. 8°, of which I have seen 
but the first volume, and which may contain 
the Wakashan linguistics. (Congress.) 

The voyages | of | captain James 
Cook. | Ulustrated with | maps and 
numerous engravings on wood. | With 
An Appendix, | giving an account of 
the present condition of the South sea | 
islands, &c.|In two volumes. | Vol. | 

T[-I1]. | [Portrait of Capt. Cook. ] | 
~ London: | William Sinith, 113, Fleet | 
street | MDCCCXLII[1842]. 

Engraved title: The| three voyages | of | 
captain James Cook. | [Picture of ship 
Endeavour, with inscription. ] | 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Cook (J.) and King (J.) — Continued. 
London: | William Smith, 113, Fleet street. 
| 1842. 

2 vols.: Portrait of Capt. Cook 1 1. engraved 
title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of print- 
ers 1 1. contents pp. v—viii, list of illustrations 
pp. ix-xii, life of Captain James Cook, pp. xiii- 
Xx, map, introduction pp. 1-2, text pp. 3-596; 
map, title verso names of printers 1 1. con- 
tents pp. v—xi, map, half-title verso blank 1 1, 
text pp. 3-556, appendix pp. 557-619, colophon 
p- [620], royal 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
vol. 2, pp. 290, 551-553. 
Copies seen: Eames. 


| —— —— The voyages | of | captain James 


Cook | round the world, | illustrated 
with | maps and numerous engravings 
| on wood and steel. | Vol. I{-II]. | 
[Portrait of Capt. Cook.] | 

John Tallis & company, London and 
New-York. [18522] 

Engraved title: The | three voyages | of | 
captain Cook, | round the world. | [Picture of 
the ship Endeavour with inseription.] | 

John Tallis & company, London & New 
York. 

2 vols.: portrait of capt. Cook 1 1. engraved 
title verso blank 1 1. portrait of Sir Joseph 

3anks 1 1.seven double page maps, half-title 
verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. contents 
pp. v-viii, list of illustrations pp. ix—xii, life 
of capt. Cook pp. xiii-xx, introduction pp. 1-2, 
text pp. 3-596; three double page maps, two 
engravings, two double page maps, half-title 
verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. half-title 
verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-xi. text pp. 8- 
556, royal 8°. 

Lingnistic contents as under titles above, 
vol. 2, pp. 290, 551-553. 

Copies seen: Astor, Lenox. 

There is an edition of Cook’s Voyages, Phil- 
adelphia, 1871. 8°, which does not contain the 
linguistic material. (Astor.) 

Coquilth. See Kwakiutl. 


D. 


Daa (Ludwig Kristensen). On the affin- ; Dall (William Healey). Tribes of the 


ities between the languages of the 
northern tribes of the old and new con- 
tinents. By Lewis Kr. Daa, Esq., of | 
Christiania, Norway. (Read December 
the 20th.) 

In Philological Soc. [of London] Trans. i856; 
pp. 251-294, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) 

Comparative tables showing affinities be- 
tween Asiatic and American languages, pp. 264- 
285, contain words from many North American 
languages, the Wakashan being represented 
by the Haeltzuk, Nootka, Tlaoquatch, and 
Wakash. | 


extreme northwest. By W.H. Dall. 


In Powell (J. W.), Contributions to North 
American Ethnology, vol.1, pp. 1-106, Appen- 
dix, linguistics, pp. 107-157, Washington, 1877, 
40° 

Gibbs (G.), Vocabulary of the Hailt/zakh, pp. 
144-158. 

— Vocabulary of the Kwakiutl, pp. 144-153. 


William Healey Dall, naturalist, was born in 
3oston, Mass., Aug. 21, 1845. Was educated at 
the Boston public schools, and then became a 
special pupil in natural sciences under Louis 
Agassiz and in anatomy and medicine under 


————— 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 17 


Dall (W. H.) — Continued. 

Jeffries Wyman and Daniel Brainard. In 1865he 
was appointed lieutenant in the international 
telegraph expedition, and in this capacity vis- 
ited Alaska in 1865-1868. From 1871 till 1880 he 
was assistant to the U.S. Coast Survey and 
under its direction spent the years 1871 to 1874 
and 1884 in that district. His work, besides the 
exploration and description of the geography, 
included the anthropology, natural history, and 
geology of the Alaskan and adjacent regions. 
From the field work and collections have 
resulted maps, memoirs, coast pilot, and papers 
on these subjects or branches of them. [Since 
1884 he has been] paleontologist to the U.S. 
Geoiogical Survey, and since 1869 he has been | 
honorary curator of the department of mollusks 
in the U.S. National Museum. In this office he 
has made studies of recent and fossil mollusks 
of the world, and especially of North America, 
from which new information has been derived 
concerning the brachiopoda, patellide, chiton- 
ide, and the mollusk fauna of the deep sea. 
These studies have grown out of those devoted 
to the fauna of northwestern America and east- 
ern Siberia. Mr. Dall has been honored with 
elections to nearly all the scientific societies in 
this country, and to manyabroad. In 1882 and 
in 1885 he was vice-president of the American 
* Association for the Advancement of Science, 
and presided over the sections of biology and 
anthropology. His scientific papers include 
about two hundred titles. Among the separate 
books are ‘‘Alaska and its Resources”’ (Boston, 
1870): ‘‘ Tribes of the Extreme Northwest” 
(Washington, 1877); ‘‘Coast Pilot of Alaska, 
Appendix 1, Meteorology and Bibliography” 
1879); ‘‘The Currents and Temperatures of 
Bering Sea and the Adjacent Waters” (1882) ; 
‘Pacific Coast Pilot and the Islands of Alaska, 
Dixon Entrance to Yakutat Bay. with the 
Inland Passage’’ (1883); ‘‘ Prehistoric Amer- 
ica,’ by the Marquis de Nadaillac, edited (New 
York, 1885); and ‘‘ Report on the Mollusca, 
Brachiopoda, and Pelecypoda”’ of the Blake 
dredging expedition in the West Indies (Cam- 
bridge, 1886).—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Aim. Biog. 


Dawson (George Mercer). Notes and 
observations on the Kwakiool People 
of the Northern Part of Vancouver 
Island and Adjacent Coasts, made 
during the Summer of 1885; with a 
Vocabulary of about seven hundred 
words. By George M. Dawson, D.S., 
F.G.8., Assistant-Director Geological 
Survey of Canada. 

In Royal Soc.of Canada Proc. and Trans. | 
vol. 5, section 2, pp. 63-98, Montreal, 1888, 4°. 
(Geological Survey.) 

Notes on tribal subdivisions of the Kwa- 
kiool, and details respecting them (pp. 64-75), 
contains astatistical table of tribal subdivisions 
for the year ending June 30, 1885, by Geo. Blen- 
kinsop, p. 65; meaning of native terms pas- | 


WAK 2 


—— Section IJ, 1887. 


Dawson (G. M.) — Continued. 


sim.—Mode of life, arts and customs of the 
Kwakiool includes a discussion of the numer- 
als, mode of counting, measuring, etc., pp. 75- 
79.—Custom of the Potlatch or donation feast, 
including native terms passim, pp. 79-81.—Tra- 
ditions, folk-loreand religion, with many native 
terms, names of legendary characters, ete , 
passim, pp. 81-87.—Vocabulary of about seven 
hundred words of the Kwakiool language (from 
Ya-a-kotle-a-katlos (Tom) of the Kom-o-yawé, a 
subdivisioen or sept of the Kwa/-ki-ool or Kwa-' 
kutl tribe, now inhabiting the vicinity of Fort 
Iupert, Beaver Harbour, Vancouver Island), 
pp. 89-98. 

In his introductory remarks the author 
states: ‘* The subjoined vocabulary is based on 
the schedules of words given by Major J. W. 
Powell in his ‘Introduction to the Study of 
Indian languages.’ Having been obtained 
from an educated Indian, with the additional 
assistance of a good interpreter, it is much 
more complete than those given for several 
tribes of the Kwakiool people by Dr. Tolmie 
and the writer in the ‘Comparative Vocabula- 
ries of the Indian tribes of British Columbia.’ 
See Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson (G. M.) 

Issued separately, with title-page as follows: 
Trans. Royal Soe., 
Can. | Notes and _ observations | on 
the | Kwakiool people of Vancouver 
island | by | George M. Dawson, D.S., 
F. G. 8., | Asst-Director of the Geo- 
logical Survey of Canada | From the | 
transactions of the Royal society | of 
Canada | volume V, section IT, 1887 | 

Montreal | Dawson brothers, publish- 
ers | 1888 

Cover title as above, no inside title, text pp. 
1-36, plate, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Geological Survey, Pilling, 
Wellesley. 


_ —— See Tolmie (W.F.) and Dawson (G. 


M.) 


George Mercer Dawson was born at Pictou, 
Nova Scotia, August 1, 1849, and is the eldest son 
of Sir William Dawson, principal of McGill 
University, Montreal. He was educated at 
McGill College and the Royal School of Mines; 
held the Duke of Cornwall's scholarship, given 
by the Prince of Wales; and took the Edward 
Forbes medal in paleontology and the Murch- 
ison medal in geology. He was appointed geol- 
ogist and naturalist to Her Majesty’s North 
American Boundary Commission in 1873, and at 
the close of the commission’s work, in 1875, he 
published a report under the title of ‘‘ Geology 
and Resources of the Forty-ninth Parallel.” In 
July, 1875, he received an appointment on the 
geological survey of Canada. From 1875 to 1879 
he was occupied in the geologica! survey and 
exploration of British Columbia, and subse- 


18 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Dawson (G. M.) — Continued. 
quently engaged in similar work, both in the 
Northwest Territory and British Columbia. Dr. 
Dawson is the author of numerous papers on 
geology, natural history, and ethnology, pub- 
lished in the Canadian Naturalist, Quarterly 
Journal of the Geological Society, Transactions 
of the Royal Society of Canada, etc. He was 
in 1887 selected to take charge of the Yukon 
expedition. 

Dictionary : 

Tokoaat See Knipe (C.) 

Dixon (Capt. George). A | voyage round 
the world; | but more particularly to 
the | north-west coast of America: | 
performed in 1785, 1786, 1787, and 1788, | 
in | the King George and Queen Char- 
lotte, | captains Portlock and Dixon. | 
Dedicated, by permission, to | Sir 
Joseph Banks, Bart.| By captain George 
Dixon. | 

London: | published by Geo. Gould- 
ing, | Haydn’s head, no. 6, James street, 
Covent garden. | 1789. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 
]. dedication pp. v-vi, introdtiction pp. vii- 
xxiii, contents pp. xxv-xxix, errata p. [xxxi] 
directions to the binder p. [xxxii], text pp..1- 
352, appendix no.1 pp. 353-360, appendix no. 4 
pp. 1-47, map, plates, 4°. 

Numerals 1-10 of Prince William Sound and 
Cook River, Norfolk Sound, and King George 
Sound, p. 241. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
neum, British Museum, Congress, Greely, 
Harvard, Lenox, National Museum, Watkinson. 

At the Fischer sale, catalogue no. 2312, acopy 
brought 1s. 6d.; at the Brinley sale, no. 4678, a 
fine copy, calf, gilt, $2.75. Priced by Quaritch, 
nos. 28950 and 28951, 102. and 12s. 


Voyage | autour du monde, | et prin- 
cipalement | a la céte nord-ouest de 
VAmérique, | Fait en 1785, 1786, 1787 et 
1788, | A bord du King-George et de la 
Queen- | Charlotte, par les Capitaines 
Portlock | et Dixon.| Dédié, par permis- 
sion, & Sir Joseph | Banks, Baronet; | 
Par le Capitaine George Dixon. | Tra- 
duit de l’Anglois, par M. Lebas. | Tome 
premier[-second]. | 

A Paris, | Chez Maradan, Libraire, 
Hotel de Chateau- | Vieux, rue Saint- 
André-des-Ares. | 1789. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
blank 1 1. dedication 1 1. introduction pp. 1-34, 
text pp. 35-581; half-title verso blank 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-274, appendix 1 pp. 
275-292, appendix 2 pp. 1-46, 8°. 


Dixon (G.) — Continued. 


Linguistic contents as under titlenext above, 
vol. 2, pp. 16-17. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenzum, 

Harvard. 
Der | Kapitaine Portlock’s und Dix- 
on’s | Reise um die Welt | besonders 
nach | der Nordwestlichen Kiste von 
Amerika | wiihrends der Jahre 1785 bis 
1788 | in den Schiffen King George und 
Queen Charlotte, Herausgegeben | von 
dem | Kapitain Georg Dixon. | Aus dem 
Englischen iibersetzt und mit Anmer- 
kungen erliutert | von | Johann Rein- 
hold Forster, | der Rechte, Medicin und 
Weltweisheit Doktor, Professor der Nat- 
urgeschichte und Mineralogie | auf der 
KGnig)]. Preusz. Friedrichs- Universitat, 
Mitglied der Konigl. Akademie der 
héheren | und schénen Wissenchaften 
zu Berlin. | Mit vielen Kupfern und 
einer Landkarte. | 

Berlin, 1790. | Bei Christian Fried- 
rich Bosz und Sohn. 

4 p. ll. pp. i-xxii, 1-214, map, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 
216-218. 

Copies seen: Brown. 

Reis | naar de | nord-west kust | van 
| Amerika. | Gedaan in de Jaren 1785, 
1786, 1787 en 1788. | Door | de Kapteins 
| Nathaniel Portlock | en | George 
Dixon. | Uit derzelver oorspronklijke 
Reisverhalen zamengesteld en ver- 
taald. | Met platen. | 

Te Amsterdam, bij | Matthijs Schale- 
kamp. | 1795. 

Title verso blank 1 1. inleiding pp. iii-xii, 
inhalt 2 ll.text pp. 1-265, de plaaten, etc., p. 
[266], maps, plates, sm. 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 
209. 

Copies seen: Brown, Congress. 


Douglass (Sir James). Private papers | 


of Sir James Douglass. | Second series. 

Manuscript, pp. 1-36, folio; in the Bancroft 
Library, San Francisco, Cal. 

Contains lists of native tribes from Puget 
Sound northward to Cross Sound, Alaska, 
with traders’ and native tribal names, grouped 
according to languages, pp. 7-33. Between pp. 
33 and 34 are 14 blank pages. 

This manuscript was copied from the orig- 
inal papers in Sir James’s possession; in Indian 
names the copyist has universally substituted 
an initial R for the initial K. It may or may 
not contain Wakashan names. 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 19 


Drake (Samuel Gardiner). The | Aborig- 


inal races | of | North America; | com- 
prising | biographical sketches of emi- 
nent individuals, | and | an historical 
account of the different tribes, | from | 
the first discovery of the continent | to 
| the present period | with a disserta- 
tion on their | Origin, Antiquities, Man- 
ners and Customs, | illustrative narra- 
tives and anecdotes, | and a | copious 
analytical index | by Samuel G. Drake. 
| Fifteenth edition, | revised, with val- 
uable additions, | by Prof. H. L. Wil- 
liams. | [Quotation, six lines. ] | 

New York. | Hurst & company, pub- 
lishers, | 122 Nassau Street. [1882.] 

Title verso copyright 11. preface pp. 3-4, 
contents pp. 5-8, Indian tribes and nations 
pp. 9-16, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 19- 
767, index pp. 768-787, 8°. 

Gatschet (A. S.), Indian languages of the 
Pacific states and territories, pp. 748-763. 

Copies seen: Astor, Congress, Wisconsin His- 
torical Society. 

Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6377, price a copy $3. 


Dufossé (E.) Americana | Catalogue de 


livres | relatifs & l’Amérique | Europe, 
Asie, Afrique | et Océanie | [&c. thirty- 
four lines] | 

Librairie ancienne et moderne de E. 
Dufossé | 27, rue Guénégaud, 27 | prés 
le Pont-neuf | Paris [1887] 

Cover titlc as above, no inside title, table 
des divisions 1 |. text pp. 175-422, 8°. 

Contains, passim, titles of works in various 
American languages, among them afew relating 
to the Wakashan. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

This series of catalogues was begun in 1876. 


Duflot de Mofras (Eugene). Exploration 


|du territoire | de l’Orégon, des Califor- 
nies | et de lamer Vermeille, | exécutée 
pendant les années 1840, 1841 et 1842, | 
| par | M. Duflot de Mofras, | Attaché 
& la Légation de France & Mexico; | 
ouvrage publié par ordre du roi, | sous 
les auspices de M. le maréchal Soult, 
due de Dalnatie, | Président du Conseil, 
Jet de M. le ministre des affaires 
étrangetres. | Tome premier [-second]. | 

Paris, | Arthus Bertrand, éditeur, | 
libraire de la Société de géographie, | 
Rue Hautefeuille, n° 23, | 1844, 


Duflot de Mofras (E.)— Continued. 

2vols.: half-title verso names of printers 11. 
title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 
1. avant-propos pp. vii-xii, avertissement verso 
note 11]. nota verso blank 11. text pp. J-518, table 
des chapitres pp. 519-521, table des cartes pp. 
523-524; half-title verso names of printers 1 1. 
title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-500, table des 
chapitres pp. 501-504, table des cartes pp. 505- 
506, table analytique, ete. pp. 507-514, 8°. 

Numerals 1-10 in a number of North Ameri- 
can languages, among them the Noutka, p. 401. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
neum, British Museum, Congress, Geological 
Survey. Lenox. 


Dunn (John). History | of | the Oregon 
territory | and British North-American 
| fur trade; | with | an account | of the 
habits and customs of the principal 
native | tribes on the northern conti- 
nent. | By John ‘Dunn, | late of the 
Hudson’s bay company; | eight years 
a resident in the | country. | 

London: | Edwards and Hughes, Ave 
Maria lane. | 1844. 

Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-vi, contents pp. vii-viii, text pp. 1-359, maps, 
8°. 

A few specimens (30) of the Bellas or Mill- 

bank Sound tribe, pp. 358-359. 


Copies seen: British Museum, Congress. 

There is an edition of this work: Philadel- 
phia, Zeiber & Co., 1845, which does not con- 
tain the ‘‘specimens.’’ (Boston Atheneum, 
British Museum, Harvard.) 

Reprinted, omitting the linguistics, in 
Smith’s Weekly Volume, vol. 1, pp. 382-416, 
Philadelphia, 1845, 4°. (Mallet.) 

A later edition with title-page as follows: 


—— History | of | the Oregon territory | 
and British North-American | fur trade; 
| with | an account | of the habits and 
customs of the principal native | tribes 
on the northern continent. | By John 
Dunn, | late of the Hudson’s bay com- 
pany, | eight years a resident in the 
country. | Second edition. | 


London: | Edwardsand Hughes, Ave- 
Maria lane. | 1846. 


Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
iii-vi, contents pp. vii-viii, text pp. 1-359, map, 
ih, 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 

Copres seen; Astor, 


20 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


E. 


Eames: This word following a title or within | Bells (M.) — Continued. 


parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of Copy of a sermon preached by Rev 


the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Mr. Wilberforce Eames, 
Brooklyn, N. Y. 


Hells (Rev. Myron). 
guages of Puget Sound. 
Eells. ] 

In the Seattle Weekly Post-Intelligencer, 
vol.5, no. 8, p.4, Seattle, Wash., November 26, 
1885, folio. (Pilling, Wellesley.) 

Remarks upon the peculiarities and gram- 
matic forms of a number of languages of the 
northwest coast, among them the Makah. 


Indians of Puget Sound. (Sixth 
paper.) Measuring and valuing. 

In American Antiquarian, vol. 10, pp. 174-178, 
Chicago, 1888, 8°. (Bureau of Ethnology.) 

Numerals, and remarks concerning the 
numeral system, of quite a number of the lan- 
guages of Washington Territory, among them 
the Bella-bella and Aht, pp. 174-176. 

The preceding articles of the series, all of 
which appeared in the American Antiquarian, 
contain nolinguistic material. It was the inten- 
tion of the editor of the Antiquarian, when the 
series should be finished, to issue them in book 
form. So far as they were printed in the mag- 
azine they were repaged and perhaps a num- 
ber of signatures struck off. The sixth paper, 
for instance, titled above, I have in my posses- 
sion, paged 44-48. 


The Indian lan- 
[Signed M. 


— The Twana, Chemakum, and Klallam 
Indians of Washington territory. By 
Rey. Myron Eells. 

In Smithsonian Jnstitution, annual report of 
the Board of Regents for 1887, part 1, pp. 605- 
681, Washington, 1889, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Numerals 1-10 of a number of languages of 
the northwest coast, among them the Makah, 
p. 644.-Comments upon the affinities of the 
numerals given, pp. 645-646. 


This article was issued separately, without 


change; and again as follows: 


The Twana, Chemakum, and Klallam 
Indians of Washington territory. By 
Rev. Myron Eells. 


In Smithsonian Institution, Misc. Papers 
relating to anthropology, from the Smithsonian 
report for 1886-’87, pp. 605-681, Washington, 
1889, 8°. (Kames, Pilling.) 


Linguistic contents as under titlenextabove. | 


—— Aboriginal geographic names in the 
state of Washington. By Myron Eells. 
In American Anthropologist, vol. 5, pp. 27- 
35, Washington, 1892, 8°. (Pilling.) 
A few Makah names with meanings. 


Dr. Eells to the Indians at Walla-walla. 

In Bulmer (T. S8.), Christian prayers in 
Chinook, Il. 39-46. 

“Of the 97 words used, 46 are of Chinook ori- 
gin, 17 Nootkan. 3 Salish. 23 English, 2 Jargon, 
and 6 in French.”’ 

The sermon is accompanied by an interlinear 
English translation. 


See Bulmer (T.S.) 


Rev. Myron Eells was born at Walker’s 
Prairie, Washington Territory, October 7, 1843. 
He is the son of Rev. Cushing Eells, D. D., and 
Mrs. M. F. Eells, who went to Oregon in 1838 as 
missionaries to the Spokane Indiaus. He left 
Walker's Prairie in 1848 on accountof the Whit- 
man massacre at Wallawalla and Cayuse war, 
and went to Salem, Oreg., where he began to 
go to school. In 1849 he moved to Forest Grove, 
Oreg.; in 1851 to Hillsboro, Oreg., and in 1857 
again to Forest Grove, at which places he con- 
tinued his school life. In 1862 he removed to 
Wallawalla, spending the time in farming and 
the wood business wntil 1868, except the falls, 
winters, and springs of 1863-64, 1864-’65, and 
1865-66, when he wasat Forest Grovein college, 
graduating from Pacific University in 1866, in 
the second class which ever graduated from 
that institution. In 1868 he went to Hartford, 
Conn., to study for the ministry, entering the 
Hartford Theological Seminary that year, grad- 
uating from it in 1871.and being ordained at 
Hartford, June 15, 1871, as a Congregational 
minister. He went to Boisé City in October, 


1871, under the American Home Missionary 


Society, organized the First Congregational 
church of that place in 1872, and was pastor of 
it until he left in 1874. Mr. Eells was also 
superintendent of its Sunday school from 1872 
to 1874and president of the Idaho Bible Society 
from 1872 to 1874. He went to Skokomish, 
Washington, in June, 1874,and has worked as 
missionary of the American Missionary Asso- 
ciation ever since among the Skokomish or 
Twanaand Klallam Indians, pastor of Congre- 
gational churchat Skokomish Reservation since 
1876, and superintendent of Sunday school at 
Skokomish since 1882. He organized a Congre- 
gational church among the Klallams in 1882. of 
which he has sinee been pastor, and another 
among the whites at Seabeck in 1880, of which 
he was pastor until 1886. In 1887 he was chosen 
trustee of the Pacific University, Oregon; in 
1885 was elected assistant secretary and in 1889 
secretary of its board of trustees. He delivered 
the address before the Gamma Sigma society 
of that institution in 1876, before the alumni in 
1890, and preached the baccalaureate sermon in 
1886. In 1888 he was chosen trustee of Whit- 
man College, Washington, delivered the com- 


WAKASHAN 


Eells (M.) — Continued. 

mencement address there in 1888 and received 
the degree of D.D. from that institution in 
1890. In 1888 he was elected its financial secre- 
tary and in 1891 was asked to become president 
of the institution, but declined both. 

He was elected an associate member of the 
Victoria Institute of London in 1881, and a 
corresponding member of the Anthropological 
Society at Washington in 1885, to both of which 
societies he has furnished papers which bave 
been published by them. He was also elected 
vice-president of the Whitman Historical Soci- 
ety at Wallawalla in 1889. From 1874 to 1886 
he was clerk of the Congregational Association 
of Oregon and Washington. 

Mr. Eells during 1893 held the position of 
Superintendent of the Departmentof Ethnology 
for the State of Washington at the World’s 
Columbian Exposition. 


Ellis (Robert). Peruvia Scythica. | The 
| Quichua language of Peru: | its | 
derivation from central Asia with the 
American | languages in general, and 
with the Turanian | and Iberian lan- 
guages of the old world, | including | 
the Basque, the Lycian, and the Pre- 
Aryan | language of Etruria. | By | 
Robert Ellis, B. D., | author of ‘The 


Asiatic affinities of the old Italians”, | 


and late fellow | of St. John’s college, 
Cambridge. | (Quotation, three lines. ] | 
London: | Triibner & co.,57 & 59, Lud- 
gate hill. | 1875. | All rights reserved. 
Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
iii- vii, contents pp. ix—xi, errata p. [xii], text 
pp. 1-219, 8°. 


A few words in the Nootka language, pp. | 


118, 120, 124, 130. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames, Wat- 
kinson. 
Ellis (W.) An authentic | narrative | 
of a | voyage | performed by | Captain 
Cook and Captain Clerke, | in his 
majesty’s ships | Resolution and Dis- 


covery, | During the years 1776, 1777, | 


1778, 1779, and 1780; | in search of a_ 
north-west passage | Between the Con- | 


tinents of Asia 
eluding | A faithful Account of all their 
Discoveries, and _ the | unfortunate 
Death of Captain Cook. | Illustrated 
with | a chart and a Variety of cuts. | 
By W. Ellis, | assistant surgeon to both 
vessels, | Vol, I[-II]. | 


and America. | In- | 


LANGUAGES 


— Zuverliissige Nachricht 


21 


_Bllis (W.)— Continued. 


London, | Printed for G. Robinson, 
Pater-noster Row; J. Sewell, | Corn- 
hill; and J. Debrett, Piccadilly. | 
MDCCLXXXII[1782]. 

2 vols.: 6 p. ll. pp. 1-358, 11.; 4 p. Il. pp. 1- 
347, 8°. 

Vocabulary (about 100 words) alphabetically 
arranged, of the language of King George’s 
Sound, vol. 1, pp. 224-229. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 

An authentic | narrative | of a | 

voyage | performed by | Captain Cook 
and Captain Clerke, | in his majesty’s 
ships | Resolution and Discovery, | 

During the Years 1776, 1777, 1778, 1779, 
and 1780; | in search of a | north-west 
passage | Between the Continents of 
Asia and America. | Including | A faith- 
ful Account of all their Discoveries, 
and the | unfortunate Death of Captain 
Cook. | Illustrated with | a chart and 
a Variety of cuts. | By W. Ellis, | 

assistant surgeon to both vessels. | The 
second edition. | Vol. I[{-IT]. 

London, | Printed for G. Robinson, 
Pater-noster Row; J. Sewell, | Corn- 
hill; and J. Debrett, Piccadilly. | 
MDCCLXXXITI[1783]. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 11. title verso 
blank 11. map, text pp. 1-358, contents pp. [859- 
361], directions for placing ents p. [871]; half- 
title verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. con- 
tents 2 ll. text pp. 1-547, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Astor. 
von der 
dritten und letzten Reise der Kap. 
Cook und Clerke in den koéniglichen 
Schiffen, die Resolution und Discovery, 
in den Jahren 1776 bis 1780, besonders 
in der Absicht, eine nordwestliche 
Durchfarth [sic] zwischen Asien und 
Amerika ausfindig zu machen. Von 
W. Ellis, Unterwundarzt auf beyden 
Schiffen. Aus dem Englischen tiber- 
setzt, nebst einer Charte. 

Frankfurt und Leipzig, auf Kosten 
der Verlagskasse. 1783. ) 

324 pp. map, 8°. Title from Sabin’s Diction- 
ary, no. 22334. 


Enssen (F.) See Lemmens (T. N.) and 


Enssen (F.) 


Featherman (A.) Social history | of the 
| races of mankind, | First division: | 
Nigritians[-Third division: | Aoneo- 
Maranonians]. | By | A. Featherman. | 

[Two lines quotation. ] | 

London: | Triibner & co., Ludgate 
Hill. | 1885[-1889]. | (All rights re- 
served.) 

3 vols. 8°. 

A gencral discussion of a number of North 
American families occurs in vol. 3, among them 
the Nootka, which includes a few words pas- 
sim, and brief remarks upon the language and 
its grammar, pp. 340-356. 

Copies seen: Congress. 


Field (Thomas Warren). An essay | 
towards an | Indian bibliography. | 
Being a | catalogue of books, | relating 
to the | history, antiquities, languages, 
customs, religion, |wars, literature, and 
origin of the | American Indians, | in 
the library of | Thomas W. Field. | With 
bibliographical and historical notes, 
and | synopses of the contents of some 
of | the works least known. | 

New York: | Scribner, Armstrong, 
and co. | 1873. 

Title verso names of printers 11. preface pp. 
lii-iv, text pp. 1-480, 8°. 

Titles and descriptionsof booksin or relating 
to the Wakashan languages, passim. ‘ 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. 

At the Field sale, no. 688, a copy brought 
$4.25; at the Menzies sale, no. 718, a ‘‘ half- 
crushed, red levant morocco, gilt top, uncut 
copy,” brought $5.50. Priced by Leclere, 1878, 
18 fr.; by Quaritch, no. 11996, 15s.; at the Pinart 
sale, no. 368. it brought 17 fr.; at the Murphy 
sale, no. 949, $4.50. Priced by Quaritch, no. 
30224, 11. 


— Catalogue | ofthe | library | belong- | 
ing to | Mr. Thomas W. Field. | To be | 


sold at anction, | by | Bangs, Merwin 
& co., | May 24th, 1875, | and following 
days. | 

New York. | 1875. 

Cover title 22 lines, title as above verso blank 
1 1. notice etc. pp. iii-viii, text: pp. 1-376, list of 


prices pp. 377-393, supplement pp. 1-59,8°. Com- | 


piled by Joseph Sabin, mainly from Mr. Field’s 
Essay, title of which is given above. 

Contains titles of a number of works in and 
relating to the Wakashan languages, passim. 

Copies seen: Bureauof Ethnology,Congress, 
Eames. 

At the Squier sale, catalogue no. 1178, an 
uncut copy brought $1.25. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF 


THE 


F. 


Fillmore (John Comfort). A woman's 
song of the Kwakiutl Indians. 

In Journal of Am. Folk-lore, vol. 6, pp. 285- 
290, Boston and New York, 1894. 8°. (Pilling.) 

Song with music, pp. 285--286. 

Fleurieu (Charles Pierre Claret, Comte 
de). Voyage | autour du monde, | pen- 
dant les années 1790, 1791, et 1792, | 
Par Etienne Marchand, | préeédé | 
dune introduction historique; | auquel 
on a joint | des recherches sur les terres 
australes de Drake, | et | un examen 
critique du voyage de Roggeween; | 
avec cartes et figures: | Par C. P. Claret 
Fleurieu, | De VInstitut national des 
Sciences et des Arts, et du Bureau | 
des Longitudes. | Tome I[-II. III. Qua- 
triéme]. | 

A Paris, |del’imprimerie de la Repub- 
lique. | An VI[-VIIT] [1798-1800]. 

4 volumes, 4°. 

Numerals 1-10, 20, 40, of the language of the 
Indians of Nootka Sound, from Cook, com- 
pared with the same from Dixon, vol. 1, p. 284. 

Copies scen: Astor, Bancroft, British 
Museum, Congress, Harvard. 

—— Voyage | autour du monde, pendant 
les années 1790, 1791 et 1792, | Par 
Etienne Marchand, | précédé | dune 
introduction historique; | auquel on a 
joint | des recherches sur les terres 
australes de Drake, | et | un examen 
critique du voyage de Roggeween; | 
avec cartes et figures: | Par C. P. Claret 
Fleurieu, | De VInstitut national des 
Sciences et des Arts, | et du Bureau des 
Longitudes. | Tome I[-V]. | 

A Paris, |de l’imprimerie de la Répub- 
lique. | An VI[—-VIII] [1798-1800]. 

5 vols. 8° and atlas 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
vol. 2, p. 107. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum. 


A | voyage | round the world, | per- 
formed | during the years 1790, 1791, 
and 1792, | by | Etienne Marchand, | 
preceded | by a historical introduction, 
| and | Illustrated by Charts, ete. | 
Translated from the French | of | C. P. 
Claret Fleurieu, | of the National insti- 
tute of arts and sciences, and of the 
Board of | longitude of France. | Vol. 
I[-I11}. | 

London: | printed for I. N. Longman 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 20 


Pleurieu (C. P. C.)— Continued. 

and O. Rees, Paternoster-row; and T. 
Cadell, jun. | and W. Davies, Strand. 
| 1801. 


8 vols.4°. ‘Vol. III. Charts, &c.”’ 
Linguistic contents as under titles above, 


vol. 1, p. 255. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

A | voyage | round the world, | per- 
formed | during the years 1790, 1791, 
and 1792, | by | Etienne Marchand, | 

preceded | by a historical introduction, 
| and | Illustrated by Charts, etc. | 

Translated from the French | of | C. 
P. Claret Fleurieu, | of the National 
institute of arts and sciences, | and of 
the Board of longitude of France. | 

Vol. I{-II). | } 

London: | printed for T. N. Longman 
and QO. Rees, Pater- | noster-row; and 
T. Cadell, jun. and W. Davies, | in the 
Strand, | 1801. 

2 vols.: title verso note etc. 1 1. contents 5 
pages, list of plates 2 pages, errata 1 page, 
advertisement 3 |]. introduction pp. i-cvi, text 
pp. 1-536; title verso name of priater 1 1. con- 
tents pp. iii-xiii, errata p. [xiv], text pp. 1-663, 
journal of the route pp. 1-105, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, vol. 
1, p. 380. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Congress. 

The Boban catalogue, no. 2425, gives title of 
an edition: Paris, 1841, 4 vols. 4°. 


Forster (Johann Georg Adam). Ge- 
schichte der Reisen, | die seit Cook | an 
der | Nordwest- und Nordost-Kiiste | 
von Amerika und in dem|nérdlichsten 
Amerika selbst | von | Meares, Dixon, 
Portlock,Coxe, Long u. a. M. | unternom- 
men worden sind. | Mit vielen Karten 
und Kupfern. | Aus dem Englischen, | 
mit Zuziehung aller anderweitigen 


G. 


| Galiano (D. A.) —Continued. 


[Galiano (D. Dionisio Aleala).] Relacion 
| del viage hecho por las goletas | 
Sutil y Mexicana | en el afio de 1792 | | 
para reconocer el estrecho de Fuea; | 
con una introduccion | en que se da 
noticia de las expediciones execu- | 
tadas anteriormente por los Espatioles 
en busca | del paso del noroeste de la 
America. | [Vignette.] | 

De orden del rey. | Madrid en la 


Fouquet (Pére —). 


Fuca Straits Indians. 


imprenta real | alo de 1802. 


Forster (J.G. A.) — Continued. 


Hiilfsquellen, ausgearbeitet| von Georg 
Forster. | Erster(—Dritter] Band. | 
Berlin,1791. | Inder Vossischen Buch- 
handlung. 
3 vols.: pp. i-ix,1 ]. pp. 1-130, 1-302; 5 p. 11. 
pp. i-xxii, 1-314; i—-xv, i-iii, 1-74, 1-380, 4°. 
Comparative vocabulary and numerals of a 
number of languages of the northwest coast, 
among them the Indians of King George Sound 
(from Portlock and Dixon), vol. 2, pp. 216-217. 
Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Har- 
vard. 
See Petitot (E. F. 
ie) 


Fry (Edmund). Pantographia;! contain- 


ing accurate copies of all the known | 
alphabets in the world; | together with 
| an English explanation of the pecu- 
liar | force or power of each letter: | to 
which are added, | specimens of all 
well-authenticated | oral languages; | 
forming | a comprehensive digest of | 
phonology. | By Ldmund Fry, | Letter- 
Founder, Type-Street. | 

London. | Printed by Cooper and Wil- 
son, | For John and Arthur Arch, Grace 
church-street; | John White, Fleet- 
Street; John Edwards, Pall-Mall, and 
| John Debrett, Piccadilly.) MDCCXCIX 
[1799]. 

Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso errata 
1 1. preface pp. i-xxiv, table of synonyms p. 
xxv, authorities quoted pp. xxvi-xxix, list of 
subscribers pp. xxx-xxxvi, half-title (Panto- 
graphia) p.1, text pp. 2-307, appendix pp. 308- 
320, 8°. 

Vocabulary of the language of the Indians of 
Nootka Sound (36 words, from Cook), p. 210. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, Brit- 
ish Museum, Congress, Eames. 

At the Squier sale a copy, catalogue no. 385, 
brought $2.13. 
See Maka. 


Title verso blank J 1. indice 3 ll. verso of last 
one blank, [contents] 4 ll. introduccion pp. i- 
elxvii, advertencia p. clxviii, text pp. 1-185, 8°; 
atlas, folio; appendix, 1806, 20 pp. 

Varias palabras [28] del idioma que se habla 
en la Boca S. del Canal de Fuca [Maka] y 
sus equivalentes en castellano, p. 41.—Nombres 
{11] que dan los naturales 4 varios puntos de 
la entrada de Juan du Fuea [Maka], p. 42.— 
Vocabulario [400words] del idioma de los habi- 
tantes de Nutka, pp. 178-184. 


24 


Galiano (D. A.) — Continued. 

Copies seen: Bancroft,Congress, Lenox, New 
York Historical Society. 

A French translation of this work, in manu- 

script, 113 pages, 4°, was sold at the Moore sale 
(no. 1878), in February, 1894. 
Gallatin (Albert). A synopsis of the In- 
dian tribes within the United States 
east of the Rocky Mountains, and in 
the British and Russian possessions in 
North America. By the Hon. Albert 
Gallatin. 


In American Antiquarian Soe. ‘l'rans. 


(Archeologia Americana), vol. 2, pp. 1-422,Cam- | 


bridge, 1836, 8°. 


Vocabulary (40 words) of the language of | 


Nootka Sound (from Jewitt), p.371.—Vocabu- 
lary (28 words) of the [Maka] language of the 
Straits of Fuca (from Alecala-Galiano), p. 378. 


—— Hale’s Indians of North-west Amer- 
ica,and vocabularies of North America; | 


with an introduction. 
latin. 

In American Eth. Soc. Trans. vol. 2, pp. xxiii- 
elxxxviil, 1-130, New York, 1848, 8°. 

Vocabulary of the Newittee (160 words), pp. 
89-95.—Vocabulary of the Hailtsa, and of the 
Haeltzuk (45 words each), p. 103. These are 
included under the Nass family, together with 


By Albert Gal- 


the Billechoola and Chimmesyan.--Vocabulary | 


(60 words) of the language of Nootka Sound, p. 
121. 


languages. 

In Schoolcraft (H. R.), Indian tribes, vol. 3, 
pp. 397-402, Philadelphia, 1853, 4°. 

Includes the Wakash and its subdivisions, 
p. 402. 


Albert Gallatin was born in Geneva, Switzer- 
land, January 29, 1761, and died in Astoria, 
L. 1., August 12, 1849. Young Albert had 
been baptized by the name of Abraham Alfonse 
Albert. In 1773 he was sent to a boarding 


school and a year later entered the University | 


of Geneva, where he was graduated in 1779. He 
sailed from L’Orient late in May, 1780, and 
reached Boston on July 14. He entered Con- 
gress on December 7, 1795, and continued a 
member of that body until his appointment as 


Secretary of the Treasury in 1801, which oftice | 


he held continuously until 1813. His services 
were rewarded with the appointment of min- 
ister to France in February, 1815; he entered 


on the duties of this office in January, 1816. In | 


1826, at the solicitation of President Adams, he 
accepted the appointment of envoy extraordi- 
nary to Great Britain. 
United States he settled in New York City, 


where, from 1831 to 1839, he was president of the | 
In 1842 he was | 


National Bank of New York. 
associated in the establishment of the American 
Ethnological Society, becoming its first presi- 


On his return to the | 


Table of generic Indian families of 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Gallatin (A.) — Continued. 
dent, and in 1843 he was elected to hold a simi- 
lar office in the New York Historical Society, an 
honor which was annually conferred on him until 
his death.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Gatschet (Albert Samuel). Indian lan- 
guages of the Pacific states and terri- 
tories. 

In Magazine of American History, vol. 9, pp. 
145-171, New York, 1877, 4°. 

Brief references to the Nootka language, its 
dialects, and their territorial boundaries. 

Issued separately, with half-title, as follows: 


Indian languages | of the | Pacific 
states and territories | by | Albert S. 
Gatschet | Reprinted from March [1877] 
Number of The Magazine of American 
History 

[New York 1877] 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 145-171, 
sm. 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Astor, Kames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

Reprinted in the following works: 

Beach (W.W.), Indian Miscellany, pp. 416- 
447, Albany, 1877, 8°. 

Drake (S. G.), Aboriginal races of North 
America, pp. 748-763, New York, [1882], 8°. 

A supplementary paper by the same author 
and with the same title, which appeared in the 
Magazine of American History, vol, 8, contains 
no Wakashan material. 


Albert Samuel Gatschet was born in St. Beat- 
enberg, in the Bernese Oberland, Switzerland, 
October 3, 1832. His propzedeutic education was 
acquired in the lyceums of Neuchatel (1843- 
1845) and of Berne (1846-1852), after which he 
followed courses in the universities of Berne 
and Berlin (1852-1858). His studies had for 
their object the ancient world in all its phases of 
religion, history, language, and art, and thereby 
his attention was at an early day directed to 
philologic researches. In 1865 he began the pub- 
lication of a series of brief monographs on the 
local etymology of his country, entitled ‘‘ Orts- 
etymologische Forschungen aus der Schweiz” 
(1865-1867). In 1867 he spent several months 
in London pursuing antiquarian studies in the 
British Museum. In 1868 he settledin New York 
and became a contributor to various domestic 
and foreign periodicals, mainly on scientific 
subjects. Drifting into amere attentive study 
of the American Indians, he published several 
compositious upon their languages, the most 
important of which is ‘t Zwolf Sprachen aus 
dem Siidwesten Nordamerikas,’’ Weimar, 1876. 
This led to his appointment to the position 
of ethnologist in the United States Geological 
Survey, under Maj. John W. Powell, in March, 
1877, when he removed to Washington, and first 
employed himself in arranging the linguistic 
manuscripts of the Smithsonian Institution, 
now the property of the Bureau of Ethnology, 


— 


WAKASHAN 


Gatschet (A. S.)— Continued. 

which forms a part of the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion. Mr. Gatschet has ever since been actively 
connected with that bureau. To increase its 
linguistic collections and to extend his own 
studies of the Indian languages, he has made 
extensive trips of linguistic and ethnologic 
exploration among the Indians of North Amer- 
ica. After returning from a six months’ 
sojourn among the Klamaths and Kalapuyas 
of Oregon, settled on both sides of the Cascade 
Range, he visited the Kataba in South Carolina 
and the Chahta and Shetimasha of Louisiana 
in 1881-82, the Kayowe, Comanche, Apache, 
Yattassee, Caddo, Naktche, Modoe, and other 
tribes in the Indian Territory, the Tonkawe 
and Lipans, in Texas, and the Atakapa Indians 
of Louisiana in 1884-85. In 1886 he saw the 
Tiaskaltecs at Saltillo, Mexico, a remnant of the 
Nahua race, brought there about 1575 from 
Anahuae, and was the first to discover the aftin- 
ity of the Biloxi language with the Siouan fam- 
ily. He also committed to writing the Tuniyka 
or Tonica language of Louisiana, never before 
investigated, and forming alinguistic family of 
itself. Excursions to other partsof the country 
brought to his knowledge other Indian lan- 
guages: the Tuskarora, Canghnawaga, Penob- 
seot, and Karankawa. 

Mr. Gatschet has written an extensive report 
embodying his researches among the Klamath 
Lake and ModocIndians of Oregon, which forms 
Vol. II of ‘Contributions to North American 
Ethnology.’ It is in two parts, which aggre- 
gate 1,528 pages. Among the tribes and lan- 
guages discussed by him in separate publi- 
cations are the Timucua (Florida), Toikawe 
(Texas), Yuma (California, Arizona, Mexico), 
Chiméto (California), Beothuk (Newfound- 
land), Creek, and Hitchiti (Alabama). His 
numerous publications are scattered through 
magazines and government reports, some being 
contained in the Proceedings of the American 
Philosophical Society, Philadelphia. 


General discussion: 


Hailtsuk See Anderson (A. C.) 
Hailtsuk Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Hailtsuk Gibbs (G.) 

Hailtsuk Latham (R. G.) 
Hailtsuk Prichard (J.C.) 
Klaokwat Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Klaokwat Gibbs (G.) 
Klaokwat Latham (R. G.) 
Kwakiutl Anderson (A. C.) 
Kwakiutl Dawson (G. M.) 
Maka Eells (M.) 

Nitinat Knipe (C.) 

Nutka Balbi (A.) 

Nutka Bancroft (H. H., 
Nutka Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Nutka Gatschet (A. S.) 
Nutk Gibbs (G.) 

Nutka Jéhan (L. F.) 

Nutka Latham (R. G.) 
Nutka Prichard (J. C.) 


LANGUAGES. 


25 


General discussion — Continued. 


Nutka Roquefeuil (C. de). 
Ukwulta Anderson (A. C.) 
Wakash Beach (W. W.) 
Wakash Berghaus (H.) 
Wakash Drake (S. G.) 
Wakash Latham (R. G.) 
Wakash Treasury. 
Gentes: 
Kwakiutl See Boas (F.) 
Nutka Boas (F.) 
Geographic names: 
Maka See Eells (M.) 
Maka Swan (J.G.) 


Geological Survey: These words following a title 
or within pareutheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the library of the United States 
Geological Survey, Washington, D.C. 


Gibbs (Dr. George). Smithsonian miscel- 
laneous collections. 161| A | dictionary 
| of the | Chinook Jargon, | or | trade 
language of Oregon. | Prepared for the 
Smithsonian institution. | By | George 
Gibbs. | [Seal of the institution.] | 

Washington: | Smithsonian institu- 
tion: | March, 1863. 

Title verso advertisement 11. contents p. iii, 
preface pp. v-xi, bibliography pp. xiii-xiv, half- 
title (Part I. Chinook-English) verso note 1 1. 
text pp. 1-29, half-title (Part II. English- 
Chinook) p. 31, text pp. 33-44, 8°. 

A short comparative vocabulary (20 words 
and phrases) of the Tlaoquatch, Nutka, and 
Columbian (all from Scouler), p. ix.—Compari- 
son of Chinook words with the Hailtzuk and 
Belbella, and the Nootka, p.x.—The Chinook- 
English and English-Chinook dictionary, pp. 
1-43, contains 24 words of Nutka origin. 

Copies seen: Astor. Bancroft, Dunbar, Eames, 
Pilling, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

“Some years ago the Smithsonian Institution 
printed a small vocabulary of the Chinook Jar- 
gon, furnished by Dr. B. R. Mitchell, of the U. 
S. Navy, and prepared, as I afterwards learned, 
by Mr. Lionnet, a Catholic priest, for his own 
use while studying the language at Chinook 
Point. It was submitted by the Institution, 
for revision and preparation for the press, to 
the late Professor W. W. Turner. Althoughit 
received the critical examination of that distin- 
guished philologist, and was of use in directing 
attention to the language, it was deficient in the 
number of words in use, contained many which 
did not properly belong to the Jargon, and did 
not give the sources from which the words were 
derived. 

‘“Mr. Hale had previously given a vocabulary 
and account of this Jargon in his ‘ Ethnography 
of the United States Exploring Expedition,’ 
which was noticed by Mr. Gallatin in the Trans- 
actions of the American Ethnological Society, 
vol. ii. He however fell into some errors in his 


26 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 

derivation of the words, chiefly from ignoring 

the Chehalis element of the Jargon, and the 

number of words given by him amounted only 
to about two hundred and fifty. 

‘A copy of Mr. Lionnet’s vocabulary having 
been sent to me with a request to make such 
corrections as it might require, I concluded not 
merely to collate the words contained in this 
and other printed and manuscript vocabularies, 
but to ascertain, so far as possible, the lan- 
guages which had contributed to it, with the 
original Indian words. This had become the 
more important, as its extended use by differ- 
ent tribes had led to ethnological errors in the 
classing together of essentially distinct fami- 
lies.’’— Preface. 

Issued also with title-page as follows: 

A | dictionary | of the | Chinook 
Jargon, | or, | trade language of 
Oregon. | By George Gibbs. | 

New York: | Cramoisy press. | 1863. 

Half-title (Shea's Library of American Lin- 
guistics. XII.) verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 
11. preface pp. v-xi, bibliography of the Chinook 
Jargon pp. xiii-xiv, half-title of part I verso 
note 1 1. Chinook-English dictionary pp. 1-29, 
half-title of part II verso blank 1 1. English- 
Chinook dictionary pp. 33-43, the Lord’s prayer 
in Jargon p. [44], 8°. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenzum, Con- 
gress, Dunbar, Eames, Harvard, Lenox, Smith- 
sonian, Trumbull, Wellesley. 

Some copies (twenty-five, I believe) were 
issued in large quarto form with no change of 
title-page. (Pilling, Smithsonian.) 

See Hale (H.) 

Vocabulary of the Hailt/-zukh. (Bel- 
bella of Millbank Sound, British 
Columbia.) Obtained from an Indian 
knownas ‘Capt. Stewart,” at Victoria, 
Vancouver Island, in April, 1859, by 
George Gibbs. 

In Dall (W. H.), Tribes of the extreme north- 
west; in Powell (J. W.), Contributions to 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


\Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 


North American Ethnology, vol. 1, pp. 144-153, | 


Washington, 1877, 4°. 
Contains about 150 words. 


Vocabulary of the Kwa’-kiutl. (A 
dialect of the Ha-ilt/zukh.) Obtained 


from two women of the tribe, at Nan- 
aimo, British Columbia, in September, 
1857, by George Gibbs. 

In Dall (W. H.), Tribes of the extreme north- 
west; in Powell (J.W.), Contributions to North 
American Ethnology, vol.1, pp. 144-153, Wash- 
ington, 1877, 4°. 

Contains about 160 words. 

— Account of Indian tribes upon the 
northwest coast of North America. 

Manuscript, 8 leaves, folio, written on one 
side only; in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 
nology, Washington, D.C. 


General account of the Indians of the above. 
named region, including the Nutka, Tlao- 
quatch, and Heiltzuk,and a list of vocabularies 
which have been printed in those languages. 

Numerals of the Makah. 
Manuscript, 1 page, folio; in the library of 
the Bureau of Ethnology. 
Includes the numerals 1-20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 

70, 80, 90, 100. 

— Vocabulary of the Makah language. 
Manuscript, 6 leaves, folio, written on one 
side only; in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 

nology, Washington, D.C. Collected in 1858. 

Recorded on one of the forms containing 180 
words issued by the Smithsonian Institution. 

Equivalents of nearly all the words are given. 
Vocabularies. Washington Terri- 
tory. 

Manuscript, 141 leaves, most of which are 
written on both sides, and some of which are 
blank, 12°; in the library of the Bureau of 
Ethnology. Recorded in a blank book. 

Most of the vocabularies have been copied 
by their author on separate forms. Among them 
is one of the Haeltzuk or Belbella, 7 pages. 
See Knipe (C.) 


George Gibbs, the son of Col. George Gibbs, 
was born on the17th of July, 1815, at Sunswick, 
Long Island, near the village of Halletts Cove, 
now known as Astoria. At seventeen he was 
taken to Europe, where he remained two years. 
On his return from Europe he commenced the 
reading of law, and in 1838 took his degree of 
bachelor of law at Harvard University. In 1848 
Mr. Gibbs went overland from St. Louis to 
Oregon and established himself at Columbia. 
In 1854 he received the appointment of collector 
of the port of Astoria, which he held during 
Mr. Fillmore’s administration. Later he re- 
moved from Oregon to Washington Territory, 
and settled upon a ranch a few miles from Fort 
Steilacoom. Here he had his headquarters for 
several years, devoting himself to the study of 
the Indian languages and to the collection of 
vocabularies and traditions of the northwest- 
ern tribes. During a great part of the time 
he was attached to the United States Govern- 
ment Commission in laying the boundary, 
as the geologist or botanist of the expedition. 
He was also attached as geologist to the survey 
of arailroad route to the Pacific, under Major 
Stevens. In 1857 he was appointed to the 
northwest boundary survey under Mr. Archi- 
bald Campbell, as commissioner. In 1860 Mr. 
Gibbs returned to New York, and in 1861 was 
on duty in Washingtonin guarding the Capitol. 
Later he resided in Washington, being mainly 
employed in the Hudson Bay Claims Commis- 
sion, to which he was secretary. He was also 
engaged in the arrangement of a large mass of 
manuscript bearing upon the ethnology and 
philology of the American Indians. His services 
were availed of by the Smithsonian Institution 
to superintend its labors in this field, and to his 


~ a 


WAKASHAN 


Gibbs (G.) — Continued. 


energy and complete knowledge of the subject 
it greatly owes its success in this branch of the 
service. The valuable and laborious service 
which he rendered to the Institution was 
entirely gratuitous, and in his death that estab- 
lishment as well as the cause of science lost an 
ardent friend and important contributor to 
its advancement. In 1871 Mr. Gibbs married 
his cousin, Miss Mary K. Gibbs, of Newport, 
R.1I., and removed to New Haven, where he 
died on the 9th of April, 1873. 


Gilbert (—) and Rivington (—). Speci- 


mens | of the | Languages of all Na- 
tions, | and the | oriental and foreign 
types | now in use in| the printing 
offices | of | Gilbert & Rivington, | lim- 
ited. | [Eleven lines quotations. ] | 
London: | 52, St. John’s square, 
Clerkenwell, E.C. | 1886. 
Cover title verso advertisement, no inside 
title, contents pp. 3-4, text pp. 5-66, 16°. 
Matthew xi, 28, in the Qagutl language of 
Vancouver Island (from Hall), no. 198, p. 52. 
Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


Gospel according to Saint John . 


Qa gitl language. See Hall (A. J.) 


LANGUAGES. 27 

| Grammatic treatise: 
Hailtsuk See Bancroft (H. H.) 
Hailtsuk Boas (F.) 
Hailtsuk Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Klaokwat Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Kwakiutl Boas (F.) 
Kwakiutl Dawson (G. M.) 
Nutka Brabant (A. J.) 
Nutka ~ Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Nutka Featherman (A.) 
Sebasa Bancroft (H. H.) 

| Tokoaat Sproat (G. M.) 
Ukwulta Petitot (E. F.S. J.) 


Grant (Walter Colquhoun). Description 
of Vancouver Island. By its first Colo- 
nist, W. Colquhoun Grant, Esq., F. R. 
8.G., of the 2nd Dragoon Guards, and 

| late Lieut.-Col. of the Cavalry of the 

Turkish Contingent. 


In Royal Geog. Soc. Jour. vol. 27, pp. 268-320, 
London [1858], 8°. (Geological Survey.) 

Brief discussion of the [Maka] language of 
Vancouver Island, and numerals 1-10, 100, ot 
the Macaw or Niteenat, p. 295. 


Greely: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy 
of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Gen. A. W. Greely, 
Washington, D.C. 


H, 


Grammar: 
Kwakiutl See Hall (A. J.) 
Tokoaat Knipe (C.) 
Hailtsuk: 


General discussion See Anderson (A. C.) 


General discussion Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
General discussion Gibbs (G.) 
General discussion Prichard (J. C.) 


Grammatic treatise Bancroft (H. H.) 
Grammatic treatise Boas (F.) 
Grammatic treatise Buschmann (J.C. E.) 


Lord’s prayer Tate (C. M.) 
Numerals Boas (F.) 

Numerals Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 

Numerals Latham (R. G.) 
Sentences Bancroft (H. H.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Vocabulary » Campbell (J.) 
Vocabulary Dall (W. 4.) 
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Hale (H.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Tolmie (W. F.) 
Words Boas (F.) 

Words Daa (L. K.) 

Words Gibbs (G.) 

Words Latham (R. G.) 


Haines (Elijah Middlebrook). The | 
American Indian | (Uh-nish-in-na-ba). 
| The Whole Subject Complete in One 
Volume | Illustrated with Numerous 
Appropriate Engravings. |! By Elijah 
M. Haines. | [Design.] | 


Chicago: | the Mas-sin-nii-gan com- 
pany, | 1888. 


Title verso copyright notice ete. 1 1. pre- 
face pp. vii-viii, contents pp. 9-21, list of illus- 
trations pp. 21-22, text pp. 23-821, large 8°. 

Chapter vi, Indian tribes (pp. 121-171), gives 
special lists and a general alphabetic list of the 
tribes of North America, derivations of tribal 
names being sometimes given. Among them 
are the Millbank Sound Indians, p. 129; Indian 
tribes of the Pacific coast, pp. 129-130; tribes of 
Washington Territory west of the Cascade 
| Mountains, pp. 132-133.—Chapter xxxvi, Num- 
erals and use of numbers (pp. 433-451), includes 
the numerals 1-10o0f the Nootka (from Jewitt), 
p. 445.—Chapter lv, vocabularies (pp. 668-703), 
contains a vocabulary (30 words) of the Nootka 
(from Jewitt), p. 675. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Pilling. 


28 


Haldeman (Samuel Stehman). Analytic 


orthography: | an | investigation of 


the sounds of the voice, | and their | 
alphabetic notation; | including | the 
mechanism of speech, | and its bearing 
upon etymology. | By | 8.8. Haldeman, 
A. M., | professor in Delaware college; 
| member [&e. six lines.] |. 


Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & co. 


| London: Triibner & co. Paris: Ben- 
jamin Duprat. | Berlin: Ferd. Diimm- 
ler. | 1860. 


Half-title ‘‘ Trevelyan prize essay’’ verso 


blank 1 1. title verso blank 11. preface pp. v-vi, | 
contents pp. Vii-viii, slip of additional correc- | 


tions, text pp. 5-147, corrections and additions 
p. 148, 4°. 
Numerals 1-10 of the [Maka] language of the 


Indians of Cape Flattery (from the dictation | 


of Dr. John L. LeConte), p. 146. 
Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, British Mu- 
seum, Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, Trumbull. 
First printed in American Philosoph. Soc. 
Trans. new series, vol. 11. (*) 


Samuel Stehman Haldeman, naturalist, was 
born in Locust Grove, Lancaster County, Pa., 
August12, 1812; diedin Chickies, Pa.,September 
19, 1880. He was educated at aclassical school in 
Harrisburg, and then spent two years in Dick- 
inson College. In 1836 Henry D. Rogers, having 
been appointed state geologist of New Jersey, 
sent for Mr. Haldeman, who had been his pupil 
at Dickinson, to assist him. <A year later, on 
the reorganization of the Pennsylvania geolog- 
ical survey, Haldeman was transferred to his 
own state, and was actively engaged on the sur- 
vey until 1842. He made extensive researches 
among Indian dialects, and also in Pennsyl- 
vania Dutch, besides investigations in the 
English, Chinese, and other languages.—A pple- 
ton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Hale (Horatio). United States | explor- 
ing expedition. | During the years | 
1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the 
command of | Charles Wilkes, U.S.N. 
| Vol. VI. | Ethnography and philol- 


ogy. | By | Horatio Hale, | philologist | 


of the expedition. | 

Philadelphia: | printed by C. Sher- 
man. | 1846. 

Half-title (United States exploring expedi- 
tion, by authority of Congress) verso blank 1 1. 
title verso blank 11. contents pp. v—vii, alphabet 


pp. ix-xii, half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3- | 


666, map, 4°. 

No. 14, Vocabulary (104 words) of the Nootka 
(Kwoneatshatka), line 14 on pp. 570-629.— 
Vocabulary (69 words) of the Hailtsa (from 
Anderson), p. 634.—List of 17 words used in the 
Chinook Jargon and derived from the Nootka, 
pp. 636-637, 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Hale (H.)— Continued. 


Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Lenox, Trumbull. 

At the Squier sale, no. 446,a copy brought 
$13; at the Murphy sale, no. 1123, a half maroon 
morocco copy, top edge gilt, brought $13. 

Issued also with title-page as follows: 
United States | exploring expedi- 
tion. | During the years | 1838, 1839, 
1840, 1841, 1842. | Under the command 
of | Charles Wilkes, U.S. N. | Ethnog- 
raphy and philology. | By | Horatio 
Hale, | philologist of the expedition. | 

Philadelphia: | Lea and Blanchard. 

| 1846. 

Half-title (United States exploring expedi- 
tion) verso blank 1 1. title verso blank 1 1]. con- 
tents pp. v-vii, alphabet pp. ix—xii, half-title 
verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-666, map, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen : Eames, Lenox. , 

These vocabularies are reprinted in Gallatin 
(A.), Hale’s Indians of northwest America, 
New York, 1848, 8°. 

Was America peopled from Polyne- 
sia? 

In Congrés Int. des Américanistes, compte- 
rendu, 7" session, pp. 375-387, Berlin, 1890, 8°. 
(Eames, Pilling.) 

Table of the pronouns J, thou, we (ine.), we 
(exe.) and they in the languages of Polynesia 
and of western America, including the Kwa- 
kiutl and Nootka, pp. 386-387. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows: 

Was America peopled from Polyne- 
sia? | A study in comparative Philol- 
ogy. | By | Horatio Hale. | From the 
Proceedings of the International Con- 
gress of Americanists | at Berlin, in 
October 1888. | 

Berlin 1890. | Printed by H.S. Her- 
mann. 

Title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-15, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
p-14. 

Copies seen: Pilling, Wellesley. 


—— An international idiom. | A manual 


of the | Oregon trade language, | or | 
‘‘Chinook Jargon.” | By Horatio Hale, 
M.A., F. R. S. C., | member [&e. six 
lines. | | 

London: | Whittaker & co., White 
Hart Street, | Paternoster square. | 
1890. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names 
of printers 1 |. prefatory note verso extract 
from a work by Quatrefages 1 1. contents verse 
blank 1 1. text pp. 1-63, 16°. : 

Trade language and English dictionary, pp. 
39-52, and the English and Trade language, pp. 


ss, 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 


Hale (H.) —Continued. 

53-63, each contain a number of words derived 
from the Nootka; in the Jargon-English por- 
tion these words are marked with an NV. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

Horatio Hale, ethnologist, born in Newport, 
N. H., May 3, 1817, was graduated at Harvard in 
1837 and was appointed in the same year philolo- 
gist to the United States expioring expedition 
under Capt. Charles Wilkes. In this capacity 


he studied a iarge number of the languages of | 


the Pacific islands, as well as of North and 
South America, Australia, and Africa, and also 
investigated the history, traditions, and cus- 
toms of the tribes speaking those languages. 
The results of his inquiries are given in his 
Ethnography and Philology (Philadelphia, 
1846), which forms the seventh volume of the 
expedition reports. He has published numerous 
memoirs on anthropology and ethnology, is a 
member of many learned societies, both in 
Europe and in America, and in 1886 was vice- 
president of the American Association for the 
Advancement of Science, presiding over the 
section of anthropology.—Appleton’s Oyclop. of 
Am. Biog. 


Hall (?ev. Alfred James). The gospel | 
according to | St. Matthew, | translated 
into the | Qa-gutl (or Quoquols lan- 
guage). | By the | rev. A.J. Hall, | C. 


M.S. missionary at Fort Rupert, Van- 


couver’s island, | 
London: | printed for the British 


and foreign bible society, | Queen Vic- | 


toria street. | 1882. 

Title verso ‘‘sounds of the letters” 1 1. text 
entirely in the Qa-gutl language pp. 5-121, 16°. 
See fac-simile of the title-page, p. 30. 


Copies seen: British and Foreign Bible 
Society, Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 
[——] The | gospel according to | Saint 


John. | Translated into the | Qa gitl 
language. | 


London: | printed for the British and — 


foreign bible society, | Queen Victoria 
street. | 1884. 
Title verso names of printers 1 1. text entirely 
in the Qa gutl language pp. 5-101, 16°. 
Copiesseen: British and Foreign Bible Society, 
British Museum, Eames, Pilling, Wellesley. 
Noticed, and an extract (St. J ohniv, 7-8) given 
in the American Antiquarian, vol. 8, p. 187, 
Chicago, 1886, 8°. 
— AGrammar of the Kwagiutl Lan- 
guage. By Rev. Alfred J. Hall, Alert 
. Bay, British Columbia. 
In Royal Soc. of Canada Trans. vol. 6, section 
2, pp. 59-105, Montreal, 1888, 4°. 
Introductory, p. 59.—The Kwagiutl people, 
with list of villages, pp. 59-60.—Phonology, pp. 
60-61.—Parts of speech (pp. 61-105) includes: 


—— Section II, 1888. 


29 


Hall (A. J.) — Continued. 


Nouns, pp. 61-65; adjectives, pp. 65-72; pro- 
nouns, pp. 72-76; verb, pp. 77-101; adverb, pp. 
101-103; conjunction, pp. 103-104; interjection, 
p. 105. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows: 


Trans. Royal Soc., 
Can. | A grammar |of the Kwagiutl 
language, | by the | rev. Alfred J. Hall, 
| from the | transactions of the Royal 
society of Canada | volume VI, section 
II, 1888. | 

Montreal { Dawson 
lishers | 1889. 


Cover title as above, title as above verso 
blank 11.contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 59- 
105, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen; Eames,Geological Survey, Pill- 
ing, Wellesley. 


brothers, pub- 


] A| Kwagutl version of portions 
| of the | Book of common prayer. | 
[Seal cf the 8. P. C. K.] | 

London: | Society for promoting 
christian knowledge, | Northumber- 
land avenue, Charing cross, W. C. 


[1891, ] 


Title verso blank 1 1. contents verso blank 1 
1. text entirely in the Kwagutl language pp. 3- 
62, colophon verso blank 1 1. 16°. 

Prayers, pp. 3-49.—Hymmns, pp. 50-62.—Isaiah 
lii, 7. 9, p. 62. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 


Mr. Hall was born in 1853 in the village of 
Thorpe, Surrey, England. In 1873 he was 
accepted by the Church Missionary Society for 
foreign work, and was sent to their college at 
Islington for four years. In February, 1877, he 
was ordained, and in June of the same year he 
left England for Metlakatla, British Columbia, 
arriving there August 6, 1877, where he labored 
with Mr, William Dunean till March 8, 1878. 
At that date this village contained 838 Tsim- 
shian Indians, and the Sunday congregations 
numbered 600 or 700 souls. When Mr. Duncan 
was absent Mr. Hall preached through an 
interpreter. He taught daily in a schoolof 140 
children, more especially instructing them to 
sing; and he also had a large evening school of 
young men. During his eight months’ stay at 
Metlakatla he acquired a fair knowledge of 
Tsimshian, and left it with much regret. In 
March, 1878, Mr. Hall was ordered to Fort 
Rupert, northeast of Vancouver Island, to 
work among the Kwakiutls, who speaka totally 
different language. He found this tongue 
more difficult to acquire than the Tsimshian, 
the variety of pronouns being very puzzling. 
Here he taught school for six months, and 
afterward for two years inside the Hudson Bay 
fort. There were difficulties in acquiring land 
at Fort Rupert, and in 1881 Mr. Hall removed 


30 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


THE GOSPEL 


ACCORDING TO 


Sl. MATTE 


TRANSLATED INTO THE 


QA-GUTL (OR QUOQUOLS LANGUAGE), 


BY THE 


REV. A. J. HALL, 


€.M.S. MISSIONARY AT FURT RUPERT, VANCOUVER'S ISLAND» 


Zonvon: 


PRINTED FOR THE BRITISH AND FOREIGN BIBLE SOCIETY, 
QUEEN VICTORIA STREET, 


1882. 


FACSIMILE OF TITLE-PAGE OF HALL’'S QA-GUTL TRANSLATION OF MATTHEW, 


Hancock Harbor Indians. 


WAKASHAN 


Hall (A. J.) —Continued. 

to Alert Bay, about twenty miles south of 
Fort Rupert, and here built a house and school. 
There are eleven villages within a radius of 


fifty miles from Alert Bay, and it has been | 


usual to make two itinerancies annually to 
visit these tribes, numbering 1,978 souls. 


See Klaokwat. 


Harvard: This word following a title or within | 
parentheses after a note indicates that acopy | 


of the work referred to has been seen by the 
compiler in the library of Harvard University, 
Cambridge, Mass. 


Humboldt (Friedrich Wilhelm Heinrich | 
Versuch | iiber | den | 
politischen Zustand | des Kénigreichs | 


Alexander von). 


| Neu Spanien, | enthaltend | Unter- 
suchungen [&c. ten lines], | von Fried- 
rich Alexander von Humboldt. | 

Erster(—Fiinfter] Band. | e 

Tiibingen, | in der J. G. Cotta’schen 
Buchhandlung. | 1809[-1813]. 

5 vols. maps, 8°. 

Numerals 1-10 of the Mexican, Escelen, 
Rumsen, and Nootka (the last named from a 
manuscript of Mozino) compared, vol. 2, p. 238. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Harvard. 

Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 33717, gives a similar 
title with the date 1809-1814, 5 vols. 8°. 


Essai politique | sur le royaume 


de | la Nouvelle-Espagne; | par Alex- | 


andre de Humboldt. | Avec an atlas | 
physique et géographique, fondé sur 


des observations astronomiques, des 
mesures | trigonométriques et des 
nivellemens barométriques. | Tome 


premier[-deuxiéme]. | 

A Paris, | chez F. Schoell, libraire, 
rue des Fossés-Saint-Germaine-l’Aux- 
errois, n°. 29. | 1811. | De V’imprimerie 
de J. H. Sténe. 

Series title: Voyage | de Humboldt et Bonp- 
land. | Troisiéme partie. | Essai politique sur 
le royaume | de | la Nouvelle-Espagne. | Tome 
premier [-deuxiéme]. | 

A Paris, | Chez F. Schoell, libraire, rue des 
Fossés-Saint-Germain-l’ Auxerrois, n°. 29.) 1811. 
| De l'imprimerie de J. H. Sténe. 

2 vols.: half-title of the series verso blank 1 
1. title of the series verso blank 1 1. half-title of 
the work verso blank 1 1. title of the work 
verso blank 1 1. dedication 3 ll. analyses rai- 
sonncées etc. pp, i-xcii, half-title verso blank 1 1. 
[preface] pp. i-iv, text pp. 3-350, table des 
matiéres 2 ll. corrections 1 1.; half titles and 
titles as in vol. 1, 411. text pp. 351-866, table des 
matiéres pp. 867-868, additions pp. 861 bis—867 
bis, table alphabetique pp. 869-904, corrections 
p. [905], folio. 

Linguistic contents as under titlenext above, 
vol. 1, p. 322. 


LANGUAGES. 


31 


Humboldt (F. W. H. A.) — Continued. 


Copies seen: Astor, Boston Atheneum, 
British Museum, Congress, Harvard. 

There are two copies of this work in the 
Astor Library, each slightly differing in the 
order of the preliminary leaves from that 
given above. 


—— Essai politique | sur le royaume | de 


de 
premier[-cin- 


la | Nouvelle-Espagne. | Par Al. 
Humboldt. | Tome 
quiéme]. | 

A Paris, | Chez F. Schoell,Libraire, 
rue des Fossés- | Saint-Germain-l’Aux- 
errois, n°, 29, | 1811. 

5 vols, 8°. 

A short vocabulary (6 words) of the Nootka, 
showing resemblances to the Mexican, vol. 2, 
p. 446.—Numerals 1-10 of the Mexican, Escelen, 
Rumsen, and Nootka, vol. 2, p. 447. 

Copies seen: Congress, Géological Survey, 
Harvard, Lenox. 

Political Essay | on the | kingdom 
of New Spain. | Containing | Re- 
searches relative to the Geo- | graphy 
of Mexico, the Extent | of its Surface 
and its political | Division into Intend- 
ancies, the | physical Aspect of the 
Coun- | try, the Population, the State 
| of Agriculture and Manufac- | tur- 
ing and Commercial In- | dustry, the 
Canals projected | between the South 
Sea and | Atlantic Ocean, the Crown 
| Revenues, the Quantity of the | 
precious Metals which have | flowed 
from Mexico into En- | rope and Asia, 
since the Dis- | covery of the New Con- 
tinent, | and the Military Defence of 
|New Spain. | By Alexander de 
Humboldt. | With | physical sections 
and maps, | founded on astronomical 
observations, and | trigonometrical and 
barometrical | measurements. | Trans- 
lated from the original French | by 

John Black. | Vol. I[-IV]. | 

London: | printed for Longman, 

Hurst, Rees, Orme, and Brown; and 
| H. Colburn: and W, Blackwood, and 
Brown and Crombie, | Edinburgh. | 
1811. 

4 vols. 8°. atlas, 4°. 

Numerals 1-10 of the Mexican, Escelen, 
Rumsen, and Nootka compared, vol. 2, p. 346. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Athenzeum, 
British Museum, Congress, Lenox. 

At the Murphy sale, catalogue no. 1289, a 
copy brought $18.75. 


—— Political essay | on the | kingdom of 


New Spain. | Containing | Researches 


32 


Humboldt (IF. W. H. A.) — Continued. 
relative to the Geo- | graphy of Mex- 
ico, the Extent | of its Surface and its 
political | Division into Intendancies, 
the | physical Aspect of the Coun- | 
try, the Population, the State | of 
Agriculture and Manufac- | turing and 
Commercial Indus- | try, the Canals 
projected be- | tween the South Sea 
and At- | lantic Ocean, the Crown Re- 
| venues, the Quantity of the | precious 
Metals which have | flowed from Mex- 
ico into Eu- | rope and Asia, since the 
Dis- | covery of the New Continent, | 
and the Military Defence of | New 
Spain. | By Alexander de Humboldt. | 
With | physical sections and maps, | 
founded on aStronomical observations, 
and | trigonometrical and barometrical 
| measurements. | Translated from the 
original French, | by John Black. | 
Vol. I[-IJ]. | 

New-York: | Printed and published 
by I. Riley. | 1811. 

2 vols.: title verso blank 1 1. preface by the 
translator pp. iii—viii, dedication pp. ix—x, con- 
tents pp. xi-xii, geographical introduction pp. 
i-cxv, text pp. 1-221; title verso blank 1 1. text 
pp. 3-377, 8°. (No more published.) 

A few words (6) of the Nootka showing 
resemblances to the Mexican, vol. 2, p.238.— 
Numerals 1-10 of the Nootka, vol. 2, p. 238. 

Copies seen ; Congress, Geological Survey. 

Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 33715, mentions ‘‘ Sec- 
ond edition, London, 1814, 4 vols. 8°. atlas. 

There is an edition: Minerva, Ensayo poli- 
tico sobre de Nueva Espaiia, Madrid, 1818, 2 
vols.8°, which contains no Wakashan linguistic 
material. (Congress.) 

—— Ensayo politico | sobre el reino | de 
| la Nueva-Espana, | Por Alej. de 
Humboldt; | traducido al Espanol, | 


Por Don Vicente Gonzales Arnao, | con | 


dosmapas. | Tomo primero [-cuarto]. | 


Paris, | en casa de Rosa, gran patio | 


del palacio real, | y calle de Montpen- 
sier, N°5, | 1822. 

4 vols. maps, 8°. 

A few words (6) of the Nootka language, vol. 
2, p. 154.—Numerals 1-10 of the Nootka, vol. 2, 
p. 155. 

Copies seen: Astor, Geological Survey. 

Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 33718, mentions an 
edition, with similar title, Paris, J. Renouard 
1827, 5 vols. 8°. 
Political essay | on the | kingdom of 
New Spain. | Containing | Researches 
relative to the Geography of Mexico | 
The Extent of its Surface and its polit- 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF 


i 


THE 


Humboldt (F. W. H. A.)— Continued. 


ical Division into Intendancies, | The 
physical Aspect of the Country, | The 
Population, the State of Agriculture 
and Manufacturing | and Commercial 
Industry; | The Canals projected be- 
tween the South Sea and Atlantic 
Ocean, | The Crown Revenues, | The 
Quantity of the precious Metals which 
have flowed from Mexico | into Europe 
and Asia, since the Discovery of the | 
New Continent, | And the Military 
Defence of New Spain. | By Alexander 
de Humboldt. | With physical sections 
and maps, | founded on astronomical 
observations, and trigonometrical | and 
barometrical measurements. | Trans- 
, lated from the original French | by 

John Black. | Vol. I[-IV]. | Third edi- 
tion. | 

London: | printed for | Longman, 
Hurst, Rees, Orme, and Brown, | Pater- 
noster-row. | 1822. 

4 vols. 8°. 

Numerals 1-10 of the Mexican, Escelen, 
Rumsen, and Nootka compared, vol. 2, p. 299. 

Copies seen: Boston Public, Congress, Har- 
vard. 


—— Essai politique | sur le royaume | de 


la| Nouvelle-Espagne | par Alexandre de 
Humboldt. | Deuxieme édition. | Tome 
premier [-quatriéme]. | [Design.] | 

A Paris, | chez Antoine-Augustin 
Renouard. | M DCCC XXV[-M DCCC 
XXVIII] [1825-1827] 

4 vols. 8°. 

Numerals 1-10 of the Mexican, Escelen, 
Rumsen and Nootka compared, vol. 2, p. 280. 

Copies seen: Harvard. 

Sabin's Dictionary, no. 33713, mentions an 
edition, Paris, 1825, 4 vols. 8°. 
Ensayo politico | sobre | Nueva 
Espana, | por | el Bev. A.de Humboldt, 
| traducido al Castellano | por Don 
Vicente Gonzales Arnao. | Tercera 
edicion, | corregida aumentada y ador- 
nado |con mapas. | Tomo primero 
[-quinto]. | 

Paris, | libreria de Lecointe, | 49 quai 
des Augustins. | Perpinan, | libreria de 
Lassere. | 1836. 

5 vols, 8°. 

Numerals 1-10 of the Mexican, Escelen, 
Rumsen, and Nootka, vol. 2, p. 130. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 

Hiersemann's catalogue 30, no. 423, mentions 
an edition: Essai politique, Paris, 1871 [18113], 
8°, atlas, folio, which he prices at 30 fr. 


WAKASHAN 


Humboldt (F. W. H. A.) — Continued. 
— Vues | des Cordilléres, |et monumens 
| des peuples indigénes | de l’Amér- 
ique. | Par Al. de Humboldt. | 
A Paris, | Chez F. Schoell, rue des 
Fossés-Saint - Germain-)’Auxerrois, n°. 


29. | 1810. 

Series title: Voyage | de | Humboldt et Bon- 
pland. | Premiére partie, | Relation historique. 
| Atlas pittoresque. | 

A Paris, | Chez F. Schoell, rue des Fossés 
Saint-Germain-l’ Auxerrois, n°. 29. | 1810. 

Half-title of the series verso blank 1 1. title 
of the series verso blank 1 1. half-title of the 
work verso name of printer 1 1. title of the 
work verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 
l. introduction pp. i-xvi, text pp. 1-304, notes 
pp. 305-21, table alphabetique des auteurs et 
des ouvrages pp. 323-328, table alphabetique 
des matiéres pp. 329-347, table des matiéres pp. 
348-350, book of plates (69), atlas, folio. 

Numerals 1-12 of the Azteque and Noutka 
(the latter from a manuscript of Mozino), pp. 
140-141. 

Copies seen: Astor, Congress. 

Priced by Quaritch, cat. 362, no. 28958, 61. 10s. 


— Vues | des Cordilléres, |et monumens 
| des peuples indigénes | de l’Amér- 
ique. | Par Al. de Humboldt. | 


A Paris, | Chez F. Schoell, rue des | 


Fossés-Montmartre, n°. 14.,| 1813. 

Series title: Voyage | de | Humboldt et Bon- 
pland. | Primiére partie, | Relation historique. 
| Atlas pittoresque. | 

A Paris, | Chez F. Schoell, rue des Fossés- 
Montmartre, n°. 14. | 1813. 

Half-title of the series verso blank 1 1. title 
of the series verso blank 1 1. half-title of the 
work verso name of printer 1 1. title of the 
work verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 
1. introduction pp. i-xvi, text pp. 1-304, notes 
pp. 305-321, table alphabetique des auteurs et 
ouvrages pp. 323-328, table alphabetique des 
matiéres pp. 329-347, table des matiéres pp. 348- 
350, book of plates (69), atlas, folio. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen : Harvard, Lenox. 

Priced by Dufossé, no. 1619i, and 24143, 200 fr. 


— Researches | Concerning | the insti- 
tutions and monuments | of | the 
Ancient Inhabitants | of | America, | 
with Descriptions & Views | of some of 
the most | Striking Scenes | in the | 


enka 


33 


| Humboldt (F. W. H. A.) —Continued. 
Cordilleras. | Written in French by | 
Alexander de Humboldt, | & Trans- 
lated into English by | Helen Maria 
Williams. | Vol. I [-II].| [Engraving.] | 

London: | Published by Longman, 
Hurst, Rees, Orme & Brown, J. Murray 
& H. Colburn. | 1814. 


2 vols.: title verso blank 1 1. advertisement 
pp. iii-iv, text pp. 1-411; title verso blank 11. 
text pp. 1-219, notes pp. 221-256, index to 
authors pp. 257-272, general index pp. 273-322, 
list of plates pp. 323-324, 8°. 

Numerals 1-13, Mexican and Nootka, vol. 2, p. 
305. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
neum, Congress, Lenox. 


LANGUAGES. 


— Vues des Cordilléres, et Monumens 
des Peuples Indigénes de l’Amérique. 
Par Al. de Humboldt. 


Paris: Maze. 1815. 
2 vols. pp. 392, 411, 11, 19 plates, 8°. 
Title from Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 33750. 


3] 


— Vues des Cordilliéres et monuments 
des peuples de l’ Amérique. 
Paris, 1816. 
2 vols.: 19 black and colored plates, 8°. 
Title from Dufossé’s 1887 catalogue, no. 
24142, where it is priced 20fr. At the Murphy 
sale, no. 1288, a copy brought $9.50. 


©) 


Vues | des | Cordilléres, | et | mon- 
umens des peuples | indigénes | de 
VAmérique; | Par Al. de Humboldt. | 
Avee 19 planches, dont plusieurs 
coloriées. | Tome premier [-second]. | 

Paris, | Chez N. Maze, Libraire, Rue 
Git-le-Ceeur, n° 4. [1824?] 

2vols.: half-title verso ‘‘ Imprimerie de Smith 
(1816), Excepté les titres qui sont de l'Im- 
primerie de Stahl (1824)/' 11. title verso blank 1 
1. dedication verso blank 1 1. avertissement pp. 
5-6, introduction pp. 7-42, text pp. 43-392; half- 
title verso as in first volume 1 1. title vers> 
blank 1 1. text pp. 1-854, notes pp. 355-394, table 
des matiéres pp. 395-399, table des auteurs pp. 
400-401, table alphabetique des matiéres pp. 
402-411, errata p. [412], table des planches pp. 
1-2, 8°. 
Linguistic contents as under titles above, 


vol. 1, p. 367. 


| Copies seen: Brinton. 


34 


J. 


Jéhan (Louis-Fran¢ois). Troisiéme et 
derniere | Encyclopédie théologique, | 
[&c. twenty-four lines] | publiée | par 
M. Vabbé Migne | [&c. six lines.] | 
Tome trent-quatriéme. | Dictionnaire 
de linguistique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 
7 francs. | 

S’Imprime etse vend chez J.-P.Migne, 
éditeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, Rue 
W’Amboise, au Petit-Montrouge, | Bar- 
riere d’enfer de Paris. | 1858. 

Second title: Dictionnaire | de | linguistique 
| et| de philologie comparée. | Histoire de 
toutes les langues mortes et vivantes, | ou | 
traité complet d’idiomographie, | embrassant | 
l'examen critique des systémes et de toutes les 
questions qui se rattachent | & l’origine et a la 
filiation des langues, A leur essence organique 

| et & leurs rapports avec Lhistoire des races 
humaines, de leurs migrations, etc. | Précédé 
d'un | Essai sur le réle du langage dans l’évolu- 
tion del'intelligence humaine. | ParL.-F. Jéhan 
(de Saint-Clavien), | Membre de la Société géo- 
logique de France, de l’Académie royale des 
sciences de Turin, ete. | [Quotation, three 
lines.] | Publié | parM. 1’ Abbé Migne, | éditeur 
de la Bibliothéque universelle du clergé, | ou | 
des cours complets sur chaque branche de la 
science ecclésiastique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 
7 francs. | 

S'Imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, 
éditeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, Rue d’Am- 
boise, au Petit-Montrouge, | Barriére denfer 
de Paris. | 1858. 

Outside title 1 1. titles as above 2 ll. columns 
(two to a page) 9-1448, large 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next below. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Georgetown. 

A later edition with title-pages as follows: 
‘Troisieme et derniere | Encyclopédie 

| théologique, | ou troisitme et der- 
niere | serie de dictionnaires sur toutes 
les parties de la science religieuse, | 
offrant en frangais, et par ordre alpha- 
bétique, | la plus claire, la plus facile, 
la plus commode, la plus variée | et la 
plus complete des théologies : | [&c. sev- 
enteen lines] | publiee | par M. l’abbé 
Migne | [&e. six lines.] | Tome trente- 
quatrieéme. | Dictionnaire de linguis- 
tique. | Tome unique. | Prix: 8 francs. | 

S’imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, 
éditeur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue 
d’Amboise, 20, au Petit-Montrouge, | 
autrefois Barriére denfer de Paris, 
maintenant dans Paris. | 1864 


Jewitt (John Rogers). 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Jéhan (L. F.) —Continued. 


Second title: Dictionnaire | de | linguistique 
et | de philologie comparée. | Histoire de toutes 
les langues morteset vivantes, | ou | traitécom- 
plet d'idiomographie, | embrassant | l’examen 
critique des systémes et de toutes les questions 
qui se rattachent | a l'origine et a la filiation 
des langues, a leur essence organique | etaleurs 
rapports avec l‘histoire des races humaiues, de 
leurs migrations, etc. | Précédé d'un | Essaisur 
le réle du langage dans lévolution de lintelli- 
gence humaine. | Par L.-F. Jéhan (de Saint- 
Clavien), | Membre de la Société géologique de 
France, de l’Académie royale des sciences de 
Turin, ete. | [Quotation, three lines.] | Publié | 
par M.l’abbé Migne, | éditenr de la Bibliotkéque 
universelle du clergé, | ou | des cours complets 
sur chaque branche de la science ecclésiastique. 

| Tome unique. | Prix: 7 francs. | 

S‘imprime et se vend chez J.-P. Migne, édi- 
teur, | aux ateliers catholiques, rue d’Amboise, 
20, au Petit-Montrouge, | autrefois Barriére 
d’enter de Paris, maintenant dans Paris. | 1864 

First title verso ‘‘avis important”’ 1 1]. second 
title verso name of printer 1 1. introduction 
numbered by columns 9-208, text in double col- 
umns 209-1250, notes additionnelles columns 
1249-1434, table des matiéres columns 1435-1448, 
large 8°. 

Tableau polyglotte des langues de la céte 
occidentale de 1) Amérique du nord, columns 
445-448, contains a vocabulary of about a dozen 
words in Noutka ou Wakash.—Wakash ou 
Noutka, columns 1238-1239, contains general 
remarks on the language. 

Copies seen: Eames. 

A Narrative of 
the Adventures and Sufferings of John 
R. Jewitt only survivor of the crew of 
the Ship Boston during a captivity of 
nearly three years among the Savages 
of Nootka Sound with an account of 
the Manners, Mode of living and Reli- 
gious opinions of the natives. Llus- 
trated with a plate representing the 
ship in possession of the Savages. 

Middletown, priuted by Loomis & 
Richards, 1815. (4) 

203 pp. 2 plates, 12°. ; 

Vocabulary of the Nootka language, contain- 
ing nearly one hundred words. p. 4. 

Title from Field’s Essay, no. 777, where it is 
followed by this note: 

The narrative of Jewitt’s captivity, was 
written by Roland Alsop, of Middletown, 
Connecticut, author of several books of poems, 
and translator of Molina’s History of Chili. 
The details of the adventures of Jewitt were 
drawn from him by the indefatigable queries of 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 35 


TIRES AND SUFFERINGS 


[WITH TES RNGRAVIN: 


oe 
ith Aastha 


FACSIMILE OF THE TITLE-PAGE OF THE NEW YORK [18162] EDITION OF JEWITT’S NARRATIVE. 


. 


36 


Jewitt (J. R.) — Continued. 

Alsop, who after some years declared that he 
feared he had done Jewitt but little good, in 
furnishing him with a vagabond mode of earn- 
ing a livelihood, by hawking his book from a 
wheelbarrow through the country. 


——A | narrative | of the | adventures 
and sufferings, | of | John R. Jewitt; | 
only survivor of the crew of the | ship 
Boston, | during a captivity of nearly 
three years among the savages of | 
Nootka sound: | with an account of the 
| manners, mode of living, and reli- 
gious | opinions of the natives. | Em- 
bellished with a plate, representing | 
the ship in ; possession of the savages. 
| [Two lines quotation. ] | 
Middletown: [Conn.] | printed by 
Seth Richards. | 1815. 
Colophon: End of the Second Edition. 
Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright ‘‘thirty- 
ninth year of the Independence of the U.S. A.” 
11. names of the crew of the ship Boston, verso 
list of words in Nootka 1 1. text pp. 5-204. 16°. 
‘A list of words [77, and the numerals 1-10, 
20, 100, 1000] in the Nootkian language, the 
most in use,” p. [4].—War song of the Nootka 
tribe (two verses with explanatory note), p. 204. 
Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, Congress, 
Eames, Harvard, Trumbull, Wisconsin Histor- 
ical Society. 
A | narrative | of the | adventures | 
and sufferings | of | John R. Jewitt; | 
only survivor of the crew of the | ship | 
Boston, | during a captivity of nearly 
three years | among the savages of | 
Nootka sound: | with an account of | 
the manners, mode of living, and reli- | 
gious | opinions of the natives. | Em- 
bellished with a plate representing the | 
ship in | the possession of the natives. | 
| [E'wo lines quotation. ] | 
New York: | printed by Daniel Fan- 
shaw, | No. 241, Pearl street. | 1816. 
Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 ].names | 
of the crew of the ship Boston verso list of 
words in Nootka 11. text pp. 5-208, 16°. 
Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp. [4], 208. 
Copies seen: 
Museum. 
Narrative | of the | adventures and 
sufferings | of | John R. Jewitt; | only | 
survivor of the crew of the | ship Bos- | 
ton, | during a captivity of nearly 
three years among the | savages of 
Nootka sound: | with an account of the 
| manners, mode of living, and religious 


Boston Atheneum, British 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


| Jewitt (J. R.) —Continued. 


| opinions of the natives. | Embellished 
with ten engravings. | [Design.] | 

New York: | printed for the pub- 
lisher. [18162] 

Cover title as above, frontispiece 1 1. title as 
above verso blank 1 |. names of the crew ete. 
verso vocabulary 1 1]. text pp. 7-166, 16°. See 
fac-simile of the title-page, p. 35. 

Linguistic contents asunder title nextabove, 
pp. [6], 166. 

Copies seen: Congress, Pilling, Wellesley. - 


| ——A| narrative | of the | adventures 


and sufferings | of | John R. Jewitt, | 

only survivor of the crew of the | ship 
Boston, | during a captivity of nearly 
three years | among the | savages of 
Nootka sound: | with an account of the 
| manners, mode of living, and reli- 
gious | opinionsof the natives. | Embel- 
lished [&c. three lines.] | [Two lines 
quotation. ] | 

Middletown: | printed by Loomis 
and Richards, | And Re-printed by 
Rowland Hurst, Wakefield; | and pub- 
lished by Longman, Hurst [&e. three 
lines.] | 1816. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 
11.To the English reader pp. iii-iy, picture 1 
1. text pp. 5-208, 16°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 
205, 206-208. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 


——A | narrative | of the | adventures 


and sufferings | of | John R. Jewitt, | 

only survivor of the crew of the | ship 
Boston, | during a captivity of nearly 
three years | among the | savages of 
Nootka Sound: | with an account of 
the | manners, mode of living, and reli- 
gious | opinions of the natives. | Em- 
bellished [&c. three lines.] | [Two 
lines quotation. ] | 

Middletown: | printed by Loomis 
and Richards, |and Re-printed by 
Rowland Hurst, Wakefield; | and pub- 
lished by Thomas Tegg, Cheapside, 
London; and | sold by all booksellers. 

| 1820. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright (39th 
year of the independence) 1 1. To the English 
reader pp. iii-iv, picture 11. text pp. 5-208, 16°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 
205, 206-208. 

Copies seen: Lenox. 

Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 36123, mentions an edi- 
tion: Middletown, 1820, 208 pages, 2 plates, 12°. 
He probably referred to the above by mistake. 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 37 


Jewitt (J. R.) — Continued. 

—— The | adventures | and | sufferings | 
of | John R. Jewitt, | only survivor of 
the crew of the ship Boston, | during a 
captivity of nearly three years | among 
thesavages of Nootkasound; | with an 
account of the manners, mode of living, 

| and religious opinions of the natives. 
| [L'wo lines quotation. ] | 

America printed. | Edinburgh: | re- | 
printed for Archd. Constable & co. | 
Edinburgh: | and Hurst, Robinson, & | 
co. London. | 1824. | 


Title verso copyright 1 1. To the English 
reader pp. iii-iv, text pp. 1-237, 16°. 

Linguistic contents as undertitles above, pp. 
234, 235-237. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 

Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 36123, mentions an 
edition in German as included in Hulsuit’s | 
Tagenbuch, Munster, 1828; and onein English, | 
Ithaca, N. Y., 1840, 8°. 

—— Narrative | of the | adventures and | 
sufferings | of | John R. Jewitt; | only 
survivor of the crew of the ship | Bos- 
ton, | during a captivity of nearly | 
three years among the | savages of 
Nootka sound: | with an account of the 

| manners, mode of living, and reli- 
gious | opinions of the natives. | Em- 
bellished with engravings. | 

Ithaca, N. Y.: | Mack, Andrus, & 
co. | 1849. 


Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. vocab- 
ulary verso names of the crew 1 1. text pp. 7- 
166, 16°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 
[5], 166. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Congress, 
National Museum. 


| 
| 
| 
| 


Narrative | of the | adventures and | 
suffereigns[sic] | of | John R. Jewitt, | | 
only survivor of the crew of the | ship 
Boston, | during a captivity of nearly | 
3 years among the | savages of Nootka 
sound: | with an account of the | man- 
ners, mode of living, and religious | 
opinions of the natives. | 

Ithaca, N. Y.: | Andrus, Gauntlett & 
co. | 1851. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 
7-166, 16°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 
7, 166. 


\ 


| Jewitt (J. R.) — Continued. 


Copies seen: British Museum, Georgetown, 
Lenox, Wisconsin Historical Society. 

The linguistic material gathered by Jewitt 
has been reprinted by many authors. 


—— The | captive of Nootka. | Or the | 
adventures of John R. Jewett[sic]. | 
[Picture. ] | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
co. | 1861. 


Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 
(1835) 1 1. contents pp. y-xii, text pp. 13-259, 
plates, sq. 16°. Compiled from Jewitt’s Narra- 
tive, by Peter Parley. 

A number of Nutka words, phrases, and 
proper names passim. 

Copies seen: Sohn K. Gill, Portland,Oregon. 


The | captive of Nootka. | Or the | 
adventures of John R. Jewett[sic]. | 
[Woodecut. ] | 

Philadelphia: | Claxton, Remsen & 
Haffelfinger, | 819 & 821 Market street. 
| 1869. 


Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 
(1835) 1 1. contents pp. v—xii, text pp. 13-259, 
plates, sq. 16°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Astor. 

There is a work entitled ‘‘A journal kept at 
Nootka Sound by John R. Jewitt, Boston, 1807, 
48 pages, which contains no linguistics. (Brit- 
ish Museum.) Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 36122, 
mentions an edition, New York, 1812. 


John Rogers Jewitt was born in Boston, Lin- 
colnshire, England, May 21,1783. He attended 
school in his native town, and at twelve years 
of age was sent to an academy at Donnington. 
At fourteen it was the intention of his father 
to apprentice him to a physician, but his own 
disinclination was so strong he was permitted 
to become an apprentice to his father as black- 
smith. When about fifteen years of age his 

-family moved to Hull, when, after four years’ 
residence there, he was permitted to ship as 
blacksmith on the ship Boston, of Boston, 
Mass., Capt. Salter, bound for the northwest 
coast of America, thence to China and thence 
to Boston, Mass.. In March, 1803, while at 
Nootka Sound, the ship was captured by the 
natives, and all on board with the exception of 
Jewitt and a sailmaker named Thompson were 
killed. They remained prisoners among the 
Nootkas until July, 1805, when they were res- 
cued by Captain Hill, of the brig Lydia, of Bos- 
ton. 


Jiilg (B.' See Vater (J.S.) 


38 


Kagutl. See Kwakiutl. 


Kane (Paul). Wanderings of an artist | 
among the | Indians of North America 
| from Canada | to Vancouver's island 
and Oregon | through the Hudson’s bay 
company’s territory | and | back again. 
| By Paul Kane. | 

London | Longman, Brown, Green, 
Longmans, and Roberts. | 1859. 

Half-title verso name of printer 1 1. frontis- 
piece 11. title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso 
blank 1 1. preface pp. v-x, contents pp. xi-xvil, 
list of illustrations p. [xviii], text pp. 1-455, 
appendix 4 ll. 8°. 

List of peoples in the northwest, including 
the Wakashan tribes, 4 unnumbered leaves at 
end. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenwum, 
British Museum, Congress, Harvard. 

The edition: Les Indiens de la Baie Hudson, 
Paris, 1861, contains no linguistic material. 
(British Museum.) 

Paul Kane, Canadian artist, born in Toronto 
in 1810, died there in 1871. He early evinced a 
love of art,and after studying in Upper Canada 
college he visited the United States in 1836 and 


followed his profession there till 1840. when he | 


went to Europe. There he studied in Rome, 
Genoa, Naples, Flcrence, Venice, and Bologna. 
He finally returned to Toronto in the spring of 
1845, and after a short rest went on a tour of 
art exploration through the unsettled regions 
of thenorthwest. He traveled many thousands 
of miles in this country, from the confines of 
old Canada to the Pacitic Ocean, and was emi- 
nently successful in delineating the physical 
peculiarities and appearance of the aborigines, 
as well as the wild scenery of the tar north. He 


returned to Toronto in December, 1848, having | 


in his possession one of the largest collections 
of Indian curiosities that was ever made on the 


continent, together with nearly four hundred | 
From these he painted a series of | 


sketches. 
oil pictures, which are now in the possession of 


George W.Allen, of Toronto, andembraceviews | 
of the country from Lake Superior to Vancou- | 


ver’s Island.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Keane (Augustus H.) Ethnography and 
philology of America. By A. H. Keane. 
In Bates (H. W.),Central America, the West 
Indies, etc., pp. 443-561, London, 1878, 8°. 
General scheme of American races and lan- 
guages (pp. 460-497), includes a list of the 


Columbian races, among them the Nootkah and | 
Puget Sound groups, pp. 473-474. A Iphabetical 
list of all known American tribes and lan- | 


guages, pp. 498-545. 
Reprinted in the 1882 and 1885 editions of the 
same work and oun the same pages. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF 


THE 


K. 


Keane (A. H.) — Continued. 
—— American Indians. 
In Encyclopedia Britannica, ninth edition, 
vol. 12, pp. 822-830, New York, 1881, royal 8°. 
Columbian Races, p. 826, includes the divi- 
sions of the Nootka. : 


Kerr (Robert). A | general history and 
collection | of | voyages and travels, | 
arranged in systematic order: | form- 
ing a complete history of the origin 
and progress | of navigation, discov- 
ery, and commerce, | by sea and land, 
| from the earliest ages to the present 
time. | By | Robert Kerr, F.R.S.& F. 
A.S. Edin. | Illustrated by maps and 
charts. | Vol. I[-X VII]. | 

Edinburgh: | Printed by George 
Ramsay and Company, | for William 
Blackwood, south Bridge-street; | J. 
Murray, Fleet-street, R. Baldwin, Pater- 
noster-row, | London; and J. Cuming, 
Dublin. | 1811 [-1816]. 

17 vols. 8°. 

Cook (J.) and King (J.), A voyage to the 
Pacific Ocean, vol. 15, pp. 114-514; vol. 16, pp. 1- 
503; vol. 17, pp. 1-811. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Lenox. 

A later edition from the same plates, with an 
added volume, as follows: 


—— A | general history and collection | 
of | voyages and travels, | arranged in 
systematic order: | forming a complete 
history of the origin and progress | of 
navigation, discovery, and commerce, 

| by sea and land, | from the earliest 
ages to the present time. | By | Robert 
Kerr, F. R. S.& F. A. 8. Edin. | Tlus- 
trated by maps and charts. | Vol. I 
f-X VIII]. | 

William Blackwood, Edinburgh; and 
T. Cadell, London. MDCCCXXIV 
[1824]. 

18 vols. 8°. 


Linguistic contents as under title next above. 
Copies seen: Congress. 


King (Capt. James.) See Cook (J.) and 


King (J.) 
King George Sound Indians. 
Klaokwat: 
General discussion See Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
General discussion Gibbs (G.) 
General discussion Latham (R. G.) 
Grammatic treatise Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


See Nutka. 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 39 


Klaokwat — Continued. 


Numerals Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Proper names Catlin (G.) 
Vocabulary Bulmer (T.5S.) 
Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 

. Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Vocabulary Lemmens (T. N.) 
Voeabulary Scouler (J.) 
Vocabulary Waters (A.) 

Words Daa (L. K.) 
Words Latham (R. G.) 
Words Whymper (F.) 


[Knipe (Rev. C.)] Some account | of | 


the Tahkaht language, | as spoken by 


several tribes on the | western coast of | 


| Vancouver island, | [One line in 
Greek. ] | 
London: | Hatchard and co., 187 Pic- 


eadilly. | 1868. 

Half-title (The Tahkaht language) verso 
blank 1 1. title verso names of printers 1 1. 
introduction pp. 1-8, text pp. 9-80, sq. 16°. 

Habitat of the Tahkaht or Nootka, p.1.— 
Numerals 1-10, 20, 30,40 of the Indians N. E. 
of Vancouver Island, and two sets of numerals 
1-10 of the Indians of Milbank Sound (all fur- 
nished by Gibbs), pp. 1-2.—‘‘ Tahkaht proper” 
pp. 2-8, includes the etymology of the name, 
list of tribal divisions, etymologies, tribal 
names used by other authors, etc.—Tahkaht 
grammar (pp. 9-29) includes: The language, 
pp. 9-12; Numerals, pp. 12-13; The formation of 
words, pp. 14-16; Roots, pp. 16-20; Termina- 
tions, pp. 21-25; Reduplication, pp. 25-26; Com- 
\parison, p.26; Verbs, pp. 27-29.—Nitinaht (pp. 
29-31) includes: General discussion, p. 29; 
Some words in which the Nitinaht differs 
partly or altogether from the other tribes, pp. 
30-31; Nitinaht numerals, p.31.—Part I, [Dic- 
tionary of the] Tahkaht-English (alphabetically 
arranged), pp. 33-38.—Part II. English-Tahkaht 
(alphabetically arranged), pp. 59-78.—Proper 


names (pp. 79-80) includes: Seshaht men and | 
boys, p.79; Opechisaht men and boys, p. 80: | 


Seshaht women and girls, p. 80. 

Copies seen: Boas, Brinton, Eames. 

Much of this material is reprinted in Sproat 
(G. M.), Scenes and studies of savage life. 


— Nootka or Tahkaht vocabulary. 


Manuscript, 1 leaf, folio, written on both 
sides; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnol- 
ogy. 

Contains about 190 words, and the numerals 
1-12, 20, 30, 100, 1000. 


| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


Knipe (C.)—Continued. 


In thé same library is a copy of this vocabu- 
lary, 6 leaves folio, made by Dr. Geo. Gibbs. 


Notes on the Indian tribes of the 

north-west coast of North America. 
Manuscript, 14 leaves, 8°, 4°, and folio, in the 

library of the Bureau of Ethnology. Composed 

mainly of letters in answer to inquiries of Dr. 

Geo. Gibbs. 

Comparative vocabulary, 25 words, Newittee 


Kwakiutl. 


and Makah; one of 24 words of the Nitinaht, 
six tribesof Barclay Sound, and of the Nootka; 
one of 54 words Chinook and Tahkaht.— 
Numerous notes on aflinities, sounds used in 
the languages, etc. 


Kwagttl version book of com- 
mon prayer. See Hall (A. J.) 
See Kwakiutl. 


Vocabulary of the Coquilth 
(Kwahkiutl). 

Manuscript, 6 leaves folio, written on one 
side only; in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 
nology, Washington, D.C. It is a copy, made 
by Dr. Geo. Gibbs from a manuscript (?) in the 
Hudson Bay Company's post at Victoria, June, 
1857. Contains 180 words. 

Kwakiutl : 
Bible, Matthew 
Bible, John 


Kwakiool. 


See Hall (A. J.) 
Hall (A. J.) 


Bible passages british. 
Bible passages Gilbert (—) and Riv- 
ington (—). 


General discussion 
General discussion 
Gentes 

Grammar 
Grammatic treatise 
Grammatic treatise 
Legends 

Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 


Anderson (A.C.) 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Boas (1I.) 

Hall (A. J.) 

Boas (F.) 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Boas (F.) 
Bergholtz (G. F.) 
Rost (R.) 


Numerals Boas (F.) 
Prayer book Hall (A. J.) 
Songs Boas (F.) 
Songs Fillmore (J. C.) 
Vocabulary Boas (F.) 
Vocabulary Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Vocabulary Dall (W. H.) 
Vocabulary Dawson (G. M.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Kwakiutl. 
Vocabulary Powell (J. W.) 
Vocabulary Wilson (E. F.) 
Words Boas (F.) 
Words Hale(H.) 


40 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


L. 


Legends: La Harpe (J. F. de) — Continued. 


Kwakiutl See Boas (F.) 


La Harpe (Jean Frangois de). Abrégé | 
de | Vhistoire générale | des voyages, 


| contenant | Ce qu’il y a de plus re- | 


marquable, de plus ntile & | de mieux 
avéré dans les pays ou les Voyageurs | 
ont pénétré; lesmeeurs des Habitans, la 
Religion, | les Usages, Arts & Sciences, 
Commerce, | Manufactures; enrichie de 
Cartes géographiques | & de figures. | 
Par M. De La Harpe, de l’Académie 
Fran¢aise. | Tome premier ([-trente- 
deux]. | [Design.] | 

A Paris, | Hétel de Thou, rue des 
Poitevins. | M.DCC.LXXX[-An IX.— 
1801] [1780-1801]. | Avec Approbation, 
& Privilége du Roi. 

32 vols. 8°, and atlas, 1804, 4°. 

Remarks on the Nootka language, with a 
short vocabulary and numerals 1-10 (all from 
Anderson, in Cook and King), vol. 23, pp. 184- 
187. This volume is dated 1786. 

Copies seen: Astor, Congress. 

—— Abrégé | de | histoire générale | des 
voyages, | contenant | ce qu’il y a de 
plus remarquable, de plus utile et de | 
mieux avéré dans les pays oti les voy- 
ageurs ont | pénétré; les mceurs des hab- 
itans, la religion, les | usages; arts et 
sciences, commerce et manufac- | tures. 
| Par J. F. LaHarpe. | Tome premier 
[-vingt-quatriéme]. | 

A Paris, | Chez Ledoux et Tenré 
libraires, | rue Pierre-Sarrozin, N° 8. | 
1816. 


24 vols. 12°. 


Linguistic contents as under titlenext above, | 


vol. 23, pp. 286-290. 
Copies seen: British Museum. 

— Abrégé | de | histoire générale | des 
voyages, | contenant | ce qu'il y a de 
plus remarquable, de plus utile et de 
mieux | avéré dans les pays ott les voy- 
ageurs ont pénétré; les | moeurs des 
habitans, la religion, les usages, arts et 
| sciences, commerce et manufactures; 
| Par J. F. LaHarpe. | Nouvelle édi- 
tion, revue et corrigée avec le plus 
grand soin, | et accompagnée dun bel 
atlas in-folio. | Tome premier [-vingt- 
quatriéme)]. | 


A Paris, | chez Etienne Ledoux, li- 


braire, | rne Guénégaud, N° 9, | 1820. 

24 vols. 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, vol. 
23, pp. 286-290. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

According to Sabin’s Dictionary, no. 38632, 
there are editions: Paris, Achille Jourdan, 1822, 
30 vols. 8°; Paris, 1825, 30 vols. 8°; Lyon, 
Rusand, 1829-'30, 30 vols. 8°. 


Latham (Robert Gordon). Miscellaneous 


contributions to the ethnography of 
North America. By R. G. Latham, M.D. 


In Philological Soc. [of London] Proc. vol. 2, 
pp. 31-50 [London], 1846, 8°. 

Numerals 1-10 of the [Hailtsuk] language of 
Fitzhugh Sound compared with the Blackfoot, 
p. 38. 

This article is reprinted in the same author’s 
Opuscula, pp. 275-297, for title of which see 
below. 


—— On the languages of the Oregon ter- 


ritory. By R.G. Latham, M. D. 

In Ethnological Soc. of London Jour. vol. 1, 
pp. 154-166, Edinburgh [1848], 8°. 

Numerals 2-7,10 of the Fitz-Hugh Sound, 
compared with the Haeltzuk and Billechoola, 
p. 155.— Vocabulary (12 words) of the Nootka 
(trom Cook) compared with the Tlaoquatch 
(from Tolmie), p. 156.—Comparative vocabulary 
(6 words) of Fuca (Maka, from Aleala Galiano), 
Tlaoquatch (from Tolmie), and Wakash (from 
Jewitt), p. 156.—List of words; showing affin- 
ities between the languages of Oregon and the 
Eskimo, pp. 164-165, includes a few words of 
Nootka, Tlaoquatch, and Haeltzuk. 

This article is reprinted with added ‘‘notes”’ 
in the same author’s Opuscula, pp. 249-265, for 
title of which see below. 


—— The | natural history | of | the varie- 


ties of man. | By | Robert Gordon 
Latham, M. D., F. R.S., | late fellow 
of King’s college, Cambridge; | one of 
the vice-presidents of the Ethnological 
society, London; | corresponding mem- 
ber to the Ethnological society, | New 
York, etc. | [Monogram in shield.] | 
London: | John Van Voorst, Pater- 
noster row. | M. D. CCCL [1850]. 


Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of 
printers 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. vii-xi, bibliography pp. xlii-xv, explana- 
tion of plates verso blank 1 |. contents pp. xix— 
xxviii, text pp. 1-566, index pp. 567-574, list of 
works by Dr. Latham verso blank 1 1. 8°. 


ae 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 


Latham (R. G.) — Continued. 

Division F, American Mongolide (pp. 287- 
460) includes a classification of the Haeltzuk 
and Hailtsa, pp. 300-301; of the Nutkans, pp. 


301-302.—Vocabulary (20 words) of the Chekeeli | 


and of the Wakash (from Scouler), p. 315. 
Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Con- 
gress, Eames. 


colonies | and | dependencies. | By | R. 
G. Latham, M. D., F. R. S., | corre- 
sponding member to the Ethnological 
society, New York, | etc. etc. | [Mono- 
gram. ] | 

London: | John Van Voorst, Pater- 
noster row. | M. DCCC. LI [1851]. 


Title verso names of printers 1 1. preface 
verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-264, 
12°. 


Chapter vi. Dependencies in America (pp. | 
224-264), contains a linguistic classification of | 


the Indians, among them the Nutka and the 
Hailtsa, p. 247; of Fitz-Hugh Sound, p. 252. 
Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Eames. 
At the Squier sale, no. 635, a copy brought$1. 


—-On the languages of Northern, West- | 


ern, and Central America. By R. G. 


Latham, M.D. (Read May the 9th.) 

Tn Philological Soc. [of London] Trans. 1856, 
pp. 57-115, London [1857], 8°. (Congress.) 

Numerals 2,3 in the language of Fitz-Hugh 
Sound and of the Haeltzuk compared with the 
Blackfeet, p. 65.—The Hailtsa, their habitat and 
divisions, p. 72.—The Wakash, a brief account, 
p. 73. 

This article reprinted in the same author’s 
Opuscula, pp. 326-377, for title of which see 
below. 


— Opuscula. | Essays | chiefly | philo- 
logical and ethnographical | by | Rob- 


ert Gordon Latham, | M.A., M.D.,F. | 


R.58., ete. | late fellow of Kings college, 
Cambridge, late professor of English | 
in University college, London, late 
assistant physician | at the Middlesex 
hospital. | 

Williams & Norgate, | 14 Henrietta 
street, Covent garden, London | and | 


20 south Frederick street, Edinburgh. | 


| Leipzig, R. Hartmann. | 1860. 


Title verso name of printer 1 1. preface pp. 
jii-iv, contents pp. v-vi, text pp. 1-377, addenda 
and corrigenda pp. 378-418, 8°. 

A reprint of a number of papers read before 
the Ethnological and Philological societies of 
London, among them some of those titled above, 
as follows: 

On the languages of the Oregon territory (pp. 


The | ethnology | of | the British | 


249-265) contains the linguistic material given | 


Al 


Latham (R. G.) — Continued. 


under this title above on pp. 250-251, 251-252, 
252, 260-262. The ‘‘notes’’ (pp. 263-265) contain 
a comparative vocabulary of 20 words of the 
Tlaoquatch and Nootka, with the Columbia 
(from Scouler), p. 263. 

Miscellaneous contributions to the ethnog- 
raphy of North America (pp. 275-297) contains 
the numerals 1-10 of the [ Hailtsuk] language of 
Fitz-Hugh Sound, p. 283. 

On the languages of Northern, Western, and 
Central America (pp. 326-377) contains the lin- 
guistic material given under this title above, 
pp. 333, 339, 340. 

Addenda and corrigenda, 1859 (pp. 378-418) 
contains brief references to the linguistic place 
of the Tlaoquatch, p. 378; to the Wakash, 
Nutka, and Tlaoquatch, p. 388. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, Brinton, 
Bureau of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Pilling. 
Watkinson. 

At the Squier sale a presentation copy (no. 
639 of the catalogue) brought $2.37. The Mur- 
phy copy, no. 1438, sold for $1. 


—— Elements | of | comparative philol- 


ogy. | By | R.G. Latham, M.A., M.D., 
F.R.S., &c., | late fellow of King’s col- 
lege, Cambridge; and late professor of 
English | in University college, Lon- 
don. | 

London: Waltonand Maberly,' Upper 
Gower street, and Ivy lane, Paternoster 
row; | Longman, Green, Longman, 
Roberts, and Green, | Paternoster row. 

| 1862. | The Right of Translation is 
Reserved. 

Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. pref- 
ace pp. vii-xi, contents pp. xiii-xx, tabular view 
of languages and dialects pp. xxi-xxviii, chief 
authorities pp. Xxix-xxxii, errata verso blank 1 
1. text pp. 1-752, addenda and corrigenda pp. 
753-757, index pp. 758-774, list of works by Dr. 
Latham verso blank 1 1. 8°. 

Chapter lv, Languages of America (pp. 384- 
403) contains: A brief discussion of the Hailtsa, 
with a vocabulary (14 words and numerals 1- 
10), pp. 401-402; comparative vocabulary (50 
words and numerals 1-10) of the Nsietshawns, 
Watlala, and Nutka, pp. 402-403. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Bureau 
of Ethnology, Congress, Eames, Watkinson. 


Robert Gordon Latham, the eldest son of the 
Rev. Thomas Latham, was born in the vicarage 
of Billingsborough, Lincolnshire, March 24, 
1812. In1819hewasenteredat Eton. Two years 
afterwards he was admitted on the foundation, 
and in 1829 went to Kings, where he took his 
fellowship and degrees. Ethnology was his 
first passion and his last, though for botany 
he had a very strong taste. Hedied March 9, 
1888.—Theodore Watts, in The Atheneum, March 
17, 1888. 


42 
Le Conte (Dr. John Lawrence). See 
Haldemann (S. 8.) 


Lekwilioq: 


Vocabulary See Boas (F.) 


Lemmens(T.N.)and Enssen(F.) T.N. 
Lemmens. 1888. | A vocabulary | of | 
the Clayoquot Sound | Language. (*) 

Manuscript, pp. 1-218, folio, in possession of 
the Bishop of Alaska, Victoria, B. C. 

English-Clayoquot vocabulary, pp. 1-211.— 
The verb, pp. 212-218. 

Title from Dr. Franz Boas, who informs me 
that the rectos of pp. 3-43 are in the Kyoquot 
dialect, and were written by Mr. Enssen. 


Lord’s prayer: 


Hailtsuk See Tate (C. M.) 
Kwakiutl Bergholtz (G. F.) 
Kwakiutl Rost (R.) 

Nutka Brabant (A. J.) 


Lubbock (Sir John). The | origin of 
civilisation | and the | primitive con- 
dition of man. | Mental and social con- 
dition of savages. | By | sir John Lub- 
bock, Bart., M. P., F. R. S. | author 
[&c. two lines. ] | 

London: | Longmans, Green, and co. 
| 1870. 


Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. front- 
ispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v- 
viii, contents p. ix, list of illustrations pp. xi- 
xii, list of principal works quoted pp. xiii-xvi, 
text pp. 1-323, appendix pp. 325-362, notes pp. 
363-365, index pp. 367-380, four other plates, 8°. 

A few words in the Nootka language, p. 288. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Eames, Harvard. 


The | origin of civilisation | and the 
| primitive condition of man. | Mental 
and social condition of savages. | By | 
sir John Lubbock, Bart., M. P., F. R.S. 
| author[&c. two lines. ] | 

New York: | D. Appleton and com- 
pany, | 90, 92 & 94 Grand street. | 1870. 


Half-title verso blank 11. frontispiece 1 1. title 


verso blank 11. preface tothe American edition | 


pp. lii-iv, preface pp. v—viii, contents p. ix, 
illustrations pp. xi-xii, list of principal works 
quoted pp. xili-xvi, text pp. 1-323, appendix pp. 
325-362, notes pp. 363-365, index pp. 367-380, four 
other plates, 12°. 


Linguistic contents as under title next above. | 


Copies seen: Harvard, Pilling. 


| 
— The | origin of civilisation | and the 


| primitive condition of man. | Mental 
and social condition of savages. | By | 

Sir John Lubbock, Bart., M. P., F. B.S. 
| author [&e. two lines.] | Second 
edition, with additions. | 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Lubbock (J.) — Continued. 


London: | Longmans, Green, and co. 
| 1870. 


Half-title verso names of printers 1 1. front- 
ispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v- 
viii, contents pp. ix-xiii, illustrations pp. xv- 
xvi, list of principal works quoted pp. xvii-xx, 
text pp. 1-367, appendix 369-409, notes pp. 411- 
413, index pp. 415-426, list of books 11. five other 
plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 
327. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames, Har- 
vard. 


~— The | origin of civilisation | and the 
| primitive condition of man. | Mental 
and social condition of savages. | By | 
sir John Lubbock, Bart., M. P., F. R. 
8. | vice-chancellor [&c. three lines.] 
| Third edition, with numerous addi- 
tions. | 

London: | Longmans, Green, and co. 

- | 1875. 

Half-title verso name of printer 1 1. frontis- 
piece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v-viii, 
contents pp. ix-xiii, illustrations pp. xv-xvi, 
list of the principal works quoted pp. xvii-xx, 
text pp. 1-463, appendix pp. 465-507, notes pp. 
509-514, index pp. 515 -528, five other plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 
417. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames. 


—— The | origin of civilisation | and the 


| primitive condition of man. | Mental 
and social condition of savages. | By | 
Sir John Lubbock, Bart. M. P. F.R.S. 

| D.C. L. LL.D. | president [&c. five 
lines.] | Fourth edition, with numerous 
additions. | 

London: | Longmans, Green, and co. 
| 1882. 


Half-title verso list of works ‘‘ by the same 
author’’ 11. frontispiece 1 1. title verso names of 
printers 1 1. preface pp. v-viii, contents pp. ix— 
xiii, illustrations pp. xv-xvi, list of the princi- 
pal works quoted pp. xvii-xx, text pp. 1-480, 
appendix pp. 481-524, notes pp. 525-533, index 
pp. 535 -548, five other plates, 8°. : 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 
427. 

Copies seen: 
Harvard. 


Boston Atheneum, Eames, 


—— The | origin of civilisation | and the 


| primitive condition of man | Mental 
and social condition of savages | By | 
sir John Lubbock, bart. | M. P., F. R. 
8., D.C. L., LL. D. | author [&e. four 
-lines] | Fifth Edition, with numerous 
Additions j 


oo < o «. ae 


WAKASHAN 


Lubbock (J.) — Continued. 
London | Longmans, Green, and co | 
1889 | All rights reserved 


Half-titie verso names of printers 11. frontis- 
piece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. preface (dated 
February, 1870) pp. vii-x, contents pp. xi-xvi, 
illustrations pp. xvii-xviii, list of principal 
works quoted pp. xix-xxiii, text pp. 1-486, 
appendix pp. 487-529, notes pp. 531-539, index 
pp. 541-554, list of works by the same author 
verso blank 1 1. five other plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 
432. 

Copies seen : Eames. 


Ludewig (Hermann Ernst). The | liter- 
ature | of | American aboriginal lan- 
guages. | By | Hermann E. Ludewig. | 
With additions and corrections | by 
professor Wm. W. Turner, | Edited by 
Nicolas Triibner. | 

London:! Triibner and co., 60, Pater- 
noster row. | MDCCCLVIII [1858]. 

Half-title ‘‘Triibner’s bibliotheca glottica 
I” verso blank 1 1. title as above verso name of 
printer 1 1. preface pp. v-viii, contents verso 
blank 1 1. editor’s advertisement pp. ix-xii, bio- 
graphicul memoir pp. xiii-xiv, introductory 
bibliographical notices pp. xv—-xxiv, text pp. 1- 
209, addenda, pp. 210-246, index pp. 247-256, 
errata pp. 257-258, 8°. Arranged alphabetically 


by languages. Addendaby Wm.W. Turnerand | 


Nicolas Triibner, pp. 210-246. 

Containsa listof grammars and vocabularies 
of American languages and among them those 
of the following peoples: 

American languages generally, pp. Xv-xxiv; 
Fuea Strait, p.74; Haeeltzuk, Hailtsa, p. 80; 
Naas (including some Wakashan), p. 130; 
Nutka, Wakash, pp. 135-136, 233; Tlaoquatch, 
p. 188. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology,Congress, 
Eames, Pilling. 

At the Fischer sale, no. 990, acopy brought 5s. 
6d.; at the Field sale, no. 1403, $2.63; at the 
Squiersale, no. 699, $2.62; another copy, no. 1906, 
$2.38. Priced by Leclere, 1878, no. 2075, 15 fr. 
The Pinart copy, no. 565, sold for 25 fr., and 
the Murphy copy, no. 1540, for $2.50. 


‘Dr. Ludewig bas himself so fully detailed 
the plan and purport of this work that little 
more remains for me to add beyond the mere 
statement of the origin of my connection with 
the publication and the mention of such addi- 
tions for which I alone am responsible, and 
which, during its progress through the press, 
have gradually accumulated to about one-sixth 
of the whole. Thisis butanactof justice to the 
memory of Dr. Ludewig, because at the time of 
his death, in December, 1856, no more than 172 
pages were printed off, and these constitute the 
only portion of the work which had the benefit 
of his valuable personal and final revision. 

“Similarity of pursuits led, during my stay 


LANGUAGES. 


43 


Ludewig (H. E.) — Continued. 


in New York in 1855, to an intimacy with Dr. 
Ludewig, during which he mentioned that he, 
like myself, had been making bibliographical 
memoranda for years of all books which serve 
to illustrate the history of spoken language. 
As a first section of a more extended work on 
the literary history of language generally, he 
had prepared a bibliographical memoir of the 
remains of theaboriginal languages of America. 
The manuscript had been deposited by him in 
the library of the Ethnological Society at New 
York, but at my request he at once most kindly 
placed it at my disposal, stipulating only that 
it should be printed in Europe, under my per- 
sonal superintendence. 

“Upon my return to England, I lost no time 
in carrying out the trust thus confided to me, 
intending then to confine myself simply to pro- 
ducing acorrectcopy of my friend's manuscript. 
But it soon became obvious that the transcript 
had been hastily made, and but for the valuable 
assistance of literary friends, both in this 
country and in America, the work would prob- 
ably have been abandoned. My thanks aremore 
particularly due to Mr. E. G. Squier, and to 
Prof. William W. Turner, of Washington, by 
whose considerate and valuable codperation 
many difficulties were cleared away and my edi- 
torial labors greatly lighteued. This encouraged 
me to spare neither personal labor nor expense 
in the attempt to render the work as perfect as 
possible, with what success must be left to 
the judgmentof those who can fairly appreciate 
the labors of a pioneer in any new field of lit- 
erary research.” —Editor’s advertisement. 

“Dr. Ludewig, though but little known in 
this country [England], was held in consider- 
ableesteem as a jurist, bothin Germany and the 
United States of America. Born at Dresden in 
1809, with but little exception he continued to 
reside in his native city until 1844, when he emi- 
grated to America; but, though in both coun- 
tries he practiced law as a profession, his bent 
was the study of literary history, which was 
evidenced by his ‘Livre des Ana, Essai de Cata- 
logue Manuel,’ published at his own costin 1837, 
and by his ‘ Bibliothekonomie,’ which appeared 
a few years later. 


‘‘But even whilst thus engaged he delighted 
in investigating the riseand progress of the land 
of his subsequent adoption, and his researches 
into the vexed question of the origin of the peo- 
pling of America gained him the highest consid- 
eration, on both sides of the Atlantic, as a man 
of original and inquiring mind. He was a 
contributor to Naumann’s ‘Serapzeum;’ and 
amongst the chief of his contributions to that 
journal may be mentioned those on ‘American 
Libraries,’ on the ‘Aids to American Bibliog- 
raphy,’ and on the ‘Book Trade of the United 
States of America.’ In 1846 appeared his ‘ Lit- 
erature of American Local History,’ a work of 
much importance and which required no small 
amount of labor and perseverance, owing tothe 
necessity of consulting the many and widely 


+4 


Ludewig (H. E.) — Continued. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Ludewig (H. E.)— Continued. 


scattered materials, which had to be sought ou 
from apparently the most unlikely channels. 
““These studies formed a natural induction 
to the present work on ‘The Literature of 
American Aboriginal Languages,’ which occu- 
pied his leisure concurrently with the others, 
and the printing of which was commenced in 
August, 1856, but which he did not live to see 


launched upon the world; for at the date of his | 
death, on the 12th of December following, only | 


172 pages were in type. It had been a labor of 
love with him for years; and,if ever author 
were mindful of the nonwm prematur in annum, 
he was when he deposited his manuscriptin the 
library of the American Ethnological Society, 


diffident himself as to its merits and value ona | 


subject of such paramount interest. He had 
satisfied himself that in due time the reward of 
his patient industry might be the production of 
some more extended national work on the sub- 
ject, and with this he was contented ; for it was 
a distinguishing feature in his character, not- 


withstanding his great and varied knowledge | 


and brilliant acquirements, to disregard his 


own toil, even amounting to drudgery if need- | 


M. 


Maclean (J.)— Continued. 


Maclean (Rev. John). Indian languages 
and literature in Manitoba, North-west 
Territories and British Columbia. 


In Canadian Institute, Proc. third series, vol. | 


5, pp. 215-218, Toronto, 1888, 8°. (Pilling.) 

Contains (1) list of languages in Manitoba, 
Keewatin, and North-west Territories; (2) lan- 
guages in British Columbia; and (3) the lan- 
guages of which vocabularies and grammars 
have been published, the authors and place of 
publication. 


— The Indians | their manners and cus- | 


toms. | By | John McLean, M.A.,Ph. D. 
| (Robin Rustler.) | With Eighteen 
full-page Illustrations. | 

Toronto: | William Briggs, 78 & 80 
King street east. | C. W. Coates, Mon- 
treal. S. F. Huestis, Halifax. | 1889. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 
1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface pp. vii- 
viii, contents pp. ix—x, list of illustrations verso 
blank 1 1. text pp. 13-351, 12°. 

Indian languages and literature, pp. 235-258. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Powell. 

Rev. John Maclean was born in Kilmarnoch, 
Ayrshire, Scotland, Oct. 30,1852; came to Can- 
ada in 1873, and was graduated B. A. from Vic- 
toria University, Cobourg,Ontario. Some years 
afterward his alma mater conferred on him the 
degreeof M.A. In 1874 he entered the ministry 
of the Methodist church. In 1880, at Hamilton, 


Ontario, he was ordained for special work among | 


ful, if he could in any way assist in the pro- 
mulgation of literature and science. 

“Dr. Ludewig was a corresponding member 
of many of the most distinguished European 
and American literary societies, and few men 
were held in greater consideration by scholars 
bothin Americaand Germany, as will readily be 
acknowledged should his voluminous corre- 
spondence ever see the light. In private life he 
was distinguished by the best qualities which 
endear a man’s memory to those who survive 
him; he was a kind and affectionate husband 
and a sincere friend. Always accessible and 
ever ready to aid and counsel those who applied 
to him for advice upon matters appertaining to 
literature, his loss will long be felt by a most 
extended circle of friends, and in him Germany 
mourns one of the best representatives of her 
learned men in America,a genuine type of aclass 
in which, with singular felicity, to genius 
of the highest order is combined a painstaking 
and plodding perseverance but seldom met with 
beyond the confines of ‘the Fatherland.’ ’’—Bio- 
graphic memoir. 


the Blackfoot Indians, leaving in June of the 
same year for Fort McLeod, Northwest Terri- 
tory, accompanied by his wife. At this point 
were gathered about 700 Blood Indians, which 
number was subsequently increased by the 
arrival of Bloods and Blackfeet from Montana 
to 3,500. Mr. Maclean settled upon the reserve 
set apart for these Indians and diligently set to 
work to master their language, history, ete 
and on these subjects he has published a num 
ber of articles in the magazines and society 
publications. At the request of the anthropo- 
logical committee of the British Association for 
the Advancement of Science, Dr. Maclean has 
for several years prepared notes on the language, 
customs, and traditions of the Blackfoot Con- 
federacy. and the results of this labor are partly 
given in one of the reports of the committee. 
Although burdened with the labors of a mis- 
sionary, he found time to prepare a post-gradu- 
ate course in history and took the degree of Ph. 
D. at the Wesleyan University, Bloomington, 
Tll., in 1888. Besides the articles which have 
appeared under his own name, Dr. Maclean has 
written extensively for the press under the nom 
de plume of Robin Rustler. He is now (Febru- 
ary, 1894) stationed at Port Arthur, Ontario, 
Canada, having left the Indian work in July, 
1889. He was for several years inspector of 
schools, and a member of the board of educa- 
tion and of the board of examiners for the 
Northwest Territory. 

Mr. Maclean is engaged in the preparation of 


WAKASHAN 


Maclean (.J.) — Continued. 

a series of letters, to be published under the 
title ‘‘Canadian Savage Folk,” which will 
include chapters on the languages and literature 
of these people. 

Maisonneuve: This word following a title or 
within parentheses after a note indicates that a 
copy of the work referred to has been seen by 
the compiler in the bookstore of Maisonneuve 
et Cie, Paris, France. 


Maka. Vocabulary of 200 words of the 


Makah Indiansof Oregon; froma chief | 


at San Francisco. 


Manuscript, 3 pages folio; formerly in the li- | 


brary of the late Dr. J. G. Shea, Elizabeth, N.J. 
Maka: 
General discussion See Eells (M.) 
Geographic names Eells (M.) 
Geographic names Swan (J. G.) 


Numerals Bartlett (J. R.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Numerals Gibbs (G.) 


LANGUAGES. 


45 


Maka — Continued. 


Numerals See Grant (W.C.) 
Numerals Haldemann (S. 8.) 
Proper names Swan (J. G.) 
Vocabulary Bartlett (J. R.) 
Vocabulary Buschmann (J.C. E.; 
Vocabulary Galiano (D. A.) 
Vocabulary Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Gibbs (G.) 
Vocabulary Knipe (C.) 
Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Vocabulary Maka. 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Swan (J. G.) 
Marchand (Etienne). See Fleurieu (C. 
P.'C. de). 


| Massachusetts Historical Society: These words 


following a title or within parentheses after a 
note indicate that a copy of the work referred 
to has been seen by the compiler in the library 
of that society, Boston, Mass. 


Millbank Sound Indians. See Hailtsuk. 


N. 


Wational Museum: These words following a title 
or within parentheses after a note indicate that 
a copy of the work referred to has been seen 
by the compiler in the library of that institu- 
tion, Washington, D.C. 

New York Historical Society : These words follow- 
ing a title or within parentheses after a note 


indicate that a copy of the work referred to has | 


been seen by the compiler in the library of that 
society, New York City. 
Nitinat: 
General discussion See Knipe (C.) 


Numerals Grant (W.C.) 
Numerals Knipe (C.) 
Vocabulary Knipe (C.) 
Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Vocabulary Sproat (G. M.) 
Niwiti: 

Vocabulary See Gallatin (A.) 
Vocabulary Knipe (C.) 

, Words Pott (A. F.) 


Norris (Philetus W.) The | calumet of | 
the Coteau, and other | poetical legends | 
of the border. | Also, | a glossary of | 


Indian names, words, and western pro_ 


vincialisms. | Together with | a guide- | 


book | of the | Yellowstone national 
park.| By P.W. Norris,| five years super- 


intendent of the Yellowstone national | 


park. | All rights reserved. | 
Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
co. | 1883. 


Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 1 
1. dedication verso blank 11. poem verso blank 


Norris (P. W.) — Continued. 

1 1. introduction pp. 9-12, contents pp. 13-14, 
illustrations versuv blank 1 1. text pp. 17-170, 
notes pp. 17!-221, glossary pp. 223-233. guide 
book pp. 235-275. map, sm. 8°. 

Glossary of Indians words and provincial- 
isms, pp. 223-233, contains a number of terms in 
the Nootka language. 


Copies seen: National Museum, Pilling, 
. 


Powell. 

Numerals: 
Hailtsuk See Boas (F.) 
Hailtsuk Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Hailtsuk Eells (M.) 
Hailtsuk Latham (R. G.) 
Klaokwat Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Kwakiutl Boas (F.) 
Maka Bartlett (J.R.) 
Maka Eells (M.) 
Maka Gibbs (G.) 
Maka Grant (W.C.) 
Maka Haldemann (S. 58.) 
Nitinat Grant (W.C.) 
Nitinat Knipe (C.) 
Nutka Adelung (J. C.) 
Nutka Anderson (W.) 
Nutka Bourgoing (J. F.) 
Nutka Classicai. 
Nutka Cook (J.) 
Nutka Dixon (G.) 
Nutka Duflot de Mofras (E.) 
Nutka Fleurieu (C. P. C. de). 
Nutka Haines (E. M.) 
Nutka Humboldt (F. von). 
Nutka Kerr (R.) 
Nutka Knipe (C.) 
Nutka LaHarpe (J. F. de). 


46 


Nutka 
Nutka 
Tokoaat 
Tokoaat 
Tokoaat 


Nutka: 


Catechism 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
Gentes 

Grammatic treatise 
Grammatic treatise 
Grammatic treatise 
Lord’s prayer 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 

Prayers 

Prayers 

Proper names 
Songs 

Songs 

Text 

Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Numerals — Continued. 
See Pott (A. F.) 


Roquefeuil (C. de). 
Eells (M.) 

Knipe (C.) 

Sproat (G. M.) 


See Brabant (A. J.) 


Balbi (A.) 

Bancroft (H. H.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Gatschet (A.5S.) 
Gibbs (G). 

Jéhan (L. F.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Prichard (J.C.) 
Roquefeuil (C. de). 
Boas (F.) 

Brabant (A. J.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Featherman (A.) 
Brabant (A. J.) 
Adelung (J. C.) 
Anderson (W.) 
Bourgoing (J. F.) 


Classical. 
Cook (J.) and King (J.) 


Dixon (G.) 


Dufiot de Mofras (E.) 
Fleurieu (C. P. C. de). 


Haines (E. J.) 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Kerr (R.) 

Knipe (C.) 

La Harpe (J. F. de). 
Pott (A. F.) 
Roquefeuil (C. de). 
Brabant (A. J.) 
Seghers (C. J.) 
Quimper (M.) 

Boas (F.) 

Jewitt (J. R.) 
Brabant (A. J.) 
Adelung (J. C.) 
Anderson (W.) 
Armstrong (A. N.) 


Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 


Nutka— Continued. 
See Balbi (A.) 


Boas (F.) 

Brabant (A.J.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Campbell (J.) 


Cook (J.) and King (J.) 


Ellis (W.) 
Forster (J.G. A.) 
Fry (E.) 

Galiano (D. A.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Haines (E. M.) 
Hale (H.) 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Jéhan (L. F.) 
Jewitt (J. R.) 
Kerr (R.) 

Knipe (C.) 

La Harpe (J. F. de). 
Latham (R. G.) 
Pablo (J. E.S8.) 
Quimper (M.) 
Scouler (J.) 
Sproat (M.) 
Swan (J. G.) 
Yankiewitch (F.) 


Bachiller y Morales (A.) 


Bancroft (H. H.) 
Boas (F.) 
Bulmer (T.S8.) 
Daa (L. K.) 
Eells (M.) 

Ellis (R.) 
Featherman (A.) 
Gibbs (G.) 

Hale (H.) 
Jewitt (J. R.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Norris (P. W.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Swan (J. G.) 
Uméry (J.) 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. AT 


P: 


Pablo (Juan Eugenio Santelizes). [Vo- | Petitot (E. F. S.J.) — Continued. 


cabularies of the Nutka language. ] (*) 

Manuscript, ll. 1-53, folio, inthe library of 
the British Museum (additional MS. 17631). 
The following description has been furnished 

me by Mr. R. Nisbet Bain of the above-named 
library: 

The vocabularies in the above volume were 
compiled by Juan Eugenio Santelizes Pablo, 
at the request of Don Josef de Espinoza, to 
whom he addresses an introductory letter (f. 1), 
dated Mexico, 16 March, 1791, in which he 
states there is no connection between the dia- 
lects of the Sandwich Islands, Nutka, and 
Mexico. 

The first five vocabularies are headed as 
follows: 

1. Vocab. Castellano - Nutkeiio - Mexicano. 

Contains about 100 words, f. 4. 

2. Vocab. Castellano - Nutkefio- Sandwich - 
Mexicano. Contains about 80 words, f. 6. 

3. Vocab. Castellano - Sandwich - Mexicano. 
Contains about 250 words, f. 8. 

4. Vocab. de los Indias de Nootka. 
Contains about 350 words, f. 12. 

5. Vocab. del Idioma de los Naturales del 
Principe Guillermo cituado .. . &e. 
Contains about 80 words, f. 15. 

Those described above are all copies of the 

originals. 

6. Another copy of No. 4, the Spanish words 
being placed before the Nutka, f. 17. 

7. A copy of part of No.5, f. 21. 

8. Vocab. Castellano - Nutka-Sandwich y 
Mexicano; apparently contains all the 
words in Nos. 1 to 4 in alphabetic order, 
f, 22. 

9-14. [Vocabularies which do not relate to 
North America], ff. 30-53. 

I am inclined to think the vocabularies of the 

northwest coast are taken from Cook and King. 


Petitot (Pére Emile Fortuné Stanislas 
' Joseph). Monographie | des | Dene- 
Dindjié | par | le r. p. E, Petitot | Mis- 
sionnaire-Oblat de Marie-Immaculée, 
Officier d’Académie, | Membre corre- 
spondant de l’Académie de Naney, | de 
la Société d’Anthropologie | et Membre 
honoraire de la Société de Philologie 
et d’Ethnographie de Paris. | 

Paris | Ernest Leroux, éditeur | li- 
braire de la société Asiatique de Paris, 
| de Vécole des langues orientales vi- 
vantes et des sociétés Asiatiques de Cal- 
cutta, | de New-Haven (Etats-Unis), de 
Shanghai (Chine) | 28, rue Bonaparte, 
28 | 1876 


Cover title as above, half-title verso name of 
printer 1 1. title as above verso blank 1 1. text 
pp. 1-109, list of publications 1 1. 8°. 


Verbal conjugations of the Yukulta (to eat 
and to drink), p. 104.—Vocabulary (8 words) of 
the Yukulta, p. 105. Material furnished by 
Pére Fouquet. 

Oopies seen: Astor, Brinton, Eames, Pilling. 


—— De la formation du langage; mots 


formés par le redoublement de racines 
hétérogénes, quoique de signification 
synonyme, c’est-a-dire par réitération 
copulative. 

In Association frangaise pour l’avancement 
des sciences, compte-rendu, 12th session (Rouen, 
1883), pp. 697-701, Paris, 1884,8°. (Geological 
Survey, Pilling.) ; 

Contains examples in a number of North 
American languages, among them the Yokultat. 


Emils Fortuné Stanislas Joseph Petitot was 
born December 3, 1838, at Grancey-le-Chateau, 
department of Céte-d’Or, Burgundy, France. 
His studies were pursued at Marseilles, first at 
the Institution St. Louis and later at the higher 
seminary of Marseilles, which he entered in 1857. 
He was made deacon at Grenoble, and priest at 
Marseilles March 15, 186z. A few days thereafter 
he went to Englandand sailed for America. At 
Montreal he found Monseigneur Taché, bishop 
of St. Boniface, with whom he set out for the 
Northwest, where he was continuously engaged 
in missionary work among the Indians and 
Eskimos until 1874, when he returned to France 
to supervise the publication of some of his 
works on linguistics and geography. In 1876 
he returned to the missions and spent another 
period of nearly six years in the Northwest. 
In 1882 he once more returned to his native 
country, where he has since remained. In 1886 
he was appointed to the curacy of Mareuil 
les Meaux, which he still retains. The many 
years he spent in the inhospitable Northwest 
were busy and eventful ones, and afforded an 
opportunity for geographic, linguistic, and eth- 
nologic observations and studies such as few 
have enjoyed. He was the first missionary 
to visit Great Bear Lake, which he did for the 
first time in 1866. He went on foot from Good 
Hope to Providence twice, and made many 
tours in winter of forty or fifty days’ length on 
snowshoes. He was the first missionary to the 
Eskimos of the Northwest, having visited them 
in 1865, at the mouth of the Anderson, again in 
1868 at the mouth of the Mackenzie, and in 1870 
and again in 1877 at Fort McPherson on Peel 
River. In 1870 his travels extended into 
Alaska. In 1878 illness cansed him to return 
south. He went on foot to Athabasca, whence 
he passed to the Saskatchewan in abark. In 
1879 he established the mission of St. Raphael, 
at Angling Lake, for the Chippewyans of that 
region; there he remained until his final depart- 
ure for France in January, 1882. 

Father Petitot has done much linguistic 


48 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Petitot (£.F.S. J.) — Continued. 


work among the Eskimauan, Algonquian, and 


Athapascan peoples. for an account of which see | 


the bibliographies of those families of speech. 


Pilling: This word following a title or within pa- 
rentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to is in the possession of the 
compiler of this bibliography. 


Pilling (James Constantine). Smithson- | 


ian institution—Bureau of ethnology | 
J.W. Powell director | Proof-sheets | of 
a | bibliography | of | the languages | 
of the | North American Indians | by | 
James Constantine Pilling | (Distrib- 
uted only to collaborators) | 

Washington | Government printing 
office | 1885 

Title verso blank 1 1. notice signed J. W. 
Powell p. iii, preface pp.v-viii, introduction pp. 
ix-x, list of authorities pp. xi-xxxvi, list of 
libraries referred to by initials pp. xxxvii- 
xXxxviii, listof fac-similes pp. xxxix-xl, text pp. 
1-839, additions and corrections pp. 841-1090, 
index of languages and dialects pp. 1091-1135, 
plates, 4°. 

Arranged alphabetically by name of author, 
translator, or first word of title. One hundred 
and ten copies printed, ten of them on one side 
of the sheet only. 


Pinart (Aiphonse L.) [Linguistic mate- | 


rial relating to the Wakashan lan- 
guages. | (Ge) 

Some years ago, in response to a request of 
mine for a list of the manuscript linguistic 
material collected by him, Mr. Pinart wrote me 
as follows: 

“T have collected, during my fifteen years of 
traveling, vocabularies, texts, songs, ete., gen- 


eral linguistic materials, in the following lan- | 


guages or dialects. It is impossible at present 


to give you the number of pages, etc., as most | 


of it is to be found among my note-books, and 
has not been put in shape as yet.” 

Among the languages mentioned by Mr. 
Pinart were the Nitinaht, Makah, and the tribes 
of Vancouver Island. 


Pott (August Friedrich). Die | quinare 
und vigesimale | Zihlmethode | bei 
Voilkern aller Welttheile. | Nebst aus- 
fiihrlicheren Bermerkungen | iiber die 
Zahlworter Indogermanischen Stammes 

| und einem Anhange iiber Fingerna- 
men. | Von | Dr. August Friedrich Pott, 
| ord. Prof. [&c. four lines. ] | 

Halle, | C. A. Schwetschke und Sohn, 

| 1847. 

Cover title nearly as above, title as above 
verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 1. ded- 
icatory notice 1 1. preface pp. vii-viii, text pp. 
1-304, 8°. 


| Pott (A. F.) — Continued. 


Many North American languages are repre- 
sented by numerals, finger names, etc., among 
them the Indians of Nootka Sound, p. 304. 

Copies seen: Astor, Boston Public, British 
Museum, Eames, Watkinson. 


—— Doppelung | (Reduplikation, Gemi- 


nation) |als | eines der wichtigsten Bil- 
dungsmittel der Sprache, | beleuchtet | 
aus Sprachen aller Welttheile | durch | 
Aug. Friedr. Pott, Dr. | Prof. der Allge- 
meinen Sprachwiss. an der Uniy. zu 
Halle [&c. two lines. ] | 

Lemgo & Detmold, | im Verlage der 
Meyer’schen Hof buchhandlung 1862. 

Cover title as above, title as above verso quo- 
tation 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v—-vi, 
text pp. 1-304, list of books on verso of back 
cover, 8°. 

Contains examples of reduplication in many 
North American languages, among them the 
Newitee, pp. 36, 90; Noutka or Wakash, p. 36; 
Nootka Sound, pp. 43, 58. 

Oopiesseen: Astor, British Museum, Eames. 
Einleitung in die allgemeine Sprach- 
wissenschaft. 

In Internationale Zeitschrift fiir allgemeine 
Sprachwissenschaft, vol. 1. pp. 1-68, 329-354, vol. 
2, pp. 54-115, 209-251; vol. 3, pp. 110-126, 249-275; 
Supp., pp. 1-193; vol. 4, pp. 67-96; vol. 5, pp. 3-18, 
Leipzig, 1884-1887, and Heilbronn, 1889, large 8°. 
(Bureau of Ethnology.) 

The literature of American linguistics, vol. 4, 
pp. 67-96. This portion was published after Mr. 
Pott’s death, which occurred July 5, 1887. The 
general editor of the Zeitschrift, Mr. Techmer, 
states in a note that Pott’s paper is continued 
from the manuscripts which he left, and that it 
is to close with the languages of Australia. In 
the section of American linguistics publica- 
tions in all the more important stocks of North 
America are mentioned, with brief characteri- 
zation. 


Powell: This word following a title or within pa- 


reutheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Major J. W. Powell, 
Washington, D.C. 


Powell (Maj. John Wesley). Indian 


linguistic families of America north of 
Mexico. 

In Bureau of Ethnology, Seventh Annual 
Report, pp. 1-142, Washington, 1891, royal 8°. 

The Wakashan family, with a list of syno- 
nyms and principal tribes, derivation of the 
name, habitat, ete., pp. 128-131. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows; 


—— Indian linguistic families of America 


| north of Mexico | by | J.W. Powell | 
Extract from the seventh annual report 
of the Bureau of ethnology | [Vignette] | 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 


Powell (J. W.) — Continued. 
Washington | Government printing 
office | 1891 
Cover title as above, no inside title, half-title 
p. 1,contents ete. pp. 3-6, text pp. 7-142, map, 
royal 8°. 
Linguistic contents as under titlenext above. 
Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling, Powell. 
Department of the interior. | U.S. 
geographical and geological survey of 
the Rocky mountain region. | J. W. 
Powell, Geologist in Charge. | Contri- 
butions | to | North American ethnol- 
ogy. | Volume I{-VII]. | [Seal of the 
department. ] | 
Washington: | Government printing 
office. | 1877[-1890]. 


7 vols. (vol. 2 in two parts), 4°. 


Dall (W.H.), Tribes of the extreme nerth- | 


west, vol. 1, pp. 1-157. 
Copies seen: Astor, Bureau of Ethnology, 
Eames, Harvard, Pilling, Powell, Trumbull. 


Prayer book: 


Kwakiutl See Hall (A. J.) 
Prayers: 

Nutka See Brabant (A.J.) 

Nutka Seghers (C. J.) 


Prichard (James Cowles). Researches | 
into the | physical history | of | Man- 
kind. | By | James Cowles Prichard, M. 
D. | Second edition. | In two volumes. 

| Vol. I[-IT]. | 

London: | printed for John and Ar- 
thur Arch, | Cornhill. | 1826. 

2 vols.: frontispiece 1 1. title verso name of 
printer 11. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. v-viii, contents of both volumes pp. ix-xxx, 
explanation of plates pp. xxxi-xxxii, text pp. 
1-523, notes pp. 525-529, index of nations pp. 
531-544, nine other plates; title verso name of 


printer 11. text pp. 1-613, note pp. 614-623, | 


plate, 8°. 

General discussion of the Yucuatl or Nootka 
(vol. 2, pp. 375-379) contains remarks on their 
language, and a few words of Mexican and 
Nootka compared, p. 379. 

Copies seen: British Museum, 
Geological Survey, Harvard. 

The first edition, London, 1813, 8°, contains 
no linguistics. (British Museum.) 


Eames, 


— Researches | into the | physical his- 
tory |of | mankind. | By | James Cowles 
Prichard, M.D. F.R.S. M. R.1. A.|cor- 
responding member [&c. three lines. ] 

| Third edition. | Vol. I[-V]. | 
London: | Sherwood, Gilbert, and 
Piper, | Paternoster row; | and J. and 
A. Arch, | Cornhill. | 1836(-1847]. 
WAK 4 


49 


Prichard (J.C.) — Continued. 
5 vols. 8°. The words ‘‘ Third edition,’’ which 
are included on the titles of vols. 1-4 (dated 
respectively 1836, 1837, 1841, 1844), are noton the 
title of vol. 5. Vol. 3 was originally issued witha 
title numbered ‘‘Vol. III.—Part I.” This title 
was afterward canceled and a new one (num- 
bered ‘Vol. IIT.’’) substituted in its place. Vol. 
I was reissued with a new title containing the 
words ‘‘ Fourth edition’’ and bearing the im- 
print, ‘‘ London: | Sherwood, Gilbert, and Piper, 
| Paternoster row. | 1841.’’ (Astor); and again 
‘Fourth edition. | Vol. 1. | London: | Houlston 
and Stoneman, | 65, Paternoster row. | 1851.”’ 
(Congress, Eames.) Volume 2 also appeared 
in a ‘‘ Fourth edition,’ with the latter imprint 
and date (Eames). These several issues differ 
only in the insertion of new titles in the places 
of the original] titles. 
On the languages of the nations inhabiting 
the western coast of North America (vol. 5, pp. 
435-441) includes a brief discussion of the 
Nootka-Columbians, pp. 435-437, with a few (5) 
examples of the Nootka compared with the 
Mexican, pp. 438-439. 
Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Athenzum, 
Congress, Eames, Lenox. 
Naturgeschichte | des | Menschen- 
geschlechts| von | James Cowles Prich- 
ard, | Med. D. [&c. three lines.] | Nach 
der [&c. three lines.] | von | Dr. Ru- 
dolph Wagner, | [&c. one line.]| Erster 
[-Vierter] Band. | 

Leipzig, | verlag von Leopold Bosk. 

| 1840[-1848]. 

4 vols. ; vol. 4 in two parts, 12°. A translation 
of the 5 vol. edition of the Physical History. 

Discussion of American languages, vol. 4, pp. 
311-341, 357-363, 458. 

Copies seen: British Museum. 


—— The | natural history | of | man; | 
comprising | inquiries into the modify- 
ing influence of | physical and moral 
agencies | on the different tribes of the 
human family. | By | James Cowles 
Prichard, M.D. EVR.S. MR. 1A: | 
corresponding member [«&c. five lines. ] 

| With | Thirty-six Coloured and Four 
Plain Illustrations | engraved on steel, 
| and ninety engravings on wood. | 

London: | H. Bailliere, 219 Regent 
street; | foreign bookseller [&c. two 
lines.] | Paris: J. B. Bailliere, libraire, 
rue de l’Ecole de Medecine. | Leipsic: 
T. O. Weigel. | 1843. 

Half-title verso note 1 1. frontispiece 1 1. title 
verso names of printers 1 1. dedication pp. v-vi, 
advertisement pp. vii-viii, explanation of 
engravings on steel p.ix, index to engravings 


on wood p.x, contents pp. xi-xvi, text pp. -L 
546, index pp. 547-556, 8°. 


50 


Prichard (J. C.) —Continued. 


Brief references to the Nootka-Columbian 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


| Prichard (J. C.) —Continued. 
—— The | natural history | of | man; | 


and Haeltzuk peoples, pp. 413-415. 
Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, 
Museum, Eames, Harvard. 


British 


The | natural history | of | man; | 
comprising | inquiries into the modify- 
ing influence of | physical and moral 
agencies | on the different tribes of the 
human family. | By | James Cowles 
Prichard, MoD, ORR. SMa iePAcs| 
corresponding member [&c. seven 
lines.] | Second edition, enlarged, | with 
| Forty-four Coloured and Five Plain 
Illustrations | engraved on steel, | and 
ninety-seven engravings on wood. | 

London: | Hippolyte Bailliere, pub- 
lisher, 219 Regent street ;| foreign book- 
seller to the Royal college of surgeons, 

| and to the Royal medico-chirurgical 

society. | Paris: J. B. Bailliere, libraire 
de Academie royale de medecine. | 
Leipsic: T.O. Weigel. | 1845. 

Half-title verso note 1 1. frontispiece 1 1. title 
verso blank 1 1. dedication pp. v—-vi, advertise- 
ment pp. vii-viii, explanations to the engrav- 
ings on steel p.ix, index to the engravings on 
wood p. x, contents pp. xi-xvi, appendix p. xvii, 
text pp. 1-586, index pp. 587-596, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp. 413-415. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames. 


— The | natural history | of | man; | 
eomprising | inquiries into the modify- 
ing influence of | physical and moral 
agencies | on the different tribes of the 
human family. | By | James Cowles 
Brichard.-M_D: Bo R8..) Mook A. | 
corresponding member [&c. six lines. ] 
| Third edition, enlarged, | with | Fifty 
Coloured and Five Plain Illustrations 
| engraved on steel, | and ninety-seven 
engravings on wood. | 

London: | Hippolyte Bailliere, pub- 
lisher, 219 Regent street ; | foreign book- 
seller to the Royal college of surgeons, 
| and to the Royal medico-chirurgical 
society. | Paris: J. B. Bailliere, libraire 
de Academie royale de medecine. | 
Leipsic: T. O. Weigel. | 1848. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso names of printers 
1 1. dedication pp. v-vi, advertisement pp. vii- 
viii, explanation of illustrations pp. ix—x, con- 
tents pp. xi-xvii, text pp. 1-546, appendix pp. 
547-666, index pp. 667-677, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, pp. 
413-415. 

Copies seen: Astor, 
gress, Harvard. 


British Museum, Con- 


Priest (Josiah). 


comprising | inquiries into the modify- 
ing influence of | physical and moral 
agencies | on the different tribes of the 
human family. | By | James Cowles 
Prichard, M. D. FE. ROS. Mo Roses 
president[&c. four lines. ] | Fourth Edi- 
tion, Edited and Enlarged by Edwin 
Norris, | of the royal Asiatic society of 
Great Britain and _ Ireland. | Ilus- 
trated with sixty-two coloured plates 
engraved on steel, | and one hundred 
engravings on wood. | In two volumes. 
| Vol. I{-I1]. | 

London: ' H. Bailliere, publisher, 219, 
Regent street, | and 290, Broadway, 
New York, U.S. | Paris: J. B. Bailliére, 
libraire, rue Hautefeuille. | Madrid: 
Bailly Bailliére, calle del principe. | 
1855. 

2 vols.: half-title verso notice 1 1. plate 1 lL. 
title verso names of printers 1 1. contents pp. 
v-viii, explanation to the engravings on steel 
p. ix, index to the engravings on wood p. x, edi- 
tor’s preface pp. xi-xili, introductory note pp. 
xyv-xx, short biographical notice of the author 
pp. xxi-xxiv, text pp. 1-343, sixteen other 
plates; half-title verso notice 1 1. plate 1 1. title 
verso names of printers 1 1. contents pp. v-vii, 
text pp. 343-714, index pp. 715-720, forty-four 
other plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, 
vol. 2, pp. 571-573. 

Copies seen: Eames, Harvard, Lenox. 


American antiquities, 
| and | discoveries in the west: | being 
| an exhibition of the evidence | thatan 
ancient population of partially civilized 
nations, | differing entirely from those 
of the present In-| dians, peopled Amer- 
ica, many centuries before | its discov- 
ery by Columbus. | And | inquiries into 
their origin,| with a| copious description 
| Of many of their stupendous Works, 
now in ruins. | With | conjectures con- 
cerning what may have | become of 
them. |Compiled | from travels, authen- 
tic sources, and the researches | of | 
Antiquarian Societies. | By Josiah 
Priest. | Third Edition Revised. | 

Albany: | printed by Hoffman and 
White, | No. 71, State-Street. | 1833. 

Folded frontispiece, title verso copyright 
notice 1 1. preface pp. iii-iv, contents pp. v- viii, 
text pp. 9-400, map and plate, 8°. 

Rafinesque (C. S.), Tabular view of the 
American generic languages, pp. 309-312. 


WAKASHAN 


Priest (J.) —Continued. 
Copies seen: Boston Public, Congress, Eames, 
Harvard, Massachusetts Historical Society. 
The Brinley copy, no. 5435, sold for $1.50. 
This article is omitted in the earlier and 
later editions of Priest's work. 


LANGUAGES. 51 


Proper names: 


| Klaokwat See Catlin (G.) 

Maka Swan (J.G.) 

) Nutka Quimper (M.) 

| Seshat Knipe (C.) 

t Tokoaat Z Knipe (C.) 
Tokoaat Sproat (G. M.) 


Q. 


Qagutl. See Kwakiutl. 
Quimper (D. Manuel). Segundo recono- 
cimiento de laentrada de Fuca y costa | 


comprendida entre ella y la de Nootka, | 
hecho | el ano de 1790 con la balandra | 


‘‘Prin- | cesa Real” mundade por el 
alferez de | navio D. Manuel Quimper. 


Manuscript, in the Bancroft Library, San | 


Francisco. Forms pp. 385-445 of: 
Viages | en la | costa al Norte | de las | Cali- 


_ Quimper (M.)— Continued. 
| fornias. | 1774-1790. | Copia Sacada | de los 
Archivos de Espagia.| Bancroft Library | 
1874. 

Short vocabulary of the inhabitants of the 
coast between lat. 48° and 50°, pp. 21-23 (405- 
407.)—Nootka vocabulary, collected with the 
assistance of Ingraham, pp. 34-45 (418-429).— 
Names of villages and chiefs, p. 46 (430). 


| 
| 
{ 
| 
! 


Quoquols. See Kwakiutl. 


R. 


Rafinesque (Constantine Samuel). At- 
lantic journal, | and | friend of knowl- 
edge. | In eight numbers, | Containing 
about 160 original articles and tracts on 
Natural and | Historical Sciences, the 
Description of about 150 New Plants, | 
and 10v New Animals or Fossils. Many 
Vocabularies of Langua- | ges, Histor- 
ical and Geological Facts, &c. &c. &e. 
| By C.S. Rafinesque, A.M... Ph.D. 
| Professor of Historical and Natural 
Sciences, Member of seve- | ral learned 
societies in Europe and America, &e. | 
[Quotation and list of figures, six 
lines. ] | 
Philadelphia: | 1832-1833. | (Two 
dollars.) 


Tabularviewrecto blank 1 1. title verso index 
1 l.iconography and illustrations ete. 1 1. text 


pp. 1-202, 205-212, 8°. Originally issued in num- | 
bers (1-8, and extra of no.3),from the ‘‘spring | 


of 1832” to the ‘‘ winter of 1833.” 
4, American history. Tabular view of the 


American Generic languages [including the | 


Waceash], and Original Nations, pp. 6-8. 

Copies seen: Boston Atheneum, British 
Museum, Congress, Eames. 

This article is reprinted in: 

Priest (J.), American Antiquities, pp. 309- 
312, Albany, 1833, 8°. 

Constantine Samuel Rafinesque, botanist, 
born in Galatz, a suburb of Constantinople, 
Turkey, in 1784, died in Philadelphia, Pa., Sep- 
tember 18,1842. He was of French parentage, 


Rafinesque (C.S.)— Continued. 

and his father, amerchant, died in Philadelphia 

about 1791. The son came to Philadelphia with 
| his brother in 1802, and, after traveling through 
| Pennsylvania and Delaware, returned with a 
| collection of botanical specimens in 1805 and 
| 
| 
| 


went to Sicily, where he spent ten years asa 
merchant and in the study of botany. In 1815 
he sailed for New York, but was shipwrecked 
on the Long Island coast, and lost his valuable 
books. collections, manuscripts, and drawings. 
In 1818 he went to the west and became pro 
fessor of botany in Transylvania University, 
Lexington, Ky. Subsequently he traveled and 
lectured in various places, endeavored to estab- 
lish a magazine and botanic garden, but with- 
out success, and finally settled in Philadelphia, 
where he resided until his death, and where he 
published The Atlantic Journal and Friend of 
Knowledge; a Cyclopxedic Journal and Review, 
of which only eightnumbers appeared (1832-'33). 
The numberof genera and species that heintro- 
duced into his works produced great confusion. 
A gradual deterioration is found in Rafinesque’s 
botanical writings from 1819 till 1830, when the 
passion for establishing new genera and species 
seems to have become a monomania with him. 
He assumed thirty to one hundred years as the 

average time required for the production of a 
| new species and five hundred to a thousand 
years fora new genus. It is said that he wrote 
a paper describing ‘‘twelve new species of 
thunder and lightning.” In addition to trans- 
lations and unfinished botanical and zodlogical 
works, he was the author of numerous books 
and pamphlets.—Appleton's Cyclop. of Am. 
Biog. 


52 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Relacion del viage .. . Sutil y | 


Mexicana. See Galiano (D. Alcala). 

Rivington (—). See Gilbert (—) and 
Rivington (—). 

Roguefeuil (Camille de). Journal | d’un 
voyage | autour du monde, | pendant 
les années 1816, 1817, 1818 et 1819, | par 
M. Camille de Roquefeuil, | lieutenant 
de vaisseau, chevalier de Saint-Louis | 
et de la legion-@honneur, | Command- 
ant de navire le Bordelais, armé par 
M. Balguerie Junior, | de Bordeaux. | 
Tome premier[-second]. 

Paris, | Ponthieu, libraire, Palacio- 
royal, Galerie de boies, no. 252. | 
Lesage, libraire, rue du Paon, no. 8. | 
Gide fils, libraire, rue Saint-Marc-fey- 
dean, no. 20. | 1823. 


2 vols.: half-title verso name of printer 1 1. 


title verso blank 1 1. preface pp. v—xi, introduc- | 


tion pp. xiii-xlix, errata p. [1], text pp. 1-336, 
contents pp. 337-344; title verso blank 1 1. text 
pp. 1-884, vocabulary of marine terms used in 


Boe 


Remarks on the Noutka and other languages | 
| —— The | lord’s prayer | In Three Hun- 


of the northwest coast, and on their system of 
numeration, vol. 2, pp. 216-219. 

‘‘We have observed four different dialects in 
the parts of the northwest coast which we have 
explored: That of Noutka, which with some 
variations is common at Nitinat, and I believe 
in all the Quadra and Vancouver isle; that of 
Queen Charlotte, which, modified, is spoken 
also in the Prince of Wales island; another 
used at Sitka, in Chatham Strait, and in Chris- 
tian and Frederick Sounds, affluents to the 
south; the fourth in Lynn Canal.” 

Copies seen: Congress. 


——A|voyage| round the world, | 
between the years 1816-1819. | By M. 


the work pp. 385-396, contents pp. 397-407, map, | 


Roquefeuil (C. de) — Continued. 


Camille de Roquefeuil | in the ship le 
Bordelais. | 

London: j printed for sir Richard 
Phillips and Co. | Bride-court, Bridge- 
street. | 1823. 

Title verso name of printer 1 1]. text pp. 3-112, 
8°. 

Brief remarks upon, and a few words in, the 
Nootka language, p. 100. 

Copies seen: Congress. 


Rost (Reinhold). The | lord’s prayer | In 


Three Hundred Languages | comprising 
the | leading languages and their prin- 
cipal dialects | throughout the world | 
with the places where spoken | With a 
preface by Reinhold Rost, | C. I. E., 
ELD: EHD: | 

London | Gilbert and Rivington | 
Limited | St. John’s house, Clerkenwell, 
E. C. | 1891 | (All rights reserved) | 

Title verso quotations 1 1. preface 2 ll. con- 
tents 1 1. text pp. 1-88, 4°. 

The Lord’s prayer in a number of American 
languages, among them the Kwagutl, p. 42. 

Copies seen: Eames. 


dred Languages | comprising the | 
leading languages and their principal 
dialects | throughout the world | with 
the places where spoken | With a pref- 
ace by Reinhold Rost, | C. I. E., LL. D., 
PH. D. | Second edition | 

London | Gilbert and Rivington | 
Limited | St. John’s house, Clerkenwell, 
E. C. | 1891 | (All rights reserved) | 

Title verso quotations 1 1. preface 2 ll. con- 
tents 11. text pp. 1-88, 4°. 


Linguistic contents as under title next above. 
Copies seen: Pilling. 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 53 


S. 


Sabin (Joseph). A | dictionary | of | | St. Onge (L. N.)—Continued. 


Books relating to America, | from its 
discovery to the present time. | By 
Joseph Sabin. | Volume I [-XIX]. | 
[Three lines quotation. ] | 


New-York: | Joseph Sabin, 84 Nassau 


street. | 1868[-1891]. 

19 vols. 8°. Still in course of publication. 
Parts exy-cxvi, commencing vol. 20 and reach- 
ing the entry ‘‘Smith,’’ were published in 
March, 1892. Now edited by Mr. Wilberforce 
Eames. 

Contains, passim, titles of a number of books 
relating to the Wakashan languages. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Geological 
Survey, Lenox. 


—— See Field (T. W.) 
St. Onge (Pére Louis Napoleon). 
Bulmer (T.S.) 


“The subject of this sketch, the Rey. Louis 
N. St. Onge, of St. Alphonse de Liguori parish, 
was born [in the village of St. Cesaire] a few 
miles south of Montreal, Canada, A pril 14, 1842. 
He finished his classical course when yet very 
young, after which he studied law for two years. 
Feeling called to another field, he gave up this 
eareer in order to prepare himself to work for 
God’s glory as an Indian missionary in the 
diocese of Nesqually, Washington Territory. 


See 


‘“‘A year and a half before his ordination, | 


Right Rey. A. M. Blanchet, his bishop, ordered 
him to Vancouver, W. T., where he wasoccupied 
as a professor of natural philosophy, astron- 
omy, and other branches in the Holy Angel's 
College. All his spare time was consecrated to 
the study of the Indian languages, in which he 


is to-day one of the most expert, so that he was | 
ready to go on active missionary work as soon | 


as ordained. 


“The first years of his missionary life were | 
occupied in visiting different tribes of Indians | 


and doing other missionary work in the Terri- 
tories of Washington, Idaho, Montana, and other 
Rocky Mountain districts, among Indians and 
miners. Aftersuch labors he was then appointed 
to take charge of the Yakamas, Klikitats, 
Winatchas, Wishrams, Pshwanwapams, Nar- 
chez, and other Indian tribes inhabiting the 
central part of Washington Territory. Having 
no means of support in his new mission, Bishop 
Blanchet, in his self-sacrificing charity for the 
Indians of his extensive diocese, furnished him 
with the necessary outfit; and with a number 
of willing though unskilled Indians as appren- 
tice carpenters, the young missionary set to 
work to rebuild the St. Joseph’s mission, 
destroyed in 1856 by a party of vandals called 
the Oregon Volunteers, who had been sent to 
fight the Yakamas. 


‘“‘A fter four years of labor, he and his devoted 
companion, Mr. J. B. Boulet (now ordained and 
stationed among the Tulalip Indians) had the 
satisfaction to see not only a comfortable resi- 
dence, but also a neat church, erected, and a fine 
tract of land planted with fruit trees, and in a 
profitable state of cultivation, where formerly 
only ruin and desolation reigned. 

“His heaith breaking down entirely, he was 
forced to leave his present and daily increasing 
congregation ofneophytes. Wishing to give him 
the bestmedical treatment, Bishop Blanchet sent 
Father St. Onge to his native land with a leave 
of absence until his health would be restored. 
During his eighteen months’ stay in a hospital 
he, however, utilized his time by composing and 
printing two small Indian books, containing 
rules of grammar, catechism, hymns, and Chris- 
tian prayers in Yakama and Chinook lan- 
guages—the former for children, the latter for 
the use of missionaries on the Pacific coast. 

‘By the advice of his physician he then under- 
took a voyage to Europe, where he spent nearly 
a year in search of health. Back again to this 
country, he had charge of a congregation for a 
couple of years in Vermont; and now he is the 
pastor of the two French churches of Glens 
Falls and Sandy Hill, in the diocese of Albany, 
NeW. 

“ Father St. Onge, though aman of uncommon 
physical appearance, stoutly built, and six feet 
and four inches in height, has not yet entirely 
recovered his health and strength. The French 
population of Glens Falls have good cause for 
feeling very much gratified with the presentcon- 
dition of the affairs of the parish of St.Alphonse 
de Liguori, and should receive the hearty con- 
gratulations of the entire community. Father 
St. Onge, a man of great erudition, a devoted 
servant tothe church, and possessing a persou- 
ality whose geniality and courtesy have won 
him a place in the hearts of his people, has by 
his faithful application to his parish developed 
it and brought out all that was to inure to its 
benefit and further advance its interests.””— 
Glens Falls (N. Y.) Republican, March 28, 1889. 

Father St. Onge remained at Glens Falls until 
October, 1891, when increasing infirmities com- 
pelled him to retire permanently from the min- 
istry. He is now living with his brother, the 
rector of St. Jean Baptiste church, in Troy, N. 
Y. Since his retirement he has compiled an 
English-Chinook Jargon dictionary of about six 
thousand words, and this he intends to supple- 
ment witha corresponding Jargon-Englishpart. 
He has also begun the preparation of a Yakama 
dictionary, which he hopes to make much mora 
complete than that of Father Pandosy, pub- 
lished in Dr. Shea's Library of American lin- 
guistics. 

I have adopted the spelling of his name asit 


54 


St. Onge (L. N.) —Continued. 


appears on the title-page of Bishop Demers's 
Chinook Jargon dictionary, though the true 
spelling, and the one he uses now, is Saint 
onge—that of a French province in which his 
ancestors lived and from which four or five fam- 
ilies came in 1696, all adopting the name. His 
family name is Payant. 


Sayce (Archibald Henry). Introduction 
to the | science of language. | By | A. 
H. Sayce, | deputy professor of compar- 


ative philology in the university of | 


Oxford. | In two volumes. | Vol.I[-IT]. 
| (Design. ] | 

London: | C. Kegan Paul & co., 1, 
Paternoster square. | 1880. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso 
quotation and notice 1 1. preface pp.v-viii, table 
of contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-441, colo- 
phon verso blank 11.; half-title verso blank 1 1. 
title verso quotation and notice 1 1. table of con- 
tents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-352, selected list 
of works pp. 353-363, index pp. 365-421, 12°. 

A classification of American languages (vol. 
2, pp. 57-64) includes the Nutka or Yueuatl, p. 
61. 

Copies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames. 
— Introduction to the | science of lan- 
guage. | By | A. H. Sayce, | deputy- 
professor of comparative philology, 
Oxford, | Hon. LL. D. Dublin. | In two 
volumes. | Vol. I[-II].| [Design.] | 
Second edition. | 

London: | Kegan Paul, Trench, & 
co., 1, Paternoster square. | 1883. 

2 vols.: half-title verso blank 1 |. title verso 
quotation and notice 11. table of contents verso 
blank 1 1. preface to the second edition pp. v-xv 
verso blank, preface pp. xvii-xx, text pp. 1-441, 
colophon verso blank 1 1.; half-title verso blank 
1 1. title verso quotation and notice 1 1. table of 
contents verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-352, selected 
list of works pp. 353-363 verso blank, index pp. 
365-421, 12°, 

Linguistics as in the first edition, vol. 2, pp. 
57-64. 

Copies seen: Eames. 


Schoolcraft (Henry Rowe). Historical | 
and | statistical information, | respect- 
ing the | history, condition and pros- 
pects | of the | Indian tribes of the 
United States: | collected and prepared 
under the direction | of the | bureau 
of Indian affairs, | per act of Congress 


of March 3d, 1847;|by Henry R. School- | 


craft, LL.D. Tlustrated by S. Eastman, 

capt. U.S. A. | Published by Authority 

of Congress. | Part I[-VT]. | 
Philadelphia: | Lippincott, Grambo 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Schoolcraft (H. R.)— Continued. 


& company, | (successors to Grigg, 
Elliot & co.) | 1851[-1857]. 


Engraved title: [Engraving.] | Historical | 
and | statistical information | respecting the | 
history, condition and prospects) of the| Indian 
tribes of the United States: | Collected and pre- 
pared under the | direction of the bureau of 
Indian affairs per act of Congress | of March 
3™1847,| by Henry R. Schooleraft L.L.D. | Illus- 
trated by | S. Eastman, capt. U.S. army. | [Coat 
of arms.] | Published by authority of Con- 
gress. | Part I[-VI]. | 

Philadelphia: | Lippincott, Grambo & co. 

6 vols. 4°. Beginning with vol. 2 the words 
‘‘ Historical and statistical” are left off the 
title-pages, both engraved and printed. Subse- 
quently (1853) vol. 1 was also issued with the 
abridged title beginning ‘‘ Information respect- 
ing the history, condition, and prospects of the 
Indian tribes,’ making it uniform with the 
other parts. 

Two editions with these title-pages were pub- 
lished by the same house, one on thinner and 
somewhat smaller paper, of which but vols. 1-5 
were issued. 

Part 1, 1851. Half-title (Ethnological re- 
searches, | respecting | the red man of America) 
verso blank 1 1. engraved title as above verso 
blank 11. printed title as above verso blank 11. 
introductory documents pp. iii-vi, preface pp. 
vii-x, Hist of plates pp. xi-xii, contents pp. xiii- 
Xvili, text pp. 13-524, appendix pp. 525-568, 
plates, colored lithographs and maps numbered 
1-76. 

Part U, 1852. Half-title (as in part 1) verso 
blank 11. engraved title (Information respecting 
the history, condition and prospects, etc.) verso 
blank 11. printed title (Information respecting 
the history, condition and prospects, etc.) verso 
printers 11. dedication verso blank1 1. introdue- 
tory document pp.vii-xiv, contents pp. xv-xxii, 
list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 17-608, 
plates and maps numbered 1-29, 31-78, and 2 
plates exhibiting the Cherokee alphabet and its 
application. 

Part 11,1853. Half-title (as in part 1) verso 
blank 1 l.engraved title (as in part 1) verso blank 
11. printed title (as in part 1m) verso printers 11. 
third report pp. v-viii, list of divisions p. ix, 
contents pp. xi-xv, list of plates pp. xvii-xviii, 
text pp. 19-635, plates and maps numbered 
1-21, 25-45. 

Part Iv, 1854. Half-title (as in part 1) verso 
blank11. engraved title (asin partiI) verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in part 0) verso blank 1 1. 
dedication pp. v-vi, fourth report pp. vii-x, list 
of divisions p. xi. contents pp. xiii-xxiii, list of 
piates pp. xxv-xxvi, text pp. 19-668, plates and 
maps numbered 1-42. 

Part v, 1855. Half-title (as in part 1) verso 
blank11. engraved title (as in part) verso blank 
1 1. printed title (as in part m1) verso blank 11. 
dedication pp. vii-viii, fifth report pp. ix-xii, list 
of divisions p. xiii, synopsis of general contents 


WAKASHAN 


Schoolcraft (H. R.) —Continued. 


of vols. I-V pp. xv-xvi, contents pp. xvii- xxii | 


list of plates pp. xxiii-xxiv, text pp. 25-625, ap- 
pendix pp. 627-712, plates and maps numbered 
1-8, 10-36. 

Part VI, 1857. Half-title (General history | of 
the | North American Indians) verso blank 1 1. 
portrait 11. printed title (History | of the| Indian 


tribes of the United States: | their | present | 


condition and prospects, | and a sketch of their 

| ancient status. | Published by order of Con- 
gress, | under the direction of the Department of 
the interior—Indian bureau. | By | Henry Rowe 
Schooleraft, LL. D. | Member [&c. six lines.] | 
With Illustrations by Eminent Artists. | Inone 
volume. | Part vi. of the series. | Philadelphia: 

| J. B. Lippincott & co. | 1857.) verso blank 11. 
inscription verso blank 11. letter to the Presi- 
dent pp. vii-viii, report pp. ix—x, preface pp. xi- 
xvi, contents pp. xvii-xxvi, list of plates pp. 
Xxvii-xxviii, text pp. 25-744, index pp. 745-756, 
fifty-seven plates, partly selected from the other 
volumes, and three tables. 

Gallatin (A.), Table of generic Indian fami- 
lies of languages, vol. 3, pp. 397-402. 

Oopies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Athe- 
neum, British Museum, Congress, Eames, 
National Museum, Powell, Shea, Trumbull. 

At the Fischer sale, no. 1581, Quaritch bought 
acopy for4l.10s. The Field copy, no. 2075, sold 
for $72; the Menzies copy, no. 1765, for $132; the 
Squier copy, no. 1214, $120; no. 2032, $60; the 


Ramirez copy, no. 773 (5 vols.), 51. 5s.; the Pinart | 
copy, no. 828 (5 vols. in 4), 208 fr.; the Murphy | 


copy, no. 2228, $69. Priced by Quaritch, no. 30017, 
101. 10s.; by Clarke & co, 1886, $65; by Quaritch, 
in 1888, 151. 
Reissued with title-pages as follows: 

—— Archives| of | Aboriginal Knowledge. 
| Containing all the | Original Papers 
laid before Congress | respecting the | 

History, Antiquities, Language, Eth- 
nology, Pictography, | Rites, Supersti- 
tions, and Mythology, | of the | Indian 
Tribes of the United States | by | Henry 
R. Schoolcraft, LL. D. | With Ilustra- 
tions. | On:endun ih ieu muzzinyegun 
un.—Algonquin. | In six volumes. | 

Volume I[-VT]. | 


Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & | 


Co. | 1860. 


Engraved title: Information | respecting the 
| History, Condition and Prospects | of the | 
Indian Tribes of the United States: | Collected 
and prepared under the| Bureau ot Indian 
Affairs | By Henry R. Schooleraft L. L.D. | 


Mem: Royal Geo. Society, London. Royal An- | 


tiquarian Society. Copenhagen. Ethnological 


Society, Paris, &c. &c. | Illustrated by | Cap.t | 


S. Eastman, U.S.A. andother eminent artists. | 


(Vignette.] | Published by authority of Con- | 


gress. | 
Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & Co. 


| 
| 
| 
| 
| 


LANGUAGES. ‘ 5D 


Schoolcraft (H. R.) — Continued. 


6 vols. maps and plates, 4°. 

This edition agrees in the text page for page 
with the original titled above, and contains in 
addition an index to each volume. 

Copies seen: Congress. 

Partially reprinted with title as follows: 


[——] The | Indian tribes| of the) United 


States :| their | history, antiquities, cus- 
toms, religion, arts, language, | tradi- 
tions, oral legends, and myths. | Edited 
by | Francis 8. Drake. | Illustrated with 
one hundred fine engravings on steel. 
| In two volumes. | Vol. I[-IT]. | 

Philadelphia: | J. B. Lippincott & 
co. | London: 16 Southampton street, 
Covent Garden. | 1884. 


2 vols.: portrait 1 1. title verso copyright 
11. preface pp. 3-5, contents pp. 7-8, list of plates 
pp. 9-10, introduction pp. 11-24, text pp. 25-458; 
frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright 1 1. con- 
tents pp. 3-6, list of plates p.7, text pp. 9-445, 
index pp. 447-455, plates, 4°. 

“In the following pages the attempt has been 
made to place before the public in a convenient 
and accessible form the results of the life-long 
labors in the field of aboriginal research of the 
late Henry R. Schooleraft.’’ 

Chapter 11, Language, literature, and pic- 
tography, vol. 1, pp. 47-63, contains general 
remarks on the Indian languages. 

Copies scen: Congress. ‘ 

Priced by Clarke & co. 1886, no. 6376, $25. 

Henry Rowe Schoolcraft, ethnologist, born in 
[Watervliet] Albany County, N. Y., March 22, 
1793, died in Washington, D. C., December 10, 
1864. Was educated at Middlebury College, 
Vermont, and at Union, where he pursued the 
studies ofchemistry and mineralogy. In1817-'18 
he traveled in Missouri and Arkansas, and 
returned with a large collection of geological 
and mineralogical specimens. In 1820 he was 
appointed geologist toGen. Lewis Cass’s explor- 
ing expedition to Lake Superior and the head- 
waters of Mississippi River. He was secre- 
tary of a commission to treat with the Indians 
at Chicago, and, after a journey through Illi- 
nois and along Wabash and Miami rivers, was 
in 1822 appointed Indian agent for the tribes 
of the lake region, establishing himself at 
Sault Sainte Marie, and afterward at Mack- 
inaw, Where, in 1823, he married Jane Johnston, 
granddaughter of Waboojeeg, a noted Ojibway 
chief, who had received her educationin Europe. 
In 1828 he founded the Michigan historical soci- 
ety and in 1821 the Algic society. From 1828 till 
1832 he was a member of the territorial legisla- 
tureof Michigan. In 1832 he led a government 
expedition. which foliowed the Mississippi 
River up to its source in Itasca Lake. In 1836 
he negotiated a treaty with the Indians on the 
upper lakes for the cession to the United States 
of 16,000,000 acres of their lands. He was then 


56 


Schoolcraft (H. R.) —Continued. 

appointed acting superintendent of Indian 
affairs, and in 1839 chief disbursing agent for 
the northern department. On his return from 
Europe in 1842 he made atour through western 
Virginia, Ohio, and Canada. He wasappointed 
by the New York legislature in 1845 a commis- 
sioner to take the census of the Indians in the 
State and collect information concerning the 
Six Nations. After the performance of this 
task, Congress authorized him, on March 3, 1847, 
to obtain through the Indian bureau reports 
relating to all the Indian tribes of the country 
and to collate and edit the information. In this 
work he spent the remaining years of his life. 
Through his influence many laws were enacted 
for the protection and benefit of the Indians. 
Numerous scientific societies in the United 
States and Europe elected him to membership, 
and the University of Geneva gave him the 
degree of LL.D.in 1846. He was the author of 
numerous poems, lectures, and reports on 
Indian subjects, besides thirty-one 
works. Two of his lectures before the Algic 
society at Detroit on the ‘‘Grammatical Con- 
struction of the Indian Languages” were trans- 
lated into French by Peter S. Duponceau and 
gained for their author a gold medal from the 
French institute. To the five volumes 
of Indian researches compiled under the direc- 


tion of the war department he added a sixth, | 
containing the post-Columbian history of the | 


Indians and of their relations with Europeans 


(Philadelphia, 1857). He had collected material | 


for two additional volumes, but the govern- 
ment suddenly suspended the publication of 
the work.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


Scouler (Dr. John). Observations on the 


indigenous tribes of the N. W. coast of | 
By John Scouler, M. D., F. | 


America. 
L. S., &e. 

In Royal Geog. Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 11, 
pp. 215-251, London, 1841, 8°. 
vey.) 

Vocabulary of the Tlaoquatch (southwest 
extremity Vancouver Island), about 100 words 
(obtained from Dr. Tolmie), pp. 242-247. 


On the Indian tribes inhabiting the 
north-west coastof America. By John 
Scouler, M. D.,F.L.S8. Communicated 
by the Ethnological Society. 


In Edinburgh New Philosoph. Jour. vol. 41, | 


pp. 168-192, Edinburgh, 1846, 8°. 

Vocabulary (19 
[Chinook Jargon], showing aftinities with the 
Tlaoquatch (from Tolmie) and with the Nootka 
(from Mozino and Jewitt), p. 176. 

Reprinted in Ethnological Soe. of London, 
Jour. vol. 1, pp. 228-252, London [1848], 8°. (Con- 
gress.) 

Linguistic contents as above, p. 236. 


Sebasa: 


Grammatic treatise See Bancroft (H. H.) 


larger | 


(Geological Sur- | 


words) of the Chikeelis | 


Seghers (Archbishop Charles 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


John). 
[Roman Catholic prayers in the Nes- 
quiat or Nutka language. ] ip) 


Manuscript; compiled in 1874. See note to 
Brabant (A.J.) 


Charles John Seghers, second and fourth 
Bishop of Vancouver's Island and second Arch- 
bishop of Oregon City, was born in the ancient 
city of Ghent,in Belgium, December 26, 1839. 
While a mere iad he began to feel that he was 
called to the priesthood, and, after going 
through the ordinary course at the theological 
seminary of Ghent, he entered the American 
College in the University of Louvain, and was 
ordained, in the cathedral of Mechlin, in 1863, 
for the American mission, choosing Victoria, 
Vancouver's Island, at the instance of Bishop 
Demers, who was then on a visit to his native 
country. For eight years he was attached to 
St. Andrew’s Cathedral, Victoria, as assistant, 
as rector, and vicar-general, being appointed 
administrator of the diocese in 1871, on the death 
of Bishop Demers. In 1873 he was consecrated 
bishop of the see, the youngest prelate of the 
American episcopacy at that time. But 
he had always a strong predilection for the 
primitive native Americans. No Catholic 
missionaries had as yet attempted the conver- 
sion of the Indians of Alaska, for the reason 
that while it was under the Russian dominions 
access had been denied to them. . . . In 
1878 Bishop Seghers made his first visit to 
Alaska in order to judge what could be done 
there, and began to study the native language. 

In the meantime Archbishop Blanchet, of 
Oregon City. having grown old and feeble, 
Bishop Seghers was made his coadjutor, with 
right of succession, while the see of Vancouver 
was assumed by Bishop Brondel. No sooner 
was he installed as coadjutor of Oregon City 
than Bishop Seghers devoted a year to acquiring 
practical knowledge of the vast region belong- 
ing to his province. On the resigna- 
tion of Archbishop Blanchet, in 1881, Arch. 
bishop Seghers became the metropolitan in 
name as well as in fact. But for some time his 
mind had been set on the conversion of Alaska, 
and in 1883:he went to Rome to beg that he 
might beallowed to take up that work. The sce 
of Vancouver was again vacant, Bishov Brondel 
having been translated to the new see of Helena. 
At his urgent request, therefore, the Propa- 
ganda authorized Archbishop Seghers to resign 
the important see of Oregon City for the 
humbler and more laborious one of Van- 
couver. By the opening of 1885 he was 
back once more at Victoria. Arch- 
bishop Seghers, accompanied by two Jesuit 
fathers, Tosi and Rabaut, and a servant named 
Frank Fuller, an American, arrived at Chilkat, 
on the lower coast, and disembarked. Thence 
they traveled northwesterly aiong the foot- 
hills of the coast range until they reached the 
station of the Alaska Trading Company at the 
headwaters of Stewart’s River. Here the Jesuit 


WAKASHAN 


Seghers (C. J.) —Continued. , 

fathers remained to establish a mission for the 
Stekin Indians, while Archbishop Seghers, 
accompanied by his servant and some Indian 
guides, pushed on forthe trading-post at Mukla- 
kayet, near the mouth of the Tanaanah River, 
reaching that point late in October. The 
journey was resumed with the intention of 
striking the Yukon River at Nulata. After 


seven days with the sleds, during which they | 


had accomplished about 170 miles, they came to 


a deserted village 30 miles from Nulata,and on | 


the advice of the Indians Archbishop Seghers 
determined to halt here for the night, but to go 
on the next day a few miles to an Indian settle- 
ment, and there to establish a mission. Fuller, 
however, who seems to have been of a morose 
disposition, was averse to pursuing the journey 
any further, and gave way toa fit of anger when 
he found that the Indians’ advice prevailed 


against his own with thearchbishop. Theparty | 


entered an abandoned hut and lay down in a 
line before the fire and slept. 
archbishop’s soothing words, Fuller’s anger at 
the prospect of having to go further into this 


desolate region must have rankled in the man’s | 


heart. At daylight the next morning, Sunday, 
November 28, Fuller went ont and brought 


some sticks for the fire, and then sat down oppo- | 


site the sleeping prelate. Picking up his rifle, 
he leveled it at the prelate’s head, at the same 
time calling out. ‘‘ Archbishop, get up!’ The 
archbishop raised his head. As he did so 
Fuller pulled the trigger, and the holy mission- 
ary received the bullet between the eyes and 
tell back dead without a sound. The 
body, which the Indians had covered up and 
left behind them in the hut, was sent for at once 
and forwarded to the seaport of St. Michael’s. 
There it was encoflined, and at the request of 
the Russian priest was deposited in the Russian 
church until it could be taken to Victoria for 
interment. The murderer, on being brought 
to St. Michael’s, acknowledged his guilt and 
professed great sorrow. The lamentation over 


LANGUAGES. 5g 
Songs: 
Kwakiutl See Boas (F.) 
Kwakiutl + Fillmore (J. C.) 
Nutka Boas (F.) 
Nutka Jewitt (J. R.) 
Wakash Boas (F.) 


In spite of the | 


the death of this devoted missionary, refined | 


scholar, adventurous explorer, and at the same 


time humble and amiable Christian, was par- | 


ticularly great throughout the Northern Pacific 
coast, where his personality had become 


endeared to all sorts of people during his fifteen | 


years of active Christian work in that region.— 
T. F. Galwey in the Catholie Family Annual for 
1888. 


Sentences: 


Hailtsuk See Bancroft (H. H.) 


Seshat: 


Proper names See Knipe (C.) 


Smithsonian Institution: These words following 


a title or included within parentheses after a 
note indicate that a copy of the work referred 
to has been seen by the compiler in the library 
of that institution, Washington, D.C. 


Some account of the Tahkaht language. 
See Knipe (C.) 


Sproat (Gilbert Malcolm). 


Stewart (Capt.—). 


Scenes and 
studies | of savage life. | By Gilbert 
Malcolm Sproat. | [Two lines quota- 
tion. ] | 

London: Smith, Elder and co. | 1868. 


Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 1 1. contents pp. v-x, preface 
pp. xi-xii, text pp. 1-310, appendix pp. 311-317, 
colophon p. [318], 12°. 

Chapter xv. Intellectual capacity and lan- 
guage [of the Ahts], contains a discussion on 
the numeral system; divisions of the year; 
grammatical analysis; the Nitinaht dialect [of 
the Aht]; Cook’s list of Nootkah words; athinity 
of the Indian languages of the northwest coast; 
a table showing affinities between the Chinook 
Jargonand Aht, and tribal names, pp. 119-143.— 
Vocabulary of the Aht language, with a list of 
the numerals 1-200; an alphabetical list of 
words obtained at Nitinaht (or Barclay) Sound, 
but fairly representing the language of all the 
Aht tribes on the west coast of Vancouver 
Island, including words invented since their 
contact with white men, pp. 295-307.—List of 
Aht tribes on the outside coast of Vancouver 
Island in 1860, p.308.—Aht names of men and 
women, pp. 308-309; of places, p. 310; of berries, 
p. 310. 

Much of this material is extracted from 
Knipe (C.), Some account of the Tahkaht lan- 
guage. 

Copies seen: Bancroft. Boston Public, British 
Museum, Congress, Eames, Georgetown. 


See Gibbs (G.) 


Swan (James Gilchrist). The | north- 


west coast; | or, | three years’ resi- 
dence in Washington | territory. | By 
James G. Swan. | [Territorial seal.] | 
With numerous illustrations. | 

New York: | Harper & brothers, 
publishers, | Franklin square. | 1857. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso copyright notice 
11. dedication verso blank 1 1. introduction pp. 
v-vii, contents pp.ix-xiv, list of illustrations 
p- [xv], map, text pp. 17-409, appendix pp. 411- 
429, index pp. 431-435, 12°. 

Chapter xviii, Language of the Indians (pp. 
306-326), includes a vocabulary (12 words) of the 
Nootka compared with the Chinook, p. 307.— 
List of [80] words in the Nootkan language, the 
most in use, from John R. Jewitt’s Narrative of 
the massacre of the crew of the ship Boston by 
the savages of Queen Charlotte Sound, 1803, pp. 
421-422.—Comparative words (12) inthe Nootka 
and Chenook or Jargon, pp. 422.—Many Nootka 
words passim. 


58 


Swan (J. G.) — Continued. 

Copies seen: Astor, Bancroft, Boston Ath- 
eneum, British Museum, Eames, Geological 
Survey, Harvard, Mallet, Pilling. 

Issued also with title-page as follows: 


—— The | northwest coast; | or, | three 
years’ residence in Washington | terri- 
tory. | By | James G. Swan, | With 
numerous illustrations. | 

London: | Sampson Low, Son & co., 
47 Ludgate hill. | New York: Harper 
& brothers. | 1857. 


Frontispiece 1 1. title 1 1. dedication verso 
blank 1 1. introduction pp. v—-vii, contents pp. 
ix-xiv, list of illustrations p. xv, map, text 
pp. 17-409, appendix pp. 411-429, index pp. 431- 
435, 12°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above. 

Copies seen: Charles L. Woodward, New 
York City. ; 


—— Smithsonian contributions to knowl- 


edge. |220 | The | Indiansof cape Flat- 
tery, | at the entrance to the strait of 
Fuca, | Washington territory. | By | 

James G. Swan. | (Accepted for publi- 
cation, June, 1868.) 


Title verso names of commission etc. 1 1. ad- 
vertisement signed by Joseph Henry, secretary 
S. I. p. iii, prefatory note signed by George 
Gibbs p.v, contents p. vii, list of illustrations 
p- ix, text pp. 1-106, index pp, 107-108, plates, 4°. 

Forms article viii, of vol. xvi, Smithsonian 
Institution Contributions to Knowledge, Wash- 
ineton, 1870, 4°. 

The Makah Indians and the names by which 
they are known to other Indians, p. 1.—Animal 
names, p. 7.—Species of whales, p. 19.—The 
harpoon and its parts, p. 21.—The canoe and its 
parts, p. 21.—Porpoises, seals, otters, etc., p. 
30.—Personal names, p. 58.—Mythology, pp. 61- 
76, includes many native terms, names of gods, 
etc.—Names of the months, elements, etc., pp. 
91-92. — Makah vocabulary, alphabetically 
arranged by English words, pp. 93-105.—Loeal 
nomenclature of the Makahs, pp. 105-106. 

Copies seen: Geological Survey, Smithsonian. 

Issued separately with title-page as follows: 


— Smithsonian Contributions to Knowl- 


edge. | 220 | The | Indians of cape Flat- 
tery, | at the entrance to the strait of 
Fuca, | Washington territory. | By | 
James G, Swan. | 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Swan (J.G.)— Continued. 


Washington city: | published by the 
Smithsonian institution. | 1869. 

Cover title as above, title as above (except 
the imprint, which reads ‘‘Accepted for publi- 
cation, June, 1868’’) verso names of the commis- 
sion and of the printer 1 1. advertisementsigned 
by Joseph Henry p. iii, prefatory note signed 
by George Gibbs p. v, contents p. vii. list of 
illustrations p. ix, text pp. 1-106, index pp. 107- 
108, plates, 4°. 

Linguistic contents as under titlenext above. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling, Smithsonian, 
Trumbull, Wellesley. 


— Vocabulary of the Makah 


Manuscript, 10 leaves, 4°, written’on one side 
only ; in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 
Recorded, March, 1865. on one of the forms (no. 
170) issued for collectors by the Smithsonian 
Institution. Equivalents of all the 211 words 
called for are given. 

A copy of this vocabulary, 7 leaves, folio, 
made by Dr.George Gibbs, isin the samelibrary. 


Vocabulary of the Makah. 


Manuscript, 21 leaves, folio, written on one 
side only; in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 
nology. 

Contains about 1,000 words alphabetically 
arranged by English words. 

Mr. James Gilchrist Swan was born in Med- 
ford, Mass., January 11,1818, and was educated 
at an academy in that place. In 1833 he went to 
Boston to reside, and remained there until 1849, 
when he left for San Francisco, where he arrived 
in 1850. In 1852 he went to Shoalwater Bay, 
where he remained until 1856, when he returned 
east. In 1859 he returned to Puget Sound; since 
then Port Townsend has been his headquarters. 
In 1860 Mr. Swan went to Neah Bay. InJune, 
1862, he was appointed teacher of the Makah 
Indian Reservation, where he remained till 1866. 
In 1869 he went to Alaska, and in May, 1875, he 
went a second time to Alaska, this time under 
the direction of the Smithsonian Institution, as 
a commissioner to purchase articles of Indian 
manufacture for the Philadelphia Centennial 
Exposition. This fine collection is now in the 
U.S. National Museum at Washington. July 
31, 1878, Mr. Swan was appointed an inspector 
of customs at Neah Bay, Cape Flattery, and 
remained there until August, 1888, addingmuch 
to our knowledge of the Makah Indians, which 
was reported to Prof. Baird and published ina 
bulletin of the U.S. National Museum. In 1883 
he went to Queen Charlotte Islands for the 
Smithsonian Institution and made another col- 
lection for the U.S. National Museum. 


7 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 59 


fly 
Tate (ev. Charles Montgomery). Tho 
lord’s prayer [in the Hailtsuk lan- | 
guage]. | 
lleaf, verso blank, 8°. 

Copies seen: Pilling. 

Mr. Tate came to British Columbia from 
Northumberland, England, in 1870. He engaged 
in mission work among the Flathead Indians 
at Nanaimo, Vancouver Island, in 187i, where 
he learned the Aukaménum language spoken 
by the Indian tribes on the east coast of Van- 
couver Island, lower Fraser River, and Puget 
Sound. Here he spent three years, when he 
removed to Port Simpson, on the borders of 
Alaska, among the Tsimpsheans. He next 
moved to the Fraser River and spent seven 
years amongst the Flathead tribes between 
Yale and Westminster, frequently visiting the | 
Indians on the Nootsahk River in Washington 
Territory. Mr. Tate spent four years, 1880 to 
188i, among the Bella-Bellas, returning in the 
latter year to the mission on Fraser River. 


Tahkaht. See Tokoaat. 


Text: 
Nutka See Brabant (A. J.) 

Tlaoquatch. See Klaokwat. 

Tokoaat: 
Dictionary See Knipe (C.) 
Grammar Knipe (C.) 
Grammatic treatise Sproat (G. M.) 
Numerals Eells (M.) 
Numerals Knipe (C.) 
Numerals Sproat (G. M.) 
Proper names Knipe (C.) 
Proper names Sproat (G, M.) 
Tribal names Knipe (C.) 
Tribal names Sproat (G. M.) 
Vocabulary Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Vocabulary Sproat (G. M.) 
Vocabulary Tolmis (W. F.) and 


Dawson (G. M.) 


Tolmie (Dr. William Fraser). [Vocabu- 
laries of the northwest coast of North 
America. | 

In Royal Geog. Soc. of London, Jour. vol. 11, 
pp. 230-246, London, 1841, 8°. (Geological Sur- 
vey.) 

Vocabulary of the Tlaoquatch (about 100 
words), pp. 242-247. 

This vocabulary and others by the same 
author are included in an article by Scouler 
(J.), Observations on the indigenous tribes of 
the northwest coast, pp. 215-251. 


and Dawson (G.M.) Geological and 


natural history survey of Canada, | 
Alfred R.C. Selwyn, F. R.S., F.G. S., 
Director. | Comparative vocabularies 
| of the | Indian tribes | of | British . 


Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson (G. M.)— 


Continued. 

Columbia, | with a map illustrating dis- 
tribution. | By | W. Fraser Tolmie, | 
Licentiate of the Faculty of Physicians 
and Surgeons, Glasgow. | And | George 
M. Dawson, D. S., A.S.R.M., F. G. S., 
&c.| [Coat of arms.] | Published by 
authority of Parliament. | 

Montreal: | Dawson brothers, | 1884. 

Cover title nearly as above, title as above verso 
blank 11. letter of transmittal signed by G. M. 
Dawson verso blank 1 1. preface signed by G. M. 
Dawson pp. 5B-7B, introductory note signed by 
W. F. Tolmie pp. 9B-12B, text pp. 14B-131B, map, 
8°. 

Comparative vocabulary (225 words) of five 
languages, among them the Aht (Kaiookwahk), 
pp. 50B-60B.—‘‘ Comparative table of a few of 
the words [68] in the foregoing vocabularies,” 
including the Aht, p.127B.—Comparison of 4 
words in various Indian languages of North 
America (from various sources), among them 
the Aht, pp. 128B-129B. 

Copies seen: Kames, Pilling, Wellesley. 

William Fraser Tolmie was born at Inverness, 
Scotland, February 3,1812,and died December 
8, 1886, after an illness of only three days, at his 
residence, Cloverdale, Victoria, B. C. He was 
educated at Glasgow University, where he 
graduated in August, 1832. On September 12 of 
the same year he accepted a position as surgeon 
and clerk with the Hudson’s Bay Company, and 
left home for the Columbia River, arriving at 
Vancouver in the spring of 1833. Vancouver 
was then the chief post of the Hudson’s Bay 
Company on this coast. In 1841 he visited his 
native land, but returned in 1842 overland via 
the plains and the Columbia, and was placed in 
charge of the Hudson’s Bay posts on Puget 
Sound. He here took a prominent part, during 
the Indian war of 1855-56, in pacifying the 
Indians. Being an excellent linguist, he had 
acquired a knowledge of the native tongues, 
and was instrumental in bringing about peace 
between the whites and the Indians. He was 
appointed chief factor of the Hudson’s Bay 
Company in 1855, removed to Vancouver Island 
in 1859, when he went into stockraising, being 
the first to introduce thoroughbred stock into 
British Columbia; was a member of the local 
legislature two terms, until 1878; was amember 
of the first board of education for several years, 
exercising a great influence in educational mat- 
ters; held many offices of trust, and was always 
a valued and respected citizen. 

Mr. Tolmie was known to ethnologists forhis 
contributions to the history and linguistics of 
thenative races of the West Coast, and dated his 
interest in ethnological matters from his contact 


60 


Tolmie (W. F.) and Dawson (G. M.)— | 


Continued. 
with Mr. Horatio Hale, who visited the West 
Coast as an ethnologist to the Wilkes exploring 
expedition. He afterwards transmitted vocab- 
ularies of a number of the tribes to Dr. Scouler 
and to Mr. George Gibbs, some of which were 
published in Contributions to North American 
Ethnology. In 1884 he published, in conjunction 
with Dr. G. M. Dawson, a nearly complete series 


of short vocabularies of the principal languages | 
met with in British Columbia, and his name is 
to be found frequently quoted as an authority 


on the history of the Northwest Coast and its 
ethnology. He frequently contributed to the 


press upon public questions and events now | 


historical. 


Treasury. The Treasury of Languages. 
| A | rudimentary dictionary | of | 
universal philology. | Daniel iii. 4. | 
[One line in Hebrew. ] | 
Halland Co.,25, Paternoster row, Lon- 
don. | (All rights reserved.) [18732] 


Colophon: London: | printed by Grant and | 


co., 72-78, Turnmill street, E. C. 

Title verso blank 1 1. advertisement (dated 
February 7th, 1873) verso blank 11. introduction 
(signed J. B.and dated October 31st, 1873) pp. 


i-iv, dictionary of languages (in alphabetical | 


order) pp. 1-301, list of contributors p. [302], 
errata verso colophon 1 1. 12°. 

Edited by James Bonwick, Esq., F. R.G.S., 
assisted by about twenty-two contributors, 
whose initials are signed to the most important 
of their respective articles. In the compila- 
tion of the work free use was made of Bagster’s 


Bibleof Every Landand Dr.Latham’s Elements | 


of Comparative Philology. There are also 
references to an appendix, concerning which 


there is the following note on p.301: ‘‘ Notice.— | 
Owing to the unexpected enlargement of this | 


Book in course of printing, the Appendix is 
necessarily postponed; and the more especially 
as additional matter has been received sufficient 
to make asecond volume. And it will be pro- 


ceeded with so soon as an adequate list of Sub- | 
seribers shall be obtained.’’ Underthe name of | 
each language is a brief statement of the family | 


or stock to which it belongs, and the country | 


where it is or was spoken, together with refer- 
ences, in many cases, to the principal author- 
ities on the grammar and vocabulary. An 
addenda is given at the end of each letter. 
Scattered references to the dialects of the 
Wakashan. 
Copies seen: Kames. 


Tribal names: 


Nutka See Keane (A. H.) 
Tokoaat Knipe (C.) 
Tokoaat Sproat: (G. M.) 
Wakash Kane (P.) 


Triibner (Nicolas). See Ludewig(H. E. ) 


Turner (William Wadden). 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Trumbull: This word following a title or within 
parentheses after a note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler in the library of Dr. J. Hammond Trum- 
bull, Hartford, Conn. 


[Trumbull (Dr. James Hammond).] Cat- 
alogue | of the | American Library | of 
the late | mr. George Brinley, | of Hart- 
ford, Conn. | Part I. | America in gen- 
eral | New France Canada ete. | the 
British colonies to 1776 | New England 
| [-Part V. | General and miscellane- 
ous. | [&c. eight lines.] | 

Hartford | Press of the Case Lock- 
wood & Brainard Company | 1878 
[-1893] 

5 parts, 8°. Compiled by Dr. J. H. Trumbull. 
There is an Index to the catalogue, etc., com- 
piled by Wm. J. Fletcher, Hartford, 1893, 8°. 
(Pilling.) 

Indian languages: general treatises and col- 
lections, part 3, pp. 123-124; Northwest coast, 
p. 141. 

Copies seen: Eames, Pilling. 

James Hammond Trumbull, philologist, 
born in Stonington, Conn., December 20, 1821. 
He entered Yale in 1838, and though, owing to 
ill health, he was not graduated with his class, 
his name was enrolled among its members in 
1850 and he was given the degree of A.M. He 
settled in Hartford in 1847, and was assistant 
secretary of state in 1847-52 and 1858-61, 
and secretary in 1861-’64, also state librarian in 
1854. Soon after going to Hartford he joined the 
Connecticut Historical Society, was its corre- 
sponding secretary in 1849-63, and was elected 
its president in 1863. He has been a trustee of 
the Watkinson free library of Hartford and its 
librarian since 1863, and has been an officer of 
the Wadsworth athenzeum since 1864, Dr. Trum- 
bull was an original member of the American 
Philological Association in 1869 and its presi- 
dent in 187475. He has been a memberof the 
American Oriental Society since 1860, and the 
American Ethnological Society since 1867, and 
honorary member of many State historical soci- 
eties. In 1872 he was elected to the National 
Academy of Sciences. Since 1858 he has devoted 
special attention to the subject of the Indian 
languages of North America. He has prepared 
a dictionary and vocabulary to John Eliot’s 
Indian bible and is probably the only Amer- 
ican scholar that is now able to read that work. 
In 1878 he was chosen lecturer on Indian lan- 
guages of North America at Yale, but loss of 
health and other labors soon compelled his 
resignation. The degree of LL. D. was con- 
ferred on him by Yale in 1871 and by Harvard 
in 1887, while Columbia gave him an L. H. D. 
in 1887.—Appleton’s Cyclop. of Am. Biog. 


See Lude.- 
wig (H.E.) 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 61 


U. 


| Uméry (J.) Sur Videntité du mot mére 
_ dans les idiomes de tous les peuples. 

In Revue Orientale et Américaine, vol. 8, pp. 
335-338, Paris, 1863, 8°. 


Among the languages mentioned is the 
Noutka, 


Ucalta. See Ukwulta. 


Ukwulta: 
General discussion 
Grammatic treatise 
Vocabulary 
Words 


See Anderson (A. C.) | 
Petitot (E.) | 
Petitot (E.) 

Petitot (E.) | 


V. 


Vater (J.S.) — Continued. 


Vancouver Island Indians. See Nutka. 


Vater (Dr. Johann Severin). Untersu- 


chungen \iiber| Amerika’s Bevélkerung 
| aus dem | alten Kontinente | dem | 
Herrn Kammerherrn | Alexander von 
Humboldt | gewidmet | von | Johann 
Severin Vater | Professor und Biblio- 
thekar. | 

Leipzig, | bei Friedrich Christian 
Wilhelin Vogel. | 1810. 


Colophon: Halle, gedruckt bei Johann Jacob 
Gebauer. 

Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 
1. verehrungswirdiger Herr Kammerherr 2 ll. 
inhalts-anzeige pp. ix-xii, half-title verso blank 
11. textpp. 3-211, errataand colophonp. [212],8°. 

A few words in the Nutka language, pp. 164, 
196.—Vergleichungen Amerikanischer Sprach- 
en (pp. 195-203) also contains a few words in the 
same languages, p. 201. 

Copies seen: Astor, British Museum, Con- 
gress, Eames, Harvard, Watkinson. 

At the Fischer sale, catalogue no. 2879, acopy 
was bought by Quaritch for 1s. 6d. 


— Linguarum totius orbis; Index | 
alphabeticus, | quarum | Grammaticae, 
Lexica, | collectiones vocabulorum | 
recensentur, | patria significatur, his- 
toria adumbratur | a | Joanne Severino 
Vatero, | Theol. Doct. et Profess, Bib- 
liothecario Reg., Ord. | S. Wladimiri 
equite. | 

Berolini | In officina libraria Fr. 
Nicolai. |] MDCCCXYV[1815]. 

Second title: Litteratur | der | Grammatiken, 
Lexica | und | Wortersammlungen | aller 
Sprachen der Erde | nach | alphabetischer Ord- 
nung der Sprachen, | mit einer | gedringten 
Uebersicht | des Vaterlandes, der Schicksale | 
und Verwandtschaft derselben | von j Dr. 
Johann Severin Vater, | Professor und Biblio- 
thekar zu Kénigsberg des 8S. Wladimir- | Or- 
dens Ritter. | 


Berlin | in der Nicolaischen Buchhandlung. | 


| 1815. 


Latin title versol. 1 recto blank, German title 
recto 1.2 verso blank, dedication verso blank 1 
1, address to the king 1 1. preface pp. i-ii, to 
the reader pp. iii-iv, half-title verso blank 1 1. 
text pp. 3-259, 8°. Alphabetically arranged by 
names of languages, double columns, German 
and Latin. 

List of works containing material relating to 
the language of Nutka Sound, p. 171. 

Oopies seen: Bureau of Ethnology, Eames, 
Pilling. 

A later edition in German with title-page as 
follows: 


—— Litteratur | der| Grammatiken, Lex- 


ika | und | Wértersammlungen | aller 
Sprachen der Erde | von | Johann Se- 
verin Vater. | Zweite, véllig umgear- 
beitete Ausgabe | von | B. Jiilg. | 

Berlin, 1847. | In der Nicolaischen 
Buchhandlung. 

Title verso blank 1 1. dedication verso blank 1 
1. preface (signed B. Jiilg and dated 1. Decem- 
ber 1846) pp. v—x, titles of general works on the 
subject pp. xi-xii, text (alphabetically arranged 
by names of languages) pp. 1-450, additions 
and corrections pp. 451-541, subject index pp. 
542-563, author index pp. 564-592, errata 2 11. 8°. 

List of works containing material relating 
to the language of Nutka Sound, pp. 267-268, 
528. 

Copies seen: Congress, Eames, Harvard. 

Atthe Fischer sale, no. 1710, acopy sold for 1s. 


See Adelung (J. C.) and Vater (J.S.) 


Vocabularies: 
Hailtsuk See Boas (F.) 
Hailtsuk Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Hailtsuk Campbell (J.) 
Hailtsuk Dall (W. H.) 
Hailtsuk Gallatin (A.) 
Hailtsuk Gibbs (G.) 
Hailtsuk Hale (H.) 
Hailtsuk Latham (R. G.) 
Hailtsuk Powell (J. W.) 
Hailtsuk Tolmie (W. F.) 
Klaok wat Bulmer (T.S.) 
Klaokwat Buschmann (J. C. E.) 


62 BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classitication 
Classification 
Classification 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 


Kane (P.) 

Keane (A. H.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Priest (J.) 
Rafinesque (C.8.) 
Sayce (A. H.) 
Schooleraft (H. R.) 
Swan (J. G.) 
Beach (W. W.) 
Berghaus (H.) 
Drake (S. G.) 
Latham (R. G.) 


Vocabularies — Continued. Vocabularies — Continued. 
Klaokwat See Gibbs (G.) | Nutka See Boas (F.) 
Klaokwat Latham (R. G.) Nutka Brabant (A. J.) 
Klaokwat Lemmens (T. N.) Nutka Bulmer (T.S.) 
Klaokwat Scouler (J.) Nutka Buschmann (J. C, E.) 
Klaokwat Waters (A.) Nutka Campbell (J.) 
Kwakiutl Boas (F.) | Nutka Cook (J.) 
Kwakiutl Canadian. Nutka Ellis (W.) 
Kwakiutl Chamberlain (A. F.) Nutka Fry (E.) 
Kwakiutl Dall (W. H.) Nutka Forster (J. G.) 
Kwakiutl Dawson (G. M.) Nutka Galiano (D. A.) 
Kwakiutl Gibbs (G.) Nutka Gallatin (A.) 
Kwakiutl Kwakiutl. Nutka Gibbs (G.) 
Kwakiutl Powell (J. W.) Nutka Haines (E. M.)y 
Kwakiutl Wilson (E. F.) Nutka Hale (H.) 
Lekwiltoq Boas (F.) Nutka Humboldt (F. von). 
Maka Bartlett (J. R.) Nutka Jéhan (L. F.) 
Maka Buschmann (J.C. 3.) | Nutka Jewitt (J. R.) 
Maka Galiano (D. A.) | Nutka Kerr (R.) 
Maka Gallatin (A.) I Nutka Knipe (C.) 
Maka Gibbs (G.) Nutka La Harpe (J. F. de). 
Maka Knipe (C.) Nutka Latham (R. G.) 
Maka Latham (R. G.) Nutka Pablo (J. E.S.) 
Maka Maka. i Nutka Quimper (M.) 
Maka Pinart (A. L.) | Nutka Scouler (J.) 
Maka Swan (J. G.) Nutka Sproat (G. M.) 
Niwiti Gallatin (A.) | Nutka Swan (J. G.) 
Niwiti Knipe (C.) | Nutka Yankiewiteh (F.) 
Nitinat Knipe (C.) Tokoaat Chamberlain (A. F.) 
Nitinat Pinart (A. L.) Tokoaat Sproat (G. M.) 
Nitinat Sproat (G. M.) Tokoaat Tolmie (W. F.) 
Nutka Adelung (J. C.) Ukwulta Petitot (E. F.S. J.) 
Nutka Anderson (W.) Wakash Latham (R. G.) 
Nutka Armstrong (A. N.) | Wakash Pinart (A. L.) 
Nutka Balbi (A. 

W. 

Wakashan: | Wakashan — Continued. 
Classification See Bates (H. W.) | General discussion Treasury. 
Classification Beach (W. W.) Songs Boas (F.) 
Classification Berghaus (H.) Vocabulary Latham (R. G.) 
Classification Boas (F.) Vocabulary Pinart (A. L.) 
Classification Brinton (D. G.) Words Bulmer (T.S.) 
Classification 3uschmann (J.C. E.) Words Daa (L. K.) 
Classification Dawson (G. M.) Waters (Abraham). A | vocabulary of | 
Sees Sara (J.) Words in Hancock’s Harbor | Lan- 
prea aie Balaeh oak guage, | On the North West Coast of N. 
@lacaiveation Haines (E. M.) America. | Taken by Abraham Waters, 


who | sailed to that place with Capt. 
Gray of | Boston (about 20 years ago) 
whose widow | presented the Original, 
from which this is! transcribed, to 
Elbridge G. Howe. | Paxton Dee. 13. 
1828. 

Manuscript, 14 pages, 8°; in the library of the 
American Antiquarian Society, Worcester, 


Mass. ‘‘ Hancock’s Harbor, lat. 49° 9’, long. 
125oe27 


Contains 110 words in the Klaokwat lan- 
guage. 


WAKASHAN 


Watkinson: This word following a title or within 


parentueses aftera note indicates that a copy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler inthe Watkinson library, Hartford, Conn. 


Wellesley: This word following a title or within 


parentheses after a note indicates thatacopy of 
the work referred to has been seen by the com- 
piler belonging to the library of Wellesley 
college, Wellesley, Mass. 


Whymper (Frederick). Travel and ad- 
venture | in the | territory of Alaska, | 
formerly Russian America—now ceded 
to the | United States—and in various 
other | parts of the north Pacific. | 
By Frederick Whymper. | [Design.] | 
With map and illustrations. | 

London: | John Murray, Albemarle 
street. | 1868. | The right of Translation 
is reserved. 

Half-title verso blank 1 1. title verso names of 
printers 1 1]. dedication verso blank 1 1. preface 
pp. vii-ix, contents pp. xi-xix, list of illustra- 
tions p. [xx], text pp. 1-306, appendix pp. 307- 
331, map, plates, 8°. 

A few Claoquaht phrases, pp. 30, 31. 

Copies seen : Boston Public, British Museum, 
Congress. 

At the Field sale, catalogue no. 2539, a copy 

brought $2.75. 
Travel and adventure | in the | 
territory of Alaska, | formerly Russian 
America—now ceded to the | United 
States—and in various other | parts 
of the north Pacific. | By Frederick 
Whymper. | [Design.] | With map and 
illustrations. | 

New York: | Harper & brothers, pub- 
lishers, | Franklin square. | 1869. 

Frontispiece 1 1. title verso blank 1 1. dedica- 
tion verso blank 11. preface pp. xi-xii_coacents 
pp- Xiii-xviii, list of illustrations p. xix, text 
pp. 21-332, appendix pp. 333-353, map and 
plates, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under title next above, 
pp. 49, 50. 

Copies seen: Bancroft, Boston Atheneum, 
Powell. 

Reprinted, 1871, pp. xix, 21-353, 8°. 

A French edition with title as follows: 
—— Frédérick Whymper | Voyages et 
aventures | dans | l’Alaska | (ancienne 
Amérique russe) | Ouvrage traduit de 
PAnglais | avec l’autorisation de 
Yauteur | par Emile Jonveaux | Illus- 
tré de 37 gravures sur bois | et accom- 
pagné d’une carte | 

Paris | librairie Hachette et Cie | 
boulevard Saint-Germain, 79 | 1871 | 
Tous droits reservés 


LANGUAGES. 


Wilson (Rev. Edward Francis). 


63 


Whymper (F.) — Continued. 


Cover title as above, half-title verso name of 
printer 1 1. title verso blank 11. preface pp. i-ii, 
half-title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 3-405, table 
des chapitres pp. 407-412, map, 8°. 

Linguistic contents as under titles above, p. 


41. 
Copies seen; Pilling. 


Wikenak: 


Vocabulary See Boas (F.) 


A com- 
parative vocabulary. 

In the Canadian Indian, vol. 1, no. 4, pp. 104- 
107, Owen Sound, Ontario, January, 1891, 8°. 
(Pilling.) 

A vocabulary of ten words in about 56 lan- 
guages, mostly North American, among them 
the Kwakiool. 

Rey. Edward Francis Wilson, son of the late 
Rey. Daniel Wilson, Islington, prebendary of 
St. Paul’s cathedral, and grandson of Daniel 
Wilson, bishop of Calcutta, was born in Loudon 
December 7, 1844, and at the age of 17 left school 
and emigrated to Canada for the purposeof lead- 
ing an agricultural life; soon after his arrival 
he was led to take an interest in the Indians 
and resolved to become amissionary. After two 
years of preparation, much of which time was 
spept among the Indians, he returned to 
England, and in December, 1867, was ordained 
deacon. Shortly thereafter it was arranged 
that he should return to Canada as a missionary 
to the Ojibway Indians, under the auspices of 
the Church Missionary Society, which he did in 
July, 1868. He has labored among the Indians 
ever since, building two homes—the Shingwauk 
Home, at Sault Ste. Marie, and the Wawanosh 
Home, two miles from the former—and pre- 
paring linguistic works. 


Wisconsin Historical Society: These words fol- 


lowing a title or within parentheses after a note 
indicate that a copy of the work referred to has 
been seen by the compiler in the library of that 
institution, Madison, Wis. 


Words: 
Hailtsuk See Boas (F.) 
Hailtsuk Daa (L. K.) 
Hailtsuk Gibbs (G.) 
Hailtsuk Latham (R. G.) 
Klaokwat Daa (L. K.) 
Klaokwat Latham (R. G.) 
Klaokwat Whymper (F.) 
Kwakiutl Boas (F.) 
Kwakiutl Hale (H.) 
Kwakiutl Pott (A. F.) 
Nutka Bachiller y Morales. 
Nutka Bancroft (H. H.) 
Nutka Boas (F.) 
Nutka Bulmer (T.5S.) 
Nutka Daa (L. K.) 
Nutka Eells (M.) 

- Nutka Ellis (W.) 
Nutka Featherman (A.) 
Nutka Gibbs (G.) 
Nutka Hale (H.) 


64 


Words — Continued. 

Nutka See Jewitt (J. R.) 
Nutka Latham (R. G.) 
Nutka Lubbock (J.) 
Nutka Norris (P. W.) 
Nutka Pott (A. F.) 
Nutka Prichard (J. C.) 
Nutka Swan (J. G.) 


pte 


Yankiewitch (F.)— Continued. 


Yale: This word following a title or within paren- 
theses after a note indicates that a copy of the 
work referred to has been seen by the compiler 
in the library of Yale College, New Haven, Conn. 


[Yankiewitch (Feodor) de Miriewo.] 
CpaBauTerbublii | caoBapb | BCbx | AsbIKOBS 1 
Hapbuili, | 10 a36yaHomy nopagaKy | pacno.z0- 
*Kenublii. | Yacrb meppaa[-yersepraa] | A-/] 
[c-0]. | 

Bb Caukmmemepoy prs, 1790[-1791 ]. 


Translation : Comparative | dictionary | of all 
| languages and dialects | in alphabetical order 
| arranged. | Part first [-fourth] A-D[S-Th]. | 
At St. Petersburg, 1790[-1791] 

4vols.: title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-454; 
title verso blank 1 1. text pp. 1-499; title verso 
blank 1 1. text pp.1-518; title verso blank 1 1. 
text pp. 1-618, 4°. 

About two hundred and seventy-four lan- 
guages and dialects are here represented, of 
which twenty-five are American. Among the 
latter is one 


Bp o6aactim Byurka Bb c’bRepo-3anaqzHno ii AMepnn'b 
[In the region Nutka,in northwestern Amer- 
ica.] 

Each page is divided into three columns, the 
first containing in alphabetical order the words 
of various languages, the second showing the 
Russian equivalents, and the third giving the 
names of the languages represented in the first 
cohuun. This edition was edited by Feodor Yan- 
kiewitch. One thousand copies were printed. 

The work ef which the above is a re arrange- 
ment was begun by the empress Catharine II 
of Russia in the summer or autumn of 1784. 
After laboring on it personally for about nine 
months, she called Prof. Peter Simon Pallas to 
her aid, and ordered him to digest the material 
and prepare it for the press. On the 22d of May, 
1785, a circular or prospectus of the work was 
issued; andin 1786 a Modéle du vocabulaire, qui 
doit servir ala comparaison de toutes les langues, 
41]. 4°, was printed, and sent out for the purpose 
of obtaining additiozal information. 


One copy or more of this specimen was for- | 


warded to General Washington, through the 
Marquis de Lafayette, with a request for some 
authentic vocabularies of the North American 
Indians. The receipt of this application was 
acknowledged on May 10th, 1786, by General 


BIBLIOGRAPHY OF THE 


Words — Continued. 


Nutka See Uméry (J.) 

Nutka Vater (J.S.) 
Nutka Youth's. 

Ukwulta Petitot (E. F. S.J.) 
Wakash Bulmer (T.S.) 
Wakash Daa (L. K.) 
Wikenok Boas (F.) 


Washington, who wrote on the 20th of the follow- 
ing August to Capt. Thomas Hutchins, enclos- 
ing the printed specimen, and asking for vocabu- 
laries of the Ohio Indians. A few monthslater, 
November 27th, 1786, hearing that Richard But- 
lerhad been appointed superintendent of Indian 
affairs, General Washington wrote to him, 
requesting him to obtain the printed torm from 
Capt. Hutchins, and to collect the desired 
information. A little more than a year passed 
before the material was ready. On the 20th of 
January, 1788, Washington transmitted to 
Lafayette a vocabulary of the Shawanese and 
Delaware languages, collected by Mr. Butler, 
together with a shorter specimen of the lan- 
guage of the southern Indians by Mr. Benjamin 
Hawkins. 

In the meantime, by order of the empress, 
work on the great comparative vocabulary had 
been rapidly hurried on. The first section was 
completed and published, with Latin titles pre- 
fixed, Linguarum totius orbis vocabularia com- 
parativa; augustissimae cura collecta, Petropoli, 
1786-1788, 2 vols.4°. (Eames.) It comprised 
words in 51 European, 137 Asiatic, and 12 Poly- 
nesian languages, with the numerals at the end 
in 225 languages, all in Russian characters; 285 
selected words were treated separately, 130 in 
the first volume and 155 in the second. The 
Russian word was placed at the head of each list, 
and followed in numerical order by the names 
of the 200 languages, each with its equivalent 
word in one line. 

The second section, which was intended to 
comprise the American and African words, in 
one volume, was never printed. This was due to 
a change of plan. The empress, it seems, was 
not satisfied with the result. She now wished 
to have all the words arranged in one general 
alphabet, irrespective of language. As Prof. 
Pallas was busily engaged in other scientific 
labors which had been assigned to him, the sery- 
ices of Feodor Yankiewitch de Miriewo, director 
ot the normal school at St. Petersburg, were 
immediately called into requisition. Under his 
direction all the material in print and manunu- 
script was recast, the American and African 
words included, and the whole published in four 
volumes, as described above. 

Copies seen: British Museum, Eames. 


Yokultat. See Ukwulta. 


bn el i 


WAKASHAN LANGUAGES. 65 


Youth's, The youth’s | companion: | a 


| monthly magazine | published for 
the benefit | of the | Puget sound, W. T. 
Indian missions. | Volume first[-fifth ?] 
| [Vignette.] | 

Tulalip Indian Reservation, | 1882 
[-1886?]. 


5vols.16°. I have seen but two volumes (the 
first and second) with cover title and inside 
title both as above, those belonging to myself; 
theremaining portion I have seen only in num- 
bers, the last of which is headed Vol. V. May, 
1886. No. 60. These numbers are each headed 
as follows: 

The youth’s companion: a juvenile monthly 
magazine published for the benefit of the Puget 
Sound Catholic Indian Missions; and set to 
type, printed and in part written by the pupils 
of the Tulalip, Wash. Ty. Industrial Boarding 


WAK——)5 


Youth's — Continued. 


Schools, under the control of the Sisters of 
Charity. Approved by the Rt. Rev. Bishop. 
Vol. I. May, 1881. No.1[-Vol.V. May, 1886. No. 
60.] 


It was edited by Rev. J. B. Boulet, and 
instead of being paged continuously, continued 
articles have aseparate pagination dividing the 
regular numbering. For instance, in no. 1, pp. 
11-14 (Lives of the saints) are numbered 1-4, 
and the article is continued in no. 2 on pp. 5-8, 
taking the place of 41-44 of the regular number- 
ing. The publication was discontinued after 
May, 1886. on account of the protracted illness 
of the editor. 

A few words in the Nootsack language, vol. 
2, p. 156. 

Copies seen: Congress, Georgetown, Pilling, 
Wellesley. 


Yukulta. See Ukwulta. 


l > ha an Ts 
pS iy Eaten i we 
aia Pi 


2 , ‘To 3 


“ {oo SEA ATS 
P : {is Se aT 
bi 2tte er > 
‘ btn abink 


1782 
17838 
1783 
1784 
1784 
1784 
1784 
1784 
1786 
1785 
1785 
1785 
1785 
1786 
1787 
1787-88 
1789 
1790 
1790 
1790-91 
1791 
1791 
1792 
1795 
1798-1800 
1798-1800 
1799 
1801 
1801 
1802 
1805-10 
1806-17 
1809-13 
1810 
1810 
1811 
1811 
1811 
1811 
1811 
1811-16 
1811-16 
1818 
1814 
1815 
1815 
1815 
1815 
1816 
1816 
1816 
1816? 
1816 
1820 
1820 
1822 


Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Maka, Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 


Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Numerals 

Numerals 
Vocabulary, etc. 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 
Vocabulary 
Numerals 

Numerals 
Vocabularies 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Numerals 

Numerals 

Words 

Numerals 

Numerals 

Numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Numerals 

Numerals 
Bibliography 
Numerals 
Vocabulary, song 
Vocabulary, song 
Numerals 
Vocabulary, song 
Vocabulary, song 
Vocabulary, song 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, song 
Numerals 


Ellis (W.) 

Ellis (W.) 

Ellis (W.) 
Anderson (W.) 
Cook (J.) 

Cook (J.) 

Cook (J.) 

Cook (J.) 

Cook (J.) 

Cook (J.) 

Cook (J.) 

Cook (J.) 

Cook (J.) 

La Harpe (J. F.) 
Cook (J.) 

Cook (J.) 

Dixon (G.) 

Dixon (G.) 
Quimper (M.) 
Yankiewitch (F.) 
Forster (J. G. A.) 
Pablo (J. E. G.) 
Bourgoing (J. F.) 
Dixon (G.) 
Fleurieu (C. P. C.) 
Fleurieu (C. P. C.) 
Fry (E.) 

Fleurieu (C.P.C.) 
Fleurieu (C. P. C.) 
Galiano (D. A.) 
Cook (J.) 

Adelung (J. C.) 
Humboldt (F. von), 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Vater (J.S.) 
Classical. 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Cook (J.) 

Kerr (F.) 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Vater (J.S.) 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Jewitt (J. R.) 
Jewitt (J. R.) 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Jewitt (J. R.) 
Jewitt (J. BR.) 
Jewitt (J. R.) 

La Harpe (J. F.) 
La Harpe (J. F.) 
Jewitt (J. R.) 
Humboldt (F. von). 


67 


68 


1822 
1822 
1825 
1823 
1824 
1824 
1824 
1825 
1825-1827 
1826 
1826 
1828 
1828 
182930 
183233 
1833 
1836 
1836 
1836-47 
1840-45 
1841 
1841 
1841 
1842 
18438 
1844 
1844 
1845 
1846 
1846 
1846 
1846 
1846 
1847 
1847 
1848 
1848 
1848 
1848 
1849 
1850 
1851 
1851 
1851-57 
1852? 
1852 
1853 
1855 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1857 
1858 
1858 
1858 
1859 
1859 
1859 
1860 
1860 
1860 
1861 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 


Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 

a 
Klaokwat 
Nutka 
Wakash 
Wakash 
Nutka 
Maka, Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Klaokwat 
Klaokwat 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Hailtsuk 
Hailtsuk 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Hailtsuk 
Hailtsuk 
Rlaokwat, Nutka 
Bailtsuk, Nutka 
Hailtsuk, Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Hailtsuk, Nutka 
Hailtsuk, Nutka 
Klaokwat, Nutka 
Various 
Nutka 
Various 
Nutka 
Hailtsuk, Nutka 
Wakashan 
Nutka 
Wakash 
Wakash 
Hailtsuk, Nutka 
Kwakiutl 
Maka, Nutka 
Maka, Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Various 
Various 
Various 
Maka 
Nutka 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Wakasban 
Wakashan 
Maka 
Various 
Wakashan 
Nutka 


Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Numerals 
Words 
Numerals 
Vocabulary, song 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Vocabulary 
Numerals 
General discussion 
Vocabulary 

2 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary, numerals 
General discussion 
Classification 
Numerals 
Vocabularies 
General discussion 
General discussion 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Numerals 
Vocabulary, numerals 
General discussion 
Vocabulary 
Numerals 
Words 
Vocabulary 
Numerals 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Bibliography 
Numerals 
Vocabularies 
General discussion 
Vocabularies 
Various 
Vocabulary, song 
Various 
Vocabulary, song 
Classification 
Classification 
Vocabulary, numerals 
General discussion 
Classification 
General discussion 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary, etc. 
Vocabulary, ete. 
General discussion 
Numerals, etc. 
Words 
Numerals 
Vocabulary 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Numerals 
Various 
Classification 
Words 


Humboldt (F. von). 
La Harpe (J. F.), note. 
Roquefeuil (C. J.) 
Roquefeuil (C. J.) 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Jewitt (J. R.) 

Kerr (R.) 

La Harpe (J. F.), note. 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Balbi (A.) 

Cook (J.) 

Waters (A.) 

La Harpe (J. F.) 
Rafinesque (C.8.) 
Priest (J.) 
Humboldt (F. von). 
Gallatin (A.) 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Scouler (J.) 

Tolmie (W. F.) 
Fleurieu (C. P. C.) 
Cook (J.) 

Prichard (J. C.) 
Dunn (J.) 

Duflot de Mofras (E.) 
Bachiller y Morales (A.) 
Dunn (J.) 

Latham (R. G.) 
Scouler (J.) 

Hale (H.) 

Hale (H.) 

Vater (J.S.) 

Pott (A. F.) 

Gallatin (A.) 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Scouler (J.), note. 
Latham (R. G.) 
Jewitt (J.R.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Jewitt (J.R.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Schooleraft (H. R.) 
Cook (J.) 

Berghaus (H.) 
Gallatin (A.) 
Prichard (J. C.) 
Kwakiutl. 
Buschmann (J. C. E.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Armstrong (A. M.) 
Swan (J. G.) 

Swan (J. G.) 
Anderson (A. C.), note. 
Latham (R. G.) 

Daa (L. K.) 

Grant (W.C.) 

Jéhan (L. F.) 

Kane (P.) 

Ludewig ‘H. i.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Buschmann (J.C. E.) 
Haines (E. M.) 
Latham (R. G.) 
Schooleraft (H. R.) 
Jewitt (J. R.) 


1862 
1862 
1863 
1863 
1863 
1864 
1865 
1865 
1868 
1368 
1868 
1868 
1868-'91 
1869 
1869 
1869 
1870 
1870 
1870 
1871 
1871 
1873 
1873? 
187475 
1874-76 
1874-76 
1875 
1875 
1875 
1876 
1877 
1877 
1877 
1877 
1877 
1877 
1877-'90 
1878 
1878 
1881 
1881~’86 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1882 
1883 
1884 
1884 
1884 
1884 
1884-'89 
1885 
1885 
1885 
1885 
3885 
1885 
1885 
1885 
1885-89 
1886 
1887 
1888 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 


Various 
Various 
Various 
Various 
Various 
Nutka 
Maka 
Maka 
Aht, ete. 
Klaokwat 
Maka 
Various 

hi de os bee 
Klaokwat 
Maka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Klaokwat 
Klaokwat 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Nutka 
Various 
Various 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Wakashan 
Ukwulta 
Hailtsuk 
Hailtsuk 
Kwakiutl 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Hailtsuk 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Kwakiutl 
Nutka 
Nutka, Hailtsuk 
Nutka, Hailtsuk 
Various 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Nutka 
Tokoaat 
Kwakiutl 
Ukwulta 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Maka 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Nutka 
Kwakiutl 
Wakashan 
Tokoaat, Hailtsuk 


Vocabularies 
Words 

General discussion 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Various 
Phrases 
Vocabulary, ete. 
Various 
Bibliography 
Phrases 
Vocabulary, etc. 
Words 

Words 

Words 

Words 

Phrases 

Proper names 
Bibliography 
Words 
Grammar, ete. 
Various 
Various 

Words 

Words 
Bibliography 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
General discussion 
General discussion 
General discussion 
Vocabulary 
Classification 
Classification 
Tribal names 
Words 

Gospel of Matthew 
Words 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Various 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Words 
Vocabulary 
Gospel of John 
Words 
Classification 
Bibliography 
Bible passage 
Bible passago 
Bible passage 
Bible passage 
Grammatic treatise 
Bibliography 
Classification 
Classification 
Words 

Lord’s prayer 
Bibliography 
Numerals 


Latham (R. G.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
Anderson (A. C.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Jéhan (L. F.) 
Swan (J.G.) 
Swan (J.G.) 
Sproat (G. M.) 
Whymper (F.) 
Swan (J. G.) 
Knipe (C.) 
Sabin (J.) 
Whymper (F.) 
Swan (J.G.) 
Jewitt (J. R.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Whymper (F.) 
Catlin (G.) 
Field (T. W.) 
Treasury. 
Brabant (A.J.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Ellis (R.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Field (T. W.) 
Petitot (E. F.S. J.) 
Dall (W. H.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Beach (W. W.) 
Gatschet (A.S8.) 
Gatschet (A, §S.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Bates (H. W.) 
Keane (A. H.) 
Keane (A. H.) 
Youth’s. 

Hall (A. J.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Campbell (J.) 
Campbell (J.) 
Bancroft (H. H.) 
Bates (H. W.) 
Drake (S. G.) 
Keane (A. H.), note, 
Norris (P. W.) 
Tolmie (W. F.) 
Hall (A. J.) 
Petitot (E. F. S.J.) 
Schooleraft (H. R.) 
Pott (A. F.) 
British. 

British. 

British. 

British. 

Eells (M.) 
Pilling (J.C.) 
Bates (H. W.) 
Keane (A. H.), note. 
Featherman (A.) 
Gilbert (—). 
Dufossé (E.) 
Eells (M.) 


69 


70 


1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1888 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1889 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890 
1890-91 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 
1891 


CHRONOLOGIC INDEX. 


Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Nutka, Hailtsuk 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Kwakiutl, Tokoaat 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl, Hailtsuk 
Kwakiutl, Hailtsuk 
Maka 
Maka 
Maka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Wakashan 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl, Nutka 
Kwakiutl, Nutka 
Nutka 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakintl 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakiutl 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka, Klaokwat 
Various 
Various 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Wakashan 
Maka 
Kwakiutl 
Kwakintl 
Kwakiutl 
Hailtsuk 
Klaokwat 
Maka 
Maka 
Maka 
Maka 
Maka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka 
Nutka, Maka 
Various 
Various 
Various ' 

| WA 


Bible passage 
Grammar 
Grammar 
Songs 
Various 
Various 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Vocabulary, numerals 
Bibliographic 
Songs 
Vocabulary 
Bible passage 
Vocabulary 
Words 
Words 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Numerals 
Lord's prayer 
Words 
Bibliographic 
Bible passage 
Various 
Various 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Vocabulary 
Lord’s prayer 
Lord’s prayer 
Vocabulary 
Prayer book 
Vocabulary 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Vocabularies 
Vocabularies 
Classification 
Classification 
Classification 
Geographic names 
Words 
Words 
Words 
Words 

Bible passage 
Grammar, etc. 
Vocabulary, ete. 
Lord’s prayer 
Vocabulary 
Numerals 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Prayers 
Vocabulary 
Vocabulary 
Vocabularies 
Bibliography 
Vocabularies 


Vocabularies 
a 


i) 


British. 

HalJl (A.J.) 
Hall (A. J.) 
Boas (F.) } 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Dawson (G. M.) 
Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 
Haines (E. M.) 
Maclean (J.) 
Boas (F.) 
Chamberlain (A. F.) 
British. 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Eells (M.) 
Eells (M.) 
Eells (M.), note. 
Brabant (A. J.) 
Lubbock (J.) 
Maclean (J.) 
British, note. 
Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Hale (H.) 

Hale (H.) 

Hale (H.) 
Canadian. 

Rost (R.) 

Rost (R.) 
Wilson (E. F.) 
Hall (A. J.) 
Eells (M.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Bulmer (‘L. 8S.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 
Brinton (D. G.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Powell (J. W.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Bulmer (T. 8.) 
Bulmer (T. 8.) 
Bulmer (T.S.) 
Fells (M.) 
British. 

Boas (F.) 

Boas (F.) 

Tate (C. M.) 
Lemmens (T.N.) 
Bartlett (J. R.) 
Bartlett (J. R.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Gibbs (G.) 
Maka. 

Seghers (C.J.) 
Boas (F.) 
Knipe (C.) 
Galiano (D. A.), note. 
Gibbs (G.) 
Knipe (C.) 
Pinart (A. L.) 
Douglass (J.) 


Cae: a ~ 
eel 4em 


hails 


6S em 
es 


Ie 
7 unt 


, we 


‘ 
“ 


bith 
Fh tg cee Cad 


ry th 
TOs. 
jes 


- 


ta 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


The work of the Bureau of American Ethnology is conducted under act of Con- 
gress ‘‘for continuing ethnologic researches among the American Indians under the 
direction of the Smithsonian Institution.” 

Two series of publications are issued by the Bureau under authority of Congress, 
viz, annual reports and bulletins. The annual reports are authorized by concurrent 
resolution from time to time and are published for the use of Congress and the 
Bureau; the publication of the series of bulletins was authorized by concurrent 
resolution first in 1886 and more definitely in 1888, and these also are issued for the 
use of Congress and the Bureau. In addition, the Bureau supervises the publication 
of aseries of quarto volumes bearing the title, ‘“Contributions to North American 
Ethnology,” begun in 1877 by the United States Geographical Survey of the Rocky 
Mountain Region. 

These publications are distributed primarily by Congress, and the portions of the 
editions printed for the Bureau are used for exchange with libraries and scientific 
and educational institutions and with special investigators in anthropology who 
send their own publications regularly to the Bureau. 

The exchange list of the Bureau is large, and the product of the exchange forms 
a valuable ethnologic library independent of the general library of the Smithsonian 
Institution. This library is in constant use by the Bureau collaborators, as well as 
by other anthropologists resident in or visiting Washington. 

The earlier volumes of the annual reports and the first seven volumes of the ‘‘ Con- 
tributions to North American Ethnology” are out of print 

Exchanges and other contributions to the Bureau should be addressed, 

The DIRECTOR, 
Bureau of American Ethnology, 
Washington, D. C., 
Oa S.A. 


a ae. 


eer eet 


, ee 
Laat dhe tag Saar? : Cee ica 


: F “ re,*4y , ae 
e 
‘ ’ 
' 
F “ 
2 
. 


visvieltes, if 
eriittta ti 9s) oes 


vcerrsicl ‘a 


4 
oa 
a 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


PORTRAITS | 


ES CULTEE. 


BOAS—CHINOOK TEXTS 


PL. | 


PL. 


BOAS—CHINOOK TEXTS 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


Se 


Pe eatin 


ST Te 


’ 


PORTRAITS OF CHARLES CULTEE. 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


CHINOOK TEXTS 


=> 4 


4a NZ 1B OAS 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 


1894 


: eee + en 
y ers g (Vr 


. ‘ e ¢ , Silt cote wie 1a os MAIGET EADY 


ms = ' 
a. , 
* ee 
aes | ba 7 : 
: “An ba a 
C3 ‘ £ i" 
- 
: co 
ae 
woe : 
‘ 
th 
, : 
: " mn 
, 
be ba r ; 7 Na 
a7 ad ars 


CON TiN ES. 


Page. 

ERS CINE CTOD SS 55 5 Oe aR Is ae eI Re ES 8 ORR es A ae te eS Mime <a a 5 

PMB G ANE NCC OTM a5 ae see Some a eae Oe 2 Lt a ee eS 5 

J MIEPLOR AOS 2 © Ere Se SOIR ESRC ies = at cies eg nee ne ee ee ee a ee 7 

2S es nS RR RSE aR ED oe be. ee ek ee 9 

I ea 31) ors fa eal vin hu Me ale Sap bc- Seuss ace ee a 

mC CTL NIN igs os Ay ae Se ee, ne eee ee ee oe eet, oo. tee Ses 22 

3h, ANETTA NOTTS. Cee ie aeaehe Uo 2 = Se ee ae 37 

Bem m Se) NTO Minas ey ae eee ene rears yt ee ee ee 60 

Rimmtu ETD ONG tes 5 ea ee ee seme ee ys Hy a at Sone eee See 88 

RE eee ee ree ec a oo Sian Wie we aid eects Cote 92 

LEDC CAO Tisha Cpe derse Taine wren Heya es Pie pa NAD Se Ne ee e c se 107 

NN Oe et Pe nt eee te Meee Sy soa eda sarees a oka 113 

Moho Crows=) 5.222 =. ERC ac raeene poesia ate ihn Cee oh be ge ae BS 123 

IED. (CHV Sect Sine aa SE on oh daar oes ce ay ol a Ss ee NN aa ee te ee 127 

TUL, ASMA UNE 2 2) A ee Alara eas ge eS ale es RENE Re gc ye 133 

em G a cL Keener ee en Sen emia Ne SRE RS cen MN Done BEE oe 144 

ES, EEG OTHG: cues cee eS an A el ae De ea ee A mn A 149 

iolne-Jayoand [ois 2s s2u2s 255 lot BS ni Sonica s — sere aera 153 

PE GENT RS 82s 52 Soe ets Als wee, Ss st 5 SL es - 161 

ieee late) cuygsin (VO aloe yas eto ae wie e Pa SE een eee oan ee Sek 172 

17/5 -CA iD Fe Gs ES SRN Ee as ae ea nen Oe re Sy oo Fae ee eee. Oe 183 

Thos AU aeyel BF ap MNCS i aC A eh er al Po De tee ae ree eS ee 191 

Dameron Matos, Ait Wales ace eee ode ask Soe eam eo nw toe sew weed 196 

fihersoulhand: the Siranianstepess saeras: shee ee ee oe eee ee 196 

How Cultee’s Grandfather acquired a Guardian Spirit ---.....-. Dp es 211 

iiosour © USING: 21 - are ee es eee, eee cet oe ee 216 

Wn GUC op, SEM a ee Se ee oe 2a ee 223 

Pen OEPAWCuP UN GE?” =. <<<. eee ESSE ee ese hn nc ayee Suisige sec 234 

eee y snd Birth . 2) Ae eee eae Ee ha eee a Sion en 238 

HeUONI Ne sc oo aco. vt Sct Se ee meme weanewet 22 OT yl. Lee 244 

IRIE Olen on oe. 0 27 iyo ae ee Ee ne Doi See Dar SILI 248 

LUE) ORE? So oo See ne ee ee 253 

LN I ae oe IS Aa eS 259 

URE UGETE So. a! a ate ee es Se ht ne wisn anes. 264 

i peeOulatCh |... ... 1 J2ace eee eee a ee on se ele cee eGuer 266 

UGE ss EE ke ee ie re re 270 

PUIG aes: //..\. . - 2.5: eee eee ee Ss Nees kh 271 

War between the Quileute and Clatsop.......:-.----.-..-.--.------+. ++. 271 

ihe-birst Ship seen by the Clatsep. 2.5. 22- -----.82----2--2---- cece oe 275 
ILLUSTRATION. 

GATE. Portraits on Gmarlesmcmlbeene coc s4522/-0- 2-2 old ecc cde ce Jaen Frontispiece. 


3 


CoOL NOOK Phx TS 


Told by 
CHARLES CULTEE 
Recorded and translated by 


FRANZ BOAS 


INTRODUCTION. 
HISTORICAL ACCOUNT. 


The following texts were collected in the summers of 1890 and 1891. 
While studying the Salishan languages of Washington and Oregon I 
learned that the dialects of the lower Chinook were on the verge of 
disappearing, and that only a few individuals survived who remembered 
the languages of the once powerful tribes of the Clatsop and Chinook. 
This fact determined me to make an effort to collect what little remained 
of these languages. 

I first went to Clatsop, where a small band of Indians are located 
near Seaside, Clatsop county, Oregon. Although a number of them 
belonged to the Clatsop tribe, they had all adopted the Nehelim lan- 
guage, a dialect of the Salishan Tillam ok. This change of language 
was brought about by frequent intermarriages with the Nehelim. I 
found one middle-aged man and two old women who still remembered 
the Clatsop language, but it was impossible to obtain more than a 
vocabulary and a few sentences. The man had forgotten a great part 
of the language, while the women were not able to grasp what I 
wanted; they claimed to have forgotten their myths and traditions, 
and could not or would not give me any connected texts. One old 
Clatsop woman, who had been married to a Mr. Smith, was too sick to 
be seen, and died soon after my visit. The few remaining Clatsop had 
totally forgotten the history of their tribe, and even maintained that no 
allied dialeet was spoken north of Columbia river and on Shoalwater 
bay. They assured me that the whole country was occupied by the 
Chehalis, another Salishan tribe. They told me, however, that a few of 
their relatives, who still continued to speak Clatsop, lived on Shoal- 
water bay among the Chehalis. 


o 


6 INTRODUCTION. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


I went to search for this remnant of the Clatsop and Chinook peoples, 
and found them located at Bay Center, Pacific county, Washington. 
They proved to be the last survivors of the Chinook, who at one 
time occupied the greater part of Shoalwater bay and the northern 
bank of Columbia river as far as Greys Harbor. The tribe has adopted 
the Chehalis language in the same way in which the Clatsop have 
adopted the Nehelim. The only individuals who spoke Chinook were 
Charles Cultee and Catherine. While I was unable to obtain anything 
from the latter, Cultee (or more properly Q;xElté’) proved to be a veri- 
table-storehouse of information. His mother’s mother was a Katlamat, 
and his mother’s father a Quila’pax; his father’s mother was a Clatsop, 
and his father’s father a Tinneh of the interior. His wife is a Chehalis, 
and at present he speaks Chehalis almost exclusively, this being also 
the language of his children. He has lived for a long time in Katla- 
mat, on the southern bank of Columbia river, his mother’s town, and 
for this reason speaks the Katlamat dialect as well as the Chinook dia- 
lect. He uses the former dialect in conversing with Samson, a Katla- 
mat Indian, who is also located at Bay Center. Until a few years ago 
he spoke Chinook with one of his relatives, while he uses it now only 
rarely when conversing with Catherine, who lives a few miles from 
Bay Center. Possibly this Chinook is to a certain extent mixed with 
Katlamat expressions, but from a close study of the material I conclude 
that it is on the whole pure and trustworthy. 

I have obtained from Cultee a series of Katlamat texts also, which 
appear to me not quite so good as the Chinook texts, but nevertheless 
give a good insight into the differences of the two dialects. It may be 
possible to obtain material in this dialect from other sources. 

My work of translating and explaining the texts was greatly facili- 
tated by Cultee’s remarkable intelligence. After he had once grasped 
what I wanted, he explained to me the grammatical structure of the 
sentences by means of examples, and elucidated the sense of difficult 
periods. This work was the more difficult as we conversed only by - 
means of the Chinook jargon. 

The following pages contain nothing but the texts and transla- 
tions. The grammar and dictionary of the language will contain a 
comparison of all the dialects of the Chinookan stock. I have trans- 
lated the first text almost verbatim, while in the later texts I endeay- 
ered only to render the sense accurately, for which reason short 
sentences have been inserted, others omitted. Still, the form of the 
Chinook sentences has been preserved as nearly as possible. 


CHINOOK 
BOAS 


=) 


PHONETIC SYSTEM EMPLOYED. 7 
ALPHABET. 


have their continental sounds (short). 

long vowels. 

obscure vowels. 

vowels not articulated but indicated by position of the 
mouth. 

in German Bar. 

aw in law. 

o in German voll, 

e in bell. 

separates vowels which do not form diphthongs. 

i in island. 

ow in how. 

as in English. 

very long, slightly palatized by allowing a greater por- 
tion of the back of the tongue to touch the palate. 

posterior palatal 1; the tip of the tongue touches the 
alveoli of the lower jaw, the back of the tongue is 
pressed against the hard palate, sonans. 

the same, short and exploded (surd; Lepsius’s t). 

the same with very great stress of explosion. 

velar k. 

English k. 

palatized k (Lepsius’s k’), almost ky. 

might be better defined as a posterior palatal k, between 
k and k:. 

ch in German Bach. 

x pronounced at posterior border of hard palate. 

palatal x as in German ich. 

are evidently the same sound and might be written s: or 
c*, both being palatized; ¢ (English sh) is pronounced 
with open teeth, the tongue almost touching the palate 
immediately behind the alveoli; s is modified in the 
same manner. 


as in English, but surd and sonant are difficult to distin- 
guish. 


as in English. 

as in year. 

as in English. 

is pronounced with semiclausure of the nose and with very 
slight compression of the lips; it partakes, therefore, 
of the character of b and w. 

is pronounced with semiclausure of the nose; it partakes, 
therefore, of the character of d. 


g INTRODUCTION. ane 


designates increased stress of articulation. 


! designates increased stress of articulation due to the 
elision of q. 

é _ isa very deep laryngeal intonation, due to the elision of q. 

9,4 designate excessive length of vowels, representing approx- 


imately the double and fourfold mora. 


Words ending with a short vowel must be contracted with the first 
vowel of the next word. When a word ends with a long vowel and the 
next begins with a vowel, a euphonic -y- is inserted. The last conso- 
nant of a word is united with the first vowel of the next word to one 
syllable. . 


TK ;ANA/MUKC. 
MYTHS. 


1. CIKTA ICTA/KXANAM. 
CIKTA THEIR MYTH. 


Lqui‘numiks Lxéla’-itx La/wuX aéXa/t Lo-*0/kuil neq;’éla’wilX. 


Five there were, their younger one a woman menstruating the 
_ sister first time. 
Ateunko/mit ica/yim. EXt igé’tak niket Lap aLe’/kxax. <A’yo 
He carried her thegrizzly bear. One year not tind he did it. He went 
away 
iLa/xk’un. Ated/xtkinEba Lia/wuX. A’yo mank <kula‘/i. Lap 
its elder He went to search his younger He went a little far. Find 
brother. for her sister. 
a‘teax oni’ctXuic. Itca/mat atcia/lax; ateupod/nit. A’yo4; kula/2i 
hedidher a pheasant. Hitting her he did her he hung her He went; far 
with it; up. 
a/yo. Lap atei‘tax t’oq. Atecixalaqiy. A/lta Loe Lq;’@yo/qxut kya 
he Find he did ahouse. He opened the Now “there an old man and 
went. them door. was 
LeXa’t Le’A’ege. Ayi’p!om. ALxa/latck Lg’a/ege. TakE aLso’pEna 
one child, He entered. It rose the child. Then it jumped up 
Le’a’‘ege. “O’quaqet, ta‘ta,” takE LE‘/k-im. Takk ateLO/skam, takk& 
the child. ‘* Louse me, uncle,” then it said. Then he took it, then 
atcLgé’qsta. TakE Lap A/tcaq d/Laqst. Take Ljk:!op  4a/teax. 
he loused it. Then find he did her its louse. Then squeeze _ he did her. 
TakE atea/yaqe go ia/tuk. TakE LjqjOp a’teax ia/tuk. Takes 
Then he bit him at his neck. Then cut hedid him his neck. Then 
acgid/Lata kja Lia/mama. TakE acgid/peut ma/Lxdlé. Alta k-7’é 
theytwohauled and his father. Then they two hid inland. Now _ nothing 
him him : 
emoket ca‘kil ckula’/pamam ta/lalX. 
two women they two went gamass. 


digging them 


A‘lta LEla‘/ktikeka txé/la-it. TakrE né/kteukté. <A/Ita wext é@/Xat 


Now tour only remained. Then it got day. Now more one 
a/yo. A’yo4. TakrE weXt Lap ii‘teax Oni/ctXuic. Take itea/mat 
he went. He went. Then again. find hedidher a pheasant. Then hitting her 
atcia/lax. TakE atcupod/nit weXt ia/xkaté. Taker a/yo, kula‘i a/yo 

he did her. Then hehangherup again there. Then he went, far he went 

weXt. TakE Lap atci‘tax t)’0L. TakE atcixalaqié. A/‘Ita Lie 

again. Then find hedidthem a house. Then he opened the Now there 
door. Was 


Lqj’eyo’qxut kja Lg’a’ege. TakE ayi’p!om. “Ta/ta, d/quaqcet!” 


an old man and a child. Then he entered. “Uncle, louse me! * 
TakE Lap a’tcax o’yuqcet. TakE L;kj’Op a/tcax Od’yuqet. TakE 
Then find hedidher his louse. Then squeeze hedidher his louse. Then 
atea/yaqe go ia‘tuk; takE LjqjOp né/xax ia/tuk. Takk acgio/Lata 

he bithim at  hisneck; then cut was his neck. Then they two 


hauled him 
kja Lia’‘mama. TakE acgid’peut gd ma’Lxdlé. TakE na/k-ém: 


and his father. Then they twohidhim at inland. Then she said: 

“Tea txgd’/ya! LguLtelXEmk 90 tE’IxaoqL aLté/‘mam.” TakE 
> > 

“Come, let us two go! A person at our house has arrived.” Then 


9 


to 


or 


12 


20 


Oo Oo ~~ Ow 


10 


13 


BU 
10 CIKTIA THEIR MYTH. prawareee 


ago'lXam Lga/‘naa: “ALqgé teax.” Lé/le ka aci/xko ka 


she spoke to her mother: ‘* Later on come.” A long time then they two and 
her went home 
Lga/naa. A/ita akLiLa/‘kux Léa/owilkt gd we/wuLe. Alta 
her mother. Now she smelled it blood in interior of Then 
house. 


naXE/LXa. A/Ita 6:0/lEptckiX agacgE’Itcim. 
she becameangry. Now [with] firebrand — she hit them two. 
Alta LO‘nikcka Lxé@/la-it. TakE né/ktcukté. “NiXua nai’ka 


Now three only remained. Then it got day. “Well! i 
weXt nod/ya!” Take a/yo4, kula‘i a/yo. TakE weXt Lap 4’teax 
also Ishall go!” Then he went, far hewent. Then again find he didher 
oni‘ctXuic. TakE itea/mat atcia/lax. Atcupo/nit weXt ia/xka. 
a pheasant. Then hitting her hedid her with He hung her up also he. 
it. j 
TakE weXt 4a/yo, kula’2i a/yo. TakE Lap atci‘tax t!’oL. TaksE 
Then also he went, far he went. Then find hedidthem a house. Then 
atcixa‘laqt; Loc Lqj’éyo’qxut kja Lg’a/ege. Takk aya’p!om. 
he opened the there was an old man and a child. Then he entered. 
door; 
*-+fas above]::* .TakE na/kim kaX 0ok’0/sks: “Tea txgo/ya! 
* [as above] *** Then she said that girl: “Come letus two go! 
ALté‘mam LgdLé1XEmk god tE’lxadqL.” Takk ago/’lXam Lga/naa: 
It arrived a person at our house.” Then she spoke to her mother; 
her 
‘“‘A’LQé, teax! a/Lgé, teax!” Take ago’lXam: “Nékect na LEma/icX 2” 
‘““Lateron, come! Lateron, come!” Then she spoke to ‘‘Not[interrog- thy relative?” 
her: ative particle] 
TakE agd/liXam: ‘“Lqui’numiks LEmé’tata-iks.” Take aci/xk6 
Then she spoke to her: ‘' Five thy uncles.” Then they two 
‘ went home 
kja Lga/naa. TakE naXk’/LXa; takE akco/tEna Lga/mama 
and her mother. Then she became angry; then shestruckthemtwo her father 


kja Lga/wuX. 
and her younger brother. 

A‘lta weXt né/kteukté. A/Ita weXt @/Xat niXE’/ItXuitck. Ate- 
Now again it got day. Now again one he made himself ready. Ho 
to’ckam tia/xalaitanEma. TakE @/yo weXt. Kula‘i a’/yo4, a’yo. TakE 
took them his arrows. Then hewent also. Far he went, hewent. ‘Then 
Lap a’‘teax Oni/ctXuic. Take itca’mat atcia/lax. TakE ateupo’nit 
find he did her a pheasant. Then hitting her he tee her Then he hung herup 

with one. 


ia/xkaté weXt. TakE a/yO weXt. Kula/4i a/yo. TakE Lap atci’‘tax 

there ~ also. Then he went also. Far he went. Then find he didthem 

t’oLt. Take ateixa/laq7é. Loe Lq;’éyo’qxut kja Lg’acge. Takk 

ahouse. Then he opened the door. There an old myn and a child. Then 
was 


ayi’/p!om. Takk aLxa/latck Lg’a/ege. Takk aLksd’pEna: ‘“ O/quaqet 
he entered. Then it rose the child. Then it jumped up: ‘*Louse me, 
ta/ta!” Take akuLgk/kXiks. TakE Lap aqga/x od’Laqst. Take 
uncle!” Then he loused him. Then found it was its louse. Then 
Lj kjop a’qax. Takk atca/yaqe Lia/tata go ia/tuk. TakE 1; qj’0p 
squeezed it was. Then he bit him hisunecle at his neck. Then eut 
atcé/xax i4/tuk. TakE acgid’/Lata ma‘Lx0lé; acgid’peut. TakE 
he did it his neck. Then they two hauled him inland; they twohidhim. Then 
na/‘k'im qaX 6k’d’sks: “Ai/aq, ai/aq, txgd/ya!” TakE: “ALté’/mam 
she said that girl: ‘* Quick, quick, let us two go!” Then: “Tt came 
LgoLéIXEmk god tE’lxadkL.” TakE agod/lXam Lga/naa: “A’L@ge, 
a person to our house.” Then she said toher hermother: ‘Lateron, 
a’Lqé.” Takk aci’xko; takE acixa/laq7é. A’Ita iLa’/kux Lé‘a/owilkt. 
later on.” Then they two went then theytwoopened Then its smell blood, 
home; the door. 


A‘Ita naXkE/LXa. A‘lta aked/tena Lga’/mama k;a Lga/wuX. 


Now shebecameangry. Now she struck her father and her younger 
them two brother. 


OnOAS CIK'IA MYTH. 11 


Alta smdékst exéla/-itX. Neé/kteukté. +--+ {as before]: -- 
Now two remained. It got day. * ++ [as before] °° ° 
A‘lta @Xa’/tka ayuko/étiXt. A/‘Ita nigE’tsax, nigk/tsax, nigE/tsax 
Now one only he was left. Now he cried, he cried, he cried 
ka/‘nauwé 0’pull. ;oa’p ikted’/ktiya, take ayad’ptit. Takr 
| ? 
all night. Nearly itwas goingto getday, then he fell asleep. Then 
niXgée’qauwako: “Manix Lap ma‘xo = Oni’ctXuic, né’/ket itca/mat 
he dreamt: “When find you will do her a pheasant, not hitting her 
miala’xo. Eqetxe’/Lau atcungo/mit LEmcia/wuX  kja  ia‘xka 
you ine her A monster he carried heraway your younger sister and he 
with him 


atctoté’/na ka/nauwé LEmé/xk’uniks. Manix mo’/ya, Lap  mta/xo 
he killed them all your elder brothers. When you willgo, find you will dv them 
tVOL. Neéket ai/aq amo’p!’a! Manix moikEla/ya am0/kctike 
a house. Not quick enter! When you will see them two persons 
oxo-éla/-itX, am0/La-it go-y-igé’p!al !” A‘Ita né’kteukte. NixB/)’0k0. 
being there stay at the doorway!” Now it got day. He awoke. 
O, a/lta weXt nigk’tsax. Take atcto/ckam tia/xalaitan, takE a/yo. 
Oh, now more he cried. Then he took them his arrows, then he went. 
Ayo4, kula/i a/yo. TakE Lap 4a’teax oni/ctXuic. Néket itea/mat 
He went, far he went. Then find hedidher a pheasant. Not hitting her 
atcia’/lax. A'lta ayo, a/y6, a’yo, kula/i a’yo. Lap atci’tax 
he did her withone. Now he went, he went, he went, far he went. Find he did them 
t’oL. Take atcixa/lakyée. Alta Loe Lqj’éyo’qxut kja Lg’d’ege. 
ahouse. Then he opened the door. Then there was an old man and a child. 
TakE ayo’La-it go-y- igé’p!al. Le’2lé takE ayO’/La-it gd-y- iqé’p!al. 
Then he stayed in the doorway. Long then he stayed in the doorway, 
Take na/k-em Ok’0/sks; takE ago/lIXam Lga/naa: ‘“Ai‘aq, ai/aq, 
Then she spoke the girl; then shesaidtoher tohermother: ‘Quick, quick, 
tXgo’ya. TakE aLté/mam LgoLé’1XEmk g0 tE’IxabkL.” Takk 
wetwogohome. Then it came a person to our house.” Then 
ago’‘lIXam Lga/naa: “Tea tXE/Xatgo!” TakE aci’xko. 
she said toher hermother: ‘‘Come, let usturn back!” Then they two went home. 


TakE acxko’/mam, take ackixa‘lakLé. A/lta LgdLé/lEXEmk 


Then they two reached then they two opened the Now a@ person 
their house, door. 
Loc. TakE 4a/ctop!. .A/lta naXkE/LXa kaxX Ok’d/sks. A/Ita 
there was. Then they twoentered. Now she grew angry that girl. Now 
no‘/ponEm. A/‘Ita ayaxalgu’Liteck Lia/wuX: “ Ka/nauwé LtXa/xk’- 
it grew dark. Now he told her his younger sister: “All our two selves’ 
unike aLe’té.” <A’lta naxalgu’/Litck g6 Og6/x0: ‘“LEmé/tata-ike 
elder they came.” Now she told her + to her daughter: “Your uncles 
brothers 
ka/nauwé aLE’té.” “Mai‘k-a meni’luat.” “Qa/da  kea’/xo? 
all they came.”’ “You you disbelieved me.” “ How they two shall 
z e done? 
Txcote‘nana?” “A, tgt)’o/kti qeLXawa’ya!” A/Ita: “Tgt;d/kti 
Shall we kill them “Ah! good they two are killed!” Now: ‘*Good 
two?” 
nLgElo’‘ya Lkekui’!” Take ateLi/tkLam tLkekui’ 96 wé/wuLé. 
I go to get it pitchwood!” Then he went and carried _pitchwood to interior of 
it house. 
TakE né’k:im éq;’@yo’/qxut: “I’kta miLgEla/xo LaLkekui’?” “A/Lqé 
Then he said the old man: “What willyoudo withit its pitchwood?” ‘Later on 
tea/xElk7é LE]xElgé’/Lxaé.” A/Ita aLxé/la-it. Lélé aLxé/la-it. A/Ita 
winter we make fire with it.” Now they stayed. Long they stayed. Now 
nixélkulil lé/le. Qj;o0a'p_ iktcd‘ktiya, ka ayad’ptit. A/Ita 
he spoke much a long time. Nearly it was going to then he fell asleep. Now 
to him get day, 
atc01Xam Lia/wuX: “Mxa/latck! Ai‘aq a/Ita_ cilxElgé@/Lxae!” 
he said to her to his younger “Rise! Quick now we will burn them 
sister: two!” 


A‘lta naxa/lateck Lia/wuX, a/Ita nod’/pa. A/Ita naxa/latek dogd/X6, 
Now ~-_ she rose his younger sister, now she went out. Now she rose her daughter, 


oOo me WO NYO 


S. 


~] 


oOo Dm 


28 


bo 


ao nn Sf 


10 


ETHNOLOGY 


12 CIKTA THEIR MYTH. [ence OF 


a‘Ita no’pa. A/Ita tuwa/x atci‘Lax Lkckui’. A’Ita ayo’pa. A/Ita 
now she wentout. Now light he did it the pitchwood. Now hewentout. Now 
né x0‘LXa_ qod’‘ta t’oL. TakE né/k-im: “He! @qxiX! Mxa/latek 
it [they] burnt those house. Then he said: “Heh! brother-in-law! Rise 
é/qxiX! lxitXa!” A/‘Ita nixa/latck @q;’éyo’qxut, a‘lta ixpo’té. A/‘Ita 
brother- We burn!” Now he rose the old one, now it was locked. Now 
in-law! 

aci/xLXa, 14/Xa kja ia/xka. 

they two burnt, his son and he. 

A‘lta akLo/Xtkin Lga/tata-iks. A‘Ita Lap agE/Lax gd ma/Lx6le, 
Now  shesearched for them her uncles. Now find anor did them at inland, 
alta agE/Luky gd Lteug®. A/lta a/xka po’/pO agE’Lax god Ltcuq?. 
now shecarried them to water. Now she blew shedid them on the water. 
Alta ka/nauwé aLxula’/yutck. A’Ita alLi’xko; kula/i a/L6. Lap 
Now all they rose. Now they wenthome; fxr they went. Find 


aLga’/yax ikakj’0/LitX. A/Ita ia/xkati aLx’o/yut go qiX ikakj’o/LitX. 
ae did him ike: Now there they bathed in that 4 aire 
A‘lta nak1;’é’mEn kaX 6¢0/kuil: “TeuX tlaya’ na qia’ nk1;’é/mEn?” 
Now she dived that woman: “a! good [inter- if dive?” 
rogative 
particle] 
“A, taya’ qia’ mk1L;’é/mEn.” “ Niko’stuit xiau ikakj’0/LitX?” “A, 
“Ah, good if you dive.” Doesit fitmein this lake?” “Yes, 
water 


mko/stuit.”. WeXt nakL;é/mEn. ‘“TeuX aya’ na qia nk; @’mEn?” 


it fits you in Again she nies ed. “Ha! good finter- if aT: live?” 
water.” rogative 
particle] 
“A, taya’ gia’ mk; @/mEn.” “Niko/’stuit xlau ikak;’0/LitX?” “A, 
“Ah, good if you dive.” ‘*Doesit fitmein water this ake?” “Ah, 
mko’stuit.”. A‘Ita weXt nakLj’é/men. LO‘ni nakLj’é/mEn; alta 
itfits youin water.” Now again she dived. Three times she dived; now 
i‘teaqed ayaxa/lax. “TeuX niko/stuit ikak;’0’/LitX?” “A, k-!é niket 
her hair began to grow bass EM does it fit me the lake?” “Ah! no! not 
on her. in water ‘ 


mko/stuit.” “BH, ga/daqa niket a/nqate anicgEnd/1Xam?” A/Ita 


it fits youin water.” ‘‘ Eh, why not before you spoke to me?” Now 

quinumé nakw;’@/mEn, a/lta kwa/nisum nod/ya. A‘Ita aLE/kXuk7q 
five times she dived now foralways she went. Now they carried her 

imkXa oLa/LatXen. Alta aLXko/mam gd tE’LaqL. A/lta aLxé’la-it. 
only her their niece. Now they arrived at at their house. Now they stayed. 


their house 


A‘Ita @wa/ gé/xtcé aqaLxamElaJEmX. K-;é, néket aLgo/tx. A/2Ita 


Now thus intending they went repeatedly to buy No, not they gave her Now 
her. away. 
LéXat Lka/nax aLgomeEl. A/‘Ita ia/xkati nd/La-it. 
one chief he bought her. Now there she stayed. 
Alta ka‘nauwé L*aLa/ma iq; é/sqés niket it;’0/kti a/yamxte, qéwa 
Now all days blue jay not good his heart, because 
niket qa/ntsix hé/hé na/xax. A/‘Ita lee, ka na/k-im: “A, takE tell 
never laugh she did. Now along then she said: “Ah, then tired 
time, 
né/xax @/tcamxte. TgEt;’0/kti mo’ ya kula‘/i; a/Ita he’hé nxa/xo.” 
gets my heart. Good you go far; now laugh I shall do.” 
“Ka, kya, niket hée’hé mxa’/x0.” Le 2lé weXt kawit na/‘k-im: “A, 
‘No, n0, not laugh you shall do.” Along again andmore- shesaid: ‘Oh, 
time 


takE Ell né@/xax é@’teamxte.” TakE ated/lXam itea/k-ikala: 


then tired gets my heart.” Then he spoke to her her husband: 
“GEtj’0/kti a/lta he’hé mxa‘xo.” A‘Ita agio’lXam: “GEt;’0’kti a/lta 
‘“Good now _ laugh you do.” Now alto: spoke to him: + Cael now 


he‘/he nxa‘xo. TakE tkll atca’yax eé’teamxte iqjé’sqes. Mo’ya 
laugh I shall do. Then tired he makes him my heart blue-jay. ‘Go 


ae. CIKTA MYTH. 13 


ma/2ux0lé gd. Mecei/niya’/yai; tEmé/utiks meEtocka/mai!” Ai/aq 
inland there. Lie eee knees and your ears hold them!” Quick 
elbows; 


kawé/X nax’o‘tam,. AkLO/skam Lqé/teametée. A/Ita aLaxa/ltciam; 
early she went to bathe. She took it a comb. Now she combed herself; 
alta no’pa. A/‘Ita na/k-im: “Qaxé’4 moc, iqjé’sqés; a/ULEL a/lta 
now shewent Now she said: ‘“ Where are you, blue-jay ; well now 
out. 


hehe nxa’xo. Hahahé! iq;é@’sqjés.” A‘Ita akta/’wilé kanauwe'4 
laugh I shall do. Hahahé! binejey.” Now she ate them all 
té1Xim, tia/leXam itea/kik’a. A/Ita go-y-0f 0/Lax, a/lta L;’pake 
? dv d ‘ 
people, his people her husband's. Now there the sun, now recovered 
na/xax, alta nagE’m’aa. Akto/m’a ka/nauwé4 tga/Xamokuk. A/Ita 
she got, now she vomited. She vomited them all their bones. Now 
agiO’XtkinEma itea/kika. A/’‘Ilta k-;é@, nikct Lap aga‘yax. A/Ita 
she searched for him her husband. Now nothing, not find she did him. Now 
agid’/Xtkin god qodtac té/lXim tga’/Xamokuk. A/‘Ita Lap aga‘yax, 
ew searched at those people their bones. Now find she did him, 
or him 


yukpeE’t k-jé tia’*owit. A’‘Ita agé/lgitk gd iqd’/mxom. A/‘Ita nakLa/yn 
uptohere nothing his legs. Now sheputhim in a basket. Now she moved 
into 
mank kula‘/i. A/Ita t)’0L agnh’tax. A/‘Ita ia/xkati n0/La-it. 
a little far. Now ahouse shemadethem. Now there she stayed. 
Alta lee é@’/teateja ayaxa/lax. A/‘Ita nakxa’/td. Aktaxu’to 
Now along her sickness was on her. Now she gave birth. She gave birth 
time, to them 


amo‘kstiks tka/la-uks. A/Ita tEqoa’-iLa. n0d/x6x tga/a. Alta 
two males. Now large they got herchildren. Now 
akeo‘IXam: “Néket yau’a mto/iX! Ia/ma yau’/a2 mai/émé mto/iX!” 
she said to them “Not there you two go! Only there downriver you two go!” 
y two: 
A‘lta nau/‘itka. Cta/qoa-iL aci’/xéx. A/Ita atcid/1Xam_ Lia’wuX: 
Now indeed. Large [dual] they two got. Now he said to him to his younger 
brother: 


“Tet ’o/kti qdi atgo1X yau‘a!” A‘Ita aé/Xt o0/Lax, a/Ita a/cto. 

“Good will wetwo go there!’ Now one day, now they two 

went. 

A‘4lta Lap acgE’tax té/1Xim tga’/Xamokuk qa no/Xue. “O, ai/aq 

Now find they didthem people their bones where they were “Oh, quick 
on ground. 


mE’te, txko/ya!” Acxko/mam go tj’oL. A/Ita atcidlXam Lia’wuX: 


come, let us two go They reached at house. Now he spoke to him to his younger 
home!” their house brother: 
“QO, tLga‘/xauyamtiks qd’/tac  té/1Xim. Qa‘daLx  nux0/La-it?” 
“Oh! the poor ones those people. How may be they died?” 
A'lta cta/qoaiL aci’xdx. A/‘Ita acx’d’yut; a/Ita lax aci’xax 
Now large [dual] they two got. Now they two bathed; now miss they two 
did it 
Lgétcame’te. “O, a’u! LO/nas go Lagétcame’té Lkéx e6 gqiX 
a comb. “Oh, myyounger perhaps there a comb itis in that 
f rother! : 
iqo’‘mxom.” “O, ai/aq Laq® tgia’/xO qgiX iqd’/mxom.” A/‘Ita Laq? 
basket.” “Oh, quick takeout we willdo that basket.” Now take out 
him 
acgayax X‘1x: iqd/mxom. tLaq°® aLgi’ctax LéXt Lqoa’g. <A/Ita 
they did him that basket. Take out they did it one mountain goat Now 
blanket. 
LgoLelEXEmk Lap aLgE/ctax gd xix: iqd/‘mxdm. “O2 ecgE/Xa! O 
a person find theytwodidit in this basket. “QO wmytwochil- O 
dren! 
egE’/Xa! LEmta’/naa itca’/q;’atxal. Mtgena/gamit a/Ita_ nei/tkum 
my two chil- Your mother her badness. You two sve me now I am half 


dren! 


bo 


oc 


~~] 


19 


20 


-1 


mo ®W 


ETHNOLOGY 


14 CIKTA THEIR MYTH. [ erewoee 
kye. Ai‘aq, ai‘aqg, mtgEnupo/nit! A’Lqi Lté‘mama LEmta/naa, 
nothing. Quick, quick, youtwohangmeup! Lateron she willcome your two selves’ 
. mother, 
grElxawi'laya.” 
she will eat us.”’ 


A‘Ita acgid/eckam Leta/mama, a‘lta ackuponit. Po‘lakli 
Now they two took him their two selves’ father, now they twohunghimup. At dark 
naxatko/ma Leta‘naa. <A’Ita cga/Xa aciXE’LXa. A/lta 
she came home their mother. Now her two children theytwo were angry. Now 
eqj’oa/lipX  aci/xax ega/Xa. A/‘Ita acgidlXam Leta/mama: 
two youths they two got her two Now they two said to their two 
children. to him selves’ father: 
“Tert’o/kti i0‘LEma qkEma’x0.” A‘Ita né/kim: “A tgEt;’okti!” 
“Good curing by super- we do you.” Now he said: “Ah, good!” 


natural means 


A‘lta  acgid/skam Leta/mama, acga/yukrt gd Ltcuq®. Alta 


Now they two took him their father, they two carried him to the water. Now 
Lj’Eli’p acga’/yax. A/lta acgd’skam Leta’/naa. Lké/wucX 
under water they twodid him. Now they two took her their two selves’ mother. A dog 
aci’/kxax. 
they two made her. 

Alta = a/eto2. Acto‘4, kula‘i 4a/cto. A‘lta actiga’Om 
Now they two went. Theytwowent, far they two went. Now they two 


reached him 


iqélo’q go els ’O/LitX. Cmdket ca/yagtq qiX igéld’q. “TgEt;’0’kti 


aswan in a lake. Two his two heads that swan. ‘““Good 
ia/mat nila’xd Rix?  iqelo'q.” “A, niket ia/mat mla’x0. 
shooting Idohim with that swan.” “Oh! not shooting youdohim 
him one him with one. 
O’xuit tqetxéLa/wuks god xix: ikak;’0/LitX.”  A/‘Ita atcto’skam 
Many monsters in this ake.” Now he took them 
tia/xalaitan, a‘lta 1a/mat atcé‘lax. “Tort ’o/kti nukué/Xa 
his arrows, now shooting him he did him with one. ‘*Good Iswim 
niugolEmama.” A/‘Ita atei/Lxaluketgo Lia/ok. A/‘lta ayd/kueéeXa, 
I shall go to take him.” Now he threw it off his blanket. Now he swam, 
a‘Ita atciu’skam qix: igélo’q. A/‘Ita L;Ela’p a’‘yo. <A‘Ita nigE’teax 
now he took him that swan. Now under water he went. Now he cried 
ia/xk’un. A‘lta 10’ElO atci/Lax Lqa/nake. A/lta na-ixE/]giLx. 
his elder brother. Now pile up he did them stones. Now he made a fire. 
A‘lta aLé/XEltug. A/Ita aLo’s-ko-it Lqa/nake. A/‘Ita atcio/‘teXEm 
Now he heated them. Now they got hot the stones. Now he made it boil 
ikak;’0/LitX. Alta qj’E’/cqjEe né/xax ikak;’0/LitX. A‘Ita atcio‘1Xam: 
the lake. Now dry he got the lake. Now he said to him: 
‘Ade’! o/xuit tqetxéLa/wuks!” <A/‘Ita atco’/ckain Oya/qéwigée. Alta 
““Ade’! many monsters!” Now he took her his knife. Now 
LE/xLEx  atci’tax tga/wanaks. A/2lta ka’‘nauweé Lex = atci/tax 
cut he did them their bellies. Now all eut he did them 
tga‘wanaks. A/‘Ita atcid’lXam: ‘“O2, qxa/oqaLx Lap  nia/x0 
their bellies. Now he said to him: —— ‘Oh, I cannot may be find T shall 
do him 
Lga/wuX.” A‘lta nigk’teax. O2, a/lta éXtka -ianu’kstX iqcetxé’Lau. 
my younger Now he cried. Oh, now one only small monster. 
brother.” 

Alta LEx atea/yax ia/wan ianu’/kstX iqetxé/Lau. A’lta Lap atea/yax 
Now cut hedidhim his belly small monster. Now find he did him 
Lia/wuX. Atcia/ktcan ia/qélog. A/‘Ita  atea/yuky Lia/wuX 
his younger He held him in hand his swan. Now he carried him his younger 
brother. brother 
go Lteug®’. <A/‘Ita po’po atca/yax Lia/wuX. A‘Ita nixa/latek 
to water. Now blow he did him his younger brother. Now he rose 
Lia‘wuX: “O, ayamod/lXam niket mukué/Xa! Qamawu’laya!” 
his younger “Oh! I said to you not swim! You will be swallowed!” 


brother: 


eos CIKTA MYTH. 15 


A‘lIta wexXt a/cto. A/2cto, kula/i a’‘ctd. A’lta Lap aLgeE’ctax 


Now again they two They two far they two Now find they two did 
went. went, went. is it 
LgoLeJEXEmk. AtLgid/ktcan i/Lasiki. A/‘lta aLa/owil. “O, i/kta 
a person. He held him his paddle.» Now he danced. pn’ S Oh, what 
mxé@/Ixalo?” “O2, tEmé’n’a nta/owil.” “NiXua mE’te! Omé’tso-itk 
are you going “Oh, flounders I catch.” ‘* Well, come! Your dipnet 
to do?” 


na-y- ake/x?” “QOgui'tsd-itk aké/x.” “NiXua a’tk"qa!. Ai’aq 


{interro- there is?” ‘* My dipnet there is.”’ “ Well! carry her Quick, 
gative here! 
particle] 
mE’tXuit i0’-kuk! NiXua gE/cgEc mta‘/xo xitik tEmé/n’a! I0/kuk 
stand here! Well, drive dothem those flounders ! Here 
mE’tXuit! LjEla/p a/xa-y Omé’tso-itk.” A/lta Lj;Eli’p a/tcax. 
stand! Under water do her thy dipnet.” Now under water hedid her, 
Lele LjEli’p a/teax. “NiXua A/latek!” O4, qjoa’p paL 
Long under water he did her. “Well, lift her!” Oh, nearly full 
oya’tso-itk. “O, @/ka oOguée’ kua/nEsum qttipia/Lxaé tEmé/n’a.” 
his dipnet. ““Oh, thus thus always they willbe caught flounders.” 
A‘lIta weXt a/cto. Kula‘i a/cto. Lap aLgek’stax LgoLé’lEXEmk. 
Now again they two Far they two Find they two did it a person. 
é went. went. 
Wa2a/2! Wa2a2! Lxa/xo-il. “I’kta atcuwa! émxé/lXalem?” “O, 
Waa! Waa! italways did. ‘‘What [exclamation] are you doing? “Oh 
iLa‘mat niLi’/Lxo-il xictik @e’Lxatct.” “O2, tgEt’d/kti cka 
shootingit, I always do it those two rain [dual].” “Oh; good and 
meE’La-it!” A/‘Ita aqtd/skam ta/yaqL; aqoX0/kXué. Alta aqh/tax 
you stay!” Now it was taken his house; it was thrown away. Now they were 
made 
ta’‘yagqL; taya’ agqgté/lax. Aqid/lIXam: “NiXua mb®’La-it!” Alta 
his house, good they zB creanade He was told: ‘Well, stay!” Now 
for him. 


niket qetoma’qta ¢’é/Lxatct.” 
not they twowillbe rain [dual].” 


killed 
Alta weXt a’/ctd. Kula/i a’/cté. Alta Lap acga/yax ilé/é. Alta 
Now again they two Far they two Now find they two acoun- Now 
- went. went. did him try. 

acx’d’/yut. A’Ita godyé’2 atck’tax tia/poté. A/Ita O2xuit télXem 
they two bathed. Now thus he did them his arms. Now many people 
xitike. A‘Ita po atck’tax. O2 nOX0-ina/Xit té/1XEm. 

these. Now blow hedidthem.. Oh, they stood up people. 


A‘lta a/cité2; acté/mam Kwi/naitL. “O02, tgnt;’0/kti ia/xkayuk 


Now theytwocame; they cameto Quinaielt. ““Oh, good here 
o‘tsdyéha qopiaLxa.” 
blue-back sal- she will be caught.”’ 


mon 
A‘Ita weXt a’‘cto. Kula/2i a/cto. Lap aLgE/ctax LgdLélEXEmk. 
Now again they two Far they two Find they two did a person. 
went. went. it 
“Niokula/ya Lqgéwe’qé, manix cté/mama qd/cta té/1XEM t’aya/ 
‘“‘T shall sharpen knives, when they two will those people good 
them come, 


kektaxo’-il, a/lta xiLé’k Lqéwé’gé negEltcé’ma.” A, a/Ita actiga/om. 


thetwoalways now these knives I shall strike them Ah, now they two met 
making them, two.” him. 
“QO2, i/kta mia/xo-il, iqjéyo’qxut?” “A2, ctaxka qd/cta té1XEm 
“Oh, what are you doing old man?”’ “Ah, they two those two people 


him always, 
Vaya’ kekta’xo-il negEltcé’ma.” “ Ni/Xua, a/tkq7a!” Take a/teutX. 


good thetwoalways I shall strike them “Well, earry her Then he gave her 
making them two.” here!” away. 
“WeXt aéXt a/tk ia!” Take a/teutX weXt. “NiXua la’X° mxE/xax!” 
“Again one carry her Then hegaveher again. “Well head side- do!” 


here!” away ways 


bo 


cs 


25 


bo 


Ou 


~] 


12 


16 CIKIA THEIR MYTH. pA 


ETHNOLOGY 


LaX° né/xax; aqa-élga/mit a/éXt. “Ni’Xua weXt laX° mE/xax!” 


Head he did; she was fastened one. “Well, again head side- do!” 
sideways to him ways 
LaX° né/xax, weXt éXt aqélga/mit. GO La’yaqtEq md‘ksti 
Head he did, again one was fastened to At his head twice 
sideways him. 
aqtilga’mit; gd ia’/pute EéXt aqilga’mit. ‘“ Ni’/Xua_ sk’/pEna!” 
they were fas- at his backside one _ was fastened to him. ‘Well jump!” 


tened to him; 
aqio’/1Xam; atcd’pEna. Aqid/lXam: “ NiXua méxé/Lxégo! Ema/cken 


was said to him; he jumped. It was said tohim: ‘ Well, * turn round! Deer 
émé’xal. Néket qa/ntsiX mtote’nax té/1XEm.” 
thy name. Never you will kill people.”’ 


them repeatedly 
A‘cto, actiga‘Om Uq;’d’nExon. “I’/kta mxéXal—Em?” “O, 
They two they two Uq j’0/nExon. “What are you doing?” “Oh, 
went, reached her 


nEXEmO/SXEm.” TakE akLo’skam Le’Xat Lk’a/cke gd La/potitk. 

I play.” Then she took it one child at its forearm. 

TakE agE’Lxaluketgo iau’a ke/kXulé. “Ai/aq teu/qoa cXE'Ikayuwa 

Then she threw it away there below. “Quick letthem they two will fight 
together 


ctxa/xamuks.” Takb na/kém Uq;’0/nExén: “O aqetxé/Lau 
our two selves’ two dogs.” Then she said Uqj’0/nExon: . “Oh, a monster 
osta‘xamuke. A/‘Ita itea/kXikala ia/1Xam_ aqia’wult, taua/Ita 
their two selves’ bitch. Even her husband his town she ate him, else 
aqa/watuX ogu/xamuke.” “Qa/da itca’/xal omé/xamuke?” “O, itea’/xal 
she will eat her my bitch.” ‘How her name your bitch?” “Oh, her name 
tqtqake itea/Lxalemax. Qa/da itca/xal oOmta/xamuke?” “QO, itea/xal 
heads eater. How her name your two selves’ bitch?” ‘Oh, her name 
o2ne'lE Xteut itea/LxalEmax.” Alta acXElkayti take. 
flint eater.” Now they two fought together then. 
A‘lta Lqj’op aqéa/xax itea/tuk Uqg;’0’‘nExon 6g0/xomuke. Takk 
Now cut it was done her neck Uqj 0/nExon her bitch. Then 
atco‘lxam qiX @/Xat: “Teca a/lta meEnxaluketgo/ya.” TakE 
he said to her that one: ‘Now you will throw me down.” Then 
atcto/1Xam tqa/sdsiniks: ‘“Manix gEnExalukctgo’/ya a’/Ita megé/‘ma: 
he said to them the boys: ‘“ When she throws me down now you will say 
SO: 


‘MXata‘komX welX!?  Mege’ma.” A‘lta = agid’skam,_—_a/Ita 
‘Return to land!’ You will say so.” Now she took him, now 
aga/xénayuX oguélEXteutk. A/‘Ita agid’skam go _ tia’/potitk. 
she [they] stood flint-pieces [f.]. Now she took him at his forearms. 
. upright ; 
Qui/numi gd/‘yé aga/yax. TakE agé’xaluketgo. TakE agtd/lXam 
Five times thus shedidtohim. Then — she threw him down. Then she said to them 
tqa‘/sosiniks:  ‘Mxiq;’"EmLEma/oX welX!” Take  atcto/lXam 
to the boys: ““Go and stay always away {in] land!” Then he said to them 
tqa/sdsiniks: “MXata/komX welX! mei/kim! mei‘kim!” “Na 
to the boys: ‘* Return to land! say! say!” Na! 
xiX0/Lac, a/Ita LO‘itt LEmeca/mama-ike!” TakE a’yo gékXula/ 
these people, now they come your fathers!” Then he went down 
ayuquna/ititam. Nixa‘lateck ka’nauwé, naket LEK" ni&/xax. A/Ita 
he went and lay. He rose whole, not broken he got. Now 
Lap atci/tax tqa/cociniks. 
find he did them the boys. 
O, paL gé’/kXulé. A/‘Ita ateLo’skam Ltcuqg®. A/Ita po’po atci’tax 
O, full below. Now he took it water. Now blow  hedid them 
ka/nauwé. A/‘Ita noxo-ina’Xit ka/nauwé a/lta. TakE atcto’1Xam: 
all. Now they stood up all now. Then he said to them: 
“TeEt;’o/kti megizkEna/-oi.” A‘Ita aLkLo/skam Lqa/nake. A/‘Ita 
“Good you watch her.” Now they took them stones. Now 


SHINOOK CIKTA MYTH-—TRANSLATION. 17 


ayoe’wilX. Ayd/yam k'ca/xale. A‘Ita ateo’1Xam Uq;’0‘nExon: “O?, 


he went up. He arrived above. Now  hesaidtoher to Uqj’0’nExon’: “Oh, 
ga/Lak, dal; néket 0X0/La-it tike té/1XEm, éka mtax. Nxe‘lutcX 
aunt, look! not they are dead those people, thus zn did I saw them 
em. 
go ge@kXulé, @ka a/lta lélé gé@kXulé nkix. OXuiwa/yul 
at below, thus now long below I was. They dance 
ka/nauwé, Okula/lam; @Lukuma Oxusg@/liL; iqa/lExal Oxusga/liL. 
? y] ) te} 
all, they sing; itlukum they play; disks they play. 
Tea, a/lta mai’/ka yamxaluketgo/ya!” A/’Ita atca/xéna  ia’koa 
Well, now you I throw you down!” Now he placed them there 


upright [f.] 
oya’/kXilXteutk. A/‘Ita ated/skam god LeE/kxakeo. A/‘Ita qui/nEmi 


his flint-pieces. Now he took her at her hair. Now five times 
go/ye a/teax. A/lta Lax® né/xax itca/wan. A/Ita atca’/xalukctgo. 
thus he did her. Now break did her belly. Now he threw her down. 
A‘lta nuquna’-ititam gé/kXulé. A‘lta atkL0/skam Laqa/‘naqe. 
Now she went and lay below. Now they took them stones. 
Alta LEME/nDLEMEnN = a’/qxax. Alta aqgiXE/kXuée = é@'tc’aLta 
Now in small pieces she was done. Now it was thrown away her flesh 
ka/nauwé qa. Aqgé/xaluketgd itea/towit iaua’ Naté’lim; agé’xalukectgo 
5 ’ 
every where. It was thrown away her leg here [to] Nehelim; it was thrown away 
LE/kxaked, aqoX0/kXué tqa/léwankma iaua’ k'cala’. 
her hair, they were thrown her ribs there upriver. 
away 
Translation. 


There were five brothers who had one younger sister. When she was 
grown up the grizzly bear carried her away. One year her brothers 
did not find her. Then her elder brother went to search for his younger 
sister. He went some distance and met a pheasant (?). He shot it and 
hung it on to the branch of a tree. He went on and found a house. 
He opened the door and saw an old manand a boy inside. He entered. 
Then the child jumped up and said: ‘ Louse me, uncle!” He took the 
child and loused it. He found a louse and squeezed it. Immediately 
the old man bit his neck and cut off his head. Then the old man and 
the boy carried his body into the woods and hid it. The bear’s wife 
and his daughter had gone digging gamass (camass) at that time. 

Now four [brothers] only remained. One day the next eldest 
went. Healso found a pheasant. He shot it and hung it on to the 
branch of a tree. He went a long distance and found a house. He 
opened the door and saw an old man anda boy inside. Then he entered. 
The boy jumped up and said: “ Uncle, louseme!” He did so and found 
a louse. He squeezed it; then the old man bit his neck and cut off his 
head. Then the old man and the boy carried his body into the woods 
and hid it. The two women had again gone digging gamass. Then 
the daughter said to her mother: ‘Come, let us go home; somebody 
arrived at our house.” The mother replied: “‘ Wait a while.” After 
some time the two women went home. Then the girl smelled blood in 
the house and knew at once what had happened. She grew angry and 
struck her father and her brother with a firebrand. 

Now three [brothers] only remained. One day the next brother said: 
“TI will go next.” He went a long distance and he also found a pheas- 

BULL T=20 2 


¥, é . AU OF 
18 CIK'IA THEIR MYTH. TES 


ant. He shot it and hung it on to the branch of a tree. He went on 
and found a house. He opened the door and found an old man and a 
boy inside. Heentered and shared the fate of his brothers. Then the 
girl said: “‘Come, let us go home; somebody arrived at our house.” 
Her mother replied: ‘‘ Wait a while.” Then she said to her: ‘Have 
you no relatives?” She replied: “You have five uncles.” Then the 
two women went home. She became angry and struck her father and 
her brother. 

Now it became day and one more made himself ready. He took his 
arrows and he also went. He went a long distance; then he found a 
pheasant. Heshotit and hung it on to the branch of a tree. He went 
on and founda house. Then he opened the door and saw an old man and 
aboyinside. Heentered. The boy jumped and said: ‘ Louse me, uncle.” 
He did so and found a louse. He squeezed it. Then the old man bit 
his neck and cut off his head. Then they carried the body inland and 
hid it. The girl [who was digging gamass with her mother] said: 
“Come, let us go home; somebody atrived at our house.” But her 
mother replied: ‘“‘ Wait a while.” Then they went home. They opened 
the door and she smelled the blood. She became angry and struck her 
father and her brother. 

Now oneonly remained. Hecried the wholenight. When it became 
nearly daylight he fell asleep. He dreamt: “* When you will go you 
will meet a pheasant. Do not shoot it. A monster carried away your 
younger sister and killed all your elder brothers. When you will go 
you will find a house. Do not enter at once. When you see two per- 
sons in there stay at the door.” Now it became day. He awoke and 
continued to cry. Then he took his arrows and went. He wenta long 
distance and saw a pbeasant. He did not shoot it. He went on and 
found a house. He opened the door. There was an old man and a boy 
inside. Then he stayed at the door. He remained there a long time. 
Then the girl spoke and said to her mother: ‘Come, let us go home; 
somebody arrived at our house.” Her mother replied: “Let us turn 
back!” Then they went home. They reached their house and opened 
thedoor. Now there wasa person. Theyentered. Then the girl grew 
angry. In the evening the man said to his younger sister: ‘All our 
brothers came here;” and she told her daughter: “All your uncles came 
here.” [The daughter replied :] ‘‘ You did not believe me.” [Her uncle 
asked:] ‘What shall we do with the old man and the boy? Shall we 
‘kill them? [She replied:] ‘“‘ Yes; they shall die.” Then the man said: 
“*T will go and get pitchwood.” He went and brought pitchwood into 
the house. Then the old man said: ‘*What do you intend to do with 
that pitchwood?” ‘ Weshall use it to make fire in winter.” Now they 
remained there a long time. [One night] he spoke to the old mana 
long time. Whenit became nearly day [the old man] fell asleep. Then 
he said to his sister: “Arise! now we will burn them.” She arose and 
left the house. Her daughter also arose and went out. Then he set 


zy / 
CHINOOK CIKIA MYTH—TRANSLATION. 19 


fire to the pitchwood. He went out. Now the house began to burn 
The vld man said: “ Heh! brother-in-law! Rise! We are going to be 
burnt.” He arose and found that the door was locked. Now he him- 
self and his son were burnt. 

Then she searched for her uncles. She found them in the woods and 
carried them to the water. She blew some water on the bodies. Then 
they all arose. They went home. They went a long distance and came 
to a lake. They bathed in the lake. Now the woman [their sister} 
dived and said: “Shall I dive?” The brothers replied: ‘‘ Yes, dive!” 
“ Do I look pretty in this lake?” ‘Yes, you look pretty in the lake.” 
She dived again. “Shall I dive?” ‘Yes, dive.” ‘Do I look pretty 
in this lake?” “Yes, you look pretty in the lake.” Then she dived 
again. After she had dived three times hair began to grow on her. 
She said again: “Do I look pretty in this lake?” ‘Oh, no! you do 
not look pretty in this lake.” “Eh, why did you not tell me before?” 
Now she had dived five times, and she remained always in the lake and 
became a monster. They took only their niece along. They arrived at 
their house and stayed there. Now all the people wanted to marry the 
girl, but the brothers did not give her away. Finally a chief married 
her and she remained with him. 

Now, Blue-jay was discontented because she never laughed. After 
a time she said [to her husband]: “I am getting tired. Go far 
away, then I shall laugh.” ‘No, no, don’t laugh!” After some time 
she said again: “I am getting tired.” Then her husband replied: 
‘Well, then laugh now.” She said: “I will laugh because Blue-jay 
makes me tired. Go into the woods! Lie down on your knees and 
elbows and close your ears.” Then early in the morning she went to 
bathe. She took a comb and combed herself. Then she went out. 
Now she said: ‘“‘ Where are you, Blue-jay? NowI shall laugh. Haha- 
heh! Blue-jay!” Then she devoured all her husband’s people. In 
the afternoon she came to herself and vomited all the bones. She 
searched for her husband but did not find him. Then she searched for 
him among the bones of all these people. She found him, but his legs 
up to the knees were gone. Then she put him into a basket and 
moved a short distance. She made a house and lived there. After 
some time she fell sick and gave birth to two boys. When her children 
became older she said to them: ‘Do not go there up the river; you 
must go only down the river.” They obeyed. When they became 
older the elder one said to his brother: “Let us go there [up the 
river].”. One day they went and found the ground strewn with bones 
of people. ‘Oh, come, let us go home!” They reached their home 
and the elder one said: “‘These poor people! How may they have 
died?” Now they grew up. One day they bathed; now they missed 
a comb. The elder one said: ‘“O, brother! Perhaps we shall find a 
comb in that basket.” “Let us take down that basket.” Now they 
took down the basket and took out a mountain-goat blanket. Now they 


20 CIKTA THEIR MYTH. eeitoree 


found a person in that basket. [The person said:] ‘‘O my children! 
Your motheris bad. Youseeme. Iamonly halfnow! Quick! Hang 
me up again, else your mother will come and devour us!” They took 
their father and hung him up again. In the evening their mother 
came back. Now the boys were angry. They became young men; 
then they said to their father: ‘‘We will cure you.” ‘ Well,” he 
replied. Now they took him and carried him to the river. They put 
him under water. Then they took their mother and transformed her 
into a dog. 

Now the two young men [who were now called Cik7a] traveled on. 
They came to a lake in which they saw a swan with two heads. “I 
will shoot that swan.” “Oh, don’t shoot it. Many monsters are in 
that lake.” He, however, took his arrows and shot the swan. ‘TI will 
Swim across the lake and get it.” He threw off his blanket, swam, and 
took hold of the swan. Then he disappeared under water. His elder 
brother cried. He picked up stones and made a fire in which he heated 
the stones. When they were hot he threw them into the lake and 
made it boil. Then the lake became dry. Then he said: “Oh, how 
many monsters there are!” Then he took his knife and opened their 
bellies. When he opened them all he said: “Oh, I cannot find my 
brother.” He cried. Now only one small monster remained. He cut 
its belly and found his brother who held the swan in his hand. He 
carried him to the water and blew on him. Then he arose: “Oh, I told 
you not toswim! [I thought] you would be swallowed!” 

They went on. They met a person who held his paddle in his hand 
and danced. “What are you doing there?” “I catch flounders.” 
[The flounders jumped into his canoe while he was dancing.] ‘Come 
here; have you no dipnet?” “TI have one.” ‘Bring it here! Step 
near! Drive the flounders. Stand here! Put your dipnet into the 
water!” He did so and held the net under water a very long time. 
“Now lift it.” It was neariy full. ‘‘Thus people shall always catch 
flounders.” 

Now they went on. They met a person who always made waa/waa’! 
“What are you doing?” “I shoot the rain.” “Stay here!” Now 
they took his house, threw it away, and made a good house for him." 
They said: ‘‘Stay here; henceforth people will not shoot the rain.” 

Then they went on. They found a country. There they bathed. 
Then they rubbed their arms and made people [of the dirt that they 
rubbed from their skin]. They blew upon them and they arose. 

Now they came to Quinaielt. ‘Here people shall catch blue-back 
salmon.” 

They went on and found a person. [He said:] ‘I will sharpen my 
knives. When these people come who make everything good I shall 
kill them with these knives.” Now they met him. ‘“ What are you 
doing, old man?” they said. ‘TI shall kill those who make everything 


1 His house had no roof, and he protected himself by shooting at the rain. 


ea CIKTA MYTH—TRANSLATION. rend 


good.” ‘Give me your knife.” He gaveit. ‘ Give me the other one.” 
He gave it also. ‘Now put your head sideways.” He put his head 
sideways. Now they fastened one knife to one side of his head. “ Put 
your head to the other side.” He did so, and they fastened the other 
knife to the other side. They fastened two to his head and one to his 
backside. ‘Now jump!” they said to him, and he jumped. “Turn 
round! You shall be called deer. You will not kill man!” 

They went on and came to Uqj0/nexon. “ What are you doing?” 
they said. “I play.” Then she took a child at its, forearm and threw 
it into the depth. ‘Let our dogs fight together,” said the two men. 
- She replied: ‘‘Oh, their bitch is a monster. She devoured even her 
husband’s people. She will certainly kill my bitch.” ‘ What is the 
name of your bitch,” they said. ‘‘Her name is Head-eater. What is 
the name of your bitch?” ‘“ Her name is Fliut-eater.”. Now the two 
dogs fought together and Cikla’s bitch cut off the head of Uq;’0/nexon’s 
bitch. Then one of the young men said to her: “‘ Now throw me down 
the precipice.” He had said to the boys [down below]: ‘“* When she 
throws me down you must say ‘Return to the land.’” She took him. 
Flint pieces stood upright {at the foot of the precipice]. She took him 
at his forearms. She swung him around five times; then she threw 
him down. She said to the boys: “Say ‘Stay always away from the 
land.” He, however, said to the boys: “Say ‘Return to the land.’” 
[When throwing him down Uq;’0’/nexon said:] ‘ Now come these two 
people, your fathers!” He fell down and lay there [at the foot of the 
precipice]. He arose whole. He was not hurt. He saw that down 
below there was a multitude of boys. He took water and blew it on 
all of them. Then they all arose. He said: ‘“ Watch her [when she 
comes down].” They took stones. He went up and arrived on the top 
of the rock. Then he said to Uqj’0/nexon: ‘“*O, aunt, look! These 
people whom you threw down are not dead. I saw them down there. 
I was there a while. They dance and sing; they play itlukum and 
disks. Now I shall throw you down.” Now he placed his pieces of 
flintupright. He took her at her hair and swung her around five times. 
Her belly burst. Now he threw her down. She fell and lay there. 
Then the boys pelted her with stones and cut her to pieces. Her body 
was scattered in all directions. Her legs were thrown to Nehelim, her 
hair was thrown inland, her ribs were thrown up the river [therefore 
the Nehelim have strong legs, the Cowlitz have long hair, and the 
tribes of the upper river have bandy legs]. 


bo 


20 


21 


2. OKULA™M ITCA’KXANAM. 
OKULA’M HER MyYTR. 


Txela’ itX Lquinumiks. WaX aLké/taqt La/wuX. ALXO/kumak*;’- 


There were five men. Every they left him their younger They always 
morning brother. 
auwakuX; imdJekuma aLkia/wul. Pa2L tk/Laqi LVolé/ma, pau 
went hunting; * elks they [hunted] Full their house meats, full 


always made. 
O’/pXil tk/Laqu. Ta/kE a’/yamxte 1lax° né/xax La/wuX. TakE 
grease their house. Then his heart lonesome he got vee younger Then 
rother. 


né‘kim: “Ana/! LOo/yam ta‘yax néket giLa’qetit kja Lgodxoé’/lax 
he said: ‘Ana’! he arrive oh! that not the one satiated and he eats them 

tik L!o0lé’‘ma.” A/‘lta la/kti aya’qxoya ne‘k‘im; ka io’e ka cix 

these meats.” Now four times his sleeps he said; where heis then noise 
0 

rattles 

né/xau go igé/pal. Alta Lax aLi’/xax LgdLéJEXEmk. A/‘Ita modkst 
got at doorway. Now visible it got a person. Now two 

imoEkuma iLa/uk iya/ck;upXela. Kjau/kjau ai/kawit o:a/LaLa. 
elks his blanket his curried elkskins. Tied % was to it hoofs. 

A‘lta aLo/p’am LgdLélEXEmk. ALO/La-it. “O qac! 0/10 gEna/xt.” 
Now he entered the person. He remained. ‘Oh, grand- hungry Iam.” 

son! 


Ayo’tXuit. Take atcLE7:ém LYolé’ma; neket pat 0/Xuit 
He stood up. Then he gave it to him meat; not very much 
to eat 


LVolé‘ma; o’/pXil ateLE’/lém. Ayo/La-it. Neé’kXiket, a/nqate ké 
meat; grease he gaveittohim He remained. He looked, long ago nothing 
to eat. 


qo’‘ta ktcLE’ltém. WexXt atcLe’/lém, a/lta mank 0o’/Xuit. WeXt 


that whathehad given Again he gave him to now a little much. Again 
him to eat. eat, 


né’kXiket, a/‘nqaté ky é; weXt aLkta’wilt. AtcLElé/mEniL aéXt 
he looked, long ago see again he ate it all. He gave ne to eat one 
often 


0:0/Lax. <A/‘Ita tsd’/yusté né/xaueé. A/Ita aLXko’/mam Lia’/xkunike. 
day. Now evening it got. Now they got home his elder brothers. 
A‘lta aLkto’/kyam oOx0dkueé’wall LVolé‘ma. A/‘Ita  aLgio/lXam 
Now ‘they carried them home fresh meats. Now they said to him 
Ly 7a/wux: “Qa/da amE’/k-im? Qa/daqa LElxga‘tom Laqctxe/Lau?” 


their younger ‘* How did you say? Whence it came to us the monster ?”’ 
brother: 


“A-y-iteamxte lax® né/xax k;a ank/kim niket tayax giLa/qctit 

“Ah! my heart lonesome it got and I said not oh! that theone satiated 

LO/yamt, kja Lgdxoé/lax LVY0lé‘ma. Ank’/kim.” “OQ meE/L;ala, 

he would ar- and he would eat them meats. I said.” ‘Oh. you fool, 
rive, 


Lkelxuwi'ltaya Lactxé’/Lau!” A‘Ita aLkltémEniL cka wax né’‘kteukte. 


he will eat us the monster!” Now they gave him and _ next it got day. 
always to eat morning 
Alta aLkl@/mEniL cka n0d/ponEm. Take nox0’/tctXum_ 1;0lé’ma. 
Now they gave him and it got dark. Then they wereatanend the meats. 


always to eat é 
Take né/kim L7a/wuX: “H’/kta Lx Lgia/x0 Lunteca/xgacgac? 


Then he said their younger ‘What may he [will] eat it our grandfather? 
brother: 
Alta ia/mkXa 6’c6/ma.” “E’/kta Lx nia/xo qa/coma. A/Ita ia/mkXa@ 
Now only skins.” “What may LIshall  grandchild- Now only 
eat it ren! 


22 


CHINOOK 7A . 
eoas OKULA‘M MYTH. 23 


ée0/ma ka mi/ea.” “Qa/daXi aLE’/k-im?” “<¢A‘Ita ia/mkXa é@coOma 


skins and_= you.” ‘How he said?” “Now only skins 
ka mi’ea,’ aLe/k:im.” “NiXua weXt LElXam!” “E/kta Lx 
and you,’ he said.” “Well again speak to him!”’ “What may 
Lgia’xO Lntca/xgacgac” [etc., as above five times]. 
he willeatit our grandfather” [ete., as above five times]. 
A‘lta aLkLxtea’maa. ALgid‘teXEm é¢d’/ma. ALgil*é/mEniL 
Now _ they understood him. They boiled them the skins. They gave them 


always to him to eat 
é:cd’ma. Lé2 nod’/ponEm. A/‘Ita Lxoa’p aLga’yax ilé’é. ALgidJEXtcum 


skins. Some it got dark. Now dig they didit ground. Theysharpened it 
time 
itexa/‘ma. A/‘lta aLgé/xéna gd qigd akL’a/yuit. A/‘Ita a/LO ian‘a 
arrow wood. Now they placed it at where theylay down Now they there 
upright to sleep. went 

Xigd naLxoa’p aLga/yax ilée’é. Qa/xé gd kula/i ka Lax aLxa’xo. 

where hole they made it ground. Where at far and visible they became. 

A‘lta aLaé/taqrt OLa’xewicX qigd’ naLxoa’p ilé’é. ALgd1Xam 

Now they left her their bitch where hole ground. They said to her 

OLa/xéwicX: “Manix teimua/amtcxoké, wo wmxa/xoyé.” Takk 
their bitch: “When he asks you, wo, dow: Then 

aLa’/xuwa. 


they ran away. 


A‘lta qjoa’/p ikted’/ktiya takE ateLekpa/na. Take atilga’yuXuit 


Now nearly it will get day then hejumpedatthem. ‘Then they stuck in him 
qota tE’/mtEcX g0 ia/wan. VYakE ka’/nauwe La‘qLaq® até/xax, 
those sticks in his belly. Then all take out he did them, 
LE/KLEK" atci/‘tax. TakE atcLgE’ta. Lax* né/xax. Takk Lap 4a/teax 

break he did them. Then he pursued them. Visible he got. Then find hedidher 
OLa’/xéwicX: “ Qa/xéwa a’LO LEmé/Xana-xé/met?” TakE wo na‘xax. 

their bitch: ‘““ Whither went thy masters?” Then wo shedid. 

TakE ne‘xanko ia/xkéwa. NéXata‘ko, néket Lap a/teax oLa/éXatk. 

Then he ran there. He returned, not find he did their tracks. 

them 
TakE weXt ateo‘1Xam OLA’ xéwicX : “(Qa/xéewa a/LO 
Then again he said to her their bitch: ‘* Whither they went 
LEmé’Xanaxé’met!” Take weXt wo na/xax. IJa/xkéwa né’/xanko. 
thy masters?” Then again. wo she did. Then he ran. 
Naket Lap a/tcax oLa/éXatk. Loni né/xanko. TakE Lap a/teax 
Not find hedidthem theirtracks. Three times he ran. Then find he did 


them 


oLa/éXatk. TakE ateLgE’ta. AtcLgk’ta, kula/i atcLgE’ta. Take 


their tracks. Then he pursued He pursued far he pursued Then 
them. them, them. 
ateikta/o6m iLa/xkun. Atcia/wat. WeXt né/xanko. WeXt é@/Xat 
he reached him theeldestone. He killed him. Again he ran. Again one 
atcikta/Om. WeXt atcia/wat. WeXt né/xanko, wéXt @/Xat atcikta/om. 
hereached him. Again hekilled him. Again he ran, again one he reached him. 
Lla/ktiks atcLo’/téna. A/Ilta ia/mkXa La/wuX ayuko/éetiXt. <A/Ita 
Four he killed them. Now only he the youngest remained. Now 
one 


ne‘qanko2. Takk ayd’/Lxam. A/‘Ita Lap atci/Lax Lq;’éyo/qxut 


he ran. Then he arrived at water. Now find he did him an old man 
Lxa/xpVadt. “Wax na/‘xa iau’a énatai; é@qctxé’Lau teEna’wat. 
he fished with “Pour do me there to other side; the monster it pursues me. 
dipnet. 
Ai’/aq, qa’qacqac.” “Hoha! qa/xéwaL ameEna/qacqac?” ““Ai‘aq, 
Quick, grandfather.” ‘*Hoha! where may be I your grandfather?” “ Quick, 


Wax na/xa, ga‘tata!” “O, qa/xéwaL ameEnda’‘tata?” “Wax na/xa 
pour dome, uncle!” “Oh, where may be I your uncle?” ‘Pour do me 


by 


Ce Coe st) Co OU ee COO 


fe 
(a —) 


een 
Goh NS 


bea 
us 


at jt 
ey 


17 
18 


24 OKULA’M HER MYTH. TTunCLoee 


kapxo!” ‘Hoht’! qa’/xéwaL amEna’px0?” LE/kxéamit Lkéx Léa’‘kil 
elder brother!" ‘ Hohu! where may be I your elder bro- In stern of there a woman 
ther?” canoe was 


go qiX éqj’éyo’qxut. Pan tepdqe LaLa. “A wuska’ wax na'xa 
at that old man. Full boils her body. ‘‘A [exclamation] pour dome 
e/qsiX!” ‘Ho qada niket a/nqaté amEno]Xam?” Alta wax 
father-in-law!’ ‘‘ Ho why not before you said to me?” Now pour 
atea/yax iau’/a @/natai IkEnuwakeod’‘m. “Ai’‘aq maya go tEe’/kXuql. 
hedidhim there to other side the thunderer. * Quick go to my house. 
a/xkati m0’pVaya! a ! a/n Xi O 
la/xkati mo’pVaya!” Take 4a/yup!, ka ma/nXi aLE’/Lxam qoLa 
There enter!” Then he entered, then alittle itarrived at water that 
Lqjéyo’qxut. “TcdXoa amb/L&ElkEl iLa/anLa’wat, qgitq;’éyo’qxut?” 
old man. = Wellt did you see him the one whom I together old men?” 
pursue, 


“Naket ank/LtElkel.” ‘Ai’aq, wax na/xa  iau’a  e/natai! 
“Not I saw him.” “Quick, pour do me then the other side! 
LamgEm0o’ktia Lgk/ciapoL.” “Hkta | niLgeEla’xo Leia’ poi 2” 
I shall pay it to you my hat!” “What shall I do with it a hat?” 
“TamkEmo’ktia ogu’xole.” “E’kta niagEla’Xo ukoleé?” * lamgE- 
‘7 shall pay it to you my cane.” “What shall Ido withit acane?” “T shall 
mo/ktia xig  itea/ok.” “Ekta  nigkEla/x0-y-idk?” “Ted Xoa 
pay it to you this my blanket.” “What shall I do withit a blanket?” * Well, 
camkEm0o/ktia xitik cLa/nict.” A/‘Ita atcié/lot cLa/nict. A/‘Ita god’ye 
I pay it to you this twine.”’ Now he gaveit the twine. Now thus 
to him 


atca/yax ia/auwit. Wok; atea/yax ia‘auwit. A/Ita atcid’Xam: 
he did it his leg. Straight he made it his leg. Now he said to him: 
“Neket manko/tXumita Xak OoOmé/Xole.” Alta né/katé 1a’tauwit. 
‘ Not make stand on me that your cane.” Now he came walk- his leg. 
ing across 


Ka’tsék qgiX @’qxél alta atca-iko’/tXumit uya’/Xolé god ia‘auwit. 
Middle that creek now he made it stand on him his cane on his leg. 
TakE atcE’/xumgq;’dya ia‘auwit. A/Ita ayo/Xuné éqctxé/Lau iau’a 

i 
Then he bent it his leg. Now he drifted the monster there 
ma‘emé. ALO/Xuné Lia/siapoL. “O2kula’‘m émé/xala! Ia’/xkéwa 
down stream. It drifted his hat. “‘Okula’m [waves] will be your There 
name: 


ikxaléLa-itx, ia/xkéwa qameEltci/mlétima. Ma/nix ia’q;’atxal ixEla/xo 


storm, there you will be heard. When ad it will get 
igd‘cax, ka LEmé’siapOL qLtcE’mlétima. 
thesky, then your hat will be heard. 
A‘lta aci/xkO kja uya‘xa IkEnuwaked’m. Acxko’mam,  a/lta 
Now they two went and hisdaughter the thunderer’s. They two reached now 
home their house, 
aLxé'la-it. A’‘Ita niket tqj’éx a’‘teax uya’‘kikala. A/‘Ita Lonas 
they stayed. Now not like he did her his wife. Now I do not 
know 
qa’/nsix aLa/qxoya, a/lta kawe/X naxa‘latck. Nax’0’tom. Qé’xtcé 
how many their sleeps, now early she arose. She went to bathe. Intend 
akLq;’a’x Leta/ok. AtLixania’/kuX. LeéXt Lia/ok, LéEXt Lga/ok 
she pulled it their two’s blanket. He rolled ab asoune One _ihhis blanket, one her blanket 
himself. 
a/xka. A/Ita qansi’X nixa‘latck, a/Ita Loe Léa/kil, 62, t;0’kti 
her. Now how often he arose, now there was a woman, oh, a pretty 
Lea/kil. <A‘Ita asxé/la-it. No’/ponEm. A/lta qé/xtcé ateLq;’a’/x 
woman. Now _ they two stayed. It got dark. Now intend he pulled it 
Leta‘ok. A/lta néket akie‘lutx. Age/nkjémenako. Alta  1e‘lé 
ee ae Now not she gaveittohim. She took revenge on him. Now along time 
anket. 
Vaya’ atxea-it. A‘Ita tq;éx aga/yax itca/k-ikala. 
good they stayed. Now like she did him her husband. 


A‘lta qa’/nsix é@/kolé nékElo’/ya qiX eq;’éyo’qxut. Ne’k-im: 
Now how often whale he went to take that old man. He said: 


“BOAS OKULA’M MYTH. 25 


‘‘Nixéld’/texa éteiqsiX !” ‘“Naket, niket, naiket qa/nsix 
“T shall look at him my father-in-law.” “No, no ; never 
aqixé/lotexax.” Kala‘Ikuilé né/xax. ‘Qa/‘toXui nixéld’texa!” <A/‘Ita 
he is looked at.” Scold he did. “Must I look at him!” Now 
ayo’/La-it; atcixé/l0tex, ska ma/nxi ka _ atcé”*ElkEl @Xt é’kolé. 
he stayed ; he looked at him, and a little then he saw him one whale. 
A‘lta aya-i’La-it uya/nXcin, ska ma/nxi qgé/xtcé atcid/latck, takE 
Now he went into net his dipnet, and a little intend he lifted it, then 
atso/pEna xiX é/kolé, atcea’/kpEnako wuyaé’/nXcin. NékXiket 
he jumped that whale, he jumped out of it his dipnet. He looked 
jau’a ma’Lxolé. Nau’i-y-i/gilgct né/xax. ALOoitXua/yutcd Lqa/kxul. 
there inland. Atonce lightning it got. It rained down hail. 
WeXt é@kun né’/té @/kolé. TakE weXt atcio’tipa. Take weXt 
Again one more came whale. Then again hedippedhimup. ‘Then again 
gé’xteé atcidatek. Taki weXt atca/kpEnako uya/nXcin. A/Ita 
intend he lifted him. Then again he jumped out of it his dipnet. Now 
niXE’LXa, a/Ita Laqa/kxul aLi’xax. Alta né’xko, néXk0d’mam. 
he grew angry, now hail it did. Now he went home, he reached his 
: home. 


Nau’i atea’/xaluketgo uya’nXcin. Ated’pa_ ia/qsiX, atcd/skam 


At once he threw it down his dipnet. He went out his son-in-law, he took it 
ugo/LXatsX. A/‘lta a’yo gd tqa/nake. A‘Ita Lé@el A’teax 
coal. Now he went to a rock. Now black he made it 
oya’‘tspux. A‘lta, _itexa’x - né'xax, ika/amtq  né‘’xax. AdZlia 
his forehead. Now — wind it got, southwest wind it got. Now 
atcto/pewé ta’/yaqL iqj’éyo’qxut. Qé’xtcé atctukola’/kux, a/nqaté 
he blew them his house the old man’s. Intend he fastened them on long ago 
away roof, ; 
atctupe’XoXoée. “QO, ac, @XtkinEmam imé‘k-‘ikal. Miola’ma 
he had blown them away. “O, daughter, go and look for your husband. Tell him 
wu’xé a/lta_ tcinxeéla‘teaya.” A‘Ita no’ya uya‘xa. Lap aga’/yax 
to-morrow now he shall look at me.”’ Now she went hisdaugh- Find she did him 
ter. 


itca‘kXikala: “O, imé’qsiX ta/yaqL LE/KLEk" né‘/xax.  Ixa/xo-il 


her husband: “Oh, your ek his house broken became. He said much 
in-law 
wu'xé a/lta mixéla’/texaya.” A/‘Ita atcLO’skam Lteuqg®, nixEmé’/nako. 
to-morrow now you shall look at him.” Now he took it water, he washed his face. 
A‘Ita LO né/xaue, Alta aci’/xko -y-uya/kXikal. Alta ackLukola/ko 
Now calm it got. Now they two his wife. Now they two fastened 
went home boards on roof 


tE’/LaqL. ‘Wu/xé = nai‘ka-y-i/qsiX no/Lxaié. MeEnxélo’/toxaié.” 


their house. ‘To-morrow I father-in- I shall go to You shall look at me.” 
law! watel. 
Ne’kteukté, takE A@/yuLx éia’/qsiX, ska ma/nxi ka né'té éXt 
’ y] 
It got day, then he wentto his son-in- and a little then hecame one 
water law, 
é/kolé. TakE ayayi’La-it uya/nXcin. A’‘Ita_ atcid/latek. A/Ita 
whale. Then he went into net his dipnet. Now he lifted him. Now 
atcé/xalukctgo ma/Lxdle qiX e/kole. “Hoho’! iteci’qsiX, t’a/qéa 
he threw him down inland that whale. Hoho! my son-in-law, just as 
nai‘ka itei‘qsiX.” Take né’Xko ia/qsiX. “E/ka nai‘ka itcei/qsiX 
I my son-in-law.” Then he went his father- ““Thus as I my son-in- 
home in-law. law 


ka a/nqate ngoLéJEXEmk.” 


then long ago I got a person.” 
[when] 
A‘lta aga/wan naxa/lax uya/kXikal. Leé ka nakxa/to. Smokst 

Now _— pregnant she got his wife. Long then she gave birth. Totwo 
aksaxu’to. A/Ita atcid/‘IXam ia/qsiX: ‘“Ai’aq, ai’aq, Lga/Emam 
she gave birth Now he said to him his father- “Quick, quick, goto take them 

to two. in-law: ve 
Lléq;’am; ka  nitsEnd’/kstX  atgE/yémocXam.” A/2yoptek 


wolves; when I small they played with me.” He went inland 


an T= eee 


oO w 


26 
27 


10 


15 


16 


17 


18 


19 


20 


21 


23 


26 OKULA’M HER MYTH. eee 


atcugo‘IEmam sm0/kst cLé/qj’am. Atei’ctitk"y sm6’kst cLé’qj’am. 


he went to take them two wolves. He carried them two wolves. 
two two here 
Aci‘tk"Ljam g6 tE’/LaqL, atcilXa/kXué qiX iqj’éyo’qxut. A/lta 
Hecarriedthem to his house, hethrew them down that old man. Now 
home before him 
acgia/qcimEnIL, acgixkjayo/kux. ‘“AtgEnxLE’/]Xta-it! ai’aq, ai/aq, 
they two bit him much, they byeporeg him ‘“They forgot me! quick, quick, 
often. 
cE/k"ya!” Take atci/ctuk"7; weXt atcalo’kctxam. A/‘lta weXt 
carry them Then hecarriedthemtwo; again he went and carried Now again 
two!” them two back. 
aLxé'la-it. TaLqté aLxé‘la-it. “Ai/aq, ai‘aq, ska‘Emam _ s’i/isxut 
he stayed. Along time he stayed. “Quick, quick, goandtake themtwo two black 
bears 
-SgE/xémusXEma.” TakE a/yt ia/qsiX. Take atci‘kqam Géi’tsxut. 
my two playfellows.” Then he went his son- Then he carried the black 
in-law. him bear. 
A’yup!, atcilXa’/kXué. TakE atcit’/egam  éq;’@y0’qxut gqdcta 
He entered, he threw him down. Then he took him the old man those 
two 
si/tsxut. A/Ita tE’/qtEq asgaéa’/yax iau’a, acgixa’Juketgux, iau’/a 
two black Now clap they two did there, they two threw him there 
bears. him down, 
acgixa/luketgux. ‘“Ai/aq, ci/k"qa, ci/k"qa; a‘lta ckinXE/LEluX.” 
they two threw him “Quick, carry them carrythemtwo; now they two do not know 
down. two, me.” 
Alta atealo‘ketxam ia/qsiX atei/ectuk"L. NiXko’mam ia/qsiX. 
Now he carried them two his son- he carried them He arrived at his his son-in- 
on his back in-law two. house law. 
A'lta weXt aLxé/la-it. Alta atcid‘1Xam _ ia/qsiX: “Ai‘aq, 
Now again they stayed. Now he said to him to He son- “Quick, 
in-law: 
ai‘ag, ska‘lEmam = sca/yim.” A/‘Ita a/yo ia/qsiX atciko/lEmam 
quick, goand take them two _ two grizzly Now he went hisson-in- he went and took 
bears.” law them two 
sca‘yim. A‘lta  a’yo 1a/qsiX: “Avyamtga‘lemam !” Alta 
two grizzly bears. Now he went his son-in-law: ““T come to fetch you two!” Now 
atei/etukT ateo‘/k"yjam god tE/LaqL. Aia/skop!. TakE 
he carried them two he carried them to his house. He entered. Then 


to the house 
atcilXa/kXué ia’qsiX. A! a/Ita acki0/péqLa ia/qsiX. PaL ka‘nauweé 
be threw them his father- A! now they twoscratched hisfather- Full all 
down to in-law. him in-law. 


a‘yaLéa Léa/owilkt. “A, ci/k°qa  i’qsiX! A‘Ita ckinxE/LElux.” 

his body blood. “A. carry them two son-in-law! Now they two do not 
know me.” 

A‘Ita atci/ctuky ia/qsiX atcaalo’/ketqam. Alta weXt aLxé’la-it. 

Now he carried them his son-in- he carried them two Now again he stayed. 
two law on his back. 

Lelé ka weXt atcid/lXam ia’/qsiX: ‘“‘Ai/aq, ska/lEmam skoayawa/.” 

Along then again he said to nim _ his son-in- “Quick, goand take two panthers!’’ 
time law: them two 


Taki 4/y6 ia/qsiX. Ayit/2ptck, takE atcd/lXam: ‘“Iamtka/lEmam! ” 
Then he went his son- He wentinland, then he said to them “T came to take you 
in-law. two: two!” 
Alta atei/ctok"7, atco/k"7am god tE’/LaqL. Atcixa/lakLé, aya’skop!. 
Now he carried them hecarried them to his house. He opened the door, he entered. 
two to house 


TakE atcilXa/kxue ia/qsiX. A/Ita acgidpé’qLa. PaL ne’xax 
Then he threw them his father- Now they two scratched Full got 
down to in-law. him. 


Lea/owilkt ia/qsiX a/yaLta. “A, ci/k"7a, i’qsiX. Alta ckinxE/LElux.” 
blood his father- his body. “A, carry them son-in- Now they two do not 
in-law two, law. know me.” 
A‘lta atei/ctok"7 ia’/qsiX. Acalo’ketxam. 


Now he carried them his son-in He carried them on 
two law. his back. 


N ait 
mo OKULA M MYTH. 2¢ 
“Tea, @/qsiX! LEx  txkeala/xoma  0’mtEcX.” A‘lta  a/cto 
VWell; son-in-law! split we two will go and a tree.” Now they two 
do it for us two went 
ia/qsiX. A/‘Ita tsEx askea/lax 0/mtEcX. TsEx acxa/lax 0’mtEcX 
his son-in-law. Now split they two did it a tree. Split they two did it a tree 
for them two 
aci/tkum. Atcid’1Xam ia/qsiX: ‘Ni/Xua mxal’a/yako. 
half. He said to him to his son-in-law: “Well, put yourself between 
them. 
Ayi'La-it kja mxal’a/yakué!” TakE ayayi/La-it ia/qsiX. 
Sit down in and put yourself between them!"" Then he sat down his son-in- 
there law. 
TakeE atcta/wilx't cta/xatcadx. TakE Lu’/XLuX atci’tax ka/nauwé. 
Then hepushedaside the two wedges. Then break he did them all. 
Ayauwea/yakuit ia/qsiX. TakE atcié/taqL, néxko. Tu/Lqteé 
He enclosed him his son-in-law. Then he left him, he went home. Long 
a’yo. A/lta god’yé atci'tax tid’pote. TakE tsEx atcxa’lax 
he went. Now thus he did them his arms. Then break he did it for him 
kaX 0/m*EcX. TakE atca/kxoné Aa/natal, ga-y-id’‘yam = god 
that tree. Then he carried it on one side, then he arrived at 


his shoulder 
tE’/LaqL, takE  atcea/xkalukctgo. Go2m née’/xau. TakE ay0od’pa 


their house, then he threw it down. Gum it made. Then he went out 
ia/qsiX: “Oho! itei’qsiX, t’a/qé nai‘ka_  itci’qsiX.” A/‘lta 
his father- “Oho! my son-in-law, justas a my son-in-law.” Now 
in-law: 
aLxéla-it. TakE cta’qo-iL aci‘xax  cia‘xa. 
they stayed. Then large [dual] they two his two sons. 
became 


Take atcid’lXam _  ia/qsiX: “Ai’‘aq ikod/lEmam @’tcipkjala g6 

Then he said to him to his son-in-law: “Quick, go and take it the hoops at 
tid/LEma iké’x.” Takk @’yo ia’qsiX; kula’i a’/yo. TakE ayd’yam. 
supernatural itis.” - Then he went his son-in- far he went. Then he arrived. 

beings law; 

A'lta goyée’ tixLa/kot té1XEm. Alta ka/tsEk qExukskoa‘liL 

Now thus they stood in people. Now in middle it was rolled often 
circle to and fro 


go qo’tac te’‘1XEm. A/‘Itaayo’La-it, texap né/xax. NaponEm. Takk 
at those people. Now he stayed, hesitating he was. It grew dark. Then 
atcikpa’/na; qxuL atcé/lax ia’pote. Alta né’xenako  atciunko’mit. 
he jumped at it; hang he diditonit his arm. Now he ran, he carried it away, 
A‘lta atigE’ta ka’/nauwe; a/lta tkjéwaXkE/ma atgB’tax. Qaxé’/Ltxa 


Now they pursued all; now torches they made them. How 
him 


kula/i aqigE’ta, takE° naxa’/nkikEna uya/kikal. Take akeo/lXam 
far he was pursued, then she thought his wife. Then — she said to them 
two 


ega’Xa: ‘“Ai‘aq, La/qlLaq mtgE/Lax LEmta’/xqacqac.” Alta 
hertwochildren: ‘Quick, strike you two do him your grandfather.” Now 
ackto/egam tE/mfEcX, a/Ita La/qLaq acgE/ctax Lsta/xqacqac. <A/lta 
they two took them sticks, now strike they did him their grandfather. Now 
aLxElgé’Lxal Leta/xqacqac. Ala’xti aLxa/wiyuec. A/‘lta acta/auwiLxt. 
he cried their two’s grandfather. Then he urinated. Now it rained. 
Takk tceXE/ptcXEp nox6x tid’/LEma tga‘/kjéwaXEma. Takk 
Then extinguished got the supernatural their torches. Then 
: beings 
néXatgo/mam. 
he came home. 


Alta weXt aLxéla-it id’/Lqte. A/lta weXt né/k‘im iq;’éy0’qxut: 
Now again they stayed long. Now again he said the old man: 
“Ai/aq, ai’aq, tka/lEmam tid’/LEma_ tk/gaqjpas.” A/‘Ita nixa/It- 
“Quick, quick, gototake them the supernatu- their targets.” Now he made 
ral beings 
Xuitck. Alta a/yo. A’y62; ayd’/yam go tid’/LEma. A/Ita wa/q; pas 
himself Now hewent. Hewent; hearrived at supernatural Now target 


ready. beings. 


12 


28 OKULA’M HER MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


ugo/‘kKXuiX. A‘Ita teXEp né/xax. NapodnEm ka atcto’cgam. 
they played. Now hesitating he got. It got dark then he took them. 
Nixa/tenko. Alta atgétaa tid‘LEma. Wax atgh’tax tga’/k;éwaXEma. 
Hecamerunning. Now they pur- thesupernat- Light they did their torches. 
sued him ural beings. them 


A‘lta nixatE’nkd hei2! A/‘Ita agé/tuwa. Qaxé’2 ka naxa/nkikEna-y- 
Now hecamerunning héi! Now hewaspursued. Sometime then she thought 

iya/kikala. Akcd’1Xam  cga’/xa: ‘“Ai’aq, La/qLaq mtk’/qxax 

his wife. She said tothem hertwochildren: ‘Quick, strike you two do 
him 

mta/xqacqac. A/‘lta acto/egam tE’/mfEcX. Alta La’/qLaq acga/yax 


your two selves’ Now _ they two took sticks. Now strike they two did 
: him 


grandfather.” them 


Leta/xqacqac. A‘lta acixElgé/Lxala Leta/xqacqac. A‘lta akcElgé/cgam 
their two selves’ Now they hurt him their [dual] grand- Now she helped them 
grandfather. father {dual} 


Leta/naa, A/2lta nixa/wiyuc iq;’éyd’qxut. A‘Ita acta/auwilXt. 
their analy Now he urinated the old man. Now it rained. 
mother. 


TeXE'pteXEp  no’/x6x tga’/kj éwaXEma tid‘LEma. Alta 

Extingnished they got their torches the supernatural beings. Now 
nixatEnko/mam. AtetE’/tk"ya tE’gaq; pas. 

he came home. He carried them the targets. 

A'lta aLxé@/la-it id’Lqté. Atcd’lXam uya’/kilala: “A/‘Ita nd’ya, 

Now he stayed long time. He said to her to his wife: “Now Ishall go. 

No’ya, kula’1 nod/ya.” A/‘lta nixa/ltXuitek. Aktd’cgam tia/ktéma. 
I shall go, far Ishall go.’ Now he made himself ready. Hetook them his ornaments, 
Atixa‘lax ka/nauwe2. Atctd’/egam tia/xalaitan m6/keti nauwe’k; ce. 


He put them all. He took them his arrows two [quivers] full. 
on himself 


A‘lta a’yo. A’y02, kula/i a’yo. A‘Ita atcika/Om é@/1Xam, qui/num 


Now hewent. He went, far he went. Now he reached it. a town, five 
cia/xilxé @1Xam. A’ytp! ké’mk-ite gd gitano’/kstX ton. Alta 
its blocks town. He entered the last at having smallness house. Now 


[pl.]} 
am0o’‘ketiks oxoela/itX tqj’éyo’qtiks. A/‘Ita a/yop! gd qodcta 


two there were old ones. Now he entered at those 

4 [dual] 

eq; éyo’/qxut. “O, kulk’ts teLXgo/mita iq;é/sqés Lka/nax.” TakE 
two old ones. “Oh, once more _ he will make him blue-jay a chief.” Then 

unhappy 
néxa/nkikEna iq;é@/sqés: “LgdLélEXEmk Lté/mam = go-y-uk0/lXul 
he thought blue-jay: ‘‘A person he arrived at mice 
tE’ctaqL.” TakE a’yo iq!é’sqés nigé’/kctam. A/‘lta nau/itka 
their [dual] Then he went blue-jay he went to see him. Now indeed! 
house.” 

Lka/nax Loe. TakE né’Xtako  iqjé’/sqés. TakE  atcid//Xam 
a chief there was. Then he returned blue-jay. Then he said to him 
ia/xakjEmana iqjé/sqés: = Lka/nax Lté‘mam. LEmgé’tiam. 

his chief blue-jay: ‘\A chief came. He came to play 
with you. _ 
Wa’‘qjpas mtxcga’ma.” TakE weXt né/XtakoO iqjé/sqés: “A 
Target you two will play Then again he returned blue-jay : “Ah 
together.” 
tcimaXué’mut ntca/xakjEmana. Wa/q;pas mtxcga/‘ma.” Takk 
he wishes to play our chief. Target you two will Then 
with you play together.” 
né‘kim: “O.” Né/Xtako iqjé/sqés. “qiX ika‘nax né‘k-im: 
he said: “Oh.” He returned blue-jay. “That chief he said: 
‘O2” TakE weXt né/Xtako iqjé/sqés: ‘“Ai‘aq, ai’aqg, mo’/Lxa 
‘Oh!’” Then again he returned blue-jay: “Quick, quick, go to the 
beach 
Lgma/xo-ilL ka/nax.” TakE atcto’egam tia’/xalaitanEma iqjé’/sqgés 
he said often to the chief.” Then he took them his arrows blue-jay 


you 


MBOAS OKULA’M MYTH. 29 


ia/xak;Emana. TakE a’/yuLx iqjé/sqés ia/xak;Emana. TakE weXt 


his chief. Then he went to blue-jay his chief. Then again 
_ the beach 
né/xanko iq;é’/sqés: “A take a/yuLx ntca/xak;Emana.” TakE @/yuLx 
he ran blue-jay : “Ah then he went to our chief.” Then he went to 
the beach the beach 
qiX ika‘nax. A‘lta acxE/cgam waq;pas. A/Ita aqa/yuL xix: é/Xat 
that chief. Now they two played target. Now it waswon that one 
together from him 
ika/nax. N@kiL iqjé’/sqés 1a/xakjEmana. Aqté’/xoL  tia/ktema 
chief, He won blue-jay his chief. They were won his ornaments 
from him 
ka/nauwe2. Aqté’xoL tia’/xalaitanEma. AqLé/xoL La/yaqso, aqé/xoL 
all. They were won his arrows. It was won his hair, it was won 
from him from him from him 
a‘yaqtq, aqé/xoL ia’pote, ka’namokst tia’pote aqté’xoL. Aqté’xoL 
his head, it was won his arm, both his arms were won from They were won 
from him him. from him 
tia/‘wit ka‘/namoékst. A/‘lta aqiXgo’mit. Lag® aqLé@/xax La/yaqso. 
his legs both. Now hewasmadeunhappy. Cutoff it was done his hair. 
A‘lta aqiupo’nit go tXut. A/Ita pod/lakli acto/iX q6’eta cko’/1XOl. 
Now he washung sin smoke. Now dark they went those mice [dual]. 


{dual} always [dual] 


AckLéloktxax Lteug. Acgilfé/mamx ka/nauwé-y- 6’pol é@/ka. 
They Epa reught it to water. They two gave him every night ‘thus. 
im to eat 


EXt igé@’tak k,a/ya  né/xax. Ack/k'im — cia’/xa: “ QOi 
One year nothing he got. They two said his two sons: ‘Let us 


atxogid’/xtkinEmam i/txam.” A/‘Ita = acxa/ItXuitck. Acktod’/cgam 
we two gotolook for him our([dual] father.” Now they two made them- They two took 
selves ready. them 
teta’ktema. Ackto/cgam tE/ctaq; pas. Ackto/cgam cta‘xalaitan. A/‘Ita 
their [dual] orna- They two took their targets. They twotook their [dual] arrows. Now 
ments. them them 


a’‘cto. A’cto, kula‘’i a/ctO. Lap acga/yax é@/lXam. Adé’2 ia/aitcLx 
they two Theytwo far theytwo Find they did it a town. Ah, large 
went. went, went. 
xik @lXam. “LO/nas yaXko’k Ltxa’mama Loc.” A/‘ctop! gd qd’gd 
that town. ‘Perhaps ~° there our [dual] father is.” They on at that [pl.] 
entered 


itand/kstX tYor. A‘Ita amo/ketiks Oxoela’-itX  tqj’éyo’qtiks. 
i 1 

having smallness house. Now two there were _ old ones. 

“Ana/2 qgéXana/Xemet! qa/xewa amte/mam?” “A, éntam 


“Anah! our [dual] two chiefs! whence’ did you [dual] come?” ‘Ath, oo [cnet 
ather 


ntgid’/xtkin.” “Kulée‘te tceuXgod/mita tkana/Xémet — iqj’é/sqés. 
we two search for ‘* Once more he will make two chiefs blue-jay. 
him.”’ unhappy 


A’nqaté Lé’/Xat Lka’/nax aLté’‘mam. AqLXgo/mit; gd tXut aLupd/nit. 
Long ago one a chief he came. He was made un- ‘in smoke he put him 
happy; up. 
Qéné/qetxEn ne/taika; ntkLElté/mEniL Ltcuq; nLgil*é/mEniL 
We two made him we two; we two give it to him water; we two give it to 
happy 1o eat him to eat 


iLbxa/lEmax. A/‘lta kjé sia/xdst; Lk;’0’pLkjop aci’xax.” La2 ka 
food. Now nothing his eyes; sunk they got.” Some then 
time 


nixa/‘nkikEna iqj@/sqés: “TakE aLté’/mam Lka/nax go6-y-uk0/lXul 
he thought blue-jay : “Then it came a chief at the mice 
th’/ctaqL.” TakE né/xanko, nigé’/ketam iq;é’sqés. A/Ita amo/kctike 
Sa [dual] Then he ran, he went to see blue-jay. Now two 
ouse ” 


tkana’/xémet Oxoéla/itX. Take né/Xtako igé’/sqés. TakE atcid/1Xam 
ai chiefs there were. Then he returned  blue-jay. Then he said to him 
ia/XakjEmana: “Am0/ketike Oxoéla/itX tkana’xemet go cko/lXul 

to his chief: “Two there are chiefs at the twomice 


10 
11 


bo 


24 


—/ BUREAU © 
30 OKULA’'M HER MYTH. EERO 


tE’ctaqL. Cogé’tiam.” ‘O,” né/k-im ia/xak; Emana ie ee TakE 


their [dual] They two came SQ ira said his chief blue-jay’s. Then 
house. to play.” 
weXt né/XtakdO iqjé’sqés. “A tcimtaXué/muL ntca/xak; Emana. 
again he returned blue-jay. ‘‘Ah, he wishes to play with our chief. 
you two 
Wa’q;pas mexega‘ma.” Néket qa/da acgid’lXam. TakE wexXt 
Target you will play to- Not [any] how they two spoke Then again 
gether.” to him. 
né/xanko iqé/sqés. Atcid’Xam ia/xak;Emana: ‘ M0’/Lxa!” Lo/ni 
he ran blue-jay. He said to him his chief: “Go tothe beach!” Three 
times 
né/Xtako iqe’sqés. Néket qa’da aqid/lXam. Go la/kti né/Xtako 
he returned blue-jay. Not [any] how wasspokento There fourtimes he returned 
him. 
ka atea/yuket qiX iX gE’cfax. Aqa’‘yuket iqé/sqés. 
then he looked at him that youngest one. He was looked at blue-jay. 
Nau/i aLE/XLXa_ ka/nauwé La/yaqso. Né/Xtako, nixilk7e’teko 
At once it caught fire all his hair. He returned he told him 
ia/xakjEmana: ‘A, Oxoé/‘ma tkana’‘ximet tgate/mam. Aqa/nuket 
his chief: ‘ACh, others the chiefs they ceme. I was looked at 
xix: O/kuk, ka/nauwé alE’/XLXa LE’kxakso. Ma/Lxa acgEno/lXam.” 
that there, all it caught fire my hair. Go [dual] they twosaid to me.” 


to the beach 
Li2, a/Ita a/ctoLx. A/‘Ita Oxoé/neXat ta’‘yaqjpas: “Q’axtci’/Lx 
Some now they two went Now they stood in the his targets: ‘* How bad 
time to the beach. ground 


tik tE’qj;pas!” Lu/XLuX acgkh’/tax qo’ta tk’qj;pas. Acgux0‘k Xue, 
these _ targets!’ Pull out they twodid those targets. They two threw 
them them away. 


“xitek tk/ntaqj;pas nE‘taika tgtj0’/kti.” Acgd’Xuina_ tk/ctaq; pas. 
“These our [dual] targets our [dual] good.” Theytwoplaced their [dell tar- 
them in ground gets. 


Lga/kt;’oma qod’ta tH’q;pas. <A’‘lta aLxE/cgam wa/qjpas. A/Ita 
They shone those targets. Now they played target. Now 
aqa/yuL iq;é/sqés ia/xakjEmana. Aqté/xoL ia/xakjEmana iqjé/sqés 
it was won blue-jay his chief. They were won his chief blue-jay 

from him from him 


tia’/ktéma ka/nauwe. A‘lta aqté/xoL tia/l1Xama ka/nauwé2. Acga/yuL 
his ornaments all. Now they were won his people all. They two won 
from him from him 


Leta/mama. <Aqa‘yul, iqé/sqés. A/Ita aLiXa/modtk  La/yaqso. 
their [dual] father. He was won blue-jay. Now he betted it his hair. 
from him 


AqLé/xoL La‘yéqso. NiXa/motk a/yaqtq, mniXa‘motk _ tia’pote. 
It was won his hair. He betted it his head, he betted him [them] his arms. 
from him 


Aqté/xoL tia/poté. AtiXa/motk tia/*owit. Aqte’xol ka’nauwe. 


They were won his arms. They betted them his legs. They were won all. 
trom kim from him 
A‘lta aqd/egam lakt ukjuna/‘tan. Agqa-ila/wit g0-y-uya’ts; puX 
Now they were taken four potentilla roots. They were put at his forehead 
into him 
ukjuna/tan. Agd/egam ugué/luXteutk, aqa-ila/wit ya‘kwa ka‘nauwe 
the potentilla They were taken pieces of flint, they were put here all 
roots. into him 
a/yaLfa. AqLO/egam ptciX LE/LuwEIkLuwElk. PtciX aqa‘yax 
his body. It was taken green mud. Green it was made 
ia/wan; ptceiX aq@a/yax ia/k0tcX. 
his belly; green it wasmade his back. 
A‘lta aqiuXtké/mit: “ IkaLé/nax imé/xala. Na’ket muXugo‘mita 
Now he was thrown into ‘‘Greon sturgeon your name Not you will make them 
the water and he swam: will be. unhappy 


tkana/xémet.”  Aqit/cgam igé/sqes. Agé/xaluketgo: ‘“Iqj’e’sqes” 
chiefs.”’ He was taken blue-jay. He was thrown away: “Blue-jay 


peer OKULA’M MYTH—TRANSLATION. 31 


imé’xala. Niket qa/nsiX muXugo’/mita tkana/xémet. Ka/nauwé 


your name Not ever you will make them chiefs. Every 
will be unhappy 
kta, ma/nix i’/kta ia/q;atxala ixa/x0, mxa/xo-ilma_ wa/tsEtsEtsE- 
thing, if thing bad will get, youwillalways say  wa’tsetsetse- 
tsEtsEtsE! O wLeEmta/xauyam! Ka/nauwé i’‘kta a/Lqi mtgia’xo 
tsetsetse! Oh, your [dual] pity! Every thing lateron you two will 
eat it 
it/’o/kti. Ka’nauwe tkoxoé/‘ma  mtkta’‘x0.” TakE aciti’/ecgam 
i 5 
good. All berries you two will Then they two took 
eat them.” him 
Leta‘mama. Alta acga/yuk"y7 gd Ltcug. A/lta pd’pdo acga’yax; 
their [dual] father. Now they two carried to water. Now blow they two did 
im him; 
né‘kiket. <A/‘Ita aLi/xko. 
he saw. Now they went home. 
Translation. 


Once upon a time there were five brothers. The four older ones 
went hunting elk every day and left the youngest one at home. Their 
house was full of meat and of tallow. Once upon a time the youngest 
brother felt lonesome, and said: “O, I wish he would come, the Glut- 
ton, and eat all the meat.” Four days he continued to say so, then he 
heard a noise like the shaking of rattles at the door. Now a person 
appeared who was so large that his blanket consisted of two elk-skins. 
It had a fringe of elk-hoofs. He entered, sat down, and said: “O, 
grandson, lam hungry.” The boy arose and gave him some meat and 
tallow. When he looked the stranger had eaten it all. He gave him 
more, and when he looked again it had all disappeared. The whole 
day long he gave him meat and tallow. In the evening his brothers 
came home and brought a fresh supply of meat. When they saw what 
had happened they said to him: “What did you do? How did the evil 
Spirit come here?” The boy replied, “I felt lonesome, and said: ‘O, 
I wish he would come, the Glutton, and eat all the meat.” “Oh, you 
fool, certainly the monster will eat us.” They fed him all night until 
sunrise. They continued to feed him the whole day. Then the meat 
was at an end. The youngest brother said to the monster: “ What 
will our grandfather eat next? There are only skins left.” The mon- 
ster replied: ““What shall I eat, grandchildren, now there are only 
skins and you.” “What does he say?” ‘Now there are only skins 
and you,’ he says.” “Speak to him again.” ‘What will our grand- 
father eat next? There are only skins left.” The monster replied: 
“What shall I eat, grandchildren, now there are only skins and you.” 
“What does he say?” ‘Now there are only skins and you,’ he says.” 
“Speak to him again.” ‘ What will our grandfather eat next? There 
are only skins left.” The monster replied: “ What shall I eat, grand- 
children, now there are only skins and you.” ‘ What does he say?” 
«Now there are only skins and you,’ he says.” Now they began to 
understand him. They boiled skins and gave them tohim. For a long 
time he continued to eat and it grew dark again. Then they dug a 


bo 


(1) 


32 OKULA M HER MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


hole in the ground, sharpened some arrow-wood, which they placed 
upright at the place where they used to sleep, and then escaped through 
the hole which they had dug. At a distance from the house they came 
out of the hole. They left their bitch at the entrance to the hole and 
said to her: “If the monster asks you which way we have gone, 
point with your head another way and call ‘Wo’.” Then they ran 
away. 

When the day began to dawn the monster awoke and made a jump 
at where he believed the brothers to be; then he fell on the sharp sticks 
which pierced his belly. He pulled them out of his body, broke them, 
and saw that the brothers had escaped through the hole. He followed 
them, and when he came to the outlet of the hole, he found the bitch. 
He asked: ‘“ Which way went your masters?” She replied: ‘‘Wo,” 
pointing with her head in a direction which they had not taken. He 
pursued them. But after a while, when he did not find their tracks, he 
turned back. Then again he said to the bitch: ‘‘ Which way went 
your masters?” Shereplied: *‘ Wo,” pointing with her head in a diree- 
tion which they had not taken. He pursued them, but he did not find 
their tracks and turned back. Three times he pursued them, then he 
found their tracks which he followed. He followed them a long dis- 
tance, and finally overtook the eldest brother. Hekilled him. He ran 
on and overtook the next one, whom he also killed. He ran on and 
killed one more. Thus he overtook and killed the four eldest brothers. 
Now the youngest only was left. He fled, and arrived at a river where 
he found an old man, the Thunderer, who was fishing with a dipnet. 
He said, “Take me across; the monster pursues me. Quick, quick, 
grandfather!” ‘“Hohoo, whois your grandfather?” ‘ Quick, quick, 
take me across, uncle.” ‘Hohoo, who is your uncle?” “Take me 
across, elder brother.” ‘‘Hohoo, who is your elder brother?” In the 
stern of the canoe there was an old woman whose body was full of 
scabs. Now the young man said, ‘‘O, please take me across, father-in- 
law.” ‘Ho, why did you not say so before?” Then he took him 
across. ‘Quick, quick, go to my house and enter!” Then he entered 
and the old man stayed in his canoe. After a little while the monster 
arrived at the river and said to the old man, ‘‘Did you see the one 
whom I pursue?” “I did not see him.” ‘Quick, quick, take me 
across; I will give you my hat in payment.” ‘What shall I do with a 
hat?” “Twill give you my cane.” ‘What shall I do with a cane?” 
‘7 will pay you with my blanket.” ‘What shall I do with a blanket?” 
‘‘T will give you this twine.” This he accepted. Then the Thunderer 
stretched his leg across the river, and said: ‘‘ Walk across over my leg, - 
but take care that you do not strike it with your cane.” Now the 
monster walked over his leg. When he was in the middle of the river 
he struck it with his cane. Then the Thunderer bent his leg, the monster 
fellinto the water and drifted down toward thesea. His hat fell down, 
and drifted down after him. Then the Thunderer said: “ Okula/‘m 


Recs OKULA’M MYTH—TRANSLATION. 33 


(noise of surf) will be thy name; only when the storm is raging you 
will be heard. When the weather is very bad your hat will also be 
heard.” 

Now the Thunderer and his daughter went home. They lived there 
for some time. The young man did not like his wife. After several 
days she arose early and went to bathe. When she tried to touch her 
husband he rolled his blanket about himself. They had each a sepa- 
rate blanket. After several days he rose, then he saw that she had 
become a beautiful woman. Now they continued to live there. It grew 
dark. Now when he tried to touch her she rolled her blanket around 
herself. She took revenge on him. But after awhile they began to 
like each other. 

The Thunderer used to go whaling every day, and the young man 
said: “I shall look on when my father-in-law goes whaling.” “No, no; 
nobody ever looks at him when he goes whaling.” He got angry and 
said: “I must see him.” Now after awhile he looked at him. Soon he 
saw a whale which went into the dipnet which the Thunderer held. 
The latter lifted it, but the whale jumped over the rim of the net. The 
Thunderer looked toward the land, and at once there was thunder, 
lightning, and hail. Another whale entered his dipnet and he lifted it, 
but when he did so the whale jumped out of the net. Then the Thun- 
derer got angry, and it began to hail and to storm. He went home and 
threw down his dipnet. Then his son-in-law left the house, took some 
coal, and went to arock. Heblackened his forehead and soon a south- 
west wind arose which blew away the old man’s house. He tried to 
fasten the boards to the roof, but was unable todo so. Then the Thun- 
derer said to his daughter: ‘Oh, child, go and look for your husband. 
Tel] him to-morrow he may look atsme when I go whaling.” His daugh- 
ter went and found her husband. She said: “Oh you destroyed your 
father-in-law’s house. He says to-morrow you may look at him when 
he catches whales.” Then the young man took some water and washed 
his face. It became calm. He went home with his wife and helped 
the old man fasten the boards to the roof. He said to his father-in-law: 
“To-morrow I shall go down to the beach and you shall see me ecatch- 
ing whales.” On the following morning they went down to the beach 
together. After a little while a whale entered the dipnet. The young 
man lifted it and threw the whale ashore. Then the Thunderer said: 
“‘Hohoo, my son-in-law, you are just as I was when I was a young 
man.” 

Now the Thunderer’s daughter became pregnant. After awhile she 
gave birth to two children. Then the old man said to his son-in-law: 
“ Quick, quick, go and catch two wolves; I used to play with them when 
Iwas young.” He went to the woods and caught two wolves which he 
carried to his father-in-law’s house. He threw them down at his father- 
in-law’s feet and they bit him all over and hauled him about. He cried: 
“Oh they have forgotten me; quick, quick, carry them back.” The 

BULL T=20——3 


34 OKULA'M HER MYTH. [eranerdes 


young man took them and carried them back. After awhile the Thun- 
derer said: ‘*Go quick and catch two bears; I used to play with them 
when I was young.” Then his son-in-law went and caught two black 
bears. He carried them to the house of his father-in-law and threw 
them at his feet. Then they took hold of him, struck him with their 
paws, and threw him about in the house. ‘“ Oh,” he cried, “carry them 
back, carry them back, they do not remember me.” The young man ¢ar- 
ried them back. Again after awhile the Thunderer said: “ Go quick and 
catch two grizzly bears; I used to play with them when I was young.” 
The young man went into the woods, and when he found the grizzly 
bears he said: “I came to carry you along.” He carried two of them 
to his father-in-law’s house. He entered and threw them at the feet of 
his father-in-law. Oh, now they seratched him all over so that his 
body was full of blood. ‘Oh, carry them back, carry them back, my 
son-in-law, they have forgotten me.” Then his son-in-law carried them 
back. Then after some time the old man said: ‘‘Go quick and catch 
two panthers; I used to play with them when I was young.” Then the 
young man went into the woods and {when he met the panthers] he 
said: ‘1 come to take you along.” And he carried two of them to his 
father-in-law’s house. He opened the door, entered, and threw them 
at his father-in-law’s feet, Then they scratched him all over, and his 
whole body was full of blood. “Oh,” cried he, “carry them back, carry 
them back, they do not know me any more.” Then the young man 
carried them back. 

[After awhile the Thunderer said :] ‘‘Come, son-in-law, let us go and 
split a log.” They went and split a log in half. He said to his son-in- 
law, ‘‘Crawl in there and stem your arms against the log.” The young 
man sat down in there. Then the old man knocked aside the wedges 
and broke them all. The tree closed over his son-in-law. He left him 
and went home. He went along distance. The young man, however, 
kept the log apart with his elbows and broke it. He carried it home 
on his shoulder. He came home and threw it down in front of the 
house. When his father-in-law heard the noise he went out and [on 
seeing the young man] said: “Oh, my son-in-law, you are just as I 
was when I was young.” They remained there and the children 
grew up. 

Then his father-in-law said to him: “Oh, go to the supernatural 
people and bring me their hoops.” The young man went, a long time 
he went, and finally he reached the country of the supernatural people. 
They stood in a circle, the hoop was being rolled to and fro in the 
circle. He was afraid to approach them any nearer and stood aside. 
‘But when it grew dark he made a Yump and caught the hoop by 
‘pushing his arm through it. Then he ran away, carrying the hoop. 
‘The supernatural people lit their torches and pursued him. They 
‘pursued him a jong distance; then his wife thought of him and told 


OBINOOK OKULA’M MYTH—TRANSLATION. 35 


her children, ‘‘Now whip your grandfather.” They took a stick and 
whipped him; then he cried and urinated. It began to rain and the 
torches of fie supernatural Pent were extinguished. Thus he 
reached home. 

After a while the old man said again, ‘‘Now go and bring the tar- 
gets of the supernatural people.” He made himself ready and went. 
After a long time he reached the country of the supernatural people. 
They were shooting at targets. He was afraid, but when it was dark 
he took the targets and ran away. Then the supernatural people lit 
their torches and pursued him, He came running, heli! He was pur- 
sued. After some time his wife thought of him and told her children, 
“ Now whip your grandfather.” They took a stick and whipped him; 
their mother helped them. Then the old man urinated, and it began 
torain. Thus the torches of the supernatural people were extinguished, 
and the young man reached home carrying the targets. 

After awhile he said to his wife, ‘‘ Now L shall leave you.” He made 
himself ready, put on all his dentalia and took two quivers full of 
arrows. Then he went. After awhile he reached a large town which 
consisted of five rows of houses. The last house was very small. This 
he entered and found two old women [the mice. When they saw him 
they said:] “Oh, now Blue-Jay will make another chief unhappy.” 
Then Blue-Jay thought, ‘“‘A person came to the house of the mice.” 
He went to see and, indeed, there was a chief in the house. Then Blue- 
Jay went back to his chief and said: ‘A chief has arrived; he wants 
to have a shooting match with you.” Then he went back to the 
stranger and said: ‘Our chief wants to play with you. You will have 
a shooting match.” Hesaid: **Oh.” Blue-Jay ran back [to his chief 
and said]: ‘Thatchief said‘Oh.’” He went backagain: ‘ The chief 
says to you you shall come down to the beach quickly.” Then Blue- 
Jay’s chief took his arrows and went down to the beach. Blue-Jay 
ran back {to the stranger and said|: ‘Our chief-went down to the 
beach.” Then the other chief went down to the beach Now they shot 
at the targets. The other chief lost and Blue-Jay’s chief won. He lost 
all his dentalia. Helosthisarrows. Helosthishair. He lost his head. 
He lost both his arms. He Jost both his legs. Then they made him 
miserable. They cut off his hair and hung him up in the smoke. But 
at night the two mice always went and gave him water and gave him 
to eat. Every night they did so. 

One year he had been away. Then his sons said, ‘“‘ Let us look for 
our father.” They made themselves ready, put on their dentalia, took 
their targets and their arrows. Then they went, they went a long dis- 
tance; they found a town, oh,a large town. [They said:] “‘ Perhaps 
here we shall find our father.” They entered that small house. There 
were two old women [who said]: ‘Oh, chiefs, where did you come from?” 
‘*We search for our father.” ‘Oh, Blue-Jay will make miserable two 
more chiefs. A long time ago a chief came and they made him mis- 


36 OKULA’M HER MYTH. pe OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


erable and put him into the smoke. But we always gave him water; 
we always gave him food. He has lost his eyes.” 

After some time Blue-Jay thought that a chief must have arrived at 
the house of the mice. He ran there to look and he found two chiefs. 
Then he went back and said to his chief: ‘“ Two chiefs have arrived; 
they stay at the house of the mice; they came to play with you.” 
“Oh,” replied Blue-Jay’s chief. He ran back [to the house of the 
mice, and said to the strangers]: ‘‘Our chief wants to play with you. 
You will have a shooting match.” They did not say anything. Then 
Blue-Jay ran back and said to his chief: ““Go down to the beach!” 
Three times Blue-Jay went back. But they did not speak to him. 
When he went there the fourth time the younger brother looked at 
him. He looked at Blue-Jay. At once all his hair began to burn. 
Then he returned and told his chief, ““O, these strangers are more 
powerful than we are. They looked at me and my hair caught fire. 
They tell you to come down to the beach.” After a littie while they 
went down tothe beach. Two targets were stuck into the ground. 
[They said:] ‘‘How bad are these targets!” and they pulled them 
out and threw them away. ‘Here, our targets are good.” They put 
their targets into the ground. Their targets were shining. Then 
they began to shoot. Now Blue-Jay’s chief lost. He lost all his den- 
talia. He lost all his people. They won their father from him. They 
won Blue-Jay. Now they staked his hair and they won it. They 
staked his head, they staked his arms. They won his head and his 
arms. They staked his legs; they won it all. Then they took four 
potentilla roots and put them on to the forehead [of Blue-Jay’s chief]. 
They took pieces of flint and put them all over his body. They took 
green mud and painted his belly and his back green. Then they threw 
him into the water, and said: “Green Sturgeon shall be your name; 
henceforth you shall not make chiefs miserable.” They took Blue-Jay, 
threw him away, and said: ‘“‘Blue-Jay shall be your name; henceforth 
you shall not make chiefS miserable. You shall sing ‘ Watsetsetse- 
tsetse,’ and it shall bea bad omen.” [Then they turned to the mice and 
said:| “‘Oh, you pitiful ones, you shall eat everything that is good. You 
shall eat berries.” Then they took their father and carried him to the 
water. They blew on him and he recovered his eyesight. Then they 
returned home. 


3. ANEKTCXO’LEMIX ITCA’KXANAM. 
ANEKTCXO LEMIX HER MYTH. 


Cxela/-itX eéXt iLa/lXam. Ayod/maqt iLa/xakjEmana. Tak& 


There were two one their Lown. He was dead their chief. Then 
cta’qoaiL cia’/xa, a/éXat o*o’kuil, é’Xat é’/kXala. Wax élagée/tEma 
large [dual] his two one a girl, one a boy. Every sea-otters 

children, morning 
teia/wul té/IXEm. A/qxéamé Lia/wuX gua/nEsum. = Pod’lakli 
they always did the people. MInsternofcanoe his younger always. At dark 
{hunted} them sister 
tsXi acgd‘mamX. Qui’nEmi 4/cto ma‘Lné ka podX"  né’xaué. 
then they two arrived: Five times they two sea-ward then  fogg it became. 
at their house. went 
Aktuwa‘lugL q0’/La Ltcugq. MEL; aLz’/xax LE‘kxakso’~ ka 
She swallowed it that water. Wet it got her hair and 
otten 
akLuwa/luqL q0/La Lteug. I0/Lqte noxoé'la-it qotac té/1XEm. 
she swallowed it that water. Long time they stayed those people. 
often 
A’?lta aga’wan naxa/lax. Ia'néwa igj;é/sqés ka xax a’tcax. 
Now pregnant she became. First blue-jay and observe he did her. 
“Wu'ska! néket na mea‘xaxomé? TakE aga‘wan atca’lax 
“Heh! not ([interroga- you observe her? Then herpregnancy he made it 
tive particle] on her 
Lia/wuX.” “Ho/ntcin! kj ixa’xoié, iqjé’sqés,” né/k-im ska/sa-it. 
his younger ‘Don't! quiet become, blue-jay,”’ he said robin. 
sister.” 
Mcok;’ué/macta/mita cilxa’xak; Emana.” “ HO/ntein! la/xka 
You make them [dual] ashamed our two chiefs. ‘*Don't! he 
iLalé/‘xgEqun. Ia/néwa ka i’kta ila’/xo-ita.” Lia2 ka _  ia’qoa-iL 
the eldest one. First then every- hewillknow.” Some- then large 
thing time 
itea’wan nixa/lax. “ Wu/ska! Ixk7a/yowa!” né‘/k'im iq; é/sqés. “TakE 
her belly became. “Heh! We will move!” he said blue-jay. “Then 
anxEmaé’tcta-itck. TakE aga’wan atca/lax itea‘lé. Lxke’ita/qta, 
I got ashamed. Then herpregnancy hemadeit her brother. We will leave them 
on her [dual], 
Ixk7a/yowa.” Ala/xti ka/nauwé nau‘itka aqigEmiLO/lExa-it iq; é’/sqes. 
we will move.” Then all indeed he was believed bidesay: 

Wext a’‘cto Lia/wuX. Pod/2lakli acgo’mam. A/Ita kjam té/1XEm, 

Again they _ his younger At dark they twocame Now nothing _— people, 

{dual] sister. home. 
went 

kjam tYoLe’ma ka/nauwée. “O take tal; aqk/txLayi. Ila/xka 

nothing houses all. “Oh, then look! we are deserted. He 
iqjé/sqés ia/xaqamt. Wu’ska, Oxanigu’Litck! La/ksta amé/wan 
blue-jay his advice. He! tell me! who your pregnancy 
aLgama‘lax?” “K@ niket tEné’/txix. Ia/ma qéa é@/Xti a’txd, ka 
madeiton you?” ‘‘Nothing not I know. Only when once wetwo then 

‘ went, 
qea poX" né/xau, ka anLuwa/lugL qoLa Lteuqg. Ia/xkatik @/métalq7 
when foggy it was, then I swallowed it that water. That this qualmish 
often 
atea’nax.” Take acgod’/xtkin 6¢0/lEptckiX. Ka’nauwé = Ltcuq 
he made me.” Then they two searched fire. All water 
for it 

Wa‘/xwax agqLa‘/kxax 0*0/lEptckiX. Go keE/mkitE  tEe’kXaqL 

pour it was done the fire. Then last her house 
octa‘Laq Okjund’ ka a/xka ka wiXt k ;é tE’kXaqu. Ka 
their [dual] aunt the crow then her then also nothing her house. Then 


of 


bo 


o) 


12 


fon) 


13 


14 


19 


20 


= =) = UREAU OF 
38 ANEKTCXO LEMIX HER MYTH. ERAGE 


exuwa/yul ka Lak na/xax O”0EptckiX. “Qaxé xiau Lak 
they two and crackle it did the fire. “Where this crackle 
walked about 
na/xax?” ated/lXam Lia/wuX. La2 ka weXt L)4k na‘xax. M6/keti 
it does?”’ he saidto her his younger Some then again crackle it did. Twice 
sister. time 


Ljak na/‘xax 06¢0/lEptckiX. A/‘Ilta LE’/KLEk acga/yax ile’e. Alta 
crackle it did the fire. Now burrow hey ro the ground. Now 
id it 
Lap acE/kxax o/otco. A/‘lta ka/tsEk g0-y- d/otcd-y ake’x 
find they twodidit  ashell. Now in middle in the shell was 
o'olEptckiX. “O La/xauyam txa/Lak. A’qka tal; a‘/kXotk Xak 
tire, S100 pitiful she our [dual] She look! she putinto that 
aunt. 


0:0lEptckiX.” A/‘Ita nacXE/lgiLx. Wax -ne’‘ktcukté. 
fire.” Now they [dual] made Next it got day. 
fire. morning 


A‘lta acgkE’tax t!’6L. ALks0/kxoL! t!OL, itant/kstX t’ou. Alta 
Now they two a house. They finished it, the house, its smallness house. Now 
made it 


ia’/xkati asxé@/la-it. La2 asxé’la-it ia’/xkate; ka ne’katxa, maLna/ 
there they two stayed. Some they two stayed there; then it grew windy, from sea 
time 
nékatxa. Kawe’X ka nixa/latck. A’yoLx. A/lta xitik tk’egan 
it grew windy. Early then he rose. He went to Now there ecedar 
the beach. planks 


tgE’xEniptegEt; itea’/LElam kaX oma’p;_ iLa/LElXamE/mtga 
they drifted ashore ; ten these planks; ten each 
Lga/nEXama. A’yoptck. Atced/IXam_ Lia’/wuX: “Lap anem’tax 


fathoms. He went up He said to her his younger sister: ‘‘ Find I did them 
from the beach. 


tE’egan, iLaLElXamE/mtga Lga/nEXama.” A/‘Ita a/ctoOLx Lia’wuX. 
boards, ten each fathoms.” Now they two went his younger 
to the beach sister. 


Alta acktoLa/taptek, ka/nauwé acktoLa/taptck. A/Ita acgn/tax 
Now they [dual] pulled all they [dual] pulled Now they two 
them ashore, them ashore. made it 


ta/qoa-iL t’oL. A/‘lta acxé/la-it ia‘xkate. Alta é/teate!a ayaxa/lax 


alarge[pl.] house. Now they two stayed there. Now her sickness came on her 
Lia/wuX. A/lta nakxa’/tom; LE/kXala akLax6’tom. 
his younger Now she gave birth; a male she gave birth to it. 
sister. 
A‘lta né‘kim itea/xkjun: “EK’/ktaLx 60’/k Lgia’xo?” Kawe/X 
Now he said her elder brother: ‘‘Whatmay blanket sh» will make Early 
it?” 
a/yuLx. Lap atea/yax moket ilagé/‘tEma, kEnE’m ilagé/tEma. ‘O 
he went to Find he did them two sea-otters, small F sea-otters. “Oh, 
the beach. 
La/xauyam LgE’/LatXEn 60/k Lgia’x6.” Atcio’kctEptck g0 
his poverty my nephew blanket she will make it.” He carried them up to 


from the beach 
ma/Lxdlé. Atced/lXam Lia’wuX: “Lap ana’/yax ilage/tEma.” O 


inland. He said to her his younger “Find I did them sea-otters.’’ Oh, 
sister: 
kj wa/nkj wan na/xax Lia/wuX. 
glad she became his younger 
sister. 

“K/ktaLx agia/xoLk LE‘tex‘imeq Lga/wuX?” Kawé/X nixa’latck. 
“What may she makes soup my younger sister? ” Early he rose. 
A’yoLx. Alta igé/pix'L iuquna’-itX. Atca/yaxc, hé! ka/nauwé 

He went to Now a sea-lion it lay there. He cut it, heh! alk 

the beach. 

atea/yaxe. A/lta acgiutcXa’mal. Alta ka/nauwé L‘aLa’ma ayo’Lx, 
he cut it. Now they two boiled it. Now all days he went to 


the beach, 


TC 
¥ -* 


eg ANEKTCXO’LEMIX MYTH. 39 

méket élagé/‘tEma Ljap atcia’x. A/Ita paL nod/xdx tk/etaqL 

two sea-otters find he did them. Now full it became vps {dual} 
ouse 


élage‘tEma. Wax  né‘kteukté a/yoLx. 
sea-otters. Every morning it gotday he wentto the beach. 


A‘Ita yuquna’-itX é@’kolé. Né/xanko ma/L’xdlé: “A, @/kolé’ xix:i/x: 


Now there lay _ a whale. He ran inland: “Ah, a whale this 
yuquna’-itX!” “QO, aqtxet’é’mam po‘lakli. E’wa @natai = x-ik 
lies there!"’ “Oh, food is sent to us at night. Thus onthe other side this 
émaL xi aqtxet!’@’mam. Ia’/xkéwa taL; XOk q;’at aqa’/nax éwa 
ocean this food is sent to us. There look! those love I am done thus 
tid/LEma. Nité‘mam Lia’mama xix‘i’k ik’a/sks. Ai/aq @’xca 
the supernatural beings. He came his father this boy. Quick cut it 
ka‘nauwe x‘iau é/kolé!” TakE- atc&/yaxc, ka’nauwé atca/yaxe 
all this whale!”’ Then he cut it, all he cut it 
itea/xq’un. Take acgid’kXuiptck. Ka/nauwé acgiod’k Xuiptck. 
her elder brother. Then they two pulled it ashore, All they two pulled it ashore. 
Alta naxk‘/IltXuitek ok; u’no. Keuketama ega‘tgéu. A/lta 
Now shemade herself ready the crow. She wanted to go tosee her sister's Now 
&; them children. 
nai/koteti o/kju/no. A2qxulkt okju’/nd. Q;’oa/p naigo’tctamé; a/Ita 
she went across the crow. She cried the crow. Nearly she got across; now 
ago/ekEl tot. Agod/ekEl tXut. NO’ya, nd’ya, nod’ya. Q:’oa’p 
she saw it a house. She saw it smoke. She went, she went, she went. ease 
naxa’-ikElai. Kvea/xali Loe Lka‘nax go tE’/LaqL LO‘kéc. “O 
she landed. Above there was a chief on his house he was onit. ‘O, 
Lga/xauyam Ltxa/Lak.” TakE naiga’tctame. Ayaxalgu’Litck 
pitiful [f.] our [dual] aunt.” Then she came across. He told her 
Lia‘wuX. Takk agée’/ElkE] @’kolé okju/n0, é@’kolé tia/L‘uléema. 
his younger Then shesawit thewhale _ the crow, a whale its meats. 
sister. 
Ja‘xkéwa noya 6kj’u/no. Agixk;’a/kux a/Ita é@/Leulé. “ Ma2t,” taku 
Then she went the crow. She pulled it now the meat. ‘“Come,”’ then 
ateo‘lXam itea‘tgeu. ‘Mia’tptega, mi/tptega. I’kta migEla/xo 
he said to her her nephew. ‘‘Come inland, come inland. What are you going to 


do with it 
ia‘atcEke?” Take na/k‘im: “O ka‘ltae nid’/‘kuman.” Take no’ptcga 
its stench?” Then she said: “O, to no pur- I look at it.” Then she went in- 
pose land 


okju’nd! No’ptega; a/Ita pau é’/kolé i/Xue gd wé/wuLée. Naw’‘i 
the crow! Shewentinland; 1ow full whale it was on in interior of Iinmedi- 
ground house. ately 


go qoLa Lk’asks qgé/xtce akLo’/cgam. ALgk’tsax qoLa Lk’asks. 
to that boy intending she took it. He cried that boy. 
“Lmé'lagst xiLa kj’oa’s tLxa/Lxaut.” TakE aqLa/lot Ltcuq. 
‘“Your tears these afraid they make him.” Then she was given water. 
TakE naxEmé/nako. TakE weXt qé/xtcé akio/cgeam. WeXt 
Then she washed her face. Then again intending she took him. Again 
aLgk’tsax: “Ayo Omé/LOtk Xau _ kj’oa’e qLxa/xau.” AkLO/egam 
he cried: “Ayo your breath that afraid makes him.” She took it 
Ltcuq, aga‘yutekte i/teacqL. WeXt akLo’cgam, weXt aLgn’teax. 
water, she washed inside her mouth. Again she took him, again he cried. 
TakE agdXam_ ugod’tgéu: “Mxiéi/LOX na  LgdLé1EXEmkK? 
‘Then she said to her her niece: “Vou think [int. part. ] a person? 
Ewa talj tid‘LEma Lk’asks. Ia’‘xkéwa weXt  aqeénta’lot, 
Thus look the supernat- child. There also it was given to 
ural being’s us [dual], 


la‘xkéwa xix: é/kole aqéntE/ém.” Take na/ktim — 0/k;’und’: 
there that whale it was given to us Then she said the crow: 
to eat.” 


“Haf-om!” Aqa/2-leqéx 6kj’und’. Aqa/kém, naxLxa/’Em. ALA/xOLx. 
Ob 1? It was boted for thecrow. She was given she ate. She finished. 
er to eat, 


13 


10 


12 


Pp wate , BUREAU 
A() ANEKTCXO LEMIX HER MYTH. ee 


A‘lta, na/xko. Agk/tok"y7 moket tgité/texala. Agauwée’kitk gd 
Now shewenthome. Shecarried them two pieces of blubber. She put them into in 
Lga/cguic. Nod/ya, no’ya, no’ya; nai/koteté. Qj;’oa’p agia’/xom 
her mat. She went, shewent, she went; she went across. Nearly she reached it 
élXam; a/Ita nagk’‘tsax. A/‘Ita akeX7a’tal cga’/tgéu. 
the town; now she cried. Now she wailed for her sister's children, 
“CEeEtgé’u, cEgé’tgéu, cEgé/tgéu! Lala’ Xuks noxo-ila’/wul XLE’mX ! 
‘“My sister’s chil- my sister’s my sister's Birds fly up often! 
dren, children, children! 
Uteaktea’/ktcinike nam%é’mo! 
Eagles chew you! 
“CreEtgé’'u, cEgé’‘tgéu, cEgé‘tgéu! Iqonéqoné’tcinike na’msémom! 
‘My sister's chil- my sister’s my sister's Gulls chew you! 
dren, children, children! 
“CreEtgé’'u, cEge’/tgeu, cegé’‘tgéu! Iqoalé’Xoatcinike namtémod‘m! 
‘My sister’s chil- my sister's my sister's Ravens chew you! 
dren, children, children! 
CrgEtgé’u, cEgé’tgéu!” 
My sister's my Sister's 
children, children!” 
Q;’oa’p agia/xOmé. 162¢ iq;’é/sqés k"La/xané. Qj’oa/p agia/xome 
Nearly she arrived. There was blue-jay outside. N res she arrived 
ka wiXt nagE’tsax: 
then again she cried: 
“CregEtgé’u, cEgé’tgén, cEgé’tgéu! Lala’Xuks nox0-ila/wulXLE‘/mX ! 
‘“My sister's chil- my sister's my sister's Birds fly up often! 
dren, children, children ! 
Uk;’ono’teinike na/mtémo’m!” 
Crows chew you!” 
Takk néxE/lqamX igé/sqés: “A -y-a/xp!Ena uk;’ond/ya. Neéket tei 
Then he shouted blue-jay : “Ah, she named ane crow. Not [int. 
= part. ] 
nimea’/xaxomé? Ta! Axp!Ena-y okj’u’nd!” TakE naxko’mam, 
you notice? Ta! She named the crow!” Then she came home, 
naxa/égilaé. TakE néptcega. A/Ita a/‘tgep! té/lx‘Em ka/nauwé g0-y- 
she landed. Then she went up Now they entered the people all at the 


from water. 


0k;’und’ tE’/kXaqu. AqaXua’teaga/lEmam. A‘Ita naxk™7é'l okj’uno’. 


eas her house. The people went to ask her. Now _ she said much ie crow. 
Na/k-im 0kj’uno’: “Anigo’/tetamé; pat tHlala‘/Xuke kexe’lax ega‘tgeu. 
She said ete crow: ed. got Across ; full birds eating them my [dual] sis- 
two ter’s children. 
Ka/nauwe telala/Xuke 0/tamo.” Ia/néwa ka iqé@/sqés ayd’pa. 
All birds chewed them.” First then blue-jay went out. 
Ayoxod/La god tou. IJa/xkati ayo’la-it. K’& na/xax 0Okj’unod’. 
He went around at house. There he stayed. Silent she became the crow. 
CXa‘lak itea’pi’au ka/sa-it. Tqui/numiks tga’a OoOkj’und’. A/‘Ita 
They sat at her dead hus- robin. Five her chil- _—_‘ the crow. Now 
opposite sides band’s brother dren 
of fire 3 
naxa-iyilk"7é itea’/pyau. Cau/cau naxayi/llk*7é. Iqauwe’tsEtk 
she told him much her dead hus- Low voice she told him much. He listened 


band’s brother. 
iqé/sqés; go k*La/xani id’e qj’oap ton. Takk Laqu aga/yax 


blue-jay; there outside he was near house. Then take out she did it 
tgak"tea-it. A/Ita Lq0’/pLqop aga/yax. AgiLE’ltem tga’a. Ageltem 
ne food she car- Now cut to pieces she did it. She fed them herchil- She fed him 
ried home. dren. 
itca’pitau. Takk ayan‘d/LuXuit ugd’x6, axgé’/sax ug0d/x0. TakE 
her dead hus- Then it choked her her daustiter the youngest her daughter. Then 


band’s brother. 


a/yop! igé/sqés. T;’Eq atci/Lax Lga’paa. Lj’Ox ayuLa‘taxit qix. 
heentered blue-jay. Slap he did it hernape. Comingout it flew out that 


CHINOOK ANEKTCXO/LEMIX MYTH. 41 


@kolé. Atcid/egam iqé/sqés. Ayd’pa igé/sqés: “A, niket tcé 
whale He took it blue-jay. He went out blue-jay: “ Ah, not {int. 
{meat}. e part. ] 
nimea/xaxomé? GEnE‘]sém ok;’undya’!” Atcixonéman qgotac télx‘Em 
do you notice? She fed me the crow!" He phged it to those people 

them 


qix: @kole. Tl6‘nkXa t!OLé’ma atcixd/néma, ka atcia/owilt. La 2 
that whale. Three only houses he showed it to then he ate it. Some 
them, time 


no/ponEm. O/lo geta/xt ka/nauwé qotac té/1X-Em. A/Ita nixk"7é/] 
it got dark. Hungry they were all those people. Now he said much 
iqé’sqés: “O ilxa/xak;Emana é’kolé paL ta/yaqu. LE’wa tal; 
blue-jay: “Oh, our chief whale full his house. Thus look 
tid‘LEma qj’at a/xkax Lia’/wuX k;a atcinn/t’euL ilxa/xak; Emana.” 


the supernat- love they did his younger and he invited me our chief,” 
ural beings her sister 


Aqa‘t’euL 6k;’und’ k;a ka/sa-it. A/Ita no’ponEm, ka mE/nx‘i ka 
She was invited crow and robin. Now it grew dark, then a little then 
while 


Lax né’/xax iqé/sqés. Atciti‘ktean iaekotitk. “ Txd/kst’ita ka/sa-it! 
visible he became blue-jay. He took in hand his quilt. ‘““We two will sleep robin! 
Kwa/nEsum tsEs ankE/xax po/lakli.” Taker né’kim ka’sa-it: ‘“ Ya2, 
Always cold I get at night.” Then he said robin: OV a. 
xixée’/kik. Texti na’/mkXa anxod’kstitX, ka wiXt aqanga’t!’Om. 
this one. Then I alone I sleep, then again people come home. 
la/xkati x‘ia mx0‘/ketit gd tgkE’uit!” A/‘Ita nix6d’kstit iqé/sqés gd 
There here sleep at my feet!"’ Now he slept blue-jay at 
tia‘owit, gd nuXuma/kXit tia/Owit ka’sa-it. A‘Ita nixEllk7a‘ta-it 
his feet, at their end [of] his feet robin. Now he was awake 


iqe’sqés. A’Ita ika/nim aega/yax ka/sa-it kj’a dya’pi’au. Q;’oap 
blue-jay. Now canoe they twomadeit robin and his dead bro- Nearly 
ther’s wife. 


ikted/ktiya ka iad’ptit iq; é/sqés. Alta aLa‘kiloya a/llta. ALktod/kué 


it got daylight then heslept  blue-jay. Now they went to now. They carried to 
the canoe the-canoe 

La/xamot. A/‘Ita ated’cegam itsa’/k;’esiL 6é’k"tEqlix:, atcd’cgam 

their property. Now he took it a sharp branch, he took it 

ka’/sa-it. Ateuqoa/na-it @éwa tiad/owit igé/sqés 6é/k"tEqlix.. A/Ita 
robin. He put it id the thus his feet blue-jay’s the branch. Now 

groun 
aLe/kXoteté ka’‘sa-it kja Oya/pyau Okj’und’. ALité/taqL iqé’/sqés. 
they went across robin and his dead bro- the crow. They left him blue-jay. 


ther’s wife 
Nixa]V?0k6 igé/sqés. kawi/X: “Mxa‘IV’0ko ka’sa-it!”  Ateé/kqtuq. 
He awoke blne-jay early: “ Awake robin!” He kicked him. 
Nau‘l Lxoa’p a/Lix La‘yape igé’sqés. Na-ilga’/Xit kaX 6é@/k"t; Eqlix:: 
At once hole became his foot _—blue-jay’s. He struck it that branch: : 
“Ana‘! LEkXEpsa’! A’ngaté tat; Xuk aLEn‘é’taqL.” Alta 
Ana! my foot! Long ago see! here they left me.” Now 
né/XkO_~—s iqé@/sqés gd tia/a. 
he went home __ blue-jay to his children. 
ALigo‘tctamé okj’und’. Nau‘i a/Loptek gd tloL. “Ai‘aq, 
They got across the crow. Atonce they went up to the house. “Quick, 
from the beach 


lxigo’tetaé,” né/k‘im iqé/sqés. A/‘/Ilta nodxué/tXuitck  tigd’/tetaé 


we will go across,” he said blue-jay. Now they made themselves they wanted 
ready to go across 

ka/‘nauwe. TakE até/kXoketé. Ka’‘tcek qix: @/maL ka né‘/katxa; 

all. Then they went across. Middle that bay then it grew windy; 

hEmm. Léeqs nuxod/La-it téIxEm. TakE wiXt nuX0’tako. 
humm. Almost they died the people. Then again they returned. 


Qoa/nEMi L’aLa’/ma nuXdta/leky ka takE atigod/tetamé. A/Ita 
Five times days theyalwaysturned and then they got across. Now 
/ 


or 


-~] 


“bo 


sett =) AU 
42 ANEKTCXO LEMIX HER MYTH. robraee 


atci/LOtk, Lka’/pa aLi’xax. ALOogodtgé/kxo-it té/lx-Em; takE tsEs 


it snowed, snow it became. They were covered the people; then cold 
no/xox téx‘Em. AcLE/nkj’@mEnako iLa/XakjEmana. ‘Taker 
they became the people. He took revenge on them their chief. Then 
a/yuptck iq;é/sqjés. Qé’xtce atcio’Xam ka/sait: “ Anxata‘laq7, 
he went up blue-jay. Intending he said to him [to] robin: ‘‘Open me, 


from shore 


ka/sa-it. TakE tsEs anE’xax. Ne/t’@m, ka/sa-it; take 06/10 


robin. Then cold I got. Bring me food, robin; then hunger 
ano/mEqt.” K;é ka/sa-it, “Ai’aq, ka/sa-it, sk/tk"tpa c’E’mtgict.” 
I die.” Nothing robin. * Quick, robin, put them two the tongs.” 
out of house 
IxElteXa/mal ka/sa-it. Ikolé’ atciuteXa’mal. “ Wu’/ska, ka/savit, 
He boiled much robin. Whale he boiled it much. “Oh! robin, 

: ° = = ° 
sE’tk"tpa cta @Emtgict.”. TakE atcd’/cgam s’E’/mtgEst ka/sa-it. 
put themtwo those tongs.” Then he took them tongs robin. 
out of house (dual) 

Take L;j’EmE’n atci’ctax. TakE atcd/ktpa. A/‘Ita atsd’/méqL iqé/sqés 
Then soft hemadethem Then he put them Now helickedthem  blue-jay 
{dual}. out of house. 
qo’cta @’E’mtgict. ‘Ka/sa-it, ka/sa-it, @1Xam ilxa/Xak;Emana, 
those tongs. “Robin, robin, say to him our chief, 
na-il6‘ta-y-6gE’xa. TcEnxEla/qia.” “Ya2, i/kta  qtciégEla’xo, 
I shall give him my He shall open me.” potas what shall be done with 
daughter. her, 
imea/xak;Emana wtya/xa x‘au aqa/uXuwa/kuX?” Takk né/xanko 
your chief his daughter that one she is demanded?” Then he ran 
iqé@/sqés ma’Lné. Takk atcid/lXam iLa/xak; Emana: “ AqauXuwa/kuX 
blue-jay tothe beach. Then he said to him their chief: “She is demanded 
omée/Xa, kja nai‘ka weXt ogu’xa aqauXuwa/kuX.” Niaket 
your daughter, and my also. my daughter she is demanded.” Not 
qa’da né‘k-‘im iLa/XakjEmana igé/sqés. WeXt né‘xankd ma/Lxdle 
anyhow spoke their chief blue-jay’s. Again he ran upland 
iqé’/sqés: ““Ka/sa-it! Teina’xo-il intsa/Xak; Emana, tca-il0/ota-y-uya’‘xa.” 
blue-jay: * Robin! He says our chief, he will give his 


her to him daughter.” 
Qosi/nEmi a/yaiL igé’sqés. TakE né‘/k-im iLa/Xakj;Emana. Alta 


Five times healways _ blue-jay. Then he spoke their chief. Now 
went 
ateo/tXuitck uya’/Xa. Atcta/lax tga/ktéma ka/nauwé2: Atso’tXuitek 
he made her hisdaughter. He put them her dentalia all. He made her ready 
ready on her 
uya’Xa igé/sqés. Né/xanko wiXt ma/Lx6lé igé’/sqés: ‘“ Ka’sa-it, 
his daughter blue-jay. He ran again upland blue-jay: “ Robin, 
takE ano’tXuitck 6mé/wulx.” “Ya&2,” ne’kim ka‘sa-it, ‘ Qadoxo-y- 
then Imadeherready thy niece.” Via said robin, ** Shall 
oyi’/sEmat giakEna/oi.” Take a/teukq iLa’/XakjEmana uya’xa. 
her chamber she will look after it.” Then he carried her their chief his daughter. 


Alta aqaLxa‘laq't. 


Now it was opened. 


Né’/ktcukté; alta kj& kaX 6¢0’/kuil iLa’/XakjEmana uya/‘le. ‘Taz; 


It got day; now nothing that woman their chief his sister. “* Look, 
aqatga/lEmam, @/wa tid/LEma kax qoLa Lkjasks.” TakE aLxLé’la-it, 
they came and took thus  thesuper- where that child.” Then _ they stayed, 

her, natural beings 


tV’oLe’/ma aLgE’tax 4a’llta. 
houses theymadethem now. 


Take agiupa/yaLx ik; Ena/tan 6k;’u/nd. E/xo-é agiupa/yaLx. A/‘Ita 


Then she gathered them  potentilla the crow. Many she gathered them. Now 
much roots 
nai‘koteté. TakE n0d/yam god tid/LEma. TakE @a/tgaLx ka/nauwe, 
she went across. Then shearrived at supernatural Then they went to all, 
beings. the beach 


agéyo/kuman itea/kjanatan. A/@Xt dgué/mEskotit tga/kcit, LEXt 
they were searched her potentilla roots. One {a plant] its root, one 


regia”. ANEKTCXO/LEMIX MYTH. 43 


LE/moksin La‘/ksit’ Ljap aqLa’x ia/xkatix:; ka aqLEla‘teax. Takk 
{a plant] its root find it was done there; then it was eaten. Then 
wa‘xwax aqa/yax itca’k; Enatan 6kj’u/n6. Noptega-y- 6kj’u/no. A/‘Ita 
pour out they were her potentilla roots the crow's. She went up the crow. Now 

done 


ago/lXam ugo'tgéu: “Mxa’/LuX na té’lx‘Em ka a/mitk"7 ikj’Ena/‘tan? 
she said to her her niece: You think {int. people then you bring potentilla roots? 
part. | them 


Muopia’/Lxa Lmo’ksin. Mopia’Lxa ogué’mskotit tga‘keiti. Ka/nauwé 
Gather it {a plant}. Gather it {a plant] their roots. All 
gé‘taq;EsEma mtopia’/Lxa. Manix weXt mtiad/ya_ itsanod’kstX 
good smelling ones gather them. When again you will come a small [f.] 
oLk; E/nLkj En nai’ka mani‘tk"7a, 0kjOna‘tan a/luec.” A/‘Ita ago’1Xam 


oyster basket me bring her [it] potentilla root itis in Now _— she said to 
to me, Mites her 


ugo’tgéu = okj’u’'nd: =“ MLO’k*Ja = XOLa~ Lgé@/wisX;  La/mitkEn 
her niece the crow’s: “Take it this dog; thy granddaughter 
La/XéwusX. Ma/nix qj’0a’/p mxigé’layaié ka mLola’‘ma: ‘ E/egam 
her dog. When nearly your land then say to it: * Take it 
é’kolé, Q;’aci/nEmicLx!’” Na‘k-im 6k;’uno’: “Ha’0.” Take na/xko-y- 
a whale, Qj ‘aci/nDEmicLx!’”’ She said the crow: “Yes.” Then she went home 
0kj’und’. No’ya, no’ya-y- okj’und. Ka _ kula’/yi agtLo’1Xam 
the crow. She went, she went the crow. Then tar she said to it 
Lga/XéwisX: “H’cgam é’kole, Qj;’aci‘nEmicLx. Nau’itka na 
her dog: * Take it a whale, Qj ‘acinEmicLx. Indeed {int. 
part.] 
imé’kickEléL @/kolé?” Takk aLxa‘latck, Og0’qxoiam Laqana/itX. 
you a catcher [of] whale?”’ Then it rose, in stern of canoe it stood. 
TakE Laxa né’xax @’kolé. TakE aLga‘yaqgs. A/Ita la’/xElax né/xax 
Then visible became a whale. Then it bit him. Now roll it did 
itea/xEnéma. “Q)’uL @/cgam, qj’uL é’cgam, é’kolé, Q;’aci‘nEmicLx!” 
her canoe. “ Fast take it, fast take it, the whale, Qj aci/nEmicLx!”’ 
A‘lta kwac na/xax 0kj’u/no: “Ya2e @’xa @’kolé, Q;’aci‘nEmicLx!” 
Now afraid shebecame thecrow: ‘‘Letalone doit the whale, Qj aci‘nEmicLx!” 
A‘lta yac aLga’‘yax é‘kolé. A’‘Ita aLxago’/ketit. Naxa/égélai 
Now let alone it did it the whale. Now it lay down to sleep. She landed 
dkj’u/no. Take akLona’/xLatck Lga/xéwisX. Naxk/nkon, ka/nauwé 
the crow. Then she lost it her dog. She ran about, all 
tYoLé‘ma akLo’xtkin. Niket Ljap agkE/Lax. Naket naxLxa’/lem 
houses she searched for it. Not find she did it. Not 2 she ate 
ka nad/ponEm. Tq;éx agE/Lax Lga/XéwisX. 
then it got dark. Like she did it her dog. 
Qoa/nEmi tiaya/kXoyaé, a’/lta weXt naxa’/lkjéwul. Agopa’/yaLx 
Five times their sleeps, now again she dug many things. She gathered it 
ogue’mskotit tga’/kcéu. AkLOpa’yaLx LEmO’ktein La/keéu. Ka/nauwé 
{a plant] its roots. She gathered it [a plant] its roots. All 
aktopa‘yaLx ge‘taq;sEma. A/Ita itsano/kstX 6Lk;’E/nLk; En agia/lotk 
she petered good avert ones. Now its smallness an oyster basket she put into 
them it 


ik;’Ena‘tan. WéXt nai/kutcté éwa tid‘/LEma. NO6d/yam go tid/LEma. 

potentilla roots. Again shecrossed thus supernatural Shearrived at the supernat- 
beings. ural beings. 

Ataga/luLX tid‘LEma ka/nauwé. A‘Ita aLk/tax ka/nauwé; aLE/tax 
They went tothe the supernat- all. Now they were all; they were 
beach ural beings eaten eaten 

alta. Ja/xkaté ma/Lné ka aqta/wuls. A’Ita ya/’mkXa ik;/Ena/tan 

now. There at beach then they were Now only they potentilla roots 

eaten. 

aga/yustX. Agk/LSEIkE] Lga/XEwucX. A/nqgaté ia/xkaté wé/wuLe 
she carried them. She saw it her dog. Long ago then in house 

Lkex: “Mxa/LuX na té/lx‘Em Lga’/XéwisX? ALE/xatgd, aLE/xatgo,” 
it was: ‘You think toe people their dog? It returned, it returned,” 

part. 


bo 


~~] 


ot ne Conrto te 


~) 


44 ANEKTCXO/LEMIX HER MYTH. becseide 2 


agolXam  ugod/tgéu: “Qa‘daqa amLo]Xam ka ma/Lné ka 
she said to her __ to her niece: “Why did yousay doit when at sea then 
Lgitsga’ma @/kolé? Go/nitei kwac amE/xax. ps: qjoa’p i1é/é texl 
it shall take it the whale? Therefore afraid you became. near land then 
pos amLo/1Xam aLgid/egam. Mx&/LaX na at nEsum aqLEma‘lot? 
{if] you say to it it takes 1 it. You think [int.part.] always it was given to you? 
ALE’xatg0o, aLE‘/xatgo. Tate; amLo’/Xtkin. WéeéXt mtLo/k"7a 
It returns, it returns. See! you searched for it. Again you will carry it 
mXgod/ya. Manéx amLona/xLategd, niket mLOo’xtkinEma. Kalta/2¢ 


you will go When you have lost it not you shall search for Only 
home. it. 


aqamEltém ka amE‘Lok’y.” Na‘k:im 6kj’u’/nd: ‘“Ha’d.” Take na/xk6 
you were given then you carried it.” She said the crow: ECR Then she went 
food home 


wiXt 6kj’u/nd. Agk’/Luk"y qoLa Lgé’wisX. ‘“Manix mL0’k"7a 
again the crow. She carried it that dog. “When you willearry it 
ees q;’oa’p 11é’é teXi amLo/lXam: ‘H/egam é’kolé, Q; aci/nEmicLx!’” 
near land then you say to it: : Take it the whale, Qj aci/nEmicLx !'”’ 
Takk na’/xko, Go‘qxéiam akLaqa/na-it Lga/xéwucX. A’ct02; qj; oa’p 


Then she went In stern it lay her dog. They S.. near 
home went; 


élXam! “E’egam @/kolé, Qjaci‘nEmicLx!” Niket aLgid/egam. 
the town! “Take it the whale, Qj aci‘nEmicix! ’ Not it took it. 
AkLO’egam Lteug. Wax akLE/Lgax: “E/cgam @’kolé, Q; aci‘nEmicLx! 
She took it water. Pour — she did 1t on it: ss Take it the ae Qj aci/nEmicLx! 
Nawitka na némé‘kickEliL?” Qjoa’p ilé/é takE wiXt akLo’lXam: 
Indeed [int.part.] youa catcher?’ Near land then again she said to it: 
“K/egam 6’kolé, Qj;’aci/nEmicLx!” AtLxa/latck qj;’o0a’p ilée’e. A/Ita 
“Takeit the whale, Q; aci nEmMicLx!”’ It rose near theland. Now 
aLgid‘egam = e’kole. A‘Ita wiXt 1la’/xElaxu né/xax itca/xEnéma. 
it took it the whale. Now again rock it ct her canoe. 
“H2t’d/egam —ékolé, ;aci/nEmicLX. Q;’uL é/egam  é6’kolé, 
fs Hold it fast the whale, Qj aci/nEmicLx. Fast hold it the whale, 
Q;’aci/‘nEmicLx.” E’/XtEmaé aya/xElEmamakuX: “Yae é@/xa é/kolé, 


Qj aci/‘nEmicLx.” Sometimes she did not say toitright: ‘Left doit the whale, 
alone 


Q;’aci/nEmicLx!” A‘Ita aya’/Xtke é’kolé iau’a ma/Lxélé. Tea! 
Qj acinEmM1cLx !" Now it swam the whale then landward. Ah! 
vita a‘tgELx télxyEm. Ka/nauwé 4@/tgELx. Aq@a/yaxs ékolé. 


now they went the people. All they went to It was cut the whale. 
to the beach the beach. 


Atga/yaxs tga/colal 6kj’u/no. A/‘Ita aqid/Xuiptck ka/nauwe é’kolé. 
They cut it her relatives ee crow's. Now it was carried up the whole the whale. 
from the shore 


10‘Lqté aLxé/la it. Take né/k-im iLa/xak; pmana: “A/nlaxta nd/ya. 


A long time they stayed. Then he said their chief: “I desire I go. 
No’‘ketama Lga/wuX.” Alta noxuitXuitck tia/1Xam, paL éXt 
I shall go to see my younger Now they made them- his people, full one 

her sister.” selves ready 
ia‘qoa-iL ikani‘m. A/‘Ita a/tgé. Atigd’/tctamé gd tid’/LEma. TakE 
large * canoe. Now they went. They came across to the supernat- Then 


ural beings. 
né/k:im iLa/xak; Emana: “Qa/t; ucXEm! qElxuk’uwa/keta.” Nau/itka-y- 


he said their chief: ao ake care! we shall be tried.” Indeed! 
alta ika’/pa; paL ika’pa qigd ma/Lné. Atctd/lXam tid/cdlal: “A/LaI 
now ice; full 1¢ce there at sea. He said tothem his relatives: ‘t Later on 
tcaX Ixaald’/Lxax.” A’‘Ita tsEs iké/x iqé/sqés. Né/k:im iqé’sqés: 
we go up.” Now cold he was blue-jay. He said blue-jay: 
“Ka niket tsEs nka/tkeX. A‘lta wiXt nak7fa/-ita.” Ated/pEna 
“Then not cold I got. Now again I stay inthe canoe.” He jumped 


iqgé’sqés. LjlE’pLjlep a/yi. TakE naLxE’/lqamx LgdLéeEXEmk 
blue-jay. Under water he went. Then it shouted a person 


— 


age = =/ 
asic ANEKTCXO’LEMIX MYTH. 45 
@wa ma/Lxdlé: “E2hé@hio! Lxuwa/ oé/ctéc.” Take ayaa/lOLx 
thus land ward: “ Ehehiu! he killed himself Then he went up 
blue-jay.” 
iLa/xak; Emana. Atcit/cgam qix: ika’/pa ka atciXH/kXue. “ Khéehiii’4,” 
their chief. He took it that ice then he threw it away. **Ehehiu! ” 
takE naLxé/‘tqamX Lg0oLé@/IEXEmk, “qantsi’x: tid’/LEma ita/Xaqa 
then it shouted a person, “how the supernatural their ice 
beings 
gaxiXE’/kXué.” ‘‘A/2héhéio’2,’ mskE’xatx. AniXE/kXué qgéwa 
it is thrown away.” ‘““* Bhehiu!’ you say. I throw it away that 
anuquna‘itixit.” A/lta a/Loptck. AcLO’lXam _ iLa’xak;’Emana: 
making me fall.” Now they went up. He said to them their chief: 
“Naket ai‘aq meco’p!a! A/Lqé qixEta’qLa.” A/‘lta -y-6Xt 10¢ 
“Not quick enter! Later on it will be opened.” Now one there 
was 
igé’piXL kja é/noL. Alta ia‘koa @/natai igé’/piXL ide. ALxéna/xit 
sea-lion and sea-cow (?). Now here on one side __sea-lion there was. They stood 
gd igé’pal. A/Ita tsEs ike’x igé’/sqés. Atcd’pEna, né’/skop! igé’sqes. 
in thedoorway. Now cold he got blue-jay. He jumped, heraninto  blue-jay. 


the house 
Wad, acga’/yaqs; qala/texi Laq aqé/cxax. A/‘lta aya’ckop! 
Wa, they two bit him; almost not take out he was done. Now he entered 
iLa/xakjEmana. Atcid’egam ia/koa-y- @Xt, ia/koa-y- €Xt kana/mtEma. 
their chief. He took him here one, here one in both hands. 
A‘lta atcXn/kXuée. “EKhehit’,” naLxE/IqEmX LgoLéeJEXEmk. 
Now he threw them away, ‘“ Ehehiu,” it shouted a person. 
6A Qhehio’,? msk/xatx. AnteXeH/kXué acga/naqs.” A’Ita a/LOp! 
“« Ehehii’,’ you say. I throw them two them two who Now they en- 
away bit me.” tered 


ka/nauwé, go we'wuLé aLxé’la-it. Kjam té/lx‘em. A’mkXa kaX 
all, in interior of house they stayed. No people. Only she that 

uya/lé ina/xak;Emana. “I’/kta Lx aqilxangé/walLj’amita, ka/sa-it?” 
his sister their chief. ‘““What may be given to us to eat, robin?”’ 
“Ho/ntcin émilq;’élateXita,” né/k-im ka/sa-it. Takk né’/k-im igé’sqés: 

“Don’t! be quiet!” he said robin. Then he said blue-jay: 
“A’kaLx ntea/xakjEmana gua/nEsum tumm = uya’qXaleptckiX.” 
“Thus may our chief always noise his fire.”’ 
EXtka-y- @’mtEcX yuquna‘itX gd we’wuLé. TakE naLxE’/IqamX 

One only log there lay in theinteriorof Then it shouted 

the house. 


LgoLé1JEXEmkK: “SEkEma/Lx sia/mist asx’Ela’qs.” A‘lta aLa/cgEmaLx 
a person: “Come down tothe his mouth splitting wood Now it came down to 
fire {dual.]” the fire 


iLa/‘mict it/ktjit. A/’lta ts;E/xtsjEx aLga/yax x:-ix' é@/m‘EcX. 
its mouth long. Now split it did it that log. 
“ Ka/sa-it,” take né/kim igé/sqés, ‘qé’wa itxa’qacqac kja wiXt 
‘*Reobin,” then he said blue-jay, “that our grandfather and again 
ia‘qacqac ia/laitix.” “TEnIlaxo-ix na _ tgE/eltgéu? Ma/‘mka 
his grandfather his slave.”’ ‘‘T know them [int. part.] my slaves? You only 
tEme'ltgéu.” Takk nacxElgitx. A/Ita tXut no’x6x. ‘“ CikEm4a’Lx, 
your slaves.”’ Then they made fire. Now smoke it got. ‘*Come down to the 
fire, 
éXte/ke.” ‘Ka/sa-it,” take atcid/lIXam iqj’é’sqjés, ‘“ia’‘xka qewa 
smoke-eater.”’ ‘*Robin,”’ then he said to him blue-jay, “he that 
itxa/laitix.. Qéwa  nai‘/ka_ ateno’stXulalema-itx, kja  mai‘ka 
our [dual] slave. That me he always carried me, and you 
ktemoptea’/lalema-itx.” ‘“Tenla’xo-ix na _ tgk’/eltgéu? Ma’mka 
he always led you by the hand.” “T know [int. part.] my slaves? You only 
tEmé’eltgéu.” TakE a/LELX, goyé’ ia’qa-iL iLa’wan. TakE aLo/La-itX 
5 ’ 1 
your slaves.”’ Then Bete aon thus large his belly. Then he stayed 
0 the fire, 


go ka’tcek t’6L. Take @/Lax Illl, aLkta’wult tXut. Tuwa/X no’x6x 
in middleof the house. Then he did = 11H), he ate it the smoke. Light it became 


10 


11 


25 
26 


- —/ “ 
46 ANEKTCXO LEMIX HER MYTH. eee 


tion. TakE aqed/cgam ctamé/kcucX. Alta iaqkEna/itX EXt- 
the house. Then it was taken a small canoe. Now there lay one 
ia‘/kitq;"p. ‘ Ka/sa-it,” takE né/k-im igé@’sqés, ‘“qj;’axtsé-y- i/kta 
cut. = tobin,”” then he said blue-jay, ‘too little what 
xix: aqilxEla’xo. A’Lqé LxEnuksta’‘ya.” “CikEma/Lx sia/mEstk 
this we shall eat. Later on I shall not have ‘“Come down to his mouth 
enough.” the fire [dual] 


sxElgé’xs.” A/LILX LgdLéIEXEmk. Ia/k;ésit iva/mict. A/Ita 
cutting meat.” a Mout down a person. Sharp [m.] its mouth. Now 
o the fire 


aLxa/lgixe, aLxa‘/lgixe, aLxa/Igixe. Pa2L ack’xax qodcta stamé’/keuc. 

it cut meat, it cut meat, it cut meat. Full got [dual] that {dual] smallcanoe. 

TakE po aqE/ctax qdcta stamé‘kcuc. TakE ayigo’Litx:it ia/qoa-iL 

Then blown it wason that([dual] small canoe. Then he made it stay large 
them [dual] 


xix: ikani’m; pau é@’koleé. A/‘lta aqid’/‘teXam é’kolé. Alta qjoa’/p 

that ——s_ canoe; full whale. Now it was boiled the whale. Now nearly 

ayo’/ktcikt é’kolé. TakE aLo’pa ka/nauwé, takE atco’cgam 0’pakué. 

it was finished the whale. Then they went all, then he took them reeds. 
out 


TakE ateaLa/lax g0-y- L’LaLqL éwa’-y- OLa’pote Lax o’pakué 
Then he put into them in their mouths thus their anus out reeds * 
kanauweé'tiks k!a iqé/sqés. Takk aLo’p!’am, a/LOp! weXt. 1a‘xkati 
all persons and blue-jay. Then theycamein, they entered again. There 
aLo/La-itX, ia/xkati LE/KLEk aLgia’x ile’e. A/‘lta aLxLxa/lem. 
they remained, there burrow they did it the = Now they ate. 
ground. 


ALgia/wulax, nau/i yawa La/xa né/xax éwa-y- uLa’/pote, ka/nauwe-y- 
They swallowed it, Anne: there visible it became thus their anus, all 
ately 


@ka. Atecia’wule igé’/sqés. Ayo’/tXuit. Iawa’ yuquna/itX uya’/pote. 
thus. Heswallowedit  blue-jay. He stood up. There it lay its anus. 
“Tea! ka/sa-it! xixi/x: éwa-y- dgu’pote aydlEktcu.” Agid’/egam 
“* Look! robin! this thus my anus it fell down.” He was taken 

iqé/sqés ia’/poté, aqa/’yuk™y7 k"La/xani. Laq aqa/éxax kaX O’pakue. 
blue-jay hisarm, he was carried outside. Out they were done these reeds. 

A‘lta wiXt a/ctop! ia/xak;Emana. Gonitsé Loni atcLo/tipa ka 
Now again they two his chief. Therefore [?] three he dipped and 

went in times 


aya’/qste. A/Ita noxo-iLxa/leEm qodtac té/lx‘Em. MEnnx: né’/xax qix’ 
he was satia- Now they ate those people. Little got that 
ted. 


ékolé. Take atcto/ktcpa tia/leEXam. Alta Lu’/XLuX ated’xox 

whale. Then he took them outside his people. Now pull out he did them 

ka/nauwée/2 0’/pakuée. A/Ita wiXt a/tgEp!. A‘Ita weXt noxo-iLxa/lEm, 
all the reeds. Now again theyentered. Now again they ate, 

cka qj’0é’L atgk’qcte, ka atgia/’wule  ita’teXemal. Taki 


and  inright way they became then they ate all what they had Then 
satiated, cooked. 


naLxElqamX LgoLe/leXEmk! “H2héhii’/2! qantsi/2x-Lx: tid/LEma 
it shouted a person! ‘‘ Ehehiu! how then the supernat- 
ural beings 


ita/‘teXEmal kja aqgé’tetXom.” A/Ita igé’/sqés né/k'im: “ Qa/da Lx 


what they had and it is finished.” Now. blue-jay he said: “How then 
boiled 
pos nékst aniod/tetXom qix: aqéneElse’m?” 

if not I finish it that I was given to eat?” 
A'lta aLxé/la-it g0 wé’wuLée. Alta ayo’pa igé’sqés, kj’Ex ike’x. 
Now _ they stayed in the interior of Now he went _—blue-jay, over- he was. 

the house. out satiated 
Alta gd’/yi né/xax iqé/sqés. A/Ita Lé/caLx acLpa/Ll Alta 
Now thus he did blue-jay. Now {a berry] all red. Now 

DixLxa/lEm igé/sqés. “LXud/2, ofé/stés, qantsi/2xLx tid/LEma 
he ate it blue-jay. “Lxui! blue-jay, how then the supernat- 


ural beings 


ane ANEKTCXO’LEMIX HER MYTH. 47 


ita/étitk kja agxé’tx.” A/Ita né‘k-im iq; é@’sqés: “66 A DhGhihaiyo” 


their excre- and heeatsthem.” Now he said blue-jay ““*Ehehiu!’ 
ments 
msh/xatx. Lnxi’lax na? Ka/Itas nLéo/kuman Lik L¢é/caLx.” 
you say. ITeat  [int.part.]? Only Llook at them these berries.” 
Ka aLxéla’-it, TakE Lax  aLi‘xax Lg0dLé/lEXEmk, ae A 
Then they remained. Then visible it became @ person. “Ah, 
mekté/mEnta. Qamcaxoé/moL.” “TeXi2, antckté/‘mEn‘a-itx g6 
you dive! It is desired a game with you.” ‘‘ Texfi2, we always dive in 
intea/lE Xam,” né/k-im iqé’/sqés. ‘“ Ka/‘nauwe L6aLa/ma 
our town,” he said blue-jay. “All days 
ankteté/mEn‘a-itx.” “Mxii/LuX na-y- é’ka go ilxa/lEXam?” akLo/1Xam 
we always dive.” *“Youthink — [int. 1 thus as in our town?” she said to them 
part. 
uLa/cinEma-iL, “mxi/LuX na-y- @/ka_ Ixai/ka? NogutL;é/mEn‘tax 
their woman married ‘‘you think [int.part.] thus as we? They dive 


among a foreign tribe, 
amo’ketiks, La/xka aLO/mEqtx, La/xka aqLo/L*aAx.” Takk agid/l1Xam 


two, that one is dead, that one he has lost.” Then — she said to him 
igé’sqés: “A, iqé/sqés, ikLe/mEn*t.” TakE A/yuLx, iq;’é/sqgés, 
blue-jay: oN blue-jay, he is a diver.” Then he went to plnesay, 
the beach, 
ateuX0/k Xué tLa/Xilkué 20 Lteuq. A‘lta cXumgé‘tga 
he threw them away their bushes inthe into water. Now they two played 
bottom of the canoe together 
ok;’Onasi’si kja iqé’/sqes. A/Ita ackL;é’mEn®, Atco/peut uya‘tamq;’aL 
{a bird; diver] and _ blue-jay. Now they two dived. He hid it his club 
iqée/sqés. Alta ackL;é@/mEnt, 64. Né/ntctXom iq;’é/sqés. Laxa 
blue-jay. Now they two dived, eh! His breath gave out  blue-jay. Visible 
née‘xax g6 qod/ta tLa/Xilkué. Nigk’Lotk god qod’ta tgé/lEkuél; 
he became at those theirbushesinthe He breathed at those bushes in the 
bottom of the canoe. bottom of the 
canoe; 
weXt nikté‘mEnt. Atco’1Xam 0’k;’dnasi’si: “Moc na?” “ Noe,” 
again he dived. He said to her the diver: “Youare  [int. “Tam,” 


there part.]?” 
agio'lXam. Lele ka wiXt né/ntctXom. WiXt Laxa né’/xax 


she said to him. Long then again his breath gave out. Again visible he became 
go gota tLa’Xilkue. Take la/kti Laxa né/xax. Alta tell 
at those their bushes in the Then four times visible he became. Now tired 


bottom of the canoe. 
né/xax igé’sqés. A/‘lta atvo/ketam Ok;’onasi’si. A‘Ita agia/qet ilé/é, 


he became __ blue-jay. Now he went to look the diver. Now she bit it the 
for her ground. 
A‘lta sanpot. Laq" a/teax oya‘tamq;’aL. AtcagE’Iltcim yukpa’. 
Now she closed Out he did it his club. He struck her right here! 

her eyes. 

Ka oxoela’-itix: télx‘Em ka aLuXua/nitck LgdLéIEXEmk: “La/xka 
Where they were people then it drifted a person: “ That one 
écté’c,” nNELXE/IqamX LgdLéJEXEmk. [42c gd tgé/lekué, Mank 
blue-jay,” shouted a person. Hewas at the bushes in A little 


the bottom of 
the canoe. 


lelé ka atcd’pena iqé/sqés ma/Lx6lé “Ehéhii’2, qantsi/2x:Lx 


long then he jumped blue-jay ashore. “Ehehiu! how then 
while 
tid’‘LEma o/takj’anasi/si ka aqaxa/tkako!” <“‘A2hihihia’2’ 
the supernat- ‘their diver then he is beaten!” ‘“*Bhehit’’ 
ural beings 
mSEH’xax, tex! antskLjé/mEnfax g0 intsa/lEXam,” né/k-im igé/sqés. 
you say, then we dive in our town,” he said blue-jay. 
TakE wiXt Lax aLi/xax LgdLé/lEXEmk. “Qamcaxoé/mOoL, mco- 
Then again visible it became a person. ‘It is desired a game you 
with you, 


é/walx'tEma.” TakE né/kim iqgé/sqés: ‘“Ka’nauwé L‘taLa/ma 
will climb up.” Then he said blue-jay: “All days 


15 


16 


17 


18 


19 


20 


= aS faye AU OF 
48 ANEKTCXO'LEMIX HER MYTH. sith 


anted-é/walx-tema-itx go intealEXam.” Takk akLo] Xam 


we always climb up in our town.” Then she said to them 
uLa/cinEMma-iL: ‘ Mcxé/Lax na_-y-é/ka  naté’tanué? I[ka’pa 
their woman married “Youthink ([int.part.] thus as Indians? Ice 


to a foreign tribe- 
aqexé/nxax ka ya/xka aqikiXéwulXaX. Manix aLué’luktcax 


is placed upright and that they climb it. When one falls down 
Lu‘ktuk aLxa’x ka aqL0o/Ltax.” TakE aqid/lXam_ iqé/sqés: 
broken he gets and he has lost.” Then hewas spoken to  blue-jay: 
“Qa/‘doXue igée’qés id/iwulx'ta.” Taker aqid/tXEmt ika‘pa, gd 
‘Must blue-jay he goes up.” Then itwas placed upright the ice, to_ 
igd‘cax qoa’’t a’/yaLqt. TakE néXe’kil igé/sqés; nix-Lx-a/nakod 
sky thus long. Then  hetiedthe blan-  blue-jay; he put it on 


ket around his waist 
ia/itexot. TakE naxEk/ltXuitck 0o/tsj’ikin. Alta actdiLxé/wulx-. 
his bearskin Then she made herself the chipmunk. Now they [dual] went 
blanket. ready climbing up. 


A‘ctod, a’/ctd, a’cto, a’cto. Kula’/yi k*ca/xali acto’yam. Take tell 
They they went, they went, they went. Far up they [dual] ar- Then tired 
[dual] went, rived. 


né’xax iqé/sqés. Ayo’/kux mank ksa/xali ka wiXt atciucga/maxé. 
he became ___ blue-jay. He flew a little up and again he took hold of it. 
Take tell né/xax. AtciagEna/nako-y- dya/tuwanXa. A/‘lta sa/npot, 
Then tired he got. He looked back to her the one he was Now she closed 
racing against. her eyes, 


gua/nEsum 0/itEt, ka niket tell aga’tkax. Atco’gam tak& 

always she came, and not tired she became. He took it then 
uya‘tamgq;’aL, yukpa’ atca/owilX. Take noé’luktci o’tsVikin. Ka 
his club, right here hestruck her. Then she felldown the chipmunk. And 
yukugué/kxamt ‘té/Ix‘Em. TakE aqa’/L'EIkKE] LgdLéJEXEmkK 

they looked up the people. Then it was seen a person 

Loélukteat. “La/xka é/ecec. TakE naxLk"tcuwa/mam.” Taker 

falling down. ‘That one blue-jay. Then she fell down.” Then 
naLxElqamX LgdLéJEXEmE: “ H2hehit’2, qantsi/2x-Lx tio/LEma 
it shouted & person: ‘ Bhehiu! how then the supernat- 

ural beings 


O'tatsVikin aqaxa/tgagd.” “*H2hehia’, msk/xatx. Text na 


their chipmunk is beaten.” ‘** Ehehia!,’ you say. Then Rene 
part. 
antcukuLxé/wulx'La-itx gd inteaEXam?” TakE mokct éla/kéetéma 
we climb always in our town?”’ Then two sea-otters 
atea’yul iLa’/Xak; Emana. 
he won them their chief. 

A‘lta wiXt mankx =  aLxé/lait. Takk wiXt aLté/mam 
Now again a little they stayed. Then again it came 
Lgd‘LéeJEXEmK: ‘ Qamcaxoé’moL. Wa/q;pas  qamcaxoé/moL.” 

a person: “It is desired a game Target it is desired a game 
with you. with you.” 
“Texi’ na wa/q;pas ntsxcga/liL gd intca/lEXam_ ka/nauwé 
“Then  [int. part.] target we always play in our town all 
LéaLa/ma,” né/k'im igé/sqés. Take akLo’lXam_ uLa/cinEma-iL: 
days,” he said blue-jay. Then she said to them their woman married 


among a foreign tribe: 
“Mexé/2LtuX na -y-é’/ka naté/tanué? Télx-a’m aqodxoéla/-itEmitx 


“You think [int. part.] thusas Indians? People are placed 
amo‘ketiks, @/wa @/natai Lé’Xat, éwa é/natai Le/Xat. La/xka 
two, thus at one side one, thus atotherside one. That one 
La‘newa aLO/mEqt, La/xka aqL0‘L;Eq.” Aqid’/lXam _ iqoa-iné/né: 
first dead, that one has lost.” He was spoken to the beaver: 
“Mai‘ka qEmuLa/étEmita.” Aqd/egam utea/la, aqa-igE’/kx6l 
“You you are made to stand up.” It was taken a grindstone, it was put on him 


ia/wan utea/la. Hwa ia/koteX aeXt, @/wa ia’wan aé’Xt. 
his belly the grindstone. Thus his back one, thus his belly one. 


Baas ANEKTCXO’LEMIX MYTH. 49 


AqéuLa‘étamit é@/wa @é/natai iqd’Lqdlale. A/‘Ita  ackto/cgam 


He was made tostand up thus on one side loon. Now they two took them 
cta/xalaitan. [a’ma* aqé‘lax iqoa-iné/né. LuX nuLa/tax‘it Okulai’tan. 
their [dual] ar- Shooting he was the beaver. Broken it fell down the arrow. 

rows. him done 


Ta/mat aqgé/lax iqd/Lqdlalé. Uht’2 né/xax. WiXt  ia/mat 


Shooting he was done the loon. Uhia’2 he made. Again shooting him 
him 

agé‘lax iqoa-iné/né. Ha né/xax. LuX nuLa/taXit kaX Okulai‘tan. 
he was done the beaver. Hi hemade. Broken it fell down that arrow. 
Ta/mat agélax iqd/Lqolalé. Uhi’2 né’xax. [a/xkéwa ka nicilga’/kxo-it 
Shooting he was the loon. Uho’2 he made. There then he fell on his 

him done _ back 
ayo/maqt. ‘ Ehehit’2, qantsi/x‘Lx tid/LEma Lg@’/lalax aqLxa/tgago!” 
he was dead. “ Ehehit’, how then the supernat- their bird he is beaten !”’ 


ural beings 
“<Bhéhia’2,’ msk/xatx,” né’/k'im igé’sqés;, “tex na wa/qj’pas 


“+ Ehehia'’, | you say,” he said blue-jay ; “recently [int. target 
: part. ] 
ntsxsga/liL go intca/lIExam?” 
wealways play in our town?”’ 
A‘lta wiXt aLxé’la-it, mank id’/Lqté aLxéla-it. Takk wiXt Lax 
Now again they stayed, a little long they stayed. Then again come 
: out 
aLi‘xax LgoLée/IEXEmk. TakE, ‘Aqamcaxoé/moL, mexalo‘tga 
it did a person. Then, ‘‘Itis desired a game you will sweat 
with you, 
6qolo‘tqan.” TakE né‘/k'im igé’/sgées: ‘“Ka‘nauwé LtaLa’ma 
sweat house.” Then he said blue-jay : “All days 
antexalo/tcElxéma-itx eX) intea/lE Xam.” TakE ak1Lo/lXam 
we always sweat in our town.” Then she said to them 
uLa/cinEma-iL: “Tqana/ks aqauwe’/kiLXaX. AtgkE/cko-itxax ka 
their woman married ‘* Rocks are heated. They get warm and 


among a foreign tribe: 

ya‘xkati atgE’p!x. Ta’cka nux0/La-itx ta/cka aqtd/Ltax.” <A‘Ita 
there they enter. Those they are dead those have lost.” Now 

né/k'im iLa/xak;Emana: ‘“ Qa’/doXué 1x0/Lxaio.” A‘lta aqauwé/kiLX 
he said their chief: ‘*Must we go into the Now they were heated 

cave.” 

qo/ta tqa/naks. TakE atqk’cko-itx. Méoket Lxoa’p qod’ta tqa/naks. 

those rocks. Then they got warm. Two holes those rocks, 

A’‘lta @Xti naLxoa’p a/LOp! La’/ska, Alta éXti naLxoa/p a/Lop! 

Now one hole they en- they. Now one hole they en- 

tered tered 


tid’/LEma. A/‘Ita aqid’xopo. Take atcid/egam ika’pa atcidteé/na go 

the supernat- Now it was shut. Then he took it ice he laid it under in 
ural beings. them 

qo’ta tqa/naks. A‘Ita ia/xka aLiga’la-it. Cka ma/nx-‘i ka dell, dell, 
those rocks. Now it they stood on. it. And _ alittle and noise of burst- 

ing, 

qoa/nEmi dell né/xau. Take aqiuxd/laqr tqa/naks. AqiLxa/laqu 

fivetimes noiseof it was. Then they were opened _ the rocks. It was opened 
bursting 

igé’sqgés La/néwatiks; Lka/nauwétiks iLa/Xanaté. Aqidxd/laqu 
blue-jay first; all of them they were alive. It was opened 

tid’‘LEma. Aqo’d/nEmiks nux6/La-it. WeXt né@kin. “Ehéhia/2! 

the supernat- Five of them were dead. Again they won. ‘** Ehehia’ 
ural beings. 


qantsi/x'Lx tid/LEma aqodxd/tgago!” “‘Ehéhit’/, msk/xatx! Texi 
how then the supernat- are beaten.” ““* Bhehiu’,’ you say. Then 
ural people 


antsxalo’‘tElkEma-itx gd intea/EXam.” 
we always sweat in our town.”’ 


Eile et —— 


1 


24 


12 


50 ANEKTCXO’LEMIX HER MTYH. [eee 


TakE atcid’|Xam ia/kxix: “Tea! ikolé’/ma -wax IxLigEla’x0.” 


Then he said to him to et oe “Come! whales pour we will do them.” 
in-law: 
TakE akLoXam =  uLa/cinEmaiL: ‘Qa‘d’ocXEm, mcXEna/oi. 
Then she said to them their woman married among ‘Take care, look out! 


a foreign tribe: 
Amegiitk;’0é/masamita imea/xakj’Emana ka mea‘k; lEmateko-y- a‘lta.” 


You w will ae him ashamed your chief and y on do the last now.” 
Agio’lXam itca/xkj)’un: “Alta pod/2lakli, wax aqk/Lax.” Io/kuk 
She said to him her elder brother: “Now dark, pour it is done,” Then 
aga/yutk iqé’/sqés go itca’/XEmalapliX. Ia/koa @’natai aga/yutk 
she put him blue-jay in her armpit. There onother side she put him 
ka/sa-it, ia/koa  te;iqi‘nkjéama = aga/yutk. ‘“Néket qa’nsix 

robin, there on right side she put him. ‘* Not [any] how 
mgé@/ma ‘Khehia’! Manix yamo’/tga, néket qa/nsix mtgé’/kcta 

you say ‘ Ehehia!’ When I hold you, not [any] how you |dual] look 
amtkanamtEm06/ket.” A/‘Ita a/LOLx p0d/lakli g6 qix: é@/maL. 
both of you.” Now they went at dark to that bay. 


to the beach 
Agid/|Xam_ itea/xkj’un: “La’/kt e@kolé’ma 10’ya, naéket milké’k"ea. 


She said to him her elder brother: ‘ Four whales they go, not harpoon them. 
H/Laquinum @’kolé id/ya, tex? amLéluketax.” Taker noxuina/Xit 
The fifth whale goes, then harpoon him.” Then they stood 
tid‘LEma. AkLO/cgam Lkjé@/wax kaX uya‘/lé, agigkElgé/cgam 
the supernat- She took it a torch that his sister, she helped him 


ural beings. 


itea’/xkj’un. TakE nELXE/lqamX LgoLe/LEXEmK: “ Yuyaytya/4! 


herelder brother. Then it shouted a person: *‘Yuyayuya! 
E/minta @’kolé x-iau id’ya,” Le’ Xat qo/La LgOLélEXEmK NELXE]qamX. 
[A fish] whale that he goes,” one that person shouted. 
Lilé ka weXt nELXE’IgamX: “Yuyayuya’,-y- ita’mEla-y- 
Sometime then again it shouted: “Yuyayuya’, albatross 
@kolé xiau idya’! Amckixé/latck LEmecatcd’L.” Qé/xtce ne’kikst 
whale that _ he goes! Raise them your harpoon shafts!” Intend he looked 
igé/sqés. TeXup teXup teXup teXup teXup aLE’/xax La’‘kj ewax. 
blue-jay. Flicker it did the torch. 
Goyi’ aga/yax igé/sqés: “Nékct Lga/‘tgilket.” TakE weXt 
Thus she did him blue-jay: ** Not look.” Then again 
NELXE/IqamX LgoLéeJEXEmkK: “Yuyayuya’, émod/lak é’kolé 
it shouted a person: “Yuyayuya’, elk whale 
x‘iau ioya! Mckuxélatek Lemeatcd’L.” WeXt naLxEIqamX 
that he goes! Raise them your harpoon shafts!” Again it shouted 
LgoLélExEmk: “ Yiyayuya’, imod/k"tXi-y- @/koleé xiau ioya’. 
a person: ‘““VYuyayuya’, sperm whale whale that he goes! 
Mckixé'latck LEMeatco’L.” TakE agid/1Xam uya‘le: 
Raise them your harpoon shafts!" Then she said to him _ his elder sister: 
“Qa/vocXEm! A‘lta ia‘xka itia/ya.” Take wiXt nELXE/Iqamx 
“Look out! Now he he will come.” Then again it shouted 
LgoLéleEXEmk: ‘“Yiyayaya’, tid’LEma ita/koleé xiau  idya‘!” 
a person: ‘“Yuyayuya, the supernat- their whale that goes!” 


ural beings 


Qée'xteé né’/ki*kst iqé/sqés; teXup teXup teXup teXup aLE’/xax 


Intend he looked blue-jay ; flicker it did 
La/k;’éwax.  ‘Qantsi/x-Lx AnékteX6/lEmiX Lga’k;’@wax ka 
the torch. “ How may AnekteXo'lemiX her torch and 
aLxat*ma/nEnukt.” A‘lta né/k'im qo’La LgoLé/lEXEmkK: 
it always flickers.” Now he said that person: 
“Yityayuya’; tid/LeEma ita/kolE xiau  idya’!” Agio/lXam 
“ Yuyayuya; the supernatural their whale that goes!” She said to him 
beings 


itea/xk;’un: “Ata ia/xka  itia’ya.” AteLé/luke — itea’xkj’un. 
her elder brother: “Now that one _he will come.'’ He harpoonedit herelder prathien: 


CHINOOK ANEKTCXO’LEMIX MYTH—TRANSLATION. 51 


BOAS 


Ateé/xaluketgd ma/Lxdlé: “ Ehehit/2, qantsi/x‘Lx tid’/LEma ita/kolé 


He threw it down landward: ““Ehehiu, how then the supernat- their 
ural beings whale 

ka agéLxatema’ptck.” TakE né’k-im igé’sqés: “ EKhéhia’!” TeXup 
aud it is thrown ashore.” Then he said blue-jay: “ Khehia’.’ Extinguished 
a/Lax La/kjéwax. Ljla‘pLjlap a’yo igé’sqés. TakE ayod’Xoné 
it became the torch. Under water hewent  blue-jay. Then he drifted away 
ig@/sqés WeXt aLb/kit. Na/kiL weXt  iLa’xak;’Emana. 

blue-jay. Again they won. He won again their chief. 
A‘ltta ati‘xko. AkLO’] Xam _ uLa/cinEma-iL: (xix k ~ 6/Lan 

Now they went home. She said tothem their woman married among “This rope 


a foreign tribe: 
megiak Xat;’0/ya! Manix meigo’/tctamai, kj’au megia/xo ka/sa-it 


coil up in canoe! When you will get across, tie do to it robin 
1a/0k.” A/‘lt&a aqgé/Lgax éitcexa’/x qigd aLi/xko. A’Ita aqcea’kXatkq 
his blan- Now it was ade a storm where they went Now it was put on the 
ket.” against them home. edge of the canoe 
g0 Lia/aLxap’uke ikani’m, ka aqé/Lgax éitcxa’x; Lé2qe puc aLxP'la-it 
on its gunwale canoe, and it wasmade a storm; almost if they were 
against them dead 


ka aLigo/tctam. 


and they came across. 
Translation. 


There was a town the chief of which had died. His two children 
were grown up; one was a girl and one a boy. Early every morning 
the people went out to hunt sea-otters. The girl was always in the 
stern of the canoe. At dark they returned home. Five times they 
had gone hunting, then it grew foggy. Her hair became wet and she 
swallowed the water which dripped down from her hair. <A long time 
the people remained there. Then she became pregnant. Blue-Jay 
was the first to observe it. He said: ‘“ Don’t you notice it? He made 
his sister pregnant.” Robin said: ‘‘ Be quiet, Blue-Jay, you will make 
our chief’s children ashamed.” ‘“ Ha, he is the elder of us two and he 
ought to know better than I.” After some time she became stouter. 
“Heh, we will run,” said Blue-Jay. “I am ashamed because her 
brother made her pregnant. We will leave them; we will move!” 
Then, indeed, the people believed Blue-Jay. Again the brother and 
sister went hunting sea-otters. In theevening they came home. Now 
there were no people and no houses. ‘ Lo, they deserted us. Blue- 
Jay advised them to do so.” Then the brother continued: ‘“ Tell me 
who made you pregnant?” She replied, ‘‘I do not know. Once when 
we went out hunting sea-otters a mist came up and I swallowed the water 
which made me qualmish.” Then they searched for fire. But the 
people had poured water into all the fires. The last house was that of 
their aunt, the Crow. It also was taken away. They walked about 
and there they heard the crackling of fire. The brother said to his 
sister: ‘‘ Do you hear the fire?” After awhile it crackled again. They 
found the place from where the sound appeared to come. They dug 
into the ground and found a shell. In the shell there was burning 
coal. ‘ Oh,” they said to each other, ‘‘ our aunt pitied us; she put the 
fire into the shell for us.” Now they started a fire. The next day they 


Pp wd e 


- =f = aa 
52 ANEKTCXO LEMIX HER MYTH. i 


built a small house. There they lived for a long time. One day a sea 
breeze arose. Early in the morning the man rose and went down to 
the beach. There he found ten cedar planks, each ten fathoms long, 
which had drifted ashore. He went up to the house and said to his 
sister: ‘“‘ I have found ten planks, each ten fathoms long.” They went 
to the beach, hauled them up to their house,.and the brother made a 
large house. Then the brother said: ‘“* What kind of a blanket will 
you make for your son?” In the morning he went down to the beach 
and there he found two small sea-otters. He said: ‘‘Oh, my poor 
nephew, this will be your blanket.” He took them up to the house 
and said to his sister: ‘“‘ I found these sea-otters.” Then she was very 
glad. The brother said: ‘‘ What soup are you going to make for your 
son?” In the morning he arose and went down to the beach. There 
he found a sea-lion. He skinned it and cut it, and then they boiled it. 
Every day he went down to the beach, and every time he found two 
sea-otters. And their house was full of sea-otter skins. One morning 
he went to the beach; there was a whale. Then he ran back to his 
sister and cried: ‘A whale is on the beach!” His sister said in reply: 
‘‘ Hvery night the people on the other side of the ocean send us food. 
Those supernatural people love me. My boy’s father came. Now cut 
the whale.” Then he skinned it and cut it and they carried up the 
meat. 

Now the Crow made herself ready to look for her nephew and her 
niece. She launched her canoe and paddled across, wailing all the 
time. When she had almost crossed the bay she discovered a house 
and saw smoke rising. She went on. When she was near the shore 
she saw a chief sitting on the roof of the house. [The latter said to his 
sister, when he saw the Crow coming:] ‘‘Our aunt who pitied us is 
coming there.” She arrived and saw the whale on the beach. She 
[was very hungry,] went to the whale and pulled at the meat. Then 
her nephew said: ‘‘Come up to the house; why do you touch that 
rotten meat ?” She replied : “Oh, I only looked at it,” and went up to 
the house. She entered and saw that it was full of whale meat. She 
went right up to the child [and wanted to take it in her arms], but the 
child began to ery. The sister said: ‘‘Oh, he is afraid of your tears.” 
They gave her water and she washed her face. Then she tried again 
to take him, but still he cried. The sister said: “He is afraidof your 
breath.” Then she took water, cleaned her mouth and took him again, 
but. still he cried. Then the sister said to her aunt: “Do you think 
he is a human being? Look here, he is the son of a supernatural being. 
They gave us that whale to eat.” “Oh,” said the Crow. They boiled 
whale meat for her and she ate it. After she had finished eating she 
went home. They gave her two pieces of blubber which she put into 
her mat. 

The Crow went across the bay; and when she approached the town 
she cried: ‘‘O, my sister’s children, my sister’s children, birds flew up 


ae _ANEKTCXO’LEMIX MYTH—TRANSLATION. AD 


from you many times; eagles were eating you. O, my sister’s child- 
ren, my sister’s children, gulls were eating you. Ravens were eating 
you, O, my sister’s children.” Now she came still nearer the town. 
Blue-Jay was sitting outside and saw her coming. When she had 
nearly arrived she cried again: ‘“O, my sister’s children, my sister’s 
children, birds flew up from you; crows were eating you.” Then Blue-Jay 
shouted: “Do you not notice? She names the Crow; she names the 
Crow.” Now she landed and went up to the house. Now all the peo- 
ple came into the Crow’s house. They asked her how she had found 
her sister’s children. She replied and told much. “I went across and 
I found their bodies full of birds which ate them. AI kinds of birds 
ate them.” After she had finished, Blue-Jay was the first to leave the 
house. He went to the rear of the house, where he stayed. Now, the 
Crow was silent. Robin, who was her deceased husband’s brother, 
remained with her. They sat on opposite sides of the fire. She had 
five children. Then she told him everything ina low voice, and Blue- 
Jay listened outside. She pulled out the food which she had carried 
home, cut it to pieces, and gave it to her children and to Robin. Her 
youngest daughter choked [when eating the blubber]. Then Blue-Jay, 
who had been peeping through the chinks of the wall, entered and 
slapped her nape. The piece of whale meat flew out of her mouth. 
Blue-Jay took it up, went out, showed it to the people, and said: 
“Do you see? The Crow fed me.” He went to three houses showing it 
around, then he ate it. After some time it grew dark. The people 
were very hungry. 

Then Blue-Jay said to the chief of the town: ‘“O, chief, the house [of 
the young man whom we deserted] is full of whale meat. A supernat- 
ural being loved his sister. He invites me, and he has invited the Crow 
and Robin.” Late in the evening Blue-Jay came out of the house, took 
his large blanket [and went to his elder brother, Robin,| saying, ‘ Robin, 
let us sleep under one blanket; I always get cold.” Robin replied: 
“Ya-a, Lalways sleep alone, and do not want anyone with me; sleep there 
atmyfeet.”. Now Blue-Jaylay down at Robin’s feet. Blue-Jayremained 
awake. Whenit was nearly morning Blue-Jay fell asleep. Now Robin 
and Crow made a canoe [ready]. Then Robin and the Crow went 
to their canoe and carried their property into it. Now Robin took a 
sharp stick and put it in the ground at Blue-Jay’s feet. Then Robin 
and the Crow went across to the young man and to his sister, and left 
Blue-Jay alone. Early in the morning when he awoke, he said: ‘* Wake 
up, Robin,” and kicked him; but his feet struck the stick, and he hurt 
himself. ‘‘O, my feet!” he cried. ‘They left me here alone.” Then 

“he went home to his children. Crow and Robin crossed the bay and 
went up to the house of the young man. 

Early next morning Blue-Jay said: “ )"ow, let us all go across.” They 
made themselves ready and went across. When they were in the mid- 
dlé of the bay a heavy gale arose, and the people almost died. They 


54 ANEKTCXO’LEMIX HER MYTH. . BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


had to turn back. Five days [they tried to cross the bay], but every 
time they were driven back. Then they got across. Now it began to 
snow, and the people were covered with snow. They became very cold. 
Thus their chief took revenge upon them. Then Blue-Jay went up to 
the house. [He found a knothole and called to Robin, who was in the 
house:| ‘Robin, open for me, Iam cold. Bring me food, Robin, | am 
starving.” Robin did not reply. “Robin, take the tongs and put 
some food through this hole.” Robin was boiling meat. Then he took 
the tongs and put them into the boiling kettle. He pushed the tongs 
through the knothole. Blue-Jay [was so hungry that he] licked the 
fat off from the tongs. He said: “ Robin, Robin, tell the chief that I 
will give him my daughter in marriage, but let him open the door.” 
“ Ya-a,” said Robin; ‘What shall he do with her? He wants your 
chief’s daughter [not yours|.”. Then Blue-Jay ran down to the beach 
and said to his chief: ‘The young man asks for your daughter and for 
my daughter.” The chief did not reply, and Blue-Jay ran back to the 
house and said: ‘“ Robin, the chief says he will give him his daughter.” 
Fivetimes Blue-Jay ran down to the beach and back to the house. Then 
his chief spoke; he made his daughter ready, and put on her dentalia, 
and so did Blue-Jay. Once more he ran up to the house and said: 
‘Robin, I have made my daughter ready.” “Ya,” replied Robin; “She 
Shall look after the chamber.” Now they brought the chief’s daughter 
up to the house and they opened the door. 

On the following morning the sister had disappeared. Lo! The super- 
natural beings had taken her and her child away. The people remained 
in this place and made new houses. 


Once upon a time the Crow gathered many potentilla roots [put them 
into her canoe] and crossed the sea. When she arrived at the country 
of the supernatural beings they all came down to the beach. They 
searched among her roots and found one d6gué/mEskotit and one 
LE/moksin among them, These they ate, and threw away the Crow’s 
potentilla roots. Then she went up to the house and met her niece, 
who said: “Do you think they are men, that you bring them potentilla 
roots? Gather ogué/mEskotit and LE/moksin. When you come again 
bring all kinds of nice smelling roots, and bring one small basket of 
potentilla roots for me.” Then she said to her: ‘“‘Take this bitch along; 
it belongs to your grandson. When you come near the shore say: 
‘Catch a whale, Qjaci/nEmicLX.’” “Yes,” said the Crow, and then she 
went home. When she was in the middle of the ocean she said to the 
dog: “Catch a whale, Q;aci/nEmicLX. Do you know indeed how to 
catch whales?” Then the bitch who lay in the stern of the boat arose. 
A whale came up. She bit it. Then the canoe rocked violently. 
“Hold it fast, Q;aci/nEmicLX.” Then the Crow became afraid aud 
said: “Let go, let go, Q;aci/nEmicLX.” Then she let go the whale and 
lay down to sleep. The Crow landed [and when she arrived], she had 


ache ANEKTCXO’LEMIX MYTH—TRANSLATION. 55 


lost her dog. She ran about and searched for it in all the houses, 
but did not find it. Then she [was very sad and| did not eat because 
she liked her dog. 

The Crow stayed here five days, and then again she gathered many 
roots of plants. She gathered 6gué/mEskotit and LE/moksin. She gath- 
ered all kinds of nice smelling roots. She put potentilla roots into one 
small basket. Then she crossed again to the country of the super- 
natural beings. Then they all came down to the beach. They [took 
the nice smelling roots and] ate them right there at the beach. She 
carried the potentilla roots up to her niece. Now she saw her dog, 
which was in the house. [Her niece said:] ‘ Do you think this is a com- 
mon bitch? Shereturns. Why did you say in the middle of the ocean: 
‘Take the whale?’ Therefore you became afraid. You must not say so 
until you are near the shore. Do you think they gave her to you as a 
present? She always returns. You will take her again when you go 
home. Do not search for her when you have lost her. She provides 
you with food when you are going.” The Crow replied: “Yes.” And 
when she went back she carried that bitch along. ‘When you approach 
the land say: ‘Catch a whale, Q;aci/nEmicLX.’” Then she went home. 
The dog lay in the stern of the canoe. When they were near the town 
_ the Crow said: ‘Catch a whale, Q;aci/nEmicLX.” She did not move. 
Then the Crow took some water, poured it over her and said: “Catch 
a whale; are you indeed able to catch a whale?” When they were 
quite near the shore she said again: ‘Catch a whale, Q; aci/nEmicL X.” 
Then she arose and caughta whale. Againthecanoerocked. Shesaid: 
“ Hold it fast, Qjaci‘nEmicLX.” Sometimes she did not say it right 
and cried: “Let go the whale, Qj aci/nEmicLX.” Then the whale drifted 
ashore. The people went down to the beach and cut the whale. ‘They 
carried the meat up to house. 

After some time the chief said: ‘I desire to go and see my sister.” 
Now the people made themselves ready and started in a large canoe. 
When they came near the country of the supernatural beings their chief 
said: ‘“‘Take care, they will test us.” [When they had gone a little far- 
ther| the whole sea was covered with ice. He said to his people: ‘We 
will land after a while.” Now Blue-Jay became very cold, but he said: 
“JT never get cold, I will stay in the canoe.” He jumped into the water 
and sank out of sight at once. Then a person shouted on shore: 
“Khehiu, | Blue-Jay| killed himself.” Then the chief arose in the canoe; 
he took the ice and threw it away. Then that person shouted: ‘“ Ehe- 
hiu, how he threw away the ice of the supernatural beings.” *‘ Ehehiu,’ 
you say, I threw it away; what made me fall down?” [said Blue-Jay]. 
Then they went up to the house. The chief said: “Do not enter at 
once. After a while they will open their house.” Now there was a sea- 
lion and a sea-cow (7), one at each side of the door. They stood in the 
doorway. Now Blue-Jay became very cold. He tried to jump into 
the house and the animals bit him. They had almost been unable 


56 ANEK'TCXO/LEMIX HER MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


to recover him. Then the chief stepped up and he took one sea mon- 
ster in each hand and threw them away. ‘“ Ehehiu,” shouted the per- 
son [how he throws away the sea lions of the supernatural people”]. 
“¢Hhehiu’, you say; I threw away those who bit me,” said Blue-Jay. 
Then they all entered the house and stayed there. There were no peo- 
ple in it except the chief’s sister. [Blue-Jay said to his brother 
Robin:] “What will they give us to eat, Robin?” “Oh, be quiet,” 
replied Robin. Then said Blue-Jay: ‘Our chief’s fire makes noise just 
as this here.” There was only one log in the house. Then the per- 
son shouted: ‘*Come down to the fire you who splits wood with his 
beak.” Then a being came out [from under the bed] with a long beak 
who split the log. ‘‘Robin,” said Blue-Jay, ‘that was our great-great- 
grandfather’s slave.” ‘I donot know that he was our slave; you alone 
have slaves.” Then a fire was made and the whole house was full of 
smoke. The person shouted: ‘‘Come down to the fire, Smoke-eater.” 
“Robin,” said Blue-Jay, ‘‘he also was our (great-great-grandfather’s) 
slave; he always carried me on his back and led you by the hand.” 
‘‘T do not know that he was our slave; you alone have slaves.” Then 
the smoke man came down and [they saw that] he had an enor- 
mous belly. He stepped into the middle of the house and swallowed 
all the smoke. The house became light. Then they brought a small 
dish and one cut of meat was init. “Robin,” said Blue-Jay, “that is 
too little; that is not enough for all of us; I certainly shall not get 
enough.” Then a person shouted: “‘Come down to the fire you who 
cuts whale with his beak.” Then a person came to the fire with a very 
sharp beak, who began ta cut meat. Hecut and cut until the whole 
dish was full. Then he blew upon it and it became a large canoe full 
of meat. They boiled it, and when it was nearly done they all went 
out and their chief took reeds. These he put into their mouths [and 
pushed them right through them] so that they came out at the anus, 
They all did so, also Blue-Jay. Then they entered again and sat down. 
They made small holes where they sat and began to eat. They swal- 
lowed the meat and it went right out at the anus. Blue-Jay arose 
and there lay his anus. ‘‘Look here, Robin, my anus fell down right 
here!” Then the people took him by his arms, carried him out of the 
house, and pulled the reed out of hismouth. Then the chief and Blue- 
Jay entered again; he took three spoonfuls and he had enough. Then 
the people continued to eat and the whale meat became less and less. 
Then they went out, took out the reeds andreentered. They continued 
to eat. Now they ate in the right way and finished all they had boiled. 
Then a person cried: ‘‘ Ehehiu, how they eat all the meat of the super- 
natural beings!” Then Blue-Jay said: ‘Did you think T could not 
finish what you gave me to eat?” 
Now they stayed in the house. Blue-Jay went out. He was over- 

satiated. He looked and saw a patch of kinnikinnik berries. He 
began to eat them, when a person called: ‘“‘Oh, Blue-Jay eats the excre- 


- 


> ae 


sp Sey ANEKTCXO’LEMIX MYTH-——TRANSLATION. at 


mentsof the supernatural people ;” whereupon Blue-Jay said: ‘*‘ Ehehiu’, 
you say; do you think I eat them? I merely look at your kinnikinnik 
berries.” 

They stayed there. After awhile a person came out of the house and 
said: ‘‘They wish to play with you; you will dive.” Blue Jay said: 
‘‘We always dive in our country.” ‘Do you think they do as you are 
accustomed to?” said the woman. “When they dive the one dies and 
the other one has won.” She said to them: “ Blue-Jay shall dive.” 
Blue-Jay went down to the water and threw the bushes out of his 
canoeinto the water. Then he and the diver fought against each other. 
They dived. Blue-Jay hid his club under his blanket. They jumped 
into the water and after awhile Blue Jay’s breath gave out. He came 
up and hid under the bushes which he had threwn out of his canoe. 
There he breathed and dived again. He said to the diver: ‘‘Where 
are you?” “Here lam,” she replied. After awhile his breath gave 
out again. Once more he came up under the bushes. Four times he 
did so, and then he became tired. He went to look for the diver. He 
found her biting the bottom of the sea. She had her eyes closed. Blue- 
Jay took his club and hit her on the nape. The people saw something 
floating on the water and then a person said: “There is Blue Jay.” 
He was, however, in the bushes which he had thrown out of his 
canoe. After a little while Blue-JJay jumped ashore and a person 
shouted: ‘‘Ehehiu, how Blue-Jay won over the diver of the supernat- 
ral beings.” ‘“‘Ehehiu’, you say; we always dive so in our country,” 
said Blue Jay. 

Then again a person stepped out and said: “They want to play with 
you; you will climb up a tree together.” Then Blue-Jay said: “We 
climb every day in our country.” But the young woman remarked: 
“Do you think they are just like Indians? They will place a piece of 
ice upright, then you will have to climb up the ice. When a climber 
falls down he breaks to pieces and the other one wins.” Then they 
said to Blue Jay: ‘‘ You shall climb up.” They placed upright a piece 
of ice which was so long that it reached to thesky. Blue-Jay made 
himself ready and tied his bearskin blanket around his belly. {The 
supernatural beings sent a] chipmunk who made himself ready [to 
climb up the ice]. They began to climb, and when they had reached a 
certain height Blue-Jay grew tired. {Then he let goof the ice] and flew 
upward. {When he had rested] he again took hold of the ice. Then 
he grew tired again. He looked back to the one with whom he was 
racing and saw her climbing up with her eyes shut. She did not grow 
tired. Then Blue-Jay took his club [from under his blanket] and struck 
her on the nape. The chipmunk fell down. The people looked up and 
saw a person falling down. “Ah, that is Blue-Jay! There he falls 
down.” (But when they saw the chipmunk] a person shouted : “Ehe- 
hiu, how they won over the chipmunk of the supernatural beings.” 


ETHNOLOGY 


58 ANEKTCXO’LEMIX HER MYTH. [zonEauian 


‘“¢ Hhehiu’, you say; we always climb in our country.” Then their chief 
won two sea-otters. 

Then they stayed awhile longer. Then again a person came out and 
said: ‘‘They want to have a shooting match with you.” Blue-Jay 
said: ‘‘We have shooting matches every day in our country.” The 
young woman said: “ Do you think they are lke Indians? They place 
people against each other. One stands on one side, the other on the 
other. [They shoot at each other,| the one dies, and the other wins.” 
Then they said to the Beaver: “ You stand up [on our side].” They 
took a grindstone and tied it to his belly. They took another one and 
tied it to his back. The supernatural beings made the loon stand up 
on their side. Then [the beaver and the loon] took their arrows and 
the loon shot at the beaver. The arrow broke and fell down. Then 
the beaver shot at the loon. ‘ Uhia,” said he when he was struck by the 
arrow. Then the loon shot again. ‘ Ha,” hesaid, and the arrow broke 
and fell down. Thenhe shotagainattheloon. ‘ Uhu,” he said, then fell - 
on his back and died. ‘‘ Ehehiu! How they won over the bird of the 
supernatural people.” Blue-Jay spoke: ‘‘ You say ‘ehehiu’; we have 
shooting matches in our country every day.” 

They stayed there some time-longer. Then again a person came out 
of the house and said: ‘‘They want to play with you; you will sweat 
in the sweat house.” Blue-Jay spoke: ‘* We always sweat in our 
country.” Then the young woman said: ‘They always heat caves, 
and when they are hot, they enter them. The one party will die, the 
other will win.” Then their chief said: “‘We must go into the cave.” 
Now the supernatural beings heated the caves. They got hot. There 
were two caves in arock. [The chief and some of his people] went 
into one, the supernatural beings went into the other. Then the caves 
were closed. The chief, however, took some ice and put it under their 
feet. They stood on it. After a little while a sound was heard like 
the bursting of a shell that is being roasted. Five times that sound 
was heard. Then the caves were opened; first that of Blue Jay’s peo- 
ple—they were all alive; next that of the supernatural beings—five 
of them were dead. They had won again. ‘ Ehehiu! How they won 
over the supernatural beings.” ‘‘Ehehiu’, you say,” replied Blue-Jay, 
‘Swe use the sweat house every day in our country.” 

Now the chief’s brother-in-law said: “Let us catch whales.” The 
sister told him: “Take care; they will try to put you to shame. This 
is their lastattempt at you.” Inthe evening they went to catch whales. 
She took Blue-Jay and put him into her right armpit. Then she took 
Robin and put him into her left armpit [and told them]: “Now I 
shall keep you here; do not say ‘ehehiu,’ do not look!” Then in the 
evening they all went down to the beach. She said to her elder brother: 
‘‘Four whales will pass you, but do not throw your harpoon; when 
the fifth comes, then harpoon it.” Now the supernatural people stood 
there. The young woman took a torch in order to help her brother. 


ee ANEKTCXO'LEMIX MYTH—TRANSLATION, aie 


After a while a person shouted: “‘ Yuyayuya, a flatfish whale comes.” 
[The chief did not stir.| After a while a person shouted: ‘ Yuya- 
yuya, an albatross whale comes; raise your harpoons.” Blue-Jay tried 
to look [from under the arms of the woman|. At once her torch 
began to flicker, and she pressed Blue-Jay, saying: ‘Do not look!” 
Then again a person shouted: ‘ Yuyayuya, an elk whale comes; raise 
your harpoons.” [The chief did not stir.| Next a person shouted: 
“Yuyayuya,a sperm-whale comes; raise your harpoons.” Then the 
sister said to him: ‘ Now, look out; now the real whale will come.” 
Then a person shouted: ‘‘ Yuyayuya, the whale of the supernatural 
people comes.” Blue-Jay tried to look [from his hiding place]. Then 
the torch of the young woman began to flicker and was almost extin- 
guished. The people said: ‘‘ Why does AnéktcX0/lEmiX’s torch always 
flicker?” The person shouted once more: ‘“ Yuyayuya, the whale of 
the supernatural people comes.” Then AnéktcX0/lEmiX said to her 
brother: ‘‘Now the real whale will come.” The chief harpooned it and 
threw it ashore. ‘Ehehiu! How they threw ashore the whale of the 
supernatural people.” Blue-Jay replied: ‘ Ehehiu,” and at once the 
torch was extinguished, and Blue-Jay [fell down from the armpit of the 
woman and] was drowned. He drifted away. Thus they won again. 
Their chief won again. Thenthey wenthome. AneéktcX0/lEmiX said: 
“Coil up this rope in your canoe; when you get across tie Robin’s 
blanket to it.” [Then they started. When they were in the middle of 
the ocean the supernatural people] created a strong gale against those 
going home. Now they tied [Mink] on to the gunwale of their canoe 
[thus making it higher and preventing its being swamped]. They 
almost perished; finally they reached their home |safely. Then they 
tied Robin’s blanket to the rope. AnétcX0/lEmiX pulled it back, and 
when she found the blanket at the end of the rope she knew that her 
brother had reached home safely]. 


bo 


ma Ow 


19 


20 


4, IGUA'NAT JA’KXANAM. 
THE SALMON HIS MYTH. 


Io’e 6/Xat iLa/Xak;’Emana, 6¢0’kuil uya’/Xa. Ewa’ gqé‘xtcé 
There one their chief, a woman his daughter. Thus intending 
was 


aqgéxEmela’luX. Niket atsd’tx. <A/’lta ateLuqoa’na-it imd/lak 
they wanted to buy Not he gave her Now he put down elk 
her. away. 


Lia/‘ateam: “‘ Ma/nix La‘ksta tej Ex LkLa‘x6d Lik L*E’/tcam, Lguega’/ma 
its antlers: * When who break he willdoit these antlers, he shall take her 
ogu/Xa.” <A/‘lta aqd/xdqte télXEm, ta’néwatike Ox0dwa’yol. 
my daughter.” Now they were invited _ the people, first the walkers. 
Ka‘nauweé aqo/xoqte. A’tElaxtike ktgE’kal. Ka/nauwé2 aqo’xdqte 
All they were in- Then they the fliers. All they were in- 
vited. vited 


ktgE’kal. TakE aqo/lXam_ ots!Emo/ékXan. ‘“Ma/néwa _ ts; Ex 
the fliers. Then she was told the snail. * You first break 
LE’xa!” No/ya ots!Emé/nkXan. Qe’xtcé akLo/cgam. Neket ts; Ex 
do it!” She went the snail. Intending she took it. Not break 
aLE/xax. Aqid/lXam_ ikja/dten! ‘‘A’mElaxta tcjEx LE‘xa!” 
it did. He was told squirrel: “You next break do it!” 
A’lta te;Ex atci/Lax ikja/0teEn cka mEnK aLxElE’], Aqid’/lXam 
Now break he did it squirrel and a little it moved. He was told 
énana’muks: ‘“A’mElaxta tcjEx LE/xa!” A’yuLx énana/muks. 


the otter: ‘You next break do it!” He went to the the otter. 
middle of the house 


NaxLo'lexa-it kaX 080’/kuil: “A, qo ia/xka tcjEx telEtx!” Qj;at 
She thought that woman: “A, will he break he does it." Love 
aga/yax. AtcLO’cgam, qgé’/xtcé te; Ex atci/Lax. Naket tcjEx aLk’x. 
she did him. He took it, intending break he did it. Not break it did. 
Ayo’ptck weXt. A/‘Ita a/élaxta é@@/na 4A’/yuLx. Goydé/2 ia’qa-iL 
He went up again. Now he next the beaver he went to Thus large 
the middle of 
the house. 
ia’‘wan. Take né’/k:im iqgé’sqés: “LE ia/xka x-ix‘l’x: gia/tsjaxan 
his belly. Then he said blue-jay: “LE he this | with large belly 
ts; Ex tcla’x0.” AtcLO/egam é@/na qd’La Ltatca/ma. Leéqs tej Ex 
break he will do it.”’ He took them the beaver those antlers. Almost break 
atcE’Lax ka weXt tell né/xax. A’yuptck eéé’na. A/’‘élaxta 
he did it and again tired he got. He wentup the beaver. Next 
élé‘q;am = a/yuLx. AtcLO/cgam, Léqs tsjEx aLE/xax. Taki 
the wolf went to the mid- He took it, almost break it did. Then 
dle of the house. 


wiXt tell né/xax. A’yuptck @lé/q;am. A/élaxta ii/texdt a/yuLx. 


again tired he got. He went up the wolf. Next he the bear went to the 
middle of 
the house. 
AtcLé/egam q0d’La Lfatca/ma ii’tsxdt. Léqs tsjEx atci/Lax. Ta2ll 
He took them those antlers the bear. Almost break he did them. Tired 
né/xax  ii’tsx6t. 
he got the bear. 
Go Lé’Xat Loe LgdLéeJEXEmk; ka/nauwé i0/Ljaqla é/LtaLfa; 
There one it was a person; all sore his body; 


60 


cd THE SALMON MYTH. 61 
LE’Laqeo ka/nauwé LOL;aqLa. TakE né‘kim igé/sqés: “ E/kta 

his hair all sore. Then he said blue-jay: “ What 
qtcé/‘tuwa xix‘i’x’ ka’nauwé Aa’yaLta gia’/tcikc?” A/‘Ita a/‘élaxta 

can he do this all his body stinking? ’ Now next 
ica/yim a/yuLx. Leéqs pus tcjEx atci’/Lax. A/‘lta weXt ta2ll né/xax. 
the grizzly he went to Almost break he did it. Now again tired he got. 

bear the middle of 
the house. 


A‘lta iLa/xak;Emana a/élaxta a/yuLx ikjoayawa’. A/‘lta ka’/nauwé 
Now their chief he next he went to the panther. Now all 


the middle 
of the house. 


noxd‘tetXom oxdwa’/yul. Alta a’tElaxta’  tgk/kal. 
they were atanend the walkers. Now next they the fliers. 


A‘lta a’/yo 


Now he went 


ya’néwa-y- énts"X. Qe’xtcé atcLO’cgam. Léqs ts;Ex atci’Lax. A/‘lta 
first Ents" X. Intending he took it. Almost break be did it. Now 


wiXt tall né’xax. Alta a/élaXta ipd/époé a’/yuLx. 
again tired he got. Now he next ipd/époé he went to 
the middle 
of the house. 


NxLo‘lExa-it 
She thought 


qaX 60/kuil: “O ia/xka taya’/x ts;Ex tsLEtx.” A/Ita ateLO/cgam; 


that woman: ‘Ohe he if break he would doit.’’ Now 


he took it; 


niket qa’da aLE’x. A’ydptck. A’cElaXta cE/ngétqét a/ctoLx. 
not {any] how it did. He went up. Next he [dual] the sparrow he went 
hawk [dual] [dual] to the 


middle of 
the house. 


Léqs tsjEx aLgE’/ctax. A’‘Ita a/ctoptck cE’/ngétqét. A‘Ita a/élaxta 


Almost break he did it. Now he [dual] the sparrow Now he next 
went up hawk. 
ive/vée a/yOLx. Léqs tc;Ex atcEH’/Lax, ka weXt tEll né’xax. A/Ita 
the hawk a went Almost break he did it, and also tired he got. Now 
own. 


atlaxta O/npite no/Lxa. Qé’xtcé tcjEx agE’/Lax. Nikct aLk&le/ll. 


nextshe thechick- she wentto Intending break she did it. Not 


en hawk the middle 
of the house 


it moved. 


A/élaxta iqoé/lqoél a/yuLx. Niket aLxelp’ll. A/yoptck iqoé/lqoél. 


Next he theowl he wentdown. Not it moved. He went up the owl. 
A‘lta a‘‘laxta wtcaktea’k nod’‘Lxa. AkLO/cgam, Léqs ts; Ex agb’Lax. 
Now next she the eagle she went down. She took it, almost break — she did it. 
A’‘lta ka/nauwé qtger’kal nox0’tetXom; ka‘nauwé o6Xowa/yul 
Now all the diers they were at an end; all walkers 

nox0‘tetXom. 


they were at an end. 


Takk né/kim = iqé/sqés: “AmckLé/lot xix:  tia’L;kjénEma. 


Then he said blue-jay: ‘You give it to him that his sores. 
Ekta qtse’‘tiwa?” Takk ta‘mEnua no/x6x té/lx‘Em. 
What can he do?”’ Then giving it up they became the people. 
“Ai’aq, ai‘aq, mE‘tXu-it,” né/kim iqé’sqés; ‘“K’kta ame’tuwa? 
“ Quick, quick, stand up!” he said blue-jay ; “What can you do? 
TsjEX LE/xax X0oLa LtEtca/ma.” Qod/nEmi atcid‘/Xam. Taker 
Break do them these antlers!"’ Five times he spoke to him. Then 
aLO/tXuit qo’/La LgoLéJEXEmk. Take to’to né/xax. TakE_ to’to 

he stood up that person. Then shaking hebecame. Then shake 
atea/yax  ia/0k. Cpl, toto, ., ne'xax.... ja/ok. TakE  to’to 
he did it his blanket. Noise shaking it became his blanket. Then shake 
of rattles, 
atci/Lax La/yaqedo. TakE 4’yuLx go ka’tsEk t’oL. Taker 
he did it his hair. Then he went to the middle of the house. Then 
down 


atcLO’cgam = Lfatca’/ma. AcLO/cgam, tcjEx atcE’/Lax. WeXt 
he took them the antlers. He took them, break he did them. Again 

ateLO‘cgam, tcjEx atcE’/Lax. Qod/nEmi tcjEx atch’/Lax, ka 
he took them, break he did them. Five times break he didthem, and 


bo 


10 


11 


(o'¢) 


cles) 


10 


? Fu + . 7 
62 IGUA’NAT HIS MYTH. TENGUaEte 


atcLXE’kXué. Take né’/xanko cka nugugué’qxamt  té/lx-Em., 
he threw them down. Then he ran and they lcoked at him the people. 
Atgia’‘qamt. Mank i0/Lqté ka né’k:im igé’sqés: “A2, Lowatska/ 
They looked at A little long and he said blue-jay: “Ah, they pursue 
him. her 
Lka/nax a/kée.” TakE aktd’/cgam tga/ktéma. Na’/xanko. Alta 
the chief's niece.” Then she took them her dentalia. * She ran. Now 
aqcgE’ta. Ka‘nauwe télx-Em alta atcgE’ta. Kula‘i aqegn’ta. 
they were pur- All people now pursued them. Far they were 
_ sued. pursued. 
E’/ma atea/yax. TakE atiga'Om é@’maL. Iawa/2 ia/qoa-iL 6é/malL. 
A bay he made it. Then they reached it the bay. There a large bay. 
TakE atiga/om @’maL té/lx-Em. A/’/nqaté iau’a @/natai acto’yam. 
Then they reachedit the bay the people. Long ago there onthe other they [dual] 
side arrived. 
Cka mi&/2nxi ka wiXt atigo’ptckam @’maL. TakE wiXt aqcgEr’ta. 
And a little and again they came land- the bay. Then again they were 
ward of pursued, 
Kula’2i weXt aqegE’ta. GO’yi né/xax, nix-ena/nako. A‘Ita weXt 
Far again they were Thus he did, he looked back. Now again 
pursued. 
qj’oa’p tkeaxt té/lxEm. WeXt é@/maL atca’yax. Alta mank 
near they over- _ the people. Again a bay he made it. Now a little 


took them 

L)’ap ia/qaiL @é@/maL. TakE wexXt atiga/om é@/maL_ té/lx-Em. 
fitting [?] large bay. Then again they the bay the people. 
middle reached 

81Ze 

TakE kula‘i weXt actoé/taqgt. WeXt ka/nauwé  atigod’ptckam 
Then far again they two left them. Again all they came landward 
télx‘-Em. WexXt aqca/wa. Qoi’nEma LEma’LEma atci/Lax ka 
the people. Again they were Five bays he madethem and 

pursued. 


ta’‘mEnua  né/xax. Ka’/nauwé aq Lgod’pteckam q0/La qoa/nEm 
giving up he got. All they came landward those five 
LEma’/LEma. TakE tEll né/xax itj;alapas ka-y- i’pEnpEn 
bays. Then tired he got coyote and badger 
keamtja’‘m koa‘nsum. TakE atcid/‘/Xam ia/cike. “Take tell 
after always. Then he said to him to his friend: “Then tired 
ani/xax, cike! Qa‘da tEmé@’x:ataqux tkipa/lau ntala’‘xo XaXa/k 


I got, friend! How your thought bewitched Ishall make that 
them on her 


ogu’/Xalaitan.”  Ta/kE né/kim @/pEnpEn: “A‘yipé.” Takk pod’pod 


my arrow.” Then he said badger: Well!” Then blow 
a‘teax uya’Xalaitan it;’a/lapas: “‘GO ia/yaqtq mo ae) go ia/yaqtq 
he did on it his arrow coyote: eK his head go at his head 
mo’ya!” Lo’ni atco/lXam uya’Xalaitan: “Go ia/yaqtq mo/ya!” 
go!” Three times he said to it his arrow: “At his head go!” 
Qoi/nEmi po’po a‘teax tiya’Xalaitan. TakE atco/Lata uya/Xalaitan. 
Five times blow he did it his arrow. Then he shot it his arrow. 
Kvea‘xalé atcd/Lata. Takk no’/ya uya/Xalaitan ha’lElElElEIEIE. 
Up he shot it. Then it went his arrow halelelelelele. 
Yukpa’ ia’/mat atcé/lax god Lid’/paa. Ila’/xkéwa ayuquna/étix't. 
Right here — shooting he did him in his nape. There he fell down. 
him on him 


La/néwatike Lléq;’a/muks gaaLxuwaé’/ma. La/cka aLgd/cgam kaX 


First they ihe wolves pursuers. They they took her that 
0:0/kuil. A/Ita atga’/yax ka’nauwé qOd’tac té’lx‘Em. Atgia/wule. 
woman. Now sie ate him all those people. They ate all. 
TakE aqaya‘lot it;’alapas 0’pLjiké, oya’pL;’iké igua/nat. TakE 
Then it was given to coyote the bow, his ane the salmon’s. Then 
to him 
aLoé‘luktct LéXt Lia/apta; go Lqa/naks ka/‘tsEk aLawia’/yakuit 
it fell down one his egg; in stone middle it fell into a hole 


55) 


taes THE SALMON MYTH. 63 


Lia/apta go Lqa‘naks. TakE no/Xuko té/lx‘Em,  ka/nauwé 


his egg in _ stone. Then they went home the people, all 
no’/Xuko téIx‘Em ka take naxeltca’ma Okj’und’, ‘“Aqia‘wat 
they went the people, and then she heard about it the crow. ‘He is killed 
home 
émé'tgéu.” No‘ya-y- 6k;’uno’, ayaxa/‘nEx‘Enémai nagk’/tsax. A/Ita 
your nephew.” She went the crow, she cried while walking she cried. Now 
no‘yam qigd kaXé’ aqia/wat. A‘lta La’qLaq agE/Lax Lqa/naks. 
she arrived where where he was killed. Now turn over she did them stones. 
A’qxulqt. La/quaq kLaxt Lqa‘nake, kuikj’ela‘leplé. TakE Lap 
She cried. Turn over she did stones, she turned them over Then find 
them often. 
agh’Lax LeéXt LgEma‘/kikect. TakE agk’/Luk"7 sate y- 6&’/qx6L. 
she did it one salmon egg. Then she carried it a creek. 
LE/KLEK aga/yau. Take akLaLfEnqa’na-it go “ea Ts0’yuste 
Dig she did it. Then she put it into in water. Evening 
ka na/Xko. NaXk0o’/mam g0 tE’kXaqL. 
and she went home. She got home to her house. 
Kawi'X ka wiXt  nd’ya. AkLo’qstam = q0/La_ Léa’pta. 
Earlyinthe and again she went. She went to see it that salmon egg. 
morning 
A’lta La/qoa-iL q0’/La L‘&a’pta, mank LO’Lqat. A‘lta LE/KLEk aga/yax 
’ Fo) 
Now large that salmonegg, a little long. Now dig she did it 
mank ia/qoa-iLé. Tsd’/yusteé weXt na’/Xko. NaXko’/mam. Niket 
alittle large. Evening again she went home. She got home. Not 
nao’/ptit ka na/kteukté. Kawi/X ka weXt nod/ya. A/’qxulqt, nd/ya. 
sheslept and _ it got day. Early and again she went. She cried, she went. 


No/yam g6 qo’/La L‘a’pta. A/Ita-y- W/LEIO yuXtké. A‘Ita yaL; mank 

Shearrived at that salmonegg. Now asmalltrout thereswam. Now glad alittle 

na/xax. Alta ia’qoa-iL LE’/KLEk aga‘yau. Tso’yusté na’Xko. ME‘nx”i 

she became. Now large dig she did it. Evening she went home. A little 

nao’ptit ka né/kteukté. WiXt no’ya iLa/lakt. TakE no’yam go qo/La 

sheslept and it got day. Again shewent the fourth Then shearrived at that 
time. 


Lta'pta. <A/Ita-y- op!a‘lo yuXtke’l. Take kwa/nkwan na/xax 
salmon egg. Now a trout swam there. Then happy she became 


6kj’u/n0! L’/kLEk aga’yau, ia/2qo-iL iLE/kLEk aga’yau. Cka meEnx* 


the crow! Dig lie did it, a large dug hole shemadeit. And _ alittle 


lax 0:0/Lax ka _  na/Xko. NaXko’mam. Texl nod’/ponEm 
afternoon sun and she went home. She got home. Just it grew dark, 
ka nao’ptit. Kawi’x: naxkE’l0k0. Naxa/latck. N6/ya_  wiXt; 
then she slept. Early she awoke. She rose. She went again ; 
ayo‘kctam kaX op!a‘/lo. No/2yam. A/‘Ita_ ian6o’kstX * igua/nat 
she went to seeit that trout. She arrived. Now a small salmon 
yuXtke’l. A’lta LE’KLEk aga/yau, ia/2qoa-iL LE/KLEk aga’yau. 
swam there. Now dig she did it, a large dig she did it. 
WiXt naié/taqt. Pat 0:0’Lax ka na’/Xk6. NaXko’mam. Ia/miaXkéwa 
Again she left him. Noou sun and oe went She got home. Only of that 
ome. 


tga’XatakOX. No’ponEm. Kawi’X ka no’ya. NOo’yam, a’lta ia/qoa-iL 
her thoughts. It grew dark. Early then she went. Shearrived, now a large 
jigua/nat yuXtke’l. Agid’/egam, agé’xalukctgO ma/Lxélé. Alta 
salmon swam there. She took him, she threw him down on shore. Now 
Lkj’asks aLo’La-it, La/qoa-iL Lkj’asks. A/‘Ilta kjwa/nkjwan na/xax 
ay there was, a large boy. Now happy she got 
0k;’u/nd. A/‘Ita aci/Xko. AcXk0/mam. Take agio/lXam itca’kXén 


the crow. Now _ they [dual] They Ua got Then  shesaidtohim her grandson 
_went home. home. 


0kj’und’: “Amwx’0'toL. I0/LEma méElkeEla/ya.” A/Ita nix’d! toL, 
the crow: ‘« Bathe. ay eee you shall see them.” Now he bathed, 
eings 


nix’d'tOL, nix’d‘toL. [a/néwatée go Letuq nix’0/toL. AL@’Lx‘0L;, g0-y- 
he bathed, he bathed. The first time in water he bathed. He finished, in 


a 


m= WwW bd 


10 


ih 


19 


20 


64 IGUA’NAT HIS MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 
é/maL nix’d‘toL. Ka/nauwé Lpo/leEma nix’0/toL. ALE/x*OL; nix’6/toL 
bay he bathed. All nights he bathed. He finished he bathed 
go-y- e/‘maL. A‘lta gd Lpaka’/lEma nix’0/toL. A/Ita-y- iq;’oa/lipx- 
in bay. Now on mountains le bathed. Now a youth 
ne’xax. 
he became. 

A‘lta naxa-iyilk"7él = uya’k;ik;é Agio’l1Xam: “It; a/lapas 
Now she told him much his, grandmother. She said to him: # ‘Cdents 
atcia/wat LEmé/mama, ia/cike @/pEnpEn. Qia ni&ket kaX 6¢d/kuil 
they two your father, his friend badger. If not that woman 


killed him 
poe naket aqia/wat. Go Lliq;am aLgd/ecgam kaX  6¢0/kuil.” 
[if] not he was killed. To wolves they took her that woman.”’ 
TakE atco1Xam uya/kjikjé ‘¢ NO‘ya. Nio’/XtkinEmama 
Then he said to her his grandmother: “T shall go. I shall go and search for him 
itja/lapas.”  ‘Naket mo’ya, taua/lta aqema’wodx.” Takk wiXt 
coyote.” ‘' Not go, else you will be killed.”’ Then again 
acxé’la-it uya’/kjik;é. Io’Lqté acxé’la-it, ka weXt naxa-ilgu’/Litck: 


they two his eeand= Long time they two then again she told him: 
stayed mother. stayed, 


“Go itja/lapas aqd/cgam uya/pLjiké LEmé’ mama. ” “A, nd/yaya 
To Jeti it was taken his ee your father’s.’ ae a I shall go. 


Niu’XtkinEma ‘it;a/lapas. Take 0/Xuit tid’‘LEma  and/ikel.” 
I shall search for him coyote. Then many supernatural I saw them.” 
beings 
“Ni/Xua amxanitgu’Litck, é@/kta imé/yoLEma?” TakE atcd/lXam 
‘Well, tell me, what your supernatural Then he said to her 
beings?” 
uya’kjikjé: “Ni/Xua mE‘tpa!” Taker no/pa-y- 6kj’u/no. Atco’/Lata-y- 


to his ior “Well, comeoutside.’’ Then she went out ihe crow. He shot it 
mother: 


uya’/xalaitan iau’a ma/Lxdlé. Ia/xkéwa né/xLx‘aé. Atcd/Lata 
his arrow then inland. There it caught fire. He shot it 
uya’‘xalaitan é@/wa tEm‘a/eéma. la/xkéwa néXLXaée. TakE na‘kim 
his arrow then to prairie. There it caught fire. Then she said 
0kj’u/nd: “O nau/itka tal; id/LEma amé@/EIkEl.” Agio/]Xam: 
the:crow: ~—  ‘“‘Oh indeed lo! supernatu- you saw it.” She said to him: 
ral being 


“Qa/doxé mod/ya. Qa’tocx‘Em, émx‘Ena/oyé.” Agod’n 6:0/Lax ka 
“Must you go. Take care, take care of yourself.” One moreday and 
nixEItXuitck. Atetd/egam tia/ktéma, atixa/lax ka/nauwé. Atcto’egam 


he made himself He took them his dentalia, he put them all. He took them 
ready. on to himself 


tia‘xalaitanEma. Alta acxé/lagux ig0d’cax. Alta a’yo. Ayd/épa 
his arrows. Now it thundered the sky. Now he went. He wentout 
from clear sky to it 


tEméa/éma. Qoa/nEMm tEmta/éma ayod/épa. 
to a prairie. Five prairies he went out to them. 
Alta ated/ikEl t!oL. A’yod, a/yo, a’yd. Q;’oa/p ateci’/tax tYOL. 
Now he saw it a house. He went, he went, he went. ie he gottoit a house. 
A‘lta iLXgula/magux LgoLéJEXEmk. Ayo’tXuit go k*"La/xané t!OL. 


Now singing song of vic- a person. He stood at theoutsideof the 
tory house. 


A‘lta éwa’ gu’lata Lé’/Xat iLXgula/magux. Lawa/2 atcixa/laq7e, 
Now thus atthe endof one singing song of victory. Slowly he opened the 
the house door, 


ayo'La-it go igé’p!al. K™teX4 né’xax it;’a/lapas. “ Ia/xkayuk ayo/yam 

he stood in thedoorway. Sneeze he did coyote. To here he arrived 
igua/nat ia/xa. “Tecintuwa’tdmx qiqd’q antsauwip’Ena/nanma-itx 
the salmon his son. ** He will kill me that I always jump inside 


tE’kXEqL. Tecintuwa‘’dmx.” Lqa/LXate Le/lauit go cia/xéct. TakE 
in house. He will kill me.” Coal it was put on his face. Then 


vias THE SALMON MYTH. 65 


a/yamEnuk"t. E/pEnpEn wiXt a/yamEnuk"t. Q;’@ né/xax iqamo’té. 
his face was black- Badger also _his face ier black- Squeak did the door. 
ened. ened. 


Né@/kiket @/wa iqgé’p!al it;’a/lapas. A/Ita ia/xka iké’x, qtciya/uwat 
| ? 
Helooked at thus the door-way coyote. Now he he was, Kia had 
ille 
ioc gd igé’/plal. Take nigh/tsax: “Ana’ itsEsta/mXa, ana 
there at the doorway. Then he cried: ‘‘Anah, my dear, anah, 
was 


itsEsta‘mXa;” itj’a/lapas né/kim, “Aqgéta’wat qéau_ itsH’/stamX. 
my dear; ”’ coyote said, ‘He was killed that my dear. 

NExowa/yulEma-itx kLxElga/yutsXa.” Taker @a/yup!. TakE 4’yup, 

They go from place to place those aa g just like Then heentered. Then heentered, 


im. - 
igua/nat ia/xa. Ayod’La-it gd ileme’tk. <A cka kj’& m&/xax 
the salmon _ his son. He stayed at the settee. A, and silent become 
it;’a/lapas. ‘“‘Niket na _ tné’txiX amia/wat LgE/mama?” TakE 

coyote. “Not [int. part.] I know you killed him my father?” Then 
_ &kj’a ne’xax itj’a/lapas. TakE @’wa ma/Lx0lé néxE/Lxéko @pEnpEn. 
silent he became coyote. Then thus _ from fire he turned his face badger. 
Alta cia/xéct Xa’Xa atci’ctax. “A’nét LgE/mama doya’pL;ike,” 
Now his face rub he did it. ‘Give it my father his bow,” 

to me 


né‘k-im igua/nat ia/xa. Né’k-im itj’A/lapas: ‘‘lamElo’ta qéstamX!” 
he said the salmon his son. He said coyote: “T shall give it my dear!”’ 
to you 
Takk ay0o/tXuit it;’a/lapas.  Laq°® a/tcax aé/Xt opLjike. Atcd’gam, 
Then he stood up coyote. Take he did it one bow. He took it, 
out 


goyi’ a’‘teax. LEK" na/xax. Atca-igh/ltcim, aqia/auwilx: 6’pLjiké. 
thus he did it. Break it did. He struck him, he was hit with it the bow. 
Acé’k;@lapxit. Qu’l qul qul qul tia’twit nod/xuita. Nixa/latek 
i 1 i 

He fell down head-long. Qul qul qul qul his legs they shook. He rose 

it;’a‘lapas. “A/nét Lgk’/mama uya’pLjiké,” né’k-im igua‘nat ia‘xa. 
coyote. “* Give it my father, his bow,” he said the salmon his son. 

to me, 


TakE né’kim itj’a/lapas: “ IlamElo‘ta qé/stamX.” Laq® a‘tcax aé/Xt 
Then he said coyote: ‘“*T shall give it my dear.” Take he did it one 
to you out 
o’/pLjiké wiXt. Atcaya/lot. WiXt aqa-igEItcim g6 cia’/xdst. L’Ox 
bow more. Hegaveittohim. Again he was struck on his face. Falling 
with it 
nicilga/kXo-it it;’a/lapas. Qul qul qul qul tia/*wit no/x6x. WiXt 
he fell on his back coyote. Qul qul qui qul his legs they did. Again 
nixa/latck. “A/nét, LgE/mama uya/pLjiké, it;’a/lapas! QadaXé’ 
he rose. ‘Give it to my father his bow, coyote! Why 
me, 
la’xlax amemna/xt?” Atcaya/lot a/Ita  iqstd’/konkon  a/yaqtq 
deceive you do me?” He gave him now woodpecker its head 
lak;’0/yuLj Ema qaX opLjiké’. TakE goyé/ a’teax; niket LEk" na/xax. 
glued on that bow. Then thus _ he did it; not break it did. 
Ja‘kwa’ goyé’ a’‘tcax qink;éama’, LEK" na/xax. Aqa-igk/Itcim 
Here thus he did it right hand, break it did. He was struck 
with it 
wiXt. TakE wiXt nicilga‘/kXo-it itj’a/lapas. La2kt LpLji/ké 
again. Then again he fell on his back coyote. Four bows 
atei/Lot itj’a/‘lapas. Ka/nauwé LeE/kLEK a/Lax. A/’LaquinEm a/Ita 
he gave him coyote. All broken they became. The fifth now 
a/xka igua’‘nat oya’pLjiké ateaya/lot. Go’yé a’teax iauwa/ 
that the salmon his bow he gaveittohim. Thus he did it there 
teaqj’Etckta, LO’ni go/yé a’teax; ala/xti ya/kwa_ tcixqing;éa/ma 
hisleft hand, three times thus he did it; then here his right hand 
Loni go’‘ye a’teax; néket LEK" a/tcax. O/’/kXuLpa Lga/patséu 
three thus he did it; not break he did it. Red shafted its red heads 
times woodpecker 


BULL. T=—20——5 


~- WwW bw - 


a/ U OF 
66 IGUA’NAT HIS MYTH. Ree 


akXa/cama qaX OpL;iké! Take aqid/lXam @/pEnpen: “A cka kj’a 
puton by twos that bow! Then he was told badger: “Ah, and quiet 
mkE/xax. Néket na tne’txiX ka mai/ka amé/kjaukjau?” Né/kim 
be. Not [int. I know and you you a murderer?” We said 
part. } 
é/penpEn: “Niket agE/k;auk;au. Ka/Itas @’/tckEmEnuk"t aqénalax.” 
badger: “Not I murderer. Only my blackened face was made me.” 
TakE aqid/egam go Lia’/paa. A‘Ita aqed‘/ktepa. A‘Ita aqeX#/ltcin. 
Then hewastaken at _ his nape. Now they werehauled Now they were struck 
out. together. 


AqeXE'ltcim, aqeXB'Itcim. AcXk’/La-it. Aqé/xalukctgod it;’a/lapas: 
They were struck they were struck They weredead. He was thrown away coyote: 
together, together. 


“Tt/alapas imé/xal. Naket tkana/Ximect mtote’na.” Aqe‘xalukctgo 
“ Coyote your name. Not chiets Sit Shar kill He was thrown away 
em.”’ 


&/pEnpEn: “#/pEnpEn imé/xal. Niket tkana/Ximet mtoté/na. A’mka 
badger: ‘* Badger your name. Not chiefs you kill Only 
them. 


ome’ wieqe kjoa’e xaxa/x0. Niket qj’oa/p amLi/tx LgdLéEXEmk.” 
your farts afraid they will be of Not near you will get a person.” 
them. him 


TakE aqex‘E/kXué itj’a‘lapas kja-y- @/pEnpEn. Takk aqox0/LXama 
Then they were thrown coyote and badger. Then it was burnt 
away 
tE/ctaqL. 
their house. 
TakE wiXt a/yo. Ay6d/épa wiXt teXt tEm£a/ema. Atco/ekEl 
Then again he went. He wentoutto again one prairie. He saw it 
tXut gd kE’mk-ité teEm*a/ema. TakE Aa’‘yd, a’yd, a’‘yo. Q;’0a’p 
smoke on end of the prairie. Then he went, he went, he went. Neatly 
ateta/xom tor. A/‘Ita La/qXulqt Léa‘/kil. Atcixa/‘laqt Lawa/4. 
hereachedit a house. Now it cried awoman. Heopenedthedoor slowly. 
Q;’é né/xax iqamo’té. Na/k-ikst qaX 60/kuil. Agé@/EIkEI, ia/xka 
Squeak it did the door. She looked that woman. She saw him, he 
qix: itea/kikala qix: aqia’/wat. <Aia/skop!. Pan Ltolé/ma qod’ta tVOL. 
that herhusband that he was killed. He entered. Full meat that house. 
“A, iamEtXtki/nEmam; tXgod/ya. Nai/ka Lgb/mama qiau aqita/wat.” 
‘Ah, Icame to search for you; we two will My my father that he was killed.” 
go home. 


Take agid/lXam: “ TqetxéLa/wuks tgEmuwa/td.” ‘Qa/doXoé 
Then she said to him: ‘* Monsters they will kill you.” “Shall 
tgEnuwa‘’d.” NixLxa/IEm, aging@/waLj’am. G0o/yé 0o¢0/Lax, lax 
they shall kill me.” He ate, she fed him in her house. Thus the sun,  after- 
noon 
o6o‘Lax ka y0d’pa. Lqj;op atci/Lax Lia’/paa. Qui/nEmi Lqj;up 
the sun and he went out. Cut he did it his nape. Five times cut 
atei/Lax. Atcuxuk;’ué/niyanuky q6/ta tia/Lwule. Alta a/teax kaX 
he did it. He made bundles that meat. Now  heateit that 
opXa; paL ia/wan né/xax. Alta ayo’p!am. Ateta/lot kaX 06:0/kuil 
alder- full his belly got. Now he came in. He gave that woman 
bark; them to her 


kanEm  qoa/nEmM = noxdkjoé@/néyak. ‘“Manix Lté/mama, éXt 
together five bundles. “When they come, one 
inixk;’@/niyak Lé/Xat mitElo’‘ta. Manix Lktawu’lta xite’/k, ka 
bundle toone * give it to them. When they will eat it this, then 
nLO/Laya. Ma/nix xax LgrEna/xoye @Xt Lé’Xat mitElo’ta.” A/‘Ita 
I et When notice they will do me, one toone  giveittothem.” Now 
over them. 


Ja/xlax atci/Lax. PO a/teax o*0/leptckiX. PaL tk’kEmém né/xax; 
deceive hedidthem. Blow he did the fire. Full ashes he got; 
on it 
iq;’éy0/qxot ne/xax. 
an old man he got. 


Seale THE SALMON MYTH, 67 


Tso/yusté ka qull né/xau. ALAa/cgatp! LgoLée/IEXEmk. Ka/tsEk 
Evening and prise of became. It entered a person. In middle of 
alling 
objects 
t!oL aLE’te. “Homm, igua/nat eniLa/kux; igua/nat éniLa/kux; 
house’ he came. ‘“*Hémm, salmon I smell it; salmon I smell it; 
homm, igua/nat éniLa‘kux.” Tak® atci/LkLtuq q0/La Lqj’éyo’qxot; 
hémm, salmon i smell it.” Then he kicked him that old man; 
é/xauwité aqgé/kLtug. Wax aLi’xax L‘a/owilqt go ia/yacqL. Takk 
often he was kicked. Pourout it came the blood in his mouth. Then 
no/tXuit o80’kuil. Laq® aga/yax @Xt iné’xk;’éniak. “ NgoLi/leEXeEmk 
she stood up the woman. Take out she didit one bundle. ‘Tam a person 
ank/xax. Lxpoc: néket aLga‘icX? xixé@/k aLgé/tk"7am x-iLa 
Iam. Do you think not my relative? This he brought it this 
Lqjéyo’qxot.” “HO! itei/kokein! Qa’‘daqa néket a’nqaté amid/l1Xam? 
old man.” ‘* Ho! My Sten es Why not long ago you told me? 
relative! 


TsE/xtsEX anE/Lax LgE’/kokein.” WiXt qul né‘/xau. WiXt @’Xat 
Hurt I did him my sister-in-law’s Again noiseof there was. Again one 
relative.” falling 
objects 
La/qo né/xax. Né@’tp!a. Io’kuk qj’0a’p ka’tsEk t;’6L: “ Hemm, igua/nat 
visible hebecame. Hecamein. ‘There near middle of house: ‘“Hemm, salmon 
ia‘tsEks iniLa/kux. HEmm, igua’nat iniLa/kux.” Ewa’ atci/LqLtuq. 
his smell I smell. HEemm, salmon I smell.” Thus he kicked him. 
Ewa’ ayuLa’tax-it, @’xoét ayuLa/taxit aqé’qLtuq. Wax 4’/Lxax 
Thus he flew about, much he flew about he was kicked. Pour out it did 
L&a/owllqt @wa ya/yackL. “ NgoLéi/IEXEmk ank/xax. Lxpoe niket 
the blood thus his mouth. ‘‘Tam a person Lam. Do you think not 
aLga/icX? xixé@’/k aLgé’tk"jam xiLa Lqj’éyo’qxot.” Agé’/lot éXt 
my relative? This he brought it this old man.” She gaveit one 
to him 
inixk;’é/niak. “ Oho’, itei/kokein! Qa/daqa niket a/nqaté amEnd/1Xam? 
bundle. “Oho, my ee aes Why not long ago you told me? 
relative! 


TsE/xtSEx anE’/Lax LgE’koksin.” WixXt qui né/xau. Wixt 
Hurt I did him my sister-in-law’s Again noiseof became. Again 
relative.” falling 
objects 
é/Xat Lago né‘xax LgdLé/EXEmk. Né@’tp!a Ka/koa kula‘i 
one visible he became a person. He entered. Thus far 
ka‘tsEk neé/k-im: “HkEmm, igua/nat ia/tseEks iniLa/kux. HeEmm. 
9 4 
in middle he said: ‘‘HeEmm, salmon his smell I smell it. HEmm, 
igua‘nat iniLa’‘kux.” Ewa’ atci/LqLtugq.* Ewa’ ayuLa’tax-it, é/xoét 
salmon I smell it.” Thus he kicked him. Thus he flew about, much 
ayuLa’tax'it aqgé/qLtuq. La/owiqt wax a/Lxax @’wa yi’/LackL g6 
he few about he was kicked. Blood pour out itdid thus his mouth at 
qo’‘La Lgéyo’qxot. Id/Lqté tcaX nd‘tXuit. Laq aga/yax éXt 
that old man. Some time then she stood up. Take she did it one 
out 


inixk;@/niak. Agée/lot itca’potexan. ‘Oho’ itei’qdqein Lia/xanyam! 
bundle. She gaveit her brother-in- *“Oho! my sister-in- the poor one! 
to him law. law’s relative 


Qa‘daqa niket a/nqaté ameEno/lXam? Tsk/xtsEx  anBE/Lax 
Why not before you told me? Hurt I did him 

Lge’qoqein.” WiXt qul né/xau. WiXt @Xat La/qo né’/xax 
my sister-in law’s Again noise of there Again one visible became 

relative.” falling was. 
objects 

LgoOLé@JEXEmk. Cka mEnx: cka né/cgatp! ka na‘yita: “ Hkrmin, 
a person. And a little and he entered and he smelled it: ‘* Hemm, 

igua/nat ia/tsEks iniLta/kux. HEmm, igua/nat inita/‘kux.” Ewa’ 
salmon his smell I smell. HEmm, salmon I smell.” Thus 

atei/LqLtuq. Ewa’ ayuLa’taxit, @’xoét ayuLa/taxit aqé/qituq. 

he kicked him. Thus he flew about, much he flew about he was kicked. 


A @D GO FP W WD 


14 


15 


= FE 
68 IGUA’NAT HIS MYTH. baht = 


Wax AaA/Lxax = Léea/owilqt @/wa_ ia/yackL. I[6/Lqté nod’/tXuit. 


Pour out it did blood thus his mouth. Long time he stood up. 

‘¢N odL4/IB XEmk ank’xax. Lxpoc niket aLga/icX? x-ix-é/k aLge’tk"yam 
‘‘T am a person Tam. pe you not my relative? This he brought it 

thin 
xi/La Lqj’éyo’qxot.” Agé/lot €Xt inixk;’é/niak: “‘Oh6’ itci’qodqein! 
this old man.” She gave it one bundle: “Oho! mIny Sister-in- 
to him . law’s relative! 

Qa/‘daqa niket a/nqaté amEnd'1Xam? TsE’/xtsEx anE/Lax LgE/qoqcin.” 

Why not before you told me? Hurt I did him my sister-in- 


law’s relative.” 
Atcia’wult qix: igua/nat. A/lta ia/mkXa itcea/k-ikal. Ka mE/nx-i ka 


He ate it that salmon. Now only he her husband. And alittle and 
, while 
qull né/xau. Texi atcixa/laqzé, ka na/yiLa: “HEmm, igua/nat 
aed there was. Just he coeue! the and he smelled it: ‘‘ HEmm, salmon 
of fall- oor, 


ing objects : 
ia/tsEks iniLa/kux. Hemm, igua/nat iniLa/kux.” Ewa’ atci/Lqutuq. 
his smell I smell. Hemm, salmon I smell.” Thus he kicked him. 
Ewa’ ayuLa/taxit, é/xoét ayuLa/taxit aqgé’/qLtuqg. Wax a/Lxax 
Thus he flew about, much he flew about he was kicked. Pour out it did 

L£a/owilqt @/wa ia/yackL. 16’/Lqté teXEp na/xax, 10/Lqté aqLqLtu’qo-im 

‘blood thus his mouth. Long hesitating she was, long he was kicked much 
qo‘La Lajéyd’/qxot. No/tXuit qaX 06d/kuil: “NLgdoLi/lEXEmk 

that old man. She stood up that woman: ‘‘] am a person 

ank/xax. Lxpdc niket aLga/icX? xix:-e/k aLgé/tk"yam xiLa 

Tam. Do youthink not my relative? This he brought it this 
Lqjéyo’qxot.” Agélot EXt inixk;’é/niak. “Oho! itei’qsiX, qa‘daga 

old man.”’ She gaveit that bundle. “Oho! my brother- why 

to him in-law, 
néket a/nqaté amEnd/1Xam? TskE’/xtsEx ana/yax itci’/qsiX.” 
not before you told me? Hurt Idid him my brother-in-law.” 

Alta aLxE/Ilgixc, aLga/yaxc  imo/lEkuma. A'lta = qé/xtcé 

Now they cut open, they cut them the elks. Now intending 
aLgilé/mEniL qix: éq;éyo’qxot. Na&ket nixLxa/lem. Take na/k-im 
they gave him food that old man. Not he ate. Then she said 
qaX = 60/kuil: ‘‘ LO/nas LE/kLEk no/xox  La‘léwankEma, 
that woman : ‘* Perhaps broken are his ribs, 
qa néket aLxéLxE/lEmax.” Wax  neé‘ktcukte. Kawi/X ka 


there- not he eats.” Next morn- it got day. Early and 
fore ing 


aLxH/ltXuitck Llé/q;’am. . ALx0o’/kumak;’auwa. A/‘Ita nixa/latek 
they made them- the wolves. They went hunting. Now he rose 
selves ready 


igua/nat ia/xa. Nix’d’/tam. A/Ita agilgé’xo-il qaX oto’kuil. A‘Tta 


thesalmon hisson. He went to bathe. Now she boiled much that woman. Now 
nixLxa/leEm. ALé/XOL; ia/LxElEmax ka ackya’‘yoit go ilbme’tk. 
he ate. He finished his eating and they two lay in bed. 
down 
Lax 0°0/Lax, takE wiXt pod/po 4a’tcax 06°0/leptckiX. TakE wiXt 
A fter- sun, then again blow he did it the fire. Then again 
noon 
éq;éyo/qxot né/xax. Tso/yusteé aLXatgo’/mam; Lkanauwé’tike 
the old man he got. Evening they arrived at home; all 
aL Xatgo/mam. ALgé’/tk" 7am imd/lEkuma. A‘Ita niket 
they arrived at home. They brought elks. Now not 
aLgEqLtu’qo-im. Na/2-ponEm ka atLkto/kuman  tia/xalaitankma. 
they kicked him. It grew dark and they looked at them his arrows. 
‘‘Masa/tsiLx tik tia/xalaitanEma, xik ilxa/qoqein!” Take ne’k:im 
‘“* Pretty these his arrows, this _ our sister-in-law’s Then he said 
relative's!” 
qix: iq; éy0/qxot: “ Nai’ka itci’xotekin.” “A, tgEt;’0/kti mtEnla‘xo! 
that old man: “My my work.”’ “Ah, good you make them 


for me! 


eTBOAS THE SALMON MYTH. 69 


Ménla‘xo = igélEXtettk.” “Mai/ka  imé/Xakamit. 1/XtEmaé 
You ap make a flint arrow head.” ‘Your your mind. Sometimes 
it for me 


maket LEME/nLEMEn nixa/néxax, @/XtEmaé é€Xt LEME/nLEMEn 
two broken they get, sometimes one broken 
nixa/nexax.” Take atcaya‘lot oOgué/luXteutk, qoa/nEm nats; E/x 
it gets.” Then he gave them to flint pieces, five pieces 
1m 


ogué’IuXteutk. 
flint. 
Ne’‘ktcukté a/lta. Kawi’X wiXt a/Lo Lléq;a’/muks. A’Lo ka wiXt 
It got day now. Early again they the wolves. They and again 
went went 


nix’0'tam igua/nat ia’xa. Atcia/xotcke igé/luXteutk. AtcLé’k Xu; 
he a to the salmon hisson. He worked onthem the arrow heads. He finished them 
athe 


ka/nauwe’2, atcia’/xdtck qiX igé/luXteutk. EXt Laq" atca/yax, 
all, he made them these arrow heads. One take out he did it, 
nixilé‘mat. Tso/yusté ka wiXt aLXatgo’/mam  Lkanauwé’tiks. 
he kept it. Evening and again they arrived at home all. 
ALgée/Lk"7yam imo0/lEkuma. ALga/yaxe ka’/nauwé imo/lEkuma. A/‘Ita 
They brought home elks. They cut them all the elks. Now 
aLgid’/kuman qix' igé/luXteutk. O, itjo’/kti xik igé/luXtcutk. 
they looked at these arrow heads. Oh, good these arrow heads. 
“A’nqaté ka angoLéeEXEmk,” né/k'im iq; éy0/qxot “itsH’t; Oxotskin 
‘Formerly and I was aman,” he said the old one, ‘*T a good worker 
igéluXteutk.” “Wuxi/k a/nlaxta minla’xo,” atcid/lXam é/Xat: 
arrow heads.” “To-morrow me next you will make he said to him one: 
them for me,” 


“Mai/ka imé/Xakamit.”. TakE wiXt  agqayi'ltatke qoa/nEm 

“Your your mind.” Then again were left for him five 
ogué’l"Xteutk. 

flint-pieces. 
Kawi'X = ka wiXt a’LO Lleé’q;’am. ALXx0/kumakj aua. 
Early and again they went the wolves. They went hunting. 

La ka nixa/latck. A/‘Ita atcia’xdtck igé/luXtcutk. Ka/nauwé 
Some- and he rose. Now he made them the arrow heads. All 
time 
ateLée’kXOL;. EXt nixelé’mat. Tsd/yusté aLXatgo’mam. Na’ponEm. 
he finished them. One he kept. In the evening they arrived at home. It grew dark. 
Atgid‘/kuman igé/luXteutk ia/xdtskin qix: iqjéy0’qxot. lLa/ktka 
They looked at them the arrow heads his work that old man. Four only 
atcé/tElotxax. EXt nixélé’/matx. Né‘/k'im wiXt é’Xat: “WuXi 
he gave them tohim. One he kept. He said again one: “To-morrow 
a/nlaxta teinla/xoya, itci/qdqcein.” WeXt atcé/ltatck qui/nEmi 

me next he will make my sister-in-law’s Again he left them to five times 

them for me, relative.” him 


natsjE’x. Kauwi’X ka a/LO wiXt, ALx0’/kumakjauwa. A/‘lta wiXt 
pieces. Early then they again. They went hunting. Now again 
went 


atcia/‘xotcké qix: igé/luXteutk. Ka’nauwé ateLé@/kXoL;. EXt 
he worked atthem those arrow heads. All he finished them. One 
nixilé‘mat. Tsd’/yusté aLXatgd’/mam. Na/ponEm. ALgid/kuman 
he kept. In the evening they arrived at home. It grew dark. They looked at it 
ia/xOtckin qix’ iq;éyo’/qxot. O it’okti xig igé/luXteutk. “ WuXi 
his work this old man. Oh, good these arrow heads. ‘To-morrow 
a/nlaxta menla/xo qé’qoqein!” Aqaya‘lot qua/‘num nats; Ex 
me next you willmake my sister-in-law’s They were five pieces 
it for me, relative.” given to him 


ogue’luXtcutk. 
flint. 


bo 


12 


26 


ETHNOLOGY 


70 IGUA’NAT HIS MYTH. [BUREAU oF 


Kawi/X ka aLxb/lXuitek Llé’q;jam. A/‘lta aLxo/kumak;auwa. 


Early and they made them- the wolves. Now they went hunting. 
selves ready 


Nixa‘latck igua/nat ia/xa. Atcia’xotské qix: igé/luXtcutk. 


He arose the salmon his son He worked at them __ these arrow heads. 
AtcLe’kX61L; ka/nauweé qix: igé‘luXteutk. EXt nigilé’ma‘. Tsd/yusté 
He finished them all these arrow heads. One hekept. Inthe evening 
aLXatgo‘mam. Na/ponEm. AtciLa’/lot la’ktka, @Xt nixilé/mat. 
they arrived at home. It grew dark. He gave them _ four only, one he kept. 
to him 
O it’o/—kti xig igéluXteutk. ‘“ WuXi' a/nlaxta  itei/qaX 
Oh, good these arrow heads. ‘* To-morrow me next my brother- 
in-law 
teinla’xo,” né/k'im qix: ixgé’s’ax. itea/k‘ikal qaX 6¢0’kuil. “ Mai’‘ka 
he will make he said that youngestone, her husband that |= woman. “Your 


them for me,” 
imé’Xakamt,”  atciod/‘1Xam. Ateayi'ltatke qoa’/nEm nats; E’/x 

your mind,”’ he said to him. He left them for him tive pieces 
ogué/lu Xteutk. 

flint. 
Kawi'X ka aLxE]tXuitek Lléq;’a/muke. Nixa/latek 
Early and they made themselves ready the wolves. He rose 
igua/nat ia/xa. A/lta atcia’x6tckeé  igé/luXtceutk. Ka/nauwé 
the salmon his son. Now he Wea at the arrow heads. All 
them 


ateLé/kXuL;. EXt  nixélé’mas. Tsd/yusté  aLXatgd/mam. 
he finished them. One he kept. In the evening they arrived at home. 
Axtgé’tk"yam ém0/lEkuma. Pa2L takE tE’LaqlL im0dlEkuma. 
They brought home elks. Full then their house elks. 
Polakli aLXatgd’mam. A/‘Ita aLgid/kuman  ia/xotckin  qix- 
At dark they arrived at home. Now they looked at it his work those 
igéIuXteutk: ‘“O, itsi/qsiX! Masa/tsiLx igé/luXteutk, it; 0’kti 
arrow heads: ‘*Oh, my brother-in-law!” Pretty arrow heads, good 
xik igé/luXteutk.” KawiX ka wiXt aLxé@’lagutck. A’‘LO 
these arrow heads.” Early and again they rose, “They 
went 


aLxo/kumakjaua. Nixa/latck igua’/nat ia‘xa. Atco‘/Xam qaX 
they went hunting. He rose the salmon his son. He said to her that 
0:0/kuil: “‘Mxa/latck. A/Ita nLote/naya.” Naxa/‘latek qaX 60/kuil. 
woman : ‘ Rise. Now Ishall kill them.” She rose that woman. 
“Qa’t;,’oceXEm!” atcoXam. Takk acxE’It Xuitck. 
‘“Take care!” he said to her. Then they made themselves ready. 
Lqui/numiks q0/Lac Llé/q;’amuks, goa/nEm q0’La_ La’pLxuma. 
Five those wolves, five those their wells. 
TakE actd’/paé oya’/pyau. Atcd’/cgam dya’pL;’iké.  Atca’/Elte 
Then they went out his dead falas Ee took it his bow. He spanned it 
wife. 
dya/pL;iké. Godye’ a’/tcax uya/xalaitan @’wa Lpaka‘lema. A/Ita e’toL 
his bow. Thus he made it his arrow thus mountains. Now hot 
né/xax. Q’E’cq’Ec atci/Lax lakt q6’La LpLxoa‘ks. A’mka qix: 
it became. Dry he made them four those wells. Only that 
ixgé@/sax Oya’/pLx mEnx: LElga/-itX q0/La Ltceuq. 
youngestone his well a little there was that water. 

Ka igd/egéwal inva/xk’un. TakE LE’/ku na/xax uya’/prjike. 
And he went much _ the eldest one. Then break it did his bow. 
Take atcixE/IlquéLx: “Tat; ia/xka, tal; ia‘xka igua/nat 1a/xa 
Then he cried much: “0 he, lo he, the salmon his son 
exa/ntselola/‘mit.”. A’yodLx, né/Xko. A’yuLx, a@/yuLx, a’yuLx. 

he disguised himself He went to he went He wentto- hewentto- he went to- 


before us.” the water, home. ward the ward the ward the 
beach, beach, beach. 


mecie THE SALMON MYTH. 71 


A'lta qj’B’eq;Ee iké’x a/‘yamxte. Lteuq 10’/mEqtit. Ayd/yam go-y- 
Now dry became his heart. Water he was thirsty. He arrived at 
oya’pLx. Neé/‘kikst, a’teukct dya’pLx. A‘lta qj’E/eqjEc, axa’/lotX. 
his well. He looked, he looked his well. Now dry, it was empty. 
down into 


A’teuket kex-rema/t Lia/wuX dya/pLx. Q);’E’eq;Ec, axa/lotX. 
He looked the next one his younger his well. Dry, it was empty. 
down into brother 


EkXatsak Lia/wuX a/teuket uya/pLx. Q;E/cq; Ec, axa/lOtX. Q;o0a/p 
The middle his younger he looked his well. Dry, it was empty. Near 
one brother down into 


ixgh’/stax kex-yEma/t Lia/wuX uya/pLx a/tcuket; axa/lotX. A/teuket 
youngestone thenextone his younger his well he looked it wasempty. He looked 
brother down into; down into 


La/2wuX oya’pLx. A‘Ita mEnx: La/léc. Atco’pEna iau/a ké/kXulé. 
the youngest his well. Now alittle was in it. He jumped then down. 
brother 


Ate7a’/kXamet, ateza/kXamet, ateya/kXamect. Pa2L né’/xax ia/wan. 
) ’ 

He drank, he drank, he drank. Full got his belly, 
la/‘mat atcé/lax igua/nat ia/xa; ia/mat aqé@/lax ilé’q;am, ac ia/xkaté 
Shooting hedidhim thesalmon hisson; shooting he was the wolf, and there 

him him done 


ayuquna/étix:. Acgid’/Lata, acgid’peut. 
he tell down. They hauled him they hid him. 
out, 

Ka igd/cgéwal weXt é’Xat [etc., as before]..... A‘Ita mEnx: 
And he went much more one [ete., as before]. .... Now a little 
La‘loe. Atei/Lukect qo’La Lteug. Nigé/kxamt, nigé/kxamt, nigé/kxyamt. 

was init. He looked at it that water. He looked, he looked, he looked. 
Naket i/kta atcé@/ElkEl. TakE ayd/itcO go qaX opLx. A/‘Ita 
Not anything he saw it. Then he wentdown to that well. Now 
ateya‘k Xamet, ateaya’kXamet. Pa2L né’/xax ia/wan. 1[a/maé atcé’/lax 
he drank, he drank. Full got his belly. Shooting he did him 
him 
igua/nat ia/xa. la‘xkaté ayuquna’étix.. Acgid’/Lata, atcio’pcut. 
the salmon his son. There he fell down. They hauled he hid him. 
F him out, 
Ka igd/cgéwal wiXt é/Xat [ete., as before]. .... A/lta mEnx: 
And hewentmuch more one {etc., as before]..... Now a little 
La‘loe. Nigé/kxamt, nigé/kxamt, nigé/kxamt. Qe/xtcé poe ayd’itco. 
was in it. He looked, he looked, he looked. Intending if he went 
own. 
Alta wiXt nigé/kxamt, nigé/kxamt, nigé/kxamt. Aya/xLako qaX 
Now again he looked, he looked, he looked. He wentaroundit that 
OpLx. E/Xti aya’xLako. A/lta aya/‘lEtco, ayd/itcd. Ate ta’k Xamcet, 
well. Once he went around Now he went into he went He drank, 
it. the hole, down. 


mEnx: ateya/kXamet, ka wiXt nigé/kxamt. WixXt ate7a‘kXamet, 
a little he drank, and again he looked. Again h-: drank, 
ateTa/kxamct. PaL né/xax ia/wan. Ia/mat atcé’lax iguaé/nat 1a/xa. 
he drank. Full got his belly. Shooting hedid him thesalmon his son. 
him 
Ia/xkaté ayuquna’étix.. Acgid’Lata, acgid’peut. 
There he fell down. They hauled they hid him. 
him out, 
Ka igo/cgéwal wiXt e’Xat [etc., as before]. .... A/Ita mEnx. 
And he went much more one [ete., as before}. .... Now a little 
La‘loe. Nige’/kxamt, nigé’/kxamt, nigé/kxamt. X@a/xa né@’/xax, xax 
was in it. He looked, he looked, he looked. Observing he observe 
became, 
atei/ctax. Qe’xtcé poc ayodée/tcax. A/‘Ita wiXt ayaxLa/nukL qaX 
he did them. Intending if he went down. Now again he wentoften around that 
opLx. Ala’/Xti ka ayd/itco, 1é’21@ ka ayod’itcd. Ate za/kXamet, 
well. At last and he went along and he went He drank, 
down, time down. 


to 


ou 


lor) 


bo 


~] 


72 IGUA’NAT HIS MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


mEnx: ate ta/kXamet, wiXt ayO-iLxé/wulx. Ala/Xti ayd/itco wiXt 


a little he drank, again he went up. Atlast hewentdown again 
ka ateta’k Xamet, ate7a’k Xamet, ateta’kXamet. PaL né/xax ia/wan. 
and he drank, he drank, he drank. Full got ' his belly. 
la’mat atcé’/lax igua‘/nat ia/xa. 1a/xkaté ayuquna/étix:. Acgid’Lata, 
Shooting hedid him thesalmon his son. There he fell down. They hauled 

him him out, 
acgi0’peut. 


they hid him. 
Ka igd/cgéwal  ixgé/stax. Take LEk® na/xax uya‘pLj’ike. 
And he went much the youngest one. Then break it did hls bow. 
Take atcixEllqélx: “Tal; ia/xka, tal; ia‘xka igua/‘nat 1a/xa 
Then he cried much: ‘ Lo he, lo he, the salmon his son 
éxa/ntselola/mit.” A‘Ita né/Lxa; neLxamm. A/‘tcuket égun @/Xat 
he disguised himself Now hewentout hecameout of He looked more one 
before us.” of the woods; the woods. down into 


ia/Xkun. Qj’E’cqj’Ec ake’x, axa/lotX. LkE/nam ~=_—sL1a/ktiks 
his elder Dry it was, it was empty. Together four 
brother. 


Lia/xk; uniks Lxa/lotX La/pLxoake. A/‘lta-y- amka-y- uya/pLx mEnx* 
his elder brothers were empty their wells. Now only his well a little 
La‘lue. AtcE/VEIkKE] meEnx: L‘a/wulqt. A’‘lta ayaxLa/nukL 
was in it. He saw it a little blood. Now he went often around 
uya’pLx, ayaxLa/nukL uya’pLx. A/‘lta ated’Xtkin, nik;’é’x-tkin. 
his well, he went often around his well. Now hesearched forthem, he looked about. 
Léqspus ategd‘tXuitX. Ated’/pEna ke/kXulé. Ate za/kXamet, 
Almost he stepped on them. He jumped down. He drank, 
ate7a/kXamet, ateqa‘/kXamet. Take wiXt atcd’/pEna k"ca/xali. A‘lta 
he drank, he drank. Then again he jumped up. Now 
wiXt nikjé/x-tkin, nikj;é’x-tkin, nik; é’x-tkin. WixXt atcd’pEna 
again he looked about, he looked about, he looked about. Again he jumped 
k@/kXulé. Qoédé/némi ated’pEna ke/kXulée. A/‘Ita ate 7a/kxamet. 
down. Five times he jumped down. Now he drank. 
Pa2u né/xax ia/wan. I[a’mat atcé/lax. Atcia‘kj LEmatsk atcia/wat. 
Full got his belly. Se oats he did. His last one he killed him. 
im 


A‘lta a/ctoLx. Atcdx0’LXam tkE’LaqL. A/‘lta_ a/cto, aci’xko. 
Now they went down He burnt it their house. Now they went, they went 
to the water. home. 


A’teok'y qaX 6¢d/kuil. Actiga/Om ikani’/m. Alta  acto/teted. 
He carried that woman. They reached a canoe. Now they went down 
her it the river. 


Kaxé’2 = kula/yi_ = actd’yam_—_ated’/l Xam: ‘“He'wam _ teina/xt. 
W here far they arrived he said to her: “Sleepy I get. 
NeExago/ketita. A/‘Ita qoa/nEm tLtaLa’/ma néket meEna/’0tec!a.” 
I shall lie down in Now five days not you will awake 
canoe. me.” 
Ayiaxago’ketit. A’Ita a/kjaya no/‘ya qaX 6¢d/kuil. Aya/qxoyé, 
He lay down in canoe. Now alone she went that woman. He slept, 
mo’‘keté aya/qxoyé, a/lta pEmm tEmotsga/nuks go.  ia‘yacqL. 
twice he slept, now noise of flying flies at his mouth. 
Aya/qxoyé, LO/né aya’qxoyé. A‘Ita paL acxE/Vuica/yu. La’/kti 
He slept, three he slept. Now full fly-blows. Four times 
times 


aya/qxoyé ka naxEla/yo-y- 6/yamoa. A/‘Ita agia’qxdte!. Agid’lEl, 


he slept and they moved much his maggots. Now she awoke him. Sheisteee 
im, 
agio‘lEl. Nixa/l’0ko. Ated/egam: ‘“Qa/daqa  aména/qxdtec!? 
she shook him. He awoke. He took her: Why did you awake me? 
Ayamo/lXam na mEna-0'te!a?” Atca/xaluketgo. ‘“O’omEn imé’xal. 
1 told you {int. you shall awake He threw her away. “Pigeon your name. 
part.] me?” 


Niiket Lmé@/k-ikal a/Lqé Lka/nax. Manix tea‘ko-i ka mxtea‘xa-itx.” 
Not your husband later on chief. When summer and you will cry much.” 


Sees THE SALMON MYTH. 73 


TakE niku;’@/mEn igua/nat. No/xunitak 0/omEn, qaxé/Lx ka 
Then he dived the salmon. She drifted away the pigeon, wheremaybe and 
nuXua/niptek. A‘Ita Ljap aci/kxax ecmodkst ckoalé’x:oa, Né’k-im 
she drifted ashore. Now find they did her two ravens. He said 
qix: é@/Xat: “EXt itca/xotk, @Xt itca/melqtan. Ka/tsek Lqjup 
that one: “One her eye, one her cheek. Middle cut 
tga/ameuke, tqcauwe’xa.” Né@’/k-im gqiX @/Xat: “ Kye, ky 6, ke, 
her intestines, we cut them in He said that one: “No, no, no, 
two.” 


k@; nai‘ka ka/namoékst sga/xost ka €Xt itca/melqtan, ka ka/tsek 
ede) Ss ] 
no; I both her eyes and one her cheek, and middle 
Lqjop tga/ameuke tqceauwée’xa.” ‘“Imé/mElaXaqamé,” atcio‘lXam; 
cut her intestines, we cut them in two.” ‘* You are wrong,”’ he said to him; 
“EXt itea/xot mai/ka, €Xt itcea/xot nai’‘ka. EXt itca/melqtan 
‘*One her eye you, one her eye I. One her cheek 
nai/ka, éXt itea/mElqtan mai‘ka. Ka/tsek Lqjop tga/ameuke.” 
ig one her cheek you. Middle cut her intestines.” 
KayeX acké’x ka naxa‘latck. No’ko, ake’é’taqL. 
Thus they did and she rose. She flew she left them. 
away, 
A‘lta a/yo, nik"L;é@/mEn igua/nat. Ayi/Xtki a/lta. Nigod’/ptegam 
Now he went, he dived the salmon. He swam now. He came ashore 
éXt ile’é. Take a’yoptek. A/2yo kula’yi. TakE niga/Om @/qxéL. 
one land. Then he went inland. He went far. Then hereached it a creek. 
Take atco/ikEl tXut iau’a @natai. TakE niXxagod/mit. TakE 
Then he saw it smoke there on the other Then he made himself Then 
side. poor. 


iq; éyo’qxot né’xax, ka‘nauwé a’yaL’a ia/atcike, La’yaqtq ka/nauwe 
anoldman he became, all his body stinking, his head all 
La/‘tcike. TakE naéxE/IqamX. “A, La/ksta x-ix:0’La? Lga/‘lEmam;” 
stinking. Then he shouted. Pala, who that? Go to take him;”’ 
aLgo‘LXam uLa/xk’un. Lqui/nEmiks Lxa/mEXutctike iLa/qula. 
they said to her their eldest Five sisters their camp. 
sister. 


A’lta- nai/kuteté una/xk’un. Naiko/tetam. A/Ita ma/Lxdlé Loc. “A, 
Now she crossed the eldest sister. She got across. Now inland he was. ‘Ah, 
jiamtga‘IEmam; mE/Lxa.” “A, cka aqanodctXué/l.” Na/Xtako, 
Icame tofetch you; come down to “Ah, and carry me on your She returned, 

the water.” back.” 


na/Xtako. NaxaLEngu'Litek Lga/mEXutctiks: “A, Lqjéy0d/qxot, 
she returned. She told them her sisters: ‘Ah, an old man, 
ka‘nauwé éLaL’a _ ia/atcike. ALgEna’xo-il cka  aqL0/ctXux. 
all his body stinking. He said to me and I should carry 
much him on back. 


Ka/nauwe’2 pal LeEm0/ckike é@Lav’a.” Na/k-im kex:yEma’‘t: ‘“ Nai/ka 
All full pus his body.” Shesaid the next eldest one: sey 
nLugoJEmam. Olxa/qxalptckix: LgiakEna/oi.” TakE nai‘kutcté 
go to fetch him. Our fire he shall look after.” Then she crossed 
akLugo‘lemam. “A,  iamtga/Iemam,” aked/IXam. “A, cka 
she went to fetch him. Abs I came to fetch you,” she said to him. [OAH and 
aqEnoctxo’x.” TakE no’ptega. AkLO/cgam god iLa/poté. Qé’/xtcé 
carry me on back.”’ Then she went up. She took him at his arm. Intending 
age’xk’a iLa’poté. Nau‘i La’qxauwilqt wax aLi’xax. Akw’é’taqL, 

she pulled it his arm. Immediately his blood pour out it did. She left him, 
al xX ce tye 2a! . We ava! p/ 2p w/ > Pas 
na’/Xko. Maniq;’a ur iq; ey S qxot. Qe’xtcé anid’/cgam = go 
oO. old. 


she went “Too! Intending I took him at 
home. 


iLa’pote. Nau‘i La/qxauwilqt wax atLi’xax.” TakE agod/lXam 
hisarm. Immediately blood pour out it did.” Then she said to her 
Lga/wux: “Mai‘ka Lga/lEmam.” TakE n0/ya = a‘kXatsak. 


her younger “You go and fetch him.” Then she went the middle one. 
sister: 


co nN Oo Ou m Ww bh a 


© 


m 9 


OU 


-~1 


10 


‘lal 


74 IGUA‘NAT HIS MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


Naigo/tetam. “A iamtga/IeEmam, mE/Lxa.” “A, cka aqanoctxo’x.” 

She got across. “Ah, I came to fetch you, come down.” “Ah, and ny on your 
ack.” 

TakE no’/ptega. Agid/cgam iLaé’/potitk, akLOo’latck. Ka/nauwe’2 wax 

Then she went up. She took it his forearm, she lifted him. All pour 

out 


aLi’x[ax] La/qxauwilqt kja La/mockike. AkL’é/taqL wiXt. Tak& 
it did his blood and his pus. She left him also. Then 
na/k‘im q;’0a/p Oxge/sax kex'LEma’‘t: “K’e nai‘ka nLugoEmam; 
she said near the youngest the next: “And a go to fetch him; 
olxa/qxalptckix: LgiakEna/oi.”. TakE  nai/koteté. Naigod‘tetam. 
our fire he shall look after it.” Then she crossed. She came across. 
“A, mE/Lxa, iq;éyd/qxot; iamtga/IeEmam.” “A, cka aqano/ctxox.” 


“Ah, go down to old man; I came to fetch you.”’ “A. “aud carry mon your 
the water, back.” 


TakE no’ptega. Alta ayaxalo’ctxamt. Mank kula’/yi agayuk"7. 
Then she went up. Now she eacried him onher_ A little far she carried him. 
ack. 


PaL na/xax Lea/owilqt; paL na/‘xax LEm0/ckike. AgEé/taqL: 

Full she got blood; full she got pus. She left him: 

‘“‘Maniq; 4’ tat; ka/‘nauwé iLa/ateike. Yi/L;aqu’Et ka/nauwé €/LaL’a.” 
‘Too! lo! all stinking. Full of sores all his body.” 

Takk 0c La/wuX cka kja ka no/tXuit. Naket qa‘da na‘k'im, TakE 

Then there their younger and silent and she stood Not [any]how shespoke. Then 

was sister up. 
nai/koteté. TakE aLgo‘lXam La/wuX: “A/xka XaX niket itea/yuL; 7 
she crossed. Then they said to her their younger ‘She that not proud 
sister: 


ka kq6ctx6.” ALgaé/qxamt La/wuX ka naigod’/tetamé. Take na/kim 
and she will carry They looked at their younger and _ she got across. Then she said 
him.” her sister 


uLa/xk’un: “Tea” Take ayo/tXuit. A/lta ayaga’/loLx. To’to 
their eldest ‘** Look.” Then he stood up. Now he went to the Shake 
sister: canoe. 
né/xax. Cell ia/ok, tal; iela’ke ia‘ok. Ayagk’La-it. Actigo‘tetame. 
he did. Rattling his lo! sea-otter his He was in the They two came 
blanket, blanket. canoe. across. 


O, masa/tsitx Lka/nax! A/Ita atcd’/cegam qaX  dxgé’s’ax, 
Oh, pretty chief! Now he took her that youngest one, 
uya’teinkikala na-éxa‘lax. AtcLO’mitckiL Lkanauwé’tike, Lia/nemcke 
his head wife she was to him. He took them all, his wives 
aLixa’/lax. Alta’2 a’/mka Oxge’s’ax tq;’éx a/tcax. 
he made them Now only the youngest like he did her. 
to him. one 


A‘lta aLxé’la-it ia/xkaté. Ka/nauwé L‘aLa/ma aLk70la/lEp7a-itx. 
Now he stayed there. All days they went always digging 
roots. 
Ta‘mka aLké/taqLax. Tci2xLx LtaLaé/ma aLkEé/taqL, ka na/Xko 
Him alone _ they left him. Several days they left him, and ake went 
nome 


a/néwa-y- uLa/xk’un. NaXko/mam. Alta kjé@ gd La/o-imatk. NOo/Lxa 
first she the eldest one. She came home. Now nothing at their camp. pray 
the beac 


ma/Lné,. <A/‘lta ia/qxoyO gd iLa‘/xanima. Jlakqana‘itx:. Lawa’ 
seaward. Now he slept in their canoe. He lay down. Slowly 

agio/tetEmt iLa/xanima. MatLxola’/-y- é/kxat. A/’lta atcio’/pewe 
she pushed it their canoe. From land wind. Now it drifted 

ma/Lné. Ma2/tné ka néxe’l’0ko. Atecid/lateck ia/0k. A/‘lta kjé-y- 
seaward. Seaward and he awoke. He lifted it his blanket. Now no 

ilé’e. Néket atcé/EikEl WeXt nixk;é/nyako. Aya/qxoya, m6‘keti 

land. Not he saw it. Again he tied blanket He slept, twice 

around himself. 


aya’/qxoya. NixE’Voko, a/lta tja’qé la/xlax ikeé’x ia/xanim. 
he slept. He awoke, now just as rock it did his canoe. 


CHINOOK THE SALMON MYTH. 15 


BOAS 


NéeElké@’Elako. A/‘Ita gd Lux itgd/OX. Ayea/lOLx. Atciusgé/’wulX 
He took off his Now at island it wasonthe He went ashore. He hauled it up 
blanket. beach. 


ia/‘xanim. Lax atca/yax ia/xanim. A‘Ita ia/xkaté ké’k Xulé nixo/kcté. 
hiscanoe. Turned hemadeit his canoe. Now there below he lay down. 
over 
Kawi'X ka LgdLée/IEXEmK aLE’té go Lkamela/lEq, tex tex tex tex 
Early and a person came on the sand, noise of footsteps 
go Lkamela/‘lEq. Na/‘wi atLiga/luptck qaxé’ gigd’ niké’x. TakkE 
on the sand. Immediately she went up where there where he was. Then 
aLgid/lXam: “Amxa‘latck, txg0/ya.” Takk nixa/latck. Acgiucgé/wulX 
she said to him: ‘Rise, let us go!” Then he rose. They pulled up 
ia/xanim ka ca/ea acga/yax. A’Ita aci/Xko. AcXgod’mam go qo’ta 
his canoe acd break they did it. Now they went They arrived at at that 
to pieces home. home 


t’oL. A/lta paL élagé’tEma qo’ta t’oL. A/‘Ita agid’peut. La2 
house. Now full sea-otters that house. Now she hid him. Some- 
time 


ka naxatgo’/mam ugo’/xk’un. Moket itea’ctxol Glagé’/‘teEma. Kawi/X 

and shecamehome her elder sister. Two her load sea-otters. Early 

ka wiXt a/cto. A’néwa naxatgd’/‘mam qaX uXgé/s’ax. EXtka 

and again they went. First she came home that youngest one. One only 

éla’kée Liap aga/yax. Take ago/IXam Lga/wuX qaX uxk&’/kxun: 

sea-otter nd she did. Then shesaidtoher heryounger that eldest one: 
sister 


“A/nqaté taL; amxatgo/mam.” “Aia/q ank/Xatko qé/wa niket é@/kta 
“Long ago, lo! you came home.” * Quick I returned as not anything 
Ljap ana/yax.” Take naxLolexa-it ugd/xk’un: “Qa/da a/Lqé naké’x, 
find I did it.” Then she thought her elder sister: ‘ How later on she will be, 
ka niket é@’/kta Ljap aga/yax, axa‘xo-il.” Wax kawi’X ka a’cto, 
and not anything find she did it, shealways Nextmorn- early and they 
? says.” ing went, 
iLa/moketé a/cto. Acta’ckta, actuxoLa/kux q0/La Lux. la/kwa nod/ix 
the second time __ they They searched they went around that island. Here always 
went. on the beach, a went 


qaX a/éXat, iau’a ta’/nata qo/ta Lux no‘ix qaX a/éXat quX 
that one, there to the other that island always that one that 
side went 


oxgi’/’ax. GO ku’mk-ité qgo’ta Lux ka acXa/omX. A/Ita kula‘yi 
youngestone. At the end of that island and they met. Now far 

qi’g0 acXa/omEniLx, a’lta naxta/kOx qaX uxgh/c’ax. Alta xax 
where _—‘ they always met, now she returned that youngest one. Now observe 
a/kxax qaX Lga/wuX qaX Oxgr’/kXun. A/’néwa qaX uqge’c’ax 


she did her that her younger that eldest one. First that youngest one 
sister ; 


naxgo’‘mam. Wax kawi/X weXt A/cto. Nod/ya qaxé qigo 
came home. The next early again they went. She went where there 
morning where 


acXa/omEniLx. K}é tga/xatk qaX Lga/wuX. God kula’yi alta 
they always met. Nothing her tracks that her younger At far now 
sister’s. 


oXuta‘kot tga/xatk. Take pat xax a/kxax. Na/xko, Lon Lj ap 
they turned her tracks. Then really observe she did She went those find 
back her. home, 


aga/yax élagé/‘tEma. Agn’tukct cta’Xti. A/Ita Oxoé/Lkjik tga/Xti 
she did them sea-otters. She saw it their smoke. Now crooked her smoke 
qaX Lga/wuX. AgE’tuke a/xka tga/Xti. A/lta wuk; qodta tga/Xti 


that her oanger She saw it her own her smoke. Now straight that her smoke 
sister. 


a/xka. A’Ita pat xax a/kxax. Wax iLa/lakté a/ctd, cka mank 
her. Now really observe she did The next the fourth they and a little 
her. morning time went, 


kula’yi no’ya qaX uxgk’c’ax ka naXa/tako. No/ya qaX oxgE’kXun 
far she went that youngestone and she turned back. She went that eldest one 


fr) 


~1 


or 


4 


25 


26 


iF 
76 IGUA/NAT HIS MYTH. ET ENOreae 


noxo/Lako qota LuX. Alta kula’‘yi, a‘Ita aXwLa/kot, tga/kipLaXat 
she wentaround that island. Now far, now she had returned, her tracks 
uxota/kot. WiXt agn’toket cta’Xti. A/‘lta pat oxué/Lkjik cta’/Xti. 
had returned. Again she saw it their smoke. Now really crooked their smoke. 
TakE na/xko qaX OxgE’/kXun. Naxgd/mam. A/nqaté id0’c Lga’/wuX. 
Then she went that eldest one. She arrived at Already there her younger 
home home. was sister. 


Ago/lXam: “A/’nqaté taL; amXatgd/mam.” “Naket @kta Lia 
| =) | 
She said to her: ‘Already behold you came home.”’ “Not anything find 
ana/yax ka aia’/q ank/Xatko.” Wax kawi’X ka wixt 4/cto 
I did it and quick I returned.” The next early and again they 
morning went 


é/LaquinEmé. A‘néwa nod/ya qaX oOxXkE/kXun. Naxa/pcut, 
the fifth time. First she went that eldest one. She hid herself, 

aga/qxamt Lga/wuX. K;jimta’ ka no’/ya. Na’Xtako. Nak;’e’Xtkin 

she watched her her younger Afterward and she went. She returned. She searched 

sister. 
go Lga/wuX itea/lEXamitk. Ljap agE’Lax LE’/kXala, LO/ktik. 
at her younger her bed. Find she did him aman, he lay down. 
sister 


“Mxa‘latck,” agid/lXam, “mxa/latck. Nau‘itka amtk’Ljala. Qa/daqa 
‘* Rise,” she said to him, ‘‘rise! Indeed you two are foolish. Why 
agEmupco'lit?” NaXko/mam tLga/wuX. A/Ita i0’e_ itea‘k-ikal. 
did she hide you?” She came home her younger sister. Now there was her husband. 
A‘lta agoTXam ugod/Xkun: “QO  nauitka meE/Ljala, neket 
Now she said to her her elder sister: Och, indeed you are foolish, not 
tEmé/Xatakux. Qa/‘daqa amiupeo'lit itxa/kikala? Qée nai/ka L;ap 
your mind. Why did vos hide him our husband? If I nd 
always 


ana/yax, poe niket aiamxa/peut.” <A/‘lta atcd’egam; ckanacm6/ket 
I did him, [if] not I hid him.” Now he took her; together both 
cia/kikal acixa/lax. I0/2Lqté ia/xkaté ayod’La-it. Alta né’k-im: 
his wives they became. A long time there he stayed. Now he said: 
“ika/kXuL teina/xt.” A/Ita acgid/‘1Xam cia/k-ikal cé/iuwall. A/Ita 
‘* Homesick I get.” Now they two spoke his wives [birds]. Now 
to him 


acgi0/tXuitek. Qoa/‘nEm é@’tElée agé/l6t a/éXat; O’/xqun’a, wiXt 
foo) 3 y] 


they made him ready. Five baskets full she gave the one; the eldest one, also 
him 
qua/‘nEm @’/tElée agé/lot; OxgE’/c’ax wiXt qoa/‘nEm é’tEléc agé’lot. 
five baskets full she gave the youngest also five baskets full she gave 
them to him; one them to him. 
Take acgid/lXam: ‘ Wu’xi a/Ita qam6’‘k"qai.” Néa’kteukté, a/lta 
Then they saidtohim: ‘‘To-morrow now — you will be carried.” It got day, now 
yuquna’-itX gd ma/Lné é’kolé, LpE’IpEl é/kole. A/‘lta aqéa/kElkoé 
there lay on the beach a whale, ared whale. Now they were carried 


to the canoe 
éelagé/tema. A/Ita aqid/lXam: “Amxo/ketit! Néket mge’kcta!” 


sea-otters. Now he was told: ‘* Lie down! Not look!” 
Qoa/nEmMI aya’qxoye ka néElgé/lako. A‘Ita ma’/Lxolé yuquna/-itX 
Five times his sleeps and he took off his Now on shore it lay 
blanket. 
qix: @/kolé. Lq;6p atea/yax qoa/nEmi ia/kiLq; p. A/lta ateid/k Xuiptek 
| | 
that whale. Cut he did it five times its cuts. Now he carried them from 


the shore upward 
qix’ Gelagé/tEma. A/‘Ita wiXt né/Xtak6o qix: é’kolé. 


those sea-otters. Now again itreturned that whale. 
Li2, ka Ljap aLga/yax Lgo’/Lé/lEXEmk. loc go ma/Lné. IgE/lxac 
Some and find he did him a person. He at at beach. It lay near 
time was him 
ia/ko0lé, igE/Ixac éelagé/tEma. TakE atcL0’/lXam LgdLéJEXEmk: 
his whale, they tay: near his sea-otters. Then he said to him to that person: 
im 


“Qaxé Lga/nEmcks aLxéla/itix:?” “A Lxéla/-itix: gd tE/LaqL.” 
‘“ Where my wives are they?” “Ah, they are in their house.” 


CHINOOK THE SALMON MYTH—TRANSLATION. 17 


BOAS 


“Ai/aq amLola’/ma LE/Lxa.” TakE a/Loptck qd/La LgoLé/lEXEmk. 


“Quick tell them they come to Then he went up that person. 
the beach.” from the beach 
“A iImea/kikal iXatgo’/mam. TcEmea/xo-il mecd/Lxa.” Qocta 
“Ah, your husband he has come home. He says to you you ore the Those 
each.” 
eméket néket LE/ctaqed. Lqj’Op aLgeE’ctax LE/ctaqedo. ALE/Lxam 
two not their hair. Cut they did it their hair. They came down 


to the beach 


a‘lta Lla‘/ktikecka. K+jé@-y- aLa/xk’un, néket na/Lxam. Aqid/Xuptck 


now four only. Not their elder sister, not shecamedown It wascarried up 
to the beach. from the beach 
qix: é’kolé. Agqid’Xuptck qix: éelagé/‘tEma. “Ai/aq megola/ma 
that whale. They were carried those sea-otters. » * Quick tell her 
up 
umea/xk’un = a/Lxa. Gitga’IEmama xix: @k0lé.” ALgod/lXam 
your elder sister sheshallcome She shall fetch it this whale.” They said to her 


to the beach. 
uLa/xk’un: “ Mk/Lxa, mE/Lxa, iga/lIEmam xiau é@’kolé.” A/Ita 


their elder sister: ‘‘Go to the go to the fetch it this whale.” Now 
beach, beach, 
aLaxEl’E’‘tcam, akLOo/cgam  Lé£a/tcau, aLaxa/lltigd. Agod’cgam 
she combeil herself, she took it grease, she greased herself. She took it 
unua/LEma. A/Ilta naxgé/matsk. A/‘Ita no’/Lxa. Take nd/yam. 
paint. Now she painted her face. Now she wenttothe Then she arrived. 
beach. 

Take atcid/latck gix: é’/kolé. Naxk/Lxéko iau’a ma/Lxolé. “Tau/a 
Then he lifted it that whale. She turned round here landward. ‘* Here 
ma/Iné mxE’Lxeko,” atco’lXam. Naxk’/Lxeék0 iau’/a wma/Lné, 
seaward turn,” he said to her. She turned round here seaward, 
Aqgéalo’ctxamt qix: é@’kolé. Naui yukpié’t natlo’tXuit Lteugq. WiXt 
Itwasputonher that whale. Atonce uptohere shestoodinthe water. Again 

back water 
aqi0ateck qix: @kolé. Naui yukpa/t natlo/tXuit. Qoi/nEmi 
it was litted that whale. At once up to here she stood in the Five times 
water. 


aqidlatek. TakE no/kuiXa. TakE no’ya, go/yé agn’/tax tea’pote. 


it was lifted. Then she swam. Then she went, thus  shedidthem her arms. 
A’lta , n0’k6. “QO’/wanid imé/xal. Manix te#llo’ ixa/xoeéleEmxé 

Now she flew. ‘**Coatch your name. When calm it gets 
ka wulkElelElE mugod’ya. Niket muXugo/mit  tkana/xime.” 
and wul£lzlele you will tly. Not you will make them chiefs.” 

poor 

A‘lta a/yuptek, a/Ita niXgd/mam g6 Lia/nEmcke. AtciLE/lEmak, 

Now he went up, now he came home to his wives. He gave each food, 
kanauwe’ atciLE’IEmak, qix: Gelagé/tEma, @Xt ia/kiLq;p é/kolé 

all he gave them food, those sea-otters, one its cut whale 
Lé/Xat Lia/k-ikal LkanEmelo‘ktike 1;a/nEmcke. 
one his wife all his wives. 
Translation. 


Once upon a time there was a chief who had a daughter. Many 
people wanted to marry her, but he was unwilling to part with her. 
[Finally he arranged for a contest.]_ He put [a pair of] elk antlers [in 
the middle of the house and said]: ‘‘Whosoever breaks these antlers 
shall have my daughter.” He invited all the people. First the quad- 
rupeds, then the birds. [When all were assembled] the people said to 
the snail: “You try first to break them.” The snail went down to the 
middle of the house and tried to break the antlers, but did not succeed. 


18 IGUA’NAT HIS MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


Then they said to the squirrel: ‘“ You try next to break them.” The 
squirrel bent the antlers alittle, but was not able to break them. Then 
they said to the otter: “‘ Now you try to break them.” When the otter 
went down the girl thought: “I wish he would break them.” She 
liked him [because he was so pretty]. He tried to break them, but did 
not succeed. He went up again. Next the beaver went down. He 
was very stout, and Blue-Jay said: ‘‘Oh, certainly, he with his big belly, 
he will break them.” He took up the antlers and almost succeeded in 
breaking them, but he grew tired and went back. Then the wolf went 
down and almost sueceeded in breaking the antlers, but he grew tired 
and went up. Then the bear went down and almost succeeded in break- 
ing the antlers. 

Now there was one person in the house whose body was full of sores 
and boils. Then Blue-Jay said: ‘Let him try what he can do, the one 
whose body is sore all over.” But next the grizzly bear went down. 
He almost broke it, when he also grew tired. Next the panther, the 
chief of all, went down, but he did not succeed. Then Ipo’epoé went 
down. Then the girl thought: ‘“O, if he would break them.” He took 
them up, but did not succeed at all. He went up. After that the 
sparrow-hawk went down. He almost broke them, and went up; then 
another hawk went down. He almost broke them, but then he grew 
tired. Now next the chicken-hawk went down. He tried to move 
them, but they did not move. Then the owl went down. They did 
not move. Then he went back. Then the eagle went down. He bent 
them and almost broke them. Now all the quadrupeds and all the 
birds had tried. 

Then Blue-Jay said: ‘‘Give the antlers to that one who is full of 
sores; let him try what he can do.” All the people had given it up. 
He continued: “Quick, stand up; [let us see] what can you accom- 
plish? Break those antlers.” Five times he said so. Then that person 
arose, shook his body, and shook his blanket. He shook his hair. 
(Then his body became clean, his hair long and full of dentalia, and he 
was very beautiful. They saw that he was the salmon.| Then he went 
to the middle of the house, took up the antlers and broke them. He 
broke them into five pieces and threw them down. Then he ran away, 
The people stared at him. After a little while Blue-Jay said: ‘Let us 
pursue our chief’s niece.” Then she took her dentalia and ran also. 
“Ah,” said the wolf, “‘we will pursue them.” Then all the people went 
in pursuit. They followed them a long distance. Then the man created 
a bay behind them. The people reached it, but the couple was already 
on the other side. After a while the people reached the other side of 
the bay. They continued to pursue them. Again they pursued them 
a long distance. He looked back and saw that the people were near 
overtaking them. Then he made a middle-sized bay. Again the peo- 
ple reached the bay and saw the two far away on the other side. Again 
the people reached the other side of the bay and continued their pursuit. 


CHINOOK THE SALMON MYTH—TRANSLATION. 19 


BOAS 


He made five bays, then he gave it up. The people crossed all five 
bays. Coyote and Badger, who were among the pursuers, became tired, 
and Coyote said to his friend: “My friend, lam getting tired. What do 
you think if I enchant my arrow?” Badger replied: “Allright.” Then 
Coyote blew on his arrow [singing]: ‘Strike his head, strike his head.” 
Three times he sang to his arrow: “Strike his head, strike his head.” 
And five times he blew on it. Then he shot upward and the arrow 
went “ Halululululululu.” The arrow struck the young man right in 
the nape and he fell down dead. The wolves were first among the 
pursuers, and they took the woman. The people devoured the salmon. 
They gave coyote the salmon’s bow. Then an egg fell down from him 
into a hole in the rock. Then the people went home. Now the Crow 
learned that her nephew had been killed. She went away and cried. 
She cried. Now she arrived at the place where he had been killed. 
She [looked for his remains,] turned over the stones, cried, and turned 
them again. Then she found one salmon egg. She carried it to the 
river, made a small hole {in the bank of the river] and put the egg into 
the water. In the evening she went home. 

Early next morning the Crow went again to look after that egg. It 
had grown a little. Then she made a larger hole [and put the egg into 
it]. In the evening she went home again. She reached her house. 
She did not sleep at all, and it grew day again. Early in the 
morning she went again [to look after the egg]. She cried while going. 
She arrived at that salmon egg. Now a small trout was swimming [in 
the hole]. This gladdened her a little. She made a still larger hole. 
In the evening she went home and slept a little. Early in the morning 
she went out again the fourth time. She arrived at that salmon egg 
and saw a large trout swimming there. Then the Crow was really 
glad. She made a large hove. Early in the afternoon she went home. 
She arrived at home. When it grew dark she fell asleep. Early in 
the morning she awoke, arose, and went to look after the trout. She 
arrived and saw a small salmon swimming there. Now she made a 
still larger hole and left it again. At noon she went home. She arrived 
at home. She thought only of the salmon. It grew dark. Early the 
next morning she went again. She arrived and now there swam a 
large salmon. She took it, threw it ashore, and it was transformed 
into a tall boy. Now the Crow was happy. They went home together. 
She said to her grandnephew: “Bathe, that you may see spirits.” He 
bathed. First he bathed in the river and after that in the sea. Every 
night he bathed. After he had finished bathing in the sea, he bathed 
in [ponds on] the mountains. Now he became a young man. 

Then his grandaunt told him: ‘‘Coyote and his friend Badger killed 
your father. Ifit had not been for that woman they would not have 
killed him. They took her to the wolves.” He replied: “I will go 
and search for Coyote.” ‘Do not go, else they will kill you.” After 
a while the Crow told him: “They gave your father’s bow to Coyote.” 


-/ . 
80 IGUA’NAT HIS MYTH. be ee 


“T will go and search for Coyote; I have seen enough spirits.” ‘Oh, 
tell me who 1s your spirit?” Then he said to his grandaunt: “Let us 
go outside.” The Crow went out with him. Then he shot his arrow 
toward the forest and it caught fire. He shot his arrow toward the 
prairie and it caught fire. Then the Crow said: “Indeed you have 
seen spirits.” She said: “You must go, but take care of yourself.” 
The next day he made himself ready. He put on his dentalia and took 
his arrows. Then it thundered, although the sky was clear. He went 
on and crossed five prairies. 

Then he saw a house [a long way off]. He went on and when he 
came near the house he heard a person singing songs of victory. He 
stayed outside. Somebody was singing there at the end of the house. 
Slowly he opened the door and stood in the doorway. Then Coyote 
sneezed and sang jestingly: ‘Salmon’s son came; certainly he will 
killme. But I jump about much in my house; certainly he will kill me.” 
He had put black paint on his face. His face was blackened, and so was 
Badger’s face. At that moment the door made a noise and he looked 
back to the doorway. Verily there stood the one in the door whom 
they had killed. ‘O, my dear, my dear!” said Coyote, “they killed 
him whom I loved so well. Somebody who looks just like him is walking 
about.” Then the salmon’s son entered. He sat down on the bed and 
said: ‘Be quiet, Coyote! I know that you killed my father.” Then 
Coyote was quiet. Badger meanwhile turned his face toward the wall 
and was rubbing it [in order to remove the paint]. The salmon’s son 
said: ‘‘Give me my father’s bow.” Coyote replied: “I will give it to 
you, my dear!” He arose and took a bow out [of a box]. [The young 
man] took it and spanned it. It broke to pieces, and he struck Coyote 
with the pieces so that he fell down headlong. His feet quivered. 
Then Coyote arose again. Thesalmon’s son said: ‘‘ Give me my father’s 
bow.” Coyote replied: ‘I will give it to you, my dear.” He took 
out another bow and gave it to him. [When the young man tried 
to span it it broke and] he struck Coyote’s face with the pieces. 
He fell on his back and his feet quivered. Again he arose [and the 
salmon’s son said once more]: “Give me my father’s bow! Why do you 
deceive me?” Then Coyote gave him another bow to the back of which 
heads of woodpeckers were glued. The young man spanned it with his 
left hand. It did not break. Then he spanned it with his right hand 
and it broke to pieces. He struck Coyote with the pieces and he 
fell on his back. Then Coyote had given him four bows; and they 
all broke. The fifth one which he gave him was his father’s bow. 
Three times he spanned it with his left hand ; three times he spanned 
it with his right hand. It did not break. The heads of red-headed 
woodpeckers were put by twos on the back of that bow. Then the 
young man said to Badger: “Be quiet, Badger, I know that you area 
murderer.” Badger replied: “I am no murderer; I merely blackened 
my face for fun.” Then the young man took hold of Coyote and Badger 


Beapoors THE SALMON MYTH—TRANSLATION. 81 


at their napes, hauled them out of the house, struck them together and 
killed them. He threw down Coyote and said: “Coyote will be your 
‘name; henceforth you will not kill chiefs.” He threw down Badger 
and said: ‘Badger will be your name; henceforth you will not kill 
chiefs. People will fear only your winds. You will never go near men.” 
He threw them away and burned their house. 

He went on. [After traveling sometime] he came to a prairie. He 
crossed it and saw smoke arising at its end. He went on. Healmost 
reached a house, and heard a woman crying inside. He opened the 
door slowly, but it made a noise. The woman looked up and saw him; 
[he looked like] her husband whom they had killed. He entered. The 
house was full of meat. He said: ‘I came to look for you; let us go 
home. The one who was killed was my father.” Then she replied: 
‘The monsters will kill you.” ‘“ Let them kill me,” he said. She gave 
him to eat and he ate. In the afternoon he went outside and cut five 
pieces of flesh from his nape. Hetied them up. Then he ate alder- 
bark until his stomach became full. He re-entered the house and gave 
the woman the five bundles of meat, saying: ‘‘ When the monsters 
come home give each one of them a bundle of meat. If they eat it I 
shall be able to win over them. Give it to them when they notice me.” 
Now he deceived them. He blew on the fire until he was covered with 
ashes and looked like an old man. 

In the evening the noise of falling objects was heard. A person 
entered and when he came to the middle of the house he cried: “I 
smell salmon; I smell salmon.” When he saw the old man he kicked 
him many times, until blood came out of his mouth.* Then the woman 
arose and gave him one bundle of meat, saying: “I am a human being; 
do you think I have no relatives? This old man [is one of my family]; 
he brought this for you.” ‘O, my sister-in-law’s relative, why did you 
not tell me before, I should not have hurt my sister-in-law’s rela- 
tive.” After a little while a noise was heard again. Another person 
appeared. He entered. When he was near the middle of the house 
he cried: ‘“‘I smell salmon; I smell salmon.” When he noticed the old 
man he kicked him many times, so that he flew about and blood came 
out of his mouth. Then the woman arose and said: “I am a human 
being; do you think I have no relatives? This old man brought this 
for you.” And she gave him one bundle of meat. ‘O, my sister-in_ 
law’s relative, why did you not tell me before, I should not have hurt. 
my sister-in-law’s relative.” Again a noise was heard outside and a, 
person appeared. Heentered. Some distance before he reached the 
middle of the house he said: “I smell salmon; I smell salmon.” When 
he saw the old man he kicked him and he flew about in the house and 
blood came out of his mouth. The woman waited a little while, then 
she arose and took a bundle of meat and gave it to her brother-in-law, 
saying: “I am a human being; do you think I have norelatives? This 


*In fact he was expectorating the juice of the alder bark which he had chewed. 
BULL T=20: 6 


82 IGUA‘NAT HIS MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


old man brought this for you.” ‘‘O, my sister-in-law’s relative, poor 
man, why did you not tell me long ago? I should not have hurt 
my sister-in-law’s relative.” Again a noise was heard and one more 
person appeared. He had hardly entered the house when he 
said: ‘I smell salmon; I smell salmon.” When he saw the old 
man he kicked him so that he flew about and blood came from his 
mouth. The woman waited a long time. Then she said: “I am a 
human being. Do you think I have no relatives? This old man 
brought this for you;” and she gave him one bundle of meat. ‘O, 
my sister-in-law’s relative, why did you not tell me long ago, I should 
not have hurt my sister-in-law’s relative.” And he ate the piece of 
salmon. Now only her husband remained |outside]. After a little 
while a noise was heard and one more person appeared. He just 
opened the door when he noticed the smell of salmon and said: “I 
smell salmon; I smell salmon.” When he saw the old man he kicked 
him many times, so that he flew about and blood came from his mouth. 
The woman hesitated, and the old man was kicked much. Then she 
arose and said: “I ama human being. Do you think I have no rela- 
tives? This old man brought this for you.” She gave him that bundle. 
“OQ, my brother-in-law, why did you not tell me long ago? I should 
not have hurt my brother-in-law.” 

Now they skinned and carved the elks and wanted to give some of 
the meat to the old man, but he did not eat it. The woman said: 
‘‘Perhaps you have broken his ribs, so that he can not eat.” Early 
the following morning the wolves made themselves ready and went 
hunting. Then the young salmon arose and went bathing. The woman 
boiled food for him, which he ate. After he had finished they went 
to bed. In the afternoon he again blew into the fire [so that he was 
covered with ashes] and became an old man. In the evening the wolves 
arrived at home and brought elks. This time they did not kick him. 
In the evening they looked at his arrows and said: ‘How pretty 
are the arrows of our sister-in-law’s relative!” He replied: ‘‘I made 
them.” “Make one for me; make me a flint arrowhead,” said 
the eldest brother. The young salmon replied: ‘ Willingly; but 
sometimes I will break a piece or two of flint.” Then he gave 
him five pieces of flint. Early the next morning the wolves went 
hunting again. When they had gone the salmon’s son went to 
bathe and then worked at the arrowheads. He finished them all. 
He took one and kept it for himself. In the evening the wolves 
returned and brought home elks. After they had carved them they 
looked at the arrowheads and said: ‘‘How pretty are these arrow- 
heads.” The salmon replied: “{That is nothing,] when I was a young 
man I knew how to make arrowheads.” The second wolf said: “ To- 
morrow you must make some for me.” ‘ Willingly.” Then he gave 
him five pieces of flint. Early the next morning the wolves went 
hunting. After some time he arose and made the arrowheads. He 


ers 


ae THE SALMON MYTH—TRANSLATION. 83 


finished them all, but kept one for himself. In the evening they arrived 
at home. When it had become dark they looked at the arrowheads 
which the old man had made. He gave him four and kept one for him- 
self. Then the next said: “To-morrow you must make some for me, 
my sister-in-law’s relative.” He also left five pieces of flint. Early 
the next morning they left and went hunting. Now he worked again 
at the arrowheads and finished all. He kept one for himself. In the 
evening the wolves arrived at home. When it grew dark they looked 
at the old man’s work. ‘Oh, how pretty are these arrowheads,” they 
said. Then the fourth wolf said: ‘‘ To-morrow you must make some for 
me, my sister-in-law’s relative.” He gave him five pieces of flint. Early 
the next morning the wolves made themselves ready and went hunt- 
ing. Then the salmon’s son arose. He worked at the arrowheads 
and finished them all. One he kept for himself. In the evening the 
wolves arrived at home. It grew dark and he gave them four arrow- 
heads, one he kept for himself. ‘Oh, how pretty are these arrowheads.” 
‘‘ To-morrow my brother-in-law will make some for me,” said the young- 
est wolf, the husband of that woman. “ Willingly,” replied he. He 
left five pieces of flint for him. Early the next morning the wolves 
made themselves ready and went hunting. Then the salmon’s son 
arose; he worked at the arrowheads and finished them; one he kept 
for himself. In the evening they arrived at home and brought elks. 
Their house was full of elk meat. When it grew dark they looked at 
the arrowheads which he had made: ‘Oh, my brother-in-law, your 
arrowheads are pretty, they are good.” Early the next morning they 
arose again and went hunting. Then the salmon said to the woman: 
“Arise, now I shall kill them.” The woman arose. ‘Take care,” she 
said. Then they made themselves ready. 

The five wolves had each a well. The salmon’s son and his widow 
went out of the house. He took his bow and spanned it; he pointed 
his arrow to the mountains. Then it became hot and the wells dried 
up, except that of the youngest wolf, in which a little water remained. 

The eldest one was on his hunt; [the heat dried the bows of the 
hunters and when the eldest wolf spanned] his bow it broke. Then 
he cried: ‘O, certainly the salmon’s son came in disguise.” He went 
to the beach. He became very thirsty and came to his well; he looked 
into it and it was dry and empty. He looked into that of his younger 
brother; it was also dry and empty. Then he looked into the well of 
the middle one; it was dry and empty. He looked into the well of the 
next brother; it was dry and empty. Then he looked into the well of 
his youngest brother, and there he found a little water. He jumped 
down and began to drink. He drank, and drank, and drank until he 
had enough. Then the salmon’s son shot him. He fell right where 
he stood. They hauled out the body and hid it. 

And the second brother was on his hunt [ete., as before]. He found 
a little water. He.looked at it. He looked and looked, but he did not 


=/) ; BUREAU OF 
84 IGUA NAT HIS MYTH. ETENOLaGe 


see anything and went into the well and began to drink. He drank, 
and drank, and drank, until he had enough. Then the salmon’s son 
shot him and he fell right where he stood. They hauled out the body 
and hid it. 

And one more went out to hunt [ete., as before]. He found a little 
water. He looked, and looked, and looked. He intended to go down, 
but looked again. He went around the well once. Then he jumped 
down intoit. He drank a little and looked again. Then he drank 
again. He drank, and drank, and drank, until he had enough. Then 
the salmon’s son shot him. He fell down right where he stood. They 
hauled out the body and hid it. 

And still another went out to hunt [etc., as before]. A little water 
was in the well. He looked, and looked, and looked. He observed 
something suspicious, but decided to go down. He went around the 
well many times, and waited a long time; then he went down. He 
drank a little, then came up. At last he went down again, and drank, 
and drank, and drank until he was full. Then the salmon’s son shot 
him and he fell. They hauled him out and hid him. 

And the youngest one went out to hunt. Then he broke his bow. 
He cried: “Oh, the salmon’s son came to us in disguise.” Then he 
went out of the woods and looked into the wells of his elder brothers. 
They were dry and empty. The wells of his four elder brothers were 
dry, but alittle water was in his own well. He saw a little blood. 
Then he went often around his well and he searched for them. He 
looked about. He almost stepped onthem. Then he jumped down and 
drank. He jumped up again. Now he looked up again and looked 
about. He jumped down again. Five times he jumped up and down. 
Then he drank and got enough. Then the salmon’s son shot him. He 
killed the last one. 

Now the man and the woman went down to the water and burnt 
their house. He went home and took the woman along. They came 
to their canoe and went down the river. When they had gone a dis- 
tance he said: “I am getting sleepy. I shall lie down in the canoe; 
you shall not awake me until after five days.” He lay down in the 
canoe, and they traveled on. He slept two nights; then the woman 
noticed flies on his mouth. After three nights she saw that he was 
full of fly-blows, and after four nights she saw maggots crawling 
around his mouth. Then she [became afraid] and awoke him. She 
shook him. He awoke, took hold of her and said: ‘ Why did you 
awake me? Did I tell you to awake me?” He flung her into the water 
and said: *‘Your name will be Pigeon; henceforth you will not be the 
wife of a chief. Your cry will be heard in summer.” Then the salmon 
jumped into the water. The pigeon drifted away and somewhere she 
drifted ashore. After awhile two ravens found her. One of them 
said: ‘I will take one of her eyes and I will take one of her cheeks; 
we will divide the intestines.” ‘‘No,” said the other, “I will take both 


meiOor THE SALMON MYTH—TRANSLATION. 85 


her eyes and one of her cheeks; we will divide the intestines.” “ You 
are wrong,” replied the other, ‘‘one eye for you, one eye for me, one 
cheek for me, and one cheek for you; we will divide the intestines.” 
While they were talking she arose, flew away and left them. 

Now the salmon swam away. After awhile he came to a country 
and went ashore. He went a long way and came to a creek. He 
saw smoke arising on the other side. Then he assumed the form of an 
old man. His whole body and his head were full of scabs. He 
shouted. Five sisters were camping there. [When they heard him 
they said to the eldest one:] ‘‘ Who is that? Go and fetch him.” She 
went across the creek and when she saw him she said: ‘ Come down 
to the water, I came to fetch you.” “Oh,” he replied, ‘carry me on 
your back.” She returned and said to her sisters, ‘‘ It is an old man; 
he told me that I should carry him on my back, but his body is all full 
of scabs.” The next younger sister said: “I will go and fetch him. 
He shall look after our fire.” She went across the creek and said: “I 
come to fetch you.” ‘Oh, carry me on your back.” She went up and 
took him by his arm and was going to take him, but blood came out at 
once, Therefore she left him and went home. She said: ‘He is too 
old, I touched his arm and blood came out at once.” Then she said 
to her younger sister: “Go and fetch him.” The middle one went 
across the creek. She arrived on the other side and said: ‘I come 
to fetch you, come down to the water.” ‘Oh, carry me on your back.” 
Then she went up and took hold of his arm. She lifted him and blood 
and matter came out at once. Then she also left him. Then the next 
sister said: “I will go and fetch him; he shall take care of our fire.” 
She went across, and when she arrived on the other side said: ‘‘Come 
down, old man, I came to fetch you.” ‘Oh, carry me on your back.” 
She went up and took him on her back. She carried him a short distance, 
and became full of blood and matter. She left him. {When she came 
back to her sisters she said:]| ‘‘ He is indeed too full of scabs and sores.” 
Then the youngest sister arose and went across the creek without 
sayingaword. They said to her: “ You are not proud, you will certainly 
be willing to carry him.” They saw how their younger sister went 
across. Then the eldest one said: ‘ Look!” The old man came and 
went to the canoe. He shook himself. Then [his scabs fell off and} 
he had a fine sea-otter blanket on. He went into the canoe and the 
girl carried him across. He was a beautiful chief. He married the 
sisters and the youngest one became his head wife. He married them 
all; but he loved only the youngest one. 

Now they lived there for some time and the women went digging 
roots every day. They left him alone. After several days the eldest 
sister came home first. She did not find him in the camp, and when 
she went down to the beach she saw him asleep in their canoe. He 
lay there. She pushed the canoe slowly from the shore. There was 
a lJand-breeze and the wind drifted it seaward. When the man 


-/ = 
86 IGUA’NAT HIS MYTH. niaworogs 


awoke he lifted his blanket and saw no land. Then he covered his 
face again. He slept for two days. Then he awoke; he felt as though 
the canoe was rocking. He took off his blanket and saw that he was 
on the beach of an island. He went ashore. He hauled his canoe up, 
turned it over, and lay down beneath it. In the morning he heard the 
noise of steps on the beach, and he saw a woman coming. She stepped 
right up to where he lay and said: ‘Rise! Letus gohome.” He arose. 
They hauled up his canoe and she broke it to pieces. Now they went 
home. They reached a house which was full of sea-otters. She hid 
him. After awhile [another woman] her elder sister entered the house. 
She carried two sea-otters on her back. Early the following morning 
they went again and the youngest one came home before the other. 
She carried one sea-otter only. Then the elder one said toher: ‘ Lo! 
You are home already!” [The younger one replied:] ‘ Yes I came 
home because I did not find anything.” Then the elder sister thought: 
‘What is the matter with her? She says that she does not find any- 
thing.” On the following morning they went the second time. They 
always searched on the beach going around the island. The one always 
went on one side of the island, the other on the other. At the farther 
end of the island they used to meet. Now the younger one returned 
long before she reached the place where they always met. The elder 
one observed her. Again she came home first. Early the next morn- 
ing they went again. When the elder one got to the place where they 
always met, she found no tracks of her younger sister. [She went on 
and saw] she had turned back long ago. Then she observed her more 
closely. She came home; she had found three sea-otters. She saw 
their smoke. Now her younger sister’s smoke did not arise straight, 
while her own smoke arose straight. Then she noticed that something 
had happened. On the fourth morning the two sisters started again. 
The youngest went a short distance and returned. The eldest went 
around the island and saw that her sister had turned back far from 
where they used to meet. Again she saw their smoke, and saw that her 
sister’s did not rise straight. Then she went home. The younger sister 
was already there. She said: “ Youareat home already.” ‘ Yes,” she 
replied, ‘“‘I did not find anything and turned back.” On the fifth morn- 
ing they started again. Now the eldest one went first. She hid herself 
and watched her younger sister who went later. {When she had left] 
she returned and searched in her sister’s bed. She found a man lying 
down, and said: ‘Arise! indeed, you two are foolish. Why did she 
hide you?” Soon her sister returned home and saw that her [sister had 
found her| husband. Then the elder sister said: ‘Indeed, you are 
foolish, you have no sense. Why did you always hide our husband? 
If I had found him I should not have hid him.” Then he married both 
the sisters. 

He stayed there a long time; then hesaid: “I am homesick.” Then 
his wives made him ready. They each gave him five baskets. Then 


oO  ——————— 


CHINOOK THE SALMON MYTH—TRANSLATION. 87 


they told him: “To-morrow you will be taken home.” The next morn- 
ing he saw a whale on the beach; it was ared whale. Now they carried 
sea-otter skins to the canoe [i. e., the whale],and they said to him: 
“Now lie down |in the whale] and do not look.” After five nights he 
took off his blanket. The whale lay on the beach. He cut five pieces 
of blubber from the whale and earried his sea-otters and his baskets 
to the shore. Then the whale returned. 

After awhile a person met him on the beach. Near him lay the 
whale meat and the sea-otters. He asked that person: ‘‘ Where are 
my wives?” ‘They are in their house.” ‘Tell them to come down 
here.” Then that person went up to the house and said: “Oh, your 
husband has come home; he tells you to come down to the beach.” 
Two of the women had cut their hair. Four of his wives went down 
to the beach. Only the eldest one did not come. They earried up the 
whale and the sea-otter skins. He said: “Tell your eldest sister to 
come down; she shall carry this whale.” They went up to the house 
and said to their sister: ‘Come down and fetch that whale.” Then 
she combed herself, greased her hair, and painted her face. She went 
down to the beach and lifted the whale. When she turned to go home 
the man said: “Turn toward the sea.” She turned seaward He put 
the whale meat on her back. The water reached up to her knees. 
They put another piece of whale meat on her and the water reached 
to her hips. Five times they did so, then [the water reached up to her 
neck and|she began to swim. She moved her arms up and down. 
Now she began to fly [and the man said]: ‘‘Coatch shall be your name; 
when it is calm you will fly about. Henceforth you will not make 
chiefs miserable.” Then he went home to his wives. He gave them 
everything, the sea-otters and a piece of whale meat each. 


bo 


(21) 


“1 


5. IKOALE’X:OA KjA IQONE/QONE ICTA/KXANAM. 
RAVEN AND GULL THEIR MYTH. 


Id’ec iqoné/qgoné. Ka/nauwé LtaLa/ma  nickta‘kutsgo-itx. Pan 


There the gull. All days he searched all over the Full 
was beach. 
Li‘cku-ic. Atctomé‘tckéex tqalXtE’/mX kj;a tEla‘ta-is kja tpke’cXiks. 
his mat. He found always poggies and codfish and flounders. 
Qa’xLx na‘a’Lax né’ckta. A‘lta LgoLélEXEmk La/gipLaxa 0Xota‘kut. 
One day he searched Now a person his tracks turned back. 


on the beach. 
Kula‘yi a’‘yo, né/ckta. Na2ket i’kta Ljap atea/‘yax. Ne’Xko, 
Far he went, he searched Not anything find he did it. He went 
on the beach. home, 


néXko‘mam. NixLo/lEXa-it, wuXi’ kawi’/X no/ya. Ne’ktcukté 
he reached his house. He thought, to-morrow early I shall go. It got day 
kawi/2X ka a’yo. Kula/yi a’yo. Liap wiXt atci’tax La’/gipLaxa 
early and he went. Far he went. Find again he did them his tracks 
LgOLélEXEmK. A/nqate oxota/kut. N@XE’LXa. Mank kula’yi 
a person's. Already they had fond He got angry. A little far 
back. 


a/yo. Naket i’‘kta Ljap atea/yax. Né’/Xtako, néXko’mam. Kala‘lkuileé 
he went. Not any- find he did it. He went home, he got home. Scold 
thing 
iké’X. Kawi2X nixa’latck, a/yo. Mank kula’yi a/yo. Lap ateci’tax 
he did. Early he rose, he went. A little far he went. Find he did them 
La/gipLaxa LgoLéeJEXEmk. A/nqaté oXdta’kot. NiXE’LXa. Cka 
his tracks a person. Already they had returned. He became angry. And 
ma/nx'i kula/yi a’yo. Kjé, néket é’/kta Ljap atea’yax. NiXko/mam. 
a little far he went. Noth- not any- nd he did it. He came home. 
ing, thing 
Kalakuilé né/xax go we/wuLé. la/xka tia/xétatke qota tkamela/lEq. 
Scold hedid in interiorof house. He his inheritance that beach. 
WuXi’ kawi/2X ka a‘yai iLa/lakté. Ayo’2, mank kula’‘yi 4a’yo. 
To-morrow early and he went the fourth time. He went, a little far he went, 
Ljap ateci/tax La/gipLaxa LgoLélEXEmk. Kala/Ikuilé né/xax; 
Find he did them his tracks a person's. Scold he did; 
niXEh’/LXa. Neé/Xtako. NiXko’mam go ta‘yaqu. Ated’kola -y-oya’- 
he became angry. He returned. He came home to his house. He sharpened his 
= be = = = = = ’ 
q;éwigé. “WuXi! a/Lqi mxeltcema’/o Laketa qLgEnxga/lukt.’ 
knife. ‘To-morrow _ later on I shall show you who the one always before 
me. 


Niket nixixa/lem ka no/ponEm  Kawi/X ka po’lakli ka 4a’yo. 
Not he ate and it grew dark. Early and dark and he went. 
Kula’/yi a/yo kay- @k"tElit née’té. A/lta LO‘/itt LgdLé’lEXEmkK. 
Far he went and the morning came. Now it came a person. 
star 


Ate L:Elkel. La2 nixatElgé/taqtamit. Atciugoa’laqL a/lta ikoalé’x:oa. 
He saw him. Some- they met each other. He recognized him now the raven. 
time 


A‘Ita iya/ctxul ikoalé’x-oa g0 Li/eguic, gd La/qoa-iL Lie’guic. “ H’kta 
Now his load the raven in a mat, in a large mat. “ What 
éloe imé/LkuiLX, qa/‘nauwulkwulEwulewule?” ‘“Tkna/paayoyueX 

isinit your mat basket, qa/nauwulewulewulewule?”’ ‘* Crab’s claws 


antE/tEluk"y; Lmé/wulXnana.” Né/xLako wiXt. WixXt atcid/l/Xam: 


I carry them to your nephews.” He went around more. Again he said to him: 
them bim 


“Bkta @/loc imé@LkuiLX, qa/nauwulEwule wulewulk?” ‘“Tkna‘pa- 
“What isinit your mat basket, qa/‘nauwulewulewulEwulk?” ‘* Crab’s 

a/yoyucX anth/tuk"y Lmé/wulXnana.” Qoé/nEmi né/xLako, 

claws I carry them to them your nephews.” Five times hewent around him, 


88 


ais. RAVEN AND GULL MYTH. 89 


atciggé/Lqta. Ia‘xkati ayuquna/‘itixit ikoalé’x‘oa. Ayod/mEqt. 
he stabbed him. Right there he fell down the raven. He was dead. 
AteLo/cgam Lia/ckuic ikoalé’x‘oa. Wax atci’tax iqonéqgone’. A/‘Ita 
He took it his mat the raven’s. Pour out he did them the gull. Now 
wax no/xox tqalx'tE’mx: uxoéxé/lak qamx tpké/cXeEke gqamx 
poured they poggies mixed with partly tlounders partly 
out became 


tela’ta-is. Atcawe’kitk g60 Lia/eguce. A/‘lta né/Xko. “Kuc! ta/kE 
codfish. He put them into in his mat. Now he wenthome. ‘ Well! then 
ania/wat qiqia’/Ox qteEnxga’/luk7.” NiXg0d’/mam iqonéqoné’. 
Ikilledhim that one who always went first.” He came home the gull. 
Ljap aqa’/yax ikoalé’x-oa. A/‘Ita i0/mEqtEt. ‘‘Ai/aq amexalkLé/tegom 
Find he wasdone _ the raven. Now he was dead. ‘Quick tell her 
Lia/wuX!” Takk 4’/LO Lqjoa/lipX. ALE’/xangd aqug0d/dm tk’/kXaqL 


his younger sis- Then he went a youth. He ran he reached her house 
ter! 


6kj’unod’. Aia/egop! qix: iqjoa/lipX. A/‘Ita akxo/tekin 06kj;’un0’; 
the crow’s. He entered that youth. Now she was working the crow; 
YLkuiL gia’xo-il. “Qia’wat eme’/le, Laq;’0/!” Kjémm, neket qa/da 


alargemat she was work- “‘ He is killed your brother, pagel - No noise, not (any) how 
ing at it. 
na/k-im. ‘Iqonéqoné’ atcia/wat eme‘lé.”  Kjomm néket qa/‘da 
she spoke. “The gull he killed him your brother.’’ No noise not (any) how 
na/kim. WexXt aqgd/lXam: “Qia/wat émé’lé, Laq;’6 of!” Qoiai/nEmi 
she spoke. Again she was told: ‘He killed your brother, crow!” Five times 
aqgo1Xam. No/tXuit 0/kj’und’. Laq agE/Lax caer Kau 
she was told. She stood up the crow. Take out she did it cedar bark. Tie 
aLExa’lax, g0-y- i’teaqtq, Okukjétik agE’/Lax. ALEXE’Ilgél L*ué/l6L. 
she did it to it to her head, Sees bark Sh made it. She tied around cedar bark. 
head ring her waist 
Agid’/egam _itea/kilx‘EmalalEma. A‘lta aLaxila’tlama. A/Ita 
She took them her shells [rattle]. Now she sang and shook rattle. Now 
ago’xuqte; tga/lEXam, xitik ma/Lxdlé telala/xuke; agE’/LXaqte; 
she called her town, these inland birds ; she called them 
4 together together 
Lteaqtea’qke; agh’/LXaqtc; Lqoeélqo-é/leke; ago/xuqte; tqoacqoa/cEke; 
the eagles; oe called them the owls; ake called ‘ikem the cranes; 
together together 
agh’LXaqtc; LEnpe’tcke; agkE/LXaqtc; LE/tetvé; ago’Xuqte; 
she called them the chicken-hawks; ne ealled hee the fish-hawks; she called them 
together together together 
tE/ngétgét; ka/nauwe tgo’/LxewulXkma tga/lIEXam. Atcd/Xuqte; 
the duck-hawks all strong people her town. He called them 
[2]; together 
tia/leE Xam iqonéqone’. Tgoéxoe/xoke, tEmonts’ikts’é/kuks, 
his town the gull. The ducks, the tail ducks, 
tq; é’ptcexEntcxEn, Lteuya/muke, Ltameéla‘yike, Lqo/Lqdlale, 
the sprit-tail ducks [?], pelicans [?], albatross loons, 
Lpa’qxo ike, 0/Lqéke; ka/nauwé ita/xalx'teE tE’/kXape_ tia/lEXam 
shags, coatches ; all flat their feet his people 
iqonéqone’, A‘Ita staq; aga/yax iqonéqone/-y- Ok;’und’, 
the gull’s. Now war she made on (on) the gull the crow. 
“Anio/goatuwa’ wu te/acgEté’, Tacmo’/L, Tacmo’/L, hé, hé, hé, hé. 
““T shall make them on the sand, Gull, Gull, heh, heh, heh, heh. 


frighten him away 
“Aniod/goatuwa’ wu te/acgEte’, Tacmo‘L, Tacmo/L hé, hé, hé, hé. 
“T shall make them on the sand, Gull, Gull, heh, heh, heh, heh. 
frighten him away 
AqcEkpa‘na oOmunts;é/ktsjik, a/nqaté kjut aqea/x é’teaqtq. 
She was jumped the tail duck [ ?], long ago tear off it was done her head. 
upon 
Ackcrekpa‘na cE’/ngétgét. <A‘Ita aqtd/téna tia/lEXam  iqonéqoné’. 
Hejumpedon her the duck hawk[?]. Now they were killed _ his people the gull’s. 


ao Oo - WwW 


Cs | 


(0'6) 


9 


bo 
oo 


4 


bo 


a 


12 


90 IKOALE X‘OA KjA IQONE QONE THEIR MYTH.  ["ituxoroay 


Aqa/mXike aqto’/tEna tia/IEXam iqonéqgoneé’, ta/kE kjwac n0o’/x6x 


Part of them were killed his people the gull’s, then atraid they got 
tialXam. Na/k-im 6kj’und’: “ Qéyalo’ta-y- kXakte qo qjul 
his people. She said the crow: ‘He shall give us ebb tide itshall low 

be water 

nikted‘/ktixe.” “ Ya/xké agéowa’/kux okjunod’, Qj;ul  niktcoktixe 

it gets day.” + This she asks for it the crow. Low water it gets daylight 

kja La/witekut. O/Xuit tanEma atgEmé’ptega-itx.” Aqéa‘lot 

and it begins to be flood. Many things drift ashore.” It was given 

to her 

qge’/xteé qo qgoe’t niktco‘/ktixe. Niket tqjéx aga/yax. Ta’kE kj wae 

intending it will low it gets day. Not like she did it. Then afraid 


be water 
no/xox tiadleXam iqonéqone’. ‘1a/‘lot, ia/lot ka/nauwé gElxote/na.” 
they became his people the gull’s. ‘““Giveit give it all she will kill us.” 
to her to her 
Ateia/lot qé/xteé qoq mank q;ul niktco’/ktixe. Tcée’tkum tia‘EXam 
He gaveit intending it will alittle low it gets daylight. One half his people 
to her be water 
aqto/tena iqonéqone’, La/kté qéxtcé-y- i/kXakte atcia‘lot. Naket 
were killed the gull’s. Four intending ebb tide he gaveittoher. Not 
agid/egam. Atgid/lEXam tia/leEXam iqonéqone’: “Tet!0/kti mialo’ta. 
she took it. They said to him his people the gull’s: ‘*Good you aig it 
to her. 


GeElxoté/nai. Itea/xiqqatEna. Ma/néwa mxEl‘o/lakuLx, k;’imta/ 
She will kill us! She is one who cannot You first you will probably later 
rise early. awake, 


axklto/lakuLx. Ma/‘néwa macta’‘kutsko, kyimta’ a/xka acta‘kutsko.” 
she will probably You first you wil] go to search later she she will go to 
awake. on the beach, search on the beach.” 


Ta/kk né/k‘im iqonéqoné’: “Amega/lXam_ ta/kE ania‘lot.” Ta/kE 
Then . he said the gull: “Tell her then Igiveittoher.” Then 
aqgo/IXam 0k;’uno/: “A, takE atcimalot ya/xka qix: amiXuwa’kok.” 
she was told the crow: “Ah, then he gave it to you he that what you asked for.” 
Ta/kE it;’0/kti né/xax é/teamxte 6kj’und’, Ta’kE aLi’xko okj’uno’ 
Then good became her heart the crow’s. Then they weut the crow 
home 
kja tga’/leXam. 


and her people. 


Translation. 


There was the gull. Every day he went on the beach to search for 
food, and filled his bag with poggies and codfish and flounders, One 
day he went to search on the beach and saw tracks of a person which 
had come towards him and turned back again. He went all over the 
beach, but he did not find anything. He went home and thought: 
‘To-morrow I will start earlier.” The next morning he went again. 
He went a long distance. He found tracks of a person who had already 
returned home [before he came to the beach]. He grew angry. He 
went some distance, but did not find anything. Then he went home. 
He scolded. Early the next morning he arose and went. He went a 
short distance and found tracks of a person who had already returned, 
He was very angry. He went a short way, but did not find anything. 
He went home. Then he scolded. He had inherited the beach. On 
the following morning he went out the fourth time. He went a short 
distance and found tracks of a person. He became very angry and 
scolded. He returned home, sharpened his knife, and said: ‘To-morrow 
I will discover who is always earlier than I.” He did not eat, and when 


Paes RAVEN AND GULL MYTH—TRANSLATION. ve 


it was still quite dark he started. He had gone quite a distance when 
the morning star rose. Now he saw a person, and after some time 
they met. He recognized the raven. He carried a large mat on his 
back. ‘‘Whatis in your mat, Kanauwulewulewulewule?” “TI carry 
crabs’ claws to my children.” The gull went around him and said to 
the man: ‘*Whatisin your mat, Kanauwulewulewulewule?” ‘I carry 
crabs’ claws to my children.” Five times he went around him and 
then he stabbed [the raven with his knife]. He fell down and died. 
Then he took the raven’s mat and poured it out. Then poggies mixed 
with codfish and flounders fell out. He put them into his own mat and 
went home. [While he was walking he sang:] “Now I have killed the 
one who always went out first.” He got home. 

After a little while some people found the raven dead on the beach. 
[They said to a young man:] ‘Quick, go and tell his sister.” He ran 
to the house of the crow and entered. He found the crow at work 
making alarge mat. ‘ Your brother has been killed, crow,” he shouted. 
She remained silent. He repeated, ‘The gull has killed your brother.” 
She remained silent. Again he said: ‘‘ Your brother has been killed, 
crow.” Five times he repeated it. Then the crow arose, took some 
cedar bark, and tied it around her head as a head ring, and tied some 
around her waist. Then she took arattle and began to sing and to shake 
herrattle. She called together all her people, the land birds. She called 
the eagles, the owls, the cranes, the chicken-hawks, the large hawks, the 
duck-hawks. All her people were strong. The gull called together 
his people, the ducks, the tail ducks [?], sprit-tail ducks [?], pelicans, 
albatross, loons, shags, and coatches. All his people were flat footed. 
Now the crow made war against the gull. [They sang their war song:] 
“T shall frighten him away from the beach, Tasmo’t] Tasm0’t] hé hé hé 
hé {Tasm0’tl is the mythical name of the gull]. The duck-hawk jumped 
at the tail duck and tore off its head and they killed part of the gull’s 
people. They became afraid. The crow said: “ Letit be low water early 
inthe morning.” They said: ‘The crow asks for low water in the morn- 
ing. Then the flood tide shall begin. Many things will drift ashore.” 
The gull wanted to give her high water early in the morning, but the 
crow did not accept it. The gull’s people were afraid and said: ‘‘Give 
her what she wants, give her what she wants, or she will kill us.” 
Then he wanted to give her half-tide early in the morning. But the 
crow did not accept it. One-half of the gull’s people were killed by 
that time. Then he offered her ebb tide late in the morning, but she 
did not accept it. Then the gull’s people said: ‘Give her what she 
wants, else she will kill us. She can not rise early, you will always be 
the first to wake up and she will awake after you. You will first go 
to the beach and she will go after you.” Then the gull said: ‘Tell her 
that I will give her what she wants.” They went to the crow and said: 
‘‘Now he gives you what you have asked for.” Then the crow was 
glad, and she and her people went home. 


(SE LN) 


Oo Oo 


16 


6. IT; A/LAPAS IA’/KXANAM. 
COYOTE HIS MYTH. 


Ne'té itja/lapas, nité/mam Gotj’a’/t. A‘lta aqoa/-iL ugo/lal aké’x, 
He came coyote, he came to Got; 'a’t. Now large surf there was. 
No’ptegEx nau’i go tEma’/ktcXEma. A/‘Ita kjoa’/s né/xax it;’a/lapas 
Hewentup atonce to spruce trees. Now afraid he became coyote 
yuXuna/ya. I1o’Lqté ayod’La-it Gotj’a’/t. AtcLo/egam Lkamila/lEq, 
he might drift Long time he stayed at Gotj ’'a’t. He took it sand 
away. 
ateLXB’/kXué gd gqaX ugod’lal. “TEm‘a/éma Ox0/x6, naéket ugo’lal 
he threw it on that surf. ‘Prairie it shall be, not surf 
axa/tx. Uxona/XkEnitEma té/lx-Em ugod/egéwakEma g0 x-itik 
it will be. Generations people they will walk on this 
tEmsa/éma.” A/‘Ita teEmea/ema no/xdx Tia/kj;élaké. TEm‘a/éma 
prairie.” Now prairie it became Clatsop. A prairie 
no/xox qaX ugo’lal. 
became that surf. 

A'lta-y- @/qxéL né/xax Nia’/xaqcee. A’yd, tV0L atci/tax it; a/lapas 
Now a creek became Nia/xaqce. He went, ahouse he made it coyote 
go Nia/xaqcé. Nixo/tXuitamé gd cia/mict Nia/xaqeé. AtcLa/luke 
at Nia/xaqceé. He went and stood at its mouth Nia/xaqcé. He speared them 

moket 0/owun; atcLé’luke igué/nat, ateLé/luke é/qalEma. 


two silver-side he speared it a salmon, he speared it a fall salmon. 
salmon; 


Ateé’/xaluketgo qix: igua/nat; atcé/xaluketgd qix: é/qalEma. 
Ho threw it away that salmon; he threw it away that fall salmon. 

“TuXul ka ianu’/kstX @/qxéet. Néket tq;éx antH’tx tia’kunat, 
“Too and small creek. Not like I do them its salmon, 

néket tq;éx antE’tx té/qalema. TuXul ka ianu’‘kstX 6/qxéL. 
not like I do them fall salmon. Too and small creek. 

Qia’x teLa-uwé/Lx6Lxa, tex! Lgiawa’td-y- @/qalkma LgoLéeEXEmk 

v] c=) 

If it is bad omen, then they kill him a fall salmon a person 
LO/mEqtemx. A’ka igua/nat. Ma/nix éa/kil igua/nat qéwa’qxeémEnILx 
will die. Likewise asalmon. When afemale salmon it will be killed 
ka Lea/gil LO/mEqtEmx, ma/nix @/k:ala qé@wa/qxémEniLx ka LE‘k-ala 

and a woman will die; when a male it will be killed and aman 


LO‘mEqtEmx. EH’/ka-y- igua/nat, @/ka-y- @/qalmma.” A/Ita a/teuk™7 
will die. Thus salmon, thus fall salmon.” Now he carried it 
amkXa qaX d/owun. Né/Xk6. Nau’/i Lqju’/pLqjup atea/lax. 
only that silver-side He went home. At once cut he did it. 
salmon. 


Nau'i atea’/qxopk, nixuxa/lEm. Neé’/kteukté. Atcid’/cgam  1a/tcdL, 


Atonce he steamed it on he ate it. It got day. He took it his harpoon, 
stones, 
nixo‘tXuitamé gd cia/mict Nia/xaqce. Neéket i/kta atce’ElkEl 
he went and stood at its mouth Nia/xaqceé. Not anything he saw it 
ka aLtuwe’tegom. Ne’Xko. Né‘kteukte wiXt, wiXt  4’yo. 
and it became flood-tide. He went home. It got day again, again he went. 
Nix6/tXuitamé. Niket i‘kta wiXt atcé/ElkEl. NiXk’LXa, né/Xko. 
He went and stood Not anything again he saw it. He became angry, he went 
there. home. 
AtcLa/auwiteXa. Atcio’]lXam ia/élitk: ‘‘Mxanigu’Litck, qa’daqa 
He defecated. He said to them his excrements: “ Tell me why 
kja/ya na/xax qaX O/owun?” “Eniket temé’/XatakdX, tia/ewit 
nothing became those silver-side eT} not your mind, his legs 
salmon?’’ 
oxoiLk;’a/yukta. Ma/nix aqa/watox O/owun, qjatsH’/n aqa/watox, 
bandy. When it is killed a silver-side first it is killed, 
salmon, 
niiket Laju/pLq;up aqa‘’x. Ka/nauwé aqa/xcx ka aqo‘/lektcX. 
not cut it is done.. W hole it is split elpne and it is roasted. 
ac 


92 


CHINOOK COYOTE MYTH. 93 


Niket aqa/opgux. Qia’x gd k"ea‘la t!’'a/LEma nO/ix, tex] aqa/opgux.” 
Not it is steamed. If at - up river creeks they go, then they are steamed.” 

Née’Xko it;’a/lapas. Neé’ktcukte. WiXt a’yo. AteLa‘/luke Lon. 

He went coyote. It got day. Again he went. Hespeared them three. 
home 


Né’Xko; atci‘tax Lon t!lEmtk. Atco’lEkte ctéXt cga/amtkct a/eXt 


He went he made three spits. He roasted it one spit one 
home ; them 


qaX o/owun. Lon qaX O/owun, Lon tga/amtk. Ne/ktcukte, wiXt 
that  ssilver-side Three those silver-side three their spits. It got day, again 
salinon. salmon, 


a/yo, nixo/tXuitamé. Neéket i’kta atcé@/EIkEl ka actuwé’tcegom. 
he went, he went and stood there. Not [any] thing he saw it and it became flood-tide. 
Né’Xko, niXe/LXa. AtcLa/auwitcXa. Atcid’lXam, atciwa/amtcxoko 


He went he was angry. He defecated. He said to them, he asked them 
home, 


ia/élitk: ‘‘Qa/da na/xax qaX 0/owun?” AtcidlXam, né/k:im 1a/élitk: 
his excre- ‘“ How became these silver-side They said to him, they spoke his exere- 
ments: salmon ?”’ ments: 


“AyamolXam, xik tia’wit Oxo-iLkj’ayo’/kuima; ma/nix  tex'l 
“T said to you, this his legs bandy ; when first 
aqa/watox 0/owun, ctéXt cga/amtket ugo’/k’ultcin, cteXt cga/amtket 


they are killed silver-side one its spit its head, one its spit 
salmon, 


ugo/koteX, ctéXt cLa/amtket Lga‘apta, cteXt cga/amtket 0’goL*‘a. 
its back, one its spit its roe, one its spit its meat. 
Og0/qxoémopa nacxE’/IgiLxax.” Né@’k-im itj’a/lapas: hao’! 
Its gills are burnt.” He said coyote: yes! 
Né‘kteukté, wiXt a/yo. <Atcd’/téna wiXt Lon O/owun. AteLa‘luke. 


It got day, again he went. Hekilledthem again three silver-side Hespeared them. 
salmon. 


Né/Xko wiXt. NiXkd/’mam. A’teaxe ka/nauwé. A/lta_ t;’Emtk 
Hawenthome again. He got home. Hecutit - all. Now spits 
atei‘tax. O/xau-it t;’Emtk atci/tax. A/Ita atcd/lektc, ka/nauwe 
he madethem. Many spits he made them. Now’ he roasted it, all 
tEnd/Xuma tga/amtk. Kula’‘yi 0’/g0¢La cga‘/amtket, kula’/yi ugo’k’ultein, 

apart their spits. Far its flesh its spit, far its head, 
kula/yi ugod’goteX cga’‘amtket; kula’/yi Lga/apta  Leta/amtkct- 

far its back its spit; far its roe its spit. 
Né’xilkte it;a/lapas. Né/kteukté wiXt. A’yd. AteLa/luke itca/Lélam 
He roasted it coyote. It got day again. He went. He speared them ten 
ofowun, YuLjl né’xax itja/lapas. NiXkd’mam. Nix#lgixc. 
ena Glad he got coyote. He got home. He split it. 
salmon. 


Qa/mxka 4a/tcaxc, na/qxoya. QaX qamx axgé/wal  na/qxoya. 
Part only he cut it, he slept. That part fresh he slept. 

Ne‘kteukté, text wiXt atcd/lEktc. WiXt 4’yod, nixd/tXuitamé. 

It got day, then again he roasted it. Again he went, he went and stood 

there. 

Niket i/kta atcé*ElkE]l. ALtuwé/tegom. Né/Xko. WiXt né/ktcukté, 
Not anything he saw. It became flood-tide. He wenthome. Again it got day, 

wixt a/yo. WiXt nadket i’‘kta atcéElkEl. N@/XkoO niXE/LXa. 

again he went. Again not anything he saw it. He went home, he became 

angry. 

AtcLa‘auwitcXa itj’a‘lapas. Atciwa/amtcxoko ia/élitk: ‘Qa/daqa 
He defecated coyote. He asked them his excrements: “Why 

kja/ya na/xax qaX 0O/owun?” Atcid/méla ia/élitk. Aqid/méla 

ae became these silver-side They scolded him his excre- He was scolded 

salmon?” ments. 
itja/lapas. ‘“Ma/nix tex aqgoté/nax O/owun, qjatsE/n aqoté/nax, 
coyote. “When first they are killed — silver-side first they are killed, 
salmon, 
naket aqad/yamitx auwé’t; ka/nauwé aqod/ktciktamitx. Qé’xtcé 
not they are left raw; all they are made (roasted). Intending 


12 


bo 


m oo 


4 


26 


Aare 1 U 
94 IT]A LAPAS HIS MYTH. athlon oo 


a/xauwé aqgoté/nax, tate;ja ka/nauwé aqo/ktciktamitx. Naket na/o-ix.” 


many they are killed, look! all they are made (roasted). Not he sleeps.” 
WiXt neé‘kteukté. A’yo itjalapas, nix0d/tXuitame. AteLa/luke 
Again it got day. He went coyote, he went and stood there. He speared 
itea/Lélam. A/Ita atci’/tax tjEmtk, 0’xué atci’/tax t;Emtk. A/Ita 
ten. Now he made them spits, many he made them spits. Now 
nixElq7yata-it, ka/nauwé ated/ktcktamit qaX ia/kjétenax. A/Ita 
he was awake, all he made them (roasted) those what he had caught. Now 
ka/nauwé atci/toL; tgé/Lau, tga’/k-iLau 0/owun qjatsk’n n0d/yamx go 
all he finished taboos, their taboos the silver- first they arrive at 
them side salmon 
Nia/xaqeé. Ia/xkaté ayo’/La-it. Né/k-im it;a/lapas: “E’ka-y- 0x0’/x0 
Nia/xaqceé. Then he stayed. He said coyote: “Thus they will do 
Naté/tanué, manix Lmé/mElost kLkLocga/liL Lga’x6-y- 6’owun, nau’i 
the Indians, when corpses whotakesthem (pre- heeatsthem silver-side at once 
pares for burial) salmon 
kyaya’-y- axa’/x0. Ma/nix gaLa’kjaukjau Lga’X0-y- 0/owun, nau’‘l 
nothing they will When a murderer he eats them  silver-side at once 
become. salmon, 
kjaya’-y- axa/xd. E’ka Lqéla’wulX, é’/ka Lqua‘xit. A/‘la nai’ka, 
nothing they willget. Thus agirlmenstruating thus amenstruating Even I, 
the first time, woman. 


4'la tell ank’xax.” 
even tired I became.” 


Alta né’té, kaxii’ nité‘mam ayugod/tjom ta/nEmcke tk7ola/lipL: 


Now he came, where he arrived he met them women digging much 
coming with sticks. 
Atctuwa/amtexoko: “E/kta amegia/wul?” “A ta/lalX ntckta/wul.” 
He asked them: “What are you doing?” “Ah  gamass we make.” 
“Qantsi’x: Lx ‘Tia/kjélaké poe ta/lalX aqta’wul, amcgiupa’/yaLx 
‘‘ How may be Clatsop if gamass is made, you dig 
iqjaLxoéma kj;a écana’taut, ia/mkXa qiupia’/Lxa gd xik ile’. 
beets (?) and thistles (?), only they willbe dug in this land. 
Néket ta/lalX qtE’tpiaLxax.” <A/‘Ita atgiupa/yaLx iqj;aLxo@’ma kja 
Not gamass it is dug.” Now they dig beets (?) and 
écana’taus. Ayodée/taqh gd’tac ta‘nEmcke. AtcuXugo/mé qo’ta ta/lalX. 
thistles (?). He left them those women. He made poor that gamass, 
L&é/Lpaté no’xox qo’ta ta’lalX. 
Scylla became that gamass. 
Nité’‘mam Tia‘kjélaké. A/‘Ita tea/épaé. Ljap atea/yax Lia/wuX 
He came to Clatsop. Now it was spring. Find he did him his younger 
brother 
ia/xkaté itea/yau. Atcid’lXam Lia/wuX: “Tegto’/kti tenaua‘itk 
there the snake. He said to him to his younger ‘Good net 
brother: 
txqta/x0.” Né’k-im itca/yau: ‘“‘Mai‘ka imé/Xaqamit.” A/‘Ita acgo/mEl 
we two make He said the snake: “ Your your mind,” Now they two 
ia bought it 
omo’tan. A/‘Ita aqegé/mgikté dcué/eé kja-y- dqodsa/na. Ace’ktgEm. 
material for Now they were paid the frog and the newt. They span. 
twine. 
A‘lta nixEla/ya-itx, atciagEla/ya-itx 6m6d’tan. A/‘Ita itea’yau cka 
Now he always cleaned, he cleaned it much the material Now the snake and 
for twine. 
nik Txélalema-itx. A/lta acktgEma/ya-itx Ocué/éée k;a-y- Oqosa’na. 
he crawled about much. Now they two span much frog and newt. 
A‘lta atcid1Xam Lia/wuX: “ E’/mx-Ela-y- @/mx‘Ela! Ka’/nauwe 
Now he said tohim —_ tohis younger ‘Clean it, clean it! All 
brother: 
LfaLa/ma cka mLxé@/l,” aqid’lXam itea/yau. Ateid/1Xam it;a/lapas: 
days and youalways he was told the snake. He said to him coyote: 


crawl about,”’ 
“Mai/ka ta/nata mta/xo, nai/ka ta/nata,” né/k-im it; a/lapas. 
Ou one side you will make I the other he said coyote. 
it. side.” 


CHI ta 7 1 
BOAS COYOTE MYTH. 95 


AqLo’/kXuL; Lané/ctuke, tia/Lanéctuke itja/lapas: ‘“Aj‘aq, ai’aq, 


It was,finished the twine, his twine coyote’s: “ Quick, quick, 
ai/aq!” aqio/l1Xam itca/yau. Amcinguwa’/kot, mxE/]lgék"tck.” Né/k-im 
quick!” he was told the snake. You let me wait, make net.” He said 
itca‘yau: ‘“Mai/ka amceinguwa/kot,” aqidlXam itja/lapas. A/‘Ita 

the snake: ce Vous you let me wait,” he was told coyote. Now 
nixE ]gék"tck it; a/lapas. AtecLO/kXuL; ka/nauwé atci’tok"tek. TE’pa-it 

he made net coyote. He finished it all he made net. hope 
ekta‘xo-il qd’/cta ca’/kil. Ateci‘Lax LE’qXun itja/lapas. Ia/xkate 
they twomade those twowomen. He made it net-buoy coyote. There 
it 
nik 7xé‘lalEma-itx itea/yau. Neé’k:im itja/lapas: “LE’/kXun LE/Xa!” 
he crawled about much the snake. He said coyote: ‘* Net-buoy make!” 
aqio’lXam itca’yau. “Amcinguwa‘kot.” Né/k-im itca/yau: *Ai‘aq, 
he was told the snake. ‘You let me wait.” He said Lhe snake: “Quick, 
ai/aq, amxEleXula’ma! Amcinguwa/kot.” AtcLia/LgoL; LE’qXun 
quick, make haste! You let me wait.” He finished it the net-buoy 
itja’‘lapas. Lqa/nake  atci/LgEloye. Nixn’ltom  itca/yau. Go 
coyote. Stones he went to take them. He necopayied the snake. At 
im 


Soguame’ts;iak Lqa/nake aLgk/cgEloya. NeékLxé@/] qix: itea/yau go 


Tongue Point stones they two went to He crawled that snake at 
take them. about much 
qo’‘La Lqa’nake. TeLo/guiLxat§ itja/lapas Lqa/nake. <Acé’Xko. 
those stones. He carried them down coyote the stones. They went 
often home. 
AcXk0o/mam. A‘yo tb’/kcéu it; aapas, ayo/kuiya’ te’keéu. NixE’lt0m 
They arrived at Hewent spruce roots coyote, he went to get spruce roots. He accompa- 
home. them nied him 
itcea’yau. la’/xkaté LE/KLEk a’tciax ilé/é itjalapas. 1a/xkateé itca/yau 
the snake. There dig he didit theground coyote. There the snake 
niktxé’l. <Acé’Xk0O. TecjE’xtcjEx atci‘tax tke’kcéu _ it;a/lapas. 
crawled about They went home. Split he did them the spruce roots coyote. 
much. 


“Wuu'ska mE/kxodtcké,” aqid/lXam itea/yau, “amecinguwa’kot.” Né’k-im 


““Go on, work,” he was told the snake, ‘‘vou let me wait.” He said 
itea’/yau: “Ai’aq, ai’aq, meE/kxotcké!” aqid’/lXam __it;a’lapas, 
the snake: ‘Quick, quick, work!” he was told coyote, 

“ amcinguwa’kot.” A‘Ita atcLauwé/xeétEq tia/nauwa-itk it; a’lapas. 
‘vou let me wait.” Now he tied it to the buoys his net coyote. 
Wuk; atca’/yax ico’blte. A‘lta ia/xkati atcLauwé’xétkq tia/nauwa-itk. 

Straight he made it a mat. Now there he tied it to the buoys his net. 
Ja/xkaté nik7x@/lalkma-itx itea/yau. AteLo/kXuL;  tid/nauwa-itk 
There he crawled around much the snake. He finished it his net 
it;’a‘lapas. QuL atcta/wix k"La’xané. Kawi’X ayod’pa it; a/lapas. 
_ coyote. Hangup he did it outside. Early he went out coyote. 
A‘ngaté qu ta‘wéwut itca/yau tia/nauwa-itk. “EK Lga/wuX,” 
Already hang up it did the snake his net. “Eh younger bro- 
ther,”’ 
atci0 1Xam ‘“tei‘nxgako.” NixEma’tcta-itk itja/lapas. Atca/yuL 
he said to him ‘he got the better He was ashamed coyote. He won over 
of me.”’ him 
itea’yau. Aqa/yuL itja’lapas. Ne’k:im itja/lapas: “ Ma/‘nix naua/itk 
the snake. He lost coyote. He said coyote: ‘“ When net 
Lkta’x0 LgoLéJEXEmK, a/lta ti2l] Lxa/xo-ilemx, tex aLkLo/konax. 
makes a person, now tired heshallalways get, then he shall finish it. 
Naket tgtjo’/kti qigd nikct tell amm/xax.” Né@k-im_ itea/yau: 
Not good when not tired you get.” He said the snake: 
“Ayamo/lXam ameinguwa’kot;” aqid’IXam it; a/lapas. 
“T told you, you let me wait; ”’ he was told coyote, 
Ne‘kteukté. ALxénauwa/itgémam. Aci/xanXa. Nau i moket 
It got day. They went to catch salmon in They laid the At once two 


net. net. 


~l 


(02) 


9 


10 


11 


12 


bo 


~] 


12 


. rat / 
96 IT|A‘LAPAS HIS MYTH. Sonne 


atce/La-it. Nau’/i atceugd/pEna tcta/nauwa-itk it; a/lapas. A‘Ita gé/xtce 
they caught. At once he jumped their net coyote. Now intending 
across it 


aci/xénaua-itgé; aLtuwii/tegom. Ta’mka moket ka icta’k;j éténax. A‘Ita 
they caught salmon in it got flood tide. Only two only their catch. Now 
their net; 


aLtuwii/tegom. Alta aci/Xkd. O16 gia/xt it;a/lapas. Neé’k:im, nau‘i 

it got flood-tide. Now they went Hun- he got coyote, He spoke, at once 
home. gry 

nixE’/Igixe aci/xélEkte. ALxgé/ktcik aLxLxa/lEm. Ocoé/eée kja-y- 
he split it they roasted it. It was roasted he ate. The frog and 

dqjOsa/na cta/lé. Ne’ktcukté, wiXt aLxenauwa/itgema. Itea/paet 
the newt their It got day, again they went to catch salmon Looking after 

cousins. in the net. the rope 


0qj Osa/na; ta/yacaxala itea/yau, aya/ckuiLx it; a/lapas. 
the newt; the one at the upper the snake, the one at the lower coyote. 
end of the net end of the net 


ALF/xénauw-aitgé gé/xtcé, acuwa’/tka ka aLtuwi/tegom. ALi’Xko. 
They caught salmon in intending, they did not get and it became flood-tide. They went 
the net anything home. 


B/x:LXa-tt it;a/lapas. AteLa/auwiteXa. Atciuwaé/amtcxoko ia/élitk. 
He was angry coyote. He defecated. He asked them his excre- 
ments. 


Ne‘k-im ia/elitk it;alapas: ‘“imé/L;EménXut.” “xik tia/ewit 
They said his excrements coyote : ‘* you lied.” Begins his legs 

0xo-iLk;a/yokoma. Manix atgia/watox igua/nat, niket aLkeugupE- 

bandy. When they catch it salmon, not they jump 

na/kux La/nauwa-itk. Niket meugd’/tkako tEmé’/nauwa-itk. Manix 
across it, their net. Not you step across your net. When 

q;’atsB/n aqtdté/nax tgua/nat, gd/yé 0°0’Lax texl aqta‘xs.” Ne’k-im 
first they are killed salmon, thus the sun then they are cut.” He said 

itja/lapas: ‘“O, ta‘kE kopH/t amxanlgu’Litck.” Ne’kteukte wiXt 
coyote: “Oh, then enough you told me.” It got day again 

aLxénauwa’-itgémam. Ma/nix aLgia/watox igua‘nat, naket ateugopE- 
they went to catch salmon in When they killed him a salmon, not he jumped. 

the net. 


na/kux tia/nauwa-itk. Mo/keti aLE’xana kopi’ti aLé/L;ja-it tgua/nat. 
across it his nec. Twice they laid thatmany went into the salmon. 
the net net 


Ated/ko qaX 6q;6sa/na: “La/xtéwa, takE paL né/xax Lteuq xiau 
He ordered that newt. ‘*Bail out, then full it got water that 
her 

ikani/m. AkLA/xtéwa-y- dqjdsa’/na. Qé’xtcé aLExé/nauwa-itge 

canoe. She bailed it out the newt. Intending they om ht salmon in 
5 e net, 
aLuwée'tegom. ALE/Xk6. ALg6d/xotEq iLa/kjéténax go we/wuLe. 
it became flood-tide. They wenthome. They putitdown whatthey had caught in the interior of 


the house. 
GO nd/yam 6%/Lax ka nixb/Igixe it;a/lapas. A2ka qaX 6/OwEn 
There arrived the sun and he split it coyote. Thus that silver-side 
salmon 
a/teaxe, ii/ka atci/taxc q6’/ta tkua/nat. Kula/yi-y-  uya‘k; Eltcin 
he cut it, thus hecutthem those salmon. ar its head 
ega/amtket, kula/yi-y- uya/koteX, kula/yi-y- a’/yaL‘a_ cia‘amtket, 
its spit, far its back, far its meat its spit, 
kula/yi Lia/apta Leta/amtket. Awuxgé/ktcikt. Né’ktcukté, wiXt. 
far its roe its spit. They were done. It got day, again 
aLxénauwa/-itgémam. Néket i/kta aLgia/wat, aLi/cx‘EmgEna.. 
they went to catch salmon in net. Not anything _ they killed it, they got nothing. 
NiXH/LXa_it;a/lapas. AtcLa/auwiteXa. Atcid/lXam _ 14/élitk: 
He became angry coyote. He defecated. He said to them his excre- 
ments: 
“Mxanklegu’Litek, qa/daqa k;é n0/xOx tik tgua‘nat?” Atcid’/meéela 
‘« Tell me, why nothing they be- these salmon?” The scolded 
came um 


CHINOOK] ~ < 
ane COYOTE MYTH. 97 


ia/élitk: ‘““AmXBE/LOXu na a/ka qaX O/owun? Oxoii/éma tga/k-iLau 


his excre- “You think {int. thusas those _ silver-side Others its taboos 
ments: part.] salmon? 

o/Owun; ixEldi/ma igua/nat tia’/kiLau. Manix mexenauwa’-itgémama, 

the silver- other the salmon its taboo. When you go out to catch salmon in net, 


side salmon; 
ma‘nix é@auwiLa’-ita tEmeca/nauwa-itk, Loni mexéna/ya;  kopii’t 
when he goes into the net your net, three times you lay net; enough 
mcéeLa’-ita igua/nat. Kopa’t; néket qa‘six: mckLextéwa/ya. Manix 
youwilltakein salmon. Enough; never bail out your canoe. When 
the net 


mcXgo/mama ka mia/xca igua/nat, yukpa’ te;Ex mia/xd, kula‘yi 

you get home and you cutit salmon, here [at sides] cut do it, far 
ia’wan cia/amtket, kula/yi ia’koteX cia/amtket; a/lta tm/mtEcX 
its belly, its spit, far its back its spit; now sticks 
moxo-ina/ya lakt. A/‘Ita’ ctcé/lEqL wmea/xo. A/Ita__ia/xkati 
place them in the four. Now two parallel sticks do. Now there 
ground vertically over the others 


Lga/koteX mLOkoXut;d/ya ka-y- uya’/k;Eltcin kjau gd-y- uya/koteX 
its back lay [m.obj.] on top of it and its head fast to its back 
el’Xa-0t ka Lia’lict kyjau_ ci’Xa-0t.” AtcioXam ia/élitk: “Ta/kE 
it is and its tail fast itis.” He said to them his excre- “ Then 

ments: 


kopE’t amxanElgu’Litck.” Né’‘kteukté aLxénauwa‘itgémam, 
enough you told me.” It got day they went to catch salmon in 
the net, 


aLkto’tena Lon tgua‘nat. Naket aLkLa/xtéwa. Atcd’/lXam 6qjosa/na: 

they killedthem three salmon. Not they bailed itout. He said to her the newt: 

“Tga‘lemam é@/mtEcX ma/Lxolé. Oqogu’nkyat Ixgia/xo.” Nd’ya-y- 
‘Go and take it a stick inland. A club we shall make it.” She went 

oqjOsa‘na, agidgd‘lIEmam é@/mtEcX wiXt aLE’/xana. WiXt éXt 
the newt, she took it a stick again they laidthenet. Again one 

niLe’La-it, atcLixE’gunk. Qé’xtcé aLixénauwa’-itgé, aLixénauwa’-itgé; 

was in there, he clubbed it. Intending they caugit salmon in they caught salmon in 

the net, the net; 


aLtuwe'tegom, la/ktka = i1La/k; éténax. ALg0/xutEq La‘kunat. 
it became flood-tide, four only whatthey had caught. They put them down their salmon. 
Go nod/yam 080’/Lax ka nixkE/lgixe itja/lapas. <A‘Ita ated/xo-ina 
There he arrived the sun and he split them coyote. Now he placed in 

; ground 


lakt tH’/mtEcX. A‘Ita a/ka atci/taxe qo6/ta tgua/nat, ii‘ka qigd 

four sticks. Now thus he cut them those salmon, as where 

atcioIXam ia/élitk. ALxgé’ktcikt. Na/wi LE/KLEk atci’/Lax q6d/La 

they told him his excre- They got done. Immedi- break he did it that 
ments. ately 


LE/kXutcX qix: itja/lapas. Né/kteukté aLxénauwa/itgémam. Niiket 
backbone that coyote. It got day they went by catch salmon in Not 
the net. 


kta aLgia‘wat ka aLtuwé‘tegom. ALE’Xko. - NiXE’LXa it;a/lapas; 
any- they killed it and it became flood-tide. They went home. He was angry coyote ; 
thing : 
atcLa/auwite Xa. * Qa/daqa kiaya no/xox tik  tgua’nat?” 
he defecated. ‘Why nothing they became these salmon?’ 
atciuwa‘amtexoko ia/élitk.’ ‘““Ayamo/IXam,” aqid/IXam_ it; @lapas; 
he asked them his excrements. *T told you,” he was told coyote ; 
atcid’IXam ia/élitk, ‘ MxkE’/LOXuna-ya- @/ka-y- 0/Owun tga‘k-ilau? 
they said to him his excre- ‘You think [int. part. ] thus as silver-side their taboo? 
ments, salmon 


Oxoé@'ma tga/kiLau tgua/nat. Ma‘nix megéwato-y- igua‘/nat, naiket 
Other their taboo the salmon. When you will kill it a salmon, not 
qa‘nsixy @/mtEcX amegixgu’ntEko. Qia/x qiad’pko, tex-i-y-é/msEcX 
{any] how [with a] stick you strike it. If itis steamed, then [with a] stick 
qiXgu/nEk0. Qia/x qj6a/p LE’taLxé, tex aqia/Opkux igua/nat. 

itis struck. If nearly autumn, then itis struck the salmon. 


BULL. T=20——7 


16 


bo 


oe TATA NN OD 


12 


A! a vO 
98 ITjA LAPAS HIS MYTH. nuoeee 


Naket LE/kKLEK" qLEtxt Lia/koteX igua‘nat q;atsE’n ayo/yamx. 
Not break it 1s done its back the salmon first it arrives. 
Manix aqia/watox igua/nat ka Lkamila/lEq aqL0/cgamx. Aq ik-a/tqoax 

When it is killed the salmon and sand it is taken. It is strewn 
go ia/xot ka aqixtcé’na-ox god ia‘xot. Neéket aqLe’xkungux.” Neé‘k:im 
on hiseye and itis pressed with on his eye. Not it is clubbed.” He said 

the fist 


it} alapas: “Ta‘kE kaph’t.amxanEleu’Litck.” ALxénauwa/itgémam, 
coyote: ** Then enough you told me.” They went to catch salmon in net, 
ne/ktcukté. ALé@’La-it tgua/nat. Nau’i Lon aLé’/La-it. Ka’nauwe 
it got day. They wereinthe salmon. Immedi- three were in the All 
net ately net. 


Lkamila/lEq atcLEku X6te’qo-imx, ateuX6teé/nan’Emx. O/xoé 
sand he strewed on each, he pressed with his fist on each. Many 
aLkto‘téna tgua/nat. ALE’/Xko ka aLeE’xélukte. ALxgé’ktcikt. A‘Ita 
he killed them salmon. They wenthome and theyroastedthem. They got done. Now 
aLkto‘mak gd kca/la -y-élXam. A/‘lta okjuélak aLE’/kxax. 
he distributed it to upstream town. Now dried salmon they made. 
Na/‘ktcukté, aLxénauwa‘itgemam. Qé’xtcé aLixénaua’-itgé, acuwa’tka; 
It got day, they went to catch salmon in Intending they caught salmon they got noth- 
the net. in net, ing; 


aLtuwé'tegom, aLE’Xko. NiXk/LXa_ itja/lapas. AtcLa/‘auwiteXa. 
it became flood-tide, ey went He became angry coyote. He defecated. 
ome. 


“Qa‘daqa kya/ya nod’/x6x tik tgua/nat.” “Ayamo/lXam xig 
“Why nothing they became these salmon.”’ “I told you this 
id‘L; ElEx, tia/*wit oxoe/Lkjayokoma. O/’xoe tga‘k‘iLau qé/wa 
lean one, his legs bandy. Many their taboos those 
tgua‘nat. Ma/‘nix aqtdté/nax 0’xoé tgua/nat, neéket qa’‘nsix’ 
salmon. If they are killed many salmon, not [any] how 
aqid’ktepax, ia/xkaté aqid’lektecX, ia’xkaté aqia‘x. Ma/nix 
they are carried then they are roasted, then they are eaten, When 
outside, 


niexga/étixitx, ia’xkaté iqid/tgEx. Manéx okjué’lak aqa’x, qia’x 
he leaves some of it, there it 13 put. When dry salmon —_ are made, if 
aLuwe'tegomx ago’n 6%0/Lax, tex'l-y- ok;ué/lak aqa’x.” Atcio’l1Xam: 
it gets flood-tide next day then dry salmon itismade.” He said to them: 
‘‘Kapk’t amxanElgu’Litck.” Né‘ktcukté wiXt. ALxénauwa’-itgémam, 
* Enough you told me.’ It got day again. They went o catch salmon in 
the net, 


aLkto'téna tgua/nat, 0’xoé aLkto’téna tgua’nat. ALkto’leEkte 
they killed them the salmon, many they killed them salmon. They roasted them 
ka/nauwé, aLxgé/ktcikt. A‘Ita aLguguixé’/mam té/lx‘Em, aq0/g0-y- 
all, they got done. Now they invited them: the people, she was sent 
0qj’osa/‘na. Noxo-iLxk/lEmam g0 ta’yaqL itja/lapas. Alo/XoLj 
the newt. They went to eat at his house coyote’s They finished 
noxo-iLxa/lEm téx‘Em. I[a’xkate atoé/taky qtoxodg0’itixit. A/‘Ita-y- 

they ate the people. Then they left it what they had left Now 

over. 

@/kXak"té né/xax. Kawi/2X ka 4a’/LOLX, aLE/xana. K6, neket 


low water in it was. Early and they wentto they laidthe Nothing, not 
the morning the beach, net. 
é/kta, aLE/xénaua-itgé cka abtuwii/‘tegom. Naket @/kta aLgia/wat; 
anything they caught salmon and it became flood-tide. Not anything they killed it; 
in the net 
aLi/ecXumgEna. Ma/keti qé/xtcé aLxénauwa‘/itgemam  kawi'X, 
they did not get anything. Twice intending they went M3 catch salmon in early, 
the net 
acuwa/tka, aLCXE/mugEnax. AtcLa/auwiteXa it; a/lapas. Atcid’1Xam 
they did not get they did not get any- He defecated coyote. He said to 
anything, thing. them 
ia/élitk: “Qa/daqa k;a’‘ya no/xox tgua/nat?” Aqid/lXam it; a‘lapas: 
his excre- “Why nothing they be- the salmon?" He was told coyote: 


ments: came 


Cc r 
moka COYOTE MYTH. 5): 


“AyamolXam xik i0/L;ElEx, 0’xoeé tga‘kiLau qé/wa tgua/nat. 


“TI told you this lean one, many their taboo those salmon. 
Ma/nix @/kXak"té mxénauwa’‘itgémam, qia/x Lax axa’‘x0 0°0/Lax, 
If low water in the you go to catch salmon in the if out comes the sun, 

morning net, 


tex'I amxE/nXax. Naket mxEnXa/ya manix ka nikct Lax 600/Lax.. 


then lay net. Not lay net when then not out the sun. 
Niket qiutctpa’ya igua/nat. Qia’x Okju’no giuktepa’ya tex} 
Not they are carried out salmon. If a crow she will carry itout then 
aqio/ktepax, tex'i aqt0’‘magux tguwe’. Néket qa‘nsiX tcagod’ktia 
it is carried out, then itis distributed raw, Not {any] how it Lc get day- 
ight 
6:0'lEptckiX, niket qa‘/nsiX qea’xo cia‘tckunict, qia‘x ctad/ya text 
fire, not {any] how itis eaten its breast, if they sleep then 
aqea’x. Ma/nix aqid/lEktcx igua/nat go-y- 6%0/lEptckiX, ayd’ktcEktx, 
itiseaten. When it is roasted salmon at the fire, it gets done, 
na/u/i wax aqLa’/kax Ltcuq qaX 0°0/‘lEptckiX.” Atcid/lXam ia/élitk: 
immedi- pour itis done water that fire.”’ He said tothem his excre- 
ately into = % ments: 


“KapE’t ta/kE amxanElgu’Litck. EH’/ka-y- 6x0/x0 Naté’tanué, 
“Enough then you told me. Thus they will do the Indians, 
uxona/XEnitEma Nate’tanue. H’ka tga/k‘iLau. A’la nai‘ka tell 

the generations of Indians. Thus their taboo. Even I tired 
anE’xax,” né/k'im itja/lapas go Tia/k;élaké tga‘kiLau. Atckco/lXam 
I became,” he said coyote at Clatsop their taboos. He said to them 
eta‘le: “Ixkya/yuwa iau’a é/natai.” Naxk/ItXuitegd 6q;6sa/na. 
his cousins: ‘ We will move there tothe other side.’’ She made herself ready the newt. 
A‘teuket itea’/yau ocué’ee. A/lta a/xLXadt, ca/uca-u agé’x. Ayaga/om 
He looked the snake [at]thefrog. Now she([the frog] growling with shedid. He reached 
at her was angry, closed mouth her 


itca‘yau, a/Ita atca’wat. Aqa/wat dcue/éé; itca/yau atca/wat. 
the snake, now he killed her. She was killed the frog; thesnake killed her. 
Auté/‘mam ya‘koa é@/natai. ALE’xénaua-itgé. ALkto’tena tgua/nat. 


They arrived here ontheother Theycaughtsalmonin They killed them salmon. 
side. the net. 
E’/ka atci‘tax Tia/k;élak, Lkamila/leq atcLé/kXatq go ia/xot qix: 
Thus as they made Clatsop, sand he strewed on them in hiseye that 
them 


igua/nat. Gdoye’ atca/yax, ateix'tcé/na. Qé’xtcé aLE’xénaua-itgé 
salmon. Thus he did him, he aerate with Intending they caught salmor 
is fist. in net 


wiXt, nikct aLgia’wat. ALE’/Xko. Né’kteukté. ALxénaua/-itgémam, 
again, not they killed him. They went It got day. They went to catch sal. 
home. mon in the net, 


niket i/kta aLgia’wat. Neé’ktcukté wiXt, aLixé/naua-itk. Nékct 
not anything they killed it. It got day again, they cane et salmon in Not 
the net. 


kta aLgia’wat. Kala‘lkuilé né/xax. AtcLa/auwitcX: ‘ Qa/daqa 

anything they killed it. Scold he did. He defecated : ‘Why 

kyj@ no’xéx tik tgua/‘nat?” “HK, mé/Ljala, it;a‘lapas. Ma/nix 

nothing they be- these salmon ?"’ * Oh, you fool, coyote. When 
came 


méuwa’to igua/nat cka wmikytu/qoema! MXa/‘/LOXEna-y- é@’/ka 
yeu will kill a salmon and you kick him! You think [int. part. ] thus as 
Tia’k; élaké?” Né@’k-im it; a/lapas: “Oo!” Né/ktcukté, wiXt aLxénauwa’- 

Clatsop?”’ He said coyote: “Oh!” It got day, again they wenttocatch 
itgemam. ALE/xana. Mokct axLkto’/tena tgua/rat. WiXt aLE‘xana, 


salmoninthe They laid the Two they killed them salmon. Again __ they laid net, 
net. net. 


Lon aLkto’téna tgua/nat. Atcé/xaluketgd €Xt ma‘Lxolé, Neélga’/Xit 
three they killed them salmon. He threw it ashore one upland. He fell down 
headlong 


a/yacqt gO Lqaméla’‘lEq qix: igua/nat. Qeé’xtcé wiXt aLE’/xana. 
his mouth in the sand that salmon. Intending again  helaid the net. 


eo A Ne 


10 


af 


14 


Sis 
100 ITjA'LAPAS HIS MYTH. Trenance 


Kjé néket i/kta aLgia’wat. ALixé/naua-itgé qé’xtcé cka 

Nothing not anything he killed it. He caught salmon innet intending and 

aLtuwa’‘tegom. Niket i/kta aLgia/wat. Qoa/nEmka iLa‘k; éténax. 

it became flood-tide. Not anything they killed it. Five only what they caught- 

Ali’/Xko. Tsd/yusté nixE‘lgixe it;a/lapas. ALE’xéluktc, aLxgé/ktcEkt. 

mate went Intheeyven- he split them coyote. They roasted them, they were done, 
1ome. ing 


Né‘kteukté aLxénauwa’‘itgémam, niket i‘/kta aLgia/wat. Kala/Ikuilé 
It got day they went ie catch salmon in not anything they killed it. Scold 
the net, : 
né‘xax itja/lapas. AtcLa/auwiteXa: “Qa/‘daqa kj;a/ya no/x6x tik 
he did coyote, He defecated : “Why nothing they be- these 
came 


tgua/nat?” “E, wme/Liala, ita/lapas! Mxm/LOXEna-y- é/ka 
salmon?” “Oh, you fool, coyote! You think [int. part. ] thus as. 
Tia’kjélake? Naket qixitketgua/lin igua/nat, @’wa_ ke’/kXulé 
Clatsop? Not he is thrown ashore salmon, thus down 
a/yaqtq, tga’/kiLau. Manix méwa’o igua/nat, a/lta amLgElo’/ya 
his head, it is their taboo. W hen you killhim  asalmon, now go and take them 
La‘lelé, ma’/nix 0’xoé tgua/nat amtote’na, ka‘nauwé amLauwe’qcamita. 


salmon- when many salmon you have killed all you put into their mouths. 
berries, them, 


Laléé.” “O, take kopE’/t amxanElgu’Litck,” atcid/lIXam_ ia/élitk. 
salmon-ber- ‘‘Oh, then enough you told me,”’ he said tothem ° bis excre- 
ries.” ments. 


Né‘kteukté. WiXt aLxénauwa/itgémam. O/xoé aLkto’/téna tgua/nat. 
It got day. Again they went a catch salmon in Many they killed them salmon. 
the net. 


Atco’/k6 oqjdsa/na, Laléleé agk/LgEloya. AkLE/Lk"yam La/‘lelé 
He sent her the newt, salmon- she shall go to take She brought them salmon- 
berries them. berries 


oqjOsa‘na. A/Ita aqLauwé/qcEmt q0/La La/lele qo‘ta tgua/nat. 
the newt. Now they were put intotheir those salmon- those salmon. 
mouths berries 


Né‘kteukté, wiXt aLxénaua/itgeémam. 
It got day, again they went to catch salmon 
in the net. 
ALOg0/Om Oxoénauwa’-itgé go ma’/Lné. Mank ma/éma aLE’xana, 
They met men fishing salmon at on water. A little seaward they laid net, 
with net 


tei’/xéL aLE’/xana, ka aLo/tctuwilX, mank k*eala’. ALE/XkO qix- 
several theylaidthenet, and they ascendedthe alittle uptheriver. They passed that. 
times river, - it 


ikani’m, ita’xénim qOo’tac Oxoénaua‘itgé. ALE/xana. ALExé/naua-itge 
canoe, their canoe these men fishing salmon They laid their They caught salmon in 
with net. net. the net 


qé/xtcé, néket i’kta aLgia’/wat. ALE/cXumgEna. ALE’Xk0;5 
intending, not anything they killed it. ‘Chey did not catch anything. they went 
ome: 
kala‘Ikuilé né/xax it;a/lapas. AtcLa/auwiteXa: “Qa/‘daqa kja/ya 
scold he did coyote. He defecated: ‘Why nothing 
no‘xox tik tgua/nat?” “Y&2, xik 10’/L;’EIEx, ma‘nix méwa‘to 
became these salmon? ' eV a this lean one, when you kill him 
igua/nat, ia/xkaté mxEnxa/ya. WiXt é€Xt méwa’d0, wiXt ia’/xkate 
a salmon, there you lay net. Again one youkillhim, again there 
mxEnxa/ya. Ni&ket mxg6’ya ikani’m, ma’/nix Oxoénaua’-itgé té/lx-Em. 
lay net. Not pass a canoe, when they put salmon in people. 
a net 


Tga/kinau.” ‘“Had’,” né/‘kim  itja/lapas. Ne’/kteukté, wiXt 

It is their taboo.” SME AG he said coyote. It got day, ‘again 

aLxénaua/-itgemam. Né‘kim itja/lapas: “A‘la nai‘ka a/la tél 

they went to catch salmon in He said coyote: ‘Even if even _ tired 
net. 


nE/xax; @/ka-y- 6x0/x6 Naté/tanue. Néket Lgia/xo igua/nat 
I become; thus they will do the Indians. Not it will eat him salmon 


CHINOOK COYOTE MYTH—TRANSLATION. 101 


BOAS 


gaLa’kjaukjau, @/ka Lmé/meloct kik0cga/liL, eka Laéla/wulX, 


a murderer, thus corpses who takes [them] thus girl first men- 
always, struating, 
@‘ka LqLa’Xit, é’ka LE’/pL’au. Ka/nav4-y- é@’/ka tga’kiLau té/lx‘Em 
thus menstruated thus widow and All thus their taboo people 
woman, widower. 
nuxuna’/xEnitEma té/lx°Em. 
generations of people. 
Translation 


Coyote was coming. He came to Got’a’t. There he met a heavy 
surf. He was afraid that he might be drifted away and went up to 
the spruce trees. He stayed there a long time. Then he took some 
sand and threw it upon that surf: ‘This shall be a prairie and no surf. 
The future generations shall walk on this prairie.” Thus Clatsop 
became a prairie. The surf became a prairie. 

At Nia/xaqeé a creek originated. He went and built a house at 
Nia/xaqcé. He went out and stayed at the mouth of Nia’xaqcé. Then 
he speared two silver-side salmon, a steel-head salmon, and a fall 
salmon. Then he threw the salmon and the fall salmon away, saying: 
“This creek is too small. I do not like to see here salmon and fall 
salmon. It shall be a bad omen when a fall salmon is killed here; 
somebody shall die; also when a salmon is killed. When a female 
salmon or fall salmon is killed a woman shall die; when a male is 
killed a man shall die.” Now he carried only the silver-side salmon 
to his house. When he arrived there he cut it at once, steamed it and 
ate it. On the next day he took his harpoon and went again to the 
mouth of Nia’/xaqeé. He did not see anything, and the flood tide set 
in. He went home. On the next day he went again and did not see 
anything. Then he became angry and went home. He defecated and 
said to his excrements: ‘‘Why have these silver-side salmon disap- 
peared?” “Oh, you with your bandy legs, you have no sense. When 
the first silver-side salmon is killed it must not be cut. It must be 
split along its back and roasted. It must not be steamed. Only when 
they go up river then they may be steamed.” Coyote went home. On 
the next day he went again and speared three. He went home and 
made three spits. He roasted each salmon on a spit. He had three 
salmon and three spits. On the next day he went again and stood at 
the mouth of the creek. He did not see anything until the flood tide 
set in. Then he became angry and went home. He defecated. He 
spoke and asked his excrements: ‘‘ Why have these silver-side salmon 
disappeared?” His excrements said to him: ‘I told you, you with 
your bandy legs, when the first silver-side salmon are killed spits must 
be made, one for the head, one for the back, one for the roe, one for the 
body. The gills must be burnt.” “Yes,” said Coyote. On the next 
day he went again. He killed again three silver-side salmon. When 
he arrived at home he cut them all and made many spits. He roasted 
them all separately. The spits of the breast, body, head, back, and roe 


102 IT|A‘LAPAS HIS MYTH. Bese 


ETHNOLOGY 


were at separate places. Coyote roasted them. On the next morning 
he went again. He speared ten silver-side salmon. Coyote was very 
glad. He came home and split part of the fish. The other part he 
left and went to sleep. On the next morning he roasted the rest. 
Then ke went again and stood at the mouth of the river. He did not 
see anything before the flood tide set in. He went home. On the next 
morning he went again, but again he did not see anything. He went 
home angry. He defecated and asked his excrements: ‘“‘Why have 
these silver-side salmon disappeared?” His excrements scolded him: 
‘‘ When the first silver-side salmon are killed, they are not left raw. 
All must be roasted. When many are caught, they must all be roasted 
before you go to sleep.” On the next morning Coyote went and stood 
at the mouth of the river. Hespeared ten. Then he made many double 
spits, and remained awake until all were roasted that he had caught. 
Now he had learned all that is forbidden in regard to silver-side salmon 
when they arrive first at Nia/xaqeé. He remained there and said: 
‘The Indians shall always do as I had to do. If a man who prepares 
corpses eats a silver-side salmon, they shall disappear at once. Ifa 
murderer eats silver-side salmon, they shall at once disappear. They 
shall also disappear when a girl who has just reached maturity or when 
a menstruating woman eats them. Even I got tired.” 

Now he came this way. At some distance he met a number of women 
who were digging roots. He asked them: ‘‘What are you doing?” 
“We are digging gamass.” ‘How can you dig gamass at Clatsop? 
You shall dig [a root, species?] and thistle |?| roots in this country. 
No gamass will be dug here.” Now they gathered |a root, species?| 
and thistle [?| roots. He left these women and spoiled that land. He 
transformed the gamass into small onions. 

Then he came to Clatsop. It was the spring of the year. Then he 
met his younger brother the snake. He said to him: “Let us make 
nets.” The snake replied: ‘As you wish.” Now they bought material 
for twine, and paid the frog and the newt to spin it. Now Coyote 
cleaned all the material for twine while the snake was crawling about. 
Then the frog and the newt spun it. Then Coyote said to his younger 
brother: ‘Clean it, clean it. You craw] about all day.” Thus he spoke 
to the snake. Coyote continued: ‘You shall make one side of the net, 
I make the other.” Coyote finished his twine and said to the snake: 
“Quick! quick! you let me wait. Make your net.” The snake replied: 
‘You let me wait.” Thushe spoke to Coyote. Now, Coyote made his 
net. He finished it all. The two women made the ropes, Coyote made 
the net buoys; while the snake crawled about. Coyote said: “Make 
your net buoys; you let me wait.” Thus he said to the snake. The 
snake replied: “Make haste! you let me wait.” Coyote finished his 
net buoys. Then he went to look for stones, and the snake accompanied 
him. They went for stones to Tongue point. The snake crawled about 
among the stones, while Coyote carried them down. They went home. 


CHINOOK COYOTE MYTH—TRANSLATION. 103 


After they reached home Coyote went to gather spruce roots. The 
snake accompanied him. Coyote dug up the ground and the snake 
crawled about at the same place. They went home. Coyote split the 
spruce roots. ‘Goon; work,” he spoke to the snake; ‘you let me wait.” 
The snake replied: “Quick, quick; work! you let me wait.” Now 
Coyote tied his net to the buoys and laid it down flat on a large mat. 
Then he tied it to the buoys. The snake crawled about at the same 
place. Coyote finished his net and hung it up outside. Early the next 
morning he stepped out of the house, and there hung already the net 
of the snake. ‘Oh, brother,” he said, “you got the better of me.” 
Coyote was ashamed. The snake had won over him. Coyote said: 
‘““When a person makes a net, he shall get tired before he finishes it. 
It would not be well if he would not get tired.” The snake said to him: 
“T told you that you would let me wait.” 

It got day. Then they went to catch salmon in their net. They laid 
the net and caught two in it. Coyote jumped over the net. Now they 
intended to catch more salmon, but the flood-tide set in. They had 
caught only two before the flood-tide set in. Now they went home. 
Coyote said that he was hungry, and he split the salmon at once. They 
roasted them. When they were done they ate. The frog and the newt 
were their cousins. The next morning they went fishing with their net. 
The newt looked after the rope, the snake stood at the upper end of 
the net, Coyote at the lower end. They intended to catch salmon, but 
they did not get anything until the flood-tide set in. They went home. 
Coyote was angry. He defecated and spoke to his excrements: “ You 
are a liar.” They said to him: ‘You with your bandy-legs. When people 
kill a salmon they do not jump over the net. You must not step over 
your net. When the first salmon are killed, they are not cut until the 
afternoon.” ‘Oh,” said Coyote, ‘You told me enough.” On the next 
morning they went fishing. When they had killed a salmon they did 
not jump over the net. They laid their net twice. Enough salmon 
were in the net. Then he ordered the newt: ‘Bail out the canoe, it 
is fullof water.” She bailed it out. Then they intended to fish again, 
but the flood-tide set in. They went home and put down what they 
had caught in the house. In the afternoon Coyote split the salmon. 
He split them in the same way as the silver-side salmon. He placed 
the head, the back, the body, and the roe in separate places and on 
separate double spits. They were done. The next morning they went 
fishing. They did not kill anything. Coyote became angry and defe. 
cated. He said to his excrements: ‘Tell me, why have these salmon 
disappeared?” His excrements scolded him: ‘Do you think their 
taboo is the same as that of the silver-side salmon? It is different. 
When you go fishing salmon and they go into your net, you may lay it 
three times. Nomore salmon will gointoit. Itisenough then. Never 
bail out your canoe. When you come home and cut the salmon, you 
must split it at the sides and roast belly and back on separate double 


104 “ITjA‘LAPAS HIS MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


spits. Then put four sticks vertically into the ground {so that they 
form a square| and Jay two horizontal sticks across them. On top of 
this frame place the back with the head and the tail attached to it.” 
He said to his excrements: “‘ You told me enough.” On the next morn- 
ing they went fishing and killed three salmon. They did not bail out 
their canoe. Then he said to the newt: “ Fetch a stick from the woods. 
We will make a club.” She went and brought a stick. Then they 
laid their net again. Again a salmon was in it and he killed it with 
his club. They intended to continue fishing, but the flood-tide set in. 
They killed four only. They put down their salmon. In the afternoon 
Coyote cut them and put four sticks into the ground. Now he did 
as his excrements had told him. When they were done he broke the 
backbone at once. On the next morning they went fishing. They did 
not kill anything before the flood-tide set in. They went home. Coyote 
was angry and defecated. ‘ Why have these salmon disappeared ?” 
he asked his excrements. ‘I told you,” they said to Coyote; ‘‘do you 
think their taboo is the same as that of the silver-side salmon? It is 
different. When you kill a salmon you must never strike it with a 
stick. When they may be boiled, then you may strike them with a 
stick. When it is almost autumn you may strike them with a stick. 
Do not break a salmon’s backbone when they just begin tocome. When 
you have killed a salmon take sand, strew it on its eye, and press it 
with your fist. Do not club it.” Coyote said: “You have told me 
enough.” On the next morning they went fishing. Salmon went into 
the net; three went into the net immediately. He strewed sand on each 
aud pressed each. He killed many salmon. They went home and 
roasted them. When they were done he distributed them among the 
people of the town above Clatsop. Now they dried them. On the next 
morning they went fishing. They tried to fish but did not catch any- 
thing before the flood-tide setin. They went home. Coyote was angry. 
He defecated: ‘Why have these salmon disappeared?” “T told you, 
you lean one, with your bandy-legs. There are many taboos relating 
to the salmon. When you have killed many salmon you must never 
carry them outside the house. You must roast and eat them at the 
same place. When part is left they must stay at the same place. 
When you want to dry them you must do so when the flood-tide sets in 
on the day after you have caught them.” He said to them: “ You have 
told me enough.” On the next morning they went fishing again. They 
killed many salmon. They roasted them all. When they were done he 
invited the people. The newt was sent out. They came to eat in 
Coyote’s house. They finished eating. Then they left there what they 
had not eaten. Now it was low water in the morning. They went 
out early to lay their net, but they did not catch anything. They 
fished until the flood-tide set in. They did not kill anything. They 
were unsuccessful. Twice they tried to go fishing early in the morn- 
ing, but they were unsuccessful; they did not catch anything. Coyote 


Sh COYOTE MYTH—TRANSLATION. 105 


defecated and said to his excrements: ‘*Why have the salmon disap- 
peared?” Coyote received the answer: ‘I told you, you lean one, that 
the salmon has many taboos. When you go fishing and it is ebb-tide 
early in the morning, you must not lay your net before sunrise. The 
salmon must not be carried outside until a crow takes one and carries 
it outside. Then it must be distributed raw. No fire must be made 
until daylight; the breast must not be eaten before the next day. 
When salmon are roasted at a fire and they are done, water must be 
poured into the fire.” He said to his excrements: ‘‘ You have told me 
enough. The Indians shall always do this way. Thus shall be the 
taboos for all generations of Indians. Even I got tired.” 

Thus spoke Coyote about the taboos of Clatsop. He said to his 
cousins: ‘“‘ We will move to the other side.” The newt made herself 
ready. Then the snake looked at the frog, who was growling. The 
snake reached her, struck, and killed her. 

Now they arrived here on this side. They went Gahie and killed 
salmon. He did the same way as in Clatsop. He strewed sand on the 
eye of that salmon. He pressed its eye. Then they intended to fish 
again, but they did not kill anything. They went home. On the fol 
lowing morning they went again fishing, but they did not kill anything. 
On the next morning they went fishing again, but they did not kill 
anything. Coyote scolded. He defecated: ‘‘ Why have these salmon 
disappeared?” ‘Oh, you foolish Coyote. When you kill a salmon you 
must kick it. Do you think it is the same here as at Clatsop?” Oh,” 
said Coyote. On the next morning they went fishing again. They 
laid their net and caught two salmon. They laid their net again and 
caught three salmon. He threw one ashore. It fell down head first, 
so that the mouth struck the sand. They tried to lay their net again, 
but they did not kill anything. They tried to fish until the flood tide 
set in. They had not killed anything. They had caught five only. 
They went home. In the evening Coyote cut the salmon and roasted 
them. They were done. The following morning they went fishing, but 
did not kill anything. Coyote scolded. He defecated: ‘“‘Why have 
these salmon disappeared?” ‘Oh, you foolish Coyote. Do you think 
it is the same here as at Clatsop? Do not throw salmon ashore so 
that the head is downward. Itis taboo. When you killa salmon go and 
pick salmonberries. When you have caught many salmon put salmon- 
berries into the mouth of each.” “Oh, you have told me enough,” he 
said to his excrements. The next morning they again went fishing. 
They killed many salmon. He sent the newt to pick salmonberries. 
The newt brought the salmonberries. Now they put those berries into 
the mouths of those salmon. It got day and they went fishing again. 
They met fishermen on the water. A short distance down river they 
laid their net. They laid it several times and went up the river a short 
distance. They passed the canoes of those fishermen. They laid their 
net and intended to fish, but they did not kill anything. They were 


Ors 
106 ITjA’LAPAS HIS MYTH. mutes 


unsuccessful. They went home. Coyote scolded. He defecated: ““Why 
have these salmon disappeared?” ‘You lean one! When you kill a 
salmon, and you have laid your net at one place and you kill one more, 
you must lay your net at the same place. You must not pass a canoe 
with fishermen in it. Itis taboo.” ‘ Yes,” said Coyote. On the next 
day they went again fishing. Coyote said: “‘Even I got tired. The 
Indians shall always do in the same manner. Murderers, those who 
prepare corpses, girls who are just mature, menstruating women,widows 
and widowers shalf not eat salmon. Thus shall be the taboos for all 
generations of people.” 


7. IQOA’/CQOAC IA/KXANAM. 
THE CRANE HIS MYTH. 


Lxéla/étix: iqoa/eqoac kja itjaapas kja ixoa/ckjoai. Ka/nauwe 


There were the crane and coyote and the heron. All 
LeaLa/ma Le/ié aLkqupia/Lxa-it. ALuwe’tcgomx. A/‘Ita né’kimx 
days mud clams they gathered. It became flood tide. Now he said 
it; a’/lapas: “Qantsi/X tqj0/xoL tEmée’qoléyu?” Ne’k-imx iqoa/eqoac: 
coyote: ‘‘ How many Oqj0/x0L are your sweethearts?” He said the crane: 
‘Moket dkuni/m pa’LEma k;a qa/mxike pEnka’.” Né’k-imx it; a/lapas: 
“Two canoes full and part afoot." He said coyote: 
‘“MeEnx: ka Lmé/qoléyi. Nai/ka goa/nEm okuni/m pa/LEma kja 
‘Few only your sweethearts. Ihave five canoes full and 
qa/mxike pEnka’;” cka kja nixa/xo-itx ixoa/ckjoai. Qod/nEme 
part afoot; ” and silent he always was the heron Five times 
téaLO’/Lx aLk70’piatx Leée‘ieé ka aLkya’/yo-itx go ma/Lxdle go 
their sleeps they gathered mud clams then they always slept — at inland on 
tEmsa/éma. Hé’wam atci/ax iqoa’cqoac. Né’xElatcko  itja’/lapas: 
a prairie. Sleepy he made him the crane. He rose coyote: 
“Og; 0/x0OL XaXaw 0/Lxat.” AtcixElqé’/Lxalkm iqoa/cqoac; ayoo’ptitx. 
‘*Oqj 0’x0L she comes down to He shouted the crane; he had slept. 


the beach.” 
Né‘k-im itja/lapas: “ Ka/Itas 1a/xlax aiamta/x.” E’xoéti la’xlax atea/x. 


He said coyote: “Only deceive I did you.” Often deceive hedid him. 
Alta aLk;é/witox'itx. NOLx Oqj0’/x0L, akLEIgitgax; egi’gula aqia’x 
Now they fell asleep. She came Oqj0/xOL, she put them into below he was 

[basket] put 
itj;a/lapas, ka/tsEk aqé/Igitgax iqoa/sqoas, e’k"caxala — aqia’/x 
coyote, in middle he was put the crane, on top he was made 
ixoa/eqoai. Ma/Lxolé aqLo/k*°yamx. NixEl’0’gux _ ixoa/cqoai. 
the heron. Inland she arrived carrying them. He awoke the heron. 
Ated/egamx 06é@/k"tEqTix. 1a/xkaté nixpo/nitx. Kula/yi n0d/yamx 
He took it a branch. There he hung. Far she arrived 
uqexé’Lau. NixEl’0’/gux it; a/lapas. Né’k‘imqac pEt nixa’/x. NixEl’0’/kux 
the monster. He awoke coyote. He looked [? ?] quiet he was. He awoke 
1qoa/eqoac. AtcixE’Iqétxax. ““Kja amb&’x, kja ambk’x,” né‘k-imx 
the crane. He shouted. ‘Silent be, silent be,” he said 
it; a/lapas. ‘“‘GElx0/ctxot uqetxe/Lau.” Akeco/k"yamx go tE’kXaqu 
coyote. * She carries us the monster.” She carried them two to her house 
g0 tga/a uqetxé/Lau. Agiona/xLategox qix: @/Xat. Agod/lXam 
to herchildren the monster. 3 She lost him that one. She said to her 
uxgh/kxun ugod/xo: “EK’/qxametk @kEloya. Moket mt&/Lk"7a 
the eldest one _—iher daughter: ‘A spit go and take it. Two carry 
wuk;Ema’ ité/la-itqE’q.” No/ix ugod/xo. Atcid‘lXamx  ia’cike 
straight huckleberry sticks." She went her daughter. He said to him to his friend 
itjalapas: ‘MixEnikja/yogO  imé/tuk ma/nix aqEmo’lEktca.” 
coyote: * Bend your neck when it is intended to roast 
you.” 
Aqid/k"yamx qgix: @/qxametk. AtcixEnLk;a/yugux ia/tuk iqoa/eqoac. 
It was brought —_ that spit. He bent it his neck the crane. 
AgolXamx ug0d/xd: ‘“H/kEloya ixEnLkja‘yukta_ -y-e’qxamcetk. 
She said to her her daughter: “Bring a crooked spit. 
Né‘k-imx it; a/lapas: “‘ Manix gé/tk"7ama ixEmk;a/yukta, wuk; amia’x 
He said coyote: ‘ When itis brought a crooked one, straight make 
107 


CONGO) Ae Se 


10 


11 


25 
26 


27 


108 IQOA’CQOAC HIS MYTH. pacers = 


imé’tuk.” Agé’tk"°qam ugo’xO ixEnLk;a/yukta. Wuk; atca/yax 


your neck." She brought it her daughter a crooked one. Straight he made it 
ia/tuk. Qoié/nEmi noya qaX uk’d’/cke ugod’xo0-y- Og; 0‘’xOL ka aLa’x 
his neck. Five times she went that girl her daughter Oa; o'/xXOL's and _ she be- 
came 
q’am. Na/kim Og;0/xol: “Cka cEla/étix qea’xo.” Ciyi’q;’Ema 
lazy. She said Oa! !0/x0L: “ And slaves wewillmakethem.” Half afathom 
iLa/Lata Lia/iteX iqoa/cqoac. Né’/k-im it; a’/lapas, aqid’1Xam iqoa/eqoac: 
long his tail crane. He said coyote, he was told the crane: 
- Qa t;’ocXEm! 1a/xlax tga/xo. AnEktcxEma’/ya, mEngEno’/tenEma.” 
‘Look out! deceive we will do I shall sing my con- you will help me sing."’ 
her jurer’s song, 
Aukeupa/yaLx Lk*ckue’ paL qod’/ta tY’oL, ka né/ktexEm it; a‘lapas. 
They gathered it pitchwood full that house, and _ hesang the con- coyote. 


oe jurer’s song 
O’kuk,’uétik atea/yax itea/yau. Qe’xtcé atcid’1Xam_ iqoa/cqoac: 


Headband he put on him the snake. Intending he said to him [to] the crane: 
“Okuk!uée'tik iamEla’‘xo xik itea/yau.” AcixElge’Lxal iqoa‘eqoac, 
‘* Headband Tshall put on you this snake.” He shouted the crane, 
kjoa‘e né/xax. <A/Ita né/ktexem itja/lapas. La/‘kti aya’qxoya 
afraid he was. Now he sang the con- coyote. Four times sleeps 


jurer’s song 
nixElkya/ta-it, 6/LaquinEM 06/podl ka noo’ptit Og; 0o/xOL kja tga/a. 


he remained awake, the fifth night and — she slept Oa; 0/xOL and ia chil- 
dren. 
Ateid/egam éLq. Atceilga’‘méete go-y- ile’e. A’mka = uya/makul 
He took it adigging He placed it upright in the ground. Only its handle 
stick. P = 
Lax. K;au atei/Lax LE/kXakeo go qix: éLq; kjau’kjau ateto/kXux 
visible. tie he did it their hair at that digging tie . he did them 
stick; 


qo’'tac tga/a Og;6/x0L. Acto’pa. WaX acgk’tax, waX qo’ta to. 


those her children ato’ XOL. They went out. Light they didit, light that house. 
Né@/xLXa iqoa/eqoac go Lia/iteX. Atcid/lXam: “ME’ La-it go x-ita 


He burnt the crane au his tail. He said to him: * Stay in this 
tmem*a/éma!” Ay0od/La-it iqoa/cqoac. N6o/xoLXa go qo’‘ta tEmfa/ema, 
prairie.” He stayed the crane. It burnt at that prairie. 
“Mr/La-it go Xau aea/qea!” Ayd’/La-it gd qaX uca/qea. Na/xLXa 
‘Stay in this Pteris aquilina.” He stayed a that Pteris aquilina. It burnt 
qaX uca/qea. “Mr/La-it gd Xiau é@/Xca-0t @’mtEcX!” Ayo’La-it. 
that Pteris aquilina. ‘Stay at this dry wood!” He stayed. 
Né/xtXa qix' @Xca-ot @mtecX. Ala/xti aLxk’tcXom 4qé’La 
It burnt that dry wood, At last it was finished that 
Lia/iteX iqoa/cqoac. Tex-i atcid‘lXam: “ME’La-it gO xiLa Ltcuq,” 
his tail the crane’s. Then he said to him: “ Stay in this water,” 
nixLoO1EXa-it it;a/lapas. Ta/kE aLxk/teXom Lia‘iteX iqoa‘eqoac. 
he thought coyote. Then it was finished his tail the crane’s. 
A‘lta na/xLXa-y- dqetxée/Lau. Naxk/l0k0, a/lta 0x0/LXa tk’kXaqL. 
Now she burnt the monster. She awoke, now _ it burnt her house. 
Akto/lXam_ tga‘a “Mexela’ yutck! Teax0/LElama té’/lxaqL it; a‘lapas.” 
She said to them neh chil- ‘Rise! He will burn it our house Sarai 
ren 
Qé’xtcé naxa/latck. Naxk; a’ Nit. ALE/XLXa Lkanauwa’tiks kja tga’é 
Intending she rose. It malied her. They burnt all and Bo cnt 
ren. 
A‘lta a/ete it;a/lapas @/wa Nix-keEla’x. K*ca/la ae’to go ia/Xakatck 
Now they two coyote thus Nix’ kela‘x. Upriver they to its cataract 
went went 
Nixknla/x. TV0L acgk’/tax. Lxoa’p atci‘tax tqa’nake itj’a’/lapas: 
Nix’ kela’x A house they made it. Dig he did them stones coyote. 
“Koma tssopEna’ya é@’qalema qigd naLxoa’pe; O‘owun ksopEna’‘ya 
‘panhane they will jump the fall where the hole; silver-side will jump 
salmon salmon 


qigd naLxoa/pe; 0'la-ateX ksopEna‘ya qigd naLxoa’pé; ka/nauwe 


where the hole; calico salmon will jump where the hole; all 


CHINOOK THE CRANE MYTH. 109 


tkj’@’wulklgqL tksopEna’ya qgigo naLxoa‘pe.” A‘lta atca’yax e’tvoL 
fish will jump where the hole.’ Now he made it a harpoon 
shaft . 
iqoa/eqoac, atci/etax ckulkuld/L. Ayo/tXuita-itx gO ma/Lné iqoa/cqoac. 
the crane, he made it a harpoon. He always stood at toward the the crane. 
water 


Qia’x @/k-ala @’qalEma, tex! ate é/luke’ax; qia‘x 0/kX6la-y- 0/owun 
iby a male fall salmon, then he speared it; if a male silver-side 
salmon 


tex ateqa/luke’ax. O/xoé atetd/piaLxax tk;é/wulElq1 iqoa/eqoac. 
then he speared it. Many he gathered them fish the crane. 

Ala/xti ateta/xex; ka’nauwé L‘aLa/ma-y- é/ka. It; a/lapas, oe x 
At last he split them; all days thus. Coyote, 

ia/q;’atxala é’qalEma, tex atssd/‘pEnax qigO naLxoa’/pe, qia’x 

a bad fall salmon, then it jumped where the hole, if 

0:0/kuil 6‘owun, tex'] akso’pEnax qigd naLxoa’/pe. A2’/XtEmaé tex‘i 

a female pene then it jumped where the hole. Sometimes then 
salmon 


itj’o‘/kté atssOpEna’x. Pau no/xdx tk/ctaqL. Lga/kxatcau paL 

a cead one jumped. Full got their house. Its grease full 

ia/k"cEmal igoa/cqoac. Ateto/ketx ia/k"cEmal it; a/lapas; ka/nauwé 
his dry salmon the crane. He lookedupto his dry salmon ae all 

cpE’qEma, néket Lga’/kxatcau. NixLo/lEXa-it it;a/lapas: ‘“ Niuwa‘to. 

gray, not its grease. He thought coyote: “T shall kill 
him. 


Mtucga’ma X0’ta ia’/k"cEmal.” A’Ita né/ktcxEmx it; a/lapas. 
I shall take them these his dry salmon.” Now he sang his con- coyote. 
juror’s song 
Nix-éno/ténEmx iqoa’/cqoae. A’qoa-iL uya/xolé it; a‘lapas. Ayopé/Lax 
He helped him sing the crane. Large his baton coyote’s. He stretched it 
out 
ia‘tuk iqoa/eqoac. Nix‘énd/tenEmx. Atcia/dwilX god _ ia’tuk, 
his neck the crane. He helped him singing. He struck him at his neck, 
atcée/XEmq;’Oya ia’/tuk iqoa/eqoac. Aqid/kLpa ka nixEma’tcta-itek 
he. bent it his neck the crane. He was missed and he was ashamed 
itja/lapas. Atcawe/kitk tia‘kjewalElqt iqoa/cqoac, ka/nauwé qix: 
coyote. He put them into his fish the crane, all that 
[basket] 
ia‘k*cEmal. Atcawe’kitk itja/lapas ia/k°cEmal. A/Ita cx'Lx‘a/yoot. 
his dry salmon. He put them into coyote his dry salmon. Now they were angry 
a) [basket] against each other. 
E/x'LXaot iqoa/eqoac, é@/x'LXadt itja/lapas. Atctod/ctxoniLtck 
He was angry, the crane, he was angry coyote. He carried them on his 
heed 
ia‘k"cEmal iqoa’cqoac. Tce/xéLx né/Xtako ka ka/nauwé nox0’tetXom. 
his dry salmon the crane. Severaltimes heturned and all he finished them. 
may be back 


Qj’am né/xax itja/lapas igé/ctxo. Atco’Xuina qo’ta tia/k; éwulelqt. 


Lazy he was coyote hecarriedthem Heplacedthem those his fish. 
on back. in a row 


Aékgo'té qaX ué/Xatk go Nix:kela/x. NixLo/lEXa-it itja/lapas: 
It ied a. that trail to Nixkela’‘x. He thought coyote: 
the hi ; 


“Ntuk;’uwa/keta nuXuwia/ya.” AteLE/Igitk LéXt Lea’pta god 
= Shall try I shall drive them.” He put into one roe in 
tia/xalaitanEma naué’ gic, ate’/xLx0 tia/xalaitanEma. A‘Ita atco/Xuwa 


his arrows where they he hung them his arrows. Now he drove them 
were in, over his shoulder 


qo’ta tia’k;’ewulelqt. A/nqaté ayd’teted iqoa/eqoae. Goyé’ mank 


those thik fish. Already he went down the crane. Thus a little 
river 

aka/x qaX 6/@Xatk qigo nd/‘Lxamtt. A/‘Ita ndXuwa/, ndXuwa’ qo’ta 

did that trail where it came down Now he drove iain: he drove them those 


to the water. 


tia’k;ewulElqt go Lqa/giltk auwigé’ca, go Eagomgo ‘muke auwige’ca. 
this fish in baskets they mene in, in large baskets they were in. 


o2) 


a 


10 


ibs 


“a 


10 


‘ -/ 
110 IQOA’CQOAC HIS MYTH. Verte 


Q;0a'p atgE’Lxam, a’lta te; pak atkxta/mXit. Ayo’Lxam qix: ia/néwa 
Nearly they came tothe now really they rolled. He arrived at that first 
water, the water 


iqa/giltk. Nau‘i go Ltcuq Ljlap né/xax; wiXt @Xt ayd/LXam, nau’‘i 
basket. Atonce in water under it got; again one arrivedatthe atonce 
water water, 


gd Ltcuq Ljlap né/xax. Ka/nauwé 4a/tgé. Né’xanko; qé/xtcé 
in the water under water it got. All they went. He ran; intending 
atcid’egam éXt, Lilap a/cto. ALgé/xkja q0’La Lta/pta. Ljlap 
he took it one, under water they two It pulled him that roe. nder 
went. water 


ayo. La/qo até/xax qo’ta tia/xalaitanEma. A/yoptck. K-;é ka‘nauwé 
he went. tae he did them those arrows. He went ashore. Noth- all 
0 ing 
qo/ta tiavkjéwulelqt. Né/kim itja/lapas: ‘“‘Anxk/LuX teja eka 
those fish. He said coyote: “T think thus 
0x0/x0 té/lx‘Em. Ma/nix 6g0La/yuwa ka cka tgOXuwa’ya tga/cxélax; 
they will the people. When they move then and _ they will drive it their food ; 
oO 


a/la nai‘ka, ala tgE/nxgako. Qa/‘doxoé ato’xqiaxtzl, tell xa/xo-ilEmx 


even 1: even they got the bet- Must they always work, tired theyalways get 
ter of me. 
LgoLélJEXEmk Lgé’ctxoniLx, ma/‘nix aLkLa/yuwa. Kj; one’k; oneé!; 
person he carries much when they are going to The story ; 
on back move. 


wu'xi ickagi’p. 
to-mor- itis fair weather. 
Tow 


Translation. 


Crane, Coyote, and Heron lived together. Every day they went dig- 
ging clams until the flood-tide set in. One day Coyote said: “ How 
many Oq;0/x0L have you for your sweethearts?” Crane replied: “‘Two 
canoes full and some must walk.” Coyote said: ‘‘ How few sweethearts 
you have! I have five canoes full and some must walk.” Heron re- 
mained silent. Five days they dug clams, and the nights they slept 
on a prairie. When Crane was sleepy Coyote rose and cried: “An 
Oq’0’xoL comes down to the beach!” Crane shouted; he had fallen 
asleep. Then Coyote said: “I have only deceived you.” He did so 
often. Now they fell asleep. Then Oq’0’x0L came to the beach and 
put them into her basket. She put Coyote at the bottom, Crane in 
the middle, and Heron on top. She carried them inland. Now Heron 
awoke. He took hold of a branch and hung there. When the mon- 
ster had gone a long distance Coyote awoke. He looked around but 
remained quiet. Then Crane awoke. He shouted, but Coyote said: 
‘“‘ Be quiet, be quiet, the monster carries us away.” She brought them 
to her house and to her children. One she had lost. Then she said to 
her eldest daughter: “‘Go and get two spits; bring straight huckle- 
berry sticks.” Her daughter went out. Then Coyote said to his 
friend: “‘ Bend your neck when she is about to roast you.” When the 
spit was brought Crane bent his neck. Then she said to her daughter: 
‘‘ Bring a crooked spit.” Coyote said: ‘When a crooked spit is brought 
stretch out your neck.” The girl brought a crooked spit, then Crane 
stretched out his neck.” Five times the girl, the daughter of Oq; 0’x0L, 
went; then she became tired. Ogj0’x0L said: ‘‘ We willmake them our 


Foose THE CRANE MYTH—TRANSLATION. 111 


slaves.” At that time Crane’s tail was half a fathom long. Coyote 
said to him: ‘‘Look here! We will deceive her. I shall sing my con- 
jurer’s song and you will help me.” They gathered pitchwood and 
when the house was full Coyote sang his conjurer’s song. He put the 
snake on asa headband. He said to Crane: “I will put the snake on 
your head as a headband.” Then Crane shouted; he was afraid. 
Now Coyote sang his conjurer’s song. Four nights they remained 
awake; on the fifth night Oqj0’x0L and her children fell asleep. Then 
he took a digging stick-and rammed it into the ground so that only 
the handle remained visible. He tied the hair of Oq’0/x0L and of her 
children to the digging stick. Then they went out and lit the house. 
Crane’s tail caught fire. Then Coyote said to him: “Stay on this 
prairie.” Crane did so and the prairie caught fire. ‘Stay in this 
fern.” Hedid so and it caught fire. “Stay in this dry wood.” He 
did so and it caught fire. At last Crane’s tail was wholly burnt. Then 
Coyote thought: “Stay in the water.” Thus Crane’s tail was burnt. 
Now the monster caught fire. She awoke and saw her house burning. 
She said to her children: “ Rise, Coyote will burn our house.” She 
wanted to rise, but her hair pulled her back. She and her children 
were all burnt. 

Now Coyote and Crane went to Nix:kela‘x. They went up the 
river to its rapids. Then they built a house. Coyote made holes in 
the stones and said: ‘ Perhaps fall salmon will jump into my hole. 
Silver-side salmon will jump into my hole. Calico salmon will jump 
into my hole. All kinds of fish will jump into my hole.” Crane madea 
harpoon shaft and a harpoon and stood near the water. When a male 
fall salmon or a silver-side salmon passed him, he speared them. He 
caught many fish. Then he split them. Every day he did so. Bad 
fall salmon and female silver-side salmon jumped into Coyote’s hole. 
Sometimes a good one would jump into it. Now their house was full 
of fish. Thedry salmon of Crane was fat. When Coyote looked up 
his salmon was all grey and no fat was onit. Coyotethought: ‘TI will 
kill him and take his dry salmon.” Now he sang his conjurer’s song 
and Crane helped him. Coyote had a large baton. Crane stretched 
out his neck when he helped Coyote. Then he struck at his neck, but 
Crane bentit. Coyote was ashamed because he had missed him. Crane 
put all his dry fish into a basket. So did Coyote. They were angry 
with one another. Crane and Coyote were angry. Crane carried his 
dry salmon on his back. He came back several times until he had 
carried them all. Coyote, however, was too lazy to carry them on his 
back. He placed all those fish in arow. The trail led across the hill 
to Nix:kela’x. Coyote thought: “I shall try to drive them.” He put 
a roe into his quiver which he hung over his shoulder. Then he 
drove his fish. Crane had already gone down theriver. The trail went 
a little down hill when it approached the river. Now Coyote drove the 
baskets in which his fish were. When they came near the water, they 


5B IQOA’CQOAC HIS MYTH. eee 


began to roll rapidly. The first basket arrived at the river and rolled 
into it. The next one arrived at the river and rolled intoit. All rolled 
into the river. He ran after them inorder to hold them. He took hold 
of his fish, but he was pulled into the water by the roe in his quiver. 
Then he took off his arrows and went ashore. All his fish had disap- 
peared. Then he said: “I think the people shall do thus: When they 
move from one place to the other they shall not drive their food. Even 
I could not do it. They shall work and become tired, carrying it on 
their backs when they move.” That is the story; to-morrow it will ve- 
good weather. 


8. ENTS;X IA’KXANAM. 


ENTS;X HIS MYTH: 


Ents; X dya’k;iké Une’ qeiuc. Ata agio’‘kXul imo/lak tcikElo‘ya. 
Ents; x his aes Upe'qeiue. Now _ she always said elk he shall go and 
to him take it. 
Wax qé/xtcé ayd’/yix; a/mka O’tsikin atca/wotdx; ia/mka_ ik;’a/oten 
Every intending he went; only chipmunks he killed them; only squirrels 
morning - 
atcia’wotox; ana/-y- okoXul_ atca/wotx. Tei/xé Lx 4’/yo. 
he killed them; sometimes mice he killed them. Several times maybe he went. 
E/xauwité a/yo ka ayo’tXuit g0 teEm*a/éma. Na/ixE’/lqamx: 
Often he went and _ he stayed on the prairie. He shouted: 
“Ok; uitkapa’2-y- imola/2k. AtxElka/yO walale/muX, atxEluweé/yo 
a Gams. down to the ia elk. We will fight, we will dance.” 
walale/muX!” Lj4q, Ljaq, Lj aq, La/xa né/xax iské/epXoa; “Ia/xka 
ut, out, out, out it became a rabbit; “ Him 
aniqElxé/moLx, tia/uteake t’a’/qé LkalkE/mstk.” TakE nigk’tsax 
I called him, his ears just as spoons with long Then it cried 
handles.” 


iské/epXoa, takE a/yuptsk. Nigk’tsax. WiXt na-ixE/Iqamx: 
the rabbit, then it went into It cried. Again he shouted: 
the woods. 


“Ok; uitkapa’2-y- imola/2k. AtxElka/yO walale/muX, atxEluwé’yo 
“Come down tothe prairie, elk. We will fight, we will dance!” 
walale/muX!” Takk wiXt Ljdq, Ljaq, Ljaq, Laxa né/xax éma/cEn. 
Then again out, out, out, out it became a deer. 
“Ta/xka aniqElxé/moLx, cia/xost qgé’/ta tE’pto-ix’é.” Take nigh/tsax 
“Aim I called him, hiseyes thesame huckleberries.’’ Then it cried 
as 


éma/cEn. A/yuptck. WeXt na-ixE/Iqamx: 
the deer. It went ae the Again he shouted: 
woods 


“ Ok; uitkapa/2-y- imola/2k. Atxnlka’ yo walalkEma/mm. AtxEluwé/yo 
“Come downtotheprairie, elk. We will fight. We will dance!” 
wa‘lalema’mm.” TakE wiXt Lj4q, Ljfq, Ljaq né’xau, Laxa né/xax 
Then again out, out, out it became, out it became 
é/nEmceke imo’lak. ‘“Ta/xka xix: néqétxemo’L.” WiXt na-ixE/IqamX: 
a female elk. ‘* Her thisone I called her.” Again he shouted : 
“Ok; uitkapa/2-y- imola/2k. Atxelka/yo walalema/mm. AtxEluwé’yo 
iigiemac downtotheprairie, elk. We will fight. We will 
walalema’‘mm!” TakE wiXt L;aq, Ljaq, Ljaq né/xau; Laxa né/xax 
dance!”’ Then again out, out, out it became; out became 
imO‘lak; i/k-ala imo/lak. A‘Ita aya/owitck Ents; X: 
an elk; a male elk. Now he danced Ents; 2g 
“Qa‘xpa ya/2mEllk;j’apka’? LO’nas go-y- @’micqL ya/milk;’apka i. 
“Where shall I go nid you? Perhaps in your mouth I will gointo you! 
X,X,X, mxa/xoié; ta/mka tEmXté/mam nxa/xoié. LO/nas go emé/kteXict 
X,X,X, you will make; only saliva Ishallbe- Perhaps in your nostrils 
come. 


ya/milk;’apka’. Xui, mxa/xo0. L;6x nuLa/‘taXita. A/’mka 0/qxotck 
I shall go into you. Xui, you will do. a ling I shall fall. Only mucus 
own 
axa/xoié. LOnas go y- 0/méutca ya/milk;apqa’. To’to mxa/xoie. L 
Ishall become. Perhaps in your ear I shall go into you. Shake you will do. raling 
own 


BULL. T=20——8 113 


SN m% GO em &W 


N SF Oo fe 


10 
11 


23 
24 
25 


114 ENTS|X HIS MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


nuLa‘taXita. Lonas go-y- Omé’/pute ya/milk;apqa’. MLawé’teXa, paL 
I shall fall. Perhaps’ in your anus I shall gointo you! Youwilldefecate, full 
é/xalitk nxa/xo.” La2 ka nélkXap! g0d-y- uya’pute. Alta 
excrements Ishall be- Sometime and he entered him at his anus, Now 
come.” 


Lqj 0’pLqj Op atea/yax ia/yamxteX. Li2 ka ayaiquna/itix't ka ayo/mEqt. 

cut to pieces he did it his stomach. Some- and he fell down and he was dead. 
time 

A‘lta atea/yaxc, Lag? atcé/xax ia/skj Opx‘El; Laq°® atcté’/xax tia’/*owit; 
Now hecutit, | off he made it its skin; off he made them its legs; 

Laq® atcté’xax tia/poté; Lag? atce’xax a’/yaqtq; ia’tuk Laq° atcé’xax; 
off ‘hemadethem itsforelegs; off he made it its head; itsneck off he made it; 

tia‘lewanEma, cia/kxalauct atcé/xax. Ka/nauwé atca’/yaxc. Alta 

its ribs, its rump bone he made it. All he cut it. Now 

née/Xko. NéXko’/mam. “Im0/lak ania/wat, ga’k)’é!” “Ateuwa/-y- 

he went He arrived at home. “ An elk I killed it, grandmother!” ‘* Certainly 
home. 


uko1Xul.” “Lia/ateam, Lia/atcam, imo’lak.” “Ateuwa/-y- utsEmé/nxan.” 
a mouse." ‘Tt has horns, it has horns, an elk.” “Certainly a snail.” 
‘““Tmola/2k, imod/lak ania‘wat.” ‘‘Atcuwa/-y- 0/tsikin.” ‘* Imola/2k, 
“An elk, an elk I killed it.” ‘“* Certainly a chipmunk.” “An elk, 
imdak ania/wat.” “Ateuwa/-y- ikj;a/étEn.” Al’ta tell a/teax. A/‘Ita 
an elk, I killed it.” “Certainly a squirrel.” Now tired he made her. Now 


a/etoptck. Actiga/dm, a/lta imoak: yuquna‘itX. “E/kta amio/ctxo, 
they went in- Theyreached it, now an elk lay there. ‘““What _-will you carry 
and. it, 


ga’k;6? A’yaqtq amid/ctxd.” “Acé/nk;amukipax, ka/ékaé!” “ E/kta 
grand- Its head you willcarryit.’’ ‘‘Itpullsmedown headlong, grandson!” “ What 

mother? 

amio/ctxo? Teuxo ia/tuk mid/ctxo.” ‘Acé/nk; amuk pax, ka/ékae!” 

will youcarryit? Then itsneck will you carry it.” ‘‘Itpullsmedownheadlong, grandson!” 

“Teuxd oOpo’/titk mod/ctxo.” “Acé/nkjamukLpax.” ‘Teuxd iat/owit 
* Then the forelegs you willcarry ‘‘ They pull me down headlong.” ‘« Then its leg 

them.” 


mio/etxo.” “Acénkjamuk.ipax.” “I’/ktaLx mio/ctxo? Teuxod 
you will carry “Tt will pull me down headlong.”’ =‘ My nae nee, you walouy Then 
it.” ) it? 


ia/ateX mid/ctXo.” “Acé/nk;j amuktpax.” “I’ktaLx mid/etxo? Teuxd 
its breast willyou-earryit.’’ ‘‘It pulls medown headlong.” pe may will he earry Then 
i e it? 


tEléwa/nEma mto/ctXo.” “Acé/nk;amukLpax.” ‘“Teuxd ia/kuteX 


the ribs you will carry them.”’ ‘‘ They pull me down head- “Then its back 
long.” 


mio/etXo.” “Acé/nkjamuk.Lpax.” “Tcuxd eqala/auwictX, mid/ctxo.” 
you will carry ‘It pulls me down headlong.” ** Then its rump bone you wits. 
itis it.” 


“Cicilax, cici/lax, ka/ékaé! Cici’lax, cici‘lax, ka/ékaé!” Alta 
“Tie it up, tie it up, grandson! Tie it up, tie it up, grandson!”’ Now 
ateca/lax, alta agk/ctuctx. Na’/xanko a/‘néu. No’ya, a‘néu no’ya. 
he tied it up, now she carried it on She ran ahead. She went, ahead she went. 

her back. 


A‘lta ateto/egam, ka/nauwé atci/toctx. A’yi a/lta né/Xkd. Qaxi/L 
Now he took them, all he carried them He went now, he went Somewhere 
on his back. home. 


ayakta/om tiya/k;ik;é. A/lta gi/cgue itca/ctxul ked/tetEmalt: “E/Xt 
hereached her his grandmother. Now kneelingon her load he ea it to and ‘“*One 
it TO: 


ila‘xElax, @/Xt im0d/yEmOyE; e’Xt ila’/xElax, 6’/Xt im0d/yEmOyé.” 
[?], one ({?]; one [2], one BE g 
TakE ayaga/Om. “Qa’da amE’xax ga/k;é?” “Acé/nk; amukLpax, 
Then he reached her. ‘How are you doing, grandmother? ' ‘‘ [t pulled me down headlong, 
ka/ekae.” TakE wiXt atcalo’tcXam, takE na/xank0d. A‘yd, 4a/yo, 
grandson.” Then ayain he Boag ae on his then she ran. He went, he went, 
ack, 


. 


oTBOAS ENTSjX MYTH. 115 


a/yo; kula/yi a/yo. Take wiXt atea‘talkEl. Oc, keo/tetEmal 


he went; far he went. Then again he saw her. She was _ she pulled it to 
there, and fro 

itca‘ctxul. “Qa’da amE’xax ga’‘k;é?” WiXt akex: 

her load. ‘‘How are you doing, grandmother?’ Again she made: 

“Xt ila/xElax, €Xt imo/yEmoyé; éXt ila/xElax, €Xt imo/yEmoyée.” 
“One [?], one [7]; one [?], one ae" 

“Qa/da amE/xax, ga’/kjé?” “Acé/nkamukLpax, ka/ekaé.” QoainEmite 

“How are you doing, grand- ‘Tt pulled me down head- grandson.” Five times 

mother?” long, 


ayaga/om ka acXgo/mam. 
he reached her and they arrived at home. 
“Aij/aq Lteuqg ma‘/ya; ga‘/kj;é, txElteXEma/ya.” TakE no’/ya 
Quick water £0; grandmother, we will boil it.” Then she went 
uya’/kjikjé. AkLO/cgam qua/‘nEm LegE/nEma. No’/ya mank kula’yi. 
his grandmother. She took them five buckets. She went alittle far. 
Naxkjanwa‘pa, ka/nauweé paL aLE/xax Lga/egEnEma. Alta 
She urinated, all full she made them her buckets. Now 
na’/Xko. NaXko/mam. Take atco’/lXam, itca/kXén: “Qa/xea Lik 


she went She arrived at house. Then he said to her, his grand- ‘‘ Where this 
home. mother: 


Lteuq nEga’k;é?” TakE agid’/p!Ena go @Xt e@/qeL. WiXt ae/Xt 
water, grandmother?” Then she named it at one creek. Again one 
ated/egam ugo’/egan. “Qaxé xiLik Lteuq, nEga’k;é?” “Tk; Emoik"tiX 
he took it her bucket. ‘“Where this water, grandmother?’ ‘‘ Upper fork of Bear 

creek 


Lteug.” Qo’é/nEmM Lga/cgEnEMma atcLO/cgam. 
water.” Five her buckets he took them. 
Alta acE/xEltcxEm. TakE naxa’/Lxeko iau’a ma/Lxolé. Alta 
Now they cooked. Then  sheturned round there from fire. Now 
Lxoa/pLxoap agE’Lax Lcta/amua. Ka/nauwé2 Lxoa/pLxoap agE’/Lax, 
holes she made the shell spoons. All holes she made 
into them into them, 
ka2 LE‘ts;EMENO Lxoa/pLxoap agk/Lax, ka2 Li’c’0 Lxoa/pLxoap 
and wooden spoons holes she made into and mountain- holes 


them, sheep-horn 
dishes, 


agE’/Lax. Take acxgé’/ktcikt. Takr acgid’/kXuiptck icta/teXzmal. 
shemadein- Then their food wasdone. Then they hauled out of fire what they had 
to them. boiled. 


“ A’tk'qa-y- 0’kuk Ogoa‘namua. Qa/xqéa nitsEnd/ketX naga/amua?” 
“Bring me that my shell-spoon. pEnere I was young my shell-spoon? *’ 
when 


“Ttea/é naLxoa’p ka/éka-é!” ‘“Qax itcE’/ts;EMEnO qéa nitsEnd/kstX 

“Tt has a hole, grandson!” ‘“Where my wooden spoon when I was young 

nétsE’ts;EmEnO?” “Ta/é naLxoa’/p ka/é-ka-e.” Qa’‘xqéa I’tcic’o qéa 
my wooden-spoon ?”’ “Tt has a hole, grandson. Where my mount- when 


ain-sheep- 
horn dish 


nitsEnd‘kstX i/tcic’s?” “la’é naLxoa’p ka/éka-e!” ‘ Qa/xqéa 
I was young my mountain-sheep- ‘‘It has a hole, grandson!” ‘“ Where 
horn dish?” 


stasgkE/xEnim qéa nitsEnd/kstX asgE/XEnim; cka qéa nitsEn6/kstX 
my toy canoe when I was young my toy canoe; and when I was young 
asga/amiksos.” ‘Icta/é naLxoa’p, ka/éka-é6.” “Ta/mka tei sta/2é 


my toy canoe [of ‘* They have holes, grandson.” ‘Only [int. part.) they 
another shape].” j 


naLxoa’p?” Take atcio’cgam icta/teXEmal, wax atcia/‘kXax. Takk 


have holes?” Then - he took it, what they had boiled, pour he did it on her. Then 
naxa’/Lxaid, tga’/pote nodxoé/Lxéyo. TakE atciaxa/n’iakO a/yaqed 
she shrivelled up, her arms became bent. Then he rolled her up [in] its skin 
icta‘molak. Take atcalé/maLx. NO/Xunit ma/émé qa asxa/xp!adt 

their elk’s. Then he threw her into She drifted down the where they fished in 

7 7 ore, i the water. river sine 
ka/sa-it kja iq; @/sqjés. 

robin and bias jay: 


rs bo 


(oo Pd 


18 


19 


14 
15 
16 


116 ENTS|X HIS MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


TakE ateé*ElkEl imod’lak ka/sa-it. YuXuné’t: “A itsumd/lak 


Then he saw it an elk robin. It drifted: SHARE my elk 
itgatsuwa/4.” Take né’/k:im iqjé’sqjés: “ Ka/sa-it, mxEltca/maana? 
is coming down Then he said blue-jay: ‘robin, do you hear? 
stream.”’ 
qatxE/IqEmxia.” TakE wiXt né@kim_ <ka/sa-it. “A  itsumd/lak 
We are called,” Then again he said robin: “Ah, my elk 
itgatsuwa/4.”, _ TakE né’/k-im iq; é@/sqés: 
coming down river.” Then he said Blue-jay : 


‘6A’ hahaha/haha/.” 


BIR il plots Br 


tA hahaha‘haha’.”’ 
Qui/nEmi né/k-im ka/sa-it, ka tak ateixtea/ma: “A, iteumd/ak 


Five times he said robin, and then he heard it: “Ah, my elk 
itgatsuwa/4,” wiXt né/k‘im ka/sa-it. Ta/kE né’kim iq;é@/sqjés: “A 
is coming down again he said robin. Then he said blue-jay: “Ah, 
stream,” : 
itsumolak itgatsuwa’4.” ‘‘Qa‘xéyaX, qa/xéyaX?” “AXiXi’/yaX, 
my elk is coming down stream.” “Where, where?” ** Here, 
aXiXi/yaX.” Take acgé’EIkE] imo’lak, acgit/cgam. Tak 
here!”’ Then they saw it the elk, they took it. Ther 
acgiakqa/na-it. A/ita kyau’kjau iké’x a/yaqed. TakE stu/XstuX 
they put it into their Now tied it was the skin. . Then untie 
canoe, = 
acga/yax. A’lta ucta/Lak. “O, utxa/Lak taL; XaXa/‘k.” “Qa/‘da 
they did it. Now their aunt. Oy our aunt look that.” ‘* How 
itxa/alqt qtgia/x6, ka/sa-it?” Take né/k‘im ka/sa-it: 
ourcrying weshallmake, robin?” Then he said robin: 


‘“Tsa/ntxawa, tsantxawa’, an’xaxa, anxaxa’, a/ntaLak, antaLa’k.” 
J) Led ed di i dd 
‘*He killed her, he killed her, Ents; xX; Ents; x, our aunt, our aunt.” 
“Ksta q;oi/L amk’/kim, ka/sa-it.” A/‘lta aci/Xko. Q;£0a/p 
“And all right you said, robin,” Now they wenthome. Nearly 
acgia‘xOm é@1Xam, a/Ita cxé/nim: “Na Leta/xauyam. Qa/da 
they reached it the town, now they cried: =O, the unhappy ones. How 
aci/xax?” Cxé’/nim ka/sa-it: 
they do?” They cry robin: 
“Tsa/ntxawa, tsantxawa’, a/nxaxa, anxaxa’/, a/ntaLak, antaLa/‘k.” 
‘He killed her, he killed her, Ents; x, Ents; x, our aunt, our aunt.”’ 
Acxé’gela-é. <A/‘Ita aqega/lOLx. <A, a/lta aqo’ketipteck ma/Lx6lé. 
They landed. Now the people went Ah, now © she was carried up inland. 


down to the beach from the beach 
to them. 


A‘lta aqagé@’la-it. La2, tjaya’ a’qxax. A/‘Ita aqauwa/amtcxoko: 
Now they tried to Some- well she became. Now she was asked: 
cure her. time, 


“kta ia/laqu aqEmé/lotk?” ‘“Pé/ckan,” na/k-im: “Aqid’/p!Ena 

“What [which way did you place it]?” ? cee she said: ‘*He is named 
a bird,”’] 
iL;’alé/xqEkun.” “Amega/egiLx uya/xEnima,.” WiXt aqanwa/amtexoko. 
the eldest one.”’ “Pull down to water his;canoes.”’ Again she was asked. 

Aqidp!Ena_ ska/sa-it. La: ‘“Aqidp!Ena iL;’alé’xqEkun,” née/k-im 

He was named Robin. Some- ‘*He is named the eldest one,” he said 
time: A ? 

iq; &’/sqés. Ka‘nauwée aktop!Ena/yam télx‘Em. K-imta/, a/lta 

blue-jay. All she named them the people. Last now 

aqid’/p!Ena igé’sqés. A/‘Ita aq0/cgiLx uya/xEnima igé/sqés. A/Ita 
he was named blue-jay. Now they were pulled. his canoes blue-jay’s. Now 

down to the water 


staq,; gia/xd, Ents;X. A/Ita a/tgi téIx-em moket Okuni/m paL. 
war she made Entsj X. Now they the people two canoes full. 
on him, went 


c oo marew r 
"BOAS ENTS|X MYTH. 117 


A’tgi, a/tgi, a/‘tgi té/lxyeEm. Qaxé kula’yi atga’yam, aqugo’om 
They they they the people. When far they arrived, they reached 
went, went, went them 


am0‘/ketike ugo‘/L’ayi. Lé/Xat Lé’/kala, Lé/Xat Lea/kil. Take 
two sleepers. One man, one woman. Then 
aya’luLx igjé’sqés. AteLé/nxokti ia’koa tcexe’/nkjiama, atcLa‘nxokti 


he went blue-jay. He took him at his there in his right hand, he took her at her 
ashore head head 


qaX o0/kuil ia/koa teiq;é/teqta. Atei/etuk"7 gd ikani‘m. Takk 
that woman then in his left hand. Hecarried them to the canoe. Then 
atciak7a/itEm. TakE wiXt 4/tgi té/lx‘Em. Kula‘yi 4’tgi, ka 
he made them his Then again they went the people. Far they then 
slaves. went, 


acXEluwa’/yutck q0d’ctac cgoLéJEXEmk. TakE né’kim_  igé/sqés: 
they danced those people. Then he said blue-jay: 

“ Ka/sa-it! Qi’sta cia’Jaitix- itxa’qacqac. Qi’sta a/ngate 

“Robin! These his slaves our grandfather's. These long ago 

qsgrm0/stxula/leEma-itx kja mai/ka qsgEmoptca’lalEma-itx. Qé/au 


they carried me always on their and you they always led you by the hand. Those 
backs 


itxa/qacqac kja wiXt é’wa ia’qacqac cia/laitix.” “Ta/, xixi’k 
our grandfather and’ again thus his grandfather his slaves.” “1a, this one 
ma/mka  tEmé’eltkéu. Trenla’‘xo-ixna _tgE/éltgeu?” né/k-im 
you only your slaves. I know [int. part.] my slaves?’ he said 
ska/sa-it. “H0/ntcin, ia/xka ikta éla@/x0-iX xixi’/k iLjalé/xqEkun!” 
robin. “Oh, he what he knows this the eldest one!” 
A'‘lta a/cto, a’tgi, qod’tac té/lx‘Em, a/lta acX#luwa’yutck: 


Now they went, they went, those people, now they danced: 


“Qj oa’p tuwe’x-ilak inta/owila, qjoa’p tuwé’x-ilak inta/owila. Was 


eter st deel LS LN 


‘Near fallen trees we dance, near fallen trees we dance. 


La‘la guyt’, guyi’, guy’ guy’. Wa Lala guyi’, guy’, guy’ ne 


ed a dls elidid dle. gd dla SLs 


La/la guyi’, guyw’, guyv’, guyw’. Wa Lala  guyi’, guyw’, guyi’, guy’. 
Take né’‘k-im igé’/sgés: “Qjoa/p kati xiau ile’é xiau sxa/xo-il.” 
Then he said blue-jay: ss New this land this _ they always 
say.” 
“4/.” né/k-im ska/sa-it, “ia/ x‘ix:” é’/kta! kawatka cimxp !é’ Xaiyaii'ta.” 
“Te” said robin, af: this thing! ~ goon they will run away from you.” 
Nau‘itka gO xix: iké’x, aya/lukLx @/mtcX. Takk aci’xauwa, 
Indeed there this was, itlay over water a tree. Then they ran, 
takE ackso’/pEna. TakE né/xankoO § igé’sqés, takE atcgE’ta. 
then they jumped. Then he ran blue-jay, then he pursued 
them. 
Ma/ixodlé néxantko/mam. Takk atcixalgé’tqal igé’/sqés: Ana/2, ana/2, 
Inland he arrived running. ‘Then he called much blue-jay : Anah, anah. 
TakE nité/mam, né’Lxam iqé/sqés. La’/mka Lé£a/owilkt  ia’owit. 
Then he came, he came to the blue-jay. Only blood his leg. 
water 


“Qa/daqa niket a/modptek ka/sa-it? CkEna/towa. AteLnE/nxokti 


“Why not you went inland robin? They struck me. He took hold of my head 
qix: é@’/kXala, a/lta agEna/OwilXLx: go itcE’*Owit.” ‘Ti’, ia‘xka 
that man, now she struck me at my leg.” “Ta, he 
Kix'l/x'Lx ikja/-utEn ka _ tciusga’‘ma. Ia/xka Lx O’tsikin’ ka 
this may be Smels and he will take them. He may be chipmunks and 
tetusga/ma.” A‘Ita wiXt a/tgi téx‘em. E2, kula’/yi a’/tgi. AqLga’/om 
he will take Now again they thepeople. Eh, far they They reached 
them.” went went. him 
La/kjaya. Lxa/xp!adt. “Masa’tsiLx émé/xEnim, 4t,” né’k-im 
one man ina He fished with a “Pretty your canoe, nephew,” said 


canoe. dipnet. 


bo 


Oo 


e2) 


10 
11 


or 


10 


18 
19 


= ° a 1 BUREAU OF 

118 ENTS|X HIS MYTH. | Bone 

igé/sqés. “TRHkEmée‘ctx.” “Masa/tsiLx imé’ski, at.” “TEkEme’ctx.” 

blue-jay.  ‘‘ They loaned it to me.” ‘Pretty your nephew.” ‘They loaned it to 

paddle, me. 
“Masa’/tsiLx Omé@/etewaLxti, at” ‘“TEkEmé/ctx.” ‘ Masa/tsiLx 
“Pretty your bailer, nephew.”’ ‘‘ They loaned it to me.” ** Pretty 

dmé/nuXecin, at.” “TEkEmée/ctx.” “Masa‘tsitx LkEmeé/xilkue, 

your dipnet, nephew.” ‘They loaned it to me.” ‘* Pretty your mat in your 
canoe, 

at.” “Tpkemé’ctx.” “TamokXa‘tsit taé/2kEméctx.” Takk 
nephew.’ ‘‘ They loaned it to me.” ‘Your things they loaned them to you.’’ Then 

ateLé/nxokti. Take atcé/xaluktego go iLa/xanim. “ Mekta/nit x-i‘ta 
he took hold of his Then he threw him down in their canoe. **Give me this 

head. 

te’pa-it! k,au/kjau nia/xo.” “TenXpéqua’!” “Mekta/nit x-i’ta 
rope! tie IT shall do him.” ‘‘I shall seratch it.’ ‘Give me these 

tpé/naLX.” “TéenXpeqna’.” “K;a e@ktatx aqela/xo? Mekta‘nit 

spruce twigs.” “T shall scratch them.” “And what may be is done with him? Give me 
xi/ta tqoqoa/-iLax.” TénXpéqua’/!” “Ha, ha, ha,” takE nigk’tsax; 
these short dentalia.” ‘‘‘ I shall scratch them.”’ ‘Ha, ha, ha, then he cried; 


“¢O/qomédm dqéomii/m.” 


a apts sid coed 


‘Sea grass, sea grass.” 

‘Ai/aq, ka/sa-it, a’‘tk"La Xau 6 ‘qomum.” A‘lta kjau’kjau atcaya/lax 

“ Quick, robin, bring that sea grass. Now tie he did him 
with it 

go tia/keia go tia’towit. Alta atcialé‘maLx. A‘lta lEp ne’xax 

at his hands at his legs. Now he threw him into Now boiling itbecame 

4. the water. 

qigo atcialé/maLx. “QO, itci‘LatXEn.  la‘/xka ikala/lkuilé, 
when he had thrown him into ‘SOh; my nephew. He scolds, 


the water. 
ninxElo/yamit itci/LatXen.” “Ta/, xixi/x: tcimad/nim x-igo’.” 
I killed my relative my nephew.” “Ta, this one, aN laughed at you here.” 
“Ta/xka qialé‘maLxa ka/sa-it ka he‘hé ixa ‘x0.’ 


‘* He is thrown into the robin and laugh he does.’ 
water 


A‘lta wiXt a/tgi téIx-rEm. La2, aqa/LtelkEl LgdLé/lEXEmk. 
Now again they went the people. Some time he was seen a person. 
Lkto/ktean tkalai‘tan. “Sau/atsa, san/atsa’, iqe/sqés!” “ Kkta Lx 


He held in his arrows. “The news, — the news, blue-jay!” “What may 
hand be 


aqéemilk-7é'tego ? Ia’‘mka-y- 0/kuk ma/éma ilqa/icX anialé/maLx.” “T6 
is told to you? Only down stream our rela- I threw him into “Am 
tive the water.’ 


nai/kXa te;a go,” aLE/k‘im X0/La LgoLelExEmk. “ 1a’, xixi’/k ka 
a look! that,” he said that person. ‘Ta, this one and 
ia‘xka x‘ix'i/x: amialé/maLx!” 
he this one you threw him into the water!”’ 
Alta wiXt a/LO, a/Lo gd ta’yaqu Ents;X. Take aqdx0/Lako 


Now again they they a his house Ents; ne 3. Then it was surrounded 
went, went 


ta‘yaqL Ents;X. Take atcXE/lgiLX. TakE nod/xoLXa_ ta/yaqL 


his house Entsj K's. Then he set fire to it. Then it burnt his house 
Ents; X. Ayo’pa Ents; X gd naLxoa’pé =: y- 0/ék"tEqVix:. NO/xoLXa 
Ents; Re s. Hewentout Ents;X at hole knot hole. It burnt 
ta/yaqL, ka/‘nauwé ta/yaqt. Take Lap atca/yax éqtq ige’sgés. “ O, 
his house, the whole his house. Then find he did it ahead blue-jay.  “ on, 
Ents;X a/yaqtq xixi/k.” Take né/k:im ska/sa-it: “ Ta’, xix kik! 
Entsj X his head this.” Then he said robin: Wea Ie this one. 


A/nqaté ayOd’pa.” Alta no‘/xoko télx-Em, aqée‘taqL Ents; X. 
Already he went out.''’ Now they went the people, he was left . Entsj/X. 


ORIKOOE ENTS|X MYTH—TRANSLATION. 119 


Translation. 


Ents; x’s grandmother was Upé’qciuc. She always asked him to go 
elk hunting. Early every morning he started, but he killed only chip- 
munks and squirrels; sometimes he killed mice. Oftentimes he went 
and stayed on a prairie. He shouted: “Come down from the woods, 
elk! we will fight, we will dance.” Down came the rabbit. “ Youare 
the one I have called, your ears are like spoons with long handles.” 
Then the rabbit cried and went back. Then he called again: ‘‘ Come 
down from the woods, elk! we will fight, we will dance.”. Down camea 
deer. ‘You are the one I have called, your eyes are like huckleber- 
ries.” Then the deer cried and went back. He called again: ‘‘*Come 
down from the woods, elk! we will fight, we will dance.” Down came 
afemaleelk. ‘You are the one whom I havecalled!” He called again: 
“Come down from the woods, elk! we will fight, we will dance.” Then 
a male elk came down. Now Entsx danced and sang: ‘¢ Where shall 
I gointo him? Where shallI go into him? I think I will go into his 
mouth. No, he will spit and I shall get full of saliva. I think [ will 
go into his nostrils. No he will snort and I shall get full of mucus. I 
think I will go into his ear. No, he will shake himself and I shall fall 
down. I[thinkI shall go into his anus. No, he will defecate and I 
shall get full of excrements.” After some time he entered his anus. 
Now he cut his stomach to pieces. Aftera little while the elk fell down 
and died. Then Entsx skinned and dissected it. He cut off the hind- 
legs; he cut off the fore-legs. He cut off the head, the neck, the ribs, 
and the rump bone. Then he went home. When he came to his 
erandmother he said: “I killed an elk, grandmother!” “ Perhaps it 
was a mouse.” ‘No, it has horns, it has horns, it is an elk.” “Then 
perhaps it was a snail.” “No, no, I killed an elk, an elk.” ‘Perhaps 
it was a chipmunk.” ‘No, no, I killed an elk, an elk.” “Perhaps it 
was a squirrel.” Then she got tired and they went into the woods. 
They arrived at the place where the elk lay. Entsx asked: “What 
do you want to carry, grandmother? Do you want to carry its head?” 
“Tt will pull me down headlong, grandson.” ‘What do you want to 
carry, grandmother? Do you want to carry its neck?” ‘It will pull 
me down headlong, grandson.” ‘What do you want to carry, grand- 
mother? Do you want to carry its hind-legs?” ‘They will pull me 
down headlong, grandson.” ‘What do you want to carry, grand- 
mother? Do you want to carry its fore-legs?” ‘They will pull me 
down headlong, grandson.” “What do you want to carry, grand- 
mother? Do you want to carry its breast?” ‘It will pull me down 
headlong, grandson.” ‘What do you want to carry, grandmother? 
Do you want to carry its back?” “It will pull me down headlong, 
grandson.” ‘What do you want to carry, grandmother? Do you 
want to carry its ramp bone?” “Tie it up, tie it up, grandson.” 
Then he tied it up, she put it up, she raised it on her back. The old 


120 ENTS|X HIS MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


woman ran ahead of her grandson, who carried the rest of the elk. 
They went home. After a little while he came near his grandmother, 
who had put her load on the ground and pushed it to and fro, singing 
at the same time [page 114, line 23}. 

He reached her and asked: ‘‘ What are you doing there, grand- 
mother?” ‘It pulled me down headlong, grandson.” Then she took 
it again on her back and ran. He wenton. Then he saw her again 
sitting down and pushing her load to and fro and singing [page 115, 
lines 3]. [He asked:] “What are you doing there, grandmother?” 
“It pulled me down headlong, grandson.” Five times he overtook 
her, when they reached home. 

[Entsx said:] “‘Now go and bring some water, grandmother, we will 
boil the elk.” His grandmother took five buckets and went out. She 
went a short distance, urinated and filled all the buckets. Then she 
went home. Her grandson asked her: ‘‘ Where did you get that water, 
grandmother?” She named ariver. Then he took up another bucket 
and asked: Where did you get this water, grandmother? “This I 
took from the upper fork of Bear creek,” she replied. Thus she named 
a new creek for each bucket. 

Now they boiled the elk. The old woman turned her back toward 
the fire and made holes in Entsx’s shell spoons, wooden spoons, and 
horn dishes. When the food was done they took it away from the fire. 
Entsx said: “Bring me my shell spoon which I used when I was a 
child.” ‘There is a hole init, grandson.” “Then give me my wooden 
spoon which I used when I was a child.” ‘There is a hole in it, grand- 
son.” “Then give me the spoon made of mountain-sheep horn.” 
“There is a hole in it, grandson.” ‘Then give me my toy canoes which 
ITused when I was a child.” ‘There are holes in them, grandson.” 
‘“Have they all holes?” he said. Then he took the boiling food and 
poured it over his grandmother. She was scalded and her legs and 
arms became doubled up. Then he rolled her up in the elk skin, threw 
her into the river and she drifted down to a place where Winter Robin 
and Blue-Jay were fishing with a dipnet. 

Robin saw an elk skin drifting down and said: “Ah! an elk comes 
down to me.” Then Blue-Jay said: ‘Robin, do you hear? they eall 
us?” Then Robin said: “Ah! an elk comes down to me.” Then Blue- 
Jay said: “Ah! hahahaha.” Five times Robin said: “An elk comes 
down to me.” Then Blue-Jay understood what he said and called 
himself: ‘‘Ah! an elk comes down to me.” ‘Where does it come?” 
[Blue-jay pointed out.] ‘Here, here, here” [pointing in all directions. 
because he did not see it]. Then they saw the elk and took it. They 
put it into their canoe [and saw that| it was tied up. They unfastened 
the strings and [out came| their aunt. ‘Oh, behold our aunt!” “How 
shall we wail for her, Robin?” Then Robin sung: “O, Entsx, Entsx, 
he killed her, he killed her, our aunt, our aunt.” “Thatis a good song,” 
said Blue-Jay. Now they went home, and when they came near their 


roe | ENTS|X MYTH—TRANSLATION. 12) 


town they began to wail. ‘ Oh, the poor ones, how they do wail?” said 
the people. They sang: “ Entsx, Entsx, he killed her, he killed her, our 
aunt, our aunt.” They landed and the people went down to see them. 
Then they carried the body of Upé’qciue up to the house. They tried 
to cure her. After a while she recovered. Then they asked her: 
“ What[?].” She named [a bird]. ‘She named the eldest one,” said 
Blue-Jay. ‘Pull his canoes into the water.” Again they asked her. 
She named Robin. “ She named the eldest one,” said Blue-Jay. She 
named all the people. Last of all she named Blue-Jay. Now they 
launched his canoes and, they went to make war upon Ents;x. Two 
canoes full of people went. 

They went a long distance and met two people asleep, a man and a 
woman. Blue-Jay went ashore. He took the man by his hair in his 
right hand and he took the woman in his left. Then he took them to 
his canoe and made them his slaves. When they traveled along these 
two persons were dancing |in Blue-Jay’s canoe]. The latter said: 
“Robin! These two persons were our grandfather’s slaves; they 
always carried me on the back and led you by the hand. They were 
‘our great-great-grandfather’s slaves.” ‘ Tii-a, they are only your slaves. 
Do you think that I do not know my slaves?” replied Robin. “Pshaw! 
he is older than I am and does not remember it!” Now the two persons 
danced and sang: ‘“ Near the trees we always dance, watlala guyu, guyu, 
guyu, guyu.” 

Then Blue-Jay said: ‘‘They always say: ‘Close to the trees, close to 
the trees’”. “Ia” replied Robin, “thus they will run away from you.” 
And indeed so it happened. [When they got a little farther they came 
to] a tree which hung over the water. [The man and the woman] 
jumped up and escaped by running [over the tree]. Blue-Jay ran in 
pursuit. He came inland. Then he called anah, anah. When he 
came back to the canoe his legs were full of blood [and he said to his 
brother Robin]: “‘ Why did you not go inland? They nearly killed me. 
That man took hold of my head and the woman struck my legs.” [Robin 
laughed and replied:] ‘‘14, they were the squirrel and chipmunk whom 
you caught.” 

They traveled on. They went a long distance and met one man who 
was sitting in his canoe. He fished with a dipnet. Blue-Jay said: 
“My nephew, you have a pretty canoe.” “I borrowed it.” “My 
nephew, you have a pretty paddle.” “TI borrowed it.” ‘My nephew, 
you have a pretty bailer.” “I borrowed it.” ‘My nephew, you have 
a pretty dip-net.” ‘I borrowed it.” ‘My nephew, you have a pretty 
mat in your canoe.” ‘TI borrowed it.” [Then Blue-Jay got angry and 
said:]| ‘Do you borrow everything?” He took hold of his head and 
threw him into his canoe. He said: ‘Give me that rope and I will 
tie him.” [The man whom he had caught replied:] ‘I shall scratch 
your ropes to pieces.” [Then Blue-Jay said:] ‘‘Give me a rope of 
spruce limbs.” “TI shall scratch it to pieces.” ‘What shall I take to 


122 ENTS!X HIS MYTH. [Bonnav or 


ETHNOLOGY 


tie him with? Give me strings of dentalia.” ‘I shall scratch them to 
pieces.” ‘Ha, ha, ha,” he cried then; “sea-grass, sea-grass!” “Give 
me sea-grass, give me sea-grass, quick Robin.” Now he tied the hands 
and the feet of that man. Then he threw him into the water. The 
water began to boil where they had thrown him down. [Blue-Jay 
cried:| ‘“O, my nephew, he scolds. I killed my nephew.” [Robin 
remarked:] ‘Ii, he is laughing at you here.” ‘‘Pshaw, a man does 
not laugh when he is thrown into the water” [said Blue-Jay]. 

Now the people went on, and after awhile they saw a person who 
held arrows in his hands. [He said:] ‘‘Tell me the news, Blue-Jay!” 
“T have nothing to tell you, only that I threw my relative down there 
into the water.” ‘I am the one,” said that person. ‘T1i,” cried Robin, 
“that is the one whom you threw into the water.” 

They went on to Ents;x’s house. They surrounded it and set it on 
fire. When it began to burn Ents;x flew out through a knothole. — 
When the whole house was burnt, Blue-Jay found a [mink’s] head. 
‘¢Oh that is Ents; x’s head!” he shouted. But Robin said: “Ti, he went 
out already.” Now the people went home and left Ents; x. 


9. OK; UNO’ ITCA'KXANAM. 
THE CROW HER STORY. 


uxéla/itiX okj;und’ Lqui/numike tga’a. Golata’ go id’e ikoalex-oa 


There was the crow five her Attheend there there the raven 
children. of the house was 
itca’lé okjund’. O’lo kiax. A’gon 60/Lax no/ya-y- okjuno’. 
her cousin the crow. Hungry they were. The next day she went the crow. 


Na/ckta. 
She searched on the beach. 
“Ne‘exatkja’ @/maL_ cia/xak’ago’x. Qulquiqulqul  é’quiqul 
“T haul them [dual] the bay its [#]. [Noise of empty vessels being struck] 
tcind’- Lawatckut.” Ljap agkE’xax OkulXtE/mX. Aga/kLtEq. WiXt 
he [?]. me.? Find she did it a poggy. She kicked it. Again 
no’ya kula/yi. WiXt akto’/pEna tga/éwam. 
she went far. Again she named it her song. 
“Ne/exatk; a’  e/maL  cia/xak’ago’x. Quiqulqulqul = é’quiqul 
‘T haul them [dual] the bay its [?] [Noise of empty vessels being struck] 
teind‘Lawatckut.” Ljap akxa/x upki/cX. Aga/kLtEq. WiXt n0o’ya. 
hey {-7]..5 me.” Find = shedidit a flounder. She kicked it. Again she went 
WiXt akto’pEna tga/ewam fas above]. Ljap agkE/xax uko/tckote. 
Again she named it her song {as above]. Find she did it a porpoise. 
Aga/kLtEq. WiXt nod’ya. WiXt akto’cgam tga/éwam |as above]. 
She kicked it. Again shewent. Again she took it her song [as above]. 
Liap akxa’x 0/lXait. Aga/kLtEq. WiXt nd’ya, wiXt akto’/cgam 
Fine — she did it a seal. She kicked it. Again shewent, again she took it 
tga/ewam [as above]. WiXt Ljap aga/yax éna’/kxon. MO0/keti 
her song {as above]. Again find she did it a sturgeon. Twice 
na/ixLako. Agié/taqL, agé/kLtEq. WiXt nod’/ya, he4. Akto’/cgam 
she wentaroundit. She left it, she kicked it. Again she went, he. She took it 
tga’/ewam [as above]. Liap aga/yax igé’pix'L. Agé/xLak6, LO/ni 
her song [as above]. Find she did it asealion. She went around it, three 
times 


agé/xLako. Ageé/kLtEq; agikE’/ItaqL. WiXt akto/cgam tga/éwam 
she went around it. She kicked it; she left it. Again she took it her song 
[as above]. No’ya kula/i, Ljap aga/yax é’kolé. AgExLa/nukL; 
{as above]. She went far, find she did it awhale. She went often around 
it; 
la’‘kté agé/xLako. Agé/kLtEq. WiXt agé/kLtEq, wiXt agé/kLtkq. 
four times she wentaroundit. She kicked it. Again she kicked it, again she kicked it. 
LEK" né’xax itca‘towit. “Ana/3, itcuwita’3!” acaxa/lqiLx. NO’ptega-y- 
Break it did her leg. ‘“‘Anah, my leg!”’ she cried. She went inland 
a/lta. Qju’‘tq;ut agE’Lax Lgé/wan. Kau aga’yax itca’towit. A/Ita 
now. Pull out she did it grass. Tie she did it her leg. Now 
wiXt no’ya. Mank kula/i no/ya. Ljap aga/yax igua/nat. “Ana/-y- 
again shewent. Alittle far she went. Find — she did it a salmon. “Anah 
iteukuna’t, ana’ iteukuna’‘t.” Nau‘itck, kjoa’‘nkjoan  na/xoa. 
my salmon, anah my salmon.” She danced, glad she was. 
Agélgitk go Lga/cgo-ic. A’‘Ita na’/Xko. Qjoa/2p naXko/mam ka 
She putitinto in her mat. ~ Now she wenthome, Nearly she arrived at house and 
agh/LfElkEl Léa/kil. Qjoa’p kat é/ka agoqgoa‘lakL. “A-y- utcaktea’k 
she saw her a woman. Nearly there she recognized her. “Ah, the eagle 
tan; !” La naga/‘ttm. “E’/kta amid/ctxul?” “A,  igua/‘nat.” 
behold!’ Sometime she met her. “What do you carry?” “Ah, a salmon.” 


123 


oO wnon ® oO FE WW ND — 


SH me 
— © 


ho 


wey (eo CSP Er) 


124 OKjUNO HER STORY. cape 


“Teoxo iamxEmeEla Ema. JameElo/ta Xak ugk’q;’@Lxam.” “ TinLa/- 
“Well I wish to buy it from you. Ishall give you that my coat.”’ ‘They 


utama-é6 Lq;’éLxa’/puke.” “Kia tedxd, iam#lo’ta igica/Ok.” 
are Lying about coats.” “And well, I shall give you my blanket.” 
“B/kta nigEla‘xo é@0’/k. O/xu-ée tga/dke.” “Tedxd, iamElo’ta 
‘What shall I do with it blanket. Many my blankets.”’ ‘* Well, I shall give you 
itcE/metaa.” “E/kta nigEla’/x6 1f/metaa. LO/nas a/xaui-y- 0/miqetit 
my hat.” ‘What shall I do with it a hat. Perhaps many your lice * 
gd imémeta.” “Teux, tamelo’ta tgn’/kcia.” “E’kta anigukué/xa 
in your hat.” “Well, I shall give them my hands.” ‘““What shallI do with them 
to you 
tEmé‘keia. xité/k nai‘ka wiXt tgn/kcia.” “ Ni‘xua, a‘xkja XaX 
your hands. These I also my hands.” “Well, pullitout this 
opa/owil!” No/ya-y- utc;akte;a’k, aga’xkja qaX dopa/owil. Nau‘i 


d 
TBE: 


bunch of grass!"’ She went the eagle, she pulled it out that bunch of grass. At once 


Laq a/qxax. “Tea! a/mElaxta a/xk;ax.” No’ya-y- 0kjun0d’, qe’xtcé; 
comeout it did. ‘Now you next pull it out.” She went the crow intending; 
qe/xteé aya/xkja. Niiket Laq a/qxax. “Tedx0, cgk/xost ctamElo’ta; 
intending shepulleditout. Not comeout it did. “Well, myeyes I shall give them 
to you; 
go2 kula/i, a’‘nqate i/kta amia/qxamt.” “E’/kta  nicgkla/xo eqoct. 
then tar already something you see it.” “What shall Ido with them eyes. 
xicté/k wiXt nai/ka cgk/xoket.” “Kj;a tcedx0, mLEnge’gsta.” Nag; 
These also I my eyes.” “And well, louse me.” Naqj 
o/qXuketi Lga/qamé. “Tcedx mai’‘ka Lamgeé’qsta.” Alta Lagk’kXeéqst 
her lice her plate full. ‘ Well you I louse you.” Now she loused her 
ok; und’. A/lta @/éwam a’teax Okjund’. Ala/xti nao’ptit. Aqit’egam 
the crow. Now sleepy she became the crow. Atlast she fellasleep. It was taken 
itca/kunat 6k;und’. Agid’cgam ute akte;a’k. Aqa‘lEgitk upa’‘owil go 
her salmon the crow’s. She took it the eagle. It was put into abunchof in 
grass 


Lga/ego-ic. Aqa/yuk"7 itea/kunat k"ca/xalé go-y- e’‘makte. Naxk/loko, 
her mat. It was carried her salmon up on spruce tree. She awoke, | 
alta k*ea/xalé itea/kunat aqixé/lax. Ia/xkati ka nuquna/-itix:. 
now up her salmon it was eaten. There then she fell down. 
“Qana/xtel 6@/mop!a manit’o’/La,” ka acilga/ox. Aqaqljuwa/ema 
‘Please the gills throw themdownto and shelayonher They were thrown [soft 
me,”’ se back. things] down to her 
oé/mop!a kja Lga/xEmakiket. A/2lta na/Xko, nagk’tsax okj uno’. 
the gills and its roe. Now she went home, she cried the crow. 
NaXko/mam go tH/LaqL. NO’/p!am. Lxéla/étix:Lga/a. Ak70lEkte qo’/La 
She arrived at at their house. Shecamein. There were herchil- She roasted it that 
home dren. 


LgEma’kiket: “Ai/aq ma/ya Ltcuq,” axgE/qxun ugo’/xo. “Ome’xa-y- 0c.” 
Troe: “Quick, gofor water,” the eldest one her “The next is there.” 
daughter. one 


WiXt agd/IXam aé/Xat ugod’xd: “ Ma/ya Lteugq.” ‘¢OQmé/xa-y- 6c.” 
Again she said to her one her daughter: ‘‘Go for water.” ‘‘Thenextone isthere.” 
WiXt agd/lXam aé/Xat ugd’/xd: “‘Ma‘ya Lteuq.” “Omée’xa -y-0c.” 
Again she said to her one  herdaughter: ‘‘Go for water.” ‘The nextone is there.” 


LEla‘/ktike akLo/IXam qgé/xteé. Alta qaX Ogué/s’ax ugod’/xo no‘ya - 


Four she said to them intending. Now that youngest one her she went 
daughter for 


Lteug. AkLE/tk'yam Lteug. A/Ita qjoa’/p Lo‘kteikta itea‘lekteala. 
i 


water. She arrived bringing water. Now nearly it was done . what she roasted. 
Alta naxEmé/2nako. “Take na tkjOp ank/xax?” “K/ka Lal.” 
Now she washed her face. “Then [int. part.] white I became?” “Thus black.” 
WiXt naxEmé/nako. WiXt akLuwa/amtcxoko tga/a. ALgo’/lXam: 
Again she washed her face. Again she asked them her-children. They said to her: 


“éka iil” Take atcd’/pEna ikoalé/x-oa, atcLo/egam itca/lEktcal. 
“Thus  black.’’ Then he jumped the raven, he took it what she roasted. 


~Sae THE CROW STORY—TRANSLATION. 125 


Atciaxh/cgam, ateLa’wilé ka/nauwé. A/Ita wixt nagn/tsax 6k;un0’. 


He took it away, he ate 1t all. Now again she cried the crow. 
Alta nixo/keti ikoalé’x‘oa. NixEma’tsta-itck. Na’ponEm ka takE 
Now he lay down the raven. He was ashamed of himself. It grewdark and _ then 

a’/yate;a nixa’/lax ikoalé’xoa. Alta ne/ktexam: 
his sickness came to be the raven. Now he sang his conjuror’s song: 
on him 


“O/kuali/pka‘n qau  ayi’tkja’ iteé/é/ya/xota’ qau Lé/yaLa‘/m. 
‘\A brass pin qau hit it my eye qau its pupil be- 
came opaque, 


Qoa’/qoaxqoii’, qoa/qoaxqo’’, qoa/qoaxqoi’.” 


Qoa'qoaxqoii’, qoa/qoaxqoa’, qoa'qoaxqod’.” 
Li2, aqLugdoJEmam oqoLxé/la. Ka/nauwé aqLugo/lEmam ka 
Some time, the people went to the crabs. All the people went to and 
fetch them fetch them 
tga’a dqoLxé/la. A/‘Ita aLé/xEltEq ikoalé’/x‘oa. TakE  aLo/cko-it 
their the crabs’, Now he heated stones the raven. Then they were hot 
children ; 
Lqa/nake. A/‘Ita aq@a/ixpoé. Take aLxLo’lExa-it LqaLxé/la: 
the stones. Now the door was Then he thought a crab: 
locked. 
“QEIXE]xé’ya.” A/2lta aqa/LXatuq ka/nauwe ka tga/a. Aqua/kXOpk 
“Ttiscookedforus.’ Now they werethrown all and their They were steamed 
on the stones young ones. 
alta. Anod/ktcikt OquLxé’/la: “Ai‘aq meLxa/lEm,” aqLo/lXam 
now. They got done the crabs: “Quick eat,” they were told 
0kj’und’ kja tga’a. Take itjo’/kti né/xax é/teamxte 6kj’und’. 
the crow and herchildren. ‘Then good became her heart the crow's. 
ALXLxa‘leEm kja tga/a. 
They ate and her children. 
Translation. 


There were the Crow and her five children. At the end of their house 
lived her cousin the Raven. They were hungry, and one day she went 
to look for food on the beach. She sang|page 123, line 4]. She found a 
poggy, kicked it and wenton. She repeated her song. Soon she found 
a flounder. Again shesang her song. Then she found a seal; she kicked 
it and went on. Againshe sang hersong. Then she found a sturgeon. 
She went around it twice, then she left it and kicked it. She went on 
and repeated her song. Then she found a sealion; three times she 
went around it. She kicked it and left it. She repeated her song. 
She went along distance and found a whale. Four times she went 
around it, then she kicked it and kicked it again. She broke her leg. 
“Oh, my leg,” she cried. She went up to the woods, pulled out some 
grass and tied it on to her leg. She went on and after a little while 
she found a salmon. “Oh! my salmon,” she said. She was very glad 
and danced. She put it into her mat and went home. When she had 
almost arrived at her house she saw a woman. When she came nearer 
she recognized her. ‘Behold! the eagle,” she said. The latter said: 
‘What do you carry there?” “Oh,” she replied, “A salmon.” “TI 
wish to buy it; I will give you my coat.” ©‘ Plenty of coats are lying 
about in my house.” ‘I will give you my blanket.” ‘* What shall I 
do with your blanket? I have many blankets.” ‘I will give you my 
hat.” ‘What shall I do with your hat? May be it is full of lice.” “TI 


Ou 


11 
12: 


a . a BUREAU OF 
126 OKjUNO. HER STORY. ETHNOLOGY 


will give you my hands.” ‘ Whatshall I do with your hands? I have 
hands as well.” ‘Pull out that bunch of grass.” The eagle went and 
pulled out the bunch of grass, which gave way at once. Then she 
said, ‘‘ Now you try to pull it out.” The Crow went and tried to pull it 
out. It did not give way. “I will give you my eyes; you will be able to 
see a long distance.” ‘ What shall I do with your eyes? I have eyes 
as well.” The eagle said: ‘‘Louse me.” She did so and found a plate 
full of lice. {After she had finished the eagle said:] ‘‘ Now I will louse 
you.” She loused the Crow, who became sleepy and finally fell asleep. 
Then the eagle took the salmon and put a bunch of grass in her mat. 
She carried it to the top of a spruce tree. When the Crow awoke she 
saw the eagle sitting on top [of the spruce tree] eating her salmon. 
Then [she was so much grieved that she fell down atonce. She asked 
the eagle]: ‘Please give me the gills.” The Crow lay on her back 
and the eagle threw down the gills and the roe. The Crow went home 
angry. Shearrived there. Herchildren were inthe house. Shecame 
to her children. She roasted the salmon roe. [She asked] her eldest 
daughter: ‘“‘Go and get some water.” [She replied:] “The next 
younger one is there.” She asked another one of her daughters: ‘Go 
and get some water.” [Shereplied:| ‘The next younger one is there.” 
She asked four of them. Now her youngest daughter brought her 
some water. When the salmon roe was nearly done she washed her 
face. [She asked her daughters:] ‘“‘Is my face white now?” ‘No, it 
is still black.” She washed it again and asked her children once more: 
“Ts my face white?” ‘No, it is still black.” Then the raven jumped 
up and took what she was roasting. He took it away and ate it all. 
Then the Crow cried again and the raven lay down. He was ashamed 
of himself. In the evening he fell sick and sang his conjurer’s song: 
‘“‘O, my brass pin hit my eye and it got blind, qoaqoaxqoii’, qoaqoaxqoa’, 
qoaqoaxqoii’ !” 

After a while they went and asked the crabs and their young ones to 
come. The raven heated stones and when they were hot he shut the 
door. Then a crab thought: “ He is cooking for us.” But they threw 
all of them on the stones, old and young. They were steamed. When 
they were done he said to the Crow and her children: ‘*Come eat!” 
Now she was glad, and she ate, together with her children. 


10. CA’/XAL ITA’KXANAM. 


CA‘/xaL HIS MYTH. 


Ca/xaL ayo/mEqt ia’xa, ixgE’kXun ia/xa. Wax ia’qxulqt. Kula‘i 


“Ca’xaL he was dead his son, the oldest his son. Every he wailed. Far 
morning 
go ma/Lné ayoLa’-ita-itx. I0/2Lqté gua’/nsum néXEnXEné’max, 
at seaward he always stayed. A long time always he went to wail on 
the beach, 
néXEnXEnéma’-itx. QaxLxanaa/Lax atei/ctElkE] ckoalé’x-oa. Yau‘a 
he always went to wail on One day he saw them two ravens. Then 


the beach. 
= = . = = = . i 7 = = 
ma/Lné aci/tptegam. Qj oa’p acge/txam yaua’ actik; éla’/pXuitxe, yaua 
seaward they er the Nearly they reachedthere they turned over each other, there 
and. him 


actik; ela’pXuitxé. Qjoa’/p acgé/txam ka nicxE’luktco. L0/210 i/kta 
they turned overeachother. Nearly they reached him and they let it fall. Around thing 
nicxEukteo. Ayuquna/étix't gO Lkamila/lEq. A’yOLx atciugd/lEmam. 
they let it fall. It lay there on the sand. He went he went to take it. 
down to the beach, 


Atcio/egam, a‘Ita ikté/lowa-itk. Tso’yusté ka né’Xko. Takk atco/]Xam 
He took it, now anabalone shell. In the evening and he went Then he said to her 
home. 


uya/k-ikala: “UgurExé/mam qo’tac téx‘Em ka/nauwé.” Takk 
his wife: “Invite them those people all.” Then 
no‘ya-y- uya/kikala. A2, atcEmcgElé’/mOL qéauq  Lid/xauyam.” 
she went his wife. A, he invites you much that poor one.” 
Take a/tgé tia/1Xam ka/nauwe. Takk a/tgEp! go ta/yaqL ka/nauwe. 
Then they went his people all. Then they.entered in his house all. 
“A, xixi’k qegingé’‘tkeptcgam. xixi’/k megid/‘kumanEma. Iakpa’ 
“Ah, this they brought it up to the shore This you will see it. Just there 
to me. 


aci‘tptegam.” TakE né‘kim  iqjé’/sq;és. ‘“WuxXi 1xd’yaya; 
they came ashore.” Then he said tata ‘To-morrow we will go; 
lxy0/xtkinEmama qaxé’ gd ack/kitk™7.” Kawi/2x: ka nixk/nkon 


we will search for it where from _ they brought it.” Early and he ran 
ige’sqes. ‘“Ai’aq, ai/aq, ai‘aq amcxEla/yutck.” TakkE nuxula/yutck 
blue-jay. “Quick, quick, quick rise.) = Then they arose 
télx-Em kanauwé’. TakE aqo/icgiLx mokct okuni’m. A/‘Ita a/tgé 
the people all. Then they hauled two canoes. Now they 
down to the went 
water 
ma/tné té/lx‘Em a/lta. Take kula/i a/‘tge. A’lta cka LEI 
seaward the people now. Then tar they went. Now and almost 
disap- 
peared 
Lpaka/‘IeEma. TakE atgée’tElkE] éle’é. Take né‘k'im_  iqgé‘sqés: 
the mountains. §Then they saw it a land. Then he said blue-jay : 
“Ta/xkati taL; ikté/luwa-itk né/xaué.” Lia atxigela‘mamé. A/lta 
‘There behold the abalone shells were.” Some they landed. Now 
time 
cka pa2L @/Xoc ikte/luwa-itk. A’lta ataa/luLX té/lx‘-Em. Alta 
and full itwason abalone shells. Now they wentashore the people. Now 
ground 
atgiomé’tckin qixi’x: ikté/luwa-itk; qia’/x ia/xka pat gqptciX 
they took them these abalone shells; if that very green 
tex'l aLgid’/egamX. Iqé’/sqés ia/xka god qjoa’p kat  ikani’m 
then they took it. Blue-jay he then near that canoe 


127 


15 


16 


Li 


18 


19 


20 
21 


Ono me CG bh 


Al : 
128 CA’XAL HIS MYTH. [ erenocedke 


ka ateciupa’/yaLx. TakE a/yo; niv’e/taqL  iLa/xak; Emana. 
and he gathered them. Then he went; he left them their chief. 
Ayux0/Lak6 q0’/ta LEX. Qia’x ia/qoa-iL, tex'l atcid’cgamx, qia’x 
He wentaroundit that island. If a large one, then he took it, if 
pat qptciX texi atcid/egam. TakE aLgiuLa/win iLa/Xak;Emana. 
really green then he took it. Then they waited for him their chief. 
TakE 0/10 aga’‘yax iqé’sqés. “Wu/ska lxéeld’qua.” Nugd’/kXom 
Then hunger acteduponhim blue-jay. “Heh! we will leave him.” They said 
aqa’m Xike: “Kj; é, qa/doXoé lxégumLa/ita. LO’/nas ayuk0/om té/lx-Em.” 
part of them: “No, must we wait for him. Perhaps he met them people.” --.. 


Né‘k-im igé/sqés: “Tca Ilxéelta’qua.” Tsd’/yusté né/xaué, takpi’ 
Evening it became then ~— 


He said blue-jay : ‘Come we will leave him.’ 
atEé'taqL tia/cdlal. Iqé’/sqés ia/Xaqamt. NO/Xoko tia/cola. Tsd’/yusté 
they left him his relatives. Blue-jay his mind. hes went his relatives. In the evening 

ome 


ka ayox0/Lako6 LEX. A/‘Ita kjé tia’cola; atké’taqL. Ia’/xkati 

and he wentaround the island. Now nothing his relatives; they left him. There 

ké/kXulé-y- 6/mtEcX nixo’kcté. A/lta nigE’tsax: “Ekta’2 atgéneé/lotk | 
below a tree he lay down. Now he cried: ‘“What they deserted me 

agE1Xam, qa tkLEnté’/taqL agE/lXam.” A/‘Ita ia/xkaté né/xax 

my people, where they left me my people.” Now there he was 
id‘Lqaté. A’Ita atcid’/koé ka/nauwé x‘ixi’x: ikté/lauwa-itk. QaxLxa- 
a long time. Now he canted them all those abalone shells. The 
often 


naa/Lax éla/ki Ljap atcia/x. QaxLxanaa/Lax kawi’X néxk/V0ko. 
next day an otter find he did it. The next day early he awoke. 
A'lta oxoi’teot télx‘Em gd Lia/maLna. Atcid‘latek ia/6k. Neé’k-ikst 
Now they talked people at seaward from him. He lifted it his blanket. ~ He looked 
ma/Lne. Ta’‘mka tqonéqoné’ oxoela/itX. WiXt néxEnk;é’/Litso. 
seaward, Only gulls there were. Again he pulled his blanket 
over his head. 


Wax wiXt né’/ktcukté. WiXt atcauitca‘ma té/lx‘Em oxoi’tcot 
Every again it got day. Again he heard them people they talked 
morning ; 
go ma/Lne. Goyé’ atci/Lax, atcLo’latck. A/‘Ita ta’mka Ltamila/ike 
at seaward. Thus he did it, he lifted it. Now only albatross 
Lxeéla/itX. Qoié/nEmi aya/qoyaé ateawitcE’mElée té/lx‘Em. Kawi'X 
there were. Five times his sleeps he heard them people. Early 
ka aLigEm0o’tXu-it LgdLé/IEXEmk. AqLOo’latek Lia/ok. “Wu/Xé 
and it stood near him a person. It was lifted his blanket. ‘‘ To-morrow 
a/Ita gamo‘/k"ya; qam/’alo’/kctxama.” Wax ne’ktcukté. TakE wiXt 
now you willbe carried; you will be carried The next it got day. Then again 
on back.” morning 


aLgEm0o‘tXu-it LgdLéIEXEmk. ALgid//Xam: “Mxa/latek! <A/Ita 
it stood near him a person. He said to him: “Arise! Now 
qamo’k"7a.” Née‘kiket iau’a ma/Lnée. Alta e@’kolé yuquna/itX. 
you will be carried.” He looked there seaward. Now a whale there lay. 
A‘lta ateio’/kXuiLx ia/ktElauwa-itk. A/lta Lxoa’p iké’x ka/‘tsEk qiX 
Now he Serie es the his abalone shells. Now a hole was inmiddle that 
eac 
é/kolé. A/lta ia/xkaté aqéiLa/étamit: ‘“ Néket mgeé/kctaié, ma/nix 
whale. Now then he was put into it: ‘Not open your eyes, when 
aqamo/k"yqa.” A/‘Ita nixo’ketit, a/lta aqa/yuk"7. A/Ita atga/yuk"7 
you are carried.” Now he lay down, now he was carried. Now they carried him 
télx‘Em ka/nauwé. A/‘lta nuguqLé/watck. AqLoXam Ltamila/yike, . 
the people all. Now they paddled. They were told the albatross, 
aqLo1Xam Lqat!é/wuLala: “Ke’kXulé LEmea/cgi.” AqLolXam 
they were told the pelicans: “* Down your paddles.” They were told 
Lqoné/qoné: “ K*ca/xalé LEmea/cgi.” Agd/lXam 0é’Xsa: “ K"ea/xali 
the gulls: “Up vour paddles."' They were told the snipes: “Up 
LEmea/egi.” Ka ma‘Lné aqga’mXike kjé n0d/xox.q0’/tac té/lx'Em. 
your paddles.”’ And at sea partof them nothing became those people. 


AS bgt 


X% = 
eae CAXAL MYTH. 129 


Q;oa’p ile’é aqa/mXike kjé no’x6x qOd’tac té/lx‘Em. A‘Ita a/mka-y- 
Wear land part of them nothing became those people. Now only 
oé’Xsa kja tqonéqoné’, Nix-gEla’/kux ka 1a/XlaX né/xax. Kja 
snipes and gulls. He felt and rock it did. Silent 
no’x6x q0’tac té/lxEm ka/nauwé ka atcia/latek ia/Ok. Alta god 
they became those people all and he lifted it his blanket. Now there 
ma/Lxdlé yuquna’-itX. Né/k-ikst a/Ita, a’mka-y- 6é’Xsa ka tqonéqoné’. 
landward he lay. He looked now, - only snipes and gulls. 
Alta nixalatek. Atcid’/ketEptck ka/nauwé ia‘ktélauwa-itk. 
Now he rose. He carried inland all his abalone shells. 
Ateio’/ketEptck qix: élage‘tEma = ka/nauwé. Qoa/nEm Lqjup 


He earried inland those sea otters all. Five eut 


atea/‘yax qix: @kolé. A/2ka aqid/IXam, aLgid’IXam_  qd’La 
he did it that whale. Thus he was told, he said to him that 
LgoLée1XEmk. A‘Ita wiXt né’Xtako qix: é’kolé. A/Ita 4/yoptck 
person. Now again he turned back that whale. Now ‘he went up 
qjoa’p go tE’/LaqL ka ay0’La-it. I0/Iqté ayod’La-it ka atcE/L&ElkeEl 
near at hishouse and _he stayed. Alongtime hestayed and he saw it 
Lkja’cke. ALE‘te, qjoa’/p aLgé/txam. 
a child. It came, near it came to him. 
ALga/Lata-y- uLa‘xalaitan. Qjoa’p na-ikmo/tXu-it. Ated/egam, 
It shot : its arrow. Near it stuck in the ground. He took it, 
ateaLxxa/peot. ALE’te ka aLgo’/xtkin uLa/xalaitan. Niket Ljap 
he hid it. Itcame and_ it reached for it its arrow. Not find 
aLi/kXaxa uLa/xalaitan ka aLge’tcax: ‘“Atcuwa’, mai/kXa igé/sqés 
it did it its arrow and it cried: ‘*Oh, you blue-jay, 
mEnXi‘peit ogu’Xalaitan. AmLEnElxa/-uyam igé’/sqés. Tate; au! 
you hide from me my arrow. You make me poor blue-jay. See! 
wiXt amEnx‘EnEmO’sx‘Ema-itx. A/nét dgu/xalaitan.” K;é@ néket 
again you tease me always. Give me my arrow.” Nothing not 
LE’Laqso q0/La Lkjasks. A/Ita Lkj;0’pLkjop  Leta/xdés. Ema/sen 
its hair that child. Now sunken its eyes. Deer 
a‘yaqso iLa/oq. TakE ateLO’/egam iLa/poté. TakE ateLd/lXam: 
itsskin its blanket. Then he took it at its arm. Then he said to it: 
“La‘kstama?” “A, nai‘kXa,” aLgio/IXam. “AqgéLa/‘taqL LgE/mama. 
‘“Who are you?” ‘Ah, 1 it said to him. ‘* He was left my father. 
Iqe’sqes atceeLa‘qal.”. TakE atci/Luk"y go Ltceuq qod/La Lk; asks. 
blue-jay he left him.” . Then he carried it to water that child. 
TakE atcLomé/nako. Alta po’po atci/Lax go Leta’/xds.  A/Ita 
Then he washed its face. Now blow he did it on its eyes. Now 
aLE’k‘ikst. A/‘Ita ateLo‘IXam: “Nai/ka, nai‘ka aqX. Take 
it saw. Now he said to it: uh fe Dip child. Then 
anXatgo/‘mam.”  TakE  atcé/xaluketgd iLa/Ok q0d/La_ Lia‘xa. 
I came home.” Then he threw it away its blanket that his child's. 
AtciLkLXa/nako éla’kée. “Ai’‘aq mxané’/tk7eél t!aya/na mexéla’-itix:?” 
He put around it the sea otter. ‘‘ Quick, tell me good [int. part.] you are?” 

“ Teintex:go/mitit iq; &’/sqés. Qi’ctac moket cEmé’kikala 
‘‘He made us poor blue-jay. Those two your wives 
kanasm0’kst a/Ita cia/k-ikala iq;é/sqés. Manix L’é/tex-eniL aLgia’x 

both now his wives blue-jay’s. When wanting to defecate he does 
atcLauwe’tcxamx go th/ntcaqL ka ia/xka itea/Ok ka aniyé/nanLxax. 
he goes to defecate in ourhouse and _ this my blanket and I wipe him with it. 
A‘Ita emé’/ketka néket tq;éx acga/yax.” “Ai/aq ega/lemam.” “A 
-Now two only not like they didhim.”” ‘Quick bring them.” “Athi 
neket icta‘keqamt, Lkj60’pLkjop  cta/xés.”  A’Ita né/Xko_ ia/xa, 
not they seeing, sunken their eyes.” Now he went home his son 
atcio’ko. Atcugd’‘lEmam Lia/naa. Atcd/lXam_ Lia/naa: “ TakE 

he sent him. He went to fetch her his mother. He said to her his mother: “Then 
LgE’‘mama niXatgo’/mam.” TakE nagh/tsax Lia/naa. Acxé/nim 
my father he came home.” Then she cried his mother, They two wailed 


BULL. T.—20 9 


6 6 = Ss or me. OS ON 


pt he 
~~ S 


12 


Oo oo F—- ®W to = 


“I 


Con (60 


10 


11 


12 
13 
14 
15 
16 


it) 


18 


19 


20 


130 : CA’'XAL HIS MYTH. Bea 


qaX a/éXat o80/kuil. “Iqj;é@’sqjés atcimad’/nima-itx. La’XlaX 
that one woman. ‘* Blue-jay always fools you. Deceive 
ateima’xo-itx.” “Nau/itka, nau/‘itka, LgE’mama aLté/mam. A/lta 
he always does you.” ** Indeed, indeed, my father he came. Now 
itei/kéqamt Xok. AtcnE/tokO ayamtga‘lEmam. Ni’Xua_ i/skam 
I seeing now. He sent me I came to fetch you. Well take 
x‘ik itea/Ok.” Agid’/sgam Lia/naa. A’‘lta LEmME’n qix:  ia/O0k. 
this my blanket.” She took it his mother. Now soft that his blanket. 


“Ta‘teja! mcEnE’luat.”. TakE  atci/etuk"y Lia/‘naa qaX a/eXat. 


‘‘Look! youdid notbelieveme.” Then he brought them to his father that vone. 


o%0/kuil. Ated/ptea. Ated/k"7am gd A/yam. A/Ita ateumé/nako. 
woman. He led them. He arriftd bringing at his father. Now he washed their 
her faces 


Alta cE’k-ikst. A’lta ated/lXam: “Ai‘aq, mcktigué/xéyam tE’/lxaqL. 
Now they saw. Now hesaidtothem:  ‘ Quick, go and sweep our house. 
Ka/nauwé2 mekttigué’xéya. TakE a/LO. A’‘lta aLkto’/guaxé tE’/LaqL, 
The whole sweep it. Then they went. Now they swept it their house, 


ka/nauwé aLkto’guexé, Alta aLgio/kué ka/nauwé we/wuLe. ALgi0’/kué © 


the whole they swept it. Now they carried all into interior They carried 
them much of house. much 


qix: é’/kolé ka/nauwé wé/wuLe. ALgid/kué qix: élagé/tEma we/wuLe. 
that whale all into theinterior ‘hey carried those sea-otters into the inte- 
of the house. them much rior of the house. 


Takk aya’ckop!, Ca/xaL takE aya/ckop!. Aya’qx6ié; kawi/X ateixa’/laqL 
Then heentered, Ca/xaL then he entered. One sleep; early he opened 
ige’p lal iqe’sqés. A‘lta atcLa/auwiteXa go ige’ptal iqe’/sqges. “ Ai/aq 
the door blue-jay. Now he defecated in the door-way blue-jay. “Quick 
E/npéyucX, ntq;é/ xEnapstam.” “ A’ckam Xau = o0/lEptckiX. 

E‘npeyucX, wipe me!" “Take it that fire-brand. 
Ama-ilo‘ktgute go-y- tya’pute.” TakE atco’cgam qix: ik; a’sks. A‘ita 
Push nee in his anus. Then he took: it that hay: Now 
atea-ilo/ktgux gd-y- uya’pute. “Ana’” takE atcixE/lgiLx i1qé/sqés. 
he pushed him into his anus. ‘‘Anah!” then he cried blue-jay. 
“Ana’! teEnxE/LElama. TakE Lx niga’t!om a/yam ka atcnxE/Lama.” 
‘Anan! they burnt me. Then maybe hearrived hisfather and he burnt me.” 
Née‘k-ikst @’wa wé’wuLé igé/sqés. A’Ita i0’e iLa’Xak;Emana go 
He iooked then [into] the in- blue-jay. Now there their chief at 
terior of the house was 


we’wuLée. Né@/xanko, néxk"Lée/tegom: “A, ilxa’/XakjEmana takE 
the interior of He ran, he went to tell them: ACh: our chief then 
the house. 


nité/mam.” A/Ita atkté/lot ka‘nauwe tga/ktema tia’ Xam; ka/nauwe 
he arrived.” Now he gave to all his property his people, all 
them 


ita/ktélauwa-itk atge’lot. 


the abalone shells he gave them. 
Translation. 


Ca’/xaL’s eldest was dead. Every morning he went to the beach 
and wailed. Day by day he went to the beach and cried. Once upon 
a time he discovered two ravens flying from the sea towards the shore. 
When they came near him he saw that they turned [in the air] over 
one another. [Sometimes the one was above, then the other.] When 
they had almost reached him they let fall a round object, which fell on 
the sand. He went down to the beach and took it. It was an abalone 
shell. In the evening he went home. Then he said to his wife: “ Invite 
all the people.” His wife went and said: “*My poor husband invites 
you.” Then all the people came and entered the house. He said: 


aa 


CHINOOK CA’XAL MYTH—TRANSLATION 131 


“This was carried up to me from the sea. You will see it. Just there 
they came ashore.” Blue-Jay said: ‘Let us go to-morrow and see 
where they found it.” Early he ran around |saying]: ‘Quick, quick, 
arise!” All the people arose and launched two canoes. Then they 
went out seaward. They traveled a long distance. When the moun- 
tains {of their own country| had almost disappeared they discovered 
land. Blue-Jay said: “Certainly here are abalone shells.” After awhile 
they landed. The ground was full of abalone shells. The people went 
ashore and picked up these abalone shells. They selected only the 
very green ones. Blue-Jay gathered those which were near the canoe. 
Then their chief [Ca‘xaL] went away and left them. He went around 
the island. He took only the large and very green ones. The people 
_ waited for their chief. Then Blue-Jay became hungry, and said: ‘ Let 
us leave him.” But part of the people said: ‘No; we must wait for 
him; perhaps he met some people.” |After awhile] Blue-Jay said: 
“Come! Let us leave him.” It grew dark; then his people left him. 
They followed Blue Jay’s advice and went home. In the evening the 
chief had gone around the island. Now his people had disappeared ; 
they had left him. Then he lay down under a log and cried: ‘* Why 
did my people desert me; why did they leave me?” He stayed there 
for along time. He carried all the abalone shells |up to the log]. On 
the next day he found a seaotter. On the following morning he awoke 
and heard people talking on the beach below him. He lifted his 
blanket and looked seaward, but he saw only gulls. He pulled his 
blanket over his head again. On the next morning, when it grew day- 
light, he heard again people talking on the beach below. Again he 
lifted his blanket, but there were only albatross. Five days he heard 
people |talking on the beach]. On the next morning [he saw] a person 
standing by him. He lifted his blanket [and the stranger said]: “To- 
morrow you will be carried back.” EHarly the next morning the per- 
son stood again near him, and said: ‘Arise; now you will be carried 
back.” He looked down to the beach and saw a whale. He carried 
down his abalone shells. A hole was in the middle of the whale, into 
which he was placed. |The person said:] ‘‘ Do not open your eyes 
while they are carrying you.” Now he lay down and he was carried 
away. All the people carried him. They paddled. The albatross and 
pelicans were told: “‘Put down your paddles; put down your paddles.” 
The gulls were told: ‘Put up your paddles, put up your paddles.” 
The snipes were told: “Put up your paddles, put up your paddles.” 
Then when they were at sea, part of those people departed. When 
they were near the land another part departed. Now only the snipes 
and gulls remained. He felt [the whale] rock, then all was quiet and 
he lifted his blanket. He lay on the beach. He looked and saw only 
gulls and snipes. Now he arose. He went inland, carrying all his 
abalone shells and the sea otters. He took five cuts of the whale. 
That person had told him to do so. Then that whale returned. Now 


=-/ 
132 - @A'KAL HIS MYTH. Tren Cudde 


he went up to his house and staid there. After awhile he saw a child. 
It approached him, shooting an arrow. |The arrow] struck the ground 
near him, and he took it and hid it. Then the child came searching 
for his arrow. When he did not find it he cried: “O, Blue-Jay, you 
have hidden my arrow. You make me feel miserable. You always 
tease me; give me my arrow.” The child had no hair, and his eyes 
were sore. His blanket was made of deerskin. When [Ca/xaL} took 
him by his arm and said: “Who are you?” “Oh it is I. My father 
was deserted. Blue-Jay deserted him.” Then [Ca/xaL] took [the boy] 
to the water and washed his face; he blew on his eyes and the boy 
recovered his eyesight. He said: “Child! it is 1; I have returned.” 
He threw away [the boy’s| blanket and gave him a sea-otter blanket. 
“Tell me,” he continued, “are you all well?” The boy replied: “ Blue- 
Jay made us miserable; two of your wives are now his wives. He 
always defecates in our house, and I must wipe him with my blanket. 
Two only [of your wives| do not like him.” “Bring them here.” ‘Qh, 
they can not see, for they have lost their eyes.” Then the boy went 
home. He sent him to fetch his mother. He said to her: “Father 
has come home.” Then his mother and the other woman began to cry: 
“O, Blue-Jay has deceived you; he always deceives you.” ‘No, indeed, 
father has come. I have recovered my eyesight; he sent me to fetch you. - 
Just feel my blanket.” Then his mother felt it. It was soft. [The boy 
continued:]| ‘See, you did not believe me!” Then he led them to his 
father. He reached his father, who washed their faces. Then they 
recovered their eyesight. Ca/xaL said to them: ‘‘Go and sweep our 
house.” They went back and swept the whole house. They carried 
everything into the house, his whale, his sea otters, and his abalone 
shells. Then Ca’/xaL entered the house. 

On the following morning Blue-Jay opened the door and defecated in 
the doorway. [Hecalled:] “ E/npéyucX, wipeme!” “Take that fire- 
brand and push his backside,” said his father. ‘The boy took it and 
pushed him. “Heh,” cried Blue-Jay: ‘Oh, he burnt me; certainly 
his father has returned.” Blue-Jay looked into the house and saw the 
chief sitting in the house. Then he went and told the people: ‘“ Our 
chief has arrived.” [Ca‘xaL] distributed all his property among his 
people. He gave them all the abalone shells. 


11. STIKUA’ ITCA’KXANAM. 


Stikua’ HER MYTH. 


Go Nakot!’a’t Lxéla/-itX, LE’xo-itiks Lxéla‘itx. A/Ita ayd/mEqt 
At Seaside, they lived, many they lived. Now he was dead 
iLa/xakjEmana. Ia’/qoa-iL ia/xa. Ta/kE tca/xilk7é né’xaueé, ta/kE 
their’ chief. Large his son. Then winter it was, then 
0110 agkh/Lax. Ta/kE 1a/inka inia/matk aLgia‘xo-itx kja-y- dgii/ican. 
hungry they were. Then only mussels they ate them and roots. 
Kaxixnaa/Lax ka né/kim  <ktia/xéquax: ‘“Amexe/ItXuitck.” 
One day and he said a hunter: ‘‘Make yourselves ready.”’ 
Noxui/tXuitck ka’nauwé2 qo’tac tka/lamuke. Ataga/la-it modket 
They made themselves all those men. They were in the two 
ready canoes 


okuni’m. Ta/kE a/tge ma/Lné. Ta/kE atcé/lkike igé’/pix:L qix: 
canoes. Then they went seaward. Then he speared it a sealion that 
ktia’/xeéqLax, cka atcd’pEna ka ayuXua/nitck qix: igé/pixL. 
hunter, and it jumped and he drifted that sealion. 
ALgé’Elta-ul ma/Lx6lé. Neé’k-im 1qé/sqés: “ Ta/xkayuk 
They hauled it up ashore. He said blue-jay : ‘* Here 


IxgiutsXrma’ya.” Takk ia/xkaté naLXx-Elgitx. Agerlktik;’E/tsXéma. 
we will boil it.” Then there they made a fire. They Binge it. 


A‘lta aLga‘yaxe. A/‘lta aLb/xalEtcXEm. Neé‘kim  iqé/sqés: 
Now they cut it. Nuw they boiled it. He said blue-jay : 
“ Ja/xkayuk Ixgéuwu’ltaya, lxgéutctX0/maya.” Ta/kE nodxuiLxa/lem 
‘Here we will eat it, we will finish it.” Ther they ate 
qo’tae té’Ix-Em. Atcid’peut gé’xtcé ikoalé’xoa g6 Lia/cgue. Atea/yuk"L 
those people. He hid it intending the raven in his mat. He carried it 
go-y- ikani’‘m é€Xt igité’tsxal. A/nqaté né/xanké iq; é/sqés, Laq°? 
to the canoe one piece. Already he ran Hide jan take out 
atea/‘yax. Atea/‘yuk"y go- 0:0/lEptckiX qix: igité’tsxal. Nix-k/lgitx. 
he did it. He carried it to the fire that piece. He burnt it. 


‘Ta/kE aLE/Xko. Aukiupa/yaLx énia/matk k;a itgué/ma. Tso/yusté 


Then they went They gathered them large mussels RUE small mussels. In the evening 
home. 


aLx'g0/‘mam. Na-ixE/Iqamx iqj;é/sqés: “A2,  y imea/niamatka ‘2, 
they arrived at home. He called blue-jay: “Ah; your mussels 


Stikuaya‘2!” Stikua/ itca/xal uya’‘k-ikal iq; é ‘sqes. TEmm aLi/Xaua 


Stikua/!” Stikua’ her name his wife blue-jay’s. Noise of they ran 
feet : 


Stikua’ ma/Lné. ALgiugod/lemam inia/matk. A/tgELx ka/nauwé 
Stikua’ down to beach. They went to take the mussels. They Gamie to all 
the beac 


qo‘taec ta‘nEmcke. Atgid’/kXuiptck itgué/matk kj;a inia/matk. Go 


those women. They carried them up the small mussels ae the large mussels. The, 


ikoale’x-oa atcigE/nXaote iLa‘xakjEmana ia/xa. Né/k-im qix: ik; a/cke: 
the raven he took care of him their thief hisson. He said that Tha 


“WaXi ka nxElto’ma.” Atcio’lXam iq; é@’sqés: “E’/kta amiuwa ‘ya? 
“To-morrow and I go along.” He said to him nine. -jay : “What are you going 
to do? 


Ugolal gkmo/k"ya, muXuna/ya. LEqs anod/Xuné nai‘kXa;” né/k:im 
The waves will carry you you will drift away. Almost I drifted away Tied? he said 
away, 


igé’sqés. Kawi/X wiXt noxui/tXuitck. Ata/kEloya. A’yuLx qix: 
blue-jay. Early again they made themselves They wentinto He went tothe that 
beady. the canoe. beach 


133 


oO - WS bh = 


eo on Oo 


22 


23 


ono ® w bv 


15 


16 


i? 


134 STIKUA’ HER MYTH. [BEREAU of 


ETHNOLOGY 


ik; a/sks, @/yuLx qé@/xtcé ixklt0’/ma. Qé’xtce atcid’cgam ikani/m 


boy, he went tothe intending he went along. Intending he took it the canoe 
each : 
ixElto/ma. “MO6/ptega, m0’/ptega” atcid’1Xam iqjé’sqjés. A’yuptek 
he went along. ‘““Go up, go up,” he said to him lue-jay. He went up 
La/yaxax qix: ikja/sks. Né/k-im iq;é’sqés: “Ai’aq, lxee’/taqL.” Takk 
sad that boy. He said blue-jay: “Quick, we leave him.” Then 
nuguq71é/watck té/lx‘-Em. TakE atiga/Om Lgip@’x-Luke iLa/xanake. 
they paddled the people. Then they arrived at the sealions their rock. 
Ayaa/luLx ktia/xékyax. AtuLé’Iuke éXt igé/pix'L, cka atcd’pEna; 
He went the hunter. He speared one sealion, and it jumped; 
ashore 
ia/xkati. ayuXua/nitck. ALgé/ltauwé. ALgégila’/mamé — go-y-ile’é. 
there it drifted. They hauled itup. They pulled it ashore to the land. 
AtgiuLa‘taptck. Né’k-im  iqj;é/sqés: “IJa’/xkayuk  Ixgiuwu'léa 
They pulled it up from He said blue-jay: ‘* Here we will eat it 
the beach. 
ka/‘nauweé; taua/lta kjoa‘n néxa/x  ilxa/xakjEmana __ia/xa.” 
all; else alwaysdesir- he becomes our chief his son.” 


ing to go here 


Auvgia’/Lk; tsxéma ia/xkate. ALga/yaxe. ALgid/teXum a/Ita ia/xkate. 


They singed it there. They cut it. They boiled it now there. 
Ta’/kE ayod/ktcEkt iLa/‘teXEmal. ALXLxa/lEm, aLxLxa/leEm. Qé’xtcé 
Then it got done what they boiled. They ate, they ate. Intending 
atcid’/peut ikoalé/x‘oa é@Xt igite’texal. K-jau atci/Lax La’/yaqeo. 
he hid it ‘the raven one piece. Tie he did it in his hair. 
la/xkati qé/xtcé atcid’/peut. A’nqaté Lag? atca/yax iqjé/sqés. 
There intending he hid it. Already take out he did it binejay. 
AtcixE lgiLx igité/texal. Tsd’yusté itgué’ma aLgiupa/yaLx kja 
He burnt it the piece. In the evening small mussels they gatheredthem and 
énia‘ma ka ati/Xko. Qjoap aLxé’gilaé, naLxk/Iqamx: ‘“A2, 
large mussels and they went Nearly they landed, he shouted: “Ah, 
home. 
Stikuaya’ émea/niamatga/2.”. TeEmm, 4Li/xatoa a/LiLx  tga/a 
Stikua’ your mussels.” Noise of feet, they came __ they went to her 
running, the beach children 
Stikua’. Ka‘nauwé2 4a/tgELx qod’/tac ta/nEmcke, Atgio’k Xuiptck 
Stikua’. All they went to those women. They carried up 


the beach 
itgué/‘ma kj;a énid/‘matk. Atcto’lXam qOo’tac té/lx-Em iqje/sqeés: 


the small and the large mussels. He said to them those people blue-jay : 
mussels 
“ Ne2ket mexqrté/tegdye mckanauwe'tike, taua‘lta iqéto’mEl atcia’x 
“Not tell him all of you, else accompany us_ he does 
ilxa/xak;Emana ia/xa.” A‘Ita né/kim qix: ikja/sks: “Wa2Xi ka 
our chief his son.” Now he said that boy: “To-morrow and 
nxalto/ma.” Take né/k-im iqjé/sqés. “E’kta miuwa‘ya? Taua‘lta 
I shall go along.” Then he said blue-jay. What are eu going Else 
to do? 
amuXuné/x, itea/aitema-y- ugo’/la.” “Qa/dox nxElt0’ma,” ne’/k-im 
you drift away, confounded waves.” ‘Must I go along,”’ he said 
ik; a’sks. 
the boy. oe = 
Kawi’X noxola/yutck i/LaLoné. A‘tgELx. A’yuLx qix: ikja/sks. 
Early they rose the third time. They went He wentto that boy. 


tothe beach. the beach. 
Atcid/egam qix: ikani/‘m gqé@/xtcé. Atciii’tcteEmt iqjé@/sqés qix 


He took it that canoe intending. He pushed him © blue-jay that 

ik, a/sks. “E/kta tciuwa’/ya x-ix°é/kik? Mzk’ptega.” Nigk’tsax qix- 

boy. “What will he do this one? Go w fom the He cried that 
each.” 


ik;a/sks, a/yuptck. ‘Ai/aq, amckLé’watck,” né’/kim  iqje’sqes; 
boy, be went up. “Quick, paddle,” he said blue-jay ; 


Cc fe) > / 
ead STIKUA’ MYTH. 135 


“)xeita/qua.” TakE nugukLe/watck télx‘Em. Ta’/kE agatg0d/yam g6 
‘*we willleave him.”” Then they paddled the people. Then they arrived at 

Lgipé’x‘Luke La/xanake. TakE ayaa/luLx qix: ktia/xkeyax. AteLé/luke 

the sealions their rock. Then he went ashore that hunter. He speared it, 

eXt igé’pix'L, 1a’qoa-iL igé’pix'L, cka atco’pEna, ia/xkati ayu Xua/nitek. 
one sealion, a large sealion, and it jumped, there it drifted. 

TakE aLgé’Ita-u ma/Lxolé. AtLgé’kilaé go-y- ile’/é. ALgiuLa/taptek. 
Then they hauleditup landward. They landed at the land. They pulled it up from 

the beach. 


AxgieLk; &’tsx-ema, ALKL¢’/kXOL; aLgieLkj B/tsx-ema. A‘Ita aLga’/yaxe, 
' They singed it. They finished it, fey singed it. Now they cut it, 
aLgid‘tcXEm ia/xkati. Ayod’/ktcikt. Ta’kE aLxLxa/lEm. Né’k-im 
they boiled it there. It was done. Then they ate. He said 
iqj@’sqés: ‘Kanauwe’2 Ixgéwu’ltai. Niket La/ksta LxkLé’tego, 

blue-jay : “All we will eat it. Not anyone tell, 
taua‘lta éqit0’/mEl atcia’x ilxa/xak;Emana ia ‘xa.” MeEnx: niLga/étix-t 
else accompany- he makes our chief his son.’ A little he left over 
ing us 
kaaLaqeta/yt. Qé’xtcé atcid/cgam éXt igité’texal ikoalé’x-oa. K;au 
and they eee Intending he took it one piece the raven. Tie 
satiated. 


atea’/yax g0 ia‘owit. Né’k:im LEK" né/xax ia‘towit. Nix-E/lgiLx 
be did it to his leg. He said broken it became his leg. He burnt it 
qix: iLga/‘éetix't. Kanauwé’ nix-b/lgiLx iq;é/sqés. Atcio/1Xam 
that what he had left over. All he burnt it bias. -jay. He said to him 
ikoale’x-oa iq; &’/sqés: “ Ni/Xua nio/kumankEma iméowit.” Atcikpa/na, 
{to] the raven bine: -jay: ‘‘(Interjec- I want to see it your leg.” He jumped at it 
tion] 
stuX atca/yax go ia‘towit. Ljap atca/yax éXt igité’tsxal god 
untie he did it at his leg. ind he did it one piece at 
ikoale’‘x‘oa ia’towit. Atcid/egam iq;é/sqés nix-E/lgiLx. Ts0d’/yuste 
the raven his leg. He took it blue-jay he burnt it. In the evening 
aLgiupa’‘yaLx itgué’ma kja eénia/matk. ALE’Xko. Qj;0a/p 
they gathered small mussels and large mussels. They went home. Nearly 
aLXgo’mam, ta/kE néxE/Iqamx iq;é’/sqés: “A, imea/‘tguématga’ 
they arrived at home, then he shouted blue.jay: Ah: your mussels 
Stikuaya’!” TEmm, a/LOLx Stikua’. A/Ita  aLgid/kXuipteck 
Stikua’.” Noise of feet, they went to Stikua’. Now they carried up from 
the beach the beach 


iLa‘tguéma. A/Ita atga/yax qix: itgué’ma ka/nauwé -y-0’pol ka 

their mussels. Now they ate those mussels all night and 
gix: iLa/xakjEmana ia/xa. Ne’k-im_ ikj’a/sks: ‘“ Wu/Xi a/lta 
that their chief his son. He said the boy: ‘* To-morrow now 
NEXEItO’ma.”  TakE né/kim iqjé/sqés: “E/kta amiuwa/ya? 
I shall go along.” Then he said blue-jay: ‘What are you going todo? 
MuXuna‘/ya. Ma/‘kcté ano’Xuné qgé niketx ikani’m ani0d/cgam.” 
You will drift away. Twice I drifted away if not the canoe I took it.”’ 


Kawi'X ka wiXt aLxk/ltXuitck 1/Lalakte. Nixa/latck qix: ik;’a/sks. 


Early and again they made themselves the fourth He rose that boy. 
ready time. 


NixEItXuitck. ALgod/cgiLx uLa/xanim. AtLagaé/lait uLa/xanim. 
‘He made himself ready. They hauled down their canoes. They wentintothe their canoes. 
to the water canoes 


Qe’xteé ayagh’La-it xix: ikj;’a’sks. Atcid/egam, iq; é/sqés, 
Intending he wentintothe canoe that boy. He took him, blue-jay, 


atciaele‘maLx. Yukpa’t nitElo’‘tXuit go Lteug. Qe’xtcé atcid’/egam 


hethrewhimintothe Uptohere hestoodinthe water in water. Intending he took it 
water. 


qix: ikani’m. Atcta/-uwilx'L tia/keia qix: ik; a/sks iq; é/sqés. [a/2xkati 

that canoe. He struck them his hands that bey! s lue-jay. There 
ayo’‘tXuit. Nigk’tsax, nigk’tsax ka a/‘yuptck. A/’LO, 4/LO, 
he stood. He cried, he cried and he went up. They they 
went, went, 


bo 


10 
itt 


13 


14 


/ A 
136 STIKUA’ HER MYTH. weenouee 


aLkyé/watck iq;é/sqés. ALiga/om qix: iqa’nake, Lgipe’x-Luke 


they paddled blue-jay. They reached it that rock, the sealions 
iLa/xanake. Ayaa/LuLx qix: ktia/xékyax, atcLé/luke éXt ige’piXL, 
their rock. He went ashore’ that hunter, he speared it one sealion, 
cka atcd’/pEna, ka ia/xkaté ayuXua/nitck. Takk wiXt aLgé’/Elta-uwe. 
and it jumped, and there it drifted. Then again they pulled it to the 
shore. 

Se we er ° = = ae ox = 
Axgigél’a’/mam élé/é. ALgiuLa/taptck. ALgéLk;jE’tsx‘Ema 1a/xkate. 
They towed it to the land. They hauled it up from They singed it there. 

the shore. ; 
ALKL@/KXOL; aLgéLk;E’tsx‘éma. ALga/yaxc; a‘lta aLgio/teXEm 
They finished it, they singed it. They cut it; now they boiled it 
ia/xkati. Ayd/ktcikt. Né’k-im igé/sqés: ‘1a2/xkukte Ixgéwu'ltaya.” 
there. He finished it. He said blue-jay : ‘*Here we will eat it.” 
ALXxLxa/IEm, aLxLxa’/lEm. cka icé/tkum aLgia/wul* ka aLaqeta’yu. 
They ate, they ate, and half they ate it and they became 
satiated. 
ALk;é/witxit; kj’E/xkjEx aLE/xax ka aLkjé/witxit. Nixk’l*oko 
They went to sleep; overeaten they became and _ they went to sleep. He awoke 
iq; @/sqés, nix‘E/lgiLx ka/nauweé qix: iLga/étixit. Tso’yuste 
blue-jay, he burnt all that what they had leftover. In the evening 
aLgiupa/yaLx itgué/‘ma kj;a énia/ma. A‘Ita aLXgo’/mam. Qj 0a‘p 
they gathered smallmussels and largemussels. Now they came home. Nearly 
aLgia/xomé: “A imea/niamatga’ Stikuaya’.” TEmm, aLi’/xaua ma/‘Lne, 
they cameashore: ‘‘Ah! your mussels Stikua’.” Nae of they ran seaward. 
eet, 
ALgid/kXuiptek énia/‘ma kja itgué’ma. Ne’k-im qix: ikja/sks: 
They carriedupfromthe the large and small mussels. He said that boy: 
beach mussels a 
“ Wi2xi a/lta nxElt0’/ma.” Atcid‘lXam iq; é’sqés. “ E’kta miuwa‘ya? 
‘To-morrow now I go along.” He said to him blue-jay: ‘* What are you going 
to do? 
Lxax0/-ita. Ljlap mo/ya.” 


We shall capsize. Under water you will go.”’ 
Wax kawi’X noxola’yutck. Nixa‘latek qix: ik;’a/sks. 
Onthe next early they made themselves ready. He rose that boy. 
morning 


NixbItXuitck. ALg6/cgiLx uLa/xanima igé/sqés. Qé/xtcé ayagH’La-it 
He made himself They hauled their canoes blue-jay. Intending he went into the 
ready. down to the water canoe 


qix: ikja/sks. Atciaélé/‘maL igé/sqés. Atcid’cgam qgé/xtce qix: 
that boy. He threw him into the _ blue-jay. He took it intending that 
water 
ikani‘m. Yukpa/t tia/xEmalap!ix: nitElo’tXuit. Qe/xtcé atcid’cgam 
canoe. Up to here his arm-pits he stood in the water. Intending he took it 
qix: ikani/m, atcta/auwilx'L tia‘kcia iq@’sqés qix:  ikj’a’/sks. 
that canoe, he struck his hands blue-jay that oy’s. 
Nigr/tsax, nigE’tsax qix: ikj’a’/sks. A’LO- y-a/Ita iq; é’/sqes. 
He cried, he cried that boy. He went now blue-jay. 
La2 ka  a/yupteck  ikj’a’/sks. Atcto/egam  tia/xalaitanEma. 
Some time and he went up from the the boy. He took them his arrows. 
beach 


Alta ixLa/kdi pkEnka’. Atcaga/Om uteaktca’k, Lé’el utcaktea‘k. 
Now he went afoot. He met it an eagle, a black eagle. 
around the point [young] 
Itea/‘mat atcia/lax. Tejux a/tcax, qgé/xtcé qui naéxa/lax. Io/kuk 
Shooting it he did it. Skin he did it, intending putting he did iton Here 
on to himself. 
k*caxala’ tia/q;6xLEma ka na-ign/nkakd. Laq°® na/éxax. WiXt 
above his knees and it was too small. Take off he did it. Again 
ayo, wiXt aée/Xt utcaktea’‘k ayaga/om. Itea/mat  atcia‘lax. 
he went, again one eagle he met it. Shooting it he did it. 
NoéIuktea. Tk; dp é@/teEqtq uteaktca‘k. Tejux a’/teax, quL naexa’lax. 
It fell down. White its head the eagle. Skin he did it, puton he ad it a 
to himself 


eal 
ne STIKUA’ MYTH. 13 


Mank kékula’ tia’q; 6xLEma, na- igE/nkako. Lag? na/éxax, atcaé’taqL. 


A little below his knees, it wastoosmall. Takeoff he did it, he left it. 
Wixt a/’yo, kula’/yi a’yo. Atciga’/Om ininé’x’d. I[a/mat atcé’lax. 
Again he went, far he went. He met it a oe Shooting it he did it. 

5 eagle. 
MOo‘keté ia/mat atcé/lax; ayée/luktcu. Tcjux atea/yax qui nexa/lax. 
Twice shootingit he did it; it fell down. Skin hedidit puton hediditon 
to himself. 
Qjoa’/p néeXE’kXa ka nigE/nkako. Aya’ko nixk;’a/waket. Kée‘/kXulé 
: Dearly it fitted and it was too small. He flew he attempted. Down 
ayo’ko, niket ayola’/tckuix't. ILa’méket Laq né’xatx, a/lta t!aya/ 
he flew, not he rose. The second time turn he did, now good 
ayo’ko. A/‘Ita né/xLako-i @’wa ma/Lné Got!’a’t. Q:o0a’p néxLa’/komeé. 
he flew. Now hewentaround thus seaward Got!'a't. Mealy he came around 


the point from the point. 


Ta/kE ata/yiLa tXut; kjEX q6’/ta tXut. Néxia/komé, atci/L°ElkE] 
Then  hesmelledit smoke; smell of fat that smoke. Hecamearoundthe he saw them 
point, 


qo‘tac ginaEXam. Go kula’yi ka ayugo’Lait. Alta ateLa/qxamt 
those thepeopleofhis There far and he sat on top of Now he saw them 
town. a tree. 


@wa ke/kXule. Auxge’ktcikt. A/‘lta aLxLxa/lEm atcLa‘qxamt. 
thus below. It was done. Now they ate he saw them. 
Q;0a’p aLE/Lx‘0L; ka ay0d/ko. NiXLo‘lEXa-it: ‘Iqé/sqés tayax 
N early they finished and he flew. He thought: ‘« Blue-jay : oh if 
tein’é‘tgElax!” Goyé’ né’xax’ igé’sqés, a/lta LEla‘lax LO’kol. “A, 
he would see me!”’ Thus he did Blue-jay, now a bird flew about. “Ah, 
LE]a‘lax qLge/lxétuwa/Lam.” WiXt Laq* néxa’/x. Qodé/nEmi Laq* 
a bird it comes to get food from us.” Again turn he did. Five times turn 
né‘xax, a/lta ke‘/kXulé. Atcid’/egam éXt igité’texal iqé’/sqés. “ x-iau 
it did, now down. He took it one piece blue-jay. ‘This 
amE‘lém,” atcid/lXam q0‘La LEla‘lax. CXX aLe’té q6d’/La LEla‘lax. 
I give you toeat,’’ he said to it that bird. Cxx itcame that bird. 
LkE’pLkEp atcid/cgam qix: igité’texal. A/’Ita aL0/k6 qg6’La LEla/lax. 
Grasping it took it that piece. Now it flew that bird. 
Née’k-im igé’sqés: “Taqgé LgoLé’1XEmk tkE’Lape.” ALaqceta’yo igé’/sgés, 
He said blue-jay: ‘Just as a person its feet.”’ They became blue-jay, 
satiated 


aLk;’é/witxit. WiXt atcid’pcut ikoalé‘x‘oa éXt_ igité’texal. 
they went to sleep. Again he hid it the raven one piece. 
ALXEI’0’yoko iqeé’sgés tso/yusté. A‘Ita wiXt aLxLxa/lEm. A/Ita 
They awoke blue-jay in the evening. Now again they ate. Now 
wiXt atix'E’/IgiLx iqgé/sqés q0d’/ta Lxga/itixit. Tsd’yusté né/xau, 
again he burnt it blue-jay that whatthey hadleft. Evening it became, 
aLgiupa’yaLx itgué/‘ma kja eénia/matk, ka aLi/Xko. NiXk0d/mam 
they gathered smallmussels and large mussels, and they wenthome. He came home 
nau ‘i nix0’ketit. Qj 0a’p é/1Xam aLgia‘xom igé’sqés. Ta/kE néxE/lqamX 
at once he lay down. ear the town’ they arrived blue-jay. Then he shouted 
igé’sqés: “A, Stikuaya’, imea/niamatga’!” TeEmm aLi/Xaua. A/LOLX. 
blue-jay: ‘‘Ah, Stikua’, your mussels,” Noiseoffeet they ran. They went 


down to the 
beach. 


A‘lta aLgio’kXuiptck itgué/ma kja énia/matk. Qé/xtcé aqia/qxdts; 
Now they carried them up the small and the large mussels. Intending he was roused 
mussels 
qix: ikj’a’/sks. Niket nixa/latck. 
that boy. Not he rose. 
Wax wiXt né‘ktcukté. Kawi/X ka no/xuitXuitck. A/Ita wiXt 
Onthe again it became day. Early and they made them- Now again 
next morning selves ready. 
atgo/egiLx uta/Xanima. I[06/ktik qix: ikj’a/sks iLa/xakj; Emana ia‘xa. 
they pushed the their canoe. He lay in that boy their chief his son. 
e 


canoe into the 
water 


—_ 


Ou 


~] 


: / = BUREAU OF 
138 STIKUA’ HER MYTH. | Paenouees 


Niket iqéto’/mEl atca/yax. Lax na/xax o%0/Lax. Takk nixa/latck, 
Not accompanying he did it. Visible. became the sun. Then he rose, 
them 

ateukuéxé’/mam  ta’/nEmcke,  ka/nauwe/2 atcukuexé/‘mam  kja 
he called them together the women, all he called them together and 
tqa/sosinike. ‘“Ai/aq, amckLi‘egam Lo‘yuc. Amex’d/yutx. Niaket 
the children. “ Quick, take urine. & Wash yourselv:s. Not 
qjam mexa’xd.” A/‘lta atkLo’cgam Lo‘yue ta‘nEmcke. Nuxoo‘yut, 


lazy be.” Now they took it urine the women. They washed 
themselves, 


ka/‘nauweZ nuxood/yut. “Ai/‘aqg, LEmexE/Iteam.” Ta/kE ateuqoa/na-it 
all they washed “Quick, comb yourselves.” Then he put it down 
themselves. 
oma’p. Laq atea/yax igité’texal. ‘TEmeca/nEmcke mekanauwé’tike 
a plank. Take he did it the piece. “ Your husbands your all 
out 


xix@/k idXué/lax.” Maket igité/texal atcé’/Xtuq go qaX oma’/p. 
this they eat it much.” Two pieces » he put them on that plank 
side by side 
A‘Ita Lqu/pLqup atea/yax igité/texal. A’/Ita atcLEIIteko Lkanauwe’tike 
Now cut he did it a piece. Now he greased their all of them 
heads 
qo‘Lac La/nEmeke. AteLawe’tiko qo‘tac tqa‘sosinike. A‘lta Lu‘xLux 
those women. He greased their those children. Now pull out of 
heads ground 


atea/yax @nXat. Alta atcé/lEméma. Manéx 4a/yaxalxt e’nXat, 
he did them the wall Now he sharpened them. When wide a wall 
planks. plank, 
te; Ex atcé/lax. Ka/nauwé atcé’IeEméema. Ke/mk-iti ta/yaqL ikoale’x-oa. 
split hedidit. All he sharpened them. The last his house _— the raven. 
Ni2ket Lu’/xLux aqa/yax ita‘nXat. Alta atciauwiga’melt go ita’koteX 
Not pull out they were its wall Now he put them into in their backs 
done planks. 


qix: @/nXat. Ka/nauwé atciauwiga’melt go ita/koteX ka that!auna’na. 
those wall planks. All he put them into in their backs those girls. 

Ateto1Xam: “Tea mei/Lxa! Manix qia meod/ya ma/Lné, qod/2nEmi 

He said to them: ‘‘Now, goto the When if you go seaward, five times 
beach! 

mecixLa’/kO =qix: iqa/nake, tex] amco/Lx ma/Lné. Manix Lap 
go around that rock, then go seaward seaward. When find 

amegia’xo-ilEmx igé@/pix-L cka amckikLtii/2qo-imx. Qé/uwa Lj0’ya 

you willalways do them sealions and you will always kill them. Those not giving 

to stingy 

people. 

aqé/megax. Nai‘ka nto/k"qa x‘iti/ke tqa/cocinike. K’wa ma/Lné xik 
you do. I [carrythem these children. Thus seaward this 

&maL tgE/1Xam_ teEnxela/x0.” A‘lta tsjE’/xtsjEx a/tcax 0o’ckyaX; 
sea my relatives they will be tome.’ Now split he did them sinews ; 

a/xaué ts; E/xtsjEx a/teax 0/ckyax. A/Ita a/tgBLx go Lteuq qo’tac 
many split he did them —sinews. Now they went to water those 

down to the sea 


ta/nEmeke. La/wa teax go/yé noxo’xu-il. Qoa/uEmi Lag® no/x6x go 
women. Slowly now thus they jumped. Five times turn they did at 
qix: @IXam. A/Ita a’tgé yau’a ma/‘Lné, a/lta cka aLx-um’ela/pXit 
that town. Now they went there seaward, now and _ it turned inside out 
Lteuq. A/Ita a/tgé iau’a ma/Lné, ka2 Lxaltcx:a’/mal igé‘sqés. A‘Ita 
the water. Now they went then seaward, where they always boiled  blue-jay. Now 
food 


née/k-im igé/sqés: “kta x-ik id/itet?” AIta aqixE’/lotex qix: i’kta. 
he said blue-jay ; ‘“What that comes there?’’ Now the people looked that some- 

at it thing. 
Aks0/pEnayux qaX Ohotauna/na. Qoii/nEmi aké/xLako iLa/xanake 
They jumped often those girls. Five times they wentaroundit their rock 
igée/sqés. TakE ka n0d/Lxa iau’/a ma/Lné; ka ma/nx'i ka aLn’tit 
blue-jay’s. Then and they went there seaward; and a little and they came 

seaward 


paver STIKUA’ MYTH. . 159 
LEla/lax aLE/tga; tja’qéa Léa/wulqt go-y- i/Lacky q0’La_ LEla‘lax. 
birds theycameflying; just as if blood at their bills those birds. 
Alta tgia/wat q0d/ta gEnE’mt Llala’‘xuke. “A, nékettcé 
Now they followed them those small birds. “Ah, not [int. part.] 
némsa‘/xaxomé?” né‘kim iqgé/sqés: “ la/laxuke x itiks tgé/itEt, 

do you observe it?” he said blue-jay: ‘“The birds then they come, 

qa/xéwa atgaté‘mam é’/ka Lga/pelatike.” Take né/k:im_ ikoalé’x-oa: 
where they came thus many.”’ Then he said the raven: 

ie ee oe = aga rf 

“Ta‘xka xixi’/x: cia/kulq;’ast. TEméa x0‘tac moxoé’/LEluXt,’ 


‘*He this his eyes squinting. Yourchildren — these you do not recognize 
them,” 


ne‘k-im ikoalé/x‘oa,. Qo’&/nEmi até/xLakO qix- iqa/nake. A/‘Ita 
he said the raven. Five times they wentaround that rock. Now 
atceiXE/kXué qaX ockTX god qo’/La Lqa/nake. AteLo/1Xam: ‘ Manix 
hethrewthemdown those sinews = on those stones. He said to them: ‘* When 
aLO’/yima-itx iqé@/sqés itgué/ma aLigElo’/yEma-itx ka  q;’E/lqj’El 
they always go blue-jay mussels they always go to take them then fast 
mxa/xo-ilEmx.” Atceo/lXam qaX ta/nEmceke: “OkuLa/ma imea’xal, qiax 
you shall always be.” He said to them those women: ‘*Killer-whales your name if 
it!o/kti é’kolé tex] megia’xo. Manix igé/pix-Lx amegéwa/kxémeniLx, 
a good whale then yeuwilleatit. When a sealion you kill it, 
ka megé’/xEluketgulaLx. Qé’wa Lj0/ya aqé/megax.” 


then you throw it away. Those not giving to you do,” 
stingy people 


Ata aLxLxa‘lEm, igé’sqés. Né’k-im qix-. ktia/xékyax: ‘“Ai/aq 
Now they ate, blue-jay. He said that hunter: © Quick 
Ixg0’ya, ka alxauwé/LxoLx. Néket qa/nsix é@’ka ia‘1k0-ilé alxgetE IkElax 
we will go then we became afraid at Not [any] how thus similar to it we saw 
home, seeing spirits. 


g0 qix: iqa/nake.” A/‘lta aLgiupaé’/yaLx itgué’ma. A/‘lta atga’/yuk"7 
at = that rock.” Now they gathered them mussles. Now they carried it 
qix’ iLxga‘étix:'t igé’pixL. ALga’/yuk"7 a/lta. Tso’yusté ka 
that whatthey hadleftover the sealion. They carried it now. In the evening then 
aLXgo/Inam. “A-y- imca/tguimatga’ Stikuaya’!” K;6mm té/lx-‘Em. 
they came home. ‘“* Ah, your mussels Stikua’!”’ No noise of people. 
Qoi/nEmi qgé/xtcé aqaLE’/lqamx. A/‘Ita a/‘tgEptck qo’tac té/lx‘Em. 
Five times intending she was called. Now they went up those people. 
from the beach 


A'lta kj’e-y- ita‘nXat q06/ta tY’oLe’ma. A/‘Ita noxoé/nim té/lx-Em, 


Now nothing their wallplanks those houses. Now they cried the people. 
NigkE’tsax igé’sqés. Aqid’/lXam: ‘“k;’a mE/xax, igé/sqés. Qé néketx 
He cried blue-jay. He was told: ‘* Silent be, blue-jay. If not 
mai’‘kXa imé’q;’atxala, poe néket @/ka atei‘lxax ilxa/xak;’Emana, 
you you were bad, {if] not thus he did to us our chief, 
qé néketx mai’kXa imé’qjatxala.” A/‘Ita té’Xtka t!oL atgE’tax 
if not you you were bad.” Now one only house they made it 
kanauwe’tike, ia’/mka ikoalé’x‘oa text ta/yaqL. Ayo/ix néckta/x, 
all, only he the raven one his house. He wentoften, he searched 
often on the 
; beach, 
éna/qxon Ljap atecia’x. Ayo/ix néckta/x, uko’/tskots Ljap atca’x. 
a sturgeon find he did it. He wentoften he searched " porpoise find he did it. 
often on the 
beach, 
Ayo/ix igé/sgés qé/xtce néckta’x. Lka’/kXul aLxa/x. Goyii’ iLa’/qa-iLa 
He went blue-jay intending he searched Hail it became. Thus large 
often often on the 
beach. 
Lka‘/kXul. Qé’xtcé aLé’gElo-ix itgué/ma. Qé’xtcé tej u/xtc;ux aLgia’x. 
hail. Intending he gathered often mussels. Intending breaking off hedidthem. 
Qxa/oxaL te; ux néxa/x. Ta/ménua aLxa’/x aLXgo/x. Ayo/ix ikoalé’x-oa 
Cannot breaking he did. Giving up he became he went He went the raven 


off home. often 


140 STIKUA’ HER MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


’ 


néckta/x. Niktea/xa-itx. O/1Xaii Ljap atea’x. Cta/mkXa egé/san 
he searched He cried much. A seal find he did it. Only roots 
at the beach. 


aLkea/xo-itx. AtceLE/nk;émEnako iLa‘xak; Emana. 
they ate them. He took revenge on them their chief. 
& 


Translation. 


Many people were living at Nakot!a’t. Now their chief died. -He 
had [left} a son who was almost grown up. It was winter and the 
people were hungry. They had only mussels and roots to eat. Once 
upon a time a hunter said: ‘‘ Make yourselves ready.” All the men 
made themselves ready and went seaward in two canoes. Then the 
hunter speared a sealion. It jumped and drifted on the water [dead]. 
They hauled it ashore. Blue-Jay said: ‘Let us boil it here.” They 
made a fire and singed it. They cut it and boiled it. Blue-Jay said: 
‘“‘Let us eat it here, let us eat allof it!’ Then the people ate. Raven 
tried to hide a piece of meat in his mat and carried it to the canoe. 
[But] Blue-Jay [had already seen it]; he ran [after him], took it and 
threw it into the fire. He burned it. Then they went home. They 
gathered large and small mussels. In the evening they came home. 
Then Blue-Jay shouted : “‘ Stikua’, fetch your mussels!” Stikua’ was 
the name of Blue Jay’s wife. Then noise of many feet [was heard], 
and Stikua’ and the other women came running down to the beach. 
They went to fetch mussels. The women came to the beach and carried 
the mussels to the house. Raven took care of the chief’s son. The 
boy said: ‘To-morrow I shall accompany you.” ‘“Blue-Jay said to 
him: ‘What do you want to do? The waves will carry you away, 
you will drift away; even I almost drifted away.” 

The next morning they made themselves ready. They went into the 
canoe and the boy came down to the beach. He wanted to accompany 
them and held on to the canoe. ‘Go to the house; go to the house,” 
said Blue-Jay. The boy went up, but he was very sad. Then Blue-Jay 
said: “Let us leave him.” The people began to paddle. Then they 
arrived at the sealion island. The hunter went ashore and speared a 
sealion. It jumped and drifted on the water [dead]. They hauled it 
ashore and pulled it up from the water. Blue-Jay said: “Let us eat 
it here; let us eat all of it, else our chief’s son would always want to 
come here.” They singed it, carved it, and boiled it there. When it 
was done they ate it all. Raven tried to hide a piece in his hair, but 
Blue-Jay took it out immediately and burned it. In the evening they 
gathered large and small mussels and then they went home. When 
they approached the beach Blue-Jay shouted: ‘“Stikua’, fetch your 
mussels!” Then noise of many feet [was heard]. Stikua’ and her 
children and all the other women came running down to the beach and 
carried the mussels up to the house. Blue-Jay had told all those 
people: “Don’t tell our chief’s son, else he will want to accompany 
us.” In the evening the boy said: ‘To-morrow I shall accompany you.” 


catixooK . STIKUA’ MYTH—TRANSLATION. ‘141 


But Blue-Jay said: ‘What do you want to do? The confounded 
waves will carry you away.” But the boy replied: ‘“‘I must go.” 

In the morning they made themselves ready for the third time. The 
boy went down to the beach and took hold of the canoe. But Blue- 
Jay pushed him aside and said: ‘“‘ What do you want here? Go to the 
house.” The boy cried and went up to the house. {When he turned 
back] Blue-Jay said: ‘‘Now paddle away. We will leave him.” The 
people began to paddle and soon they reached the sealion island. 
The hunter went ashore and speared one large sealion. It jumped and 
drifted on the water [dead]. They hauled it toward the shore, landed, 
pulled it up and singed it. They finished singeing it. Then they carved 
it and boiled it, and when it was done they began to eat. Blue-Jay 
said: “ Let us eat it all, nobody must speak about it, else our chief’s son 
will always want to accompany us.” A little [meat] was still left when 
they had eaten enough. Raven tried to take a piece along. He tied 
it to his leg and said his leg was broken. Blue-Jay burned all that was 
left over. Then he said to Raven: * Let me see your leg.” He jumped 
at it, untied it and found the piece of meat at Raven’s leg. He took 
it and burned it. In the evening they gathered large and small mus- 
sels. Then they went home. When they were near home Blue-Jay 
shouted: ‘Stikua’, fetch your mussels!” Then noise of many feet 
[was heard] and Stikua’ [her children and the other women| came down 
to the beach and carried the mussels up to the house. The | women 
‘and children] and the chief’s son ate the mussels all night. Then 
that boy said: ‘To-morrow I shall accompany you.” Blue-Jay said: 
“ What do you want to do?) You will drift away. If I had not taken 
hold of the canoe I should have drifted away twice.” 

On the next morning they made themselves ready for the fourth 
time. The boy rose and made himself ready also. The people hauled 
their canoes into the water and went aboard. The boy tried to board 
the canoe also, but Blue-Jay took hold of him and threw him into the 
water. He stood in the water up to his waist. He held the canoe, but 
Blue-Jay struck his hands. There he stood. He cried, and cried, and 
went up to the house. The people went; they paddled and soon they 
reached the sealion island. The hunter went ashore and speared a 
sealion. It jumped and drifted on the water [dead]. Again they 
towed it to the island and pulled it ashore. They singed it. When 
they had finished singeing it they carved it and boiled it. When it 
was done Blue-Jay said: ‘Let us eat it here.” They ate half of it and 
were satiated. They slept because they had eaten too much. Blue- 
Jay awoke first and burned all that was left. In the evening they 
gathered large and small mussels and went home. When they were 
near the shore he shouted: “Stikua’, fetch your mussels!” Noise of 
- many feet [was heard] and Stikua’ [her children and the other women] 
came running down to the beach and carried up the mussels. The 
boy said: ‘‘ To-morrow I shall accompany you.” But Blue-Jay replied: 


r é BUREAU O 
142 STIKUA’ HER MYTH. | BTHNOLOGY 


“What do you want to do? We might capsize and you would be 
drowned.” 

Early on the following morning the people made themselves ready. 
The boy arose and made himself ready also. Blue-Jay and the people 
hauled their canoes down to the water. The boy tried to board it, but 
Blue-Jay threw him into the water. He tried to hold the canoe. The 
water reached up to his armpits. Blue-Jay struck his hands {until he 
let go]. Then the boy cried and cried. Blue-Jay and the other people 
went away. 

After some time the boy went up from the beach. He took his 
arrows and walked around a point of land. There he met a young 
eagle and shot it. He skinned it and tried to put the skin on. It was 
too small, it reached scarcely to his knees. Then he took it off and 
went on. After awhile he met another eagle. He shot it and it fell 
down. It was a white-headed eagle. Heskinned it and tried the skin 
on, but it was toosmall. Itreached a little below his knees. He took 
it off, left it, and went on. Soon he meta bald-headed eagle. He shot 
it twice and it fell down. He skinned it and put the skin on. It was 
nearly large enough for him, and he tried to fly. He could fly down- 
ward only. He did not rise. He turned back, and now he could fly. 
Now he went around the point seaward from Nakot!a‘t. When he had 
nearly gone around he smelled smoke of burning fat. When he came 
around the point he saw the people of his town. He alighted on top 
of a tree and looked down. [He saw that] they had boiled a sealion- 
and that they ate it. When they had nearly finished eating he flew up. 
He thought: “O, I wish Blue-Jay would see me.” Then Blue-Jay 
looked up fand saw] the bird flying about. ‘Ah, a bird came to get 
food from us.” Five times the eagle gyrated over the fire, then it 
descended. Blue-Jay took a piece of blubber and said: “I will give 
you this to eat. The bird came down, grasped the piece of meat and 
flew away. ‘Ha!” said Blue-Jay, “that bird has feet like a man.” 
When the people had eaten enough they slept. Raven hid again a 
piece of meat. Toward evening they awoke and ate again; then 
Blue-Jay burned the rest of their food. In the evening they gathered 
large and small mussels and went home. When the boy came home 
he lay down at once. They approached the village and Blue-Jay 
shouted: “‘Fetch your mussels, Stikua’!’? Noise of many feet |was 
heard] and Stikua/ [and the other women] ran down to the beach and 
carried up the mussels. They tried to rouse the boy, but he did not 
arise. 

The next morning the people made themselves ready and launched 
their. canoe. The chief’s son stayed in bed and did not attempt to 
accompany them. After sunrise he rose and called the women and 
children and said: ‘‘Take urine and wash yourselves, be quick.” The 
women obeyed and washed themselyes. He continued: ‘Comb your 
hair.” Then he put down a plank, took the piece of meat out [from 


Se STIKUA’ MYTH—TRANSLATION. 143 


under his blanket, showed it 1o the women and said|: ‘“ Every day 
your husbands eat this.” He put two pieces side by side on the plank, 
cut them to pieces and greased the heads of all the women and children. 
Then he pulled the planks forming the walls of the houses out of the 
ground. He sharpened them [at one end and| those which were very 
wide he split in two. He sharpened all of them. The last house of 
the village was that of Raven. He did not pull out its wail-planks. 
He put the planks on to the backs of the women and children and said: 
‘““Go down to the beach, when you go seaward swim five times around 
that rock. Then go seaward. When you see sealions you shall kill 
them. But you shall not give anything to stingy people. I shall take 
these children down. They shall live on the sea and be my relatives.” 

Then he split sinews. The women went into the water and began to 
jump [out of the water]. They swam five times back and forth in front 
of the village. Then they went seaward plowing through the water 
Now they went seaward to the place where Blue-Jay and the men were 
boiling. Blue-Jay said to the men: ‘“‘Whatis that?” Themen looked 
and saw the girls jumping. Five times they swam around Blue-Jay’s 
rock. Then they went seaward. After awhile birds came flying to the 
island. Their bills were |as red| as blood. They followed [the fish]. 
“ Ah,” said Blue-Jay: ‘*Do you notice them? Whence come these 
numerous birds?” The Raven said: ‘ Ha, squinteye, they are your 
children; do you not recognize them?” Five times they went around 
that rock. Now [the boy| threw the sinews down upon the stones and 
said: ‘‘ When Blue-Jay comes to gather mussels they shall be fast |to 
the rocks].” And he said to the women, turning toward the sea: 
* Whale-Killer will be your name; when you catch a whale you will eat 
it, but when you catch a sealion you will throw it away, but you shall 
not give anything to stingy people.” 

Blue-Jay and the people were eating. Then that hunter said: ‘ Let 
us go home. I am afraid we have seen evil spirits; we have never seen 
anything like that on this rock.” Now they gathered mussels and car- 
ried along the meat which they had leftover. In theevening they came 
near their home. [Blue-Jay shouted:] “‘Stikua’, fetch your mussels!” 
There was no sound of people. Five times he called. Now the people 
went ashore and [they saw that] the walls of the houses had disap. 
peared. The people cried. Blue-Jay cried also, but somebody said 
to him: “ Be quiet, Blue-Jay; if you had not been bad our chief’s 
son would not have done so.” Now they all made one house. Only 
Raven had one house [by himself]. He went and searched for food on 
the beach. He found a sturgeon. He went again to the beach and 
found a porpoise. Then Blue-Jay went to the beach and tried to search 
for food. [As soon as he went out] it began to hail; the hail-stones 
were so large [indicating]. He tried to gather mussels and wanted to 
break them off, but they did not come off. He could not break them off. 
He gave it up. Raven went to search on the beach and found a seal. 
The others ate roots only. Thus their chief took revenge on them. 


bo 


m 


18 


20 


12. O/PENPEN ITCA’/KXANAM. 


THE SKUNK HER STORY. 


A‘lta na/kteXEm qaX uko/nax. A/Ita t!oL agk/tax, ta’qoa-iL 
Now  shesanghercon- that  chieftainess. Now ahouse she made it, a large 
juror’s song ’ 


t!oL agh’/tax. A/Ita agod/xuqte té/lx-Em. Ta/kE atxé’géla-i té’/lx-Em. 


house she madeit. Now sheinvitedthem people. Then they landed the people. 
Tcia/xuwaltck igé/sqés qaX uk0d’/nax. “A, akcEma _  x-‘itac 
Tle helped her singing blue-jay that chieftainess. “Ah, who there 
oxuiwa/yutego?” “A-y- 0/mda xiLa/e kixiluwa/yutego.” A/lta 
they dance?” “Ah, maggots these they dancing. Now 


Lgitxta/maé 0/moda: 
they entered the the maggots: 
house to dance 


“Antsgid/lats, antsgid/lats iq0/tEn, ‘iqo’tEn. Antsgi0‘lats, antsgid/lats 
‘“Wemakeitmove, wemake itmove [?] [2]. Wemakeit move, wemake it move, 
iqo’tEn, iqd’tEn.” 
[?] sere ee, 
Takk nixino’tén igé’sqés. AqLilgé’qxo-im LeXt Lqoa‘k. Atco/lXam 


Then he joined their blue-jay, He was given in pay one mountain- He said to her 
song for his help goat blanket. 
uya/k-ikala: “LuXLXa/nago’, 0q; oyo’qxot! ” TakE na’/kim: “1; lop 

his wife: ‘Put it on, old woman!”’ Then she said: sc 

Ljlop néx néx tet tei!” ““K;a naué/tkaa,” né’k-im igé/sgés, “Le/Xat 

toy [?] Teele alee SS ioies er indeed,”’ he said blue-jay, ‘one 
na qLa/qéwam LE’/x:adt, pos namXLXa/nago it!o/kte?” WiXt 
[int. conjuror assembles, if you put on a good one?” Again 
part. ] 
atkto/pEna tga/ewam té/lx-Em go-y- icq igé’plal. ‘“A,akckma x-itae 

they uttered their song people at infront doorway. ‘Ah, who then 

of house 
oxuiwa/yutego?” “A, Lk; ElakjEla/max xiLac kLx-Eluwa/yutcgo.” 
they dance?” “AL, the es these they dancing.”’ 

A‘Ita aLgio/xtamai Lk; Elak; Ela’ma: 

Now they entered the the geese: 


house to dance 


|: Antsga/yilEmé/matsq @/maL uya/tstpa gu‘tstpa gu’tspa: || 


Tt Sal a lactase h Cauee an 


We pull it out and it drifts the bay its sea grass, grass grass. 

Aq Lé/lugl igé’sqés LkjElak;Ela’ma kLkex Wok. NoXuina/Xit gd 
They carried to him blue-jay Eeeae being blanket. They stood at 
iqé’/plal téIxnm: “A akeEma xitac oxuiwa/yutcgo?” ‘6 A -y- 
the doorway people: “Ah, who then they dance?”’ “Ah, 
imo/lEkuma: 

the elks:”’ 


: Niveaika’ antega/wicilii/ poqd’/XumaX, acilé’ ci/le,  acila’ 
a NN PD FUP. Diddele) 
we hiss [on] bluffs, hiss, LZ ZZ. 
ci‘lé. : || 7 


de 


Ta/kE nix‘Enod’/té iqé/sqés: 
Then he joined their song Blue-jay: 


144 


cHIxOOK" THE SKUNK STORY. 145 


BUAS 


“||; Na’eaika’ antega’‘wicilié’ pogo’ Xuma’‘X, acili’, ci/lé acilii’ ci/lé:|| ” 
iT ; 


“We we hiss {on]| bhuaffs, hiss, ZZ, ZL, Ze)" 
AqgéIukt im0'/lEqan iqe’/sqés. Ateo/lXam uya’k-ikala: 
It was brought tohim a voung eik blue-jay. He said to her his wife: 
Peres | | blanket] 
“EmXLXa/nako-y- 0qjoyo’qXut!” Agid’lXam: “Ljlop L;lop, néx 
“Put it on old woman!”’ She said to him: allel [, 2] [7] 
néx teu tei.” “Kya naué/tkaa Lé/Xat na qLa/qéwam LE’x:a-0t, pos 
[2] (2 ee et La “And indeed one {int. conjuror assembles, if 
part. } 
na mXLXa/nako it!o/kte?” WiXt nOXo-ina/Xit té/l-xEm g6 igé’p!al. 
{int. you put on a good one?"’ Again they stood people in the door- 
part. ] way. 
“A,akerma x‘itaec 0Xo-ina/Xit, 6xo-iwa/yutego?” “A, Lléq;a ‘muke. 4 
“Ah who - then they stand . they dance?” Ah, the wolves.’ 
“Ne’saika’ qLE’nsxit na/‘tkankué’l) kja_ ex‘ta’mtxi’x. A, 
“We we haul with our [2] and the deer fawn. Ah, 
mouths 
qgLLEnca’/nEmkoti/keé koti/kea koti‘kea.” 
we have our faces blackened, blackened, blackened.” 
Nix'no’ti igé’sqés. Aqué/luky Llé’q;amL kLkex Lok. 
He helped blue-jay. It was carried wolves being blanket. 
singing to him 
Aktexa/mal 0’/pEnpEn ta’/nox: 
She sang much her skunk ‘ separate: 


conjuror’s song 
“Axla/wat, axla’wat, untaméwa'lEma qix: igé/sqés a, qix: iqé/sqés.” 


‘*Together, together, our dead people that  blue-jay, that blue-jay.” 
A'lta né‘k-im igé/sqés: “MO0’pa k@a’/sa-it. Ngé’/ma.” ‘-N&2, ho/ntcin 
Now he said blue-jay: “Go out robin. I shall speak.” ‘No, do not 
émilqjé/latexita. A’xka xilg@’/ma i’kta iaxagkla’/xo. Qana qéna 
you will be a silent one She she willspeak what she resolves it. When _ if [int. 
to herself {int. part.] part.] 
mola’ma?” 


you say to her?” = 

Ta‘kE wiXt noXoina’Xit télxEm. “A, akcEma _ x-itac 

Then again they stood people. evAthy who then 

kLgtwa’yutcko?” “Leaya/‘muke.” A‘Ita aLx‘Eluwa‘yutck Leaya/muke. 

they dancing?”’ ‘“The grizzly bears.”” Now they danced the grizzly bears. 

Io/Lqté aLx‘Eluwa’yutck go we’wuLé. Ta’/kE aLE’/k-im LgoLé/lEXEmk 
Long they danced in the interior Then he said a person 

of the house. 


go k"La/xané: “Qantsi’x aLtpa’ya? LamkXa tikena? Kja id/Lqté 
at outside: “When they go out? Only these Aud long 
[int. part.]? 


ta‘kE aLx‘Eluwayul.” Take né’k-im Leaya/muke iLa/Xak; Emana: 


then they dance much.” Then he said the grizzly bears their chief: + 
“La‘keta xiLa-y- é@/ka qLxa/xo-il? LjE/xLjEx_ ania/x0-y- I/LaL/a. 
‘““Who that thus saying much? Teas I shall do it his body. 
Nuiuwu'laya.” ‘“Nai/kXa-y- @/ka anxa‘xo-il. E’natka gia/‘nEptéema. 
I shall eat him.” wit thus Isaidmuch. Oneside only my braid. 
Manix anLE'lgap!ax LgoLe/lXEmk, naéket naxl./wulX  06*0’/Lax, 
When -I enter him a person, not he gets high up the sun, 
a‘nqaté aLO/mEqtx.” TakE atcLo/lXam tia/cdlal: ‘Ai/aq a/lta 
already _he dies.” Then he said to them his relatives: “Quick now 
1x0’pa. A’tElaktike Lx‘Eluwa/yutcko. Tal; okulai‘tanEma 
we will go out. They next they dance, Behold the arrows 
qExkeE’xtEna.” Ta/kE a/LElaktike LEnts;E/xuks LxEluwa/yutcko. 
they growl.” Then they next the Ents; xs they danced. 
A‘lta LkcikEmuXula’ma ilé’é Lents; E’xuks: 
Now they beat fast time the ground _ the Ents; xs: 
{made shake] 
“Antsgidlaya’ ilé’é qtEntsa/éwe gEnE’/ma,” aLE’/k'im 
‘*We made it shake the ground our legs small,”’ they said 


BULL. T—20 10 


bo 


3 


bo 


10 
11 


13 


16 


18 
19 


24 


el AT 
146 O’PENPEN HER STORY. EnnOTeae 


LEntsjE/xuks. A/‘Ita né/k-im iqgé‘sqés: “LE, q;’axtsé/Lx La/‘owit 


the nts xs. Now he said blue-jay : ‘* Ha, how bad their legs, 
La/ska a/Lqi aLgidla/ya-y- ile’é. Qoi ska kya aLXke’x 
they later on they willshake it the ground. Shall and silent they are 
giLa’q;atxalkma.” A‘Ita aLx-Eluwa/yutck LEnts;E/xuke, ka mE/nx‘i 
the bad ones.”’ Now they danced the Ents; xs, and a little 
ka no/xdla q0d’/ta t!on ka né/xela ilé/e. Avyo/tXuita iqé’sqés: 
and it shook that house and it shook the ground. He stood up blue-jay: 
“La/wa, La/wa, La’wa, La’wa a/wima! TgEluktcuwa’/ya tik t!0L.” 
“Slowly, slowly, slowly, slowly younger It will fall down this house.” 
brothers! P 
ALa/LXuL; LeEnts;E’/xuke aLx‘Eluwa/yul. A/‘Ita a/LElaXtike 
They finished the Ents; xs they danced. Now they next 
Lqjacpale’ Lx‘Eluwa’yutck. Lgiuxta’mai. Itja/lapas I/Lax-ala. A‘Ita 
the gray cranes they danced. They Creve to Coyote their husband, Now 
: dance. 
né‘/ktexam itja/lapas: ‘“Niket iLx‘atna/‘n"ky a’‘tse. Ama/Lgum 
he sang his con- Coyote: ** Not look back often younger You will make 
juror’s song sister. 
kj, a/mitapa witxa’qdk.” <A’‘taqe a/éXat ugod’xd. Lqjop _ atei/ax 
that they makea our children.”’ He bit one her danghter. Cut he did it 
mistake in their 
dance 
itcea/tuk. ALa/2LXuL; aLx‘Eluwa’‘yutck. A/LElaktike ske’pXoa 
her neck. They finished they danced. Next they the rabbits 


aLx'Eluwa/yutck : 
they danced: 


“na/q mExa/nxala wala/patée’ heha’ héeha/! Emé/maq aya/mElax 
dwolll FIGs Sits ile) See 


‘*Going out you do for me post heha heha! Shooting you I do it to yon 
of way 


héha’ heha. 
Baap 
heha heh. 
Tecala‘tit uya’pLjik. TakE né/k-im igé’sqgés: 


He spanned it his bow. Then he said blue-jay : 
“Taq mxe’xela witso’/Xuix: wala’pate, heha; é@mé/maq 
“Goingout youdoforhim my younger brother post, heha; shooting you 
of way 


teimEl0/xoax heha!” 
he does it to you heha!”’ 


AqLé‘luk"y ske’pXoa kLkex Lok. ‘* LEmMXLx'a/nako-y- 


It was brought rabbit being blanket. ‘Put it on 
to him 

dq; oyo’qxut!” “Ljlop Ljop nex néx tei teu.” “Teja nalauwe'tkaa 

old woman!” paleail {?] {?j [?] [2] Balhae “Well indeed 
Lé/Xat na qLa/qéwam LE’x‘a-0t, pos na mXLXAa/nako it!o/kte?” 

one _[int. conjuror assembles, if [int. you put it on a good one?” 

part. | = part. | 
Aka/2x qaX uko/nax a/ktexEm: 
Often that  chieftainess she sang her con- 


juror’s song: 
“Axmla/wat, axEla/wat nta’/méwalEma 4 qix: iqé@/sqeés, a qix: 


‘Together, together our dead ones ah that blue-jay, ah that 
iqé’sqés m-m.” 
blue-jay m-m.” 

Ta/km wiXt atcio’1Xam ia/xk’un igé’sqés: ‘MOo’pa ka/sa-it. Ta/kE 

Then again he said tohim his elder blue-jay: ‘Go out robin. Then 

brother 
0/16 aga/nax. Ai’‘aq id/mEqta xix: eé/kole. Ngémai.” Ta/kE 
hunger it acts on Quick it will be dead this whale. I shall speak.” Then 


me. 


Ses THE SKUNK STORY—TRANSLATION. 147 


nek-im ka/sa-it: “Ii xix: @kik. Ma’mkXa na ma/kxEmt? A/xka 


he said robin : “Ta this one. Youalone  [int. you see it? She 
part.) 
xElg@/mai i/kta-y- axagkla’x0.” Qod/nEmi_ atcio’1Xam__ia’xk’un 
she will say what she will do herself.” Five times he said to him his elder 
herself brother 
-jupa’/ya. Niiket ay0d’pa_ ska/sa-it. A‘Ita na-ixa/Iqamx — ige’sqeés: 
he shall go Not he went out robin. Now he shouted blue-jay : 
out. 
“Ugo/dicge 0/pEnpEn. E/teats;a agia/laut qa ikjuano’m agia’xo il.” 
g q I i i § 
‘She a farter skunk. Her sickness shemakeson when potlatch she aleye 
him makes.” 


Pd naxb/lwieqe, ac ia/xkate ac é@/kyjilapx‘il nicilga’/kxo-it e’kole. 


Blow- she farts, and then and falling over he lay on his back the whale. 
ing 
Atcid’/péwe igé/sqés. Ayugoo’L;6 it ayawea/yakuit. A‘Ita aqa’/yaxe 
He blew himaway blue-jay. He flew away and she was squeezed into Now it was cut 
stuck to it a hole. 
qix: é’/kole. Kanauwé’ té/lx‘Em atga’/yaxc. Qi2xtcé na-ixE/lqamx 
that whale. All people they cut it. Intending he shouted 
igé/sqés: “Laq" nk/xa ka/sa-it.” Aqid/tetXum, ka/nauweé aqa’yaxc, 
blue-jay: ‘'Takeout dome robin.” It was finished, all it was cut, 
texl aydé/wulXt ka/sa-it, tex Laq" atca/yax. A/Ita ia/mkXa qix: 
then he went up robin, then take out he did him. Now only that 
é/Lwulé ateca/yaxc igé’sges. 
its meat he cut it blue-jay. 
Translation. 


A chieftainess sang her conjurer’s song. She madea large house and 
invited the people. The people landed. Blue-Jay was the chorus 
leader of the chieftainess. ‘“ Who are those outside who want to 
dance?” “Ah, the maggots; they will dance.” Now the maggots 
entered; they sang: ‘‘ We make move therotten meat; we make move 
the rotten meat.” Blue-Jay joined their song and they gave him a 
mountain goat blanket in payment. He said to his wife: ‘“ Put it on, 
old woman.” But she replied; ‘“Llop, Llop, néq, néq, teu, teu.” “Cer- 
tainly,” said Blue-Jay, ‘‘when conjurers assemble it is better not to 
put on beautiful clothing.” Now other people sang in front of the door. 
‘Who are those who want to dance?” ‘Ah, the geese; they want to 
dauce.” Now the geese entered; they sang: ‘ We pull out the sea- 
grass, the sea-grass, the sea-grass, and it drifts away.” They gave 
Blue-Jay in payment a blanket made of geese skins. Other people 
stood at the door. ‘‘Who are those who want to dance?” ‘Ah, the 
elks; they want to dance.” Now they entered and sang: “We hiss 
on bluffs; we make z-z-z on bluffs.” Blue-Jay joined their song: “You 
hiss on bluffs.” They gave him a blanket made of the skin of a young 
elk in payment. He said to his wife: ‘Put it on, old woman.” She 
replied: ‘Llop, Llop, néq, néq, teu, teu.” “Certainly,” said Blue-Jay, 
‘“‘when conjurers assemble itis better not to put on beautiful clothing.” 
Again people stood at the door. ‘‘ Who are those who want to dance 2?” 
“The wolves; they want to dance.” They entered and sang: ‘ We 
carry deer-fawns in our mouths; we have our faces blackened.” Blue- 
Jay joined their song and they gave him a wolf blanket in payment. 


oo no 


10 


148 O'PENPEN HER STORY. . ‘BUREAU OF 


The chieftainess, the skunk, was singing by herself: ‘ Blue-Jay’s 
and my ancestors used to keep company.” Blue-Jay said to his brother: 
‘‘Robin, go out, I shall speak to her.” Robin replied: *‘ No, be quiet, 
do not speak to her, she will say herself what she resolves to do. Do 
not speak to her.” 

Then more people stood in front of the door. ‘Ah, who are those 
who want to dance?” “The grizzly bears.” Now the grizzly bears 
danced. They danced a long time in the house. Then a person said 
outside: “‘ When will they go out; do they think they alone want to 
dance?” Then the chief of the grizzly bears said: ‘‘ Who is talking 
there? I shall tear him to pieces; I shall eat him.” ‘Iam talking; L 
have a braid on one side of my head only. When I enter a man in the 
morning he must die before noon.” Then the grizzly bear said to his 
people: “Let us go out and let them dance. Behold the arrows are 
growling.” 

Next the birds Ents;x danced. They sang in a rapid movement: - 
‘‘Our legs are small, but we make the ground shake.” Blue-Jay said: 
‘‘Ha, how miserable are your legs, they will make the ground shake! 
Be quiet, you bad people.” The birds danced and after a little while 
the house began to shake. Blue-Jay arose and said: ‘Slowly, slowly,. 
slowly, younger brothers, the house will fall.” The birds finished danc- 
ing, and next the gray cranes began to dance. Coyote was their hus- 
band. He sang his shaman’s song, ‘Do not look back, younger sister, 
because you cause our children to make mistakes.” Then he bit one of 
the children and tore off his neck. After they finished dancing the 
rabbits came and sang: ‘Step aside, step aside, post, heha, heha, I will 
shoot you, heha, heha!” He spanned his bow and Blue-Jay said: 
‘‘Step aside for my younger brother, post, heha, else he will shoot you, 
heha!” They gave him a blanket made of rabbit skins. [Blue-Jay 
gave it to his wife and said:| ‘ut it on, old woman.” She replied: 
“Llop, Llop, néq, néq, teu, teu.” ‘O, yes,” remarked Blue-Jay, “when 
conjurers assemble it is better not to put on beautiful clothing.” Now 
the chieftainess continued to sing her conjurer’s song: “ Blue-Jay’s and 
my ancestors used to keep company, m-m-m-m.” Again Blue-Jay said 
to his brother: ‘‘Go out, Robin, I am hungry. She shall kill the whale 
quickly.” Robin replied: ‘ la, do you think you alone see this? She 
will say herself what she wants to do.” Five times Blue-Jay said to: 
his elder brother to go out, but Robin did not leave the house. Then 
Blue-Jay shouted: “The skunk is a wind-maker; she will make sick 
those whom she invited to the dance.” She made wind and the whale 
fell down dead right there. Blue-Jay was blown away and he was 
caught in a knot-hole in the wall, in which he stuck. Now the people 
cut the whale. Blue-Jay cried: “Take me out, Robin, take me out.” 
When the whale was all cut, Robin went up and took him out. Then 
Blue-Jay cut the meat only. 


13. SKA’/SA-IT ICTA/KXANAM K;A IQE/SQES. 


RoBIN THEIR MYTH AND BLUE-JAY’S. 


Cxéla/itX cka/sait. A/Ita-y-0/l0-y- agk/ctax. QaxLxnata/Lax: 
There was robin. Nov hunger it did him. One day: 

“Ai/aq, mxEItXuitck ka/sa-it,” né/k'im iqé’/sqés. <A/‘Ita a/ecto god 

‘ Quick, makevryourself ready robin,” he said blue-jay. Now they two to 
went 


we/kua. Go-y-énLée/x‘atk acxga/mita. Takk naéxEIqamx: “A, 
the ocean. In a slough they were in canoe. Then he shouted : “Ah, 
mnxatala’ptck gitsakxéwa’m!” TakE naxE/Iqamx = gitsa/kxéwam. 
come shoreward sleeper.” Then she shouted the sleeper. 

E/maLna néLa’et. TakE wiXt na-@éxE/Iqamx iqgé/sqés: “ Xoa/u 


Seaward trom she. was. Then again he shouted blue-jay: “ Why 
him 


mxaLe’Lx? QtumgeElo’/kstxa, iqsd’/tElOtElO tia’wit.”. TakE wiXt 
do you goseaward? Something is carried [a bird with long legs] his legs.”’ Then again 
to you, 

naxE’/lqamx gitsa/kxéwam. Q;0a’p @/maLna  néLa’-ét. WiXt 
she shouted the sleeper. : Meets seaward from him she was. Again 

atco’lXam: ‘“Xoa/u mxaLée/Lx? QtumgElo/kstxa, iqs0d’/tElotEld 

he said to her: ‘““Why do you go seaward? Something is carried to {a bird with 
you, long legs] 


tia’wit.” Qoai/nEmi atca/iqamx. Ala/xti naxa-igE/cgiptck. Alta 
his legs.”’ Five times he called her. Next shefswam shoreward. Now 
atea’lEk-ike. Aci’ Xko alta.  Acgakqa’/na-it  icta’k; éténax. 
he speared her. They two went home now. They put it into the canoe what they had killed. 
AcXgo‘mam; a/ctoptck. AtcidXam iaXk’un: “Mxe'Igitx, 
They arrived at home; they wentinland. He said to him his elder brother: ‘*Make fire, 
ka/sa-it!” Na-ixE/lgiLx ska/sa-it. A’yuLx igé/sqés, atcdLa’/taptck 
robin!” He made fire robin. He paisa sea- blue-jay, he carried it inland 
war 


1a/k)étenax. A‘lta nixE/Igéxs igé@/sqés. Ta’/ke né/k‘im ska/sa-it: 
what he had killed. Now he cut blue-jay. Then he said robin: 
“Nai/kXa Lga/lict, nai‘kXa Lga/mokué, nai/kXa_ iigo/k’ultcin.” 
“My my tail, my my flesh under the chin, my my head.” 
Ta’/kE nix‘E/Lx’a igé@/sqés: ‘“Mxelgé’/x-éalé, mxElgé’x-éalé. Teia’xd 
Then hebecameangry blue-Jay: ‘*You ask for it, you ask forit. They willeatit 
Q;tée‘nsé xik @kta aqéme’lua.” Ta/kE nigk’tsax  ka&/sa-it. 
6; te’nsé this that it was killed for you.” Then he cried robin. 
Ateid/egam = ia/x6tekin. Ayd’pa. A’lta  nigk’tsax k"1La/xani. 
He took it his work. He went out. Now he cried outside. 
Ala’xOL; nixE/Igixe igé/sqés. TakE atcige/lxém_ ia/xk;un: 
He finished he cut blue-jay. Then he called him _ his elder brother: 
“Ma’tp!a, ma/tp!a Lmé/xauyam Lma/mokué mai/kXa, Lmii/mokXué 
“Come in, come in you poor one, your flesh under yours, your flesh under 
the chin the chin 


mai’kXa; oma‘kjultcin mai/kXa; LEmié/léct mai/kXa.” Ta/kE a‘yop! 
yours; your head yours; your tail yours.” Then heentered 
ska/sa-it. A/lta acxge’ktcikt icta/lEkteal; ta/kE acxLxa/lEm. Id’/Lqté 
robin. Now it wasdone whatthey roasted; then - they ate. A long time 
acxé'Ja-it. Nix-ge’qauwako igé/sqés. ‘“Ka/sa-it,” atcio’/1Xam 
they stayed. He dreamt blue-jay. ‘* Robin,” he said to him to 
ia/xkjun, “aqantga‘lEmam; anx-gé/qauwako nuguila/ita.” Ta/kE 
his elder “people came to fetch us; I dreamt I shall cure by means Then 
brother,”’ of sorcery.” 


149 


bo 


mem Ow 


4 


bo 


12 


* = = — = 
150 SKA’SA-IT KjA IQE SQES THEIR MYTH. pie = 
acxéla/-it.  A‘Ita LO/itEt iLxEnxEné/mate. Qjoa’p aLxe/géla-é, 
they two stayed. Now they came —_ they who wailed while early they landed, 
traveling. 
ackugoa/laqT a‘lta Ogo@/xgoex. Nexa’-égila-é. Aqid/1Xam igé’/sqés: 
they tworecognized now the ducks. They landed. He was told blue jay: 
“A, ayimuya’xit imta/qix.. IamtgaEmam, migéla/-éta-é.” Ne/k-im 
“ Ah, he chokes your brother- I came to fetch you, youshalleure him by He said 
in-law. means of sorcery.” 
iqé’sqés: ‘“ntd’ya.” <A/‘Ita acxE/ItXuitck iqé/sqés. A/Ita a/cto. 
blue-jay : “We will go.” Now they made themselves __ blue-jay. Now they 
ready went. 


Atci0'lXam_ ia/xk’un: “Mgé/ma_  ka/sa-it: ‘EXt  ikak;0/Litx- 
He said to him [to] Be elder “ Say robin: ‘One lake 
rother: 


gitxalEmé/mtoma igd’n @/nata.” E’ka mola’/ma manix anigéla/-étaé.” 
she will pay usforcuring also one side.’ Thus youwillsay when I cure him by means 
him of sorcery.” 


Né‘k-im ska/sa-it: “A/yipé!” Acxé/gila-é. A/Ita cka ci‘Iecill uya/Lutek 
He said robin: Welle They landed. Now and _ rattling his breath 
itea/k-ikal 6goé/xgoéx. A/‘Ita ayugué’la-it iqé’sqés: 
her husband the duck’s. Now he cured him by _ blue-jay:, 
means of sorcery 


Ka iaXa/lak, ka iaXa‘lagE’ kaxunta/gEmémto’m agun a/nata. 


Paid. ft gdiie es ieee 


And both sides, and both sides we are paid for curing him and its one side. 
Kula/yi ta’/noxué Oqoé/xqoéx axEno/tém: “Qoée’x a/nata 
Far another [song] the female duck helped singing: **Qoé’x one side 
LEmtaLtx‘Ena‘’n!” <A, Laq® atca/éxax qax 6n’0’/L;6-it. Tlaya’ 
your nephews!” Ah, out he made it that whatchoked him. Well 
atca/yax, tlaya’ né/xax. Alta acktopa/yaLx  cta’/kemé/mtom 
he made him, well he got. Now they gathered what they had received 


; in pay for curing him 
moket Okuni/m pau. A/‘lta aci/Xgd acger’/tokL. AcXg6/mam. 


two canoes full. Now they went they carried They came home. 
home them. 
Acto’kXuiptck teta‘at. Ka/nauwé acto’/kXuiptck. A/‘Ita acxé’la-it, 
They carried inland their roots. All they carried inland. Now they stayed, 
acgE’tax teta/at. Acktod/2tetXom ka/nauwé qOo’ta teta/at. 
they ate _ their roots. They finished all those roots. : 
TakE wiXt nix-gé/qauwako igé@/sqés: ‘ Ka‘sa-it,” atcio’1Xam 
Then again he dreamt blue-jay : “Robin,” he said to him | to) 
ia/xkj’un, ‘“Nix-gé/qauwako aqEntga/lEmam, noguéla’/étae.” Mank 
his elder brother, “*T dreamt people came to fetch us, I shall cure him by A little 


means of sorcery.” 
k'sa/xali na/xax 080/Lax; acg@/EIkE] ikani’m,  a’‘k;amdketike. 


up became the sun; they saw a canoe, two in canoe. 
Nixi/2gila-6 ikani/m. A/‘tgatptck alta mo‘ketike tq;’ulipXuna‘yu. 
It landed thecanve. They cameinland now two youths. 
Aci/2tptegam alta LlEq;a/muke Leta’q;’olipx:. Aqid’IXam iqé@’sqés: 
They came inland now the wolves their youths. He was told blue-jay: 
“KamtgaleEmam. Ontea/hat!au ayan’0’/L;o-it.” Né/k-im iqé/sqés: 
‘““We came to fetch you. Our virgin is choking.” He said blue-jay: 
“Nto/yaa.” La2, a/lta acxE/ItXuitck igé’sqés kja ska’sa-it. 
““Weshallcome.”’ Sometime now they made themselves blue-jay and robin. 
ready 
Ateid’1Xam ia/xk;un igé/sqés: “ Ma/nix niguila/ita, ia/xka ia/qoa-1L 
Hesaidtohim [to] his elder blue-jay : ‘When I cure him by that large 
brother means of sorcery, 
iqd/‘mxom, ia/xka migintcia‘/k"tia. Mgé/max: ‘x‘ix:0’/yax qé/La-it.’” 
basket, that point to it. Say: ‘ That there somebody isin 
it [spirit of 
disease].’”’ 


Nék-im  ska/sa-it: “A/vipé.” Acxi/2gila-é iqé/sqés. A/Ita cka 
He said robin: “well? They two landed blue-jay. Now and 


ae ROBIN AND BLUE-JAY MYTH—TRANSLATION. 151 


te; é/kte;ék ugd’/mokue qaX oho’t!au. Take ayo’La-it iqé’/sqes. A/lta 
almost out of her throat that virgin. Then he stayed blue-jay. Now 
breath 


yukuela’éta-i: 
- he cured her by means of sorcery: 
I’kta qia ya’/loc qau 0kj0’skEs ko na/xumLxi0/gux 60g0/mokue. 
ee ee al ded od so wld dae 7e 
“What if inthere that girl it gets curled up her throat.” 
Ta/kE né‘/k-im ska/sa-it: “xix'0/yax qé@/La-it.” AtcigE/ntciakté qix: 
Then he said robin: ‘““That there somebody is in.” He pointed to ite that 
ia/qoa-iL iqd’/mxom. Aqid/ik"tcd iqd/mx0m. AqigElo’tx‘Emite ka/sa-it. 
large basket. Itwastakendown the basket. It was placed near hims robin. 
A‘lta® @/ka né/xax ka/sa-it; qiax ia/qoa-iL, tex atcigEntcia’qtxe 
Now thus did robin; if a large one, then he pointed at it 
iqo‘mxoOm. Laq°® ateci‘ax qix: é/kta yamn’0/LjOox. A/‘Ita imd’lak 
the basket. Out he made it that something choking her. Now an elk 
uya’q;’oxL. Aqcilgé/memtom paL méket okuni’m Lj 0Le/ma cxé’lak 
its knee. He was paid for curing her full two canoes meats mixed 
kja-y- 6’pXul. A/Ita aci/Xko. I0/LjL aci’/xax a/Ita. AcXgd’mam 
and fat. Now they wenthome. Glad they became now. They came home 
go tE’ctaqL; acto’/kXuiptck q0/La LjOLé’ma. PaL n0/x0x tE/ctaqL. 
to their house; they carried inland that meat. Full became their house. 


Translation. 


There were Blue-Jay and Robin. Once upon a time they were hun- 
ery. Blue-Jay said: ‘Make yourself ready, Robin.” And they went 
to the sea where a slough was left by the receding tide. They were in 
their canoe. Blue-Jay called: “Come ashore, sleeper!” [name of a 
large fish]. The sleeper shouted |in reply], but it was far away from the 
shore. Blue-Jay called again: ‘‘Why do you stay far from the shore? 
Only the heron can carry [food] to you [if you stay that far from the 
shore].”. Again the sleeper shouted; he was nearer the shore now. 
Blue-Jay repeated: “ Why do you stay far from the shore? Only the 
heron can carry [food] to you [if you stay that far from the shore].” 
Blue-Jay called him five times; then he came ashore. Blue-Jay 
speared him and he and his brother went home after they had thrown 
the fish into their canoe. They reached their home and went ashore. 
Blue-Jay said to his brother, ‘‘Make a fire.” Robin made a fire. 
Blue-Jay went and carried the fish up to the house. He cut it and 
Robin said: ‘1 will have its tail, I will have its breast, I will. have its 
head.” Then Blue-Jay became angry: ‘ You want to have everything 
for yourself; the Q; té’nse* are going to eat.what has been killed for'yeu.” 
Then Robin cried; he took his work and left the house. He cried 
outside. Blue-Jay finished cutting the fish. Then he called his elder 
brother [and said]: ‘‘Come in, come in, you poor one, you shall have 
the breast, you shall have the head, you shall have the tail.” Then 
Robin came in. When the fish was roasted they began to eat. 

After some time Blue-Jay dreamed, and he said to his elder brother: 
“Robin, I dreamed people sent for us; I was to cure a sick person.” 
After some time people came in a canoe, wailing. When they had almost 


*An imaginary tribe. 


ko 


or) 


~] 


“9 
10 


152 SKA’SA-IT KjA IQESQES THEIR MYTH. ab ald = 


reached the shore they recognized the duck. She landed and said to 
Blue-Jay: ‘“O, your brother-in-law is choking. I came to fetch you; 
you shall cure him.” Blue-Jay replied: ‘We shall go.” They made. 
themselves ready to go. They went, and he said to his elder brother: 
‘Robin, you must say, ‘She shali give us in payment one lake and one- 
half of another lake.’ Thus you must say when I cure her.” Robin said: 
“All right.” They landed. The duck’s husband was breathing heav- 
ily. Now Blue Jay began to cure him and Robin sang: “ You shall 
pay us both sides of one lake and one side of another lake.” One of 
the ducks who sat at some distance sang differently: “‘ Qoé’x, one side 
shall be yours, my nephews.” Then Blue Jay took out the morsel 
which was choking the duck and made him well. He recovered. Now 
[Robin and his brother] dug roots on the place which they had received 
in payment. They gathered two canoes full and went home. They 
arrived at home. They carried their roots up to the house. They 
stayed there for some time. They ate all their roots. Then Blue Jay 
dreamed again. He said to his elder brother: ‘Robin, I dreamed that 
people sent for us; I was to cure a sick person.” In the afternoon 
they saw a.canoe coming; two persons were in it. They landed and 
two young men came up to the house. They were the young wolves. 
They said to Blue-Jay: “We come to call you; a girl of our family is 
choking.” Blue-Jay replied: ‘‘We shall go.” After some time he 
and his brother made themselves ready, and he said to his elder 
brother: “When I cure her you must point to the largest basket and 
say, ‘There is the spirit of the disease.’” “All right,” replied Robin. 
They landed, and when they came to the house the girl was almost 
suffocated. Then Blue-Jay began to cure her. He sang: “ What is it 
that is in this girl? Her throat is all twisted up.” Then Robin said, 
pointing to the largest basket: “It is in that large basket.” The 
wolves took it down and placed it near Robin. Robin continued to do 
so, and pointed to all the large baskets. Then Blue-Jay took out what 
had choked the girl; it was the kneepan of an elk. Then they gave 
them in payment two canoes full of meat and grease. They went 
home and now they were satisfied and carried the meat up to the 
house. Their house became full. 


14. IQE’SQES K;A IO’I ICTA/KXANAM. 
BLUE-JAY AND I0/I THEIR MYTH. 


Cxéla’-itx’ igé/sqes kja  uya’xk’un. Ka‘nauwé = L*aLa’/ma 
There were blue-jay and his elder sister. All days 
akLola‘lepta-itx ikjEna‘tan. “Qo‘i tkalai/tanEma mtax,” agio’/1Xam 

she always dug potentilla roots. ‘‘ Shall arrows make,” she said to him 
uya’/xk’un. ‘“Itei/pote atgiumeé’qLa-itx tlala’/xuke, tqoéxqoé/xuke, 
his elder sister. *‘My buttocks they always lick it the birds, ducks, 
tkjElakEla’‘ma, tmontsjikts;é/kuks.” Né@’k'im = igé/sqés: “A’ka 
geese, tail ducks.” He said blue-jay : “Thus 
anxE’Lux.” Né‘/kteukté, wiXt no/ya akLola’pam uya/xk’un. <Atei’‘tax 
I think.” It got day, again she went she dug his elder sister. He made 
tkalai‘tanEma atcL0/kXoL;. A/Ita a/yo. Ated’/xtkinEmam uya/‘xk’un. 
arrows he finished them. Now hewent. He searched for her _ his elder sister. 
Ka kwola‘lept 10'1, a, LE’xLEx iLa’pote né/xax. NaxE/Lxég6, goyé’ 
Where = she always 101, ah, noise of her anus became. She looked back, thus 
dug scratching 


na‘xax. A/lta cix-Ela‘tit iqé/sqés. GO itca’pote: “Ana/x, x-ix-i/k 
she did. Now he spanned his blue-jay. At her anus: ‘*Anah, this 
bow 


kx'sia‘kulq;’ast!” Aga éxE/cgam uya’‘pL;ike. Agid’lXam: ‘“ X0’ta, 
squint eye! © She took it from him his bow. She said to him: ‘These, 
XO'ta_ tlala’xuke Oxoéla’-itx.” Ita’mat agia’wax. Ia/mat agé/lax 
these birds they are.” Shooting shedidthem. Shooting she did him 
them him 


eXt icimé’wat. Aya’pXEla qix: icimé’wat. Agid/lXam_ Lia/uX: 
one male mallard His grease that male mallard She said to him her younger 
duck. duck. brother: 


“Ai/aq  meE’Xko. Manix mXg0d/mama cEmiaJEq, cEmié/lEq, 
“Quick go home.” When you arrive at home nose ornament, nose ornament, 
antElte’ma. [a’mqa iqa/naks megangEklo’tka kja_ tga/pa-it.” 
bring them to eat. Only a stone keep for me and its rope.” 
“Aka anxE/Lux,” né‘/k:im igé‘sqés. Né/Xko iqé’/sqés. A/Ita atcé/klata 
“Thus I think,” he said blue-jay. He went blue-jay. Now he plucked it 
: home ; 


qix: icimé’wat. AtcLé/2kX0L; atcé/klata. Lqui‘nEmiks tga/a I6/i. 
that male mallard He finished he plucked it. Five her chil- 10/i. 
duck. dren. 
Ta/kE Lqju’pLqjup atea’yax qix: @/pXill; ia/pXEla icimé/wat. A/Ita 
Then cut he did it that grease: its grease — the male mal- Now 
lard Juck’s. 
kyau/k;au atcé/Lgax q0d’/Lac Lka/cocinike, I0/i tga/a. Na-ixE/lgiLx: 
tie he did itto them those children. Ioi__ her chil- He made a fire: 
dren. 
“Ai/aq amexa/nEmiL; 0*0/lEptckiX. Mckanauwe'tike mexLxé/gd 
“Quick put your faces to the tire fire. You all look into the fire 
jau’a ma’Lne.” A’‘lta atciupo’nit iqa/nake, goyée’ ia/qa-it. A/Ita 
there tothemiddle Now he put it up a stone, that large. Now 
ot the house.” 
aLxE’Lxego iau’/a-y- 00/lEptckiX. A‘Ita ayo/sku-it qix: é’pXill. 
a eee into there the fire. Now it became warm that grease. 
the fire 


A‘Ita aLkKLo/migl Lia/qxatcau. Na/Xko 10. Agixa/laq7é. AgE/L‘EI]kE] 
Now they licked it oft it; fat. She went I6/i. Sheopenedthe door. She saw them 
; home 
tga‘a. A‘lta exLa/llt cta/xést. Akso/pEna iau/’a we/wuLé. Yukpa/ 
Ber chil- Now tHushed their faces. She jumped then into the house. Right here 
ren. 


153 


wo bo = 


12 


6 


154 IQE SQES KjA 10/1 THEIR MYTH, ~ eTHNOHsEE 


qix: iqa/naks ayagEltcé/mEx it. [a/xkate na/ek;ElapXuite. [a/2Lqte 


that stone it hit her. There she fell over. A long time 
nuquna/étix't; naxa/latck, ateala’‘tako. ‘“Na2, xix: ksia‘qulq;’ast! 
_ she lay there; she arose, she recovered. “Anah, that squint eye! 
K’ka = na ayamo’1Xam?” AquX0/kXuit tga/‘a  ma/Lx6le. 
Thus [int. did I say to you?” She threw them her chil- from the mid- 
part.] dren dle to the sides 


of the house. 
“AyamoXam: ‘Mé/nx'E, mii/nx‘E mitElema‘ko. AyamoXam, 


“T said to you: ‘A little, a little give them.’ I said to you, 
‘Oquna’ amsgangElo/tka”” “A’ka anxE’Lux,” ne‘k'im  ige’sqeés, 
‘The stomach keep for me.’” “Thus I thought,” he said blue-jay, 
“ka mai/kXa tan tei tjaya’ amEn0o‘1Xamx?” 

‘and you some- [int. good you say tome?” 


thing part. | 
Agid/IXam wiXt Lga/uX 10/i: “QO0‘7 ikani‘m ame/nElax, @/owitq 
She said tohim again her younger 10’: “Shall acanoe youmakeitforme, aleg 
brother 
Lj a/ap.” “A’ka anxE/Lux,” né/k-im iqe‘sqés. Na‘k:im 10/1: “Ta’/ke 
fitting.” “Thus I think,” he said blue-jay. She said 10/i: “Then 
kj@ xix: ikjEna/tan; a/Ita iau’a @/natai no’‘yima manix 
nothing these potentilla roots; now then on the other side I shall go when 
often 


mLigo/L;a_ qix: ikani‘m.” “A’ka anxE/Lux,” neé/k-im  igé/sqés. 
you finish that canoe.” “ Thus I think, ° he said blue-jay. 

Kawi/X a‘yo igé’/sqés. AteLik/Itgipa é’ckan. Atcid’/quna-itx ia/towit; 
Early -c went blue-jay. He hollowed out a cedar. He put into it his leg; 

atcia‘kqana-itx. AteLé’/kX0L; ikani‘m = igé‘sqés. Atcio’lXam 

he put it into t_. canoe. He finished the canoe blue-jay. He said to her 

uya/xk’un: “Ta/kE anLé’kXoL; qix: ikani‘m.” A‘cto acgiusgé/Lxam. 

his elder sister: * Then I finished it that canoe.’ They went they took it to the 

water. 


Acto/yam go uya/xk’un,. AgéE]KE] 10/1 qix: ikani‘m. A/‘Ita etwit 
They arrived at_ his elder sister. She saw it Io'i that canoe. Now a leg 
Lijap. “Nax, xix: ksia/kulqjast! E’ka na _ -ayamo/lXam? 
fitting. “Anah, that squint eye! Thus [int.part.] did I say to you! 
Ayamo/lXam_ La/k;ayax LgiO/ktEll.” “A’ka anxk’/Lux,” ne‘k-im 
I said to you one man in canoe carrying.” «Thus I thought,” he said 
iqé/sqés, “kia wmaikXa tan ‘tei wuk; amkErno‘1Xam?” 
blue-jay, ‘and you something [int. part.]: straight you say to me? " 
Né/kteukté wiXt. A/lta é@/ktan wiXt atca/yax iqe’sqes ikani’/m. 


It got day again. Now another again he made 1t blue-jay canoe. 


Alta it;0’kti ikani/m, La’k;ayax Lgid/ktHll. Alta  agio’ktEl 


Now a good canoe, one mau in canoe carrying. Now she carried it 
uya’xk’un. 
his elder sister. 

Lélé avxé/la-it. Agio’IXam uya/xk’un: ‘“Qo‘i amulé/méxa-itx. 


Long they staid. She said to him his elder sister: ‘Shall you marry. 
Lia/gil amLo/egamx. ALgEngElgé/cgEliLx LEla/lipt, kana/xtei 
A woman take her. She shall help me digging, but 
Lmé/mEloct.”.. Né/k-im  iqé/sqés: “A’ka anxE/Lux.” No/mEqt 

a dead one.” He said blue-jay : “Thus I think.” She was dead 
iLa/xak;’EMana-y- uya’/xa qgo’/Lac @Xt giLta/lXam. A’yo po‘lakli ka 

their chief his daughter those one people oftown. He went atdark and 
Laq® atca/xom igé/sqés. Kawi’X nixé/géla-i ka atco‘lXam uya‘xk’un: 
take out he did her blue-jay. Early he landed and_ hesaid to her his elder sister: 
“A, X0O/La anLé/géla-i Lmé/mEloct, ka qé amEno/lXam.” “ Nax, 
“Ah, that one I land here the dead one. thus as you said to me.” ‘‘Anah, 
xix: ksia/qulqjast! Lqjéyo’qxot ayamo/1Xam mtLucga’ma. Ai‘aq 
that squint eye! an old one I said to you you shall take her. Quick 
LE’k"La iau/a tid’/LEma.” Alta ayd’tctcd igé/sqés. Laq® aLe’xax 
carry her there tothe supernat- Now he went out blue-jay. Cut off he did it 


ural beings.” to sea 


CHINOOK BLUE-JAY AND I0‘'I MYTH. 155 


La/yaqeo ka/‘nauwe2. Ia/qxulqt, a/yo ka Oxoéla‘itix: tid/LEma. 
his hair all. He cried, he went where they were the supernat- 
ural beings. 


Atgiltca’ma aqixEné/mate. Atgk’pa tid’/LEma. “Ak;c, Lia/xauyam 


They heard him somebody cried They went the super- “Oh, the poor one, 
while traveling. out natural beings. 

ige’sqés. la/xka xik ¢@xEnx‘Ené/maté. LO/nas uya’/xk’un Xau 
blue-jay. He that he cried traveling. Perhaps his elder sister thatone 

o/mEqt.” Ixa/xo-il igé/sqés: “A- v ogu‘kikala!” ‘LO/nas uya/lé 
dead.” He said much blue-jay: “Ah my wife!” ‘* Perhaps his sister 

Xauq, tea/xo-il uya‘k-ikala.” Nixii/gila-é iqe/sqes. Aqage’la-it 
that, he says his wife.” He landed blue-jay. She was cured by 


means of sorcery 
qeéxtee. Aqéwa/amtexoko: ‘“Qantsi’x ka no’/mEqt?” Neé’k-im: 


intending. He was asked: ‘‘How many [days| and she is dead?” He said: 
“'Ta/anLki no/mEqt.” “A, md/ya g0- y- eXt gita/‘/Xam, La/cka 
“ Yesterday she died.” “Ah, go one people of a town, they 
Lkto/kul L; paq aLkLa’x é@’/Xte ka’ o-itmt.” Né’k-im igé@’sqgés, a/xka-y- 
they know neal they dothem one sleep.” He said blue-jay, that 
0°0/Lax atcd/mE] ka no/mEqt. WixXt a/yo igé/sqés. Qaxi/2 kula/-i 
day he bor ght her and _ she died. Again hewent  blue-jay When far 
ka aya/kxoye. Wax neé’‘ktcukté; wiXt a/yo iqé’sqés ka-y- 0xo0e- 
then he slept. Onthe next it got day; again he went  blue-jay where they 
morning 


la/itx: tid’‘TEma. WiXt ¢é/qxElqt atgiltca‘ma. Atger’pa tid’/LEma: 
were thesupernatural Again acryingone  theyheard him. They went out the supernat- 
beings. ural beings. 
“A, igé/sqés Lia/xauyam xik ixEnxEné/maté; Lonas uya/xk’un 
‘Ah, blue-jay the poor one that he cries traveling ; perhaps _hiselder sister 
no/‘mEqt.” [xa‘xo-il uya‘k-ikala 6’/mEqt. Nixi/2gila-é iqé/sqés. A’/tgELx 
died.” He always his wife was dead. He landed blue-jay. They went to 
said the beach 


tid/LEma. Aqiga/luLx igé/sqés. A, néxgu/Litsk iqé/sqés: “A/xka-y- 
the supernat- They wentdown  blue-jay. Ah, he told them blue-jay : “That 
ural beings. to him 


0°0‘Lax anod/mEl ka no/mEqt. Ayamegé/tk"yam incagela/éta-i.” 
day Ibought her and she died. I brought her to you you cure her.”’ 
Aqo’/kumam uya/k-ikal iqgé/sqés. Aqid/lXam: ‘ Qantsi’/xé ta/kE 
She was looked at his wife blue-jay’s. He was told: ‘* How many then 
no‘mEqt na/qxdie?” “A, mdo‘keti ta/kE na’qxoié.” “A, mo/k"7a 
she is dead sleeps?’ SAth: two then sleeps.’ “Oh, carry her 
go-y- eXt giLa/lXam; La/ska LkLo‘kul m6/keti qLa‘o-itt Lj paq 
to one people of a ian, they they know two sleeps heal 
aLkha’x.” WiXt a/yo igé’sqés. Kula/yi a/yo; aya’qxoie. Kawi'x’ 
they do her.” Again hewent  blue-jay. Far he went; he, slept. Early 
wiXt nexE’l’0k6. A’‘Ita wiXt a’/yo. Ayd/yam go-y- éXt ita] Xam. 
again he awoke. Now again he went He arrived at one their town. 
Aqiltea/ma iqix‘Ené/maté. No/xaua k"La/xané qo’/tac té/lx-Em: 
He was heard he cried traveling. They ran outside those peosle: 
“Lia‘xauyam igé/sqés; LO/nas ta‘lé 0/mEqt.” la’qxulqt. Nixd/2gila-é 
“The poor blue-jay ; perhaps his sister died.’ He cried. He landed 
igé’sqés. A’/tgELx tid’LEma. A/lta itca’tcike qaX 6%0’kuil. Agio/1Xam: 
blue-jay. They went the supernat- Now stinking that woman. He was told: 


down tothe ural beings 
beach 


“Teée/xé ta/kE na/qxdie?” “A, ta/kE LO/né na/qxdie.” AqLo/egam Ltcuq 

“Howmany then her sleeps?”* ‘‘Ah, then three her sleeps.” It was taken water 

cka aqonid/2nako. Aqid/IXam: ‘“M0o/k"La go-y- @Xt giLa/lXam; 

and her face was washed. He was told: ‘Carry her to one people of a town; 

La/cka tY’aya’ aLkLa’/x LO’né qLa’o-itt.” A’yOd igé@’/sqés. ‘Qaxé: 
they good they make it three sleeps.” He went _—blue-jay. ‘*W here 

ayo’‘yam ka aya/qxdya. Wax né/ketukté. WiXt a’yo. Qjoa’/p 

he arrived and he slept. The next it got day. Again he went. Near 

morning 


eS AN 


10 


11 


15 


or) Oo — Ww ho 


~~] 


oc ® 


10 


22 


yo - =/ s BUREAU OF 
156 IQE'SQES KjA IO’'I THEIR MYTH. ee 
atcia‘xom é@1Xam. Agqiltca’ma iqix'Ené/maté yo/itEt. Atgk’/pa 
he reached _ the town. He was heard crying while traveling hecame. They went out 
té/lx‘Em: ‘A, Lia/xauyam igé/sqgés, ixinxEné/inaté, LO/nas Lga/xauyam 
the people: ‘Ah, poor blue-jay, he cries while travel- perhaps poor 
ing, 

uya‘lé 0/mEqt.” Ixa/xo-il uya’/k-ikal no’mEqt. Nixi/2gila-é igé/sqés. 
his sister died.” He said much his wife died. He landed blue-jay. 
“A-y- Ogu/kikal no/mEqt.” Aqid/lXam: “Qantsi/xé ta/kE 
“Ah, my wife died.” He was told: ‘‘ How many then 
na/qxoye?” “A, ta/kE la/kti na/qx6ié.” A‘Ita a/qxétcktc ka/nauwé 

sleeps?” “Ah, then four times sleeps.” Now — she was washed all 
aqo/kxot. Nawi kjé né/xax itea/tcke. “Mo’k"ya gd X0/Lac é@Xt 

she was Atonce nothing became her stench. ‘Carry her to these one 

bathed. 2 d 
gita‘lXam.” <A’‘yd  igé’/sqés; kula/yi aydyam; qjoa’p atcia’xom 
people of a town.” Hewent blue-jay ; far he arrived; nearly he reached it 
élXam aya’qxdie. Kawi’2x- nixE’l0k0. A/‘Ilta wiXt 4a/yo 
the town he slept. Early he awoke. Now again he went 
ka oxoela/étx: [ti0’‘LEma. Iqix'Ené/mat atgiltca‘ma. AtgE’pa 
where they were the supernatural A erying one they heard him. They went 

: beings. out 

tid’‘LEma. “A, Lia/xauyam igé/sqés. LO/nas no/mEqt uya/xkj’un.” 
the supernat- “Ah, the poor one blue-jay. Perhaps she died his elder sister.” 


ural beings. 
Nixé/gila-é iqé‘sqés. A’‘tgELx tid’‘LEma. Né’k-im iq@/sqés: “A’xka 
He landed blue-jay. They went the supernat- He said blue-jay: “« That, 
down ural beings. 


6c0/Lax anod/mEl, a/xka 06°0/Lax ka n0/mEqt.” “A, qantsi/xé ta/kE 
day I bought her, that day and she died.”’ “Ah, how many then 
na/qxoie no/‘mEqt?” “A ta/kE qui/nEmé na/qxodie.” ITa/xkaté ma/Lne 
nights she is dead?’ “Ah then five nights.” There seaward 
ka aqagé/la-it. NixElE’] é’teamxtc. <A/‘Ita aq0d/ketEptck. A/Ita go 
and she was cured. It moved her heart. Now _ she was carried from Now in 
the water inland. 


t!loL aqagé’la-it. AtcalXa/tako uya’‘kikala igé‘sqés. Ge’gula itea’pote 


the she was cured. She got well his wife blue-jay’s. Below her buttocks 
house 
LE/kXaqso iLa/Lqta. <A‘Ita aqia’cgdktc! igé/sqés god ita’xk;un 
her hair long. Now hewas broughtinto  blue-jay to the eldest 
the house brother of 
tid/LEma. A’lta aqia‘/xotcki igé’/sqés. Yukpa’t ia/pote La/yaqso 
the supernat- Now they worked on him blue-jay. To here his buttocks his hair 


ural beings. 


aqLé/lax iLa/Lqta. Aqid/lXam igé/sqés: “Ia/xkayuk m7a/-ita! E/ka 


it was made long. He was told blue-jay : ‘““ Here stay. Just as” 


nsai/ka mxa/xoO. Qui/nEMm iLad’/yiniLx aLO/mEqtx LgdLe‘lEXEmkK 
we Oz ris Five nights dead a person 
Ljpaq amuLa‘xo-ileEmx.” Kawi/2x- ne/xElatckO qix:  10/LEma. 
well you always make him.” Early he rose that supernatural 
being. 
Aqid/lXam igé’sqés: ‘“ Ni/Xua LE/mkxo-it!” Qe’xtcé ateLO/mEkxo-it 
He was told blue-jay: “Well spit!” Intending he spit 
iqeé’/sges, ac ia/xkayuk aLuquna’‘étix't X0/La  Lia/‘muXte. 
blue-jay, and there it fell down that saliva. 
AteLO/‘mEkxo-it qix: i0‘LEma. LjEq @/wa ta‘nata t!oL aLukuceé’mx-it 
He spit that supernatural Striking thus theother the it struck 
being. side of house 


qo/La Lia/mXté. Qoai/nEmi aya’qxéya igé’sqes. A/Ita ateLO/mEkxo-it, 
that saliva. Five times his sleeps blue-jay. Now he spit, 
LiEq @/wa ta/nata t!oL aLukucé/mxit. A/‘lta ikak;Ema‘na ne/xXax 
striking thus the other the it fell down. Now a chief became 
side of house 


igé/sqés. [a/Lqté né/xax ia/xkateée. A’lta ika’k XuL atea’yax. Aqid/lXam 
blue-jay. Longtime he was there. Now homesickness affected him. He was told 


EE ————— Se 


CHINOOK BLUE-JAY AND I0/I MYTH. 157 


iqé/sqés: “‘Ma/nix mxg0d/mama, ma/nix @/kit mia/x0, néket qa/nsix 
blue-jay : “When you get home, when baying you do, not [any] how 
a wife 
La/miqed @/kit mLa‘x0.” Ta/kE né’xko igé’/sqés. NiXko’mam iqé/sqés 
yourhair buying do it.” Then he went blue-jay. He-arrived at home  blue-jay 
a wife home 


g0-y- uya/xkjun. Ated/k"°7am uya/k-ikal. 


at his elder siete: Hie brought her his wife. 
home 


La‘qoa-iL Lea/wuX qgaX 6°0/kuil. QAxLxnata/Lax a’‘LO iau’a kula’‘i. 
Large her younger that woman. One day he went there far. 
brother 


ALO/yam gO igé’/sqés ta/yaqL. ALgickXa/nap!é go naLxoa’/pe. A/lta 
He arrived = at blue-jay his house. He lookedintothe house at a hole. Now 
atea*EIKE] qaX uya/xkjun gd igé/sqés cxéla‘itx.. Yukpa/2tema 
he saw her that his elder sister at blue-jay they two were. Down to here 
La’‘yaqeo§ igé/sqés iLa/Lqta. NiXgo’mam. qix: ikja‘/sks. Naket 
his hair blue-jay long. Hearrived at home — that boy. Not 
nixgu’/Litck. Kawi/2x: wiXt a‘yo. WiXt atcickXa‘nap!é <A’xka 

he told. Early again hewent. Again he looked into the house. She 
ateugua’laqgh uya’/xkjun. Qoa/nEmi a/yO qoa/nEm L*taLa/ma ka 
he recognized her his elder sister. Five times he went, five days and 
ageEIkE] uya’/xkjun. Agigh’/lxem: ‘“Ma’tp!a, ma/tp!a, au!” 
she saw him his elder sister. She called him: ‘““Come in, come in, younger 
brother!” 


agio’I1Xam. A’yop!; agé/léém. A/Ita né/Xk0. NiXko/mam; atco/1Xam 
she said to him. He entered; sha gave him Now ne went Hearrivedathome; he said to her 
to eat. ome. 


Lia‘naa: “Agk’/xkjun g0 igé/sqés 6c.” Aqid’egam é@/mtEcX ka 
hismother: “ My. elder cditbes at blue-jay she-is.”” It was taken a stick and 
aqixElgé'lex'Lako. Nigk’tsax: ‘ Nau/itka, nau‘itka,” né’k-im, 
he was whipped. He cried: ‘Indeed, indeed,” he said, 
“agEnE'ltém; agEngE’/lxém, a/nop! ka agEnE/l%m.” Aqod/ketam 
“she gave me to’eat; she called me, Ientered and she gavemeto eat.’ Somebody went 
to see 


qaxé qigd a’/qxotk. A/Ita kj’@, ia’‘mka ikani’m iupod’/nitX. AqLo6/gd 
where where shehadbeen Now ea only a canoe what was put He wassent 
put up. up. 
Lqj0a‘lipx: go igé/sqés ta’/yaqL. A‘Ita nau/itka-y- 6c ia/xkaté go 
a youth to blue-jay his house. Now indeed there was there at 
ige/sqes ta/yaqL iLa’Xak; Emana uya’xa. A‘Ita né/k-im iLa/Xak; Emana: 
blue-jay his house their chief his Now he said their bhiet: 
daughter. 
“Ai’‘aq amegilXa/mam igé/sqés. Ka/nauwé x‘i/La La/yaqed teLEn]0/ta.” 
“Quick goandspeaktohim  blue-jay. All this his hair _he shall give it 
to me. 
Qé’xtcé aqidla’/nmam igé/sqés: “A, La/méqed qLE/mxuwakux.” 
Intending somebody went to blue-jay : “Ah, -your hair is asked from you.” 
say to him : 
Niaiket qa‘da né‘/k-im igé’/sqés. Qo/nEmi qé/xtcé aqid/i Xam. AIta 
Not at all he spoke blue-jay. Five times intending he was told. Now 
né‘kim gix: ita/XakjEmana q6’tac té/Ix-Em: ‘‘Ai’aq,  lxd’ya. 
he said that . their chief those people: “ Quick, we will go. 
LxgoLa’ta.” A/Ita a/tgi té/lx‘Em. Ia/kwa aqd/cgam é’/natai itea’potitk. 


We will haul Now they the people. Here she was taken on one her forearm. 
her.”’ went side 


la‘kwa @/natai itca’potitk aqid’/egam Lé/Xat, kana/mtEma tga/potitk 


Here on tag canes her forearm - she was taken one, both her forearms 
side 


aqto’cgam. Aqod’/tx-Emt. Qoa’p igé’pjal ayo/kO iqé’/sqés. Né/xax 
were taken. Shewasputonherfeet. Near the doorway he flew blue-jay. He became 
igé/ sqés, wa‘tSEtsEtsEtsEtsE ay0/ko. Ia/xkaté nuiLjowai’d-it qaX 
a blue-jay, wa’ tsEtsEtsEtsEtsE he flew. There ake collapsed that 
o:0/kuil. Qé/xtcé aqid’/IXam_igé/sqés: “Omé/k-ikal, iqé/sqés 
woman. Intending he was told blue-jay : ‘* Your wife, blue-jay 


rN Sf & Ww 


© 


13. 


158 IQE’SQES KjA 10/l THEIR MYTH. BURBS e 


ETHNOLOGY 


mXa/tako, 0/mékikal igé/sqés!” Néket néXa/tako ige’sqés. A/‘lta 


turn back, your wife blue-jay!” Not he turned back blue-jay. Now 
wiXt a/qxotk qaX 6¢0/kuil. NO6/mEqt wiXt. 
again shewasputby that woman. She was dead again. 


Translation. 


There were Blue-Jay and his elder sister [16/1]. ‘The latter went every 
day digging roots. [Once upon a time] she said to her brother: “ Make 
some arrows; the ducks, the geese, the tail-ducks always lick my but- 
tocks.” ‘Yes, I will do so,” said Blue-Jay. The next day she went 
again digging. Then Blue Jay made the arrows. When he had fin- 
ished them he went and searched for his elder sister, When he came 
to the place where 10/1 always dug roots he heard her scratching her 
anus. She looked back, turning her head over her shoulder. Now 
Blue-Jay spanned his bow and shot her in her buttocks. ‘ Anah, 
Squint-eye” [she said]. She took away his bow and said: ‘These here 
are the birds,” and she shot them. She killed a male mallard duck 
which was very fat. Then she said to her younger brother: ‘‘Go home, 
and when you get home give them the nose ornament to eat, keep for 
me only a stone and its rope.” ‘I will do so,” said Blue-Jay. I6/i had 
fivechildren. Hewent home. Nowhe plucked theduck. He finished 
plucking it. Now he cut the fat of the duck and tied it to the noses of 
Jo‘i’s children. He made a fire and said: ‘‘Go near the fire. Look into 
the fire in the middle of the house.” Now he put a stone aside; a stone 
of that size. Now they looked into the fire and the fat became warm. 
Then they licked it off. 167 went home. She opened the door and saw 
her children. ‘Their faces had become flushed by the heat. Then she 
jumped into the house. The stone [which Blue-Jay had put aside] hit 
her right on her forehead and she feildown. She lay there a long time; 
she recovered, arose [and said]: “ Anah, Squint-eye, what did I tell 
you? I told you to give them a little and to keep the stomach for me.” 
Then she took her children away from the fire. Blue-Jay replied: “1 
thought so; why do you not speak plainly when you speak to me?” 

Another time I0/i said to her brother: “ Make me a canoe large 
enough for one leg.” “I will do so,” replied Blue-Jay. 10/1 said: 
‘‘When there are no roots here I shall always go to the other side 
when you have finished the canoe.” “I think so,” replied Blue-Jay. 
Early next morning Blue-Jay went and hollowed out a piece of cedar 
wood. He put his leg into the canoe [to measure it and made it just as 
large as his leg]. He finished the canoe and went to his sister. He 
said: “(I have finished the canoe.” They carried it to the water and 
went to the canoe. When she saw it [and noticed that] it was just large 
enough for one leg she said: “‘ Anah, Squint-eye, what did I tell you? 
I told you to make a canoe large enough for one man.” Blue-Jay 
replied: ‘‘T thought so; why do you not speak plainly when you speak 
to me?” On the next day Blue-Jay made a large canoe. It was good, 
large enough to carry one person. He brought it to his sister. 


CHINOOK BLUE-JAY AND 10/1 MYTH—TRANSLATION. 159 


BOAS 


After a while his sister said to him: “ You ought to get married. 
Take a wife. She shall help me dig roots. But take a dead one.” 
_ “TJ will do so,” said Blue-Jay. Now the daughter of the chief of a 
town had died. Blue-Jay went to the grave at night and took her 
out. Early the next morning he landed and said to his elder sister. 
“Here, I bring the dead one ashore, as you told me.” ‘ Anah, 
Squint-eye, I told you to bring an old one. Quick! Take her to the 
supernatural beings [and ask-them to cure your wife|.”. Now Blue- 
Jay went. He cut off all his hair and began to ery. He went to the 
place where the supernatural beings lived. They heard somebody 
erying and went outside. They spoke: “Oh, see; that is poor Blue- 
Jay who is crying there; perhaps his sister died.” But he cried 
all the time: “O, my wite; O, my wife.” ‘Perhaps his sister died, 
but he said his wife.” He landed and they tried to cure her. They 
asked him: “ How long has she been dead?” He replied: ‘“‘ She died 
yesterday.” [Then the supernatural beings said:] ‘Then you must 
go to another town where they can cure those who have been dead one 
day.” Blue-Jay said: “She died on the same day when I bought her.” 
He traveled on, and when he had gone some distance he lay down 
to sleep. On the next morning he went on and came to the town of 
the supernatural beings. They heard some one crying and went out- 
side. They spoke: ‘ Oh, see; that is poor Blue-Jay who is crying there; 
perhaps his sister died.” But he always said his wife died. Blue-Jay 
landed and the supernatural people went down to meet him. He told 
them: ‘She died on the same day when I bought her. I bring her to 
you to cure her.” They looked at her and asked him: ‘* When did she 
die?” He replied: ‘‘ She died two days ago.” ‘Then you must carry 
her to another town where they know how to cure people who have 
been dead two days.” Then Blue-Jay traveled on, and after he had 
gone a distance he lay down to sleep. Early the next morning he awoke 
and traveled on. After some time he reached a town, and the people 
heard him crying. They ran outside and said: ‘“‘Oh, see; that is poor 
Blue-Jay; perhaps his sister died.” He cried. He landed, and the 
supernatural people came down to meet him. Now the body of that 
woman was stinking. They asked him: ‘*When did she die?” ‘O,” he 
replied, ‘‘three days ago.” They took water and washed her face. Then 
they said: ‘‘ You must carry her to another town where they know how 
to cure those who have been dead three days.” Blue-Jay went on, and 
after some time he lay down to sleep. Early the next morning he started 
again. and reached the town of the supernatural people. They heard him 
erying and said: ‘¢Oh, that is poor Blue-Jay who is crying there; per- 
haps his sister died.” But he always said his wife had died. He landed. 
“OQ, my wife has died.” They said to him: ‘‘When did she die?” 
“O,” he replied, ‘four days ago.” Now they washed the whole body 
and bathed her. The bad smell disappeared. |They said:| ‘Carry 
her to another town.” Blue-Jay wert. When he had gone some dis- 
tance and had almost reached the town he lay down to sleep. Early 


160 IQE’SQES KjA 10/1 THEIR MYTH. pees oo 


the next morning he awoke and traveled on to.the place of the super- - 
natural beings. They heard somebody crying and went outside and 
said: ‘Oh, see; that is poor Blue-Jay; perhaps his sister died.” He 
landed and the supernatural people went down. He said: ‘She died on 
the same day when I bought her.” ‘When did shedie?” ‘Oh, five days 
ago.” They tried to cure her there on the beach. Her heart began 
to move and they carried her up to the house. There they continued 
to cure her. And Blue-Jay’s wife resuscitated. Her hair was so long 
that it hung down below her buttocks. Now they brought Blue-Jay 
into the house of the oldest one of the supernatural people, they 
worked over him and made his hair grow until it hung down to his 
thighs. They said to him: “Remain here; you shall do as we do- 
When a person has been dead five days you shall cure him.” Early 
the next morning the supernatural man arose. [He sat down with 
Blue-Jay| and said: “Spit [as far as youcan].” Blue-Jay tried to spit, | 
but his saliva fell down near by. Then the supernatural being spat, 
and his saliva struck the other side of the house. Five days Blue-Jay 
tried, then he spat, and his saliva struck the other side of the house. 
Now he became a chief. He stayed there some time and then he 
became homesick. The supernatural people told him: ‘‘ When you go 
home never give your hair in payment for a wife.” Blue-Jay went 
home. He arrived at his elder sister’s house with his wife. 

The younger brother of the woman had grown up. One day he 
went some distance and reached Blue-Jay’s house. He peeped into the 
house through a hole and he saw his elder sister sitting with Blue-Jay. 
Blue-Jay’s hair reached down to his thighs. The boy came home, but 
he did not tell anything. Early the next morning he went again to the 
house and peeped into it, and again he recognized his sister. Five 
times he went and then his elder sister saw him. She called him: 
“Come in, come in, brother.” He entered and she gave him to eat. 
Then the boy went home and said to his mother: “My elder sister is 
staying with Blue-Jay.” The people took a stick and whipped him. 
He cried: ‘Indeed, indeed, she gave me to eat. She called me; I went 
into the house and she fed me.” Then the people went to the burial- 
ground and saw that she had disappeared. Only the canoe was there. 
They sent a young man to Blue-Jay’s house, and, indeed, there was the 
chief’s daughter. Then the chief said: “Go to Blue-Jay and tell him 
that he must give me his hair in payment for his wife.” The messen- 
gers went and said to Blue-Jay: ‘‘The chief wants your hair.” Blue-Jay 
did not reply. Five times they spoke to him. Then the chief said to 
his people: ‘Let us go, we will take her back.” Now the people went. 
They took hold of her, one at each arm. They put her on her feet [and 
dragged her out of the house]. Then Blue-Jay began to fly. He 
became a blue-jay and flew away: wa’tsEtsEtsEtsEtsE. The woman 
collapsed right there. Then they called him: “ Blue-Jay, come back, 
she shall be your wife.” But he did not return. Now they buried her 
again. She had died again. 


15. IQE’SQES KjA I0/I ICTA’/KXANAM. 


BLUE-JAY AND J[0O’I THEIR MYTH. 


Cxela’-itxy 10/1 kja Lga/wuX. QaxLx na/‘pol é’kit atga/yax 
They were there I[0/i and her younger One night buying they did 
brother. a wife 


tmémElo’ctike. Aqod/mE] 10/1. <Aqi/2tutk tga’/xamota.  Ila’/xkate 
the ghosts. She was bought = I0’i. They were kept their dentalia. There 
po'lakli aqa’xo-iktcgd. Né’kteukté, a/Ita kjé 0/1. Lo‘Lqte né/xax 
at night she was married. It got day, now nothing I0/i. A longtime he was 
igé’sqés. EXt igé’taq, alta né/k:im: “ Nu/xtkinEmama o6gu’xk’un.” 
blue jay. One year, then he said: ‘*T shall go tosearch her my elder sister.” 
A'lta qé’xtceé atctuwa/amtexogd ka/nauwe tH’/mtEcX: ‘ Qa/xéwa 
Now trying he asked them all trees: ‘* Where 
aLo/ix LgoLéeJEXEmMK ma/nix aLo/mEqtx?” Atectuwa/amtcxdgo 
goes a person when he dies ?"’ He asked them 
ka‘nauwe teElala’xuke. Nié2ket atxElgu’/Litck. A’laxta  utea/nix 
all birds. Not they told. Next the wedge 
atcuwa/amtexok6. Agid/IXam: “MrEngEmgé’ktia! Iamo’k"qa.” Qogu 
he asked her [it]. She [it] said to him: ‘* Pav me! : I shallearry you.” Where 
itea’/q;atxala aya’xElax utea/nix. A'lta atcagE/mEgikté. Alta 
her [its] badness cameon her [it] the wedge. Now he paid it. Now 
aga/yuk"7 @/wa tEméwa/lEma. Acto/yam utea’/nix kja_ igé/sqés 
it carried him thus [to] the ghosts. They arrived the wedge and blue-jay 
ia/2qo-iL @/lXam. K;é tXut qis: @lXam. Go keE’mk-‘iti tix: t!oL, 
{at] a large town. No smoke that . town. At the last that house. 
ta’/qoa-iL t!oL, a/Ita ia’/xkaté tXut atco’ékEl. A/Ita ia‘xkaté a/yup!. 
a large house, now there smoke he saw it. Now there he entered. 
Ljap a’‘teax uya’xk’un ia’xkaté. “Ana’ LgawuXa’,” agid/lXam. 
Find hedid her his elder sister there. ‘“Ah, my younger brother,’’ she said to him. 
“Qa’/xewa amte’‘mam? MOo/mEqtna?” “A, nekct anod’/mEqt. Utea/nix 
“Whence did you come! Are you dead?” “Ah, not I am dead. The wedge 
agEnae’tketXam. A/‘Ita atciuxo’lalqgqy qo’ta t!oLé’ma ka‘nauwéz. 
brought me hereonits back. Now he opened them those houses all. 
Ta‘mkXa tkamo’/kXuk pa/LEma qO’ta t!oLée’/ma. IakEnqena’-itx: 
Only bones full those houses. It lay near her 
uya/‘xk’un =éXt iauwa/qeta kja’ tkamod/kXuk. ‘“I’kta  atsuwa’ 
his elder sister one skull and bones. “What now 
amiugué’xa tik tkamo/kXuk kja xik iauwa/qceta?” Agid/lXam 
will youdo with these bones and this skull?” She said to hin 
them 


uya’xk’un: “Imé/qxiX, imé/qxiX.” *‘Qu’ltci igd/LgEl itca’Xt 10/1. 
his elder sister: ‘‘Yourbrother- your brother- “Always lie she does 16'i. 
: in-law, in-law.”’ 
Etci’qxiX iauwa’qeta ageEna’xo-il.” N0/2ponEm; a/lta noxula/yutck 
My pele fa a skill she always says tome.” It got dark; now they arose 
aw 
qo’tac té/lx‘Em, ¢cka paL no/x6x qgo’ta t!oL. ILa/Lélam LE’k Xana 
those people, and full became that house. Ten fathoms 
go‘ta t!ot. Atcd’lXam uya’/xk’un: ‘Qa’xéwa atgaté’mam tike 
that house. He said to her his elder sister: * Whence they came these 
télx‘Em?” Agid’lXam_ uya/xk’un: “AmxE/LuxEna ~ té/lx‘Em? 
people?” She said to him his elder sister: * Do you think people? 
TYmeé’meEloctike; tmeé’meEloctike.” Agid/IXam_  uya’/xk’un. — 10/Lqté 
; 1 
Ghosts ; ghosts.” She said to him his elde~ sister. Long 


BULL. T=20 11 161 


12 


4 


4 


162 IQE’SQES KjA I0'I THEIR MYTH. Paes 


ayo/La-it g0-y- uya/xk’un. Agio/1Xam uya’xk’un: “ Qoi amxux0/qj ulax, 


he stood at hiseldersister. She said to him his elder sister: ‘‘ Future imitate them, 
amxaxp!a/Omx.” “A’ka anxE/Lux.” NO’/ponEm ka_ nixk/ItXuitck. 
fish in dipnet.”’ ‘““ Thus I think.”’ It got dark and hemade himselfready. 
ALxBItXuitck Lé/Xat Lk;asks, cka wu-u-u-u, noxo-itcuwa/ya-itx 
He made himself ready one boy, and whispering they spoke 
qo‘tac téIx-Em. N&2ket  atcuxdtcE/mElitEma-itx. Agid/l/Xam 
those people. Not he understood them. She said to him 
uya/xk’un: “LEmé/qoqcin X06/La mto/ya.” Agid’lXam: ‘ Neket 
his elder sister: “Your brother-in- this youtwo will go.’”’ Shesaid to him: ‘Not 


law's relative 
mLupala/wulalema; ac kja mxa/x0.” A‘Ita a/cto. Qoa’p ackta’xom 
speak much to hin; and — silent be.” Now they went. Nearly they reached 
them 


téIx-Em Ogula/lam tgE’tcj teuwama. A‘Ilta atcugo-éxo’ten nigEla/lam. 
people singing goingdownriverincanoe. Now he helped them he sang. 
K;a no/x6x. Né‘kiket @/wa_ g0d/qxdiama. Ta’mkXa_ tkam0o/kXuk 
Quiet they were. He looked thus in stern of canoe. Only bones 
ta‘kXae g0d’qxdiama. A‘Ita wiXt ayo’tetc!0. Alta kja ne‘xax, 
they were in in stern of canoe. Now again he went down Now quiet he was, 
canoe stream. 


ayO‘tete!0. GO’yi né’/xax, nix‘Ena/nakoc @’wa go’qxéiama. A‘Ita La’gue 
he went down Thus he did, he looked back thus instern of canoe. Now he wasin 
stream. . the canoe 


wiXt q0o’La Lk; asks. AtcLo/lXam, cau atcE/Lax. “Qa/xé-y- umea/aL ?” 
again that oy. He said to him, low voice he made. ‘* Where = your weir?” 
atcLo/IXam, Lawa’2 ateLo‘IXam. ALgid/1Xam q0’/La Lkjasks: “GO 
he said to him, slowly he said to him. He said to him that boy: ‘There 
ma/éme.” A’ceto wiXt. AtcLo’1Xam, te!pak ateLO/l1Xam: “ Qaxe’go-y- 
downstream.’”’ They again. He said to him, loud he said to him: ** Where 
went 


umea/aL?” Ta’mkXa tkamo’/kXuk atakX@a/La-it gd g0’/qxdiama. 
your weir?” Only bones they wereinthe canoe at the stern of the 
canoe. 


WiXt kja né/xax iqé/sqés. Né’‘k-ikst, a/lta wiXt La’gue Lkjasks. 
Again silent he was blue-jay. He looked, now again he was in the boy. 
the canoe 


WiXt = cau atei/Lax, atcLo’lXam: ‘“Qaxé’gd-y- umca/aL?” 
Again low voice he made, he said to him: ‘Where is your weir?” 
ALgid] Xam: ‘“f6’kuk.” A/Ita acxaxE’p!a. Né’x-gEla i‘kta niyi’'La-it 
He said to him: “Here.” Now they fished in He felt some- was inthe net 

dipnet. thing 


go-y- uya/nuXcin. Ated‘Latck uya/nuXcin. A/‘lta La/mkXa 
in his dipnet. He lifted it his dipnet. Now only 
Wé/k"tEquix: modket aLayi/La-it. Wax atci‘Lax gd Lteugq. Ka 
branches two wereinthenet. Pourout hedidthem into water. And 
mi/nx't LjEME’n atea’/x uya/nuXcin. Pan naxa’x tE’kXOn. Wax 
afteralittle into water he did it his dipret. Full it got leaves. Pour out 
while : 
ateta’x, qamx atk7a/taXitx qo’ta tE’kXon. ALktomeé’tckix q0’La 
he did them, part they fell into [the those leaves. He gathered them up that 
canoe} 
Lky asks. Weé/k"tequix: aLayi/La-it uya/‘nuXcin. Wax atciLa’x 20 
boy. A branch was in the net dipnet. Pour out’ hedidit into 
Lteug. Ana’ tE’kXOn atayi’La-itx; wax atcta’x. Qamx wax no/x6x 
the water. Some- leaves were in it; pour he did them. Part poured they be 
times out out came 


go ikani/m q0/ta te/kXOn. ALktome’teqix qd’La Lkjasks. Moket 

in canoe those leaves. He gathered them up that boy. Two 

q;at atei’Lax qd/La We’ k*tEqvixs “x iLe’k  ntalo’kLa 10/1; 

like he did them those branches. ‘Those I will ae. them 1o'i; 
to her 


LaxElgé@/Lxaya.” Laqgoa#/iLa qd/La We/k"tEql’ixs AcXgod’mam. 
she will make fire with Large those branches. They came home. 
them.”’ 


CHINOOK BLUE-JAY AND I0/I MYTH. 163 


A’‘ctoptck. E/XiXaut iqé/sqés, gé/wa acé/XEmkEna ALO/keptegam 


They went up He was angry blue-jay, because he had not caught Hearrived carrying up 

from the shore. anything. 

qo’La Lkj asks LE/ego-ic paL op!a/lo. A/‘Ita aqo/lEkte qaX op!a‘lo. 
that boy a mat full trout. Now they were roasted those trout. 

A’Ita axk7@/1 qo’La Lk; asks: “A, cka ateuX0’kXué, atctak/lguiLxax 
Now hetoldmuch that boy: “Ah, and he threw it away, he threw it out of the 


canoe into the water 

qo‘ta inta‘k;éténax. LXpoe paL ne’xax inta/xénim qé néketx cka 

that what we had caught. neo bau full was our canoe if not and 
then 


ateuXo0/kXué.” Agid/lXam uya’/xk’un: “ Qa/daqa cka amuX0/k Xué 
he threw it away.” She said to him _ his elder sister: “Why and did you throw away 
qo’ta imta’k; étéenax.” *‘AnuX0/kXueé gé/wa L’é’/k"tEqu’ix:.” ‘Ta’ Xka, 
that what you had caught.” ‘I threw it away because branches.”’ ‘t That, 
ta/Xka_ tkj@’wulklqiL,” agid’IXam; ‘Mxk/LuXna_ L’é/k"tEqL’ix:? 
that food,”’ she said to him; “Do you think branches? 
Ma/nix tE’kX0On, a/lta op!a/lO; manix L’é/k"tEqLix:, a/lta LE/qalema.” 
When leaves, then trout; when branches, then fall salmon." 
AteolXam uya/xk’un: “Inamé/ket Wée/k"tEqU’ix: ank/LEtk"1, 
He said to her his elder sister: “Two branches I brought here, 
LEmXxElgé’Lxaya.” NO/Lxa uya’/xk’un. A‘Ita modket LE/qalEma 
you will make fire with She went to _ his elder sister. Now two fall salmon 
them.” the beach 


La/kXac. AkLO/ketEptck. NO’p!am LE’qaLEma kLO’/ktean. Atcd/lXam 
were in [the Shecarried them up. She entered fallsalmon carrying in hand. He said to her 
canoe}. 


aya’xk'un iqé’sgés: “Qaxé’ atsuwa’ agk’Luxtk I060/i X6’La 
his elder sister blue-jay : ‘* Where now she stole them 10'i those 
LE’qalema?” Agid//Xam uya‘xk’un: ‘“Kja La/xka imé’k; éténax.” 
fall salmon?” She said to him his elder sister: “And this what you caught.” 
“ Qule’tei igd/LgEl itea’xt 10/1.” 
“Always he she does — Io/i."’ 
Na’‘ktcukte. A’yuLx @’wa ma/Lné_  igé’sqés. A/lta  dla/ox 
Tt got day. He went to thus seaward blue-jay. Now they were 
the water on the beach 


uta’xénim q0/tac temémElO’ctike. Ka/nauwé Lxoa‘/pLxoap, qamx a/Ita 
their canoes _ those ghosts. All holes, part now 
tga/xamitgax qaX uta/xénim tmémEFlo’/stike. A’yuptck iqés’qés. 
their lichens those their canoes the ghosts. He went up blue-jay. 
AteolXam uya/xk’un iqé/sqés: ‘ Qaxtsi/Lx uya/xénim itea‘k-ikal 
He said to her _his elder sister blue-jay: ‘How his canoes her husband 
Toi!” “Qoi cka kja mké@’x, tkcEmina/ya télx‘Em.” ‘“ Ka/nauwé 
To/i’s!”" ‘‘Future and _ silent be, they will become the people.”’ ‘All 
tired of you 


Lxoa/pLxoap uta/xanim tike té/lx‘Em.” Agid/lXam_ uya’xk’un: 
holes their canoes those people.” She said to him his elder sister: 
“Téelx-Em na, téix-Em na? TEméuwa/lema.” WiXt no/ponEm, 
‘‘People  [int.part.], people [int. part ]? Ghosts.” Again it grew dark, 
wiXt nixE’IltXuitck igé/sqés; wiXt aLxE/ItXuitck q0’La Lk; asks. 
again he made himself ready  blue-jay ; again he made himselfready that boy. 
WixXt a/cto. A’lta aLiXEnEm0/cx‘Em q6/La Lkjasks. Ka acto/yama 


Again hewent. Now he teased him that boy. Where they will 
arrive 


ka atcaLE/Iqamx, ta’/mkXa tkama/kXuk. Tei/2xeéL é/ka atci/Lax 


where he shouted, only bones. Severaltimes thus he did 
ka acto’‘yam. Alta acxaxa’/p!a. A/Ita atcLopa/yaLx L’é/k"tEqL’ix’; 
and they arrived. Now they fished with Now he gathered them the branches; 
the dipnet. 

atctopa/yaLx tE’/kXon, ka Lxaluwe’got ka paL né’/xax icta/Xanim. 
he gathered them theleaves, and it becameebb-tide and full was their canoe. 
Ta/kE aci/Xko. A/‘Ita atcuXuimo’ex‘Em q6/tac tkEméuwa/lEma. 
Then they went Now he teased them those ghosts. 


home. 


oOo oO 


~ 


maven re . a BUREAU 
164 IQE SQES KjA 101 THEIR MYTH. Sr NOEeae 


Ma’nix actauwita’/qtEtx, atcauwiqE’/mxLoLx. Ta/mka tkam0d/kXuk 
When they met one, he shouted. Only © bones 
atakXa/La-itx. AcXk0d/mam. A/‘Ita nagé/guiptek go-y- uya/xk’un. 
wereinthecanoe. They arrivedathome. Now he carried them up to his elder sister. 
AkLO‘/kXuiptek, LE/qalEma qamx 6/6n. 
She carried them up, fall salmon partly silver-side salmon. 
Wax né‘ktcukté. A’Ita a’/yo iau’a qix: é@lXam_ igé’/sqés. O, 
Nextday it became day. Now hewent_ there that town blue-jay. Oh, 
o/Xuit tkamo’/kXuk gd qod’/ta t!oLé’‘ma. Na’ponEm. “A, é’kolé 
many bones in those houses. It got dark. “Ah, awhale 
Liap aqa/yax.” <Agaya/lot dqoéwe’qxé uya’xk’un. Agid/l1Xam: 
find itis done.” She gave it to him a knife his elder sister. She said to him: 


“Ai‘aq meE/xEnko! E’kolé xiau Ljap aqa‘yax.” Né/xankd ta‘kE 
Quick run! A whale that find itisdone.”” | He ran then 
iqé’sqés. Ayd/yam god tkamila/lEq. Ayukota/om gqd’/tac télx-Em. 
blue-jay. He arrived at the beach. He met them those people. 
Atetuwa/amtexoko. Te; pak atetuwa/amtcxoko; te;pak ateto’lXam: 
He asked them. Loud he asked them; loud he said to them: 
“Qaxe’ xik é@’kolé né/xax?” Ta’mkXa_ tkamod’/kXuk nox0/La-it. 
‘“ Where this whale ae Only bones lay there. 
AtcuguLtE’qo-im q0‘tac tauaqeta/ake. Ayoe’taqL. Kula/yi né/xanko. 
He kicked them much those skulls. He left them. Far he ran. 
Wikxt tg0/nike ayugota/om. AteauixqE’/muXLOL Ta’/mkXa 
Again others he met them. He shouted much. Only 
tkamo/kXuk nuxo’La-it. Tei/2xeL é@’ka atci/tax qod/tac té/lx‘Em. 
bones lay there. Several times thus hedidtuthem those people. 
Ta/kE ayaga/oOm qaX 0d/mtEcX; a/qoa-iL aaX 06/mtEcX. LO/nas 
Then he reached it that log; large that log. Perhaps 
goye’ itca/xéLawunX qaX ugod/EleEm. A/‘Ita cka pau té/Ix-Em 
thus thick that its bark. Now and full people 
teju/Xte;juX -tgaxt qaX oolk’m. AtcauwiqE’muXLOL iqé’sqés. 
peel off they did it that bark. He shouted blue-jay. 
Ta/mkXa tkam6/kXuk nuX0/La-it. La/mkXa Lk"ckué’ qaX Oolk’m. 
Only bones lay there. Only pitch that bark. 
Teju/XtejuX a/teax LO’nas qansi’x. Ateca/kxona mdket. Ne’Xko. 


Peel off he didit Idonot howmuch. He e¢arried on his two. - He went 
know shoulder home. 


NixLo/lEXa-it: ““Nxk/LuX qé naueé/tka-y- é@/kolé. Tat; umqei’ckan.” 
He thought: ‘*T thought if indeed awhale. Look a fir.” 
Né/Xko6, niXko/mam. K"na/xané atcaXn/kXué uya/alem. A/’yop!. 
He went home, he arrived at home. Outside he threw it down his bark. He entered. 
Ateo’1 Xam uya’xk; un: ‘ Nxk’/Lux gé naué/tka-y- é/kolé, taL; OolE/m. 
Hesaidtoher [to]hiseldersister: ‘‘I thought if indeed a whale, look bark. 
Agio1Xam uya’/xk’un: ‘ K’kolé-y-é’/kolé. Mxkr’/Lux na-y- oolz’/m?” 
She said to him his elder sister: ‘‘A whale, a whale. You think [int part.] bark?” 
No’pa-y- uya/xk’un. A/Ita moket ia/qiLq;"p eé’kolé @’Xoc. Na/k-im 
She went his elder sister. Now two its cuts whale wereonthe She said 
outside ground. 


Io: “Maca‘teiLx é/kolé. Qana/xl aLia/xELawEnX xik 6’/kole.” 
I0/i: “Good whale. Very thick this whale.” 
Atecia/qxamt igé/sqés. A/‘Ita-y- i/kolé-y-e’/X6c. Ne’Xtako igé’sqés. 

He looked blue-jay. Now a whale was onthe beach. He turned back  blue-jay. 
NiLE'Iltaqt LgoLé/1XEmk igé’/sqés, Lgd/ctxot dole’m. AtcaLE/IqamX. 
He met a person blue-jay, he carried on bark. He shouted. 

; his back 
Ta‘mkXa tkama/kXuk nuX0/La-it. Atcid/egam qaX doolE’m, 
Only bones lay there. He took it that bark, 
ateaé/qxona, née/Xko. NiXko’/mam. A/‘Ita @/ka_ atci/tax q0d’tac 
he carried it on he went He arrived at home. Now thus he did them those 
his shoulder, home. 


tEméuwa/lEma, Ala/xti @/xoé-y- ia/kolé nixa/lax  iqé/sqés. 
ghosts. In course of time much his whale _ became to him blue-jay. 


CHINOOK BLUE-JAY AND I10’'I MYTH. 165° 


EOAS 


A’lta wiXt ay0’La-it ia/xka igé/sqés. A/‘Ita wiXt @/yo iau’/a qiX 
Now again he stayed that blue-jay. Now again hewent there _ that 
élXain. <A’Ita ayo/p!am god qod’ta t!oL. Atecid’/egam iLa/awkEqcta 
town. Now hecamein into that house. He took it its skull 
Lk;’acke, atciuqoa’/na-it go qo’ta taqoa’-iLa tkamo’/kXuk. Atecio’/egam 
a ‘child, he put it on % those large bones. He took Tt 
qix’ ia/qoa-iL éauwa/qeta, atcit’qona-itX gd qod/La  Lkjacke 
that large skull, he put it on on that child’s 
La‘/XamokXuk.- Ka/‘nauwé’-y- @’/ka_ ateci‘tax qod’tac’ té/lx-Em. 
his bones. All thus he did them those people. 
ALi‘xElategux Lkjacke qigd nopd/nEmx. Qé/xtcé aL0’La-itx. 
He rose to his feet the boy when it grew night. Intending he sat. 


Axé’k élapx'itxé. AtciLk7a/-itx @/Laqtq. ALE/xElatcko Lqj éyo’qxut. 


He ell over. It threw him down his head. He rose the old man. 


Kaullku/ll = @/Laqtq. Wax owiXt  nektco’ktxe. A/Ita wiXt 


Light his head. Onthenext again it became day. Now again 
morning 


atectauwiXa/ktegux tga/qtqake. Ana’ tga/towet @’ka atcta’x qod’tac 
he replaced them their heads. Sometimes theirlegs thus hedidthem those 

tmémelod’ctike. E/wa Lqjéyo’qxut gEnkr’/m La/towit nd/xdx; @/wa 
ghosts. Thus an old man small his legs he made; thus 

Lkj asks Laqoa/iL La‘towét noxdx. Ana’ Lta’gil La‘towit, @’wa LE’k-ala 


a a large hislegs hemade. Some- awoman her legs, thus aman 
times 


Latowit ateth/LElax. Ated’Xumakj;E/nuapax’ LE/k-ala La‘‘owit kya 


his legs he made them to He eeolaees them aman his legs gia 
them. 


ia/gil. Ala/xti ka aqea‘yina. Atcd/’lXam 1061 itea/k:ikal: “Ta/kE 
awoman’s. Incourse and hewasdisliked. Hesaidtoher I6/i her husband: ‘Then 
of time 
atkea/yina tike té/lx‘Em, Xogu é’ka atcta’xt. Tgt!o’/kti midla’ma 
they dislike him these people, Rechase thus hedoes to them. Good you tell him 
alta iXk0’ya. A/lta néket tqjéx tgétxt tike té/lx‘Em.” Qé’xtcé 
now hewillgohome. Now not like they dohim these people.” Intending 
giaxoé’wuniL Lga’/wuX (I[0/i. xa/dqxaL atca/xtemma6dx. WiXt 
she stopped him her younger Io’i. Can not he understood her. Again 
always brother 


née’kteukté. NixE’l’0kO kawi/X. A/Ita agid’/ktean go itea’potitk 
it got day. He arose early. Now she held it in her arm 

éuwa’qeta 10/1. Atcé/xaluktego. “K’kta wiXt agid’ktcan 
askull I0‘i. He threw it away. ‘© What again she holds it 

I0’i éuwa‘qeta?” “Ana! imé’qxiX, ta/kE LEK" mé@‘xax ia/tuk.” 

1o/i a skull?” “Anah — your brother- then break  youdidit- his neck.” 

in-law : 

No’/ponEm. A/‘lta 4’yatc!a ia’qxiX. A/Ita aqigé/la-it ia/qxiX. 

It grew dark. Now his sickness _ his brother- Now he was cured by _ his brother- 
in-law. means of sorcery in-law. 


Atigé‘la-it ia‘cdlal, tiaya’ né/xax ia/qxiX. 
They cured him his relatives! well he became his brother-in-law. 
Alta né’Xko, igé’sqés. Agid’/1Xam_ uya/xk’un: ‘“Qa/t!ocXEm, 
Now hewenthome,  blue-jay. She said tohim his elder sister: “Take care, 


imx‘Ena/oyE. Manix 0x0’LXat tem*a/éma, niiket wa/xwax amL0’kotx; 
be careful. When it burns prairie, not pour out do it; 


go tLa‘lakt temta/éma tex'l wax’wax amLo’ gux. ” «Aka anxE LUX,” 
at the fourth prairie then pour out do it.’ “Thus I think,’ 
né‘k-im igé’/sgés. A‘Ita né’/Xko. Ayugod/om teXt tEm*ea/éma. A/Ita 
he said blue-jay. Now hewenthome. He reached one prairie. , Now 
tgh’cko-it qo’ta temta/éma. A‘lta LpEl wax iké’x ik; é/wax. Wa/xwax 
it was hot that prairie. Now red blos- theydid flowers. Pour out 
som 


atcLé/kxax qix: ik;é’wax. Nau/i Xué’/t na/xax XaX uya/ckan a/éXt, 
he oh igre those flowers, Atonce half full it became this his bucket one. 
on : 


20 


o Fe WwW bb 


16 


17 


19 


166 I1Qé/sQés KjA I10'I THEIR MYTH. sere od 


Ayugo’ptegam. Qo’ta tEmsa/éma go kE/mk-ité 6x6/LXat. WiXt téeXt 
He came upintothe ‘That prairie at end burnt. Again one 
woods. 


ayugd/om tEm&a/éma. Ated/ékEl iau’a teé/tkum 6x0/LXat_ alta. 

he reached it a prairie. He saw it there half it burnt now. 

“Ta/xka taL; xitik aktEnxE/]1Xam agh/xk’un.” Wa/xwax atcLo/kxux 
“That look! this shesaidtomeaboutit my eldersister.”’ Pour out he did it 

go qgqaX uya/éXatk. Naxii’/tstXom a/éeXt uya/egan. WiXt 4’g6n 

on that his road. He finished it one bucket. Again one more 

ated‘egam uya/ckan, qjoa’/p Xué/t na/xax ka nigod’/ptegame. WiXt 
he took it his bucket, nearly half it became and hecameuptothe Again 

woods. 


teXt ayugo/Om tEm*a/éma, La’/LOn tEmfa/‘ema. Alta tei‘tkum pet 
one he reached it a prairie, the third prairie. Now half . really 
6x0/LXat. Atcd’/egam aé/Xt uya/ckan. Naxi’tetXom uya/ckan; 
it burnt. He took it one his bucket. He finished his bucket; 
ateo/egam a/gon uya/ckan. Xué’/t na/xax uya’ckan ka nigod’ptegame, 
he took it |. onemore his bucket. Half itbecame  hisbucket and hecame eo to the 
: woods. 


A‘Ita mo/ketka Lia/ckanEma ago’n Xué’/t. WiXt téXt ayugo/om 
Now two only his buckets and more a half. Again one he reached it 
tEm‘a/éma. LEqe ka/nauwé 0x0/LXat. Atco/cgam qaX Xue’t uya/ckan. 
a prairie. Almost whole it burnt. He took it that half bucket. 
Naxii’/tctXom. Agod’n ae/Xt 6/cegan atcd’egam, cka nigod’ptcgam ka 
Tle finished it. Oue more one bucket he took it, and hecame up tothe and 

woods 


naxE’tctXom. A/‘Ita aé/Xt ka uya/ckan ugo/itX. Atcugod/om wiXt 

he finished it. Now one only his bucket was left. He reached it again 

teXt temé‘a/ema. Alta ka/2nauwé 6x0’/LXat. Wa/xwax atcLo’/kXuk. 
one prairie. Now the whole burnt. Pour out he did it. 

Qj 0a'p atctutctXo’/mam qod’/ta tEm‘a/éma, ka nExE’tetXom uya/ckan. 
Nearly he came finishing it that prairie, and he finished it his bucket. 
Laq" né/xax ia/itexut. A‘lta atciagE/Itcim qaX 6£0/lEptckiX. Nixé’tEla 
Take off hedid pe Now he struck it that fire. It burat 

anket. 


ka/nauwé ia/itexut. A/lta La/yaqtq a@/LElaxta, aLé/XLXa ka/nauweé 
the whole pe eer Now his head last, it burnt all 
anket. 


La‘/yaqeo. A‘lta né/xLXa. 
his hair. Now he burnt. 
Ayo/mEqt iq@’/sqés. Tex no/ponEM. Oc uya’xk’un: 
He was dead blue-jay. Just it grew dark. There was his elder aister: 
“kukukukukuku 10/1!” Acaxa‘llqéLx uya/xk’un: “Ana’/, LgawuXa’,” 
“ Kukukukukuku Tomar? She cried his elder sister: ‘‘Anah. my younger 
brother,” 


na/kim; “takE ayd/mEqt LgawuXa’.” E/wa @/natai qix: @/qxéL 
she said; ‘then he is dead my younger Thus ontheother that creek 
brother.” side 


qigd no/Lxamit qaX ué/Xatk. Agid’/cgiLx ikani’m, agiugd/lEmam 
where it led ie the that road. She launched a canoe, she went to fetch him 
water 


Lga/wuX. Naiga/Om Lga/wuX. “ Masa’tsiLx ikani’m, 10/1.” Agio/1Xam 
her younger Shereached her younger «Pretty the canoe, 1I106/i.”’ She said to him 
brother. him brother. 


uya/xk’un: “ K’a ia‘xka qgé/wa amiod/lXam tia/xamiuguX.” “A, ha, 
his elder sister: ‘‘And that when you said to it it had lichens.” “CAN; hat 

qulz’te igd/LgEle tcaxt I0/i. Lxoa’p iké’x ta/nuX XiauX, 
always lies she makes 106/i. Holes were theotherones those, 

tia‘xamiuguX.” <Agid/lXam: “Am0d/mEqt ta/kE.” “Nn  qulE’te 
they had lichens.” She said to him: ‘“ You are dead now.” “Nn always 

igd/LgElé tceaxt 10/1.” A‘Ita aga/yukL é/wa é/natai Lga/wuX. A‘Ita 
lies shemakes I6/i.” Now shecarriedhim thus to yer other a JounEe Now 

side rother. 


SEINOOR BLUE-JAY AND I0’I MYTH—TRANSLATION. 167 


atcta‘qxam té/lx‘Em. Go-y- Okula/lam, go-y- i/Lukuma dxoega/liL 


he saw them people. There they sang, there ihtlukum they played 
much, 

on-ve OO nt ld VWliL: 20 ta/ ke @mEla-é Ox VliL: 20-v 

go-y- OomE’nt!'o oxucga’liL; go ta’/nEmcke @/mEla-é Oxucga’liL; gd-y- 

there beaver teeth they played there women’s ihtlukum they played there 

much; much ; 

i/pkj ala Oxucga/liL; gd iqa/lxal Oxucga’liL; go wa/cakoa-i Oxucga’liL; 

hoops they played there ten disks they played there wa/cakoa-i they played 
much; much; much; 

go-y- 0‘kotexEm iau’a kula/yi 6Xt @/1Xam. Iteauiter/meElét iqé/sqés. 

there they sangcon- there far one town. He heard them blue-jay. 


jurer’s songt 

Oxuiwa’/yul kumm, kumm, kumm, kumm, 0Xuiwa/yul. A’yo qé/xtcé 
They danced kumm, kumm, kumm, kumm, they danced He went intending 
much much. ; 
go qgo/tac ugola/‘lam. Qe’xtcé nigHla/‘lam na-ixE/IqgEmXLOL, cka 
to those singers. es Intending he sang he shouted, and 
aqia0/‘nim igé’/sqés. Ewa’ qé/xtcé ayod/ix atcauiqE’/mXLOLx, cka 
he was laughed _ blue-jay. Thus intending he went he shouted always atthem, and 

at 


aqia0‘nimx. A’yop! god té/LaqL, go ta/yaqL ia/qxix. A/Ita Loe 
he was laughed at. Heentered in his house, in his house his brother-in- Now there 
law's. was 


Lka/nax, masa’‘tsiLx Lga’/k:ikal I0/i. Agio/IXam: “ Kja ia/xka qiaw 
a chief, pretty her husband 10/i’s. She said to him: “And he when 
LEK" mé@/xax ia/tuk.” “Qulk’te igd/LgEli tceaxt I0/i. Qa/xéwa 
break you did it his neck.” “Always lies shemakes I0/i. Whence 
nate‘mam Xak Okuni’‘m? Masa‘tsiLx okuni’m.” “Kja ia/xka qian 
they came those canoes? Pretty canoes.” “And this when 
ma‘xo-il tga/xamiuguX.” “Qulk’te igd/LgEli teaxt 10/7. Ka’nauwé 
youalways they had lichens.” “Always lies she makes 10/i. All 

said 


ta‘nux Lxoa/pLxoap, qamq tga/xamiuguX.” “Amo’mEqt, amo/mEqt,” 
the others holes, partly they had lichens.” ‘“ You are dead, you are dead,” 
agio’1Xam uya’/xk’un; “mm, amd/mEqt.” “Qule’te igd/LeEli teaxt 
shesaidtohim his elder sister; ‘‘mm, you are dead.” “Always lies she makes 
10/1.” Qe’xtcé atcauiqE’/mXLuLX qo’tac té/lx-Em, cka atgiad/nimx. 
Toi.” Intending he shouted at them always those people, and they laughed at 
hin. 
Ta‘ménua nexa‘x, kja néxa‘/x. Ayaxk’lidmEqt Lga’wuX, 
Give up he did, silent he became. She forgot him her younger 
: brother, 
agi0/xtkinEmam. Alta g0 qjoa’/p ateta’x qod’tac oOXuiwa/yul. 
she went to look for him. Now then near he was them those dancers. 
Qoa/nEmi aya’qxoya-e, ala’/xti né/ckoOp! gd qod’/tac OXuiwa’yul 
Five nights, then he entered at those dancers 
igé/sqés. Agixa/laqLé-y- uya’/xk’un. A/lta ia/’wil @/wa_ tH’k"cala 
blue.jay. She opened the door his elder sister. Now hedanced thus up 
tia/towit, e’wa @/ckj ématex:. Na‘xtako-y- uya’xk’un, nagE’tsax. A/Ita 
his legs, thus head downward. She turned back his elder sister, she cried. Now 
wiXt wuk; ayo/mEqt. Ayo/mEqt kja wiXt iLa/médketé ayo’mEqt. 


_again really he was dead. He died and again a second time he died. 


Translation. 


There were Blue-Jay and Io’. One night the ghosts went out to 
buy a wife. They bought 10/1. [Her family] kept the dentalia [which 
they had given] and at night they were married. On the following 
morning I0/i had disappeared. Blue-Jay stayed at home for a year, 
then he said: “TI shall go and search for my sister.” He asked all the 
trees: ‘Where do people go when they die?” He asked all the birds, 


12 


13 


168 IQE’SQES KjA 10’I THEIR MYTH. ee 


but they did not tell him. Then he asked an old wedge. It said: ‘‘ Pay 
me, and I shall carry you there.” Then he paid it, and it carried him 
to the ghosts. The wedge and Blue-Jay arrived near a large town. 
There was no smoke [rising from the houses]. Only from the last 
house, which was very large, they saw smoke rising. Blue-Jay entered 
this house and found his elder sister. “Ah, my brother,” said she, 
“where do you come from? Have you died?” ‘Oh, no, I am not dead. 
The wedge brought me hither on his back.” Then he went and opened 
all those houses. They were full of bones. <A skull and bones lay near 
his sister. ‘‘What are you doing with these bones and this skull?” 
{asked Blue-Jay]. His sister replied: ‘‘That is your brother-in-law; 
that is your brother-in-law.” ‘Pshaw! I0/i is lying all the time. She 
says a Skull is my brother-in-law!” When it grew dark the people 
arose and the house was [quite] full. It was ten fathoms long. Then 
he said to his sister: ‘“‘Where did these people come from?” She 
replied: ‘‘Do you think they are people? They are ghosts.” He 
stayed with his sister a long time. She said to him: “Do as they 
do and go fishing with your dipnet.” “TI think I will do so” [replied 
he]. When it grew dark he made himself ready. A boy [whom 
he was to accompany] made himself ready also. Those people 
always spoke in whispers. He did not understand them. His elder 
sister said to him; ‘You will go with that boy; he is one of your 
brother-in-law’s relations.” She continued: ‘Do not speak to him, but 
keep quiet.” Now they started. They almost reached a number of 
people who went down the river singing in their canoes. Then Blue- 
Jay joined their song. They became quiet at once. Blue-Jay looked 
back and saw that [in place of the boy] there were only bones in the 
stern of his canoe. They continued to go down the river and Blue- 
Jay was quiet. Then he looked back towards the stern of the canoe. 
The boy was sitting there again. He said to him in a low voice: 
““Where is your weir?” He spoke slowly. The boy replied: “It is 
down the river.” They wenton. Then he said to him in a loud voice: 
“Where is your weir?” And only a skeleton was in the stern of the 
canoe. Blue-Jay was again silent. He looked back and the boy was 
sitting again in the canoe. Then he said again in a low voice: ‘* Where 
is your weir?” ‘‘Here,” replied the boy. Now they fished with their 
dipnets. Blue-Jay felt something in his net. He lifted it and fou.d 
only two branches in his net. He turned his net and threw them 
into the water. After a short while he put his net again into the 
water. It became full of leaves. He turned his net and threw them 
into the water, but part of the leaves fell into the canoe. The boy 
gathered them up. Then another branch came into [Blue-Jay’s] net. 
He turned the net and threw it into the water. Some leaves came 
into it and he threw them into the water. Part of the leaves 
fell into the canoe. The boy gathered them up. [Blue-Jay] was 
pleased with two of the branches [which had caught in his net]. He 


eae BLUE-JAY AND I0/I MYTH—TRANSLATION. 169 


thought: “I will carry them to I0/i. She may use them for making 
fire.” These branches were large. They arrived at home and went 
up to the house. Blue-Jay was angry, because he had not caught 
anything. The boy brought a mat full of trout up to the house and 
the people roasted them. Then the boy told them: “He threw out of 
the canoe what we had caught. Our canoe would have been full if he 
had not thrown it away.” Hissister said to him: ‘Why did you throw 
away what you had caught?” “I threw it away because we hadnoth- 
ing but branches.” ‘That is our food,” she replied. “Do you think 
they were branches? The leaves were trout, the branches fall salmon.” 
He said to his sister: “I brought you two branches, you may use them 
for making fire.” Then his sister went down tothe beach. Now there 
were two fall-salmon in the canoe. She carried them up to the house 
and entered carrying them in her hands. Blue-Jay said to his elder 
sister: ‘‘ Where did you steal these fall salmon?” She replied: “That 
is what you caught.” ‘6/1 is always lying.” 

On the next day Blue-Jay went to the beach. There lay the canoes 
of the ghosts. They had all holes and part of them were mossgrown. 
He went up to the house and said to his sister: “ How bad are your 
husband’s canoes, 101.” “Oh, be quiet,” said she; “‘the people will 
become tired of you.” “The canoes of these people are full of holes.” 
Then his sister said to him: “ Are they people? Are they people? They 
are ghosts.” It grew dark again and Blue-Jay made himself ready. 
The boy made himself ready also. They went again. Now he teased 
the boy. When they were on their way he shouted, and only bones 
were there. Thus he did several times until finally they arrived. 
Now they fished with their dipnets. He gathered the branches and 
leaves [which they caught] and when the ebb-tide set in their canoe 
was full. Then they went home. Now he teased the ghosts. He 
shouted as soon as they met one, and only bones were in the canoe. 
They arrived at home. He went up to his sister. She carried up 
[what he had caught]; in part fall salmon, in part silver-side salmon. 

On the next morning Blue-Jay went into the town. He found many 
bones in the houses. When it grew dark [somebody said]: “ Ah, a 
whale has been found.” His sister gave bim a knife and said to him: 
“¢ Run! a whale has been found.” Blue-Jay ran and came to the beach. 
He met one of the people whom he asked, speaking loudly: ‘* Where 
is that whale?” Only a skeleton Jay there. He kicked the skull and 
left it. He ran some distance and met other people. He shouted 
loudly. Only skeletons lay there. Several times he acted this way 
toward the people. Then he came to a large log. Its bark was per- 
haps that thick. There was a crowd of people who peeled off the bark. 
Blue-Jay shouted and only skeletons lay there. The bark was full of 
pitch. He peeled off two pieces, I do not know how large. He carried 
them on his shoulder and went home. He thought: “I really believed 
it was a whale, and, behold, it is a fir”. He went home. When he 


ETHNOLOGY 


170 IQE’SQES KjA 10’1 THEIR MYTH. [BUREAU oF 


arrived he threw down the bark outside the house. He entered and said 
to his sister: ‘Ireally thoughtit was a whale. Look here, it is bark.” 
His sister said: ‘‘ It is whale meat, it is whale meat; do you think it is. 
bark?” His sister went out and two cuts of whale lay on the ground. 
Io/i said: ‘‘Itis a good whale; [its blubber] is very thick.” Blue-Jay 
looked. A whale lay on the beach. Then he turned back. He met a 
person carrying bark on his back. He shouted and nothing but a 
skeleton lay there. He took that piece of bark and carried it home 
on his shoulder. He came home. Thus he did to the ghosts. In 
course of time he had much whale meat. 

Now he continued to stay there. He went again to that town. He 
entered a house and took a child’s skull, which he put on a large skele- 
ton. And he took alarge skull, which he put on that child’s skeleton. 
Thus he did to all the people. When it grew dark the child rose to its 
feet. It wanted to sit up, but it fell down again because its head pulled 
it down. The old man arose. His head was light. The next morning 
he replaced the heads. Sometimes he did thus to the legs of the ghosts. 
He gave small legs toan old man, and large legs toa child. Sometimes 
he exchanged a man’s and a woman’s legs. In course of time they 
began to dislike him. 1[0/i’s husband said: ‘These people dislike him 
because he maltreats them. Tell him he shall go home. These people 
do not like him.” I0/i tried to stop her younger brother. But he did 
not follow her. On the next morning he awoke early. Now I0’i held 
_askullin her arms. He threw it away: ‘‘Why do you hold that skull 
again, 10/1?” “Ah, you broke your brother-in-law’s neck.” It grew 
dark. Now his brother-in-law was sick. A man tried to cure him and 
he became well again. 

Now Blue-Jay went home. His sister gave him five buckets full of 
water and said: “‘ Take care! When you come to burning prairies, do 
not pour it out until you come to the fourth prairie. Then pour it out.” 
“IT think so,” replied Blue-Jay. Now he went home. He reached a 
prairie. It was hot. Red flowers bloomed on the prairie. Then he 
poured water on the prairie and one of his buckets was half empty. 
He reached the woods [and soon he came to a] prairie, which was burn- 
ing at its end. He reached another prairie which was half on fire. 
“That is what my sister spoke about.” He poured out on his road the 
rest of the bucket. He took another bucket and when it was half 
empty he reached the woods on the other side of the prairie. He 
reached still another prairie, the third one. One half of it burned 
strongly. He took one of his buckets and emptied it. He took one 
more bucket and emptied one-half of it. Then he reached the woods 
on the other side of the prairie. Now he had only two buckets and a 
half left. He reached another prairie which was almost totally on fire. 
He took that half bucket and emptied it. He took one more bucket 
and when he reached the woods at the other side of the prairie he had 
emptied it. Now only one bucket was left. He reached another prairie 


Saroas BLUE-JAY AND 10‘ MYTH—TRANSLATION, 171 


- which was all over on fire. He poured out his bucket. When he had 
come nearly across he had emptied his bucket. He took off his bear- 
skin blanket and beat the fire. The whole bearskin blanket was burnt. 
Then his head and his hair caught fire and he was burnt. 

Now Blue-Jay was dead. When it was just growing dark he came to 
his sister. “‘ Kukukukukuku, 10/1,” he said. His sister cried: ‘‘Ah, my 
brother is dead.” His trail led to the water on the other side of the 
river. She launched her canoe and went to fetch him. She reached 
him. I[0/i’s canoe was pretty. She said to him: “And you said that 
canoe was moss-grown.” ‘Ah, [0/1 is always telling lies. The other 
ones had holes and were moss-grown.” She said to him: ‘*You are 
dead now |therefore you see them differently].” “10/1 is always telling 
lies.” Now she carried her brother across to the other side. He saw 
the people. They sang, they played ihtlukum, they played dice with 
beaver teeth; the women played their ihtlukum; they played hoops; 
they played dice with ten disks; they played wacakoa-i. Farther in the 
town they sang conjurers’ songs. Blue-Jay heard them. They were 
dancing, kumm,kumm,kumm, kumm, He wanted to go to these singers. 
He tried to sing and to shout, but he was laughed at. He went and 
tried to shout but they all laughed at him. Then he entered his brother- 
in-law’s house. There was a chief; 10/1’s husband was good looking. 
She said: “And you broke his neck.” ‘10/7 is always telling lies. 
Whence came these canoes? They are pretty.” ‘And you said they 
were moss-grown.” ‘10/i is always telling lies. The others had all 
holes. Part of them were moss-grown.” ‘You are dead now [there- 
fore you see everything differently],” said his sister. ‘10/i is always 
telling lies.” He tried to shout at the people, but they laughed at 
him. Then he gave it up and became quiet. His sister forgot him | for 
amoment]. When she went to look for him, he stood near the dancers. 
After five nights he entered their house. His sister opened the door 
and saw him dancing on his head, his legs npward. She turned back 
and cried. Now he had again really died. He had died asecond time 


bo 


=I, Son ot 


16. IQE/SQES K;A 10’I ICTA/KXANAM. 
BLUE-JAY AND I0‘/I THEIR MYTH. 


Lea/wuX = Lxela‘itx: —ige/sqés, ‘Lois itea’/xal = uya/xkj’un. 


Her younger brother there were blue-jay, I6/i her name his elder sister. 
“Txuwa/Ljama 16/1,” ated‘ Xam uya/xk’un, ‘“g6 ipd/époe.” Kawi'x: 
‘‘We will go visiting Io'i,” hesaidtoher hiselder sister, ‘at magpie [?]” Early 
ka a/cto. Qoa’/p acgia’xOm ipd/épde. . 10’/gde ta’/yaqL. Acxé’gela-i, 
and they Nearly they reached magpie. He wason his house. They two landed, 
went. top of 
a/etoptck. Atcto’/p!lam. Tae ipd/epoe god ta/yaqL, cka mE/‘nx‘é 
they went up. They cameinto There magpie in his house, and a little while 
the house. was 


ayo’La-it ka atcid’/gnixé. Atctd’guixé ta’yaqL. Ljap a/teax aéXt 


he stayed and he swept it. He swept it his house. Find hedidit one 
umo/ékXux. Atca/LEDuya gd Lia/xEmalaptckix:.. ALe’x-eltuq 
salmon egg. He put it into in his topknot. He heated them 
Lqa/nake. ALO/cko-it Lqa/nake. Atcd/egam d0dmse’/cX, ateLa/lotk 
stones. They were hot the stones. He took it a kettle, he poured into it 
Lteuq qaX domte’cX. Alta atcanqgaéa‘na-it qaX Omod/ikXux gd qaX 
water that kettle Now hethrew theminto that salmon egg in that 


the water 
oomee/cX. Alta atcLO/teXEm, atcLo/teXEm. Pau na/xax 0omste/cX 


kettle. Now he boiled 1t, he boiled it. Full became the kettle 
qo’‘La Lmd/‘ikXux. AqLegElgo/Lit igé/sqés kja uya‘lé. Alta 
those salmon eggs. It was placed before blue-jay and his sister. Now 
them : 


acxLxa/lEm, acxLxa/lEm, cka Xué/te na’/xax qaX o0omée’cX ka 
they ate, they ate, and half became that kettle and 


‘acta/qté. A‘Ita acgE/LOk"y, aci/Xgd Agid/lXam uya’/xk’un: *“Ai‘aq 


they were Now they carried it, they went She said to him his elder sister: ‘Quick 
satiated. home. 


tx0/Lxa. Ma/néwa mE/Lxa,” na‘k-im qaX I0/i. Ne‘k-im igé’/sqés: 
let us go to You first go to the she said that Io'i. He said blue-jay: 
the beach. beach,” 


‘“ Ma/néwa mE/Lxa.” NOo/Lxa uya’/xk’un iqé/sqés. Né’k-im igé’/sqés: 
“ You first go to the She went to his elder sister blue-jay’s. He said blue-jay: 
beach.” the beach 


‘“We/x'é mEtga’/leEmam Xak 00m*e’/cX.” Ne’k:im ipd‘epoe: “ nd/ya.” 
“To-morrow come and fetch this kettle.” Hesaid . magpie: “T shall go.” 
AcXg0d/mam igé/sqés. Kawi’X na-ixE/lgiLx iqgé/sqés. AyoLxée/wulX 
They came home  blue-jay. Early he made fire blue-jay. He went up 
gd tH’etaqL. A/Ita ia/xkaté ayo/La-it. TakE atcio’1Xam uya/xk’un: 
on their house. Now there he stayed. Then he said to her his elder sister: 
“Tkeni/m id/itEt.” “I0/itEt qé’/wa amid/lXam itia‘ya.” Nixaé’géla-i 
“A canoe is coming."’ ‘‘Itiscom- because yousaidtohim he shall He landed 

v ing come.”’ 
a‘Ita ipo/époe. A’‘yuptck ipd‘epoe. Ayod/tXuit iqé’sqés. Atcto‘/kuixé 
now magpie. He went up magpie. He stood there blue-jay. He swept 

to the house 


ta/yaqL. Lj ap a‘teax ae’ Xt omo/-ik Xux. AteaEnuya 
his house. Find . he did it one salmon egg. He put it into 
Lia/xEmalaptckix.. AteLo’/kXuL;  ta/yaqL  ateto’kuixé. Alta 
his top-knot. He finished his house he swept it. Now 
aLé’x‘Eltugq Lqa/nake. ALO/cko-it Lqa/nake. Atcid’/egam dya‘amicX, 
he heated them stones. They were hot the stones. He took it his kettle, 
ateLalotk Lteuq. Ated/egam qaX omod‘ikXux atcaLEnqga‘na-it 
he poured into it water. He took it that salmon egg he threw it into the 
water 


172 


Lyell BLUE-JAY AND I0/I MYTH. 173 


go q0’La Ltcuq. A’Ita ateLa/LE]lXatq q0/La Lqa/nake -kLO’cko-it. Lep 
in that water. Now hethrewthemintoit those stones hot ones. Boil 
na’/xax qaX o60ms/cX. Ata atcakgé/tgé. A’2ka né/xax ip0’epoe, 
it did that kettle. Now he covered it. Thus he did magpie, 
a/2ka wiXt nixé’xkjEla. I0/Lqté ka atcL’Elgée/lako. K-;é, niket 
thus also he imitated. Long time and he uncovered it. Nothing, not 
e‘kta gd qaX oomté/cX. “E’Xtka tanLx ix°Ela/x0 iqé/sqés.” 
anything in that kettle. “One only what may be he did to him blue-jay.” 
AtcL0’egam q0/La Lqa‘/nake ipod/epoe. Laq atcLa’/xax qaX 60/m*éeX, 
He took them those stones magpie. Takeout hedidthem that kettle. 
AtcaLEnga/na-it aé/Xt omd/ikXux. AtcLa/LEXatk q0/La Lqa/nake 
He put into it one salmon egg. He put into it those stones 
kLO’cko-it. LEp aLE’xax q0/La Ltcuq. Ateakgé/tgé qaX d0mté/cX. 
hot ones. Boil it did that water. He covered it that kettle. 
AtewveElgé/ElakoO qaX oomé/cX. A/lta paL q0/La LEm0/ikXux. 
He uncovered it that kettle. Now full those salmon eggs. 
A‘lta ate’@/taqL; né/xk0  ipd/epoe. 
Now he left them; he went home magpie. 
Tei/2xéL aya’qxoia-é, wiXt 6/10 ager’ctax. ‘“Tcu’xo atxuwa’L; amx, 
Several nights, again hunger aciod on ‘*Come we will go visiting, 
them. 


Io/i, go-y- 0’/Lqike.” “A, wu’xi txd/ya;” na/kim I0/i. Qui/nEmiket 
16'i, at the duck.”” ‘‘Ah, to-morrow. we will she said 10/i. Five 
go;” 
tga‘a I0’i. Na‘ktcukte. A’cto-y- a/lta atcowa/Ljam. Acxii/gila-€ go 
her chil- 16/1. It got day. They went now they went visiting. They landed at 
dren 
Lga/maLna 0’Lqike, a/ctoptck. Acto’ptegam. Ta/kE akLo/lXam 
seaward fromher  theduck, they wentup They arrived coming Then she said to them 
from the beach. up from the beach. 


tga’a O0/Laike; ulnEmike tga/a: ‘“IxtOyuta’ma.” Ta/kE 4/LULx 
, 


herchil- the duck; — five ~ her chil- ‘‘Let us go and bathe.” Then they went to 
dren dren: the beach, 
aLx‘0/yutam, aLkL;jé/mEn Lkanauweé’tike, Lga/qeit Op!a/l6. 1a/Lélamé 
they went to bathe, they dived all, they bit a trout. Ten times 
aLkL;é@/mEn ka pal aLli/xax LE/cgo-ic op!a‘lo. A’LOptek. NaLxE/lgiLx 
they dived and full became their mat trout. They wentup She made a fire 
trom the beach. 
0:0/lEptckiX. ALi’xéluktc, aqci/lgix a/Ita igé/sqés kja_ uya/lé. 
a fire. They roasted it, they were fed now blue-jay and his sister. 
No’ktcekt iLa‘lektcal o’/Lqike. Aqcingé’waLjamit a/Ita iqé’/sqés. 
It wasdone whatsheroasted the duck. She gave them to eat now blue-jay. 
AcxLxa‘lEm a/lta iqgé/sqés kja uya‘lé. Qa’mxka acgod’/tctXom ka 
They ate now blue-jay and his sister. Part only they finished and 
acta’‘qcete. Agid‘lIXam uya/lé iqé’sqés: “Ma/néwa mE’/Lxa, taua/Ita 
they were She said to him his sister blue-jay: “You first you goto the else 
satiated. . beach, 
ateuwa’ qa/da ame’gimx.” Atco/Xam uya/lé: “Atcuwa’ k;oa/n 
indeed how you always say.” He said to her his sister: ‘“Come always stay- 
ing here 
mkéx. Ma/néwa mE‘Lxa,” atced/‘IXam uya/‘le. NO/Lxa uya/lé. A’/néwa 
you are. You first yougotothe hesaidtoher hissister. She went to hissister. She first 
beach,” the beach 
no/Lxa. “ Wa2x- mcod/ya amckLugo/lEmam LEmeca/cguic.” <A/Ita 
she went to ‘To-morrow you go you fetch it your mat.” Now 
the beach. 
a/yuLx igé/sqés. Na’/k-im 0/Lqike: “ Wax: ntcd/ya.” Alta a/cto; 
he wentto _ blue-jay. She said theduck: ‘‘To-morrow weshallcome.” Now they 
the beach went; 
aci/Xko igé’sqés; acXko/mam. Kawi’2x: nixa/latck iqé’sqés. 
they went blue-jay ; they came home. Early he arose blue-jay. 
home 


AyoOLxé@/wulXt go ta’yaqL. Atco/LXam uya’/xk’un: “160/itEt ikani’/m.” 
He went up on his house. He said to her his elder sister: ‘It comes a canoe.”’ 


| a oS 


Die CS" “Sor Qt 


10 


11 


or 


—/ — 5 -=/ 
174 IQESQES KjA IOI THEIR MYTH. ae 


AgidlXam: “To/itEt qgé’wa amia-ué/wuL.” ALxa/gilaé-y- 0/tqike. 
She said to him: “Tt comes because you invited him.” They landed the ducks. 
A/LOptek, aLxé/la-it. Né’k-im igé@/sqés, atcto/lXam tga’a uya/xk’un: 
They went up theyremained He said blue-jay, hesaidtothem her chil- hiselder sister's: 
from the beach, dren 


“Tea Ixtd’/yutam.” Ta/kE @/LuLx igé/sqés kja tga‘a uya’xk’un. 
“Come we will go to bathe.” Then they wentto  blue-jay and herchil- his elder sister's. 
the beach dren 


Qe’xteé aLkyjé/meEn, @/ka Lax iLa/koteX. I[a/Lelamé aLkLje’mEn, 
Intending they dived, thus out their back. Ten times they dived, 
LEqs aLXi’La-it itsa/tsa. A’LOptck acuwa/tka. “E’gon tan ix-Ela’x0 
almost they died cold, They wentup empty handed. ‘‘Onemore what he will do to 
him 


igé/sqés.” AKLO/1Xam_ tga/a-y- 0/Lqike: ‘Ai‘aq, amex*d/yutam. 
blue-jay.”’ Shesaidtohim  herchlldren — the duck: ‘** Quick, go and bathe. 
LxkLeElgé@/tatEkea.” A/LOLX, 6’/Lqike tga‘a aLx’0’yut a/lta. Ia’/Lélamé 
We will throw food before They wentto the duck herchil- they bathed now. Ten times 
them.” the beach dren 


aLkL;é/mEn. Pau atli/xax Li’ego-ic. A’LOptck o/Lqike tga’/a. 
they dived. Full became their mat. They went up the duck her chil- 
dren, 


“XaXa/q aqamei'lltatke op!a/l6.” A/‘Ita aLi/Xkod-y- 0’Lqike. 


‘That is thrown at you trout.” Now they went home the ducks. 
Tei/x@eL aya’qxoié, ta’‘kE wiXt 0/10 agk’ctax igé’sqes kja uya‘le. 
Several nights then again hunger did them blue-jay and his sister. 
“A, txauwa/Ljama go-y- ii’texut,” né’k-im iq@/sqés. Wax ne’ktcukte 
“Ah, we will go visiting at the bear,” he said blue-jay. On the it got day 
next morn- 
, ing 
ka a/cto. Actd/yam god-y- ii‘teXut ta’/yaq~t. ALé/XeEltq ii’texut; 
and they went. Theyarrived at the bear his house. He heated them __ the bear; 
ateo1Xam uya/lé: “E/ktaLx aqitxEngé/lwaLamita, 10/i?” ALO’cko-it 
he said to her hissister: ‘‘ What may be will be given to us to eat, Io/i?”” They were hot 
Lia‘xanake. Atcd/kula-y- uya/qéwégé. Lqjop atci/Lax La/yape 
j OF 
his stones. He sharpened it his knife. Cut he did it his foot 
iakwa’ ka/‘nauwé. Lqjop atea/yax i0‘kuk ia/mElk. Goyé’ né’‘xax, 
here [around all. Cut he did it here his thigh. Thus he did 
the sole] 
ka/nauwé ia/xka iaIko-ilé. Goyé’ atci/Lax La/yape, ka/nauwé ia/xka 
all that well. Thus bedid to them his feet, all that 
inalko-ilé, Alta Lqju/pLq;up atea’‘yax, Lqju’pLqjup atea/yax. Ta’kE 
well. Now cut he did it, cut he did it. Then 
ateia’tcXem. Ayd/kterkt ia/teXeEmam. Aqicgil*go’/Lit, cka ma2nx" 
he boiled it. It was done what he boiled. It was ees before and a little 
them, 
acgio’‘tetXom, ka acta/qeti. Agio‘’Xam uya’xk’un: ‘ ME/Lxa. 
they finished, and they were satiated. She said to him his elder sister: ‘*Go down to 
the beach. 
Ma‘newa mek/Lxa, taua/Ita ateuwa’ qa/da ame&/gimx.” Atco/lXam 
You first go down to else indeed how  youalways say.’’ He said to her 
the beach, 
uya’xk’un: “Mai/kXa ma/néwa . mE/Lxa.” NOo/Lxa-y- uya/xk’un 
his elder sister: “You you first go down to She went down his elder sister ~ 
the beach.” 
anéwa. Take né/kim  igé/sqés, aqid’/lXam_ ii’tsxut» ‘* We2x 
she first. Then he said blue-jay, he was told the bear: ‘To-morrow 
mLugd/lbmam LEmé/cgo-ic.” Aci/Xk0-y- a‘Ita igé’/sqes kja uya‘leé. 
go and fetch your mat.” They went home now blue-jay and his sister. 
AcXg0/mam. Kawi/2X nixa‘latek iq@/sqgés, na-iXE‘lgiLx. 
They arrived at home. Early he rose blue-jay, he made a fire. 
AyuuLxé/wulXt go ta/yaqy. Ated/1Xam uya/lé: “Tkani’m i0‘itEt.” 
He went up on his house. He said to her _ his sister: ‘* A canoe it comes.” 
“To/itet qé@’wa amia-uwe/wull.” Nixé’géla-i ii/texut. Neé’tptcgam 
“It comes because you invited him.” He landed the bear. He came up from 


the shore 


parsook BLUE-JAY AND 10'l MYTH. 175 


ii‘texut. AL@’x‘EltEq igeé’sqés. ALO/cgu-it q0/La Lqa/nake, Liad/xanake 
the bear. Heheated stones  blue-jay. They were hot those stones, his stones 

igé/sqés. Atcd/kula-y- uya’qewegé. LqjOp atci‘Lax La/yape, ac 
blue-jay’s. He sharpened it his knife. Cut he did it his foot, and 

da/xkéwa né’‘k;élapxité, ayd’mEqt. Pa, pa, pa aqa/yax, L;paq 


then he fell down headlong, he fainted. Blow, blow, blow he wasdone, recover- 
ing 
atcila/tako igé’/sqés. Né’/k:im ii’/tsxut: “EXt ka tan imx-é/lEx-ala 
he recovered blue-jay. He said the bear: “One only thing you will do 
ige’sqés.” AtcLO/cgam La’yape ii’tsxut, Lq;oi/2p atei’/Lax, ia/mElk 
blue-jay.”’ He took it, his foot the bear, slowly cut he did it, his thigh 
Lqj 0u/2p atea/yax. Lqju’pLqjup atea’yax geEnk’/m ka/nauwe. A/Ita 
slowly cut he did it. Cut to pieces he did it small all. Now 
atcid’‘teXEm. AtecLa/kXOL; atcidteXem, ayod’qtcikt. Atcici/lltatke. 
he boiled it. He finished, he boiled it, it was done. He pay it before 
them. 
Né’Xko ii‘tsxut. A/Ita @’Lats!a La’yape iqgé’/sqgés. 
He went the bear. Now _ its sickness his foot blue-jay. 
home 
Tca’xeL aya/qxoye, ta’‘kE wiXt 0/10 agzk/ctax. - Atco‘lXam 
? 
Several nights, then again hunger acted on them. He said to her 
uya/xk’un: “ Wu’Xé txowa’/Liama god é@’/na.” Wax né‘kteukte. 
his elder sister: ‘‘To-morrow we will go visiting at the beaver.’’ Onthenext it got day. 


morning 
A‘lIta a‘cto actuwa’‘Ljam. Actd/yam go éé’/na. loc &é’/na go ta’/yaqL, 
Now they they went visiting. They arrived at the beaver. He thebeaver on his house, 
went was 
eka mE/nx'é§ acxé’la-it, ayo’/pa é@/na. Ateci/tk"te!am éla/éma, 
and a little they remained, he wentout thebeaver. He armed them to willows, 
the house 


atciegi/lxatEq. Atcid/egam @/am. Ayod’pa. Atecé/tk"team pan 
he placed them before He took it a dish. He went out. He carried it to the full 
them. house 


é'Ljuwalkijuwalk gd qix: é/am. A, niiket acga/yax ka aci’/Xko. 
mud in that dish. Ah, not they ate it and they went 
home. 

Agio1Xam uya/xk’un: “ Ma/néwa me/Lxa, taua/lta atcuwa! qa’/da 
She said to him his elder sister: * You first you go to the else indeed how 

beach, 

am&’/kimx.” Ated‘/Xam uya/xk’un: “Ma’néwa mE/Lxa.” No/Lxa-y- 
you always say.'’ Hesaid to her his elder sister: ‘You first gotothe beach.’ She went to 
the beach 

uya’xk’un a’néwa, Ne’kim iqgé/sqés: “Wé/x@ midga/lEmama 
his elder sister she first. He said blue-jay : ‘* To-morrow go and fetch 

xig @/am.” Né’/k-im éé/na: ‘“NO6/yaa. No/ya wu’X6,” né/k-im é@/na. 

the dish.” Hesaid thebeaver: ‘I shallgo. “Igo to-morrow,” hesaid the beaver. 

Kawi'2X néxb’lgiLx igé’sqés, ayué’wulXt gd ta/yaqL. Atcdo/lXam 
Early he made a fire blue-jay, he went up on his house. He said to her 

uya’xk’un: “Tkani/m id‘itet.” ‘“Joitet qé/wa amid/l/Xam_ itia’/ya.” 
his elder sister: ‘A canoe comes.” “Itcomes because you told him he should 
come.”’ 

Nixi’2 gila-é6 -y- &é/na. Ayd’p!am gd tH/ctaqL. Ayod’pa igé’sqés, cka 
He landed the beaver. Hecame into in their house. Hewertout  blue-jay, and 

MENXi kja’ya né/xax. Ateé/tk"yam godyii/2 Lia/péla é@la/éma. 
a little nothing he was. He brought thus many willows. 

Aqigk’Ixatk &@’na, Atea/yax texoa/ptexoap, atcio/tetXum kanauwé’2. 


Hethrew them the beaver. He did gnaw, he finished them all. 
before him 


Ne’xanko igé/sqés | ma/Lné, = ate@/kEloya-y-  @/Lj uwalk1juwalk. 
He ran blue-jay sea-ward, he went to take it mud 
AqigElgo’Lét é@é/na, Atea/yax, atca/yax, ka/nauwé atcio/tctXum. 
He pred it before the beaver. He ate it, he ate it, all he finished it. 
im 


A’‘Ita né/Xk6 é@’na. 


Now he went the beaver. 


13 


14 


15 


176 IQE’SQES KjA I0’I THEIR MYTH. | Brcncviees 


WiXt atcd’l1Xam uya‘xk’un: “ WuXi’ txua/Ljama go-y- 0/1Xaiii.” 


Again  hesaidtoher his elder sister: ‘To-morrow we will govisit- at the seal,” 
ing 
Na/2kteukté ka a/cto. Acto‘yam go-y- 6/lXaiii te’kXaqL. Qui/nEmiks 
It got day and they They arrived at the seal her house. Five 
went. 
tga/a-y- 0/1Xait. AkLO/Xam 0/lXait. tga’a: “Ameo’/ya gd ma/Lné 
her children the seal. She said tothem the seal her children: “Go to seaward 
go aLXE/muit Ltcuq. Ia’xkati mcXxat!0’ya.” A/LOLx tga/a 6/lXaia 
to its edge the water. There lie down.” They went herchil- the seal 


tothebeach dren 
go aLXE/muit Ltcug. ALXxa/Xatq. Agid/egam @’mtEcX 6/1Xaii, 
to its edge the water. They lay down. She took it a stick the seal, 
no‘Lxa. AkLga’om tga‘a, aga‘owilx: qaX Oxgé’/s’ax g0 iI'teaqtq. 
she went to She reached her chil- she struck her that youngestone on her head. 
the beach. them dren, 


ALKL;é@’wamEn tga’/a. Lax aLi/xax, aLkta/yutck Lkanauwe’tike 
They dived her children. Come they did, they emerged all 
out 


tga‘a O/1Xaii Lkanam Lqoié/nEmiks. AgoLa‘taptck qaX aé/Xt 
hee chil- the seal together five. She hauled herashore that one 
dren 


aga‘wata. AgaLkj)B/tsXéma. AkLa/kXuL; agaLk;E’/tsXéma. A/Ita 
she had killed She singed her. She finished, she singed her. Now 
her. 


a/kXaxe. LOn kei 6g60’/pXula. Agod/teXEm, agod’/teXeEm. No’ktcikt. 
she cut her. ‘Three fingers her blubber. She boiled her, ske boiled her. She was done. 
Aqacingé’waLj amit igé/sqes kja uya‘xk’un qaX 0/lXait, cka qamx 
‘They were given food blue-jay and hiselder sister that seal, and part 
aci/kXax ka _ acta/qeti. Agid’/Xam_ uya/xk’un iqgé’sqés: “Ai/aq 
they ate it and they mere satia- Shesaidtohim his elder sister blue-jay : “Quick 
ted. 


mE/Lxa, ma/néwa mE/Lxa.” Ated’lXam: “ Ma/néwa mE’Lxa. Atcuwa/ 


go to the you first go to the He said to her: ‘You first go to the Indeed 
beach, beach.” beach. 


kjoa/n mkéx Xuk aqamElé/mEniL,” atcd’lXam uya/xk’un: “Ai/aq 

always youare _ here you are given much to he said to her hiselder sister: ‘ Quick 

wanting eat,” 

to stay 

mE’Lxa.” NO’/Lxa-y- uya/xk’un. Né’k-im iqgé‘sqés: “*We’x'i mugo/lEmama, 
o to the She went to his elder sister. He said blue-jay : ‘‘To-mor- go and fetch it 
each.”’ the beach row 


Xak Omé/micX.” “ NO/yaa,” na/k-im 6/1Xaii. Kawi/2X na-ixE/lgiLx 
this your kettle.” “I shall go,” . she said the seal. Early he made a fire 

igé/sqés. Ayo-iLxé’wulx't gd ta’yaqL. ‘1o/itEt ikani’m,” atco/lXam 
blue-jay. He went up on his house. “Tt comes a canoe,” he said to her 

uya/xk’un. “Id/itet qgé’wa amia/owéwut.” Nixi’gila-é ikani’m. A, 

his elder sister. ‘‘Itcomes because you told them often.” It landed the canoe. Ah, 

o1Xait Lxé@/géla-é kja tga/a. A’‘Luptck o/lXait. Taker ne’k:im 
the seal landed and herchildren. They went up the seal. Then he said 

from the shore 


igé’sqés, ateLOXam uya/xk’un tga/a: “Amcod’ya gd aLXE/muit: 


blue-jay, he said to them his elder sister her children: ‘*Go to its edge 
Ltcuq. Ia/xkati meXxat;0/ya.” Ta/kE a/LOLx 10/1 tga‘a. ALE/Xxatq 
the water. There lie down.” Then she went to 10'i herchil- They lay down 

the beach dren. - 

go aLXE/muit Lteug. Ta’kE atcid’/cgam é@/m‘tEcX iqé’sgés. A’‘yOLXx,. 

at its edge the water. Then he took it a stick blue-jay. He went to. 

the beach, 

atca/owilx: qaX Oxgoée’s’ax. Mo/keté atca/owilx:. Ia’/xkaté n0d/mxEqt. 

he struck her that youngest one. Twice he struck her. There she died. 
Ateto’lXam uya‘xk’un tga‘a: “Ai‘/aq, amckL;é’mEn.” ALK1L;é/mEn, 
He said to them his eldest sister Her chil- “ Quick, dive!” They dived, 

ren: 


aLgn’tatck. A/éXat k;é. Qoii/nkmi aLkL;é@/mEn, goa/nsum nod/mEqt. 
they emerged. One nothing. Five times they dived, always dead 


saree BLUE-JAY AND I0/I MYTH. £77 


qaX a/éXat. Alta aLxé’.im I0/i k;a tga/a: “A.” Na/k-im 0/1Xaii: 
that one. Now they wailed Io’'i_ = and hep chil- ‘‘Ah.’’ She said the seal: 
ren: 


“Beun tan ix-bla’/xoO igé/sqés.” Aga/owilx: a/éXat ugd’/X0. “Ai/aq 
“One more thing he bit do to blue-jay.” She struck her one her daughter. ‘‘ Quick, 
im 


amck1;é’meEn,” na/kim 0/1Xait. ALgk’/tatek Lka/nauwe Lqoa/nEmike. 
dive,” she said the seal. They emerged all five. 
Aga/LkjteXéma ugo/xo. AkLa/kXuL; aga/LkjtsXema. A’kXaxe 
She singed her her daughter. She finished she singed her. She cut her 
agaLE'Iltatke. Akco/lXam: “XaXa/k mtga‘xo.” A/2lta aLkexk; é/niako, 
she ahrew her be- She said to them: “This you will eat.”” Now they tied her up, 
fore them. 


aLgn’/ctotk Lmé/meEloct [6/1 Lga/xa, ALi’Xko-y- 0/lXaiu. 
they put her up the dead Io/i__ her child. They went home _ the seal. 
A‘lta acxé’la-it iqé/sqés kja uya/xk’un. WiXt 0/10 agnE’ctax: 
Now they stayed blue-jay and his elder sister. Again hunger acted on 
them: 


“Teu/‘xa txuwa/Ljamx, I0/i, gd LE’qxaLa. Wukx'l’ txgo’ya.” 
“Well we will go visiting, 16/i, at the shadows. To-morrow we will go.” 
Né‘kteukté, alta a’cto. Actd/yam gd LE’qxaLa tH’LaqL. A’ctoptck. 
It got day, now they went. Theyarrived at the shadows their house. They went up 

from the beach. 


PaL gqoé’ta tké’walElqr q0d’ta t!or. IX0’ca god LElx-eme’tk 
Full those _ provisions that house. They layabout on the bed 
iqauwik;é/Lé. OX0’ca tqjétxa/puke, OX0/ca tpayi/xama; OX0'ca 
large dentalia. They lay about coats, they lay about’ deer blankets they lay 
about 


tqoa/qEma, OX0‘ca t&ola/‘’Oma. Ne’k:im igé’/sqes: ‘ Qa/xewa Lx a/tgi 
mountain-goat they lay ground-hog He said blue-jay : ‘“Where maybe they 
blankets, about blankets. went 


tike téIxem?” Agid’1Xam uya/xk’un: “Oxoéla/itx: té/IxeEm k;a 
‘those people?” She said tohim __his elder sister: “They arethere thepeople and 
néket mtz/tqEmt.” Atcid/cgam qix: iqauwik; é’Leé. ‘ Hahaha 0’go-utea, 
not you see them.” Hetookthem those large dentalia. ‘* Hahaha my ear, 
iq@/sqés,” aLE’/xax LgoLé/lEXEmkK. Lj) LjLjL; noOxowa/-itx té/lx-Em. 
blue-jay,” he did a person. ‘Littering they laughed people. 
Ated/egam = cola/l. Atei’exkja: ‘Hahaha cegod/ulal  igé’sqgés. 


He took it aground-hog He pulled at it: ‘Hahaha my ground-hog __ blue-jay. 
blanket. blanket : 
Nik;é’x-tkin go ge’kXulé ilemé’tk. Lj Lj Lj; Lj, he’he no’/x6x té/lx‘Em. 
He a for at under the bed. ittering, laugh they did people. 
im 
Ated/egam 6qjoé/Lxap okunx'ta’/m: “Qa‘daqa wiXt amo‘latck 
He took it a coat a woman's coat of ‘Why again you lift it 


mountain-goat wool: 
dgu’q;oGLxap, igé/sqés?” Atcid’cgam ica/mEl. Atce/xkja ige/sqés 
my coat, blue-jay?” He tookit anoseornament. Hepulledatit  blue-jay 
ica/mEl, “ Hahaha itci/cimEl‘, iqgé’sqés.” Ayué/luktcu €Xt iqd’mxom. 
the nose or- ‘Hahaha my noseorna-  blue-jay.” It fell down one basket. 
nament. ment, 


Atcid/egam, atcé/xEluketgd ma/Lxdlé. ALo-e/luktcu — Lé‘a/pta. 
He took it, he put it up at the side of the house. It fell down salmon-roe. 
Atci/txaluketgd ma’Lxdleé. Nikjé’x:tkin e’wa gekXula’ elemi’tk. 
He put it up at mie ie of the He searched thus below the bed. 
ouse. 


A‘lta wiXt hé/hé no/x6x. LjLjLjL; aqiad/‘nimx igé@’sqés. Qé’xtcé 
Now again laugh theydid. Tittering he waslaughedat blue-jay. Intending 
agio Xam uya/xk’un: “PEt mE/xax. I’kta LEmé/kxal LE’/qxaLa? 
she said to him his elder sister: ‘‘Staying be. What thy names shadows? 
quietly 
Lx poe nékct é’/ka nugo/tkixX.” Goyé’ aci/xax, a/nqaté otX o/pXueé. 
Maybe if not thus they do.”’ Thus[they they did, already there salmon-roe, 
looked} stood 
12 


BULL. T = 20 


m 


= 


bo 


19 


178 IQE’SQES KjA 10'l THEIR MYTH. Fetee es = 


A‘lta acxLxa‘lEm. Né’kim iqgé/sqés: “ Qaxé’Lx noxoela’-itX tike 
Now they ate. ' He said blue-jay: ‘* Where may be they are those 
téIx‘Em?” Agid’IXam uya‘xk’un: “Oxoeéla/-itX, oxo-ela/itX kja. 
people?” Shesaidtohim his elder sister: ‘“ They are there, they are there and 
niket mtE’tqamt.” Na/ponEm. Né’kim igé/sqgés: “ la/xkuk txao/ya.” 
not you see them.” It grew dark. He said blue-jay : ‘' Here we will 

camp.” 


A‘lta acta’qxoya po’lakli. NixE’’0k6 iqé’sqés, ayod’pa. Qé’xtcé 
Now they slept at night. He awoke blue-jay, he went out. Intending 
ayO/tXu-it nixau’/yus, cka iakwa’ aLx0/gua go tiatowit. N06/pa-y- 
he stoolup he urinated, and here itrandown at his legs. She went out 
uya/xk’un igé/sqés. NOo’La-it go-y- ilé’é na/xkj auwapa. GO aLo’tXuit 
his elder sister blue-jay. Shesatdown on _ ground she urinated. There stood 
qo’La Lga/xakjauwalpy. Lak atci‘tax tia‘towit iqé’sqés: ‘“ Te;a/a! 
that her urine, Spread hedidthem his legs blue-jay: ‘*Look! 
Id0/i, qa’‘da Xuku ne/xax. Atexkja/kux cia/kxo-itdc, acaxElaé’Lxal 
I6/i, how here I became. He pulled them his groins, — she cried 
uya’xk’un: “Ahaha/y- i’tcite!a x-iq sia/kulq; ast.” “A’xka na itea/L%a 
his elder sister: ‘Hahaha my sickness that squint-eye.”’ ‘She {int. her body 
; part. ] 


Io‘ ka-y- i'teate!a atcia/laut?” Ilo/Lqté ka agé/nk;émEnako. 

Io'i and her sickness is on her?” Sometime and she took revenge on him. 

Agé’xkja qix’ ia/kjalxix. “Ana’2,” né’k-im igé’sgés, ‘“i'teite!a 10/1.” 

She pulledit that his penis. ‘“‘Anah,” he said blue-jay, ‘‘my sickness I0/i.” 

“Ja/xka na a/yaLta ka-y- a‘yate!a né/laut?” WiXt ack;é’witx-it. 

“ He {int. his body and his sickness is on him?” Again they went to sleep. 
part.] 


Kawi/2X nixE’/V0k6 igé’sqés. Ia‘xka ia/lko-ilé @’k-ala qigd a/nqaté. 
Early he awoke blue-jay. He the same man as formerly. 
NixE’l’0k6-y- uya’/xk’un. A/‘lta wiXt 060’guil é@’ka qigd a/nqaté. 
She awoke his elder sister. Now again awoman thus as before. 
Nitea/lakuile. AqcEnk;é’‘mEnako igé/sqés qigd atcuXuimd/cXEm 

She was well. It was taken revenge on him blue-jay as he teased them 
téIx-Em. “Tegt!0/kti txgd’/ya, taua/lta wiXt aqtXEnEm0/cXEmx.” 
the people. ‘* Good we go, else again they tease us.” 
Agid‘1Xam uya'lé: “ Mai‘ka niket imé@/xEtcitmE]é ka 
She said to him his elder sister: “Vou not you believed me and 
aqtxinEm0/cXEm.” A/‘lta aci/Xko, acXgo’/mam. Na/kim uya’lé: 

we were teased.”’ Now they went home, they arrived at She said his elder | 
home sister: 


“TakE kapk’t atxuwa/Lj am.” 


“Then enough we went visiting.” 
Translation. 


There were Blue-Jay and his elder sister I0/i. ‘ Let us go visiting, 
10/i,” he said to his sister. ‘‘ Let us visit the Magpie [?].” Early the 
next morning they went. They came near his house and saw him on 
the roof. They landed and went up to the house. Then they saw 
Magpie on his house. After a little while he swept his house and 
found one salmon egg. He put it into his topknot [made a fire], and 
heated some stones. When they were hot he took a kettle, poured 
water into it, and threw the dry salmon egg into the kettle; then he 
boiled it. The kettle came to be full of salmon eggs. He placed it 
before Blue-Jay and his sister and they ate. When they had half 
emptied the kettle they were satiated. They carried away what was 
left and started to go home. I6/i said to her brother: “Let us go to 


Bear BLUE-JAY AND I0’I MYTH—TRANSLATION. 179 


BOAS 


the beach; you go down first.” Blue-Jay said: “ You go first down to 
the beach.” His sister went down. Then Blue-Jay said [to Magpie}: 
“Come to-morrow and fetch your kettle.” Magpie said: “I shall go.” 
Then Blue-Jay and his sister went home. Early in the morning Blue- 
Jay made a fire and went up te the roof of his house, where he staid. 
After awhile he said to his elder sister: “A canoe is coming.” She 
replied: “It comes because you told him to come.” Now Magpie 
landed and went upto the house. Blue-Jay arose and swept his house. 
He found a salmon egg. He put it into his top-knot. He finished 
sweeping his house and he heated stones. When they were hot he 
took his kettle and poured water into it. He took that salmon egg 
and threw it into the water. Then he threw the hot stones into the 
kettle and the water began to boil. Then he covered it. He imitated 
all Magpie had done. After awhile he uncovered it, but nothing was in 
the kettle. ‘Blue-Jay can do only one thing,” said Magpie. He took 
the stones and threw them out of the kettle. He threw one dry salmon 
egg and hot stones into the kettle. When the water began to boil he 
covered it and when he uncovered it the kettle was quite full of salmon 
eggs. Then Magpie left them and went home. 

After several days Blue-Jay and his sister became hungry. ‘ Let 
us go and visit the Ducks,” said Blue-Jay. ‘To-morrow we will go,” 
said Io’i. The latter had five children. On the following morning they 
started and went visiting. After awhile they landed at the beach of 
the Duck. They came up to the house. The Duck said to her five 
children: “‘Go and wash yourselves.” They went to the water and 
washed themselves. They dived. |Soon they emerged again] each 
carrying a trout. Ten times they dived and their mat became full of 
trout. They went up to the house, made a fire and roasted thein. 
Then they gave Blue-Jay and his sister toeat. Now the fish which they 
were roasting were done. They fed Blue-Jay, and he and his sister 
ate. They ate part and were satiated. I0/i said to her brother: “You 
go down first, else you will talk ever somuch.” He replied to his sister: 
“Ah, you would always like to stay here, you go down first.” His 
sister went down first {and as soon as she had left he said to the Duck]: 
“Come to my house to-morrow and get your mat.” Now Blue-Jay went 
down to the beach. The Duck said: “We shall go to-morrow.” Then 
they wenthome. They arrived athome. Early the next morning Blue- 
Jay arose and went up to the roof of the house. He said to his sister: 
“A canoe is coming.” She remarked: “It comes because you invited 
them.” Then the Duck landed {with her five children] and went up to 
the house. After awhile Blue-Jay said to his sister’s children: ‘Go 
and wash yourselves.” Then Blue-Jay and his sister’s children went 
down to the beach. They tried to dive, but their backs remained over 
water. Ten times they dived and were almost dead with cold. They 
came up to the house empty handed. ‘ Blue-Jay does one thing only” 
|said the Duck]. She told her children: ‘“‘Goand wash yourselves. 


Tannid aD . 5! > BUREAU OF 
180 IQE’SQES KjA I0'l THEIR MYTH. ee 


We will give them food.” The Duck’s children went down to the beach 
and washed themselves. They dived ten times and their mat was 
full. They went up to the house. ‘That trout is thrown at your 
feet.”. Now the Ducks went home. After a number of days Blue- 
Jay and his sister became again hungry. ‘Let us go and visit the 
Black Bear,” he said. The next morning they weut. They arrived 
at the Bear’s house. The Bear heated stones. Blue-Jay said to his 
sister: ‘‘ What may he give us to eat, 10/1?” When the stones were 
hot the Bear sharpened his knife and cut his feet here [all around 
the sole] and cut his thigh. Then he rubbed over the wounds, and 
they were healed. Then he cut [the flesh which he had cut from 
his feet and from his body] into small pieces and boiled it. When it 
was done he placed it before them, and after a little while they were 
satiated. J6/i said to her brother: ‘‘ You go down first, else you will 
talk ever somuch.” Blue-Jay said: “You go down first.” His sister 
went, and then Blue-Jay said: ‘‘C me to-morrow and fetch your mat.” 
Then he went home with his sister. They came home. Early the next 
morning Blue-Jay arose and made a fire. He went up to the roof of 
his house. He said to his sister: ‘“‘ A canoe is coming.” |And she 
replied:| “It comes because you invited him.” Then the Bear landed 
and came up to the house. Blue-Jay heated stones, and when they 
were hot he sharpened his knife and cut his feet. He fainted right 
away. They blew on him until he recovered. The Bear said: ‘You 
can do only one thing, Blue-Jay.” The Bear took his foot and slowly 
cut it. He cut his thigh. Then he cut the flesh into small pieces. He 
boiled it. When he had finished cooking and it was done he threw it 
before them and went home. Blue-Jay’s feet were sore. 

After several days they again got hungry. Then Blue-Jay said to his 
elder sister: ‘‘To-morrow we will go and visit the Beaver.” Early in 
the morning they started to visit him, and they arrived at the Beaver’s 
house. The Beaver was in his house. After a little while he went out 
and carried willows into the house which he placed before them. He 
took a dish and went out. Then he carried it back filled with mud. 
Blue-Jay and his sister could not eat it and started to go home. As 
they set out homeward his elder sister said to him: ‘‘ You go down 
first else you will talk ever so much.” Blue-Jay said to his elder sister: 
“You go down first.” She went to the beach first. Then Blue-Jay 
said: ‘‘Come to my house to-morrow to fetch your dish.” The Beaver 
replied: ‘‘I will come to-morrow.” Early the next morning Blue-Jay 
made a fire and went up to the roof of his house. He said to his sister: 
“A canoe is coming.” ‘It comes because you told him to come.” The 
Beaver landed and entered the house. Blue-Jay went out and when he 
had been away a little while he brought that many willows. He threw 
them before the Beaver, who began to gnaw and ate them all. Then 
Blue-Jay ran to the beach. He went to get some mud, which he put 
before the Beaver. He ate it all and went home. 


ceece BLUE-JAY AND 10'1 MYTH—TRANSLATION. 181 


Blue-Jay said again to his sister: ‘“‘To-morrow we will go and visit 
the Seal.” On the next morning they started and arrived at the house 
of the Seal, who had five children The Seal said to her young ones: 
_ “Go to the beach and lie down there.” They went and lay down at the 
edge of the water. The Seal took a stick and went down. When she 
reached her children she struck the youngest one upon its head. The 
others dived and when they came up again they were again five. Then 
she pulled up to the house the one which she had killed. She singed 
it. When she had finished singeing it she cut it. Its blubber was three 
fingers thick. She boiled it and when it was done she gave it to Blue- 
Jay and his sister. Soon they had enough. Then I0/i said to her 
brother: ‘“‘ You go down first.” He replied: ‘““You go down first, else 
you will always want to stay where they give us food.” He said: ‘ Go 
to the beach.” His elder sister went to the beach. Then Blue-Jay said 
to the Seal: ‘‘ Come to-morrow and fetch your kettle.” ‘I shall come,” 
replied the Seal. [They went home.| Early next morning Blue-Jay 
made a fire and went up to the roof of his house. He said to his elder 
sister: ‘A canoe is coming.” She replied: ‘It comes because you 
invited him.” The canoe came ashore. The Seal and her children 
landed and they came up to the house. Then Blue-Jay said to [0/i’s 
children: “Go to the beach and lie down there.” Then I0/i’s children 
went and lay down at the edge of the water. Blue-Jay took a stick. 
He went down and struck the youngest one ; he struck it twice and it 
lay there dead. Then he said to the other children: ‘ Quick, dive!” 
They dived, and when they came up again one was missing. Five times 
they dived, but the one [which was struck] remained dead. Then [6/1 
and her children cried: “A.” The Seal said: “ Blue-Jay knows to do 
one thing only.” She struck one of her daughters and said : “‘ Quick; 
dive!” And when they came up again all five of them were there. She 
singed her daughter. When she had finished singeing her she cut her 
and threw her down before Blue-Jay and his sister, saying: ‘You 
may eat this.” Then they tied up and buried the dead child of 16’i, 
and the Seal went home. 

After awhile they got hungry again. ‘“ Let us go and visit the shad- 
ows.” ‘*To-morrow we will go.” Early next morning they started and 
arrived at the house of the shadows. They went up tothe house. The 
house was full of provisions, and on the bed there were large dentalia. 
There were coats, blankets of deer skin, of mountain goat, and of 
ground-hog. Blue-Jay said: ‘* Where may these people be?” His 
elder sister replied: ‘ Here they are, but you can not see them.” 
Blue-Jay took up one of the large dentalia. ‘ Ahahaha, my ear, Blue- 
Jay,” cried a person. They heard many people tittering. He took up 
a ground-hog blanket and pulled at it. ‘‘ Ahahaha, my ground-hog 
blanket, Blue-Jay.” He searched under the bed [for the person who 
had spoken] and again the people tittered. He took up a coat 
of mountain-goat wool. The person cried, “Why do you lift my 


182 IQéSQES KjA I0/I THEIR MYTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


coat, Blue-Jay?” He took a nose ornament and the person cried: 
“Ahahaha, my nose-ornament, Blue-Jay.” Then a basket fell down 
from above. He took it and put it back. Then a salmon roe fell down, 
He put it back, and again he searched under the bed for persons. Then, 
again, the people tittered and laughed at him. His sister said to him: 
‘“Stay here quietly. Why should they be called shadows if they would ~ 
not act as they do?” They looked around. There was a salmon roe 
[put up in a bag for winter use] and they ate it. Blue-Jay said again: 
‘Where may these people be?” His elder sister replied: ‘Here they 
are, here they are; but you do not see them.” When it got dark Blue- 
Jay said: ‘‘We will sleep here.” Now they slept during the night. 
Blue Jay awoke and went out. He tried to urinate standing. It ran 
down his legs. Blue-Jay’s elder sister went out. She sat down on 
the ground and urinated. There stood her urine. Blue-Jay spread his 
legs: ‘*Look here, 10/i, what became of me!” He pulled his groins 
and his sister cried much. ‘Ahaha, that hurts me, Squint-eye!” ‘Is 
it 1o’’s body, and it hurts her?” After some time she took revenge 
upon him. She pulled the penis; ‘‘Anah,” cried Blue-Jay, “it hurts 
me, 10/1.” “Is it his body, and he feels sick?” Then they went to 
sleep again. Blue-Jay awoke early. Then he was a mau again as 
before. His elder sister awoke. Now she was again a woman as 
before. She was well again. Thus they took revenge on Blue-Jay, 
because he had teased the people. ‘‘Let us go, else they will tease us 
again,” said Blue-Jay. . His sister replied: ‘“‘ You did not believe me 
and they teased us.” Then Blue-Jay went home. He arrived at home, 
His sister said: ‘“‘Now we have gone visiting enough.” 


17. CKULKULO’L ICTA/KXANAM. 


CKULKULO’L His MYTH. 


A‘lta exéla/‘itX Ckulkulo’L k;a-y- aya/xk’un. A/‘Ita agid/lXam: 
i 
Now there was a Salmon-harpoon and his elder sister. Now she said to him: 
“ Qo-iamxux0/l’ulax iqgjoané’X tgia/wult.” A‘lta nau/‘itka. Atci/ctax 
“Puture you will imitate them i ae a they cateh.”’ Now indeed. He made it 
salmon. 


-ekulkulo/L, alta ateni’/eckoL; Ckulkuld’L. A’Ita né/kteukté, a/lta 
a@salmon-harpoon, now he finished it Ckulkulo’L. Now it got day, now 
akLola’‘pam uya‘xk’un. A/Ita ia/xka a/yo, nixélala’/ko-imam. A/‘Ita 
she went digging hiseldersister. Now he he went, he went to catch salmon. Now 

roots 


ateLé/luke @Xt iqoané/X. A‘Ita né/Xko. A/Ita ayo’yam god tH’/ctaqu. 
hespearedit one i i Now hewenthome. Now  hearrived at _ their house. 
salmon. 


Alta né‘xelkte. A‘Ita no/ktciqt ok’u/ltcin. “ TgkEt!o’kti agE’/xk’un 
Now he roasted it. Now it was done its head. ‘*Good my elder sister 

nale’m Xak ok’u'ltcin. Kyjé, taua/lta aga‘k’altcin § naxa’lax. 

Igiveher’ this fish head. No, else her fish head comes to be 

eat on her. 
~Teget!o’/kti ia’wan  nialté’m. K-jé, taua/Ita itea/wan ayaxé’lax. 
Good its belly I give it to No, else her belly comes to be on 
her to eat. her. 


Iqjé’qau nialté/ma. K-jé, taua/lta itea’q;éqau ayaxé/lax. TgEt!o’kti 
Its back I shall give it No, else her back comes to be on Good 
to her to eat. her. 


LElé’ct nLalé/ma. K+; é, taua/lta Lga‘lict aLa/xalax.” A/‘Ita ka/nauwé 
itstail Igiveittoher No, else her tail comes tobeon Now all 
to eat. her.” 
‘ateta’wult, Ia’wan atcia’wult, ia‘téqau atcia’wult a/lta_ Lia’lict 
he ate it. Its belly he ate it, its back he ate it, now its tail 
atcLa/wult. A‘lta aya-o’ptit. Alta na’Xko-y- uya/xk’un. NaXko/mam 
he ate it. Now he went tosleep. Now she wenthome hiseldersister. She came home 
go teH’ctaqL. A/‘lta ia/qx0id Lga’wuX. A/‘lta aLa/XiLq, a/lta 
to their house. Now he slept her youre bro- Now she heated stones, now 
ther. . 


agia/kxOpq itca/k;Enatan. A/‘Ita age’/ltém Lga/wuX. 
she roastedthem her potentilla roots. Now she gavethem her younger 
to him to eat brother. 


A‘lta né/kteukté wiXt. A/lta no/ya wiXt akLola’pam. A/Ita 1é21é 
Now it got day again. Now she went again she wentdigging. Now long 
ka nixa/latck Lga/wuX. Nixélala/ko-imam. Leé/lé, mank 1é/é ka 
and he rose her ee bro- He wenttocatch salmon. Along alittle long then 
ther. time, 


atcLé'luke ia/qoa-iL iqjoane/X. “Ané/4 Ckulkulo’L! Tate ateuwa 
be speared it a large steel-head salmon. ‘‘ Aneh Ckulkulo’L! See! [exclamation 
néket tcealté’ma-y- uya’xk’un.” Ta/kE naxLo/leXa-it uya/xk’un: “O, 
net he will give it to [to] his elder sis- Then she thought his eldersister: ‘Oh, 
her to eat ter.” 


ka/Itas  qiad/nim Lia/xauyam.” A/Ita né/Xko Ckulkuld/L. Ta/kr 
only heismadefunot his poverty.” Now he went home Ckulkulo'L. Then 
niXko/mam. Ta/keE né‘xélkte. Ta/kE nixgé/ktcikt. “ TgEt!o/kti 
- he came home. Then he roasted it. Then it was done. ‘**Good 
agE’xk’un nalé’m Xak Ok’u'Itcin [etc., three times as above. | 


myeldersister Igiveitto this fish head [ete., three times as above]. 
her to eat 


A’‘lta aLa-iLa/kuX L*a/tcau go we/wuLé. Ta/kE wiXt né’‘ktcukté. 
Now she smelled it _ grease in theinteriorof Then again it got day. 
the house. 
183 


22 


bo 


ou 


=/ 
184 CKULKULO’L HIS MYTH. bea es 


Ta/kE wiXt nod/ya akLola’pam. Ta’/kE wiXt a’yo nixélala’/ku-imam. 
Then again she went she went to dig Then again he went he went tocatch salmon. 
roots. 
Ka2-y- aké’x ka wiXt naxaltca’ma: “E’yaa-itcLx  14/qj;oaniX 
Where she was and again she heard: ‘* How large his steel-head 
salmon 


Ckulkulo’L.” “O, Lia/xauyam LO/nas aqiad’/nim.” Ta/kE atcLé/luke 
Ckulkulo’L.” “Oh; his poverty perhaps heislaughedat.” Then he speared it 
ia/qjoaniX, ta’/kE neé’/Xko. \NeéXko’mam_= god. ta’yaqi. Ta’/kE 
his ceolieet then he went home. He arrived at home at his house. Then 
salmon, 


ne/xelkte. Ta‘ke no/ktcikt Ok’ntein. “O agE/xk’un, nalé/ma 
he roasted it. Then it was done the head. “QO  myeldersister, Ishall give 
her to eat 


Xak oOk’u'Itcin. Kyjé, taua‘lta aga/k’altcin naxa/lax. TgEt!o’kti 
this fish head. No, else her fish head comes to be on Good 
her. 


ia‘wan niaké/ma. K-é, taua‘Ita itea/wan ayaxa/lax. Iq) e’qau 
its belly Igiveittoher. No, else her belly comes to be on her. The back 
niaké/ma. Ky é, taua/Ita itea’q;éqau ayaxé/lax. TgEt!o/kti Lule‘ct 
I giveittoher. No, else her back comes to be on her. Good the tail 
nLaké/ma. K+ 6, taua/Ita Lga/lict aLa’xalax.” A/‘Ita ka/nauwé 
I give it to her. No, else hertail comes to be on ber.’’» Now all 
ateia/wul, iya/eqau atcia’wult, Lia/lict ateLa/wult. A’lta aya-o’ptit. 
he ate it, its back he ate it, its tail he ate it. Now he slept. 
A‘lta na/Xko uya/xk’un. A/Ita naXko’/mam. A/‘lta_ aLa/xzltq. 
Now she went home his elder sister. Now she came home. Now _ she heated stones. 
Agia/kxopq itea/k;Enatan. Ta’/kE ayo’ktcikt itea’k;Enatan, ta/kE 
She roasted them her potentilla roots. Then they were done her potentilla roots, then 
agée/lsém Lga/wuX. A/lta Liap agk’Lax L‘a/teau go we/wuLe. “ O, 


she gavethem her younger Now find she did it grease in inside of house. “Oh, 
to him to eat brother. 


nawitka, tat; XoOku é@ka ateina’/xt Xoku néket atcinEl*@/mEniL.” 
indeed, look here thus he did to me here not he always gave it to me 
to eat.” 


Alta Liap agE/Lax L&a/pta go ia/yaeqL. A/‘Ita akLugo’Lit go-y- 
Now find aie did it salmon roe in his mouth. Now she put it up on 
oma’p kea/xalé. Ta/‘ke agé/lém ikjEna/tan. Ta’kE akLo/ecgam 


a board above. Then she gavethem potentilla roots. Then she took it 
to him to eat 


qo'La L‘a/pta, ta/ke akié/kem. “O xiLé/k aqLnéikém.” Ta/kE 


that salmon roe, then she gaveitto him ‘Oh, this I was given it to eat.’ Then 
to eat. e : 
atei/Luket, ta‘/kE k;wac né/xax. “O, ta‘kE taLj; Ljap aga/nax.” 
he saw it, then ___ afraid he got. “Oh, then belo tind ane did me.” 
Alta né/kteukté. Ta/‘kE naxEItXuitck. Ta/kE agid//Xam Lga/wuX: 
Now it got day. Then she made herselfready. Then — she said to him her younger 
brother: 
‘Ni’ Xua mE’pa.” Ta/kE ayo/tXuit. ‘“E/tsEntsEn imé’/xal. Neket 
“ Well go outside.” Then he stood up. ‘“‘Humming-bird your name. Not 
qa’/nsiX iqjoané’X mia/xo.” Ta’/kE no‘ya, naik/ltaqL. 
ever atoel head sal- you will eat Then she went, she left him. 
mon it.’ é 
No’ya, no/ya, kula/yi nod/ya. Ta‘kE ago/ekEl tlou. Ta/kE 
She went, she went, far she went. Then she saw it a house. Then 
no/p!am. Ta/kE agid/ci itca/k;Enatan ia/Lélam. Ta/kE akLo/egam 
she came in. Then she roasted her potentills roots ten. Then she took it 


them in ashes 


L‘a/pta; agE/Lax. AkLa/wul. Ta/kE aLXaLgo’mam LgoLéeJEXEmE. 


salmon roe; _ she ate it. She ate it. Then he arrived @ person. 
Ta/kE aLgo/cgam aLkea/nk; o-iam. Ta/kE aLOLa/taXit q0d’La L‘a/pta. 
Then he took her he struck*her. Then it fell down that salmon roe. 


Ta/kE naxEma’tcta-itck, ta‘kE no’/pa. Ta‘kE wiXt no’ya, kula‘yi 


Then she was ashamed, then she went out. Then again she went, far 


CHINOOK _ CKULKULO’L MYTH. 185 


BOAS 


no‘ya. Ta/kE wiXt ago/ékEl t!0L. No’ya, agixa’laqLé. A/Ita pa2L 


she went. Then again she sawit ahouse. She went, she epee the Now full 
oor. 
qo’ta t!oL tkj)é'wulElqL, cka mE’nx‘i no/La-it ka ayo/lektct: éXt 
that house dried salmon, and alittle while shestayed and __ it fell down one 
iqjoané’X. Agid’/egam agiuk’0’n ia/k0O. WiXt ayod‘lektei. WiXt 
steel-head salmon. She took it she put it up there. Again it tell down. Again 
agio’‘egam, wiXt agiok’0’/n ia’/kd. Alta agid/ci  itca’k;j Enatan 
she took it, again she put it up there. Now she roasted her potentilla roots 


them in ashes 


iaLé‘lam. A/‘Ita agiOna‘xLatck moket. A/‘lta agio’xtkin, agid’xtkin, 
ten. Now she lost them two. - Now ~ shesearchedfor she searched for 
them, them, 


agio/xtkin. K-;6, néket Ljap aga/yax. A/Ita aLoTekteu L‘a’pta. 
she searched for Nothing, not find she did it. Now it felldown salmon roe. 
them. 
AkLO/egam wiXt akLok’0/n ia‘ko. Le’2lé ka aL Xatgo’/mam LE’k Xala. 
She took it again sheputitup there. Long and he arrived _ aman. 
Take Ljiik na/xax 6¢0/leptckiX. Takk aLE’k:im: “ A2!” Ta/kE wiXt 
Then crackle it did the fire. Then he said: “Ah!” Then again 


Ljik na‘xax 60’leptckiX. Ta/kE wiXt aLE/k-im: “A2. EB, qa/da 
crackle it did the fire. Then again he said: “Ah. Eh, why 
qa niket amid/cgam agimElé’mEniL? Moket agid’/egam 0q; 0y0’qxut 
not you took it she he to you to eat Two she tookthem the old woman 
always? 


imé’/k;Enatan. Amid/Xtkin  god-y-i’teaqn. Amxa/LOX na 
your potentilla roots. You searched for them in her mouth. Youthink — [int. part.] 
LgoLéeIEXEmK xix‘iau amiga’t’?om? E’Iteap ia/xal xix: iawuné/nEm.” 
a person this youmethim? Fishhawk his this danger.” 
name 


A‘lta aga/wan uaxa/lax. A’Ita nakxa‘to; LE’kXala akLax6’to. 
Now pregnant she got. Now she gave birth; a male she gavs birth 
to it. 


A'lta aLk/tsax q0/La Lkjasks. ALix‘E/lgiLxax. A/‘Ita akso’pEnax, 
Now he cried that child. He put him on top of Now she jumped, 
the fire. 


akLO’/sgamx Lga/xa. “Ana’, qa‘daqa aLEMXE/‘IgiLx?” “ Qa/‘daqa 

she took it her child. ““ Anah, why you put him into the fire?” ‘““ Why 
amLa/xcgamx dOqjoyo/qxut; giLgina/o-i. ITa/ma iau’a_ tE/mtEcX 

you take him from her the old woman; she looks after him. Only here wood 
mtupia’/Lxa. Néket mo’ya iau’a mai/émé.” Alta nau‘itka ia’ma 
gather. Not go there down river.” Now indeed only 
iau’a na/xElEmEqa. A/Ita 1é/2lé, a/Ita kj;é tk’mtEcX iau’a kea’la, 
there she gathered wood. Now longtime, now no sticks there upriver, 
ta/kE akto‘tetXom. A’Ita no’ya iau’a mai/émé. A’‘Ita Liap aga’‘yax 
then she finished them. Now she went there downriver. Now find she did it 
é’méEcX, iu/Lqat é@/mtEcX. Alta LEK" aga/yax. A/‘Ita Lpil qigo 
a stick, long a stick. Now break shedidit. «© Now red where 
LEK" né/xax. WiXt LEk" aga’/yax, a/Ita Lia/qxauwilqt. LO’ni 
broken it was. Again break she did it, now its blood. Three times 
LEKY® aga/yax, ka LE/xauwé Lia/qxauwilkt. Alta na/Xko. 
break she did it, then much its blood. - Now she went home. 
NaXko’mam, agixa/laqLé. A/‘Ita yuquna/-itX itea/k-ikala. LO0/ni 
She came home, she opened the door. Now there lay her husband. Three 
times 


Lqjup iké’x. A’lta Lga‘/xa La/qxulqt wi, wa, wi. <A/Ita po’po 
eut he was. Now her child cried wi, wii, wa. Now blow 
a‘kxax of0/lEptckiX. A/‘Ita teXEp aké’x 060/lEptckiX. Ta/kE 
she did it the fire. Now extinguished it was the fire. Then 

akLo’cgam Lga’xa, ta/kKE n6’ya. 
she took it her child, then she went. 
Kula’yi ta/kE no’ya. Ta/kE tEll na/xax. “ TgEt!0/kti nLxElkctgo/ya 
Far then she went. Then tired she got. ‘“Good I desert it 


13 


14 


bo 
~] 


SI Oo oO Ee & 


186 CKULKULO’L HIS MYTH. Beet 


Lgb’/xa. Ia/xkayuk nWeElta/qLa.” AgkE’LOtk eu iteona‘k. Ta/kE 


my child. Here I shall leave it.” She carried it to a maple. Then 
naL’é‘taqL. No/ya ta/kE kula‘yi. A/Ita ka aLgia/xoil ikani/m 
she left it. She went then far. Now where he was work- a canoe 
ing at 
qgo‘La Lée/Xat Le’kala, ta/kE aLkutca’/ma Lkjasks. Ta/kE 
that one man, then he heard it a child. Then 
aLkLo’Xtkin. Ta/kE Ljap aLgE’Lax, ta/kE aLgeE/Luk"y qoa’/p gd 
he searched for it. Then find he did it. then he carried it near _—to 
t!oL ka aLkuo‘peut. Ta’/kE né/Xko xix: @k-ala. Ta/kE ated/1Xam 
house and he hid it. Then bhewenthome this - man. Then he said to her 
uya/k-ikala: “Ljap anE/Lax Lk; asks. Amé/wan mxola/xo.” La/xlax 
his wife: “Find I did it a child. Youare pregnant you do.” Deceive 


eta‘xdya-y dcta’xa. Alta acgd/lXam Octa‘xa: “A, Lmé/na ayi'teate! 


they did her theirdaugh- Now theysaidtoher theirdaugh- ‘‘Ah, your mo- her sickness 


ter. ter: ther 
aya‘la-ot. A’‘Ita LO/nas akxto’/ma.” Ta/kE n0o‘La-it dcta/xa. Hé 
is on her, Now perhaps she willgive birth.” Then she remained their Heh, 
there daughter. 
qoa’p ikteu’ktai ka ta/kE anao’ptit. Ta/kE ateLugd/lEmam q0d’/La 
nearly it wasgoing to and _ then she fell asleep. Then he fetched it that 
get daylight 
Lkjasks. “Amxb/lt0k0; LeEmé/wuX ta/kE aLté/mam.” Ta/kE 
child. “Rise; your youngerbrother then he arrived.” Then 
naxE'lt0ko uya’/xa. “O, Lga/wuX,” ta/kE na’/k-ém. A/lta Lga/’wuX 
she rose hisdaugh- ‘Oh, my younger then she said. Now her younger 
ter. brother,” brother 
La‘qoa-iL aLE/xax. A/‘lta atcLa’lax Lkalai/‘tanEma. A/‘Ita ka/nauwé 
large he got. Now he made them arrows. Now every 
for him 
qa/xéwa ayd’/yix k-jimta’-y- uya‘xk’un. Itea/q;atxal. “ Niket 
where he went after his elder sister. Her badness. ‘* Not 


iama/wuX,” agidXam. “Lap aqa/max; LgE/mama Ljap atca/max. 
you are my she said to him. ‘‘ Find you weredone; my father nd ihe did you. 
younger brother,” 


E/tsoL ia/xa mai’k-a.” Ta/kE néxk/Lxa Lga/woX. Ta/kE acXgo/mam. 
Salmon- his son you.” Then he was angry her younger Then _ they came home. 
harpoon brother. 


“Grna‘xo-il, gEna‘xo-il, é/tsOL LgE/mama.” ‘“ Na2xaxa/x! qa/daqa-y- 
“She always says’ she always Salmon- my father.” * Naxaxa’x! why 
to me, says to me, harpoon 


é/ka-y- amia/xo-il LEMé@/wuX ?” Aqid/egam é/mECX, 
thus you always say to him your younger brother?” It was taken a stick, — 
aqaxElqé@JEx'Lako. A/‘Ita ka/nauwé LtaLa/ma tell a/yamxte. “O, 
she was whipped. Now every day tired his heart. ‘Oh, 
tgEt!o/kti nuwa’sd.” A/‘lta né‘ktcukté, wiXt a/cto. A/lta tga/mat 
good I kill her.” Now it got day, again they went. Now shooting her 
atcta/lax. NOo/mEqt. Ayaée’taqL, god’yé ne’xax, a/nqate agia’wat. 
he did it to She was dead. He left her, thus he did already she followed 
her. {turned round], him. 


A‘lta 1a/qoa-iL né/xax, iqjoa/lipX né/xax. A/Ita niXé/qauwako: 
Now large he became, a youth he became. Now he dreamt: 
“Ma’/nix muwa/d®, ka go-y- ogd/kcia Lj;EmME/nL;EMEn ma/xo0. Ka 
‘When youwillkillher, then at her finger broken to pieces makeit. Then 
tcopEna’ya-y- i/kta 10/El0 ka ia/xka Lj kOp mia‘x0. A/‘Ita 0’/mEqta. 
it willjump something round and _ that squeeze do it. Now _ she will die, 
Qe’xtcé gEmola’ma: ‘Nai‘ka mEnuwa’o!’” A/‘Ita wiXt ne’ktcukte; 
Intending she will say: ‘Me kill me!’”’ Now again it got day; 
alta a/cto. Alta gd Lqa/nake ka wiXt atca/wat. A/‘lta wiXt 
now they went. Now at a stone then again he killed her. Now again 
Lqjop a/tcax ogod/keia. A/’Ita-y- atcd’pEna-y- i’/kta 10’El0. A/‘Ita 


eut he did it her finger. Now it jumped something round. Now 


CHINOOK CKULKULO’L MYTH. 187 


Lj kop atca/yax. Qé’/xtce agid/IXam: “Nai/ka mEnuwa‘0.” A/Ita 
squeeze he did it. Intending — she said to him: “Me kill me!” Now 
no/‘mEqt. A/‘Ita ayae’/taqL. 

shewasdead. Now he left her. 

A’‘lta a’yo kula’yi. A/‘lta Lia’/XéwiecX iLa/kématsk Lia’ XéwicX. 
Now he went far. Now his dog spotted his dog. 
A‘lta ayugd’/om télxEm ta’/nEmcke, 0/Xuitike ta/nEmcke. “Ana’, 
Now hereachedthem people women, many women. ““Anah, 
masa/tsiLx q0’/La Lké/wucX. Wu/ska LxLocga’ma.” Alta qgé‘xtcé 

pretty that dog. [Exclamation] we will take it.” Now intending 
aqakLxLé/moL. K;é,  nicket akLo’/cgam. A‘lta é@Xa/tka 
it was called much. No, not she took it. Now one only 
oLa/Xak;Emana: “ Ai/aq, ai‘aq, LgE/lxém.” Lé/lé ka akLgeE/lxém. 
their chieftainess: Quick, quick, call him.” Some time and__ she called him. 
ALaga/Om ka akLo/cgam. No’/X0go ta/nEmcke: “O, Lgé/wucX 
Hecametoher and shetookhim. They wenthome the women: “Ons a dog 
Ljap ancgE’Lax, Ontea’/xakjEmana akLo/ecgam.” Ta/kE né/kim 
find we «lid him, our chieftainess she took him.” Then he said 
igé’sqés: ‘“‘Ni’Xua, nLo’ketama.” Ta/kE ayod’p! ige’sqés. Ta’/kE 
blue-jay : “Well, I will go to see him.” Then heentered  blue-jay. Then 
atei/L‘ElkE] Lgé/wucX. Ta/kE  atcid’/egam ikamod/kXuk,  ta’/kE 
he saw it the dog. Then he took it a bone, then 
atciLE’ls¢m ikamo’/kXuk qg0/La Lgé/wucX. Néket aLga’/yaqe. Ta/kE 
he gave it to him a bone that dog. Not he ate it. Then 
to eat 


ateLa/owilX. “Ja’c Lé/Xa LgeE’XéwucX. [a/c Lée’Xa, mLuwa’t0.” 
he hit him. “Letting do him my dog. Letting do him, you will kill 
alone alone him.” 


Ta/kE né/Xko iqjé@/sqjés. Ta/kE atcid’‘lXam ia/xk’un: ‘“ Ka/sa-it, 
Then he went home blue-jay. Then he said to him his elder brother: “Robin, 
LgoLée/IEXEmk, néket Lgé/wucX.” ‘Ho/ntein, cka kja mxa’/xo. 
a person, not a dog.” “* Don’t, and _ silent be. 
Ma‘mkXa na mLa/qxamt?” “ HO/ntcin, ia’/xka xix ik iq; éyo’qxut, 
Youalone {int.part.}] you seeit?” ‘Don’t, he this one the old one, 
a/Lgé ia/xka ia/néwa i’kta ila’xo-ila.”  Lé/lé LO’nas Lon L‘aLa’ma ka 
lateron he he first some- he knows it.” Some perhaps three days and 
thing time, 
wiXt a’/yo iqjé’sqjés. Ayod’p!am, a/lta ta/lalX Lxé@/lax Lgé/wucX. 
again he went peeaae! He came in, now gamass he ate it the dog. 
Ta/kE atcid‘egam @m*EcX iqjé’/sqjés, atciLgE’lXcim. “EK, 6, 
Then he took it a stick lue-jay, he struck him. “Eh, eh, 
La/xauyam LgE/XéwucX,” na/k-im qaX 06°0/kuil. Ta/kE né/Xko 
his poverty ' my dog,” she said that woman. Then he went 
home 


iq; @’sq;és. Ta’kE atcid‘1Xam ia/xk’un: “LgoLeJEXEmK  ka/sa-it; 
blue-jay. Then he said tohim hiselder brother: ‘“ A person robin; 
ta/lalX Lxé/lax.” N6/ponEm. A/‘lta atcd’lXam uya’/k-ika: ‘OO, 
gamass he eats.”’ It got aark. Now he said to her his wife: “Oh, 
ta/kE tEll atca/yax é’tcamxte» iq; é/sqjés. Ala/xti LEk" tcia/xoyé 
then tired he makes it iny heart blue-jay. Finally break he will do 
them 


itecE/xamokuk. NLxE’lkctgoya Lké/wucX La/6k.” Alta’ pod/lakli 
my bones. I shall throw it away the dog his blanket.”” Now dark 
atei/LxEluketgo. A/‘Ita ne’/kteukté, a/Ita txaldi‘ma Lia/ok. A/Ita 
he threw it away. Now _ it got day, now another his blanket. Now 
ayo’/p!am iqjé’/sqjés. “ K2, ank/k‘im LgodLée/lEXEmk. TenE‘luwats 
he came in blue-jay. ‘* Eh, I said a person. He did not believe 
me 


ka/sa-it.” A/Ita ia/xkaté ay6’La-it. 
robin.” Now there he remained. 


Pp @ So =» 


eo HN GH CO 


188 CKULKULO'L HIS MYTH. [ renee 


Translation. 


There was Ckulkuio’L [the salmon-harpoon | and his elder sister. 
Once upon a time the latter said to her brother: ‘*Do as the other peo- 
ple do and catch steel-head salmon.” Now he did so. He made a har- 
poon. On the day after he had finished it his sister went digging 
roots. Now he went to catch salmon. He speared asteel-head salmon 
and went home. When he arrived at home he roasted it and when it 
was done he said: ‘I will give the head to my sister to eat. No, else 
she will get a fish’s head. I will give the belly to my sister to eat. 
No, else she will get a fish’s belly. I will give the back to my sister to 
eat. No, else she will get a fish’s back. I will give its tail to my sister 
to eat. No, else she will get a fish’s tail.” Now he ate the whole fish. 
He ate the belly, he ate the back, he ate its tail. Then he lay down to 
sleep. Now his elder sister came home. Her brother was asleep. She 
heated stones and roasted the roots. Then she gave them to him to 
eat. 

On the next morning she went again digging roots. After some time 
her younger brother arose and went to catch salmon. After some time 
he speared a large steel-head salmon. “ Ah, Ckulkuld/L behold! he 
does not give anything to his sister,” said the people. His sister 
thought: *‘Oh, they make fun of my poor brother.” Now Ckulkuld’L 
went home. When he arrived he roasted his salmon. It was done. 
Then he said: “I will give the head to my sister to eat” | ete., three 
times, as above]. 

Now she smelled the smell of grease in their house. On the next 
morning she went again digging roots. Then her brother went again 
to catch salmon. Again she heard: ‘ How large is Ckulkul6d/L’s sal- 
mon!” ‘“QOh, perhaps they make fun of my poor brother.” Then 
Ckulkuld/L speared a salmon and went home. When he arrived he 
roasted it. Now its head was done. He said: “I will give the head 
to my sister to eat. No, else she will get a fish’s head. Iwill give the 
belly to my sister to eat. No, else she will get a fish’s belly. I will 
give the back to my sister to eat. No, else she will get a fish’s back. 
I will give its tail to my sister to eat. No, else she will get a fish’s 
tail.’ Now he ate the whole fish. He ate the back; he ate the tail. 
Then he lay down to sleep. Now his elder sister went home. When 
she came home she heated stones and roasted her potentilla roots. 
When they were done she gave them to her younger brother. Now 
she found some grease in the house. ‘Oh, indeed! Behold how he 
acted against me. He never gave me anything to eat.” Now she found 
a salmon-egg in his mouth. She placed it on top of a shelf. Then she 
gave him the roots. Then she took that salmon egg and gave it to_ 
him. ‘Oh, somebody gave this to me.” When he saw it he became 
afraid. ‘Look, she found me out.” On the next morning she made 
herself ready and said to her younger brother: ‘Leave the house.” 


pamenr: CKULKULO’L MYTH—TRANSLATION. 189 


Then he arose. ‘“ Your name shall be Humming-Bird. Henceforth 
you shall not eat steel-head salmon.” Then she went away and left 
him. 

She went and went. She went a long distance. Then she saw a 
house. She entered and roasted ten roots in the ashes of the fire. 
Then she took a salmon roe and ate it. Then a man arrived who took 
her and struck her [on the nape]. The salmon roe fell jout of her 
mouth]. She was ashamed and went out of the house. She went again 
along distance. Then she saw another house. She went and opened 
the door. The house was full of dried salmon. When she had stayed 
a little while a steel-head salmon fell down. She took it and put it 
back. It felldown again. She took it and put it back again. Now 
she roasted ten roots in the ashes of the fire. She lost two of them. 
She searched and searched, but did not find them. Now a salmon 
roe fell down. She took it again and put it back. After some time a 
man arrived. Then the fire crackled. He said, “Ah.” The fire 
crackled again, and he said once more, “Ah. Heh, why did you not 
take the food which she offered to you? She took two of your roots 
and you searched for them in her mouth. Do you think the man whom 
you met was a human being? Fish-hawk is the name of that danger.” 
Now she became pregnant. She gave birth toa boy. Now the child 
cried and the man put it on top of the fire. She gave one jump and 
took the child. ‘“‘Ah, why do you put our child into the fire?” ‘‘Why 
do you take it away from the old woman? She will look after it.” He 
continued: ‘* When you gather wood go only this way. Do not go down 
the river.” Now she did so, and gathered wood only above the house. 
Now one day there was no wood above the house. She had taken it 
all. Then she went down the river. She found along stick and broke 
it. It was red where she had broken it. She broke it again and it 
bled. Three times she broke it and it bled profusely. She went home. 
When she opened the door she saw her husband lying there. He had 
three [deep] wounds. Now her child cried. She blew the fire, but it 
was extinguished. Then she took her child and left. 

After she had gone a long distance she became tired. ‘I will desert 
my child,” she thought. “I will leave it here.” She earried it toa 
maple and left it. Then she went far away. Now a man was working 
at a canoe [near by]. He heard achild crying and searched for it. He 
found it and carried it to a place near his house. Then he went into the 
house, and said to his wife: “I found a child. Feign to be pregnant.” 
Thus they deceived their daughter. They said to her: ‘* Your mother 
begins to be in labor. Perhaps she will give birth to a child.” Then 
their daughter stayed there. But when it was almost morning she fell 
asleep. Then he fetched thechild. [Hesaid to his daughter:] ‘“ Arise, 
your brother has been born.” Then his daughter arose. ‘Ah, my 
brother,” she said. Now, the boy grew up, and [his father} made arrows 
for him. He went about following his sister. She was bad and said: 


190 CKULKULOL HIS MYTH. deca se nn 


“You are not my brother. My father found you. You are the salmon- 
spear’s son.” Then her brother became angry. When they came home 
he said: ‘‘She always says the salmon-spear is my father.” Her father 
said: ‘‘Naxaxa’x, why do you always say so to your brother?” He 
took a stick and whipped her. Now the boy became tired [of her teasing 
and thought]: *‘ I will kill her.” On the next morning they went again. 
Then he shot her several times and she was dead. He left her, but when 
he turned round she followed him again. Now he became a youth. 
One day he dreamt: “If you want to kill her, you must break her finger. 
Then a round thing will jump out of it, and that you must squeeze to 
pieces. Then she will die. She will say: ‘Kill me!’” On the next 
morning they went again. Then he killed her at a stone. He cut her 
finger and around thing jumped out of it. He squeezed it and she 
said: “ Kill me” [but he squeezed the round thing to pieces]. Now she 
was dead and he left her. 

He went a long distance. Now he [assumed the shape of] a spotted 
dog. He came to a place where there were many women. They said: 
‘See, how pretty is that dog. Let us take him!” They called him 
often, but he did not allow himself to be taken. Now only their chief- 
tainess [had not tried]. They said: “Now you call the dog.” She 
called him. He went to herand she took him. Then the women went 
home. They said: “Oh, we found a dog; our chieftainess took him.” 
Then Blue-Jay said: ‘‘I will go tosee him.” Heentered her house and 
saw the dog. He took a bone and offered it to him, but he did not eat 
it. Then he struck him. [The chieftainess said:] ‘Let my dog go; 
you will kill him.” Then Blue-Jay went home and said to his elder 
brother: “ Robin, that is a man and not adog.” ‘Oh, be quiet, do you 
think you alone can see?” “Ha, he is the elder one, and he ought to 
know everything sooner than I,” retorted Blue-Jay. After about three 
days Blue-Jay went again. He entered the house and saw the dog 
eating gamass. Then Blue-Jay took a stick and struck him. ‘“O, my 
poor dog,” said that woman. Then Blue-Jay went home and said to 
his elder brother: ‘‘Heis a man, Robin, he eats gamass.” When it got 
dark the dog said to his wife: “‘Blue-Jay makes me tired. He will 
break my bones. I shall throw away my dog-skin blanket.” At night 
he threw it away. When it got day again he had another blanket. 
Now Blue-Jay came in. [When he saw him, he said:] “ Eh, I said he 
was a man aud Robin would not believe me.” Now he remained there. 


‘18. IQATSE’LXAQ IA/KXANAM. 
THE PANTHER’ HIS MYTH. 


Alta i0’e iqatsé/Lxaq, imod/lEkuma ia/kjéwula. Ka/nauwé 


Now  therewas _ the panther, elks hunter. All 
LtaLa’ma atcia/wul imo/lEkuma. Lé2, ka Ljap atca/yax ipé/naLX ka 
days he hunted them elks. rian and find he did it a twig and 
ime 
atciXp!ené/nako ka atcé/xEluketgo gé’k Xulé ilemé’tk. O, masa’tsiLx 
he twisted it and he threw it down under the bed. Oh, pretty 
xik ipé/naLX: “Ana’ LgdLeJEXEmkK tayaX mxa’tx!” Wax 
that twig: ““Anah a@ person good you become!”’ On the next 
morning 
a’/yo-y- imo/lak né/kEloya. Tsod/yusté niXatgd’mam. A/Ita Li’/Xue 
he went elk he wenttocatch In the evening he came home. Now there was on 
it. the ground 


Lué/1lOL. “A, qa/xéwa Lx atgaté/mam té/lx‘Em? Iqa/lxal Oxuega/liL.” 
cedar bark. ‘Ah, whence maybe they came people? Disks they played.” 
Wax wiXt né’‘kteukté. WiXt a’yo-y- imod’/lak né’kEloya. Tso/yusté 
Onthe again it got day. Again he went elk he went to catch In the even- 
next it. ing 
morning 
niXatgo‘mam. A‘Ita LE/Xaué Lue’lOL: “Qa/xéwa Lx atgaté/mam 
he came home. Now much cedar bark: “Whence maybe they came 
télx-Em? Iqa/lxal Oxucga/liL g60 tk’/kxaqu.” Wax né‘ktcukte 
the people? Disks they always play in my house.” On the next it got day 
morning 
iLa’Loné. WixXt a’/yo. NiXatg0’mam tso’yuste. A/lta paL Lué/lOL 
the third time. Again he went. He came home intheevening. Now full cedar bark 
Li‘Xuec go ta/yaqu. A’Ita 6’wa axo/ca. Ina/lakté a’yo. Lax 6°0/Lax 
itwason in his house. Now counters they were Thefourth he went. Afternoon 
the ground on the ground. time 


ka né’Xko. Qj;0a’p atcta’xom ta/yaqL, 0/kumatk atealtea/ma. Ta/kE 
and hewenthome. Nearly hereachedit his house, batons he heard them. Then 
NixE/LXa. “ Qa/xéwa té/lx‘Em, Oxucga/liL iqa/lxal g0 tkE/kxaqL.” 
he became angry. ‘‘ Whence the people, they always play disks in my house.” 
Qjoa’p atci/tax ta’/yaqL, ta’/ke kja na/xax O/kumatk. Ta/kE 
Near he came toit his house, then silent they became the batons. Then 
niXko/mam, ayOo’p!am. A/‘Ita-y- 6’/wa a/x6e go-y- Oma’/p. “ Wu’ Xi 
he arrived at home, he came in. Now counters lay on aplank. ‘‘ To-morrow 
ka nxptco’ta, qa’xéwa Lx _ atgatcia/ya.” Wax  né‘ktcukté. 


and I shall hide, whence maybe they came.”’ On the next it got day. 
morning 


NixE'ItXuitck. Ayo’pa. Ayo’/La-it g6 te’peo. Nigé/qxamt, nigé/qxamt; 
He made himself He went Hestayed in the grass. He looked, he looked ; 
ready. out 
kjé, niket atei/L¢ElkEl LgoLé/IEXEmk. Ta/ke atealtca’/ma 0/kumatk 
nothing not he saw it a person. Then he heard them batons 
go we’wuLe. Ta’kE née’Xko. Ta’/ke atcickxa/nap!é. A/‘Ita iqa/lxal 
in theinteriorof Then hewenthome. Then he looked into the house Now disks 
the house. through a hole. 


Lxega/liL Lqjoa/lipX. A/‘Ita id’‘kuk LE/Lape uLa/Xematk a/LgotX. 
he played a youth. Now here his foot his baton it struck it. 

A’lta Lxa‘xo-il: 
Now he sang: 


191 


es) 


19 


21 


C1 


BUREAU OF 


; hop rw 
192 IQATSE’LXAQ HIS MYTH. STHNOLUCE 


E’/pénaLX = atsée/nkatXrl Xiau  @/tsElXit atsEnd/gutXap! 


OAPI) I l= ee ee 


Twig he gives me name this my brother he _—_ twists me 


éné/nankuL Xiau é/tsEIXit. 


id Jo ae 


often that my brother. 
Ta/kE a’yup! iqatsé/Lxaq: “H2 Lga/wuX, LgE’xauyam. Qa/daqa 
Then he entered the panther: “Eh, my younger my poverty. Why 
brother, . 
émxanxal?” Ta/kE ayo/La-it Lia’/wuX; nixema’tcta-itck. Cka 
you keep secrets Then he stayed his younger he was ashamed. And 
before me?” brother; 
mai/nx'i nixema/tcta-itck, ta‘/kE atcidlXam_ Lia/wuX: “T!a/ya 
a little he was ashamed, then he said to him his vores bro- ‘Good 
ther 
mE/La- it. ” Ta/kE ayO’La-it. Tlaya’ ayOo’La-it, ta‘kE acxi/la-it. Ta/kE 
you stay.’ Then he remained. Good he stayed, then they stayed. Then 
atcté/lot tia/xalaitanEma. TegEt!o/kti  tia/xalaitanEMa. A/Ita 
he gave them his arrows. Good his arrows. Now 


to him 


tEmaca/nuke ia/k;éwula_ Lia/wuX. Ta/kE ateid’‘lXam Lia/wuX: 


deer he inuritedl his younger brother. Then he said to him his younger 
brother: 


“Ta/ma iau’a mo/yima. Néaket iau/a_ mai/émé_ iLta’ yim.” Ta! KE. 
“Only there go. Not there. down streant go.’ Then 

nau/itka ia’/ma iau’a k*ecala’ ayo’‘yim. Ta/kE iqjoa‘/lipX né/xax. 
indeed only there up stream he went. Then a youth he became. © 
Ta/kE ago’n 680/Lax, a/lta a’yo iau’a mai/émé. Ayogo/om tEm£a/éma, 
Then one day, now he went there downstream. Hereached it a prairie, 
ta/kE ayoga/om O/npite. Ta/kE itca’mat atcia‘lax go itca’pote. Ta/kE 
then hereached her achicken Then _ shooting her Rodi itto on her wing. Then 

hawk. 1er 


noe/lukteu oO/npite. Alta na/xanko, aks0d’pEnan, aks0/pEnan 
she felldown thechicken hawk. Now she ran, she jumped, she jumped, 
na/xanko. Ta/kE né/xanko atcagk’ta. Kula‘yi atcagr’ta, ta’kE 
she ran. Then he ran, he followed her. Far he followed her, then 
ateo‘ikEl t!oL. Ta/kE ia/xkaté no’p!a go qo’ta t!oL. A‘lta Lawa/ 
he sawit a house. Then there she entered in that house. Now slowly 
a’/yo. Nixio1Xa-it: “O, qEnuwa’to. TgEt!o/kti nXta/koya, O-y- 
he went. He t hought: “Oh, Ishallbe killed. Good I turn back. Oh, 
o’XalaitaEnEMma tqjéx naxt. Qa/doxué nod’p!a.” Ta‘kE a/yop!. Go-y- 
my arrows like I do them. Must I enter.”’ Then he cohen At 
ick’q ayo’La-it. Alta paL télx‘Em go qo’ta t!oL. A‘lta aqo’kumam 
the door he stayed. Now full people in that house. Now it was looked at 
uya/Xalaitan. A/Ita ka/nauwe té/lx‘Em atgo/kumam uya/Xalaitan. 
his arrow. ’ Now all the people looked at it his arrow. 
Ta/kE aqaya‘lot iq;é/sq;és. A/‘Ita atcd’/kumam iqjé’sqés. Alta 
Then it was given to blue-jay. Now he looked at it blue-jay. Now 
him 
né/k'im: ‘¢ Sal’ane, — sai‘ané, sai/agEq;oe’Lne, iq; e’/sqjes.” “ Neket 
he said: ‘“Give it to me, give it tome, my double- pointed arrow, blue-jay. ‘* Not 
mai/ka sE/m’eq; ae tEXu’'l gimé’q;atxala.” Ta/kE wiXt aqo/kumam 


your your ainbles pointed very you having badness.” Then again it was looked at 
arrow, 
uya’xalaitan. ‘La/ksta Lx Lka/nax uLa/xalaitan? At!o’kti-y- 
his arrow. ‘* Whose maybe chief his arrow ? Good 
okulai‘tan.” Take wiXt aqaya‘lot iqj;é/sqjés. A’Ita wiXt ne‘k-im: 
arrow.” Then again it was given blue jay. Now again he said: 
to him 
‘¢Sai/ané, sai/ané, ae agEq;0e'Lne, iq; €/sq; és.” “ Ni/Xua_ si‘sgum.” 
‘* Give it to give it to y. double- Haina arrow, blue-jay.’ ‘well; take it.”’ 
me, me, 


CHINOOK THE PANTHER MYTH. 193 


POAS 


Ta/kE ayi’tXuit, atea’ckam. Ta/kE t0’to né’xax. A/Ita tkté/’ma 
Then he stood un, he took it. Then shake he did. Now dentalia 
paL a/yaLta. Ta/kE ne/k-im iqj;é@/sq;és: “A Lowatska’ Lka‘naxa/!” 
full his body. Then he said blue-jay: “Ah, follow him the chief!" 
Ta/kE né/xanko iqjoa/lipX. Ta/kE agikk’ta 060’kuil. Ta/kE a/cto, 
Then he ran the youth. Then she mere the woman. Then they 
1m went, 


a/cto, a/cto, a’cto. Ta’kE ayod’/p!am go tzE’ctaqL ia/xk’un. Ta/kE 
they they they Then he came in at their house his elder Then 
went, went, went. brother. 


néxE’peut. Ta’/kE no’p!am 6°0’kuil. K;}é LgoLélEXEmK go we/wuLé. 
he hid himself. Then shecamein the woman. No person in ero of 
nouse. 


Ta‘/kE naxL0‘/lXa-it: “ Qa’xéwaLx a/LO qg0/La Lqjoa‘/lipX?” Lé ta/kE 
‘Then she thought: ‘Where maybe he went that youth ?” Some then 
time 
tso’/yusté niXatgo’mam iqats!@/Lxaq. A/‘Ita L*a/gil Loe. “O, ta’kE 
evening he came home the panther. Now awoman there “Oh, then 
was. 


taL; @/wa mai/émé a/yo.” A‘Ita ated’egam qaX 6°0’kuil. NaxL0/1Xa-it 
behold thus downriver he went.’ Now he took her that woman. She thought 

qaX 0o¢0/kuil: “Qansi’x: aLXatgo’‘mam qi’/La Lqjoa’/lipX?” Ago’n 
that woman: “When he came home this youth?” The next 
080/Lax akLO’xtkin. Lak, Lak, Lak, Lak aga’/yax éecod’ma, 


day she searched for Turn turn turn turn she did them skins, 
him. over, over, over, over 


im0o‘lak ia/‘ecoma. Ta‘/kE nd’/ponEm. Mokct L‘aLa’ma, ta/nata t!oL 
elk their skins. Then it grew dark. Two days, one side of house 
ka agid‘tetXom. TE’godn ta/nata t!oL agid’xtkin. Lak, Lak, Lak, 
then — she finished it. Next the other house she searched. Turn turn turn 
side of over, over, over, 


Lak éico’/ma aga’yax. I[a/kxdit. Ta/kE akLO’/cgam L‘a’teau, ta/kE 
turn the skins shedidthem. He slept. Then she took it grease, then 
over 


akto/egam tqe’o’cttk. Ta/kE ataxE/IgiLx. Ta/kE nax0/LEla tqe’6/cttk. 
she took them hoofs. Then she made a fire. Then they got done the hoofs. 
Ta‘/kE Lj EME/nL;EmEn agk’tax. Ta/kE akto/cgam te!0/wuL;. Ta/kE 
Then broken to pieces she made them. Then she took it soot. Then 
akexé/lako kja imo‘lak a’yaqeo god cia/kteXict. Alta aqexé/lako, 
she mixed it and elk its hair at its nostrils. Now she mixed it, 
ka/‘nauwe aqexé’/lako kja L*‘a’teau, imo/lak Lia’qxatcau. A/‘Ita wax 
all it wasmixed and grease, elk its grease. Now pour 
out 


aktélax g6 cia’/ktcXict. Po/lakli nixE’l&6k6. A/Ita é/ctatc!la 
she oe it to in his nostrils. At dark he awoke. Now their sick- 
im ness 


cia/kteXict: “O, ka’pX0, ka’/pX6, cgEm0/lakteXict cxanii/lax.” “O, 
his nostrils: EO; elder elder my elk nose comes tobeon  ‘‘O, 
brother, brother, me.” 


au, cmé/molakteXict cxamii/lax. QEqa/ta ayama’/xo.” “O ka/pX6, 
yeunesr your elk nose comes tobe Unable to help Idoyou.” **O elder brother, 
yrother, on you. 


ka/pX06, 0 tgEqe’d/cotk txanii/lax.” “O au, temé’qe’ocdtk txamii/lax. 
elder oh, my hoofs come to be on ““O, younger your hoofs come to be on 
brother, me.” brother, you. 


QEqa’‘ta ayama’xo.” Ne/ktcukté ka nixéna’Xit éecd’ma, imo/lEkuma 
ee ble to I do you.” It got day and they stood up the skins, elks 
1elp 


né/xax. Ka ayo/tXuit Lia/wuX. E/lemiX né/xax. Ayo’pa Lia/wuX. 
they And _ he stood up his younger ElemiX hebecame. Hewent his younger 
became. brother. out brother. 


Nixéna/Xit imod/lEkuma ka/nauwe. A/‘Ita ayo’ptck go tqa/-itEma. 
They stood up the elks all. Now ney went to the woods. 
inland 


A/lta ated/egam qaX 0¢0/kuil itea/poté. A/teuk"y7 god La/xané. 
Now he took her that woman her arm. He carried her to outside. 


BULL. T=20 013; 


bo 


12 


—/ 
194 IQATSE LXAQ HIS MYTH. Stone 


Alta to’to a‘teax. Ka/nauwe tga’‘Lwulé Laq atxa/xax. Atca’/xaluketgo: 
Now shake he did her. All her flesh none it did. He threw her down: 
0 


“O/npite imé/xal. Niket muXugo/mita tkana/ximet. pa itca‘yau, 
“Chicken- your name. Not you will make them chiets. a snake, 
hawk unhappy 


tex] mia’/x0. Imé’qjatxala. Nai‘ka iqats!é’Lxaq _itci’xal.” 
then you will eat it. Taran I panther my name.” 


Translation. 


There was the panther. He was an elk hunter. Every day he went 
hunting. One day he found a branch [of a spruce]; he twisted it and 
threw it under his bed. It wasa pretty branch. [Then he said:} “Oh, 
I wish you would become a man!” On the next day he went again elk 
hunting. Inthe evening hecame home. Now he saw cedar bark lying 
on the ground. ‘Where do these people come from? They have been 
playing at disks” [said he]. On the following morning he went again 
elk hunting. In the evening he came home. Now there was much 
cedar bark [in his house]. “Where may these people have come from? 
They always play at disks in my house.” On the third day he went 
again, and came home in the evening. Now the floor of his house lay 
full of cedar bark and counters lay on the ground. He went out for 
the fourth time and came home in the afternoon. When he reached 
his house he heard batons. Then he became angry. ‘‘ Where do these 
people come from? They always play at disks in my house.” He came 
near the house, then the noise of the batons stopped. He arrived at 
home and entered. Now counters lay on a plank. [He said:] “To- 
morrow I shall hide to see where these people come from.” On the 
next morning he made himself ready and went out. He stayed in the 
grass {near the house| and looked. He did not see anybody. Then he 
heard the batons moving in the interior of the house. He went home 
and looked through a hole in the wall of the house. Now there was a 
youth who played at disks. He struck the rhythm with his foot and 
sang: ‘‘My brother calls me branch of a spruce, my brother twisted me 
often.” Then the panther entered. “Oh, my poor brother, why did 
you hide yourself before me?” Then the youth was ashamed. He 
stayed there. The panther said to him: “Stay with me.” Then he 
remained there. Now the panther gave him good arrows, and the youth 
went hunting deer. Then the panther said to his younger brother: 
“Go only this way, do not go down the river.” He obeyed and went 
only up the river. He grewup. One day, however, he went down the 
river. He came to a prairie where he found a chicken-hawk. He shot 
it and hit its wing. It fell down and ran away jumping. He pursued 
it a long distance. Then he saw a house. The chicken-hawk entered 
the same. Now he went on slowly. He thought: “Oh, they will kill 
me. I had better turn back. But I like my arrow [so well]. I must 
goin.” Then he entered and remained standing in the door. The house 
was full of peopie who looked at his arrow. All the people looked at 


em THE PANTHER MYTH—TRANSLATION. 195 


it. Then they gave the arrow to Blue-Jay, who looked at it. Then 
the young man said: ‘Give me my double-pointed arrow, Blue-Jay.” 
“Tt is not your arrow, you bad man” |, retorted Blue-Jay]|. Again the 
people looked at the arrow and said: “To what chief may this arrow 
belong? It is a good arrow.” ~ Then they gave it again to Blue-Jay. 
Now the young man said again: ‘“‘Give me, oh, give me my double- 
pointed arrow, Blue-Jay!” ‘Well, take it!” Then [the young man| 
arose and took it. Heshook himself and his body was all covered with 
dentalia. Then Blue-Jay said [to the chicken-hawk, who on entering the 
house had assumed the shape of a woman]: ‘“ Follow the chief!” The 
youth ran and the woman pursued him. They went and went and went 
until he came to his elder brother’s house. He hid himself |inside]. 
The woman entered and did not see anybody. She thought: ‘‘Where 
may that youth have gone?” In the evening the panther came home. 
Now there was the woman {in his house. He thought:] ‘Certainly he 
went down the river!” Then he married the woman. She thought: 
““When did that youth come home?” On the following day she searched 
for him. She turned over all the elk skins until it grew dark. She 
continued two days. Then she had finished all the skins on one side 
of the house. Now she searched at the other side of the house. 
She turned over all the elk skins. [Finally she found him] sleeping 
{under the skins]. She took some grease and [elk| hoofs. She made a 
fire and roasted the hoofs. When they were done she pounded them. 
She took some soot and mixed it with hair of an elk’s nose. Now she 
mixed it all with elk’s grease and poured it into his nostrils. When 
it grew dark he awoke. Now his nostrils felt sore. He said: “Oh, my 
elder brother, my nose is being transformed into an elk’s nose.” “Oh, 
my younger brother, your nose is being transformed into an elk’s nose. 
Tecan not help you.” ‘Oh, my elder brother, hoofs are growing on my 
feet.” “Oh, younger brother, hoofs are growing on your feet. I can 
not help you.” On the following morning the elk skins arose and _ be- 
came elks. The youth arose. He became E/lemiX* and went out. 
Then all the elks arose and went into the woods. Now (the panther] 
took the woman at her arm. He carried her out of the house and shook 
her, so that all her flesh fell down. He threw her down and said: 
“Your name shall be Chicken-hawk. Henceforth, you shall not make 
chiefs unhappy. When you see a snake you shall eat it. My name 
will be Panther.” 


* The tutelary spirit of the hunters. 


bo 


BELIEFS, CUSTOMS, AND TALES. 
THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. 


1. Gita’/kikElal atgé/ix é@’wa tEméuwa‘lEma. Manix aLOo/niks, 


av The seers go thus [to] the ghosts. When three, 
La/néwa aqLa’x pat giLa’Xawok. Kjimta’ aqua’x pat giLa’Xawok, 
first heismade- a havinga guardian Last heismade a having aguardian 

strong spirit. strong spirit, 

ka‘tsEk aqLa/x gianu/kstX iLa’/Xaw6k. Ma/‘nix ala‘ktike atgé’ix 

in the heismade asmall one his guardian When four go 

middle spirit. 
gita’kikElal, 4/ka amo/‘ketike ka/tcEk aqta’x. La/néwa aquLa/x pat 
seers, thus two in middle are made. First he is made strong 
giLa/Xawok, LEki’mta aqLa’x pat giLa’Xaw6k. Aqgé’ktadx 
person having a last heis made strong a seer. It is pursued 


guardian spirit, 
iLa’/Xanaté Lka/nax, ma’‘nix @/Latc!a Lka/nax. Manix itca/q;atxala 
his soul the chief's, when his sickness a chief. When its badness 
aya/xElax qaX ué/Xatk, aLkto’p!Ena La/éwam q60’La La‘néwa. 
comes to be on that road, he utters his song that first one. 
Manix @/wa kimta’ itca’q;atxala aya’xElax qaX ué/Xatk, ka q0/La 
When thus ehind its badness comes to be that road, and that 
on it 
iau’a kyimta’ aLktOp!Ena/x La/éwam. Cka mE/nxi nopd/‘nEmx ka 
there behind he utters 1t his song. And a little dark and 
atokoé@’la-itx, tate! ayu’/ktEliL iod/iteEt ka aqita‘Om_ iLa/xanate 
they ny to cure look! the morning star comes and _ they reach it his soul 
im, 


qo‘La gé/Late!a. Aqid’/egam iLa/xanaté. Nuxuta/kux tga/Xaw6k 
that sick one’s. It is taken his soul. They return their guardian 
spirits 
gita’kikElal. E’/XtEmaé m0’keti aLa/oix, @/XtEma-é é@/Xti aLa/o-ix 
the seers. Sometimes two nights, sometimes one night 
ka aqé’tElotxax iLa’/xanaté qigd noxuta/kumx q0’ta tka/-uwok. 
and they give him his soul as they come back those spirits. 
T!a/ya aLxa’x gé’Latc!a. 
Well gets the sick one. 

2. Ma/nix aqia’/wax iLa/xanaté gé/Latc!a; atge’x gita/kikezlal, 
2. When it is pursued his soul the sick one’s, they go the seers, 
ma/nix aqia/wax iLa/xanaté gé/Latc!a; iau’a qiq;E‘teqta qaX 
when it is pursued his soul the sick one’s; there the left that 
ué/Xatk aL0/ix; n6dgd’go-imx gita/kikElal: ‘‘O, Lo’mEqta, taLj !” 

trail it went; they say. the seers: ‘Oh, he will die, behold!”” 
Ma/‘nix iau’a qingjeama’ ayo/ix iLa/xanaté: “O, t!a/ya qLa‘xo!” 
When there right hand goes his soul: “Oh, well he will be 
made !”’ 
3. Aqiga‘omx qigd naLxoa’pe ilé/é. Ia/xkaté aLkTEE/mcta-itx 
3. Itis reached where the hole [in] ground. There they drink always 
tmémElo’ctike. Ma/nix aLkLa/metx ge/Latc!a gd q0d’La Lteuq, a‘lta 
the ghosts. It it has drunk the sick one at that water, then 
néket qa‘nsix tlaya’ aqLa’/x. Qé’xtcé ka/nauwé tga/qewama 
not anyhow well he is made. Intending all shamans 
ataLgé’la-itx, naket L!pax aqLa’x. 
they try to cure not well and he is made. 
him, sound 


196 


es THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. Loe 


4, Ljap aqgé@/ax iLa’/xanaté q0/La LkLamctx Ltcuq. Aqid/egamx, 
4. Find itis done his soul that having drunk water. It is taken, 
1a/qoa-iL qix: ikana’te. Nuxota’kux tga/Xaw6k gita/kikElal. [a/qoa-i 
large that soul. They return their spirits the seers. Large 
qix: ikana’‘te. Aqid’cgamx qjoa’p ia‘kua Nate’tanué ka iano/kstX 
that soul. It is taken near here the Indians and its smallness 
né/xElax. Nugod/go-imx qtodguila‘lé: “LO/nas naket Li’t!o-ix ka 
comes to be They say those who cure ‘Perhaps not one day and 
on it. people: 
LO’mEqta.” Niktceo’/ktixé. Qé’xtcé aqgé’tElot iLa’xanaté. Aqi’/tElotx, 
he will die.” It gets day. Intending itis pce to his soul. It1s given to him, 
im 
qj0a’‘p ka/‘nauwe @’LaL’a ka aLO/mEqtx. NiLgEnga’gux iLa‘xanateé. 
nearly all his body and he dies. It is too small his soul. 
5. Ma/nix atgé/ix gita/kikElal, atgE’/Lxamx tga/Xaw6ok g0 
5 * When they go the seers, they arrive seaward their spirits at 
tEméwa‘lEma, kula‘yi go-y- @/lXam iké’x iLa’/xanaté gé’/Latc!a, ka 
the ghosts, far at town is his soul the sick one’s, and 
niket qLé‘t!émt, mgo’go-imx gita’kikElal: “O, t!aya’ Ixgia/x6 k: 
not he has been they say the seers: “Oh, well we shall and 
given food, make him 


niket qiyi/t!emt.” Nau‘itka, aqid/egam iLa/xanaté. Noxuta’/kux 
not he ae been given Indeed, it is taken his soul. They return 
ood.” 


tga’/Xawok = gita’kikElal. Qé’xtcé pat é/Latc!a, tate! aqé’/tElot 
their spirits the seers. Intending really his sickness, look! it is given to 
him 
iLa/xanate, nau‘/i t!laya’ aLxa’x. 
his soul, at once well they make him. 
6. E’/Xté wiXt go’La aqLongod/mitx; tEm¢éwa'lEma atkLongo/mitx, 
6. Once again thatone he is carried away; the ghosts they carry him away, 
nau’i aLO/mEgtx. Nuxula‘ya-itx La/‘owit. A/Ita aqLElgé/mimtomx 
at once he dies. They tremble his legs. Now they are paid 
iLa’/kikeElal. A‘Ita aqug0/taox tEméwa‘lEma. ALqta/qamitx qd’/La 
the seers. Now they are driven the ghosts. He sees them that 
away 


aqgLongo’mitx qd/tac tEméwa/lEma. Aqa/mxike Lkto‘kul, aqa/mxike 
he was carriedaway those ghosts. Part of them he ve i part of them 
them, 


naiket aLkto’/kulEqi’ax. Ta’mac qod’tac niket a/nqaté nuxo’La-it, 
not he knows them. Only those those not long ago dead, 
ta/cka aLkto/kulequ’ax. Aqikta/omx iLa’xanaté q0’La aqLongo/mitx, 
those he knows. It is reached his soul that it is carried away, 
aqLxlxémé’takux. Nau’i atcElata’kux, t!aya’ aLxa/x. 
it is turned round. At once he recovers, well he gets. 
7. Ma/nix tEméwa‘lEma atkLungo/mitx, manix k;é giLa/kikelal, 
7. When the ghosts carry him away, when no seer, 
aLa‘o-ix q0/La aqLungod’mitx, é/XtEma é@/Xti aLa/o-ix ka aL0/mEqtx, 
one day that heis{carried] away, sometimes one night and he died 
gua/nsum aLO’mEqtx, @/XtEma m0/keti aLa/o-ix aLO/mEqtx. 
always he is dead, sometimes two nights he is dead. 

8. Ma‘nix ayo/ix iLa‘xanaté gé/Latc!a é/wa tEméwa‘lEma, ma/nix 
8. When it goes his soul the sick one's thus ghosts, when 
ate’ktaox gita‘/kikElal atgE’/Lkta6x tga’/Xaw6k, a/nqaté aqid/ktex 
they pursue it the seers they pursue it their spirits, already it has been taken 

into the house 


iLa/xanateé ka xa/oqxaL qa/da aqua‘x. Noxoé/nimx tga/Xaw6dk 


his soul and can not anyhow it is done. They cry their spirits 
gita’kikElal. Noxuta‘kux. Mdoket ikana‘te aqté/tElax; ma/nix Lag 
the seers. They return. Two souls people have them; if take 
out 


aqtE’Lxax qgo‘ta moket, ia/xkaté ka aLo/mEqtx. 
itis done those two, there and he dies. 


we (Oe/ NS 


co. OC 


10 


bo 


10 
11 


23 


7 BURE 
198 THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. piles 


9. Ma/nix aqiE/lgElax iké/utan, gO teméwa‘lEma iké’x. Ma/nix 


9. When it 1s seen a horse, at the ghosts it is. When 
niket aqid’/egamx, ted/2xé aya/o-ix ka  ay0d/mEqtx; ma/nix 
not it is taken, several days and it is dead; when 
aqid/egamx ka naket ay0d’mEqtx. A’ka LgoLé/lIEXEmk wiXt. 
it is taken and not it is dead. Thus a person also. 
Ma‘nix p!ala’ Lg6d’/egéwal aqiE/lgElax iL/axanaté gd tEméwa’lema, 

Wher well some one goes it is seen his soul at the ghosts, 
ma’nix naket aqid’cgamx, nakct 10’Lqté ka aLo/mEqtx. A’/ka 
when not it is taken, not long and he is dead. Thus 
wiXt ikani‘m. Ma/nix atgiungd’mitx tkméwa/lEma _ ikani’m, 
also a canoe. When they carry it away the ghosts a canoe, 
ma/nix naket aLgid/egam iLa‘kikElal ka ca’ca nixa’x. 
when not they take it the seers and smashed it gets. 
10. Ma’/nix Lé/Xat gita/kikElal ka-y- utsja’xO aLga‘/x, ka 
10. When one seer and ehakte man-__he does it, and 
ikin 
aLga’‘tElutx niket giLa’/Xawok. A/‘lta acto/ix @’wa tEméwa‘lEma. 
he gives it to one not having guardian Now they go thus {to] the ghosts. 
spirits. 
ALKElgelgé’cgamx. ALkta/qamitx ka‘nauwé ta/nEma 20 
He helps him. He sees all things at 
tmémElo’ectike ita/lé qod’La niket giLa’/Xaw6k. AKkLO‘k"qx é@/wa 
the ghosts their land that one not having guardian It carries him thus 
spirits. 
tEméwa’/lEma qaX utsj a’xo. 
[to] the ghosts that manikin. 
11. Ma’nix god Naté/tanué iLa’Xanaté iké’x ia/mkXa eé’Xtka 
11. When at the Indians his soul is only one only 
Lag" nixé/lxax gé/Latc!a, aqid’/cgamx, nau‘i t!aya’ aLxa/x. Ma/‘nix 
takeout hedid him the sick one, it is taken, at once well he gets. When 
aqid/egamx qix: gianu/kstx iLa/xanaté go Naté/tanué aqgé/tElotx 
it is taken that the one having his soul at the Indians itis given to 
smallness him 
cka mE/nx‘i tlaya’ aLxa/x. TaL;, 6Xt iLa/xanaté gd teméwa/lEma 
and alittlewhile’ well he gets. Look! one his soul at the ghosts 
iké’x, aqgé/ktadx qiX é/wa tEméwa/lEma iLa/xanaté 10’yama, 
is, it is pursued that thus [to] the ghosts his soul arrives, 
aqitElo/k"yamx iLa’xanaté, nau‘/i aqé/tElotx nau‘'i tlaya’ aLxa/x. 
itis brought to him his soul, atonce itisgiventohim at once well he gets. 
12. Ma’nix Lka/nax ay0/ix iLa/xanaté, é@’wa tkamila/lEq ayo’/ix 
12: When a chief goes his soul, thus [to] beach goes 
iLa/xanaté. Naikct 6/Xuitike gita’kikElal tgid’/kuete. Ma/nix pat 
his soul. Not many seers know about it. If a real 
qLa/qéwama, texi Lgio’/kuété ia/xkéwa é6’wa_ tkamila/lEq. 
shaman, then he knows aboutit there thus beach. 
13. Ma’‘nix é/kta aLgi0/egamx iLa/xanaté LgdLée1XEmk 
13. When something takes it his soul a person 
tEméwa‘lEma ita‘/kté, naiket qansi’x tlaya’ aqLa‘x. 
the ghosts their things, not ever well he gets. 

14. Ma/nix LO/mEqta’ gé/Late!a gua/nEsuin, qoée’t nixa‘xoe. 
14, When he will die a sick one always high water it will be. 
A‘lta Lawa’ atgé’x qd’/ta tka/owok. Ma/nix ti!a‘ya qLa’xo 
Now slowly they walk those spirits. When well he will get 

ge/Late!a ka gua/nEsum qjul mixa/xoé. 
the sick one and always low water it will be. 
15. Ma/nix aqiakLa/étémitx iLa/xanaté gé/Latc!a go ikani’m, 
15. When it is placed his soul the sick one’s in canoe, 
a/qgiuk"7 @/wa wé/kwa niket qa/nsix tlaya’ aqLa’x. 
itiscarried thus _ [to] ocean not ever well he gets. 


16. Aqiga/omx iLa/xanaté gé’/Latc!a. Aqid’egamx, aqid’/lategux. 
16. It is reached his soul a sick one’s. It is taken, itis lifted. 


ceeds) THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. 199 


Aqid/ketx, ia‘xka gd ike’x. WiXt aqid’cgamx, aqid’lategux; 


It is looked at, it there 1t is. Again it is taken, it is lifted; 
aqid’/ketx; a/lta kjé qaxé’ qigd’ niké’x, aLb’/k'imx kLa/qéwam: 
itislookedat; now nothing where as it was, he says the shaman: 


“Ta/kE anidc’/gam.” 
“Then I took it.” 
17. Ma/nix LO/mEqta, iLa’/Xanate qé/xtcé aqid’cgamx, a’lta 


As When he will be dead, his soul intending it is taken, now 
tlaqé’ qaX 6:0/lEptckiX nutXui/tcax. Qé’xtcé aqidmé/tckenEnx 
just as that fire sparks fall down. Intending he gathers it up 
qigO ayutXui/teax, aLe/k‘imx kLa’/qéwam: “Nakct tal; t!aya’ 
where it fell down, he says the shaman: ‘Not behold! well 
nétx.” 


i make him.”’ 
18. Ma/nix LO/mEqta, iLa’Xanaté ka-y- ia’pik né/xalax. Ma/nix 
18. When he will die, his soul and ip being is on it. When 
eavy 


tla’ya qua’xo giLa’/Xanate ka kullku’ll néxa’x. 
well he willbe theone havinga and light it gets. 
made soul 


19. Ma‘nix tgigE/nXauteé ikana‘teé teEméwa’/lEma, a‘lta éma/cEn 
18. When they watch it a soul the ghosts. then a deer 
aLgia’/x La/qéwam. ALgid/kux, néxE’nkux. Atgé’/kta-6x teméwa/lEma; 

hemakesit the shaman. He sends it, it runs. They pursue it the ghosts; 
aqee‘taqgLax qix: ikana’te. Ayoxoé/yumgtx tkméwa‘lEma qix: 
it is left that soul. They forget it the ghosts that 
ikana’té. Ana’‘Lila/‘lax aLkLa/x La’‘qéwam. La/xlax  aLkta/x 
soul. Deceive he does them the shaman. Fool he does them 
tEméwa/lEma ka _ atLgid/egam~= qix: ikana/te. AtéE’ltaqL’ax, 
the ghosts and he takes it that soul. They left it 


tEméwa‘lEma. 
the ghosts. 


20. Ma/nix ia/qjatxala, aLkykem/’.0lExa-itx, a/lta giLa/kike&lal, 


20. When he is bad, he is evilly disposed against him, now a seer, 
a/Ita aLxaLkj umLuwa’kotsgox. Ala/xti Ljap aLkLa’x La/qxdio. Laq 
now he watches for him. Next find hedoes him _ sleeping. Take 


out 


aLgé’/Lxax iLa/xanaté. A/lta aLguipco’/tetEmx go tmémeEld/ctike 

he does it his soul. Now he hides it everywhere at corpses 
atgn’tgiX, ia’/xkaté aLgid/tkeEX. Ana’2 go igé/mEXatk ikani’m; ana’ 
they are, there he puts it. Sometimes at putup as burial canoe; some- 
times 


go ia/qjatxala ilé’/é aLgid’tqx, ana’ go ke’kXulé t!oL, ana go 
in bad ground he puts it, some- at under house, some-_ at 
times times 


yuma/inx’ tE/mtEcX. A/‘Ita @/Late!a nixa‘tElax q0/La giLa’/Xanate. 
rotten wood. Now his sickness eames to be on that theone Tavs the 
im soul. 


AqLElgé/mimtomx Lé/Xat qLa’‘qéwam. AqLgé’la-it gé/Latc!a, 
He is paid one shaman. * They try to cure the sick one, 
him 


aqibIkElax iLa/Xanaté. “O/’kuk La/qéwam iké’x imé/Xanaté.” 
itis looked for his soul. “At that shaman is your soul,” 
A‘lta aqiu’Xtkinax iLa/Xanaté. Ljap aqia’x god tmémelo’ctike. 
Now it is searched for his soul. ind itisdone at the corpses. 
IxElo‘ima Liap aqia’/x go ia/qjatxala ilé’é. Ixeld/ima Ljap aqia’x 
Another find itisdone in bad ground. Another one find itisdone 
go ge’gula t!oL. Aqid’cgamx. IxkEld/ima Ljap aqia/x gd yuma/inx: 
at under the house. It is taken. Another one find itisdone at rotten 
tE/mEcX. Ixklo/ima Ljap aqia’x, gd k"ca’xali iké’x. Aqid/cgamx: 
wood. Another one find itisdone, at above it is. It is taken. 
Ma/nix iaXkia‘lkuil qix: ikana/té, t!aya’ aqLa’x gé/Latce!a. Ma/nix 
When its being well that soul, well he is made _ the sick one. When 


So Cu 


bo 


10 


ig 


12 


13 


200 THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


a/nqaté atea/yax iLa/Xawok kLa’qéwam, a’‘lta aLo/mEqt qd/La 
already he ate it his spirit the shaman’s then he dies that 
LgoOLé’1XEmk q0’/La giLa/Xanaté. 
person that having the soul. 
21. Ma/nix aq Lgklo’/‘kux qLa’qewam LgoLélXEmk, qantsi’x: 
21. When it is sent to him a shaman a person, how many 
La’/yana iqauwik;é’/Lé, niket La/keta Lgé/tqeEmt, aqLo/lXamx: 
fathoms long dentalia, not who knows it, he is told: 
“Ta’/Xanate Laq" mé@xa/xo xix‘l’x.” AqL0/gux qLa/qéwam, 
‘* His soul take out do it this one’s.” It is sent to him the shaman, 
aqLaLgElo’kux LgoLéelXmmk. Pa/nic agé’tElax éqauwik;é’/Lé, ana’ 
he is sent to him a person. Secretly they are done long dentalin, some- 
paying to him times 
Léa/gil pa/nic aqLE’/tElax qLa’/qéwam. A‘lta nau/itka Laq" aLg3/Lxax 
awoman secretly sheisdoneto the shaman. Now indeed takeout he does it 
paying him 
iLa/Xanaté qo’La aqLaLgeElo’/kux. ALO/mEqtx q6’La aqLaLg&lo‘kux. 
his soul that one to whom he was sent. He dies thatone to whom he was sent. 
Ma‘nix atauwé’xixitx La/colal q6d’La LO/mEqtx, aqa/Lgbloé/xax 
When they learn aboutit _his relatives that dead one’s, somebody goes to take 
him 
qLa/qewam, aqLa’watox, mané’x noxo’/x tkata/kux. Ma/nix néket 
the shaman, he is killed, learning his they do their mind. When not 
secret 


aqLa/watox ka 0/Xuit La‘ktéma aLkto’tx; ma/nix La/la-étix: 
he is killed and many his goods he gives them if his slaves 
away; 
qLa’qéwam ka Lla/étix’ aLkLo’tx ka niiket aqLa/watdx. AqLo/lXam 
the shaman and hisslave hegiveshim and _ not he is killed. He is told 
away 


aLxalawi/tXuitx. 
he has not done it [it is 


forgiven]. 
22. A‘ka wiXt pat wuq; qLa’qéwam. Ma/nix xax aLkua’x 
| 

22. Thus also really strong shaman. When observe he does her 
La’/kikala gd Lqoa/lipx:, a/Ita tqé’wam aLkua’x. GiLa/kiLatEniL 

his wite at a youth, now sending disease he does it. He shoots much 
tid’LEma tte!a’/ma qlktuLa/tEniL. A’/ka wiXt ma/nix aqLaLgElo’/kux 
supernatural sickness who knows to shoot Thus also if he is sent to him 

much. 

LgoLéeJEXEmMK, aqta’tElotx tkté’‘ma. Pa/nic aqtkH’tElax. Ana’ 
a person, they are given to him goods. Secretly he is done. Some- 
paying times 
éqauwik;@’Le pa’/nic aqgé’/tElax, ana’ Léa’gil pa/nic aqLE’tElax. 

long dentalia secretly heisdone, sometimes awoman secretly he is done. 

paying paying 
Tqi/wam aLkia/x LgodLéeJEXEmk. Maneé’x noxo’x  tkata/kux, 
Sending dis- he does 1t a person. Knowing they do their minds, 
ease his secret 

aqLa‘watox qLa/qéwam. AtkLa’watdx La’cdlal q0d’La tqé/wam 
he is killed the shaman. They kill him his relatives that sending dis- 

ease 


kLkuLa’/x. Ma/nix Liap aqta’x ttc!a’ma go gé/Late!a aqLElgé’m’étox 
who did it. If find itisdone thedisease in the sick one he is paid 
pat qLa’/qéwam. La/qlaq aLkta’/x qo’/ta tte!a’ma. Qoa/nEmM Lag 
a real shaman. Take out he does it that sickness. Five take out 
aLkta‘x qo’ta ttela‘ma ka @Xt @/Lan. Ljpaq aLxa/x gé/Latc!a. 
he does it that sickness and one rope. Recover es the sick man. 
im 
Ma/nix aql;La’‘tapax qo’‘ta tte!a’ma, ma/nix ka/nauwé aqL;La‘/tapax 
ig it goes through him that sickness, when all it goes through him 
qo’ta tte!a’ma ka cka dqoi/kElax ka aLO/mEqtx gé/Latc!a. 
that sickness then and itis discovered and he dies the sick one. 
23. Ma‘nix Laq aqia/x qix: @/tc!a i0/LEma, a/lta aqLod/cgam god 
23. When takeout itisdone that sickness supernatural, now it is taken in 


moor THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. 201 


La/keia qLa/qéwam. Ogué’ ackta’x La/keia, ma/nix Ljux naxa’x Xak 


his hands the shaman’'s. Folded he ment his fingers, when comeout it does that 
them 

O°OxgE’qxun uLa‘kcia ayO/pax qix: i0’/LEma. Ma/nix aLgid’/egam qix: 

its eldest daughter his hand it goes out that supernatural When he takes it that 
{thumb] thing. 

i‘LEMa qLa/qéwam, aqLOo/cgamx gd La‘“owit, aqL0/cgamx 206 

pee eatural the shaman, he is taken at his legs, he is tuken at 
thing 

La‘potitk, aqL0’cgamx Xuk" iLa/koteX. Alta aqLo‘lategux. 

his forearms, he is taken there his back. Now he is lifted. 

Aqta‘lotgax Ltcuq d%omé’cx. Qjo0a’p qod/La Lteug ka nixtcko’x qix: 

It is put into it water kettle. Near that water and it escapes that 

i0’‘LEma. GO atkLa’taxitx té/lx-am. Teci/2xé aqid/kLx, a/lta Lj EME/1 

supernatural Then they falldown the people. Several itis carried now soft 
thing. times to the water, 

aqia’/x, LjEME’/n aqia’x god Ltcug. Ts!Es néxa/x i0’LEma. A/lta 

it is made, soft itismade in the water. Cold gets the supernat- Now 


ural thing. 
a4i0’kumanEmx. Ana’‘2-y- ilé’q;am, ana/2-y- uLx0/té LEla’/lax, ana/2 
it is looked at. Sometimes a wolf, sometimes its claws a bird, sometimes 
LgoLi'lIEXEmkK Lmeé/melost iLa/Xamodkuk. Aqia’/x LgoLéeJExEmk. 
a@ person a dead one its bones. It is made @ person. 
24. Ma’nix qoa/nEm uya’/kjaukjau qix: i0‘LEma ka LO/ni Lq;up 
24. When five murderer that supernatu- then three eut 
ral thing times 


é/wa e’/nata ia/poté, mo/keti Lq;up iau’a é/natai. Ma/‘nix ksto/Xtkin 
thus oneside  hisarm, twice eut here other side When eight 
uya’kj auk;au i0/LEma, qoa/nEmi Lqjup iau’a @/natai; LO/ni Lqjup 
murderer the supernat- five times cut here on one side; three eut 
ural thing, times 


iau‘a e/natai. Ma/nix itea’Lélam = uya/kjauk;au, qoa/nEm é/wa 
here on peacther When ten murderer, tive times thus 
side. 


é/nata ia’/poté, qoa/nEmé iau’a. é/nata_ ia’/pote. 
one side his arm, five times there onthe other his arm. 
side 


Ma/nix Laq® aqia’x i0/LEma, Lag? aLgia/x qLa/qéwam. AqLo/cgamx, 
When take itisdone the supernat- take he does it the shaman. It is taken, 
out ural thing, out 


aqLo’/lategux. Q;o0a’p qaX o%ome/cX La/‘keia ka ateLo/ketx qod’/La 
it is lifted. Near that kettle his hand = and he sees it that 
Ltcuq xix: 10‘LEma, LjEx acxa’/lax 6*6mé/cX. WiXt aqod/cgamx 
water this supernatural burst it does the kettle. Again it is taken 
thing, 
a/gon ocome/cX. Ma/nix tell aLxa’x qLa/qéwam aqLo/lXam Leé’Xat 
another kettle. When tired he gets the shaman he is told one 
qLa’qewam: “AngkE’tcim Xau Ona‘Lata go tgE/keia.” A‘Ita aLgo’egamx 
shaman: “Strike me that rattle on my hands.” Now he takes it 
qLa’‘qéwam una‘/Lata; agaLgb/lltcim gd La/kcia q6d’/La i0/LEma 
a shaman a rattle; he is struck on his hands that supernatural 
thing 
aqLid/ktcan. LjlB/pLjlEp noxod/x La/keia, Lj;EmME/n aLgia/x qix: 
itis held. Under water they are his hands, soft he makes it~ that 
id‘LEma go Ltcug. KanEmgoa/nEm Laq aLkta’x. Nau’i nux0/LEIEx 
supernatu- in water. Five together take out he does At once they burn 
ral thing them. 


La/kcia. A/élaxta @/Lan Laq® aLgia’/x; a/Ita aqLgElgé/cgamx, ana/2 
his hands. Lateron therope take he does it; now he is helped, some- 
out times 


aLo/nike La’q® atgia’x @/Lan, ana’ amo/ketike. Ma/‘nix 6/Xuitike 
three take out theydoit therope, some- two. When many 
times 


qtga’qéwama ka ala/ktike Laq® atgi/ax @’Lan. Lag® agé/Lxax @/Lan 
shamans then four take out they doit the rope. Take itisdone the rope 
out 


~] 


bo 


18 


19 


202 THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. eae 


qo’La tqé/wam kLkéx. A/‘lta atgixkja’x qix: @’Lan qtga’qéwama. 
that sending disease who did him. Now ee = that rope the shamans. 
oth ends 


AqLo]Xamk LgdLéeJEXEmkE: ‘AY aq Lqju i é’txa.” ALO’tXuitx 
‘He is told a person: “Quick do it.” He stands 
néket giLa/Xawo6k, aLgo’/cgamx a/qoa-iL Oqewée/qxé. Lagi up aLgi/ax 


not having a guardian he takes it a large knife. Cut he does it 
spirit 


gO noxo-ia’yak tga‘kcia qo’tac té/lx‘am. Naket é@’kta Lqjup néxa’x, 
at betweenthem theirhands those people. Not anything cuk he does. 
Ma/nix L‘a’gil Loc, 1La/Xawok, aLgo’cgamx itcand/kctX dqéwé/qxé, 
When awoman thereis, her guardian she takes it its smallness knife, 
spirit, 
cka goyé@’ aLgia’x noxo-ia‘yak tga’/keia qtga/qéwama. ALgigé/Lq7a0x 
and thus shedoes it between them their hands the shamans’. She pierces it 
qix’ @/‘Lan. Wax aLxa/x L£a/owilqt. Tced/2xé aLgigéLqiadx. Kopa/2t 
that rope. Pourout it does blood. Several times _ she pierces it. At an end 
wax aLxax q0/La L‘a/owilqt. A‘lta Oqo-iwé’qxé aqaLgE’lltcimxax 
pour out it does that blood. Now knife he is hit 
qo‘La tgé/wam kLkLax LgdLéeEXEmk. Ma/nix okulai/‘tanEma 
that sendingdisease who did it the person. If arrows 
itea‘kilx'ted aqa-ilga/maltEmx qix: é@’Lan_ ka-y- okulai‘tanEma 
their heads it is struck often that rope then arrows 
aqaLgE'lltcimx. Itca’mat agé’tElax qigd aqLa/watox. 
it is hit. Shooting him he is done as he is killed. 
25. Ma/nix tgE’/Lqta tga/Lan aqta’wix qod’ta ttcla’‘ma ka 
25. When long their ropes are made those diseases and 
id‘Lqté niket é@/Latc!a nixa/tElax, q6d’La tqé/wam  aqLa’x. 
long time not his sickness comes to be on that sending dis- is done to 
him, ease him. 


Tex'l-y- @Late!a nixa/tElax. Ma‘nix tgk‘tskjta tga’/Lan aqta/wix 
Then his sickness ome to be on If short their ropes are made 
him. 


qo‘ta ttce!la’/ma, qoa/nEmi aLa‘-0-ix ka @/Latc!a nixa/tElax, 
those diseases, five times sleeps and  hissickness comes to be on him, 
ana’ txa’mé aLa’-o-ix. 

sometimes six times sleeps. 

26. Ma‘nix aLO/mEqtx Lka/nax La/Xa, a/lta aLKLO’gux La/qéwam. 
26. When it is dead a chief his child, now he is sent for a shaman. 
Go Le’Xat Lka‘nax La’/Xa tqé’wam aqLa’/x. Lkatoé/‘mé aLkia/x 
At one chief his child sending dis- itisdone. Taking revenge itis done 

ease on his relatives 


Lé/Xat Lkak;Ema/na La/Xa. Pa’/nic aLkLa/x La/qéwam. Ma/nix 
one chief his child. Secretly heis done the shaman. When 
paying 
aLEla’xo-ix'itx La/XatakoX wiXt aqLE’nk;émEnakox. La/wuX 
they know it nis mind again it is taken revenge on him. a? younger 

rother 


tqé’wam aqLa/x q0’La Lka/nax. Ma/nix atela‘/xo-ixitx q0d/La 
sending dis- itis done that chief. When they know him that 
ease 


Lé/Xat Lka/nax, ana’ aqLa/watéx qd/La qLa/qéwam. E/XtEma-é-y- 
one chief, some- he is killed that shaman. Sometimes 
times 


aqLa/watox La/icX q0d’/La Lka/nax. A/Ita-y- ukuma/La-it naxa’x, 
he is killed his relative that chief ’s. Now afamily feud it becomes. 
Qia’x iqagé/niak ayOd/Xuix, tex'il-y- ux06’t!aya n6x0’x. Ateda/2xike 
If paying blood they ane each then at peace they become. Several 
ne other, 


aqtoté/nax, tex'l-y- ux0/t!laya nOx6’x. 
they are killed, then at peace they become. 


27. Ma’nix aexté/nax niket giLa’/Xawoék kja qLa/qeéwam ka 


27. When they are angry not having guardian aha shaman then 
against each other spirits 


eye THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. 203 


Lqé’‘wam aLkuLa’/x ka aqLa’watox qLa/qéwam. Ma/nix 0/Xué 
sending dis- he doesit then he is killed the shaman. When many 
ease 


La‘ktéma ka akLkto/tx La/ktéma, 0’Xue aLkto’tx La/‘/ktéma ka 
hisdentaha and hegivesthem his dentalia, many hegivesthem hisdentalia and 
away away 


niket aLa/watdx, aLxaluwek/txuitxax. Ma/nix aqLE/Lxcgamx 
not they kill him they forgive him. When it is taken away 
La/kikala pa’nic aLkLa’x qLa’/qewama. Tqgé/wam aq7a‘’x q0d’La 
his wife secretly he is done the shaman. Sending dis- it is done that 
paying ease to him 


LE‘k‘ala. Ana’ q6’/La L*‘a’kil tqé’/wam aqLa’x. Ma/‘nix aqL0’/cgamx 
man. Some- that woman sendingdis- itis done When she is taken 
times ease to her. 


La’pLiau go kula’yi, pa’nie aLkLa’x qLa’/qéwam, aLO/mEqt qo0’La 
a dead rela te far, secretly he is done the shaman, she dies that 
tive’s wife paying 
Lea‘kil; ana’ q0‘'La LE‘k:ala aLO/mEqtx. Ma/‘nix 6/Xué La/ktema 
woman; sometimes that man dies. When many dentalia 
L‘a‘kil, aLo’mEqtx La‘xk’un, pa/nic aLkLa’x qLa’qéwam, 
a woman, he dies her elder brother, secretly pay- she does him a shaman 
ing 

aLktE’tElutx La/ktéma, tqé/wam aqLa’x  Lé/Xat Lké’nax. 
she ae them to dentalia, sending disease it is done one chief. 

im 7 
ALKLkto’mitx La’/xk’un. Ana’ aLolé/mxa-itx L‘a’/kil gO qLa/qéwam. 
She takesrevengeon her elder Some- she is married a woman to the shaman. 


a relative of his brother's. times 
murderer 


Lxa’/pEnic aLxa’x. Nau/itka aLkLo’/gux La’‘k‘ikala. 
Giving herself she does. Indeed she sends him her husband. 
in payment 
secretly. é 
28. Ma/nix nugo’/texEmx qtga’qéwama, ma/nix aLE’/k‘imx: “ Nai‘ka 
28. When they sing the shamans, when he says: coir 
ia’qoa-iL itci’/Xawok,” ka aqLo/k’uaketx Lé’/Xat qLa/qewam. Ma/nix 
a great one my guardian then he is tried one shaman. When 
spirit,” 
nawitka iLa/Xaw6k qé’xtcé aqiLgE‘Itcim i0/LEma. AqLO’kLpax. 
indeed he has a guard- intending he is hit supernatural He is missed. 
ian spirit thing. } 
LE’gun Le’Xat La/géwam  aLkLo’k’uaketx, wiXt aqL6’kLpax. 
Another one shaman is tried, again he is missed. 
Ated’/xike tga’/qéwama = qé’/xtcé atkiLo’k’uwaketx, naket iLa’ma* 
Several shamans intending they try him, not shooting him 
aqi‘tElax. AqLoOIXamx: “O naw itka taL; tia/qewam.” Ma/nix 
it is done to him. Hes told: “HG Ja. mdeed, behold, he is a shaman.” When 
ka‘ltac iLa/yuL;] qLa/qéwam, aqLo’k’uaketx, a/nqaté iLa’mat 
to no pur- he bragging a shaman, he is tried, already shooting 
pose him 
aqia/tElax. Ma/‘nix Lt;0/xoyal aLb/ktcxEmx, qé/xtcé tqé/wam aqLa’x, 
he is done with When a strong man sings, intending sendingdis- itis done, 
it. ease 


niket qa’nsix iLa/mat aqii/tElax. Ma/‘nix aLb/k:imx: ‘“ Nai’ka 
not ever shooting him he is done with When he says: peal: 
it. 
nt!o’xoyal,” aLE’ktexamx, tqé’wam aqLa’x, a/nqaté aLO/mEqtx. 
Iam a strong he sings, sending dis- it is done already he is dead. 
man,” ease to him 


29. Ma/nix é@’Latc!a atecé/tElax iLa/Xawok, a/lta aqLo/lXam 
29. When his sickness he makes it on his guardian then he is told 
e] him spirit, 
qLa’qéwam: “O tgt!o/kti migkEltecxEma’/ya.” AqLElgé/mimtomx 
the shaman: “\@uh, good you sing for him.” He is paid for it 
qLa’/qgéwam. A/‘lta aqLgE’ltexamx q0’La_ gé’Latc!a, iLa’Xaw6k 
the shaman. Now somebody sings for him that sick one, his guardian 
spirit 


cb) | 


Qe 


10 


Bae 


20 


10 


. mi et r a + BUREAU OF 
204 THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. pb 


é’Late!a atcé’tElax. Alta t!aya’ aLE/ktexamx. Ma/nix niket t!aya’ 
his sickness he made it to Now well he sings. When not well 
be on him. 


aqia’/x ka aLo/mEqtx. A’ka Lea/kil, 4/ka Lz/k-ala. 
heismade then he dies. Thus a woman, thus aman. 
30. Ma‘nix  aLE’/xk’uwoketx qLa‘qéwam, tqé’wam  aLga’x 
30. When he tries himself a shaman, sending disease he doesit 
o:lE’m. Nau’i LEx acxa/lax ugo’‘lEm. Kanauwe’2 nutXo-i'teax 
bark. Atonce burst it does on it its bark. All it falls down 
ug0/‘lEm. ALXxLOlExa-itx: “O tgE/qéwam tEnxa/lax.” Ma/nix go’yé 
its bark. He thinks: “Oh, my shaman’'s is on me.” When thus 
power 


ia/ap @/makte oc uteaktea/k, tqé’/wam aLga‘/x La/qéwam. Nau’i 
ontopof spruce is an eagle, sending dis- he does it the shaman. + At once 
ease 
noe‘luktcux. PaL @/teaqL L‘a/owilqt. ALXLOEXa-it: “‘O tgE’qéwam 
it falls down. Full its beak blood. He thinks: “Oh, my shamans 
power 
tEnxa‘lax.” 
is On me.”’ 

31. Ma/nix ia/qjatxala né/xElax igd’cax, a/lta aqiLgElo’/kux 
31. When its badness comes to be on it the sky, now he is asked 
giLa’ Xawo6k it!0/kté, iau’a maLna’ giLa’ Xawo6k, a’lta aLgigE/Itexamx. 
one havinga agoodone, then seawara having a gnard- now he sings for it. 

guardian spirit ian spirit, 


ALE’k-imx i0’/kuk 6080/Lax ka tciuma/Lxa-é@, aLE’k'imx giLa/Xaw6k. 
He says there sun and it will become he says the one having.a 
clear, guardian spirit. 


Ma/‘nix i0/Lqté ia/q; atxala ixE]a/x0 igd/cax ka aLE/k-imx: ‘Qj; E/1q; El 
When long time itsbadness’ willbeonit thesky and he says: ‘Too difficult 
igd‘cax, Lx xa/oqxaL @/tolé ixa’xd. Lax nikLa/‘ko-it.” 
the sky, probably cannot clear weather it will Unable Iam to doit.” 
be. 


32. Ma’nix iLa/mat nixa/tElax LgoLéJEXEmkK aq ’Elgé‘mémtomx 
32. When shooting him it is done to a person he is paid 
him 


Lt!o/xoyal. “Tgt!o’/kti milmé’ctxa imé/Xawok.” Alta nau’‘itka 
a strong man. “Good youloan hin your guardian spirit.” Now indeed 
Wax aLkLE’Lgax Lteuqg giLa’mat. Alta aL’E’llpax L‘a’qauwilqt, 
pourout he does it water onthe one who Now 1t squirts out his blood, 
is shot. 


ka‘nauwe Laq®? aLxa/Lxax. ALE/k‘imx Lt!o’xoyal: “Ma/nix t!a/ya 

all come out it does. He says the strongman: ‘t When well 

nia/xo, ka-y- ikEnuakeco’/ma ixa/xoya.” Nau/itka cka ma’/nx‘1 kja 

he willget, then thunder it will do.” Indeed and pao quiet 
whoue 


aLxa/x ka-y- ikEnuakco’ma néxa’x. ALE/k:imx: ‘‘M6/keté qilteima’0-y- 
itis and thunder it does. + He says: ‘Twice it will be heard 
ikEnuakeo’ma,” aLE’kimx Lt!0/xoyal. 
thunder,’ he says the strong man. 
33. Ma’nix naLé’/La-itx oOkulai/tan giLa’/mat ka aqLo’cgam 
33. When it is in him an arrow the onewhois and he is taken 
shot 


qLa/qéwam kuLgé’mémtomx giLa/XaXana, ka aLgiLgXa/nadX, 
a shaman who is paid one who sucks, then he sucks it ont, 
Laq® aLga’x Okulai’tan giLa’XaXana. 
take out she does it the arrow the one who sucks. 
34. Ma’nix iLa/mat  nixa/tElax Lt!0’xoyal, aqL0/tXuitgux 
34. When shooting him itis on him a strong man, it is made ready 
Lk; a/cke. Onua’/LEma aqa’‘tElax go Leta’xost, ana’ Lqa/LXatcX 
a child. Red paint ismadeonit on his face, some- coal 
times 


a —_ — a _ _ a —| / 

aqLE/tElax. Kj;au  aqLa’x LE’Laqed- go-y- oOLa‘tepuX; ana 
is made on it. Tie itis done his hair on his forehead; some- 
times 


ae THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS—TRANSLATION. 205 


amo’ketike aqtd/tXuitegux. Wax aqLE’Lgax Lteuq  i/La‘mat 
two are made ready. Pour out it is done water shooting him 


Lt!o’xoyal, Laq®? naxa/Lxax okulai’/tan. Ma/nix am6o’kctike 
the strong man, _ take out it is done the arrow. When two 
aLkta’/qamitx, Lé’Xat L*a/gil, Lé’/Xat LE‘k-ala. E/’wa_ ta/nata 
look after him, one a Woman, one aman. Thus on one 
side of 
t!loL La/gil aqLO/tx‘Emitx; aLkLO/cgamx Lkj;é@/wax Lé£a/gil; @/wa 
the a woman she is placed; she takes it a torch the woman; thus 
house 


énata iLa/pote igilxEmala/lEm aLgid/egamx. E/wa ta/nata t!oL 
other side her arm a rattle she takes it. Thus on other the 
side of house 


LE’k-ala aLked/cegamx {[aq|cé/LOtelk. Go k"ca/xali t!oL aL0’La-it 
a@ man he takes it a whistle. At above the house there is 


LE’k-ala, La/xka wax aLkLE’/Lgax Ltcuq q0/La_ giLaé/mat. 
aman, he pours out he does it the water [on] that the one who 
is shot. 


A‘lta Laq® a’/Lxax La/qauwilxt kanauwé/2 giLa/mat Lt!0/xoyal. 
Now come it does his blood all the one who the strong man. 
out is shot 


Ma/nix kjé Lt!o’xoyal go éEXt é1Xam, ka aqLgé/mémtomx 
When no strong man in one town then he is paid 
giLa’‘XaXana ka aLgiLkXa/nan’Emx giLA/mat. La/qLaq aLKLE/Lxax 
one who sucks and he sucks him the one whois Take out he does it 
shot. 
La/qauwilqt. 
his blood. 


Translation. 


1. The seers go to the ghosts | the souls of the deceased]. When three 
go, one having a strong guardian spirit is placed first, another one last. 
One having a less powerful guardian spirit is placed in the middle. 
When four seers go, the two lesser ones are placed in the middle. 
A strong seer goes in front, another one behind. They pursue the soul 
of asick chief. When the trail [which they follow] begins to be dan- 
gerous, the one in front sings his song. When a danger approaches 
trom the rear, the one behind sings his song. In the evening when it 
begins to grow dark they commence the cure of the sick person. When 
the morning star rises they reach his soul. They take it, and the 
guardian spirits of the seers return. Sometimes they stay away one 
night, sometimes two. Then they give the sick person his soul and he 
recovers. 

2. When the seers pursue the soul of a sick person and it takes the 
trail to the left, the seers say: ‘“‘ Behold, he will die.” When it takes 
the trail to the right they say: ‘‘ We shall cure him.” 

3. The spirits of the seers reach the hole in the ground where the 
souls of the deceased always drink. When the soul of the sick one has 
drunk at that water, then he cannot get well. Even if all the shamans 
try to cure him they cannot make him well. 

4, They find a soul that has drunk of the water. They takeit. It 
islarge. The spirits of the seers return. When they bring it near the 
country of the Indians it begins to grow smaller. Then these men 
who know how to cure people say: “Perhaps he will die to-morrow.” 


10 


18] 


206 THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


It gets day. They try tu give him his soul. It does not fill his body 
and he must die. His soul has become too small. 

5. When the seers go and their spirits arrive at the water in the 
country of the ghosts, and the soul of the sick one is still far from their 
town, and they have not given him food, then the seers say: “Oh, we 
shall make him well, the ghosts have not given him food.” And indeed 
their spirits take the soul and return. Even if the person is very sick 
and they give him his soul, he revives at once. 

6. Again the ghosts carry away a soul. The person faints at once; 
his legs tremble. Then the seers are paid and drive away the ghosts. 
The soul which they carried away sees the ghosts. He knows part: 
of them; another part he does not know. Only those he knows who 
died not long ago. The spirits of the seers reach the soul which was ear- 
ried away and turnitround. At once the sick one recovers; he gets well. 

7. When the ghosts carry a soul away and no seer is present [to re- 
cover it], when the soul has been away a night, the person who fainted 
remains dead. Sometimes when it has been away two nights he 
remains dead. 

8. When the soul of a sick person goes to the ghosts, the seers pur- 
sue it. Ifit has already been taken into the house, it cannot be recov- 
ered. The spirits of the seers cry and return. 

9. When a horse is Seen in the country of the ghosts and it is not taken 
back it dies after a few days. When it is taken back it does not die. 
Just so a person. When a person is well, but his soul is seen in the 
country of the ghosts and it is not taken back he must die within a 
short time. Just so acanoe. When the ghosts carry away a canoe and 
the seers do not bring it back it will be broken. 

10. When a seer wants to shake his manikin [a figure made of cedar 
bark] he gives it to somebody who has no guardian spirit. Now they 
go to the ghosts. He helps him. Now this person sees everything 
in the country of the ghosts. The manikin carries him there. 

11. When only one soul leaves_the body of the sick person, when it 
remains in the country of the Indians and it is taken, then the sick 
person recovers at once. When the lesser soul of a person is caught 
in the country of the Indians and is given back to the person, he recoy- 
ers after a short time. A soul is in the country of the ghosts; the 
spirits of the seers pursue it and reach it when it arrives at the ghosts. 
They bring it back, return it to the sick person, and he recovers. 

12. When the soul of a chief leaves his body it goes to the beach. 
Not many seers know about it; only strong shamans know how it goes 
to the beach. 

13. When a soul has taken anything that belongs to the ghosts, the 
sick one can not recover. 

14. When a sick person will die, it is always high water. Then the 
spirits of the seers walk slowly. When the sick one will recover it is 
always low water. ‘ 


i os THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS—TRANSLATION. "207 


15. When the soul of a sick person is placed in a canoe and this is 
carried out into the ocean, the sick one can not recover. 

16. The spirits of the seers reach the soul of a sick person. They 
take it and lift it. They look at it and seize it again. They look again 
and it has disappeared; then the shaman says that he has taken it. 

17. When they try to take the soul of a sick person and sparks fall 
down, he will die. It seems just like a firebrand. They try to gather 
the sparks up. Then the shaman says: “ Behold, I shall not cure him.” 

18. When a person will die, his soul is heavy; when he will recover, 
it is light. 

19. When the ghosts watch a soul then the shaman makes a deer. 
Hesends it anditruns away. The ghosts pursue it and leave the soul. 
They forget it. Thus the shaman deceives them and takes back the 
soul which the ghosts had left. 

20. When a seer is evilly disposed against a person, he watches for 
him. At last he finds him asleep. Then he takes out his soul and 
hides it near a corpse, in a canoe burial, in a thorny place, under a 
house or in rotten wood. Then the owner of the soul falls sick. A 
shaman is paid to look for the soul and to cure him. He says: 
“Oh, that shaman has your soul.” They search for it and find it in 
the country of the ghosts, or in a thorny place, under a house, or in 
rotten wood, or somewhere in the air. Hetakes it. When the soul is 
still hale and well, the sick one will recover. When the shaman’s spirit 
has begun eating it, the owner of the soul must die. 

21. Somebody sends, unknown to anybody, a string of large dentalia 
several fathoms long to a shaman, and asks him [through his messen- 
ger|: “Take the soul of that person out of his body.” He gives in 
payment to him, secretly, long dentalia or a woman. Then he takes 
out the soul of the person against whom he was sent. The person 
dies. When his relatives learn about it and come to know the secret 
they take the shaman and kill him. If they do not kill him and he 
gives away a large amount of property or slaves, he is not killed. 
Then he is forgiven. 

[Numbers 1 to 21 were originally Chehalish beliefs and customs. | 

22. It is the same with a very strong shaman. When he observes 
his wife with a young man he shoots disease against them. In the 
same way a man sends a person to the shaman, who gives him goods. 
He pays him secretly long dentalia ora woman. Then he sends dis- 
ease toa person. When his relatives learn the secret, the shaman is 
killed. The relatives of the man against whom he sent the disease 
killhim. If the disease is found in the sick one, a strong shaman is 
paid, who takes out the disease. He takes out five diseases [pieces of 
bone around which hairs are tied] and one rope. He cures the sick 
one. When the disease has gone right through him before it is dis- 
covered the sick man must die. Man hastwosouls. If both are taken 
out of the body their owner must die. 


~~ 


208 THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. pele 


23. When the supernatural disease is taken out, the shaman takes 
it into his hands. He folds his fingers [the thumb of the right hand 
being inclosed by the fingers of the left]. When the thumb comes out, 
then the disease-spirit escapes. When the shaman has taken the dis- 
ease-spirit, one man takes him at his legs, another one at his arms, a 
third one at his back. He is lifted. Then water is put into a kettle. 
When they come near the water and the disease-spirit escapes, the 
people fall down (as though a resistance which they try to overcome 
were suddenly removed). Several times they carry him to the water. 
Then the disease-spirit is made soft in the water. It gets cold, and 
they look at it. Sometimes it is a wolf’s or a bird’s claw, sometimes a 
human bone. It is carved into the shape of a person. 

24. When the disease-spirit has murdered five people, it has three 
euts on one arm, two on the other. When it has murdered eight peo- 
ple, it has five cuts on one arm, three on the other. Ifit has murdered 
ten persons, it has five cuts on one arm, five on the other. When the 
shaman has taken out the disease-spirit, he lifts it. He brings 
his hands near the kettle. When the spirit sees the water, the 
kettle will burst. Then another kettle is taken. If the shaman gets 
tired, he asks another shaman: “Strike my hands with that rattle.” 
Then a shaman takes a rattle and strikes the hands of the one who 
holds the disease-spirit. He puts his hands into the water and rubs 
the spirit. He takes out five at the same time and his hands become 
hot. Then he takes out the rope. Now others help him. Sometimes 
three shamans, sometimes two take out the rope. When many shamans 
are present, then four take out the rope. They take the rope out of the 
body of the man into whom the disease was sent. The shamans pull 
at both ends of the rope and ask somebody to cut it. When a person 
who has no guardian spirit takes a knife and cuts between the hands 
of these people, he does not cut [feel] anything. If there is a woman 
who has a guardian spirit, she takes a small knife and cuts between the 
hands of the shamans. She cuts through that rope. Then blood flows 
out. She cuts through it several times. Now all the blood has flowed 
out. Then the person who sent the disease is struck with the knife. 
If the rope was struck [cut] with an arrowhead, then he is struck with 
an arrow. He is shot and killed. 

25. When the ropes [the hairs tied around the middle of the pieces 
of bone] of the disease-spirits are long, then the sickness will come 
upon the person after a long time. If the ropes of the disease-spirits 
are made short, then the person will fall sick after five or six days. 

26. When a chiet’s child has died, the people send for a shaman. 
Disease has been sent to the child of a chief. Then he takes revenge 
onthe relatives of the murderer [and selects] the child of [another] chief. 
A shaman is paid secretly. When these people learn about it, they 
take revenge in their turn. They send disease to the younger brother 
of that chief. When that chief knows the shaman [who has done so], 


fame THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS—TRANSLATION. 209 


he will sometimes killhim. Sometimes they kill a relative of the chief. 
Then a family feud originates. If they pay a blood fine to each other, 
then they make peace again. They do not make peace until several 
are killed. 

27. When a shaman and somebody who has no guardian spirit are 
angry against each other, and the shaman sends disease against his 
enemy, he is killed. When he gives away many dentalia, he is not 
killed; they forgive him. When the wife of a man is taken away, he 
secretly pays the shaman, who sends disease, sometimes to the man 
{who eloped with the woman], sometimes to the woman. When a 
deceased relative’s wife is taken by a stranger, a shaman is paid 
secretly and the woman or the man is killed. When a woman has 
many dentalia and her elder brother dies, she pays secretly a shaman, 
giving him dentalia, and he sends disease to a relative of the one who 
killed her brother. She takes revenge on a relative of the murderer 
of her elder brother. Sometimes she marries the shaman. She gives 
herself secretly in payment and sends her husband [to kill her enemies]. 
_ 28. When the shamans sing and one of them says: “I have a great 

guardian spirit,” then the other shamans try him. When he really has 
a guardian spirit, one of them tries to hit him with a disease spirit, but 
he misses him. Another shaman tries him, but he also misses him. 
Several shamans try him, but they can not hit him. Then they say: 
“Behold! He is really a shaman.” When he only brags, saying that 
heis a shaman, they try him and hit him at once. Whena strong man 
Sings and shamans try to send him disease, they can not hit him. 
When a person sings: “fam a strong man” {without being a strong 
man], and they send disease to him, he dies at once. 

29. When somebody is made sick by his guardian spirit his friends 
say to a shaman: ‘“ Please sing for him.” They pay the shaman who 
sings for the man whom his guardian spirit made sick. Then the 
Shaman sings until he gets well. If he is not made well, he must die. 
This is the case with men and women. 

30. When a shaman tries his power, he sends disease to the bark of 
a tree. The bark bursts at once and falls down. Then he thinks: 
“Indeed, I have the powers of a shaman.” When an eagle sits on top 
of a spruce tree, the shaman sends disease against him. He falls 
down at once, his mouth full of blood. Then he thinks: ‘Indeed, I 
have the powers of a shaman.” 

31. When the weather is bad, the people ask a good person who has 
a guardian spirit of the sea to sing for good weather. He Says: 
“When the sun stands there and there, it will clear up.” When it 
will be bad weather for a long time, he says: “ It is too difficult for me, 
probably it will not clear up. I ean not do it.” 

32. When a person is shot, a “strong man” is paid. “Lend him your 
guardian spirit.”. Then they pour water {on the face] of the person 
who is shot. The blood squirts out; all the blood comes out. Then 

BULL. T = 20——_14 


210 THE SOUL AND THE SHAMANS. [ areeouoee 


the ‘strong man” says: “ If he gets wellit will thunder.” Indeed, itis 
quiet for a short time and then it thunders. Hesays: ‘“ You will hear 
the thunder twice.” 

33. When a “strong man” is shot, a child is made ready. Its face 
is painted red or sometimes black. Its hair is tied up over its fore- 
head. Sometimes two children are made ready. Then water is poured 
on the “strong man” who has been shot, and the arrow is taken out. 
When two persons look after him, one is a girl and one a boy. The 
girl is placed on one side of the house. She holds a torch in one hand 
and a rattle in the other. The boy is placed at the other side of the 
house and has a whistle. On top of the house is a man who pours the 
water on the wounded “strong man.” Then all the blood comes out of 
the “strong man.” If there is no “strong man” in a town, a shaman 
who sucks is paid and he sucks out the blood from the one who is 
shot. 


HOW CULTEE’S GRANDFATHER ACQUIRED A GUARDIAN SPIRIT. 


LgE’qacqae Lia/mama it!0/xoyal tia’/qéwam. Ated/ikEl tqé/wam 
My grandfather his father strong man his supernatu- He saw it supernatural 
ral power. power 


LgE’qacqac; atcé*ElkE] ilé’q;am; atea’*E]kE] 6°0/kuil Okué/wucX; 
my grandfather; he saw it a wolf; he saw it a female dog; 
atcée*EIkE] é’tcdyuct. A/Ita ia’qoa-iL né/xax; a/lta nixLO/lExa-it: 
he saw it the evening star. Now large he became; now he thought: 
“Tet!o’/kti a‘lta La’gil nLucga’ma, ta’kE 0’xoe tgkE’/Xaw6k.” 
‘*Good _ now a woman I shall take her, then many my guardian 
spirits.” 
Noxoik;@/wulalkmam ta/nEmecke noxo-éwula/yemam. Atgid/lXam 
They went digging roots the women they went camping. They said to him 
tia’cikenana: ‘“TeuXoal xkxta/wax X0/tae  0’xoéwula/yemam.” 
his friénds: ** Come, we will follow them those who went camping.” 
Né‘k:im: “ Niket, taua/Ita aqendmé'lax.” WiXt atgio’ko tia’cikenana; 
He said: “No, else I shall be scolded.’ Again idey Asker his friends ; 
1m 


ka nixLo’lEXa-it: ‘“Qa’dox nxElt0’ma.” A‘Ita atcta’wax qO6d’tac 
then he thought: “* Must I go along." Now he followed them those 
tqjulipXEna/yo. Agqugd’om qod’tac ta’/nEmcke. ALgid/1Xam Leé/Xat 
youths. They were those women. She said to him one 
reached 


Lqjeyo’qxut Lea/gil: “TcimEla/xo-ix na Lmé/mama Xuk" amE’té?” 
old one woman: ‘‘He knows about you [int. your father here you came?” 
part. ] 


“Niket ga/da,” né/krim. “A/Lqi iamuklé‘tegd.” AtgE/qxoya ia/xkaté 
“Not anyhow,"’ he said. ‘Later on I shall tell him.” They slept there 
qo'‘tac tqjulipXEna/yt, ka _ ia/xka = aya’qxdié. GO 6t0/lEptckiX 

those youths, and he he slept. At the fire 
nixo/keté, qj;oa’p ddleptckiX. Na’ktcukté ka n0d/Xuko qO’tae 
he lay down, near the fire. It grew day and they went those 
home 
tqjulipXEna’/ya. NoXugod’/mam. 
youths. They came home. 
A‘lta k*La/xani ayo/tXuit, kjoa’e né/xax, ayo’p!a god-y- a/yam 
Now outside - he stood, afraid he was, _ he entered in his father 
ta/yaqL. Atea-ixa/laqLé. E’wa ta’nata qgo’ta t!oL lakt t!a/leEptckix, 
his house. He opened the door. Then on ie one that house’ four fires, 
side 


ée’wa ta/nata wiXt lakt. Ksto’/xtkin tga/kxalptckix q0d’ta_ t!OL. 
then on i aa also four. Eight ; its fires that house. 
side 


Née‘tp!a a/lta gd qix: a’yam ta’/yaqu. Ayaga‘tlom qaX aé’Xt 
Hecamein now in that his father his house. He reached it that one 
0°0/lEptckiX. NixLO/JExa-it: ‘Qantsi’x- Lx qa/da aqkEn0dla’ma?” 
fire. He thought: “How long maybe how Ishall be spoken to?” 
Ayaga’t!om a/gon 0°0/lEptckiX. Aya/‘xatgo. Qjoa’p a‘tcax aLa’/Lon 
He reached it another fire. He passed it. Near hecameit the third 
o:olEptckiX. Atcid//Xam Lia/mama: “IJa/xkati x‘iau meE/tXuit. 
fire. He said to him his father: ‘‘ There then stand. 
Ta/kE na ka/nauwé tid’/LEma amo/ékel ka L¢a’gil tq; éx amLa/Xt?” 
Then  [int. all supernatural you saw and awoman like you do her?” 


part. ] beings them 
211 


bo 


bo | co 


bo 


. mn! A 
212 QjELTE’ LIA’QACQAC. ph = 


Aqayi/nfoL o6cd/yaL: “Ai/aq iga/wulXt xix: ipa’k-al. Qui/nEmi 
It meas threws a cape: “ Quick climb this mountain. Five times 
at hi 


mao/ya ka mXatgod’/ya. la/xkati tmé’q;éyoktike uta/Xawo6k nake’x 


your sleeps and you come back. There your ancestors their female is 
guardian spirit 


Ut!0/naqan.” 
Ut!0/naqan.” 

AgidIXam uya/Lak: ‘“Ma/nix mikwu‘Ix'tama xix: ipa‘k-al 
She said to him his aunt: “When you have climbed this mountain 
tE’qp!op! mtnkElpia’/Lxa, ma/nix migwu’lx‘tama xix: ipa’k-al. 
{a grass] gather it for me, when you will have climbed this mountain. 
Atcd’egam qaX ocd’yal;. A’‘lta a’‘yo. A’y0, a’y0, a’yo, a’yo, 
He took it that cape. Now he went. He went, he went, he went, he went, 
kula’/yi a’yo, ka no’ponEm. IJa/xkati aya’qxéyé. Né/xEltcu, cka wax 
far he went, and it grew dark. There he slept. He talked, and inthe 
morning 


né‘kteukté. Nékct i’kta atciltca’/ma ka née’ktcukte. A/‘lta wiXt 

it grew day. Not anything he heard and it grew dark. Now again 
a/y0, a/yo, a’yo. Niga’wulXt qix ipa’k‘al. Qjoa’p pat of0’/Lax, 
he went, he went, he went. He climbed it that mountain. Nearly noon, 


a‘Ita q;0a’p igwu/lx-tama-é. Alta i/kta atciltea/ma. A, dqo-ikE/muXLut 


now nearly he had climbed-it. Now se he heard it. Ah, howling 
thing 


atealtea/‘ma, Nau‘i L;’& a/yaLfa né‘xax, cka mE/nx‘i a/yit, ka wiXt 


he heard it. Hence feeling his body became, and alittle he went, and again 
of fear 


oqo-i1kE/mXLut atealtca’ma., A/‘lta mank te;pak oqo-ikE/muXLuL 
howling he heard her. Now a little eal howling _ 

atealtca‘ma. K;a na/xax qaX oOqo-ikE’/muXLuL. A/‘Ita ted 

he heard her. Silent became that howling one. Now [noise of fall 

i ing leaves] 

nutXua/yute 6’qxdca. NixLo’lEXa-it: “O, iqetxe’/Laut xik Ljap 


they fell spikes of fir. He thought: EO: the monster, that find 
ania/xOyé.” NixL0/lEXa-it: ““Qa’d6xoé SSL i/kta L; aqg@/nxaua.” 
I shall do.” He thought: “* Shall he devour me, what Pe planned | 


against me.” 
Ayo’/La-it go k*ca‘xali-y- @/mtEcX ka na-ixE/Iqamx. MB8’nxi kja 


He was on above tree and she howled. A little — silent 
né/xax, WiXt Oqo-ikE’/muXLuL na/xax. A/‘lta qjoa/p kate’ mank, 
it became, again bowling she became. Now near very little. 
Kj;a naxa’x oOqo-ikE/muXLuL. Te4  nutXo-i’/teax qaX 0/qxoca. 
Silent became the howling one. {Noise of fall- they fell down those spikes of fir. 


ing leaves] 


WixXt na-ixE’lqamx. A’Ita né/Xtako ay0o’itcd. NixLO/lEXa-it: “A‘Tta 


Again she howled. Now he turned back, went He thought: ‘Now 
own. 
niXkd/ya.” A‘ita agigE’ta qaX Ut!0’/naqan. Kula‘yi ayo’/yam, a/Ita 
I go home.” Now she pursued that * Ut!0/naqan. Far he arrived, now 
him 


qjoa’p gia’xt qaX Ut!o/naqan. Naxk/Ilqamx, nau‘i Lak; a‘yaL’a 


near shecameto that Ut!o/naqgan. She howled, at once neaks his body 
him is [whispered] 
nexa’/x. NixLoEXa-it: “O, gknuwu’laya, taL;.” Né/IlgaLx éXt 
became. He thought: “Q, she will devour me, behold!’ He thouets one 
of him 
ia/Xaw6ok. Kula/yi. ayaé’taqt. <A’lta wi2Xt tEHll né’/xax. 
his guardian Far he left her. Now again tired he got. 
spirit. 
Atea/xEluktegd qaX dya/coyaL;. Agaga/Om qaX dcd/yaLj; ka 
He threw off that his cape. She reached it that cape and 
naxLa/nuky, naxLa/nuky. Atea/qxamt; a/Ita wiXt né’/xanko. Qé’xtcé 
she went aroundit, she wentaround it. Helookedat her; now again he ran. Intending 


ateia/qxamt @/egan, kaxé’ tcé@ElkEla/ya é@/ckan ka i0-oLxe/wula, 
he looked for it a cedar, where he will see it acedar and he will go up. 


CHINOOK CULTEE’S GRANDFATHER. ) 213 


WiXt né/lgaLX ia’ Xawo6k ilé’q;am. Kulku’ll né’xax 4/yav’a. Kula’yi 


Again he thought of his guardian the wolf. Fresh got his body. Far 
it spirit 
ayaé/‘taqL. Ka wiXt tEll né/xax. Atcia/‘kEnana/koXué. A/‘lta 
he left her. And again tired he got. He looked back at her. Now 
tka’toma i0/kuk itea’/wan. Ta/qé Lké@/wucX La/toma. Yukpk/tEma 
her teats here her belly. Just as a bitch her teats. Right here 
takiltcé/mXEllt go tga’/pote. Ma/nix noé/tceax mank Lawa’, ma‘nix 
they struck heroften at her legs. When  shewentdown alittle slow, when 


é@’wa no-é/wulXtxax a/lta aia’q. Qj’oa’p agi’ax. WiXt né/lgaLx 


thus she went up hill now quick. ear she got him. Again he faovghy 
of it 
ia/Xaw6k. Nai-E/lgaLx 6¢0’‘kuil Ogué/wucX uya’Xawo6k. A/‘Ita kula’yi 
his guardian He thought of female bitch his guardian Now far 
spirit. her spirit. 
ayaE'ltaqL. Go lax 6*0/Lax ta/kE na/xax, ta/kE Ljap ateca‘yax 
he left her. There after- sun then it became, then tind he did it 
noon 
é/qxéL; ianu’kstX qix: @/qxéL, Ljle’pe. Yukpa’t nilo/tXuit qix: 
a creek ; itssmaliness that creek, it was deep. Uptohere hestoodinthe that 
water 
é/qxéL qjoa’p tia/xEmalap!ix.. Ayaxa’/LElta q0/La Ltcuq é@’wa 
creek near his armpits. He walked in the that water thus 
water 
mai/émé a/yo ka a/yoptck. Agd/lXamx Ut!0/nagan itca’k;oacdmi 
down he went and he went from It is said Ut!o‘naqan her fear of 
stream the water to 
the land. 
Lteug. A/‘Ita atca/qxamt na’/Lxam go qix: @/qxéL. Ma/nix nau/itka 
water. Now he saw her shecamedown at that creek. When indeed 


to the water 


itea’k; oacdmi Ltcug ka niket atElo’tXuita. Alta na/Lxam go qix: 
her tear of water and not she goes into water. Now she gaine down at that 
to the water 


é/qxéL. A®, a®, a® na/xax. Xué/Xué agkE’/Lax q0’La Ltcug. NO’La-it 
creek. A*,* a”, a® she did. Breathing on she did. that water. She stayed 
water like a 
drinking horse 

alta. No/La-it ka naxE’/Iqanx: “Wa4!” ka ayd’/mEqt ia/xka ka 
now. She stayed and she howled: OW and he fainted he and 
ayao’ptit. Atea’talkEl, a/lta LgodLé/lEXEmk. Alta agiupala/wul: 
he slept. He saw her, now a person. Now she spoke to him: 
“ Nai’‘ka Xuk amcegEno/lXamx, atgEn0/]Xamx Naté’tanue Ut!0/naqan. 

= here you say to me, they say to me the Indians Ut!o/naqan. 
E’wa_ kea/xali xik ilé’é anté‘mam. Qjat aya/max. Ner’tqamt 
Thus above this land I came. Like I do you. Look at me 
Ite‘tanué!” agid1Xam. Tkalai/‘tanEma uta/k-ilx'tcutk paL Xak 
Indian!” she said to him. Arrows their points full that 
ogua’mokue, paL xik @’teiLéa. “ K’ka mxa/x0-y- a/Lgeé god Nate’tanue.” 

her throat, full that herbody. ‘‘Thus youwilldo lateron at the Indians.” 


Tea’mat xité/kik. “E’ka-y- a/Lq@ mxa/xd gd Naté’tanué.” 
Shot here. “Thus lateron you will do at the Indians.” 
Ayao’ptit. Wax né‘ktcukté, a/lta kveca‘xali-y- 080’/Lax ka 
He slept. On the next it got day, now above the sun and 
morning 


nixE’}:oko. A‘Ita kjé naket qaxé’ atea’tElkEl. Nixa’kx0t go 

he awoke. Now nothing not {any]where he saw her. He bathed in 

qix: @/qxéL. A’Ita né’Xko cka-y- @/qak"titx: niXk0d’/mam. A/yup! 
that creek, Now he went and naked he arrived at home. He en- 
home tered 


go tE’LaqLé. Agid’]Xam uya’Lak: “ Tcox te’qp!6p! amtEnilpa/yaLx?” 


into their house. She said tohim his aunt: “ Well grass you gathered it for me?” 


* Nasalized. 


10 


11 


214 QjELTE’ LIA’ QACQAC. SEG Eaee 


Ateo‘1Xam: “Niaket ano/yam ka anxa/tako.” LO’/ni aya’‘qxdya ka 
He said to her: “ Not Larrived and Iturned back.’ ‘Three his sleeps and 
times 


niXatgo‘mam. Niket qa’/da atcid’/1Xam Lia/mama. 
he came back. Not {[anyJhow hesaid to him his father. 


Translation. 


My great-grandfather had the guardian spirit of the warriors. My 
grandfather had seen the shaman’s spirit, he had seen the wolf, he 
had seen the bitch, he had seen the morning star. Now he came to 
be grown up and he thought: “I will take a wife. Now I have many 
guardian spirits.” The women went digging roots and camped [on the 
beach]. His friends said to him : “Let us follow the women who are 
going to camp out.” Hesaid: “No, else I shall be scolded.” His friends 
asked him again. Then he thought: I must accompany them. Now 
he accompanied those young men. They reached those women. An 
old woman said to him: ‘ Does your father know that you came 
here?” He said : “No, I shall tell him later on.” The young men 
slept there and he also slept there. He lay down near the fire. At 
daybreak the young men returned. They arrived at home. Now he 
stood outside. He was afraid to enter his father’s house. He opened 
the door. There were four fires on each side of the house. Eight fires 
were in the house. Now heentered his father’s house. Hereached the 
first fire. Hethought: ‘‘When will he speak tome?” He arrived at 
the next fire and passed it. He came near the third fire, then his father 
said : “Stay there! Did you find all your guardian spirits and do you 
want to take a wife?” He threw a cape at him: “ Quick, climb that 
mountain and [do not] come home [until] five nights [have passed]. 
There is the female guardian spirit of your ancestors. There is 
Ut; o‘naqan.” His aunt said to him: “* When you reach the top of 
that mountain, gather some grass for me.” He took the cape and 
went. He went, he went, and went a long distance. It became dark 
and he slept there. He lay down and it became day again. He had 
heard nothing and it became daylight. Now he went and went again. 
He climbed that mountain. When it was nearly noon he had almost 
climbed it. Now he heard something. He heard her howling. At 
once he was chilled by fear and he went on for a little while, when he 
heard her again howling. Now he heard the howling a little louder. 
Then it became quiet again. Now leaves fell down. He thought: “O, 
I shall meet the monster.” Hethought: ‘They intended that she should 
devour me.” He wason top of a tree and she howled. For ashort while 
it became quiet, then she howled again. Now she was quite near. The 
howling stopped again. Leaves fell down again. Again she howled. 
Then he turned back to go home. He thought: “I will gohome.” Now 
Ut; 0/naqan pursued him. When he had gone some distance she came 
near him. She howled and immediately he became weak. He thought: 
‘She will devour me.” Then he thought of one of his guardian spirits 
and he left her far behind. Then he became again tired. He threw 


CHINOOK CULTEE’S GRANDFATHER—TRANSLATION. 215 


BOAS 


away his cape. She reached it and went around it often. He looked 
at her and he ran again. He looked for a cedar which he intended to 
clinb. Then he thought of his guardian spirit, the wolf. At once he 
felt fresh and left her far behind. Then he became tired again. He 
looked back at her. Her teats were along her belly, like those of a 
bitch. They reached down to the middle of her legs and struck them 
often. When she went down hill she went a little slower; when she 
went up hill she ran quickly. She approached him. Then he thought 
of his guardian spirit, the bitch, and left her far behind. Inthe after- 
noon he reached a small but deep creek. The water reached up to here, 
near hisarmpits. He walked down stream in the water. Then he went 
ashore. It is said that Ut; 0’naqan is afraid of water. Now he saw her 
coming down to the creek. If she was really afraid of the water, she 
would not step into it. Now she arrived at the creek. She made a’, 
a", a", and blew upon the water like a deer that is about to drink. She 
stayed there and howled: “ Ua,” and he fainted and fell asleep. Now 
he saw that she was a human being. She spoke to him: ‘ I am the one 
whom your family and whom the Indians call Utj0’naqan. I come 
from the top of that mountain. [like you. Look at me, Indian!” Her 
throat and her body were full of arrow-heads. ‘“ You will be just as I 
am |when you return to the country of] the Indians.” Her body was 
full of {arrows which had been shot at her]. “ You will be just as | am 
[when you return to the country of | the Indians.” He slept. On the 
next day he awoke when the sun was high up in the sky. Now he saw 
nothing. He bathed in that creek and went home, and he came home 
quite naked. He entered the house. His aunt said to him: “Did 
you gather grass for me?” He said to her: ‘I returned before I 
reached there.” Three days he stayed away. He did not tell his father 
{what he had seen. | 


ag! 


12 


20 


21 


THE FOUR COUSINS. 


Lo/nike = Lia/xk’unike ixgé/s’ax qix: Lia/xauyam. Pa2u d/yaqet’ 


Three his elder cousins the youngest -that his poverty. Full lice 
one ¢. 


cka Lia/k; ék;é, néket Lia/naa. Qo’ectac cgE/kxun cia/xk’un icta’git’dl 
and hisgraudmother, not hismother. Thosetwo theeldestones hiselder they knew to- 
cousins win 
iqaExal. Tea’‘ko-1 néxa’xoyé ka naktgEma’va-itx uya’‘k;ikjé om0/tan 
disks. Summer it will become and she spun always his grandmother poe 
ar 
ogutgEma’/ya-itx. AqagElo/kux Lé/Xat LgdLé/lEXEmk aga’/tElax 
she always spun it. She was hired one person she ms for 
em 


oLa’motan. Minx: Laq® aga’/x. Naxilé’ma-0x, agaxo’/peam. WeXt 
their willow A little takeout she did. She kept it for she hid it for Again 
bark. herself, herself. 
Lé/Xat aga‘tElax oOLa/motan; wiXt minx: nixElé’ma-6x. Ala/xti 
one she made for their Rulon: again alittle she kept for herself. At last 
them bark; : 


goye’ itca/xaiL nExLa/mEXitx. A/lta aLo/ix Nitc;xéEle. God 
thus its largeness she braided. Now they went to Chehalis. At 
Ik; aniyi/ Xam. 6xo-éla/itix: q6’tae té/Ix‘Em. Ia’xkaku n0d/x6x ka/nauwé 
| 
Mythtown they stayed those people. There they are every 
tea/epa é, ma/nix atolo’Lxé iau/a-y- @’maLé. A‘lta aL0/ix Nite; xé’Ele 
spring, when they godown there Columbia Now they went Chehalis 
stream river. to 


qo/Lac Lia/xk; unike. Agio//Xam uya‘kjikjé: “Mo‘k»ya Xak 0/peam, 
those his elder cousins. She said to him his grandmother: “ Carry this rope, 

eula/] mex-t!d/ya.” A/‘Ita aLo‘ix iau’a Nite;xé@/Ele. Iqa/lExal 

ground-hog you will ex- Now they wentto there Chehalis, Disks 
blanket change for it.” f 


aLO/guix Lia/xk’unike; aLo’yam Nite; xé’Ele, 
they wentto hiselder cousins; they arrived Chehalis. 
play at 
A’‘lta Lé/Xat LgdLée/leEXEmk Ljap aLgia/x étela/ké. Qé’/xtcé 
Now one a person find he did it asea-otter. Intending 
aqitxamEla/lamx, qé/xtcé éqawik’é@’Lé agé’/tHlot. K-+;é, néket aLio/tx 
it was bought, intending longdentalia they were given No, not he gave it 
to him. away 


qix: @ela/ké. Qéxtcé ikani’m agé’tElotx. Ke, néket aLgid/tx qix: 
that sea-otter. Intending acanoe it was given to No, not he gave it that 
him. away 


esela/ké. A/Ita nackla/xo-ix'itx qax 60’/pcam. A/Ita aLiga/émx q0’La 
sea-otter. Now they two learned about that rope. Now he Mie to their that 
it ouse 


LgoLéIEXEmk: “TgEt!o/kti iamElo/ta xix: eela’ké, manlo’ta Xau 
person: ‘*Good! Igiveit to you this sea-otter, you giveme _ this 
o/peam.” A‘Ita acgi’ex:tqoax qaX 6’peam k;a ééla‘ke. A/lta aLXgo’x, 
rope.” Now they exchanged that rope and _ sea-otter. Now they went 
ome. 


Née/k:imx: “ Nixega/ma xix: éGela/ké. Atecuwa [Lqi] qé@x0’L’aya, 
He said: “T shall takeit from that sea-otter. Certainly [2] it willbe won from 
him him in gambling, 


teil’é/tegama.” Né’/k-im qix: kex'LEma’t ia/xk’un: ‘Cka ia/c mtgé’/kXax 
he will lose it.” He said that next to the his elder “And let you two do 
youngest - cousin: alone him 
Lia/xauyam. Qa/d6xoe qexd/L’aya. Ma/nix tan ageé/lotx qaX 
his poverty. Shail it will be won Ts something she eile it that 
from him. to him 
216 


orca, 


a Neg THE FOUR COUSINS. 217 


uya’kjikjé a/nqaté aqé/xO0L’ax, ma‘nix aLgixual6o’ta-itx LgoLé1BXEmk 


his grand- already itis won from if he made him happy a person 
mother him, 
tan aLgb/lotxax a/nqaté aqé/x0L’ax.” ALXO’x. G6 Né/max ka 
some- he gaveittohim already itis won from him.’’ They went At Nema then 
thing home. 
aLo/o-ix. A/‘Ita niket a/yaqsd qix: imdEk-:an ia/ok. Ia’qxo-im ka 
they slept. Now not its hair that youngelk'sskin his He slept then 
blanket. 
-atcta-0’/yutcax tia/xalaweéma qix: ia/xk’un. A/Ita aqé@/xcgamx qix’ 
he awoke them his people that eldest brother. Now it wastakenfrom that 


him 


écela‘ké. AqéeLa’/takL’ax, ia/kxdi-¢ ka aqéE’ItaqLax. Kawi’/X 


sea-otter. He was left, he slept and he was left. Early_ 
nixE’Vokux, a/lta kjé qod’tac gita’ckéwal. NixLo/lEXa-it: “O, 
he awoke, now nothing those travelers. He thought: “ Oh 
agEwE'ltaqL taj!” Ky é qix: eela’ké. “O, aqinxE’cgam qgé/auwa 
I was left ‘behold!’ Nothing that — sea-otter. Ol eat bel taken away that 
rom me 


écela‘/keée.” A/lta itca’/épa-é. A‘lta ayo/ix pE/nka. Nikgé’Xax’é Né’max; 
sea-otter..’ Now spring time. Now he went afoot. He swam across Nema; 
ka/namoket qo’ta t!a‘LEma ayugdgué’Xax. Ayo/ix pE/nka, niXko’x. 
both those creeks he went across. He went afoot, he went home. 
Ayo’/yamx god Né/leqtEn ka LXaluwé’got. A/‘Ita ayd/La-it ma’‘Lxole. 
He arrived at Né'leqtEn and it was ebb tide. Now he stayed ashore. 
NiXL01EXa-itx: “Qia’x Lj uwu’/n Lxa’xo Lik Lteuq, tex'l anigElgé/xaxé.” 
He thought: “Tf slack water it gets this water, then I shall swim across.” 
Ka id’e LO né/xau. Alta i’kta atciltca’ma gd Lteuq: “ Qa’doxué 


Where he calm _ it became. Now some- he heard it in the water: * Must 
was thing . 


nia’qamita i’kta xik ixa‘xo0.” Tumm né’xax gé’‘kulé go Lteug. Kja 
I see what this does.” Tumm it made below in the water. Silent 
nexa/x qigd tumm nexa/x. Ka ala/xti né/xax dkll. A/‘Ita no/ix qaX 
itbecame where tumm  itmade. Then next itmade dell. Now itwent that 
ug0/lal iau’a ma/éma: wa2. Qoa/nEm atciltca’ma qix: é/kta dell. 
wave then downstream: wa. Five he heard it that something dell. 
WiXt qgoa/nEm atciltca’/ma qix: @/kta gumm god gé/kXulé. Lax 
Again five he heard it that ‘something gumm at below. Come out 
né/xax éé’texot, LO’/nas qantce’x ita/Lqta tia/ucake. WiXt @’gun 
it did a black bear, Idontknow how much their length its ears. Again one more 
Lax? né/xax. Qoa/nEmM Lax® né/xax éé/teXutEma. NiLgEna/Xit 
come out it did. Five come out they did black bears. They stood 
go Lteug. Laq' neé’xax ia/modlkan. Atciugoa’/na-it méa/Lxolé: 
in the water. Take off hedid his elkskin blanket. He threw it landward: 
“Qa‘doxoé n0’/mEqta,” nixLO/1EXa-it. A‘Ita ayd’/guiXa. Atcé’xk6-y- 
‘* Must I shall die,” he thought. Now  heswam across. He passed it 
éXt, igd’‘n EXt atcd’/2xk0O; @’LaLOn atci’xk6O qix: 6éé’texutEma. 
one, another one he passed it; thethirdone hepassedit those bears. 
xixi/k iLa/lakt ka atcea/yukct. Agqa/yuket qix: Ité’‘tanué cka 
This fourthone and itlookedathim. He waslooked at that Indian and 
atce*EIkE] go cia/xdst. K;é@ nod’/xdx tia’/Xatak6x. A/‘Ita aqa/yukiec! 
itlookedathim in _ his face. Notlung became his mind. Now he was carried 
go tion, Ite!xia’n ta/yaqu. Tat; Ie!xia/n x-ixi/x: atce/*ElkeEl. 
to a house, Ite!x‘ia/n his house. Behol Ite!xia/n this he saw him. 
Ta/nata ta/yaqL qix: i0‘LEma Oxoié/éma tgaXipala/wul, é’wa ta/nata 
On one side hishouse’ this supernatural other their language, thus on the 
being other side 


ta/yaqL oOxoé/ma  tgaXipala/wul. AtcawiteE/m:lé, Oxoii/éma 
his house other their language. He understood them. Other 
tgaXipala/wul é@/wa tcé/tkum t!oLt. “TEmé@/nEmeke a/Lqé x-itac 
their language thus in middle the house. “* Your wives later on these 
mauitcH/mElé kana/mtEma x‘ita t!oL. E’/ka mxa/x0 gd Naté’tanué. 
you hear them on both sides of this house. Thus youwilldo at the Indians. 


16 


x 


218 THE FOUR COUSINS. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


xix'i/gik mka/nax tceEma‘/x0.” Agé@/lot igd’matk, ikamo/kXuk 
This here you chief it will make you.’ He was given eoEe or: bone 
ead, 
igd/matk, dkulai/tanEma itca’/kXomatk. AqLé/kXOL; qod’ta tid’LEma. 
bird arrowhead, arrows their heads. They Were finished these supernatural 
beings. 
NixE’l:0k6, go ma/Lxolé yuquna‘itx: iau’a @’/natail. Nixa/latck. 
He awoke, at ashore he lay there onthe other side. He arose. 
A‘lta kawe’X. Pat 680’Lax qigd ayo/kuiXa. Tatc!au wiXt kawi’X 
Now _ it was early. Noon when heswamacross. Behold! again early 
ka nixE’l&0ko, Ayo’/tXuit, nigé’qxamt. Yuquna/-itX 1a/molkan qj; 0a’p 
and he awoke. He stood there, he looked. It lay Me elkskin near 
lanket 


go ia/xka. Ayo’tXuit. Atcd’/ckam ia/mdlkan. A/‘Ita wiXt 4/yo. 
at him. _ He stood there. He took it hiselkskin blanket. Now again he went. 
Né’xko. 

He went home. 


Ayo/yam go I’'tskuil cia/mict. Né’kgix:aé. A/lta wiXt a/yo ka. 


He arrived at Itskuil its mouth. He landed. Now again he where 
went 
iqalExal oxucga/liL gd Ikjaniyi/lXam. ALB/kiket Leé’Xat. 
disks they played at Mythtown. He looked one 
LgoLéeJEXEmk: ‘ Hé/tsxot xix: 6xE/nkon go xix: @’L; uwalkL; uwalk.” 
person: “A black bear this runsabout at _ this mud.” 

Atgia’qxamt qo’tae té’lx‘-Em. ALE/k'im q0/La Lé’Xat: “He‘/tsxot na? 
They looked those people. He said that one: “A bear (int. 

part.]? 

LgOL@1EXEmMk X06/La qLO/‘itEt. Ta’/xkaLX xiau aqceé/taqh xix: 
A person that coming. He, I think, who was left this 

id/itht.” Né/k-im qix: ixgE/kxun ia/xk’un: “E/kta wiXt qtcia/wat? 
comes.”' He said that eldestone hiseldercousin: ‘‘What again does Se pee 

to do! 
Ia/kimatetamé.” Neé/k-im qix: kex:'LEma’t: ‘‘Qa’/d6xoé Lia/xauyamn. 
He is one of whom we He said that the one next to ‘Let him his poverty. 
must be ashamed.” the youngest: 

Qa/da ateimta/xt ka néket amtgigé/tx'é?” <Ayod’ptcgam god qod’tac 

How hedidto you and not you like him?” He arrived cquatass at those 
up from the beach ~ 


té/Ix‘Em. A/Ita iqaJExal Oxoega/liL. G62 kE’mkXiti ka nixé/lotex. 


people. Now disks they played. Then at the end and he looked at. 
Ateiugoa/na-itx qix: atcid’/ktcan igd’/ma. I[a/xkati wiXt Lé/Xat 
He put it down that what he held the bird arrow. There also one 
LgoOLélEXEMk Loc, Lxé/lotex. Aqid/Ixam: ‘ Masa/tsiLx ig0/matk.” 
person was, he looked at. He was told: “ Pretty arrowhead.”” 
“A, Liap ana/yax,” né/k:im. Lé/giL’Et qo’La Le’Xat LgoLeEXEmk, 
“Ah, find I did it,”’ he said. He always won that one person, 
qLO/L’Et q0’/La Lé/Xat LgoLéJEXEmK @/wa qigod ayo’/La-it. ALgi0‘] Xam 
itwasalways that one person thus where he was. He said to him 


won of him 
qo‘La Lé/Xat LgoLéeJEXEmk: “ Tx0/xot!éya, yamgEmo’tea eXt 


that one person: ‘* Let us bet, I stake against you one 
igd‘matk.” AtcLO/lXam: ‘ Mai’ka tEmé/Xatak6x,” ka mé‘nx'i ka 
arrowhead.” He said to him: “ Your your mind,” and afteralittle and 
while 
aLE/k‘iL, alta kadi’x: né/kiL qix: Lia/xauyam. LO/ni né/kiL, la’‘kti 
he won, now this one he won that his poverty. Three times he won, four 
times 
né/‘k-iL ka ia/Lélam né/xax qix: igoma/tgEma. Atca/yuL. Aya/qxoi-a. 
he won and ten they be- these arrowheads. He won them. He slept. 
came 
Ayawalgu’Litck uya’kjikjé: “Anid’/mEl @ela’ke ka aqinxE/cgam.” 
He told her his grandmother: “Tboughtit asea-otter and it wag taken away 
rom me.” 


Nagii/2teax uya’‘k; ik; 6, agixuwalo’ta-it. Ni/2ktcukte. ‘“‘Tcoxoate !a, cike, 
She cried his grandmother, — she pitied him. It got day. ‘Come on, friend, 


CHINOOK THE FOUR COUSINS. 219 


BUAS 


txega/ma iqa/lexal.” Né/k-im: “K-;é itei/Ikoté.” “ E/Xtka itxa/lkote.” 
let us play disks.”’ He said: “None my mat.” ‘One only our mat.’’ 
“K-ié néket itci’Ljaltjal.” ALgio’IXam: “ lamilEme’ctxa iL; alLja‘l.” 
‘None not my disks.” He said to him: “‘T loan to you disks.” 
A'lta ayo’pa. A/‘ita atci/LOL, atci/LOL, atctE’/Lx0L ka’/nauwé 
Now he went out. Now he won, he won, he won it all 
La‘ktéma, La/XalaitanEma, iLa/LjalLjal atce/Lx0L. ALicXOL;. 
his property, his arrows, his disks he won them. They finished. 
ALE‘k-im Lé/Xat wiXt LgoLée/lEXEmk. “ Kj wan qiya’/xt xiau 0/yaqet 
He said one more person. * Hopeful heis made that lice 
paL go La/yaqtq. Wuxe’ nai‘ka ntxcga/ma.” Kawe/X né’‘ktcukte 
full on his head. To-morrow E we will play.” Early it got day 
ka id’‘e go uya’k;ik!e te’kXaqL. ALgixa/laqLé LgdLé/lEXEmk. 
and. he was at his grandmother her house. He opened the door a person. 
Igo’titk aLgio‘ktcan: “Tea  txega’ma, cike,” aLgid/lXam. 
A mat he held: “Come we will play, friend,” he said to him. 
AteLoXam: “Aya’‘qaa.” Atcid/mE] ilgd’titk. A/Ita wiXt atci/LOL 
He said to him: SEV Viel ge He bought it a mat. Now again he won over 
him 


qo’La Le’Xat LgodLéeJEXEmk. AtctE’/LxOL La’‘xamota ka/nauwe; 
that one person. We won it his property all; 
ka iLa/xanim atcé’/LxoL. A’}ta atci’LOL qOd’tac gita’q!atxalEma 
then his canoe he won it. Now he won of those common 
; them 


téIx‘eEm. Ala‘xti ka a’tElactike qo’tac tkana/Ximct. Ala/xti 
people. Next then they next those chiefs. Next 
LEla‘itix: atci‘LOL. A‘Ita 0/Xuitike t!é’/Itge-u atci/LOL.  A‘Ita 
aslave he won him. Now many slaves he won them. Now 
ika‘nax né/xax. Ka/nauwé qO’tac té/lx‘Em tga‘ktéma ka atcto’xoOL. 
achief he became. All those people their property then he won it. 
Ka‘nauweé LtaLa’ma noxo-iLxE‘Ima-itx téx‘Em g0 ta/yaqL. A/Ita 
All days they always ate the people in his house. Now 
atcid Xam @/Xat ia/xk’un: “AtcéeEIkKE] LO’/nas  id’/LEma. 
he said to him one his elder cousin: ‘* He saw it perhaps a supernat- 
ural being. 
Antxega/ma kLia/XEmatk. Ntéxo’L’a ka/nauwé tia/éltke-u. Kj; wan 
We will play having batons. I shall win them all his slaves. Hopeful 
qia’xt tia/éltke-u.” Acxélgu’Litck: “A, emé/xk’un tcEmax6/émoL.” 
he is his slaves.’ They told him: Athy your elder he wants to play with 
made cousin you,’’ 


“la’‘xka ia/Xaqamt.” A/lta acxE’cgam  ia/xk’un  Lia/Xamatk. 
“He his mind.” Now they played his eldér cousin batous. 

TcéxLx Lpo/L; Ema acxE’/cgam kja ia’xk’un. Atcté/xoL tia/éeltke-u, 

How many nights they played and his elder He won them his slaves, 


I do not cousin. 
know 


atea/éxOL uya/Xanim ka/nauwé. E/gon @/Xat wiXt  ia/xk’un 
he won them his canoes all. Once more one also his elder 
cousin 


acxE’egam; wiXt ka/nauwé atcté’/xoL tia/éltke-u; ka tcta/nEmcke 
they played; also all he won them his slaves ; then their wives 
atcti‘exoL. Atcid1Xam @Xat ia’xk’un: “A/’nElaxta txega’ma.” 
he won them. He said to him one his elder cousin: “T next we will play.” 
Atei01Xam: “K;é yamXuwa/lot. E’ka qé a/nqaté ama/nax, 
He said to him: “No, I pity you. Thus as formerly you did to me, 
amEnXuwalo’ta-it, ka wiXt é@ka yamXuwalota’-éta.” Qé’xtcé 
you pitied me, and also thus" I pity you.” Intending 
atgé/‘ix Gita’tcxéEle, ka/nauwée atcta’xoL’ax tga‘/ktema. Atgé/ix 
they came the Chehalis, all he won it their property. They came 
Tkwinait’/LEke, até’gElo-ix iqa/IExal. Ka‘nauwé  atct0’/x0L’ax 
the Quenaiult, they came to play disks. All he won it 
tga/ktema, tga/éltke-u. Ka/nauwé té/lx‘Em atcLauwitxa/uyama qix: 
their property, their slaves. All people he made them poor that 


- woh 


bo 


m 0 


220 THE FOUR COUSINS. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


ga/yaqet. GO Lka/nax La/Xa, a/ngatée @kxit atcé/tElax. Bwa/ 


lousy one. Where achief his child, at once beyine as he did her. Thus 
a wite 
Tkwinait’/LEke, @’wa Tlilé‘muke @/wa k*ea‘la xik né/maL, @/wa 
the Quenaiult, thus __ the Tillamook, thus upstream that river, thus 
Gita’qauélitsk, ka’/nauwe noxuexéla/kXuit tea/nEmcke qix: ga/yaqet 
the Cowlitz, all they were mixed his wives that lousy one 
a/‘nqaté. Qé naket gigd aqixe’cgam é%ela’/ké qod/ctac cia/xk’un 
formerly. If not where it was taken from the sea-otter, those his elder 
him brothers 
acgixE/egam ka 10/LEma atcé’E]kEl. Ite!x-ia/n atcé/*E]kEl, 
thew took itfrom then the supernat- he saw it. Ite!x-ia‘n he saw him. 
him ural being 
Translation. 


There were three brothers and their younger cousin, who was very 
poor. He was full of lice. He had no mother, only a grandmother. 
The two eldest brothers knew how to win in the game at disks. When 
the summer approached the grandmother spun twine out of willow 
bark. The people hired her to spin bark. Then she kept a little for 
herself. At last she made a large rope. Now [the cousins] went to 
Chehalis. The péople stayed [at that time] at Mythtown [at the most 
southern part of Shoalwater bay]. There they are every spring when 
they are going to Columbia river. Now the cousins went to Cheha- 
lis. The grandmother said to her youngest grandson: ‘Take this 
rope and exchange it for ground-hog blankets.” Now they went to 
Chehalis. The elder cousins wanted to play at disks. They arrived 
there. 

Now somebody had found a sea-otter. They wished to buy it and 
wanted to give long dentalia for it; but that man did not want to part 
with his sea-otter. They wanted to give him a canoe, but he did not 
want to part with it. Now they heard about the rope. Then that man 
went to their house [and said]: ‘I will give you this sea-otter if you 
will give me this rope.” Now he exchanged the rope for the sea-otter. 
Then they went home. [The eldest one] said: “I shall take the sea- 
otter away from him. He will certainly gamble and lose it.” Then 
the one who was next to the youngest said: ‘‘ Let the poor boy alone. 
Let him lose. If his grandmother gave it to him, let him lose it; if 
somebody made him happy and gave him something, let him lose 
it.” They went home. They slept. at Nema. The elkskin blanket of 
the younger cousin had no hair. When he slept the eldest brother 
awoke his people. They took the sea-otter away from him and left him 
asleep. Early the next morning he awoke. Now the brothers had 
disappeared. Hethought: ‘“ Behold! they deserted me!” The sea-otter 
had disappeared. ‘ O, they took the sea-otter away from me.” Now 
it was spring time. He went on afoot, going home. When he arrived 
at Né/leqtEn it was ebb tide. He stayed ashore and thought: “ At 
slack water I will swim across.” It grew calm. Then he heard some- 
thing in the water. ‘I must see what that is.” It made tumm under. 


CHINOOK THE FOUR COUSINS—TRANSLATION. 221 


water. Then it became quiet, and again it made tumm. Then next it 
made dEll. Now a wave came down the river. Five times he heard 
tLe same noise, dEll, and five times he heard it, gumm, below the 
water. Then five black bears came out of the water; their ears were 
Ido not know how long. They stood on the water. Then the youth 
threw off his elkskin. He threw it ashore. He thought: “I must 
die,” and began to swim across. He passed the first one, the second 
one, and the third one. When he reached the fcurth one it looked 
athim. It looked that Indian right in the face. He fainted. Now 
Ite!x-ia‘n carried him to his house. Behold! he saw Ite!x‘ia/‘n. On 
one side of the house of this supernatural being they spoke one lan- 
guage; on the other side they spoke another language. He understood 
them. In the middle of the house they spoke still another language. 
‘Those women whom you hear now on both sides of the house will be 
your wives. Thus you will live among the Indians. This will make 
you a chief.” Then they gave him a bird arrowhead made of bone. 
The supernatural beings finished. He awoke and lay ashore on the 
other side [of the water|. He arose. It was early now; while it was 
noon when he began to swim across. His elkskin blanket lay near 
him. He arose, took his elkskin blanket, and went home. 

He arrived at the mouth of I’tskuil. He came ashore. Now he 
went to the place where the people of Mythtown played at disks. A 
person looked up [and said]: “A black bear is running about on the 
mud.” The people looked up and one of them said: “Is that a bear? 
It is a man who is coming. I think it is the one who was left alone.” 
Then the eldest brother said: ‘‘ What does he want here? We must be 
ashamed of him.” Then the next to the youngest said: ‘Let him 
come, the poor one. What did he do to you that you do not like 
him?” He went up to these people. Now they played at disks. He 
stood at one end and was looking at them.’ Then he put down the 
bird arrow which he held in his hand. One of the bystanders looked 
at it and said: “How pretty is your arrowhead.” “Ah, I found it,” 
he replied. The one man was winning all the time the other was 
losing. Then one man said to him: ‘Let us bet, I will stake an arrow- 
head against yours.” He replied: “As you like,” and after a little 
while the poor boy won. He won three times, four times, and now he 
had ten arrowheads. He had won them. He went '!o sleep. Then he 
told his grandmother: ‘I bought a sea-otter and they took it away 
from me.” His grandmother cried; she pitied him. It got day. |Then 
a person said:| ‘Come, friend, let us play at disks.” He said: “I 
have no mat.” ‘ Wecan use one mat.” “I have no disks.” ‘I loan 
you my disks.” Now he went out. He won and won and won. He 
won all his arrows and all his property. He won his disks. When 
they had finished, another person said: ‘‘That one with the lousy head 
is getting hopeful. To-morrow I will play with him.” Early the next 
morning when he was still in his grandmother’s house, that person 


< 7 7 F 
222 THE FOUR COUSINS. arageree 


opened the door. He held a mat in his hand and said: ‘Come friend, 
we will play.” ‘ Well,” said the boy. He bought a mat. Now he won 
again all the property of that person. He won his canoe. Now hehad 
won over all the common people. Next he won over the chiefs. He won 
first one slave and then many. Now he became a chief. He had won 
the property of all those people. Everyday the people ate in his house. 
Now his elder cousin said: ‘‘ Perhaps he saw a supernatural being. We 
will play with the accompaniment of batons. Then I shall win all his 
slaves. He is [too| hepeful.” Then he was told: ‘“ Your elder cousin 
wants to play with you.” ‘As he likes.” Now the cousins played 
and the people beat time with batons. They played several nights. 
He won the eldest brother’s slaves and all his canoes. Then he played 
with the next brother and he won all his slaves; then he won his 
wives. Now the next brother said: ‘I want to play with you next.” 
‘No, I pity you, as you pitied me formerly.” Then the Chehalis 
came and he won all their property. The Quenaiult came to play 
at disks. He won their property and their slaves. That lousy boy 
made everybody poor. He bought the daughters of chiefs among the 
Quenaiult, the Tillamook, the tribes up the river, the Cowlitz. The 
wives of the man who had been the lousy boy were taken from 
among all these tribes. If his cousins had not taken the sea-otter 
from him, he should not have seen the supernatural being. He saw 
Itc !x-ia’n. 


THE GILA’UNALX. 


~H/Xat . gia/unaLX ik; a’cke aqa-E‘ItaqL uya’k;ik;é 20 


One ‘GiLa-unaLX boy she was left his grandmother at 
Soguame’tstiak. Tqa’meté na’kxoya ka aqid/lXam qix: ik;a’cke: 
Tongue point. Six times her sleeps and he was told that boy: 
“A’ketam omé/k;ik;é@. PE/nka mo0/ya.” A‘Ita ne’‘te mai’éme. 
“Gotosee your grandmother. A foot go." Now he came down the 

river. 
Né’xateo. Ateat/alkEl moket 6O’Lgike. Ateto/ktean tia’xalaitanEma. 
He walked He saw them two fish-ducks. He took them his arrows. 


down river. 
NixL0/lEXa-it: “Nékect ita’‘mat aniad‘/lax, taua’Ita agod/kLx 


He thought: **Not shooting them __I do them, else they carry 
down to the 
water 
Ogu’/xalaitanEma.” Atcid’egam iqa’/nake. NakL;@/iwamEn qaX 
my arrows.” He took it a stone. They dived those 
O/Lgike. Né@/xEngO ma‘/Lné. La’xLax na/xax qaX  0/Lqike. 
ducks. He ran seaward. Visible they became those ducks. 
AtciagEItcim qix: iqa/nake. Itea’mat atcia/‘lax god-y- é’teaqtq: 
He threw it that stone. Hitting it he did it at its head. 
Laq® né/xax ia/ok. Ayaga’om. Yukpé/2t Ltcuq nitElo/tXuit ka 
Take off hedidit his blanket He reached Up to here water he stood in the and 
them. water 


akeo/ngué qaX d/Lqike, nuwa’Xit. A’yoptck. A‘teukct. OXuné/n 
they fluttered those ducks, they escaped. He wee land- He looked. They drifted 
ward. 
@k"caxala itea‘wan. WiXt 4@/yuLx. Ayod’guiXa. Qj ;0a’p atca’xom 
up their belly. Again he went to He swam. Meaty he reached 
the water. them 


wiXt  aked/ngué. A’yuptek wiXt. Qoia/nEmi ayd/guiXa ka 
again they fluttered. He went up again. Five times he swam and 
ated‘/egam cka nixi/Lxigo ka kyjé no’/xox tia/xatakuX. A/Ita 
he reached them and heturned round and nothing became his mind. Now 
i0‘LEma atcé’EIkE]. Nixiga/lax Iqamia‘itx. NixE/l’6k60. GO ma/Lxolé 
a supernat- he saw it. He saw a super: the fisherman's He awoke. At landward 


ural being natural being supernatural 
helper. 


yuquna/itX. Ited’/ktean qaX o/Lqike. Ia/Xkaté ayaé/taqL qaX 
he lay. He held his those ducks. There he left them those 
an 


O/Lqike. A’Ita a’yd. Ayod’/yam Sokuamé'’tstliak. Q;0a’p = a’teax 
ducks. Now he went. He reached Tongue point. Near he got 
4/k-ik-e. Toa’Xte a! Qigd ou Ov 6 5/ Lie 
uya’kjikjé. Tga’Xté qaxé’ qigd aqaé’taqL. Ayo’/yam go-y- uya’k hik;e. 
his grandmother. Hersmoke where when _ she was left. Hearrived at  hisgrandmother. 
Ateo‘IXam: ‘“Imi’Xanaté, taj.” Agid/lxam: ‘Itcd/Xanaté.” 
He said to her: ‘You are alive, behold! ’ She said to him: ‘*T am alive.” 
Qé’xtcé age/lkém. Atcd’]Xam: ‘Niket 6/10 genE’tx” Aya’qxoyé 
Intending she ae him He said to her: “Not hunger acts on me.” He slept 
ood. 


ia/xkaté. Ne’ktcukté, atca’gElEmqtcé uya’kjikjé. O’Xue tkh/m*EcX 
there. It got day, he gathered food for his grandmother. Many sticks 
: her 


atctupa/yaLx ka né/Xk0. Ayaé’taqu uya‘k;ik;é. Tsd’/yuste 
he gathered them and he went home. He left her his grandmother. In theevening 
niXkd/‘mam. Agid/lXam: “O/’lo na gEma/xt?” Neé’k-im: “K;é; tell 
he came home. He was told: ‘‘ Hunger (int. acts on you!” He said: = No; tired 
part. | 
993 


=P) 


10 


11 


13 


14 


224 THE GILA UNALX. SURES 


ETHNOLOGY 


Iam." He lay down. Early he arose. He went to 


nixEMO’cXEmam. Tso’/yusté texi né’Xko. Ayod’p!am ska mi/nx‘i 
he went to play. Intheevening then he went He came in and a little 
home. while 


ayo/La-it ka wiXt nixo’ketit. Lon Lpo‘lEma Lon LtaLa/ma néket 
he stayed and = again he lay down. Three nights three days not 
nixLxa/lem. Texi nixLxa'lEm god-y- aLa’/lakt 6:0’/Lax. Ayo/mEt. 
he ate. Then he ate on the fourth day. He grew up. 
A‘lta @Xat ia/cike iqjoa/lipx:. Cqjoa‘lipx: aci’xax. QaxLx 
Now one his friend a youth. Two youths they two became. One 
nata‘Lax ka a/ctO teakEnima.’ Ka/tcEk acto/yam @’maL. Atcid/1Xam 
day and they went ima canoe. Middle they arrived thebay. He said to bim 
iavcike: “I’kta imé’Xaw6k?” ‘“Iqamia/-itx itci‘xawok. Kja é’kta 
his friend: ‘‘What your guardian spirit?’' ‘‘Iqamia’-itx my guardian spirit. And what 
mai‘kXa imé/Xawok?” Né/k:im qix: é’Xat: “ Nai‘ka wiXt Iqamia/itx 
you your guardian Hesaid that one: ose also Iqamia’-itx 
spirit?” 
itci/Xawok?” “ E’/kta mia’xOya ma/nix 0/160 aktaé’x0 txa/colal?” 
my guardian ‘What will you do when hunger will act our relatives ?’” 
spirit?’ a on them 
Né@’k:im qix: @/Xat: “E’/Lxan nia‘x0.” Atcio’lXam ia/cike: “ Kja-y- 
He said that one: ‘Smelt Ishallmake He said to him his friend: “And 
it.” 
kta mai/kXa mia/xo?” Né‘kim: ‘“Igua/nat nia’xO ma/nix 0/16 
what you you will do?” He said: * Salmon Ishallmake when hunger 
: it 
akta’/xo txa/cdlal. Ni‘/Xua, LjmEn, @’xa imé/poté gd Lteug. Ia‘koa 
acts on our relatives Well, underwater doit  yourarm in water. Here 
them 


wiXt nai‘/kXa Lj)mEn nia’xo itei’poté.” LimEn acgk’tax teta’/pote. 
also I under water Tahal my arm." Under water they. did their arms. 
ot them 


Ja‘néwa qix’ @/Lxan gia/Xaw6k atcLO’latck Lia/keia, A‘Ita quL 
First he that smelt having guardian . he lifted it his hand. Now hang 
spirit 
a/elaot O/Lxan god Lid/keia. Li/lé qix: @/Xat, tex atcLo‘latck 
itdidtoit asmelt at hishand. Longtime that one, then he lifted it 
Lia/‘kcia. QuL é@/ladt gianu’kstX igua/nat. Atcid’lXam _ ia/cike: 
his hand. Hang it did to it a small salmon. He said to him his friend: 
“ Nan/itka LEmé/Xawo6k [qamia’-itx.” 
‘* Indeed your guardian spirit Iqamia’-itx.”’ 
Aci’/Xko qod‘ctae eqjoa‘lipx.. AyulE’mNa-it qix: @’Xat qix: @/Lxan 
They went those youths. He married that one that smelt 
home 
gif/Xawok. Alta 0/16 agk’tax té/lx‘Em GiLa/unaLX. La/mkXa 
having guardian Now hunger actedonthem the people GiLa/unaLX. Only 
spirit. 
LE‘/kXaltpo atkia‘xo-itx. A‘Ita ika’‘nax né’/xax qix: 6’Lxan 
skunk-cabbage they ate it. Now rich he became that smelt 
gia/Xawok. Qa/xLxnata/Lax, a‘/lta naLgElo’/ya LE’kXal*po uya’k-ikal. 
having guardian One day, now she wenttoget skunk-cabbage his wife. 
spirit. 
Tsd/yusté naXatgo’/mam. A/‘Ita aLa/xElEtq. Naxcko/mit. TsEs 
In the evening she came home. Now she heated stones. She warmed herself. Cold 
aké’x qé@/wa tea’qElqlé. Nad/ptit qigd nod’cko-it. NaLgEna/‘itixit go. 
it was that winter. She fellasleep where she was warm. She fell down at 
qaX d0/lEptckiX. Na‘Lxto0. NaxkE’tEla gd tga’pote. ALE’kim 
that fire. She fellasleep She burnt her- at . her arms. They said 
sitting. self 


GiLa/unaLX Lkanauwe'’tike: “Aca/‘letyit ilxa/xakj;Emana uya’k-ikal. 
the GiLa/unaLX all: ‘*She is starving our chief his wife. 

K;ii-y- Omea/potexan; a/Lx%d-y- oOmea/potexan. Ca/ltéyit, ca’leyit,” 

Nothing your sister-in-law; shefellasleep your sister-in-law. She is starv- she is starv- 
sitting ing, ing,” 


nkeéx.” Nixd’ketit. Kawi’x:  nixa/latek. <A’yd gd kula’yi; 
far; 


CHINOOK THE GILA’UNALX. 225 


BOAS 


nugo/kXo-im q6/tac té/lx‘Em. Na/k‘im qaX 686/kuil: “Ank/Lx‘0, 
they said those people. She said that woman: ‘*T fell asleep 
sitting 
xik gia/qamia-itx, né-k‘imx gia/qamia-itx.” A/Ita nixEma’tcta-itek 
this having Iqamia/itx, he says having Iqamia/itx.” Now he was ashamed 
qix’ itea/k-ikal, ka‘namdket tga’poté nux0d/LEla. Niket ayao’ptit 
that her husband, both her arms were burned. Not he slept 
qix: itca/k-ikal. Ka/nauwé nugué/witx'it qd’tac té/lx‘-Em. Atcid/1Xam 
that her husband. All they slept those people. He said to him 
Lia‘wuxX: ‘Mxa/latck!” Nixa‘lateck wLia’wuX. “A’cgam XaxX 
his younger ** Rise!” He arose his younger ‘Take it this 
brother: brother. 


OLk;’H/nLk;’En.” A‘Ita atciii/egam qix: itcd/itk. A/ctd ma/Lné 
asket.”’ Now he took it that dipnet. They two seaward 
went 
 tea/xElqlé. Actigo/om qix: éla/itk. Acto/cegam q6’ta tia/qxon é@1a/itk. 
winter. They reached it that willow. _ They tookthem those itsleaves willow. 
Pau na/xax qaX OLk;’E/nk;’En. A’yoLq. YukpE’t niLé’La-it Ltcuq. 
Full became that asket. He went to Tohere hestoodin the water. 
the water. water 


Atcid'IXam_ Lia’wuX: “LxEluwe’got. E’wa_ kea/la nai/kXa, 
He said tohim his younger brother: ‘It is ebb tide. Thus up river {from] me, 
LgkE/k"cala wax amta‘/xax xita tE’kXon. Ka amiucga’/mx x-iau 
up river from pourout dothem those leaves. Then take it this 

me 


itco/itk. Amgé/ma: ‘Ehé’;’ amgé/ma: ‘ Nia/ wat itci’tsoitk.’ Amiola/tego 
dipvet. Say: ‘Ehé’;’ say: ‘T broke it my dipnet.’ Lift it 
imé’‘teoitk. WiXt wax amta’xo @/wa Lgk’k"cala. WiXt amgé/ma: 
your dipnet. Again pourout do them thus upriver fromme. Again say: 
‘Hhé’, nia’wat itso/itk.’” LO/ni wax atci/tax; wiXt né’k-im: ‘“ Nia/wat 
‘Ehé’, I broke it the dipnet.’’’ Three pour he didthem; again he said: “T broke it 
times out 


itei/tsoitk.” Atcid/latck ia/teditk. Atcid/1Xam qix: ia’/qk’un; aqid/1Xam 


my dipnet.”’ He lifted it his dipnet. He said tohim that his elder it was said to 
brother; him 
qix: iqjoa/lipx’: “ Ni/Xua, th’/kEman!” Atcto/kuman qix: iq; 0a/lipx:. 
that youth: “ Well, look at them!” Helookedatthem that youth. 
A'lta ta’/kX0n gd tga/lictEke, fi’Lxan @’wa tia/qtqake. Wax atci’tax 
Now leaves at their tails, smelt, thus their heads. Pour out he did 
them 
@LaquinEmix’. LilEp, LjlEp, Ljlep, nikqLa/yux. WiXt atcid’tipa 
the fifth time. Under under under they jumped into Again he dipped 
water, water, water, the water. 
é’/Latxamé. Wax atea/yax. A/lta niLk"kLa/Xit Lteuq qgix: @/Lxan. 
the sixth time. Pour he did them. Now they swam onthe water those smelts. 
out surface 


Atci0’1Xam Lia/wuX: “ Tea txgiucge’Lxa xix: iqicé’tix:.” Acgid/egiLx 
He said to him tile younger “Come wewilllaunchit this  fishingcanoe.” They launched it 
rother: 
qix: iqicé’tix.. Acgid/egam iqaLé/mat. A/‘Ita nicxLé/n. Xuwé’t qix: 
that fishing canoe. They took it the rake. Now sey shed with Halffull that 
the rake. 
icta’/xécitix:. Atcid/‘1Xam: “KOpB’t.” Ta/kE acx@’gila-é.“‘Ai/aq Lea/leEmam 
their fishing Hesaidtohim: ‘“Enough.’’ Then they went * Quick fetch 
canoe. ashore. 

Lkué/Lx‘Ema qoa/nEm.” AtcLugd‘lEmam qix: iq; o0a/lipx:. Ogoé’/witii 
large mats five.” He fetched them that youth. They slept 
qo’tac té’Ix‘-Em. Acgid/kué qix: @/Lxan. Acgid/ketEptek ka/nauwé. 
those people. They carried those  smelts. They carried them all. 

them ashore inland 


Atci01Xam Lia/wuX: ‘“ Kawée/X mxeEla/tego ka mxElgé/Lxa ka 
He said to him oes yeullger ‘« Karly rise and make fire and 
rother : 


mx’0‘tama. Midgona/ya tk’Ilxaqu. Ia/xkaté kea/xalé motX ka 
gotobathe. Openthe smoke hole our house. There up stand and 
BULL, T=20: 15 


me © SOS Fe 


16 


17 


18 


19 


226 : THE GILA’UNALX. pe 


mxElqE/mxaya. . Mgé/‘ma: ‘A, GiLaunaLXa/ ta’/kE na amexk’La-it? 
shout. Say: ‘Ah, GiLaunaLX then {int. are you dead? 
a part. ] 
A tqageEla’xelta’;’ mgé’‘ma. M0o’keti mgé/ma, mxElqE/mxa.” Nau/‘itka,. 
Ah, the news;’ say. Twice say, shout.” Indeed. 
Kawe’X nixa’/latck Lia/wuX. Na-ixE’/lgiLx. Nix’d/tam. Né/tptega. 
Early he arose his younger He made a fire. He went to He went inland. 
brother. bathe. 


Atciugona/mam th/LaqL, na-ixE/Iqamx: “A, GiLaunaLXa/ takE na 
He went to open the their house, he shouted: *CATh, GiLa/unaLX then  [int. 
smoke hole part.] 


amexE’La-it? <A, tqagElaxeElta’.” M6’‘keti na-ixE/lqamx. A/‘Ita 
are you dead? Ah, the news!” Twice he shouted. Now 
nuxola’/yutck qod’tac té/lx‘Em. Atktod’cgam  tga/XalaitanEma. 
they arose those people. They took them their arrows. 
AtkL0/cgam Lta/mEq;aL; atkLo’/cgam LmoLjané’. A/lta a/‘tgé @/wa 
They took them their boneclubs; they took them lances. Now they went thus 
qo’ta ta/yaqL qix: iLa/Xak;Ema-na. Nugd/kXo-im q0/tac té/lx-Em: 
that his house that their chief. They said those people: 
“Hikta @/xax? Qa’/xéwa atgatée’/mam tqagEla/xElt?” Né‘k-im qix: 
“What is it? Whence came they the news?” He said that 
iqjoa/lipx:: “x-ita/o, xita/o tqagkla’xelt g0 q0d/La qoa’nEm 
youth: “* These, these news in those five 
Lkué’tx‘Ema.” A/Ita ixé/nXat @/Lxan. Ia/xka LkLXa/nak igé/Votitk, 
large baskets.” Now they stood smelts. That one he haditon  elkskin armor, 
there 


ia‘xka alLgixania/kOx. Ma/nix cola/l LekuLxa/nax,  ia/xkati 
he carried it in the fold When a ground-hog he had it on, there 
of the skin. lanket 


aLgixk;@/niakux qix’ @Lxan god q0d’cta c@odla/l. Ma/nix odnat 
he wrapped them up those smelts in that ground-hog When a raccoon 
blanket. blanket 


LkLxa/nak, qgé’/xtcé aLgixk;é@/niagux, ayutXui‘tcuwa-itx gd qaX 
he had it on, intending he wrapped it up in it, they fell through in that 
oLa’/kXanat. Ka/nauwe-y- é@/ka qod/tac té/lx‘Em n0/xdx. A/‘Ita 
his raccoon blanket. All thus these people they did. Now 
noxo-iLxa/lEm q6o’tac té/lx‘-Em. Aqid/tXEmit é@Xt iqa/étEma é@/wa 
they ate those people. It was placed upright one youngspruce' thus 
tree 
mai/émé. Aqid/tXEmit EXt iqa/étEma é@/wa k"ca/la. La/maka 
down river. It was placed upright one young spruce tree thus up river. Only they 
GiLa/unaLX aLgiupa/yaLx @é/Lxan. Pa’/LEma no’/xOx  tE/LaqL. 
the GiLa/unaLX they gathered them smelts. Full became their house. 
Augio/kcEm. Ka/nauwe tia‘IEXam atgiupa’yaLx. 
They dried them. All their people gathered them. 
A’gon igé@/tak ka wiXt 0/10 agk’Lax GiLa/unaLX. La/mka 
One more year then again hunger acted on the GiLa/unaLX. Only 
them 


LE/kXaltpa aLkLa/xo-itx kja-y- OpE/nxaLX. Nixk/Itechmadx qix- 
skunk-cabbage they ate it and rush roots. He heard about it that 
iLa’/Xak;Emana. A, ta/kE pa’/LEma no/x6x t!oLe’ma go Iqa‘niaq. 

their chief. Ah, then full they were the houses in Rainier. 
Qia/wul @Lxan. Atcta’x tE/m:EcX @/cgan Og0/kXuix ita/Lélam; 
They were smelts. He made sticks cedar made out of ten; 
made [caught] them 


qoa/nEm 0/Laqike, qoa‘nEm Lpa/qxo-ike. Ateto’lXam tia/cdlal: “Ai‘aq 
five fish ducks, five shags. He said to them his relatives: ‘‘ Quick 
amexE’ItXuitck. Lxd’tetdla, lxowa/L;j’ama.” AtLeé’gEla-itx eXt 
make yourselves ready. Wewillgoupnow, we willgotogetfood.” They were in acanoe one 
ikani/m paL, ia/qoa-iL ikani/m. ALO’tctolax, aLO/yamx Soguame'’ts liak. 
canoe full, a large canoe. They went up the they leah Tongue point. 
river a 


E’/ktexEm aLO’ix. AteLo/1Xam giLa’cgéwal: “Ma/nix 
He sang his con- they went. He said to them his companions ;. “When 
jurer’s song 


cHmmaor THE GILA’ UNALX. 227 


BOAS 


gElxEngé’waL;’amita, neket amcxLxE’lEma.” ALO/yamx ka 
we are given food, not eat.” They arrived then [at] 
Lia/écaLxe. ALgégela’xé go y- é/l1Xam. ALO’ptck. Né/gimx: “G6 qaxé 
Lia/écaLxeé. They landed * at_ the town. They wentup. He said: “At where 
aqia/wul xik @’Lxan?” “A ma/‘ema Iqa/‘niaq, ia/xkati aqia‘wul.” 
are made these  smelts?”’ “Ah, below Rainier tbere they are made 
[caught] [caught.]” 
Qe’xtcé aqidEkte @/Lxan; qjoa’/p  ayod’ktciktx. Atcto/lXam 
Intending they were roasted the smelts; nearly they were done. He said to them 
giLa‘cgéwal: “Ai’aq 1x0’/tetowula.” AqLo‘lXam_ qé’xtcé: “A/‘Ita 
his companions: * Quick we will go up.”’ They were spoken to intending: ‘Now 
qjoa’p id’ktcikta xix: @/Lxan.” Neé‘kim: “A’ntcxElxulama. A’Lqi 
. nearly they aredone those smelts.” He said: ‘“ We will go at once. Later on 
wuX ntcxéxa’/txama-i.” ALO/ix k*ca’/la. A’Ita nau‘itka aLogo’/omx 
-tomor- weshall go ashore for They went up river. Now indced they reached 
TOW awhile.” them 
té‘lx-Em, tgia’/wul @’Lxan. Qjoa’p aLkta/x gqod’tac_ té/lx-am. 
people, they made it smelts. Near they got them _ those people. 
[caught] 

ALE/gimx Lé’/Xat LgoOLéIEXEmk: “PaL é@/xax itci’tsditk. Ala/xti 
He said one person: “Full is my dipnet. Soon 
LjEx ixa’/xo. Atcuwa’-y- 0/10 Lix'La‘it GiLa/unaLX.” IRqamia‘itX 
burst it will. Ha! hunger they starve the GiLa/unaLX.”’ Iqamia‘itX 
ina/Xaw6ok atcLO/‘lXam_ giLa’/cgéwal: “Lawa’ msK7e’watego.” 

his guardian spirit he said to them his companions: “Slowly paddle!” 
Ka/‘nauwé aLgaxg0’c qaX Okuni’m ka atoLo’lXam: “Amcek7é/watck 
All they passed _ those canoes then. he said to them: ‘* Paddle 
them : 


ma/inée.” Alta aLkyé/watck ma/Lné. E/wa @/natai qix: ikani’/m 
away from Now they paddled away from Thus on one side that canoe 
the land.” the land. 


goa/nEm atcuX0d/tqoax qd’/ta tElala’xuke; @’wa é’/natai qoa/nEm 
five he put them into the those birds; thus on the five 
water other side 


qix: ikani/m. Ii/iqat ita/Lan. EXt ita/Lan qoa/nEm, wiXt éXt 
that canoe. Long their rope. One their rope five, also one 
ita/Lan qoa/nEm. Atcto’lXam _ tia‘cdlal: “Amekyé/watek!” <A/Ita 
their rope five. He said to them his relatives: “Paddle!” Now 
nugukye’watck giLa’/cgéwal. T!a’qé naué’/tka-y- atxa/Lgdwa 
they paddled his companions. Just as indeed they swam 
tElala‘xuke qo’ta tE’mecX ugod/kXuiXt teElala/Xuke. Qjoa’p 
birds those sticks made birds. Nearly 
aLXgo’/mam ka _ né/ktcukté. Qoné’2 tqonéqone’ go La/maLneé. 


they came home and it got day. Gull gulls at seaward from 
them. 


No’ponEm. Né’k-im: “Ni’Xua, mei/Lxa! Nau‘itka na x‘iau a/nitk™7 
it grew dark. He said: “Well, gotothe water! Indeed lint. these did I carry 
part. ] them 


xiau @/Lxan?” A’tgELx giLa/IEXam, atE/kXukL uta/Xanim, ska 
these smelts?’’ They went to the people of his they launched their canoes, and 
the water town, them 


ma/nxi ka pa/Lma na/‘xax. ALgid/kcEm é@/Lxan GiLa/unaLX. 
after alittle and full they were. They dried them __ the smelts the GiLa/unaLX. 
Pa’Lma no’/x6x La/uLema. Qé’xtcé aqio/Xtkin gd k*ca/la Qauilé’teq. 
Full they were their houses. Intending they were at upriver Cowlitz. 
searched 


Kopr’t atga’yamx. K;é@ qix: @’Lxan. Nuxoé/teckma6éx té/lx-Em: “A 
Enough they arrived. None _ these smelts. | They heard the people: “Ah 
GiLa/unaLX, ta‘ke pa/Lma no/xox La/uLéma. Atca/‘yuk"7 tal; 
the GiLa/unaLX, then full are their houses. He carried them, behold! 
xik @Lxan = qix:  gia/xamia-itx.” A‘Ita aqLomé’lax q6d/La 
those the smelts that the one having Iqamia’- Now they were angry that 
itx.” with him 
LgoLéJEXEmk. la/Xka, xixi/x: né/k-im: “ Atcuwa’ 0/10 LE/XLa-itt 
person. He, this one he said, ‘Ha! hunger they starve 


bo 


es) 


A GF CO fe 


13 


14 


15 


16 
17 
18 
19 


20 


228 THE GILA’UNALX. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


GiLa/unaLX, Iqamia/itx iLa/Xaw6k.” A/‘Ita 0/10 nux0’La-it q0’tae 


the GiLa/unaLX, Iqamia’ itx his guardian spirit.” Now hunger they died those 
téIx-Em, é@/wa k"ca‘la té/lIx‘-Em.- Kjé né/xax qix: @/Lxan. Alta 
people, thus upriver the people. Notiling became __ those smelts. Now 


La/‘macka GiLa/unaLX aLgiupa/yaLX qix: @’Lxan. 
they only the GiLa/unaLX they gathered them those _ smelts. 


A'lta qix: @/Xat gia/xamia-itx atcLd/egam L‘a/gil. O/lo agE/Lax 


Now that one having Iqamia-‘itx he took her awoman. Hunger actedon 
them 
GiLa/‘unaLX tsak;B’é. Qé/xtcé aLxEnkjanXa‘temamx, neket i‘kta 
the G#a/unaLX inthe Cone Intending they cmaeniin the dipnet, not anything 
time. 
aLgia/ wat6x. Qia/x Ogué/can aLgo’/k"yx Tia’/k; élaké kj a-y- OpE/nxaLx 
they killed it. If fern root ings carried it the Glateop and rush roots 
t!a/‘nuwa aLga/x, tex] manx: axLE’é¢mx okj’ue/lak kja 0x0/ca-ut 
exchange they didit, then alittle they nee given iy salmon ora dry 
00 
tkaleu@/EX. E/Xauete t!a‘nuwa  aLxa/xumx ka  aLe’/k‘imx 
salmon skins. Often exchange they did it often and he said 
Lé’‘Xat LgdLélEXEmk: “Texi kja Lx ti!a‘nuwa GiLa/unaLX 
one person: ‘““Then ~ aad may be exchanging the GiLa/unaLX 
ma/nix wiXt Lté/mama, ka Lix: 1xkLa/x0,” aLE’k:imx q0/La Lé/Xat 
when again they will come, then cohabit we will with he said that one 


[their women],”’ 


LgoLéeleXEmk Tia/kjélak. A/Ita wiXt aLo/ix GiLa/unaLX t!a/‘nuwa 


person Cintas Now again they went the GiLa/unaLX exchanging 

aLxa/xEmx. Aqa/tHlotx okjue/lak kja oxo’ca-ut tkalgue’ex:. ALO‘LX; 

they did it. They were given ae salmon ava dry salmon skins. They on 

to the water; 

a/lta aLXgo/ya. WiXt La/xka q0’La Lg0/L@1EXEmk: “Ai‘aq amci’te! 
now they wenthome. Again he that person: ‘* Quick, come! 

Lxkikta/o, <Lix: IxkLa’x0.” Lxeltcé/mElit q0d/Lac GiLa/unaLX 
We will follow cohabit we will do They heard it those GiLa/unaLX 

them, them.” 


La/nEMmcke. Katé’X gaX uya/kikal qix: gia/xamia-itx. ALXgd/mam. 
women. Accompany- that his wife that having Iqamia-‘itx. They came home. 
ing 
ALxewLitek: “QLEntcilqLa/lEtciL, aqgEntco’1Xam Lix: qEntca/x0.” 
They told: ‘“We were insulted, we were told cohabit me will be 
one.” 


Néxod/keté qix: igua/nat gia’/Xawodk. NixEma/tcta-itck. QoanEmi 
He lay down that salmon his guardian spirit. He was ashamed. Five times 
aya/qxoya nixd/keté. Néket nixLtxa/lem, ka atcia/wat igua/nat 
his sleeps he lay down. Not he ate, then he killed it a salmon 
Lia‘wuX. N@k-im: “LE/mexEltEq!” ALa/‘/xEltEq uya/‘k-ikal. 
his younger He said: ‘‘ Heat stones!” She heated stones his wife. 

brother. 


Aqtuga/lEmam tq;éyo’qtike. Atga’/tp!am. NuxdiLo‘JEXa-it qo’tac 
They were fetched lala people. They came in. They thought those 
tq; éyo’qtike: “Tgia’/xo qix: igua’/nat.” ALO/ckuit qo’/La Lqa’/nake ka 


ola people: “Weshall that salmon.” They were hot those stones and 
eat it 


né‘ktexEm qix: igdLé/lEXEmk qix GiLa/unaLX. Aqod’/cgam o&me’cX. 
he sang that person that GiLa/unaLX. It was taken a kettle. 


Aqugo'Lit go ka‘tsEk t!o1. ALO/ckuit q0/La Lqa/nake. Aq La/LXatq 


It was put in middleof house. They were hot those stones. They were putinto 


qaX o:mé/eX. Aqiuqoa/na-it qiX igua/nat god qaX ome/cX ka 


that kettle. It was putintoit | that salmon in that kettle and 


10‘Elo, néket aqa/yaxc. Cmdkect cXumela‘itX qod’ctae eq; eyo’qxut. 
whole, not it was cut. Two they stood close those two old men. 
together 


Aqiod/teteEmt qix: @/Xat: “Qa/daqa-y- @’ka aqa/yax xix: igua/nat?” 
He was pushed that one: “Why thus itisdone this salmon?” 
Cka: “ K; a amE/xaX; kja amxé’x itxa’k;acke. A/Lqi temela/xo-ix‘ita 


ATO Silent be; leat be to our aiee Lateron you will know it 
people. 


bamoox THE GILA’UNALX—TRANSLATION. 229 


ga’da qia/xo xix: igua/nat.” Lele aqigk;étkit qix: igua/nat, 4 
how itisdone' this salmon." Long time it was covered that salmon, 
aqiElge‘lako. Atcto’/lXam tia’lXam: “ Nékct lxgia’x6x xik igua/nat. 
the mat a taken He saidtothem his people: * Not we shalleatit this salmon. 2 
off. 
lo’‘ya go ma/‘~née.” AtcidlXam qix: 6’Xat_ iqjéyd’qxot qix: 3 
It will go to seaward.”’ He said to him that one old man that 
qceXEmeEla‘itX: “Amxauwu’teatko tate! amx6’xo-il, qa’/daqa-y- é@’/ka 
standing close to- ‘* You hear behold! you talk much, why thus 
gether: 
aqa/yax xix’ igua/nat.” Aqd/cgam qaX omé/cX; amd’kctike 5 
itis done this salmon.” It was taken that kettle; two 
eqjulipXuna/yu atgo’cgam. A/’qxok"7 ma/Lné qaX omeé/cX. 
youths they took it. It was carried seaward that kettle. 6 
_ Aqid’/egiL iqicé’tix:; aqakgod/Lit qaX d%mé’/cX god qix’ iqicé’tix:. 
It was launched a fishing it was put into that kettle in that fishingcanoe. 7 
canoe; the canoe 
ALaga‘la-it La/kjaquinumike, 1a/xqix: igua‘nat gia’/Xaw6k kja 
They were in five in a canoe, he that the salmon the one having and 8 
the canoe guardian spirit 
la‘ktike tqjulipXEna’/ya. A/‘Ita a’‘LO ma/Lné, @’/ktcxEm  4’LO. 
four youths. Now they went seaward, he sang’ they went. 
Kula’/yi ma/Lné aLo/yam ka aqgd/cgam qaX osmé/cX. Wax aqa/yax 
Far seaward they arrived and it wastaken that kettle. Pour it was done 10 
out 
qix:igua‘nat go Ltcuq ka qo’La Lqa‘nake. ALxé’géla-e. Atcto’lXam 41 
that salmon into the water and those stones. They went ashore. He said to them 
tqjulipXEna/yu: ‘“Mcé’kEloya iqa/yétEma.” Aqée’/gEloya modkcet 12 
the youths: ‘** Get young spruce trees.”’ They were got two 
iqa/étEMa, Laq aqa/yax uya/apteXa. Né‘/kim qix: igoLé/lEXEmk 
young spruce take off it was done their bark. He said that person 13 
trees, 
qix’ Gia/unaLX: “Go k*ca/la megid/tXEmita éXt, gd ma’/éemée- 1 
that GiLa‘unaLX : “At up river you place it one, at down river = 
y-eXt.” A’ka atga/yax qgod’/tac tqjulipXuna/yu. No/ponEm nuXuik; 15 
one.” Thus they did it those youths. It got dark they laid 
anXa/‘temam GiLa/unaLX. Neé’‘kteukte. Pa’Lma-y- uta’Xanim 
their dipnets the GiLa/unaLX. It got day. Full their canoes 16 
tgua/nat ka ixElE’] igua/nat ayuXtke’Xéwa ma/Lxdle. Aqtomé’tckin 
salmon and moving the salmon swam landward. They were picked up 7 
qo’ta tgua/nat. Mé/nxé aLktomé’/tckénimx Lg0dLélEx‘Emk, pau 
those salmon. A little he picked them up a person, ful 18 
ikanim. Atco’‘lEXam_ tqjulipXEna/yu: “Tea _ Ix0d’‘ya’ é@/wa 
the canoe. He said to them the youths: ‘*Come we will go thus 19 
Tia‘k;élake.” ALO’yam Naya/aqctaOwe. Lj)mE/nLj;MEn atci/Lax 
Clatsop.” They arrived at Naya’qctaowe. Rub hedidit 20 
La‘moptcX, Atcxé’/la gd Ltcuq. AtcLO)]Xam _— gita’/ckéwal: 
green paint. He mixed it in water. He said to them his fellows: i 
“Lxkye’watego iau’a ma/Lnée.” Atk 7é/watck ma/Lné. Wax 
“We will paddle there seaward.” They paddled seaward. Pourout 22 
atci/Lax gd Ltcuq q0d/La La/moptcX. AtcLo/lXam: “ Lxgo’ya,” 
he did it into the water that his green paint. He said to them: “We will go,” 23 
giLa/ckéwal. ALXgo/mam. Pa/LEma no’/x6x La/uLéma GiLa/unaLX 
[to] his fellows. They came home. Full were their houses the Gita/unaLX 24 
0k; ué‘lak, ox0/ca-ot _— tkalgue’éx. Atei‘tax. tgua/nat qix: 
dry salmon, dry salmon skins. He made them salmon that 25 


gia‘xamia itx. 
the one having Iqamia/‘itx. 


Translation. 


The grandmother of a GiLa/unaLX boy was deserted at Tongue 
point. After six days the boy was told: “Walk [to Tongue point 


230 THE GILA UNALX. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


and| look after your grandmother.” He walked downstream and saw 
two fish ducks. He took his arrows but thought: ‘‘I will not shoot 
them, else they will carry my arrows away from the land.” He took a 
stone. When the ducks dived he ran to the water and when they 
emerged he threw his stone. He hit the head of one. Then he took 
off his blanket [and went into the water]. He reached them. The 
water reached to his armpits; then the ducks fluttered and flew away. 
He went ashore. Then they drifted again, the belly upward. Again he 
went into the water and swam. When he nearly reached them they | 
tluttered again. He went ashore. Five times he swam to get them. 
Then he reached them. He turned round and fainted. Now he saw a 
supernatural being; he saw Iqamia‘itx |the helper of the fishermen]. 
When he awoke he was on the shore and held the ducks in his hands. 
He left them and went on. Now he reached Tongue point. When he 
came near his grandmother he saw smoke rising where she was deserted. 
He reached her and said: ‘‘ Behold! you are alive!” She said to him: 
‘‘T am alive.” She was going to give him food, but he said: “I am not 
hungry.” He slept there. On the next day he gathered fuel for his 
grandmother. He gathered many sticks and went home. He left his 
grandmother. In the evening he came home. Then the people said to 
him: “Are youhungry?” He replied: “‘No, I am tired.” He lay down. 
Early the next morning he arose and went a loug distance. He went 
to play. In the evening he came home. After he had been there a 
short while he lay down. For three nights and three days he did not 
eat. Then on the fourth day he ate. He grew up. 

Now he had a friend, a youth. They grew up. One day they went 
out in a canoe. When they were in the middle of the river he said to 
his friend: “Who is your guardian spirit?” He replied: ‘“ Iqamia/itx 
is my guardian spirit, and who is yours?” The other one said: ‘“ My 
guardian spirit is also Iqamia/itx.”. The one said: ‘“‘ What are you 
going to do when our relatives shall be hungry?” The other reptied: 
‘‘T shall let smelts come;” and he asked his friend: ‘“‘And what are 
you going to do?” He said: ‘I shall let salmon come when our rela- 
tives get hungry. Put your arm under water; I shall put mine also 
under water.” They put their arms under water. The one who had 
the guardian spirit helping him to obtain smelts lifted his hand first. 
Now a smelt hung at his hand. After some time the other one lifted 
his hand. A small salmon hung atit. Then he said to his friend: 
“Indeed! Iqamia‘itx is your guardian spirit.” 

The youths went home. The one who had a guardian spirit helping 
him to obtain smelts married first. Now the GiLa/unaLX were starv- 
ing. They had only skunk-cabbage to eat. Then the young man whose 
guardian spirit helped him to obtain smelts became rich. 

One day his wife went to gather skunk-cabbage. In the evening when 
she came home she heated stones and warmed herself. The winter 
wascold. When she was warm she dozed away and fell down at the 


pas THE GILA’UNALX—TRANSLATION. 231 


BOAS 


fire. She fell asleep sitting there and burned her arms. Then all the 
GiLa/unaLX said: ‘Our chief’s wife is starving. Your relative’s wife 
will die, she fell asleep sitting. Sheis starving.” Thus spoke the people. 
The woman said: ‘I fell asleep, and my husband says he has Iqamia/itx 
[for his guardian spirit|.”. Now her husband was ashamed because 
both her arms were burned. He did not sleep, while all the other people 
slept. He said to his younger brother: “Rise!” His younger brother 
arose. {He continued:| ‘‘Take this basket.” Now he took his dipnet 
and they went to the water. It was winter. They came toa willow and 
he took its leaves. When the basket was full they went to the water. 
He stood in the water up to his waist. He said to his younger brother: 
“Tt is ebb tide. Pour these leaves into the river above me. Then 
take this dipnet and say: ‘Ehé’, 1 broke my dipnet.’ Lift it and pour 
it out again above me. Then say once more: ‘Ehé’, I broke my dip- 
net.” Three times he poured it out and said: “I broke my dipnet.” 
He lifted the dipnet. Then the elder brother said to the younger 
one: “Now look at them.” The youth looked at them, now they were 
leaves at the tails and smelts at the heads. He poured them out the 
fifth time. They jumped into the water. He dipped them up the sixth 
time and poured them out again. Now smelts swam on the surface of 
the water. He said to his younger brother: ‘‘Let us launch our fish- 
ing canoe.” They launched it and took a rake. Now they fished with 
the rake and the canoe was half full. He said: “It is enough.” Then 
they went ashore. “Bring five large mats.” The youth brought them. 
The people were asleep. ‘They carried the smelts ashore and carried 
them all up to the house. He said to his younger brother: ‘ Rise 
early, make a fire and go to bathe. Open the smoke-hole of our 
house. Stand up there and shout. Say: ‘Ah, GiLa/unaLX! are you 
dead? News has come.’ Thus speak twice.” The younger brother 
did so. He arose early, made a fire and went to bathe. He went up, 
opened the smoke-hole of their house and shouted: “Ah, GiLa/unaLX, 
are you dead? News has come.” He shouted twice. Now the people 
arose. They took their arrows, their bone clubs, and their lances. Now 
they went to the house of their chief. The people said: ‘What is 
it? Where did news come from?” The youth said: ‘There, in these 
five baskets is the news.” Now the smelts stood there. One of the 
men wore an elkskin armor; he carried some away in a fold of the skin. 
Another wore a ground-hog blanket; he wrapped them up in bis blanket. 
Still another wore a raccoon blanket; he wanted to wrap them up in 
it, but they fell through it. All the people did thus. Now they ate. 
Now one young spruce tree was placed downstream and one upstream. 
Only the GiLa/unaLX caught smelts. Their houses became full and 
they dried them. All the people caught them. 

Another year the GiLa/unaLX were again starving. They had only 
skunk-cabbage and rush roots to eat. Their chief heard that the houses 
of the people at Rainier were full. They caught smelts. Then he carved 


. -/ a 
232 THE GILA UNALX. pslaisere t= 


ten pieces of cedar. He made five fish-ducks and five shags. Hesaid - 
to his relatives: ‘‘Make yourselves ready. We will go upstream to 
get food.” They went in a large canoe. They went up until they 
arrived at Tongue point. Hesang his conjurer’s song while they went. 
He said to his companions: “If they should give us food, do not eat!” 
They arrived at Lia/écaLxé. They landed at the town and went up to 
the houses. He said: ‘‘Where are those smelts caught?” ‘Ah, they 
are caught below Rainier.” They were going to roast the smelts and 
when they were nearly done he said to his companions: ‘Let us go up 
the river.” The people said to them: ‘These smelts are nearly done.” 
But he said: ‘We will go at once. To-morrow we shall stay for a 
while.” They went upstream. Now they came to the people who 
caught smelts. They were near them. One person said: ‘My dipnet 
is full. It willsoon burst. Ha! The GiLa/unaLX are starving.” The 
one whose guardian spirit was Iqamia/itx said to his companions: 
“Paddle slowly.” When they had passed all the canoes he said to 
them: ‘‘Paddle toward the middle of the river.” They paddled from 
the land. He put five of those birds into the water on each side of the 
canoe. Each five were tied to along rope. Then he said to his rela- 
tives: “Paddle.” Now his companions paddled. These wooden birds 
swam just like birds. When it was nearly day they came home. Gulls 
were seaward from them. When it grew dark he said: ‘Go to the 
water. Seeif I did not bring the smelts.” The people went to the 
water and launched their canoes. After a short time they were full. 
The GiLa/unaLX dried the smelts and their houses were full. The 
people upstream searched as far as Cowlitz, but the smelts had disap- 
peared; there were none. The people heard: “Ah, the houses of the 
GiLa/unaLX are full. That one whose guardian spirit is Iqamia/itx 
carried the smelts away.” Now they scolded that person: “Ha! this 
person said: ‘Ah, the GiLa/unaLX are starving, although one of them 
says that he has Iqamia/itx for his guardian spirit.’” Now the people 
upstream were starving. The smelt had disappeared. Only the 
GiLa/unaLX caught smelt. 

Now the other man who had Iqamia/itx for his guardian spirit mar- 
ried. In spring the GiLa/unaLX were again starving. They tried 
to catch salmon in the dipnet, but they did not kill anything. They 
carried fern (Pteris) roots and rush roots to Clatsop and exchanged 
them. Then they received a little dry salmon and salmon skins. 
They went often to exchange it. Then a person said: ‘‘When the 
GiLa/unaLX come again to exchange we will cohabit with (their 
women].” Thus said a Clatsop man. Now the GiLa/unaLX went again 
to exchange [roots for salmon]. They received dry salmon and salmon 
skins. They went to the water and went home. That person said again: 
“ Quick, let us follow them. We will follow them and cohabit with the 
women.” The GiLa/unaLX women heard it. The wife of theman who had 
Iqamia/‘itx for his guardian spirit was with them. They came home and 


CHINOOK THE GILA’/UNALX—TRANSLATION. 233 


BOAS 


declared: “We were insulted; they told us they would cohabit with 
us.” Then the one whose guardian spirit helped him to obtain salmon 
lay down. He was ashamed. For five days he remained in bed, and 
did not eat. Then his younger brother killed a salmon. He said: | 


_ «Heat stones.” Then his wife heated stones. They called the old 


people and they came. They thought: ‘We shall eat that salmon.” 
When the stones were hot that GiLa/unaLX sang his conjurer’s song. 
They took a kettle and placed it in the middle of the house. When the 
stones were hot they put them into that kettle. Then they put the 
salmon into the kettle whole; they did not cut it. Two old men were 
standing close together. The one nudged the other and said: “‘ Why 
do they treat the salmon in that way?” The other said: “Be quiet, 
do not disturb our young men. You will learn in due time what they 
are going to do with this salmon.” Now the salmon had been covered a 
long time. Then the mat was taken off, and he said to the people: ‘“‘ We 
shall not eat this salmon. It will be taken out into the water.” Then 
the one old man who was standing close to the other one said: “‘ Now 
you hearit. You said before, why do they treat the salmon in this 
manner.” Two youths took the kettle and carried it to the water. A 
fishing canoe was launched and the kettle was placed in it. Five 
men were in the canoe—four youths and the one whose guardian spirit 
helped him to obtain salmon. Now they went seaward, and he sang 
his conjurer’s song as they went. They arrived in the middle of the 
water. Then they took the kettle and poured the salmon and the stones 
into the water. They went ashore. He said to the youths: ‘Take 
young spruce trees.” They took them and peeled off the bark. Then 
that GiLa/unaLX said: ‘“‘Place one above and one below this place.” 
The youths did so. When it grew dark the GiLa/unaLX set their dip- 
nets. When it grew day their canoes were full of salmon and the fish 
swam toward the shore. They filled their canoes quickly. Then he 
said to the youths: “Let us go to Clatsop!” They arrived at Naya‘qcta- 
owe. He rubbed some green paint in his hands and mixed it with 
water. He said to his companions: ‘“ Let us paddle toward the middle 
of the water.” They paddled away from the shore. Then he poured 
his green paint into the water. He said to his companions: “ Let us 
go.” They came home. The houses of the GiLa/unaLX were full of 
dry salmon and of dry salmon skins. Thus the man who bad Iqamia‘itx 
for his guardian spirit obtained salmon. 


ar @®@ oO —~- & 


20 
21 


THE ELK HUNTER. 


E/Xat igoLéTEXEmk iqjoa/lipx: gua/nEsum Lka/wadt ateLa’xo- 
One person a youth always traps he always 

ilEma-itx. Atciuté/niLa-itx éé/tcexotEma. A’gon igé/tak wiXt atcLa’x 
made them. He always killed them bears. One more year again he made 
them 


Lka‘waot. Tecée/xéL ateLo/kctamx Lia/Xawadt. A/lta La/qxulqt 
traps. Several he went to see them his traps. Now she cried 
L‘a/gil go qod’La Lka/wadt. NiLga/omx. A/lta uLa/ksia Lagé/laktctt 
awoman in that trap. He reached her. Now her hand it was caught 
qo’La Lka’waot. Lt!o/kti Lea’gil. SquL LE’/Laqeo, tE’/Lasko ka/nauwé 
that trap. A pretty woman. Brown her hair, her tattooing all 
La‘o-it, tE’/LaskoO go La’/pote ka’/nauwé q0’La L£a/gil. AteLOategux 
her feet, her tattooing on her hands all that woman. He lifted it 
qo‘La Lia/Xawaodt, Laq® aLxa/x q0’La La/kcia q0d‘La Lé£a’gil. 
that his trap, take out he did it that her hand that woman. 
ALgi0‘lEXamx: “Lax amta’x0, moxdgo/kO xitike té/lxyEm. Aka 
She said to him: ‘Pass apa do yousurpass them these people. Thus 
em 


nai Les aLEngé’lukteu LEmé/Xawaodt. Moxogo’'ko ka/nauwe té/lx‘Em. 
it caught me your trap. Yousurpass them all people. 


Tome’ xéqLax teEmxEla’xo0.” Né’k:im qix’ iqjoa/lipx:: “ lam0/k"qa go 
You a hunter you will be.” He said that youth: ‘“‘Tshallearry you to 


intca‘1Xam.” Ated/Xam qaX uya’/Xawodk: “ lamuxonima/ya 
our town.” He said to her that his supernatural “T shall show you [to] 
helper: 
Nate’tanué.” A‘Ita ateo/k*°7x go i1a/lXam. AtgatE/lkElax tia/colal, 
the Indians.” ’ Now he carried her to his town. They saw them his relatives, 
ka/nauwe nuxo/La-itx, ka ia/xka ayo/mEqtx. 
all they died, and he he died. 

Qantsi’X Lxqéta/kEma ka wiXt LE’gon aLgétE’IkElax Lk; asks. 
How many years and again another one he saw her a boy. 
Nekst La’/mama qo0/La Lkjasks, nekst La/naa, La/xauyam. Ka 
Not his father that boy, not his mother, his poverty. And 
iLanu/kstX qo’La Lkjasks. AKkLO‘TXamx, qéc mank ma/qoa-iL pos 

small that boy. She said to him, if a little you large then 
ka’‘nauwé amux0o/kuko tga’/xékLax. Naket @/ka ani0d‘/Xam_ qix: 

all you surpass them the hunters. Not thus I told him that 
ia/‘néwa Itée/tanué. Tate! atcénuxd/néma_ té/lx‘Em. Mané’x 
the first one Indian. Behold! he showed me the people. When 
migElo’‘yamx im0‘lak, ia/mkXa-y- @/mtEcX miucgEle’/Lx, onua/LEma 

you go hunting elk, only a stick you carry hes, your paint 
han 


ma-ila’xo-ié qix: @/mtEeX.” Ja/qoa-iL né/xax qix: ikja’/sks. Iqoa/lipx: 
you willdoit that stick.” Large he got ~=— that boy. A youth 
ne/xax. A/‘lta né’/ktcxam: 

he became. Now he sang: 


‘“Ané/ekctcé gd -y-éeka -y-anid/olXam qix: ia/néwa; 
FS” dvd aeencdl ese eae eae 
‘‘Not [int. part.] there thus I told him that first one; 4 
:“ Ata/te!a atinaxa/tEnéma. Nate’/tanué. 


TU dee TEP eae tal ae 


‘ Behold! He showed me to them the Indians. 


234 


CHINOOK THE ELK HUNTER. Be: 


BOAS 


“ Ané/eketcé go-y- @/eka-y- anid‘/olXam qix: ia/néwa. Ata/te!a.” 


Ponerinae ins | el Pell 


“Not [int. part.] thus I told him that first one. Behold!” 
WixXt né/ktexam: 


More he sang: 
- “QOés  ti'axi’tk, 


q 
gi adhe! oJ 


és ti/axi’tk, qik @/qéna, qik é’qéna_ pos 


he Baal. tga aslo J Sab ge 
are what he re- if what here- that orphan that orphan [then] 
members of members of boy, boy, 
olden times, olden times, 


xoa/0 aqid’Li’a.” 


PLS idl sl 


shall he is carried farther than others.” 
AqigEno’ten a/lta. Aqa/Luk"y Lqjéyo’qxut, Lxoutea’/tkama- 
He was helped now. He was carried an old man, he went to listen. 
there 


La/xéqLax aA’/nqaté qod’La  Laqjéyo’qxut. ALxuwu’teatk q0d/La 
A hunter long ago that old man. He listened that 
Lqjéyo’qxut, aLxigEluwu’teatk qix: ie/ktexEm. ALE’kim = q0/La 

old man, he listened to him that singer. He said that 

Lqjéyo’qxut: “O amegigEno’tén ilxa‘kjacke, atcée’*ElkE] i0’/LEma. 

old man: HALO)E help singing our boy, he saw it a supernatural 
being. 

Tqéequa’x ated/ékEl.” Qoa/’nEmi aya’qxoya-é ne‘/ktexEm. AqLé‘lax 

The hunte he saw her.” Five times his sleeps he sang. It was puton 
him 

L6uéelOL. LpE/IpEl aqE/Lax q0’/La L*ué/loL. Aqé@/lax qix: é/m‘EcX, 
cedar bark. Red it was made that cedar bark. It isi put that stick, 

on him 


LpEIpEl aqa/yax qix: @/mtEcX. A/yo-y- a/lta ia/wa kea/la, go 
red it was made _ that stick. He went now there up river, to 
kula/yi a’‘yo. E’‘ktcxam ka a’yuptck. A/‘Ita atcé’Xatoa qix: 
far he went. He sang and hewentinland. Now he drove them those 
imO‘lakEma. Ia‘koa iLa/lXam ka_ oqoela/étix: tia/cdlal. ALE’k:im 
elks. There his town and they werethere his relatives. He said 
Lée/Xat: “Imod’lak xix: é@/Lxam.” Atkto’cgam tga’XalaitanEma. 


one: “An elk this it comes down They took them their arrows. 
to the beach.”’ 


Igd‘n wiXt né’Lxam, igod’n wiXt né/Lxam, igd’/n wiXt né/Lxam. 
Onemore again itcamedown, onemore again itcame down, onemore again it came down. 
Aqia’qula. aqia’q'la gqix: im0d/lEkuma. Si/namdkst LaL aqia/qula 
They were they were those the elks. Seventy were counted 
counted, counted 


ka nicxE’PiomEqt. ALE‘/k:im Lqjéyo’qxut: “a/c mei’/kXiX, néket 
and they forgot [the num- He said an old man: ‘* Let do them, not 
ber]. alone 


ia/mat mckteEla’xo. LO/nas ia/xka Xiau é’qtcxam, teiXua’/t Xiau 
shoot do them. Perhaps he this one who sings, he drives this ong 
im0‘lEkuma.” Nixena/Xit qix: imo/lEkuma g6 qjoa’p Lteuq cka 
the elks.”’ They stood these elks at near the water and 
paL no’x6x q0o’ta tEma/éma. gd ma/Lné. Ta’/kE né/Lxam qix’ 
full got that prairie at seaward. Then hecamedown that 
é’qtexam. Atcid’cgam qix: @’mfEcX. Goye’ atca/yax @’wa ma/Lné 
singer. He took it that stick. Thus he did it thus seaward 
e/wa Lteng ka mE/nx'i nixena/Xit gix: imoEkuma ka ayo/kuiXa 
thus water and a little while they stood these elks and they swam 
jlau’/a ma/Lné. Ka/nauwé2 ayod’guiXa. Ma/Lné ayod’yam_ ka 
then seaward. All they swam. Seaward he arrived and 


bo 


o fmm & 


10 


; ape ste BUREAU © 
236 THE ELK HUNTER. peananne 


na-ixE/Iqamx qix: ié/qtecxam. A/lta nix‘E’La-it qix: imdJEkuma 

he shouted that singer. Now they died those elks 
ka‘nauwe2. A/‘lta aqigE’/lxém é’wa maLxola/ nxitexa’x. 

all. Now it was called thus landward the wind blew. 
AtcigE’lxém qix: éiktcexa’m. Ayo’miptck qix- im0d/lEkuma, cka 
He called it that north wind. They drifted ashore those elks, and 
paL ne’xaueé ma’‘Lne go-y- @/lXam, Lia’/maLna-y- @lXam. A/‘Ita 
full it got seaward at the town, seaward from it the town. Now 
a/tgELx tia/colal. Qia’x aya’pXula, texi 1a’xka aqia’xcx. Mané’x 
they went his relatives. If its grease, then it it was cut. When 
to the beach 
id‘L!ElExt ka ia’mka ia’qeO Laq® aqgé/xax. Pa/2LEma n0/xdx 
lean then only its skin takeoff it was done. Full became 
t!oLe’‘ma, tga/OLéma tia/cdlal. A’‘Ita ka’nauwe iqé/tak, mané/x 
the houses, their houses his relatives. Now the whole year when 

Im0‘lak = atcé’kElo-ix, 1a/mka-y- é@’mtEcX  atcid’egamx  cka 

elk he went to hunt, only a stick he took it and 
atca-ia/IEqEmax. Ma/nix niga’Omx imo/lak, a/nqaté ayo/mEqtx. 

he shouted. When he met it an elk, already it died. 
Ateux0/koko ka’/nauwé qtga’xéqLax. 
He surpassed them all hunters. 
Translation. : 


A youth was in the habit of setting traps. He always killed bears. 
One year he had set his traps [as usual], and when he went to look after 
them [he heard| a woman crying in a trap. He reached her. Her 
hand was caught in the trap. She wasapretty woman. Her hair was 
brown, her feet and her hands were tattooed. He opened the trap and 
took her hand out of it. She said to him: “You will excel all the 
poeple. You have caught even me in your trap. You will be a great 
hunter.” The youth said: ‘I shall carry you to our town.” Thus he 
spoke to his supernatural helper. ‘I shall show you to the Indians.” 
Now he carried her home. His relatives saw her and all died. He died 
also. 

After many years another boy saw her. He had no father and no 
mother. He was poor. He wasasmall boy. Shesaid to him: ‘When 
you have grown a little larger, you will excel all hunters. I did not 
tell the first Indian [not to show me] and behold, he showed me to the 
people. When you go elk hunting carry only a stick in your hand 
and paint that stick.” The boy grew up and became a youth. Then 
he sang: 


“‘T did not tell him thus, the first one, and behold, he showed me to the Indians. 
I did not tell him thus, the first one. Behold!” 


He also sang: 
‘“‘Tf the orphan boy remembers what is told of olden times, 
If the orphan boy remembers what is told of olden times, 
He shall excel all others.” 


The people helped him singing. An old man was brought there who 
came to listen. He had been a hunter. He listened to the singer and 
said: ‘Oh, help our boy sing; he saw a supernatural being. He saw 


Emoon THE ELK HUNTER—TRANSLATION. 237 


the hunter spirit.” He sang five days. Cedar bark was dyed red and 
put on him. A stick was painted red and given tohim. Then he went 
up the river. He went a long distance. He sang when he was going 
into the woods. Now he drove the elks [toward the water]. His rel- 
atives had remained in the town. One of them said: “An elk is 
coming down to the water.” They took their arrows. Another one 
came; again one and again one came. They counted them, but when 
they had counted seventy they lost the number. The old man said: 
“Let the elks alone; do not shoot them; perhaps the boy who sings is 
driving these elks.” They stood near the water and the opening was 
quite full of them. Then the boy came down singing. He took that 
stick and pointed seaward to the water. The elks stood there a short 
while and then they swam seaward. When the boy came to the sea 
he shouted, and all the elks died. Now he called the wind to blow 
landward and anortherly wind arose. The elks drifted ashore, and 
the beach in front of the town was full of them. Now his relatives 
went down to the beach. They cut up only the fat ones. The lean ones 
were skinned merely. Then the houses of his relatives became full. 
Now, whenever he went to hunt elk, he carried only a stick, and 
‘shouted. As soon as an elk met him it died. He excelled all hunters. 


oman GS oa fF WS DS F 


= 
oe 


a 
oF Sa oe Sh Ss Cy mm 9S 


SS = 
Go © 


21 


25 


PREGNANCY AND BIRTH. 


Ma/‘nix aLa/wan L‘a/gil niket it/Lqté aLao’ptitx. Kawi’X a/nqateé 
When pregnant a woman not long she sleeps. Early already 
aLXxEl’0/kux. ALXEIl’6’kux, nau‘i aLeE/xaluktegux. ALgixkla/qL’exé. 
she awakes. She awakes, at once she rises. She opens the door. 
Ma/nix aL0/pax nikct aLo‘/tXuitx go iqé’p!lal. Nau‘i aLod/pax. 
When _ she goes out not she stands in thedoorway. Atonce she goes out. 
Ma’/nix aL0/La-itx gaLa’/wan, niket aqLgumo/tXuitx iau/a 
When she sits down a pregnant one, not they stand near her there 
Ina/koteX. Ma/‘nix aLO’La-itx gaLa/wan, nakct aLx0’kctitx 
her back. When she sits down a pregnant one, not | he lies down | 
LgOL@JEXEmMkK é@/wa_ aLxtce’qLgux. A’ka nupd/nEmx. Ma/nix 
a person thus across. Thus it is night. When 
aLx0'ketitx LgdLé’lIEXEmk ka iau/a-y- @’Laqtq, iau’/a-y- aLa/twit 
he lies down a person then there his head, there her feet 
gaLa/wan. Mané’x alLiga/omx @/qxeL gaLa/wan, mo/kcti 
the pregnant one. When she arrives at it a creek a pregnant one, twice 
aLksikpEna/kux. Niaket k*na/xani Lxatk'ctElt gaLa/wan; 
she jumps across. Not outside she lies down a pregnant one; 
tga‘kiLau, taua/lta tqé’wam akLa/x 60/Lax. Naket qansi’x 
itis her taboo, else sending disease he Goes to the sun. Not anyhow 
er 


iLakj@/Lx0t gaLa/wan, taua/Ita niLéLx0/Xuitx iLa/amcod La/Xa- 
her necklace a pregnant one, else it is often around its its navel- her child 
neck string 


Niket qansi’x LE/Lakoalé, taua‘/lta kjau uixa/tHlax iLa/‘amco go 
Not ever her bracelet, else tied itis toit its navel-string to 
La‘keia. Naiket akLé/tqamt Lmé’meEloct gaLa/wan, naket i’/kta 
its arm. Not she looks at it a corpse a pregnant one, not anything 
aLgé‘/tqamt i0’‘mEqtEt. Tga‘kitau. Naket iqjoala’s Lge’tqamt; 
she looks at it dead. It is her taboo. Not a@ raccoon she looks at it; 
niket inana/muke Lgé‘tqamt; niket kta Lgé’/tqamt 
not an otter she looks at it; not anything she looks at it 
gia‘/atcEke gaLa/wan. Niket Lkcitpé/ XuniL ikego/matk 
stinking a pregnant one. Not she blows it up a bladder 
gaLa/wan. Niaket i/kta iLxé/tElax gaLa/wan, ma/‘nix Ljap 
a pregnant one. Not anything she eats it a pregnant one, if found 
aqia’x. Tga/kitau. Niket 0/qjo-ixiné aLxé’tElax. Naket 
it is. It is her taboo. Not trout she eats it. Not 
iqjoani’X aLxé’/tElax. Tga/kiLau. Niket aLxe’tElax La/k-ikala, 
steel head sal- she eats it. It is her taboo. Not he eats it her husband, 
mon 
ma/nix i/kta Ljap aqia/x. Nikct Lgituwa’/qxémEniL iqjoala’c 
when something find it is done. Not he always kills it raccoon 
La‘kikala  gaLa’wan, Naket LgaLkjatsXé@/mEniIL 0/lEXaiu 
her husband a pregnant one. Not he singes it a seal 


La/kikala gaLa/wan. Niket Lktté/nin telala’xuke La/k-ikala 
her husband a pregnant one. Not he shoots them birds her husband 


gaLa/wan. Naket LKLE’tqamt Lmé’mEloct. Niket 
a pregnant one. Not he looks at it a corpse. Not 
Leituwa/qxéminiL inana/muke, taua/Ita igé/kckamé nexa/x. EH’ka 
he always kills it otter, else obtaining sickness it gets. Thus 
by sympathy [the 
child} 
iqjoala’s. Ma/nix @/Late!a nixa/tElax Lkj;asks, qjoa/p aLo’/mEqtx 
a raccoon. When its sickness comestobeonit the child, nearly it dies 


238 


CHINOOK PREGNANCY AND BIRTH. 239 


BOAS 


ka aLxEn0/yuwanEmx, &’/ka qigO vixEnd’/yuwanEmx inana/muke. 


then it has ahard struggle before thus as _ it has hard struggle before the otter. 
dying, dying 
A’ka wiXt LEIa‘lax; a’ka wiXt iqjoala’c. Igé’/kckamé nexa’/x. Ma/nix 
Thus also a bird; thus also araccoon. Obtaining sick- it gets. When 


ness by sympathy 


‘ja’xot Lkjup nexa/x iqjoala’s ka iLa/xanate ka Lkjup nexa’x iLa/xot 


' its eye eneezod it gets the raccoon and its life and faneerad it gets its eye 


go’La Lk; asks. Ma/nix acixElqe/Lxalemx aqia‘owilXLx qix: iq; oala’s, 
that child. When it cries much it is struck that raccoon, 


é/ka aLxa/x q0’La Lk; asks qigd qj0a’p aLO/mEqtx. Ma/nix aLga’xd 


_ thus does that child if nearly it dies. When she eats it 
op!al6 gaLa/wan, aLE’/ktcx La’Xa, nau‘i aLod/mEqtx. I6/Lqté 


trout a pregnant one, it cries her child, at once it faints. Long 


aLo‘mEgtx ka wiXt atctElata‘kux. Ka/nauwe L‘aLa/ma-y- @/ka. 


itisinaswoon then = again it recovers. All days thus. 


E/Xtema-é la‘/kté aLo/mEqtx aé/Xt 0%0/Lax. Ma/nix aLgaLk; tsxé/max 
Sometimes four times it faints one day. When he cmeee it 
La/k-ikala gaLa/wan 0/lXaii, ka/nauwe qo’La Lkjasks nixLE’lx 
her husband a pregnant one a seal, all that child is burnt 
é/LaL‘a,. ALiLa/‘létEmx Ltcuq. Ma/nix aLkcilpé’/Xux gaLa/wan 
its body. Then is in it often water. When she blows it up a pregnant one 
{under its skin] 


‘ikego/matk, gua’nEsum acilpé’Xunil iLa/wan La/Xa. Ma/nix aLgia’x 


a bladder, always it is blown up its belly her child. When _ she eats it 


gaLa’wan i/kta Liap aqia’x, ia’xkati Lxoa’p niké’x qix: i/kta Ljap 
a pregnant some- focnd itisdone, there hole is in it that some- found 
one thing thing 


aqia’x, ia/xkaté Lxoa’p aLxa’/x q0/La Lkjasks. Ma/’nix aLao’ptit 
it is done, there hole is that child. When she sleeps 
k"La‘/xani gaLa/wan, qjoa’p aLE’/qxtomx, paL nexa/x iLa/wan 
outside a pregnant one, nearly she gives birth, full it gets her belly 
L‘a/owulkt. ALO/’mEqtx. Ma/nix aLo’tXuitx i0’/Lqté god iqé’p!al 
blood. She dies. When she stands long in the doorway 
aLgé/qEmitx iau’a k"La/xaneé, a/ka aLxa/x qigd aLE’qxtomx cka Lax 
she looks then outside, thus does when she gives birth and come 
out 


aLxa/x La/Xa, id’/Lqté Lax aLxa’/x La/Xa. E/Xtkmaé aLo/mEqtx 
it does her child, long come out it does her child. Sometimes she dies 
go’La gaLa/wan, @/XtEmaé aLO/mEqtx q0’La Lkjasks. Ma/nix 
that pregnant one, sometimes ou dies that aisiad When 
i0‘Lqté aLx0’kstitx gaLa/wan, f/ka aLxa’/x qigd aLk/qxtomx. 
long she lies down a pregnant one, es she does when she gives birth. 
E’Late!a nixa/tElax id’Lqte. Ma/’nix aLxo/ketitx LegoLé/mXEmk 
Her sickness is on her long. When he lies down a person 


e’wa La‘‘owit gaLa/wan, a/lta iau’a aLoteé/qxLkuitx qo’La Lk; asks. 
thus her feet apregnantone, now then it lies across that child 


Mané’x aLo/tXuitx LgoLe/lEXEmkK ian/a iLa/koteX gaLa/wan, ka 
When he stands a person there her back a pregnant one, and 

lau’a aLo/tXuitx q0d’La Lkjasks ma/nix aqLa’/xtoms. 

then it stands that child when it is born. 

Ma/nix aLk’/kxtOmx gaLa/wan, qoa/nEm La/xanake goa/nEsum 
When she gives birth the pregnant one, five her stones always 
LO’cko-it. Lxoa’p aLgi/ax élé/é. Méokct Lqa/nake aLgE’/Lx'guix qigd 
she heats. Hole shemakesit ground. Two stones she throws into where 
naLxoa’pe. Alta aLxkjée/niakux ka/nauwé é/LaLta aLqk;é/niakux. 


the hole. Now she ties it around herself all her body she ites it aoe 
herself. 


A‘lta aLxaLgE’m’apgux g0 q0d/La Lqa/nake. Qoi’nEMmi aLa/o-ix 
Now she takes a steam-bath at those stones. Five her sleeps 


aLxaLgb’mapkax ka/nauwé L’aLa’/ma, ka/nauwé Lpo/lEma. Ma/nix 
she takes steam-baths all days, all nights. When 


= 


ao oOo & Ww b 


15 


16 


rn al wv OF 
240 PREGNANCY AND BIRTH. Sr Ecuaee 


tsEs aLxa’/x q0d’La Lqa/nake, a/lta Laq® aLa/x, a/lta Lé’gon 


cold get those stones, then take out eu does now others 
them, 
aqE/LXtkoax. Ka/nauwé L‘aLa/ma-y- @’ka, ka/nauwé Lpo’/lEma-y- 
she puts into it. All days thus, all nights 
é/ka. Ma/‘nix aLE/LXOL;ax aLxaLgE/m’apgux aLkLo/k"7x La/xanake 
thus. When she finishes she takes steam-baths she carries them the stones 
go ma/Lxolé go nasp!a’qé kja La/qjéLxap kja Leta/’mtket kja 
to inland in holeofatree and her coat and her tongs and 
Lak Xo-iluL kulgé/iug. Aqta/lutx tkté/ma qaX Opd’né, dLa/poné 
her cedar-bark belt. It is given _ property that after-birth, her after-birth 
kLE/qt0mx aqagEmgé/k"tix. Ekupku’p = aqia/lotx, tkamo/sak 
the one who has it is paid. Short dentalia it is given, beads 


given birth 
aqLa/lotx. Lt!0/kti Li/ego-ic aqLaxania/kux qaX OoOpod‘/né. Ma/nix 
itis given. Good mat it is put into that after-birth. If 
néket aqayamgé’k"tix qaX opo/né ka mia/nxi ka aLO/mEqtx q0’La 
not it is paid that after-birth and alittle while and it dies that 
Lk; asks; aLExElaLaé/tax qaX opd/né qod’La Lk;asks. Ma/nix 
child; it takes it back that after-birth that child. When 
gaLa/wan, niket aLkLa/amctx qLa/o-it Lteug. La/mkXa tex 
a pregnant one, not she drinks it one day old water. Only . then 
aqLo‘tépax, taua’/lta aLElgé’o-initx gaLa/wan. 
it is dipped, else she is sick long the pregnant one. 
Ma/nix Lka/nax aLE‘/kxtomx, aqLugd/lEmam Lé/Xat_ L£a/gil, 
When achieftainess gives birth to a child, she is fetched one woman, 


aLgiLgEna/oxo-é, E/XtEmaé am0o/ketike aqtug0/lEmamx. 
she looks after her. Sometimes two are fetched. 
AtkLO/cgamx Lk; acke ma/nix aqLa/kxtomx. [a’/qoa-iL 
They take it the child when it is born. A large 
ikaLxE’/lematk aqLé/’otx Lk;acke. At!0/kti-y- dqoewe’/qxé Lqj op 
dish it is washed the child. A good knife cut 
aqgé/Lxax iLa/amco Lkjacke. Aqokumage’k"tex q0/tac ta/nEmcke 
itis done its navel-string the child. They are paid those women 
amo/ketike; ana’ Lé/Xat Léta/gil, A’ka Lkjasks La/gil, 4a/ka 
two; sometimes one woman. Thus child male, thus 
Lkjasks LE/k-ala. Iva/Lélam LtaLa’/ma La/k-iLau, ma/nix L‘a/gil, 
child female. Ten days her taboo when a female, 
goa/nEM LtaLa’/ma La/k-iLau ma/nix LE’/k-ala. Qoa/nEm LtaLa’/ma 
five days her taboo when a male. Five } days 


ma/nix LE/kala ka aLgia/x ixgé/wal La/mama. A/’/ka La/naa 
when a male then he eats fresh food his father. Thus his mother 
wiXt. Ma/nix Lé‘a/gil giLa/Lélam LtaLa’‘ma ka aLgia/x ixgé’/wal. 
also. When a woman ten: days and _ they eat fresh food. 
A/éXt OkLEmé@n = aqla/xtomx ka _  aqo/xdktc!lax té/lx‘Em. 
One moon it is born then they are invited the people. 
Augo’xékte!ax La/mama qo’La Lk;asks. A/Ita aqLkEluwa’‘yutegux. 
He invites them its father that child. Now they dance. 
A‘lIta aqLgElg0/xo-iLx tqa/cocinike La’/Xaw6k. Lxoa/pLxoap aqta/x 
Now he is asked to do [his children his guardian Holes are made 
work] spirit. 
La/-utcake. xigo NagaLa/‘mat gd tga/k"Lil qO’ta-y- é’ka. 
its ears. Here at Katlamat there _ their custom this thus. 
AqLii/Lg0Ljax Lxoa/pLxoap aqta’/x La’-utcake. E/natai méket Lxoa’p 
They are finished holes are made its ears. On one side two holes 
aqLa/x 0/La-utean, @natai wiXt mdket. Aqawé/’makuq téx-Em; 
are made in its ear, on the other also two. Presents are dis- the people; 
side tributed [among] 


aqawigé/kxo-imx. EXt iqé‘taq ka  aLO/tXuitx Lkjasks, 
they are paid for dancing. One year and it stands the child, 


aLkeX0’tkakux. WiXt yulj7 aLxa’x La’/mama. WiXt aLgo’/xuktc !ax 
it goes step by step. Again glad he gets its father. Again he invites them 


ee PREGNANCY AND BIRTH—TRANSLATION. 241 


BOAS 


téIx-Em, wiXt aqLkEluwa’yutcgux La’/Xa. WiXt Lxoa/pLxoap 


the people, again they dance for it his child. Again holes 
aqta’x La/-utcake. A/’Ita qod/nEmi Lxoa’p a/éXt  6/La-utca. 
he makes its ears. Now five times holes one its ear. 
them > : 
Ia‘koa a/nata wiXt qoid’nEmi. A’ka Léa’/gil, 4’ka LE’k-ala. 
Here on the other also five times. Thus a female, thus a male. 


side 


La/qgoa-iL aLxa/x La/Xa_ Lka/‘nax. ALksaxLé/x  ukjotaq;é’. 


Large gets his child the chief. It euers with the suckers. 
100 

WixXt gqjoa/nqjoan aLxa’x La/mama. WiXt  aLgo/xuqtc!ax 

Again glad gets his father. Again he invites them 
téIx-Em. WiXt nuxuiwa’/yutckux. WiXt aqawigé/kxo-imx ka/nauwé. 

the people. Again they dance. Again they arepaidfordancing all. 
WixXt pat La’qoa-iL aLxa‘’x. ILa/mat aLgé’tElax  LEIa’lax. 

Again really large it gets. Shooting it does it to it a bird. 
WiXt = aqod’/xuqtc!ax téx‘-Em. WiXt  ikjuand’m  aqgé’/Lxax. 

Again they are invited the people. Again a potlatch is made. 
Nuxuiwa’yutckux té’lx‘Em. WiXt aqawigé’qxo-imx ka/nauwe. 

They dance the people. Again they are paid for dancing all. 
Translation. 


When a woman is with child she does not sleep long. She awakes 
early in the morning and arises at once. She opens the door. She 
does not stay in the doorway, but goes out at once. When a woman 
who is with child sits down, nobody must stand back of her and nobody 
must lie down crosswise {at her feet]. It is the same at night [when 
she lies down]. When a person lies down near her, his head must 
point in the same direction as her feet dre turned. When she comes to 
a creek she jumps across twice. She does not lie down outside the 
house, else the sun would make her sick. It is forbidden. She does 
not wear a necklace, else the navel-string would be wound around the 
child’s neck. She does not wear bracelets, else the navel-string would 
be tied around the child’s arm. She does not look at a corpse. She 
does not look at anything that is dead, It is forbidden. She does not 
look at a raccoon nor at an otter. She does not look at anything that 
is rotten. She does not blow up a [seal] bladder. She does not eat 
anything that has been found. It isforbidden. She does not eat trout 
nor steel-head salmon. Itis forbidden. Her husband does not eat any- 
thing that has been found. He does not killraccoons. He does not singe 
seals. He does not shoot birds. He does not look ata corpse. He does 
not kill otters, else the child would get sick by sympathy. It is the 
Same with the raccoon. When the child should fall sick and nearly die 
it would have a hard struggle against death, like the otter. It is the 
same with a bird or a raccoon. It would obtain sickness by sympathy. 
When a raccoon’s eye is squeezed out [by the husband of the woman 
who 1s with child] the child’s eye would be squeezed out. When the 
raccoon cries much on being struck [with a stick] the child will 
do the same when it is near death. When a woman who is with 
child eats trout, her child will faint whenever it cries and recover 

BOLL, T= 20 16 


eo wo NN GS CO 


242 PREGNANCY AND BIRTH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


only after along time. This will happen every day, sometimes it may 

faint four times a day. When her husband singes a seal, the child’s 

body will be burnt all over. It will have blisters. When she blows 

up a [seal] bladder, the child will always have winds. When she 

eats anything that was found and there is a hole in it [eaten by 

birds or other animals], the child will have a hole at the same place. 

When she sleeps outside of the house, and it is nearly time for her 

child to be born, her belly will be filled with blood and she dies. When 

she stays a long time in the doorway and looks out of the house, the 
child will do the same when it is being born. It will take long for the 

child to be born. Sometimes the woman will die; sometimes the 

child. When a woman who is with child stays in bed long, she will do. 
the same when she gives birth to the child. When anybody stands 

back of her the child will be born feet first. 

When she gives birth to the child, she always heats five stones. She 
makes a hole in the ground and throws two stones into it. Then she 
ties her blanketaround herself and takes a steam-bath over these stones. 
Five days and nights she takes steam-baths all the time. When the 
stones get cold she takes them out of the hole and puts others into it. 
She does so day and night. After she has finished her steam-bath she 
takes the stones inland and places. them in the hollow of a tree with 
her coat, her tongs and her cedar-bark belt. The after-birth receives 
presents—short dentalia and beads. If this is not done the child dies 
after a short time. Then the after-birth takes it back. A woman who 
is with child does not drink water that has been standing [in a vessel] 
aday. She drinks only water that has just been taken from the river, 
else she will be sick for a long time. 

When a chieftainess gives birth to a child a woman is called to look 
after her. Sometimes two are called. They take the child when it is 
born and wash it in a large dish. They take a good knife and cut its 
navel-string. Then the two women are paid; sometimes it is only one 
woman. It is the same with a male and with a female child. When 
the child is a girl the taboos extend over ten days; if itis a boy, they 
extend over five days. When it is a boy the father and the mother 
may eat fresh food after five days. If it is a girl they may eat fresh 
food after ten days. 

One month after the birth of the child the people are invited by the 
father of the child. Now they dance. Nowa man who has a guardian 
spirit [who helps him to understand] children, is asked to practice 
his art on the child. Then its ears are perforated. This is the custom 
of the Katlamat. They finish perforating its ears. Two holes are made 
in each ear and presents are distributed among the people. They are 
paid for dancing [for the child]. After a year, when the child begins 
to stand and to walk, the father becomes again glad and invites all 
the people, who dance for the child. Its ears are again perforated. 
Now five holes are made in each ear. This is done with both boys 


peeKone PREGNANCY AND BIRTH—TRANSLATION. 243 


and girls. When the chief’s child grows up and [first] catches fish 
with a hook, the father is gladdened again and invites the people. 
They dance, and all are paid for dancing. When the child becomes 
really large and shoots [the first] bird, he again invites the people. 
He gives a potlatch, and the people dance. Again all are paid for 
dancing for the child. 


Notes. 


Other taboos and beliefs.—When a woman gives birth to a child out of doors, this 
will be a reproach to her child throughout life. Her husband is allowed to be ae 
during her confinement. 

The father must not go fishing for ten days nor do any work that requires his 
going out on the water. He must not go-hunting, but he may gather wood. If the 
child is a boy this rule holds for five days only. If a sick person is in a house where 
a woman is about to be confined, his bed is surrounded with mats so that he cannot 
see the woman. 

There is a certain guardian spirit which enables its possessor to understand the 
cries and the cooing of babies. The child may tell him where it came from. It may 
say: After four days I shall go home; then it will die after four days. This spirit 
informed us that the land of the children is in sunrise. If a child in a family dies 
and another one is born later on to the same family, it may be the same child which 
returned, Sometimes, if it died after its ears had been perforated, the new-born 
child will have its ears perforated. Old people cannot return as new-born infants. 


10 
it 


PUBERTY. 


Ma/nix L‘a/gil La’/Xa Lkaé/nax, ma/nix gua/nsum @/Latc!a Lka/nax 


When a girl his child a chief, when always his sickness the chief 
ka yugoé’ iLa/qa-iL La/Xa Lka/nax, Lq;1a’/plix: La’/Xa Lka/nax, 
then thus[about its large- his child the chief, an immature girl his child a chief, 

_ 10 years] ness 
ka  ikjuand/‘m  aLgé/Lgax, aqLga‘/xoL;j kux  Lq;élawulXa/Em. 
then potlatch he makes, she is pretended to be menstruant for the 

first time. 
AqugEluwa/yutckux. Qoi/nEmi atga‘o-ix nodxuiwa/yutckux ka 
They dance. Five times their sleeps they dance and 


aqawigé’/qxo-imx. 
they are paid for dancing. 
Ma/nix aLqjela’/wulax La’/Xa Lka/nax, a/lta aqLo’/pcedtxax. 
When she is menstruating his daughter a chief, now she is hidden. 
for the first time 


La‘mkXa LéXa/tka L*a/gil aLgiLgEna/oxoé. Kjau’/kjau aqLE/tElax 


Only one only woman looks after her. Tied it is to her 
Léué1OL go La’poté, go La’towit, aqLE/Igil’6x Lué/loL. E/XtEmaé 
cedar bark to her arm, to her leg, itis tied around cedar bark. Sometimes 

her waist ‘ 
qodi/nEmi aLa/o-ix, @/XtEmaé ia/Lélamé aLa/o-ix, @/XtEma-é la/kte 
five times her sleeps, sometimes ten times her sleeps, sometimes  fourtimes 
aLa/o-ix, @/XtEmaé txa/mé aLa/o-ix niket aLxLxE/lEmax. Alta 
her sleeps, sometimes six times her sleeps not she eats. Now 
aqo/xukte!ax té/lx‘Em. Ikjuan0d’m aqgé@/Lgax Lqjela/wulX. Qoié/nEmi 
they are invited the people. otlatch is made for her theone menstru- Five times 
ating for the first 
4 time. 
aLa/o-ix aqL0/peutx. A/Ilta Laq aqLax, a/lta La/qLaq aqLE/Lxax 
her sleeps she is hidden. Now takeout sheisdone, now take off it is done 
qo‘La ky gé/luq. Alta a/tElaxta tqdqoa‘itEla kj;au’kjau 
that what is tied around Now they next strings of short dentalia tied 
her waist. 
aqtE/tElax go La’poté kj a go La‘‘owit. A’lta it !a/lnqama aqiLE/lgil’6x. 
theyaretothem at herarms and at her legs. Now a buckskin strap is tied around 
her waist. 
Poe a/lta gua/nEsum aqiLE/lgil’6x ia’/k;amOnagé iad/ya, tex] Laq® 
If now always it is tied around a hundred days, then taken off 


her waist 


né/Lxax qix’ it!a’lEqama. A‘lta aLkLomé’/nagux Lqj;éyo’/qxut. Alta 


it is that buckskin strap. Now she washes her face an old woman. Now 
LE/gun Lé/Xat Laqjéyo’qxut tnowa/LEma atLga‘tHlax. Alta 
another one old woman paint she does her with it. Now 
aqLE/Itcamx; Lqjeyo’qxut aLkLE/Itcamx. AqLée/Lgol;Ex ka/nauwe. 
she is combed; an old woman combs her. It is fiaveked all. 
Aqawigé’kxo-imx q0d/tac té/lx‘Em. Alta aqagumgé’k"tix q0’tac 
They are paid for dane*ng those people. Now they are paid those 
tq;eyo’qtike ta/nEmcke. A/Ita wiXt aqLO/tgEx q0’La Lqjéla/wulX. 
old ones women. Now again sheisputaway that one menstruant 


: for the first time. 
IxEli/ima éLa/xépal. GO kula/yi @’/qxéL ka ia/xkati aLx’0’La-itx. 
Another one her door. At far creek and there she bathes. 
Quinum La/Lé ayao/éxé niket aLgi/ax ixgé/wal. WiXt aLq;ela/wulax, 


Fifty her sleeps not she eats fresh food. Again she is menstruant, 
iLa/moket aLkjela’wulax. WiXt i’/ka aquLa’/x. WiXt ikjuano’m 
the second time sheis menstruant. Again thus it is done. Again a potlatch 


244 


penoor PUBERTY. 245 
aLgia/x La/mama. Niket qa/nsix aLxcko/mitx Lqjela’/wulX. Neéket 
he makes her father. Not anyhow she warms herself the one menstru- Not 


ant for the first 
time. 


qa‘nsiX aLqta/qamitx té/lx‘Em. Niiket qa/nsix igd/cax aLgia/qamitx, 
anyhow she looks at them people. Not anyhow the sky she looks at it, 

niket qa‘nsix tgoxoé’ma aLkto’piaLxax. Tga/kiLau. Ma/nix ig0d’cax 
not anyhow berries she gathers them. It is her taboo. When the sky 

aLgia/qamitx Lqjela/wulX, gua/nEsum ia/q;atxala né/xElax igo/cax. 
she iooks at it the one menstruant always its badness comes tobe the sky. 

: for the first time, on it 


Ma/nix tgdqo@’ma aLkto’piaLx Lq;ela’wulX, gua/nEsum émEla/Ikuilé 
When berries she gathers the one menstruant always rainy weather 
for the first time, 


nexa’x. Ja/xkaté La’/qxoéluL quL aLkLa/owix go-y- é/makte. [a/xkaté 


it gets. There her cedar-bark hang she doesitonit on a spruce There 
up tree. 
né’xca-0x. 1a/kj amonagé aLa/o-ix Lq;jela’/wulX, tex] aLgia’x ixge/wal, 
it dries. One hundred her sleeps theonemenstruant then sheeatsit fresh food, 


for the first time, 
tex'] aLkto/piaLxax tgdqoé’ma, tex] aLxck0/mitx. 


then she gathers berries, then she warms herself. 
Ma/nix qa‘xéwa nodgoLa’yax, aqLo/k"™7x Lq;éla/wulX. Niaket 
When somewhere they move, sheis carried the one menstruant Not 


for the first time. 


aLqLée/wategux cka aqL0/ctx6x gd ikani‘m. Nikct aLaLo/tXuitx 
she paddles and sheiscarriedon into’ the canoe. Not she stands in water 
the back 
Lteng, go-y- é/maL Lteug. Ka pod/lakqi ka aLx’0/tamx Lqjéla/wulX. 
water, in salt water water. And atnight and shegoesto theonemenstruant 
bathe for the first time. 
ALguxog0/kux tElala’xuke, ka/nauwé L*taLa/ma-y- @ka. Ma/nix 
She is superior to the birds, all days thus. When 
ta/newatike tElala/xuke noxo-e0/lbguLx, aqLxga/IEguLx Lq;éla/wulX, 
they first the birds rise, they are superior to her the one who men- 
struates for the 
first time, 
ka niket 10’/Lqté iLa’Xanate. Ma/nix ka/nauwé-y- i/kta tlaya/ 
then not long her life. When all things good 
aLgia/x Lajela’wulX, a/lta Lqjéyo’qxut aLxa’x, tex aLo/mrqtx. 
she does the one who menstru- now old she gets, then she dies. 


them ates for the first time, 
Mo’keti aLq;éla’/wulax ka aLE/LXOLjax. A/‘lta ma/nix alLquLa/Xitx, 
Twice she is menstruant then she finished. Now when she is menstru- 
for the first time ant, 
nau/i k"La/xané aLo’-ix. Qod/nEmi aLa/o-ix Lkua’/Xit ka wiXt 
at once outside she goes. Five times her sleeps sheismen- then again 
struant 


aLo/p!x. Ka/nauwe LkLmeéna/‘ke @/ka aLkua’Xitx nau‘i aLd/pax. 
she enters. All months thus sheismenstrnant at once she goes out. 
Ana’ la’/kti aLa/o-ix k"La/xani, Niket gLE/tqamt gé/Late!a LkLa/ Nit. 
Some- four her sleeps outside. Not she sees him a sick one a menstruant 
times times woman. 


Ma/‘nix @’Latc!a LgoLélEXEmk, go kula/yi t!oL aLkta’x Lkwaé/Xit. 
When his sickness a person, at far ahouse shemakes’ the menstru- 
e it ant woman. 
K’ka Lajéla‘wulX. Neket LkLe/tqamt Lk; asks Lq;éla’wulX. Ma/nix 
Thus one menstruating Not she looks at it a child one menstruating If 
for the first time. for the first time. 


LkLa/Xit aLgia’x ita’‘kjétenax nauwa/itk, a/Ita pax  noxod/x; 
a menstruant eats what he caught [in] net, now unlucky it becomes; 
woman 


gé/xtcé ita/‘tuk7tX nauwa/itk, tateja pax noxd/x. E’ka-y- i/kXik. 
intending successful the net behold! unlucky it gets. Thus a hook. 
Ma/nix algia’x éna/qxon LkLa/Xit, qgé/xtcé iad/tukqtX 1’/kXik, 
If she eats it sturgeon a menstruant intending successful the hook 
woman 


ko 


me OW 


or 


18 
19 


10 


11 


246 PUBERTY. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


tate;a pax néxa/x. Qia/x qui/nEmi aLa/oix LkLa/Xit text aLgia’x 


behold! unlucky it gets. If five days menstruant then  sheeats 
ixg@/wal. Ma/nix iLa’/k; éwulal LkLa/Xit nékect iLxé/tElax Lk; acke; é’/ka 
fresh food. If the berries which the menstru- not it eats them achild; thus 


she picked ating woman 
gé/Late!a ma/nix iLa’/k;éwulal LkLa/Xit, naket iLxé’tElax gé’Latc!a 


a sick person if the berries which the menstru- not he eats them _ the sick one. 
she picked ating woman, 
Ma/nix niket La/mama Lka/nax La/Xa, ka La/‘tata ikjoand’m 
When not her father a chief his daugh- then hermother’s a potlatch 
ter, brother 
aLgé/Lgax. Ana’ La/motX ikjoand’/m aLgé/Lgax; ana’ La/Lak 
he makes it for Some- her father’s a potlatch he maxes it for her; some- her father’s 
her. times brother times sister 
ikjoand’‘m aLgé/Lgax; ana’ La/‘qjotxa ikjoand’‘m aLgé/Lgax 
a potlatch she makes it for | some- her mother’s a potlatch she makes it 
her; times sister for her 
Lqjéla’wulX. Ma/nix néket 0’xoé La‘ktema LgoLé/lEXEmk, a/lta 
the one menstruating When not many dentalia a person, now 


for the first time. 
eka aLktugoEmamx té/lx‘Em. Niket nioxd-wa/yutckux cka 


and they fetch them the people. Not they dance and 
aqLa/qamitx Lq;éla’wulX. Aqawé/makux kanauwe’ qO’tac ‘té/lx‘Em 
they look at her theonemenstruating Presents are distrib- all those people 
the first time. uted among them : 


ktkLa/qamitx qo’La Lq;ela/wulX. Niket 0’xoé tkté/ma aqtawé/makux. 
who looked at her that theonemenstruating Not many dentalia are distributed. 
for the first time. 


E’/ka wiXt m6/keté aLq; ela’/wulX, m6/keté aqawé/makux té/lx‘Em. 
qj ’ 


Thus also twice she is menstruant twice presents are distrib- the people. 
for the first time, uted among them 
Translation. 


When a chief who is continually sick has a daughter about ten years 
old and not yet mature, he makes a potlatch and pretends that she is 
menstruant for the first time. The people dance five days and are paid 
for dancing. 

When a chief’s daughter is menstruating for the first time, she is 
hidden [from the view of the people]. Only an [old] woman takes care 
of her. Cedar bark is tied to her arms [above the elbows and at the 
wrists], to her legs, and around her waist. She fasts sometimes five 
days, sometimes ten days, or four or six days. Now the people are 
invited and a potlatch is made for the girl. She remains hidden five 
days. Now she is taken out [of her hiding place] and the cedar bark 
which is tied around her [arms, legs, and waist] is taken off. Then 
strings of dentalia are tied around her arms and legs, and a buckskin 
strap is tied around her waist. This remains tied around her for one 
hundred days, then it is taken off. Now an old woman washes her face. 
Another old woman paints her; still another one combs her. When 
this is finished the people are paid for dancing for her. Now these old 
women are paid and the girl is hidden again. She has a separate door. 
She bathes in a creek far [from the village]. For fifty days she does 
not eat fresh food. When she is menstruant for the second time her 
father gives another potlatch. She must not warm herself. She must 
never look at the people. She must not look at the sky, she must not 
pick berries. It is forbidden. When she looks at the sky it becomes 


CHINOOK PUBEKTY—TRANSLATION. 247 


BOAS 


bad weather. When she picks berries it will rain. She hangs up her 
[towel of] cedar bark on [a certain] spruce tree. The tree dries up at 
once. After one hundred days she may eat fresh food, she may pick 
_ berries and warm herself. 
If the people move from one place to another, she is carried into the 
~eanoe. She must not paddle and is carried on the back into the canoe. 
She must not step into salt water. When it is night she must go 
to bathe. She must rise earlier than the birds. If the birds should 
_ rise first she will not live long. If she does everything in the right 
_ way she will get old before she dies. After her second menses 
{these customs] are finished. Later on, when she is menstruant, she 
goes out of the house and comes back after five days. Every month 
when she is menstruating she goes out at once. Sometimes she stays 
outside four days. No sick person must see her. When a person is 
sick she makes a house for herself far away. The same is done by a 
girl menstruaut for the first time. The latter must not look at children. 

When a menstruant woman eats fish that was caught in a net, the net 
becomes unlucky. If the people try to catch fish in the net, they find 
that it has become unlucky. Itis the same with a hook. When she 
eats sturgeon, and the people try to catch sturgeon with that hook, they 
find that it has become unlucky. After five days she may eat fresh 
food. Berries which she has picked must not be eaten by children or 
sick persons. 

When a girl who is menstruant for the first time has no father, then 
her mother’s brother gives a potlatch for her. Sometimes her father’s 
brother, or her father’s sister or her mother’s sister will make a potlatch 
for her. If anybody has not many dentalia the people are invited. 
They do not dance, but look at the girl. Presents are distributed among 
them. Not many dentalia are distributed. In the same way presents 
are distributed among the people when she has her second menses. 


Sc Ot 


~] 


10 


11 


12 


MARRIAGE. 


Ma/nix @Xt gita/lEXam tq;éx aLkLa’x L‘a/gil go-y- 6Xt é/lEXam, 
When one peopleofatown like they doit awoman in one town, 
ka atktd’/egam tga’Xamota ka/nauwé La/colal LE’k-ala, ka atgé/x 
then they take it their property all his relatives theman, then they go 
@kit atgia/xomx. AqLO/kux LEuna/yucX, Agqtd/tgnx tga/ktema 
bays they do. They are sent messengers. They are kept their dentalia 

a wile 
téIx-Em; ka nux0d/gux. Nux0’gux ga/tamEl. A/‘Ita pa/apa atcta/x 
the people; then they gohome. They gohome they who went Now divide he does it 


to buy. 
é/team qaX 0680’/kuil q0d/ta tkamo’ta ka/nauwé g06 tia/colal. 
her father that woman that property all to his relatives. 
A‘lta tilaya’ akta’x tga‘/ktema qaX 0/kXua_ 60/kuil. Alta 
Now good she makes them her dentalia that her mother woman. Now 


noxué'tXuitegux. A/lta aqd/kix g6 éXt é@/lEXam_= qigod 
they make themselves ready. Now she is brought to one town where 
aqgomeEla‘leEmx. Nuxuigé/qtc!lamx. Aqa‘ktc!lamx qaX 680’kuil. 


she was bought. They bring the bride to the She is brought as bride that woman. 
groom. to the groom 
WiXt aqaxiktcgo‘mamx. Ma/nix mE/‘nx‘ka q6d’ta @kit aqta’x, 
Again she is brought to him. When ([forjalittleonly that buying a itis done, 
wite 
wiXt aqLO’/kXux LEuna/yucX. WiXt aqagilgé’x-iwa-y- 0’mEl. 
again they are sent messengers. Again it is added to it purchase 
money. 
A‘lta wiXt atktd/tx tga/ktema télx‘Em. A/‘Ita 4a/yip!é. Wixt 
Now again they give their dentalia © the people. Now it is right. Again 


them away 
aqto/tx atcé/xike t!éeltkéu. A/Ita noxoé’la-itx té/lx‘Em k"La/xané. 
they are several slaves. Now they stay the people outside. 
given away 


AtuXuLx‘a/nak6x tga/okke. A/‘Ita nuxuiwé’/yutckux tga/colal qaX 
They put them on their blankets. Now they dance her relatives that 
0:0/kuil. Nugod/texamx. A/‘Ita nux0d/wax té/lx‘Em €@’wa qO0’tac 
woman. They sing conjurers’ Now they run the people thus [to] those 
songs. 
é/natai 0xoéla/-itx:. Aqugugé’Latatck6. La/qLaq aqto’x6x ka/nauwé 
on the they are. They are taken off [their Take off they are done all 
other side blankets]. 
tga’okke. LO/né aqugugé/Latatckux, é/XtEmaé la‘/kte 
their blankets. _ Three times they are taken off, sometimes four times 
aqugugéLatatckux. A’/lta ué/Xatk aqa/x. Tkté’‘ma _  ué’Xatk 
they are taken off. Now a road it is made. Dentalia aroad 
aqta’x. Ué/Xatk aqa’x @/wa xix @/k-ala tiad’colal. AqLa/goLj Ex 
is made. A road ismade thus _ this the man his relatives. It is finishe 
qaX ué/Xatk. Alta aqd/ctx6x qaX 060’kuil. Aqank;é/Litcax, 
that road. Now she is carried that woman. A blanket is pulled over 
on back her head, 
niket ci/qdexi ega’‘xéct. Agqtodtcé/nadx t!okke. Lon aqtotce/nadx. 
not it is seen her face. They are laid down blankets. Three are laid down. 


K’/XtEmaé moket aqtdteé/nadx. ALgd/ctxdx Lta/gil qaX 680/kuil. 
Sometimes two are laid down. She carnies Her on awoman that woman. 
ack 


A‘lta aqLgumgé/k"tix qg0/La qLgé’ctxéx. Aqtaé/tElutxax tkté’ma. 
Now she is paid that theone who carried They are paidtoher dentalia. 
her on her back. 
248 


ee MARRIAGE. 249 


Ala/téwa k"ea/xali aLga’x iLa/ctxul. Aqtii’‘tElotx t!okke. Ala’/téwa 


Again up So ee as her load. She is given blankets. Again 
1er 

kvea/xali aLga’x. O/xuit tkamo’ta aqté’tElotx q0d’/La _Lgé/ctxox. 
up she makes her. Much property __ is given to her that the one who ¢ar- 

vied her on her 

back. 

Texi aLgoLa/étamitx gd qd’ta t!okke, k"caxala’. A‘Ita aqt0/qLx 
Just she puts her down on those blankets, up. Now they are car- 


ried to her 
tkté’/ma. Atktd/qLx tga/colal qaX 0680/kuil. A/lta kju’tk;ut aqta’x 
be) | | 
dentalia. They carry them her relatives that woman. Now tear they are 
to her done 


gd LE/kaqtq. O/’qxuqst aqa/lax. AqtikXa/tkoax qix: é@’k-ala 
on her head. Her louse is madeonher, They ae oat on his that man 
eac 


tkté/‘ma. Tiad/colal atktikXa/tkoax. O’yaqet aqa@/-ilax. A/Ita 
dentalia. His relatives they put them on his head. His louse is made on him. Now 
aqto/kuiptekax tk!e’wulElqi. ALuxupo/nax tga/colal qaX 0¢0/kuil. 
it is carried up to her tood. They carry itto her her relatives that woman. 
Ta’/cka qo’tac OXuige’Xiwax, ta/cka aqta/witx q0’ta tk; é/wulElqu 
They those they help, they they are fed that food 
qo‘La = Lga’pona. -A/apa =o aaqta’x = q0/La_~—=s Lga’/pona. = A‘Ita 
that it is brought to her. Divide it is done that what is pisuebt to Now 
her. 


nuxumaya/mitx tga’colal qaX 0ot0’/kuil. Ma/‘nix ita’Lélam tpaci‘ci-y 
they return the pur- her relatives that woman. When ten blankets 
chaSe money 


uya’wa, ksta/xtkin aLx‘mo/yamitx. Ma/nix qoa/nEm uya/wa iLa’kit, 


her expend- eight they refund them. When tive her expend- her price 
iture, iture of purchase 
lakt uya/wa niLx'mo’/yamitx. Ma/nix @/xauwit aLuXupo/nax, 
four her expend- they refund it. When much food is brought her, 
iture 
a/Ita wiXt é@’k-it aqia/wix. WiXt aqta’witx tkam0’ta. A/‘Ita wiXt 
now again buyinga is done. Again they are given property. Now again 
wite 


nuxumaya’‘yamitx. 
they return it. 
La/xka La/qokein, w“a/xka @/kit aLgé/tElax. Ma/nix La/kil 
Those are relatives of a they buying wife they didittothem. When a woman 
married couple, 


La/qokein, kanamo/ketike ta/nEmeke La/qéqein La/xka_  é@/k‘it 
married couple's both women married couple’s they buying 

relative, relatives wife 
aLgé’tElax. 


they did it to them. 
Ma/nix aLE/kxt0x Lgaé/cinEma-iL; ma/nix aqL6/mEqt La/Xa, 


When she gives birth to their relative married when it dies her child, 
a child in a foreign village; 
ateLlo/tx qaX o0/kuil @’/tcam LEIla/-étix.. Ma/nix néket LEIa/étix: 
he gives him that woman her father a slave. When not a slave 
to him 
ka. ikani‘m - atcid‘/tx. Lka/‘nix‘é ateLa’/x. Ma/‘nix aL0/‘ix 
then a canoe he gives it. Paying indemnity he does him. When she goes 
for the loss of a 
child 
aLxElk; é/wulaleEmamx aLXgo/mamx, a/lta ka/nauwé aLgid/makux 
she goes to gather roots or berries she reaches her now all she gives food in 
house, dishes 
ina/kjéwula. Ta/‘cka qod/tac tkLumeEla‘lEmx,  ta’cka ka’/nauwe 
what she had They those they bought her, them all 
gathered. 
aLgauwe/emx. Ka/nauwé Lqita/kema-y- @’ka, ma/nix aLxeElk; é/wala- 
she feeds them. All years thus, when she goes togatherroots 


lemX q6d/La_ Lé£a’kil. 


or berries that woman. 


oS  CO* I Sd 


10 


It 


24 


250 MARRIAGE. BUREAHEe 


ETHNOLOGY 


Ma/nix aLO0/mEqt La’/kikala, a/lta gd Lia’/wuX gqiX é’k-ala 
When he dies her husband, now to ms gounger that man 
rother 


aqLo/egam qo’La L‘a/gil. Ma/nix naket Lia/wuX qix: é’k-ala, ka go 
she is taken that woman. When not sa Jouuger that man, then to 
rother 


Lia/mama aqLo’/cgam L*a’/kil. Ma/nix kjé Lia/mama qix: é’k-ala, ka 
his father sheistaken the woman. When no his father that man, then 
gd Lia/icX aqLo’/egam qo’/La L£a/kil. Ka a/yip!é tia/cdlal é/tamxte. 
to his relative she is taken that woman. Then right hisrelatives their heart. 
Ma/nix @kit aLgia’x Lqjoa‘/lipX aqL’lagué’gux La/xamota. 
When uuying s he does it a youth it is refused his property. 
wife 
MO’keti gé/xtcé-y- @/kit aLgia’x aqL’lagué’/gux La’/xamota. K/XtEmaé 
Twice trying buylie he does it it is refused his property. Sometimes 
, wife : 4 
LO/né qgé/xtcé-y- @’/kit aLgia’x, ALxaLkjEmLuwa’‘kutegux. Tca/2xéL 
three trying buying a he does it. He hides for her in the woods. Several times 
times wife 


ka Ljap aLkLa/x god ko/lxé. A’lta aLkLungo/mitx. ALaLgm/Idax, 
and find he does her in inthe woods. Now he carries her away. She es nee for 
is sake, 


naxE/Idax qaX 6¢0/kuil. AqLona’/xLategux L‘a’kil. AtkLona/xLategux 
she leaves that woman. She is lost the woman. They lost her 
La/colal. Nackla’xo-ix'tx gqaX 06*0’kuil na’/xElta. Atgé/ix tga/colal. 
her relatives. Theylearnabouther that woman she left. They go her relatives. 
Ma/nix tga‘xkjunake, atgé/ix ka/nauwé. AqoLa/tamx. Atga/yamx 
When her elder brothers, they go all. They 4 ote her They arrive 
ack. 


tga/cdlal gd qaxé’ naké/x. AqoLa’/tax. Aqod/k"7x. NuX0/gux 
her relatives at where she is. She is taken back. She is carried. They go home 
tga’/cdlal. Aqd/k*yamx. Ted’/xéL aya-0/ixé, a/nqaté wiXt naxE’ltax. 
her relatives. Sheis brought home. Several days, already again she leaves. 
WiXt ia/xka na-igE/Itax. WiXt aqdLa/tamx, atgé/ix tga/colal. 
Again to him she leaves for his Again they go ae gorny her they go her relatives. 
sake. : ack, 


Teii/xéL aya-0/ixé, wiXt naxE/ldax. Alta ia/e aqé’/x. E/XtEmae . 


Several days, again she leaves. Now letalone she is Sometimes 
done. 


LO/né aLxE/Idax L‘a/kil ka ia/ec aqLa’/x. A/‘Ita niaket 60/Xué-y- 
three she leaves the woman and let alone she is done. Now not much 
times 


@kit aqéE/Lgax, mE/nx’ ka tkamo’ta-y- e/kit aqth’/Lgax. WiXt 
buying is done to her, a little only property buying a_ is done to her. Again 
a wife wite 
aqLaxo-iktcgo/mamx. Ka/nauwée tga/cdlal atgé/ix qaX 6¢0/kuil. 
they are married. All her relatives they go that woman. 
Aqaxiktego/mam. Ma/‘nix neket La/xamodta LE’k-ala cka ka/ltac 
She is married. When not his property the man and only 
aLO/p!x gd La/qeix.. A/lta aLgidgona/oxoé t!oL gd La/qsix’. 
they enter at his father- Now he looks after it the house at his father- 
in-law. in-law. 
ALgiagEna/6x 6°0lEptckix. ALxelala/guya-itx gd ka/nauwé La/colal 
He looks after it the fire. He always catches salmon to all her relatives 
La’‘k-ikal. 
his wife. 
Ma/nix aqLE/Legamx La/kikal LgdLé/lEXEmk, a/lta-y- 6’/Xué 
When she is carried away his wife a@ man, now many 
t!é/Eltkéu éqa/tém aqte’/tElax, ka it!0/kti né’xax @/Lamxte. Ma/nix 
slaves paying in- it is done, and good gets his heart. When 
demnity 


5 niket iqa/teém aqii/tElax ka aLk;é/ténax. Ma/nix niket Ljap aLkha‘x 


not payingin- itisdone and he kills him. When not find he does him 
demnity 


— k 


= heey MARRIAGE—TRANSLATION. 251 

qo’/La La’/kikal KLKLXE/cgam, ka La/icX aLLa/watox q6’La LE’k:ala. 
that his wife who carried her and _his rela- he kills him that man. 

away, tive 
 LE‘k'Emaua aLxa’/x. AqLgE’nuax La‘icX q6’La kLgodxogé’/cgamx. 

Taking revenge he does it. A relativeofan hisrelative that who carried her away. 

on a relative of evil doer is killed 
an evil doer : in revenge 

A‘lta-y- O6kuma/La-it nE/xax. K’ka wiXt La/pL‘au aqLo/cgamx, wiXt 
Now a family feud it gets. Thus _ also a dead she is taken away, also 
i brother’s 

4 wife 

iqa/tem agé/tElax ka t!aya’ né/xax @/Lamxte, 

paying in- itisdone and _ good gets his heart. 

demnity 

Translation. 


When a man of one town likes a girl of another town his relatives 
take [part of] their property and go to buy her. They send messen- 
gers. The [girl’s relatives] keep the dentalia [which have been sent 
them] and the messengers go home. Now the girl’s father divides 
that property among all his relatives. Now her mother prepares her 
dentalia and the people make themselves ready. They bring her to 
the town where the people live who have bought her. They bring the 
bride to the groom. When they had given a small amount only in 
payment, they add to the purchase money, giving more dentalia and 
several slaves to her father. Now the [amount paid] is sufficient. The 
relatives of the girl stand outside the house. They put on their blan- 
kets, dance, and sing conjurer’s songs. Now the man’s relatives run to 
the other party and take off their blankets. This is done three or four 
times. Now a road is strewn with dentalia by the man’s relatives. 
When it is finished a woman carries the girl over it on her back. A 
blanket is pulled over her head, so that her face can not be seen. Two 
or three blankets are laid down. The woman who carries her receives 
a payment of dentalia. When she lifts her load again, she receives 
blankets in payment. She lifts her once more. She receives much 
property for carrying her on her back. At last she puts her down on 
those blankets. Now the relatives of the girl bring her dentalia. 
They are torn over her head, and [they feign to] louse her. Dentalia 
are also strewn on the man’s head by his relatives and they feign to 
louse him. Now the girl’s relatives bring her food. This food is divi- 
ded among those who helped [in the ceremonies]. Then the woman’s 
relatives return the purchase money. When ten blankets are paid, 
they refund eight. When five were paid, four are refunded. When 
much food is brought to her, the man’s relatives pay once more, and this 
purchase money is also returned. 

The relatives of the married couple transact the purchase. [Male 
and] female relatives of a married couple are [called] La’qoqein. 

When the relative of a family who is married in another village gives 
birth to a child and the child dies, the woman’s father gives a slave 
or a canoe. He pays indemnity. When [the young wife] gathers 
roots or berries, she distributes them among the people who bought 


B U OF 
252 MARRIAGE. path SS 


her. This is done every year when she goes to gather berries. When 
her husband dies she is taken to his younger brother. If he has no 
younger brother, she is taken to his father. If he has no father, she is 
taken to one of his relatives. Then the relatives of her husband feel 
satisfied. 

When a youth tries to buy a wife and his property is refused, he may 
try twice or three times. If he is still refused, he hides in the woods 

‘in order to wait for the girl. Often he meets her there and carries her 
away. She goes to him. Then her relatives have lost her. Her rela- 
tives learn where she is. If she has elder brothers, they all go to take 
her back. They arrive at the place where she is and carry her back 
home. After several] days she leaves again and goes to the young 
man. Her relatives go again and carry her back. When she leaves a 
third time they let her go. Sometimes she is allowed [to stay with 
the man] after she bas left three times. _Now she is bought for a small 
amount of property. They are married. All her relatives go to [attend 
the marriage|. If the man has no property, they live with his father- 
in-law. He looks after his father-in-law’s house. He looks after his 
fire and catches salmon for his wife’s relatives. 

If a man’s wife is carried away, many slaves are paid to him as an 
indemnity, and he is satisfied. If he is not paid indemnity he kills 
[the abductor]. If he does not find him he kills one of his relatives. 
Then a family feud arises. It is the same when the wife of a man’s de- 
ceased brother is taken away. Then, also, indemnity is paid and he is 
satisfied. 


DEATH. 


Ma/‘nix aLO/mEqtx 6/Xué Laé/cdlal 0/Xué La/ktéma LgoLé/lEXEmk, 
When he dies many hisrelatives many his dentalia a person, 

o/Xue Laeltgéu, a‘lta ka/nauwe = atkLkjé/niakux La/colal. 

many his slaves, now all they tie it on to him his relatives 

i i 0 6/Ix- 6’x"Lex" a ‘ Olipx’Ena’yt. 

Amo/ketike aqt0’egamx télx‘Em Leée/x‘Léx: atkLa‘x tqj Olipx’Ena’ 
Two are taken men to prepare they do young men. 
corpse 


Ma/nix it!0’kti iLa/Xanim ka ia/xka aquLé/nkana-itx ka aqiupo/nitx 
When good his canoe then it he is put into it and it is put up 
qix: ikani’m k*eca/xali. Onua/Lema aqa/élax qix: ikani/m. M6/keti 
that canoe up. Paint itisdone that canoe. Twice 
Lxoa’p aqia’/x go ia’pote. AtgE’Lxamx té/lx‘Em ka noxood’yutx, 
hole itismade in its stern. They come downto the people and _ they wash them- 

the beach selves, 


aLoxo/étamx. LE’kaqced Lqup atqLa’x. Ka/nauwé LE’kaqceo Lqup 
they pied them- Their hair cut they do it. All their hair cut 
seives. 7 


atqLa’x ta/nEmcke, tka/lamuks, — tqa/cociniks. ALO’ Xu; ax 
they do it women, men, children. It is finished 
LE‘/kaqeo Lqup atkia’x. A/‘Ita Laq® atcd’/x6x tga/xal. Ka’/nauwé 
their hair cut they do it. Now takeoff they do them their names. All 
ta’‘nEmcke Laq® atod’x6x tga’/xal, ka/nauwé tka’/lamuks Laq? 
women take off they dothem their names, all men take off 
aLo’xox tga’/xal. Oxoé/ma t’atoxup!Ena’x tE’kXala ka tqa/cociniks. 


they do theirnames. Others they name themselves names and children. 
them 


Alta aqta’/maquq La’qtema q0/La LO/‘mEqtx. Ka/nauwe atkto/egam 
Now they pe cie Gelb his dentalia that dead one. All they take them 
ute : 


La‘colal La/eltgéu, uLa/Xanima. Ma/nix tqjéx La/‘icX, qjoa’p 
his relatives his slaves, his canoes. If like his relative, nearly 
aLo/mEgtx aLkLO/lEXamx: “x‘ixi’/x teucga/ma ogu’kikal, ma/nix 
he dies, he says to them: ‘‘This one he will take her my wife, when 
ano/mEqta.” Ma/nix am0o’‘ketike La/nEmcke ka amo/ketike télx-Em 
I die.” When two wives and two persons 
aLktoJEXamx. Alta ia’xkati aqtd’/egamx La/nEmcke g6 La/colal. 
-he speaks to them. Now there they are taken the women to his relatives. 
Ma/nix wLa/gil tqjéx La/‘kikal qoa’p  aLOo/mEqtx  L£a/kil 
When a woman likes her husband nearly she dies the woman 
aLkLoJEXamx La/xk’un: “ Mai/kXa teEmucgaéa/ma imé’/ptau.” Ma/nix 
she says to her her elder sister: “You he will take you sous Dorther- When 
; in-law.” 
La/wuX, a/ka wiXt aLkLOEXamx. Qé’/xtcé Lq;éy6/qxut, Lk; asks 
her younger thus _ also she says to her. Intending old, young 
sister 


La/pLau, tate!a La’/XKa aLkLo/cgamx. E/ka Le’k-ala, @/ka L«a/gil. 
his widow, then to him they take*her. Thus aman, thus a woman. 
Ma/‘nix Lka/nax aLex'p!Ena’/x; aqiup;Ena’x iLa’/xal. ALx'p!Ena’/x 
When a chief he takes his name; he is named his name. He takes his name 
La/icX. Aqt0d/lXamx am6‘ketike té/lx‘Em: “ MB‘taika amtiup; Ena/ya.” 
his relative. They are told two people: DO" name him.” 
A‘Ita amo‘ketike té/lx‘Em actiup!Ena’x. A/Ita-y- 0/Xué tqamod’ta 
Now two people they name him. Now much property 


253 


bf 


bo 


oOo - Ww 


10 


11 


(uy 


12 


is) 
20 


254 DEATH. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


aqta/witx q0/tac tgiup;Ena/x @/qxal. E/ka LE/kala, é’ka L‘a/gil, 


they are given those they name him name. Thus aman, thus a woman, 
é/ka Lkjasks, ma/nix aqiupjEna/x @’qxal. 
thus a child, when he is named name. 

Néxelta’/komxéa wiXt tjaya’ aqla’x Lmé/meEluct. Am6’/ketike 
After one year again good it is made the corpse. Two 
aqt0/kux tqjulipx‘Ena/yu. Tlaya’ atkLa’x ka qix: ikani‘m wiXt 
are hired young men. Good they makeit and that canoe also 

tlaya’ aqia’x. Onua/LEma aqa/ilax. 
good itis made. Paint it is done to it. 
Ma/nix giLa’/Xawok aLOo/mEqtx aqd’/tXEmitk uLa/XEmatk g6 
When aman haying a guar- dies it is placed his baton at 


dian spirit 
qix: ikani’m. Ma/nix La/qéwam aLO/mEqtx aqLxé/nx‘ax La/XEmatk 
that canoe. When a shaman dies it is placed his baton 
go qix: ikani‘m. QuL aq@/wiX uL@a/anaLaLa go g0’qxdiamé qix: 
at that canoe. Hang up it is done his hea: claws at its stern that 
rattle 


ikani‘m. Ma/nix i La’gilx‘EmalalEma La’qéwam, quL aqia/wix 
canoe. When his shell rattle a shaman, hang up __sit is done 
iLa/gilx‘EmalalEma. Ma/nix 0/Xué La/a La’/qéwam, a/lta kolEXi 
his shell-rattle. When many his chil- a shaman, now far into the 
dren woods 


aqLo/kyx La/Xematk. A’ka wiXt uLa/anaLaLa kd/IEXi aqo/kqx. 
it is carried his baton. Thus also his rattle far into the it is carried. 
woods 


Ma/nix Lt!0/xoyal aL0/mEqtx aqawik;é@’/ktuwklax La/kjéckEla go 
When a brave dies it is put on top of a stick his healt dress at 


igé/mXatk. Ma/nix iLa/gilx‘EmalalEma Lt;0’xoyal, quL aqa/wix go 
canoe burial. When his shell rattle the brave, hangup itisdone at 

ikani’m. Ma/nix L‘a/gil aLO/‘mEqtx, a/mkXa-y- uLa/q;@éLxap quL 

canoe. When a woman dies, only her ee hang up 
aqa/wix go igé/mXatk. 
itisdone at the canoe burial. 

Ma/nix Laq aqtE’Lxax Laxigé’xo-il, LgOLé’IEXEmk Laq aLktE’Lxax, 

When oe it is done the coe den- a@ person take he did them, 
0 alia, 0 


aqLa/watdx LgoLéJEXEmkK. Ma/nix aqix‘EnEm0’sXEmx iLa’/k‘em Xatk 
he is killed the person. When it is made fun of it his canoe burial 
Lmé/mElost, atcila’xo-ix'itx, ma/nix néket aLkto’/tx La‘ktema qo’/La 
a dead one, he learns about it, if not hegivesthem his dentalia that 
away 


qLx‘EnEmMO/cXEm Lmé/mElost ka  aquLa/watéx. Ma/nix 0/Xo0é 
the one who made fun of him the dead one then he is killed. If many 
aLkto’tx La‘kteéma ka naket aqLa/watox. 


he gives dentalia then not he is killed. 
them away 


Ma/nix aLo/mEqtx La/Xa Lka/nax, a/lta Lia/xauyam aLé’/xElax 
When it dies his child a chief, now its poverty comes to be 
on it 
é/Lamxte. Alta aLkto/’lXamx La/cdlal: “Tea lx0d/ya god-y- éXt 
his heart. Now he says tothem____ his relatives: ‘‘Come we will go to one 
é1Xam go Lé/Xat Lka/nax.” ELamxte t!aya’ qitkla’x0. Alta atge/ix 
town to one chief.” His heart good itwillbemade. Now they go 
télx-Em go-y- 6Xt él Xam. ALO/nike aqtk’/tElotx t!é’Eltgéu, 0/kunim 
people to one town. Three _ are given him slaves, canoes 
aqa/tHlotx. Tkté/‘ma aqth/tElotx. O/’Xué tkté/ma aqtk’tHlotx. 
are given him. Dentalia are given him. Many dentalia are given him. © 
Ka/nauweé aLkta/witx La/‘colal qo’ta tkté’ma, qaX okuni’m. Cmdket 
All he distributes them his rela- those dentalia, those _—_ canoes. Two 
among them tives 


ka cEla/itiX atcexéleé‘madx. Ma/nix néket aqta/witx tkté’ma g0- y- 


only slaves he keeps them. When not theyaregivento dentalia at 
him 


CHINOOK DEATH. 255 


ext e1Xam ka a/Ita nOxd/maqtx. O/Xuitike aqtdté/nax té/lx-Em, 
one town and now ._ they fight. Many are killed people, 

ka a/Ita okoma’La-it naxa‘/x. Ma/nix aLo/mEqtx La/icX qd’/La 
- and now feud it is. When he dies his relative that 
kLkto’tx tkté’ma, aLgo/xuptet!ax La/colal, aLo/ix wiXt gd qigo 
the one who dentalia, he calls them together his relatives, he goes again to where 
_ gives away 


a/nqaté aLktn’telotx tkté/ma. A/Ita wiXt @ka aqLa/x. Aqtn/tHlot 


before he gavethemtohim dentalia. Now again thus itisdone. They are given 
tle‘Eltgéu, aqtH’/tElot tkté’ma, okuni’m aqa/tElotx. Tlaya’ né/xax 
slaves, they are given dentalia, canoes are giventohim. Good gets 
é/Lamxte. 
his heart. 
Ma/nix aL0/mEqtx LgakjEma/na. A’Ita a/yate!a né/xElax é@/Lamxte. 
When he dies a chief. Now his sickness is on it his heart. 
A‘lIta aLkto/kux La/colal. Nugodgé’/staq;oamx. AqLa/watéx Lka/nax 
Now they tell his relatives. They go to war. He is killed a chief 


go-y- €Xt ita/1Xam. 
at one their town. 
Ma/nix aLkje’ténax LgodLéIEXEmK, aqLo1Xam_ Lq;éy6/qxut, 
When he has killed one @ person, it is said to an old man, 
giLa/Xaw6k Lq;éyo’qxut: “ Mai‘ka miaxo’tckia.” A/‘Ita aLkLo/cgam 
having a guard- an old man: “You work over him.” Now he takes it 
jan spirit 
Lqa/LXatcX Lq;éyd’qxut. A/‘lta L*a/teau aLqcela/kox 0/La 
| 
coal the old man. Now grease he mixes it that 
Lqa/LXateX. ALKLE’tElax gd Leta‘xdst. ALga/tElax okuk;ué'tik. 
coal. He puts it on on his face. He puts it on eiicoatine et cedar 
ark. 


Iuk La‘towit kjau aLkLE’tElax L‘ué/lOL, id/kuk wiXt kj;au, go 
Here [at his legs tied it is done cedar bark, here [un- also tied, at 
ankles] der knees] 


La/pote wiXt kjau’kjau. Qo’/nEmi aLa/o-ix niket aLkLa/ametx 
his arms also tied. Five days not he drinks 
[wrists] 

Ltcug, néket aLao’ptitx, néket aLO/La-itx, gua/nEsum aL0O/tXuitx. 
water, not he sleeps, not he lies down, always he stands. 

Polakli aLgo’cgewalEmx; aLkciLo’/tElkEma-itx cE’qoalala aqcé/LOtelk ; 
At night he walks about; he whistles much bone whistles _ he whistles; 

é/nxéaxul aLgia/xolkma-itx gaLa/kjaukjau. Cka wax né/ktcukté. 

he says 4 4 & he always says the murderer. And onthenext it gets day. 
morning 


Qoii/‘nEmi aLa/o-ix niket aLxEmé/nagux. A/Ita tex'l aLkLomé’/nagux 
Five hissleeps not he washes his face. Now then he washes his face 
Lqjeyo’qxut. Laq aqLE/Lxax q0/La Lqa/LXatcX. Laq aqé/Lax 
the old man. Take off he does it that coal. Take off itis done 
e/Lamnukt gaLa/kjaukjau. Aqa’/tElax Onuwa’/LEma gaLa’k; auk; au. 
his blackened face the murderer. It is put on him red paint the murderer. 
Menx: Lqa/LXatceX aqex'bla/kux. La/xka wiXt qd/La Lq;éyd’/qxut 
A little coal is mixed. That again that old man 
aLga/tElax onuwa/LEma. Ana’ LE‘/k:ala Laqjéyo’/qxut, ana’ Lea/gil 
he puts it on him red paint. Sometimes man old person, sometimes woman 
Lqjeyo’qxut. La/qlaq aqLE’Lxax qo/La L‘ué/loL, qo/La k; au’k; au 
old person. Take off it is done that cedar bark, that tied 
qLE’tEla-ut, A/Ita itja/lEqEma kjau’kjau aqgé/tElax go La/pote k;a 
being to him. Now buckskin straps tied they are to his arm and 
go La‘owit. A‘Ita aqLE’/lémx tLtcuq gd qui/nEMé aLA/o-ix 
to his feet Now he is given food water at fifth his sleep 
gaLa/kjaukjau. A/‘Ita aqa‘tElotx o’egan LkualtE’/meta. Alta 
the murderer. Now he is given abucket out of which be drinks. - Now 
aqgéxtEla’max ikjé/wulklqL. Qia/x Lé/el néxa/x, nixLE/lx, tex‘ 
it is cli matll it food. If black it gets, it is burned, then 
is burne 


So 1 & Go - 


10 


11 


13 


©. GO. “| 


9 
ad 


“BUREAU OF 
256 DEATH. ETHNOLOGY 


agiLE’ltemx. LOtX ka aLgia/x. Qoiéi/nEmi aLgia/wulax ka kapr’t. 


he is given it to He then he eats. Five times he swallows and enough. 
eat. stands 
LOnLa/Li  aLa/o-ix, ka wiXt 4’gon Onuwa/LEma aqa/tElax. A/Ita 
Thirty his sleeps, and again another red paint is put on him. Now 
at!o’kti onuwa/LEma. A/Ita aLgo/k x uLaé/Xak;étik kj;a-y- uLa/egan 
good red paint. Now he carries it his head ring and his bucket 
go kca‘xali-y-e/maktcX. QuL aLga/wix g0-y- a/ap @/makteX. Niiket ° 
to ontopof a spruce tree. Hang he does it on top of spruce. Not 
qa’nsix: aqa/Lxaméeéx gaLa/k;auk;au, ma/nix aLXLxE/lEmax. Niiket 
anyhow the people eat in the murderer, when he eats. Not 


his company 


qansi’x aL0/La-itx aLXxLxE/lEmax, gua/nsum aLo/tXuitx ma/nix 
anyhow he sits he eats, always he stands when 
aLXLXxE/lEmax. Ma/nix aLO/La-itx ka @Xt iLa‘owit aLextecawa/txu-itx 
he eats. When he sits and one his leg he kneels on one leg 
gaLa’‘kjaukjau. Niaket qansi’x aLkLo/ketx Lkjacke gaLa‘/k;auk;au. 
the murderer. Not anyhow he looks at it a child the murderer. 
Niket qansi’x aLkta/qamitx té/lx‘-Em noxo-iLxE/lEmax. 
Not anyhow he sees them people they eat. 
Ma/nix aL0/mEqtx L‘a/kil La/k-ikala LE/pLtau aLxa’/x. A/Ita 
When he dies a woman her husband a widow she becomes. Now 
aLoix go k*ca/la @/qxéL. E/XtEmaé md/keté aLa/o-ix, é/XtkEmaé 
she goes to upriver acreek. Sometimes twice her sleeps, sometimes 
ée/Xté aLa/o-ix. ALE/X’0tx. LOnLa/L LtaLa’‘ma neket aLgi/ax 
once her sleep. | * She bathes. Thirty days not she eats it 


ixge/wal. H/ka wiXt niket akLe/tqamt Lk; acke, naiket akLE/tqamt 
fresh food. Thus also not she sees it a child, not she sees him 

ge‘Latc!a. Ka/nauwé LtaLa’/ma aLx’d’/toLa-itx. ALxéné/nago-itx 
a sick one. Every day she always bathes. She rubs on herself 


gé/tak; EsEma go-y- @/LaLta, Niiket qa’nsix: it; 0/kti iLa/ok L&n/pLau; 


goodsmelling things on her body. Not anyhow a good blanket a widow; 
ia’‘qjatxala iLa/ok gua/nsum. EXt igé/taq néket qa/nsix: he/he 
its badness her blanket always. One year not anyhow laugh 
aLxa/x. Qia/x aLkLo1Xam La/pL’au: “Alta it!0/kti @’xa @/mémxte! 
she does. If he says to her her dead “ Now good makeit your heart! 


husband’s 
relative: 


TeEmucga/ma imé/pL’au,” a/Ita niLx'Lxa/nagdx it!o/kti iLa/ok. 


He willtake you yourdead husband’s now she puts it on good her 
brother,” blanket. 


Ma/nix naket id’/Lqté LE’pL’au, ka gua/nEsum heé’/hé aLxa/x ka 
When not long widow, and always laugh shedoes and 
néket it!o/kti né/xax é/tamxtec La’pL’onan. Ma/nix §ai‘aq 
not good get their hearts her dead husband's When quick 
relatives. 
aLolé/mXa-itx LE/pL’au ka aqLo/gux qLa’/qéwam, tqé/wam aq La’x 
she marries a widow then he is asked a shaman, sent is Tae to 
disease er 


LE/pL’au. ALO/mEqtx. Mané’x La’Xa LE’pL’au, iLand’/kstX La’Xa, 

the widow. She dies. If her child a widow, its smallness her child, 

ka niket id/Lqté ka aLkLO/lEXamx La’pl’au: “T!a’/ya @’xa 

and not long and he says to her her dend husband’s ‘'Good_ eg 
relative: i 


é/mémxte;” nau/itka t!aya’ né/xax @’/Lamxte. 
your heart;”’ indeed good gets her heart. 


Translation. 


When a person dies who has many relatives, much property, and 
many slaves, his relatives tie [dentalia] to his body. Two young men 
are selected to prepare the corpse. If [the deceased] had a good canoe, 


CHINOOK DEATH—TRANSLATION. 257 


he is placed into it and itis put up. It is painted and two holes are 
made initsstern. The people go down to the beach and wash and comb 
themselves. They cut their hair—men, women, and children. After 
they have cut their hair, they take other names. Women, men, and 
children change their names. Then the dentalia of the deceased are 
- distributed. His relatives take them as well as his slaves and canoes. 
If the deceased liked one of his relatives [particularly] he would say: 
“He shall take my wife after I am dead.” If he had two wives he speaks 
in this way to two persons. Now the women are taken to his relatives. 
When a woman loves her husband and she is near her death, she will 
_ say to her elder sister: ‘* Your brother-in-law shall marry you;” or she 
may Say so to her younger sister. When an old man dies and his widow 
is young, she is taken to his younger brother. In the same way [when 
and old woman dies and her widower is young, he is given his wife’s 
younger sister]. 

When there is a chief, he takes the [deceased chief’s name a long time 
after the death of the latter]. His relative takes his name. Two peo- 
ple are told to name him. Now two people give him the name. They 
_are given much property [for performing this service]. This is done 
when a man, a woman, or a child is named. After a year the corpse is 
cleaned. Two young men are hired, who also rearrange the canoe and 
paint it. 

When a man dies who has a guardian spirit, his baton is placed next 
to the canoe. When a shaman dies, his baton is placed next to the 
canoe. His rattle of bear claws is hung on to the stern of the 
canoe. When he had a rattle made of shells, it is hung in the same 
place. When a shaman has many children, his baton is carried far into 
the woods. His rattle is. carried there also. When a brave dies, his 
headdress is placed on top of a pole near his canoe burial. When he 
had a shellrattle, it is hung on to the canoe. When a woman dies, only 
- her coat is hung on the canoe burial. 

When anybody takes the dentalia away from a corpse, the person 
who took them is killed. When anybody makes fun of a canoe burial, 
and [the relatives of the deceased] learn about it, he must give away 
many dentalia, else he is killed. If he gives away many dentalia he 
is not killed. 

When the child of a chief dies, he becomes very sad. He says to his 
relatives: ‘Let us go to the chief of that town.” The chief tries to 
please him. Now the people go to another town. Then he is given 
three slaves, canoes, and dentalia by the chief whom he visits. He 
receives many dentalia. He distributes all these dentalia and canoes 
among his relatives. He keeps only two slaves. If [the chief of] that 
town does not give him any dentalia they fight. Many people are 
killed, and now a feud originates. When a relative [of the chief] who 
has given dentalia dies, he assembles all his relatives and goes to the 


EV. T—20. i 


258 DEATH. Se 


ETHNOLOGY 


man whom he had given dentalia. Now the same is done [as before]. 
They give him slaves, dentalia, and canoes. His heart becomes glad. 

When a chief dies, his relatives are sad. They speak to each other 
and go to war. They kill the chief of another town. 

When a person has been killed, an old man who has a guardian spirit 
is asked to work over the murderer. The old man takes coal and mixes 
it with grease. He puts it on to the face [of the murderer]. He gives 
him a head ring of cedar bark. Cedar bark is also tied around his 
ankles and knees and around his wrists. For five days he does not 
drink water. He does not sleep, and does not lie down. He always 
stands. At night he walks about and whistles on bone whistles. 
He always says i i i. For five days he does not wash his face. Then 
on the next morning the old man washes his face. He takes off that 
coal. Heremoves the black paint from his face. He puts red paint 
on his face. <A little coal is mixed with the red paint. The old man 
puts this again on to his face. Sometimes this is done by an old man, 
sometimes by an old woman. The cedar bark which was tied to his 
legs and arms is taken off and buckskin straps are tied around his arms 
and his legs. Now, after five days he is given water. He is given a 
bucket, out of which he drinks. Now food is roasted for him, until it 
isburned. Whenitis burned black it is given to him. He eats standing. 
He takes five mouthsful, and no more. After thirty days he is painted 
with new red paint. Good red paint is taken. Now he carries his 
head ring and his bucket to a spruce tree and hangs it on top of the 
tree. {Then the tree will dry up.] People never eat in company of a 
murderer. He never eats sitting, but always standing. When he sits 
down [to rest] he kneels on one leg. The murderer never looks at a child 
and must not see people while they are eating. 

When a woman’s husband dies she becomes a widow. Then she goes 
up the river. [There she stays] sometimes one day, sometimes two 
days. She bathes. For thirty days she does not eat fresh food. She 
also does not look at a child or ata sick person. She bathes every 
day. She rubs her body with sweet-smelling herbs. She never wears 
a good blanket. Her blanket is always bad. For one year she must 
notlaugh. Then her dead husband’s relatives tell her: ‘‘ Now be glad; 
your brother-in-law will marry you;” then she puts on a good blanket. 
When she laughs shortly after becoming a widow, her husband’s rela- 
tives are not pleased. When she marries again quickly, they ask a 
shaman to send disease to her and she dies. When a widow has a 
child which is small, her dead husband’s relatives say to her soon: 
““Now be glad,” and, indeed, she gets glad. 


~~ e 


WHALING. 


GiLa’peoyi, ma/nix Ljap aLgia/x é@’/kolé, aqLo/lXamx Lqjoa/lipX: 


The people of when find they doit a whale, he is told a youth: 
Sealand, 

“Amxkle‘tegum.” Ma‘nix 0/Xoéetike Ljap  atgia’x é’kolé: 
‘Go and tell them.” When many find they do it a whale: 
“Amxkle‘tegum god ilxa/lEXam.” Ma/nix aLa/kiLau, aqLo’lXamx: 

_ “Go and tell them at our town.” When one having taboos, he is told: 
“Tau’/a ma Lna La/qlLaq amxiga/max.” A/‘Ita La’qLag atxé’xax iau‘a 

“There seaward going upand do,” Now goingupand they do there 
down down 

ma’/Lna. E’ka wiXt gaLa’poL, iau’a ma/Lna La/qLaq aLxé/kEmax. 

seaward. Thus also. one having co- there seaward going up and he does. 

habited the pre- down 


ceding night, 


Ma/‘nix néket La/qlaq aLxé/kEmax La/k‘iLau, ka ayuXuné’x. Niket 
When not going up and he does the one having then it dirfts away. Not 
down taboos, 


atgia‘xcx qo’tac Liap qtgia’x, aqLge’mLaitx Lka/nax. Atga/yamx 
they cut it those tind who did it, they wait for him the chief. They arrive 
ka‘nauweé té/lx‘Em g0d qix: é’kolé, ka aLgid’/egamx @/mtECX q0/La 
all people at = that whale, then he takes it a stick that 
Lka’nax. A/‘lta aqigEmgé’k-:amita-Odx qix: é@’/kolé ka/nauwé, kopii’t 
chief. Now it is measured that whale whole, vate a 
at 
La/yaqtEq, kopi’t cia‘lict. A’‘Ita aqtd’/lXamx té/lx‘Em: ‘“I0/kuk 
its head, enough [at] its tail. Now they are told the people: “Here 
mai/ka mia‘xca, i0/kuk x-ix‘i’/x: tcia/xca.” Ka’/nauwé aqiauwé/makux 
you you willcut, here this one he will cut.” All it is distributed among 
qo’tac té/lx‘Em. Ma/nix gita’q;atxaleEma txela/yuwima, ka gd 
those people. When bad ones common people, then at 
cia‘lict atkea’/xe. Ka/nauwé aqia’xe. <A/‘Ilta atgid’/kuix é@/wa 
its tail they cut it. All it is cut. Now they carry it thus 
ita‘lEXam qO’tac té/lx‘Em. Ka/nauwé atgid/k"yamx god tga/uLEma 
their town those people. All they carry it to their houses 


qix: @/kolé. E’ka(Oku) a/yaLqt @/mtEcX, moket cia/kotctk tagun 

that whale. Thus long stick, two spans others 

goa/nEm tkei. Moket cia/kotctk @/wa a’/yaxalxt, aLE/gimx Lka/nax 

five anaes Two spans thus wide, he says the chief 
wide. 


aqigumgé’k-amita-dx ita/kolé té/lx‘Em, ma/nix ia/qoa-iL iLa/‘kolé. 
it is measured their whale the people, when large their whale. 
AqLOXamx i0’/kuk LqjOp 4@’xa. Lqjo’’p aLgia/x ixLa/kolé. 
They are told here cut do. Cut they do it their whale. 
Ka/nauwe @’ka aqia’x ita‘kolé. Ma/nix moket cia’/kotetk tagun 
All thus itisdone _ their whale. When two spans others 
qoa/‘nEm tkei, ka Lpaci’ci aci/xLa-itx; qoa/nEM Laq iqauwiq;é/Lé 
tive fingers wide, then ablanket they pe enes five outside dentalia 
‘ or it; 
aci/xLa-itx. Ma/nix mdket cia/kotck @/yaLqt, ika iawa a/yaxalxct, 
suemexchnnge When two spans itslength, thus here its width, 
or it. 


ka ctula’l aci/xLa-itx ma/nix aqiumEla/lEmx. 
and aground- they exchange when it is bought. 
hog blanket for it 


Ma‘nix  gita’ckéwal Gita’ts;xéEls Ljap  atgia/x é/kolé, 
When travelers Chehalis find they do it a whale, 
259 


12 


260 WHALING. ET ENGIOEe 


aqiox0/egamx, aqioxOXuLa’tax. Ma/nix Wintciawu’ct Ljap agé/ax 
it is taken from it is asked back from When at Oysterville found it is done 
them, them. 


é/kolé, La/cka GilLa’/peo-i iLa‘kolé. Ma/nix meEnx: ma/éma 
a whale, those the people at Sea- their whale. When alittle down the river 
_ land {northward} 

Wintciawu’ct ka GiLa’XuilapaX iLa/kole. Ma/nix Ljap aLgia’x 
Oysterville and the Willapa their whale. When _ find they do it 

GiLa’ped-i ma/‘ema Wintciawu’ct ka  aqiLXaLa‘tax. Ma/nix 

the people of northward Oysterville and it is asked back. When 
Sealand 


GiLa/XuilapaX iau’a k"ca/la Wintciawu’ct Ljap aLgia’x é’kolé 
the Willapa there up ny er pea Oysterville find they doit awhale 
ward o 


aqiL XaLa/tax. 
itis asked back. 
Ma/nix aLgéBkElax qLa/kiLau, qjoa’p iuxoné/ptega, tatca 
When he sees it one having taboos, nearly it drifts ashore, behold 
wiXt ayo/Lx, ma/Lné ayod’ix. K’ka gaLa/pol, é@’/ka LqLa’xit, é’/ka 
again it goessea- seaward it goes. Thus someonewho thus amenstruating thus 


ward has cohabited the woman, 
last night, 


wiXt Laqjela’wulX, é@’/ka wiXt gaLa/kjaukjau. Ma/nix La’k-iLau, 
also agirlwhoismen- thus also a murderer. When their taboo, 


struant for the 
first time, 


néket Lga‘tckéwal @/wa tkamila‘lEq. Ma/nix aLgo/cgéwalEmx @/wa 
not they go thus beach. When they go much thus 
tkamila/leq, a/lta niket Ljap aqea’x é’kolé. A/‘Ita 0/l0 akta’‘x 
beach, now not find itis done a whale. Now hunger comes to 
them 


té1x‘Em. 
the people. 
Ma/nix god Nite; xé/Els Ljap aqia‘/x é@’kolé, ka/nauwé atgé/ix 
When at Chehalis find itisdone a whale, ali they go 
téIxseEm GiLaélam, GiLa’/XuilapaX, atgiumla’‘lEmamx é’kole. 
the people the Nisal, the Willapa, they go to buy it the whale. 
A‘ka wiXt La’peo-i ma/nix Ljap aLgia’x é’kolé, ka/nauwé 
Thus also Sealand when find they do it a whale, all 
Gita’te; xeEls atgiumla’‘IEmamx é’kole. 
Chehalis they go to buy it whale. 
Ma/nix 0/10 akta’x té/lx‘Em, ma/nix iLa/yuLEma LgoLé/lEXEmk, 
When hunger comesto_ the people, when his supernatural a person, 
them helper 


iau’a maLna’ nid/LEma, alta aLgigE’ItcxEmx é/kolé. Nikcet 
there seaward where his supernat- now he sings for it a whale. Not 
ural helper is, 


aLO/p!x qLkLa/xElt, néaket aLo’p!x Lqjoa'lipX,  taua/Ita 
she enters amature woman, not he enters a young man, else 
aLkL‘EIkElax LE/ktexEm kaLa/pol. A’/ka wiXt qLkLa/xeElt, taua/Ita 
he sees it he sings man who cohab- Thus also. amature woman, else 
ited the last 
night. 
aLka/xitx gd wé/wuLé kLE’ktcxEm L‘a/gil. Ta/mac tqjeyo’qtike 
she gets men- in the interior of the singer a woman. Only old people 
struant the house 


nuxoexo/ténema-itx, ta/mac  tqa/cociniks  nuxoéx0/ténema-itx, 
they help sing, only boys they help sing, 
tqLapLxiXEna/yu. Qoi/nEmi aLa/o-ix kLE‘/ktexEm. AqL0o’gux 
girls. Five his sleeps singing. He is sent 
LqoalipX: “Amgé/ketam go ma/Lné.” Qo’aé/nEmi aqLO’guX, a/lta 
a youth: “Go and look at seaward.” Five times he is sent, now 
Liap aLgi/ax. Nau‘itka iuquna‘itix: é/kolé. Ma/nix kaLa‘pol aLo’p!x 
find he does it. Indeed it drifts a whalh. When aman whohas _ enters 


cohabited the 
last night 


—_ 


BOUr WHALING. 261 


BOAS 


go qo’ta t!oL qd/La qLE/ktexam, nau/i kj@ aLxa/x, ayuwa/xitx qix: 


in that house that singing, atonce nothing it gets, it flees that 
iLa/yuLEma. A’ka wiXt LKLa‘xit. Ma/‘nix aLo’p!x LkLa/xit nau’‘i 
his supernatural Thus also amenstruant When she enters amenstruant at once 

helper. woman. woman 

kja abLxa’x kiLeE/ktexam. Pat @’/pgon gqgod’La_ kLE‘ktcxam. 
nothing it gets the singer. Full down that singer. 
ALgid/tXEmitx @/mtEcX g6 we’gwa, i0/Lqté @’mtEcX. ALE’kimx: 
_ He places upright a stick at _— the ocean, a long stick. He says: 
“Yukpa’ iuXuné’ptega é/kole.” Nau‘itka ia/xkati ayd/Xuniptckax, 

‘Here it will drift ashore the whale.” Indeed there it drifts ashore, 
ma/nix qui/nMEmi ayad/éxé aLkE/ktcxEmx. Ina‘kital iLa’xal q0d’/La 

when five times his sleeps he sings. Iké’tal his name that 


jaua’ ma/Lna giLa’/Xawok. 
there seaward having a guardian spirit. 

Ma‘nix La/k;élak é@’/kolé Ljap atgia’/x, ma’/nix amdo’kctike, Lxoa’p 
When Clatsop awhale find they do it, when two, hole 
aLgia’x, kjau aLga/elax O0/kuéma; ma/nix néket o/kuéma ka-y- 
theymakeit, tie they do it to it a strap; when not a strap then 
ogo’cil. Akoapi’tike La/‘cdlal, koapa’t kjau aLgia’x. A/Ita atgia‘xe 
kelp. As many his relatives, as many tie he does it. Now they cut it 
ée‘kolé. E/xauwé atgia’/xc. A/Ita aqL0o’gux Lé/Xat, aLxkLé/tegomx 
the whale. Much they cut it. Now they send him one, he goes to tell them 
é’wa-y- 6/l1Xam. A/‘Ita atgé/ix té/lx‘Em. A/‘Ita atgia’/xcx ka/nauwé 

thus the town. Now they go the people. Now they cut it all 
téIx‘-Em. Ma/nix k;au ake’x 0/kuema god qix: é@’kolé, naket qa/nsix 
people. When tied it is a strap at that whale, not anyhow 
Lqjup aqia’x ia/xkaté. Qia’x aLO/yamx q0/La-y- 0/kuéma aqa’tElax, 
cut it is done there. ibe he arrives at that strap it is ae for 
im, 
tex'l aLgia/xcx gd qaX O0’/kuéma k-;au a/élaut. Mané’x Lq;op aqa’x 
then he cuts at that strap tied it is. When cut itis 
uLa/kéma LgoLéeEXEmk, Lxald/‘ima Lqjop aLga‘x, ka nuXuiga’/yax 
his strap a person, another one cut he does it, then they fight 
télxEm. Ta’cga uXuma/cgapXite, ta/cga qix: é’gigula é’kolé 
the people. Those they come too late, those that under it the whale 
ka/nauwé atgia‘xe té/lx-Em. Ka/nauwétike q6/tac té/lx-Em tkilé/mak 
all they cutit the people. All those people sell 
atgia‘x ita/kolé. la/qoa-iL, kapa’t ia/qoa-iL; niket Lqjup akée’txo-il. 
they doit their whale. Large, enough large; not cut it is done. 
Tanu‘kstX, ka ianu‘kstX. Ma/nix ianu’kstX a/Ita niakect pat 
Small, then small. When small then not very 
aqiumEla‘lEmx. Ma/nix ia/qoaiL ka L&aXt Lpaci/ci aci/xLa-itx. 
it is bought. When large then one blanket they exchange. 
Mane’x Leta‘xélalak L‘a‘kil ka _  tcéx uya’giLqjup’ é’kolé 
When strong a woman then several its cuts whale 
aqiLgEmo’ktix aLge/ctxoniLx. GO aLo/nike té/lx‘Em aLgugigé/cgamx; 
she is paid she carries them. To three people she helps them; 


ana’ ala/ktike =té/lx‘-Em = =ma/nix  Leta/xé@lalak Lea/kil. E’ka 
sometimes four people when strong a woman. Thus 
Lqjoa‘lipxy wiXt, ma/nix aLXeElgé’cgeElitx, aLgé/ctxonitx tcéx 
a youth also, when he helps, he carries on his back several 
uya/giLqjup é@/kolé aqiLgEmo/ktiX. Kawi/X La‘kjélak a/nqaté 
its cuts whale he is paid. Early the Clatsop already 
nuxo-iLXE1Emax. Ma/‘nix gatElo’/pameé LgoLéeJEXEmK 
they eat. W hen jejune a person 
ka acxauwikLé‘tegumx nuxd/wax, ska mia/nxi aLxE/ngux 
and they go to tell them they run, and a little he runs 
qo/‘La kLO’/pame - kLkéx LgoLéeJEXEMK  aLextega/nEmtegux. 
that jejune being person he gets faint. 


bo 


m oo 


B 
262 WHALING. dep Sd 


ALxactB’luwaql’ax. Alta aLgiXEm6’/ckapamx @’/kolé. <A/lta naket 


They leave him behind. Now he arrives too late at the whale. Now not 

é/xaué iLa/kolé. Aqid/tetXumx, text aLd/yamx. Gua/nEsum 

much his whale. It is finished, then he arrives. Always : 
uLa/kima kja uLa/qéwéqxé; cx'Ela/wat uLa/kima k;a uLa/qeweqxé 

their strap and their knife; they are tied their strap and their knife 

together : 
kja La/ckuic La/k;élak. Ka/nauwetike @’ka. 
and _ their mat the Gliieap: All thus. 
Translation. 


When the people of Sealand find a whale they tell a youth to go to 
the town and to inform the people. A person who has to observe taboos 
is asked to go up and down [in his canoe] below the whale. Then he 
goes up and down below the whale. Thus also a person who cohabited 
the preceding night goes up and down below the whale. If no person 
who has to observe taboos would go up and down, it would drift away. 
Those who found the whale do not cut it; they wait for the chief. All 
the people reach the whale. Then thechief takes a stick and measures 
the whale from the head to the tail. Then he tells the people: ‘You 
will cut here; you will cut there.” Itis distributed among those peo- 
ple. The common people cut from the tail end. When it is all ent, it 
is carried to the town into the houses. When the whale is measured, 
the chief tells the people to make the [measuring] sticks two spans 
and one hand width long, if the whale is large [; two spans wide if the 
whale is smaller]. The people are told: ‘“ You cut here,” and they cut 
the whale. Everything is done this way. A cut two spans and one 
hand width large is exchanged for one blanket, or for a string of den- 
talia five shells longer than a fathom. When a cut two spans large 
is sold it is exchanged for a ground-hog blanket. 

When travelers from Chehalis find a whale it is taken back from 
them. If it is found at Oysterville, it belongs to the people of Sea- 
land; when it is found north of Oysterville, it belongs to the Willapa. 
When the people of Sealand find a whale north of Oysterville, it is 
claimed by the Willapa. If the Willapa find one south of Oysterville, 
it is claimed by the people of Sealand. 

When a person who has taboos sees a whale nearly drifting ashore, 
it will drift out to sea again. This happens with one who has cohab- 
ited the preceding night, with a menstruating woman, with a girl who 
is emenstruant for the first time, and with a murderer. People who 
have taboos do not go to the beach. When they go often to the beach, 
no whale will be found and the people get hungry. 

When a whale is found in Chehalis all the Nisal and Willapa go to 
buy whale meat. When a whale is found in Sealand, all the Chehalis 
go to buy its meat. 

When the people are starving, a person who has a supernatural 
helper of the sea sings to bring a whale. No woman who has her regu- 
lar menses enters, no young man; else a person might see the singing 


CHINOOK _ WHALING—TRANSLATION. 263 


who has cohabited the preceding night. Therefore, also, no woman 
must enter, as she might become menstruant in the house where they 
sing. Only ald people, boys, and young girls help sing. For five 
days he sings. Then a youth is sent and told to look seaward. Five 
times he is sent; then, indeed, he finds a whale adrift. When a man 
who has cohabited the preceding night enters the house in which the 
‘Singing goes on, the supernatural helper vanishes at once. Thus also 
when a menstruant woman enters. The singer is covered with down. 
He places a pole upright on the beach and says: ‘Here a whale will 
drift ashore,” and, indeed, it drifts ashore there after he has sang five 
days. The name of the supernatural helper of the sea is Iké’tal. 
When the Clatsop find a whale, and there are two people, they make 
holes {in the skin] and tie their straps to it. If they have no strap 
they take kelp. Each ties as many straps to it as he has relatives. 
Then they cut the whale. They cut much. Now they send one man 
to bring word to the town. Then the people go and all cut it. They 
will not cut where a strap has been tied to it. When the man arrives 
for whom the strap has been tied to the whale, he cuts at that place. 
If one man cuts at the strap of another one, they will fight. Those who 
come last take the lower side of the whale. All those people sell their 
whale meat. The pieces are not cut—when they are large they are left 
large, when they are small they are left small. Small ones are not 
expensive. Large ones are exchanged for a blanket. If there isa 
strong woman who can carry several cuts, she does so and is paid [for 
her services]. Sometimes she helps three people; when she is strong 
she may help four people. Thus also is a youth paid who helps the 
people carrying several cuts of meat. The Clatsop always eat very 
early. When a person has not yet eaten and they learn [that a whale 
has stranded] and they run there, he gets faint and is left behind. He 
comes too late to the whale and finds that only little is left. He may not 
arrive until the cutting is finished. The Clatsop always carry their 
straps and knives, which are tied together, and their mats. All do thus. 


to 


ELK HUNTING. 


Ma/nix aLgia/wat6x La/xékLax imd/lak g6d kula’/yi, ma/‘nix 
When he has killed it a hunter an elk at far, when 
@kala  imd’lak aLgia/wat6x iLa/Lélamiuks igod’n. amd/ketike 
male elk he has killed it ten others two 
atgiugd’lEmamX. Ma/nix éé/kil im6/lak aLgia/wat6x, akstuXtké/nike 
they go to fetch it. When female elk he has killed it, eight 
atgidgoEmamx. Ma/‘nix mdoket atLgiuté/nax La/x@ékLax ka 
they go to fetch it. When two he has killed them a hunter then 
OXO/étike atgé@/ix, atgiugaEmamx imo’lak. Ma/nix é@/Xaué 
many they go, they go to fetch it the elk. When many 
aLgiuté/nax Laé/xékLax ka ia/xka gd aqid/kcEmx ma/Lxdlé 
he has killed them the hunter then that there it is dried inland. 
Né@’x-cadx, texi nuxd’/gux. Ka/nauwé = aqidwé/magux  qo’tac 
It is dry, then they go home. All it is distributed among those 
télx‘Em. ALgid/magux iLa’k;éténax kLa/xékLax. 
people. He distributes it | what he has killed the hunter. 
Mané’x Lqla/xElt L*a/gil, naiket Lgitega’/liL a’yaqtq, tga’/k-iLan. 
When menstruating a woman, not phe tales it its head, it is her taboo. 
always 


Niket iLxé/tElax ia/mEmkunEmatk Lé£a/gil, La/mkXa_ LE/kala 
Not she eats it its tongue a woman, only aman 

aLgia’x. Niiket ca/ea LktEtx go tia/poté tia’/XamokXuk. Go2 kula’yi 

he.eats it. Not break they doit at its forelegs its bones. There far 

aqto/kyx tkam6/kXuk, taua/lta aLgoé/kElax LkLa/xit tkamo/kXuk. 

they are car- the bones, else she sees them a menstruating the bones. 

ried ‘ woman 

Mané’x aLkta/x tqe’d/cutk LkLa/xit, pax aLxa/x kLa/xéqLax. Ma/‘nix 

When she eats hoofs amenstru- unlucky he gets the hunter. When 
them ating woman, 


aLkeikLka/nanukLx imolak a/yaqtq LqLa/xit, 6’Laaliqet na/Lxalax. 
she steps across it often an elk its head amenstruating dropsy comes to be on 
woman, her. 


A’‘ka 1Lq;éla/‘wulX. Niiket Lgé/tqamt imd/lak, 6/Laaliqct na/Lxalax. 
Thus agirl whoismenstru- Not shelooks at it the elk, dropsy comes to be on 
ant for the first time. her. 


Ma/nix aLx'cE/mgEmax La/xékLax, néket qa/nsix aL0/Lx La/Xa. 


When he is unsuccessful the hunter, not [anyJbow itgoesto his child. 
the water 


Ma/nix aLo/Lx La/Xa, alta é/Latc!a nixa’/LElax, nau‘i aLO’/mEqtx. 
When it goesto hischild then itssickness comes to beonit, at once it dies. 
the water 


Ma/nix aLxugoma/q;jauwox ka cgapE/t noxd’/x La/‘aa kja 


When he goes hunting then motionless they are hischildren and 
La‘kikal. Niket qa/xéwa aLO/ix La/‘k-ikal La/xékLax. Ma/nix 
his wife. Not {any ]where she goes his wite the hunter. When 
acoxoe/nx‘ax La/a, ka Lé/Xat é@/Latc!a ne’LxElax tLa’Xa 
they make noise his chil- then one its sickness comestobeonit his child 

dren, 
ma/nix aLx'cE/mgEnax. 
when he is unsuccessful. 
Translation. 


When a hunter has killed a male elk far away, then twelve men go to 


fetch it. When he has killed a female elk, eight go to fetch it. When 
264 


CHINOOK ELK HUNTING—TRANSLATION. 265 


BOAS 


a hunter has killed two elks, many people go to fetch it. When he has 
killed many, then it is dried in the woods [it is not carried away]. The 
people go home when it is dry, and the hunter distributes the meat 


- among all the people. 


A menstruating woman must not take the head of an elk. Women 
do not eat the tongue; only men eat it. They do not break the bones 
of the forelegs. These are carried far away, else a menstruating woman 
might see them. When such a woman eats the feet and hoofs, the 
hunter will be unlucky. When she steps over an elk’s head, she will 
be sick with dropsy. Just soa girl who has just reached maturity. 
She does not look at an elk, else she will be sick with dropsy. When 
a hunter is unsuccessful, his child must not go near the water. When 
it goes near water, it will fall sick and die at once. When he goes 
hunting, his wife and children sit motionless. His wife must not go 
anywhere. When his children make noise, one of them will fall sick if 
the hunter is unsuccessful. 


= 


THE POTLATCH. 


Ma/nix ikjoand/mEm aLgia/x Lka/nax, a/Ita atgé/ix, aqtd/kux 
When potlatch he makes it a chief, then they go, _ they are sent 
a/k; alaktike, é/Xtkmaé-y- a/kj aquinumike, @/XtEmaé-y- a/kj atxEmike. 
four in a canoe, sometimes five in a canoe, sometimes six in a canoe. 
Ma/nix giLa’Xawok, kadi’x: aqLo/gux. Qj;oa’p atgia/xdmx é@/1Xam 
When aman havinga incompany heis sent. Neat they reach a town 
guardian spirit, 
qo‘tac aqt0/kux, aLE’/ktcxEmx q0’La giLa/Xawok. Noxo-é/teckEma0x 
those whoare sent, he sings that one having a guardian They hear it 
spirit. 
gita’l1Xam: “O  qElXtga‘lEmam,” nugo’go-imx. Atxigéla/mamxé 
the people of “Oh, people come to fetch us,”’ they say. They land 
the town. 


qo‘tac télx‘Em qtktugd/lEmamx. Nuxo’klitegux go-y- €Xt é/leEXam, 
those people those who cane to fetch They tell to one town, 
them. 


a‘lta wiXt atgé/ix god-y-€Xt é/lEXam; ka’/nauwé té/lx‘anéma. A/Ita 
now again they go to one town; all towns. Now 
nuX0/gux. A‘Ita nuXué/tXuitegux télxam. Ta/cka qo’tac kula/yi 
they go home. Now they make themselves ready the people. They those far 
gita/lXam, ta’/cka aquguma’/La-itx. Qia’x atga/yamx, a/lta ka/‘nauwé 
people of atown, they are waited for. If they arrive, now all 
atgh’tctcax té/lx‘'am. E’/ka wiXt iau’a atgzr’tctolax, ma/nix g0 


they go down the people. Thus also there they gouptheriver, when at 
the river 


kvca‘la ikjoand’‘m aLgia/x Lka/nax. Atga/yamx g0 qigod 
up river potlatch he makes it a chief. They arrive at where 
aqtugoJEmamx. Qjoa/p atgia/xoé-y- @1Xam, ka aqax’0/yuL;Ex 
they are fetched. Near they arrive the town, and they are put side 
: by side 
okuni’m. Ka/tcEk ooma’/p aqak-a’/tqoax, @’wa notcé’qLkuitx qaX 
the canoes. In middle planks are laid on top of thus they lay themacross those 
them, 


doma’p. Ka/nauwé-y- @/ka g6 qaX OoOkuni’m. A/Ita ia/xkaté 
planks. All thus on those canoes. Now there 
noxuéna’ Xitx, aLE’ktexEmx  a/lta  giLa’Xawodk, akuapi’tike 
they dance, they sing now those having guardian as many 
spirits, 
gita’/Xaw6k, akapii’tike nugo‘texEmx. AtkLilga/mitaxoé aqto/lXamx. 
having guardian as many sing. They sing in the canoe they are told. 
spirits, 
NuXuiwa’/yutckux gd qaX ooma’p. Ka/nauwe-y- 6ta/nuwaLEma 
They dance on those planks. All their painted faces 
qo‘tae té/lx‘Em; ka/nauwe ita’pqon. Ta‘nEmcke ka‘nauwé pa/LEma 
those people; all their down. The women all full 
tkté’ma, ita/ckElal, tga‘qoxoalXta, ita’k; éLxot. Ka/nauwé tgEt; 0’kti 
dentalia their ear their hair ornaments, their necklaces. All good 
ornaments, 


tga‘oke. Ma/‘nix Lt!0/xoyal LE’/k:ala ka La/2k;éckElal, é/LamEnukt. 
= eee When a brave aman then his head ornament, his blackened face. 
ankets. 


Ma/‘nix La/qéwam LgoLé/lEXEmk ka La/Xumatk aLkLo’/kLx. 
When a conjurer person then his baton he carries it. 
Nugo’texEmx cka_ atxigkla’xé. AqL6o’lXamx Léa/gil: “ Mai‘ka 

They sing and they land. She is told a woman: Ours 
ia‘mitstkEnEma mxEla/x0.” ALE/k'imx Lé‘a/gil: “ Kj;é texEp nkéx.” 
you head dancer be.” She says the woman: ‘‘No not daring I am.” 


266 


NBOAS THE POTLATCH. 267 


Qia’x giLa’tlowil tex ia/LatstkEnkEma na/Lxalax. E’/ka Ln’k-ala, 
If one who under- then she a head dancer she gets. Thus aman, 
stands it well 


ia‘x giLa’t!owil LE’k-ala, tex:i ia/LatstkEnEma na/Lxalax. A/Ita 
? 
if one who under- aman, then he a head dancer he gets. Now 
stands it well 


-atgiuxta’maxé. Ma/nix ]4x° aLxa’x L¢a’gil, aLO/ix Lé/Xat L¢a/gil 
they enter the house When bent(her _ gets awoman, she goes one woman 
dancing. head] 


tla’‘ya aqia’x @/Laqtq. A/‘Ita aLkLgEmgé’ktix, t!a/ya aqLgia’x 
good itismade her head. Now she pays her, . good it is made 

~@/Laqtq. Ma/nix naLkemk;a/pax LgdLéeEXEmk, aqL0/cgamx 

__ her head. When he gets out of rhythm @ person, he is taken 
ma‘Lxolé, aqLOLa’/étemitx. Kapé’tike tga’/Xawo6k, kapé’tike 

‘up to the sides he is placed up there. As many those having guardian as many 
of the house, spirits, 


nugo‘texEmx. ALO/XuLj’Ex €Xt giLa/lEXam, a/Ita wiXt tgd/nike 
sing. They finish one peopleofatown, now again others 
éXt gitayJEXam wiXt @/ka. Ma/nix néket 0/Xué télx‘Em ka m6éket 
one peopleofatown again thus. When not many people then two 
tga‘IEXamema atgiuxta’max. Nux:‘ix‘auwa/Xitx. Ma/nix ta/qoa-iL 


towns they enter the house They come together. When large 
dancing. 


t!oL Lon tga/lEXamema nux-‘ix‘auwa/Xitx, é’Xti atgiuxta/max. 
house three towns they enter together, atone they enter the house 
: time dancing. 

Aqeo’gux cmdket eqjoa‘/lipx, ma‘nix manx: ka La/‘k;éwolElqL 
They are sent two youths if alittle only his food 

ik; oand/mEmM qugia’xo-il: “Tegt!o/kti mtd’ya,” aqtd/lXamx 
the potlatch the one who makes it. ‘*Good you go,” they are told 

tqjulipx‘Ena’/ya; “mtgEma/nEmama g6d = La‘icX  ikjoand/mEm 

the youths, ‘‘ fetch food at his relative the potlatch 

qugia‘xo-il.” Go é6éXt @lXam nugoma/nEMamx tq; ulipx-Ena’ya. 
the ous ne At one town they fetch food the youths. 
makes it.” 


Alta aLkt0/k"7x = La/kjéwolElqL = q60/La aqLxEma/nEmamx. 

Now they bring it to them food those who were sent to bring food. 
ALkto’k"tx = La/colal ka/nauwé; = aLkto/k"yx ~~ La‘ kj wolElqu. 
They bring it to his relatives all; they bring it to food. 

them them 
Nugo’‘texamx, wiXt atxigéla/xé. WixXt atgiuxta/maxé qd’tac 
They dance, again they land. Again they es the house those 
ancing 


axuxoma/‘nEMamx. Mané’x o1EXkul aquxoma/nEmamx, 

who were sent to bring food. When dry salmon is brought, 

quinEmike Lka/lamuke atga/qex oO/lEXkul. Atgiuxta’max tga/qcit 
five men they holditin thedrysal- They enter dancing they holdit 


their mouths mon. in their 
mouths 


qaX o‘leXkul. Mané’x  teaxalé/at, aqui/nEmike _ ita’ctxtcol 


that dry salmon. When edible roots, five they carry it 
on back 


atgiuxta‘max. Qoii/nEmi atga/o-ix uuXuiwa’/yutckuX  té/lx:am, 
they enter,dancing. Five times their sleeps they dance the people, 
a‘lta aqauwigé’qxo-imx. La‘/néwa Lka/nax aqLop!Ena’x. 
now they are given presents. First the chief is named. 
AqLo/lXamx Lé’/Xat LgdLé/lEXEmk: “Mai/ka amtdp!Ena/nEma 
He is told one person: “You go and name them 
téIx-am.” GO éXt ita/lEXam Lé/Xat Lka/nax aqLop!Ena/x. Ma/nix 
the people.” At one their town one chief he is named. When 
glya’yuL;L @/Lamxte, éa/k aLgé/LElutx q0d’/La_ kLtop!Ena/n 
liberal his heart, ablanket he gives it to him that the one wy names 
them 


té‘lx‘Em. Iqauwik;é/Lé aqé/LElotx qd/La kitop!Ena/n  té/lx-am. 


the people. Long dentalia he is given that the one eee names the people. 
; them 


bo 


me WwW bw 


10 


it 


268 THE POTLATCH. dipeieht 


EXt ita1Xam aqL0/goL;ax aqawigé/qxo-imx, wiXt é@’/gon é@/1Xam 


One their town is finished is given presents, again one more town 
aqauwige’qxo-imx. La/néwa Lka/nax aqaLE/lqEmax, aqLop!Ena/x. 
is given presents. First the chief is called, heis named. 
Ma/nix aLgiuLa‘tax La/géqo-im, a/lta m0/keti aqaLk/lgEmax. 

When he drags it his present, then twice he is called. 
Ka/nauwe-y- é@/ka; @/ka ta/nEmcke, @’/ka tka/lamuke. 
Ail thus; thus the women, thus the men. 
Nugo’go-imx gita/‘kjoanEmEm: “Nékct La/keta LguLa/ta-y- 
They say those at the potlatch: “Not anybody shoot 
okulai/‘tan.” Ma/‘nix é@/maqt atcta’x @Xt gita/lEXam, aLguLa/tax 
his arrow.” When afight he uns to one people of a town, he shoots it 
‘hem 
oLa/Xalaitan ka nux0d/maqtx té/lx‘am. Atci/xike aqtdté/nax. 
an arrow then they fight the people. Several are killed. 
Ia/nx‘ama = ékupku’p aqéauwé’makux: ta/nEmcke. Ta/mkXatike 
A fathom to short dentalia they are given as presents the women. Only they 


each 


tka/lamuke iqauwik;é@/Lé aqiauwé/makux; txela/yowema tka’/lamuke 


men long dentalia they are given as presents; common men 
ékupku’p aqiauwé/makux. Ma/nix 06/Xoeé La/ktéma Lka/nax ka 
short dentalia they are given as pres- When many his dentalia achief then 
ents. 
moketE’/mtga Lia/nx‘rama ékapku’p aLgid/magux. 
two to each fathoms toeach short dentalia he gives it to them 


as a present 
Translation. 


When a chief intends to give a potlatch, four, five, or six men are 
sent out in a canov [to invite the guests]. One man who has a guard- 
ian spirit is sent among them. When they approach a town the man 
who has the guardian spirit sings. The people of that town hear him 
and say, ‘‘Oh, we are going to be invited.” The messengers land and 
tell the peopleto come. Then they go to the next town. After having 
visited all the towns they go home. Now the people make themselves 
ready. They wait for those who live farthest away. When they arrive 


they all go down the river together. Thus they do also when a chief 


on the upper part of the river has sent an invitation. They go up the 
river together. When they reach the town to which they were invited 
they put their canoes side by side and lay planks across. This is done 
with all their canoes. Now they dance, and those who have guardian 
spirits sing. The people dance on the planks. Their faces are painted 
red, their hair is strewn with down. All the women wear their 
dentalia, their ear and hair ornaments, and their necklaces. They 
wear good blankets. Braves wear their head ornaments and their 
faces are blackened. Shamans carry their batons. They sing and 
finally land. Then they tell a woman, ‘“‘ You shall be our head dancer.” 
She replies, ‘“‘No; I do not dare to do it.” One who knows how 
to dance well is made head dancer, a man or a woman. Now they enter 
the house dancing. When a woman [while dancing] bends her head, 
another one goes and raises it. Then she pays her for having made 
her head straight. When a person gets out of rhythm, he is taken 
to the side of the house and must sit down there. All those who have 


7 


ad THE POTLATCH—TRANSLATION. 269 
, 
: 


guardian spirits sing. When the people of one town have finished, 
those of another town enter dancing. When there are not many people 
of one town, those of two towns enter together. When the house is 
large, the people of three towns will enter together. 

If the host has too little food, two youths are sent and told, ‘Go 
and ask my relatives to bring food.” The youths go to a town and 
ask the [host’s relatives] to bring food. They all come and bring food. 

They also dance on the canoes and land. They enter the house danc- 
ing. When they bring dry salmon, five men hold it in their mouths 
while they enter the house dancing. When they bring roots, five men 

carry them on their backs when they enter the house dancing. After 
the people have danced five days they receive presents. One man is 
asked [to stand near the host and] to name the people. First he names 
the chief of one town. When the host is liberal, he gives. the man who 
calls out the names a blanket. Or he is given long dentalia. After 
one town is finished, another one receives presents. Again first the 
chief is called. When he drags his present he is called back. Men as 
well as women are thus given presents. 

The people are forbidden to shoot with arrows during the potlatch. 
If a man should want to fight against the people of a town and shoot 
an arrow, then the people would fight and several would be killed. 

The women receive each a fathom of short dentalia. Only men are 
given long dentalia. Common men receive short dentalia. If a chief 
has many dentalia, then every one receives two fathoms of short den- 
talia. 


bf 


bo 


10 


11 


WAR. 


Ma/nix nugugué/saqgjoamX ka  aLuxXuila/lamX. Ma/nix 


When they go to war then they sing. When 
aqLéée/kElax L&a/wulqt, La’/xka aqLa/watdx qigd noxo’/maqtx. Ma/nix 
it is seen blood, that one is killed where they fight. When 
amo/ketike ak Loée’/kEla L*a/wulqt ta’cka aqtoté/nax. ALO/XuLEx 
two they see it blood, those two are killed. They finish it 
aLoXuila‘lam. Ma/nix aLo/Xuila/lamx aqa/xtEqoax ooma/p, 
they sing. When they sing they are put down planks, 
0/Lqta-y- ooma’p moket ina/xEmo-ix. Akopi’tike t’oxula/yuwima, 
long planks two parallel. As many warriors, 
kopii’‘tike aLu Xuila/lamx. AtkeitEna’xé. A’lta atge’x 
as many sing. They kneel. Now they go 
nugugeée’staq;oamx.  A’Ita  nuxd/maqt. Ma/nix kana/mtEmax 
they go to war. Now they fight. When both parties 
aqtoté/nax té/lx‘ram ka  aLO/xoL;ax. I0/Lqté ka _  iqagé/niak 
they are killed people then they finish, Sometimes then exchange of pres- 


ents after war 
ayo’xo-ix. Kana/mtEma iqagé/niak ay0d’xo-ix, ka ox0d/t!us nox6/x, 
it is. Both exchange of pres- it is, then peaceful they become, 
- ents after war 


Ma/nix niket t!aya’ naxa/x okuma/‘La-it, ka L*a’gil aqLo’tx g0-y- 


When not good they make it a feud, the awoman itisgiven to 
away 
éXt italEXam ka tlayé’ naxa’/x . okuma’La-it. 
one their town and good they make it the feud. 
Translation. 


Before the people go to war they sing. If one of them sees blood, 
he will be killed in battle. When two see blood, they will be killed. 
They finish their singing. When they sing, two long planks are put 
down parallel to each other. All the warriors sing. They kneel [on 
the planks]. Now they go to war and fight. When people of both 
parties have been killed, they stop. After some time the two parties 
exchange presents and make peace. When a feud has not yet been 
settled, they marry a woman to a man of the other town and they make 


peace. 
270 


HISTORICAL TALES. , 
WAR BETWEEN THE QUILEUTE AND CLATSOP. 


A'lta @’Xat igqjoa/lipx: go Tia’k;é@laké aqid’go nix’d’tam iau/a 


Now one youth at Clatsop he was sent he went to there 
bathe 

Nakot;a’t. Qoii/nEmi aya’/qxdié ka né/Xatgo. NéXatgo’, manna’ 
Nakotj at. Five times his sleeps and _he returned. He returned, seaward 

né/Xatgd iau’a tkamila/IEq. Tso’yusteé ka qjoa’p_ atci‘txamé 
he returned there beach. It got dark then nearly he reached it 

Tia’kjélaké, iau’a tstaX Tia‘kjélake. Née’/kuket @€/’wa ma/Lxolé. 
Clatsop, there around the Clatsop. He looked thus landward. 

point 
A’‘lta-y- Okuni’m ola/ox; a/Xoyé Okuni’m. “Qa’/xéwa Lx naté/mam 
Now canoes’ they lay side many canoes. ‘““Wherefrom may they came 
by side; be 
Xak oOkuni/‘m?” niXLO‘lEXa-it. ‘‘“NXta’k0.” NixkE/Lxégod iXta/‘ko. 
those canoes?” he thought. “T will turn back.” He turned Ne go 
ack. 
Alta atgia’wat téx‘Em cka paL tkamila‘leq télx‘Em. Né’k:ikct 
Now they eee people and full the beach people. He looked 
™m 
é/wa qigd ayd/yama. A’‘Ita wiXt Lgb’Lxat. té/lx‘Em. Lqj Op tgixa’xo-é. 
thus where he will go. Now also they wentdown people. Cut off they did him. 


to the beach 
A‘lta até/xLako qo‘tac té/lx‘Em. <A/yo, a’yd, a’/y6; a/lta até/xLako 
Now they surrounded those people. He he he now they sur- 
him went, went, went; rounded him 


qo'tac té/Ix‘-Em. Ka/nauweé cquil;a/muke akLo/ktean. Agqé/Ikike, 
those people. All spears they held. He was thrown, 
ats0/‘pEna kca/xalé, aqid’/kLpa iau’a ké/kXulé ka/nauwé q6d/La 
he jumped up, he was missed __ there below all those 
equiL;a/muke. “Hahi’!” atgid’‘IXam qo/Lac téIx-Em. AtkLé/luke 
spears. ‘Haha’! they said to him those people. They threw him 
iau’a k*ea/xalé qo/tac té/lx-Em. TskjEs né/xax. Aqii’/kLpa iau/a 
there up those people. Stoop he did. He was missed there 
kvea/xalé, WiXt atgid’1Xam qo’tac té/lx‘Em: “ Hahii/!” A/Ita atso/pEna 
above. Again they saidtohim those people: “Haha! !” Now he jumped 
ka/tsEk go qo’tac télx-Em. Ay0d’ipa qod’tac télx‘Em. A/Ita atigE’ta 
middle at those people. He went those people. Now they fol- 
out of lowed him 


qo‘tac téIx'Em. Qé’xtcé aquLé/luke’ax atsopEna/x kea/xali. A/Ita 
those people. Intending he was thrown he jumped up. Now 
ayo-e’taqL qo’tac télx-Em, ta’‘kB nité/mam Tia/k;élaké. K;é@ Lia/naa 
he left them those people, then he arrived at Clatsop. o his mother 
qix’ iq; 0a‘lipx, aLO/mEqtx; kj@ Lia/mama, aLO/mEqt; cka Lia/qacqac. 
that youth, she was dead; no his father, he was dead; and _ his grandfather. 
A‘lta tso’yusté ka niXatgo’mam Tia‘/kjélaké. Alta 6xoé@/nx-at 
Now evening and he came back to Clatsop. Now they stood there 
Tlilé/muke; oXuiwa’/yutcko. “Ikta mex:@Ipx‘alem? Mckti/ckam 
the Tillamook ; they danced. “What are you doing? Take them 
temea‘xalaitan. Stag; qE/Ixax. Télx-eEm pau _ iké’x _ téité. 
your arrows. War is made on us. People full it is on land. 
Mexn’ltXuiteck!” “Kia! L;Emé/nXut” aqid/lXam. ‘“TmémeElod/ctike 
Make yourselves ready!" ‘“‘ Kia’ lies” was said to him. ‘*Ghosts 


271 


-] 


272 WAR BETWEEN QUILEUTE AND CLATSOP. BEE 


ETHNOLOGY 


xita’e tqjéx tciqtxigEla’xo. Aydxdtuwa’xit.”. Ta’‘kE atcid’1Xam 
these like __ he found them. He became afraid.” Then he said to him 
Lia/gqasqas: ‘“‘E/egam émé/ok. Tx0’ptegaya txpcd’tama!” Ta/kE 
his grandfather: “Take your blanket. Let us go inland let us hide!” Then 
a/etoptek ia/qasqas. Acxped/tam. A/Ita nuXuiwa/yul T!lé/muke. 
they went his grandfather. They went to hide. Now they danced the Tillamook. 
inland 5 


Ka‘tsEk 6/pol ka nukué/witXit Thlémuke. Q;0a’/p @’k"tEliL ta/kE 
Middle night and they lay down the Tillamook. Neatly dawn then 
staq; akn’tax. Aqto’téna-y- a‘lta Thle‘muke go k"La/xani-y- 
attack they didthem. They were killed now the Tillamook at outside 
ogo/Leaid. Aqto’/tena ka/nauwé qOd’/tac Ogod/Ltaid. A/‘Ita staqj°? 
sleeping. They were killed all those sleepers. Now attack 
agh’tax t!oLé/ma. AmE/nx‘katike aqtoté/na iau’a ci‘tkum @/lEXam 
they did _ the houses. Few only were killed there at the town 


them [upper] half 
of the 


ka noxo-0/yoko ka/nauwé qO6’/tac télx‘Em. A/‘Ita atktd/egam 
and they awoke all those people. Now they took them 
tga/xalaitanEma  1La’k;élak. A‘Ita aqta/ktuq —‘ tka/cocinike. 
their arrows the Clatsop. Now they were carried the boys. 
away 


O’Xuitike tka/c6cinike aqta/ktuq, Tkulé’yut!ke atkta’ktuq. A/Ita 
Many boys were carried away, the Quileute carried them away. Now 

aLE/xangd LgdLéJEXEMmk aLxkLe/tegom iau’a k"ca‘la go-y- @Xt 
he ran a person he informed them there upriver at one 

@leXam Kono’/pe. A‘Ita aLxawigu’Litck té/lx-Em. Alta 
town Kono'pe. Now he told them the people. Now 

atkto/egam tga/xalaitanEma ka/nauwé. A/‘Ita nox0d/tua qod’tac 
they took them their arrows all. Now they ran those 

té/lx‘Em ia/koa mai/émé. Atktd’/cgam naua‘itgEma; atkto’/cgam 

people here downtheriver. They took them the nets; they took them 

away 


Tkuléya’t!ke. A/Ita noxd’/maqt qd’/tac té/lx‘Em. A/Ita aqta/wa 
the Quileute. Now they fought those people. Now they were 
driven away 


Tkuléya/t!ke. Aqto’tena tcée’2tkum. Ta/kE aqtd/k"°7am_ go-y- 
the Quileute. They were killed half. Then they were carried into 
uta/xanim. Atgd/cgiLx uta/xanim Tkulyéia’t!ke, qamx ia/xkate 
their canoes. They hauled them their canoes the Quileute part there 

into the water 


ma/Lxolé ataé/taqi. Atgd’/egam qaX okuni'’m La/k;élak, ta/kE 


inland they left them. They took them those canoes the Clatsop, then 
atgo/egiLx. Ataga/la-it La/kjélak qaX okuni’‘m; Tkuléyi’t!ke 
they hauled them They were in the Clatsop those canoes ; the Quileute 
into the water. the canoes 
uta/xanima. A/Ita aqtéua-y- é’maL Tkuléyi’t!ke. Lap, Lap, Lap, Lap, 
their canoes. Now they were pur- the sea the Quileute. Shoot, shoot, shoot, shoot, 


sued on the water 


tga/mat aqta’wix. Ta/kE aqa/Lxalukctgo Lkjacke. AqLa/owilX 


shooting they were done. Then he was thrown into the a boy. He was struck 

them water : 

go-y- @/Laqtq. Ia/‘xkaté LjEla’‘p a’Lo. WiXt  LE’gun 

on his head. There under water _—ihe went. Again one more 
aqkE/Lxalukctg6. Aq La/owilX ka LuXuné’/n. AqLga‘om, -aqL0’cgam 
he was thrown into the He wasstruck and he floated. He was reached, he was taken, 
water. 
aqLaQa/na-it. O/’Xuitike tka/‘cdcinike  aqto-a/lguiLx. Qamx 
he was put into the Many boys were thrown into the Part 
canoe. water. 

ita’xanate, qamx Ela’p atgé’x. ITakoa’ aqaxatgd’/mam 
their life, part under water they went. _ There it was passed 

Walk’mlem. Aqtk/tua Tkuléyia’t!ke. E’maL aqta/yitoa. <ATta 
Port Canby. They were pur- the Quileute. Sea they were pursued Now 


sued towards here. 


BE serx00r WAR BETWEEN QUILEUTE AND CLATSOP. 273 


BOAS 


a2kjaLO/nike go-y- eXt ikani’m. Akjala’‘ktike g0- y- @Xt ikani’m. 


Tees in a canoe in one canoe. Four one canoe. 
A‘lta mE‘nx‘ka-y- uta‘xanima Tkuléyu’t!ke, nekce a/Xaueé; ka 
Now few only their canoes the Quileute, not many ; then 
né/‘k:im iLa/XakjEmana =  La/k;élak: “A’Ita = Ixta‘/ko. Ta/kE 
~ he said their chief the Glatsou: “Now we will return. Then 
0/Xuitike alxkto’téna.” A’Ita aLi/Xtako La’kj;élak. A/Ita n0’/xogo 
many we have killed Now  theyreturned the Glatedp: Now they went 
them.” home 
Tkuleyu't!ke. Atxigila’2mam gd #£Kué’naiyaL Tkuléyt’t!ke. 
the Quileute. They arrived at Quenaiult the Quileute. 


“Pax tmeémeld’ctike wta/xanim. A/Ita atktagElai/tamit qod’tac 


Full of corpses their canoes. Now they placed them upright those 
tmeémeElo’ctike. A‘Ita qu’LquL aqta’wix tga/xéLétcuwama. A/‘Ita 

dead ones. Now put on they were done their hats. Now 

to them 

a‘tgEptck qo‘tac gita’Xanate. A‘lta aqawige/waL; amit. 

they went up to those who were alive. Now they were given to eat. 

the shore 3 

Noxo-inxa‘leEm Tkuléyi’t!ke. A/‘lta tk*tea’-it atkta’wix q0’tac 

They ate the Quileute. Now carrying food they did it to those 

them 

tga‘colal. Tate! ux0d/La-itt q0’tac tga/cdlal. At0d/xuxdi-oa qigod 
their relatives. Behold, they were dead those their relatives. They lied because where 


they were ashamed 


aqto‘tena. 
they were killed. 


Translation. 


A youth at Clatsop was sent to bathe at Nakot;a’t. After five days 
he returned, going along the beach. In the evening he approached 
Clatsop and came around the point. Then he looked landward and 
saw many canoes lying side by side. ‘‘ Where did these canoes come 
from?” he thought; “I will turn back.” He was going to turn back, 
then many people pursued him. The beach was full of people. He 
looked in the direction where he wanted to go. Now there also the 
people went down to the beach. They cut him off and he was sur- 
rounded. They all held spears in their hands. They threw the spears 
at him. He jumped up and they missed him, the spears passing below 
him. ‘Ha, ha!” said the people. They threw their spears again and 
aimed higher. He stooped and they missed him, the spears. passing 
above him. Again the people said “Ha, ha!” Now he jumped right 
through them and escaped. They pursued him. They threw spears 
at him, but he jumped high. He escaped and arrived at Clatsop. The 
youth had no mother and no father; they were dead. He lived with 
his grandfather. Now it was evening when he came back to Clatsop. 
The Tillamook stood there and were dancing. ‘ What are you doing?” 
he said. “Take your arrows. We shall be attacked. The beach is 
full of people. Make yourselves ready.” ‘ Hia, he lies,” said the peo- 
ple. ‘He wanted to see the ghosts and became frightened.” Then the 
youth said to his grandfather, “Take your blanket. Let us go inland 
and hide ourselves.” Then he and his grandfather went inland to hide. 
Now the Tillamook danced. At midnight they lay down. When the 
dawn of the day approached, an attack was made on the village. The 

BULL. T=20 18 


274 WAR BETWEEN QUILEUTE AND CLATSOP. bc at 


Tillamook who slept outside were all killed. Now they attacked the 
houses. Only a few were killed in the upper half of the town, when 
the people awoke. The Clatsop awoke. Now the [enemy retired and] 
carried away the children. The Quileute carried away many boys. 
Now a person ran up the river to inform the people at Kono’pe. Now 
he told them what had happened; they took their arrows and ran 
down the river. The Quileute took away the nets. Now the people 
fought, and the Quileute were driven away. One half of them were 
killed. Then [the dead ones] were carried into the canoes and they 
launched their canoes. Part they left on the shore. 

The Clatsop took those canoes and launched them. They went into 
the canoes of the Quileute and pursued them. They shot their arrows 
at them. Then the Quileute threw a boy into the water. They struck 
him on his head and he was drowned. They threw another one into 
the water and struck him on his head. He swam, and the Clatsop took 
him into their canoe when they reached him. Thus many boys were 
thrown into the water. Part survived and part were drowned. Now 
they passed Point Canby. The Clatsop pursued them on the open sea. 
Now only three or four men survived in each canoe, and a few canoes 
only were left. Then the chief of the Clatsop said, “* We will return. 
We have killed a great many.” Now the Clatsop returned and the 
Quileute went home. They arrived at Quenaiult. Their canoes were 
full of corpses. They placed them upright and put on their hats. 
Then the survivors went ashore, where they were fed by the Quenaiult. 
The Quileute ate. Now the Quenaiult carried food to their relatives to 
the canoes. Behold, they were dead! The Quileute had lied because 
they were ashamed [that so many of their number had been killed}. 


THE FIRST SHIP SEEN BY THE CLATSOP. 


Ayo/maqt qaX a/eXat dqjoéyo’qXut  itca’xa. Goa/nEsum 


It was dead that one old woman her son. Always 
naktea/xa-it. EXt iqé/tax goa/nsum naktea/xa-it, ka kja na’‘xax. 
she wailed. One year always she wailed, and silent ; she 

ecame. 


Alta 1é1@ ka nod’/ya. Iau/a Nia/xakei no’ya. Ia/xkaté naod/yEniL go 


Now along and she went. There tothe slough she went. There she stayed at 
time at Seaside always 
Nia/xakci ka na/xatgd. Na/té, na’té, na/té, na/xatgo iau’a 
Nia’/xakei and she returned. She came, shecame, shecame, _ she returned there 
tkaméla/lnq. Q;oa’p agée/txamé Tia’kjélake. A‘Ita i/kta agé’tElkEl. 
the beach. esas she reached it Clatsop. Now something she saw it. 
Nax.oleXa-it é’kolé. Qj;oa’p agia/xom. A/‘Ita méket tma‘kteXEma 
She thought a whale. Nearly she reached it. Now two spruce trees 
tigh/nx-at. NaxLo/leXa-it: “O neéket tat; é/kolé. Eqetxe’Lau tal;.” 
stood upright She thought: “Oh! not behold a whale. A monster behold.” 
near her. 

Naiga/t!om qix: é/kta yuquna/itX. A/Ita ia/woxomé ka/nauwe e/wa 

She reached it that pone: it lay there. Now its copper all thus 

thing 

k'La‘xané, A/‘lta tE’pa-it kyjau/kjau te‘laut ka’nauwe2 go qo’ta 

outside. Now ropes tied they were all at those 
to it 

tia‘maktex‘Ema cka pa2L é@/qewiqema. Ta/kE Lax né/xax éé’tcxot. 
its spruce trees and full iron. Then come it did a bear. 

; out 


la‘kue go qix: @/kta qix: é’/kta yuquna/itX. Taqgé eé’/texot ia/lekuile. 


He wason on that some- that some- ~ lay there. Just like a bear it looked like 
thing thing it. 
Tate!a LgoLé/IEXEmkK go cia/xoct. Ta/kE na/xko no/ya. Ta/kkE 
Behold! a person ‘in his face. Then she went she went. Then 
home 
aya'lEkaLx itca‘xa. A‘Ita nagk/tsax. Na/kim: “O qéau_ itcH’xa. 
she menenibered her son. Now she cried. She said: ‘Oh! that my son. 
im 


Ayo/mEqt géau itck’xa ka tqiga’/Lxol atxé’gela-é.” Qjoa’p agia/xom 


He is dead that my son and _ what is told landed.”’ Nearly she reached 
ts about in tales it 
@lpXam. A/qxulqt. “A. iqix-Ené’mat i0/itEt; LOo’nas ik; é’tenax 
the town. She cried. “Ah! a crying person comes ; perhaps strack 
é/xax.” Noxui/tXuitck té/lx-Em. Atkto’/cgam_ tga/xalaitanEma. 
he is.” They made chemaelves the people. They took them their arrows. 
ready 
Ka/nauwé atkto’cgam tga/xalaitanEma. “ Ni/Xua amcxagEluwE’teatk,” 
All they took them their arrows. “Well, listen,” 
aLE’k-im Lq;éyo/qxut. Ta’/kE noxuwi’tcatk té/lx‘-Em. A/‘Ita xa‘xo-il: 
he said an old man. Then they listened the people. Now she said 
always: 
“Ayo’mEgt qéau itcK/xa ka _ txé/gela-it tqiga/Lx0l.” Ta/kE 
**He is dead that my son and it landed what is told Then 


m about in tales.” 
pugo‘/kXuim téglx-am: “EK’kta Lx @/xax?” Ta/kE acxalgé’taqtame; 


they said the people, ‘“What maybe itis?” Then they went to meet her; 
no’Xua qo’tac télx-Em. Aqod’lEXam: “I’kta @/xax?” “A, i‘kta 
they ran those people. She was spoken to: .‘* What is it?" “Ah!  some- 
thing 


275 


Oo Oo ~- WwW 


Or 


=r) 


9 
ad 


276 FIRST SHIP SEEN BY THE CLATSOP. eee 


xix: iuquna/itX @/wa_ tetax. Ila/koe modket éitexd/thema na 

this lies there thus around the There are two bears. [int. 

point. onit . part.] 

teu téeIxEm na.” Ta/kE no’/Xua_ télxEm. Ta/kE  aqiga/om 

or people [int. part.].’’ Then they ran the people. Then it was reached 

xix: @/kta iuquna/itX. <A/lta atkLo/ktean qd/tac téIlx-Em na 
this some- lay there. Now they held them those people {int. 

thing part. | 

tco-y- i/kta na mdket Ltegh/nEma éwaxod/miqL Lkéx. Ayo/yam 
or something [int. two packets copper it was. He arrived 

part. ] 

qix' @/Xat ianéwa nicga/om. Ta’/kE wiXt @/Xat  ayd’yam. 
that one first he arrived at them. Then again one he arrived. 

A‘lta godyé’ aLi‘xax LgodLé/lEXEmk g6-y-° i/Lacqu. Ata 
Now thus he did the person etn to his mouth. Now 

aqLea/lot qd/La LtegE/nEma. La/sEmiltks q0’/La LtegE/nEma, 

they were given those buckets. They had lids those buckets. 

Goye’ aqk/ctax aLxE/ntciyak"té iau’a ma/Lxolé. Lteuq aqceod’ko. 

Thus it was done to they pointed there inland. Water they were 
them sent for. 


Ta/kE aci/Xaua ma/Lxdlé qo/ctac cgdLé/lEXEmk. GO LE/mtEcX 
Then they ran inland those two persons. At a log 
ka  aLkeo/peot. WiXt aci’Xtako, aci’Xaua iau’a ma/Lné. 
and they hid themselves. Again they returned ; they ran there seaward. 
AyouLX@/wulX @’Xat, ayayE’La-it. Né/Ited qix: ici’p. Nik’é’x-tkin 
He ascended one, he entered it. He went that ship. He looked about 
own 


go we'wuLé, LEqea/nuke paL qix: ici’p. Lap atea/yax é’tcEltcEl, 
in interior of ship, boxes full that ship. Find hedidthem brass Inatigieen 
goye’-y- ixkje’Le. Ayod’pa k"La/xané. Qé’xtcé qtcuguixé’ma 


that long [half strings. He went out outside. Intending he called them 
a fathom] 


tia‘colal, a’‘nqaté wax aqa/yax qix: é/kta iuquna/itx. Ated’/pEna 
his relatives, already  setfire it wasdone that something lay there. He jumped 
: to it 
iau’a kée’/kXuleé. Alta ke’/k Xuleé ckéx qo’ctae moket 
there down. Now below they were those two 
cgoLéeJEXEmkK. Né@/xLXa qix: é@’/kta ka acgk’tcax. Aqé/xLx-ama-y- 
persons. It burned that some- and they cried. It was burned 
thing 
a‘Ita ka‘nauwe. Ne@’xtXa qix: @’kta tjaqé  L*a/tceau aLxtx-a‘x. 
now all. It burned that something jot as fat it burned. 
Ia‘xkaté atgiupa’yaLx qix’ iqéwéké’ma. Atgiupa/yaLx qix: 
There they gathered it that iron. They gathered it that 
iuwaX0/mé, atgiupa’/yaLx iqékjE’ec La’‘kjélak. Ta/kE noxoé/xiXt 
copper, they gathered it the brass the Clatsop. Then they ee 
about it 


ka‘nauwe té/lx‘Em. Ta/kE aqed/egam qo’/ctac méket cgoLé/lEXEmk 
all the people. Then they were taken those two persons 
go iLa/XakjEmana La‘k; élak. Ta/kE né/k-im go-y- éXt iLaJEXam 
a their chiet the C aeetaat Then he said at one _ their town 
iLa/Nakj Emana: “Go nai‘ka nk’onia’x0-y- @/Xat,” Li2qe nuxd/maqt 
their chief, “At me I shall keep him one. 1? Almost they fought 
téIxEm. Alta aqid’/egam god-y- eEXt éelEXam eé/Xat. A/2lta 
the people. Now he was taken to one town one. Now 
it!o/kt@ né/xax a’yamxte qix: é/Xat ikakjEma/na. Ta’/kE noxoé/xiXt 
good became his heart that one chief. Then hey learned 
about it 


Tkwinait’/Luke, ta’/kE noxoé/xiXt Gita’/ts;xéEls, ta‘kE noxoé/xiXt 
the Quenaiult, then they learned aboutit the Chehalis, then they learned 
about 1t 


GiLa’xicatck ta/kKE noxoé/xiXt Gita/qauélitsk, ta’ke noxoé/xiXt 
the Cascade, then they learned about it the Cowlitz, then hey ee 
about it 


ahha FIRST SHIP SEEN BY THE CLATSOP. 277 


LE/qatat. Alta a/tgé Tia‘’k;élake ka/nauwe. Tkwinaiu’Luke a’‘tge, 


the Klickatat. Then they went to Clatsop all. The Quenaiult went, 
GiLa’ts;xéEls a/L0, GiLa’XuilapaX a/LO. Ka/nauwe télame’ma 
the Chehalis went, the Willapa went. All towns 
a‘tgé. GiLa’xicateck aLe’tctco, Gita/qauélitsk atga‘tctcd, LE’qatat 
went. The Cascades they went down the Cowlitz went downthe the Klickatat 
the river, - Tiver, 


-atga/teted. Ka’nauwe iau’a k"ca/la né/maL atga/tetco. Atgaté/mam 
went down the All these uptheriver theriver they wentdown. They came to 
river. 


Tia’k; élake. Moket kei iwaX0/mit. Li/Xat Lla/étix: ska nix‘a/6mx 


Clatsop. Two fingers copper one slave and it met [goes 
[wide ] . around] 
20 iLa’poté. Goye’ a’/yaLqt iqéwe’qxé Le’Xat Lila‘étix:. Goye’ 
at thearm. Thus [halfthe long iron one slave. Thus 
i length of the 
radius | 
ia‘qa-iL mdket kei igékjH’e Lée/Xat Lla/étix:. Aqid/mE]x-ix: 
large two fingers brass one slave. They were bought 
[wide] 
itsusa/qama, qia’x ct!o/kti cpa’‘yix tex1 qantsé’x: aci’XLa-itX. 
nails, if a good eurried deer then some they exchanged 
skin them for them. 
AqeE’x‘ctgoax. Qia/x it/Lqta iqauwik;é@’Lé, tex] teéx aci’xLa-itx 
It was bartered. If long long dentalia, then several theyexchanged 
them for it. 
qix’ itsusa’qEma. Atgid’mEl] q6’/tac té/lx‘Em. Tkana/Ximct n0o’/x6x 
those nails. Phey bought those people. Chiefs [rich] became 
them 
La‘/k;élak. Ia/xkate ka qjatsE’/n aqéEIkEl iqéwigé’ma. Iqék;B’s 
the Clatsop. There and for the first it was seen iron. Brass 
time 
ia‘xkaté qjatsh’/n aqé*ElkEl. A/‘Ita nia/kO aqk/ctax  qO6/ctac 
there for the first time it was seen. Now keep they were done those 
cgoLéeJEXEmk, g60 é@/Xat ika/nax é6/Xat; g0d-y- ayod’ktlitée 
persons, at one chief . one; at point of land 
Tia/kjélaké @’Xat nH’/kO aqa’‘yax. 
Clatsop one keep he was done. 


Translation. 


The son of an old woman had died. She wailed for him a whole year 
and then she stopped. Now one day she went to Seaside. There she 
used to stop, and she returned. She returned walking along the beach. 
She nearly reached Clatsop; now she saw something. She thought it 
was a whale. When she came near it she saw two spruce trees stand- 
ing upright on it. She thought, “Behold! it is no whale. It is a 
monster.” She reached the thing that lay there. Now she saw that 
its outer side was all covered with copper. Ropes were tied to those 
spruce trees and it was full of iron. Then a bear came out of it. He 
stood on the thing that lay there. He looked just like a bear, but his 
face was that of a human being. Then she went home. Now she 
thought of her son, and cried, saying, ‘“‘Oh, my son is dead and the thing 
about which we heard in tales is on shore.” When she nearly reached 
the town she continued toery. [The people said,]| ‘Oh, a person comes 
crying. Perhaps somebody struck her.” The people made themselves 
ready. They took their arrows. An old man said, “Listen!” Then the 
_ people listened. Now she said all the time, ‘Oh, my son is dead, and 
the thing about which we heard in tales is on shore.” The people said, 


1) 


6 


9 


278 FIRST SHIP SEEN BY THE CLATSOP. pec: = 


‘¢What may it be?” They went running to meet her. They said, ‘‘ What 
is it?” ‘Ah, something lies there anditis thus. There are two bears on 
it, or maybe they are people.” Then the people ran. They reached the 
thing that lay there. Now the people, or what else they might be, held 
two copper kettles in their hands. Now the first one reached there. 
Another one arrived. Now the persons took their hands to their 
mouths and gave the people their kettles. They had lids. The men 
pointed inland and asked for water. Then two people ran inland. 
They hid themselves behind a log. They returned again and ran to 
the beach. One man climbed up and entered the thing. He went down 
into the ship. He looked about in the interior of the ship; it was full 
of boxes. He found brass buttons in strings half a fathom long. He 
went out again to call his relatives, but they had already set fire to the 
ship. He jumped down. Those two persons had also gone down. It 
burnt just like fat. Then the Clatsop gathered the iron, the copper, 
and the brass. Then all the people learned about it. The two persons 
were taken to the chief of the Clatsop. Then the chief of the one town 
said, “I want to keep one of the men with me.” The people almost 
began to fight. Now one of them was taken to one town. Then the 
chief was satisfied. Now the Quenaiult, the Chehalis, the Cascades, 
the Cowlitz, and the Klickatat learned about it and they all went to 
Clatsop. The Quenaiult, the Chehalis, and the Willapa went. The 
people of all the towns went there. The Cascades, the Cowlitz, and 
the Klickatat came down the river. All those of the upper part of the 
river came down to Clatsop. Strips of copper two fingers wide and 
going around the arm were exchanged for one slave each. A piece of 
iron as long as one-half the forearm was exchanged for one slave. A 
piece of brass two fingers wide was exchanged for one slave. A nail 
was sold for a good curried deerskin. Several nails were given for long 
dentalia. The people bought this and the Clatsop became rich. Then 
iron and brass were seen for the first time. Now they kept these two 
persons. One was kept by each chief; one was at the Clatsop town at 
the cape. 


) 


“Gp 


Ceo i . 


iy 


re bs 
ors giadel 


e 


ADVERTISEMENT 


The work of the Bureau of American Ethnology is conducted under act of Con- 
gress ‘‘for continuing ethnologic researches among the American Indians under the 
direction of the Smithsonian Institution.” 

Two series of publications are issued by the Bureau under authority of Congress, 
viz, annual reports and bulletins. The annual reports are authorized by concurrent 
resolution from time to time and are published for the use of Congress and the 
Bureau; the publication of the series of bulletins was authorized by concurrent 
resolution first in 1886 and more definitely in 1888, and these also are issued for the 
use of Congress and the Bureau. In addition, the Bureau supervises the publication 
of a series of quarto volumes bearing the title, ‘‘Contributions to North American 
Ethnology,” begun in 1877 by the United States Geographical Survey of the Rocky 
Mountain Region. 

These publications are distributed primarily by Congress, and the portions of the 
editions printed for the Bureau are used for exchange with libraries and scientific 
and educational institutions and with special investigators in anthropology who 
send their own publications regularly to the Burean. 

The exchange list of the Bureau is large, and the product of the exchange forms 
a valuable ethnologic library independent of the general library of the Smithsonian 
Institution. This library is in constant use by the Bureau collaborators, as weli as 
by other anthropologists resident in or visiting Washington. 

The earlier volumes of the annual reports and the seven volumes of the ‘‘ Contri- 
butions to North American Ethnology ” thus far issued are out of print. 

Exchanges and other contributions to the Bureau should be addressed, 

The DIRECTOR, 
Bureau of Ainerican Ethnology, 
Washington, D. C., 
Ue Sen 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY BULL. U—21, PL. 1 


SKETCH MAP OF THE QUARRY-SITE, ABOUT 100 FEET TO AN INCH, 
The pitting is indicated by shaded areas and the shops are dotted. 


Sig a 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


AN ANCIENT QUARRY 


IN 


mel AN. TERRITORY 


BY 


WILLIAM HENRY HOLMES 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1894 


told crete 
— 
yg og 


I * 
[ 


pad ~ 
aa 
5 
‘ 
. 
é 
i 
> 
7 5 
i 
: 
id 
. .! J zZ Me 
= 
e- v 
? 
. , ‘ 


A 
ES 
: : 


© 


Introductory ..------- 
Discovery and locaticn 
The material quarried 


CONTE NS 


Of the: QUuakLyc: woes. se. Ko oanie toe eee Seats 


Betotiand character of the quarry work * =. 5... ...-cae-- eaeseeeenoss oes. 


The workshops ..----- 


PPMP AnEV BOIS PTOUUCE <3. 22225: c aces stoma. soaks ao aesee aerate cess one = 


Hammerstones..-.-... -- 
INE Se 


PLATE I: 
ie 

III. 

IV. 

Vi 

VI. 


XII. 


LE Silko ICONS 


Sketch map of the:quarnyasihemenscs 2. eae ec eo ess a eso en 
Lodge-shop sites on level ground near quarry pits.--......--.--. 
Quarry-shop refuse filling in group of pits..---. Set Donen pee 
Progressive series of rejects and range of well advanced forms --. 
Blade of most advanced form found in quarry refuse..---....... 
Rejects: a, massive reject resembling a common type of paleo- 

lithic implement; b, reject of ordinary type resulting from 

failure of flakes to carry across body of specimen .........-..- 


. Rejectage from failure to remove hump...--..-................- 
. Form of reject occurring somewhat rarely, the sides being slightly 


notched as if the implement was to be hafted as an ax... ___. 


. Rejects: a, reject resembling nucleus from which flakes had been 


removed; b, probably a nucleus but possibly only a reject from 
blade making; c, reject of eccentric shape................---- 


. Nuclei or cores from which flakes have been removed, probably 


fOr MSETAS ENUVESS sei EL oe eae Ok ie ace i alee = a 


. Hammerstone of usual type and average size, made of compact 


ELE IRSA a 8 fe ae pe ee ane grat ae ake, a a a 
Aged oak growing on margin of ancient pit..----...---.....-.-- 


Fic. 1. Fragment of antler, probably used as a pick......................... 


“1D OFF m | LO 


- section through a group of the quarry pits. ......-.........-.-.....-- 
. Section through a single pit well filled with shop débris............-. 
. Present appearance of some of the smaller pits. ...................-.- 
- Relation of lodge-shop sites to the quarry pits.............---...-..-. 
. Plan of a lodge-shop site, showing fire pit and circle of refuse......-. 
- Fragment of thin blade from trimming shop.--... ...........-....-.- 


Page 
1 

abl 
13 
14 
15 


16 
16 


16 


18 


18 


18 
18 
10 
10 
10 
11 
12 
13 
14 


; AN ANCIENT QUARRY IN INDIAN TERRITORY 


By W. H. HOLMES 


INTRODUCTORY. 


The Mississippi valley, within a radius of 150 miles of St. Louis, has 
yielded a large number of flaked stone implements of exceptional 
beauty of form and material, and, in many cases, of unusual or even 
extraordinary size. Many of these objects are of whitish or light gray 
flinty stone classed usually as chert. This material, having various 
degrees of adaptability to the flaking processes, is found throughout 
a wide district, including portions of Illinois, Missouri, and neighboring 
states. _ 

In many places evidences of manufacture have been observed, but 
usually the sites are nothing more than small shops where individual 
implements have been shaped or small masses have been worked up. 
It is apparent to the student of tlaked stone tools that these limited 
shops could not have furnished the multitudes of fine specimens dis- 
tributed over every part of the valley, and that the existence of great 
quarries must in time be discovered. These quarry sites, if such there 
are, may be so hidden away in wild and rugged regions and so obscured 
by forests that the attention of white settlers has never been called 
to them. 

An important quarry site, considerably beyond the limits of the 
province referred to, being nearly 300 miles southwest of St. Louis. has 
recently come into notice. It is hardly to be supposed that the flint 
supply of the Missouri and Mississippi valleys could in any large 
part have been derived from this source, for the task of transporta- 
tion would have taxed even the marvelous patience and endurance of 
our aboriginal workers in stone. The material produced on this site, 
however, corresponds very closely with that used in the St. Louis region, 
and a study of the refuse of the quarry shops demonstrates the fact that 
the classes of tools made are identical in many instances with those found 
so plentifully in that region. 


DISCOVERY AND LOCATION OF THE QUARRY. 


Early in October, 1891, my attention was called to a letter forwarded 
to Mr. G. K. Gilbert, then geologist in charge of the United States 
Geological Survey, from Joplin, Missouri, by Mr. Walter P. Jenney, the 

7 


8 AN ANCIENT QUARRY IN INDIAN TERRITORY. ; peeks ace a 


ETHNOLOGY 


geologist engaged in the investigation of zine deposits. This letter 
related to the occurrence of an ancient flint quarry, and was accom- 
panied by a small box of specimens which made it apparent at a glance 
that an important archeologic find had been made. 

Mr. Jenney, while studying the zine and lead mines of southwestern 
Missouri, had his attention called to a site located on Peoria lands in 
Indian Territory, and known locally as the ‘old Spanish mines.” A 
visit by him developed the true nature of the ancient operations, and 
demonstrated at the same time the futility of the search for precious 
metals at the site. I at once resolved to visit the locality, and late in 
October had the pleasure of beginning the study of one of the most 
interesting examples of our great aboriginal quarries. 

This quarry is situated on the Peoria reservation, about seven miles 
northwest of Seneca, Missouri, and some ten miles southeast of Baxter 
Springs, Kansas. From Seneca the spot is reached by driving north- 
ward along the Missouri border, for five miles, and then crossing the line 
and proceeding two miles in a westerly course through the forest. The 
country is a gently rolling plateau, with a gradual descent westward 
into the valley of Spring river, a branch of the Neosho, or Grand river, 
which falls into the Arkansas at Fort Gibson, Indian Territory. 

The forest which covers the region about the quarry is open, and con- 
sists of a medium-sized growth of several varieties of oak, hickory, and 
other deciduous trees. Geologically the country seems rather feature- 
less, save for the presence of flinty masses.of chert that cover much of 
the surface and weather out in numberless rough fragments along the 
low ledges and terrace faces. Outcrops of this rock may be seen along 
the stream courses, but its gnarled and very forbidding appearance 
gives no encouragement to the advances of searchers for workable 
stone. It is only where fresh fractures are met that its true nature is 
discovered. Scattered over a wide range of country are seen evidences | 
of ancient operations, and the refuse of flaking is quite common, showing 
that the aborigines thoroughly explored the country before settling down 
to the one choice site in the trackless forests of Spring river valley. 

At an early date the whites learned of these ancient diggings, and 
work was undertaken by various parties and at wide intervals of time, 
with the view of discovering the precious metals supposed to have 
been sought by the Spanish or other peoples in early times. Several 
shafts were sunk in and about the old pits, some to the depth of fifty or 
sixty feet. As a matter of course, nothing of value was found. It is 
reported that some of the later explorers discovered iron tools of a 
primitive type in the ancient pits, but itis believed that these were left 
by our own pioneer miners, and that there is no evidence either that 
the Spanish were ever here or that the aborigines possessed metal tools. 

The ancient quarry is situated mainly on the southern end of a low, 
rounded ridge, which rises perhaps forty or fifty feet above the dry 
branch bordering it on the west and falls off gently to the shallow water- 


/ 


Aa OLOne QUARRY WORK AND MATERIAL. 9 


ways on the other sides, as partially indicated by the contours on the 
accompanying map (plate 1). The beds of chert, which are of upper 
Subcarboniferous age, outcrop or approach the surface about the mar- 
gins, forming in places a low, rounded scarp. The ancient implement- 
makers began work at the more accessible points along the margin and 
gradually, no doubt, and by long continued operations carried their 
trenches and pits far back into the surface of the terrace. 


THE MATERIAL QUARRIED, 


The chert worked by the ancient miners comprises numerous strata 
of considerable aggregate thickness and doubtless of great horizontal 
extent. Such exposures as occurred, or were made by my limited exca- 
vations, were not sufficient to give a good idea of the character of the 
formation, but the fine blocks and masses thrown out and left by the 
quarrymen indicate unusual massiveness and homogeneity. The frac- 
ture is conchoidal to a high degree, although the surfaces are granular 
rather than glossy, as in the flints. Flakes are removed with ease, and 
the fracture carries remarkable distances. It is not unusual to find 
flakes from six to ten inches in length, and they are often very attenu- 
ated. They are highly resonant and jingle like bells beneath the feet. 
Such portions of the chert beds as were uncovered by my workmen were 
much flawed and fractured, but the solid portions seemed extremely 
tough, refusing to break under the strokes of our light hammers. The 
color, aS seen in the quarried masses and refuse, is creamy white or 
light gray, with occasionally very delicate mottlings of pinkish, reddish, 
wid yellowish grays. Freshly removed from the bed it seems to be 
somewhat darker, resembling common varieties of hornstone. It is 
/not improbable that fires used in mining or from burning forests have 


/ conspired to produce a chalky appearance in the surface fragments. 


EXTENT AND CHARACTER OF THE QUARRY WORK. 


In extent the work done in this locality does not compare with that 
accomplished on Flint ridge in Ohio or in the novaculite quarries of 
Arkansas, but was nevertheless quite extensive. The quarrying pre- 
sents phenomena of unusual interest. 

There are three principal groups of the ancient excavations, as shown 
on the map (plate I), the two clusters on the western side being con- 
nected by a narrow line of pits. The whole area covered by these dig- 
gings does not exceed four or five acres. : 

In the main the excavations took the form of roundish pits, but on 
the margins trenches of a hundred feet or more in length were carried 
along the ledges. Where the work was deep the refuse filled the pre- 
ceding excavations and accumulated about the margins of the mines. 
It is not probable that many of the pits were more than ten or twelve 
feet deep. At present the greatest depth is about five feet, and the 
width of the roundish depressions rarely exceeds forty feet. In nearly 


10 AN ANCIENT QUARRY IN INDIAN TERRITORY. ) TENOR: 2 


ETHNOLOGY 


all cases the débris was allowed to accumulate in a ring around the mar- 
gin and has descended into the excavations, many of which are entirely 
filled with the refuse of manufacture. 

As in other similar cases, we are unable fully to determine the meth- 
ods of quarrying, but further exploration will doubtless throw light on 
this point. In cleaning out one of the minor pits to learn something of 


Fig. 1.—Frazment of antler, probably used as a pick. 


4 


the relation of an ancient oak that grew on its margin to the artificial 
deposits, I came upon two fragments of buck-horn. The better preserved 
of these was pick-shaped and about twelve inches long, and although 
much decayed it still bore evidence of having been worn by use in the 
mines. This specimen is shown in figure 1. Portions of the skeleton ofa 
deer were found near the bottom ofanother pit. Itis altogether probable 


peo em me ene ee ee 


iste, - 


PAIR 


Seen es 
OSS cere 
SEP 


Fig, 2.—Section through a group of the quarry pits. 


that buck-horn was used in the quarry work, for neither stone, bone, nor 
wood would be as suitable and serviceable; but when we turn toward 
the lines of pits excavated in compact, flinty strata, any tools save 
those of metal seem wholly inadequate to accomplish the results. If 
we assume that the cherty masses were uncovered or undermined with 
buck-horn picks and wooden picks and shovels, we find it necessary in 


Fic, 3.—Section through a single pit well filled with shop débris. 


addition to suppose that fire and water were used to fracture the masses 
and break them up. Frequently the pits were sunk to the upper sur- 
face of the horizontal strata, in which case even these latter agencies 
would be very difficult of application. 


‘oper sea qdursojoyd ary maya dn qos o10M SOs ToOMpA JO ano; ay ‘soouydexy spoatous soxey Jo sourt ory, 
"SLId AYYWNOD YVAN GNNOYS 135A31 NO S3LIS dOHS-39007 


ae ho 


z 


A t 
Wid ‘12—=n ‘1Ina SOIONHL]A 40 NVvayNd 


eee ee 


ice aca DESCRIPTION OF THE PITS. eA 


A section through a group of excavations.is shown in figure 2. The 
dotted line represents the original surface. The pits are partially filled 


_ with refuse from continued excavation and manufacture. The section 


of a single pit is given in figure 3, which shows the heaping up of shop 
refuse on the margins. A general view of the half-filled pits and ref- 


use-covered ridges is presented in figure 4. 


THE WORKSHOPS. 


The story of the working of this quarry and the management and 
manipulation of the stone is to be read with almost as much ease as if 
the work had closed but yesterday. The fragments and masses of fresh 
chert were selected and removed from the pits and the work of redue- 
tion and manufacture began. Shops were established on the margins 
of the pits, on the dump heaps, and at convenient points in the vicinity, 


RE Sas Ta] it 
Sine eee un Ont 
ee offi 


wwllturs” 


Fic. 4.—Present appearance of some of the smaller pits. 


the distribution being something like that shown on the map, plate 1, 
and in detail in figure 5. 

The cireular clusters of white chert refuse, shown in plan in figure 
6, are clearly defined on the dark ground, and especially so after forest 
fires have destroyed the growth of weeds and small underbrash. In 
the center is a Shallow depression which was the fireplace of the lodge; 
around this the workmen sat, and here are the fragments and flakes, 
the rejects and hammerstones left by them, covering about the space 
inclosed by the lodge, and hardly disturbed since the site was deserted. 
The photograph presented in plate 11 is probably the first representa- 
tion of an aboriginal flaking shop ever brought out. Behind the prin- 
cipal shop are dimly seen a number of other lodge clusters, and beyond 
this among the oaks are the pits from which the stone was obtained. 
Before making the photograph I set up sticks in the fireplace depres- 
sions of the lodge circles and some of these may be seen in the picture. 


12 AN ANCIENT QUARRY IN INDIAN TERRITORY  §BUBNé0 er 


In many cases these circular clusters are surrounded by lines or ridges 
of chert masses, just as they were brought from the quarry and depos- 
ited within the reach of the workman, iidicating that the work was 
abandoned before the supply was worked up. In some cases flattish 
lumps of chert, used as seats by the workers and surrounded by piles 
of refuse, are seen. Not only are these shop phenomena thus fresh 
and undisturbed, but in some instances the flint seems hardly to have 
changed color or to have suffered in the least from weathering. 

The shops are very numerous over the level space included between 
the three main groups of quarries,.but as a rule they are not found 
more than 100 or 150 feet from the pits. Small trimming shops are 
found, however, much farther away, scattered through the forest and 
along the water courses. Probably these spots mostly represent camp or 


Fic. 5.—Relation of lodge-shop sites to the quarry pits. a, pit; b, b, b, shops. 


lodge sites too far from the quarries to be ordinarily used as shops, 
but where the roughed-out pieces were occasionally trimmed and some- 
what elaborated. On one of these a broken blade (figure 7), more ueatly 
finished than any of the quarry-shop forms, was found. 

Where the work has gone on for a long time near the quarry margins 
the accumulations of refuse are so great that separate shops are oblit- 
erated, a number coalescing in the general mass which, in some eases, 
reaches many feet in depth. Such an instance is illustrated in plate 
111, where the older pits are entirely filled up with masses, rejects, and 
clinking flakes of chert. One can sit on these accumulations and, with- 
out changing position, select bushels of the abortive implements 
and partially worked pieces broken under the hammer. The figure of 


*SLId JO dNOUD NI DNITMNS 3SNASY dOHS-AYYVNO 


ASOIONHLA 20 Ayana 


Wi “Id “be n*1V1Nd 


ae a, WORK AT THE QUARRY. 13 


one of my assistants is seen in a partially filled pit, and other pits are 
visible in the forest beyond. Vegetation has hardly begun to encroach 
on these artificial beds of loose, angular chert. 


THE QUARRY-SHOP PRODUCT. 


In my report on the ancient quartzite bowlder quarries of the Dis- 
trict of Columbia, published in the American Anthropologist, Janu- 
ary, 1890, I gave a careful analysis of the evidences relating to the 
nature of the articles produced. It was shown that a study of the 
refuse could be made to yield a full knowledge of the work done on the 


2) 
a 


Fic. 6.—Plan of a lodge-shop site, showing fire pit and circle of retuse. 


site; that on account of the brittleness of the material, implements in 
process of manufacture were necessarily broken at all stages of elabo- 
ration, some at the first stroke and others by what should have been 
the final stroke—that is to say, the stroke that, if successful, would 
have finished them so far as the quarry-shop work was intended to be 
final. This fact is in a general way true of all the quarry-shops. 

It is observed here, as elsewhere, that as a rule little or no specializa- 
tion of form was attempted on the quarry sites. If completed articles 
or implements are found intermingled with the refuse on any such site, 
it is because they were employed in the work of quarrying and shaping 
or because they were accidentally present and lost. The ordinary and 
almost the exclusive shaped product of these sites, aside from the ham- 


§ BUREAU OF 


14 AN ANCIENT QUARRY IN INDIAN TERRITORY.  } Sranovoer 


merstones, was some form or blade or disk—a blank—intended, in most 
cases, no doubt, to be subsequently elaborated into an implement of 
more highly specialized form. 

The product of the Peoria chert quarry was more than usually varied, 
but still remained strictly within these limits. The wide range of form 
is in a measure probably due to the nature of the material, which is 


Fs hs 

‘ * ts 
, “. ety 
- ' ’ 


.. 
’ 
. 


NN 
‘ 
a} 
’ 
' 
‘ 
. 


wes 
Wy Mes 
Dit 


Hil 


ey)))) 
i i : 


—= 


= 
NS 
SSSss 


SSS aS 
SSS SS 


- NSS 
SSS 


SS 
SS 
= 


ENS SS —— 
GE —— 
Za SS =~ 


Fig. 7.—Fragment of thin blade from trimming shop. 


exceptionally tractable, yielding to the will of the workmen with much 
ease. If long, thin blades were desired, they could be made; if broad, 
strong, discoidal forms were needed, they could be shaped with equal 
facility. But no matter what the final forms in view were—and it is 
evident that such forms were generally in view—the quarry work covy- 
ered only the incipient stages of shaping, i. e., the roughing out. 

It is further evident that all the work was professional—that it was 
carried on by skilled specialists and intended to supply a general and 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


PROGRESSIVE SERIES OF REJECTS 


The first and second lines illustrate a progressive series of rejects beginning with the 
rejects indicating the range of blade outlines so far as represented in the qu 


BULL. U— 21, 


IGE OF WELL ADVANCED FORMS. 


erial at 4 and ending with a well-developed blade, R. The third line is a series of 
use. Figure 1 is shown full size in plate V. About one-fifth actual size. 


PL. IV 


ec 
be 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


BULL. U—21, PL. Iv 


ND 
PROGRESSIVE SERIES OF REJECTS A RANGE OF WELL ADVANCED FORMS. 
with the T@W materja) at 4 
in the quaFTY refuse 


and ending with a well-developed blade, R. The third line is a series of 
Figure 1 is shown full size in plate V. About one-fifth actual size. 


The first and second lines illustrate a progressive series of rejects beginning 
rejects indicating the range of blade outlines so far as represented 


< 
he as rig matgiinnsinoen $ : i Bi eh ce des Eon acne 
; oe , £ cz Pier aS » ee GAP Vis? 
ae 3 ye y a - . ad J ule oy ee, Cot SIA y 
~ Ret aes : ¢ oe : ' . y 
; bs 


Ps ° 
wy ve ho 


a 


Tit xii on 


‘wh 


n 
> 
fs 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY BULL. U=21, PL-V 


BLADE OF MOST ADVANCED FORM FOUND IN QUARRY REFUSE. 


ibly a finished piece unintentionally left on the quarry-site, as the form is symmetric and the thickness n 
greater than that of many implements of like form used in the Mississippi valley. Actual size. 


Soueaa’ ¢ PRODUCT OF THE SHOPS. 15 


permanent demand, and not for temporary or occasional use. The 
quarry was the factory wherein the raw material was prepared for 
market, and the shapes were carried only far enough to make transpor- 
tation easy and profitable. 

It seems probable that in many cases the characteristics of the 
material led to modifications in form and size of the articlas made. 
The finer and more homogeneous masses encouraged the manufacture 
of long, broad blades; the more minutely divided or flawed pieces 


-. served to produce only small objects. The products of accidental 


fracture are often fantastic, and an imaginative people would readily 
be led into the elaboration of fanciful objects. 

A careful examination of the shops over the whole site demonstrates 
the practical unity of the work. There are no indications of earlier and 
later periods of occupation. Although some shops have more decided 
appearance of newness than others, the difference of time represented 
may not be more than a few generations. In one place the refuse indi- 
cates that blades of a limited range of form were produced to the prac- 
tical exclusion of other forms, though this may be the result of the 
adaptability of the material to the production of such shapes, or to a 
temporary demand for particular forms. In other places we have evi- 
dence of the making of all forms and sizes in the same shop, and possi- 
bly by a single workman at one sitting. 

An extensive collection of the worked pieces was made, and some 
thirty boxes were forwarded to the Bureau of Ethnology. The points 
kept in view in making selections are as follows: It is important, first, 
to illustrate all stages of the work, all processes of manufacture, and 
all forms produced; second, a full series of the more finished pieces is 
necessary to indicate the probable intention of the workman with 
respect to final forms; and third, the collection must needs illustrate 
the stone in color, cleavage, and fracture. 

The largest of the failures are quite massive, each weighing 20 pounds 
or more, and areas much as 15 or even 18 inches long, 10 inches wide, and 
6 inches or more in thickness. These represent rejections resulting from 
the selection of workable stone for large implements, impurities and 
flaws having been developed by the first few strokes. It appears that 
masses so large as here indicated were generally very much reduced 
in dimensions before the roughing-out process was complete. The 
average length of the more ordinary thick rejects would probably not 
exceed 6 inches. It is only rarely that specimens are found less than 
4 inches in length by say 2 inches in width and half an inch in thick- 
ness. 

It is a striking fact that in the thirty boxes of flaked specimens 
obtained from this site there was no single piece that could be called an 
implement; though all were shaped forms and many of them quite well 
advanced, we can not assume that any were finished, and there is really 
no means of determining, save in the most general way, what relation 


16 AN ANCIENT QUARRY IN INDIAN TERRITORY.  $ 2UAU OF 


? ETHNOLOGY 


any of the specimens have to the final forms the workman had in view 
or that specialization would finally produce. 

It happens that no finished flaked implement safely assignable to 
this quarry has ever been collected at the quarry or elsewhere. My 
visit was to the quarry alone, and I had to deal with rejectage exclu- 
sively. What the fields and valleys of the Neosho or more distant 
regions may yield is yet to be determined. It is probable that imple- 
ments of this cream-colored chert comprising the full range of flaked 
forms will be found when search is made, but judging by the quarry-shop 
rejectage a very considerable percentage will be of large size, including 
spear points, knives scrapers, hoes, and even celtoid forms. 

The quarry-shop shapes, taking those approaching most nearly 
specialization and apparent finish, serve as our only key to the inten- 
tions of the workmen. Series of these forms are shown in the last 
line in platetv. Having been left scattered through the refuse in num- 
bers it is assumed that all are rejects, and it appears that rejection 
must have been mainly on account of too great thickness or defective 
outline or texture. Many of these pieces bear evidence of repeated 
but ineffectual efforts to reduce thickness and remove excrescences. 

The oblong, oval blade, 1, prevails (this species is shown enlarged 
in plate v); 2,3, and 8 are slight variations from this type. Some forms 
are rudely triangular, 4; others approach the discoid or circular 
form, 9. Some are long with parallel sides and squarish ends, 10, as if a 
chisel shape had been in view. Additional outlines illustrating oblong 
and pointed forms are given in 5, 6,and 7. This series of specimens 
probably indicates pretty closely the range of blank forms produced on 
the quarry site, and it is quite possible that some of the pieces in- 
cluded are completed forms (so far as this site is concerned), left on 
the site by accident. 

In digging about the roots of the gnarled oak shown in plate XI, 
three or four handsome blades, almost perfect in outline and apparently 
not too thick for the ordinary uses to which such objects are usually 
devoted, were found scattered through the débris. It is one of these 
(1, plate 1v) that is shown full size in plate v. 

A progressive series of rejects is given in the two upper lines of 
plate rv. Each blank blade of the remaining line passed through just 
such a succession of morphologic steps. The small scale makes it diffi- 
cult to realize the true nature and dimensions of the specimens, but 
some definite notion may be obtained by observing that the aver- 
age size is about that of the piece shown in plate vy. For convenience 
of insertion as a plate this series has been divided midway. Begin- 
ning with a lump of the raw material at the left we pass through suc- 
cessive steps of specialization to the most highly elaborated form.! 

It happens that occasional specimens, by a semblance of specializa- 
tion accidentally acquired, have assumed forms characterizing some of 


1This is the type series shown in the exhibit of the Bureau of Ethnology in the World's Columbian 
Exposition. 


nN 


l 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY BULL. U 


Ae, 


vi 


REJECTS. 


a. Massive reject resembling a common type of paleolithic implement; b, reject of ordinary 
type resulting from failure of flakes to carry across body of specimen. 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


REJECTAGE FROM FA 


Sy i 
ri f 
< 7 
» { 
‘* 
= - Sere oe 
a 
* 
wn 
“ 
é 
. 
: ? 
ie . 
cab] 
4 
i4 ; , 
ef iy a 
: 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


PROFILE AT THE RIGHT. ACTUAL SIZE. 


REJECTAGE FROM FAILURE TO REMOVE HUMP, SEEN IN 


fia 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


FORM OF REJECT OCCURRING SO| 


oH Ya eg Rae 
j vs, ay ee NN 
F v1 «et ak A hed, Uae 
<4. Pe Wy il ies lie 
; ii Ly 
Lyman 


a. ig/ ‘ 
ad im Dits 
' @ nod 
re 
;* 
7 cy 
‘@ 
» 
as - 
‘a \ 
| 
\ 
a 
A i, 
a") : 
; “i Ley 
‘ 
; , nhl 
a 
Sager le 
“ ’ 
' ¥ , 
: « ‘ ee h. 
. i? 
» 
‘ “tee ao 
‘ ee ak 
_ Dig 9 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


FORM OF REJECT OCCURRING SOMEWHAT RARELY, THE SIDES BEING SLIGHTLY NOTCHED AS IF THE IMPLEMENT WAS TO BE 


ACTUAL SIZE. 


HAFTED AS AN AX. 


ne 


mace CHARACTER OF THE REJECTS. 17 


the well known types of European paleolithic implements. Such a 
piece is shown in a, plate v1. It represents an abortive attempt at 
blade-making, the heavy end having been much battered in attempts 
to reduce the thickness. This specimen was so discolored by lichens 
- that a good photograph could not be made. An additional example of 
rejection from too great thickness is given in b, on the same plate. In 
this case a pronounced hump has developed on one side, and repeated 
biows on the edge of the specimen employed to remove the excrescence 
have only tended to increase the difficulty. Plate V1I is intended to 
show still more fuliy this important class of rejects. One variety recur- 
ring somewhat rarely is shown in plate vil. The sides are obscurely 
notched, giving an ax-like outline, but it can not be determined whether 
or not this was intentional, representing the beginning of some peculiar 
specialization, or whether it is the result of repeated attempts to reduce 
the great thickness of the middle part of the specimen by strokes first 
on one edge and then on the other. These specimens are nearly all 
highly convex on both sides. 

Besides the varieties of shop refuse, rejects and broken incipient 
implements, referred to and illustrated above, there are among the 
rejectage many interesting fortuitous shapes—shapes produced in shap- 
ing implements but not themselves the subject of the shaping opera- 
tions. There are flakes and fragments in great diversity of shape. 
Fracture is often eccentric and unique forms are produced, some of 
which are so suggestive as to lead the operator to the fashioning of 
new and unheard of forms. The long slender flakes are often excellent 
knife blades, and many must have been utilized in the arts without 
modification. Others are slender and dagger-like, making effective 
perforators or piercing tools or weapons. 

In shaping the quarry blades the most marked tendency toward 
abortive fracture is in the direction of too great thickness. Fracture 
by blows delivered on or near the edge of the specimen does not carry 
across the face of the specimen, but rises quickly, resulting in high 
backs or peaks with facets recalling those of a turtle’s back. Common 
forms have already been presented. Very often these forms are pro- 
nounced pyramids, as shown in a, plateIx. Eccentric shapes occur, such 
as that shown in c, where a curved spawl has been worked on one side 
only with the view of reducing the convexity. These shapes grade 
imperceptibly into other conical or pyramidal forms, which are cores 
resulting from the removal of flakes for some unknown use—perhaps 
as knives—or to be carried away for the manufacture of small arrow 
points, scrapers, and the like. They resemble the well known cores of 
obsidian, so common in Mexico, from which thin blade-like flakes were 
removed for knives and razors. Two specimens of these cores are 
shown in plate x. It is very hard to draw the line between such cores 
and the high-backed failures previously mentioned, and we class them 
aS cores only because it seems unlikely that the flaking could have 

BULL. U=—21 2 


18 AN ANCIENT QUARRY IN INDIAN TERRITORY. $ BUBEAT OF 


been done with the hope of reducing the thickness and securing a blade 
or any form of implement of which we have knowledge. : 

If flakes were removed to be used in arrow-making they were carried 
away as flakes, for there is not a trace of the manufacture of small 
articles at this site, the smallest unbroken worked piece found in several 
days’ examination being more than 3 inches long. The flakes removed 
from the cores, as indicated by the facets, were in many cases as long as 
this, but they were usually thin and fragile; and, if used for implements 
that required further elaboration, they must have been flaked by pres- 
sure, a process not employed so far as observed in or about the quarry. 


HAMMERSTONES. 


The hammerstones found associated with the débris of the quarry 
shops do not differ materially from those found on similar sites in other 
parts of the country. They are not so numerous as elsewhere, but it is 
probable that good stone was scarce in the region. Water-worn bowl- 
ders and masses of quartzite were used, but tough pieces of the chert 
reduced to discoidal or globular shape are found in greater numbers. A 
specimen of rather Small size is shown full size in plate x1. It is a 
mass of gnarled chert, flaked and battered into shape. These ham- 
mers vary in diameter from 2 to 8 inches or more. 


AGE. 


A glance at the quarry-shop phenomena is sufficient to convince one 
that the work is not of high antiquity. The pits are still quite deep, 
and the débris is not compacted or filled or covered with earth or vegeta- 
ble matter. Some pits have appearance of greater age than others, and 
the same is true of the shops, but the difference is not so marked as to 
suggest widely separated periods of work. Occupation was evidently 
confined to a single period. The pits and trenches were dug in the for- 
est, and it seems probable that the older oaks were standing when the 
work was done. Strangely enough a glance over the site at the present 
time shows that nearly all the older trees stand on the ridges of undis- 
turbed ground between the excavations, whilst some of the younger 
ones grow in the pits. In order to determine the meaning of this 
phenomenon I selected one of the most antiquated trees on the quarry 
site—a gnarled and stunted oak of the variety locally known as post 
oak—and cleared away the débris about the roots. Shop refuse inclosed 
the base of the trunk, which had expanded in knotty lobes over the top 
of the flinty mass. The roots did not extend into the body of refuse, but 
were confined almost entirely to the underlying bank of original ground 
between two pitsas imperfectly shown in plate x11. The appearances pre- 
sented seemed to indicate that the tree stood here when the excavations 
were made, that the pitting was carried around it, that the trench was 
filled in with flinty refuse covering the base of the trunk, that this pre- 


21, PL. Ix 


BULL. U— 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


REJECTS. 


a. Reject resembling nucleus from which flakes had been removed; b, 


probably a nucleus, but 


ntric shape. 


possibly only a reject from blade-making; c, reject of ecce 


x 


PE: 


BULL. U— 21, 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


y 


1 
i 


wl 
ce 


5 


( 


( 


Zo ie \\ 
: I pl aad h nO uaa tea LY fy 
a MME 
WCC y 
LLL. YY 


PROBABLY FOR USE AS KNIVES. 


J 


REMOVED 


NUCLEI! OR CORES FROM WHICH FLAKES HAVE BEEN 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY BULL. U—21, 


us 
ANS 


\ 
A\\ 


A 
WS 
SN 


LAYS 


AN 
NR 
SAAN 


i 
WN 


HAMMERSTONE OF USUAL TYPE AND AVERAGE SIZE°MADE OF COMPACT CHERT. 


- 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


BULL. U—21, PL. Xil 


oy ay 
eas 
ES | 


Bes 0 


NN 


\ 


\ ( Ny ‘i Mocs 


oe 
as 
oa 


fe 

( 

~ 
CSS OO 


WEY M/A 0) 776 s 


NN ea 


Ea 
ao LEE 


A ww 
. ataA 
fen ae 


aie ¥ 


AGED OAK GROWING ON MARGIN OF ANCIENT PIT, THE ROOTS GROWING IN THE UNDISTURBED 
FORMATION AND BUT SLIGHTLY IN THE REFUSE FILLING THE PIT. 


ARCHEOLOGY, AGE OF THE SHOPS. tee 


vented the free growth of the lower part of the trunk, stunted the tree 
and caused the growth of the encircling excrescence, and that the roots 
of the tree have not, since the quarrying operations ceased, grown suf- 
ficiently to penetrate to any extent the mass of flinty refuse surround- 
ing the island of original ground. If these indications give a correct 
impression of the sequence of events, the quarry work was done during 
the lifetime of this tree, which is now probably not more than 150 years 
in age. 

The appearance of freshness in the deposits of flakes and failures 
does not favor the idea of great age. Many of the shops are so well 
preserved and the flint refuse so white and so free from weathering 
that a long period can not have passed since the work was done. The 
oldest tree actually growing on or in the quarry shop refuse is not over 
75 years in age. It is possible that the flinty refuse remaining long free 
from soil did not encourage the growth of vegetation, so that trees grew 
only on the spaces between the pits not deeply covered with flint; and, 
again, the accumulations of leaves and small growth in the pits may 
have caused the destruction of the young forest trees by affording fuel 
to forest fires. At any rate we shall have to use with much caution 
the argument against great age, based on the growth of large forest 
trees only on the spaces between the pits. 

Having considered all points, | am strongly impressed with the belief 
that the period of occupation was not very remote, and that the last 
work done may come to or very nearly to the occupation of the region 
by the white man. It is not impossible that a study of the inhabited 
sites along the neighboring streams may in time yield data for deter- 
mining something with respect to the period and to the peoples by 
whom the quarry work was conducted. 


“~~ 
w 


ADVERTISEMENT 


The work of the Bureau of American Ethnology is conducted under act of Con- 
gress “ for continuing ethnologic researches among the American Indians under the 
direction of the Smithsonian Institution.” 

Two series of publications are issued by the Bureau under authority of Congress, 
viz, annual reports and bulletins. The annual reports are authorized by concurrent 
resolution from time to time and are published for the use of Congress and the 
Bureau; the publication of the series of bulletins was authorized by concurrent 
resolution first in 1886 and more definitely in 1888, and these also are issued for the 
use of Congress and the Bureau. In addition, the Bureau supervises the publication 
of a series of quarto volumes bearing the title, ‘‘Contributions to North American 
Ethnology,” begun in 1877 by the United States Geographical Survey of the Rocky 
Mountain Region. 

These publications are dinéeibated primarily by Congress, and the portions of the 
editions printed for the Bureau are used for exchange with libraries and scientific 
and educational institutions and with special investigators in anthropology who 
send their own publications regularly to the Bureau. 

The exchange list of the Bureau is large, and the product of the exchange forms 
a valuable ethnologic library independent of the general library of the Smithsonian 
Institution. This library is in constant use by the Bureau collaborators, as well as 
by other anthropologists resident in or visiting Washington. 

The earlier volumes of the annual reports and the first seven volumes of the ‘‘Con- 
tributions to North American Ethnology” are out of print. 

Exchanges and other contributions to the Bureau should be addressed, 

The DIRECTOR, 
Bureau of American Ethnology, 
Washington, D. C., 
U. Si Ae 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITU TLON 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST 


BY 


JAMES MOONEY 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1894 


Introduction... -. 


CONTENTS 


he soucherne Aambic ShOCKS 2.1 22327 ves = ee cere tee ese oie ec aS 
Siouan migrationg.and Iroquois conquests... ...-2:-...-2- +--+. s--------- 


he Biloxi. ... - 


iiesbaskacula. Moctobi, and Chozetta-.-2° 22. :.2..2222-.ee2- 2 oo cs Se. e one 
Mitrovica We Ac CONTO(LOLACY) o sxc- ose - on doo tale t ance Seale = ee eae eee ose oe 
The Monacan confederacy, including the Saponi and Tutelo..............--. 
hes Monacan proper 2-- 2-22 -- 2... --- 328 BES eee Oe ee Bee ee 

Cit De HERE NTP OY EIS cae eat ec oe ea ieee eS, Se a eS 
BIS erm VU OG eaters ete ee era e Cee eie eee tet coe ty aoe eet on oo OY 

PPKeEN UNTAM eC KE OrMNUMual yess Asem. esos ane Se ne es oe oe Se 

ee Ohehane. 2s sees me a eas ean jacob tae neen ba ety east « 
iiiemMicipontsky or Meipousky* sss tases els eects bees ais toe so2k 

Pe on Ane. ENGL. oe pees erent oe cad Anti eee ecb eee lees 


The Occaneechi 


Bates cs culeathl mI y.UUWViCOl< aaa snc oom wereern ns sama a ee een gre on ee IS 
iam oarasancubholr alles 5257 ses same ee ae Re Sone eG Re ke 
sO MINE WRI CO se a= e oo mot Nese erate Se wie Skiers emia tienes eee Bos 

inheyEne.Shoccoree, and Adshusheer == 22-2. 232 3.:4252-4-2-e-0ees face cco 

The Woccon, Sissipahaw, Cape Fear, and Warrennuncock Indians -....-.---. 


The Catawba... 


TNE: AIS ERIN SST ANA LSTS WEL) WC ht ee nn pe ae ene ye ei 
The Pedee, Waccamaw, and Winyaw; the Hooks and Backhooks ~--....---- 
TheiSewee, Santee, Wateree, and Congaree...-.. .----.252.-22-----2----- eee 
Dito Hee COMMA TEUDeSis.2 Sj cies.c oe casa eee ee eee ae pas eee ee a 

(INC LOMMCOny Meat )s) 2c) Gee, Dine Seal eae ere eres ea nee eS Ss 


Cusobo 


Local names from Siouan tribal names in Virginia and Carolina. ....---.-.---- 


Authorities... - 
LUT e5 2 ee ona 


Map showing the location of the Siouan tribes of Virginia and the Carolinas. . 


2° 
oO 


76 


sy i a ‘ . ¥ 
i ; f ma mi f ‘ a eave Me 
Ne ia! 


Se bee 


oH yt 
ee vei 
tat po 


mY pics cs Pi. ‘ ; A y ae 
a) P of th f 
SOF Fh soll ge Sie : Tae 2 US SSO Se eae 
er BF A be ; > << 7 ) Rw yar : “. re wont” ena. \ a) tui 


@ 
a i 


: “8 > - A 4 
"A We 4 ead | i 
4 Guy a 5 ’ 3 
; 


4 
-5 5 
“img 
Ld 4 
ie i ) = ‘ & 
, ¥ wy By A / . ‘ee | 
ise 4 7 1 / gd wk 
x \ Tw i F) _~ . U a ‘ ry T 
iy . ‘ ; A 
i. ‘\ f 
re J Peis, ‘ ‘e “4 P . ¥i@ a 
% d Pa. if “i ? ' Can 
hi q ‘ 


-) yy 4 wi 


“4 ; ‘ Q FETT E hy 
p ba Yo atte , Oper, AP 
; ia es : ; Rey ry a ng ‘ i 


4 


ie 2 


oe 
Ss 


Nada 


; Ni “4 a Biyis ; ha : 
a. et) Rami vibe) 4!) + oe < ey 


- 
7 


ia he 


“ od Ont 


THE SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST 


By JAMES MoOoNEY 


“?'Tis good to muse on nations passed away.” 


INTRODUCTION. 
THE SOUTHERN ATLANTIC STOCKS. 


When the French and English established their first permanent 
settlement in America they found the whole country in possession of 
numerous aboriginal tribes, some large and powerful, others restricted 
to a single village and its environs. The variety of languages and 
dialects at first appeared to be well-nigh infinite; but on further 
acquaintance it was discovered that these were easily reducible to a 
few primary stocks. 

Excluding the Eskimo along the northern coast, the first great group 
comprised the tribes of the Algonquian stock, whose territory on a 
linguistic map appears like a large triangle, extending on the north 
from the Atlantic to the Rocky mountains, but gradually narrowing 
southward until it dwindles to a mere coast strip in Virginia and North 
Carolina, and finally ends about the mouth of Neuse river. 

The territory of the next great group, comprising the tribes of the 
Troquoian stock, either lay within or bordered on the Algonquian area. 
Around Lake Erie and Lake Ontario, and stretching to a considerable 
distance inland on either side, were the Iroquois proper, the Huron 
or Wyandot, and several other closely connected tribes; on the lower 
Susquehanna were the Conestoga or Susquehanna and their allies; 
on Nottoway and Meherrin rivers, in Virginia, were tribes bearing the 
names of those streams, and on the lower Neuse, in North Carolina, 
were the Tuskarora; while on the southwest, in the fastnesses of the 
southern Alleghanies, were the Cherokee, whose territory extended 
far into the gulf states. Although the territories held by the several 
Troquoian tribes were not all contiguous, the languages, with the excep- 
tion of that of the Cherokee, which presents marked differences, are so 
closely related as to indicate a comparatively recent separation. 

The country southwest ofthe Savannah was held chiefly by tribes 
of the Muskhogean stock, occupying the greater portion of Georgia, 
Alabama, and Mississippi, with parts oi Tennessee and Florida. 


5 


le od AI 
BUREAU OF AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. BULLETIN V#22.PL.1 


q | SIOUAN TRIBES 
=o augnoowgh fe ox 


“ar “VIRGINIA AND THE CAROLINAS 


BY 
JAMES MOONEY 


Scale 


1894 


L4 al a) Tr ay OF 
6 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. phate tS 


West of all these tribes was the territory of the great Sionan or 
Dakotan stock, extending in a general way from the Mississippi to the 
Rocky mountains and from the Saskatchewan to the Arkansas. With 
the tribes farther westward and southward the present paper is not 
concerned. 

Most of these tribes. had fixed locations in permanent villages, sur- 
rounded by extensive cornfields. They were primarily agriculturists 
or fishermen, to whom hunting was hardly more than a pastime, and 
who followed the chase as a serious business only in the interval be- 
tween the gathering of one crop and the planting of the next. The 
Siouan tribes, on the contrary, although generally cultivating the 
ground to a limited extent, were essentially a race of hunters, follow- 
ing the game—especially the buffalo—from one district to another, 
here today and away tomorrow. ‘Their introduction to the horse on 
the prairies of the west probably served only to give wider opportunity 
for the indulgence of an inborn roving disposition. Nomads have short 
histories, and as they seldom stopped long enough in one place to 
become identified with it, little importance was attached to their wan- 
derings and as little was recorded concerning them. 

The position of the Algonquian and Iroquoian tribes, as the native 
proprietors of an immense territory claimed by two great rival Euro- 
pean nations, rendered their friendship a matter of prime concern 
throughout the colonial period; and each party put forth strenuous 
efforts to secure their alliance against the other. As a principal means 
to this end, numerous missionaries were sent among them, especially 
by the French, to learn their languages, become familiar with their 
habits of living and modes of thought, and afterward to write down the 
facts thus gathered. There were besides among the early settlers of 
New England and the northern states generally a number of men of lit- 
erary bent who made the Indians a subject of study, and the result is 
a vast body of literature on the northern tribes, covering almost every 
important detail of their language, habits, and history. In the south 
the case was otherwise. The tribes between the mountains and the sea 
were of but small importance politically; no sustained mission work was 
ever attempted among them, and there were but few literary men to 
take an interest in them. War, pestilence, whisky and systematic 
slave hunts had nearly exterminated the aboriginal occupants of the 
Carolinas before anybody had thought them of sufficient importance to 
ask who they were, how they lived, or what were their beliefs and 
opinions. 

The region concerning which least has been known ethnologically is 
that extending from the Potomac to the Savannah and from the moun- 
tains to the sea, comprising most of Virginia, North Carolina, and South 
Carolina. Of some of the tribes formerly within this area the lin- 
guistic connection has long been settled; of some others it is a matter 
of recent discovery; of others again it is still a matter of doubt; while 


sol . ALGONQUIAN AND TROQUOIAN STOCKS. 7 


some must forever remain unclassified, for the tribes have perished 
from the earth without leaving a word of their languages behind. 

The Indians occupying the coast of Virginia, and extending as far 
inland as the geologic structure line marked by the falls of the prinei- 
pal streams, formed the Powhatan confederacy, belonging to the Algon- 
quian stock. Adjoining them on the south were another Algonquian 
people, known to Raleigh’s colonists of 1585 as the Weapemeoc, and 
at a later date as Yeopim ( Weapeme-oc), Perquiman, Pasquotank, and 
Poteskeet, occupying that portion of North Carolina north of Albemarle 
sound and extending as far westward as Edenton; between Albemarle 
sound and Pamlico river and on the outlying islands were the 
Secotan of Raleigh’s time, known afterward as Mattamuskeet, Mach- 
apunga and Hatteras Indians; while the Pamlico country, between Pam- 
lico and the estuary of Neuse river, was held by the Pamlico or Pamti- 
cough, together with the Bear River Indians, the Pomouik or Pama- 
waioe of Raleigh’s colonists; all these people being Algonquian. The 
tribes here classed as Algonquian are known to have been such from 
the vocabularies and isolated words of their languages given by Simith, 
Strachey, Lawson, and others, and from the numerous local names 
which they have left behind in the territory they once occupied. The 
Neusiok, who in 1585 lived just south of the Neuse estuary, in the 
extreme eastern parts of Craven and Carteret counties, in North Caro- 
lina, and who were in alliance with the Pamlico, may also have been 
Algonquian, this bringing the southern limit of that stock along the 
coast almost to Cape Lookout. The Chowanoe or Chowan, on Chowan 
river—chiefly on the eastern bank, contiguous to the Weapemeoc— 
seem also to have belonged to the same stock, judging from the half 
dozen names preserved by Lane. 

The Iroquoian stock was represented by at least four tribes, three of 
which are known from vocabularies and other linguistic material. 
First came the Nottoway on Nottoway and Blackwater rivers in south- 
eastern Virginia, contiguous on the north and east to the Powhatan con- 
federacy and on the south to the Chowanoc. The name Nottoway, by 
which they were commonly known, signifies ‘‘ snakes” or “enemies,” 
and was given by their neighbors, the Powhatan, being one of the 
generic names used by the Algonquian tribes to denote any of a dif- 
ferent stock. Mangoac, the name by which they were known to the 
tribes on the sound, is another generic term used by the Algonquian 
tribes to designate those of Iroquoian stock, and signifies “ stealthy 
ones.” In the north it was commonly written Mingo or Mengwe. 
They called themselves Chiroe™haka, a word of uncertain etymology. 
The fact that neither of these generic terms was ever applied to the 
Chowanoc is evidence that they belonged to the common Algonquian 
stock. Adjoining the Nottoway, and in close alliance with them, were 
the Meherrin, on the lower course of the river of the same name. 
They were a remnant of the Susquehanna or Conestoga, who had 


8 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUBBA OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


fled from the north on the disruption of that tribe, about 1675. On the 
lower Neuse and its tributaries, the Contentnea and the Trent, and 
extending up about as far as the present site of Raleigh, were the 
Tuskarora, the most important tribe of North Carolina east of the 
mountains. Before they rose against the whites in 1711 they were 
estimated at 1,200 warriors, or perhaps 5,000 souls, but their terrible 
losses in the ensuing war, amounting to 400 in one battle and 1,000 in 
another, completely broke their power. The remnant of the hostiles 
abandoned their country and fled to their kindred, the Iroquois or 
Five Nations of New York, by whom they were incorporated as a sixth 
nation. Those who had kept the peace were removed in 1717 to a 
reservation on the northern bank of Roanoke river in the present 
Bertie county, North Carolina, so that the tribe was completely extir- 
pated from its original territory. From here they gradually removed 
in small parties to join their kindred in the north, and in 1790 there 
remained only about 60 souls on their lands in Bertie county, and 
these also finally withdrew a few years later. The fourth Iroquoian 
tribe was the powerful Cherokee nation, occupying all of North Carolina 
and Virginia west of the Blue ridge, as far north at least, according 
to their tradition, as the Peaks of Otter, near the headwaters of James 
river, together with the upper portion of South Carolina and the moun- 
tain section of Georgia and Tennessee. The Coree, on the coast lands 
south of the Neuse, also may have been a tribe of the same stock. 
Farther southward were the Catawba, who had their settlements 
about the river of the same name, just below the border line between 
North Carolina and South Carolina, ranging upward to the hunting 
grounds of the Cherokee, their inveterate enemies. When first 
known they were estimated at 1,500 fighting men, or at least 6,000 
souls, but so rapid was their decline that in 1743, according to Adair, 
they were reduced to less than 400 warriors, and among these were 
included the broken remnants of more than twenty smaller tribes, 
which had taken refuge with their more powerful neighbors, but still 
retained their distinct dialects. Adair enumerates several of these 
incorporated tribes, but the mere fact of such an alliance proves 
nothing as to linguistic affinities. A few Catawba still remain on a 
reservation in South Carolina, and recent investigation among them 
has proved conclusively that they are of Siouan stock. Closely related 
to them linguistically were the Woccon, occupying a small territory 
in the fork of Neuse and Contentnea rivers, in and adjoining the more 
numerous Tuskarora. Although at one time a considerable tribe, 
_ they seem to have disappeared suddenly and completely soon after 
the Tuskarora war. If not absorbed by the Tuskarora they probably 
removed to the south and were incorporated with the Catawba. 
Turning now from the tribes whose affinities are thus well known, 
it will be found, by referring to the map, that we have still to account 
for a large central area. In Virginia this territory iné@ludes all west 


ones STOCK CLASSIFICATION OF TRIBES. 9 


MOONEY. 


of a line drawn through Richmond and Fredericksburg, up to the Blue 
ridge, or about one-half the area of the state. In North Carolina it 
includes the basins of the Roanoke, the Tar, the Cape Fear, the Yadkin, 
and the upper Catawba rivers, comprising more than two-thirds of the 
area of that state. In South Carolina it comprises nearly the whole 
central and eastern portion. In the three states the territory in ques- 
tion comprises an area of about 70,000 square miles, formerly occupied 
by about forty different tribes. 

Who were the Indians of this central area? For a long time the 
question was ignored by ethnologists, and it was implicitly assumed 
that they were like their neighbors, Iroquoian or Algonquian in the 
north and “*Catawban” in the south. It was never hinted that they 
might be anything different, and still less was it suppossed that they 
would prove to be a part of the great Siouan or Dakotan family, whose 
nearest known representatives were beyond the Mississippi or about 
the upper lakes, nearly a thousand miles away. Yet the fact is now 
established that some at least of those tribes, and these the most im- 
portant, were of that race of hunters, while the apparently older dia- 
lectic forms to be met with in the east, the identification of the Biloxi 
near Mobile as a part of the saine stock, and the concurrent testimony 
of the Siouan tribes themselves to the effect that they had come from 
the east, all now render it extremely probable that the original home 
of the Siouan race was not on the prairies of the west but amidst the 
eastern foothills of the southern Alleghanies, or at least as far eastward 
as the upper Ohio region. Some years ago the author’s investigations 
led him to suspect that such might yet prove to be the case, and in a 
paper on the Indian tribes of the District of Columbia, read before the 
Anthropological Society of Washington in 1889 (Mooney, 1) he expressed 
this opinion. 


SIOUAN MIGRATIONS AND IROQUOIS CONQUESTS. 


Horatio Hale, to whom belongs the credit of first discovering a Siouan 
language on the Atlantic coast, noted the evidences that the Tutelo 
language was older in its forms than the cognate dialects of the west, and 
predicted that if this should prove true it would argue against the sup- 
position, which at first seemed natural, that the eastern Siouan tribes 
were merely offshoots from a western parent stock. Investigation might 
result in showing that the western Siouan, like the western Algon- 
quian tribes, had their original home in the east. The inference that the 
region west of the Mississippi was the original home of Siouan tribes, 
and that those of that stock who dwelt on the Ohio or east of the Allegha- 
nies were emigrants from the western prairies did not, by any means, 
follow from the fact that the majority of these tribes were now dwellers 
on the plains, as by the same course of reasoning we might conclude 
that the Aryan had their original seat in western Europe, that the 


10 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


Portuguese were emigrants from Brazil, or that the English derived 
their origin from America (Hale, 1). . 

As early as 1701 Gravier stated that the Ohio was known to the 
Miami and Illinois as the “river of the Akansea” because that people 
had formerly lived along it. The Akansea (Arkausa or Kwapa) are a 
Siouan tribe, living at that time on the lower Arkansas river, but 
now in Indian Territory. More than sixty years ago Major Sibley, one 
of the best authorities of that period in regard to the western tribes, 
obtained from an aged chief of the Osage—a well known Siouan tribe, 
speaking the same language as the Kwapa—a statement which con- 
firms that of Gravier. The chief said that the tradition had been 
steadily handed down from their ancestors that the Osage had 
originally emigrated from the east, because the population had become 
too numerous for their hunting grounds. He described the forks of 
Alleghany and Monongahela rivers and the falls of the Ohio at Louis- 
ville, where he said they had dwelt some time, and where large bands 
had separated from them and distributed themselves throughout the 
surrounding country. Those who did not remain in the region of the 
Ohio followed its waters until they reached the mouth, and then 
ascended to the mouth of the Missouri, where other separations took 
place, some going northward up the Mississippi, others advancing up 
the waters of the Missouri. He enumerated several tribes which had 
sprung from this original migrating body (Featherstonhaugh, 1). 
Catlin heard a similar story among the Mandan, another Siouan 
people living far up the Missouri (Catlin, 1), and Dorsey has since 
found the tradition to be common to almost all the tribes of that stock 
(Dorsey, Migrations, and Kansas). Indeed, two of these tribes, the 
Omaha and the Kansa, cherish sacred shells which they assert were 
brought with them from the great water of the sunrise. 

When this western movement took place we can only approximately 
conjecture. Like most Indian migrations it was probably a slow and 
devious progress with no definite objective point in view, interrupted 
whenever a particularly fine hunting region was discovered, or as often 
as it became necessary to fight some tribe in front, and resembling 
rather the tedious wanderings of the Hebrews in the desert than the 
steady march of an emigrant train across the plains. De Soto found 
the “Capaha” or Kwapa already established on the western bank of 
the Mississippi in 1541, although still a considerable distance above 
their later position at the mouth of the Arkansas. The name Kwapa, 
properly Ugéqpa, signifies people living ‘down the river,” being the 
converse of Omaha, properly Uma™ha", which designates those going 
“up the river” (Dorsey), and the occurrence of the name thus early 
shows that other tribes of the same stock were already seated farther 
up the river. The absence of Siouan names along De Soto’s route in 
the interior country held later by the Osage is significant, in view of 
the fact that we at once recognize as Muskhogean a number of the 


sIOUAN MIGRATION AND THE BUFFALO. 11 


MOONEY 


mames which occur in the narrative of his progress through the gulf 
states. The inference would be that the Muskhogean tribes were 
already established in the southern region, where we have always 
known them, before the Siouan tribes had fairly left the Mississippi. In 
accordance with Osage tradition the emigrant tribes, after crossing the 
mountains, probably followed down the valleys of New river and the Big 
Sandy to the Ohio, descended the latter to its month and there separated, 
a part going up the Mississippi and Missouri, the others continuing their 
course southward and southwestward. In their slow march toward the 
setting sun the Kwapa probably brought up the rear, as their name 
lingered longest in the traditions of the Ohio tribes, and they were 
yet in the vicinity of that stream when encountered by De Soto. 

The theory of a Siouan migration down the valley of the Big Sandy 
is borne out by the fact that this stream was formerly known as the 
Totteroy, a corruption of the Iroquois name for the Tutelo and other 
Siouan tribes in the south. 

As to the causes of this prehistoric exodus, it is impossible to speak 
positively. Hale assumes that the Siouan tribes followed the buffalo 
as it gradually receded westward, but this position is untenable. As 
just shown, some of these tribes were beyond the Mississippi at least 
350 years ago, while the disappearance of the buffale from the east 
was not accomplished until within the present century. The savage 
on foot, and armed only with bow and arrows, could never exterminate 
the game over any large area. It required the gun, the horse, and the 
railroad of civilization to effect the wholesale slaughter that has swept 
from the face of the earth one of the noblest of American quadrupeds, 
There is abundant testimony to the fact that buffalo were numerous in 
the piedmont region of Virginia and Carolina at least as late as 1730, 
and in Ohio valley and Tennessee until after the close of the French 
and Indian war, and did not finally disappear from this central basin 
until 1810. We must seek other reasons than the disappearance of the 
game from what was all a wilderness, keeping in mind at the same time 
the inherent unrest of savages and especially of the Siouan tribes. 
The most probable cause of this great exodus was the pressure from 
the north and from the south of hostile tribes of alien lineage, leaving 
to the weaker Siouan tribes no alternative but to flee or to remain and 
be crushed between the millstones. They chose to abandon the country 
and retreated across the mountains, the only direction in which a retreat 
was open to them. 

The Muskhogean tribes all claim to have come into the gulf states 
from beyond the Mississippi, and the tradition 1s clearest among those 
of them—the Choctaw and Chickasaw—who may be supposed to have 
crossed last. (Adair, 1; Gatschet, Legend,1; see.also, Bartram, Travels, 
and Hawkins, Sketch of the Creek Country.) As they advanced they 
came at last into collision with the Timuquanan and Uechean tribes of 
Florida and Georgia, and then began the long struggle, which ended 


Degas SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. ae 
only with the destruction of the Timukua and the incorporation by the 
Creek, within the historic period, of the last of the Uchi, leaving the 
Muskhogean race supreme from Florida cape to the Combahee river in 
South Carolina. This wave of invasion must necessarily have had its 
effect on the Carolina tribes toward the north. The Yamasi of South 
Carolina were of Muskhogean stock, and seem to have driven out a 
preceding tribe of the Uchean race. 

It is useless to theorize on prehistoric migrations beyond the period 
of coherent tradition. Within this period traditional and historical evi- 
dence point out as the cradle of the Algonquian race the coast region 
lying between Saint Lawrence river and Chesapeake bay. The tribes 
occupying this central position—the Abnaki, the Mohegan, the Lenape, 
and the Nanticoke—regarded themselves as constituting one people, 
and were conceded by the others to be the “grandfathers,” or progen- 
itors, of the stock. From here, as their numbers increased, they sent 
colonies northward along the coast, driving back the Eskimo, and prob- 
ably the Beothuk, westward and northwestward up the valley of the 
Saint Lawrence and the lakes, and southward to occupy the coast of 
Virginiaand a part of Carolina, where, in conjunction with the Iroquoian 
tribes, they expelled the Cherokee from the upper waters of the Ohio 
and compelled them to take refuge in the mountain fastnesses on the 
south. Most of these movements, although the subject of well-supported 
tradition, belong to prehistoric times, but the advance of the Algon- 
quian tribes into the northwest is comparatively modern. Since the 
introduction of firearms, within the last two centuries, the Ojibwa 
have driven the Sioux and Minitari from central Wisconsin and Lake 
Superior to beyond the Mississippi, while the Cree have swept the 
whole country from Winnipeg to Great Slave lake, and the Blackfeet, 
Cheyenne, and Arapaho have moved cut from the Saskatchewan and 
Red river and occupied the plains. 

But the great agents in the expulsion or extermination of the eastern 
Siouan tribes were the confederate Iroquois of New York. With these 
may be included the Tuskarora, who, though established on the Neuse 
river in North Carolina, retained the clear tradition of their common 
origin and were regarded as an outlying tribe of the confederacy with 
which they afterward united as an integral part. From the very first 
we find these pitiless destroyers making war on everything outside the 
narrow limits of their confederacy, pursuing their victims on the one 
hand to the very gates of Boston and on the other to the banks of 
the Mississippi, and making their name a synonym for death and 
destruction from Hudson bay to the Gulf of Mexico. Community of 
blood or affinity of language availed not to turn aside their fury, 
and the kindred Huron, Erie, and Conestoga suffered alike with the 
Ottawa and the [llinois. When their warfare against the southern 
tribes was inaugurated we do not know. It was probably continuous 
with the expulsion of the Cherokee from the upper Ohio, and was in full 


eaes IROQUOIS DEPREDATIONS. 13 


progress nearly three centuries ago. As early as 1608 John Smith 
found the Iroquois, known to the Powhatan tribes as Massawomek, 
regarded as “their most mortall enemies” by all the tribes of Virginia 
and Maryland. The Susquehanna (‘‘ Sasquesahanock ”) or Conestoga 
at the head of the bay, who had nearly six hundred warriors, all “‘ great 
and well-proportioned men,” he found ‘ pallisadoed in their Townes to 
defend them from the Massawomekes their mortall enemies” (Smith, 1). 
Sixty-five years later these giant-like men, notwithstanding their pal- 
isaded defenses, were forced to abandon their country to the conquering 
Iroquois and come down upon the frontiers of Virginia, thus precipitat- 
ing the Indian war which resulted in Bacon’s rebellion. On the upper 
Rappahannock he was told that the Massawomeke made war with all 
the world, and he states that all the tribes of the interior ‘are con- 
tinually tormented by them: of whose cruelties they generally com- 
plained, and very importunate they were with me and my company to 
free them from those tormentors. To this purpose they offered food, 
conduct, assistance, and continual subjection” (Smith, 2). 

In 1701 John Lawson, the surveyor-general of Carolina, made a cir- 
cuitous journey through the interior from Charleston to Pamlico sound, 
and on every hand, alike from Indians and traders, he heard stories of 
the ruin wrought by the “‘Sinnagers” (Seneca, i. e. Iroquois), who, hay- 
ing completed the conquest or extermination of all the tribes which 
had formerly withstood their power in the north, were now at liberty 
to turn the full current of their hatred upon the weaker ones of the 
south. Even on the border of South Carolina he was shown the grave 
piles erected over the bodies of their victims. He found the larger 
tribes living in forts and obliged to keep continual spies and outguards 
on the lookout for better security, while smaller tribes—the Saponi, 
Tutelo, and others of Siouan stock—were consolidating and withdraw- 
ing to the protection of the English settlements. He described the 
Iroquois as “A sort of people that range several thousands of miles, 
making all prey they lay their hands on. These are feared by all the 
Savage nations I ever was among” (Lawson, 1)—a striking confirma- 
tion of the statement given to Smith seventy years before, that‘they 
‘made war with all the world. Byrd, about 1730, says that the northern 
Indians were the implacable enemies of these Siouan tribes, and that 
the frequent inroads of the Seneca had compelled the Sara to aban- 
don their beautiful home ou the banks of the Dan and take refuge on 
the Pedee (Byrd, 2). On one occasion the Iroquois themselves asserted 
that these southern Indians had been for a long time their enemies, 
and that they (the Iroquois) formerly had been so exasperated against 
them that they had taken them prisoners even out of the houses of the 
Christians (New York, 1). When at last, in 1722, at the urgent solici- 
tation of the colonial government, they consented to cease their attacks 
upon the miserable remnant gathered under the guns of Fort Chris- 
tianna, they declared that they had cherished toward these people “so 


14 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. ce 
inveterate an enmity that it could be extinguished only by their tetal 
extirpation” (New York, 2). On the same subject, Byrd said, in 1728: 
“And now I mention the northern Indians, it may not be improper 
to take notice of their implacable hatred to those of the south. Their 
wars are everlasting, without any peace, enmity being the only inher- 
itance among them that descends from father to son, and either party 
will march a thousand miles to take their revenge upon such hereditary 
enemies” (Byrd, 2). The great overmastering fact in the history of the 
Siouan tribes of the east is that of their destruction by the Iroquois. 
The various tribes and confederacies which made up this eastern 
Siouan group, or were intimately connected with it, will be treated sep- 
arately. The description of each tribe will be preceded by asynonymy, 
giving the various names known to have been applied to it. The 
Biloxi, whose isolated position has given them a separate history, 
will first be described, and more closely aggregated tribes and confed- 
eracies will then receive attention. 


THE BILOXI. 
Synonymy. 


Ananis (for Anaxis?).—Document of 1699 in French, Louisiana, 1875, p. 99. 

Annocchy.—Document of 1699 in Margry, Découvertes, vol. iv, 1880, p. 172. 

Baluxa.—Brown, Western Gazetteer, 1817, p. 133. 

Beloxi.—Porter (1829) in Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, 1853, vol, iii, p. 596. 

Beluxis.—Document of 1764 in New York Doe. Col. His%., 1856, vol. vii, p. 641. 

Bilexes.—Berquin-Duyallon, Travels in Louisiana, 1806, p. 97. 

Billoxis.—Butel-Dumont, Louisiana, 1753, vol. i, p. 154. 

Bilocchy.—De VIsle map, 1700. 

Biloccis.—Robin, Voyage wa la Louisiane, 1807, vol. ii, p. 54. 

Bilowi.—Berquin-Duyallon, Travels in Louisiana, 1806, p. 91, note (misprint). 

Biloxis.—Penicaut (1699) in French, Louisiana, n. s., 1869, p. 38. 

Bilusi.—Michler in Report of Secretary of War, 1850, p- 32. 

B’luksi.—Mooney, MS., 1886 (‘‘ Trifling, worthless;” Choctaw name). 

Binukhsh.—Gatsehet, Caddo and Yatassi MS., 1885 (Caddo name). 

Bolixies.—Schooleraft, Indian Tribes, 1854, vol. iv, p. 561. 

Boluxas.—Sibley (1805) in Lewis and Clark, Discovery, 1806, p. 94. 

Paluxsies. —Parker, Texas, 1856, p. 221. 

Poluksalgi. —Gatschet, Creek MS. (Creek name, plural form). 

Poutoucsis (for Poulouesis?).—Berquin-Duvallon, Travels in Louisiana, 1806, p. 94. 

Tancks or Tanks. —Gatschet, Biloxi MS., 1886. (Naime used by themselves; Taneks 
haya, the Biloxi people.) 


Inspection of the various names which have been applied to this 
tribe suggests that they are all derivatives from Taneks, the name 
by which the Biloxi call themselves. The interchangeability of the 
liquids /, n, and r in different dialects is a well-known linguistic fact, 
while the substitution of a labial for a dental or a compound labial- 
dental is of frequent occurrence in the Siouan languages. As exam- 
ples, Dorsey mentions mda or bla and mdu or blu, pronominal particles 
in Dakota, which become hata ov hatu in Oto, and ta or tu in Winne- 


= ae BILOXI HABITAT AND POPULATION. 15 


bago. Mde or bde, the Dakota word for lake, is a good example of a 
compound sound which to an alien people might appear a simple labial 
or dental. The name B’luksi or Biloxi, signifying “trifling or worth- 
less” in the language of the Choctaw, may have been given them by 
that tribe on account of its resemblance to the proper name, in accord- 
ance with acommon habit among Indian tribes of substituting for a tribal 
name of unknown meaning some translatable name of similar sound 
from their own language, especially when, as in this case, the latter 
term has a derogatory or sarcastic import. The people themselves, 
like a hundred other tribes, can not explain the meaning of their name. 
Dorsey thinks the word is connected with the Siouan root changa or 
hanga, signifying “first,” “foremost,” “original,” “ ancestral,” an idea 
embodied in many tribal names, the assumption of antiquity being 
always flattering to national pride. Thus the Winnebago call them- 
selves Ho-changa-ra, ‘tie people speaking the original language.” In 
Biloxi we find tanek-ya signifying “the first time” (Gatschet), and 
Taneks haya, or Biloxi people, would thus mean “ the first people.” 
Dorsey suggests that the old French form of 1699, Anani, may be from 
anyadi, or haryadi, another word for ‘‘ people” in their own language. 

The Biloxi were first noted: by Iberville, who found them in 1699 
living about Biloxi bay on the coast of Mississippi, in connection with 
two other small tribes, the Paskagula and Moctobi, the three together 
numbering only about twenty cabins (Margry, 1). It is evident that 
they were even then but remnants of former larger tribes, which, having 
been reduced by war, pestilence, or other calamities, had been com- 
pelled to consolidate and take refuge with the powerful Choctaw, who 
claimed all the surrounding country. At a later period the Biloxi 
removed northwestward to Pearl river (Jefferys, 1), and thence crossed 
the Mississippi into Louisiana, probably about 1763, settling on Red 
river and Avoyelles lake near the present Marksville (Am. 5S. P., 1); 
they were mentioned in a list of southern tribes in 1764 (New York, 3). 
In 1784 they and the Paskagula, who still lived near them, were 
estimated together at thirty warriors, or probably about a hundred 
souls (Imlay, 1). In 1806 they had two villages, one at Avoyelles on 
Red river and the other on the lake, and wandered up and down the 
bayous on the southern side of the stream (Berquin-Duvallon, 1). In 
1829 they were reported to number 65, living with Caddo, Paskagula, 
and other small tribes about Red river and the frontier of Texas 
(Schoolcraft, 1). About the same time Mexican authorities report 
them as numbering twenty families, on the eastern bank of the Neches 
in Texas. After this no more was heard of them until recently. 

From the fact that the Biloxi were known in history only as a tribe 
subordinate to the Choctaw, it was very naturally supposed that they 
were of the same linguistic connection, more especially as most of the 
region of the gulf states was held by tribes of Muskhogean stock. 
Sibley, in 1805, stated that they spoke the general trade language 


rel x UREAU 
16 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. Ee 


known as Mobilian—a corrupt Choctaw—but had a distinct language 
of their own, without, however, giving any hint as to what that lan- 
guage mightbe(Am.S.P.,2). Itremained for Gatschet to prove that the 
Biloxi are the remnant of an isolated Siouan tribe. In 1886, while 
pursuing some linguistic researches in the southwest, in the interest of 
the Bureau of Ethnology, Mr Gatschet came across a small band of 
Biloxi still living near Lamourie bridge on Bayou Beeuf, in Rapides 
parish, Louisiana, sixteen miles south of Alexandria. They numbered 
only 25 all told, including several mixed bloods, and hardly half a 
dozen were able to speak the language fluently; but from these he 
obtained a vocabulary which established their Siouan affinity beyond 
a doubt. Although on the verge of extinction, poor, miserable, and 
debilitated from their malarial surroundings, they yet retained all the 
old pride of race, insisting on being called Taneks, and refusing to be 
known as Biloxi. 

Following up this discovery, Dorsey, the specialist in the Siouan 
tribes, visited the Biloxi of Louisiana in 1892 and again in 1893, and 
has succeeded in collecting from this small remnant a valuable body 
of linguistic and myth material. A synopsis of the results obtained 
appears in his paper on the Biloxi, published in 1893 in the proceedings 
of the American Association for the Advancement of Science. He 
states that in 1892 the only survivors of the tribe remaining in Louisi-. 
ana were about a dozen individuals living near Lecompte, in Rapides 
parish. One of his informants said, however, that toward the close of 
the civil war, or about 1865, a large party of Biloxi and Paskagula 
removed to a place in Texas which he called “Comishy.” This is, 
doubtless, Kiamishi river, a northern tributary of Red river, in the 
Choctaw nation, and an o]d settlement nucleus for Choctaw, Caddo, 
and other emigrant tribes from Louisiana. From personal inquiry 
among the Caddo, Creek, and Choctaw, I am led to believe that 
these Biloxi are now with the mixed band of Alabama, Coasati, 
and Muskogee living near Livingston, in Polk county, Texas, and in 
a smaller settlement nearer Houston. There are none now in the 
Choctaw nation or among the Caddo in Oklahoma, but one or two 
individuals are said to be living near Okmulgee, in the Creek nation. 
Allthree of these tribes are perfectly familiar with the name. 

Their former neighbors, the Choctaw, say that the Biloxi were orig- 
inally cannibals. The statement must be taken with some allowance, 
however, as the charge of cannibalism was the one most frequently 
made by Indians against those of an alien or hostile tribe. From 
information obtained by Mr Dorsey it appears that the Biloxi formerly 
dressed in the general style of other eastern tribes, and that tattooin, 
was sometimes practiced among them. They made wooden bowls, horn 
and bone implements, baskets, and pottery. They still remember the 
names of three gentes, the deer, grizzly bear (?), and alligator, and 
probably had others in former times. Descent, as usual, was in the 


OUAN e 
COREY BILOXI MYTHOLOGY. L7 


female line, aud there was a most elaborate kinship system (Dorsey, 
Biloxi). Their mythology, as noted by Dorsey, has evidently been 
much affected by contact with the whites. They venerate the thunder 
(personage) and will talk about it only in clear weather. They will 
not kill or eat the snipe, because it is the sister of the thunder. They 
also respect the humming bird, because, as they say, it always speaks 
the truth. They believe that the slain deer is resurrected three times, 
but that if killed the fourth time the spirit leaves the body forever. 
The same belief is held by the Cherokee. Their dwellings were of two 
kinds, the low wigwam of the eastern tribes and the high pointed tipi 
of the more nomadic western Indians (Dorsey, Biloxi). 

Our latest information concerning the Biloxi of Louisiana is con- 
tained in a letter received by Mr Dorsey in February of this year (1894), 
in whieh it is stated that the handful of survivors were then preparing 
to remove farther westward, presumably to the Choctaw nation, where 
all stragglers from the Louisiana tribes find a welcome. 


THE PASKAGULA, MOCTOBI, AND CHOZETTA. 
Synonymy. 
Pascagoula.—Common geographic form. 
Pascoboula.—iberville (1699) in Margry, Découvertes, vol. iv, p. 195 (misprint). 
Paskagula.—“ Bread people;” correct Choctaw form. 
Paskaguna.—Moouey ; Caddo form. 
Moctoby.—Iberville (1699 in Margry, op. cit., p. 195. 
Chozettas.—-Iberville (1699) in Margry, op. cit., p. 154. 


The Paskagula and Moctobi tribes are mentioned by Iberville 
(Margry, 2) in 1699 as living on Pascagoula river near the coast of Mis- 
sissippi, associated with the Biloxi, each of the three tribes, although 
but few in numbers, having its own village. As the French settlement 
on Biloxi bay was nade in that year, this date probably marks the 
beginning of their displacement and removal westward. We know 
nothing of their language, but from their intimate connection then and 
afterward with the Biloxi, it is very possible that they were cognate. 
The name of the Moctobi seems to have disappeared from the earth, 
as repeated personal inquiry among the Choctaw and Caddo has 
failed to elicit any knowledge of sucha tribe. It is quite probable that 
the form given in Margry is a misprint or other corruption, as we find 
the misprint form, Pascoboula, in the same reference. 

The Paskagula are better remembered. The name is not their own, 
but was given to them by the Choctaw, and signifies ‘bread people,” 
from paska “bread” and okla “people.” It has been retained as the 
name of the river in Mississippi on which they formerly had their vil- 
lage. I found the name of this tribe still familiar to the Choctaw and 
Caddo, the latter of whom, having no / in their language, pronounce the 

BULL. V=22 2 


18 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. oTRNGLoen 


word ‘‘ Paskaguna.” There are none now among either of these tribes, 
but the Caddo have a distinct recollection of them as neighbors when 
they lived lower down on Red river in Texas and Louisiana. In 1784, 
eighty-five years after their mention by Iberville, we find them in 
Louisiana, still living with the Biloxi (Imlay, 2). In 1829 they were 
mentioned as living in connection with the Biloxi and Caddo on Red 
river, about on the eastern border of Texas. They were then reported 
to number 111, while the Biloxi were reported at only 65, which, if cor- 
rect, would show that sixty years ago the Paskagula were the more 
important of the two (Schoolcraft, 2). They can hardly have become 
extinct within so short a period, and it is probable that they, as well 
as the Biloxi, still exist among the Alabama and other small tribes 
already referred to as now living in eastern Texas, where enough of 
their language may yet be obtained to settle their linguistic affinity. 

The Chozetta, mentioned in 1699 as living on Pascagoula river in 
connection with the Paskagula, Biloxi, and Moctobi (Margry, 3), may 
also have been of Siouan stock. 


THE MANAHOAC CONFEDERACY, 


Synonymy. 


( Mahoc.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 2 (same?). 
| Mahock.—Ibid., p. 10 (same ?). 
Managog.—Ibid., p. 2 (misprint). 
Manahoacs.—Jetferson (1781), Notes on Virginia, 1794, p. 134. 
1: j Manahocks.—Smith (1629), Virginia, reprint of 1819, vol. i, p. 188. 
Mannahannocks.—Kingsley, Standard Natural Library, 1883, part 6, p. 151 (mis- 
print). 
Mannahoacks.—Smith, Virginia, 1819, op. cit., vol. i, p. 134. 
Mannahocks.—1bid., p. 186. 
Mannahokes.—Ibid., p. 120. 
( Stegara.—Smith, Virginia, vol. i, map. 
| Stegarakes.—Ibid., p. 134. 
Stegarakies.—Jefterson, op. cit., p. 134. 
Stegora.—Smith, op. cit., p. 186. 
2. { Stenkenoaks.—Hale in Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., 1883-84, vol. xxi, p. 7. 
Stenkenocks.—Albany Conference (1722) in New York Colonial Documents, 1855, 
vol. v, p. 673 (misprint). 
| Steukenhocks.—Byrd (1728), History of the Dividing Line, 1866, vol. i, p. 188, 
| Stukarocks.—Spotswood (1711), in Burk, Virginia, 1805, vol. iii, p. 89, 
{ Shackaconias.—Smith, op. cit., p. 134. : 
3. H Shackakonies.—Jefferson, op. cit., p. 134. 
| Shakahonea.—Smith, op. cit., p. 186 (misprint). 


( Tanxsnitania.—Smith, Virginia, vol. i, map. 
Tauxanias.—Ibid., p. 134. 
4.4 Tauxitanians.—Jefferson, op. cit., p. 134. 
| Tauxsintania.—Smith, op. cit., p. 187. 
| Tauxruntania.—Ibid., p. 186. 


Ontponeas.—Ibid., p. 134. 
* ( Ontponies.—Jefterson, op. cit., p. 134. 


— 


ete MANAHOAC TRIBES AND HABITAT. 19 


MOONEY 


6 Tegninaties.—Ibid., p. 134. 
% Tigninateos.—Smith, op. cit., p. 134. 


7 } Whonkenteaes.—Smith, op. cit., p. 134. 


Whonkenties.—Jefferson, op. cit., p. 134. 
( Hasinninga.—Smith, op. cit., p. 186. 


8. 4 Hassinuga.—Smith, op. cit., map. 
; | Hassinungaes.—Smith, op. cit., p. 134. 


The Manahoac confederacy of Virginia consisted of perhaps a dozen 
tribes, of which the names of eight have been preserved. With the 
exception of the Stegarake, all that is known of these tribes was 
recorded by Smith, whose own acquaintance with them seems to have 
been limited to an encounter with a large hunting party in 1608, Smith, 
however, was a man who knew how to improve an opportunity; and 
haviig had the good fortune to make one of them a prisoner he man- 
aged to get from him a very fair idea of the tribes and territories of the 
confederacy, their alliances and warfares, their manner of living, and 
their cosmogony, aud succeeded, before his departure, in arranging a 
precarious peace between them and their hereditary enemies, the Pow- 
hatan confederacy. 

The Manahoac tiibes cecupied the upper waters of the Rappahan- 
nock above the falls near Fredericksburg. In this territory, comprising 
northern Virginia between tide water and the Blue ridge, the allied 
bands wandered about without any fixed location, Jefferson’s attempt 
at locating them by counties is evidently based on Smith’s map, which, 
however, as regards this region, is only intended to be a rough approxi- 
mation, aS Smith did not penetrate far beyond the falls. Smith tells 
us in one place that they lived at the head of the river, among the 
mountains; and in another place (Smith, 3) he gives more detailed 
information: 

Vpon the head of the river of Toppahanock is a people called Mannahoacks. To 
these are contributers the Tauxanias, the Shackaconias, the Ontponeas, the Tigni- 
nateos, the Whonkenteaes, the Stegarakes, the Hassinungaes, and divers others, all 
confederates with the Monacans, though many different in language, and be very 
barbarous, liuing for the most part of the wild beasts and fruits. 

The history of the Manahoac begins in 1608, and as.usual the first 
encounter was a hostile one. In August of that year Captain Smith, 
with 12 men and an Indian guide, ascended the Rappahannock, 
touching at the Indian villages along its banks, and having gone as far 
as was possible in the boat they landed, probably about the present 
site of Fredericksburg, to set up crosses and cut their names on the 
trees in token of possession. This done, they scattered to examine the 
country, when one of the men suddenly noticed an arrow fall on the 
ground near him, and looking up they saw ‘about an hundred nimble 
Indians skipping from tree to tree, letting fly their arrowes so fast as 
they could” (Smith, 4). Hastily getting behind trees, the whites met 
_ the attack, being greatly aided by their Indian guide, who jumped 
about in such lively fashion and kept up such a yelling, letting fly his 


r x » ‘ BUREAU OF 
20 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. Enapieee 


arrows all the time, that their assailants evidently thought the English 
had a whole party of the Powhatan assisting them, and after a short skir- 
mish vanished as suddenly as they had appeared. Pursuing them a 
short distance, the whites came upon a savage lying wounded on the 
ground and apparently dead. On picking him up, however, they found 
that he was still alive, aud had great work to prevent their Indian 
guide from beating out his brains. The prisoner was taken to the boat, 
where his wound was dressed and he was given something to eat, when 
he became somewhat more cheerful. The English then began to ques- 
tion him through their Powhatan interpreter and learned that his name 
was Amoroleck and that he was the brother of the chief of the Hasin- 
ninga, who, with a large hunting party made up from several tribes of 
the confederacy, was camped at Mahaskahod, a hunting camp or head- 
quarters not far off, on the border line between the Manahoae and 
their enemies the Powhatan. When asked why they had attacked 
the whites, who came to them in peace to seek their love, he replied 
that ‘they heard we were a people come from ynder the world, to take 
their world from them ”—not altogether a bad guess for an Indian. 
‘“*We asked him how many worlds he did know, he replyed, he knew 
no more but that which was vnder the skie that covered him, which 
were the Powhatans, with the Monacans and the Massawomeks, that 
were higher vp in the mountains. Then we asked him what was beyond 
the mountains, he answered the Sunne: but of any thing els he knew 
nothing; because the woods were not burnt.” He further told them 
that the Monacan were their neighbors and friends, and dwelt like 
themselves in the hill country along the small streams, living partly on 
roots and fruits, but chiefly by hunting. 

That night as they sailed down the river they were again attacked 
in the darkness by the Manahoac, who evidently believed that the 
whites had killed the brother of their chief. The English could hear 
their arrows dropping on every side of the boat, while the Indians on 
shore kept up a continual shouting and yelling. As it was impossible 
to take aim in the darkness, the whites had to content themselves with 
firing in the direction from which the most noise seemed to come. The 
Indians kept up the pursuit, however, until daylight, when the English, 
having come to a broad bay in the river, pulled the boat out of reach of 
the arrows and coolly proceeded to eat their breakfast. This done, they 
got their arms in order and then had their prisoner to open communi- 
cation with his countrymen standing on the bank. The Indian gave 
the savages a glowing account of how the strangers had preserved his 
life, how well they had used him, how they wished to be friends, and 
how it was impossible to do them any harm. His speech had a very 
gratifying effect upon the Manahoac, who hung their bows and quiv- 
ers upon the trees, while one came swimming out to the boat with a 
bow tied upon his head, and another with a quiver of arrows carried 
in the same way. These they delivered to Smith, it being evidently 
their ceremonial form of making peace, Smith received the envoys 


I N ‘¢ nla bl 
Shad MANAHOAC EARLY HISTORY. 21 


kindly and expressed his desire that the other chiefs in the party should 
go through the same ceremony, in order that the great king whose ser- 
vant he was might be their friend. 

It was no sooner demanded but performed, so vpon a low Moorish poynt of Land 
we went to the shore, where those foure Kings came and receiued Amoroleck: noth- 
ing they had but Bowes, Arrowes, Tobacco-bags, and Pipes: what we desired, none 
refused to give vs, wondering at every thing we had, and heard we had done: our 
Pistols they tooke for pipes, which they much desired, but we did content them 
with other Commodities, and so we left foure or fiue hundred of our merry Manna- 
hocks, singing, dauncing, and making merry (Smith, 5). 

And so do we leave them for a hundred years. With the exception 
of an uncertain reference by Lederer to the ‘‘ Mahocks,” apparently a 
hostile tribe living in 1670 about the upper James, there seems to be 
nothing more concerning the Manahoac confederates for more than a 
century. In this year Lederer made a journey from Rappahannock 
falls due westward to the mountains, through the center of the old 
Manahoae country, but as he met no Indians it is probable that these 
tribes had already moved farther south, and that the Mahock found 
by him on the James in the same year were identical with the Mana- 
hoaec of Smith. A wandering people, living remote from the white 
settlements along the coast and isolated from them by the intervening 
tribes of the Powhatan, they appear to have silently melted away 
before the attacks of their Iroquois enemies from the north, until in 
the beginning of the eighteenth century we find only the Stegarake 
remaining, the others having disappeared or consolidated with them. 

In 1711 Governor Spotswood, of Virgina, mentions the “Stuka- 
rocks” in connection with the Tutelo and Saponi (Burk, 1). Again, 
in 1722, the “ Stenkenocks” are mentioned in the same connection as 
one of the tribes living near Fort Christanna, in Virginia, and which 
the colonial government desired to secure from the further attacks of 
the Iroquois (New York, 4). In 1728 Byrd speaks of the “ Steuken- 
hocks” as a remnant of a tribe living with the Saponi and others at 
the same fort (Byrd, 3). This seems to be their last appearance in his- 
tory as a distinct tribe. The few survivors were merged with the 
Saponi and Tutelo, and thenceforward followed their wandering for- 
tunes, as will be related in treating of the Monacan tribes. 

After careful investigation, J.N. B. Hewitt makes the date of the for- 
mation of the Iroquois league about 1570. It was about forty years 
Jater when Smith learned of them from the Manahoae on the Rap- 
pahannock as making war on all the world. From this it would.-seem 
that within the brief space of half a lifetime they had made their name 
terrible throughout a wide area. At this period the whole interior of 
Pennsylvania was an unoccupied wilderness. The Delaware did not 
remove from Delaware river and the coast lands to settle upon the 
Susquehanna until driven by the pressure of the whites a century 
later. The Conoy (Piscataway) did not move up the Potomac into 
Pennsylvania until about the same time, so that when Smith wrote, 


22 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


and for a long time thereafter, the Iroquois invaders met no opposi- 
tion to their southward advance until they struck the Conestoga 
(Susquehanna) at the head of Chesapeake bay and the Manahoae 
themselves on the Rappahannock. The Conestoga, being a powerful 
people and protected by stockaded forts, were able to hold out until 
1675, but the Manahoac, having no such defensive structures to which 
they could retreat, and probably also having less capacity for organi-. 
zation, were sooner overpowered and forced to abandon their country. 
Some fled to their kindred and friends, the Monacan, farther south. 
ward; but as these were exposed to the same invasion, it seems quite 
probable that the majority chose rather to cross the mountains to their 
westward and seek refuge in the unclaimed and untenanted region 
of the Big Sandy, afterward known as the river of the Totteroy, the 
generic Iroquois name for the eastern Siouan tribes, including the 
Catawba. : 

In regard to these southern conquests by the Iroquois, a speaker for 
the league, in a council at Lancaster in 1744, emphatically denied that, 
the English had conquered any tribes in that direction excepting the 
Powhatan and the Tuskarora, and asserted that all the world knew 
that the Iroquois had conquered the tribes formerly living on the Sus- 
quehanna and Potomac and at the back of the Blue ridge, and that 
these tribes, or their remnants, were now a part of the Trvoquois and 
their lands belonged to the Iroquois alone. Among these conquered 
tribes he named the Conoyuch-such-roonaw, Cohnowas-ronow (Conoy ?), 
Tohoairough-roonaw (Tutelo?) and the Konnutskinough-roonaw. As 
these are not the Iroquois names for the Cherokee, Delaware, Shaw- 
ano, Miami or any other of the important tribes afterward known in 
that region, it is possible that we have here, among others, the Mana- 
hoae and Monacan under other names. 

All that we have of the language of the Manahoac is comprised in 
the eight tribal names given by Smith, with the name-of the hunting 
camp, Mahaskahod, and the single personal name Amoroleck. Even 
these are open to suspicion, as they were obtained through an inter- 
preter of a different linguistic stock. The names Manahoac and Ste- 
garake look very much like Algonquian words, or foreign words with 
an Algonquian suffix. The prefix mo orema seems to be the same that 
appears in all the Monacan tribal names, and is perhaps the Siouan 
locative root mo or ma, signifying place, earth, or country. Smith in 
one place includes both Manahoae and Monacan in a list of tribes 
which could not understand one another except through interpreters, 
and again states rather indefinitely that among the Manahoac tribes 
were “many different in language” (Smith, 6). But although Smith 
was intimately acquainted with the Powhatan tribes on the coast, and 
to some extent with the Monacan, into whose territories he once 
conducted an exploring party, his knowledge of the Manahoac was 
extremely limited, since, as we have shown, he never went beyond the 
border of their country, and met with them on but one occasion, when 


a 


Socuey THE MANAHOAC A SIOUAN TRIBE. 23 


he conversed with them through a Powhatan interpreter. The fact 
that the Monacan and Manahoae were so closely allied, lived in the 
same fashion and in practically the same country, renders it probable 
that the linguistic difference was only dialectic. Byrd, a most compe- 
tent authority, who knew the remnants of these tribes a century later, 
tells us positively that each was formerly a distinct nation, or rather a 
different canton of the same nation, speaking the same language and 
having the same customs (Byrd, 4’. Knowing the Saponi and Tutelo, 
whom heincludes i this statement, to be Siouan, we are thus enabled 
upon his authority to assign the Stegarake and the other Manahoac 
tribes to the same family. 


THE MONACAN CONFEDERACY, INCLUDING THE SAPONI 
AND TUTELO. 


Monacan Synonymy. 


Manacans.—Smith (1629), Virginia (reprint of 1819), vol. i, p. 136. 

Manachees.—Neill, Virginia Carolorum, 1886, p. 325. 

Manakan.—Document of 1701 in Virginia Historical Collections, new series, 1886, 
vol. v, p. 42. 

Manakins.—Stith (1747) quoted in note by Burk, Virginia, 1804, vol. i, p. 128. 

Manikin.—Document of 1700 in Va. Hist. Coll., op. cit., p. 48. 

Mannacans.—Strachey (about 1612), Virginia, 1849, p. 41. 

Mannachin.—Document of 1701 in Va. Hist. Coll., op. cit., p. 45. 

Mannakin.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint of 1860, p. 187. : 

Manskin.—Herrman map, 1670, in Report Comrs. on Boundary between Virginia 
and Maryland, 1873 (misprint). 

Manycan.—Document of 1700 in Va. Hist. Coll., op. cit., p. 51. 

Monacans.—Smith, Virginia, op. cit., vol. i, p. 116. 

Monacans.— Beverley, Virginia, 1722, p. 245. 

Monachans.—Yong (1634), in Mass. Hist. Coll., 4th series, 1871, vol. ix, p. 112. 

Monakins.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 9. 

Monocans.—Strachey, Virginia, op. cit., p. 27. 


Mehemenchoes.—Jefterson (1781), Notes on Virginia, 1794, p. 134. 
Mowhemcho.—Smith, Virginia, op. cit., vol. i, map (misprint). 
Mowhemenchouch.—Ibid., p. 196. 

Mowhemenchughes.—Ibid., p. 134. 


Massinacacs.—Jefferson, Notes on Virginia, p. 134. 
Massinacak.—Smith, op. cit., p. 196. 
Massinnacacks.—Ibid., p. 134. 


Flanahaskies.—Fernow, Ohio Valley, 1890, p. 219 (misprint). 

Hanahaskies.—Batts (1671), New York Documentary Colonial History, 1853, vol. iii, 
p. 197 (misprint). 

Hanohaskies.—Ibid., p. 194 (misprint). 

Monahasanugh.—Smith, Virginia, op. cit., map. 

Monahassanoes. —Jetterson, Notes on Virginia, p. 134. 

Monahassanughes.—Strachey, Virginia, op. cit., p. 102. 

Nahyssans.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 9. 

Nobissan.—Lederer, map in ibid (misprint). 


24 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. SOE 


Yesd".—Hale MS. (Burean of Ethnology), 1877 (name used by themselves). 


Yesah.—Hale, in Proc. Am, Philosoph. Soc., 1883~84, vol. xxi, p. 11. (See Tutelo.) 


Yesang.—Ibid. 


Monasiccapanoes.—Jetterson, Notes on Virginia, 134. 
Monasickapanoughs.--Smith, Virginia, vol. 1, 134. 
Monasukapanough.—Ibid., map. 


Saponi and Tutelo Synonymy. 


Christanna Indians (collective).—Albany Conference (1722) in Byrd, Hist. Dividing 
Line, 1866, vol. i1, p. 253. ; 

Christian Indians.— Albany Conference (1722) in N. Y. Documentary Colonial History, 
vol. v, p. 671 (misprint). 

Chiesa Indians.—ITbid., p. 673. 


Paanese (for Sa-paanese).—Albany treaty (1789) in Hale, N. W. States, 1849, p. 70. 

Saps.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, 1860, p. 89. 

Sapan.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, map. 

Sapon.—Ibid., p. 2. 

Saponas.—-Lawson, op. cit., p. 83. 

Sapones.—Drake, Book of the Indians, 1448, p. xii. 

Sapongs.—Batts (1671) in N. Y.Doe. Col. Hist., vol. ili, p. 194 (misprint, g for y). 

Saponeys.—Johnson (1763), ibid., vol. vii, p. 582. 

Saponees.—Knight (1712) in N. C. Records, vol. 1, p, 866. 

Saponi.—Byrd (1728), Hist. Dividing Line, vol. i, p. 75. 

Saponie.—Doecument of 1711 in N. C. Records, vol. 4, p. 808. 

Saponys.—Document of 1728 in Colonial Virginia State Papers, 1875, vol. i, p. 215. 

Sapoones.—Croghan (1765) in Monthly American Journal of Geology, 1851, p. 271. 

Sapoonies.—Hutchins (1768) in Jefferson, Notes on Virginia, 1787, p. 169. 

Sappona.—Polloek (1712) in N. C. Records, vol. i, p. 884. 

Sapponces.—Albany Conference (1717) in N. Y. Documentary Colonial History, vol. 
v, p. 490 (misprint, ¢ for ¢). : 

Sapponees.—N. C. Council (1727) in N. C. Records, vol. ii, p. 674. 

Sapponeys.—Document of 1709 in Colonial Virginia State Papers, 1875, vol. i, p. 131. 

Sapponie.—N. C. Council (1726) in N. C. Records, vol. ii, p. 648. 

Sapponnee.—Albany Conference (1717) in N. Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vol. v., p. 490. 

Sappony.—N. C. Council (1727) in N. C. Records, vol. i, p. 674. 

Shateras.—Bellomont (1699) in N. Y. Documentary Colonial History, vol. iv, p. 488. 
(nisprint for Tateras). 

Taderighrones.—Index, ibid., 1861, p. 312. 

Tadirighrones.—Albany Conference (1722), ibid., vol. v, p. 660. 

Tatera.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 1816, p. 100. 

Tedarighroones.—Mount Johnson Conference (1753) in N. Y. Documentary Colonial 
History, vol. vi, p. 811. 

Tedarrighroones.—Ibid., p. 812. 

Tedderighroones.—Index, op. cit. 

Tedirighroonas.—Conterence of 1756, ibid., vol. vii, p. 55. 

Tehotirigh.--Hale, in Proce. Am. Philosoph. Soec., 1883-’84, vol. xxi, p. 11 (dialectic 
Iroquois form). 

Tehutili.-_Ibid. (dialectic Iroquois form ). 

Tentilves.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 1816, p. 129 (for Teutilues). 

Tetarighroones.—Mt. Johnson Conference (1753) in N, Y. Doc. Col. Hist., vol. vi, p. 814. 

Tetero.—Byrd (1729), History of the Dividing Line, 1866, vol. i, p. 189. 

Teuteloe.—-Macauley, History of New York, 18, 29, vol. ii, p. 180. 

Thedirighroonas.—Index, op. cit. 


aoe SAPONI AND TUTELO SYNONYMY. 26 


Thoderighroonas.—Conference of 1756 in N. Y. Documentary Colonial History, vol. 
vii, p. 156. 

Tiederighroenes—Cannajohary Conference (1759) in ibid., vol. vii, p. 380. 

Tiederighvroonas.—Mount Johnson Conference (1755) in ibid., vol. vi, p. 982. 

Tiederigoene.-—Stone, Life of Sir William Johnson, 1865, vol. i, p. 485, note. 

Tiederigroenes.—Mount Johnson Conference, op. cit., p. 964. 

Tiutei.—Hale in Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., 1883-81, vol. xxi, p. 11 (Iroquois 
dialectic form). 

Tiuterih.—Iid (Iroquois dialectic form). 

Toalaghreghroonees.—Albany Conference, 1748, in N. Y. Documentary Colonial 
History, vol. vi, p. 447 (misprint). 

Toataghreghroones.—Ibid., p. 441, note. 

Toderechrones.—Albany Conference, 1722, op. cit., vol. v, p. 671. 

Toderichroone.—Albany Conference, 1717, op. cit., vol. v, p. 491. 

Todericks.—Boudinot, Star in the West, 1816, p. 100. 

Todevigh-rono.—Johnson map, 1771; fide Hale, Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., 1883~84, 
vol. xxi, p. 8-(muisprint, v fora). 

Todirichroones.—Albany Conference, 1722, op. cit., vol. v, p. 673. 

Tolera.—Batts, 1671, op. cit., vol. ili, p. 194 (misprint). 

Tolere.—Lambrevyille, 1686, fide Hale, op. cit., p. 2 (misprint). 

Toleri.—Index, op. cit., p. 313. 

Torteros.—Logan, History of Upper South Carolina, 1859, vol. i, p. 33 (misquotation). ; 

Totaly.—Macauley, History of New York, 1829, vol. ii, p. 166. 

Totaro.—Dorsey, manuscript information. (A district in Brunswick County, Virginia, 
named from the tribe.) 

Toteloes.—Schoolcratt, Indian Tribes, 1853, vol. ii1, p. 196. 

Toteras.—Brickell, Natural History of North Carolina, 1737, p. 343. 

Toteris.—Index, op. cit., p. 313. 

Totevos.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina (reprint, 1860), p. 85. 

Totierono.—Vaudreuil Conference (1756) in N. Y. Documentary Colonial History, 
vol. x, p. 500. 


Totivis.—Chauvignerie (?), 1736, in ibid., vol. ix, p. 1057. 

Totora.—Clayton (1671) in Fernow, Ohio Valley, 1890, p. 221. 

Totteros.—Spotswood (1711) in Burk, History of Virginia, 1805, vol. iii, opposite p. 89. 

Tutecocs.—Jolunson (1763) in N. Y. Doc. Col. History, vol. vii, p. 582 (misprint). 

Tuteeves.—Plan of Management (1764) in ibid., vol. vii, p. 641 (misprint). 

Tutela.—Brainerd (1745) in Day, History of Pennsylvania, 1845, p. 525. 

Tutele, Tutelegi,—Gatschet, Shawano MS. (Shawano singular and plural forms). 

Tutelee.—Zeisberger (1782), Diary, 1885, vol. i, p. 115. 

Tuteloes.—German Flats Conference (1770) in N. Y. Documentary Colonial History, 
vol. viii, p. 229. 

Tutie.—Hale, op. cit., p. 11 (Iroquois dialectic form). 

Tutloe.— Macauley, op. cit., p. 169. 

Tuttelars.—Document of 1756 in Rupp, Northampton County, 1845, p. 106. 

Tultelee.—Jones, Ojibway Indians, 1861, p. 21. 

Tutulor.—Peters (1761) in Mass. Hist. Soe. Coll., 4th series, 1871, vol. ix, p. 440. 

Yesan.—Hale, Letter of 1877, in Bureau of Ethnology (proper tribal name). 

Yesah, Yesang.—Hale, op. cit., p.11 (proper tribal name). 


THE MONACAN PROPER. 


The history of the Monacan tribes of Virginia belongs to two distinct 
periods, the colonization period and the colonial period. By the former 
we may understand the time of exploration and settlement from the 
first landing of the English in Virginia to the expeditions of Lederer 


26 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. pth 


and Batts, in 1670 and 1671, which supplied the first definite informa- - 
tion in regard to the country along the base of the mountains. Under 
the colonial period we may include everything else, as after the Revo- 
lution the small remnant incorporated with the Iroquois in Canada vir- 
tually disappeared from history. Up to 1670 the Monacan tribes had 
been but little disturbed by the whites, although there is evidence that 
the wars waged against them by the Iroquois were keeping them con- 
stantly shifting about. Their country had not been penetrated, except- 
ing by a few traders who kept no journals, and only the names of those 
living immediately on the frontiers of Virginia were known to the 
whites. Chief among these were the Monacan proper, having their 
village a short distance above Richmond. In 1670 Lederer crossed the 
country in a diagonal line from the present Richmond to Catawba 
river, on the frontiers of South Carolina, and a year later a party under 
Batts explored the country westward across the Blue ridge to the 
headwaters of New river. Thenceforward accounts were heard of 
Nahyssan, Sapona, Totero, Occaneechi, and others, consolidated after- 
ward in a single body at the frontier, Fort Christanna, and there- 
after known collectively as Saponi or Tutelo. The Monacan proper 
form the connecting link between the earlier and the later period. The 
other tribes of this connection were either extinct or consolidated under 
other names before 1700, or were outside of the territory known to 
the first writers. For this reason it is difficult to make the names of 
the earlier tribes exactly synonymous with those known later, although 
the proof of lineal descent is sometimes beyond question. 
We shall deal first with the Monacan and confederated tribes men- 
_ tioned by Smith. According to this explorer the Monacan confederacy 
in 1607 held the country along James river above the Powhatan, 
whose frontier was about the falls at which Richmond was afterward 
located. Among the tribes of the confederacy Smith enumerated the 
Monacan proper, the Mowhemenchugh, Massinnacack, Monahassanugh, 
and Monasickapanough, and says there were others, which he does 
not name. Like their neighbors, the cognate Manahoac on the Rap- 
pahannock, they were “very barbarous” and subsisted chiefly by hunt- 
ing and by gathering wild fruits. They were in alliance with the Mana- 
hoae and at constant war with the Powhatan, and in mortal dread 
of the Massawomeke or Iroquois. beyond the mountains (Smith, 7). 
He seems to imply that the Monacan tribes named spoke different lan- 
guages, although in another place (Smith, 8) we are led to infer that 
they had butone. The difference was probably only dialectic, although 
the cognate and confederate tribes farther southward probably used 
really different languages. 
Strachey derives the name Monacan from the Powhatan word mono- 
hacan or monowhauk, “sword,” while Heckewelder, through the Dela- 
ware language, translates it “spade” or “digging instrument.” It is 
more probable that the word is not Algonquian at all, but that the 


UAN z : 
SoGant MONACAN EARLY HISTORY. 27 


tribal names given by Smith are approximations to the names used by 
the tribes themselves. The prefix ma, mo, or mon, which occurs in all 
of them, may be the Siouan ma”, “earth” or “country.” Monahassa- 
nugh is the Nahyssan of Lederer, and Monasickapanough may possi- 
bly be the original of Saponi. 

The principal village of the Monacan in Smith’s time was Rasau- 
weak or Rassawek, located in the fork of James and Rivanna rivers, 
in what is now Fluvanna county, Virginia. The village known sixty 
years later as ‘“ Monacan Town” was identical with the Mowhem[en|- 
cho or Massinnacack of Smith’s map (Smith, 9). 

The English having established themselves at Jamestown and 
explored the bay and the lower courses of the principal rivers, were 
anxious to penetrate the interior toward the head of the James, with 
an eye particularly to the discovery of minerals. In this connection 
it may be stated that coal was afterward discovered and worked with 
profit near the Monacan town. To accomplish their purpose the more 
readily they strove to obtain the aid of Powhatan under the specious 
pretext of revenging him upon the Monacan, but the proud chieftain, 
jealous of the encroachments of the strangers, replied that he could 
avenge his own injuries, and refused to lend them guides or assist them 
in any way. Finally, in the fall of 1608, a party of 120 men under 
Newport set out from the falls of the James and marched about 40 
mniles inland up the river, returning in about a week, after having dis- 
covered two of the Monacan villages, Massinacak and Mowhemen- 
chouch. ‘They evidently met no friendly reception from the Monacan, 
which is hardly to be wondered at in view of the fact that the whites 
were scheming to induce the Powhatan to make war upon that tribe 
in order to get possession of their country. As Powhatan had refused 
to furnish guides, they seized a Monacan chief, and, after tying him, 
forced him to go with them and point out the way, which was not con- 
ducive to friendlier feelings in future contacts. After making trial of 
several mineral deposits, they returned without having accomplished 
much in the way of either discovery or negotiation with the Indians 
(Smith, 10). This was the first entry into the Monacan country. 

In the next year (1609) the English made a settlement at the falls of 
the James, in the immediate vicinity of the principal residence of Pow- 
hatan. The site chosen proving unfavorable, they coolly proposed to 
Powhatan that he should surrender to them his own favorite village 
and further pay a yearly tribute of corn for the pleasure of their com- 
pany, or else give them the Monacan country, as though it was his to 
give. The old chief made no bargain, but in a short time his people 
were loud in their complaints that the English, who had promised to 
protect them from their enemies, were worse neighbors than the Mona- 
can themselves (Smith, 11). 

After this no more was heard of the Monacan for sixty years. The 
English were settled on their border, and of course were constantly 


28 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. pebble 


ETHNOLOGY. 


encroaching upon them, and, like all the Virginia tribes, they rapidly 
wasted away. The Powhatan on the east probably kept up their 
desultory raids so long as they themselves were in condition to fight, 
and from numerous chance references we know that the Iroquois were 
constantly striking them in the rear. They probably suffered more or 
less by the relentless war waged by the Virginians against the Pow- 
hatan from 1622 to 1645, at one time during which it was enacted that 
there should be three annual expeditions to sweep the whole country 
from the sea to the heads of the rivers for the utter extermination of the 
Indians. They were also directly in the track of the Rechahecrian 
(Rickohockan, Cherokee), who in 1656 (or 1654) descended from the 
mountains and ravaged the country as far as the falls of the James, 
where they defeated the combined forces of the English and Pamunki 
in perhaps the bloodiest Indian battle ever fought on the soil of Vir- 
ginia (Neill; Burk, 2). The traders were probably among them before 
this time, as we find that in 1643 a party was authorized to explore the 
country west and south of Appomattox river, with the right to trade 
with the Indians for fourteen years (Neill). In 1665 stringent laws were 
enacted for the government of the Indians, and they were no longer 
allowed to choose their own chiefs, but were compelled to accept 
chiefs appointed by the governor (Neill). It is quite plain that all the 
Virginia tribes alike had now become mere dependents of the English. 
A remark by Lederer indicates that the Saponi were at this time ear- 
rying on a war with the whites, and from the harsh regulations made 
by Virginia it is probable that the Monacan and others nearer home 
were also concerned. 

In 1669 the Manachee, or Monacan, were reduced to 30 bowmen 
(Neill, 1), with perhaps a total population of 100 or 129. No other tribe 
of the confederacy is named in the census of that year, the tribes known 
later being still beyond the borders of the settlements. In 1670 the 

rerman traveler, John Lederer, under a commission from the governor 
of Virginia, explored the country from the settlement at James falls 
(Richmond) southwestward through Virginia and North Carolina to 
Catawbariver. Two days above the falls he came to the village of the 
Monacan, who received him with friendly volleys from their firearms. 
From this and other references it appears that the warriors of the Vir- 
ginia frontier, although still called “bowmen,” were already pretty 
well supplied with guns. This village, known then and later as ‘“‘Mona- 
can Town,” was on the southern side of James river, about 20 miles 
above the present Richmond, and within the present limits of Pow- 
hatan county, Virginia. The Indian plantations extended for 5 miles 
along the river, between two small streams known as Monacan and 
Powick creeks. In 1699 a colony of French Huguenots took pos- 
session of the spot, which still retained the name of Monacan Town, 
although the Indians had disappeared (Beverley, 1; V. H.S.,1). The 
village seems identical with the Mowhem/(en)cho of Smith’s map of 1609. 


er : wax? ‘ 
poner THE -“'TACc!” OR “DOGE.” 29 


Near the village Lederer noticed a pyramid of stones, and was told 
that it represented the number of a colony which had left a neighbor- 
ing country because of overpopulation, a condition easily reached among 
hunting tribes. The emigrants, having been chosen by lot, had come 
to their present location under the leadership of a chief called Monack, 
from whom they derived their name of Monacan (Lederer, 1). As the 
explorer stopped with them only long enough to learn the road to the 
next tribe, his version of their migration legend must be taken with due 
allowance. 

In another place Lederer states that the country between the falls of 
the rivers and the mountains was formerly owned by the “Tacci” or 
“‘Dogi,” who were then extinct, and their place occupied by the Mahoe 
(not identified), Nuntaneuck or Nuntaly (not identified), Nahyssan 
(Monahassano or Tutelo), Sapon (Saponi), Managog (Mannahoac), Man- 
goack (Nottoway), Akenatzy (Occaneechi), and Monakin. All these, 
he says, had one common language, in different dialects. This was 
probably true, except as to the Nottoway, who were of Iroquoian stock. 
He describes the region, the piedmont section of Virginia and Carolina, 
as a pleasant and fruitful country, with open spaces clear of timber and 
abounding in game. Farther on he says again that the Indians of this 
piedmont region are none of those whom the English removed out of 
Virginia, but that they had been driven by an enemy from the north- 
west and directed to settle here by an oracle, according to their story, 
more than four hundred years before. He also says that the ancient 
inhabitants of the region, presumably the Tacci, were far more rude and 
barbarous than the more recent occupants, and fed only on raw flesh 
and fish, until these latter taught them how to plant corn and instructed 
them in the use of it (Lederer, 2). As Lederer’s narrative was written 
originally in Latin, his names must be pronounced as in that language. 

In regard to the origin of these tribes, Lawson, speaking of the 
Indians of Virginia and Carolina, says that they claimed that their 
ancestors had come from the west, where the sun sleeps (Lawson, 1). 
The Catawba, as will be shown later on, had a tradition of a northern 
origin. All these statements and traditions concernin g the eastern 
Siouan tribes, taken in connection with what we know of the history 
and traditions of the western tribes of the same stock, seem to indicate 
the upper region of the Ohio—the Alleghany, Monongahela, and Kan- 
awha country—as their original home, from which one branch crossed 
the mountains to the waters of Virginia and Carolina while the other 
followed along the Ohio and the lakes toward the west. Linguistic 
evidence indicates that the eastern tribes of the Siouan family were 
established upon the Atlantic slope long before the western tribes of 
that stock had reached the plains. 

The Tacci or Dogi, mentioned as the aborigines of Virginia and Caro- 
lina, may have been only a mythic people, a race of monsters or unnat- 
ural beings, such as we find in the mythologies of all tribes, They have 


30 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. Se 


‘no relation to the Doeg, named in the records of the Bacon rebellion in 
1675, who were probably a branch of the Nanticoke. 

This seems to be the last appearance of the Monacan in history under 
that name. Beverley, in his history of Virginia, published in 1722, 
makes no mention of them in his list of existing tribes, but in speaking 
of the Huguenot colony of 1699, already mentioned, says that these 
exiles settled on a piece of very rich land on the southern side of James 
river, about 20 miles above the falls, “‘ which land was furmerly the 
seat of a great and warlike nation of Indians called the Monacans, 
none of which are now left in these parts; but the land still retains 
their name, and is called the Monacan Town” (Beverley, 2). It is prob- 
able that between 1670 and 1699 the small remnant had removed west- 
ward and joined the Nahyssan (Tutelo) and Saponi. 

On leaving the Monacan, Lederer passed through the territory of 
the Mahock, mentioned later on, and then, with a single Indian com- 
panion, left James river and turned southwestward. After traveling 
four days over a rough road without meeting Indians or signs of habi- 
tation, he arrived at ‘‘Sapon, a town of the Nahyssans,” situated on a 
tributary of the upper Roanoke. His estimates of distances are tco 
great, but from a comparison of his narrative with that of Batts, written 
a year later, it seems probable that the Saponi village was on Otter 
river, a tributary of the Staunton, or Roanoke, southwest of Lynch- 
burg, Virginia. He describes the village as situated on high land, by 
the side of a stately river, with rich soil and all the requisites for a 
pleasant and advantageous settlement. The name Sapon or Saponi 
may possibly have a connection with the Siouan (Dakota) word sapa, 
“black.” The chief resided at another village, called Pintahe, (p. 127), 
not far distant, and equally well situated on the same river. 

Lederer states that che Nahyssan had been constantly at war with 
the whites for ten years past, notwithstanding which he ventured to go 
among them, trusting to the trading goods which he carried to pro. 
cure him a welcome; for he had heard that they never offered any 
injury to a small party from which no danger could be apprehended. 
In another place he observes that Totopotomoi, the Pamunki chief, 
had been killed while fighting for the English against the Mahock and 
Nahyssan. This event occurred during the invasion of the Rechahec- 
rian (Cherokee) in 1656, and if Lederer’s statement be true it would 
prove that the Siouan tribes of Virginia had aided the Cherokee in 
this invasion. This is quite likely, as we know that the upper tribes 
had always been the enemies of the Powhatan, living lower down. It 
is probable also that the war mentioned by Lederer had been inaugu- 
rated in that year. However, the event justified his calculations, for 
after questioning him closely as to whence he came, whither he went, 
and what his business was, his answers, with the trinkets which he 
presented them, satisfied them that he intended no mischief, and they 
welcomed him with every demonstration of friendship. They even went 
so far as to offer a ‘‘sacrifice”—probably a ceremonial dance—in bis 


iecaet THE NAHYSSAN. 31 


honor, and solemnly consulted their ‘‘medicine” to know whether they 
should not admit him to their council and adopt him into their tribe 
and induce him to stay with them by giving him for a wife the daughter 
of one of their principal men. With some difficulty he waived the 
honor and got away by promising to return to them before many months 
(Lederer, 3), a promise which, however, he failed to keep. 

In Nahyssan we have the Monahassanugh of Smith, the Hanohaskie 
of Batts, and the Yesang of Hale. ‘The last is evidently the generic 
root word, the prefix Mo, Mona, or Na in the other forms probably giv- 
ing a specific local application to the common term. Thus from Led- 
erer’s statement that Sapon was a Nahyssan town we understand 
that the Saponi were a subtribe or division of the people who knew 
themselves as Yesang. Pintahz was the local name of another tribe 
or settlement included under the same generic designation. This is 
the first mention of the Saponi, the Tutelo being first named the follow- 
ing year by Batts. 

The Nahyssan chief is described as an absolute monarch. The people 
were tall, warlike, and rich. Lawson also, thirty years later, describes 
them as tall and well built. In their little temples or medicine lodges 
they had large quantities of pearls, which they had taken in war from 
the southern tribes bordering on Florida, and which were as highly 
prized as among the whites. Their tribal ensign consisted of three 
arrows (Lederer,4). In this connection Beverley states that the Indians 
of each Virginian tribe had a particular -tribal mark painted on the 
shoulder to distinguish themselves when away from home. A common 
tribal mark consisted of one, two, or three arrows arranged to point 
upward, downward, or sidewise, and the Virginia assembly found this 
system of aboriginal heraldry of such practical use in distinguishing 
friends from enemies that they had these designs stamped on metal 
badges which they distributed in quantities to each of the friendly 
tribes, and also enacted a law that no Indians should come among the 
settlements without them (Beverley, 3). 

Lederer gives some general information in regard to these interior 
tribes which may be of interest here. In his hints to traders he advised 
them to carry, to those nearest the frontier, trading cloth (of which a 
yard and a half sufficed to make an Indian matchcoat or mantle), 
together with axes, hoes, knives, scissors, and all kinds of edged tools. 
Arms and ammunition would be eagerly purchased, but this trade was 
contraband, notwithstanding which it appears from various statements 
that some of the tribes were already well supplied in this respect. For 
the remoter tribes the best trading articles were small mirrors, pictures, 
beads, bracelets, knives, scissors, and all kinds of gaudy trinkets and 
toys that were light and easily carried. The goods were frequently 
paid for by the Indians with their native wampum, which he describes 
as their current coin, or with pearls or vermilion, or sometimes, in the 
south, with pieces of silver obtamed from the Indians adjoining the 
Spaniards. He shows himself informed in all the methods of wheedling 


32 SIOUAN. TRIBES OF THE EAST. | renee. 


an Indian, even to making him drunk preparatory to a trade, and lays 
down the cardinal principle, as good now as then, that “in dealing 
with the Indians you must be positive and at a word.” On approach- 
ing an Indian village the traveler was advised to first learn through his 
scouts whether the tribe held any communication with the Susque- 
hanna, in which case he should give notice of his approach by firing a 
gun. With other tribes this was to be avoided, as these were ignorant 
of the use of firearms, and would thus be frightened and disposed to 
‘some treacherous act. From this it would seem that the Susquehanna, 
living at the head of Chesapeake bay, were the medium through 
which the Virginia and Carolina Indians obtained firearms. Lederer’s 
guide on this journey was himselfa Susquehanna. On entering the set- 
tlement the traveler was not to go into any house until invited, when he 
would be led in bound like a prisoner, a curious custom, which they 
-apphed to friends and foes alike. An invitation from the old men 
should be accepted in preference to one from the younger warriors, and 
the guest was advised to be careful to refuse nothing that was set before 
hin, or in any other way to slight their courtesy in the least, as they 
were jealous of their dignity and revengeful when angered. ‘Traders 
were enjoined not to fail to go the rounds of their camp at the close of 
the evening, for it was then, and early in the morning, that danger was 
‘to be anticipated; in the night time the Indians never made an attack. 
This applies also to our modern prairie tribes, arising from a_ belief 
common among them that an Indian killed at night will be forever in 
darkness in the spirit world. It is plain from Lederer’s account that 
traders generally were as unscrupulous, and Indians as uncertain, two 
centuries ago as today. 

For counting, they used pebbles, or bundles of short reeds or straws. 
Heaps of stones indicated the number of persons killed on a battle- 
ground, or of emigrants to some distant region. ‘Time was measured, 
and a rude chronology was arranged by means of strings of leather 
with knots of various colors, very much as in Peru. This system 
proved so convenient in dealing with Indians that it was adopted for 
that purpose by a governor of South Carolina, as shown by an inei- 
dental reference in Lawson. At certain ceremonies reeds or straws 
were arranged in a particular order, and left thus in place after the 
ceremony as a record of the character of the performance there 
enacted. They were never disturbed, as it was deemed a sacrilege to 
interfere with them. If the explorer’s account can be believed they’ 
had a highly developed pictogiaph system, by means of which they 
symbolized not only physical things but also mental qualities. Thus, 
swiftness was indicated by the figure of a deer, wrath by that of a 
serpent, courage by the picture of a lion (panther), and fidelity by that 
of a dog. The English were symbolized under the figure of a swan, 
on account of their white complexion and their power of flight across 
the sea, 


eoanEy CUSTOMS OF THE INTERIOR TRIBES. = 


Lederer’s account of their religion is too general to be definite, and 
he neglects to state to what particular tribal language the Indian 
names quoted belong. They believed in a supreme creator (?) under 
various names, to whom only the high priest offered sacrifice. This 


' supreme being, however, was supposed to pay no heed to any earthly 


matters; so these were committed to the care of lesser spirits, good or 
bad as the case might be, to whom the ordinary medicine-men offered 
prayers and ceremonial propitiation. By Lederer’s supreme god, to 
whom only the high priest sacrificed, may perhaps be understood the 
special palladium or “ medicine” of the tribe, in the keeping of a priest 
of a particular-family or order. 

They had a system of four gentes (as before remarked, it is impossi- 
ble to know how many or to what particular tribes this statement 
applies), called by the names of four women, Pash, Sepoy, Askarin, 
and Maraskarin, from whom they derived their origin, and who were 
believed to be the common ancestors of the human race. They had a 
strict marriage and kinship system, based on this elan division, with 
descent in the female line. Marriage within the clan was regarded as 
incest and was punished with great severity. Even in death this 
division was followed out and separate quarters of their burial places 
were assigned to each of the four clans. The dead were wrapped in 
skins of animals and buried with food and household properties deemed 
necessary for the use of the ghost in the other world. When a noted 
warrior died, prisoners of war were sometimes killed at the grave to 
accompany hit to the land of the dead. Their spirit world was in the 
west, beyond the mountains and the traditional western ocean. 

Their traditional history was delivered in the form of long narratives 
from the fathers to the children, who were obliged to learn them by 
heart. Although ignorant of books and letters, they were trained in 
expression and oratory, and their speakers were frequently men of 
much judgment and eloquence. Children were ruled by persuasion 
instead of command, and were never punished. On one occasion, 
while among the Sara, a little boy shot an arrow at Lederer’s horse, 
and when the traveler spurred the animal out of his reach, the young 
savage tried to send his next arrow through the body of the rider. 
With much trouble the explorer was able to pacify him with small 
trinkets, but the affair roused such a commotion that the old men had 
to take the white man and his horse under their protection to save 
them from injury (Lederer, 5). 

Beverley gives several additional facts in regard to the customs and 
beliefs of the tribes of this section, with more particular reference to 
the Occaneechi, whose dialect was the common language of trade and 
religion. Strangers were received with the pipe of peace, which was 
made larger than the ordinary pipe and adorned with the wings and 
feathers of birds, or with other ornaments. The chief of the village 
filled and lighted the pipe and handed it to the visitor, who, if on a 

BULL. Y=22——-3 


ea r >! i a n EA 
34 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. etc: 


friendly errand, accepted it and took a few whiffs and then returned it 
to the giver, who, after drawing a few pufts himself, passed it over to 
the second man of the delegation, and so on. A refusal to smoke on 
the part of the stranger was regarded as a sign of hostility. They 
were said to believe in a good spirit and an_evil one. To the former 
they paid but little attention, considering it a waste of effort, but took 
particular pains to conciliate the other with prayer and sacrifice. The 
medicine-men had great influence, and used the Occaneechi in their 
ceremonies as a sacred language. Years were connted by winters and 
were divided into five seasons—the budding or blossoming, the ripen- 
ing, the midsummer, the harvest or fall, and the winter: Months were 
counted by moons, and the day was measured by ania noon, and 
sunset (Beverley, 4). 

General accounts of the arts, customs, and ceremonies of these 
tribes will be reserved for another occasion, and attention may be 
confined in this paper to the more specific references. Before going 
further it may be observed that the attempted identification of 
Lederer’s route by Hawks, in his history of North Carolina, seems to 
be entirely incorrect. After making him swing around a narrow circle 
instead of proceeding along the lines of the trading path toward a 
definite point, he leaves the traveler floundering in the marshes of 
Albemarle sound, when in fact he must have been on Catawba river 
on the border of South Carolina, and finally gives up the identification 
in despair with the statement that ‘‘ Lederer’s itinerary presents diffi- 
culties which we confess we can not satisfactorily solve.” 

From the Nahyssan and Saponi Lederer went on into Carolina. 
In the next year, 1671, an exploring party under Thomas Batts, with 
two Indian guides, left the Appomattoc village (now Bermuda Hundred, 
Virginia), at the mouth of the Appomattox, to discover what lay beyond 
the mountains. Traveling nearly due westward about 140 miles accord- 
ing to their estimate they arrived at the ‘‘Sapong Town” (misprint 
for Sapony), where they were welcomed with firing of guns and plenty 
of provisions, and were kindly entertained. It is evident that Lederer’s 
visit the year before had left behind a favorable impression toward the 
whites instead of the former hostility. According to the best study of 
their route, this village was probably on Otter river, a northern trib- 
utary of the Roanoke, in what is now Campbell county, Virginia, nearly 
south of Lynchburg. It was off the line of the Occaneechi trading path, 
which they had left behind them the first day. 

Procuring a Saponi guide they went on to the village of the ‘“* Hano- 
haskies,” which was estimated as 25 miles distant north of west, at no 
great distance from the mountains, and situated on an island in the 
‘‘Sapong river.” This was probably the northern branch of Staunton 
river, in the present Bedford county, Virginia. The Hanohaski (prob- 
ably a misprint for Manohaski) are the Monahassanugh of Smith’s map 
of 1609, on which they are located indefinitely southwest of the junction of 
the James and the Rivanna. From this tribe they met the same friendly 


focnarl LEDERER’S ACCOUNT. 35 


reception. Leaving there a sick man of their party, they started on again 
the next day toward the “Tolera town” in the mountains. After going, 
according to their estimate, about 100 miles in a general southwesterly 
direction, crossing the ‘“Sapong river” several times and climbing 
several smaller mountain ridges, they came to the Tolera (misprint for 
Totera or Tutelo) village located on the headwaters of the Roanoke 
(Dan) and encircled by mountains. The site was probably about the 
present state line southwest of Stuart, in Patrick county, Virginia, or 
possibiy within the limits of North Carolina. Here again they were 
“exceedingly civilly entertained,” and having rested a few days they 
pushed on across the Blue ridge and came down on the other side to 
the headwaters of Newriver. After making some further explorations 
in that direction, they recrossed the mountains and came back as they 
went, meeting from Tolera, Hanohaski, and Sapong the same kind treat- 
ment that they had experienced on their outward journey, and at last 
arrived at the Appomattoc town after an absence of exactly one month. 
From their narrative it is evident that the three tribes mentioned, all 
of whom had already obtained fireariws, were in alliance and were also 
friendly with the Mohetan, living west of the Blue ridge (N. Y., 5). 

The Hanohaskie village of Batts may be the Pintahw of Lederer. 
The latter did not meet the tribe here desigated as the Tolera, as they 
were far remote from the regular lines of travel, and after leaving the 
village which he calls Sapon he turned off to strike the trail which 
crossed the Roanoke at the Occaneechi village about Clarksville, Vir- 
ginia. The chief difficulty in comparing the narratives arises from the 
fact that the names Yesang and Tutelo, in their various forms, are 
used both specifically and collectively. 


COLLATERAL TRIBES. 


Before treating of these better known names, several other tribal 
names or synonyms, for each of which there is but a single authority, 
may be mentioned. They were all probably of the same Manahoae or 
Monacan connection, but it is impossible to identify them positively 
with any of the tribes mentioned by Smith or with any of those prom- 
inent in the later colonial records. This is not necessary, however, as 
Smith himself, in speaking of the two Virginia confederacies just 
referred to, distinctly states that each had other tribes besides those 
which he names, while as for the interior of Carolina, it was entirely 
unknown excepting along the line of the great trading path until after 
the Tuskarora war of 1711 and the Yamasi war of 1715 had brought 
about an upheaval and readjustment of tribal relations by which many 
of the old names disappeared and new ones took their place. In the 
meantime the Indian wars of Bacon’s rebellion and the constant 
inroads of the Iroquois had served further to complicate the problem. 

The Mahoc.—Lederer is the sole authority for this tribe. From his 
narrative it appears that in 1670 they were living on the upper James, 


36 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


with their village at the junction of a stream coming in from the north 
which he judged to be about 100 miles above the Monacan town. This 
estimate is too great, but it is probable that they were located about the 
foothills east of the Blue ridge. The name suggests the Manahoag, 
but, as he mentions both Mahoc and Managog in a list of tribes, they 
may have been distinct. From his reference it seems that they were 
hostile to the English, and he states that Totopotomoi, the Pamunki 
chief, had been killed while fighting for the whites against the Mahoe 
and Nahyssan. As this chief was killed while fighting at the head of 
his men, side by side with the English, to drive back the Rickohockan 
invasion in 1656, it would seem that the Rickochokan (Cherokee) were 
joined by Siouan tribes in their descent upon the lowlands. The 
Mahock are mentioned as speaking the same language, with dialectic 
difference, common to the Monacan, Nahyssan, Saponi, and other 
tribes of that section. Lederer passed through their territory on his 
way to the Saponi, but apparently did not meet any of them, The 
name is intended to be pronounced with the Latin vowel sounds 
(Mahoe, Lederer, p. 2; AMdahock, ibid., pp 9,41) 

The Nuntaneuck or Nuntaly.—This tribe is mentioned as speaking the 
common language of the Monacan, Nahyssan, Saponi, and others, and 
as having occupied the piedmont country jointly with those tribes after 
the extinction of the Tacci.. Their naine also is to be pronounced as in 
Latin (Lederer, p. 2). 


The Mohetan.—These Indians are mentioned in the narrative of 
Batts’ exploring expedition into western Virginia in September, 1671. 
After crossing the Blue ridge to the headwaters of New river the 
party came upon recently cleared cornfields along the stream, from 
which it appeared the Mohetan had but lately removed. On their 
return to the Tutelo village on a head stream of Roanoke or Dan 
river, they found a Mohetan Indian who had been sent by his people to 
learn if the English had come with hostile purpose. Being assured 
to the contrary, and gratified with a small present of powder, he told 
the explorers that when they had reached their farthest point on New 
river, apparently a few miles east of the present West Virginia line, 
they had been very near the Mohetan settlement, and that the next. 
people beyond lived in a plain country from which came abundance of 
salt. This was probably about the present Mercer Salt Works on 
New river, in Summers county, West Virginia, or Salt pond, in the 
adjacent Giles county, Virginia, so that the Mohetan must have lived 
within the mountains at the head of New river on the western border 
of Virginia. They knew nothing of what was beyond the salt plains. 
From the narrative it is evident that they were an agricultural tribe, 
probably using salt—which was not commonly used by the eastern 
tribes,—were already acquainted with firearms, and were at this time 
on good terms with the Tutelo, Although this is the first recorded 
expedition so far into the mountains, the party found traces of preyi- 


schoo THE MEIPONTSKY OR MEIPOUTSKY. 37 


ous white visitors considerably west of the Blue ridge. In this name 
the initial mo may be the Siouan root ma’, “earth” or “country,” and 
the final ton may be the Siouan to” or to"wa". “village” or ‘settle- 
ment,” which appears in the tribal names Teton, Yankton, Sisseton, 
etc. (Mohetan, Moheton, p. 196, N. Y., 6). 

The Meipontsky or Meipoutsky.—These seem to be mentioned only 
in the report of the Albany conference of 1722, convened at the 
instance of Governor Spotswood to put an end to the inroads of the 
Troquois against the Virginian tribes. They are named. as one of the 
five tribes then living near Fort Christanna and known collectively 
to the English as Christanna Indians and to the Iroquois as Todirich- 
roone; the four others being the Saponi, Occaneechi, Stenkenock 
(Stegaraki), and Tutelo. They were probably one of the Monacan 
or Manahoac tribes, although they can not be identified with any of 
those named by Smith; and as they do not appear in the later 
records we may assume that their existence became merged in that of 
the Saponi and Tutelo (Meipontsky, N. Y.,7; Meipoutsky, Byrd, 5). 


THE SAPONI AND TUTELO. 


The Tutelo and Saponi tribes must be considered together. Their 
history under either name begins in 1670, 

As already stated, Monahassanugh and Nahyssan are other forms 
of Yesa", the name given to themselves by the last surviving Tutelo, 
and which seems to have been the generic term used by all the tribes 
of this connection to designate them as a people. The name Saponi 
(Monasickapanough ?) was generally limited to a particular tribe or 
aggregation of tribal remnants, while the Iroquois name Tutelo, Totero, 
or Todirich-roone, in its various forms, although commonly used by 
the English to designate a particular tribe, was really the generic Iro- 
quois term for all the Siouan tribes of Virginia and Carolina, including 
even the Catawba. In 1722 the remnants of all the tribes of Virginia 
and the adjacent parts of Carolina, included under this general desig- 
nation by the Iroquois, had been gathered at Fort Christanna and 
were commonly known collectively as Christanna Indians or Saponi. 
After their removal to the Iroquois country in the north the Iroquois 
collective term, Tutelo, became more prominent. In deference to 
Hale, who first established their Siouan affinity, we have chosen to 
use the form Tutelo, although Totero is more in agreement with the old 
authorities. With the Iroquois it takes the tribal suffix roné, as 
Todirich roone. Hale states that, so far as known, the name has no 
meaning either to the Tutelo, who call themselves Yesang, or to the 
Iroquois (Hale, 2). As the name is used by Batts and Lawson it 
probably belongs to some southern language and was adopted by the 
Iroquois. It frequently happens that Indian tribes can not interpret 
their common tribal designations, but know themselves simply as ‘the 
people.” 


38 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


The next reference to either of these tribes is in 1686, when the French 
missionary Lambreville reported that the Seneca of New York were 
preparing to go against the *“‘Tolere,” a misprint for Totere (Hale, 3). 
In 1699 we find the Earl of Bellomont writing from New York as to the 
convenience of Carolina for treaty with the Shatera (misprint of 
Totera), Twichtwicht (Miami), and Dowaganhas (Shawano) Indians, 
“and a world of other nations,” which the northern tribes had informed 
him were as numerous as the sands on the seashore (N. Y., 8). 

In their frontier position at the base of the mountains the Saponi 
and Tutelo were directly in the path of the Iroquois, whose war trail 
toward the Catawba crossed the Dan at a point between the mouths 
of Smith river and Mayo river, about on the line of the present rail- 
road (Byrd, 6). Unable to withstand the constant assaults of their 
northern enemies, the two western tribes abandoned their villages 
and removed (some time between 1671 and 1701) to the junction of the 
Staunton and the Dan, where they established themselves adjoining 
their friends and kinsmen the Occaneechi, whose history thenceforth 
merges into theirs. The Occaneechi, of whom more will be said later, 
although now themselves reduced by the common enemy, had been an 
important tribe They occupied at this time a beautiful island about 
4 miles long, called by their tribal name, lying in the Roanoke a short 
distance below the forks of the stream, in what is now Mecklen- 
burg county, Virginia. Above and below Occaneechi island, in the 
same stream, were two other islands, of nearly equal size. The 
Saponi settled on the lower of these, while the Tutelo took possession 
of the upper one just at the confluence of the two rivers. How long they 
remained there is not definitely known, but it is evident they were not 
able to hold their position, even with the river on all sides as a pro, 
tecting barrier, for in 1701 all three tribes were far down in Carolina- 
uniting their decimated forces and preparing to remove into the Eng- 
lish settlements. They may have been driven from their position on 
the Roanoke by that general Indian upheaval, resulting from the con- 
quest of the Conestoga or Susquehanna by the Iroquois about 1675, 
which culminated in Virginia in the Bacon rebellion. In 1733 Byrd 
visited the islands, and found tall grass growing in the abandoned fields. 
On the Tutelo island he found a cave where, according to his story, 
“the last Tetero king,” with only two men, had defended himself against 
a large party of Iroquois and at last forced them to retire (Byrd, 7). 

After Lederer and Batts, the next definite information comes from 
John Lawson, the surveyor-general of North Carolina.- With a small 
party he left Charleston, South Carolina, on December 28, 1700, and, 
after ascending Santee and Wateree rivers to the Catawba country, 
struck across and came out about seven weeks later on Pamlico river 
in North Carolina. A considerable portion of his journey was along the 
great Indian trail and trader’s route, known to the Virginia traders 
as the Oeccaneechi or Catawba path, which extended from Bermuda 
Hundred, on James river, in Virginia, to Augusta, Georgia. He had 


Sey LAWSON AMONG SAPONI AND TUTELO. 39 
intended to follow this trail to Virginia, but was obliged to leave 
it at the Occaneechi village (near the present site of Hillsboro, North 
Carolina), and turn southeastward on account of the alarm created 
by a fresh inroad of the dreaded Iroquois. 

While stopping at the village of the Waxhaw on a small eastern 
- tributary of the Catawba, just within the limits of South Carolina, a 
messenger arrived from the Saponi to arrange some tribal business 
with the Waxhaw. The visitor had his entire face painted with ver- 
milion, and carried a cutlass in his belt and a gunin his hand. His 
coming was celebrated that night by a masquerade dance, to which 
Lawson and his party were invited. 

Continuing on his journey, in the course of which he found several 
fresh reminders of the Iroquois in the shape of stone heaps erected to 
commemorate several of their victims slain near the path, he arrived 
at last at the Saponi village, situated on Yadkin river, in the nighbor- 
hood of the present Salisbury, North Carolina. Lawson calls the stream 
Sapona, and incorrectly supposed it to be a branch of Cape Fear river. 
The name is still retained in connection with a small village a few miles 
northeast of Salisbury in Davidson county. He has much to say of 
the beauty of the stream, making constant music as it rippled over its 
rocky bed in unison with the songs of innumerable birds on the hills 
round about. He declares that all Europe could not afford a pleasanter 
stream, and describes the surrounding country as delicious, leaving 
nothing to be desired by a contented mind. 

He found the people as friendly as the location was agreeable, and 
rested there several days as the special guest of the chief, who had 
lost an eye in defense of an English trader, and who added to his dig- 
nity as a chief the sacred character of a medicine-man. While here 
the Englishmen were well entertained with feasting and presents of 
game and medical dissertations by one of the Indian doctors. Near 
the village they noticed several stone sweat-houses, which were in fre- 
quent use, especially for rheumatic pains due to exposure in the woods. 

From one of the Totero with whom he talked at this village he found 
that a powder made from the so-called bezoar stone, a hairy concretion 
sometimes found in the stomach of the deer and other ruminants, was 
in great repute among their hunters, who believed that when blown 
into the eyes it strengthened the sight. 

The Saponi had recently taken prisoner several ‘‘Sinnagers” (Lro- 
quois), whom they were preparing to burn when Lawson arrived. The 
burning was to be by the horrible splinter torture, in which the body ot 
the victim was stuck full of pine splinters, which were then lighted like 
- so many candles, while the sufferer was compelled to dance around a fire 
until his strength failed and he fell, when the tomahawk put an end to 
his agony. A ceremonial feast was always an accompaniment of the 
tragedy. Before the burning, however, some ‘“‘Toteros” (Tutelo) came 
down from their tribe living in the neighboring mountains toward the 
west, probably about the headwaters of the Yadkin, and asked posses- 


40 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EASY. bl ph 


sion of the prisoners in order to send them home to their own people 
in the north, in return for a generous act of the Iroquois who had some 
time before captured some Totero and, instead of killing them by tor- 
ture in the usual fashion, had treated them kindly and then released 
them to go back to their friends, with the parting message that by such 
conduct they might hope to bring about a permanent peace. The mat- 
ter was debated by the Saponi, who finally delivered the prisoners to 
the Totero to be by them conducted back to their home in the north. 
They repented of their kindness, however, a night or two later, when a 
terrible storm nearly blew down the village, all owing, so the chief said, 
to the devil’s anger because they had not put the prisoners to death. 
However, as the chief was a priest as well as a king, he ran out into 
the storm and began his conjurations at a great rate, and, said Lawson, 
“T thought he would have been blown away or killed before the devil 
and he could have exchanged half a dozen words; but in two minutes 
the wind was ceased and it became as great a calm as ever I knew 
in my life’—evidently the first Carolina cyclone on record. 

Lawson described the Totero as tall and robust, which he ascribes 
to their plentiful diet of buffalo, elk, and bear meat. This agrees with 
Lederer’s account of the Nahyssan thirty years before. By this time 
(1701) the Saponi and Tutelo had been driven entirely out of Virginia, 
where Lederer and Batts had found them in 167071, and had become 
so reduced in nuinbers that they were then combining with the Keyau- 
wee, Occaneechi, and Shoccoree—all five tribes numbering together 
only about 750 souls—and were moving into the neighborhood of the 
Carolina settlements to escape their enemies from the north (Lawson, 3). 
Hale is in error in supposing from Lawsou’s narrative that the Tutelo 
and Saponi in 1701 had found shelter from the Iroquois by placing 
between themselves and their destroyers the “living rampart” of the 
Tuskarora. The error grows out of Lawson’s supposition that Sapona 
river is identical with the Cape Fear, while, as a matter of fact, he had in 
mind the Yadkin; and the Tutelo and Saponi were then at least a hun- 
dred miles west of the Tuskarora and in the direct line of the Iroquois 
war parties sent out against the Catawba. As the Tuskarora were 
friends and kinsmen of the Iroquois, who made their villages a resting 
place on these southern incursions, the smaller tribes had nothing to 
expect from them until the war, a few years later, had broken the power 
of the Tuskarora and rendered them dependent on the whites. 

In regard to the location on the Yadkin of the Saponi and their 
allied tribes and to the causes of their removal from that stream, Byrd 
in 1728 says: 

They dwelt formerly not far below the Mountains, upon Yadkin River, about 200 
Miles West and by South from the Falls of Roanoak. But about 25 Years ago they 
took Refuge im Virginia, being no longer in condition to make Head not only against 
the Northern Indians, who are their Implacable enemies, but also against most of those 


tothe South. All the Nations round about, bearing in mind the Havock these Indians 
us’d formerly to make among their Ancestors in the Insolence of their Power, did at 


SIOUAN LAWSON’S ROUTE. Al 


MOONEY 


length avenge it Home upon them, and made them glad to apply to this Government 
for protection (Byrd, 8). 

As there will be frequent occasion to refer to Lawson’s narrative, his 
route, which has been the subject of much misapprehension, may be 
described in some detail. His own guesses are often misleading, as 
much of the country through which he passed was still unexplored, and 
he constantly confounded the numerous large streams met with in the 
interior with the two or three with which he was acquainted along the 
coast. Starting from Charleston, South Carolina, he went by water to 
the mouth of the Santee, which he ascended 20 or 30 miles to the French 
settlements. Then, taking the trail from Charleston, which came 
in near the present railroad crossing, he followed the eastern side of 
Santee, Wateree, and Catawba rivers, passing in succession through 
the territories of the Sewee, Santee, Congaree, Wateree, and Waxhaw 
tribes, until he came to the Catawba (Esaw and Kadapaw) on the 
boundary between South Carolina and North Carolina. Here he took 
the great trading path from Virginia to Georgia and followed it into 
North Carolina as far as the Occaneechi village, about the present Hills- 
boro, North Carolma, On this part of the journey he encountered 
the Sugeree, Saponi, Keyauwee, and Occaneechi, and crossed several 
rivers and smaller streams. His “‘Sapona” river, supposed by him to 
be a branch of the Cape Fear, is the Yadkin, which he crossed at the 
traders’ ford near the site of Salisbury. Here was the Saponi village, 
the name being still commemorated in a small station on the northern 
side of the river. His “Rocky river,” miles farther on, is prob- 
ably Abbott creek, and hts ‘Haw or Reatkin” is the Haw, which he 
forded about at the present railroad crossing at Graham. In fact, the 
Richmondand Danville railroad from Hillsboro, North Carolina, through 
Greensboro, Salisbury, and Charlotte, into South Carolina, is laid out 
almost exactly on the line of the old Occaneechi trail along which Law- 
son traveled. Itis evident that he was not aware of the existence of 
the Yadkin or Pedee as a distinct stream, as in crossing it he supposes 
it to be a branch of Cape Fear river, and later on confounds it under 
the name of ‘“Reatkin” with the Haw or main upper portion of the 
same stream. At the Occaneechi villagenear Hillsboro, commemorated 
in the “Occaneeche hills” at that town, he left the trading path and 
struck off in a southeasterly direction toward the English settlements 
on the coast. His general course was down along the western bank of 
Eno and Neuse rivers until he crossed over to the northern bank about 
the falls near the railroad crossing at Wake Forest, where he entered 
the territory of the Tuskarora. He then continued down between the 
main Neuse and the Cotentney, probably passing near the site of Golds- 
boro, until he turned northward and crossed the latter stream about 
the present railroad crossing at Grifton, afterward continuing across 
the Tar or Pamlico at Greenville or lower down, and finally coming out 
at the English settlements on Pamlico river around the present Wash- 


42 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. a 


ington and Bath. Although it is not an easy matter to follow these 
old explorers through an unnamed and unsurveyed country, the problem 
is simplified if it is remembered that the principal Indian settlements, 
even though successively abandoned and reoccupied through the con- 
stant shifting of tribes, were usually situated in the most favorable 
locations for the future cities of the whites, and as the principal trails 
naturally followed the best lines of travel between these Indian settle- 
ments the wagon roads of the early settlers, and afterward the rail- 
roads, were laid out nearly on the same lines. 

Soon after Lawson’s visit in 1701 the Saponi and Tutelo left their 
villages on the Yadkin and moved in toward the settlements, being 
joined on the way by the Occaneechi and their allied tribes. The 
name of Saponi creek, near Nashville, North Carolina, probably indi- 
cates the line of this eastward migration. Together they crossed the 
Roanoke, evidently before the Tuskarora war of 1711, and made a new 
settlement, called ‘‘Sapona Town,” a short distance east of that river 
and about 15 miles westward from the present Windsor in Bertie 
county, North Carolina. For information in regard to this settlement, 
which appears to have escaped the notice of historians, I am indebted 
to the kindness of Dr E. W. Pugh, of Windsor, to one of whose ances- 
tors the land in question was deeded by the last remaining of the Tuska- 
rora on their removal to New York. That tribe lived originally along 
the waters of the Neuse, and did not occupy this territory until after 
the Tuskarora war, when, in 1717, that portion of the tribe which had 
remained friendly was settled north of the Roanoke in Bertie county. 
From a reference in a document of 1711, shértly after the outbreak of 
the Tuskarora war, it appears probable that the Saponi were already 
established there in 1711 (N.C. R., 1). In the next year the government 
of North Carolina took steps to engage their help against the hostile 
Tuskarora, leaving the Saponi to make their own terms, and promis- 
ing to provide for their families in the meantime if they would remove 
into the settlements, which at that time were confined to the northern 
shore of Albemarle sound (N.C. R., 2). As they evidently had no reason 
to love the Tuskarora it is probable that this invitation was accepted, 
for a few months later it was proposed to get the assistance of the Saponi 
in cutting off the retreat of the hostiles on the north. It was believed 
that the Nottoway and Meherrin, who were of the Iroquoian stock, could 
not be trusted for such service. The negotiation was left to Virginia, 
whose energetic governor, Spotswood, possessed almost boundless influ- 
ence over all the tribes of that neighborhood (N.C. K., 3). 

From all accounts it appears that there was always bad feeling 
between the Saponi and their confederates on the one side and the 
Tuskarora, Nottoway, and Meherrin—all Iroquoian tribes—on the 

other, after they became near neighbors, so that it required the con- 
stant effort of the English to adjust their quarrels and prevent them 
from killing one another. In 1709 the Saponi chief complained that the 
Nottoway and Tuskarora had killed two of his people. On this the 


‘MOONEY 


SIOUAN SAPONI AND TUTELO EARLY HISTORY. 43 


Nottoway replied that the Saponi had killed three of theirs and 
wounded two others not long before, and they thought it reasonable 
that they as well as the Saponi should have satisfaction. Then the 
Saponi proposed, according to the Indian custom, that the Nottoway 
should pay for the two murdered Saponi, which the Nottoway agreed 
to do provided the Saponi would pay for the three Nottoway, on 
which the disgusted judge to whom they had come told them that if 
they would make such bargains among themselves he would have noth- 
ing to say, but it was not in the white people’s law to sell men’s lives 
for money. The Saponi then tried to shift the blame upon the Tutelo, 
but the Nottoway answered that they were both as one people, and 
further stated that they had some time ago paid the Saponi a quan- 
tity of wampum to help them exterminate the Tutelo; but that the false 
Saponi, after taking the wampum, had broken their promise and_ pri- 
vately warned the Tutelo of the designs of their enemies. ‘To settle 
the whole matter the Nottoway proposed that if the Saponi would 
fulfill their agreement and join them against the Tutelo, they (the 
Nottoway) would not only let them keep the wampum, but would also 
pay them for the two men killed. The Saponi chief promised to take 
the matter under consideration and returned home, while the judge 
wrote to the Virginia government that if aTuskarora was delivered up 
to be killed by the Saponi some English lives would certainly pay for 
mV. P:,1). 

About this time the Saponi, Tutelo, and confederated tribes removed 
from North Carolina through the persuasions of Governor Spotswood, 
of Virginia, who settled them near Fort Christanna, 10 miles north of 

wanoke river, about the present Gholsonville, in Brunswick county, 

Virginia. Their village was close to Meherrin river, and the name of 
Totaro district, south of Meherrin river and southeast of Lawrenceville, 
in Brunswick county, preserves their memory. The exact date of this 
removal does not appear, but it was probably shortly after the opening 
of the Tuskarora war, which began with the general massacre of Sep- 
tember 22,1711. Spotswood’s object in procuring their removal to the 
fort was to draw away the Saponi and their confederates from an 
alliance with the hostile tribes and to make them a barrier between the 
latter and the Virginia settlements, as well as to render the Saponi 
more secure from the attacks of the Iroquois. The name of Saponi 
ereek and chapel, in Dinwiddie county, dating back at least to 1733, 
indicates that they sometimes extended their excursions north of Notto- 
way river. They gained nothing, however, by their removal to Fort 
Christanna, for by so doing they became embroiled in constant quarrels 
with the neighboring Nottoway and Meherrin and with the remnant 
of the Tuskarora on Roanoke river, while their old enemies, the Iroquois, 
still continued their attacks, even after they had agreed to make peace, 
in 1722 (N.C. R., 4). There is evidence that the refugee Tuskarora who 
had fled to New York had a great deal to do with instigating the Iro- 
quois to these outrages. 


44 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. Bee 


ETHNOLOGY 


As is always the case when wild tribes come in contact with eivil- 
zation, the result was rapid degradation through the work of unprin- 
cipled white men, who aided in their destruction by debauching their 
morals and ruining their systems with liquor, resulting in continua! 
quarreling and bloodshed. 

The one bright spot in the darkening history of the dying tribes is 
the effort made by Governor Spotswood to have their children edu- 
cated, but this also ended in failure, as seems to be the fate of every 


attempt at making the Indian a white man. During the war with the - 


Tuskarora, in 1711-1712, this energetic and benevolent Virginia gov- 
ernor conceived the idea of securing the fidelity of the smaller tribes 
and advancing their younger generation in civilization by putting the 
children of the chiefs into the college established for the purpose at 
Williamsburg by Mr Boyle. In this way he hoped to accomplish 
lasting good results for the Indians, while at the same time securing 
hostages for their good behavior. He also sent a schoolmaster to the 
Saponi, at an annual salary of 50 pounds, to instruct their children. 
For this purpose he selected Charles Griffin, described as “a man of a 
good family, who, by the innocence of his life, and the sweetness of his 
temper, was perfectly well qualify’d for the pious undertaking. Besides, 
he had so much the secret of mixing pleasure with instruction, that he 
had not a scholar, who did not love him afiectionately.” So gentle a 
worker could hardly fail to accomplish good, but in the midst of his 
labor he was called away to the college and the Saponi were left to 
their original barbarism, so that the only result of his teaching was to 
make them somewhat cleaner in habit than other Indians (Byrd, 9). 
Notwithstanding their vicinity to the whites, the Saponi were still 
subjected to the inroads of the Iroquois, even under the guns of Fort 
Christanna. In April, 1717, a party of Catawba and others of the 
smaller tribes of South Carolina, who had been engaged in the Yamasi 
war, arrived at the fort to conclude a peace and leave a number 
of their children to be educated as a pledge of their good faith. While 
camped outside the fort, having previously delivered up their arms to 
the commander, they were attacked during the night by a party of 
Iroquois who killed five and carried off a number of prisoners, including 
the chief of the Catawba. From one of the prisoners who made his 
escape it was learned that the Iroquois had come down to surprise the 
Saponi, and that they threatened to return in a short time and mas- 
sacre the whole tribe, with any of the whites who might be disposed to 
befriend them. On being called to account for this outrage by the 
English representatives at Albany, the Iroquois claimed that the 
Catawba themselves, whom also they called Toderichroone, had acted 
treacherously three years before in killing five of their men while asleep, 
the night after they had made a treaty of peace. They declared that 
all the Indians in those southern parts had been for a long time the 
enemies of the Iroquois, who had such hatred against them that they 
had even taken them prisoners out of the very houses of the Christians. 


ee ee 


anna ALBANY TREATY OF 1722. 45 


In conclusion they asserted that the report that they intended to attack 
the Saponi or the whites of Virginia was false, and that they desired 
to be friends of the Huglsh and of their Indian allies, and proposed 
that commissioners might be sent from Virginia to meet them at Albany 
and conclude a firm and lasting peace (N. Y., 9). 

As a result of this mutual desire for aes a conference was held at 
Albany, New York, in September, 1722, which was attended by repre- 
sentatives of the Five Nations of Lroquois, with their allies, the Tuska- 
rora, Shawnee, and others, then hving on the Susquehanna, and by 
the governors of New York, Pennsylvania, and Virginia, including Gov- 
ernor Spotswood himself. A treaty was there concluded between the 
Iroquois and their allies on the one side, and Virgima and her tribu- 
tary Indians, including those of Carolina, on the other, by which an end 
was made to the exterminating warfare that had so long been waged 
between the northern and southern tribes; and the Potomac and Blue 
ridge were made the boundaries between the two parties. The Iro- 
quois agreed that in their southern excursions they would keep within 
the mountains and would not cross the Potomac or come beyond the 
Blue ridge without the knowledge and consent of Virginia, and Gov- 
ernor Spotswood, on behalf of the southern tribes, promised that they 
would not go beyond the same boundaries to the northward without the 
same permission. To render the agreement more binding, Spotswood 
made it a provision of the treaty that any of the Lroquois who were 
found within the proscribed limits without authority should be hanged 
or transported as slaves. To this hard condition the Five Nations will- 
ingly consented, but magnanimously declared for themselves that should 
they meet any of the southern tribes on the northern side of the boundary 
they would give them food and treat them as friends, in order that peace 
might remain assured. It is clear that the Iroquois had some rudi- 
mentary philanthropy not learned from the whites. 

The Virginia tribes for whom Governor Spotswood particularly 
engaged are named as ‘The Nottoways, Meherins, Nanemonds, Pamun- 
keys, Chichominys, and the Christanna Indians whom you call Todirich- 
roones that we comprehend under the name, the Saponies, Ochinee- 
ches, Stenkenocks, Meipontskys and Toteroes, all the forenamed Indians 
having their present settlements on the east side of the high ridge of 
mountains and between the two great rivers of Potomack and Roanoke” 
(N. Y., 10). Although small parties several times violated the agree- 
ment then made, the [roquois as a body always respected it, and the 
long war which they had waged against the Virginia tribes thus came 
to an end. The Shawano and other tribes of Ohio valley, however, 
kept up their raids on the Catawba to the close of the French and 
Indian war. 

In 1728 (1729 by an error in the Byrd manuscript) the boundary line 
between Virginia and North Carolina was run by commissioners and 
surveyors fram each colony. William Byrd was the chief commis- 
sioner for Virginia and has left us a valuable account of their advent- 


46 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. pees OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


ures, told in the rarest and raciest old English. For guides and hunt- 
ers they engaged two Saponi Indians from Fort Christanna, Saponi, be 
it remembered, be.ng used as a collective designation for all the Siouan 
tribes there established. One of the two became sick and returned, but 
the other, whose name was Bearskin, accompanied them and proved 
most excellent company, keeping them well supplied with meat all the 
way to the foothills and back again. This same Bearskin as much 
deserves a monument as did the old Cornish woman, for upon him 
depends nearly all that we have of the language and folklore of the 
Saponitribe. As they advanced slowly westward along the line, cutting 
through thickets, wading swamps, and fording rivers, he told them the 
name of each stream in turn in his own language, with the meaning in 
English. Sitting around the camp-fire at night he taught them the 
secrets of the woods and the things of the spirit world. The few words 
of his language which we thus obtain are unmistakably Siouan, and 
although we can not be sure that they are really Saponi and not Tutelo, 
we have the concurrent assertion of every authority from Lederer and 
Byrd down to old Nikonha, the last of the Tutelo, that the language 
of both was the same, with no more than a dialectic difference. 

Among the local names which Bearskin gave are Moni-seep or “shal- 
low-water,” the ford where the trading path crossed the Roanoke nearly 
due north of Warrenton, North Carolina; Massa-moni or “paint ereek,” 
so called on account of the red ocher which lined its banks, now Island 
creek, joining the Roanoke south of Boydton, Virginia; Yapatsco or 
Yatapsco, ‘‘beaver creek,” so calied on account of a high beaver dam 


built across it; Ohimpa-moni, “jumping creek,” so named on account of 


the jumping of the fish there during the spring (probably identical with 
Grassy creek); Tewawho-mini, or ‘‘Tuskarora creek,” so called because 
a Tuskarora had been killed there and his body thrown into the water 
(identical with Aaron creek); and Hico-oto-moni, or ‘“‘ turkey-buzzard 
river,” so called from the great numbers of buzzards that roosted in the 
trees in its neighborhood (now known as Hyco or Hycootee river). In 
these names the moni or mini is the same word mini, ‘‘water” (in Tutelo 
mani), which appears in the Dakota names Mini-sota ‘‘cloudy water,” 
and Mini-haha, “laughing water.” Massa, here rendered paint, or 
ocher, is probably the generic term for mineral or metal, which appears 
in the Dakota language as ma’za, in Tutelo as mas or ma”s, and in 
Biloxi as mast. The word for beaver, which is embodied in the name 
Yapatsco, is yaop in Tutelo, chapa in Dakota, and shapé in Osage. In 
the North Carolina records the name is spelled Yapatio, which is prob- 
ably nearer the true form of Yapa-tio, ‘beaver lodge.” Hega in Omaha 
and hecha in Dakota is a buzzard, and tipi or ti is a house or lodge, so 
that Hico-oto-moni would be in Dakota, if used in that language, 
Hecha-oti-mini, ‘‘buzzard lodge water.” In Tutelo and Biloxi the word 
for house is ati. Moni-seep, the name of the ford, appears in the Caro- 
lina records as Mony Shap. In the Dakota language chapa, and in the 
cognate Kansa jupshe, signify to ford. Two other words mentioned, 


eee 


oe eae . SAPONI AND TUTELO CUSTOMS. 47 


evidently also of the Saponi language, are maosti, turkey-cock beard,” 
and cohunks, “wild goose,” the latter being an onomatope (Byrd, 10). 
In the journal of the same expedition, as printed in the North Carolina 
Colonial Records, the names sometimes appear in slightly different form 
through misprints or carelessness in the original writing (N.C. R., 5). 

From Byrd and his Saponi informant several little points in regard 
to Indian habit and belief are obtained. Although not always defi- 
‘nitely so stated, the references are usually intended to apply to the 
Saponi and their associated tribes, the Tutelo, Occaneechi, and others 
at Fort Christanna. 

Fire was made by rubbing together two dry sticks of papaw wood, 
the process requiring about ten minutes. On the occasion of any 
religious ceremony new fire was always made for the purpose from two 
sticks which had never before been used, as it was deemed a sacrilege 
to use the fire already kindled. From the fiber of a kind of ‘silk grass” 
the women made a strong thread from which they wove baskets and 
the aprons which formed the chief part of the woman’s dress. These 
aprons or skirts were wrapped round the body and hung from the waist 
to the knee, bordered with a fringe at the bottom. Spoons were made 
of buffalo horn, and the Indians believed that thess spoons would split 
and fall to pieces if poison were put into them. Skins were dressed with 
deer’s brains, a method which the English learned to pattern, and the 
skin was sometimes stretched over a smoke to dry it more speedily. 
They annointed their bodies with bear’s grease as a protection against 
mosquitos and all other insects. A diet of bear’s meat was supposed to 
increase the generative power. It was believed that venison and turkey 
(i. e., the flesh of birds and of quadrupeds) must never be cooked 
together, on penalty of provoking the anger of the hunting gods, who 
would drive the game away so that the offending hunter would 
never be able to kill anything afterward. When the party laughed at 
Bearskin’s fears on this score and deliberately violated the tabu to 
convince him that he was in error, he took the precaution afterward 
when he had shot a buck and a wild turkey together, of leaving the 
turkey behind and bringing only the deer into camp, in order to put 
such a sacrilege out of their power. They justified their laying of the 
heavier burdens on the weaker sex by a tradition that work had orig- 
inally come upon the human race through some fault of the woman 
(Byrd, 9). 

The general statement of the Saponi belief in regard to the spirit 
world, as obtained from Bearskin in a Sunday night talk around the 
fire, is. best told in the language of Byrd himself, always making lib- 
eral allowance for the preconceived notions of a white man who did not 
claim to be an ethnologist. The transmigration idea here set forth 
agrees with what Lederer says of the same people: 

In the evening we examin’d our friend Bearskin, concerning the religion of his 
country, and he explain’d it to us. without any of that reserve to which his nation 
is subject, He told us he believ’d there was one supreme God, who had several sub- 


A8 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. hte 
altern deities under him, And that this master-God made the world a long time | 
ago. That he told the sun, the moon, and stars, their business in the beginning, 
which they, with good looking after, have faithfully perform’d ever since. That the 
same power that made all things at first has taken care to keep them in the same 
method and motion ever since. He believ’d God had form’d many worlds before he 
form’d this, but that those worlds either grew old and ruinous, or were destroyed 
for the dishonesty of the inhabitants. 

That God is very just and very good—ever well pleas’d with those men who pos- 
sess those God-like qualities, That he takes good people into his safe protection, 
makes them very rich, fills their bellies plentifully, preserves them from sickness, 
and from being surpriz’d or ‘overcome by their enemies. But all such as tell lies, 
and cheat those they have dealings with, he never fails to punish with sickness, 
poverty and hunger. and, after all that, suffers them to be knockt on the head and 
sealpt by those that fight against them. 

He beliey’d that after death both good and bad people are conducted by a strong 
guard into a great road, in which departed souls travel together for some time, till 
at a certain distance this road forks into two paths, the one extremely levil, and the 
other stony and mountainous. Here the good are parted from the bad by a flash of 
lightening, the first being hurry’d away to the right, the other to the left. The right 
hand road leads to a charming warm country, where the spring is everlasting, and 
every month is May; and as the year is always in its youth, so are the people, and 
particularly the women are bright as stars, and never scold. That in this happy eli- 
mate there are deer, turkeys, elks, and buffaloes innumerable, perpetually fat and 
gentle, while the trees are loaded with delicious fruit quite throughout the four 
seasons. That the soil brings forth corn spontaneously, without the curse of labour, 
and so very wholesome, that none who have the happiness to eat of it are ever sick, 
grow old, or dy. Near the entrance into this blessed land sits a venerable old man 
on a mat richly woven, who examines strictly all that are brought before him, and 
if they have behay’d well, the guards are order’d to open the crystal gate, and let 
them enter into the land of delights. 

The left hand path is very rugged and uneaven, leading to a dark and barren coun- 
try, where it is always winter. The ground is the whole year round cover’d with 
snow, and nothing is to be seen upon the trees but icicles. All the people are hun- 
gry, yet have not a morsel of anything to eat, except a bitter kind of potato, that 
gives them the dry-gripes, and fills their whole body with loathsome ulcers, that 
stink, and are insupportably painfull. Here all the women are old and ugly, having 
claws like a panther, with which they fly upon the men that slight their passion. 
For it seems these haggard old furies are intolerably fond, and expect a vast deal of 
cherishing. They talk much, and exceedingly shrill, giving exquisite pain to the 
drum of the ear, which in that place of the torment is so tender, that every sharp note 
wounds it to the quick. At the end of this path sits a dreadful old woman on a 
monstrous toad-stool, whose head is cover’d with rattle-snakes instead of tresses, 
with glaring white eyes, that strike a terror unspeakable into all that behold her. 
This hag pronounces sentence of woe upon all the miserable wretches that hold 
up their hands at her tribunal. After this they are deliver’d over to huge turkey- 
buzzards, like harpys, that fly away with them to the place above mentioned. Here, 
after they have been tormented a certain number of years, according to their several 
degrees of guilt, they are again driven back into this world, to try if they will 
mend their manners, and merit a place the next time in the regions of bliss. 

This was the substance of Bearskin’s religion, and was as much to the purpose as 
cou'd be expected from a meer state of nature, without one glimps of revelation or 
philosophy (Byrd 12). 


On their return from the mountains their guide left them as they 


approached the settlements and hurried on ahead. As the commis- 
sioners drew near Meherrin river all the chiefs of the Saponi came out 


OUAN 
aaa SAPONI EARLY HISTORY. 49 


to meet them, and among them was their old friend Bearskin, dressed 
in all his ceremonial finery. The whole party was on horseback, which 
was evidently in greater honor of the occasion, as the distance from 
the village was only 3 miles, and, as Batts says, they had probably 
walked as far on foot to catch their horses. But these timber Indians 
were very different from the free rangers of the plains, for the traveler 
declares that they rode more awkwardly than a Dutch sailor. With 
them came several women, who rode man-fashion, as do the women of 
all the tribes. The men are described as having something great and 
venerable in their countenances, beyond the common mien of savages, 
which agreed with their reputation as the most honest and brave Indi- 
ans the Virginians had ever known. Anyone familiar with the facial 
type and bearing of the Sioux or Osage will understand what it was 
that struck the observer so forcibly in the appearance of these Saponi, 

Continuing, the traveler says: 

This people is now made up of the remnant of several other nations, of which the 
most considerable are the Sapponys, the Occaneches, and Steukenhocks, who not 
finding themselves separately numerous enough for their defence, have agreed to 
unite into one body, and all of them now go under the name of the Sapponys. Each 
of these was formerly a distinct nation, or rather a several clan or canton of the 
same nation, speaking the same language, and using the same customs. But their 
perpetual wars against all other Indians, in time, reduc’d them so low as to make it 
necesssary to join their forces together (Byrd, &). 

He goes on to tell how, about twenty-five years ago, they had fled 
from the Yadkin and taken refuge in Virginia, where Governor Spots- 
wood, having a good opinion of their courage and fidelity, had settled 
them at Fort Christanna as a barrier against the attacks of other 
foreign Indians upon the settlements. His purpose was defeated, how- 
ever, by the debauchery wrought among them by the whites, resulting 
in many disorders and culminating at last in a murder committed by 
one of their chiefs while drunk, and for which he was hanged after he 
had become sober. The ignominious manner of his death angered his 
people exceedingly, largely from an idea, common to other tribes, that 
the soul of the dead person, being prevented by this mode of execution 
from leaving the body by the mouth, must necessarily be defiled. 
Some of the Indians took the matter so much to heart that they soon 
atter left their settlement and moved in a body to the Catawba tribe. 
Byrd says that those who thus removed to the south were the Saponi 
proper, but this is certainly a mistake if intended to apply to the whole 
tribe. It is more probable that they were the Eno or the Keyauwee, or 
perhaps the Sara, the two former of whom had joined the Saponi and 
Tutelo about 1701, but were afterwards found incorporated with the 
Catawba, with whom also the Sara: had confederated. He states also 
that the daughter of the Tutelo chief went away with them, but being 
the last of her nation, and fearing that she would not receive the treat- 
ment due her rank, she poisoned herself with the root of the trumpet 

BULL, V=22——_4 


50 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


plant. Her father, who had died two years before, had been a noted 
warrior who had made himself terrible to all other Indians by his 
exploits, and had escaped so many dangers that he seemed invulner- 
able, but died at last of an illness, ‘the last man of his race and nation” 
(Byrd, 13). This is the same Tutelo chief previously mentioned as 
having defended himself so valiantly against the Iroquois on an island 
in the Roanoke, but he was by no means the last of his race, as our 
author supposed. 

In regard to the hanging of this Saponi chief and the general inter- 
ference of the whites in the quarrels of the Indians, additional informa- 
tion is gathered from a document of 1728. From this it appears that 
some Saponi delegates went to the Catawba to bring back a hundred of 
them to demand satisfaction of the English for imprisoning their men. 
They also threatened that if a certain Captain Tom was hanged they 
would remove their women and children across the Roanoke and would 
then drive the whites beyond the James. Another one told the white 
man that the English had no business to come to the fort to concern 
themselves about the Indians killing one another (V.S8. P., 2). 

Being restless and dissatisfied at the vicinity of the whites, and hav- 
ing now made peace with the Iroquois, the Saponi and Tutelo, with 
other confederated tribes, resolved to follow the example set by the Tus- 
karora and put themselves under the protection of the Iroquois in the 
north. Accordingly they abandoned their settlement near Fort Chris- 
tanna and removed from Virginia into Pennsylvania, and by permission 
of the Iroquois established themselves at the Indian village of Shamo- 
kin on both banks of the Susquehanna just below the forks, where now 
is the town of Sunbury. The village was composed of the remnants of 
the Nanticoke and Conoy, with some Delaware, who, like the later 
immigrants, after having been driven out of their own country and 
impoverished by contact with the whites, had been received under the 
protection of the Iroquois and assigned lands within their territory. 
The exact date of this removal northward can not be given, but it must 
have been about 1740. It was probably a gradual movement by small 
parties, extending over a period of several years. The immediate cause 
was doubtless the dissatisfaction growing out of the hanging of one of 
their chiefs by the Virginians about 1728. From a casual French refer- 
ence it seems probable that they were still in the south in 1736 (N. Y., 
11). The Occaneechi probably accompanied them, while the Eno, 
Keyauwee, and Sara went southward and joined the Catawba. 

In 1745 missionary David Brainerd visited Shamokin, which then 
contained about 300 Indians, of whom half were Delaware and the 
remainder Seneca and Tutelo (Hale, 4), under which latter name he 
included all the emigrants from Fort Christanna, It is not certain, 
however, that all the Tutelo and Saponi were congregated at this vil- 
lage. The three tribes named as making up this small community 
spoke languages radically different. Three years later another mis- 
sionary, David Zeisberger, passed through the same region and found 


SIOUA mp 7 
Pian SAPONI AND TUTELO ADOPTED. 51 


the Tutelo, or a part of them, living farther up the northern branch of 
the Susquehanna at a village called Skogari, in what is now Columbia 
county, Pennsylvania. He describes it as “the only town on the con- 
tinent inhabited by Tuteloes, a degenerate remnant of thieves and 
drunkards” (Hale, 5). Two generations of civilization had evidently 
changed them from the honest and brave men described by Lederer 
and Lawson. 

In 1753 the Cayuga formally adopted the Tutelo and Saponi, who 
thus became a part of the Six Nations. The measure was approved by 
Sir William Johnson, the English representative (N. Y., 12). At the 
same time the Oneida adopted the Nanticoke, as they had already 
received the Tuskarora. From this time the Tutelo and Saponi chiefs 
appear on equal terms with those of the Cayuga in the conclaves of 
the Iroquois league. In 1765 the Nanticoke and Conoy, with the 
“Tutecoes, Saponeys, ettc.,” were reported by Johnson to number 
together 200 warriors (N. Y., 13). By “ettc.” may perhaps be under- 
stood the Occaneechi. 

The Tutelo and Sapoui did not at once remove to the Cayuga. In 
1765 the Saponi are mentioned as having 30 warriors, living at Tioga 
(about Sayre, Pennsylvania) and other villages on the northern branch 
of the Susquehanna, in connection with the Delaware and Munsee 
(Croghan, 1). A part of them may have remained at Tioga until its 
destruction in 1778, but in 1771 the principal portion had their village 
in the territory of the Cayuga, about 2 miles south of Cayuga lake 
and 2 miles south of the present Ithaca, New York. On the Guy John- 
son map of 1771 it appears as Todevigh-rono (for Toderigh-rono); on 
another map of about the same date as Kayeghtalagealat; in Grant’s 
journal of 1779 as Dehoriss-kanadia (apparently the Mohawk Tehote- 
righ-kanada, “Tutelo town”); and in Dearborn’s journal as Coreorgonel 
(Hale, 6; N. Y., 14). 

Then came the Revolution, which resulted in driving half the Iro- 
quois into Canada. The Tutelo village, with those of the Cayuga and 
Seneca, was destroyed by Sullivan in 1779. Most of the Cayuga fled 
with Brant to Canada and were settled by the British government on 
w reservation assigned to the Six Nations on Grand river in Ontario, 
on the northern side of Lake Erie. The Tutelo went with them and 
built their village on what is now known as “Tutelo Heights,” a sub- 
urb of Brantford, on the western bank of Grand river (Hale, 7). 

The last surviving Tutelo told Hale in 1870 that when his people 
came to Canada with Brant they parted with the Saponi at Niagara, and 
what became of the Saponi afterward he did not know. He did know 
that the two tribes could understand each other’s speech. It is possi- 
ble to settle the question of the ultimate fate of the Saponi from the 
record of a treaty made with the New York Cayuga at Albany in 
1789, in which it is stated that the ‘‘Paanese” (Sa-poonese), the 
‘adopted brethren” of the Cayuga, were then living with them on 
their reservation, near Salt Spring, on Seneca river, in Seneca county, 


52 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. i ps 


New York (Hall, 1). It is barely possible that some of their descend- 
ants, retaining the Janguage, may still be found among the Cayuga in 
New York. 

About sixty years ago, says Hale, when Brantford was a frontier ham- 
let, the Tutelo cabins were scattered over these heights, having in the 
center the “long house” wherein their councils were held and their fes- 
tivals celebrated. They numbered then about 200 souls, and from all 
accounts were a jovial, uproarious lot, quite different from the sedate 
Iroquois among whom they lived. Nearer to the white settlements than 
the others, they sunk still lower into dissipation, until their systems 
had become so enfeebled that they became a prey to disease. When 
the cholera swept over the country in 1832 it carried off the greater 
portion of the tribe, and a second visitation in 1848 completed their 
destruction. The few survivors took refuge among the Cayuga and the 
Tutelo tribe ceased to exist. In 1870 only one full-blood Tutelo remained. 
This venerable remnant of a nation was said, when discovered by 
Hale in the year named, to be the oldest man on the reservation. He 
believed himself to be considerably over a hundred, and was a pensioner 
of the war of 1812. His memory went back to a time before the Revo- 
lution when his people were living together with the Saponi and the 
Patshenin (Occaneechi?). His Cayuga name was ‘Old Mosquito ;” 
his Tutelo name was Waskiteng. Hale describes him as having “a 
wrinkled, smiling countenance, a high forehead, half-shut eyes, white 
hair, a scanty, stubbly beard, fingers bent with age like a bird’s claws,” 
but withal a man of marked intelligence and much lively humor. His 
wife was a Cayuga and for many years he had spoken only that Jangu- | 
age, but he remembered well his own, and from him Hale obtained a 
sufficient vocabulary to establish the important discovery that the 
Tutelo is a Siouan tongue. This was published in the Proceedings of 
the American Philosophical Society in 1883, having been noted in the 
minutes of that society as early as 1879. Even on the threshold of his 
second century, the old man remembered that the tribes against whom 
the Tutelo had been most often at war had been the Tuskarora, 
Seneca, and Cayuga. 

Ou a second visit to the reservation in October, 1870, Hale obtained 
some additional material from the old man, who died shortly after, in 
February, 1871, leaving none of full Tutelo blood behind. There are, 
however, several children of Tutelo mothers by Iroquois fathers still 
remaining, retaining their language and their name of Tutelo, accord- 
ing to the Indian law of descent through the female line. Oneof them 
(from whom other linguistic material was obtained) was even allowed 
to retain his seat in the councils of the league as the representative of 
the Tutelo, and to exercise the league privilege of making his address 
in the language of his tribe, after the tribe itself had disappeared 
(Hale, 7). 

In 1882 Dorsey visited the Grand River reservation in Canada, but 
found then only two persons of Tutelo blood remaining and retaining 


SIOUAN LAST OF THE TUTELO. 53 


MOONEY 


their language. From a letter obtained by him two or three years 
later, however, it appears that there was then at least one other Tutelo 
living somewhere else in Canada, probably with the Caughnawaga 
Mohawk or the Moravian Delaware, and still claiming title to lands 
in Virginia. As already stated there are probably a few Saponi still 
with the Cayuga in New York. 

. To this pitiful handful have come at last ‘the honestest and bravest 
Indians Virginia ever knew.” 


THE OCCANEECHI. 


Synonymy. 


Acconeechy.—Map of 1715; Winsor, History of America, 1887, vol. v, p. 346. 

Achonechos.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint 1860, p. 384. 

Achonechy.—Ibid., p. 93. 

Aconeche.—Moll map, 1720. 

Aconichi.—Alcedo, Diccionario Geog., 1786, vol. i, p. 19. 

Acoonedy.—Vaugondy map, Partie de Amérique Septentrionale, 1755 (misprint). 

Akenatzy.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 2 (Latin pronunciation). 

Akonichi.—Lotter map, about 1770. 

Botshenins.—Hale, Proce. Am. Phil. Soc., 1883-84, vol. xxi, p. 10 (same? Tutelo form). 

Ocameches.—Drake, Aboriginal Races, 1880, vol. ix (misprint). 

Occaanechy.—Byrd (1728), Dividing Line, 1866, vol, i, p. 190. 

Occaneches.—Ibid., p. 188. 

Occaneeches.—Beverley, History of Virginia, 1722, p. 161. 

Occaneechy.—Byrad, Dividing Line, op. cit., vol. 11, p. 8. 

Ochineeches.—Albany Conference (1722) in New York Col. Does., 1855, vol. v, p. 663. 

Ockinagee.—An anonymous writer of 1676; Mass. Hist. Soc. Colls., 4th series, 1871, 
vol. ix, p. 167. 

Okenechee.— Batts (1671) in New York Col. Does., 1853, vol. iii, p.193. 

Oscameche.—Domenech, Deserts of North America, 1860, vol. i, p. 442 (misprint). 

Paitshenins.—Hale, Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., 1883-84, vol. xxi, p. 10 (same? Tutelo form). 


The history of the Occaneechi is so closely interwoven with that of 
the Saponi and Tutelo that little remains to be said of them as a dis- 
tinct tribe. Their history begins with Lederer’s journeyin 1670. After 
leaving the Saponi, who lived then, as has been stated, on a tribu- 
tary of the Staunton, he went, as he says, about 50 miles south by west 
of the Saponi village and thus arrived next at the “Akenatzy” village 
(Latin pronunciation), situated on an island in another branch of 
Roanoke river. His estimate of the distance is too great, as usual, 
and the direction was rather east than west of south of the Saponi. 
There can be no question of the location of the Occaneechi village, as 
the island retained the name long after the tribe had abandoned it.’ It 
was on the middle and largest island, just below the confluence of the 
Staunton and the Dan, and just above the present Clarksville, Meck- 
lenburg county, Virginia. 

He described the island as small, though having a large population, 
well protected by natural defenses of a swift river current on all sides, 
with mountains or high hills round about. The fields of the Indians 
were on the northern bank of the river, and they raised immense crops 


54 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


of corn, having always on hand a year’s supply of provisions as a 
reserve in case of attack by hostile tribes. They were governed by 
two chiefs, one presiding in war, the other having charge of their hunt- 
ing and agriculture. They held all property in common. Ceremonial 
feasting was an important feature of their daily life, each man in turn 
feasting his friends, the giver of the feast haying the seat of honor 
between the two chiefs during the entertainment. Their tribal totem 
was a serpent. 

Here Lederer met four strangers from a tribe living at two months’ 
distance northwestward, being all that survived of a party of 50 who 
had started to visit the Oceaneechi, the rest having been drowned in 
crossing a great water or having died later from hunger and exposure 
on the journey. While Lederer was stopping here six Rickohockan 
(Cherokee) also came down from the mountains farther westward to 
visit the Oceaneechi, perhaps to arrange a treaty of peace between the 
two tribes. They were received with great show of friendship and a 
dance was arranged in their honor that night, but in the midst of the 
festivities the false Occaneechi suddenly darkened the place by means 
of smoke and murdered all the Rickohockan. This act of bloody 
treachery so frightened the traveler that he left secretly with his Indian 
companion and went on to the Oenock (Eno) territory (Lederer, 6), 

It must have been shortly after the expedition of Batts in 1671 that 
the Saponi and Tutelo moved in and joined the Occaneechi, the 
Saponi fixing on an island just below and the Tutelo on another 
island just. above the Occaneechi. T'rom all accounts of the early 
travelers it must have been an ideal place for Indian settlement, with 
rich soil and fine timber on all three islands, and well defended from 
enemies by the river and from storms by the hills. Situated at the 
confluence of two large rivers, midway between the mountains and the 
sea, and between the tribes of Virginia and Carolina, the Occaneechi 
were an important people, if not a numerous one, and their island was 
the great trading mart, according to a writer of this period, “for all 
the Indians for at least 500 miles” (Mass., 1). Their language was the 
general trade language for all the tribes of that region—as Algonkin 
was in the north, as Mobilian was in the gulf states, and as Comanche 
is in the southern prairies—and was used by the medicine-men of the 
various tribes in all their sacred ceremonies, as Latin is by the priests 
of the Catholic church (Beverley, 5). 

But their wealth proved their destruction. In 1676 the Susque- 
hatina (Conestoga), who had been driven out from the head of Chesa- 
peake bay by the combined attacks of the Iroquois and the English 
of Maryland and Virginia, fled to the Oceaneechi, with whom they 
had long been on friendly terms. They were received by the latter, 
but repaid the hospitality by endeavoring to dispossess their hosts. 
The result was a battle through which the Susquehanna were driven 
out of the island. At this juncture, in May, 1676, Bacon with 200 
Virginians came up in pursuit of the Susquehanna and engaged the 


dent OCCANEECHI EARLY HISTORY. 55 


assistance of the Occaneechi against their late ungrateful friends. 
The Occaneechi joined forces with the whites, and in the next encounter 
killed the Susquehanna chief and took a number of prisoners. The 
Virginians, however, had seen the rich stores of beaver skins in the 
village, and with a treachery equal to that of any savages, after having 
defeated the Susquehanna they turned upon the friendly Occaneechi. 
Over 50 of the Indians were killed, a terrible loss for an Indian tribe, 
but the Virginians were unable to force the palisades and were finally 
obliged to retire with considerable loss after a desperate battle, lasting 
the whole day (Mass., 2). 

Although the Oceaneechi had beaten off the Virginians, they felt 
themselves no longer secure in the vicinity of such treacherous neigh- 
bors, while their heavy loss rendered them less able to meet the increas- 
ing fury of the Iroquois attacks. It is probable also that they shared 
the general Indian dislike to remain in a location where their friends 
had died. They abandoned their beautiful island home and fled south- 
ward into Carolina. Nearly sixty years later some of the peach trees 
they had planted were still remaining in the old fields on the island 
(Byrd, 14). 

Twenty-five years later (in 1701) Lawson found them pleasantly situ- 
ated in a’village on Eno river, about the present Hillsboro in Orange 
county, North Carolina, on the line of the great trading path to the 
Catawba already mentioned (the Occaneeche hills at this place still 
preserve theirname), They were well supplied with provision of game, 
and received the traveler kindly, in spite of their former experience 
of the English. They were on good terms with all the neighboring 
tribes and had some little trade with the Tuskarora living lower down 
the Neuse, who were jealous of their dealings with the white traders, 
At this time they were much wasted and were consolidating with the 
other reduced tribes and moving in toward the settlements for greater 
security. Later on they combined with the Saponi, Tutelo, and others, 
the whole body numbering only about 750 souls (Lawson, 4). 

They are next known (in 1722) as living in connection with the tribes 
just named at Fort Christanna, when Governor Spotswood made peace 
in their behalf with the Iroquois (N. Y., 15). Another incidental men- 
tion is made (Byrd, 15) of one of the tribe in the same neighborhood 
in 1729 (for 1728). This seems to be their last appearance in history. 
Their separate identity was lost and the remnant probably moved north- 
ward later on with the Saponi and Tutelo into Pennsylvania and after- 
ward into New York. The last clew to their ultimate fate is contained 
in the statement made to Hale by the sole surviving Tutelo in 1870 that 
when he was a boy, probably just before the Revolution, the Saponi 
and “ Patshenins,” or “ Botshenins” were living with his people, who 
were then located near the Cayuga tribe in New York. Although Hale 
did not inquire as to the language of these Patshenin, he is inclined to 
identify them with the Occaneechi (Hale, 8), and from all the cireum- 
stances this seems a probable supposition. If this be true, and they 


55 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. Bees 


are still in existence (they are not with the Six Nations in Canada), 
they must be with the Cayuga still on a reservation in the state of New 
York. 


THE SARA AND KEYAUWEE. 
Synonymy. 


Characks.—Document of 1726 in N. Y, Col. Does., 1855, vol. v, p. 793. 
Charah.—Adair, Hist. Am. Inds., 1775, p. 224. 

Charraws.—Glen (1751) in Gregg, Old Cheraws, 1867, p. 14. 

Charrows.—Gregg, ibid., p. 1. e 
Chawraw.—Smyth, Tour in the United States, 1784, vol. i, p. 207. 
Cheraw.—South Carolina Gazette (1739) in Gregg, Old Cheraws, p. 9. 
Chouala.—De VIsle map. 

Chovala.—Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 1881, p. 366 (misprint), 
Sara.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 2. 

Saraus.—Map of 1715 in Winsor, History of America, 1887, vol. v, p. 346. 
Saraws.—Virginia Council (1716) in Col. Records of N. C., 1886, vol. ii, p 247. 
Sarraws.—Document of 1715 in ibid., p. 251. 

Sasa.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 2 (form in Warrennuncock dialect). 
Saura.—Vaugondy map, Partie de Amérique Septentrionale, 1755, 
Sauro.—Byrd (1733), Hist. Dividing Line, 1866, vol. ii, p. 20. 
Sawara.—Gallatin in Trans. and Colls. Am. Antiq. Soc., 1836, vol. ii, p. 86. 
Sawras.—Document of 1716 in Col. Records of N. C., vol. ii, p. 246. 
Sawraw.—N. C. Records, vol. ii, Document of 1716; ibid, p. 243. 
Sharawas.—Note in N. Y. Col. Does., 1855, vol. v, p. 793: 

Suala.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 2 (Spanish form). 
Suali.—Ani-Suali.—Mooney (Cherokee singular and plural forms) 
Sualy.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 2 (Warrennuncock form). 
Swali.—Mooney (Cherokee form). 

Xuala.—Garcilaso (1540) in La Florida del Inca, 1723, p. 155. 

Xualla.—Elvas (1540) quoted in Shipp, De Soto and Florida, 1881, p. 366, note. 


Keawe.—Jefferys, French Dominions in America, 1761, pt. i, map. 
Keawee.—Bowen, Map of the British American Plantations, 1760. 
Keeawawes.—Document of 1716 in Col. Records of N. C., 1886, :p. 242. 
Keeowaws.—Ibid., p. 243. . 
Keeowée.—Vaugondy map, Partie de !Amérique Septentrionale, 1755. 
Keiawwees.—Lawson (1714), Hist. of Carolina, reprint 1860, p. 384. 
Keomee.—Moll’s map of Carolina, 1720 (misprint). 

Kewawees.—Byrd (1733), History of the Dividing Line, 1866, vol. ii, p. 20. 
Keyauwees.—Lawson (1714), Hist. of Carolina, reprint 1860, p. 83. 
Keyawees.—Brickell, Natural History of North Carolina, 1737, p. 343. 


THE SARA AND THEIR ALLIES. 


While we know nothing positively as to the linguistic affinity of the 
Sara, all the evidence goes to show that, like most of the tribes of the 
central region of Virginiaand Carolina, they were of Siouan stock. Their 
name is probably from the Catawba word sara, signifying a place of 
‘‘tall grass or weeds” (Gatschet). While the Siouan tribes treated in 
the foregoing consolidated, after their decline, and joined the Iroquois 
in the north, most of the remaining people of that stock, including the 


SIOUAN ] 
MOONEY 


SARA EARLY HISTORY. KT 


Sara, migrated southward and merged with the Catawba tribe in South 
Carolina. 

The history of the Sara goes back to the earliest Spanish period. 
In 1540 De Soto, after leaving Cofachiqui (identified as Silver bluff on 
the Savannah, in Barnwell county, South Carolina), advanced along 
the border of the Chalaque (Cherokee) country, meeting several small 
villages of that tribe, and after traveling through a pleasant country 
for about 50 leagues, equal to about 150 miles, reached the province of 
“ Xuala.” (In writing Indian names the early Spanish authors used x 
as the equivalent of sh; Xuala of the Spaniards is Suala of Lederer, 
Suali of the Cherokee, and Saura and Cheraw of later writers.) From 
the narrative of Garcilaso the Sara must then have lived in the pied- 
mont region about the present line between South Carolina and North 
Carolina, southeast of Asheville, North Carolina. On the De l’Isle map. 
“Chouala” is marked west of the upper Santee. From personal inves- 
tigation among the Cherokee I learn that the correct name of the 
Swannanoa gap through the Blue ridge, east of Asheville, is Suwali- 
Nua*nahi, or “Suwalt trail,” that being the pass through which ran 
the trail from the Cherokee to the Suwali, or Ani-Suwali, living 
east of the mountains. The name of the Suwali tribe is still familiar to 
the Cherokee yet.living in North Carolina, Lederer in his narrative 
states that the tribe, which he usually calls Sara, was called Suala, 
Sualy, or Sasa in the “ Warrennuncock” dialect (Lederer, 7). The 
interchange of l and 7, it may be remarked, is one of the most common 
in Indian dialects. 

Garcilaso in 1540 describes the village of Xuala as situated on the 
slope of a ridge in a pleasant hilly region, rich in corn and all the other 
vegetables of the country. In front of the village flowed a swift stream 
which formed the boundary between the Xuala tribe and that of Cofa- 
echiqui. This may have been either Broad river or the Pacolet. Both 
tribes are said to have been subject to the same queen, which, if true, 
would indicate that the Cofachiqui were perhaps of kindred stock and 
that even at this early period there was a close connection.among the 
tribes which long afterward consolidated under the single name of the 
Catawba. After stopping here five days the Spaniards journeyed 
through a country of mountains and swift small streams into Guachule 
and thence down into Georgia. From the length of their stay it is evi- 
dent that this first meeting between the Sara and the white race was 
a friendly one (Garcilaso, 1). 

That the Sara were an important tribe is evident from the persist- 
ence of the name to a very late period. Asthey lay so far remote from 
the settlements and rather back from the general route of the traders, 
little was known of them by English settlers and travelers until after 
their removal into eastern South Carolina. It wovld probably be 
found, however, if the records could be searched, that De Soto was not 
the only Spanish leader who explored the country in search of gold in 
the early days of the colonization period. It was the jealous policy of 


‘ ) ; BUREAU OF 
58 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. Bete 


the Spanish government to keep the knowledge of such expeditions a 
secret; but from the vivid traditions still retained by the Cherokee of 
North Carolina, as recounted to the author, it is evident that the Span- 
iards made many expeditions into the mountains and carried on mining 
operations in different places during the period of their occupancy of 
Florida and the adjacent coast of Georgia and South Carolina. 

The next visit to the Sara of which records are known was 130 years 
later than De Soto. In 1670 Lederer, after passing successively through 
the territories of the Saponi, Occaneechi, Eno, Shoccoree, and Wateree 
arrived among the Sara. He describes their village as being near 
the mountains, which at this point became lower and turned from 
their general southward or southwestward direction and veered west- 
ward. As the tribes next met by him were the Waxhaw and Catawba, 
it is evident that he found the Sara about where De Soto had 
found them in 1540, He states that the neighboring mountains were 
called Sara, which the Spaniards made Suala—another evidence of 
Spanish presence in this upper region. Beyond the mountains, west 
and north of the Sara, lived the Rickohockan (Cherokee). From 
these mountains the Sara got quantities of cinnabar, which they used 
as paint. They had also cakes of white salt. As the Cherokee and 
gulf tribes generally used no salt, and no considerable salt deposits 
were found in their country, it is probable that the Sara obtained their 
supply from the Mohetan or some other tribe farther northward. 
Lederer made no long stay with the tribe, perhaps, as already stated, 
on account of having become involved in a dispute with a youthful 
savage, who attempted to shoot the traveler’s horse and when prevented 
turned his attentions to the traveler himself (Lederer, 8). 

Some time after this the Sara removed northward and settled on 
Dan river. This removal may have been due to the incursions of the 
Spaniards, as a document of 1654 indicates that the Eno, living then 
in central North Carolina, were doing their utmost to check the north- 
ern advance of the Spaniards (Hawks, 1). As early as 1673, and perhaps 
earlier, the Sara had acquaintance with English traders from Virginia 
(Byrd, 16). Their village was on the southern bank of the Dan, shortly 
below the entrance of Irvin (Smith) river from the opposite side, and 
about due north of the present Wentworth in Rockingham county, 
North Carolina. Their fields extended along both banks of the river 
for several miles below the village. Byrd, who visited the site in 1733, 
thus describes it: 


It must have been a great misfortune to them to be oblig’d to abandon so beauti- 
ful a dwelling, where the air is wholesome, and the soil equal in fertility to any in 
the world, The river is about 80 yards wide, always confin’d within its lofty banks, 
and rolling down its waters, as sweet as milk, and as clear as crystal. There runs a 
charming level, of more than a mile square, that will bring forth like the lands of 
Egypt, without being overflow’d once a year. There is scarce a shrub in view to 
intercept your prospect, but grass as high as a man on horseback. Towards the 
woods there is a gentle ascent, till your sight is intercepted by an eminence, that 


overlooks the whole landskape. This sweet place is bounded to the east by a fine 


aoowerl SARA EARLY HABITAT. 59 


stream call’d Sauro creek, which running out of the Dan, and tending westerly, 
makes the whole a peninsula (Byrd, 17). 

There may have been two villages occupied by the tribe in this neigh- 
borhood, as on a map of 1760 we find this spot designated as “ Lower 
Saura Town” while about 30 miles above, on the southern side of the 
Dan, and between if and Town fork, is another place marked ‘ Upper 

Saura Town.” This latter was on the site of the present Sauratown in 
Stokes county, North Carolina. The two towns thus designated, how- 
ever, were white settlements. 

The Sara were not met by Lawson in 1701, as they lived west of his 
line of travel. Shortly after this date, finding themselves no longer 
able to withstand the unceasing attacks of the Iroquois, they aban- 
doned their beautiful home on the Dan and, moving southeastward, 
joined the Keyauwee (Byrd, 18). The Eno, Shoecoree, and Adshu- 
sheer also consolidated at the same time for a similar reason, the three 
being thenceforth commonly known under the single name of Eno. 
The Saponi, Tutelo, and Occaneechi, who had joined forces about the 
same time, moved eastward tothe neighborhood of the white settle- 
ments on Albemarle sound, and were shortly afterward settled by Gov- 
ernor Spotswood at Fort Christanna in Virginia, as already stated. In 
1716 he also undertook to settle the confederated Sara, Keyauwee, 
and Kno (probably including also the Shoccoree and Adshusheer) at 
Knotown, on the frontier of the Tuskarora, on the upper Neuse in 
North Carolina, where he intended that they should serve as a proteec- 
tion to the white settlements against the incursions of the hostile Tus- 
karora and their allies from the north, and against the hostile Yamasi 
and their allies, who had lately killed their traders and inaugurated 
a war against the whites, on the south. This plan might have been 
successful had it not been defeated by the vigorous protest of the two 
Carolina governments, which insisted that the Sara were at that 
moment engaged in the war against South Carolina and that the Eno 
and Keyauwee were probably aiding them. At the same time, by 
request of the southern colony, North Carolina raised a force of whites 
and Indians to attack the Sara themselves (N.C. R., 6). A few weeks 
later it was reported that a white man and an Indian slave had been 
killed on the South Carolina frontier by a party of Indians supposed 
to be Sara, who appeared to be well supplied with arms and ammu- 
nition. It was believed that they were some of those with whom Spots- 
wood had lately been negotiating, and that they had obtained their 
supplies in Virginia; and a letter was accordingly forwarded to the 
governor of that colony asking him to prohibit any trading with the 
Sara or any other southern tribes until they had first made peace with 
South Carolina. About the same time Governor Eden, of North Caro- 
lina, declared war against the Sara,and made formal application to 
Virginia to assist in prosecuting it. To this Spotswood replied, with 
the concurrence of the Virginia council, that the Sara were under a 
treaty of friendship with Virginia, which had had the approbation of 


60 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


the South Carolina government; that they had come into Virginia under 
a promise of safety; and that in the late encounter the Carolina people 
had been the aggressors and had attacked the Indians without provo- 
eation. The council therefore declined to take part in a war “so 
unjustly begun” (N. C. R., 7). 

The war against the Sara and their allies was carried on by the 
two Carolina governments until the final defeat and expulsion of the 
Yamasi from South Carolina. Throughout this war there were 
frequent complaints from South Carolina that the Sara were responsi- 
ble for most of the mischief done north of Santee river, and that they 
were endeavoring to draw the Winyaw and Waccamaw into the 
same alliance. Their arms and ammunition were said to be supplied 
from Virginia in return for skins, slaves, and goods plundered from 
South Carolina settlers, and it was openly charged by Carolina that 
Virginia encouraged these depredations in order to monopolize the 
Indian trade, so that one of the South Carolina writers was moved to 
declare, “I heartily wish Virginia had all our Indians, so we were but 
Eoin from them” (N.C. R. 

At the close of the WaratiGis war ree 's Sara tribe, who now oe to be 
known as Cheraw, were located on the upper Pedee where it crosses 
from North Carolina into South Carolina. The adjacent district in 
South Carolina was for a long time known as the Cheraw precinct. 
According to the old maps their village at this time was on the eastern 
bank of the Pedee, about opposite the present Cheraw, in Marlboro 
county, South Carolina. In 1715 they were reported to number 510 
souls (Rivers, 1). This estimate, which seems too high, probably 
includes the Keyauwee, who still lived with or near them. Accord- 
ing to the reports of Blount, chief of the friendly Tuskarora, they 
occasionally made inroads on his people and even attacked and plun- 
dered the Virginia traders (N.C. R., 9); but Blount’s testimony is open 
to suspicion, as he was constantly endeavoring to increase his impor- 
tance with the whites by discovering hostile conspiracies among the 
other Indians. However this may be, the remaining Tuskarora in 
1717 received permission to remove from the Neuse to the northern 
side of the Roanoke, in order to be more secure from the southern 
tribes. The Sara were still exposed to the attacks of the Iroquois, of 
which there are records so late as 1726 (N. Y., 16), and were finally 
obliged to abandon their settlement and incorporate with the Catawba, 
who at an earlier period had been their enemies, on Catawba river, 
farther westward. Being a considerable tribe, however, they still 
preserved their separate name and dialect for a long time. They are 
mentioned as living with the Catawba as early as 1739 (Gregg, 1), 
and their dialect is mentioned as existing distinct from that of the 
Catawba as late as 1743 (Adair, 2). In 1751 they are again men- 
tioned as one of the southern tribes adjoining the settlements with 
whom it was desired that the Iroquois should make peace (N. Y., 17). 
In the French and Indian war they and the Catawba aided the 


SIOUAN LAST OF THE SARA, 61 


MOONEY 


English against the French and their allies, and in 1759 a party of 45 
“Oharraws,” some of whom, under their chief, King Johuny, had been 
in the expedition against Fort Du Quesne, brought into Charleston the 
scalp of a French Indian (Gregg, 2). The last notice of the tribe 
seems to be in 1768, when we find thei still living with the Catawba, 
but so reduced by wars aud sickness that they numbered only 50 or 
60 souls (Mass., 3). The Catawba and all their confederate tribes 
together then numbered only about 500 souls. 


THE KEYAUWEE. 


The name of the Keyauwee has no connection with that of Keeowee 
town of the Cherokee on Keowee river, in western South Carolina, nor 
apparently with that of Kiawah island, south of Charleston. Of their 
language nothing remains, but the evidence of alliance and history 
goes to show that they were Siouan. They were never prominent as a 
separate tribe. In 1701 Lawson found them in a palisaded village 
about 5 miles beyond ‘“ Heighwaree” (Uharie) river, and near another 
stream which was probably Deepriver. The village was about 30 miles 
northeast of the Yadkin, and must have been about the present High 
point in Guilford county, North Carolina. It was shut in by high hills 
or mountains, pearly bare of timber or grass, being composed of a red- 
dish earth from which the Indians obtained their mineral paint, In one 
of these mountains was a large cave. Around the village were large 
fields of corn. At that time they were about equal to the Saponi in num- 
ber, and were ruled by Keyauwee Jack, who was by birth a Congaree, 
but had obtained the chieftainship by marriage with the queen. 
Lawson describes the daughter of this queen as a beautiful girl, 
with an air of majesty not common among Indians. She treated his 
party kindly, and they were well entertained during their stay. Most 
of the men of this tribe wore mustaches or whiskers, which was not the 
general custom of the Indians, who usually plucked their beards. 

Incidentally the traveler mentions that all the Indians of that neigh- 
borhood carefully preserved the bones taken out of the meat they ate 
and afterward burned them, believing that if this were not done the 
game would leave the country and they would have no more success 
in hunting. At this time they were about to join the Tutelo and 
Saponi for greater protection against their enemies. 

In 1714 the Keyauwee, with the Saponi, Tutelo, Occaneechi, and 
Shoccoree, had moved down toward the settlements about Albemarle 
sound; all five tribes, together with one or two not mentioned, num- 
bering only about 750 souls (Lawson, 5). In 1716 Governor Spots- 
wood proposed to settle the Keyauwee, with the Eno and Sara at 
Enotown, on the frontier of the North Carolina settlements, as already 
related, but was prevented by the opposition of that colony. Failing 
in this, they moved southward along with the Sara and probably also 
the Eno to Pedee river in South Carolina some time before 1733 (Byrd, 


62 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. — ee pe 


ETHNOLOGY 


19). On Jefferys’ map of 1761 their village is marked on the Pedee 
above that of the Sara, and about on the line between North Carolina 
and South Carolina. We find no later mention of them, but like the 
two other tribes just named they were probably incorporated with the 
Catawba. 


THE ENO, SHOCCOREE, AND ADSHUSHEER. 


Synonymy. 


Eend.—Adair, History of the American Inds., 1775, p. 224. 
Enoe.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint 1860, p. 97. 
Haynokes.—Yardley (1654) in Hawks, North Carolina, 1858, vol. u, p. 19. 
Oenock (or GEnock).—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 15. 


Cacores.—Yardley (1654) in Hawks, North Carolina, 1858, vol. ii, p. 19. 
Shabor.—lbid., map (misprint). 

Shacco.—Byrd (1733), Hist. of the Dividing Line, 1866, vol. 11, p. 2. 
Shackory.—Ibid., p. 15. 

Shakor.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, map. 

Shoccories.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint, 1860, p. 97. 


Adshusheer.—Lawson, ibid., p. 95. 


As these tribes are usually mentioned together they may be treated 
in the same manner. It is doubtful if they, or at least the Eno and 
Shoccoree, were of Siouan stock, as they seem to have differed in 
physique and habit from their neighbors; but as nothing 1s left of their 
language, and as their alliances were all with Siouan tribes, they can 
not well be discriminated. Little is known of them, for they disap- 
peared as tribal bodies about 1720, having been incorporated either 
with the Catawba on the south or with the Saponi and their confederates 
on the north. 

The Eno and Shoccoree are first mentioned by Yardley in 1654. 
Writing from his Virginia plantation he says that a visiting Tuskarora 
had described to him, among other tribes in the interior, ‘ta great 
nation called Cacores,” of dwartish stature, not exceeding that of boys of 
14 years, yet exceedingly brave and fierce in fight and extremely active 
in retreat, so that even the powerful Tuskarora were unable to con- 
quer them. Near them was another “ great nation” whom the Tuska- 
rora called Haynoke, by whom the northern advance of the Span- 
iards was valiantly resisted (Hawks, 1). From this it appears that the 
Eno were then at war with the Tuskarora, and that the Spaniards 
had advanced from the gold regions of the southern Alleghanies into 
central North Carolina. 

The next mention of these two tribes is by Lederer, who found them 
in 1672 living south of the Oceaneechi about the heads of Tar and 
Neuse rivers. The general locality is still indicated in the names of 
Eno river and Shocco creek, upper branches of these streams. In the 
name Shoccoree, the name proper is Shoceo, ree or ri being the 
demonstrative suffix of the Catawba and closely coguate languages, 


pehwead ENO AND SHOCCOREE EARLY HISTORY. _. ba 


MOONEY 


the same that appears in Usheree, Uharee, and Enoree, the last-named 
river perbaps taking its designation from the Eno tribe. 

Lederer found the villages of the two tribes about 14 miles aparv, 
the Eno the farther eastward. The Eno village was surrounded by 
large fields cleared by the industry of the Indians, and was itself built 
around a central field or plaza devoted to an athletic game described 
by the traveler as “slinging of stones,” in which “they exercise with 
‘so much labor and violence and in so great numbers that I have seen 
the ground wet with the sweat that dropped: from their bodies.” He 
agrees with Yardley as to their small size, but not as to their bravery 
or other good qualities, stating that “they are of mean stature and 
courage, covetous and thievish, industrious to earn a penny, and there- 
fore hire themselves out to their neighbors who employ them as car- 
ryers or porters. They plant abundance of grain, reap three crops in 
a summer, and out of their granary supply all the adjacent parts.” The 
character thus outlined accords more with that of the peaceful Pueblos 
than with that of any of our eastern tribes, and goes far to indicate a 
different origin. Their housebuilding also was different from that of 
their neighbors, but resembled that of the mountain Indians. Instead 
of building their houses of bark, like the Virginia and Carolina In- 
dians generally, they used branches interwoven and covered with mud 
or plaster. Some huts were built of reeds (canes) and bark. They 
were usually round instead of long as among the coast tribes. Near 
eyery house there was a smaller structure, somewhat resembling an 
oven, in which they stored corn and nuts. This is identical with the 
w"watdli or provision house of the Cherokee. In summer they slept 
under leafy arbors, The government was democratic and patriarchal, 
the decisions of their old men being received with unquestioning obedi- 
ence. The Shoccoree resembled the Eno in their general customs and 
manners (Lederer, 9). 

In 1701 Lawson found the Eno and Shoccoree, now confederated, 
with the addition of the Adshusheer, in the same location. Their 
village, which he calls Adshusheer, was on Eno river, about 14 miles 
east of the Occaneechi village, near the present Hillsboro. This would 
place it not far northeast of Durham, in Durham county, North Caro- 
lina. Eno Will, a Coree by birth, was the chief of the three tribes. 
He entertained the party in most hospitable fashion at Adshusheer, 
singing them to sleep with an Indian lullaby, and afterwards guided 
them from the Occaneechi to near the white settlements on Albemarle 
sound. Lawson describes him as ‘one of the best and most agreeable 
temper that ever I met with in an Indian, being always ready to 
serve the English, not out of gain, but real affection.” 

They kept poultry, but, so Lawson thought, largely for the purpose 
of sacrifice to the devil. They had not forgotten their old game men- 
tioned by Lederer, which may now be recognized as the universal 
-wheel-and-stick game of the eastern and southern tribes; for Lawson 
says in his narrative that they were ‘much addicted to a sport they call 


64 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. ST ENGHOeE 


Chenco, which is carried on with a staff and a bowl made of stone, which 
they trundle upon a smooth place like a bowling green, made for that 
purpose.” 

At this time the Shoccoree seem to have been the principal tribe. 
‘They had some trade with the Tuskarora. Later (about 1714), with 
the Tutelo, Saponi, Occaneechi, and Keyauwee, together numbering 
only about 750 souls, they moved toward the settlements. Lawson 
includes Eno in his list of Tuskarora villages at this period, and as the 
Eno lived on the Neuse adjoining the Tuskarora, it is probable that 
they were sometimes classed with them (Lawson, 6). In 1716 Governor 
Spotswood, of Virginia, proposed to settle the Eno, Sara, and Key- 
auwee at Eno Town, on what was then “the very frontiers” of North 
Carolina; but the project was defeated by North Carolina on the ground 
that all three tribes were then at war with South Carolina (N. C., 10). 
From the records it can not be determined clearly whether this was the 
no Town of Lawson in 1714, or a more recent village nearer the Albe- 
marle settlements. 

Owing to the objection made to their settlement in the north the Eno 
moved southward into South Carolina. They probably assisted the 
other tribes of that region in the Yamasi war of 1715. Atleast a few 
of the mixed tribe found their way into Virginia with the Saponi, as 
Byrd speaks of an old Indian, called Shacco Will, living near Nottoway 
river in 1733, who offered to guide him to a mine on Kno river near the 
old country of the Tuskarora (Byrd, 20), The name of Shocco (Shockoe) 
creek, at Richmond, Virginia, may possibly have been derived from 
the same tribe. The main body was finally incorporated with the 
Catawba, among whom the Eno still retained their distinct dialect in 
1743 (Adair, 3). The name of Enoree river in South Carolina may have 
a connection with the name of the tribe. 


THE WOCCON, SISSIPAHAW, CAPE FEAR, AND WARREN- 
NUNCOCK INDIANS. 


Synonymy, 


Waccoa.—Morse, Report, 1822, p. 14. 

Waccoam.—I\bid (misprint). 

Waccon.—Document of 1712 in N. C. Records, 1886, vol. i, p. 891. 

Wacon,.—Lawson, map of 1709, in Hawks, History of North Carolina, vol. 11, p. 104. 
Woccon.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint 1860, p. 378. 
Wocons.—Rafinesque in Marshall, History of Kentucky, 1824, vol. i, p. 23. 
Wokkon.—Drake, Book of the Indians, 1848, p. xii. 

Woocon.—Schooleraft, Indian Tribes, 1853, vol ii1, p. 401. 

Workons.—Domenech, Deserts of North America, 1860, vol. i, p. 445. 


Sauxpa.—Vandera (1579) in Smith, Documentos inéditos, 1857, pp. 15-19 (probably 
the same). 

Saxapahaw.—Bowen, Map of the British American Plantations, 1760. 

Saxapahaw,—Byrd (1728), History of the Dividing Line, 1866, vol. i, p. 180. 


—— 


aiOuAN THE WOCCON TRIBE. 65 


MOONEY. 


Sippahaws.—Martin, History of North Carolina, 1829, vol. i, p. 129. 

Sissipahau.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint 1860, p. 94. 

Sissispahaws.—Latham, Varieties of Man, 1850, p. 334 (misprint). 

Cape Fears.—Albany Conference (1751) in New York Colonial Documents, 1855, vol. 
vi, p. 721. 


Warrennuncock.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 2. 


- Of the North Carolina tribes bearing the foregoing names almost 
nothing is known, and of the last two even the proper names have not 
been recorded. The Woccon were Siouan; the Saxapahaw and Cape 
Fear Indians presumably were Siouan, as indicated from their associa- 
tions and alliances with known Siouan tribes, while the Warrennuncock 
were probably some people better known under another name, though 
they can not be identified. The region between the Yadkin and the 
Neuse, extending down to the coast, was probably occupied by still 
other tribes whose very names are forgotten. They were virtually 
exterminated by smallpox and other diseases long before the coloniza- 
tion of this region in the middie of the eighteenth century, and prob- 
ably even before the Yamasi war of 1715 disrupted the smaller tribes. 

About all that is known of the Woccon was recorded by Lawson, 
who states that about 1710 they lived not more than two leagues from 
the Tuskarora (who occupied the iower Neuse and its tributaries), and 
had two villages, Yupwauremau and Tooptatmeer (p. 383), with 120 
warriors, which would indicate a population of 500 or 600 souls. This 
was by far a larger population at that period than any other of the 
eastern Carolina tribes excepting the Tuskarora. He givesa vocabulary 
of about 150 words, which shows that their dialect was closely related 
to that of the Catawba, although the two tribes were separated by 
nearly 200 miles (Lawson, 7). His map of 1709, reproduced by Hawks, 
places the Woccon between the main Neuse and one of its tributaries, 
perhaps about the present Goldsboro in Wayne county or Snow Hill 
in Greene county. They joined the Tuskarora against the whites in 
the war of 1711-1713, as learned from incidental references in the colo- 
nial documents of that period. Since there are no later records con- 
cerning them, they were probably destroyed as a tribe by that war, 
and the remnant may have fled northward with the hostile Tuskarora 
to the Iroquois, or southward to the Catawba and Yamasi; or per- 
haps they were assigned to the reservation with the friendly Tuskarora 
who remained in North Carolina. 

The Sissipahaw must have been an important tribe at one time, as 
Haw river, the main upper stream of the Cape Fear, derives its name 
from them, and the site of their former village, known in 1728 as 
“the Haw old fields,” was noted as the largest body of fertile land in 
all that region. It was probably situated about the present Saxapahaw 
on Haw river, in the lower part of Alamance county, North Carolina. 
They are probably identical with the Sauxpa mentioned by Vandera 

BULL. v=22 5 


> 


: . ) 2 7 TAG BUREAU OF 
66 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. ee 


in 1579; Lawson mentions them, but he did not meet them in his journey 
in 1701, as they lived below the point at which the regular trading path 
crossed the river. He incidentally mentions meeting among the Eno 
a slave taken from this tribe (Lawson, 8). Nothing more of them is 
known beyond the general statement by Martin that they and other 
tribes of that region joined the Yamasi against the English in the 
war of 1715. 


The proper name of the Cape Fear Indians is unknown. This local 
term was applfed by the early colonists to the tribe formerly living 
about the lower part of Cape Fear river in the southeastern corner of 
North Carolina. Their first intimate acquaintance with the English 
was made about the year 1661, when a colony from New England made 
a settlement near the mouth of the river, but soon incurred the ill will of 
the Indians by seizing their children and sending them away, ostensibly 
to instruct them in the ways of civilization, but really as the Indians 
believed, with a semblance of probability, to make them slaves. The 
result was that the Cape Fear Indians, although as yet without guns, 
began a determined war against the colonists and tinally succeeded in 
driving them from the country. In 1663 another party, from Barba- 
dues, explored the river and its branches for a considerable distance. 
Not far from the mouth they found an Indian settlement called Necoes 
(narrative of 1663, in Lawson, p. 115), together with numerous cleared 
fields of corn. They found the Indians generally friendly, manifesting 
their friendship by cries of ‘bonny bonny,” which may have been a 
reminiscence of previous contact with Spaniards. The Indians gave 
them corn and other provisions, and in return received presents of 
beads. One of the Indians, however, shot an arrow at them as they 
were passing under a cliff. They pursued and fired at him but missed. 
Afterward they came upon him in his canoe. What follgwed, as told 
in their own words, well indicates the summary methods of the English 
in dealing with the Indians: 

We went on shore and cut the same in pieces. The Indians perceiving us coming 
towards them ran away. Going to his hut we pulled it down, broke his pots, plat- 
ters, and spoons, tore the deerskins and mats in pieces and took away a basket of 
acorns. 

Notwithstanding this severity, the Indians at the next village received 
the whites kindly, and their chief expressed the greatest regret and 
displeasure at the misconduct of his man. They afterward ‘‘made a 
purchase of the river and land of Cape Fair, of Wat Coosa and such 
other Indians as appeared to us to be the chief of those parts.” The 
tribe seemed to be populous, with numerous villages along the river, 
and excepting in the single instance mentioned, displayed the utmost 
friendly feeling toward the whites (Lawson, 9). In 1665 another colony 
settled at the mouth of Oldtown ereek, in Brunswick county, on the ~ 
southern side of the river, on a traét bought of the Indians, who still 


Boonie CAPE FEAR AND WARRENNUNCOCK TRIBES. 67 


remained friendly. The colony was not successful, consequently was 
disbanded a few years later (Martin, 1). 

No more is heard of the tribe for nearly a hundred years. As they 
were evidently a warlike people, it is probable that like most of their 
neighbors they took part in the Yamasi war in 1715. Itis also prob- 
able that they suffered with all the Carolina tribes from smallpox and 

-other diseases until only a handful remained. They do not seem to 
have incorporated with the Catawba, however, as did many of the 
smaller tribes in their decline, but to have maintained their separate 
existence within the English settlements. They are last noticed in 1751 
as one of the small friendly tribes with whom the South Carolina goy- 
ernment desired the Iroquois to be at peace (N. Y., 18). 

For the name Warrennuncock there is only the authority of a single 
statement by Lederer, who tells us in 1672 that the southern Allegha- 
nies (or Blue ridge) at Sara ‘“ take the name of Suala; Sara in the 
Warrennuncock dialect being Sasa or Sualy.” The name has an Algon- 
quian appearance, and is probably only a Powhatan synonym for some 
Carolina tribe (having the / instead of the vr) better known to us under 
some other name. 


THE CATAWBA. 
Synonymy. 


Atakwa, Anitakwa.—Mooney (singular and plural Cherokee forms). 
Cadapouces.—Pénicaut (1708) in Margry, Découvertes, 1883, vol. v, p. 477. 
Calabaws.—Humphreys, Account, 1730, p. 98 (misprint), 

Calipoas.—Census of 1857 in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1857, vol. vi, p. 686. 
Canapouces.—Pénicaut (1708) in Margry, op. cit. 

Catabas.—Montcalm (1757) in New York Col. Does., 1858, vol. x, p. 553. 
Catabans.—Rafinesque in Marshall, Hist. of Kentucky, 1824, vol. i, p. 24. 
Catabaw.—Document of 1738 in New York Col. Does., 1855, vol. vi, p. 137, 
Catapaw.—Map of North America and the West Indies, 1720. 

Catauba.—Filson, History of Kentucky, 1793, p. 84. 

Cataubos.—Map of 1715 in Winsor, History of America, 1887, vol. v, p. 346. 
Catawba. —Albany Conference (1717) in N. Y. Col. Does., 1855, vol. v, p. 490. 
Catawbau.—Carroll, Historical Collections of South Carolina, 1836, vol. ii, p. 199. 
Catawbaw.—Map in Mandrillon, Spectateur Américain, 1785. 

Cataupa.—Potter (1768) in Mass. Hist. Soc. Colls., Ist series, 1809, vol. x, p. 120. 
Cattabas.—Document of 1715 in N. C. Records, 1886, vol. ii, p. 252. 
Cattabaws.—Alhany Conference (1717) in New York Col. Does., 1855, vol. v, p. 490. 
Cattawbas.—Clarke (1741) in ibid., 1855, vol. vi, p. 208. 

Cattoways.—Stobo (1754) in The Olden Time, 1846, vol. i, p. 72. 
Cautawbas.—Clinton (1751) in New York Col. Does., 1855, vol. vi, p. 716. 
Chatabas.—Buchanan, North American Indians, 1824, p. 155. 
Contaubas.—Oglethorpe (1743) in New York Col. Does., 1855, vol. vi, p. 243. 
Cotappos.—Document of 1776 in Historical Magazine, 2d series, 1867, vol. ii, p. 216. 
Cotawpees.—Rogers, North America, 1765, p. 136. 

Cotobers.—Document of 1728 in Va. State Papers, 1875, vol. i, p. 215. 
Cuttambas.—German map of British Colonies (about 1750). 

Cuttawa.—Vaugondy, map Partie de l’ Amérique Septentrionale, 1755. 
EKa-tau-bau.—Hawkins (1799), Sketch of the Creek Country, 1848, p. 62 (misprint). 


BUREAU OF ; 
68 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. ETHNOLOGY = 


Elaws.—Craven (1712) in North Carolina Records, 1886, vol. i, p. 898 (misprint). 

Esau.—Martin, History of North Carolina, 1829, vol. i, p. 194. 

Esaws.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint of 1860, p. 73. 

Flatheads (?).—Albany Conference (1714) in New York Col. Does., 1855, vol. v, p. 386. 
Albany Conference (1715) inibid., pp. 442-444 (subjects of Carolina, Oyadagah- 
roenes). 

Issa.—La Vandera (1579) in French, Hist. Coll. of La., 1875, vol. ii, p. 291. 

Kadapau.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint of 1860, p. 76. 

Kadapaw.—Mills, Statistics of South Carolina, 1826, p. 109. 

Katabas.—Malartic (1758) in New York Col. Does., 1858, vol. x, p. 843. 

_ Katahba.—Adair, History of American Indians, 1775, p. 228. 

Kataubah.—Drake, Book of Indians, 1848, book iy, p. 25. 

Kattarbe.-—Cumming(?) (1730) in Drake, Book of Indians, 1848, book iv, p. 27. 

Kattaupa.—De VIsle map in Winsor, History of America, 1886, vol. ii, p. 295. 

Ojadagochrene.—Albany Conference (1720) in New York Col. Does., 1855, vol. v, p. 567. 
(“The flatheads Alias in Indian Ojadagochroene;” ‘‘ They live to the west and 
south of Virginia’’). 

Oyadagahrenes.—Document of 1713 in New York Col. Does., vol. v, p. 386, note. 

Tadirighrones.—Albany Conference (1722), op. cit., p. 660 (same ?), 

Toderichroone.—Albany Conference (1717), op. cit., p. 491 (so called by Iroquois). 

Totiris.—Chauvignrie(?) (1736) in New York Col. Docs., 1855, vol. ix, p. 1057 (here 
intended for the Catawba). 

Usherees.—Byrd (1728), Hist. of the Dividing Line, 1866, vol. i, p. 181. 

Usherys.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 17. 

The origin and meaning of this name are unknown. It is said that 
Lynche creek in South Carolina, east of the Catawba territory, was 
anciently known as Kadapau; and from the fact that Lawson applies 
the name Kadapau to a small band met by him southeast of the 
main body of the tribe, which he calls Esaw, it is possible that it was 
originally applied to this people by some tribe living in eastern South 
Carolina, from whom the first colonists obtained it. The Cherokee, 
having no 6 in their language, changed the word to Atakwa, or 
Anitakwa in the plural. The Shawano and other tribes of the Ohio 
valley made the word Cuttawa. From the earliest period the Catawba 
have also been known distinctively as the ‘‘river |Catawba, iswd] 
people,” from their residence on what seems to have been considered 
the principal river of the region, Iswa, “the river,” being their only 
name for the Catawba and Wateree. The name appears in the Issa of 
La Vandera as early as 1569, in the Ushery (iswa-héreé, “river down 
there”) of Lederer, and in the Esaw of Lawson. They were also called 
Flatheads (Oyadagahroene) by the Iroquois, a name which leads 
to some confusion, as it was also frequently applied by the same 
people to the Choctaw, Chickasaw, and Cherokee. The name was 
properly applicable to the Choctaw, who practiced the custom of head — 
flattening, as did also the Waxhaw of South Carolina adjoining the 
Catawba; but there seems to be no allusion to the existence of this | 
strange custom among the Catawba themselves. They were also fre-— 
quently included by the Iroquois under the general term of Totiri or — 
Toderichroone (whence the form Tutelo), applied to all the southern — 
Siouan tribes collectively. Like most other tribes the Catawba know 


nanny | FORMER CATAWBA CLASSIFICATION. 69 


themselves simply as “ people,” or “ Indians,” in their language nieya 
or nieye, abbreviated to nie or ye, or sometimes expanded into Kataba 
nie, “Catawba Indians” (Gatschet). 

Gallatin in 1836 classed the Catawba as a distinet stock, and they 
were so regarded until Gatschet visited them in South Carolina in 
1881 and obtained from them a vocabulary of over 1,000 words, 
among which he found numerous Siouan correspondences. On the 
strength of this testimony they were classed with the Siouan stock in 
the First Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology, published in the 
same year. No further investigation of the subject was made until 
Hale’s account of the Tutelo language, published in 1883, Gatschet’s 
further discovery of the Biloxi in 1886, and the author’s notice of the 
Siouan affinity of the Saponi in 1890 proved beyond question that 
some of the oldest forms of the Siouan languages must be looked for in 
the east. The material obtained by Mr. Gatschet was then turned over 
for critical examination to Mr. Dorsey, a specialist in the well-known 
Siouan tribes of the west, with the result that he pronounced ‘the 
Catawba a Siouan language. This established, it followed that the 
Woccon and other languages known to be closely related to the 
Catawba must also belong to the same stock. As nearly all the tribes 
of both Carolinas from Cape Fear river to the Combahee were closely 
allied politically with the Catawba, with whom they were afterward 
incorporated, it is probable, though not certain, that they were all of 
the same linguistic stock. 

According to a Catawba tradition related in Schoolcraft, the people 
originally came from the north, driven by the “ Connewangos,” by which 
is evidently meant the Iroquois. They settled on Catawba river, and 
after a desperate struggle with the Cherokee, who claimed prior rights 
in the region, they succeeded in maintaining their position; and Broad 
river was adopted as the boundary between the two tribes. So much 
of the tradition may be accepted as genuine. The rest of it, relating 
with great exactness of detail how they had lived in Canada, how the 
Connewango were aided by the French, how the Catawba lived for 
atime in Kentucky and in what is now Botetourt county, Virginia; 
how they settled on Catawba river about 1660, how in one battle with 
the Cherokee they lost 1,000 men and the Cherokee lost 1,100, and 
how the Catawba exterminated the Waxhaw to the last man imine- 
diately afterward—all this is absurd, the invention and ignorant sur- 
mise of the would-be historian who records the tradition, and of a piece 
with Schooleraft’s identification of the Catawba with ‘‘the lost Eries.” 
The Catawba were found living about where we have always known 
them as early as 1567. Kentucky river was called by that name among 
the Shawano and other northern tribes because up that river lay the 
great war trail to the Catawba country. The creek bearing the name 
in Botetourt county, Virginia, was so called from a ¢hance encounter 
of Shawano or others with a party of Catawba, who used to enter 


70 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


Pennsylvania and cross over to Ohio valley in their raiding excursions, 
just as the Iroquois and other northern tribes used to penetrate to 
South Carolina against the Catawba. 

The French had nothing to do with the expulsion of the Catawba 
from the north, as shown by the connected accounts of all the impor- 
tant French dealings with the tribes from their first occupancy. So 
far from being exterminated, the Waxhaw were found by Lawson liy- 
ing on Waxhaw creek in 1701, and were described in detail by him at 
that time. It is hardly necessary to say that no tribe in the United 
States ever lost 1,000 warriors in a single battle with another tribe. 
As for the Erie, there is no question as to their identity; they were 
an Iroquian tribe on Lake Erie whose conquest and incorporation by 
the Iroquois is a matter of history. 

From the earliest historical period the Catawba have always lived 
where the small remnant may still be found, on Catawba river, about 
on the border of North Carolina and South Carolina. Westward and 
northwestward they bordered on the Cherokee and Sara, with the 
former of whom they were in a state of chronic warfare, while on the 
south and east they had as neighbors several small tribes closely akin 
to themselves and most of whom afterward united with them in their 
decline. Their villages were chiefly within the present limits of South 
Carolina. 

The first European acquaintance of the Catawba was with the 
Spaniards about the middle of the sixteenth century. It is possible 
that the Guachule of De Soto’s chroniclers, although evidently situated 
southwest of Catawba river, is identical with the Usheree or Catawba 
tribe of the later English writers, as Guatari and Hostaqua are identi- 
cal with Wateree and Oustack or Westo. They are mentioned under 
the name of Issa by the Spanish captain, Juan Pardo, who conducted 
an expedition from Saint Helena into the interior of South Carolina in 
1567 (French, 1). 

The next important notice is given a hundred years later by Lederer, 
who visited these Indians in 1670 and speaks of them under the name 
of Ushery. He describes them as living on one side of a great lake, 
on the farther side of which lived the Oustack (Westo) of whom they 
were in constant dread. As there is no such lake in that part of the 
country, it is evident that he must have visited the region at a time 
when the low bottom lands of Catawba river were flooded by heavy 
rains. The swamp lands of Carolina are subject to heavy overflow, 
and Lawson records the statement that on his journey he found Santee 
river risen 36 feet above its normal level. While at war with the Westo, 
the Catawba in 1670 were in alliance with the Wisacky (Waxhaw), a 
subordinate neighboring tribe. Lawson describes the Catawba women 
as “reasonably handsome,” and delighting much in feather ornaments, 
of which they had a great variety. The men were more effeminate 
and lazy than other Indians generally, a fact which may account for 
the little importance of the tribe in history. He notes the fact of the 


EE ee 


bs aes EARLY ACCOUNTS OF THE CATAWBA. ia! 


universal custom of plucking out the beard. They were acquainted 
with the Spaniards, who lived only two or three days’ journey south- 
westward. The Sara, living northwest of the Catawba, also were 
acquainted with the same nation. 

According to Lederer’s account, the Catawba had the fire dance 
found among so many tribes; he says: 

-These miserable wretches are strangely infatuated with illness of the devil; it 
caused so small horror in me to see one of them wrythe his neck all on one side, 
foam at the mouth, stand barefoot upon burning coal for near one hour, and then, 
recovering his senses, leap out of the fire without hurt or signe of any (Lederer, 
10). 

As it is impossible to do justice to the Catawba within the limits of 
this paper, only a brief sketch of the tribe will be presented, with espe- 
cial attention to the obscurer tribes; the fuller descriptions being re- 
served for a future work on the Indians of the southern Atlantic region. 

In 1701 Lawson passed through the territory of the Catawba, whom 
he calis by the two names of Esaw and Kadapau, evidently unaware 
that these names are synonyms. In Esaw may be recognized Iswi, 
whence is derived the name Ushery of Lederer. Kadapau, of course, is 
another form of Catawba, the band which he calls by this name living 
some little distance from those designated by him as Esaw. He ealls 
the Esaw a “powerful nation” and states that their villages were “very 
thick.” From all accounts they were formerly the most populous tribe 
in the Carolinas excepting the Cherokee. He was everywhere received 
in a friendly manner, in accord with the universal conduct of the 
Catawba toward the English save during the Yamasi war. Virginia 
traders were all among them then, and the great trading path from: 
Virginia to Georgia was commonly known as the Catawba path. He 
says nothing of head-flattening among this tribe, although he describes 
the custom in detail as found among the neighboring Waxhaw. In- 
cidentaily he mentions that scratching a stranger on the shoulder at 
parting was regarded as a very great compliment. He also notes the 
use of a comb set with the teeth of rattlesnakes for scraping the body 
before applying medicine to the affected part in cases of lameness (Law- 
son, 10). A similar practice still persists among the Cherokee. 

Adair states that one of the ancient cleared fields of the Catawba 
extended 7 miles, besides which they had several other smaller village 
sites (Adair, 4). In 1728 (1729 by error) they still had six villages, all 
on Catawba river, within a distance of 20 miles, the most northerly 
being called Nauvasa (Byrd, 21). Their principal village was formerly 
on the western side of the river in what is now York county, South 
Carolina, opposite the mouth of Sugar creek (Mills, 1). 

The history of the Catawba up to about the year 1760 is chiefly a 
record of the petty warfare between themselves and the Iroquois and 
other northern tribes, throughout which the colonial government was 
constantly kept busy trying to induce the Indians to stop killing each 
other and go to killing the French. With the single exception of their 


rad 
r ‘ AU OF 
72 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. claeeremes =. 


alliance with the hostile Yamasi in 1715 they were uniformly friendly 
to the English and afterward to their successors, the Americans; but 
they were at constant war with the Iroquois, the Shawano, the Dela- 
ware, and other tribes of Ohio valley, as well as with the Cherokee. In 
carrying on this warfare the Iroquois and the lake tribes made long 
journeys into South Carolina, and the Catawba retaliated by sending 
small scalping parties into Ohio and Pennsylvania. Their losses by 
the ceaseless attacks of their enémies reduced their numbers steadily 
and rapidly, while disease and debauchery introduced by the whites, 
and especially several wholesale epidemics of smallpox, aided the work 
of destruction, so that before the closeof the eighteenth century the great 
nation of Lawson was reduced to a pitiful remnant (details may be 
found in the Colonial Documents of New York, in 12 volumes, 1856-1877), 
They sent a large force to help the colonists in the Tuskarora war of 
1711-13, and also aided in expeditions against the French and their 
Indian allies at Fort Du Quesne and elsewhere during the French and 
Indian war. Later it was proposed to use them and the Cherokee 
against the lake tribes under Pontiac in 1763. They assisted the 
Americaus also during the Revolution in the defense of South Carolina 
against the British, as well as in Williamson’s expedition against the 
Cherokee. 

In 1738 the smallpox raged in South Carolina, and worked great 
destruction not only among the whites but also among the Catawba 
and smaller tribes. In 1759 it appeared again and this time destroyed 
nearly half the tribe, largely because of their custom (common to other 
Indians likewise) of plunging into cold water as soon as the disease 
manifested itself (Gregg,3). In order to secure some protection for 
them in their weakened condition the South Carolina government 
made strong protests to the governor of New York against the incur- 
sions of the Iroquois and Ohio tribes from the north, who did not con- 
fine their attention to the Catawba alone, but frequently killed also 
other friendly Indians and negroes and even attacked the white settle- 
ments. Governor Glen, of South Carolina, at last threatened to take up 
the quarrel of the Catawba by offering a reward for every northern 
Indian killed within the limits of South Carolina. This heroic measure 
was successful, and in thenext year (1751), at a conference at Albany 
attended by the delegates from the Six Nations and the Catawba, 
under the auspices of the colonial governments, a treaty of peace was 
made between the two tribes, conditional upon the return of some 
Iroquois prisoners then held by the Catawba (N. Y., 19). This peace 
was probably final as regards the Iroquois, but had no effect upon the 
western tribes, whose interests were all with the French. These tribes 
continued their warfare against the Catawba, who were now so far 
reduced that they could make little effectual resistance. In 1762. a 
small party of Shawano killed the noted chief of the tribe, King 
Haiglar, near his own village (Mills, 2). From this time they ceased to 
be of importance except in conjunction with the whites. In 1763 they 


i ed 


SIOUANY CATAWBA EARLY HISTORY. 73 


moonry] 


had confirmed to them a reservation (assigned a few years before) of 15 
miles square, or 225 square miles, on both sides of Catawba river, 
within the present York and Lancaster counties, South Carolina (N. 
Y., 20). 

On the approach of the British troops in 1780, the Catawba Indians 
withdrew temporarily into Virginia, but returned after the battle of 
Guilford Court House and established themselves in two villages on the 
reservation, known, respectively, as Newton (the principal village) and 
Turkey Head, on opposite sides of Catawba river (Mills, 3). In 1826 
nearly the whole of their reservation was leased to whites for a few 
thousand dollars, on which the few survivors chiefly depended. About 
1841 they sold to the state all but a single square mile, on which they 
now reside (Gatschet). About the same time a number of the Catawba, 
dissatisfied with their condition among the whites, removed to the eastern 
Cherokee in western North Carolina, but finding their position among 
their old enemies equally unpleasant, all but one or two soon went 
back again. An old woman, the last survivor of this emigration, died 
among the Cherokee in 1889. Her daughter and a younger full-blood 
Catawba still reside with that tribe. At a later period some Catawba 
removed to the Choctaw nation in Indian Territory and settled near 
Seullyville, but are said now to be extinct. About ten years ago sev- 
eral became converts to Mormon missionaries in South Carolina and 
went with them to Salt Lake City, Utah. 

The following figures show the steady decline of the tribe from the 
first authentic reports to the present time. At the first settlement of 
South Carolina (about 1682) they numbered about 1,500 warriors, 
equivalent perhaps to 6,000 souls (Adair, 5). In 1701 they were “a 
very large nation, containing many thousand people” (Lawson, 11). 
In 1728 they had but little more than 400 warriors, equivalent perhaps 
to 1,600 souls (Byrd, 22). In 1738 they suffered from the smallpox, 
and in 1743, even after they had incorporated a uumber of smaller 
tribes, the whole body consisted of less than 400 warriors. At that 
time this mixed nation consisted of the remnants of more than twenty 
different tribes, each still retaining its own dialect. Others included 
with them were the Wateree, who had a separate village, the Eno, 
Cheraw or Sara, Chowan(?), Congaree, Notchee, Yamasi, Coosa, ete., 


(Adair, 6). In 1759 the smallpox again appeared among them and 


destroyed a great many. In 1761 they had left about 300 warriors, 
say 1,200 total, ‘brave fellows as any on the continent of America, 
and our firm friends” (Description of South Carolina, London, 1761). 
In 1775 they had little more than 100 warriors, about 400 souls; but 
Adair says that smallpox and intemperance had contributed more 
than war to their decrease (Adair, 7). They were further reduced by 
smallpox about the beginning of the Revolution, in consequence of 
which they took the advice of their white friends and invited the 
Cheraw still living in the settlements to move up and join them 
(Gregg, 4). This increased their number, and in 1780 they had 150 


74 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. mare 


warriors and a total population of 490 (Mass., 1). About 1784 they 
had left only 60 or 70 warriors, or about 250 souls, and of these war- 
riors it was said, “‘such they are as would excite the derision and con- 
tempt of the more western savages” (Smyth, 1). In 1787 they were the 
only tribe in South Carolina still retaining an organization (Gregg). 
In 1822 they were reported to number about 450 souls (Morse, 1), which 
is certainly a mistake, as in 1826 a historian of the state says they had 
only about 30 warriors and 110 total population (Mills, 4). In 1881 
Gatschet found about 85 persons on the reservation on the western 
bank of Catawba river, about 3 miles north of Catawba Junction, 
in York county, South Carolina, with about 35 more working on farms 
across the line in North Carolina, a total of about 120. Those on the 
reservation were much mixed with white blood, and only about two 
dozen retained their language. The best authority then among them 
on all that concerned the tribe and language was an old man called 
Billy John. They received a small annual payment from the state in 
return for the lands they had surrendered, but were poor and misera- 
ble. For several years they have been without a chief. In 1889 there 
were only about 50 individuals remaining on the reservation, but of this 
small remnant the women still retain their old reputation as expert 
potters. They were under the supervision of an agent appointed by 
the state. 


THE WAXHAW AND SUGEREE. - 


Synonymy. 


 Flatheads.—General (see Catawba). 
Wacksaws.—Craven (1712) in Col. Records of North Carolina, 1886, vol. i, p. 898. 
Wassaws.—Catawba manuscript in Schoolcraft, Ind. Tribes, 1853, vol. iii, p. 294. 
Waxaus.—Map of North America and the West Indies, 1720. 
Waxaws.—Document of 1719 in Rivers, South Carolina, 1874, p. 93. 
Waxhaws.—Logan, History of upper South Carolina, 1859, vol. i, p. 182. 
Waxsaws.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint of 1860, p. 60. 
Wisack.—-Ibid., p. 72. 
Wisacky.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 17. 


Sugans.—Vaugondy, map of ‘‘ Amérique,” 1778 (misprint). 

Sugaus.—Bowen, Map of the British American Plantations, 1760. 
Sugeree.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, op. cit., p. 76. 

Suturees.—War map of 1715 in Winsor, History of America, 1887, vol. v, p. 346. 


The two small tribes bearing the above designations are hardly 
known except in connection with the Catawba, with whom they were 
afterward incorporated. They may be treated together. The tribes 
lived, respectively, about Waxhaw and Sugar (i. e., Sugeree) creeks, two 
small streams flowing into Catawba river from the northeast, within, 
what is now Lancaster county, South Carolina, and Union and Mecklen- 
burg counties, North Carolina. As previously mentioned (page 69) 
the Waxhaw practiced the custom of flattening the head, a custom 


SE Ss UC 


MOONRY WAXHAW HEAD-FLATTENING. 75 


probably followed also by the Catawba and other neighboring tribes, 
whence they were called Flatheads. The first notice of either tribe 
seems to be that of Lederer, who visited the Wisacky (Waxsaw) in 
1672, and found them living next south of the Sara, i. e., about where 
they were afterward known. He dismisses them with the brief state- 
ment that they were subject to the Ushery (Catawba) and might be 
considered a part of that tribe (Lederer, 11). 

In 1701 Lawson visited the Waxhaw and was received in the most 
hospitable fashion. He mentions two of their villages as being situated 
10 miles apart, showing that they might be considered a tribe of some 
importance at that time. From incidental references in Lawson’s work 
it is evident that at the time of his visit they were on good terms with 
their neighbors as well as with the Saponi farther toward the north. 
He says that the Waxhaw were very tall, and describes in detail their 
method of flattening the head. This was accomplished by laying the 
infant in a sort of cradle, consisting chiefly of a flat board, with its head 
resting on a bag of sand. Swaddling cloths were then wrapped tightly 
around baby and cradle from head to foot and a roll (of cloth ?) was 
placed over its forehead and pulled down tightly in the same manner. 
The bandages were loosened or tightened from time to time, and the 
child was kept in this press until the soft skull was permanently dis- 
torted. The process had the effect of disfiguring the countenance by 
making the eyes stand very wide apart and causing the hair to hang 
over the forehead, as Lawson says, “like the eves of a house.” The 
reason given by the Indians for this strange custom was that it improved 
the eyesight, so that they became better hunters. 

The dance ceremonials and councils of the Waxhaw were held in a 
large council house, much larger than the ordinary houses in which 
they dwelt, with a very low entrance and with benches of cane inside 
next to the wall. Instead of being covered with bark like their dwell- 
ings, this state house was neatly thatched with sedge andrushes. One 
of their principal old men had his residence in it as guard and keeper. 
The interior of the structure was dark and the fire was kept up on public 
occasions by means of a circle of cane splits in the middle, the canes 
being constantly renewed at one end as they were consumed at the 
other. According to personal information, the same method of making 
and renewing the fire was used among the Cherokee on certain cere- 
monial occasions. 

Soon after leaving the Waxhaw and Esaw (Catawba), Lawson met 
the Sugeree, who, according to his statement, occupied a very fertile 
country and inhabited “a great many towns and settlements.” Near 
them were the “ Kadapau,” who to all appearances were a detached 
band of the Catawba (Lawson, 12). 

No later reference to these tribes is found excepting a brief mention 
of the “ Elaw” (Catawba) and Waxhaw in 1712, from which it seems 
that the hostile Tuskarora and their allies in the north were making 
inroads upon them. They were probably so far reduced a few years 


76 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST, Rae. 


later by the Yamasi war, in which nearly all the Carolina tribes took 
part against the English, that they were no longer able to stand alone 
and were obliged to incorporate with the Catawba. 


THE PEDEE, WACCAMAW, AND WINYAW; THE HOOKS 
AND BACKHOOKS. 


punon ymy. 
Peadea.—La Tour map, 1784. 
Pedees. ar map of 1715 in Winsor, History of biadeasta 1887, vol. v, p. 346. 
Peedee.—Document of 1732 in Gregg, History of the Old Cheraws, 1867, p. 8. 
Pidees.—Glen (1751) in New York Col. Does., 1855, vol. vi, p. 709. 


Waccamaus.—Letter of 1715 in Col. Rec. of North Carolina, 1886, vol. 1, p. 252. 
Waccamawe.—Ibid., p. 252. 

Wacemaus.—Ibid., p. 251. 

Waggamaw.—Map of the Province of South Carolina, 1760. 

Waggoman.—War map of 1715 in Winsor, op. cit.,vol. v, p.346 (misprint). 
Wicomaw.-—Bowen, Map of the British American Plantations, 1760. 
Wigomaw.—Moll, map of Carolina, 1720. 


Weenees.—Rivers, History of South Carolina, 1856, p. 36 (same ?). 

Wenee (river).—Map of the Province of South Carolina, 1760. 

Wineaus.—Letter of 1715 in Col. Rec. of North Carolina, 1886, vol. ii, p. 251. 
Wingah.—Map of the Province of South Carolina, 1760 (misprint). 
Winyaws.—Mills, Statistics of South Carolina, 1826, p. 108. 

Winyo.—Bowen, Map of the British American Plantations, 1760. 
Wyniaws.—Gallatin in Trans. and Colls. Am. Antiquarian Soce., 1836, vol. ii, p. 89. 


Hooks.—Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint of 1860, p. 45. 


Back 5 (misprint). 
Back Hooks.—Rivers, History of South Carolina, 1856, p. 35. 


These small tribes lived on the lower Pedee and its tributaries in 
South Carolina and the cont#guous border of North Carolina. Nothing 
is known of their language and very little can now be learned of their 
former daily life or their religions system of belief, as they were never 
prominent in history. 

For the “Hooks” and “ Backbooks” there is only the authority of 
Lawson, who mentions them as enemies of the Santee, living in the 
earliest part of the eighteenth century about the mouth of Winyaw 
river, i. e., Winyah bay, South Carolina (Lawson, 13). The names have 
a suspicious appearance, as though badly corrupted from their proper 
forms. Rivers, perhaps from original information, makes them Hooks 
and Back Hooks, which, if correct, may indicate that the former lived 
nearer the coast and the others back of them. 

The Waccamaw lived on the river of that name, which enters the 
Pedee from the north almost at its mouth. The Winyaw lived on the 
western side of the Pedee near its mouth. Black river, a lower tribu- 
tary of the Pedee from the west, was formerly called Wenee river, prob- 
ably another form of the same word, and Winyah bay still preserves 
their memory. The two tribes are mentioned in 1715 as living near 


SIOUAN THE WACCAMAW AND PEDEE. 17 


MOONEY 


together and as receiving supplies of ammunition from the Sara, who 
were endeavoring to persuade them to join the Yamasi and other 
hostiles against the English (N. C., 11). In 1755 the Cherokee and 
Notchee were reported to have killed some Pedee and Waccamaw 
in the white settlements (Gregg, 5). This appears to be the last mention 
of the Waccamaw, though from other evidence it is probable that, like 
the Pedee, Sara, and other tribes of that region, the remnant was 
finally incorporated with the Catawba. 

The Pedee are somewhat better known. They lived on the middle 
course of Pedee river, and on a map of 1715 their village is located on 
the eastern bank, considerably below that of the Sara (about the 
present village of Cheraw). They are mentioned in a document of 1732, 
and again in 1743, In 1744 they and the Notchee killed several Catawba, 
whereupon the Catawba pursued them and drove them down into the 
settlements, necessitating the interference of the colonial government to 
prevent war between the two parties. In 1746 they and the Sara are 
mentioned as two small tribes, which had been long incorporated with 
the Catawba. They were restless under the connection, however, and 
again Governor Glen had to interfere to prevent their separation. 
This he did by representing to them that either was too weak to 
stand alone against their enemies, although strong enough when united, 
enforcing the parable by means of a bundle of ramrods. Incidentally 
it is iearned that the Pedee owned negro slaves, as also did other 
tribes near the settlements (Gregg, 6). In the Albany conference of 
1751 they are mentioned as one cf the small tribes living among the 
whites, with which the South Carolina government desired the Iroquois 
to be at peace (New York, 21). Inthe following year the Catawba sent 
a message to Governor Glen to the effect that there were still a great 
many Pedee living among the settlements, and asking him to advise 
these to come and live with them (the Catawba), who promised to treat 
them as brothers. By this means the Catawba represented to the 
governor that they themselves would be strengthened and the Pedee 
would run less risk of being killed by hostile Indians while straggling 
in the woods. It is not improbable that the invitation was accepted 
_ by most of the Pedee who had not already joined the Catawba, although 
there is a record of some Pedee having been killed by the Notchee 
and Cherokee in 1755 within the white settlements (Gregg, 7). 


THE SEWEE, SANTEE, WATEREE, AND CONGAREE. 


Synonymy. 


Seawees.—Document of 1719 in Rivers, Hist. of South Carolina, 1874, p. 93. 
Secwas.—Rivers (anonymous), History of South Carolina, 1856, p. 38. 

_ Sewee.—Purcell, Map of Virginia, ete., 1795. 

Sewees.— Lawson (1714), History of Carolina, reprint of 1860, p. 25. 


Santees.—Lawson (1714), op. cit., p. 34. 
_Seratees.—Mills, Statistics of South Carolina, 1826, p. 735. 


78 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUREAU CF 


ETHNOLOGY 


Seretee.—Lawson, op. cit., p. 45. 
Zantees.—Howe in Schoolcraft, Indian Tribes, 1854, vol, iv, p. 155. 


Chichanees.—Rivers (anonymous), History of South Carolina, 1856, p. 36. 
Chickaree.—Howe in Schoolcraft, op. cit., p. 158. 

Guatari.—La Vandera (1569) in Smith, Documentos Inéditos, 1857, vol. i, p. 17. 
Watarees.—Jettreys, French Dominions in America, 1761, part i, map, p. 134. 
Watary.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 16. 

Wateree.—Lawson (1714), op. cit., p. 56. 

Wateree Chickanee.—Ibid., p. 59. 

Waterrees.—Ibid., p. 99. 

Watteree.—Moll, Map of Carolina, 1720. 


Canggaree.—Adair, Hist. Am. Indians, 1775, p. 225. 

Congares.—Doe., of 1719 in Rivers, Early Hist. of South Carolina, 1874, p. 92. 
Congarees.—Ibid., p. 93. 

Congeres.—Moll, Map of Carolina, 1720. 

Congerecs.—Lawson (1714), op. cit., p. 34. 

Congrée.—La Tour, Map of United States, 1784. 

Conqerees—War map of 1715 in Winsor, Hist. of Am., 1887, vol. v, p. 346. 

The Santee and its branches, the Wateree and the Congaree, were 
held by the Sewee, Santee, Wateree, and Congaree tribes, whose terri- 
tory extended to the neighborhood of the Waxhaw and Catawba. 
Nothing is known of their linguistic affinities, but their alliances and 
final incorporation were with the Catawba. 

The Sewee occupied the coast and the lower part of the river below 
the Santee, extending westward to the divide of Ashley river about 
the present Monks Corner, in Berkeley county, South Carolina, where 
they adjoined the Etiwaw (Rivers, 2). Their name is preserved in 
Sewee bay. Lawson, who met them in 1701, states that they had 
formerly been a large tribe, but, like the other tribes of Carolina, had 
been much wasted by smallpox and other diseases, and through the 
effect of liquor introduced by the whites. The great mortality always 
produced among them by smallpox was owing chiefly to their universal 
habit of plunging into the water at the critical stage of the disease in 
order to ease themselves of the feverish burnings. 

The destruction of the Sewee was the immediate result of the fail- 
ure of a great trading scheme which they had elaborated, but which 
proved disastrous to the originators. Being dissatisfied with the bar- 
gains that the traders drove with them, and having noticed that the 
English vessels always came in at one particular harbor, they con- 
cluded that by starting from the same point with their canoes they 
could easily reach England, which they would not believe was so far 
off as the whites said, and there do their own trading to better advan- 
tage. Accordingly, after having deliberated the matter in council, 
they prepared a fleet of large canoes, which they loaded with a full 
stock of their finest furs and what they supposed were sufficient sup- 
plies for the voyage. In order not to be cheated out of the reward of 
their enterprise, the plan and preparation were kept a secret from their 
neighboring tribes. When the fleet was ready they embarked nearly 


a 


SIOUAN THE SANTEE OR SERATEE. 79 


MOONEY 


all their able-bodied men, leaving only the old people and children at 
home to await their return, and put out into the Atlantic. Unfortu- 
nately they were hardly out of sight of land before a storm came up, 
which swamped most of their canoes and drowned the occupants, 
while the survivors were taken up by an English ship and sold as 
slaves in the West Indies. Aboriginal free trade thus received its 
death blow in Carolina, and their voyage to England remained a sore 
topic among the Sewee for along time thereafter. Lawson describes 
the remnant as tall, athletic fellows, and excellent canoemen, and inci- 
dentally mentions that they used mats as sails. Avendaughbough, 
a deserted village which he found on Sewee bay (p. 24), was probably 
one of their settlements (Lawson, 14). 

Only one later reference to the Sewee is known. It is said that in 
January, 1715, they numbered 57 souls and occupied a single village 
60 (?) miles northeast of Charleston (Rivers). The Yamasi war, which 
began three months later and involved all the tribes of that region, 
probably put an end to their existence as a separate and distinct tribe. 


The Santee or Seratee lived on Santee river from the Sewee settle- 
ments up about tothe forks. They were a small tribe,even in 1701, 
although their chief had more despotic power than among other tribes. 
They had several villages, one small one being called Hickerau, known 
to the traders as ‘‘the black house.” They were a generally hospitable 
people and friendly to the whites, but were at that time at war with the 
tribes below them on the coast. They made beautiful feather robes, 
wove cloths and sashes of hair, and stored their corn in provision houses 
raised on posts and plastered with clay, after the manner of the Chero- 
kee and other southern tribes. It is recorded that their chief was an 
absolute ruler with power of life and death over his tribe, an instance 
of despotism very rare in that region but probably in accordance with 
the custom of the Santee, as we learn that his predecessor had been 
equally unquestioned in his authority and dreaded by all his enemies 
for his superior prowess. 

Their distinguished dead were buried on the tops of mounds built low 
or high according to the rank of the deceased, and with a ridge roof 
supported by poles over the grave to shelter it from the weather. On 
these poles were hung rattles, feathers, and other offerings from the 
relations of the dead man. The corpse of an ordinary person was care- 
fully dressed, wrapped in bark, and exposed on a platform for several 
days, during which time one of his nearest kinsman, with face blackened 
in token of grief, stood guard near the spot and chanted a mournful 
eulogy of the dead. The ground about the platform was kept carefully 
swept, and all the dead man’s belongings, gun, bow, and feather robes, 
were placed near by. As soon as the flesh had softened it was stripped 
from the bones and burned, and the bones themselves were cleaned, 
the skull being wrapped separately in a cloth woven of opossum hair, 


80 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. led et 


The bones were then put into a box, from which they were taken out 
annually to be again cleaned and oiled. In this way some families had 
in their possession the bones of their ancestors for several generations. 
Places where warriors had been killed were sometimes distinguished 
by piles of stones, or sometimes of sticks, to which every passing Indian 
added another (Lawson, 15). The custom of cleaning and preserving 
the bones of the dead was common also to the Choctaw, Nanticoke, 
and several other tribes. 

According to an old document the Santee in January, 1715, still had 
two villages, 70 (?) miles north of Charleston, with 43 warriors (Rivers), 
equal to about 160 souls. As nothing is heard of them later they prob- 
ably were destroyed as a tribe by the Yamasi war, which broke out 
soon after. , 


The Congaree lived on Santee and Congaree rivers, above and below 
the junction of the Wateree, in central South Carolina. They had the 
Santee tribe below them and the Wateree tribe above. Lawson found 
them in 1701, apparently on the northeastern bank of the river below 
the junction of the Wateree; but on a map of 1715 their village is indi- 
cated on the southern bank of the Congaree and considerably above, 
perhaps about Big Beaver creek, or about opposite the site of Columbia, 
on the eastern boundary of Lexington county. A fort called by their 
name was established near this village and about the present Columbia 
in 1718, and according to Logan became an important trading station, 
Lawson described their village in 1701 as consisting of only about a 
dozen houses, located on a small creek flowing into Santee river. They 
were then but a small tribe, having lost heavily by tribal feuds, but 
more especially by smallpox, which had depopulated whole villages. 
They were a friendly people, handsome and well built, the women being 
especially beautiful. Although the several tribes were generally small 
and lived closely adjoining one another, yet there was as great a differ- 
ence in their features and disposition as in language, which was 
usually different with each tribe (Lawson, 16). 

The Congaree, like their neighbors, took part in the Yamasi war 
in 1715, as a result of which they were so reduced that they were 
obliged to move up and join the Catawba, with whom they were living 
in 1743, still preserving their distinct dialect (Adair, 8). 

The Wateree were first met by the Spaniards under Juan de Pardo 
in 1567, and were described by La Vandera two years later under the 
name of Guatari. The name is derived from the Catawba word watérdn, 
“to float in the water” (Gatschet). From the Spanish account they 
were then living at a considerable distance from the coast and near the 
Cherokee frontier. They are described as being 15 or 16 leagues south- 
east from ‘Otari-yatiqui,” a misconception of an Indian term for an 
interpreter of the Otari, Atali, or Mountain Cherokee. They were ruled 
by two female chiefs, who held dignified court with a retinue of young 
men and women as attendants (French, 2). 


Ste aa THE CONGAREE AND WATEREE. 81° 


More than a century later (in 1670) Lederer found them apparently 
on the extreme upper Yadkin, far northwest of their later location, 
with the Shoccoree and Eno on their northeast and the Sara on their 
west. It is probable that in this position they were not far from where 
they had been found by Pardo in 1567. There is reason to believe that 
the name Wateree was formerly applied to Pedee and Yadkin rivers 
“instead of the stream now known by that name (Gregg, 8). Pardo 
describes the Wateree as differing from other Indians in being 
slaves, rather than subjects, to their chiefs, which agrees with 
what Lawson says of the Santee. While Lederer was stopping with 
the Wateree their chief sent out three warriors with orders to kill 
some young women of a hostile tribe in order that their spirits might 
serve his son, who was dying, in the other world. In accordance with 
their instructions they soon returned with the scalps and the skin from 
the faces of three young women. These trophies they presented to the 
chief who, it is related, received them with grateful acknowledgment 
(Lederer, 12). 

In the first half of the eighteenth century the Wateree lived on 
Wateree river in South Carolina, with the Congaree below them and 
the Catawba and Waxhaw above. Ona map of 1715 their village is 
marked on the western bank of the river, perhaps about the present 
Wateree creek in Fairfield county. Moll’s map of 1730 places their 
village on the northern or eastern bank of the river, and Mills states 
definitely that it was on Pinetree creek below Camden (Mills, 5). It 
seems to have been here that Lawson found them in 1701. He calls 
them in one place “ Wateree Chickanee” Indians, the latter part of the 
compound perhaps designating a particular band of the tribe. He 
describes them as tall and well built, friendly, but great pilferers and 
very lazy, even for Indians. At that time they had but few guns or 
other articles obtained from the whites. Their houses were as poor as 
their industry. They were a much larger tribe than the Congaree, 
and spoke a different language (Lawson, 17). The Yamasi war in 
1715 probably broke their power, and in 1743 they were consolidated 
with the Catawba, though still constituting a large village and retain- 
ing their distinct dialect (Adair, 9). 


OTHER SOUTH CAROLINA TRIBES. 


Synonymy. 


Cherokee.—(Synonyms not given. ) 
Shawano.—(Synonyms not given.) 
Uchi.—(Synonyms not given. ) 


Saluda.—(Synonyms not given; the form occurs on Moll’s map of Carolina, 1720.) 
BULL, V=22——6 


82 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. rans 


Nachee.—Adair, History of American Indians, 1775, p. 225. 

Natchee.—South Carolina Gazette of 1734 in Rivers, Hist. South Carolina, 1856, p. 38. 
Notches.—Glen (1751) in Gregg, History of the Old Cheraws, 1867, p. 14. 
Notchees.—Document of 1744 in ibid., p. 10. 


Ashley River Indians.—(Same?). 

Etewaus.—Albany Conference (1751) in New York Col. Does., vol. vi, p. 721. 
Etiwans.—Rivers, History of South Carolina, 1856, p. 37. 

Eutaw.—Present geographic form. 

Tlwans.—Rivers, Early History of South Carolina, 1874, p. 94 (nisprint). 
Itiawans.—Rivers, History of South Carolina, 1856, p. 37. 


Hostaqua.—Laudonnitre (about 1564) in French, Hist. Coll. Louisiana, 1869, vol. 
vi, p. 288. 

Hostaque.—Ibid., p. 266. 

Houstaqua.—thbid., p. 244. 

Oustack.—Lederer, Discoveries, 1672, p. 17. 

Westos.—Gallatin in Trans. and Colls. Am. Antiquarian Soc., 1836, vol. ii, p. 83. 

Westoes.—Archdale (1707) in Ramsay, Hist. South Carolina, 1809, vol. i, p. 34, note. 


Stonoes.—Ibid., p. 83. 


Adusta.—De Bry, Brevis Narratio, 1591, vol. ii, map. 

Audusta.—Laudonnitre (1587) in Hakluyt, Voyages, 1600, vol. iii, p. 379. 
Eddisto.—Map of the Province of South Carolina, 1760. 

Edisto.—Bowen, Map of the British American plantations, 1760. 

Edistow.—Harris, Voyages and Travels, 1705, vol. i, map. 

Orista.—F ontanedo (1559) in Ternaux-Compans, Voyages, 1841, vol. xx, p. 10. 
Cristanum.—Brigstock in French, Hist. Coll. Louisiana, 1875, vol. ii, p. 186, note. . 


Casor.—Document of 1675 in Mills, History of South Carolina, 1826, app., p. 1. 
Cogao.—La Vandera (1579) in French, Hist. Coll. Louisiana, 1875, vol. ii, p. 290. 
Coosah.—Adair, History of American Indians, 1775, p. 225. 

Coosaw.—Mills, Statistics of South Carelina, 1826, map. 

Cosah.—Ibid., p. 107. 

Cozao.—La Vandera (1569) in French, Hist. Coll. Louisiana, 1875, vol. ii, p. 290. 
Kissah.—Mills, op. cit., p. 107. 

Kusco.—Moll, Map of Carolina, 1720 (misprint). 

Kussoe.—Document of 1671 in Rivers, History of South Carolina, 1856, p. 372. 


Chicora.—Fontanedo (1559) in Ternaux-Compans, Voyages, 1841, vol. xx, p. 16 (same?). 
Corsaboys.—Document of 1719 in Rivers, History of South Carolina, 1874, p. 93. 
Cusabees.—Rivers, History of South Carolina, 1856, p. 38. 

Cusoboe.—Mills, Statistics of South Carolina, 1826, p. 107. 

Cussobos.—Simms, History of South Carolina, 1860, p. 56. 


Santee and Congaree rivers probably formed the approximate south. 
ern limit of the Siouan tribes of the east. There is no reason for assign- 
ing to this stock any tribes farther southward along the Atlantic coast. 
As the history of all these Indians is closely interwoven, however, a 
few notes on the remaining tribes of South Carolina between Santee 
and Savannah rivers may properly be introduced. 

Cherokee.—The Cherokee tribe, of Lroquoian stock, oceupied the ter- 
ritory of what are now the seven upper counties along the Savannah, 
extending down to the mouth of Broad river. Being a well-known 


SIQUAN MISCELLANEOUS SOUTH CAROLINA TRIBES. 83 


MOONEY 


tribe, with an extensive territory embracing large portions of several 
present states, nothing more need be said of these Indians here. 

Shawano.—Below the Cherokee territory on the Savannah there was 
an important band of the Shawano, locally known as Savannah Indians, 
of Algonquian stock, having their principal village nearly opposite 
Augusta. The river takes its name from the tribe. They moved 
northward into Pennsylvania about the year 1700. 

Uchi.—Lower down on both sides of the Savannah were located 
the Uchi tribe, which constituted a distinct linguistic stock (Uchean). 
The remnant of the tribe are now incorporated with the Creek. They 
were probably identical with the ‘‘Cofitachiqui” of De Soto’s chroni- 
clers, a tribe whose village is supposed by the best authorities to have 
been located at the site of Silver Bluff, on the Savannah, in Barnwell 
county, South Carolina, about 25 miles by water below Augusta. 

Saluda.—The territory of the Saluda Indians is marked on Jefferys’ 
map of 1761, south of Saluda river, about the present Columbia, with 
a Statement that they had removed to Conestoga in Pennsylvania. 
There seems to be no other original reference to this tribe. They may 
have been identical with the Assiwikale, who removed from South Caro- 
lina about 1700, and in 1731 were living with the Shawano partly on 
the Susquehanna and partly on the Alleghany. 

Notchee.—The tribe called ‘‘ Natchee,” ‘‘ Notchees,” etc., in early 
documents, do not seem to have been native to South Carolina, but 
were probably identical with the Natchez of Mississippi. Although 
at first thought it might appear improbable that a tribe originally liv- 
ing on the Mississippi could afterward have been domiciled near the 
Savannah, it is no more impossible than that a Savannah tribe could 
have removed to the Susquehanna or to the Ohio, as was the case with 
the Shawano, or that a tribe on the Yadkin could have emigrated to 
Canada, as was the case with the Tutelo. 

The Natchez, who lived originally on the eastern bank of the Mis- 
sissippi, about the site of the present city of Natchez, became involved 
in a war with the French in 1729 which resulted in their complete 
destruction as a tribe in the following year. The remnant, disorgan- 
ized, but still considerable in numbers, fled in different directions. A 
few crossed the Mississippi and were lost in the swamps of Louisiana; 
many took refuge with the Chickasaw, who thus drew down on them- 
selves the anger of the French. <A large body fled to the Creek tribe, 
among whom they have ever since retained a distinct existence, after- 
ward removing with that tribe to Indian Territory. In 1799 their village 
on Coosa river in Alabama contained several hundred souls. Others, 
again, joined the Cherokee, and according to personal information of 
the author they had a distinct village and language on Valley river in 
western North Carolina about ninety years ago. As the Creek and Cher- 
okee both bordered on Carolina, while the Chickasaw were in alliance 
with that government as against the French, it is easy to see how 


84 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


people of a dismembered tribe scattered among these others could have | 
found their way into that province. A body of the Chickasaw them- 
selves at one time removed from the Mississippi and settled on the 
Savannah in South Carolina, in the neighborhood of the present 
Augusta; and according to Adair the South Carolina traders them- 
selves instigated the rising of the Natchez, their message being con- 
veyed to that tribe through the medium of the Chickasaw (Adair, 10). 
It was but natural, therefore, that the defeated and extirpated Natchez 
should turn to Carolina for support and shelter. 

While all the other tribes of South Carolina hitherto noted or men- 
tioned hereafter appear early in the history of that colony, the first 
notice of the Notchee did not appear until 1734, four or five years after 
the first Natchez war. In that year, it is related,a delegation of 26 
“Natchee” Indians applied to the government of South Carolina for per- 
mission to settle their tribe on the Savannah (Rivers, anon., 1). By this 
time the old Natchez were probably already scattered among the Chick- 
asaw and Creek and the Cherokee, those with the last-named tribe being 
settled in western North Carolina. Permission was evidently given, 
forin 1744 the *‘ Notchees” are mentioned, in connection with the Pedee, 
as having killed some Catawba in a drunken quarrel, as a result 
of which the Notchee and Pedee had fled down to the white settle- 
ments to escape the vengeance of the Catawba, and the colonial gov- 
ernment was compelled to interfere (Gregg, 9). In the preceding year 
the ‘“ Nachee” are mentioned as one of the tribes incorporated with the 
Catawba, but retaining their distinct dialect (Adair, 11). It is prob- 
able that the result of this quarrel was to separate the Notchee per- 
manently from the Catawba and cause them to make their residence 
thereafter lower down among the settlements, in the neighborhood of 
the Pedee, as in 1751 the “ Notchees,” Pedee, and several others are 
named as tribes living in South Carolina among the settlements, and 
in whose behalf the colonial government effected a peace with the Iro- 
quois (N. Y.,22). A few years later they seem to have moved up again 
and joined the Cherokee, for in 1755 they are twice mentioned as 
having been concerned with that tribe in killing some Pedee and Wac- 
camaw among the white settlements (Gregg, 10). This appears to be 
the last reference to them in the South Carolina records. 

Htiwaw.—The tribe known as Etiwaw or Eutaw lived about Ash- 
ley and Cooper rivers, in what is now Berkeley county, extending east- 
ward about to the site of the present Monks Corner, where their hunting 
grounds bordered the Sewee country. The Santee and Congaree 
were above them (Rivers, anon., 2). Their memory is preserved in the 
name of Kutaw Springs or Eutawville. The tribal name is derived 
from the Catawba word itawa, “pine tree” (Gatschet). They were one 
of the small coast tribes collectively known as Cusabo, and were 
probably identical with the tribe sometimes mentioned as ‘Ashley 
River Indians.” They were never prominent, and from their prox- 


OUR MISCELLANEOUS SOUTH CAROLINA TRIBES. 85 


MOONEY 


imity to the settlements soon dwindled into insignificance. In Janu- 
ary, 1715, just before the Yamasi war, they had a single village with a 
population of 240 souls (Rivers, 3). They were probably much reduced 
by that war, and uothing more is heard of them until 1751, when they 
are mentioned as one of the small tribes for whom the South Carolina 
government made peace with the Iroquois (N. Y., 23). 

Westo and Stono.—Lederer and other early observers refer to two 
tribes living between Ashley and Edisto rivers, known as the Westo 
and Stono, the latter probably occupying the coast along Stono river 
and inlet. From the nature of the references it is probable that both 
tribes extended some distance into the interior. They seem generally 
to have acted together, and were steadily hostile to the early South 
Carolina settlers. They were among the tribes collectively known as 
Cusabo. The Westo seem to be identical with the Hostaqua men- 
tioned by Laudonniére about 1564, and with the Oustack of Lederer, 
described by him as being brave fighters, at war in 1670 with the 
Ushery (Catawba), who were separated from them by what he calls 
a lake, probably an overflow of the Santee (Lederer, 13). 

The Westo and Stono made war on the settlements about Charles- 
ton in 166971, and again in 1674, when a force of volunteers had to 
be raised against them (Gatschet, Legend, 2). In 1680 they became 
involved in a war with the Savannah (Shawano), by whom they were 
totally defeated and driven out of the country (Gallatin, 1). What 
became of them is unknown, but they may have gone southward into 
the Spanish territory of Florida, as did the Yamasi thirty-five years 
later. 

Edisto.—A. tribe appears to have occupied the country along the 
lower part of Edisto river, and their name is preserved in that of the 
river; but as the coast region was occupied in later times by small 
bands having local rather than tribal names it is impossible to locate 
them definitely. Their country is called the province of Orista by the 
early Spanish writers, and Audusta by Laudonniére. Edisto is the later 
English form. The Huguenots of Ribault’s colony received a friendly 
welcome from them in 1562, and the Spaniards for some time had a mis- 
sion among them. They are mentioned in connection with the Stono, 
Westo, and Savannah as still living in the same region when the 
English settlements were established in South Carolina in 1670. They 
disappear from history soon after, and may have been driven out of 
the country together with the Westo and Stono in the war waged 
against the last-named tribes by the Savannah in 1680, 

Coosa.—Another tribe lived about the mouth of the Edisto or Com- 
bahee whose name, Cusso or Coosaw, is preserved in Coosaw and Coo- 
sawhatchee, streams entering the sea on either side of Saint Helena 
island. According to Rivers they lived northeast of Combahee river, 
which separated them from the Combahee tribe (Rivers, anon., 3). 
They appear to be identical with the Couexi of the Huguenot colonists 


86 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. pte = 


in 1562 and with the Cocgao of La Vandera’s Spanish narrative of 1569. 
They are noted as hostile to the English in 1671 (Rivers, anon., 4). In 
1675 thechiefs of “‘ great and lesser Casor ” sold a tract lying on Kiawah, 
Stono, and Edisto rivers, and in 1684 there is a record of another sale 
of land by the chief of ‘“ Kissah” (Mills, 6). They are mentioned as 
‘¢ Kussoes ” in the South Carolina trade regulations in 1707, and appear 
last under the name of ‘‘ Coosah” as one of the tribes incorporated - 
with the Catawba, but still preserving a distinct dialect in 1743 (Adair, 
12). The name is identical with that of a leading division of the Creek, 
but this fact, or that of their final union with the Catawba, proves 
nothing as to their linguistic affinities. It is probable, however, that, 
like their neighbors, the Yamasi, they were of Muskhogean stock. 
If not, they may have been Uchean rather than cognate with the 
Catawba. 

Cusabo.—The coast tribes between Ashley river and the Savannah 
were known collectively as Cusabo. The name was elastic in its 
application, and included the Etiwaw, Westo, Stono, Edisto, and 
Cusso, as well as smaller local bands immediately along the coast, 
among which were the Kiawaw, on Kiawah island; Combahee, on 
Combahee river; Wapoo, on Wapoo river; Wimbee (location not def- 
initely ascertained), and Saint Helena Indians or Santa Elena of the old 
Spanish writers, on the island of that name. In its restricted sense 
the term was applied to these smaller bands which had less compact 
organization than those first named. Their territory is the Chicora of * 
D’Ayllon and other early Spanish adventurers. This term Gatschet 
is disposed to derive from the Catawba Yuchi-kéré, ‘‘ Yuchi are there,” 
or ‘ Yuchi over there,” which interpretation, if correct, would indicate 
that they were of Uchean stock. There is reason to believe that these 
early people of Chicora were practically exterminated by the raids of 
Spanish slavers or by later Muskhogean invaders, and that the coast 
tribes found in this region in, the eighteenth century were of Musk- 
hogean origin, allied to the Yamasi and Creek. 

In January, 1715, the “‘ Corsaboys,” by which. we are to understand 
the smaller local coast bands, were reported to have five villages with 
295 souls. A few months later came the Yamasi war, the most terri- 
ble in the history of colonial South Carolina, resulting before the end 
of the year in the expulsion and “utter extirpation” of the Yamasi 
and several other tribes, including the Cusabo (Rivers, 4). 


LOCAL NAMES FROM SIOUAN TRIBAL NAMES IN VIR- 
GINIA AND CAROLINA. 


CATAWBA. A river of North Carolina and South Carolina, known as the Wateree in 
its lower course, joining with the Congaree to form the Santee. 

— A creek in Botetourt county, Virginia. 

— Acounty of North Carolina. 

— A town of Catawba county, North Carolina 

— A town of Roanoke county, Virginia. 

— A town of Marion county, West Virginia. 

— Catawba Junction; a town in York county, South Carolina. 

— Catawba Springs; a town in Lincoln county, North Carolina. 

— Little Catawba or South Catawba; a tributary of the Catawba from the west, in 
North Carolina. 

CONGAREE. A river in South Carolina, joining with the Wateree to form the Santee. 

-— A town in Orangeburg county, South Carolina; also a town in Richland county, 
South Carolina. 

Eno. A river joining the Neuse in Durham county, North Carolina. 

— Enoree; a river joining the Congaree from the west in South Carolina. 

— Enno; atownin Wake county, North Carolina. 

Monacan. Manakin; a town in Goochland county, Virginia, 17 miles west of Rich- 
mond, and about the site of the ancient Monacan village. 

OCCANEECHI. Occaneeche hills; south of Hillsboro and on opposite side of Eno 
river, in Orange county, North Carolina. 

— Occoneechee; a township in Northampton county, North Carolina. 

— Occanuchee; a neck or bend in Roanoke river, Northampton county, North Caro- 
lina. 

PEDEE. A township in Montgomery county, North Carolina. 

— A township in Georgetown county, South Carolina. 

— A township in Marion county, South Carolina. 

— Great Pedee; a river in South Carolina, known as the Yadkin in its upper course. 

— Little Pedee; an eastern tiibutary of the Great Pedee in South Carolina. 

SANTEE. A river in South Carolina, formed by the union of the Wateree and Con- 
garee. 

— A township in Clarendon county, South Carolina. 

— A township in Georgetown county, South Carolina. 

— Santee Hills; northeast of the confluence of the Wateree and Congaree, in Sum- 
ter county, South Carolina. 

SAPONI. Sapona town; a district northeast of Roanoke river in Bertie county, North 
Carolina, on the site of a former Saponi village. 

— Saponi; a creek flowing into Tar river, in Nash county, North Carolina. 

— Sappony; a creek flowing into Nottoway river, in Dinwiddie and Sussex counties, 
Virginia, 

Sara. Cheraw; a town in Chesterfield county, South Carolina. 

—Cheraws; a former precinct of Sonth Carolina, chiefly between Pedee and 
Wateree rivers, and including most of the present counties of Marlboro, 
Chesterfield, Lancaster, Kershaw, Darlington, and Sumter. 

— Sauratown; a town on Dan river in Stokes county, North Carolina. 


87 


88. SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. placard 


SHOCCOREE. Shocco; a township in Warren county, North Carolina. 

— Shocco; a creek tributary to Fishing creek between Warren and Franklin counties, 
North Carolina. 

— Shocco; a creek flowing into the James from the south at Richmond, in Chester- 
field county, Virginia (the name in this case is probably of Algonquian origin), 

— Shockoe Church; a village in Pittsylvania county, Virginia. 

SissipAHaw. Haw; a river forming the upper part of Cape Fear river in North 
Carolina. 

— Haw River; a town in Alamance county, North Carolina. 

— Saxapahaw; a town in Alamance county, North Carolina. 

SUGEREE. Sugar; a creek, tributary to Catawba river in Mecklenburg county, North 
Carolina, and York county, South Carolina. 

TUTELO. Totaro; a district south of Meherrin river in Brunswick county, Virginia. 

— Tutelo Heights; asuburb of Brantford, on Grand river, Ontario (Canada), on the 
site of the former Tutelo village. 

Waccamaw. A river in North Carolina and South Carolina joining the Pedee near 
its mouth. 

— A lake at the head of the river of the same name, in Columbus county, North 
Carolina. 

— A town in Georgetown county, South Carolina. 

— A township in Brunswick county, North Corolina. 

— A township in Georgetown county, South Carolina. * : 

WaATEREE, A river in South Carolina uniting with the Congaree to form the Santee. 

— A creek flowing into Wateree river from the west in Fairfield county, South 
Carolina. 

— A town on the west bank of Wateree river in Richland county, South Carolina. 

— A township in Kershaw county, South Carolina. 

WaxuHaw. A creek flowing into Catawba river in Lancaster county, South Carolina. 

— A town in Union county, North Carolina. 

— A town in Lancaster county, South Carolina. 

— Wisacky; a town in Sumter county, South Carolina. 

Winyaw. Winyah; a bay at the mouth of Pedee river in Georgetown county, South 
Carolina, 


AUTHORITIES. 


Apatr, JAMES. The history of the American Indians, particularly those nations 
adjoining to the Mississippi, east and west Florida, Georgia, South and North 
Carolina, and Virginia, etc. 4°. London, 1775. 

1, p. 352; 2, p. 224; 3, p. 224; 4, p. 225; 5, p. 224; 6, pp. 224-5; 7, p. 224; 
8, p. 225; 9, p. 224; 10, pp. 224, 3538; 11, p. 225; 12, 

AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST. See Mooney. 

AMERICAN ANTIQUARIAN SOCIETY. See Gallatin. 

AMERICAN JOURNAL OF GEOLOGY. See Croghan. 

AMERICAN NATURALIST. See Dorsey. 

AMERICAN PHILOSOPHICAL SOCIETY. See Hale. 

AMERICAN STATE PAPERS. Documents, legislative and executive, of the Congress 
of the United States, etc. (1789 to 1815). Indian affairs, vol. i, Washington, 
1832. Folio. (This volume is sometimes marked on title-page, volume iv; 
Abbreviated Am. §. P.) 

1, Sibley, 1805, p. 724; 2, p. 724. 

ARCHZOLOGIA AMERICANA. See Gallatin. 

BERQUIN-DUVALLON, Travels in Louisiana and the Floridas, 1802, from the French, 
with notes [by J. Davis]. New York, 1806. 12°. 

1, p- 41. 

[BEVERLEY, ROBERT]. History of Virginia, in four parts, etc. By a native and 
inhabitant of the place. Second edition, revised and enlarged by the author. 
London, 1722. 8°. (Copy in Library of Congress. ) 

1, p. 245; 2,ibid.; 3, p. 160; 4, pp. 157, 181-2; 5, pp. 161 and 171. 

Burk, JOHN D. The history of Virginia from its first settlement to the present 

day. Petersburg, Va., 1804-1816. 4 volumes. 12°. 
1, Spotswood, 1711, vol. iii, opposite page 89. 

Byrp, WILLIAM. History of the dividing line between Virginia and North Caro- 
lina, as run in 1728~29. Richmond, 1866. 2 volumes. 8°. (Volume ii is 
taken up with miscellaneous papers, the most important being ‘‘A journey to 
the land of Eden.’’) 

1, general; 2, vol. i, pp. 120, 188, and vol. ii, p. 220; 3, vol. i, p. 188; 4, ibid.; 
5, vol. ii, p. 257; 6, vol.i, p.120; 7, vol.ii, pp.5-8; 8, vol. i,p.188; 9, vol. i, 
pp. 75,188; 10, vol. i, pp. 86, 90, 91, 92, 94, 112, 135, 173, 175, 184; 11, vol. i 
pp. 97, 103, 145, 163, 171, 172, and vol. ii, pp. 20, 27; 12, vol. i, pp. 106-8; 13, 
VOl.ispp-isi—o- 14. vol. it, p.5; 15, vol. 1, p. 190; 16, eu ils op 23; iT 
vol. ii, pp. 20-21; 18, vol. ii, p. 20; 19, ibid.; 20, vol: ii, p. 2; 21, vol. i, p. 
181; 22, vol. i, p. 181. 

CATLIN, GEORGE. Letters and notes on the manners, customs, and condition of the 
North American Indians, written during eight years’ travel amongst the wild- 
est tribes of Indians in North America. Twovols.in one. Philadelphia, 1860. 

1, pp. 136-7; 2, pp. 171-2. 

CROGHAN, GEORGE. Quoted in Monthly American Journal of Geology, 1831. 

1p. 2 > ; 

DorsEy, J. OWEN. The Biloxi Indians of Louisiana. Proceedings of the Ameri- 
can Association for the Advancement of Science, vol. xlii. Salem, 1893. 8°. 
Pages 2-23. (Abbreviated ‘ Biloxi.”) 

—Migrations of Siouan tribes. American Naturalist, vol. xx, No. 3, March, 1886, © 


pages 211-222. (Abbreviated ‘‘ Migrations.’’) 4 
9 


90 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. ee 


Dorsty J. OWEN. Mourning and War Customs of the Kansas. In American 
Naturalist, vol. xx, No.7, July, 1885, pages 670-680. (Abbreviated ‘ Kansas.’’) 

FEATHERSTONHAUGH, G. W. Excursion through the slave states, from Washington 
on the Potomac to the frontier of Mexico: with the sketches of popular man- 
ners and geological notices. New York, 1844. 8°. 1, p. 71. 

FRENCH, 6. F. Historical collections of Louisiana, vol. ii. New York, 1875. 8°. 
(Contains narration of Juan de la Vandera, 1569.) 

1ps Zoli a oO: 

GALLATIN, ALBERT, A synopsis of the Indian tribes within the United States east 
of the Rocky mountains, and in the British and Russian possessions in North 
America. Jn Transactions and Collections of the American Antiquarian 
Society, volume ii (Archieologia Americana). Cambridge, 1836. 8°. (Galla- 
tin’s Synopsis occupies pages 1-422.) 

1, p. 84. wens 

GarRcILAsoO. La Florida del Inca, Historia del adelantado Hernando de Soto, ete. 
Eserita por el Inca Garcilaso de la Vega, etc. Madrid, 1723. Large 8°. (The 
same volume contains Barcia’s Ensayo Cronologico. 1, pp. 136-8. - 

GATSCHET, A. S. A Migration Legend of the Creek Indians, with a linguistic, his- 
toric and ethnographic introduction. 8°. Volume i (published as no. 4 of 
Brinton’s Library of Aboriginal American Literature), Philadelphia, 1884; 
vol. ii (in Transactions of Saint Louis Academy of Science), Saint Lonis, 1888. 
(Abbreviated ‘‘ Legend.”) 

1, vol. i, p. 222 passim, vol. ii, p. 9 passim; 2, vol. i, p. 48. 

—Catawba Manuscript, 1881. In the Library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 

—Biloxi Manuscript, 1886. In the Library of the Bureau of Ethnology. 

GREGG, ALEXANDER. History of the old Cheraws, containing an account of the 
aborigines of the Pedee, the first white settlements, etc., extending from about 
A.D. 1730 to 1810, with notices of families and sketches of individuals. New 
York, 1867. 12°. 

1, South Carolina Gazette (1739) quoted p. 9; 2, ibid. (1759), and p. 16; 3, ibid. 
(1759), pp. 15-17; 4, Gregg, p. 17; 5,p. 15; 6, documents quoted, pp. 8-13; 
7, documents of 1722 and 1756, pp. 18-15; 8, p.7; 9, document of 1744, p. 10; 
10, Evans (1755), p. 15. 

Hatz, Horatio. The Tutelo tribe and language: Proceedings of the American 
Philosophical Society, vol xxi, No. 114. Philadelphia, 1883. 8°, pages 1-45. 

1,p.4; 2,p.11; 3, p. 2, footnote reference to N. Y. Hist. Coll., vol. iii, p. 484; 
4, p. 6, quotation from Brainerd’s diary of 1745; 5, p. 6 and note; 6, p. 8; 
7, pp. 8-13; 8, p. 10. 

HAL, JAMES (?) Early history of the northwestern states. Buffalo and Auburn, 
1849. 

iS as 7) 

Hawks, F. L. History of North Carolina: with maps and illustrations, etc. Third 
edition. Two volumes. Fayetteville, N.C., vol.i, 1859, vol.ii, 1858. 8°. 

1, Yardley, 1654, vol. ii, p. 19. 

[HEWATT, ALEXANDER.] Historical Account of the Rise and Progress of the Colonies 
of South Carolina and Georgia. 2 Volumes. London, 1779. 8°. 2 volumes in 
one. New York, 1836. 8°. (Alsoforms volume i of Carroll, Hist. Colls. of 8. C.) 

IMLAY, GILBERT. A topographical description of the western territory of North 
America, ete. London, 1797. 8°. 

1, Hutchins, 1784, p. 420; 2, ibid. 

JEFFERSON, THOMAS. Notes on the state of Virginia, written by Thomas Jefferson. 
Hlustrated with a map, including the states of Virginia, Maryland, Delaware, 
and Pennsylvania. London, 1787. 12°. 

‘JEFFERYS, THomMaAs. Natural and civil history of the French dominions in North 
and South America. Two parts in one volume. London, 1761. 4°. 

1, part i, p. 153. 


Selah AUTHORITIES. 91 

Lawson, JOHN. The history of Carolina, containing the exact description and 
natural history of that country, etc. (Reprint from the London edition of 
1714.) Raleigh, 1860. 16°. 

1, p. 82; 2, p.279; 3, pp. 65, 80, 86, 334; 4, pp. 95, 96, 101, 384; 5, pp. 83, 87-92, 
384; 6, pp. 95-101, 383-4; 7, pp. 367, 378, 383; 8, pp. 94,101; 9, Long (1663) 
quoted, pp. 113-126; 10, pp.71, 75-77; 11,p.71; 12, pp. 60-72, 76; 13, p. 45; 

14, pp. 24-31; 15, pp. 34-45; 16, pp. 56-59; 17, pp. 56-59. 

LEDERER, JOHN. The discoveries of John Lederer, in three several marches from 
Virginia to the west of Carolina, and other parts of the continent. Begun 
in March, 1669, and ended in September, 1670. Together with a general map 
of the whole territory which he traversed. Collected and translated out of 
Latin from his discourse and writings, by Sir William Talbot, baronet, ete. 
London, etc., 1672. 12°. Map and 33 pages. (Copy in Library of Congress.) 

1, p.9; 2, pp. 2,3; 3, pp. 11,12; 4, pp.4,13; 5, pp. 3-5, 17, 25-27; 6, pp. 4, 13-14; 
pos) Oo; pp. LO-L7s 9) palo LO ippeli-1es tip. 27s) 12) pp. 165 13) p. 17. 

LoGan, J. H. A History of the upper country of South Carolina from the earliest 
periods to the close of the war of independence. Volume i. Charleston and 
Columbia, 1859. 12°. (Only one volume published. ) 

Maps. Bowen; Map of the British American plantations, 1760. 

— Moll; Map of Carolina, 1720. 

— Vaugondy; Partie de lAmérique Septentrionale, 1755. 

— Map of North America, etc., and the West Indies, 1720. 

— Map of the province of South Carolina, 1760. 

— War map of 1715 on p. 546, vol. v, of Winsor, Narrative and Critical History of 
America. Boston and New York, 1887. 8°. 

MarGry, PIERRE. Découvertes et établissements des Francais dans l’ouest et dans 
Je sud de lVAmérique septentrionale (1614-1754). Mémoires et documeuts 
originaux. Recueillis et publiés par Pierre Margry. 6 vols. Paris, 1875-86. 8°. 

1, D’Iberville (1699), vol. iv, 1880, p. 195; 2, vol. iv, p. 195; 3, vol. iv, p. 154. 

MarTIN, FRANCOIS XAviER. History of North Carolina from its earliest period. 
2 volumes. New Orleans. 1829. 8°. 

1, vol. i, pp. 143, 153. 

MASSACHUSETTS. Collections of the Massachusetts Historical Society. 1st series, 
vol. x, Boston, 1809; 4th series, vol. ix, Boston, 1871. 8°: 

1, Anonymous writer of 1676, pp. 167-8; 2, ibid.; 3, Potter (1768), Ist series, 
vol. x, p. 120; 4, Ramsey (1795), 1st series, vol. iv, p. 100. 

MILLs, RoBERT. Statistics of South Carolina. Charleston, 1826. 8°. 

1, p. 595; 2,p.106; 3,p.114; 4, p.773; 5,p.108; 6. Documents of 1675 and 
1684, p. 107 and app. p. 1. 

Mooney, JAMES. Indian tribes of Virginia, 1884. Manuscript in the Bureau of 
Ethnology. 

— Indian tribes of the District of Columbia: American Anthropologist, vol. ii, 
Washington, 1889, pp. 259-266. 

1, Am. Anth., p. 261. 

MORSE, JEDIDIAH. A report to the Secretary of War of the United States on Indian 
affairs, etc. New Haven, 1822. 8°. 

app SBS 

NEILL, E. D. Virginia Carolorum: the colony under the rule of Charles the first and 
second, 1625-1685, based upon manuscripts and documents of the period. 
Albany, 1886. 8°. 1, p. 325. 

New York. Documents relative to the colonial history of the state of New York. 
Procured in Holland, England, and France, by John Romeyn Brodhead, ete. 
Edited by E. B. O’Callaghan. Albany, 1856-77. 12 vols. 4°. 

1, Albany conference of 1717, vol. v, p. 491; 2, Albany conference of 1722, vol. 
v, p. 671; 3, document of 1764, vol. vii, p. 641; 4, Albany conference of 1722, 
vol. v, p. 673; 5, Batts (1671) vol. iii, pp. 194-7; 6, vol. iii, pp. 196-7; 


92 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. Reese 


New York—Continued. : 

7, Albany conference of 1722, vol. v, p. 673; 8, Earl of Bellomont (1699), vol. iv, 
p. 488; 9, Albany conference of 1717, vol. v, pp. 490-2; 10, Albany conference 
of 1722, vol. v, pp. 669-677; 11, Chauvignerie (?), 1736, vol. ix, p. 1057; 12, 
Mount Johnson conference, 1753, vol. vi, p. 811; 18, Johnson (1763) vol. vii, 
p. 582; 14, vol. vii, 55, note; 15, Albany conference of 1722, vol. v, p. 673; 
16, Albany conference of 1726, vol. v, p. 793; 17, Governor Glen (1751) vol. vi, 
pp. 709, 721; 18, Albany conference of 1751, vol. vi, p. 721; 19, Glen letter 
(1750) vol. vi, p. 588; Clinton letter (1751) vol. vi, p. 714; Albany confer- 
ence of 1751, vol. vi, pp. 717-726; 20, Augusta congress, 1763, vol. viii, p. 33; 
21, Glen (1751) and Albany conference of 1751, vol. vi, p. 721; 22, Albany con- 
ference of 1751, vol. vi, pp. 708-726; 23, vol. vi, p. 721. 

NORTH CAROLINA. The Colonial Records of North Carolina, published under the 
supervision of the trustees of the public libraries, by order of the general 
assembly. Collected and edited by William L. Saunders, secretary of state. 
10 vols. Raleigh, 1886-1890. Large 8°. 

1, journal of Virginia council (1711) vol. i, p. 808; 2, journal of N. C. council 
(1712) vol. i, p. 866; 3, Pollock letter (1712) vol.i, p. 884; 4, council journal 
(1727) vol. ii, p. 674; 5, journal of the boundary commissioners (1728) vol. ii, 
pp. 776-815; 6, North Carolina council (1716) vol. ii, pp. 242-3; 7, N. C. and 


Va. councils (1716) vol. i1, pp. 246-7; 8, letters of 1715, vol. ii, pp. 251-35- 


9, document of 1717, vol. 11, pp. 288-9; 10, North Carolina council (1716) vol. ii, 
pp. 242-3; 11, documents of 1715, vol. ii, pp. 251-2. 

Puen, Dr. E. W. (of Windsor, N.C.) Personal letters in response to inquiries con- 
cerning Sapona Town on the former Tuscarora reservation in Bertie county, 
North Carolina. Letters dated June 15 and June 19, 1889. 

[Rivers, W. J.] A sketch of the history of South Carolina to the revolution of 
1719, with an appendix. Charleston, 1856. 8°. (Abbreviated Rivers, anon. ) 

1, p. 38; 2, p.37; 3, p.37; 4, document of 1671, pp. 372-3. 

— A chapter in the early history of South Carolina. Charleston, 1874. 8°. 

1, p.94; 2, statutes at large, 1691 and 1695, p. 37; 3, p. 94; 4, document of 
1719, pp. 93-4. 

SAUNDERS. See North Carolina. 

ScnooLtcrart, H. R. Historical and statistical information respecting the his- 
tory, condition, and prospects of the Indian tribes of the United States, etc., 
Philadelphia, 1851-7. 6 volumes, 4°. 

1 Porter (1829) vol. iii, p. bJ6; 2, ibid. 

SmirH, Joun. The true travels, adventures and observations of Captaine John 
Smith, etc. From the London edition of 1629. 2 volumes. Richmond, 1819. 
12°. 

I voli, pp. 120, 184:. 2, vol. i, p. 135; 3; vol. a, p. 134: 4) evoliepeesus 
5, vol. i, p. 188; 6, vol. i, pp. 120, 134; 7, vol. i, p. 134; 8, vol. 1, p. 120; 
9, vol. i, p. 134 and map; 10, vol. i, pp. 195-7; 11, vol. i, pp. 208, 237. 
- SmytTuH, J. F. D. A tour in the United States, 1784. 2 volumes, 8°. 
1, vol. i, pp. 185-6. 

TALBOT, WILLIAM. See Lederer. 

VirGINIA. Colonial Virginia state papers and other manuscripts, preserved in the 
capitol at Richmond. Arranged and edited by William Plummer, M. D., 
under authority of the legislature of Virginia. Vol. i, Richmond, 1875, 12°. 
(Abbreviated V.S. P.) 

1, Document of 1709, vol. i, pp. 181-2; 2, Document of 1828, vol. i, p. 215. 

VirGINIA HistoricaL Society. Collections of the Virginia Historical Society, 
Newseries. (Abbreviated V.H.S.) Volumes iii-x, Richmond, 1883-1891. 8°. 

1, pp. 42-3, 51. 
WINSOR, JUSTIN. See Maps. 


INDEX 


ABNAKI, Relation of, to other tribes -..-. 
ADAIR, JAMES, on Catawba fields ...--..- 
=— Catawba population: --...---..----1 
— —. Sara and Catawba dialects 
—— incorporation of Catawba and Eno- 
=the Congaree in 1743... -..-..---- = 
— — Muskhogean migration ......--.---- 
— — early Natchez history -----..--.---- 
ADSHUSHEER, General description of the. 
—, Consolidation of, with Eno and Shoe- 


— village, Location of. .-..--.------------ 
AKANSEA indians, Early account of - ----- 
AKENATZY, Identification of, with Occa- 

RE IREe aoe wae tos sce cae aclwis ame 
— village of Lederer 
ALABAMA indians, Paskagula and Biloxi 

among 


ALGONQUIAN stock, Extent of area of. --- 
Pee SOU HNORM (ribs Ol-o-----.<+---=-—-- 
= tribes in the northwest..-....--.-.-.-.- 
AMOROLECK, Wounding of.........--.--- 
ANANI, Probable derivation of .....--...- 
ANITAKWA, Cherokee form of Catawhba.. . 
ANOINEMENT, SAPOMD - 2. --.--4ce.--< <a ‘A 
ARAPAHO, Removal of, to the plains ..-.. 
ARKANSA indians, Early account of .-.-.-- 
ASHLEY RIVER indians, Probable identi- 

fication of.--.--- bets =p Shap et ee Pe 
ASSIWIKALE, Probable identification of. . - 
ATAKWA, Cherokee form of Catawha...--. 
ATALL, native name of Mountain Cherokee 
ADUSTA, Identification of...--.----/.-.. 
PMUHEEOREEYES CLUCOs— 222. e 52 ccecc eee os 
AVENDAUGHBOUGH, a probable Sewee vil- 

[NEG et os oS 08 So sCCnE Naan En Beene Aaa 


BACKHOOKS, Mention of the, by Lawson. 
TRACON TOVCRIOR 22-6 a. <= sche onic win oin nie 
BaArRTRAM, WM., on Muskhogean migration 
BASKETRY, Biloxi 


13, 35, 38, 


Batts, T., Expedition of, in 1671.-. 26, 30, 34, 36, 


—on Saponiand Tutelo habitat.......... 
BEAR RIVER indians, Habitat of.......... 
BeEArpDs, Indian custom of plucking 
BEARSKIN, Aid rendered Byrd by .-...--. 
BELLOMONT, Earl of, cited on early indian 


treat ys soschsee 22 SShv ee ete eet es = 
Brotuuk, Pressure of, by Algonquian 
EY DOS eater ciatee eile iealstiaistees Socnercc 


61, 


76 
o4 
11 
16 
37 
40 
71 
46 


38 


12 


| — — last of the Occaneechi 


3ERQUIN-DUVALLON on Biloxi habitat in 


BEVERLEY, ROBERT, on the early Monacan 
— — customs of southern tribes.-..---.--- 
TER al EOLOION ae Ree oe eis oes ose 
BEZOAR STONE, Use of, by the Tutelo. --.- 
BILLY JOHN, a Catawba Indian.........-.. 


| BiLox! indians, General description of. . - 


— language, Study of, by Gatschet-.----- 
BLACKFEET, Removal of, to the plains. -.-. 
Biownt on Sara inroads on the Tuskarora 
Bones, Custom of preserving..--------- 
BOTSHENIN, a probable Occancechi syno- 


Boyt, Indian college established by. .--. 
BRAINERD, DAvip, Visit of, to Shamokin. 
BRANT, JOSEPH, Cayuga flight to Canada 

Wathies sasnijaic sista aeet pe woceee ses 
BUFFALO, Migration affected by------.--. 
Burk, J. D., cited on the ‘‘ Stukarocks ”’- 
Byrp, WILLIAM, Account of adventures of 
~onmindian education --22-222+s-s.----- 
— — Catawba villages mm 1728.-.--......-- 
POP) AOM Mag == = saa /eia ae a= 
= the last of thedino.-.-:-----22-.---2 


-——— flight of Occaneechi <2... ----------- 


— — incorporation of Sara and Keyauwee. 
— — southward movementofSaraand Eno 


- —, Description of Sara village by.-.-.-.--- 


—, Mention of ‘‘Steukenhocks”’ by ------ 
—= oni the carly Saponmi.:---.-----5:------. 
— — Saponiand Tutelo habitat.......:.. 
— — supposed extinction of the Tutelo.. 


CacoreEs, Identity of, with Shoccoree- - -. 
CaDAPAW, Mention of, by Lawson-.----- . 
CANNIBALISM among the Biloxi. --.------ 
CAPAHA or KwAPA early habitat. -....-.--- 
CAPE FEAR indians, General description 
1) FIG pte eee os ROS et a 
== Hah POpulamnlon Of so. ise seen oe = 
CAPTAIN Tom, a Saponi indian......--.--. 
CAROLINA, War of, with the Sara-..--..- 
Casor, Indentification of ----.-..-------- 
CATAWBA, General description of the ..-. 
S=* NOVGner OL (Of. 25.25 Jonsesse se sts 
—, Habitat and population of .........--- 
==) Poprlation) of, a0) W768e5 3 teensy 
—, Visit to tho, by Lawson<=2-22s-.4-5 2. 
—, Attack of, by Iroquois........---..--- 


Page 


61, 80 


45, 46 
44 
val 
73 
64 
13 
23 
55 
5D 
59 
61 
58 
21 

40, 49 


94 


Page 
CATAWBA, Shawano raids on the...-...--- 45 
—, Attempt of, to incorporate the Pedee- 77 
—, Incorporation of the Eno with..------ 64 
— — —— Wi Gama Wr Wales = See eee 17 
== —— WiiLeLeG wile hase eee eee ane 81 
— — + Sara wither... cccetes eee Sees 57, 60 
—, Probable incorporation of Keyauwee 
| ees Abe ee aac Sane pana soecionnS 62 
— in French and Indian war-....-..-.--.- 61 
—, Relation of Woccon to--.-:-.--..----- 65 
—, Removal of the Saponi to the.....-.-- 49 
CATLIN, GEORGE, on early Mandan mi- 
aye) Noe Se San St ae ho SoS SRR e epee - 10 
CayuGa, Adoption of Tutelo and Saponi 
Mh aes keeeeereogan ese Saonecuds Secese 51 
ee Wlightot, tolCanidac: sc: sa==-eea5.=2 51 
CHENCO, Game of, mentioned by Lawson. 64 
CHERAW, First use of term ------.------- 60 
=, Identity of, with Sara...2-222-. 222.5% 57 
— precinct of South Carolina....-:..-..--- 60 
CHEROKEE, Habitat ofthe ------.-.-.-.-.. 5, 8, 80, 82 
-—— expelled by other tribes....--....----. 12 
== Hostility Oteesea-e sete) see eee es 28, 30 
— and Catawba relations -.-.--..---.-... 69 
—, Incorporation of Natchez with ..-..--.- 83 
= —— = Cataw, Dalai bisa ee eae tee ee 73 
——joined by the Notcheeye--2-.---eeee=2 84 
CHEYENNE, Removal of, to the plains - --. 12 
CHICHOMINY and Iroquois treaty. -..-..--- 45 
CHICKASAW migration tradition .......-.- 11 
—, Incorporation of Natchez with -....-- 83 
@HICORA, Derivationiof- esse ere. 86 
— of the early Spanish <--:22---5.-22..--- 86 
Cuiers, Female, among the Wateree..--. 80 
CHILDREN, Punishment of........-.-...-. 33 
CHIROE"HAKA, the Mingo native name... vi 
CHoctaw migration tradition. .........-- 11 
— joined by the Biloxi -:--.22-225222 2... 15 
= MOTUUATY MULOS|\-aatt= Sener eeieee 80 
CuHouata, Location of, by De l'Isle .-_.-- 57 
CHOWANOC or CHOWAN, Habitat of.....-- 7 
CHOZETTA, Possible Siouan connection of. 18 
CHRISTANNA indians, Collective use of 
WELETEN Goro tos SER ees One sobs rise ad 5 aanes 37 
——, Treaty of Iroquois and <........... 45 
CINNABAR, Use of, as paint by the Sara... 58 
CIVILIZATION, Effect of, on the Tutelo.... 44,51 
CoAL, Discovery of, near Monacan town . 27 
Cocao, Mention of, by Vandera.......... 86 
CoOFITACHIQUI, Probable identification of. 83 
COHNOWAS-RONOW, a possible Conoy form 22 
Comp, Use of, for body scraping. --...... 71 
CoMBAHEE, 2 Cusabo tribe.-..-...--...... 86 
Comisuy, The, of the Biloxi:.......:--... 16 
ConeEsroaGa, Former habitat of........... 5 
= described ibiismitht osc ts2 nesses 13 
—, Iroquois conquest of .....--.......... 38 
—, Iroquois hostility toward. -........... 12, 22 
--, Removal of-Saluda to.......--...--..- 83 
—, Occaneechi joined by---<-<--.-4...-.- 54 
CONGAREE, General description of........ 80 
—, early population of ...--.2=----..-22. 101 
CONNEWANGOS, Mention of, by Schooleraft. 6 
Convoy popilationin 17hseee. eee 51 
—. Removal of, to Pennsylvania........-. 21 


SIOUAN TRIBES 


ean BUREAU OF 

OF THE EAST. ETHNOLOGY 
Page 

CONOYUCH-SUCH-ROONAW conquered by 


the Troquois 5... -2s8e-ce se eae ee ee 22 
Coosa habitat and early history..----..-. 85 
Coosaw, asynonym of Coosa..-....--..- 85 
COREE early habitat........-..-:----2--<- 8 
COREORGONEL, Village of......---.----2-2 51 
CorsABboys, a Cusabo synonym.....-.-.. 86 
Cosmocony, Manahoac.-.-....2.-2- 222. ae 20 
SS OAD ONE = oa 5 alcte te Shere cate tee ole ee 48 
Counxi, Identification of-2...-.s--eeeeeee 86 
CountinG, Method of, by southern tribes. 32 
CREE hostility toward Sioux ....-.-.----- 12 
CREEK, Incorporation of Natchez with the 83 
CROGHAN, G.,on Saponi population in 1765. 51 
CusABO, Collective use of the term.----- 84, 85 
— habitat and early history ......-----.. 86 
CUsso, a synonym of Coosa.........----- 85 
CuTTAWA, Shawano form of Catawba. -.. 68 
DANCE, Fire, of the Catawba--........-.- 71 
DANCE, Masquerade, of the Waxhaw .--. 39 
DEARBORN, Journal of, cited ......--..--- 51 
Deer, Biloxi belief in resurrection of... 17 
DEHORISS-KANADIA, Town of.......--.--.- 51 
DELAWARE indians, Removal of, to the 

Susquehanna; -5.2.5_ 5.25... eo.- eee 21 
DE L’ISLE, location of the Sara by -..----- 57 
DESCENT among the Biloxi. .....--....... 16,17 
— — southern tribes ..--..-...-.-.-=..-.. p 33 
—, Tutelo, through female line ..--...-..- 52 
DE Soro cited on the Capaha..-....-.--..- 10 
—, The Cofitachiquiof ..-..-...-.-...-.. 83 

| —, Visit of, to the Catawha........--..5. 70 
—, — =, to the Saraz.-2---.--5-</s8. esse 57 
DISEASE, Catawba treatment of .......... 72 
-—, Effect of, on the Catawba -...---.-..- 72 
=, — =, — — SOwee .. 2... oe eee ee 78 
= ——, —— Tuatelo..2..0 22-55 52 
Done, Mention of the. --- 2... see 30 
Doel, possibly a mythic people .......--- 29 
—, Reference to the, by Lederer ........- 29 
Dorsey, J. O., on origin of Anani ...-.-.- 15 
= — tho Biloxi! -- acc: soen.c eee eee 16, 17 
—, Study of Catawba language by..--..- 69 
-- on early Sionan migration .......-.-..- 10 
—, Tutelo investigations by..-..------.-- 52 
— on dialectic interchangeability ..-..-.. 14 
DOWAGANHAS, a Shawano synonym .....- 38 
Dress, Former, of the Biloxi -........... 16 

| —, Sapon1 method of making -.-.---.----- 47 
DWELLINGS, Biloxi... 22. 2s.0- ssc eee 17 
EDEN, Gov’R., Declaration of waragainst 

|| “the Sarajby -c2-.. tes. sasses eee 59 
Episto habitat and early history. .....--- 85 
EDUCATION of southern indians in 1711-12. 44 
ELAW, Mentioniof, im E712 22-2 eee ase eee 75 
ENGLISH, Attitude of, toward the indians. 27 
—, Defeat of, by Cherokee....--..----.... 28 
--z, Treachery of, toward mdiams ...-..--- 55 
Eno, General description of the ...--.----- 62 
—, Removal of, to Pedee river ---------.- 61 
—, Attempt of,to check Spanish incursions 58 
— Visited by Lederer 2--<---..- =o semer 54 
—, Incorporation of, with Catawba. .-.--. 50 
—,— —, — Shoccoree and Adshusheer.... 59 


SIOUAN = Or 
eae INDEX. ID 
Page | Page 
Eno, Incorporation of, with Saponi and | GOVERNMENT, Wateree-.-.----.-2-.-:.<-- 80 
FUE PA Ree ee hd ep ee Fe ee a ee nee 49 | GRANT’s journal of 1779 quoted. .......... 51 
Eno rown, Attempted settlement of GRAVIER, J., on ‘‘river of the Akansea”’. i0 
TRIER Biamcee oe tensa aa cee 52556 <8 59,61 | GREGG, ALEX,, on Sara-Catawba consoli- 
INOS WW ILI:, SCHICN Samos cnc) =a moe sa 63 GOIN Gee ea bad ococe nce oc oc aor aa aeeeener Ge 60, 73 
ERIE, Identification of the ..------------- 70 | — — condition of Catawba in 1787.-.-.---.. 74 
—, Schoolcraft’sincorrect identification of — — Catawba treatment of disease... --.-.- 72 
’ 

_ Catawba with.....------------------+-- 69 | — — Notchee and Catawba quarrels ---.- 8k 
—, Iroquois hostility toward the...-..---. 12 | — — application of name Wateree ..----. 81 
Esaw, a Catawba synonym .-....--------- 68 | — — Indian hostility .....-...-......--.- 77 
— tribe, Visit to, by Lawson....--------- 41 | —— negro slaves among indians ..-..-.-. 77 
== —. Mention of, by Lederer -...-.......- 71 | Grirrin, CHAS., Education of indians by. 44 
Eskimo pressed by Algonquian tribes. - - 12 | GUACHULE, Visit of Spaniards to.....--. 57 
EtIwaw, Habitat and early history of--- 84 Eiger Possible identification of ..........--- 70 
EuTAw an Etiwaw synonym.....-------- 84 | GUATARI, Reference to, by Vandera .--.-. 80 

—, Identity of, with Wateree...---...... 70 
’ ew ’ 
FEAsT, Ceremonial, of the Occaneechi. - -. 54 | : 
-—,—, — — Saponi ..-.---------+--++----- 39 | J1air, Weaving of, by the Santee ......-. 79 
FEATHER ornaments, Use of, by the Ca- | HALE, Horatio, on Patshenin-Occaneechi 
OTE Sager cb sece ose = Se Oe oc ase eereacee 70 FIST FIR) cesta cease Bye li i ee 5D 
= robes, Santee -...-.-=---.2- ----------=- 79 | — — Saponi protection from Iroquois hos- 
FEATHERSTONHAUGH, G. W., on early TiliGyeeace Seas Sete tee aerate Lee eee 40 
Osage migration. ..-.-.------------+--- 10 | — — population of Shamokin -----.------ 50 
Fire, Method of renewal of ..-...-------- 75 | — — westward Siouan migration. ...-.-.. 11 
—, Saponi method of making .--.-.-.----- a7 a\e—= Atccounbor Muteloby.as-+- 222 -casee—- 69 
FIREARMS traded with southern tribes - -- 31-) = on the Tutelo language------....--.--- 9 
—, Early use of, by Virginia indians ....- 28 | —, Tutelo affinity with Siouan established 
—, Use of, in indian invasions. ...-------- 12 | Sh ate daar bane Charen meme 37 
Five nations joined by the Tuskarora.. 8 | — on Tutelo settlement in Canada.------ 51 
FLATHEADS, Origin of term..-...---.---- ipa t= lastisurrivinoy belo mec see 51, 52 
—, Reference to the Catawba as...-...-.-- 68) — — Zeisberger’s journey. -..---..---.-.. 51 
—, see HEAD-FLATTENING. HALL, JAMES, cited on last of the Saponi- 52 
LOUTH, Selb Tie Seee pec eeepor lee anaece 47 | HANGING, Saponi superstition concerning 49 
Forr CHRISTANNA, Settlement of Saponi HANOHASKI, Identification of .......---- 30, 34, 35 
Dasa’ Baise See doors po esecc ore EeoeeS 49 | HLASINNINGA, Reference to the --..-----..- 20 
—, Abandoument of Saponi settlementat. 50 | HASSINUNGAES of John Smith.-.-..------- 19 
—, Settlement of tribes at........-.... 26,37,43,59 | HATTERAS indians, Habitat of -........-- 7 
PRP DSA MOVICINILVIOL- oo 72 S2 <a 08.- a 21 | HAW OLD FIELDS, Mention of-.-...-.-.-..-- 65 
Frencn, B. F., cited on early Spanish ref- | Hawkins, BENJ., on Muskhogean migra- 
erences... .--.-- SasdenAassensseeore ser Jaws COI pekGl OTe 2 eee tae lene astern cine sins =e = 11 
. Zi | 
FRENCH, Relation of the, to the Indians... 70 Hawks, F.L., on Ledercr’s route...--.-.. 34 
—and Indian war, Catawba in the....... 72 | — — Spanish incursions in 1654........-- 58, 62 
HAYNOKE, Identity of, with Eno.......-. 62 
GALLATIN, ALBERT, Classification of Ca- HEAD-FLATTENING, Custom of...-.-..----- 68 
tawhba by....-~..-.----2----+++-25------ COM) by. tlre, Walia @ sa oes ose 71, 74, 75 
— on Shawano-Westo warfare. -....----- > 85 | HECKEWELDER, J. G. E., on etymology of 
GAME, Athletic, of the Eno.............- 63 1M (aie VOr nk teeta pe ONE ae ee a Bre 26 
SGU ALAAE 1G ER 0) eee See Dare res 63 | Hewitt, J. N. B., on date of Iroquois 
GARCILASO cited onthe Sara..-.....--.--- Di SRN GAMUO oe or teem ge tate merane ee 21 
GATSCHET, A. S., on Biloxi terms... .... 15 | HIcKERAU, a Santee village.-..-..--.---. 79 
— — Biloxi-Siouan affinity.......-....... 16 | Hooks, Mention of the, by Lawson...-.. 76 
—=-—Gerivanon OL CatawDaw<--.s--<-<-< 80 | Horse, Effect of introduction of......-..- 6 
— — Catawbaand Biloxi dialects........- 69 | Hospira.ity, Eno and Shoccoree ......-. 63 
— — Catawba population in 1881--.-.-..... oN hoe SON GEG act ane oe ee Se ae oe dala ois 79 
— — late status of the Catawhba.....--.... Tota ee 2 Wie Neunyien osc age ae aaa aim = is 75 
—— derivation of Chicora.............-- 85 | Hosraqua, Identification of---..--.-----. 70, 85 
— — derivation of Etiwaw...-..------..- 84 | Hosriniry of certain southern tribes. --. 77 
— — Muskhogean migration.-..._....-..- ets OHETO KEG os as at emel sale a2 aes sowecmew 28, 30 
— — Westo andStono warfare.....-..... SD a COOS Nee eae aa see oo see eke ct eee c= 86 
GENTES, SBMOXD teem. ee ee eee ance 16 | —, Eno and Tuskarora..------.---.------ 62 
GENTILE system of southern tribes.....-- Soils Proguols:-- = --2-0 == 22, 26, 28, 38, 39, 43, 44, 60, 72 
GLEN, Goy'R, Action of, in Catawha lea — @egsation Ofer 355 hd sin, SAG ches aE = 
USPTO sean = eee eet ere fa |e Man NOM se nore cera ae 20, 21 
—,-——, toward southern tribes.......-.. Ta OGCANEEC NT es <.hioas Shes e h Nebo 54 
GOVERNMENT .ENO:-\5. 3.1% <tg- 5 Sage neee (ib jf PSeeIS hie Weoepacmpar CE eCOSSnC Gao ate es Seco 59 


96 SIOUAN TRIBES 


Page | 
TLOSTILIDY, Loskarora s-2o-seeeeese meee 42, 59, 75 
—=, Dutelos... 22230 - 2s eee seen ee 30 
=, Westo and Stono.:-2.2-....-- s-.2==< 85 
ai Mamagiiees. scan dceeh cece seceeeere eee 59, 72 
TIOUSES JUNO. acct a eee ee eee 63 
SE VPM VaR na Sapo sOas Sos scoresssoos S64 81 
VV EEX Willem tera clot are ere ata en teens erate 75 
—, Provision, of the Santee ...-.......--- 79 
HUMMINGBIRD, Biloxi respect for .--.-.--- AT 
I'URON, Habitaivote se eee eee senate 5 
—, Iroquois hostility toward..--......---- 12 
IBERVILLE, P. L. pv’, Biloxi first noted by- 15 
— on Paskagulaand Moctobihabitat-- -.- 17 
ILurnors, Iroquois hostility toward the- -- 2 
Imvay, G.. on former Paskagula habitat - 18 | 
IMPLEMENTS. Biloxi. s-- she. o-saceg~ 1 16 
TROQUOIAN stock, Extent of area of ----.- 5 
= SOWIE UEIDOS Ola. ene eRe 7 
Iroquots described by Lawson .....----- 13 
Sa Seo eSseesase cone saosesSseSsacets sce 5 
— conquests .--.-.-.--- Beno saarcrcodesc 9 
= Wien iene reunite Soe ose soscpnee 12 
— and Catawba warfare...-..-.----.-.... 71 
= hostilities <a e eae ee 13, 22, 26, 28, 60, 69, 72 
—, Flight of, to Canada.--------.--.----- 51 
— league, Date of formation of ..-------- 21 
— —, Tutelo representative in -.......-..- 52 
Issa, Mention of, by Pardo ....--......-- 70 
—, Reference to, by Vandera-..-.-.......- 68 
IswA, the proper name of Esaw -.-..---- 71 
JEFFERSON, T., on Manahoac habitat -..- 19 
JEFFERYS, T., Location of Keyauwee vil- 

LEVEY ON @ dS) 53.555 Sooner co ceducocostone 62 
—, -— — the Saluda by 2socecese-- ee eeecel- 83 
JOHNSON GUY. Map iobas: =a eee ae 51 | 
—, Sir Wo., on Cayuga adoption of 'Tu- 

TOLOVANG SADOWL ae scene eee me meee 51 
— — population of Tutelo, etc.......----- 5] 
—, GOV'R, on southern Indian population. 101 
KADAPAU, Mention of, by Lederer - ..-.-- 71 
KADAPAW, a Catawba synonym.....----- 41 
WGANSA early misration) 22 2..iecss. esc 10 
KATABA NIE, a Catawba native form .-.-. 69 
KKAYEGHTALAGEALAT, Village of ..--..--. 51 | 
KEEOWEE, Distinction of, from Keyauwee 61 
KEYAUWEE, General description of the.. 56, 61 | 
—, Visit to the, by Lawson. -...-.-.-.-... 4) | 
—, Incorporation of, with Catawba ....-- 50 
=, — —, — Saponiand Tutelo--2-5.--..- 40, 49 
Sot SS Se ia Gates eaosSeasas 59 
KEYAUWEE J ACK, 1 Keyauwee chief ..... 61 
KIAWAH, Distinction of, from Keyauwee.- 61 
KIAWAW, @ Cusabo tribe.-....-.---....-- 86 
Kune HarevaRr, Killing of, by Shawano. - 72 
KiNG JOHNNY, a Sara chief.....-...--.--- 61 
KinsuHip system of the Biloxi..---.....-- 17 
Kissau, Identification of, with Coosa. --. 86 
KONNUTSKINOUGH-ROONAW conquered by 

the Lroquois]= see ese eee e aan eee 22 | 
Kussoes, Identification of, with Coosa .-- 86 | 
KwapPa, Signification of........---------- 10 
—— Marky habpitabl Ot. case ee =ee eee ee 10 
Kwapa, Western migration of .....------ 11 


r r BUREAU OF 
OF THE EAST. peed 
Page 

LAMBREVILLE, J., Reference to the Tutelo 
[ASE eaeBoraa- Sanco oS EOS as orc 38 
LANE, Chowanoc names preserved by. --- ff 
LANGUAGE, indian, Interchangeability in 14, 57 
—,Saponiand Tutelo, Identity of -.-.--- 46 
—, Locative root in Siouan ...---. Sesh Sa ..22, 27; 37 
--, Sacred, of the Occaneechi -.----.--.-- 34 
--, trade, Occaneechi used as -...:.-..--.- 54 
LAUDONNIERE, Mention of Audusta by-. - 85 
—,-—— — the Hostaqua by.-..--..--.------ 85 
; LAwson, JOHN, Explorations of.......--. 38 
| NOULOIODE ce eee == aoe ae eee 41 
| —, Mention of vocabularies by.------.--- aq 
| —-on migration of southern tribes..-.-.- 29 
—-— Cape Fear indians.....2.--l2sccesee 66 
—, Error of, regarding Cape Fearriver. --. 40 
—, Travels of, among the Catawba.....-- 71 
— on Catawba population in 1701 ---..--. 73 
— — Congaree habitat ......-............ 80 
— — the Eno and Shoccoree......-......- 63 
— — -- Hooks and Backhooks .-.....--.- 76 
— — Keyauwee habitat in 1701 -.-....... 61 
—— population of the Keyauwee and * 
other tribes... -<- 2 -.50s soe eee 61 
— — Occaneechi habitat in 1701....-..--. 55 
— — Santee mortuary customs......---.- 80 
—-- population of Saponi, etc.......-... 55 
—, Non-mention of Sara by .---.-.----.-- 59 
-— on the Sewee in 1701------....----- 222 78,79 
— —. — *“Simnagers mse t- 22-2 oe eee 13 
—, Mention of Sissipahaw by ---.-------- 66 
— 0D Sugeree habitat. 2252-2 2-seeee eee 75 
—, Mention of the Tutelo by-...--------. 37 
--, Wateree visited by----.-----------25. 81 
— on Waxhaw habitat in 1701 .-...-..... 70 
—, Description of the Waxhaw by-..-----. 75 
— on’ Wocconihabitat= 22> <-es4= eee 65 


LEDERER, J OHN, Expedition of, in 1670- 25, 26, 34, 538 
—, General information by, onsouthern 


tribes ~ 0: oi kee ee 31 
| —- on the Catawbain'l670 2222 sees eee 70, 71 
— — — /norand Shoccoree_- -----— eee 62, 63 
== = = Mahots. os ao.- cece eee eee 35 
— — — Manahoac.-.-2.-0--22ee- 5s eee 21 
—, Journey of, among the Monacan..--.- 28 
— on origin of the name Monacan..--..--.-. 29 
— —— the Nahyssan< -- 3.2.2 22 40 
-- — -- Nuntaneuck or Nuntaly........-.. 36 
= — —= Salar os. ees 3 ane ee 57, 58 
-_ — — Westo and Ston0 <2--------=e==ee 85 
— — Wateree habitat: 252-2222 2-- scene 81 
—, Visitiof, to the Waxhaw -----e-eeee 75 
LENAPE, Relation of, to other tribes..--.- 12 
Liquor, Introduction of, among the 
Sewee's -c2220 00.02 ee eae eee 78 
Logan, J. H., on location of Congaree 
Village’. 22sec seee en eae eee 80 
LONG-HOUSE among the Tuteio .--..---.- 52 
LOWER SAURA TOWN of 1760 .-......:-.-- 59 
MACHAPUNGA indians, Habitat of..---- = 7 
MAHASKAHOD, an indian camp ...------- 20 
MAHnOoc, an unidentified tribe .---..-.-..- 29 
—, General description of.--.-.---.----... 35 
—, Mention of, by Lederer ............ oes 20730 


SIOUAN 
MOONEY 


MANACHEE, Population of, in 1669 
MAnaGoG, Identification of, with Mana- 

hoac 
MANAHOAC confederacy, General descrip- 

tion of 
MANDAN early migration.....-..........- 
MANGoOAC, Signification of ........-.-...- 
—, Identification of, with Nottoway 
MARRIAGE custom of southern tribes. ... 
Martin, F. X., on Cape Fear colony 
—— participation of Sissipahaw 

VUES QT =<) oom ara sinisleloe oils \a\e ansicis alain 
MAssAWoMEK tribe of John Smith 
MAssINACAK, Discovery of, by the Eng- 

lish 
MAssINNACACK, Mention of, by Smith.... 
— identified with Monacan town 
Mats, Use of, as sails 
MATTAMUSKEET, Habitat of 
MEDICINE, Catawba practice of ......-.-- 
MHHEREHIN, Habitat of: ..22-5----2c.sceeee 
—, Relation of, to Tuskarora.....-....-.. 
— and Iroquois treaty ...--..-..--....---. 
MEIPONTSKY, General description of the. - 
— and Iroquois treaty.........-..------.-- 
MENGWE, Reference to the name....-..... 
MiGRATION affected by the buffalo........ 
—, Early, of the Mandan 

“ba SORE SG ees oappoonseer “negsene 
czy, OTE ene Gea Dea ia ce 


MILLs, ROBERT, on location of Catawba 
village 
— — Catawba villages in 1780............ 
— —— population in 1826 
— — location of Wateree village......... 
— — killing of King Haiglar............. 
MineGo, Reference to the name... .-....-.. 
Minirari, Hostility of Sioux toward..... 
MISSIONARIES among northern tribes-.... 
MOoBILIAN trade language.........-....-. 
Mocrosi, Early mention of, by Iberville. 
—, Disappearance of the 
MOHEGAN, Relation of, to other tribes. ... 
MOoHETAN, General description of the. ... 
Momma of, Of N05... ec betes ee 
Monacan, Origin of name of ...-......... 
—, General description of ........-....... 
—, Mention of, by Smith................. 
—, Habits of the 
—a OWN Location Of- = 22. 15. sence case ne 
= POLOFENCOIUO!s 12s. a\Ses state cae eee 555 
———, Mention of, in 1722.2. 5222.2c..c0008 
MoNACK, a Monacan chief..-.....-.... .. 
MOonAHASSANO, Identification of, with 
PRO OR ears sae einen ton tone etree 
MoNnAHASSANUGH, a Tutelo synonym..... 
—, Mention of, by John Smith........... 
—, the Nahyssan of Lederer..-.....-..... 
MOoNASICKAPANOUGH, Mention of, by John 
Po, 1) | Wear ep eo Ses 2 Rei eer 
— possibly the original of Saponi-.-......-. 
, Mooney, JAMES, cited on eastern Siouan. 
—on Siouan affinity of the Saponi...... 


BULL. V—22 7 


INDEX. a 
Page | Page 
28 | Mormonism, Conversion of Catawba to .. 73 
Morse, J., on Catawba population in 
29 BB eesterete eta cia inae cle in haya jet met cienticts ore 74 
MorTUARY customs of the Santee........ 79 
18 | — — — southern tribes..........--......- 33 
10 | MocnrAIN CHEROKEE. ..-.--2--.........5 80 
7 | MowHemcnHo identified with Monacan 
CRW SONA ee nemo goeceSerocenaaost o> GeSecaesee 27, 28 
33 | MOWHEMENCHOUCH, Discovery of, by the 
Wife! JUnTSE § aoe ocean occreonasanneeocnaee 27 
| MowHEMENCHUGH, Mention of, by John 
GE ye Smit he see ase ee eae. Soe ee 26 
13 | MUSKHOGEAN stock, Extent of area of.... 
| ——, Probable affinity of Coosa with..... 86 
ite tripess MoprationOf -<22-2<as2-2--2<5- 11 
26 | — — met By DESOtOr sce een aeons aco seias 10,11 
= | NacuEE, Mention of, by Adair........... 84 
7 | NAHYSSAN, Early mention of......-...--. 26 
wae hae Identification of, with Tutelo......... 29 
5.7 | —, a Tutelo synonym ................... - 37 
2 | Names, Local, of the Saponi..........:.. 46 
PE Be Siouan local, in Virginia and Carolina. 87 
37 | —, Monacan tribal- Prefix In=-.o--.-.---. 22 
45 | NANEMOND and Iroquois treaty ..-..----- 45 
7 | NANTICOKE, Relation of, to other tribes.. 12 
u|—> Qneida adoption of---.-. 2-5-2220. 555. 51 
10h ieee MOPalAOM IN NTGS coe anes <li m mnie imia le 51 
jo | — mortuary rites --.---.--..-----.------- 80 
29 NATCHEE, Reference to the..............- 83 
11 | NATCHEZ, Early history of the ........-.. 83 
9,10 NECOES, Settlement of .-.---.....-.. ere 66 
| NEILL, E. D., on early indian traders .... 28 
71 | ——— Monacan population....-....-..- 28 
73 NEUSIOK indians, Habitat of -.....-...... 7 
74 NEwport, Expedition of, 1m 1608-........ 27 
81 | NEWTON, Catawba village of............. 73 
72 NIKONHA, the last of the Tutelo ......... 46 
= | NOTCHEE, First appearance of..--..-....- 84 
S | 722 seatiibas Of og. escent eee ck oe 83 
eld Attitude of, toward southern tribes. - 77 
15.16 Norroway, Signification of.............- a 
fs aE se IMormer lh tLoabi Ob ccncsl eso seesebaese Girt 
wh and Troquois treaty. .--.---.-.-..-..... 45 
49° = Relation of, to Tuskarora -....-....-.-< 42 
36 | NUNTALY, an unidentified tribe .......... 29 
eae) Habitat Ob 2-+-<-saces6- eoaeee oe eee mate 36 
29 NUNTANEUCK, an unidentified tribe...... 29 
aac! Habitat Ofs oc: :o.je5 aa cicicajsicin a diss eee ces 36 
19 | OCCANEECHI, General description of..-... 53 
200 |) —) Harlvimention) Of¢s5<aeese ae os- (<n <5 26 
28; —, Early habitat of ..-..-------------.-.. 38 
27 | —, Habitat and population of, in 1714..-.. 61 
30 | —, Status of the, in 1728-'29.............. 49 
29 | —, Probable status of, in 1763 ............ 51 
—, General customs of the.........-----. 33 
29,31 | —, Settlementof, at Fort Christanna...... 59 
37 | —, Visit to the, by Lawson .........--... 41 
26 | —- joimed by the Saponi and Tutelo..... 38, 40, 42 
27 | — and lroguois treaty -.-...-.....-06-. 3: 45 
| — language, Use of, by medicine men.... 34 
26 | OJIBWA hostility toward the Sioux --.-.- 12 
27,37 | OLD Mosquiro, the last of the Tutelo.-.. 52 
9 | OMAHA, Signification of ..........-..-.--- 10 
69 | — early migration .............-c-ee0 ance 10 


98 


Page | 
ONEIDA, Adoption of the Nanticoke by... 51 
ONTPONEAS of John Smith. -....-.-...-... 19 
ORATORY, Training in, of southern indians 33 
ORISTA, Identification of.-.....-.--..--.- 85 
OsaGE early migration..........---.---.- 10,11 
OTARI, the native name of Mountain Cher- 

OKCC. « sy eeisiaidas.- Biesbs fee Stoel ete ee 80 
OTARI-YATIQUI, Mention of, by the Span- 

Taras. sche those eesepete ese weshase ees 80 
Orrawa, Iroyuois hostility toward the.. 12 
OUSTACK, Identification of.........------ 70, 85 
OYADAGAHROENE, Iroquoian name of Ca- 

baW Dooce esches see sees eee eae 68 
PAANESE, a Saponisynonym......-------. 51 
PAINT, vermilion, Saponiuse of ...-...-.- 39 
PAMAWAIOC indians, Habitat of.--..----- 7 
PAMLICO indians, Habitatof........-..... 7 
PAMTICOUGH indians, Habitat of......... ij 
PAMUNKI, Defeat of, by Cherokee. --..... 28 
== ANd MT OKWOLS Greate. - 5 tee eee eee 45 
Parvo, JUAN, Mention of Issa by.-.-.---.. 70 
= on the wWatercesnylohy 22! s-os-eeees o= 80 
PASKAGULA, General description of-..... 17 
—, Early mention of, by Iberville......-.. 15 
=) Populationiot im pie4 Soe. reese ea 15 
PASQUOTANK indians, Habitat of.....-... 7 
PATSHENIN, a probable Occaneechi syn- 

OMe acrscnaseadennenoAraterme asscdac oc 52, 55 
PEACEMAKING, Manahoae method of.-.... 20 
PEARLS, Trade of, by southern tribes.-.. 31 
—as Tupelo trophies... -255-22-..-2---<- 31 
PEDEE, General description of the ...--..- 76,77 
=—sHabitatOt:, a0 roles =nseemenee asec ee 84 
PERQUIMAN indians. Habitat of......-.-.. 7 
PESTILENCE, Indians exterminated by .-. 8 | 
PIcTOGRAPHY among southern indians... 32 
PINTAH#, Saponi village of.............. 30, 31 
—, Probable identification of...-...-..... 35 
PIPE OF PEACE, Description of..........-. 83 
PiscaTAwAy, Removal of, to Pennsylva- 

MLO s oe sores ore ee ek Ae eee eee ate 21 
Pomoc, Fabibatot.2-.s:--54s2ee2 aoe 7 
PonT1Ac, Southern hostility toward ....-.. 72 
POTESKEET, Habitat of. <2-<.2Jjece) J.c.sce 7 
Bonny, Iilos... tet4-poses seni ctaels oe 16 
[ROULTRY, SacriuceOL 2. 544--c54cen5 cee 63 
PowHATAN confederacy, Habitat of-..... 7 
SN OSMUDIOS Brey toe ce ae Seek sem sees ca ee ee 28 
—, Attitude of, toward the English .-..... 27 
PRISONERS, Iroquois treatment of ........ 40 
—, Kortureof, by burning -=--:-.-...-... 39 
PROPERTY, how held by the Occaneechi.. 54 
Puan, E. W., Acknowledgments to....-.. 42 
RALEIGH colonists, Tribes known to.-..... 7 
RASAUWEAK, Monacan village of......... 27 
RECHAHECRIAN identified with Cherokee. 28 
IR BLIGLON, Saponl’, 5. ees See eee eee 47,48 
— of southern tribes: --:-5.-5- 52 sce-26-- 33 

<MIBAULT, Reception of, by the Edisto... 85 
RICKOHOCKAN identified with Cherokee. . 28 


Rivers, W.J., Reference to the Coosa by 85, 86 


— on extermination of the Cusabo.....-... 86 
—, Reference by, tothe Etiwaw -...-..... 84, 85 
ae a CHER 4 alanis aisles aeie eee 84 


-SIOUAN TRIBES 


| SINNAGER indians of Lawson......--- atelete 


BUREAU OF 
OF THE EAST. ae 
Page 
Rivers, W.J., on the Santee in 1715 ...... 80 
— on Sara population. -...........--...-- 60 
— — early Sewee habitat.........cs-..2- 78 
| SACRIFICE, Human, among the Wateree.. 81 
OL POUL Y <2 =. <a =\-wiee ease eee ee ee 63 
== (Saponil...22..c-.922-2 see ee 30 
SAINT HELENA indians, a Cusabo tribe. -.. 86 
SALT not used by Gulf tribes............. 58 
—, Possession of, by the Sara..-...... estes 58 
| SALUDA, Territory of the....---. 13 SB ee 83 
| SANTEE, General description of.......-... 79 
—, Early population of .......-.--..--.-.- 101 
Sapon, Location of village of .....-.....- 30,35 
| —, Identification of, with Saponi........- 29 
| SAPONA, Early mention of............ ade 26 
SAPONG 'TOWN Of Batts): 3222-21 accesses 34 
SAPONI, Probable etymology of..... eae 30 
| —-, General description of the-..--....... 37 
| —, Collection of tribes forming the......- 26 
--, Mention of, by Spotswood ..-...... BAS 21 
—-, Habitat and population of, in 1714.... 61 
=, Populationsof. -22. 222-0 a.scee aes 51,55 
—, Settlement of, at Fort Christanna..... 59 
=; War of, with the whites. <s.s0s sees 28 
— TOWN, Establishment of -......-.2...- 42 
SA-POONESE, a Saponi synonym .......... 51 
SakA, General description of.--....-..... 56 
—, Early population of..-....--.-..--..< = 101 
—, Acquaintance of, with the Spaniards. 71 
—, Incorporation of the, with the Cataw- 
be ce ee AS 49, 50 
| =, Barlyremomalof.2e2ica:: cee eee 13, 14, 61 
Sasa, Warrennuncock form of Sara...... 57 
SAURA, Identity of, with Sara............ 57 
SAuxPA, Probable identity of Sissipa- 

Haw ANG sacs. ses ae Osea eee eee 65 
SAVANNAB Indians \.cj- ose eo eee eee san! 83, 85 
SAXAPAHAW, a form of Sissipahaw......-. 65 
SCALPING parties, Catawba.--......--..-- 72 
ScaLps among the Wateree ........--.... 81 
SCHOOLCRAFT, H. R., on Catawba migra- 

tion tradition: © Jee sba-26~)ciee cee eee 69 
SECOTAN indians, Habitat of............. ff 
SENECA, Flight of, to Canada............- 51 
SERATEE, a form of Santee-..----..-...--- 79 
SEWEE, General description of the.....-- 77 
SHACKACONIAS of John Smith..........-. 19 
SHaAccOo WILL, an Eno indian..--...-...-- 64 
SHAMOKIN, Population of, in 1745 ..-..-.- 50 
—, Settlement of Saponi and Tutelo at-.. 50 
SHATERA, a Tutelo synonym.........-..- 38 
SHAWANO, Brief description of the ....-.- 83 
— and Weesto .warfare <<22. acc oe: see 85 
—, Raid by, on the Catawba....-.....-.- 45 
SHELLS Sacred, of the Omaha and Kansa 10 
SHOcCOREE, General description of the.-. 62 
— habitat and population in 1714 ........ 61 
— consolidation with Eno and Adshu- 

sheer, ;../ysss05- ss 59e ee eee 59 
— — — Saponiand Tutelo --...-.. 222.25. 40 
SIBLEY, JOHN, on the Akansea........-.- 10 
—, — — Biloxi language -.......-......... 415 
SILveR, Trade of, by southern tribes.... 31 


TOUAN 
gs INDEX. 99 
Page Page 
SIOUAN stock, Extent of area of........-. 6 | SUSQUEHANNA indians, Barter by.......- 32 
SE tTIPOsag Mantels. see ee cee coca seas 6 | SUWALI, Cherokee form of Sara .......... 57 
Sioux, Hostility of Ojibwa toward ...... Aa PAL i teeter ee tacks eee eure sca ie 57 
SissipAHAW, General description of the-- 64 | SWEAT-HOUSES, Saponi use of ............ 39 
SKIN-DRESSING, Saponi method of -.....-.. 47 | SYMBOLISM among southern indians ..... 32 
Skoeanrr, a Tutelo village...........-.... 51 
SLAVE HUNTS, Indians exterminated by -. 6) Lasu of food, by; Saponi---..5-.h 2200 2t< 0 47 
SLAVERY, Seizure of indians for........-- 66,86 | Tacct possibly a mythic people......-.-.-. 29 
SLAVES, Negro, among the Pedee........ 77 | —, Reference to, by Lederer...-.......... 29 
SMALLPOX, Indian treatment of .-.-...--- 78 | TANEKS, the Biloxi native name.....--.- 14 
—, Extermination by --...--------------- 65,67 | TATTOOING among the Biloxi .........--. 16 
— among the Catawba..................- 72,73 | Tauxansas of John Smith........-..--.- 19 
_, Effect of, on the Congaree........-.--- 80 | TEHOTERIGH-KANADA, The Mohawk ‘ Tu- 
= among the Sewee.-.-.2--.2..5--025.-2. 78 tOLOMO WAY seers: citi perariear einer ee sla 51 
SmiTH, JOHN, Mention of vocabularies by- 7 | THUNDER venerated by the Biloxi. -...--- 17 
— cited on Iroquoian tribes.....--.....-- 13 | TieNINATEOS of John Smith......-..--..- 19 
—, Encounter of, with the Manahoac ..... 19 | Time, Measurement of, by southern in- 
— cited on Manahoac tribes ...-..--. ee 19 IANS ease see eateine ac oe as abide pete daene 32 
——W— Manahoac and Monacan ...:..... 22,35 | —, Occaneechi measurement of.-.....----- 34 
——— early Monacan habitat.........-.. 26 | TimuKkva indians, Destruction of .-....-.. 12 
SuytH, J. F. D., on Catawba population TIMUQUANAN tribes, Destruction of ....-. 1 
Hes deme leet iar ie aieseienistelaciaiamcieroee = cet eie 74 | TODERICHROONE, Collective use of term. . 68 
SniPeE not killed by the Biloxi ..........- 17 | —an Iroquois tribal name...........----.- 37, 44 
SOCIOLOGY, Wateree ................----- Si) —andwEroguois: treatiyy ~~ - === sa1 meee sel 45 
Spoons, Saponi method of making .....-- alee Voll OG) Ofte ie mista tiaicl actos ~al= <1, 5. ome 51 
Spotswoop, Gov’R ALEX., Proposed set- TTOHOAIROUGH-ROONAW, a possible Tutelo 
tlement of indians at Eno town by...-.- 64 HOT. Bas Abo cabdebecodses costar beisecea 22 
—, Oceaneechi-Iroquois treaty effected by - 55 | TOLERA TOWN visited by Batts-.........- 35 
— on treaty of Iroquois with southern ToueRs, Use of term, by Lambreville- --. 38 
UDU AGE) 2 SSBSS5 sos he ccs oe scoese aes 45 | ToopTATMEER, a Woccon village.......-- 65 
—,Settlement of indians near Fort Christ- TORTURE! Of Prisoneray: -=-4- == 5=2-—7'- --< - 39. 40 
DDE A Gecisoc eso coo SESE ooo beaeors 43, 49, 59,61 | Toraro pistrict, Location of..........-- 43 
— onobligations of whites to the Sara... 60 | Totem, Tribal, of the Occaneechi...-..-- 54 
—, Mention of the Stukarocks by .-.--.... Le) See DUG CLO scree cera cemeremee oe 31 
—, Influence of, with Virginia tribes. -... 42 | TorerRo, Early mention of -.....-..-..... 26 
—, Effort of, to educate Indians ...---..-. 44 | Totrri, Collective use of term.....-.--.- 68 
STEGARAKE of John Smith.........--.--. 19 | Toroporomor, a Pamunki chief.......... 30, 36 
= SIOUATE DO Iso2~ acta cleti= sek a eke = a 23 | Torreroy, Former name of the Big Sandy 11 
—, Existence of, in 18th century ..-...... 21 | —, Iroquois name for eastern Siouan tribes 22 
STENKENOCK, Mention of, in 1722 ........- 21 | TRADE, Extensive, attempted by the Se- 
— and Iroquois treaty...--...-..-.-.----. 45 WHEE < Piscine BoC SaReoonoS ee HoagooneNeEseeeE: 79) 
STEUKENHOCK, Mention of, by Byrd ...-.-- 21 | TRADERS, Early, among the Indians..... 28 
=, Status of the, in 1728-’29 .........-.-.- 49 | —, English, among the Sara ..........--. 58. 
STOCKADES, Conestoga ...-.....--.-..---- 22 | —, Unscrupulousness of ........-..-:.-.. 32: 
STONE-HEAPS, Signification of, among TRADING, Character of, among southern 
Souther tribess: -<<lase-. set gees sss 32 tribes) 6-2 .50 2542 Seescsneace seetwcsseh-t 31 
Peas OUI MATK Ss, </<.2,/<jocisin.cecianianis = 39, 80 | TREACHERY, Occaneechi ........--.------ 54 
Stono habitat and early history......... | dea Witiifenbal eel: See occoc apn nen caduSo abort 55 
STRACHEY, WM., Mention of vocabularies TREATY between Iroquois and southern 
WERE ye toe wien eins Ae wis on awsiseies seseeas 7 WLUDGB ee 2 eee aae cea Ssaeceeniceeae ae 45, 
—on etymology of Monacan ..........--- 26 | —, Occaneechi and Cherokee.....-.------ 54 
STRANGERS, Scratching of, on parting . ... 71 | TURKEY-HEAD, Catawba village of -...--.- 73. 
PPE COMUION! Ole. «= s:<)ciciciasisss sies.cs'e asia 33, 71 | TusSKARORA early habitat .......--..----- 5, 42 
STUKAROCKS, Mention of, by Spotswood. . 21 | — habitat and early population -.......--- 8 
SUALA, Identity of, with Sara.......-.... Die le LOR ULI yeast ee ene acta ie c\s cious cicm 59, 75 
EON OMMORMNS Olen =. \f cee a. vests ceceet Die awe Oh (ilelda. ete atctelstes so = - nies 35, 42, 43, 72 
SUGEREE, General description of the..... 74 | — friendliness with the Iroquois .-.....-. 40 
—, Visit to the, by Lawson............-.. 41 | —, Incorporation of the Woccon by --.--- 65. 
SuicipE of Tutelo chief's daughter ...--.-. 49 | TuTELO, Collection of tribes forming the 26. 
SULLIVAN, GEN. JOHN, Destruction of Tu- —, General description of....-....-...... 31, 37 
teloiwwillacelby Socmenis ssmcceec-- -saecce 51 ; — habitat and population............... 61, 55, 6L 
SUSQUEHANNA indians, Former habitat of. 5 | —, Mention of, by Spotswood ..........-. 21 
— — described by Smith ................. 13 | —, Settlement of, at Fort Christanna .... 59 
— —, Iroquois conquest of ..-............ 38 | —, Settlement of, in Canada ...-........- 51 
——, Occaneechi joined by............... 405i), —-hOstilifivss so sereeeeer eee e Soin ee ris oc 30 


100 SIOUAN TRIBES OF THE EAST. cece 


ETHNOLOGY 
Page | Page 
TUTELO language, Hale-on the .-....--.-- 9769 |) WiKAVING }Santee* 5-2-6 tas se eee ee 79 
— village, Destruction of, in 1779 ...-..-- 51.7) WiSAVING; -SapOmi jes. 2 oases eee 47 
TWICHTWICHT, a Miami synonym........ 38 | WESTO, Identification of ............ ..-. 70 
— habitat and early history..-........... 85 
UcHEAN, Probable affinity of the Cusabo Wuisky, Indians exterminated by ......- 6, 44 
<i thee ce ee gg | WHONKENTEAES of John Smith-.-....-.. 19 
— tribes, Probable destruction of.......- 11 | WILLIAMson, Expedition of, against the 
Ucut, Brief description of the-.-..-..--- 83 Cherokee .-....--..++----+-++-22e-2+2++ 72 
— incorporated by the Creek..-.......---- 1g | WIMBEE, a Cusabo tribe. ....--..--------- 86 
UGAQpa, the proper name of Kywapa .... 10 | WINNEBAGO, Native name of the..-....-- 15 
UMA®HA®, proper name of Omaha.....--. jo | WinyAw, General description of the. --.. 76 
UPpprER SAURA TOWN of 1760 ......--.-.--- 59 | — Early population of .............---.- 101 
USHEREE, Possible identification of, with Wisacky, a Waxhaw synonym ........-- 70 ° 
‘CUCRY SITET Jr cs 4G oP ee wy ae 79 | —, Mention of, by Lederer..............- 75 
Usuery, Identification of..............-. 71 | Woccon, General description of the..... 64 
—, a Catawba synonym .....-....-..-..-. 6g | — habitat .......-----.+-+++-2+2+02+2+-++- 8 
—, Mention of, by Lederer...........---- 70 | — language classed as Siouan......-....-. 69 
— and Westo hostility..........--------- 85 ‘WOMEN, Treatment of, by the Saponi. mre. 47 
WyanpboT, Former habitat of.........--- 5 
VANDERA on the Guatari in 1569 ......... 80 
—, Reference by, to Issa ..........------- 68 | XUALA, Identification of, with Sara..... 57 
—, Mention of Sauxpaby----2-.2- .------ 65 
VERMILION, Trade of, by southern tribes. 31 | YAMASI, Expulsion of, from South Caro- 
Vina) Sos ee es ee 60 
WaccaMAW, General description of....-- 76 | — hostility....---------+++-2++se0-2s+222- 12, 59 
Wampum, Trade of, by southern tribes -. 31 | — War of 1715......-.---+-+++4-+-- 22-25. 35 
WApoo, a Cusabo tribe.........--..----2- 86 | — — Disruption of smaller tribes by. --- 65 
Wr, Indians exterminated by ...-.----. 6 | \-— Effect of, on the Congaree..-----..- 80 
WARFARE, see Hostility. | — —.——,—— Cusabo:......----.----.- 86 
—, Catawba and Cherokee .--.-.-..:-.-.- 70 | ————*#—— Etiwaw....-..--.-.------ 85 
ee OU OLS eee se eee eee eee 71 | ——— —,— — Samtee..-......-----..--- * 80 
oe ep (GSO Stace ee eae eee Seas ee 70 | ——,— — — — Sewee ...---------------- 79 
— of western tribes against Catawba. --. 72 | ——.——,— — Wateree....-----.------- 81 
W ARRENNUNCOCK forms of Sara..-.------- 7 | ——, Cape Fear indian participation in. - 67 
—+ Reteren certo tc ont cse ee ceee ee iso 64, 67 | +, — Bnoline 2a toa ee 64 
W ASKITENG, the last of the Tutelo.....-. 52 | — —, — — Sissipahaw in. -.-....--...----- 66 
WAT Coosa, a Cape Fear Indian.-..--...- 66 | —-—,—— Carolina tribes in........----.- 76 
WATEREE, General description of......-. go | YARDLEY, First mention of Eno and Shoc- 
—, Identity of, with early Spanish names. 70 coree by ..------------++-+++2 +e eres eee 62 
WATEREE CHICKANEE, Mention of, by YEOPIM indians, Habitat of .........----- : 7 
TEA CYr i ee eee Ee ee et nee ee 81 | YEsA", the Tutelo native name.....--.... 37 
WaxXHAW, General description of........ 74. | YESANG, Use of the term.......---...---- 35 
—habitatin 1701 Sos tee Se 70 | —, Identification of, with Tutelo........ 31 
—, Tradition of extermination of........- 69 | YUPWAUREMAU, a Woccon village....... 65 
= DANCE OL ss2e 5s SUS se ese tore es tees cwe 39 | 
—, Head-flattening among the.-.........-. 71 | ZEISBERGER, DaAvip, Early missionary 
WEAPEMEOC, Habitat-of ................- Ti WOTrk Of Jccck ceancedcuee ace Gane eee eee 50 


ADDENDA 


The following additional references to the population of the Carolina 
tribes are taken from Governor Johnson’s “Table of Indian Nations” 
in January, 1715—three months before the outbreak of the Yamasi 
war—published on page 94 of Rivers’ Early History of South Carolina. 
Owing to the author’s absence in the field they were not inserted in the 
proper place: Catapaw (Catawba), seven villages, 1,470 souls; Saraw, 
one village, 510 souls; Cape Fear, five villages, 200 souls; Santee, two 
villages, and Congeree, one village, together numbering 125 souls; 
Weneaw (Winyaw), one village, 106 souls. 

101 


on) 


a 
a an 
act beatat Mm 


hy. 
ia We 91h s/f 


- 
. ~ . 
a -<¢ 
“ . 
< py 
4 2 rt 
’ 
‘ 
4 ; 
- 
‘ > mA 
oe 
‘ 
. . 


SMITIISONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


ARCHEOLOGIC INVESTIGATIONS 


IN 


JAMES AND POTOMAC VALLEYS 


BY 


GERARD FOWKE 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1594 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


The work of the Bureau of American Ethnology is conducted under act of Con- 
gress ‘‘for continuing ethnologic researches among the American Indians under the 
direction of the Smithsonian Institution.” 

Two series of publications are issned.by the Bureau under authority of Congress, 
viz, annual reports and bulletins. The annual reports are authorized by concurrent 
resolution from time to time and are published for the use of Congress and the 
Bureau; the publication of the series of bulletins was authorized by concurrent 
resolution first in 1886 and more definitely in 1888, and these also are issued for the 
use of Congress and the Bureau. In addition, the Bureau supervises the publication 
of a series of quarto volumes bearing the title, ‘‘Contributions to North American 
Ethnology,” begun in 1877 by the United States Geographical Survey of the Rocky 
Mountain Region. 

These publications are distributed primarily by Congress, and the portions of the 
editions printed for the Bureau are used for exchange with libraries and scientific 
and educational institutions and with special investigators in anthropology who 
send their own publications regularly to the Bureau. 

The exchange list of the Bureau is large, and the product of the exchange forms 
a valuable ethnologic library independent of the general library of the Smithsonian 
Institution. This library is in constant use by the Bureau collaborators, as well as 
by other anthropologists resident in or visiting Washington. 

The earlier volumes of the annual reports and the first seven volumes of the ‘‘ Con- 
tributions to North American Ethnology” are out of print. 

Exchanges and other contributions to the Bureau should be addressed, 

‘ The DIRECTOR, 

Bureau of American Ethnology, 
_ Washington, D. C., 
(Oh Sez: 
w=23 


VOTE NTS 


Page 
imiroduetery note (by William H. Holmes). ...-.:2.-2. =-:.:...+--.---------- il 
UTED CITE ays a ee 8 a eco A 2 BRP gobo daka sek ee eae ee ae 9 
Per Anes and Me eMIPULATIOS oS io joe koea ee oe towed ee cece vee dees Meee on 9 
Gu REDE COUDING en are ne See eee aoe see an Se Ne Se eee ee ee Ss 9 
OLE DP TADS oe eS RE OE eee Dec ack abt ne Se nearest ee 10 
TORI E ELAR COUN Vee ae ee SR te ene Saintes ee ake Fe Oe ao ey 11 
TUNE TEST NPAVONE 5S eee Sea irc aA aie ap sk Se ae gage Ae Ne asa Re See Ue 11 
REIN LUN THTCR rge ea eene an h an  n eode Matny get eea  SaE c 12 
auNberlAangreOuUnby 2.52.5 ieee tee co) Saas weniace Btn nite ea BN ee aS ears 12 
JSUCR SI TEP CATTID Bee Oe pe ate ered Nf ts Beep ple A Fae a he ene sea ga ec eeeiene aden ee ONE 12 
VAUD CY NCTE ON Se aaa Patch et ests Lf ah ee te eee gee une Sm 12 
PUEDES EO UM WV oye. St erent St Meee ee en BS Ss aaa = Std 12 
Pe GASEM Oi cuNINC OM MD? aa 8 Soe. Sele ets ya Ae ee. en rae OY eo ee LY 14 
NEL SCOTB “CUB OR ea oe ts a Sete g Cicer i Pn en 14 
TETRIS 2 a0 bg) DEY ON TET y (5 6 (hale Nees ee i aon a ee i et ee eee 14 
SAR RON UCMG UA RTay, Seen oP ema re 2 Unc een Se eee ee eee es eres 3 15 
CMa ne COrcOUnt Vee Semon oie. fe 2 Ses oe ee oe Aa eee ace ospee ce oe 15 
SPIRE CUE E CUTAN Ng Sok Beep Seema eae SRS et ote ERR eee See eee 16 
1 BES ELE TINE 0 Se a Sealy A a era AR ACP ny a gO eS 16 
GON code S SA eh Bes See ae Se Oe Ue teen a ea 17 
MOOS S121 Cte Soran nce meet eee. ee SOR Eek ye Ree od! ye cig 23 
TE iey mR TON 2 sie ayy See aga et a as Rn eyes ot ay pe ae 23 
IDET TRO aT GENRE hack ee i een ie ene Nel series Bila le es Soe ed ee ne ee ae 24 
(lll 4 WNT RCOOTTIN GS, ee i tort ena oa eC ign ee ee ee eee 24 
PRUE INOS DUNO ae att eee a la OR oe eet eae esac bate wd os oe 24 
Vive ERA DRE PR ae RRS og a re SE eile on et 26 
LSHENTTS) COCOCUAN tp RSS SI RSA IE gS ee OH eRe a A ee 27 
"SUT FITS LEN ps FN eg ap a oe eg ee eel eee ene 27 
HOY CaRCeR ESS ChE 0 (0 ULET Clee = se ae en eae Sythe Site ye is Sie ee eres a 27 
Withrow mounds ...-......- SSS Sa ns ee ed A 28 
LEYS OUS Tei ea Ca ge ee x eS a Be en aa pic O sere a er 29 
OY TD TRS oe ee Se RS Sah ee Sa Ee ea 30 
Highland county; 222 oo s25.4~55 5 Be ey Se eA BET oS : 31 
CHARGE GREG Rees Sees Same aa Hee ean 9s oe ae a ee ee ae 31 
(NG wah ning Cnisee ase heen ce fon a eo eee oe ess 32 
The Piedmont country Se re ee ete Ae eRe el ae a 33 
RAG ROLCOURG ter eos oe eee ee ne ne Ee nk Se cielo tos blew ese 33 
VICTORS OT: GO ULI Ves ee ae te pee tre ne etn eens Mapas nce nee Ses chars. cee ciaies 36 
Culpeper cOUDLY.--- 3052-2 c-5- cee 4s Se Ce ae Le eee ee 3 
Mid el yay rag ce We oo 8, RS aoe eee ey ea ea Ge SEs ee 36 
ODL OL MUR EM eo ete oe Be re PLN wre Oa eyes Soe ets SSE See ee Se 37 


a JAMES AND POTOMACU ARCHEOLOGY BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 
Page 

Shenandoah and upper Pojomac valleys-------------2--. 5+ sa-eeeeeee ee eee 37 
Augusta: countby2.teaeeeecseeaewce ead o-oo = +s ocean a eee Ee eee 37 
Rockingham county ese sen. oso ce = os cece Zee eee eee ee eee ee 37 
Timberville:: sees sae. oct otees socics Binesesce see Coe he 3T 
Linville ee ees cece eeinte conics oo nace cone esc sere eee eee a 37 
Page) COUMUY Rca as eoramicc cisros<- ce cle Sens he ee eee eee ee 44 
Kite plated oo tances sn sa one ocb see cteee ye cue ece ses ee 44 
Price farm > 2... -- ~~ 520 peee sate epee ee ence oe 45 
hee cone tarm so: -- se. ssjctee wees see setae ye eee 45 
Philip Wong farm . .\. ge cove ete ee eels esis = See eee 45 
Brubaker farm... 22.2 cose. seek Se Dine oes See ee 46 
Gander place: .. .... 2-22 -ie tines Sere 2-5 o-oo ee = eee ee 47 
Bowerstarm .. 2. ecins we fees tee es a eee 47 
BUIMEE PlACe. 2 anaes ec en a eee ee cee Saaet slo ees 47, 
Veeny fai. oc. ene nee ae Ronee eer aos eee ee 48 
Rufiner, places: = Misc. ce eta en 2 eae eee ee ee 48 
Bauserman farm --. 2. -2- <)s2 2) ces see a a eo ee ne eee 48 
Deal farm ie 222 ss0.2 ons 2 2s wae hoeee oop noe = one 48 
Heury Bromback farm ..- 3.2.2.5. . jx-<seceense sss 5 552 49 
Cullers farm ooo...) en espe Ai ace cae ee nee ch saat re 53 
JA. Brumback fatm . 4.2.2.0 a6 otc e ee Se ea oo tae 54 
iMkegay Soni i ece = Slee see Soo pees= Saaaoben be seeacdenes dees - 322 ee 5d 
Riley wile. ec. sean a eee saecer Ae cee Ceara ee er 5D 
Keyser:farm 20 222% seca 222 geass fe ebiee se osecse be eee ee 57 
Mong: fat: 355.2020 58 oes setae. «3 eee ee ee ee 57 

lit lbh ees Rese oor oeo Bose odpE ce ab eeasee socbes Sac osesas costo soc ca 57 
PrintZ place's 7c: s5 os ee gases sate Oe ee eee ee 58 
Koontz placecc.-5-5 = 5 2Se ae perce oe eee eee = eee 58 
Shenandoah county =o. <c-re2 soe see eee ee eee ee Eee eee 58 
SH sl Olt eee se OBE eee coerce coos eso SseUaseeoudeoAbaotasness+----. 58 
Vicinity .of Newmarket:< 2.2 22.025 2 asco ee 59 
Woodstock. ©2220. octet eiicescntese snes eee eee bY) 
Warren <COUNLY:. 52. moan e oti nc A eel elem oie cin cece ee ete 60 
Olarké: COunty...cei:. = f= sae cies wciesed ee os eyse oe ele eie s ooece -oee 61 
Vicinity.of: Berryville 225.5 62s. 2222): oes, coos ee 61 
Wihite post oc) aos. eewisAe Sek een ose e nas Gees eee 62 
Washington county, Maryland --2 = 22< 225-25 2e- =. 2-2-2 63 
Jetterson county, West Virginian. 2.2 --22-- 22. ..- ecee ee eee eee 64 
Allegany connty, Maryland): 255-522-220. ¢2ces0 22 22a5)25- 202 eee 64 
Hampshireicounty, West Varoiniae -2-- 9-42-22 5- 242-52 ae ee 64 
Mineralscoumty, West Virginia. .-- 22 o-<--- -2.2-ce- 66 soe 66 
Granticounty, West Virginia): =. 2-2 co. .-e aes oo oe soe 66 
Hardy ‘county, West Virginia. .2-2.22.-2 .---. =< 5s - es eee 67 
Pendleton county, West Vireinin= 32252222 -o-> 2-2-4 --2 1-2 -e eee 69 
Conclusions. 22 2 2.022 222 ed dee eee ee ee Saas ee pee tee ee 70 
ING OX 6. 20:5 cise Soke ete oe ac Sieh oatatals en toate arate Sica to re Sie heen ata ee 15 


Figure 


ILLUSTRATIONS 


Carved bone from Gala, Botetourt county, Virginia. ---- Pc Rat ahs 3 
Shell disk from Gala, Botetourt county, Virginia......------------ 
Currier from Gala, Botetourt county, Virginia. ----.----.---------- 
Gorget from Dickinson mound, Bath county, Wineintye— enone 
Pipe from Williamsville, Virginia. -..-.--.-.----------+----+------ 
Pipe from Clover creek, Highland county, AVai Oe lrestert= an= 
7. Bone needle from Linville, Virginia. ..---..----------------------- 
8. Carved bone from Linville, Virginia. ------------------------------ 
9. Carved bone from Linville, Virginia. ...-..------------------------ 
10. Gorget from Philip Long mound, Page county, Vir oI ale s= a 
11. Unfinished pipe from Philip Long mound, Page county, Virginia. - 
12. Pipe from Philip Long mound, Page county, Vireginias. 32% 25 352.2% 
13. Spearhead from Deal mound, Page county, WAG KOAnIUE aie 3 ed00 cece 
14. Pipe from Henry Brumback mound, Page county, Wir oinia.2-'s--- 
15. Copper crescent from F. M. Huffman mound, Page county, Virginia. 
16. Pipe from F. M. Huffman mound, Page county, Waites ees soc ccc 
17. Paint cup from F. M. Huffman mound, Page county, Virginia..---- 


Sue ho 


or or or 
Doz 


or 
er) 


‘a 


ita ned Cv Pe ovale fem 
: : ter #45 P ‘ uP feet 
? J i) ea 7 ia) s Ub! 
, f é ‘ t: es ; Cl eres 
. * m4 
« ‘ : (eashig de 
or 
bs ‘ 1” 4 7 i wd j 


Nits) ter? 6h 


ste 


#¢Fi + 


. 
» 
i 
¢ 
a . 

a 

. 

- 
‘ 


re) : aM 


INTRODUCTORY NOTE 


By WILLIAM H. HOLMES 


In 1889 the Bureau of Ethnology began systematic archeologic explo- 
rations on the Atlantic slope of the United States, the initial work 
being in the tidewater territory of Maryland and Virginia. While 
this work ‘was in progress it became apparent that a clear understand- 
ing of the culture phenomena of this province required an examination 
of the Piedmont-Appalachian highland of Virginia, Maryland, and 
West Virginia. Accordingly, Mr Gerard Fowke, formerly associated 
with Dr Cyrus Thomas in the exploration of the great mound region 
of the Mississippi valley, was directed to take up the survey of this sec- 
tion. Early in May, 1891, [ joined Mr Fowke in a study of the lower 
valley of James river, the purpose being to give him a reasonable 
degree of familiarity with tidewater archeology before entering the 
highland. 

The summers of 1891 and 1892 (and until the summer of 1893) were 
devoted by Mr Fowke mainly to James, Shenandoah, and neighboring 
valleys, and the accompanying report embodies the principal results of 
his work. His explorations included all the territory within 5 miles of 
the James, on each side, from Cape Henry almost to the head of its 
ultimate tributaries; both sides of the Potomac from the mouth of the 
Monocacy to Cumberland; the entire area of every county drained by 
the Shenandoah and the South branch of the Potomac; all of Orange 
county, with portions of the adjoining counties, and several counties 
along the Appomattox and upper Roanoke. The report on the latter 
region, aS also that of the tidewater country, is reserved for another 
paper. <A brief sketch of particularly interesting features of the investi- 
gation was published in the American Anthropologist for January, 1893. 

Mr Fowke was instructed to seek means of identifying the tribes 
formerly occupying the. region and of demonstrating their relations to 
the tidewater peoples on the one hand and to the inhabitants of Ohio 
valley on the other. 

The results, though sufficiently definite on a number of points, fail 
to furnish satisfactory knowledge of the nationality of the former occu- 
pants. It is clear, however, that the people, even if not of the same 
stocks as those associated historically with the region, did not differ 

7 


x B 
8 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY ae ee 


greatly from them in habits, customs, or other features of culture, and 
the occupancy was confined apparently to a single period ending with 
the final expulsion of the red man 140 years ago. 

There is no evidence of long-continued occupancy of any section or site 
and the art remains do not appear to represent any localized culture 
development. On the west the art forms affiliate with those of Ohio 

valley and on the east with those of the tidewater country. On the 
north there are traces of Iroquoian influence and on the south a gra- 
dation into the southern Appalachian phases of art is shown. There 
is absolutely nothing in the archeologic evidence that is not sufficiently 
accounted for on the assumption that the highland districts of Maryland 
and the Virginias were overrun and at times occupied by the historic 
tribes associated with the general region. 


ARCHEOLOGIC INVESTIGATIONS IN JAMES AND 
POTOMAC VALLEYS 


By GERARD FOWKE 


INTRODUCTORY. 


In the following paper are given the results of a careful examination 
of the area drained by James and Potomac rivers, in Maryland, Vir- 
ginia, and West Virginia. Constant inquiry and diligent search were 
made at every point for aboriginal reinains of any character. No 
reference is made herein to scores of places at which such remains were 
reported to exist, but which failed to reveal anything falling within the 
seope of the work; only those localities are mentioned in which definite 
discoveries were ins: 

Along the James and Potomac cote a exist many village sites 
and cemeteries covered by a thickness of soil that has hitherto con- 
cealed them; these will gradually be disclosed through excavations, 
freshets, and other agencies, for the benefit of future explorers. 

Irom various causes a few mounds and other indications of aboriginal 
occupancy, which have been reported, could not be visited, but from the 
descriptions given there is no reason to believe that an examination of 
them would materially modify the conclusions derived from a study 
of those here treated. 


THE JAMES AND ITS TRIBUTARIES. 
POWHATAN COUNTY. 


At the first settlement of Virginia in 1607, James river, between 
tidewater and the Blue ridge, was claimed by the Monaecan, known 
later as the Tuskarora.!'’ They removed soon after to North Carolina, 
where they lived until 1712, when they migrated northward and were 
incorporated with the New York Indians as the Sixth Nation. 

In 1608 an expedition ascended the river 40 miles above the falls, 
discovering 2 eter en cbonek (or Mohemanco) and Mas- 


: Jefferson, Thomas, Notes on Vi irginia, p. 1 56. John Haywood (Nat. & Abor. Hist. 
of mennesdec' says that in 1730 a part of the Iroquois were at the foot of the moun- 
tains between Tennessee and North Carolina, the king’s town less than a day’s 
journey from the foot of the mountains. He also identifies them withthe Monacan. 


9 


10 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY See 


sinacak;! the former, the outpost or most easterly settlement of the 
Monacan, was 17 miles above the falls at Richmond, on the southern 
side of the river, near Huguenot springs. The old name of the town, 
though in a modified form, is retained by the railway station of Manakin, 
opposite that point. The only evidences now remaining are the flint 
chippings, which are abundant; all else that may have existed has been 
destroyed by more than two centuries of constant cultivation. On the 
northern side of the river a great many arrowpoints and spearheads 
are to be found; and on the bottom Jands many chips and unfinished 
implements occur. Nearly all these are made of quartz or quartzite, 
though there are some pieces of worked flint among them. It is possi- 
ble that in the lowlands, subject to overflow, the silt deposited by floods 
has covered from sight many temporary camping places. At Boscobel, 
4 miles above the old village, a ledge of rock crosses the river, forming a 
natural dam, with long pools of deep water above and below, which 
are noted fishing places; arrowheads and pottery fragments are abun- 
dant in the vicinity. Near the dam a steatite pipe and some frag- 
ments of pottery were found about 30 inches below the surface, one 
piece of the pottery having the impression of a net or web on the inside; 
no bones were with or near these specimens. 

The farm of Dr Blair Burwell, 2 miles north of Tobaccoville, has 
been known for two centuries as ‘‘ Indian camp,” from a supposed abo- 
riginal settlement. Various depressions were long pointed out as 
places where the Indians had dug holes in which to keep warm. Some 
of these, judging from the description, may have been hut-rings or sites 
for lodges; but most of them seemed to be more like trenches, extend- 
ing sometimes nearly or quite 100 yards and being from 20 to 40 feet in 
width. They resembled gullies or shallow ravines, except that they 
lad no outlet in any direction, the ends terminating abruptly. All 
these depressions have been obliterated by cultivation. A great num- 
ber of arrowpoints and spearheads, with a few fragments of rough 
pottery, have been found in the adjacent fields. It is not impossible 
that this is the site of the Massinacak of Smith, although he leaves 
the exact locality in doubt. 


AMELIA COUNTY. 


There is an extensive steatite quarry on the farm of John B. Wig- 
gins, 34 miles east of Amelia court-house. It has been thoroughly 
explored by Mr F. H. Cushing. 

Several mica mines have been opened within a mile of the court- 
house. The miners report that in digging they sometimes discover 
small piles of mica which have been detached from the rock and heaped 
together. These pieces, usually of poor quality, as if rejected by the 
workers, are doubtless from the aboriginal excavations, as they lie 


‘Smith, John, History of Virginia, London, 1629, (reprint Richmond, 1819), vol. i, 
p. 196. 


eee HUMAN REMAINS ON ELK ISLAND 1 


beneath several feet of accumulated earth, and there is no tradition 
of early mica mining in this section by the whites. 


GOOCHLAND COUNTY. 
ELK ISLAND. 


The upper end of Elk island is 24 miles below Columbia; the lower 
end 7 miles farther down. The widest part, which is a mile across, is 
a little more than 2 miles from the upper point, and the island contains 
about 1,200 acres of very fertile soil. The southeri branch or channel of 
the river is much wider than the northern branch. The entire island 
was submerged in 1870, and a large part of it is flooded every year, 
though much remains bare except in the highest freshets. It is gradu- 
ally increasing in size; a thick growth of maples along the water’s 
edge breaks the current from the banks and favors the accumulation 
of sediment, which forms lower terraces and has covered with many 
feet of mud any remains which may have been exposed by caving in of 
_the banks before timber began to grow. The same cause is raising 
the general level; within the last fitty years 8 or 10 feet of soil have been 
deposited on the lower portions. 

There are very few gullies or bare spots along the banks; but at 
nearly every place along both sides, for more than 2 miles from the head, 
at which the ground could be examined at all, the usual indications 
of Indian occupancy are visible. When the ground on ridges is plowed 
the same indications may be seen. Skeletons have been found in three 
places—on the southern side of the island, near the ferry landing; on 
the northern side, just opposite the first, at some distance from the bank ; 
and on the edge of the bank nearly a mile below the latter. At the last 
an extensive washout had taken place, and many bones were afterward 
found in the bank, as well as lying at the base where they had fallen. 
This bank has been sloped down and trees cut to cover it, and bushes 
and weeds allowed to grow thickly over it, so that nothing can now be 
seen. No excavations can be made, as a very small hole might give the 
river a start, during floods, that would cause the loss of many acres. 
The second burial place mentioned was discovered by plowing several 
inches deeper than usual. Many bones were unearthed, but as the 
ground has since filled 5 or 6 feet through the agency of freshets, 
explorations are impracticable. 

Smith! says the chief habitation of the Monacan was at Rasauweak ; 
on his map this settlement is shown on the point within the two 
branches of the river. Jefferson,” also, says their principal town was at 
the forks of the James.’ But the point of land between the two rivers 
is irregular, infertile, rather difficult of access, and nothing is found to 


'History of Virginia, op. cit., vol. 1, p. 134. 

2Table of Indian tribes in Virginia, in his Notes, op. cit. 

3 That portion of the James above the mouth of the Rivanna was formerly called 
the Fluvanna. 


12 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY -~ PIRGEGoE 


Show that it was ever occupied by Indians. On the other hand, the 
island is well protected from assault, the soil is all alluvium, the rae 
along each side at the upper end is fully as high as any of the bottom 
land on either side of the river, and many specimens of steatite pot- 
tery, some rough, others tolerably well finished, have been found on the 
island, whereas such are extremely rare elsewhere in the vicinity. The 
villages near here, to be mentioned presently, may have been perma- 
nent, or only temporary, but their sites were in no way preferable, 
being either surrounded or submerged in every considerable freshet. 
Altogether it is very probable that the main town of the Monacan was 
on Elk island. 


CALEDONIA, 


A steatite quarry showing Indian work may be found a mile from 
the village of Caledonia, which is‘about 6 miles from Columbia. It has 
been examined by Mr Cushing. 


CUMBERLAND COUNTY 
MAYO FARM. 


On the farm of Dr Edward Mayo, opposite Columbia, the bottom is 
about 300 yards in width, and like nearly all the bottom land in the 
vicinity 1s highest near the river, In 1870 this ridge was greatly eroded, 
and many skeletons were visible after the water had subsided. No trace 
of them now remains, and the ground is so torn into depressions and 
heaped into minor ridges by that and later floods, and so disturbed by 
cultivation, that it is impossible to determine, otherwise than by carry- 
ing along a series of trenches, where any burials have been made. That 
it was a village site is sufficiently proven by the great quantities of 
broken and burned stones, quartz chips and spalls, and broken pottery, 
both of clay and steatite, scattered about on the surface. 


HOOPER ROCK, 


On the south side of the river, 2 miles below Columbia, is a ledge or 
cliff, known as Hooper rock. It contains a vein or stratum of steatite 
which does not, however, seem to have been worked. In the woods, 
somewhat less than a mile back of this, is an aboriginal quarry, where 
many broken or unfinished vessels have been found. it is covered with 
such a dense growth of small trees, underbrush, and vines, that an 
examination is impossible until the ground is cleared. 


FLUVANNA COUNTY. 


The only aboriginal remains examined in detail in Fluvanna county 
were those found in the vicinity of Columbia. 

Columbia is situated at the mouth of the Rivanna, on the lower or 
left bank. On the point opposite, between the Rivanna and James, the 


OGY 
Baa REMAINS NEAR COLUMBIA 13 


hill land extends almost t9 the junction of the two streams, and the 
narrow lowlands are subject to overtlow. 

Three miles above Columbia, on the farm of Major Allen Galt, was a 
large area along the river bank, several feet higher than the ground near 
the hill, and so sandy as not to be worth cultivating. This sand bank 
may have been due to the great flood of 1776, at which time much sedi- 
ment was deposited in the river bottoms, but it had never been entirely 
covered by water since the whites occupied the country until the freshet 
of 1870. When the water receded it was found that fully 4 feet of the 
surface had been removed, revealing not less than 40 or 59 * fireplaces” 
scattered at intervals, generally 30 to 40 feet apart. Lying among the 
ashes and burned earth, or scattered close about, were many burned 
stones, fragments of pottery, animal bones, mostly broken, some of them 
calcined, arrowheads, great quantities of chips and broken arrows, and 
other indications of a former Indian town. Most of the arrowheads 
were of quartz, a few being of flint or crystal. The remains were 
abundant, but nearly all were carried away by local collectors. No 
steatite pottery was found, nor any earthenware with handles. 

Seattered between the fire beds were the graves, readily distin- 
guished by the darker color of the earth. They were circular, or nearly 
so, about 3 feet in diameter, and none of them more than 18 or 20 inches 
deep. One contained the skeletons of a woman and a child, one of a man 
and a woman, a few those of two women, but most of them disclosed the 
remains of only one individual in each. . 

The fire beds were 6 or 8 inches thick, and several feet in diameter. 
If the fires were made in huts or wigwams, the latter were far enough 
apart to allow considerable space around each one, the burials being 
made in the open spaces between. More than 25 graves were carefully 
examined, but no relics were found in any of them; if anything had 
been buried with the bodies, it was of a perishable nature. In most of 
them the bones crumbled upon exposure; only one skull was taken out 
intact. Human bones were found nearly half a mile below the cem- 
etery later in the season; but there was nothing about them to indicate 
that the place in which they were found was originally a burial ground, 
or even that the bones were near their original position; they may have 
been washed there. 

The area denuded by the freshet extended far beyond the limits 
of the village site; in fact the whole bottom was bared to a greater or 
lesser extent. Since this occurrence the ground has been inundated 
three or four times; this, with constant cultivation, has destroyed all 
semblance of definite order or arrangement. <A great amount of 
burned stones, human and animal bones, quartz chips, spalls, and unfin- 
ished pieces, and numerous fragments of pottery are strewn in confusion 
over the surface. 

Dr Gay, who assisted in these investigations, describes the skulls 
as being flat at the occiput and having high or pointed parietals, the 


14 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


sides sloping like the roof of a house. There is no record or tradition 
of an aboriginal settlement here, unless it be the ‘chief town of the 
Monacans,” referred to in Jefferson’s Notes and Smith’s History; and 
as Stated above, the evidence is in favor of that settlement having been 
situated on [1k island. 

On a lofty hill near Dr Gay’s residence, 5 miles northwest of Colem- 
bia, a great many arrowheads and a few celts or hatchets have been 
found. It seems to have been a workshop, as chips, etc., are very 
abundant; but no traces of fire beds, pottery, burned stones, or other 
evidences of former domiciliary occupancy have ever been discovered. 

In the first bottom below Columbia the surface near the river bank is 
several feet higher than toward the hill. The elevation is about half 
a mile long, with an average width of 50 feet. Pottery fragments, 
burned stones, implements of quartzite or flint, mostly rude or unfin- 
ished, and chippings, occur sparsely. Some finely-worked arrowheads 
or knives have been found, as well as 2 drills and a leaf-shape imple- 
ment of yellow jasper 3 inches long. 

Three skeletons have been exhumed at this place; it is learned that 
they were buried 8 or 10 feet apart, extended, and about 30 inches below 
the present surface. Nothing apparently had been interred with the 
bodies. 


BUCKINGHAM COUNTY. 


Three miles below Scottsville, on James river, were several so-called 
‘Indian pottery kilns.” Burned stones were arranged in small circles, 
on and about which were many large pieces of pottery, some with legs, 
others with handles. On one piece, consisting of half a pot of about 
2 quarts capacity, were a handle and 2 legs. It was probably the fire- 
place of a party that camped on the river bank. 


NELSON COUNTY. 


TRAILS AND HABITATIONS, 


The Indian trar{ from the Shenandoah valley, through Rockfish gap, 
crossed James river at an island near Norwood. For 5 miles below the 
river there is a succession of pools and rapids, with many large rocks in 
the channel which are covered only in time of high water. The hills 
on the south with scarcely an exception reach to the water, there being 
only a few narrow strips of level ground. On the north the bottom 
lands are wide and continuous. 

The only indications of Indian occupancy on the southern side in this 
vicinity are opposite the island. On the northern side, however, aborigi- 
nal remains may be found on every farm. They are most abundant on 
the lands of Mr Alexander Brown and Mr Russell Robinson, 3 miles 
below Norwood. . 

The floods of 1870 and 1877 disclosed numerous small deposits, prob- 
ably more than 200 in all, containing burned stones, pieces of pottery, 


ya oe aes REMAINS IN NELSON COUNTY 15 


arrowheads, and great quantities of quartz chips. They are in nearly 
straight rows, from 25 to 50 feet apart, and extend for several hundred 
yards along the river. There-was close similarity in the piles; they 
varied in size, but on an average each contained half a bushel of 
burned stones, a double handful of clay or steatite pottery fragments, 3 
or 4 well-made arrowheads, a dozen rough or unfinished ones, and prob- 
ably a quart of chips and broken points—nearly all of quartz, a few 
being of quartzite, flint, or argillite. Spearheads are rare; most of the 
arrows and knives are small. Although the pieces of pottery are 
numerous, none show any trace of iegs or handles: A number of side- 
notched axes, hoes, adze-hke celts for hide dressing or for working 
steatite, and an unfinished steatite pipe were found. All these things 
point to a village cr considerable size, but a most careful search of the 
whole area, especially along the river bank and in the numerous gullies, 
failed to reveal a bone of any description. 

Similar sites exist opposite Greenway and near Gladstone; arrow- 
heads and pottery are found, but no bones. 


STEATITE QUARRY. 


Four miles from Norwood, beginning about 100 yards above where 
the “Tye river road” crosses Cedar creek, is a very large ledge of stea- 
tite. It gradually becomes more siliceous toward either side until it 
merges into the sandstone. Bowlders, some of them as large as a 
freight car, project above the surface; slabs 10 feet or more in length 
have been quarried. The outcrop extends more than half a mile, the 
creek cutting across it and making a considerable ravine. There are 
observable several slight depressions where it is possible work has been 
done by the Indians, but every place is so covered with leaves and 
litter and so overgrown with brush and vines that it would be necessary 
to clear the ground thoroughly in order to determine whether or not 
these depressions are of Indian origin. Pieces of steatite from 2 to 50 
pounds in weight cover the surface; very few of them show indications 
of having been worked, and they may be only blocks broken from pro- 
jecting points.! 

ROCKBRIDGE COUNTY. 


The Indian trail from Shenandoah valley to southern Virginia, which 
crossed the James at this point, passed over the mountains through a 
depression about a mile above. In this gap a small pile of stones was 
examined a few years ago, but no remains of any sort were discovered. 
Such mounds frequently occur at the highest points on a trail; they 
seem to have served as guide marks or for a kindred purpose. 


'The hills beginning just above Norwood and continuing to the Blue ridge were 
formerly known as the “ Broken country,” and emigration, which early reached to 
their eastern border, advanced no farther for more than fifty years, or until the 
Indians finally abandoned that region as a hunting and fishing resort. 


16 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


Tradition says an Indian town was situated on the right bank of 
North river, opposite the gap; but very few relics, except some chips of 
quartzite, and none of the usual indications of a village site, have ever 
been found in the bottoms. A mound of peculiar form near by, whiclr 
locally has been supposed to cover the remains of the ancient inhab- 
itants, is of natural formation. 

The Indians abandoned this region soon after the battle of Point 
Pleasant; none ever returned, except a few small hunting parties, who 
never tarried in the vicinity more than a few days. 

On the farm of Jacob Horn, near the junction of Hayes and Walker 
creeks, 2 miles north of Rockbridge baths, is a mound that has been 
partially excavated several times by various parties, and many skele- 
tons and relics have been taken out. The top of the mound is white 
with fragments of human bones that have been thrown out or exposed 
by plowing. The owner refuses to allow further excavation. 

At the summit of a pass through North mountain, between Lexington 
and Rockbridge Alum, are several stone piles, none of them more than 
2 or 3 feet high. They are commonly supposed to be Indian graves, 
but are probably only trail marks similar to those previously described, 
as a trail formerly passed through here. 

A mile south of Goshen, at the Victoria iron furnace, a dozen or more 
skeletons were disclosed, all extended on the back. There was nothing 
to indicate whether they were the remains of whites or Indians. 

Near the same place, in making a road, the skeletons of a man and 
boy were found 4 feet beneath the surface; the skull of the latter had 
been pierced by a bullet. 

A inile north of Goshen, on the Big Calfpasture, one skeleton was 
found in the river bottom. ‘The finder described it as “sitting up,” 
meaning, probably, that it was doubled and lying on the side. No 
relics were with it, and no other skeletons have ever been found there, 

Four miles below Goshen the Big Calfpasture and the Little Calf- 
pasture unite, forming North river. Ualf a mile from their junction, 
equidistant from either, on a plateau from 40 to 60 feet above the 
low bottom, on the estate of Mr Bell, are two mounds, both of which 
have been opened.- Before being disturbed the first was about 4 feet 
high and 30 feet in diameter; from it were taken, according to the 
description furnished, ‘a lot_of arrowheads, some mica, 2 or 3 pipes, 
some copper in small squares as thick as a quarter of a dollar, and a 
good many beads, some looking like bone, others resembling amber.” 
The other mound is 2 feet high and 40 feet in diameter, and neither 
human nor art remains were found in it. 


BOTETOURT COUNTY. 
BUCHANAN. 


Opposite the upper end of the town of Buchanan, where the bank 
had caved down and the loose soil had washed away, there was a large 


TWEE REMAINS AT GALA 17 


mass of burned stone, in and close around which were fragments of 
pottery, arrowheads, a celt, a rough or unfinished ax, several worked 
stones which were evidently intended for celts or axes, and many 
chips of quartz, quartzite, flint, and chalcedony. These apparently 
marked the site of a single firebed. 


GALA. 


At this place two creeks, whose courses across the bottom land are 
nearly parallel, flow into the James within 300 yards of each other. 
Most of the land between the creeks is about 20 feet higher than the 
bottom lands above or below them, or on the opposite side of the 
river, and is terminated at the river by a cliff of shale, the remnant of 
an ancient island. The river at this point flows almost due south, 
making an abrupt turn westward just below. Opposite the bluff, and 
for half a mile farther up, the river is from 10 to 20 feet in depth. 
Before dams were built, shad were caught in great quantities ; bass 
are abundant now. The rugged mountains (Rich Patch has for miles 
an elevation of 2,000 to 2,700 feet above the river) still harbor many 
deer, and bear are faquently seen, while smaller game is abundant. 
The low lands yield from 60 to 90 bushels of corn to the acre. The water 
of the creeks, being from mountain springs, is very clear and cold, and 
is used by many in preference to well water. It is an ideal place for 
an Indian settlement. 

In making a railway cut between the creeks, about 200 skeletons 
were taken out, with many of which were pottery, pipes, beads, and 
other articles. Remains of the same character have been exhumed 
from postholes, cellars, and other excavations in the vicinity. 

For various reasons careful examination was possible on only one 
side of the railway, along a strip 180 feet in length, with an average 
breadth of 20 feet. 

A firm subsoil of yellow clay underlies a loose, porous soil, almost black 
in color; at the northern end of the area dug over it is from 2 to3 feet 
deep, but soon decreases to a thickness of 18 to 30 inches for about 80 
feet, then gradually becomes thinner until within 30 feet of the other 
end, where it is not more than 6 inches deep. This difference is due to 
surface erosion; the clay holds practically the same level. 

Scattered throughout the black earth, from the surface to the under- 
lying clay, were thousands of pottery fragments; mortar stones; celts; 
grooved axes; mullers; clay pipes; fragments of steatite pipes with — 
flat stems; arrowpoints, mostly triangular; flint scrapers; drills; bone 
beads; awls, needles, or perforators, made of the leg bones of deer, 
wild turkey, and other animals and fowls, as well as from other 
bones broken and dressed; quantities of periwinkle shells, probably 
used for food, many having the points broken off; bones of various 
animals, birds, and fishes, showing evidence of having been burned or 
boiled, or occurring in their natural state; charred corn on the cob or 

BULL. W=23 


18 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY [eRoneee 


shelled; long, slender bones, partly cut in two at different points, 
intended to be made into beads; bone fishhooks; mussel shells; smooth 
pebbles, which may have been used as pottery polishers; charcoal; 
burned stones; flint chips and spalls in great quantities. No effort was 
made to keep an exact record of all these things; they were found at 
random, sometimes sparsely, sometimes abundantly, but always as if 
lost or thrown aside, 

There can be no doubt that all this loose black deposit is due to the 
gradual accumulation of such refuse as is always characteristic of an 
Indian village. There is no other way of accounting for the distribu- 
tion of the numerous articles found in it. 

Scores of pits of different depths were found, some extending only a 
few inches into the clay, others with a depth of 4 feet or more. They 
were filled with earth like that in the stratum above, mingled with 
ashes, charcoal, burned stone, broken bones (charred and boiled), frag- 
ments of pottery, and implements, such as occur in similar pits else- 
where. They were evidently intended only for culinary purposes. To 
save wood, or to avoid the discomfort arising from proximity to a large 
tire, a hole was dug, a fire made in it, and wood enough heaped on to 
make a thick bed of coals when it had burned down. Then the food 
was placed within and the hole carefully covered and left undisturbed 
until the cooking was completed. No order or arrangement was appar- 
ent in the contents of these fire pits, nor were they at all uniform in 
size. it is singular that so many should exist within a limited space, 
as it would be much easier to clean the loose material out of one in use 
than to dig another in the tough clay. 

Some of the skeletons were close to the surface, others in the black 
earth at various distances above its bottom line; most of them, how- 
ever, were in Shallow graves that extended from 8 to 15 inches into the 
clay. 

Work was commenced at the northern end of the section examined. 
During the first day 3 barbecue holes were found. The first was very 
irregular in outline, from 6 to 7 feet across and extending only a few 
inches into the clay. A portion had been removed by the railway exca- 
vation. There was nothing in it except some fragments of the skull of 
avery young child. 

The second hole,' 33 feet across, was also shallow, being only about 
30 inches deep. It contained a bone needle 8 inches long, and 2 or 3 
unworked bones of the same kind lying together, a flat bone piercer, 
and the carved object shown in figure 1. All these were scattered in 
the earth above the bottom of the hole. ? 


' A)though the word ‘‘ barbecue” is omitted, it may be assumed that all holes men- 
tioned were designed for roasting large animals whole. 

*Unless otherwise specified the objects mentioned as having been found in these 
holes were not on the bottom, nor apparently placed with any intention of hiding or 
concealing them, but were in such position as to indicate that they were carelessly 
thrown in at any time. When found in graves the case is different. 


ARCHEOLOGY EXPLORATIONS AT GALA 19 


FOWKE 


On the second day 4 holes were found, one 45 feet deep, the others 
shallow, all about 35 feet in diameter. Two celts were -found in the 
larger hole and two in one of the others. 

The third hole opened was somewhat different in form from any other. 
It had been dug to a depth of 55 feet, with a diameter of 4 feet. The 
bottom was covered with a layer of clean ashes one-fourth of an inch 
thick; resting on these were several pieces of a pot which, when entire, 
would have contained between 2 and 3 gallons, and a bone partly divided 
at several points for making beads. The hole was circular for 2 feet 
above the bottom. It then extended 6 feet toward one side, making the 
upper portion 10 feet long and 4 feet across, the entire bottom being as 
smooth and level as a board floor. It contained much pottery, bone, 
and rock, all burned and broken into small fragments. 

On the third day 4 holes were opened, 3 of them small and shallow. 
In one was a polished bone fishhook. The largest was 4 feet deep. Just 
eastward from it, with 4 inches of clay separat- 
ing them, was a grave, the bottom of which 
was 3 feet from the surface. The skeleton was 
compactly folded and lay on the left side, 
with the skull toward the north. The bones 
rested against the hard clay on every side, as 
if the body had been forcibly pushed down. 
A large deer-bone perforator lay near the 
chest. Not a single bone of the right hand 
or wrist could be found, though nearly all the 
bones of the other hand were well preserved. 

On the fourth day 2 shallow holes and a 
large bed of ashes lying a few inches above 
the clay were examined. On the fifth day a 
similar ash bed; and on the sixth day 7 holes, 
none of them deep, and a large ash bed, were 
unearthed. 

On the seventh day one deep and 3 shallow 
holes were found, with the usual contents— 
pottery, bones, and stones burned and broxen. 
A bone fishhook was in one of the holes. -One grave was found which 
contained a doubled skeleton lying on the left side, with head toward 
the east. The remains rested on the clay, which had not been disturbed 
in burying the body. Three celts were lying together at the waist; 4 
bone needles were also found in the earth about it. A bone tube, 
dressed at both ends, lay by one femur. The bones were much decayed 
and broken. 

On the eighth day 4 holes, 3 to 34 feet deep,’ were examined, in one 
of which portions of a bear skull were found. About a foot below the 


Fic. 1.—Carved bone from Gala, 
Botetourt county, Virginia. 


‘Most of the holes were 35 to 34 feet in diameter. This measure is implied when no 
other is given. 


7 r , BUREAU OF 
20 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY ETHNOLOGY 


surface, loose in the earth, was found a charred ear of corn, and a foot 
away a quantity of shelled corn. 

Ninth day; 3 shallow holes and 2 from 4 to 43 feet deep were found, 
in one of which was a bear skull. Two graves also were found, about 
3 feet apart. Both skeletons were folded, rested on right side, with 
head toward the east. ‘The femur of one was 16 inches long; the bones 
were very soft. Nothing was buried withit. The skull of the other was 
small, rather long and narrow and broken transversely across the top 
in a way that could scarcely result from the pressure of the earth. The 
fracture seemed due to a blow, but the inner plate was not depressed or 
shattered, the fracture extending through the bone in a sharp, well 
defined line. All the molars were gone from the lower jaw and the 
sockets entirely closed. The femur measured 174 inches in length. 

On the tenth day 2 holes were found, one 6 feet deep and 4 feet 
across, containing an arrowhead and a needle, the other 4 feet in depth 
and the same in diameter, with a large amount of ashes and charcoal, 
many animal bones, the entire skeleton of a small wolf, and about 40 
burned stones ranging from 2 to 50 pounds in weight, besides scores of 
smaller ones. 

The first skeleton found, that of a child about 4 years of age, was 
doubled, and lay on the right side. It rested on the clay at a depth of 
18 inches, and nearly 150 periwinkle and Marginella shells accompanied 
it. The next skeleton, about 2 feet east of the first, was that of an 
adult, lying in the same position, with the head southward. It was 3 
feet under the surface. A bear tusk lay 3 or 4 inches north of the 
sacrum, and a bone and a shell bead lay near the head. 

Just east of the child’s skeleton was that of a woman who had eyi- 
dently died in childbirth. In the pelvic cavity were found an infant’s 
bones fully as large as some of those separately buried. The body was 
extended on the back, with head toward the east. The skull lay with 
the vertex up, the face turned southward, the displacement being 
doubtless caused by settling of the earth. The legs were drawn up 
until the feet were near the hips. The knees were a little north and the 
feet a little south of the line of the spine; they may have been placed 
thus or may have assumed the position after burial. Around the neck 
were more than a hundred small, slender, tubular shell beads, some 
stuck together end toend. Above the feet, with 8 inches of earth inter- 
vening, was a cobblestone about 40 pounds in weight. 

A foot south of the head of this skeleton, in the same grave, was a 
small part of the upper jawbone of another individual. No other 
human bones were found with it; but as it lay at the edge of the rail- 
way cut, it is possible the remainder of the skeleton had been previ- 
ously dug out and the earth had fallen over this portion. 

Near the second skeleton, and a little south of a line from it to the 
child’s skeleton, was a single lower jaw, sound and nearly perfect, 
though many of the teeth had fallen out. Some fragments of the 


ARCHEOLOGY) HUMAN REMAINS FROM GALA 21 


bones of a quadruped were found near it, but no other trace of human 
bones were seen. 

The skeleton of a very young infant also was found; the crowns of 
the teeth had not yet reached the surface of the bone. About 20 
Marginella shells and a number of periwinkles were with it. The body 
was folded, rested on the right side, with head toward the east. A 
bowlder about 50 pounds in weight lay above its feet, with 10 inches of 
earth between. 

The first skeleton found on the eleventh day was lying in the small- 
est space possible; the grave, dug a foot into the clay, could barely 
contain it. The body lay on the right side, with head toward the east; 
the back nearly in a straight line, not bent toward the knees, as in most 
of the skeletons exhumed. The fibule and tibizw were all in contact, 
though the heels were not drawn up against the pelvis, being 5 or 6 
inches from it. The femurs measured 174 inches in length. About 20 
beads, with Marginella shells, and small disks were among the leg 
bones, possibly having been used as legging ornaments. Under the 
pelvis were twelve elliptical shell ornaments, from 14 to 2 inches long, 
the shorter diameter about two-thirds the 
longer, made from the harder part of a conch 
or other large shell, and perforated length- 
wise (figure 2). On the bottom of the grave, 
between the knees and the elbows, were four 
finely worked chalcedony arrowpoints; a thin 
polished celt with a sharp edge; a bone pol- 
isher of uniform diameter, blunt at the ends; 
5 needles or perforators; 4 bone fishhooks; 
and a dozen perforated scapulie of some very 
small animal. With the bones of the forearms and wrists were 650 
Marginella shells; around and under the skull were 925 beads, most 
of them long, slender, tubular pieces. The lower jaw held a quantity 
of earth, in which many beads were packed. At the top of the head 
were 2 or 3 flint cores, a number of chips and spalls, and several per- 
forated seapulie. 

Immediately west of this skeleton lay another, extended on the back, 
with head toward the east; the legs drawn up until the thighs were 
fully flexed, and pushed over to the left until the knee was almost ona 
level with the spine. The left humerus lay along the side, the forearm 
under the pelvis; the right forearm was between the pelvis and the 
femurs. In one of the dorsal vertebrae was imbedded a flint arrowpoint, 
which had penetrated the abdominal cavity from the left side; the bone 
had made no new growth about the injured part. The femur was 16 
inches long. With the exception of the single arrowpoint mentioned 
no art rémains were found with this skeleton. 

Three skeletons of children not more than 2 years of age were next 
exhumed, the heads toward the east; bones almost completely decayed. 
Near them was a hole 3 feet deep and 44 feet in diameter; and just 


F 1a. 2.—Shell disk from Gala, 
Botetourt county, Virginia. 


x : UREAU.OF 
22 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY tis eS 


east of this a skeleton of a child about 14 years of age was found. It 
lay on the left side, with head toward the east; a portion of the lower 
jaw lay several inches to one side, but there was no trace of the skull. 
As the bones were only a few inches beneath the surface, the remainder 
of the skull probably had been destroyed by the plow. 

On the twelfth day 6 holes were found; 4 near together, each about 3 
feet deep, yielded nothing; one, 4 feet in both dimensions, contained 
a large perforated mussel shell and a broken scraper or currier made 
from the leg bone of a deer (figure 3). Another, nearly 6 feet deep, and 
4 feet across, had near the middle a stratum of ashes about 2 feet thick. 

The first skeleton found lay on the right side, head toward the east; 
the skull had been destroyed by the plow. One tibia also was broken, 
the ends being about an inch apart, and the pieces, which were firmly 
embedded in undisturbed earth, not in the same line. <A broken needle 
was with the skeleton. 

Fragments of 2 other skeletons were found near the first; of one, only 
a portion of the skull remained; of the other, there was no trace of the 
skull. 


Fic. 3.—Currier from Gala, Botetourt county, Virginia. 


The fourth and fifth skeletons lay on their right sides, with the heads 
toward the east. One had with it a perforated shell disk with a shell 
bead stuck in the hole. , 

Close to the last hole was the sixth skeleton, lying on the back, head 
southward, legs drawn up close to the body and turned to the left. The 
skull lay face upward, the front part having been torn away by the plow. 
A large bone fishhook, rudely finished, lay by or under the chin, The 
femur was 184 inches long. 

The next skeleton was that of a very small child; only a few broken 
bones remained. A number of Jong, slender shell beads were buried 
with it, but so badly decayed that only 12 could be recovered. 

A few pieces of bone belonging to another skeleton were found, but 
not enough to ascertain how it had been placed. 

These 8 skeletons were lying on the clay which was nowhere, except 
in the holes, more than a foot below the surface; consequently they 
were almost entirely decayed and their position was difficult to deter- 
mine, 

The twelfth day a hole was found on the edge of the railway cut; most 
of it had been removed by that excavation. In the portion remaining 
was a considerable quantity of broken pottery. Two other holes, each 
about 3 feet deep and 4 feet in diameter, also contained some pottery. 


Pore HUMAN REMAINS AT GALA 23 


The first skeleton was doubled, rested on the right side, with the head 
toward the east, near the surface. The bones were very soft. No art 
remains were found with it. 

The next skeleton, which also was doubled, was found in the clay, 
resting on the right side, with the head toward the south. The back 
was straight, and the head bent back until the face was turned directly 
southward and pressed firmly against the hard wall. Two. well- 
finished arrows, a rough knife, some flint chips, and a bone needle, with 
the bones of the hands, lay beneath the skull. 

The third skeleton lay only a few inches below the surface; its posi- 
tion could not be ascertained, except that the head was southward. 
Half of the lower jaw was discovered; all the bicuspids and molars had 
been lost and the bone entirely closed. 

The fourth skeleton was 18 inches below the surface, doubled, on 
left side, head toward the east; 14 long bone beads were around the 
neck. 7 

The fifth and last skeleton was at the bottom of a hole 3 feet deep; 
it lay on the right side, head eastward, back straight. The tibiz were 
much enlarged and roughened apparently by disease; one humerus and 
a few of the smaller bones were slightly affected in the same way.! 


WOOD ISLAND. 


Before the great freshets of 1870 and 1877, skeletons were sometimes 
exposed by the caving of the eastern bank of a large island in James 
river near Baldwin station; but since that time none have been seen. 
As the surface was much denuded, it is probable that any bones which 
may have remained at the time of the flood were carried away by the 
water. 

On the western side of the island are some indications of a village site. 
There were formerly piles of burned stones, apparently sites of camp- 
fires, beneath which it is claimed skeletons were found. Only two such 
piles remained ; excavations under and around them to a depth of 5 
feet showed that the earth had never before been disturbed. 

Graves formerly existed along both banks of the western branch of the 
river; but the caving of the banks has extended past the line at which 
they occurred, and consequently none have been seen for several years. 

In the bottom land on the western side of the river are many spots 4 
to 5 feet across and about 6 inches thick, very irregular in outline, where 
the sandy earth is of a bright red color. They are called “fireplaces,” 
but there is no trace of ashes or charcoal, nor are any relics found about 
them. 

HOOK MILL, 

Six miles west of Gala, in Rich Patch mountain, there is a pass through 

which a trail led from Craig creek to Covington. At the highest point 


‘Except the fragments.of skull exhumed on the first day, this was the only instance 
of human bones found in a barbecue hole. 


24 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY Bee 


in this pass there are several small stone piles, not more than a foot high, 
and placed on earth which is light and easily dug. Several of these 
cairns were removed and the earth beneath carefully examined to a 
depth of 3 or 4 feet without result. They are probably trail-marks. 


NEAR IRON GATE. 


Three miles below Clifton Forge the Jackson and Cowpasture unite to 
form James river. A large fertile bottom lies between them, in which 
many relics of various kinds have been found, flint chips being very 
abundant. Close to the bank of Jackson river, a few hundred yards 
above the junction, the upper soil was washed away in 1870, and many 
human bones were unearthed. 

On the opposite or right bank of the Jackson the land is much higher, 
being underlain with native rock which forms a bluff along the water. 
At one point on this bluff is the site of an arrowhead factory. 

This high level land extends for a mile along the stream; the alluvial 
soil is loose and fertile; good springs are numerous; and the mountains, 
full of game, come down to the rivers on every side. 

Similar conditions exist in all the valleys in this portion of Virginia 
and theadjoining parts of West Virginia. There aremany well defined 
plateaus and terraces along the rivers and some of the creeks. 

Under such circumstances, evidences of aboriginal oceupancy are to 
be expected, and the ordinary hunting or war implements, pipes, and 
ornaments are quite common. A number of cemeteries lave been dis- 
closed by floods, and it is probable that many others remain to be dis- 
covered; for in some places where relics are plentiful, and where all the 
requirements of Indian life seem to be met, there are no indications of 
permanent settlements. There are very few mounds, aid none of them 
are large. 

ALLEGHANY COUNTY. 


FALLING SPRING. 


In making a cut on the Covington and Warm Springs railway at 
this point, an aboriginal cemetery was discovered and 50 or 40 skele- 
tons, together with some beads, a pipe, and a few arrowheads, were 
exhumed by the workmen. The burial ground was not more than 30 
feet wide, and this width was reduced at least one-third in making the 
cut. In the remaining space were 2 pits or holes, neither of them more 
than 8 feet across, into which many bodies or skeletons had been thrown 
promiscuously. The first pit had been dug partially away by the 
laborers; in the undisturbed portion 12 skulls were found, probably 
less than half the original number. It was evident that some of the 
bodies had been deposited. soon after death, the displacement of the 
bones being no greater than would naturally result from the settling 
of the earth around them when the flesh had decayed. In other cases 
the bones alone were interred, being intermingled and packed ina way 


AncnEoLoayy REMAINS AT FALLING SPRING 25 


FOWKE 


that could not have been possible had they ever been orderly arranged. 
For example, the leg bone of a child had half its length in the skull of 
an adult; 3 skulls were in contact among a mass of long bones, ribs 
and vertebrie, that ocenpied a very small space; a patella and some 
bones of a foot were lying against the face of askull which had its vertex 
upward, there being no leg bones within Ginches. This pit was nowhere 
more than 3 feet deep, and the uppermost bones were only 6 inches 
beneath the surface. No art relics were found among them. 

South of this pit, separated from it by not more than a foot of inter- 
vening earth, was the second, somewhat larger, containing from 20 to 
25 skeletons; as the stratum of bones had been continuous for several 
feet and at about the same depth as those found near the top of the 
pit, the exact number could not be ascertained; several had been taken 
out before the character of the deposit became apparent. This pit was 
somewhat deeper than the first; the lowest skeletons being 4 feet below 
the surface. In a hole barely large enough to contain them, 2 bodies 
were closely doubled up and Jaid in with heads at opposite ends—one 
at the northern, the other at the southern end of the hole. The skulls 
were so flattened and broken by pressure of the earth, and the other 
bones so intermingled, that it was impossible to ascertain their original 
position. Above these skeletons was a foot of earth, and then the other 
bodies were found just as in the first pit—mingled in every way and 
extending nearly to the surface. 

No bones were found north of the first pit opened, but south of the 
second and west of both were a number of skeletons, usually buried 
singly, but occasionally 3 or 4 together. Where more than one was 
thus found there was at least one child or infant; sometimes only a single 
adult, the other 2 or 3 being young persons. None was more than 16 
inches below the surface; some not more than 6 inches. All were 
doubled, resting on either side, with the heads toward no particular 
direction. Each grave had been made only long and wide enough to 
hold one skeleton. If another was placed in it the bones were laid 
directly upon those first deposited. Sometimes 3 bodies had been thus 
buried, one above the other, the bones being in close contact. 

With one adult in the second pit was a single shell bead; with one 
west of the first pit were 2 pieces of worked Columella shell; with an 
infant west of the second pit was a part of a small conch, the whorls 
mostly decayed. South of the second pit were many fragments of a 
large pot, and west of it were 2 bone awls or perforators. 

In some of the pits 5 or 6 skulls were found in a space not over 2 feet 
square. The leg bones or the vertebre of one skeleton were sometimes 
forced into the fragmentary skull of another lying just beneath, or a 
skullgvould be wedged between the bones of several individuals. 

Although the ground was very dry and hard the bones were quite 
brittle, most of them having been much broken by the pressure of the 
earth. The soil, varying from a foot to 30 inches in depth, rests on a 


26 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY pee 


stratum of gravel and bowlders, some of them as large as a flour barrel. 
Many large stones were in the earth containing the bodies. Several 
skulls were flattened by rocks thrown or laid on them at the time of 
burial. Two skulls had transverse incisions on the left side, such as 
might have been made by an iron tomahawk or small hatchet. In one 
grave were found nearly all the bones of a skeleton except the skull; 
in another all the bones of the body and arms were recovered, but not 
the skull or leg bones. Altogether portions of 61 different skulls were 
obtained, showing that at least 63 persons were buried here, besides 
the 30 or 40 reported by the railroad excavators. 

A battle was fought at this point in the year 1760 between whites 
and Indians, 25 or 30 of the former being killed; but the number of 
of skeletons of persons who could not have been engaged in such an 
affray, especially those of children, precludes the idea that this was the 
burial place of the slain on this occasion. 

Just south of the southern pit were two barbecue holes, near each 
other, containing only a few deer bones; and northwest of the northern 
pit, beyond where any remains were found, was a fire bed about 8 feet 
across, the earth burned red to a depth of 6 inches, and covered by a 
layer of ashes from 2 to 3 inches thick. Not even a potsherd was 
found in it. 

There are no traces of a village site in the vicinity. Two miles 
north is a place where it is said bones have been exposed by plowing, 
but no art relics have been discovered. 


INDIAN DRAFT. 


This isasmall tributary of Jackson river, flowing into it 6 miles above 
Covington. A level bottom of about 50 acres, subject to overflow, 
extends along the river above the creek. Excavation was not per- 
mitted except in a narrow strip a few yards in length along the road- 
side. In this small space 10 skeletons were found from a foot to 2 feet 
beneath the surface, the bones being much decayed. Among them were 
the remains of 2 small children and also of a child apparently about 14 
years of age. All were crowded into the smallest possible space. They 
lay on either side, with the heads in various directions. Most of the 
bodies had been buried with the flesh; of 2 or 3 apparently only the 
skeletons had been interred. With one this was very plainly the case. 
The bones were at a depth of 2 feet; the femurs lay side by side, but with 
the ends reversed; some ribs were at the top of the skull, which lay on 
the left side; the sacrum, one scapula, and some vertebree lay at the 
base of the skull, while other vertebrie lay at the top in front of the 
face. : : 

The only articles found with the bones were a few pieces of pottery, 
including some that had formed part of a vessel of 25 to 3 gallons 
capacity. 

Half way between Falling Spring and Indian Draft, and a little more 
than a mile from each, is a mound 3 feet high and 30 feet in diameter. 


EOLO y \ 
AncHEOLOGY) REMAINS IN BATH COUNTY - 27 


It is built of loose clay and sand, with many small bowlders scattered 
through it. <A little to one side of the center near the top were traces 
of human bones, completely decayed. By them lay a syenite celt. A 
foot from the celt was a small arrowhead. 

Under the bones was an impacted mass about 8 feet across, the color 
of ashes, though it seemed to contain nothing but sand. It extended 
a foot below the natural surface and contained no trace of bone. Near 
the. bottom of the mound and close to one side were 3 small sheets of 
nica, 


BATH COUNTY. 
SITLINGTON. 


During a freshet several years since a new channel or “ cut-off” was 
made across a level bottom at this place. When the water subsided 
many human bones were found heaped up in the depression. Bullets 
of different sizes as well as arrowheads were scattered along for more 
than a hundred yards. Human bones have not been discovered else- 
where in this bottom, and it is uncertain whether these had been buried 
here or were carried in by the current from some other place. It is pos- 
sible they mark some forgotten pioneer graveyard. 

A black steatite pipe and a butterfly gorget of green steatite have 
been found in the same field with the bones, but none of the remains 
common to Indian camps have ever been noticed. 

On a bluff on the next farm below Sitlington a great many human 
bones have been exposed by plowing. They are confined to an area not 
more than 15 feet in diameter. From the description it seems to be a 
small burial pit. ‘Che only surface indication was an elevation of about 
6 inches. No excavating was allowed. 


DICKINSON MOUND. 


At a point on Cowpasture river, 2 miles below Millboro springs, 
the geologic formation is somewhat unusual for this region. There 
are 5 distinct terraces, the lowest subject to frequent overflow, the 
highest being probably 120 feet above the water. The river makes ¢ 
curve of about 5 miles, the isthmus formed being not more than half 
amile wide. The fourth terrace and the one next above it are on the 
peninsula, which was an ancient island half a mile from the hills, the 
third terrace extending across the intervening space. 

The fourth terrace is entirely absent, except on the side next the 
point. On it stands a mound, which after much cultivation is 30 feet 
in diameter and 3 feet high. A trench 16 feet wide was run through it 
from the northern side, but the only trace of human bones observed was 
a parietal and part of a frontal bone at a point 9 feet outward from the 
center and just above the bottom. ‘Two feet farther in was a 1ec- 
tangular hole with rounded corners, but not having a well-defiied or 


28 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


symmetric outline. It measured 2 by 3 feet, and extended 2 feet into 
the original soil, the longer axis being east and west. Nothing was 
found in this cavity except a small arrowhead which had been thrown 
in with the earth. Loose in the earth above the hole, and near the top 
of the mound, were some smail pieces of mica and a perforated slate 
gorget. I‘arther along were a flint knife, some broken arrows, and 
several chips. About a foot below the summit were a sheet of mica 
aud a small piece of galena. In the original soil, with its northern 
edge just at the center, was an irregular excavation about 3 by 4 feet 
and a foot deep, the longer axis being north and south. The bottom 
of this hole, over a space 15 by 24 inches, 
was covered with a bright red substance, 
which had been deposited either in a fluid 
state or had afterward dissolved; it satu- 
rated the clay and gravel tu a depth of 2 
inches at the center, gradually thinning 
out toward the edges until it disappeared. 
In this red deposit were 3 gorgets, each 
with a single hole. All were finished and 
= polished to the highest degree; one (illus- 
y Ly % trated in figure 4) was nade of argillite, 
iy one was of dark chocolate slate, the third 

of syenite. All of these specimens were 
2 coated with the red paint. The earth just 
above them had the color of that in which 
animal matter has decayed; but nothing 
remained to show that an interment had 
ever taken place. 


Up, 
Ky 


ig NM YY 
CTY fps 
yy Wy Y Wy, 


j YO: 
Wy Y Upp Ys 
yyy 


Haaywunnien dane 


(p 


UAV AVULD EA LANA 


j yy We E WITHROW MOUNDS. 
i oo On the farm of Mr Withrow, adjoining 
Hi Mh Wi Wy Wey the Dickinson place, are 2 mounds. The 
di i i Wie ‘ first opened, once circular and 4 feet high, 


is now 30 by 40 feet, longer east and west, 
and not over 18 inches high. Bones have 
been plowed out for many years. The en- 
tire mound, except a few feet at the eastern side, was removed; 13 
graves, from 2 to 4 feet across, were found beneath it. In some were 
traces of bone lying on the clay at the bottom, the earth having the 
peculiar appearance due to decay of animal matter; but in most there 
was no sign of bone, though the color showed what their purpose 
had been. After these graves were filled a large number of skeletons— 
not bodies—had been placed on the natural surface, and a layer of 
earth about a foot thick placed over them; then other skeletons were 
similarly laid down and covered. Only the upper layer had been dis- 
turbed by the plow. 


Fig. 4.—Gorget from Dickinson mound, 
Bath county, Virginia. 


ere | HUMAN REMAINS IN WITHROW MOUNDS 29 


FOWKE 


Most of the bones were in the southwestern quarter of the mound, a 
solid mass 6 inches thick, all in confusion, as if they had been thrown 
in promiscuously. On the southern side of the mound they extended 
to the edge of the earth that had been plowed down, while on the 
northern side they did not reach more than half way from the top to 
the margin of the base. Tor the first 8 or 10 feet from its western 
-edge the bone stratum was continuous; after this there were intervals 
of 6 to 12 inches from which it was absent; then perhaps 5 or 6 skele- 
tons would be found mingled in a heap; and so they continued until 
some distance past the center. Wherever single skeletons, or not 
more than 2 together, occurred, large stones had been piled on them; 
this was not the case where several were buried in a small area. Per- 
haps the remains covered with stones had been interred in the flesh 
and this was a preventive against wild animals digging after them. 
Four single skeletons lay directly on small masses of human bones 
burned until nearly destroyed, only small calcined pieces remaining. 
Many of these burned pieces, especially the fragments of skull, were 
bright bluish-green on one or both sides, the stain resembling that 
produced by copper; but a careful analysis shows ho trace of that 
metal. A similar deposit was at the bottom of one of the graves under 
the mound. No burial accompaniments of any kind were found; the 
teeth of one child only were seen, though many of the bones unearthed 
were small enough to pertain to children. It was not possible to 
recover any of the bones entire. 

The second mound on the Withrow tract is 25 feet across and 24 
high, made of earth and stone in equal quantities. It is surrounded 
by a shallow ditch abont 3 feet wide, containing from 6 to 12 inches of 
black muck. . 

In the construction of this mound a hole had been dug to a depth of 
18 inches and the bottom covered with a layer of burned human bones 
about 15 by 20 inches, an inch thick at the middle and running to a 
feather edge all around, in which were 35 black flint arrowheads. On 
this charred bone a body had been laid. No trace of bones remained, 
but the ‘“‘grave earth” previously described was distinct in an area 2 
by 54 feet, with a thickness of 2 inches. Stones, some fully 100 pounds 
in weight, had been placed over the body until they reached a thick- 
ness of 4 feet and extended about 10 feet on every side; then earth had 
been piled on which filled in the spaces between the rocks. Some frag- 
ments of the burned bones were of the same bluish-green color as those 
from the first mound. 


KLEEK MOUND. 


On the farm of A. G. Kleek, 12 miles north of Millboro depot, is a 
mound not more than a foot in height and 10 feet in diameter, near 
the edge of a slate bluff about 100 feet high. A trench was cut 
through it, but neither human remains nor art relics of any description 
were found. 


30 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY liege = 


After a freshet some years ago a number of arrowheads, stone hateh- 
ets, and bullets were found in the lowland, where the Millboro Springs 
and Warm Springs turnpike crosses the river. No aboriginal remains 
are now traceable. | 

WILLIAMSVILLE, 

There are 2 mound groups near this village, one on either side of the 
Bullpasture. The first, consisting of 5 small stone mounds, is on the 
land of Mr Wallace, half a mile from Williamsville, on a plateau rising 
100 feet above the river. All were made in the same way; the surface 
soil had been removed and the rocks piled up to a height of 2 feet over 
a space 15 or 16 feet in diameter. Three of them yielded nothing. In- 
one, lying under the rocks and on the undisturbed earth, were a num- 
ber of flint implements, including some broken or unfinished ones and 
a few cores; 3 fine slate gorgets, each with a single perforation; a lump 
of wad; and a fine monitor pipe (figure 5). In the fifth mound were a 


Fic. 5.—Pipe from Williamsville, Virginia. 


rectangular tablet or gorget, small and not well finished; a stone pipe, 
Shaped like our common clay pipes; and three columellas, one drilled 
lengthwise, another through one end. No trace of bone or pottery 
could be found in any of them. 

The second group is on the farm of Major John T. Byrd. One is of 
stone, about 16 feet in diameter and 3 feet high, and contained nothing 
in the way of relics save 2 or 3 small lumps of charcoal. A mound 
similar in size and barrenness stood near this one. 

The other mounds were of earth, the larger 2 feet high and 25 feet in 
diameter. Near its center was an irregular hole 4 by 8 feet, extending 
23 feet into the subsoil, and filled with earth in which a large quantity 
of ashes and charcoal were mingled; part of the earth was burned red. 
All this mixture, which had been carried from some other place and 
thrown into the hole, was very hard and dry, while the remainder of 
the mound was soft and even muddy. If an interment had ever taken 
place here it would seem the skeleton must be perfectly preserved; but 
there were no remains of any character in the entire mound except a 


jape) sacoialiga MOUNDS AT WILLIAMSVILLE aL 


FOWKE 


sheet of mica, trimmed smooth on the edges, which was found loose in 
the earth a foot below the summit. 

The last mound was 18 inches high and 20 feet in diameter. Parti- 
cles of charcoal occurring 2 feet below the natural surface in the central 
portion showed that a hole had been dug to that depth and then filled. 
It contained one broken arrowpoint. 

Each earth mound had a depression around the base, whence earth 
had been taken to construct it. 


HIGHLAND COUNTY. 
CLOVER CREEK. 


On the farm of Mr George Revercomb, 5 miles above the mouth of 
the Bullpasture, is a mound 3 feet high and 60 feet in diameter. The 
bottom on which it stands contains about 200 acres of fertile land, ail 
of which is subject to frequent overflow. 

For 40 years human bones and teeth have been plowed out every 
time the mound was cultivated. Arrowheads and flint chips are 
numerous in the field around; but the only indications in the vicinity 
of a village or camp are found on the top of a high rounded knoll a 
mile below the mound, where quantities of mussel and periwinkle shells 
have been plowed up. 

Beginning at the northwestern side a trench 35 feet wide was carried 
nearly to the opposite margin. Human bones were found almost to the 
limit of the excavation on every side. 

At 18 feet outward from the center was a hole 3 feet in diameter, dug 
after the mound had been carried to a height of 2 feet, and extending 
through the clayey subsoil to the underlying gravel. In the bottom 
was a layer of bone about an inch thick. On this was a layer 2 inches 
thick of charcoal containing linden, oak, and poplar bark, small twigs, 
and several fragments of charred cloth. Resting on this was a second 
layer of bone, just above which were fragments of a pot whose capacity 
had been 5 or 6 gallons. This seemed to have been placed in the hole 
unbroken, as many of the pieces held their proper position around the 
sides of the cavity, which was lined with charred cloth. In and above 
the vessel were 10 or 12 large stones. The character of the bones could 
not be determined, as they were entirely decayed, forming a soft, sticky 
mass. 

Skeletons, or traces of them, were continually discovered. None of 
the remaining seemed to have been buried at full length, though this is 
uncertain. Often a thin layer of decayed bone only a few inches across 
would be all that was left. Usually the skeletons occurred singly; 
sometimes 3 or 4, in one place 5, skulls were found almost in contact. 
All the bones whose condition was such as to allow of examination 
seemed to have been compactly bundled. In many instances bowlders 
were placed on the bones, and in 2 or 3 cases bodies had been laid on 


es 


3 r x 1 7 BUREAU 0 
32 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY ES ENOEDUE 


bowlders and others piled above them. Graves and barbecue holes 
from 2 to 4 feet across and from 6 inches to 3 feet apart, some only a 
few inches deep, others reaching down into the gravel, occupied a space 
30 feet in diameter under the central portion of the mound. Bowlders 
were found in every one, those in the graves showing no marks of fire, 
while all the others had been much burned. 

Hight feet nearly west of the center of the mound was a barbecue 
hole, dug after the mound had reached the height of 2 feet, which con- 
tained a large quantity of ashes, burned earth and stones, and charcoal. 
Among the last were nearly a quart of charred corn and beans. Corn 
in small quantities, with a few fragments of cloth, were found in two 
other holes, while charred bark was plentiful. In each of two holes was 
an arrowpoint. Shortly before ti.e center was reached a broken stea- 
tite pipe (figure 6) was found near the top, close to but not among the 
remains of 2 or 3 skeletons. It bore evidence of long service. A few 
feet beyond the center, at the bottom of the mound, were the frag- 
ments of a large pot, piled together as if broken and thrown in. 

Near the southeastern edge of the mound, 18 
feet from the center, was the largest hole found. 
It measured 5 feet across and extended below 
the surface of the gravel nearly a foot, or about 
3 feet below the bottom of the mound. It con- 
tained no trace of bone, very little charcoal, 
some ashes, two or three patches of burned 
earth, apparently burned in place, and half a 
‘art load of bowlders of various sizes, one wrigh- 
ing fully 100 pounds, some of them burned, 
others not. It was probably a barbecue hole. 

The remains of between 75 and 100 skeletons 
were exhumed; the number plowed out pre- 
viously is not known. Often it was impossible to say whether a bone 
deposit represented one or several bodies. They were not buried in 
regular order, but a few had been interred at a time, and the mound, 
of alluvial material, black, sticky, and wet, thus built up irregularly. 

No animal bones or shells were found; but burned earth, charcoal, and 
ashes were abundant in all parts of the mound, some of the holes being 
filled with these materials. Small deposits of bone almost destroyed 
by fire were sinilarly distributed. In one were pieces of antler and 
turkey bone; in another fragments of a human skull and teeth. Noth- 
ing else could be identified. 

There was formerly a depression encircling the base in which water 
stood much of the year. 


FG. 6.—Pipe from Clover creek, 
Highland county, Virginia. 


» NEW HAMPDEN. 


On a spur rising to a height of 200 feet just west of the village of New 
Hampden a large quantity of flint (or chert) has been released by the 


Pcie | REMAINS AT NEW HAMPDEN 33 


decomposition of the limestone in which it was imbedded. It is mostly 
in the form of small nodules or fragments, although some of it is inter- 
stratified with the limestone. Over a considerable area on the north- 
ern end and at the top of the ridge the earth had been much dug over 
by the aborigines for the purpose of procuring the flint. Most of the 
pits remaining are quite small, few being larger than would contain a 
cartload of earth. The largest are on top of the ridge, where a few 
have a depth of 2 to 34 feet with a diameter of 20 to 30 feet. The latter 
cover an area of about an acre; the others are so scattered that it is 
difficult to estimate their extent, probably 6 acres in all. There is no 
outcrop of stone at any point where digging has been done, and it 
appears that the searchers for the material, having learned that the 
flint nodules and fragments were distributed through the soil, excavated 
for them in such spots as proved to contain them in greatest abundance, 
making no effort to quarry out the stone in which they oceur. At 
various places on the summit of the ridge, where the flint projected 
above the ground, it had been battered off apparently with stones, but 
there is no evidence that quarrying was resorted to. 

Such portion of the hill as is not timbered has a heavy blue-grass 
sod, and the ground is visible only in a few small spots where animals 
have burrowed. Flint chips and flakes were found at several of these. 
At the foot of the spur atits northwestern terminus is a spring, around 
which these indications of manufacture are abundant; and it is 
reported that before the grass had become so thick a great many 
broken or unfinished implements were picked up. Spalls and chips 
are abundant in the face of the bank around the spring, but it can 
not be ascertained except by excavation how far they extend. So 
far as could be learned the space covered by this workshop seems too 
limited to have been utilized for flaking more than a small part of the 
flint that could have been obtained by the amount of digging apparent. 
It may, however, be more extensive than reported, or there may be 
others in the vicinity which have been overlooked. 


THE PIEDMONT COUNTRY. 


ORANGE COUNTY. 


The country along the upper portion of the Rappahannock and its 
tributaries was inhabited by tribes known collectively as the Mana- 
-hoac. They probably migrated westward and united with tribes beyond 
the Ohio whose names they took. They and the Monacan were allied 
against the Powhatan, though the dialects of these tribes were so 
diverse that interpreters were required.' 
It will be proper to describe here a mound, evidently a tribal burial 
place, situated in the former territory of the Manahoac and due prob- 
ably to their labor. 


' Jefferson, Notes, pp. 149, 156. 
3 


BULL. W=23 


34 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY eats =! 


The mound stands on the right bank of Rapidan river, a mile east of 
the boundary between Orange and Greene counties. Originally it was 
elliptical in form, with the longer axis nearly east and west; but the river 
in shifting its channel some years ago undermined and carried away the 
eastern portion. Estimates as to the amount removed, made by persons 
who saw the mound intact, vary from one-half to two-thirds of the entire 
structure. For several years more or less of the earth composing it 
fell in at every freshet, thus keeping a vertical section exposed to view. 
During this time the different strata of bone were plainly visible, and at 
periods of low water fragments of human bones were strewn along the 
shore beneath. Afterward the river took a new course and the earth 
on the exposed side of the mound soon assumed its natural slope. At 
present the base of that portion still remaining measures 42 by 48 feet, 
with the longer axis nearly north and south. A considerable part of 
this has been hauled away, leaving a depression at the middle fully 
20 feet across and extending almost to the bottom of the mound. As 
a result, the interior was very muddy, the bones extremely soft and 
fragmentary, and excavation quite difficult. 

The highest point left by these destructive agencies was 6 feet 
above the level of the surrounding field; to judge from the slope of 
the undisturbed surface the river had left it fully 10 feet high. How 
much more it may have been, no one could say; if the statements con- 
cerning its original form and extent be correct the apex was at least 
12 feet above the base, the iatter being not less than 50 by 75 feet. 

Beginning at the northern side, the earth was removed from an area 
28 by 40 feet. At 7 feet from the margin was found the outer edge of 
a bone deposit measuring 6 by 15 feet, the longer axis about parallel 
with that of the mound as constructed. It was very irregular both in 
outline and thickness, in some places being 8 inches in depth and 
in others showing only a thin chalky seam. There were indications in 
several places that skeletons had been compactly bundled; but most. 
of the bones were scattered promiscuously, as if they had been collected 
from some place of previous interment and carelessly thrown in, there 
being no evidence of an attempt to place them in their proper order: 
In the mass were two small deposits of calcined human bones in 
minute fragments, and beneath it were graves or burial pits which will 
be described later. 

This bone-bed, which was at the level of the natural surface, was the 
largest found in any part of the mound. Two feet above it, and 4 feet 
within its outer margin, was another, much smaller; and numerous 
others were found in all the portion removed. There was no attempt 
at regularity in position or extent; in some places there was only 
a trace such as may have resulted from the decomposition of a few 
bones; in others it seemed that as many as 15 or 20 skeletons had been 
deposited. They occurred at all levels below a foot from the upper 
surface of the mound; but no section showed more than 4 layers above 


psec) | REMAINS IN ORANGE COUNTY 35 


the original surface of the ground, although it was reported that 6 
strata had been found near the central portion. This would indicate 
that the burials were carried nearly to the top of the mound. There 
was no uniformity in either the vertical or horizontal space between 
the deposits; it was plain there had not been at any time a sufficient 
number of interments to cover any considerabie part of what was then 
the top of the mound, but that a quantity of bones, greater or lesser 
according to circumstances, had been laid on the surface and covered 
with earth. Others were afterwards buried in the same way. Thus 
while no single vertical section would reveal more than 6 layers of 
bone, a careful removal of the earth horizontally would have uncovered 
them at probably three times that number of levels. 

In the skeletons all ages were represented, for among the bones were 
those of very young children, while of others many of the teeth were 
worn to the neck. 

Numerous small deposits of human bones almost destroyed by fire 
were scattered through the mound. When found in the bone-beds, 
they seemed to have been placed at random, but when found with the 
remains of not more than 2 or 5 skeletons they formed a thin layer 
upon which the latter rested. 

The pits or graves mentioned above were of two kinds. One. class 
was excavated to a depth of 2 feet in the soil, with a diameter varying 
from 4 to 5 feet; the others did not exceed a foot in depth, and all were 
somewhat less than 4 feet across. The deeper ones contained usually 3 
layers of decomposed bones at intervals of about 10 inches; in the 
shallower there was in most cases only a single layer, at the bottom, 
though in a few a second deposit had been made a few inches above the 
first. The bones in some of the graves appeared to have been placed in 
their proper position; but it was impossible to ascertain with certainty 
whether such was the case. One ot the deeper pits had its bottom and 
sides lined with charcoal; none of the others had even this slight evi- 
dence of care or respect. These holes were so numerous as to coalesce 
and take up the entire space within a limit of 10 feet from the margin 
of the mound; it was sometimes difficult to determine the line of sep- 
aration between two bone deposits. When all the earth indicating 
their position had been removed, a basin to the extent and depth above 
indicated was left, with only a few small points of the yellow sandy 
subsoil rising above its bottom. Owing to the erosion and caving-in of 
the mound on its eastern side, the limit of the graves in that direction 
could not be ascertained; but it is probable they extended as near to 
the margin on this side as elsewhere. 

No relics of any sort were deposited with the bones; a rough mor- 
tar, 2 arrowheads, and some fragments of pottery were found loose 
in the débris. 

It is plain that this spot was for a long period the burial place of 
a small tribe or clan, among whom prevailed the habit of stripping the 
flesh from the corpse before interment, or of depositing the body else- 


al 144 Y 7 A 
36 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY ErENonee 


. 


where for a time and afterwards removing the dismembered bones to 
this ossuary. That no stated intervals elapsed between consecutive 
deposits is shown by the varying position and size among the different 
bone-beds, and by the overlapping of many of the graves beneath. 

It is impossible to accurately estimate the number of skeletons found 
in this mound; but there were certainly not fewer than 200, aud there 
may possibly have been 250, These figures will represent, approxi- 
mately, one-fourth of the entire number deposited, if the statements as 
to the original size of the mound be correct. 

In its construction this mound corresponds closely with one opened 
by Jefferson a few miles above Charlottesville in low ground of the 
Rivanna, except that no mention was made of graves occurring below 
the original surface; but these might easily have been overlooked in 
the method of excavation pursued. The contents were such “as on 
the whole to give the idea of bones emptied promiscuously from a bag 
or basket and covered with earth, without-any attention to their 
order.”! As in the mound above deseribed, ‘‘ the bones near the top 
were in a much better state of preservation than those toward the 
bottom.” This is due probably less to their being of much later deposit 
than to the drier earth near the top. We are further told (pp. 151, 
162) that “a party [of Indians| passing about thirty years ago [i.e., about 
1751] through the part of the country where this barrow is went through 
the woods directly to it, without any instructions or inquiry, and having 
staid about it some time, with expressions which were construed to be 
those of sorrow, they returned to the high road, which they had left 
about half a dozen miles to pay this visit, and pursued their journey.” 
It is very unfortunate that no one took the trouble to learn to what 
tribe these travelers belonged, as this knowledge would have given a 
clue to the fate of the aborigines of this part of Virginia. 


MADISON COUNTY. 


Near the Orange and Madison road, 2 miles from Rapidan river, is 
an outcrop of steatite half a mile in length, but nowhere more than 
a few rods in width. At the extreme northern end are 5 or 6 excava- 
tions, none more than a foot deep and 10 or 12 feet across. The stone 
is either too siliceous or too porous to be suitable for aboriginal pur- 
poses, hence was but little utilized. 


CULPEPER COUNTY. 
WAYLAND MILL. 


On Crooked run, a mile and a half west of the Orange and Culpeper 
road, an outcrop of steatite fully half a mile in length has been excavated 
over its entire extent. At this place is the largest excavation in this 
material yet discovered; it is fully 150 feet across. On one side the 


‘Jetferson, Notes, p. 158. 


ARCHEOLOGY STEATITE AT WAYLAND MILL - 37 


FOWKE 


bank is about 10 feet high; the other side being on the slope of 
the hill shows less elevation. The pitis partially filled with muck and 
rubbish, so that it is level within over an area of 50 by 60 feet; hence 
its entire depth can not be ascertained except by clearing away the 
accumulated material. The other pits are at the present time from a 
foot to 4 feet in depth, and 10 to 50 feet in diameter. Several thousand 
cubic yards of stone were excavated by those to whom these remains 


are due. 
AYLOR FARM. 


On the farm of H. I. Aylor, 24 miles from Wayland mills, is another 
aboriginal quarry, less extensive than the one above mentioned. 


SHENANDOAH AND UPPER POTOMAC VALLEYS. 
AUGUSTA COUNTY. 


Several mounds formerly existed in this county, but all have been 
obliterated by cultivation except one on Middle river, a few rods from 
the bridge on the Staunton and Churchville road. This, after long 
cultivation, is now about 5 feet high. 


ROCKINGHAM COUNTY. 
TIMBERVILLE. 


A mile north of Timberville was a small mound, 2 feet high, on a 
slight natural elevation near the left bank of the Shenandoah. It 
contained several skeletons extended at full length at the level of the 
natural surface. Flat stones were set on edge around the bodies and 


others placed over them. 
LINVILLE. 


Two miles northwest of Linville, on the farm of Mr S. M. Bowman, 
is a mound near the bank of Linville creek. After heavy rains the 
mound is often the only dry spot between the hills for 2 or 3 miles 
along the stream. 

It now measures 65 by 75 feet, and 3 feet high, the longer diameter 
trending northwest and southeast. Over the entire surface of the 
mound, toa depth of 6 inches, there is not so much as a space 3 inches 
Square that did not contain fragments of bone which had been dragged 
down from the top by cultivation. 

Five trenches were extended inward from the edge of the mound. 
For a considerable distance no remains of any description were found 
in any of these except the one from the southwestern side. At 24 feet 
from the center of the mound a small hole a foot deep contained the 
decayed bones of a young child, which, judging from their disposition, 
were evidently the remains of a skeleton burial. 

When undisturbed bones were reached the inner ends of these 
trenches were connected, isolating a mass of earth nearly circular in 


38 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY ae 


ETHNOLOGY 


form, 36 feet in diameter, which was filled from the top to fully 2 feet 
below the level of the original surface with skeletons and bone-beds in 
the utmost confusion. There was scarcely a cubic foot of earth in which 
human remains of some description were not discovered. Sometimes a 
single skeleton, perhaps that of a very young infant, would be found, 
the few bones remaining being in their proper position, with many 
beads around or among them; again the long bones of several adults 
would be laid closely together, like sticks tied in a bundle. Oceasion- 
ally 5 or 6 skulls would be in contact, with not a lower jaw near enough 
to have been deposited with any of them; or an entire skull would 
be in a mass of bones many of which belonged to some other skele- 
ton. Cremated human bones were found in little deposits by them- 
selves, or under the bundled skeletons of one or more individuals, or in 
the middle of a stratum of bones a foot thick showing no evidence of 
incineration. 

When the southeastern trench reached the bone deposits it had awidth 
or face of 18 feet. At the western side of this, a foot above the bottom 
of the mound, were the bones of an infant with a large number of 
(Marginella) shell beads. Six feet from the latter, at the same level, was 
a skull on which lay the frontal bone of another. These were at the 
edge of a bone pile a little less than 3 feet across, containing 10 skulls, 
some of them burned to cinders. Among them was a black steatite 
pipe, and above them, with an intervening layer of earth from 8 to 10 
inches thick, was a thin and very uneven stratum of charcoal. 

Just at the middle of the face was a hole 6 inches deep; in the 
bottom lay a skeleton, doubled, with a lot of Marginella shells among 
the bones of the head and neck. Above this was a bone bed 3 
feet thick containing 14 skulls; in it were a drill and a knife of black 
flint and 5 bone needles. Two feet nearer the center were piled about 
a peck of small fragments of bones, some of which were calcined. 

Four feet farther from the eastern side of the face, a foot from the top, 
began a mass of bones which reached in an unbroken layer for 10 feet 
north and south, with fully half that width at the middle, and in some 
places more than a foot thick; among them were a rough slate gorget, 
a perforater of deer bone, and 6 triangular arrowheads. They were 
packed so closely together that the earth could not settle between them. 
Under them lay the bones of a very small child in their proper position 
with the head toward the northeast; many Marginella shells were scat 
tered from its head to its knees. Within a few inches, and parallel, 
were the remains of another infant, also in position; with it also were 
a number of Marginella shells and 12 rather long columellas. A little 
farther toward the center was the skeleton of a third infant, near which 
were found half a pint of Marginella shells, as well as 38 columellas of 
various lengths. 

Under these, its outer margin 18 feet from the center, was a burial 
pit a foot in depth, 10 feet long, and from 3 to 34 feet wide, the longer 


fa entlasaet EXCAVATIONS AT LINVILLE 39 


FKFOWKE 


axis parallel with that of the mound, in which were the remains of 32 
adults and 7 children. Only the bones had been deposited, and they 
were mingled in the most promiscuous manner. In the southeastern 
end of the pit there were many fragments of human skulls, limb bones, 
and vertebrie, some of them completely incinerated. The only other 
relics found were a few columellas split lengthwise, none being entire. 

Almost exactly at the middle of the bank, was a grave 4 feet in 
diameter and 10 inches deep, in which lay the skeleton of an adult, 
lying on the right side, nearly straight, with the head toward the south. 
Three columellas 25 to 5 inches long and one 6 inches long lay by the 
head. 

When the bank was 6 feet from the center, 14 skeletons mingled with 
earth were discovered at its eastern end. They occupied a space 4 feet 
in diameter and a little more than 3 feet in thickness, extending a foot 
below the original level. A clay pipe, many Marginella shells, 2 long 
columellas, and the cremated bones of a child and an adult were among 
them. Four of the skulls lay almost in a vertical line separated by 2 
to 4 inches of earth. 

Within a few inches of this deposit, toward the center, was a small 
bone-bed a foot thick, near the middle of which was a thin stratum of 
the cremated bones of a youth and an adult; scattered through it were 
2 steatite platform pipes, 4 panther claws, and 4 columellas. Five or 
6 skulls also were found. Immediately below lay the bones of an infant 
in their proper position, with disk and Marginella shell beads; a little 
nearer the center on the bottom of the mound were the remains of 
another infant, who evidently had been born but a few days, and with 
which were 38 columellas and many disk beads. 

Near the center of the mound, in soft black earth apparently result- 
ing from decay of organic matter, was a bone deposit 8 feet across. At 
its western margin was the skeleton of an infant! having small beads 
seattered from head to feet. Near this, among the bones, were other 
deposits of beads; and at various points a broken and a perfect clay 
pipe, 2 well-made steatite pipes, and a triangular arrowhead were found. 
The arrowhead, like all other finished flint implements found at this 
locality, was delicately worked, thin, symmetric, and sharp. <A femur 
was found that had sustained a compound fracture, the ends having 
overlapped fully two inches and healed in that position. Another femur 
was greatly enlarged, rough, and with a deep hole apparently of tuber- 
cular origin in the sidé running parallel with the shaft. 

A foot above this deposit was one similar but smaller. In it were 
many fragments of burned bones of various parts of the body, as well 
as a number of teeth. 

Four feet west of the center was a grave 2 feet deep, in which lay a 
skeleton, doubled up, on right side, with the head southward. With it 


! No infant in this mound had been folded, though none of the many skeletons of 
youths and older children were extended. 


nr 1 oO 
40 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY oe 


were a gorget of fine finish; a lot of red and yellow ocher; a large 
columella; disk beads; a net or weaving needle, highly polished from 
use, with a hole in the end opposite the point (figure 7);' a bone orna- 
ment in the form of a comb, and the upper portion of another having 
a yoke or Y shape, delicately worked and covered with incised lines 
(figures 8 and 9). It will thus be seen that the number of burial 
accompaniments was uniusually large for this section. 

Over these remains, at the level of the bottom of the 
mound, was a folded skeleton, resting on the left side, 
the head to the south, with which were 2 columellas, one 
5 the other 6 inches long, the latter having a bone drill 
stuck in the perforation and broken off even with the 
end of the shell. Just at the northern edge of the 
grave were the bones of an infant; upon them was the 
outer whorl of a conch shell which had been partly 
filled with about a pint of Marginella shells and inverted 
over the body. Above the conch, with less than an inch 
of earth between, lay the skull of an adult whose skeleton, | 
which rested on the right side, was doubled, the head 
being toward the south. 

At the center, a foot above the bottom, were human 
bones, of large size, cremated before the flesh had been 
removed: some fragments only 2 or 35 inches long were 
burned to a cinder at one end while the other ends 
were as fresh in “appearance as any bones found. A 
columella and a panther claw were with them, but may 
have fallen from the bone stratum above. In the earth 
under the burned bone was considerable chareoal which 
reached afew inches north of it and stopped at the edge 
of a grave a foot deep and 4 feet across, in which were 
2 skeletons; one doubled, on right side, head toward 
the south; the other apparently in the same position, 
but so decayed as to make this uncertain. With the 
first were 2 bone needles near the top of the skull, 3 colu- 
mellas 5 to 6 inches long under the skull, and a quartz 
srystal near the chest; with the other were 5 columellas, 
a flint knife, a flint drill, and a lot of shell beads, the 
latter scattered over a foot in area. 

Fic. 7.—Bone Immediately north of this grave was another a foot 
tenis deep containing the skeleton of an adult; the skeleton of 
rs an infant with columellas and Marginella shells lay just 

above it. On the natural level above these was a skeleton accom- 
panied by a very fine gorget, a celt scraper, 7 pieces of hematite which 


IThis implement had been longer, with a hole farther from the point, but had 
been broken and a new eye drilled in it. 


ARCHEOLOGY EXCAVATIONS AT LINVILLE 41 


had stained the earth about them a bright red, 5 bone polishers, 4 bone 
needles, and 6 quartz crystals, one of the latter with a slight groove 
around a projection from the end. Over this was a layer of charcoal 
extending upward to the 10 foot stratum of bone above mentioned, and 
containing several hundred Marginella shel's that showed indications of 
having been burned. Above the northern margin of the charcoal layer 
was a skull by which lay 14 columellas; 6 inches to the northward 
of this was another skull with a flint 
drill, 2 arrowheads, some cores and ie am 
oe 


: - . \ 
chips, 2 bone polishers and 2 bone Ce 
| 
\ i i) h 
WN jy 
" Aas 


nh 


= 
| 
= 


: = 


= 


needles; and a foot northward from \ 
. the last was a third with 5 columellas. 
These were all at the bottom of the 
bed, and it was impossible to trace 
any connection between them and the 
other bones. 

A grave southwest of the center con- 
tained a doubled skeleton, on the left 
side, head toward the south; by the 
skull lay the lower portion of the orna- 
ment shown in figure 9,' and a number 
of animal ribs 5 or 6 inches long and 
obtusely pointed at one end; at the 
northern edge of the grave on the orig- 
inal surface was a mass of red ocher. 
From this level to the top of the 
mound, over the grave and on every 
side ofit,was a mixture of bones, many 
of them burned; beads, both shell and 
disk; and many columellas. 

Hight feet east of the center was a 
funnel-shape burial pit 6 by 8 feet at 
the top, extending the entire depth of 
the mound, the sides being. slightly 
incurved. An inverted pot, holding 
about 14 pints, lay at one side. There 
were scores of individual skeletons, - 
but allthe bones werecrushed, broken, F'¢- 8—Carved bone from Linville, Virginia. 
~and displaced, so that very few pieces of skull more than 2 or 3 inches 
in, diameter were found. Under this deposit was a grave a foot deep, 
4 feet north and south by 54 feet east and west. In this were 18 skel- 
etons, including those of 2 infants with whom were mussel shells and 
shell beads. Among them were a piece of decayed wood (apparently a 
pine knot), 22 columellas, a celt, some disk beads, a bone needle, 
and potsherds. At the northwestern corner, partly on the natural 


S 


Ss 


1 One of these “combs” is 154 inches, the other 17 inches, in length, 


r TREAU OF 
42 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY pda 


surface and partly within the grave, was a doubled skeleton, on left 
side, with head toward the south. Behind the head was a pot lying on 
its side, broken in pieces by the pressure of the earth, and containing 
a tortoise shell and fragments of animal bones. Almost touching the 
pot, on the opposite side, was another skull lying vertex upward on the 
scapulee and backbone; 
», the arms were in their 

.) proper places, but the 
‘ bones of the legs and 
lower part of the body 
were not distinguish- 
able among those which 
rested upon them. This 
apparently was a skel- 
eton burial, with some 
effort to place the bones 
as they belonged. Un- 
der and in contact with 
one scapula was a pa- 
tella belonging to a 
much larger person. 

The bones in the upper 
portion of the funnel- 
shape pit were continu- 
ous with a stratum a foot - 
thick, 25 feet long, and 
with an average width 
of 10 feet. This termi- 
nated at the extreme 
northern edge with a 
similar but slightly 
smaller pit. 

Of necessity the face 
or bank of the trench 
was in a very irregular 
line, each deposit, except 
the 25-foot bone bed, 
having been thoroughly 
worked out as discover- 
ed. The projecting por- 
tions were next removed 
with the same general 
results as already de- 
scribed, though there 
was nothing of striking interest found in them. When the line was 
rectified the face was 12 feet north of the center point. Here 3 small 
graves about 10 or 12 inches deep were found almost in a line, each 
containing skeletons with columellas and Marginella shells. 


Fia. 9.—Caryed bone from Linville, Virginia. 


ee] EXCAVATIONS AT LINVILLE 43 


Coincident with the face at the western side was the edge of a saucer- 
shape depression in the original soil, a Jittle more than 4 feet across 
and 16 inches deep at the center. It contained a bed of ashes and 
charcoal 3 inches thick at the middle and gradually thinning toward 
the sides. On this and nearly parallel lay the arm and leg bones of 
2 adults, burned black, with no traces of other bones belonging to the 
same bodies. Lying on them, in contact, was the spinal column of an 
adult, very soft from deeay, not in the least degree charred or even 
smoke-stained. The skull lay at one side of the depression; at the 
opposite side was the head of a humerus; between these were many 
other bones so decayed thaf their character could not be ascertained. 
As the vertebrie were in their proper position, the unburned bones 
must have belonged to more than one individual, whose remains had 
evidentiy been placed on the cremated bones after the latter had become 
cold. 

North of the center, 6 feet from the cremated bones, was a skeleton 
a foot and a half above the bottom of the mound, with a number of shell 
beads. A few feet east of this was a grave 8 inches deep, large enough 
to contain only a body closely folded, which rested on its left side, with 
head toward the south. Atthe top of the skull was a broken clay pipe. 

A foot lower down and almost at the limit of the burials was a large 
mortar, concave on both sidesebut not otherwise dressed. 

In the funnel-shape pit which terminated the large bone stratum, as 
well asin a few places in the mass itself, were found bones which, judging 
from their position, may have belonged to a bundled or doubled skeleton, 
but the evidence is too slight to state this as a fact. Only one relic 
was found in the northern half of this bone-bed—a dressed piece of 
mussel shell an inch and a half square with a hole drilled near the 
center. 

Under the pit was the end of a grave a little more than a foot deep, 
barely 3 feet wide, and extending 124 feet on a line exactly east and 
west. In it were 19 skeletons, including those of 3 infants and of 2 or 3 
older children. Only one was doubled, all the other bones having been 
promiscuously thrown in. The only specimens found were a few Mar- 
ginella shells and disk beads. 

The soil of the bottom is the black loam found along water courses 
which overflow frequently; it is very muddy when wet, but easily dug 
when dry. This probably accounts for the location of the mound. 
Many higher places close by on each side of the creek afford ample level 
space for the construction of such a tumulus, but the soil is a limestone 
clay, difficult to work by aboriginal methods. The many ways in which 
the remains were deposited are explicable only by the supposition that 
this was long a general burial place. But there was no village or camp 
in the immediate vicinity, for no burned earth or stones, no ashes or 
animal bones, very few pottery fragments, and not half a dozen flint 
flakes were found in the entire structure. The dismembered condition of 


44 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY AUREAD OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


remains and the absence of relics in the bone-beds denote the period- 
ical collection and interment of skeletons, while the position of the 
bones and the finding of various relics in nearly every grave with only 
1 or 2 skeletons indicate that other persons were buried soon after 
death. This was especially the case of infants, nearly all of whom had 
been interred with many beads. 

Moreover, the bodies occurred at all levels. In many places graves 
had been dug after the mound had been partly or even wholly completed. 
In others—especially in the bone-beds and in 2 or 3 smaller deposits 
somewhat similar—bones seem to have been laid or thrown on the 
surface of the mound and covered with soil. The earth was so uniform 
in color and consistency that this could not be proved. ; 

The total number of skulls found was 388, but in the bone-beds, as 
well as in other places where the bones were much broken, only those 
were counted of which enough remained in position to make certain 
there could be no duplication. Neither was any account taken of the 
fragments of cremated skulls found in more than 20 different spots. 
The mound had been dug into several times previously, in a desultory 
way, yielding fragmentary skulls to everyone who chose to continue 
excavation. A great many have been destroyed by the plow. Alto- 
gether it is probably safe to say that as originally constructed this 
was the cemetery of not less than 800 individuals. There is no other 
mound nor any indication of another burial place in the neighborhood; 
but half a mile southward, on the opposite side of the creek, a great 
quantity of chips, spalls, and unfinished implements of flint foreign to 
the locality have been found. 


PAGEHK COUNTY. 
KITE PLACE. 


On the land of A. J. Kite, one-fourth of a mile west of Grove Hill, 
on a narrow ridge, is a mound nearly leveled by cultivation. It is now 
75 feet long, north and south, 20 feet wide, and a foot high. Mr Kite 
states that a few years ago he found near the extreme northern end, 
just beneath the surface, 17 extended bodies radiating like the spokes in 
a wheel, the skulls lying almost in contact. Over the face of one 
skeleton was a sheet of mica about 10 by 12 inches and nearly an inch 
thick, supported by a stone on each side of the skull, no other stones 
being found. The only art relics were a few gorgets. Afterward, near the 
center of the mound, Mr Kite unearthed a sandstone platform pipe with 
a turtle carved on top of the bowl, the legs and tail in relief on the sides, 
the head projecting on the side opposite the stem hole; also about a 
peck of well-finished quartzite arrowpoints or spearheads. 

At the extreme southern end a few bowlders rested on the original 
surface over a narrow space about 5 feet long, near one end of which 
was a Side-notched ax and near the other end a sheet of mica; between 
them was a slate gorget with 2 perforations. A gorget was found at 


a | FIRE BEDS ON KITE PLACE 45 


one point on the bottom; and chips of quartzite, scraps of mica, and 
pieces of arrows were abundant through the entire structure. 

In the bottom land below this mound the tlood of 1870 uncovered 
between 200 and 300 aboriginal fire beds, from 4 to 6 feet in diameter, 
either on the bare surface or on astratum of bowlders carelully placed. 
Quantities of flakings, broken and burned bones, burned stones, and 
other indications of a village site were washed out. 


PRICE FARM. 


a the farm of ©. D. Price, half a mile north of Alma, on the summit 
of a hill overlooking the largest bottom on the Shenandoah, is a mound 
20 by 28 feet and 2 feet high, composed of 
earth and stone in about equal quantities. 

At the center, over an area 4 feet in diam- 
eter, the stones reached to the hard gravelly 
subsoil. No relics or traces of bone were in 
this pit, but it was evident from the appear- 
ance of the earth that a body, or bodies, had 
been deposited in it. 


pana yer 


LEE LONG FARM, 


SS= 


——— 


——— 


On a high point on the farm of Lee Long, 
adjoining the Price place on the north, is a 
small cairn similar to many others in this 
section. Nothing was found in it. 


PHILIP LONG FARM. 


On the farm of Philip Long, 5 miles south- 
west of White House ford, are 3 mounds 
which, after much mutilation by plow and 
spade, are not more than 2 feet high, and 
measure, the first, 50 by 25 feet, the longer 
axis northeast and southwest; the second, 25 
feet northwest from the first and parallel to 
it, 38 by 28 feet; and the third, 10 feet north Sz 
of the second, 37 by 25 feet, the longer axis ss s 
northwest and southeast. They are men- nce Rea 
tioned in Kercheval’s Histery of the Valley, oe a een vintinie 
which also states that many Indian graves 
exist immediately around them; but no trace of these can be found, 
and it is probable that the author alludes to depressions from which 
earth was taken to form the mounds. 

Inthe first the central portion was excavated over an area 12 by 25 feet. 
At several places southwest of the center small fragments of bone were 
found, but not enough to denote the number or position of the bodies. 
The earth around them was unchanged in appearance or color. Six 


46 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY [ erenceeee 


feet southwest of the center in a space not more than 4 feet square were 
4 deposits of relics, all on the original surface, with only one of which 
were any traces of bone. These consisted of a striped slate gorget 
(figure 10), a rectangular slate gorget with 2 holes, some red ocher, 
several pieces of quartz crystal, some small, smooth quartz pebbles, 
a very large flint flake, a flint knife, 6 arrow- 
heads, and a gorget-form piece of slate roughly 
finished; finally, a large triangular knife, several 
pieces of quartz, 2 rough celt scrapers of basaltic 
rock, and an unfinished pipe of micaceous sand- 
stone (figure 11). The mound was composed en- 
tirely of earth. . 

In the second mound, 135 feet west of the cen- 
ter, were some fragments of bones with which 
were a Sandstone platform pipe (figure 12), 8 
arrowpoints and spearheads of flint and crystal, 
a small gorget of shale, another of sandstone, a 
small plate of mica, and pieces of crystal. 

The third mound contained about the center 
several wagon loads of stones which had all been 
taken out and thrown back by a previous inves- 
tigator. It is reported they formed a vault in 
z which was a skeleton with a few relics. Eight 
Fig. 11.—_Unfinished pipe from feet west of the center were fragments of bone, 

Philip Long mound, Page with a single tooth worn to the neck; and the 

county, Virginia. i : 

; same distance south of the center were a broken 
gorget with one hole, another with two holes, a third unfinished, and 
2 arrowheads. Four feet northwest of the center were some soft frag- 
ments of the skull of a body that extended toward the west. 

In the river bottom under the spur on which these mounds are 
built some human bones were exposed a few years ago by a freshet, 


Fia@. 12.—Pipe from Philip Long mound, Page county, Virginia. 


and a great many spalls, chips, and implements in various stages of 
manufacture have been picked up. 


BRUBAKER FARM. 


On the farm of A. D. Brubaker, near the mouth of Massanutten 
creek, 1s a small spot on the bank of a level terrace where a mound is 


etme | EXCAVATIONS ON BOWERS FARM 47 


FOWKE 


said to have stood. No elevation is now apparent, but arrowheads 
and chippings are very plentiful. 


GANDER PLACE. 


On the top of a hill near the house of D. H. Gander, half a mile above 
White House ford and nearly opposite the mouth of Massanutten 
creek, was a small stone mound which has been destroyed. On an 
opposite island the flood of 1870 washed out burned stones, fragments 
of pottery, flint chippings, and several skeletons. 


BOWERS FARM, 


On the farm of J. C. Bowers, 35 miles west of Luray, opposite the 
mouth of Mill creek, on the first ridge rising above the river, is a 
mound of earth and stone 30 feet in diameter and 30 inches high. 
On the northern side is a depression 15 by 30 feet, 2 feet deep, the 
slope being continuous from its bottom to the top of the mound. Most 
of the stones were at the central portion where several wagon loads of 
bowlders had been carefully laid up in the form of a V, with the open- 
ing toward the east. From the apex to the extremity of either arm 
was between 12 and 13 feet. The right or southern arm rested on the 
undisturbed original surface. No relies or traces of bone were found in 
or under it. Beneath the left or northern branch was an irregular exca- 
vation filled with large stones, between which very little earth had 
settled. The western end of tbe excavation was nearly circular, 4 feet in 
diameter and a foot in depth, the bottom being covered with a mixture of 
white clay and sand, which had been put there while wet, and pounded 
smooth and level. It was as hard as cement and under the pick split 
into small flakes. Traces of bony substance were found in it; also 3 
gorgets sufficiently far apart to denote that they belonged to different 
individuals. One, similar to that illustrated in figure 10, was of green 
slate; another was of black slate, rectangular, with two perforations; the 
third, like the second in form, of black shale, much softened by moisture. 
A trench a foot in width joined the northeastern side of this grave to 
another measuring 5 to 6 feet across, with an average depth of 2 feet, 
the sides of which were covered with a substance similar to that on 
the bottom of the first. It was roughly made, with no attempt at 
regularity or symmetry, and contained no relics or traces of bones. An 
excavation a foot wide and the same in depth, with smooth, even sides 
and bottom, extended 24 feet from the eastern side; nothing was found 
in it. The arrangement of bowlders and the peculiar shape of the 
‘grave pits in this mound were different from anything else observed 
in Shenandoah valley. 


BURNER PLACE. 


In the river bottom, half a mile above the Bowers farm, near Jacob 
Burner’s distillery, a village site was uncovered by the flood of 1870. 


48 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY sites: 
Little information concerning these remains or the character of the 
art products uncovered by the freshet was obtainable. 


VEENY FARM. 


On a hill on the farm of Lee Veeny, half a mile above the Burner 
place, are 2 small mounds, both of which have been opened. It is 
reported that pottery was found in one. 


RUFFNER PLACE, 


For nearly a mile along the bottom lands of Reuben and Ben Ruffner, 
below Ruffner ford, a mile north of Hamburg, the flood of 1870 disclosed 
at intervals hearths and fireplaces, probably over 200 in all. They 
were close to the river bank and from 2 to 6 feet in diameter. Quan- 
tities of flint and quartzite chips, burned stones, fragments of pottery, 
many fine arrowpoints and spearheads (one of Flint ridge stone), and 
a very large black steatite platform pipe have been found. 


BAUSERMAN FARM. 


On the farm of George Bauserman, a mile anda half above Bixler 
ferry and 3 miles northwest of Luray, is a village site on a low bluff 
overlooking the bottom. Chippings are abundant, and many relies 
have been found here and in the adjacent bottom lands. The last 
Indian massacre in the valley occurred at this point in 1766, 


DEAL FARM. 


Three miles northwest of Luray, opposite Shuler, at Bixler ferry, on 
the farm of Mrs Deal, are 2 mounds on a plateau that rises about 200 
feet above the river bottom. They area hundred yards apart on a line 
nearly northwest and southeast. The one nearer the bluff is 21 feet 
in diameter and 18 inches above the surrounding level. On the northern 
side the slope continues unbroken to the bottom of a ditch a foot deep 
and 4 feet wide which embraces a third of the circumference. The sur- 
face of the mound was covered with a single stratum of bowlders, none 
appearing below these until within 4 or 5 feet of the center on every 
side. Here they began to increase in numbers and finally extended to 
the bottom of a pit 4 feet in diameter which reached to the gravelly 
subsoil at a depth of 18 inches. Across the bottom of the pit, in 
irregular spots and patches not wider at any point than 18 inches, was 
a streak of powdered specular iron ore. On this, close to one edge of 
the pit, were some scraps of mica, a few flint fragments, pieces of 
quartz crystal, a lump of red ocher, a slate gorget with two perforations 
and curving sides, a rectangular gorget with two perforations and 
another of similar shape but with one perforation, and a chalcedony 
spearhead nearly 6 inches long (figure 13). There was no trace of bone. 
Evidently a body had been deposited at the bottom of the grave with 
the accompanying articles, stones placed over it until they reached up 


ARCHEOLOGY 
FOWKE 


MOUNDS ON 


DEAL FARM 


49 


the slope of the removed earth, which had been thrown out on every 
side alike, earth piled over and around them, and the mound covered 


with a layer of bowlders. 


The other mound was somewhat larger, being 24 feet across and 2 
5) S 


feet high. 


It had been previously excavated, but examination of so 


much as remained undisturbed showed that it was constructed in the 


same manner as the first. 


Four feet from its base was the inner mar- 


gin of a shallow ditch extending two-thirds of the way around on the 


northern, western, and southern sides. 


HENRY 


BRUMBACK FARM. 


On the farm of Henry Brumback, 33 miles north of Luray, near the 
bank of Pass run, just above its contluence with Hawksbill creek, is a 


mound 35 feet high and 80 feet in diameter; but 
before being cultivated it was 8 or 9 feet in 
height. The bottom is level, subject to over- 
flow, and composed entirely of material depos- 
ited by the creek, none of it being due to the 
decomposition of rock in place. Bowlders of 
varying size from the foothills on the east 
occur sparsely along the stream, but con 
stantly increase in numbers toward the hill 
until the ground is covered with them. Spalls, 
chips, fragments, and entire specimens are 
abundant on the surface; and though all the 
facts point unmistakably to a comparatively 
recent date for the deposition of the soil, 
many of these objects are perfect types both 
in form and material of the ‘ paleolithic” im- 
plements from the gravels. 

Five circles were marked off from the center 
of the mound, the radii in multiples of 5 feet, 
giving a diameter of 50 feet to the outer cir- 
cle. This area was excavated to a depth of 2 
feet below the surrounding level, each zone 
being entirely removed before the one next 
interior was touched. In the outer zone at 
least 40 different deposits of human bones 
were found at various depths, a dozen or 
more of them being remains of cremated 
skeletons. They were so decayed that the 
method of burial or number of individuals was 
not determinable. None extended beyond the 


‘a f } 74 i uid 
iri dfs 
MN il 
ms vl 
\\' 


ay j i 4 \ \4 ' 
py men's 

Wh iy Ny 

Wl F 


ei 


i) aa TTA \ | ' ) | : 
Wao 


ae AN 
nN mI \ _ imi 
rit ae) 


ie N\A 
\\ ty 


Fie. 13.—Spearhead from Deal 
mound, Page county, Virginia. 


outer circle. On the eastern side was a small pile of stones on the 


original level; nothing was found under them. 


BULL W=23——4 


50 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


At the beginning of the second zone, 20 feet from the center, on 
the northern side,were 3 skulls almost in contact and lying on a few of 
the longer bones which were much decayed and broken. Two feet from 
these were 2 others under the same conditions. For several feet on 
each side and toward the center from these skulls every stroke of 
the pick uncovered human bones, most of them soft as wet ashes. 
Northeast of the center, mostly in this zone but partly in the outer 
one, was a thin layer of pine bark charcoal with some small oak sticks 
or limbs, apparently spread with some care over the surface of the 
mound as it stood at this stage. Below it the earth showed no marks 
of fire; but resting on and coextensive with it was a stratum of 
burned earth haying considerable variation in thickness. A similar 
but smaller deposit was near the skulls above mentioned. 

Sixteen feet south of the center were the remains of a young buffalo, 
consisting of a skull with the nubs of the horns, a portion of the lower 
jaw, some cervical and dorsal vertebrae, the latter with the ribs still 
attached, the pelvic bones, and a few caudal vertebrae. No trace of 
limbs or scapule were present, though all the bones found were in 
their proper relative positions, the ribs extending into the earth above 
as if the body of the carcass had been thrown on the ground and 
covered with earth during the construction of the mound. On the sandy 
subsoil a few inches west of these bones, and 8 or 10 inches lower, 
was a folded human skeleton. The teeth were much worn, the bones 
slender but long, the femur measuring 18 inches. 

On the eastern side was acart load of bowlders covering an extended 
skeleton, with the head toward the north; near the hips were 5 small 
triangular quartzite arrowheads with indented base, and a knife of 
similar pattern of green flinty stone. The stones extended over the 
northern end of a hole of very irregular outline a foot deep, 6 feet long, 
and 2 to 3 feet wide, the bottom burned red to a depth of 2 to 5 inches, 
and covered with an inch of pine charcoal, on which lay a lot of decayed 
bones, certainly the remains of more than one body; with them, at the 
southern end, were a triangular knife and 2 triangular arrowheads of 
quartzite. The hole had been filled to the general level with earth, a 
space 1 by 2 feet covered with an inch layer of cremated human bones 
and other bones, showing no trace of fire, deposited on them. 

Toward the center, with only a few inches of earth intervening, was 
a similar excavation, the northern end opposite the middle of the first, 
which it duplicated in construction and contents, with the addition 
of 4 large columellas. 

Just above and west of the stone pile began a bone-bed extending 
14 feet from north to south and reaching to within 10 feet of the 
center. The deposit was irregular, the bottom varying a foot or more 
from a horizontal plane, not holding the same level more than a few 
inches at any part. In places the decayed bone formed a stratum 
5 or 6 inches in thickness with scarcely any included earth; in others 


eke RELICS FROM BRUMBACK FARM 51 
it almost disappeared; while in one part there were several thin layers 
of bone interstratified with thicker layers of earth, making the deposit 
extend through a vertical space of 2 feet. One large and several small 
colueHas and also a rude clay pipe were among the bones. 

In the third zone, nearly north of the center, 2 feet above the bottom, 
was along-stemmed steatite pipe; south of the center a grave oby 8 feet, 
the main axis east and west, extended through the 2 feet of sand sub- 
soil to the yellow clay beneath. The bottom was covered by a mass 
of charcoal and burned earth, on which the disarticulated skeletons 
of 3 or more individuals had been thrown at random after the fire 
had died down; burned and unburned fragments of bone were mingled, 
hence the cremation was not a part of the burial ceremony; no relics 
were with them, but in the earth just above were many fragments of an 
incised flat bone ornament. Over a small portion of the bottom was < 
stone pile which extended upwardinto the body of the mound; the sand 
excavated had been thrown back after the bones were interred, A 
little north of east from the center was a kettle-shape pit 5 feet in 


Fic. 14.—Pipe from Henry Brimback mound, Page county, Virginia. 


diameter at the top and 2 feet deep. The bottom was lined with 
charcoal, some of the pieces being 6 inches in diameter, Another, north 
of this (a foot of solid earth separating them), was 3 feet in diameter | 
and 8 inches deep, with the usual contents of charcoal and decayed bone. 
East of north of the center was a fourth pit, 6 feetin diameter and 30 
inches deep, extending to the solid gravel. The bottom was covered 
with 6 inches of charcoal; scattered through this was nearly a cart 
load of burned stones, none of them weighing more than 8 or 10 pounds. 
A few fragments of bone and a steatite platform pipe (figure 14) lay 
at the bottom. The next stratum of 6 inches was of earth; then a 
space 8 by 2 feet, the main axis east and west, was covered with 
charcoal, in and on which were traces of bone. Whether the circular 
grave had been filled to a depth of only 12 inches and the second 
interments made at once, or whether it had been made level with the 
surface and another grave dug afterward, could not be determined. 


52 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY Re 


West of these was a grave 5 feet in diameter and a foot deep. South- 
west of this, or northwest of the center, was another, 6 by 2 feet, lying 
north and south, in which were 6 columellas close to a skull that had 
been partially burned, the teeth being completely calcined. Southwest 
of the center was a Shallow grave 6 by 4+ feet, extending northeast and 
southwest; the bottom was covered with charcoal intermingled with 
decayed bone. These 8 graves—or 7 separate pits—were thus made 
almost in a circle around the central part of the mound, but at varying 
distances from one another. 

In the fourth zone, south of the center, several columellas, as well as 
a number of shell disk beads, were found at the original surface level; 
and 2 feet above them were still other columellas and a handful of shells . 
of Marginella with the bones of a hand and wrist by a skull. All were 
soft from decay. Southeastward from the center a steatite bent tube 
pipe was found, but no human remains occurred near it. 

Throughout this zone were beds of decayed bone, mostly at 1 foot 
and 3 feet above the bottom, though detached masses occurred at all 
levels; while small deposits of burned human bones, either with or with- 
out others showing no marks of heat, were frequent. 

Kast and southeast of the center was a grave 8 by 4 feet, trending 
north and south, very irregular in depth and outline, extending in places 
to 30 inches below surface level. The bottom was covered with charcoal, 
burned stones, and traces of bone, among which were 8 small shark 
teeth, charred; with a skull at the margin nearest the center were an 
arrowhead and a flat pebble drilled for a gorget. 

The removal of these four zones left a central area 10 feet in diame- 
ter. Near the center of this, on the southern side, among fragments of 
bone on and above the surface level, were 15 triangular arrowheads of 
quartz and quartzite, one of them stemmed, the only specimen of this 
kind found in the mound. <A few inches south of these, and a foot 
higher, were numerous soft and broken columellas. Others were found 
at various places in the block, sometimes with decayed bone, some- 
times alone, all traces of the bodies with which they had been interred 
having disappeared. Northeastward from the center were several 
pieces of a small but very thick pot. 

Beneath this area were 3 graves, south, northwest, and northeast of 
the central point, each large enough to contain several bodies. They 
were irregular in outline and depth, extending in places to the compact 
eravel below. The bottom of each was covered with a layer of charcoal, 
which reached a few inches up the sides; on this were traces of 
decayed bone, but nothing else. 

Throughout the mound were bowlders, 2 or 3 in a place, laid on 
deposits of bones, though never in sufficient numbers to cover them. 
As arule they were placed above the head. One, with a natural con- 
cavity, had been so placed as barely to touch a cranium, the edges of 
the stone resting on the earth all around it. 


owe EXPLORATION OF BRUMBACK FARM 53 


All the pits and graves appear to have been made with reference to 
a regular disposition around a given point.! 

All other mounds in this county in which specimens were found 
contained mica and gorgets, but no beads nor shells, while this yielded 
quantities of the latter, but not a flake of mica nor a gorget, except 
one rough stone whose only artificial feature was-a rudely drilled hole. 


CULLERS FARM. 


On the summit of a hill on the farm of Lee Cullers, next west of the 
Brumback farm, is a small mound 18 by 28 feet, the longer axis nearly 
east and west, parallel with the ridge on which it stands. 

Near the eastern end was a small pile of stones resting on the 
original surface, but nothing was found under them. 

At the middle of the mound, stones extended to the bottom of a 
grave 5 by 2 feet and a foot deep, trending nearly southeast and north- 


!On April 21-23, 1894, this locality was further examined by Professor W. H. 
Holmes and W J McGee. About 100 yards northeast of the large mound, on the 
level alluvial bottom, a number of graves were found, roughly arranged in a line 
trending east and west. All were broken up by plowing to such an extent that the 
contents were fragmentary and indiscriminately intermingled. The graves were 
detected by the dark color, due to organic matter, in the freshly plowed surface. In 
all, fragments of human bones and potsherds were found; in some cases human teeth 
occurred, and in one instance the distal portion of the tibia of a deer was pivked uv. 
Charcoal was observed in several graves, but no calcined bones were seen. 

The site is of exceptional interest as an illustration of aboriginal industry. Pass 
run, a good-sized mill stream, flows over a bed of small bowlders and cobbles with 
smaller pebbles, consisting in part of an exceptionally hard and tough diabase, and 
in size and texture the diabase cobbles were admirably adapted to manufacture 
and use in primitive fashion. The extent of manufacture is indicated by numerous 
rejects representing all stages from that of a few trial or initial blows to nearly 
finished implements. These rejects are of special note in that nearly all represent 
the manufacture of broad-pointed implements—celts or axes—rather than sharp- 
pointed objects, such as those represented by the rejectage in the well-known 
localities on Piney branch and Delaware river. A nearly complete celt, showing 
the flaking by which it was wrought out of the original cobble, and ground only 
toward the edge, was among the objects picked up, and it was evidently the form 
which the primitive artisan had in mind in his work on the cobbles which resulted 

only in failures. 

The source of the diabase cobbles was sought by following Pass run toward its 
source near the summit of the Blue ridge. Traced upstream, the fragments increase 
in size and number until, about the confluence of the branches as they emerge from 
the mountain gorges, the material was found to prevail, commonly in the form of 
huge bowlders; and well within the gorges the rock was found in place as a great 
eruptive mass. In view of the rude appliances and purposes of the red men the site 
near the mouth of Pass run could not be better chosen by civilized intelligence. 
With primitive tools the hard, tough rock could not be quarried where it occurs in 
place; the great bowlders of the upper reaches could not be reduced. A few hun- 
dred yards below the site, with the confluence of the larger Hawksbill creek and its 
inferior pebbles, the material is too sparse for profitable seeking. At the site only 
the toughest and hardest specimens have been preserved by the selection of stream 
work, and they are of fit size for convenient flaking and sufficiently numerous for 
easy finding.—W J McGEnr. 


54 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY (arewer x 


ETHNOLOGY 


west. At the eastern end against the slope were a large unperforated 
gorget, some flint and quartz chips, and a long, slender flint flake, A 
foot from these 5 small plates of mica, a quartz blade, 5 roughly fin- 
ished flint knives, and a shale gorget in fragments from weathering 
were found. 

On the point between the Hawksbill and the Shenandoah there 
was formerly a small stone mound, but it is now entirely destroyed. 
Many relics have been found in the field in which it stood. 


J. A. BRUMBACK FARM. 


On the farm of J. A Brumback, at Beyler ferry, is a small cairn 
almost effaced by cultivation. 


ALGER FARM. 


On the farm of A. J. Alger, 8 miles northwest of Luray, on a spur 
which extends from Massanutten mountain to the Shenandoah, is a 
mound 50 feet long and from 22 to 28 feet in breadth, the longer axis 
nearly northwest and southeast, or about parallel with the spur. The 
height varies from 4 to 5 feet. A broad shallow ditch extends nearly 
around it, the inner edge being 3 to 4 feet from the base of the mound. 
Exeavation proved it to consist of two nearly circular earth mounds 
whose bases overlapped on the adjacent sides, the whole being covered 
with bowlders to a depth of 1 to 2 feet. Thirteen feet inward from the- 
southeastern end and 8 feet from the northern side was a grave large 
enough to contain an extended body. Two feet southwest of this was a 
pit 3 feet in diameter. From these to the southern edge of the mound 
extended a streak of burned earth and charcoal 6 to 10 feet in breadth, 
apparently the remains of a fire on the surface. Eighteen feet inward, - 
10 feet from the northern side, was a pit 5 feet in diameter containing a 
few fragments of soft bones, among which were the teeth of a child and an 
adult; also a broken flint spearhead. Twenty feet inward, 8 feet from the 
northern side, was a grave 5 feet long. Twenty-eight feet inward on the 
center line was a grave 4 by 14 feet. Allof these reached only to the hard 
subsoil, and in none of them, except as mentioned above, were found 
any relies or traces of bone. Forty feet inward, or 10 feet from the north- - 
western end, equidistant from the sides of the mound, was a grave nearly 
7 feet long extending a foot into the hard gravelly clay, which is diffi- 
cult to penetrate even with a pick. Much of the earth removed had been 
thrown back and mingled with cobblestones or bowlders. Near the 
center were 2 small copper beads and a scrap of mica, At the north- 
western end were an gorget-form piece of slate (not perforated), a gorget: 
of green slate broken and redriiled, a piece of mica, a flint arrowhead, a 
quartzite knife, a piece of white quartz, and a piece of quartz erystal. 
Stones filled all the graves and were piled above them to the top of the 
mound. In several of the graves flat stones were inclined against the 
sides with one end in the bottom, as if poles or other supports had been 


GRAVES ON ALGER FARM 575) 


aoe | 
FOWKE 


placed across to protect the bodies and had decayed, thus allowing the 
‘stones to fallin. This feature was observed in nearly every mound in 
the valley in which slabs were found. 


RILEY VILLE. 


On the farm of F. M. Huffman, a mile southwest of Rileyville, is a 
narrow ridge somewhat lower at the middle than at either end. In this 
slight depression is a mound 60 feet long, 20 to 24 feet wide, and 2 to 3 
feet high, being lower and narrower at the middle than near the ends. 
The longer axis is nearly east and west or at a right angle to the ridge, 
extending across the latter to the slope on either side. There is a 
shallow ditch along each side of the mound and a stratum of bowlders 
ranging from 10 to 50 pounds in weight covers the top. It will be 
observed that the method of construction is exactly the same as that 
of the Alger mound. 

At the extreme western end was a grave 6 feet by 18 inches, dug 
nearly to the subsoil, partially refilled with earth, and then covered 
with a pile of bowlders. This is unusual in such graves, as no others 
have been found in the valley in which the rocks did not extend to the 
bottom. <A foot from the eastern end of the grave, just below the stones, 


1G. 15.—Copper crescent from F. M. Huffman mound, Page county, Virginia. 


was a crescent of copper 6 inches across the horns, with 3 smal! holes 
punched near the convex edge (figure 15). Directly under this, with 6 
inches of earth intervening, were 8 triangular black flint knives. Two 
feet from these, at a slightly lower level, was a double handful of 
quartzite chips and spalls. 

At 14 feet from the end began a mass of stones covering a space 8 
feet in diameter at the top of the mound and filling a grave 6 by 4 feet 
that reached a few inches into the soil. On the bottom, a few feet 


< Ap EE BUREAU OF 
56 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY ee 


from the eastern end, were two pieces of quartz crystal and a large 
rectangular gorget in which a hole had been started but not com- 
pleted. 

Midway between, the extremities of the mound were 2 graves 3 by 
5 feet extending shghtly below the original surface, and 6 feet 
beyond these was another of the same size and general character, 
reaching to the subsoil. 


Fic. 16.—Pipe from F. M. Huffman monnad, Page coanty, Virginia. 


At 16 feet from the eastern end of the mound were 4 graves on a line 
nearly north and south. The northern one, near the edge of the 
mound, was quite shallow and 1 by 5 feetin extent. ‘The next was the 
sume length, but 6 inches wider. At its eastern end was some greasy, 
shining black substance mingled with the earth, in which was a rec- 
tangular gorget 2 by 5 inches with one hole. Near the middle was a 
smaller gorget of similar form with two 
holes. Against the northern side, oppo- 
site the center, was another, still smaller, 
with eurved sides. Near the western end, 
Ginches below the level of the first gorget 
found,was a large plate of mica, thus show- 
ing that the bottom of the grave had not 
been made level. A pine stump had been 
burned on the spot where it was dug. The 
charcoal and resin from the roots could be 
traced below and on either side of the ex- 
cavation. 

The third grave was 3 feet in diameter. 


Fic. 17.—Paint cup from F. M. Huffman < es 
mond! Bade county vaineinin At the center lay a finely finished plat- 


form pipe of bluish-gray sandstone, with 
the bowl upward (figure 16), and a paint cup or unfinished pipe of the 
same material (figure 17). The fourth grave, almost at the margin of 
the mound, measured 2 by 5 feet, and was dug to the subsoil. At the: 
eastern end were a small gorget and a few seraps of mica. 


eye GRAVES ON HUFFMAN FARM 5a 


Pwo feet east of the first of these graves, almost at the edge of the 
mouud, was one 3 feet in diameter, reaching to the subsoil; and at the 
extreme eastern end of the mound was another not quite so deep, 
4 feet in diameter. 

In all cases the measurements given apply to the bottom of the 
grave, the top being larger, owing to the outward inclination of the 
sides, whose slope was not at all even or regular. No traces of bone were 
found in any of them. The longer graves lay parallel with the main axis 
of the mound, and the position of the relics indicates that the bodies 
had been placed in them with the heads toward the east. The clay 
below the thin coating of soil was of the consistency of putty. 

Manifestly there were three periods of construction. At the eastern 
end 7 graves were covered by a mound about 24 feet in diameter; a 
few feet west of this a similar mound was made over 2 graves; then 
two additional graves were made in the narrow space between, suffi- 
cient stone and earth being piled above to give the appearance of a 
single mound, but not enough to make it symmetric in form. Each of 
the larger graves may have contained more than one body. 

Fragments of mica, quantities of quartzite chips and spalls, and 
occasionally a knife or arrowhead were scattered through the earth of 
the mound. <A piece of clay pipe was found near the top. 

On the adjoining farm of J. R. Huffman, on a knoll somewhat higher 
than the ridge, is a small cairn now nearly destroyed. 


KEYSER FARM. 


On the farm of J. W. Keyser, three-fourths of a mile northwest of 
Rileyville, is a cave from which several human skulls have been ob- 
tained. In the débris near the mouth many fragmentary bones occur, 
aud in a room about 30 feet farther back bones are resting on and 
imbedded in the stalagmite. Some entire skulls have been found in 
this room, 

Systematic investigation is impossible until the opening to the cave 
is greatly enlarged and the accumulated matter cleaned out. 


M. LONG FARM. 


On the farm of Mrs Michael Long, 24 miles north of Rileyville, on a 
spur locally known as “ Indian Grave ridge,” are 2 stone mounds, 
both of which have been ravaged to such an extent as to render further 
examination useless. One is 70 feet in length with a breadth of 15 
to 20 feet; the other is about 30 feet in diameter; each probably 3 or 4 
feet high originally. 


IDA. 
v 


On the farm of A. Shipe, near Ida, are 2 small mounds or bowlder 
piles which have long been known as Indian graves; but they are on 


58 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY eee 


ETHNOLOGY 


the slope of the hill instead of on the top, and may have been heaped 
up when the land was cleared. 


PRINTZ PLACE. 


On John S. Printz’s land, on Dry run, is a small stone heap from 
which, it is claimed, human bones and fragments of pottery have been 
taken; but it lies on the slope of the Blue ridge, fully 1,000 feet above 
the base, and a stream of water flows from beneath it. 


KOONTZ PLACE. 


Near the Gordonsville turnpike, a mile above Kite mills, at the foot - 
of the Blue ridge, on the land of David Koontz, is a field where hun- 
dreds of arrowpoints and spearheads and many hoes and celts have been 
found. The ground is covered with chips and spalls, and it seems to 
be the site of an extensive factory. Quartz and quartzite bowlders, 
and argillite in pieces that may be wrought into implements with but 
little labor, are abundant. The ground is too sterile for cultivation, 
and the nearest level land is fully a mile away. 

A-very small earth mound in which some fragments of mica were 
found, stood on a terrace between the two Hawksbill creeks, a mile 
and a half south of Luray. 


SHENANDOAH COUNTY. 
STRASBURG. 


A little more than a mile south of Strasburg, on the land of O. 8. 
Funk, is a mound 3 feet high and 350 feet in diameter. It stands near 
a bluff overlooking North fork of the Shenandoah, and is composed 
of earth and stone in about equal quantities, the latter, some of 
them weighing 200 pounds. being sandstone bowlders from the surface 
and shale or limestone slabs from the bluff. 

Three graves were found extending a little less than a foot into the 
compact clay soil, each about 6 feet long and 16 or 18 inches wide, lying 
northwest and southeast, and nearly equidistant from the center and 
from each other. In one, nothing was found; in another, decayed bone; 
in the third, traces of bone, a rude quartz knife, and a sheet of mica. 
The rocks piled over them had settled to the bottom of each. 

On the opposite side of the river, south of this mound, is another 
18 inches high and 20 feet in diameter, similar in construction except 
that it was built of shale slabs, there being no sandstone bowlders 
near. [tis onthe northern end of a ridge in a sharp curve of the river, 
and covered two graves, the longer axis northwest and southeast as in- 
the first. They were about 5 feet apart, the eastern end of the southern 
one opposite the middle of the northern one. No trace of bones was 
found. 


oatEar | ‘““INDIAN CAMP” NEAR STRASBURG 5g 


FOWKE 


Half a mile south of this mound, in a field that rises from the river 
in a gentle slope, is an area of about 2 acres, known as- “ Indian 
camp.” The soil is black and very productive, but no pottery, burned 
stones, bones, or any other of the usual remains have ever been found. 

In the bottom just below Mr Funk’s house a flood some years ago 
washed off a considerable quantity of soil, disclosing several places 
where the earth over a space of 5 or 6 feet was very red, as if it had 
been burned. These were possibly the sites of fire beds, but no trace 
of them is now to be seen. 


VICINITY OF NEWMARKET. 


Near the mouth of Smith creek, 5 miles north of Newmarket, is a 
mound, now almost leveled by cultivatio:. Some human bones and a 
few relics have been dug or plowed out of it. 

It was at this point that Peyton’ and Kercheval? located the Senedo 
Indians. The latter says all the tribe, except two boys, were killed, 
and the mound, whose height he gives as 12 or 15 feet, contained the 
bodies of the slain, being “literally filled with human skeletons.” But 
the author appears not to reflect that a mound of such height could 
scarcely be constructed by “two boys,” or be so nearly obliterated by 
the plow. ; 

On the adjoining farm, near the river, are 2 mounds. One has been 
opened and is reported to have contained an extended skeleton 
covered with flat stones. A grooved ax of about 5 pounds’ weight, a 
leaf-shape quartzite knife 6 inches long, some arrowheads, and a 
black steatite platform pipe with a stem 5 inches wide, the cylindrical 
bowl 5 inches long and joining the stem at an angle of about 135°, are 
shown, which it is claimed were found with the skeleton. 

A mound a mile north of town on ground overlooking the river, and 
another a mile southeast of town in a narrow bottom on the eastern 
side of Smith creek, have been completely destroyed. Some human 
bones have been exhumed in this bottom; it is not known whether they 


were of Indians. 
WOODSTOCK. 


A mile south of Woodstock, on the farm of E. M. Busheng, is a 
small mound on top of a ridge commanding an extensive view in every 
direction. It is now about 35 feet across and 18 inches high. 

Fifteen feet northeast of the center on the original surface under a 
pile of limestone which had been earried from some ravine in the 
vicinity—there being none in place nearer than a quarter of a mile 
away—were some fragments of bones apparently of a person about 14 
years of age. Two feet south of this, in the mound, were a few decayed 
bones belonging to another skeleton. 


'Peyton, J. L., History of Augusta County, 1882, p. 6. 
? Kercheval, 8., History of the Valley, 1833, p. 50. 


2 Fes ‘ = ~ BUREAU OF 
60 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY mbes 


Fragments of bone were under a small heap of stones 4 feet south- 
west of the first; on the stones was the extended skeleton of an adult, 
apparently an intrusive burial; by its side lay a bone needle. Another 
intrusive burial was indicated by some fragments of bones a foot above 
the bottom and just south of the skeleton last mentioned. 

Under the highest point of the mound was the southern margin of a 
burial pit 16 inches in depth. It had first been dug in circular form 
with a diameter of 5 feet; afterward it had been extended toward 
the west, making a pear-shape cavity 7 feet in length. In this were 
portions of 15 skulls. In two places were a few teeth which may have 
belonged to some of these skulls or to others which had entirely disap- 
peared. The clay was very wet and of wax-like consistency; conse- 
quently the bones could not be taken out except in small fragments 
almost as soft as the mud. They were mingled in confusion, showing 
skeleton burials. Several of the skulls were very thin; in at least 2 of 
them the teeth were very small and not at all worn, while in some the 
teeth were worn to the necks. 

A fine perforated gorget, a bear tusk with the root half ground 
away, and a minute quantity of wad were the only relics in the grave, 
although a soft slate gorget with two perforations was found on the sur- 
face above it. The pit was filled with 8 or 10 wagon loads of limestone 
slabs, each from 10 to 100 pounds in weight, which extended beyond 
its limits on every side and reached the top of the mound. 

Four feet south of the grave were a few bones a foot above the original 
surface; and 4 feet farther was another stone pile that probably had 
covered a skeleton though no bones were found under it. 

Near the southern edge of the mound was another skeleton protected 
by a small pile of stones. 

It is probable that a mound 15 to 18 feet acer oss and about 3 feet high 

was first built over the large grave; and that afterward the other skel- 
etons were interred, perhaps at various times, the earth and stones 
thrown over them destroying the symmetry of the mound and changing 
the position of its summit. 

At Dr Riddel’s, 4 miles above the town, on the opposite side of the 
river, is a place possessing all the features that would fulfill the require- 
ments of an Indian village; and many burned stones, unfinished imple- 
meuts, fire beds, and smali areas of black earth are found. 

A trail from South branch, across North mountain, passed over Fort 
mountain (Massanutten), near Woodstock, into Page valley.’ It prob- 
ably led to the country east of the Blue ridge. 


WARREN COUNTY. 


A number of small mounds or cairns formerly existed in Warren 
county, but nearly all have been destroyed and scarcely a trace of them 
now remains. Four of the mounds were on the hill back of Front 


‘Kercheval, History of the Valley, p. 51. 


RCHEOLOGY REMAINS IN WARREN COUNTY 61 


FOWKE 


Royal, near the college building, and 2 others were situated on the 
point opposite the junction of the two Happy creeks. 

Seven miles above Front Royal, on the farm of Captain Simpson, 
opposite Gooney run, were 4 cairns, one of them 20 by 20 feet, the others 
much smaller. 

There were several cairns on the farm of Dr Haynie, 9 miles below 
Front Royal; many relics, mainly arrowpoints and spearheads, are 
found in the bottom lands near by. Kercheval mentions the location 
of an Indian town at this point. 

_ Two mounds were opened near Water Lick; in one of them were found 
a stone hatchet and part of a gun barrel. 

On the Jenkins farm, near Buckton, is a mound 28 feet in diameter 
and 2 feet high; it has been partially opened without results. 

On the Catlett place, adjoining the above, were 4 mounds, of which one 
has been entirely destroyed. The largest was 20 feet in diameter and 
30 inches high. It covered 2 graves, about 5 feet apart, extending a 
few inches into the tenacious clay subsoil and filled with large stones 
which had settled in from the mound. One was nearly 6 feet long and 
about 20 inches wide; the other was cireular, 34 feet in diameter. No 
traces of bone remained in either. <A foot from the top of the mound 
were the fragmentary bones of 2 adults and a child of 12 or 14 years, 
much broken and decayed but in proper order; they had been interred 
in a shallow hole made by the removal of the stones, which were then 
thrown back on them, The 2 other mounds were much smaller; under 
each was a circular grave 34 feet in diameter, extending a few inches 
into the subsoil. No bones or art products were found in either. 

A mound at the highest point on the road leading through Cullers 
gap to Seven Fountains in Fort valley, if not due to natural causes 
is only a trail mark, as this pass was much traversed by the Indians, 

_The Indian trail through Chester gap divided at Front Royal, one 
branch joining the main trail up the valley, a few miles north of Win- 
chester,' the other following the Shenandoah. The two main streets of 
the town are laid out along the line of these trails; this explains the 
sharp angle at which they separate. 

Tradition also locates the Senedo Indians at the junction of the two 
branches of the Shenandoah and along Happy creek. 


CLARKE COUNTY. 
VICINITY OF BERRYVILLE. 


Five miles south of Berryville, on the farm of S. M. Taylor, at the 
end of a low ridge, bounded by the river and a small creek, are abund- 
ant surface indications of an aboriginal settlement. 

Four folded skeletons were found not more than a foot below the sur- 
face, one on the right side, with head toward the east; the position of 


‘Kercheval, History of the Valley, 1883, p. 51. 


ETHNOLOGY 


62 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY [ eoeeoteee 


the others could not be determined. Another, lying on the left side, 
the head toward the south, was in a grave 3 feet deep, the end of which 
was at the side of a barbecue hole. 

A burial pit 4 feet in diameter and 3 feet deep, 15 feet from the néar- 
est grave, contained remains of 3 persons. At one side were piled in 
contusion the bones of a child about 14 years of age; opposite them lay 
the pelvic bones of an adult. The bones of an infant lay in their 
proper order, on the right side, the head toward the east; at the neck 
was a Shell disk with a single perforation. 

More than 20 barbecue holes were found which had apparently been 
cleaned out before being abandoned, and had refilled; for, although the 
bottom was much burned, they were almost devoid of the remains 
usually found in such holes except that in one was a quantity of burned 
stones. They were filled with earth having exactly the same appear- 
ance as the soil about and between them; pieces of chareoal, none 
larger than a hazelnut, occasionally a mussel shell or small burned 
stone, or a fragment of pottery being scattered here and there. Most 
of the holes were circular in outline, measuring from 34 to 5 feet in 
diameter at the top and a little more than-half as much at the bottom. 
Several were quite irregular as if dug at ditferent periods. One was 15 
feet long, a foot deep at one end, 3 feet deep at the other, and from 3 to 
5 feet wide, the bottom not having a uniform slope but being quite 
uneven. It contained very few animal bones, shells, or such remains, 
but small lumps of charcoal were scattered thickly in the earth filling 
it. Parts of the skull of an infant, with arm and leg bones of 2 others 
were found; the femurs were not more than 4 inches long and the skull 
was as thin as heavy wrapping paper. 

There were several large piles of mussel shells in various places; one 
covered the grave of an adult, but this did not seem to have been 
intentional. 

On the land of John F. Alexander, lying next south of the Bowman 
farm are 2 stone mounds, one of them about 2, the other about 3 feet 
high, the diameter of each being about 20 feet. One is on top of a hill, 
the other about 40 feet above the bottom land on a point terminating a 
ridge. Both have been opened, and human bones but no other relics 
found in them. 


WHITEPOST. 


On the farm of Mr M. H. Reardon, 2 miles northwest of Whitepost, 
was a stone mound or grave that was carefully examined by that 
gentleman. The rocks surrounding it were all large; with one end set 
in the ground, the other inclining inward. Several circles were thus 
formed, each supported by the next inner one, the last .being upheld 
by small stones laid under it. Similar rows above were held in place 
by having the lower end of each stone wedged between stones in the 
next lower course; others were fixed upon these, aud so on until the 


ge og MOUNDS AT WHITEPOST 63 


uppermost stones came together above the middle of the grave, forming 
an arch. Several wagon loads of loose stones were then thrown on, 
making amound more than 4 feet high and 30 feet in diameter. In the 
vault were not less than 20 extended skeletons of adults, the skulls all 
toward the west, laid as closely together as they could be placed on the 
ground and exposed rock which formed the natural surface. The small 
amount of earth within the grave was very black and loose. A quan- 
tity of bone and shell beads sufficient to fill a cigar-box was found 
among them. 

This description exactly corresponds with that of a grave near Ripley, 
Ohio, except that the latter contained fewer skeletons. 

Half a mile southeast of the above mound was another, also of stone, 
in which were several skeletons, with arrowpoints and spearheads and 
celts. It was noticed at the time that while one mound contained no 
relics but beads, only weapons were found in the other. 


WASHINGTON COUNTY, MARYLAND. 


A mound and a cemetery were removed near dam number 4, in dig- 
ging the Chesapeake and Ohio canal. Two small mounds stood near 
the Miller sawmill, 3 miles below Sharpsburg, at the mouth of Antie- 
tam creek; human bones also were found there in excavating for the 
eanal. Another was near the river, 2 miles west of Sharpsburg. All 
these have been opened; they were of stone and quite small; pipes, 
pottery fragments, and bone ornaments or implements were found in 
them. 

There is a burial cave on 8.58. Stauffer’s land, 2 miles south of 
Sharpsburg, in a bluff that overlooks Antietam creek, and about 40 feet 
above the level of that stream. The opening is not sufficiently large 
to allow a man to enter upright, and the cave is only a few yards in 
extent in any direction. Human bones and some relics, including a pipe, 
have been found in it, under flat stones which lie only a few inches 
below the surface; some of the bones were caicined. The earth below 
them has not been disturbed, and its depth is not Known. 

At the mouth of the Conococheague, on the upper side, is a village 

site where bones, pottery, and other relics, including an unfinished 
steatite pipe of very modern North Carolina type, have been found, 
with great quantities of chips and spalls; it extends along the river 
bank for more than 300 yards. Half a mile farther up the river, on a 
bluff, was a small cairn which upon examination yielded human bones 
and a few relies. 
- A mile west of Hagerstown is a flat rock near a large spring; tradi- 
tion says it was an Indian council place. Quantities of worked flint, 
chips, spalls, and some finished implements were formerly found on 
and about the rock; it was probably an arrowhead factory. 

Two iniles above Hancock, on the Bowles farm, is a large spring at 
the foot of the hill. It was formerly a camping place of the Indians. 


‘ \ > BUREA 
64 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY eA 


At various points on the hillside above the spring, in crevices formed 
by unequal erosion of the nearly vertical strata, human bones have 
been found on the natural surface, covered with large stones some- 
times to the amount of several wagon loads, 

Cairns are reported on the farms of Thomas Smith, near the Bowles 
place, and Frank Shive, on Timber ridge, 4 miles north of Hancock, 


JEFFERSON COUNTY, WEST VIRGINIA, 


Stone mounds or cairns, from 12 to 30 feet it diameter and less than 
3 feet high, have been located as follows: One near the cement mill, a 
mile below Shepherdstown; 2 on Jacob McQuilken’s farm, 6 miles above 
Shepherdstown; and another on Harrison’s farm, adjoining the last. 
All have been opened, human bones and a few relics being found in 
them. It could not be learned at what depth they were placed; the 
excavations seemed to extend somewhat lower than the outside level. 


ALLEGANY COUNTY, MARYLAND, 


Several small cairns on a hill above the river, on the Cresap farm, at 
Oldtown, were hauled away many years ago. Bones in a fair state of 
preservation and some relics, among them a very fine pipe, were found, 

There is a village site near Ellerslie, and one at James Pollock’s 
place, on the river, 2 miles aboye North Branch station; there is also 
a mound at the latter place, now almost destroyed. Other mounds 
have existed in various parts of the county, but none remain intact, 
unless in the vicinity of Flintstone. 

A trail down Wills creek, through Cumberland, led to the Wappa- 
tomaka (South branch) valley.' 


HAMPSHIRE COUNTY, WEST VIRGINIA. 


The largest mound in Hampshire county is in the cemetery at Rom- 
ney; it measures 35 by 40 feet (the longer axis trending nearly east 
and west,) and is nearly 5 feet high, being made of stone and earth in 
about equal proportions. 

Two mounds on the Parson farm, a mile north of Romney, one 35 
feet in diameter and 24 feet high, the other somewhat smaller, have 
been thoroughly examined and reported to contain nothing. 

Two mounds, mostly of earth, are on the farm of Joseph Wirgman, 
a mile south of Romney. In one, about 25 feet in diameter, a small 
pot was found entire. The other is 22 by 34 feet and 2 feet high, 
the longer axis east and west. It covered a grave larger than any 
other that has been disclosed in this region, being 7 by 8 feet, not 
regular in outline, and extending 18 inches to the hard-packed, dis- 
integrated shale that could scarcely be dug with a pick. It had been 
refilled with earth to the depth of a foot, and then large stones, some 


‘Kercheval, History of the Valley, 1833, p. d1. 


ARCHEOLOGY EXCAVATIONS IN HAMPSHIRE COUNTY 65 


FOWKE 


of them as heavy as a man could lift, piled on until they reached 
slightly beyond the margin of the grave on every side and to the top 
of the mound as it now exists. No relics were found in it. 

A small cairn stood half a miie south of the cemetery on the same 
level as those just described. 

On the bottom lands, between the cemetery and the bridge, many 
village site relics as well as human bones have been picked up after 
floods, or when the ground was freshly plowed. 

In making excavations for the railway along the foot of Hanging 
rock, 4 miles below Romney, many human bones were unearthed. 
Such quantities of stone have fallen from the cliff above, however, that 
itis impossible to ascertain whether there was a mound. According 
to tradition a great battle was here waged between the Catawba and 
the Delaware. The same claim is made for various points on the 
Potomac from the mouth of Antietam creek almost to Cumberland, and 
along South branch from its source to its mouth;! in every locality, in 
fact, where a few skeletons have been found. 

An extensive village and cemetery site exists on the Herriott farm, 
opposite and below Hanging rock. Fireplaces are numerous and many 
skeletons have been exhumed. Besides the ordinary Indian relics are 
found iron hatchets, glass beads, and ornaments of brass. An Indian 
town stood at this point when the whites first came into the valley, and 
the natives continued to occupy it for a number of years after the early 
settlers had taken up land, as shown by the character of some of the 
relics found. Persons well versed in the history of the region assert 
that the Indians occupying this town were a branch of the Seneca. 

There were formerly many stone mounds along the foot of the hill 
back of this village, but all of them have now been removed. Some of 
them were along the hillside a few feet above the margin of the level 
bottom; others were on the level, but nowhere more than 50 or 60 feet 
from the foot of the hill. They varied in height from 2 to 8 feet, in 
diameter from 12 or 15 to 40 or 50 feet, and were composed entirely of 
stone. All except the smallest ones had a depression at the top as if 
they had contained a vault or pen of logs whose decay had allowed 
the rocks to settle. Fragmentary bones were found in many of them 
lying on the original suriace. Very few art relics were found. In one 
was a@ pipe with a wolf head carved on it. A cairn on the hillside near 
the schoolhouse on the Herriott farm contained some decayed bones. 

On the western slope of Mill Creek mountain, on the farm of William 
Hamilton, directly west of Romney, is the site of an arrowhead factory. 
Flint is abundant along the mountain side, and was carried to a knoll 
near the foot of the slope to be worked. 

Three considerable village sites are located above Romney. One is 
on Murphy’s farm, 9 miles from town; a second on John Pancake’s 


' Kercheval, History of the Valley, 1833, pp. 47-50. 
BULL. W=23 5) t , 


66 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY { reaaenee 


place, 2 miles below the former. Both are on the right bank. The 
third is on the left bank, at what is known as Pancake island. Many 
fireplaces and graves have been examined. In them arrowheads, bone 
fish-hooks, celts, pipes (including many of the platform type), iron 
hatchets, brass ornaments, and glass beads (among the latter some of 
the Venetian polychrome variety) were found intermingled. Pottery 
fragments are abundant and of two distinct kinds; one, thin, smooth, 
well worked, of nearly pure clay, kneaded or paddled as compactly 
as possible, the other formed of pounded flint and quartz mixed with 
shale from the hill crushed like the other ingredients, pieces as large as 
a grain of wheat being common. 

On Joseph A. Pancake’s place, at the mouth of Trout or Mill run, 4 
miles above Romney, are 2 stone mounds, one of which has been nearly 
leveled. It contained some relics, among them a celt and a steatite 
pipe with a hawk head carved on it. The other mound was formerly 3 
feet above the surrounding level, but the soil had been washed away 
from around it by freshets until its top is 6 feet above the present sur- 
face. It is now on the river bank, but the terrace formerly extended 
fully 100 yards farther than at present. At the center was a grave 
dug to the underlying gravel, at this point only a few inches below 
the old surface, and filled with flat stones, some of them 200 pounds in 
weight. They were inclined at various angles as if they had been 
placed over a pen or other covering for the body. Nothing in the way 
of relics was found. 

“Indian rock,” 3 miles above the mouth of South branch, takes 
its name from an incised image, supposed to represent an Indian, 
carved on the protected portion of an overhanging rock. The lines are 
filled with a red substance which persons have tried unsuccessfully to 
remove. Of course “a great battle” is reported to account for it. 

On a point overlooking Cacapon river, half a mile north of the Hardy ~ 
county line, on the Rudolph farm, are 3 or 4 small cairns, one of which 
has been opened and found to contain bones tolerably well presetved. 

A small cairn on a hilltop just above the residence of Captain Pugh, 
44 miles south of Cacapon bridge, has also been opened; and two others 
on the opposite side of the river, half a mile farther down, have been 
removed. Nothing of note was found in any of them. 

An undisturbed cairn stands on a narrow ridge just west of Cacapon 
bridge. 

MINERAL COUNTY, WEST VIRGINIA. 


Many stone graves have been opened along Patterson creek, but 
no record was made of their appearance or contents. 


GRANT COUNTY, WEST VIRGINIA. 


Small stone mounds are to be found in the vicinity of Maysville. It 
is reported that in a mound (whether of earth or stone could not be 


ARCHEOLO : 
dics wens aay MOUNDS IN GRANT COUNTY 67 


ascertained) in the valley between New creek and Alleghany mountains, 
avery small, soft, steatite platform pipe, decorated with incised straight 
and zigzag lines, was found. 

On the eastern edge of the town of Petersburg was a small earth 
mound, now entirely destroyed. No one could remember whether any- 
thing had been found in it, but flint implements are abundant about 
its site. 

At the opposite end of the town a mound of earth and stone formerly 
stood, but it has long since been leveled. It is said to have contained 
a black steatite platform pipe, many flints, and some other relics whose 
character could not be learned. 

Ona high point 2 miles south of Petersburg are two small cairns, 
both of which have been opened. 

Half a mile north of the town, on a hill, is an undisturbed mound of 
earth and stone, about 40 feet in diameter and 4 feet high; and near it 
the remains of a stone mound about 30 feet in diameter, now mostly 
hauled away. 

On the Cunningham place, in the river bottom, a mile below Peters- 
burg, was an earth mound, but it has been destroyed by years of culti- 
vation and no record of the contents is now obtainable from the resi- 
dents of the neighborhood. 

There is a cairn on the Stump farm, 5 miles south of Petersburg, and 
a mile east of the turnpike. 

‘“Indian-house cave,” about 10 miles above Petersburg, on the right 
side of South branch, takes its name from a tradition that it was an 
Indian dwelling place. As the floor is of solid stone over nearly its 
entire extent, there is no means of verifying or dispreving the account. 


HARDY COUNTY, WEST VIRGINIA. 


“Old Fields” takes its name from the fact that when the earliest 
white explorers entered the valley there was a clearing on the lett bank 
of South branch, just above the “Trough,” at what is known as the 
“Neck,” on the MeNeill place. A fort was established here and many 
battles took place between the whites and the Indians. On the moun- 
tain near the upper end of the “Trough” human bones covered with 
stones have been found in crevices formed by erosion of the upturned 
strata; while on “Indian Grave ridge,” 34 miles east of “ Old Fields,” 
was a cairn, and on the mountain, a mile farther southward, there were 
~ or 3 others, supposed to contain the remains of Indians slain in early 
border warfare. None of these cairns are more than 12 or 15 feet in 
diameter, and to explorers they have yielded nothing except a few bone 
tragments. 

On the Cunningham farm, next south of “Old Fields,” on a level 
terrace 40 feet above the river, are 2 mounds, one 35 feet in dimmeter 
and 2 feet high, the other 20 feet in diameter and 18 inches high. The 
central portion in each is stone, the remainder earth. A short distance 


, 


4 ~{ BUREAU OF 
68 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY ctl ates? 


away are 2 others, on a ridge 100 feet above the terrace. They are of 
earth and stone in about equal proportions; the smaller is 20 feet in 
diameter and 18 inches high, the larger 32 by 50 feet, with the longer 
axis east and west, and 30 inches high. This was removed and found to 
cover 6 graves, none of them more than 3 feet in diameter; one extended 
16 inches below the original surface, none of the others being more 
than a feot deep. The stones reached to the bottom in every one, 
some being inclined against the sides. No traces of human bones were 
found; indeed the only relics observable were a few flint chips scat- 
tered throughout the earth. 

A small eairn has been removed from the first terrace near the river 
bluff on the McNeill farm. 

On Thompson Parson’s farm, 8 miles above Moorfield, on South fork, 
was a cairn 18 feet in diameter and 2 feet high, on a hillside 100 feet 
above the river. Nothing was found in it, although stone implements 
have been found in the bottom lands below. 

On Duidy’s farm, two miles below Parsow’s, on a point 50 feet above 
the river, are 2 mounds of stone, one 15 feet in diameter and 18 inches 
high, the other 30 feet in diameter and 2 feet high, united at the base. 
They have been opened, but the result could not be learned. 

On Welton'’s farm, 8 miles south of Moorfield, on the left side of 
South branch, were 3 small cairns; all have been opened, but contained 
nothing of archeologic interest. 

A mound of earth and stone, 25 feet in diameter and 3 feet high, on 
William Baker’s farm, 6 miles above Moorfield, on South branch, has 
never been opened. 

On Jesse Fisher’s farm, on South branch, 7 miles above Moorfield, 
were 3 mounds, one of which had been partly, and another entirely, 
removed. The third, 25 feet in diameter and 3 feet high, has been 
partially opened, and it is reported that some flints were found in it. 
Removal of nearly the entire structure showed that 1t covered a single 
grave a foot deep, the earth from which had been thrown out-on every 
side. In the bottom were a plate of mica, 3 roughly worked arrow- 
heads, a piece of quartz crystal, some flint flakes, apiece of slate with 
3 shallow depressions on one side (probably a polisher), and a small 
quantity of black substance, probably graphite, intermingled with the 
earth, which, when rubbed on a smooth surface, exactly resembles 
ordinary stove polish. 

There is a cairn on the Randolph place, near the junction of South 
branch and South fork; another on the Newman place, 2 miles south 
of Moorfield, and two others may be seen on the Inkermann farm, in 
the vicinity of the latter. 

Four miles south of Moorfield, on Jesse Fisher’s farm, were 4 mounds, 
one of which had been removed; another, 20 feet in diameter and 
2 feet high, was not opened. The third, 25 feet across and a foot 
high, covered a single grave reaching 6 inches into the original 


Sa ey MOUNDS IN GRANT COUNTY 69 


soil; the stones formed a solid mass to the bottom over a space 
5 feet in diameter. A slate gorget with 2 perforations was found 
among these stones, but there was nothing beneath them. These 
5 mounds were entirely of stone, except such earth as had accumulated 
on them. The fourth mound, 30 feet in diameter and 3 feet high, was 
composed equally of earth and stone. Near the eastern side was a 
grave 2 by 6 feet, a foot deep, filled with bowlders, but without relics 
or traces of bone. Six feet northeast of the center lay a slate gorget and 
a number of small flint chips. Ten feet south of the center, heaped pro- 
miscuously together, were a slate gorget, 25 triangular knives of black 
flint. 15 quartz crystals, 2 plates of mica, a few chips and spalls, a 
paint cup or pipe like that shown in figure 17, and a pint or more of the 
same black substance noted above. Eight feet southwest of the center 
were 14 black flint knives and arrowheads and a shale gorget. All 
these objects were on the original surface. In a number of places com- 
pact masses of stone reached to this level; one of these was almost at 
the western edge. Nothing was found under them; if they marked 
the position of graves there was no other evidence of the fact. A ecup- 
stone, about 5 pounds in weight aud containing several depressions, 
was one of the stones forming the mound. Flint chips, a few arrow- 
- heads, and a piece of iron ore were found loose in the earth. ; 

There is a large stone mound on the farm of George McAllister, on 
Lost river, 2 miles above Mathias. 

A mound mostly or entirely of earth is located near Fort Seybert, 
op South fork, about 21 miles from Moorfield. A pioneer fort stood 
here, which was several times attacked by the Indians and once, in 
1758, captured:by them. This mound, which is now searcely discernible, 
is Supposed to be the burial place of the slain. Many bones in a 
fair state of preservation have been exhumed. Another mound which 
stood near here yielded bones said to be much smaller than those from 
the one just mentioned. 

Near the Hampshire county line, on a small ridge or level formed by 
Frye’s run, on the right side of the Cacapon river, are 3 cairns; and in 
the river bottom, a mile from the mouth of this run, is another. All 
have been opened, but nothing was found in them. 


PENDLETON COUNTY, WEST VIRGINIA. 


On the farm of John H. Harmon, at Upper Tract, near the river 
bluff, on the first terrace, were 2 stone mounds. Chips and spalls are 
abundant along this terrace and many flint implements, including some 
scrapers, have been picked up. On the same farm, on the upper ter- 
race, are 4 mounds. One of earth and stone resembles somewhat a 
pear cut in two lengthwise, the smaller end being toward the east ; 
the larger portion is 30 feet in diameter and 4 feet high, the smaller 
part 20 feet wide and 18 inches high, extending 25 feet toward the east. 
Another mound is similar in form but is somewhat smaller. <A third 


70 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY Bese 


ETHNOLOGY 


mound, 15 feet in diameter and 3 feet high, is entirely of stone; this 
covered a single grave in which nothing was found. The fourth mound 
is also irregular in form; apparently 2 mounds, each about 20 by 25 
feet and 18 inches high, have been built end to end, in such a way that 
a line connecting their centers would fall near one side at their junction. 

There is an earth mound at the mouth of Seneca creek, in fertile, 
sandy bottom land, from which many well-preserved human bones have 
been taken. It is reported that they were buried extended under flat 
stones. 

A small cairn stands at Riddle’s store, 6 miles above Upper Tract, 
and another at Jacob Hammer’s, 3 miles above the latter. 

An earth mound, now destroyed, stood at MeCoy’s mills, 25 miles 
above Franklin, at the mouth of Blackthorn creek. 

Various places have been reported as the sites of Indian quarries or 
workshops for the manufacture of arrowpoints arl spearheads; also 
caves which are said to show traces of human occupancy; they present 
nothing not due to natural causes. As the rocks in this region belong 
to the Devonian system, caves are frequent, though mostly small, and 
hornstone or chert is very abundant. The weathering of the limestone 
has released the latter in blocks and nodules to such an extent that 
in many places the surface 1s completely covered with their fragments. 


CONCLUSIONS. 


The data obtained by the investigations described in the foregoing 
pages, and the results of previous explorations so far as can be judged 
by the published accounts, justify the belief that the aboriginal remains 
between tidewater and the Alleghanies, from Pennsylvania to south- 
western Virginia, pertain to the tribes who lived or hunted within this 
area at the beginning of the seventeenth century. If a more ancient 
population existed, all traces of it have been obhterated or else bear 
such a resemblance to those of a later period that differentiation is at 
present impossible. 

In the various cemeteries, so far as examined, there is nothing in the 
methods of burial or the character of attendant works of art that may 
not be more rationally explained by the known customs in vogue among 
the Indians of this region than by any arbitrary division into conjec- 
tural periods of time or stages of culture. The occurrence of objects 
which could have been obtained only from white traders fixes approx- 
imately the date of some burial places; others in which these evi- 
dences are lacking show such resemblance to the first in construction, 
and such similarity in specimens due to aboriginal handiwork, that any 
attempted separation of them that involves the supposition of a differ- 
ent age or dissimilar people appears to be without sufficient warrant. 

The same is equally true in regard to the mounds. Even if we omit 
the statement of Jefferson that the one opened by him was visited by 
a traveling band of Indians, their contents prove them to be ossuaries 
formed by depositing at intervals, probably irregularly, the remaims 


ee FORMER INDIAN OCCUPANCY 71 


FCOWKE 


of those whose bones had been collected since the last previous general 
burial. This, as we know from various authorities, was customary 
with many tribes both north and south. Jefferson! tells us that at a 
treaty held with the Six Nations at Lancaster, Pennsylvania, one of the 
Indians died and was buried near the town. Afterward a party came, 
teok up the body, cleaned off such flesh as remained by boiling and 
seraping, and carried the bones home. As the Tuskarora (or Mona- 
can) were one of the Six Nations, and as the Powhatan also pre- 
served the bones of their dead, while the Manahoac, being neigh- 
bors to both, might be expected to have similar customs, it is quite 
probable that such remains in the Piedmont region are due to the 
tribes occupying that territory within the last three centuries. <A sim- 
ilar assertion can safely be made concerning the country beyond the 
Blue ridge. The earth mounds are constructed in practically the same 
way; the small cairns, containing in most cases only a single skeleton 
and never more than two or three, are doubtless the graves of such 
hunters or warriors as perished on their periodical raids or hunting 
expeditions; the larger cairns seem to have been constructed hastily 
and without much care. The finding of the fragment of a gun barrel at 
Water lick proves a modern origin for at least one of them, and all are 
quite similar in their construction to the graves which students gen- 
erally agree were made by different tribes who have roamed through 
this country within the historical period. 


Following is a list of all the known tribes residing in or resorting to 
the valley in 1716-1732, taken from Peyton’s History of AugustaCounty : 

Shawnee, whose principal villages east of the Alleghanies were near 
the present town of Winchester. 

Tuskarora, near Martinsburg. 

Senedo, ote occupied the north fork of the eheaaule ah until 1732 
when they were exterminated by hostile tribes from the south. 

Catawba, from South Carolina. 

Delaware, from the Susquehanna. 

Susquehanna, or Susquehanough, who were driven from the head of 
Chesapeake bay and settled on the headwaters of the Potomac. 

Cinela, on the upper Potomac. 

Piscataway, or Pascataway, from the head of Chesapeake bay. 

Six Nations. 

Cherokee. 

Kercheval, in his History of the Valley, says that ‘*‘ Shawnee cabins” 
and ‘* Shawnee springs,” near Winchester, received their names from 
settlements of this tribe, who had, besides, a considerable village at 
Babb marsh, 3 or 4 miles northwest of Winchester, where signs of 
their wigwams were visible years after the country was settled. He 
also says the Tuskarora were living on the creek of that name after 
the whites came into the Bey: 


ote on sendin p. 353. 


12 JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY Spd = 


These various tribes hunted and fought over all this region. Each 
year, before going into winter quarters, they set fire to the dry grass 
in order to prevent timber from growing and thus diminishing the area 
of their hunting grounds. For this reason the country was almost 
devoid of trees, except along the streams and to some extent in the 
mountains, the forests which now exist having sprung up since Spots- 
wood’s day. 

In 1744 one of the chiefs of the Six Nations, at the treaty of Lan- 
caster, Pennsylvania, claimed that all the country west of the Blue ridge 
belonged to his people by right of conquest, and a clear title to it could 
only be obtained from them.! How long they may have been in posses- 
sion ofit isnot known. Celden? states that they formerly lived near the 
present site of Montreal, whence they were driven by the Adirondack 
Indians shorily before the French settled in Canada in 1603, and settled 
where they were found by the whites, and that they did not extend their 
conquests into the south till furnished with firearms by the English; but 
Smith records that he saw several canoes full of them in Chesapeake 
bay in 1608, and that they were then known and feared by all the east- 
ern Indians. He speaks of procuring from thein arrows, shields, ete., 
but makes no mention of firearms or other weapons that they could have 
obtained from the whites, which is very good evidence they did not 
possess them at that time. By the seaboard Indians they were called 
““ Massawomec,” but are better known by the various names of Mingo, 
Mengwe, Iroquois, Maqua, and Five Nations, or, after the adinission 
of the Tuskarora, Six Nations.’ 

Besides the aboriginal villages above mentioned, a number of Shaw- - 
nee had settlements along South branch until the whites became numer- 
ous enough to drive them out; the villages above Romney may have. 
belonged to them. At the same period the Delaware were represented 
by a branch upon the Cacapon; while the Seneca had a village opposite 
Hanging rock, and another at the mouth of Seneca creek, which takes 
its name from that fact. It is not known to what nation or tribe the 
Senedo belonged, as there is no reference to them in the older books; 
it is possible that the name was invented to account for the term 
Shenandoah, which is popularly derived from them and interpreted 
‘Sparkling daughter of the shining stars.” On the earliest deeds it 
is spelled ‘‘Gerando,” and by successive orthographic changes has 
reached its present form. It is really a corruption of the Iroquoian 
word ‘“Tyonondoa,” meaning literally ‘‘there it has a large (high) 
mountain ;” that is, ‘in that place there is a high range of mountains.” 
On some old maps the name “The Endless Mountains” is given to some 
of the ranges of Pennsylvania and Virginia, probably an attempted 
translation of the above meaning; the descriptive persion of the word 


UNfinutes of the Provincial Council of ‘Beaver ania, vee Iv, p. 512. 
2Colden C., History of the Five Nations, 1747, p. 22. 
5 Jetierson, Notes, p. 350; Craig, N. B., Olden Time, 1876, vol. 1, p. 4. 


ARCHEOLOGY CONCLUSIONS 13 


FOWKE 


refers to the elevation instead of to the length of the chain. These | 
romantic but incorrect translations of Indian words arecommon. For 
example, “Kentucky,” which is nearly always interpreted ‘‘ Dark and 
bloody ground,” is almost certainly derived from an Iroquoian word con- 
veying the idea “a place where the grazing is good ”—at least, the word 
having that meaning is almost identical in sound with ‘‘ Kentucky,” 
while there is no Indian word with anything like the popular meaning 
that bears the slightest resemblance to it.! 

The Alleghany mountains, in this part of the range at any rate, seem 
to have been a dividing line between theeastern and the western Indians. 
South branch and Shenandoah valleys were the great thoroughfares 
within modern times, and may long have been so, between the north 
and south, for the one: while the others followed Tygart Valley and 
New river. 

There is nowhere any evidence of an ancient or long-continued ocecu- 
pancy of this region by the Indians; on the contrary, the archeologic 
discoveries are in accord with the historical and traditional statements 
that more than one stock or people were in the habit of resorting to 
this country. The village sites, as would. be expected, are along the 
principal watercourses, in fertile bottoms easily tilled, and the ceme- 
teries are at the same spots. The stone mounds, on the contrary, are 
scattered at random, with no other apparent object in their location 
than the selection of a commanding outlook. It is not to be supposed 
that any people would carry their dead to an inconvenient spot and bury 
them in a manner so different from that in which most of their inter- 
ments were made. There is not, however, sufficient diversity in these 
graves to permit a classification that would attribute particular forms 
to certain tribes. 

It is worthy of note that many of the pipes and most of the gorgets 
found in this section, whether in the earth or stone mounds, very 
closely resemble in style, finish, and material those considered typical 
of the mound-building tribes of Ohio. It would be of interest to know 
whether this coincidence is accidental, or whether it may result from 
communication between the different peoples. If the latter, it would 
have the effect of reducing considerably the length of time that is gen- 
erally supposed to have elapsed since the construction of the western 
mounds. 


‘Communicated by Mr J. N. B. Hewitt. 


‘ Paired! 
a } r <f ‘. : = a2. 3 <3 a 
aired to ees 2 PAA SOY i : $9231, te i Pica 
che 4 ieee iI a oe Piekag shee a 
; vf i t Pg ~ Bir re Sie : ot, ® oe 


a). a <¥ 2» . a. 
: 3 ac P29 9. oN eae a 
b 


* , i é ] hil ear a 


; A mf 
i site e fay SLT: 


: 
- ’ 4 
a pol . 
» 2 , . fs 
poms = es 
Sx P SS, 
. bs 
7 ‘ 
hs 
‘ 
2 : « 
. 
< 
, 7 ~ 
- 
- 
“ 
i 
. 
— ¥ 
4 - 
‘ 2 
. . 
7 - 
‘ 
. 
7 ’ 
\ 


INDEX 


Page 
ALEXANDER PLACE, Stone mounds on --.-. 62 
ALGER FARM, Occurrence of mound on. -. 54 
ALLEGANY county, Md., Aboriginal re- 

PRPOIAAR ET Tet oop 2 nn aS ws a 64 
ALLEGHANY county, Va., Archeology of- 24 
AMELIA county, Archeology of.......--- 10 
ANTLER, Fragments of, found in Rever- 

damp mound... .- 6-65. -- CET ay tet 32 
ARROWHEADS, Occurrence of, in graves.. 66 
DAM DOCUO! DOG. 2-21-21 - - = a0 20 
—, — —, —mounds... 28, 30, 31, 32, 35, 44,46, 54, 57, 


59, 68. 69 
—, — —, with human remains. 21,23, 24, 27, 29, 39, 
41, 50, 52, 63 


— found in human vertebra........-.----. 21 
—, Character of, on Galt farm.-....-...-.. 13 
—, Abundance of, on Brubaker farm. ..-.. 47 
en ROOML A) PIACE- sae ~ sae oe oot 58 
= tonnd near BUChaAnAal = <2. s5—- -<<~ <= 17 
= = = (Ci A eae eee eee eereee 14 
= oe Uae Be OaE oe ee See eae 17 
aOR Gra VUDLACE 2 ase aa oes = oc ane 14 
AIG LALM 2.22. se see's oe 61 
— — in Nelson county ...-.-.--- Pein ras 14, 15 
— — — Powhatan county....-.--..---.-- 10 
——— Rockbridge county .-.-...-.---.--- 16 
= ti ONMOr PlaCO-2.s.<s10s-s<00-55=- 48 
ARROWHEAD SHOP, Occurrence of, near 

Fron Gate ....-.--- Sc pope oe eae 24 
ART remains, General character of..--.-- 8 
AUGUSTA COUNTY, Mounds in..........-. 37 
AWL. See PERFORATOR. 

Axks, Grooved, found near Gala. ..... ee 

—-, Side-notched, found in Nelson county. 15 
==IMand near buchanan -. 2 os.6is22.2.2 17 
—, Occurrence of, on Kite mound........ 44 
—, — —,in Newmarket mound .......... 59 
AYLOR FARM, Aboriginal quarry on.....-. 37 
BAKER FARM, Occurrence of mound on .-.- 68 
BARBECUE HOLES, Occurrence of, near Fall- 

TGS Siete SOR Oe eeee sec Sees eo see ee 26 
se ee SS OE core nen tpn eae 18 
— —, — —, in Revercombmound....-...-. BY 
ai OMA ON LACM nm silogs ass =< 62 
BATH county, Aboriginal remains in .... 27 
BAUSERMAN FARM, Village site on..--..- ee 48 
BEAbDs, Absence of, in certain mounds... 53 
aS, Trpnti a chet Ci Se eeloo ee a ConepeIne se 17 
—, Occurrence of, in mounds ..-..-.-- Se tele 16 | 
—, ——, with human remains . 20, 21, 23, 24, 37, 44 
—, Bone and shell, in Reardon mound ... 63 
—, — found near Gala......-...--..-..-+- Vy: 


Page 
BeEaApbs, Bone and shell, Occurrence of, 

with human remains.....-.-------.---- 23 
—, copper, Occurrence of, in Alger mound 54 
—, disk, Oceurrence of, in Brumback 

MOUN ie > ssews Seen asics aoe ties sees 52 
= —-, ——— WitanumMaAn remains. ==---= 39, 40, 43 
—, glass, Occurrence of, in graves ..-.--- 66 
=, —, — =, om Village sites---e.«-..2-. 65 
—.shell, Oceurrence of, with human re- 

TD BANG =e os eee a cee nee sane ncsaeae noo 404s 
a, Sn thy Woh pradesh lee Be Se Soe 38 
BEANS, Charred, in Revercomb mound -..- 32 
BEAR SKULL, Occurrence of, in barbecue 

olOa S23 Se eae tee So se See sen ae 19, 20 
BEAR TUSK, Occurrence of, in Bushong 

MOUND Cs See eee ee as sere as 60 
— —, — —, — STave..-....-....----------- 20 
BERRYVILLE, Aboriginal remains near.... 61 
Bones, Animal, found near Gala-..-.-----. 17 
—, —, Occurrence of, in barbecue hole. --. 29 
—, —, — —, — Brave -...--.------.------.- 20,21 
—, —, — —, with human remains: --==-. -. 41,42 
BoretTourt county, Archeology of --.--- 16 


BowERs FARM, Aboriginal remains on -. - 4 
BOWwLDERS, Human remains covered by .50, 55, 69, 69 


—, Occurrence of, IM STaAVe-----~...22=2~— 20, 21 
—, Use of, in mound construction. ------ 54, 55, 58 
—, Occurrence of, on Bowers mound - ---. 47 
= — in brumbaek mound. =~... 5-.-- 52 
ss Onmeah moun: += s'7 ..e ene = 3 48 
BowLteEs FARM, Aboriginal remains on. --- ¢3 
Bowman, S. M., Mound on farm of --.---- 37 
BROWN, ALEXANDER, Remains on farm of - 14 
BRUBAKER FARM, Aboriginal remains on. 46 
BrRuMBACK, HeNRy, Aboriginal remains 

Gui farm: Ob6S2 365-2 25. Fosse sent 49 
—, J.A., Occurrence of cairn on farm of 54 
BucuANAN, Aboriginal remains near....- 16 
BUCKINGHAM COUNTY, Aboriginal fireplace 

Dd, oe ae eae eo eS ES, - 14 
BUFFALO, Occurrence of remains of... --- 50 
BULLETS, Occurrence of, near Kleek mound 30 
= awit, hm ame TeMe@ins (4 --seee== = 27 
BURNER PLACE, Village site at..-...-..-- 47 
BuRWELL, Buarr, Aboriginal remains on 

MERA UC Le eee RAE r Ae 55 Ke Se OBE AY DOS Ee 10 
BUSHONG FARM, Occurrence of mound on 59 
ByRD, JoHun T., Mound group on farm of 30 
GATEN: Probable mse, 0%.4..---2--o-,a=-- =- 71 
—, Occurrence of, above mouth of the Con- 

OCOCHOAL Gr se aa sere clei =a a eta 63 
SSS Saar iy: eS Oh Ue eeercg conse 54 


75 


76 


JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY 


Page 
CarRN, Occurrence of, on Huffman farm.. 57 
=, — Long farm ..2. 52225 ene eee 45 
—,— —,in Allegany county.....--...---. 64 
—,— —,— Hampshire county......-..--. 65 
—,— —,— Hardy county -.-..----.....-- 7 
—,— —.-—- Jefferson county-.-....-..--... 64 
—,— —,— Warren county......-.---.--. 60 
—.—— eat an COC kas eae ae oie 64 
—,——,— Petersburg ...-........--..-.- 67 
CALEDONIA, Steatite quarry near.......-. 12 
CATAWBA, Early habitat of the.....-- sack 71 
—, Tradition of battle between Delaware 

AMCs, a Natiet nate «onic nc ta eth eres eee 65 
CATLETT PLACE, Mounds on’... ...----2.-. 61 
CAVE, Burial, on Stauffer farm.........-. 63 
—, Occurrence of, on Keyser farm..-..-.-. 57 
CELTs, Occurrence of, in barbecue holes. . 19 
—, — —, With human remains. -...--..... 21, 27, 63 
—,— —, on Gay place .-----.--2--.2 2222 14 
=. Near (Puchandia eae ae eee ee 17 
i Galan. cecue tec beeeeteeees oe 17 
On MOOnIZED a COnee seen eee eee 58 
— of adze-shape in Nelson county......-. 15 
CELT SCRAPER, Occurrence of, with human 

TOMAS oo c teehee ee Cee. eh eee ce 40 
——, ——, in Long mound.........-.-.. 46 
CEMETERY, Occurrence of, on Herriott 

ESAT INN 235s are te trial ite are Roe ce ee Ne oe 65 
——— ——. TICar LronwG ates ase ee ee eee 24 
—,——, in Washington county..-.--...-. 63 
—,— —, near village site...-...2..------ 73 
—,——, at Falling Spring...-....-...... 24 
CHARCOAL, Occurrence of, with human 

Femains.22... 40s sees ele eee aos 40, 41, 33 
— i —, 1 SOULE Ge eee 18, 30, 31, 32, 38, 43, 50, 

51, 52, 54, 56 
— lining of-burial-pits..--.22-.-.-2---22- 35 
CHEROKEE, Mention of, by Payton ..-.-.- 71 
CINELA, Early habitat of the..-..... ..... 71 
CLARKE County, Archeology of -..-.-... 61 
Cioru, Fragments of, in Revercomb 

NO “Gli ate = ere pease sSdaon ses. € See anc 31, 32 
CLOVER CREEK, Archeologic remains on. 31 
CoLpEN, C., on Iroquois habitat........... 72 
Co.umBIA, Aboriginal remains near -.... 12 
COLUMELLAS, Burial of, with human re- 

MAING von to arses ese cee 25, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42 
—, Occurrence of, in Brumback mound-.. 50, 51, 52 
—-, Drilled, in Williamsville mound --.---- 30 
Comss, bone, Occurrence of, with human } 

BOMAING 255 oo5 once coe Hae e oe ce cates 41,42 
Concu, Burial of, with human remains... 25, 40 
CookinG, Ancient method of......-...-.-. 18 
Copprn, Occurrence of, in mounds ..-.... 16 
—. See BEAD, ORNAMENT. 

CORES, Occurrence oi, with human re- 

MAING 2c... s cece eee kanes see eee eee 41 
—,— —,in Williamsville mound..-...... 30 
Corn, Charred, found near Gala........- 7 
—-;——.in Revercomb/ mound 2-2 - see seeee a: 32 
—, Occurrence of, in barbecue hole ...--- 20 
Craia, N. B., on application of Iroquoian 

tribal names... eee eee eee 72 
CRESAP FARM, Occurrence of cairns on -. 64 


BURZAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


’ Page 
CRYSTAL, quartz, Burial of, with human 


TeEMAINS....2u£< see peeee eee ee 40, 41, 46, 68, 69 
—, —, Occurrence of, in mounds -..--- 46, 48, 54, 56 
CULLER FARM, Description of mound on.. 53 
CULPEPER CotNTy, Aboriginal remains 

AD ca bteeg costo eee ee 36 
CUMBERLAND CouNTY, Archeology of ..-. 12 
SUNNINGHAM MOUND, Description of..... 67, 
CUPSTONE, Occurrence of, in burialmound. 69 
CURRIER, See SCRAPER-2... 23.522 5°e=ee 
CusHING, F. H., Exploration by .......... 10, 12 
DEAL FARM, Occurrence of mounds on -.. 48 
DEER BONES, Occurrence of, in barbecue 

NOlOS. 5 jie Ss eeensnre tinder SSE eee 26 
——, — —, with human remains....-...- Gs) 
DELAWARE, Early habitat of the ..-...--. 71 
—, Settlement of the, on the Cacapon --.. 72 
—, Tradition of battle between Catawba 

and) 2c. Ee eee 65. 
Depressions, Artificial, near Tobacco- 

Ville. 2258.02: J) SR ee 10 
—, Occurrence of, in Indian mounds.. 31, 43, 54, 65 
DICKINSON MOUND, Description of.....-- 27 
DisEAsE, Apparent effect of, on human re- 

MaiNs ~ 523s. Fe2e he scene Se ee eee 23, 39 
Disks, shell, Occurrence of, with human 

TeMaAiNS. ..=..- 245 -hSe eee -22, 62 
—, Use of, as legging ornaments ..-.....- 21 
DRILL, Burial of, with human remains.... 38, 40 
— found near Gala). -. 32... 2as08)-- eee 17 
—, Bone, found in Linville mound....-.-.. 4) 
Duipy FARM, Occurrence of mounds on.. 68 
ELLERSLEE, Occurrence of village site near 64 
ELK ISEAND, Remains O0)J=-c-). 2eee eee ual 
FALLING SPRING, Remains at ..-...-.---.. 24 
FIREBED, Occurrence of, near barbecue ; 

WOLOSY « tac.q nin een cs ens aes 26 
= =, — BUchananess= -- eee 17 
——— at Honk placea:--2-----ee eee 59 
—, = —, near Kite place-— 32 -=ssee= eee 45 
—, -———, at Riddel places: .4-emsean meses 60 
FIrepits, Occurrence of, near Gala-..-..-- 18 
FIREPLACE, Remains of, in Buckingham 

COUNBY: ..2555 32265 eas ssa oe 14 
— on ‘Galt farm. ...2.2 sae= 52 ee eee 13 
—, Occurrence of, in Hampshire county. - : 65 
—, —— —, 0n Herriot farm =--4-.= sean 65 
— ——, at Rufiner place %-22-2-2eeeees 48 
FISHER FARM, Description of mounds on. - 68 
FisHHooks, Bone, found near Gala-.-.---. 18 
—, —, occurrence of, in barbecue hole ---. 19 
—, —, — —, with human remains- -- ---- 21; 22, 66 
Fioop. See FRESHET. 

FLUVANNA CouNTY, Archeology of -..---- -12 
Forests, Indian method of burning------ 72 
Fort SEYBERT, Occurrence of mound near 69 
FresHET, Aboriginal remains exposed by 1; 


12, 13, 14, 23, 24, 27, 30, 34, 45, 46, 47, 48, 59.65 
FUNK PLACE, Description of mound on.... 58 


GALA, Aboriginal remains near 17 


EOLOGY 
Boreas INDEX 17 
Page | Page 
GALENA, Occurrence of, in Dickinson HUMAN remains in canaexcavation ....- 63 

BYLOUI (Us: Sat Shes on ee ieee eee amiee'<'s 28 | — —, Occurrence of, in cave .............. 63 
GALT, ALLEN, Remains on farm of...-.-- 13 | ——, — —, — stoneheap............----.. 58 
GANDER, D. H., Mound near place of.-.- 45 | ——,— —, — mounds... .27, 28, 31, 32, 34, 46, 59, 60, 
Gay, Dr., Description of skulls by.--.-- 13 61, 62, 70 
(GOOCHLAND counTY, Archeology of-...-.. ie) —)— mean Columbian < 5. /.%. 6 -s6s. 5-22-55 14 
GoRGET, Resemblance of, to those of -— — at mouth of the Conococheague .... 63 

SRNR et toe rg a ee Ss ea acine eee St — Oleh) Beto Une sane accel. s.enaemie accee 11 
—, Oceurrence of, with human remains-. 27, 40, 52 | — — near Galene sess ca deiacsccndtkre 18,19 
—, — —-, in mounds. - ..28, 30, 44, 45, 46, 47, 48, 53,54, | —— on Galt farm ................-.-.-.. 13 

56, 60,69 | — — near Gander place ........---....... 47 
GRANT couNnTY, Aboriginal remains in.. - 66 | ——in Hampshire county ..-..-........ 65 
GRAPHITE, Occurrence of, in burial Pe = NEOTARF OM Gaels ae aoreicie cine wie eracine ciewle 24 

SGD. SR Oe SSG Ae aes ee soeeaemoa oe 68, 69 — —in Jefferson county cairns .--.---.- 64 
GRAVE, Triple burial in single.-..-.-.-..- 25; —— — Keyser cave’ .--.2---22ce sce eae 57 
GRAVES, Examination of, in Hampshire a tite ace sean alccmiscccdos steee 44 

NEEL core OSB ep O nS Mae a ebeaaroecn mers 66 | —— on Mayo farm ..-.............-.-.--+ 12 
—, Occurrence of, in mounds... 28, 32, 35, 39, 41, 44, ree sy Olde Mic dase ee ee ae eee te aee 67 

45, 47, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55, 56, 58, 61, 63, 64, 68,70 | — — — Rockbridge county-..-...-....-..- 16 
meer een Galas -c--- -¢ ssee- = 53-02 19),20¢ 21) =e af Gitlimatonssxtteeee eee teeaeseee 27 
Pterrguecwomol, Uy Slabs. 2.5.25...) -- 54, 66 | — —, Cremated, in Stauffer cave ..--..... » 63 
—, Stone, in Mineral county.....--..-..-.- 66) == on) Raylorfarme... 2...2scce57 seh ae 61 
—. See HUMAN REMAINS, Movnp, Pir. == == OV NVIOOM 1S Lan Gs <%= + cetiecers aie ewe serete 23 
GUN BARREL, Occurrence of, in Water | ——. See CEMETERY, GRAVES. 

HC GUNG ore ae = Par See Sain cin wince 61,71 | 

| Ipa, Stone mounds near .--...-....-..... 4 57 
HAGERSTOWN, Workshop site near .....-- 63 | IMPLEMENTS, Abundance of, near Iron 
HAMILTON FARM, Workshop site on ...-.-. Coie ee Geta) cmtere cious etc esate aera oe Bein eae 24 
FAVIMER PLACE, Calrnion.-...----5.05-..- 70 | —, Bone, in Washington county mounds. 63 
HAMPSHIRE COUNTY, Aboriginal remains —, Flint, in Williamsville mound.....-.. bu 

ooo eee sot SOS SE cr a 64 | —, Unfinished, in Linville mound .....-- 4k 
HANcocgE, Aboriginal remains near ....-- 63 | INDIAN CAMP, Location of..........------ 59 
Harpy county, Aboriginal remains in .. 67 | — —, Socalled, near Tobaccoville ...-.... 10 
HARMON FARM, Stone mounds on.....-.-.- 69 | — prartT, Remains near ..-.:..-...----..- 25 
HARRISON FARM, Cairns on .....-.-...--.- 64 | — HOUSE CAVE, Location of .-...--.----.- 67 
HATCHETS, iron, Occurrence of, in graves. 664) == Rocky Locationotw -e eee eee 65 
OT WINACE SULO:- <2 ones eae mens nts 65 | INKERMANN FARM, Cairns on ..----------- 68 
—,stone, Occurrence of, near Kleek TRON GATE, Aboriginal remains near -...- Q4 

SAUL IOS SaaS e aoa aR ae ene oer 30 | ore, Occurrence of. in mounds ......-. 48, 69 

-—,—,——,in Water Lick mound ........ 6L | TRoqvoraNn influence on art remains...--- : 
" HAynIe var, Cairns on...--...-..--..--- 61 Iroquois, Application of term .......... 72 
HAYWOOD, JOHN, on early Monacan hab- 

Nidil Gee pe SSt onc San ese snbeoe anSacer ee 9 | JEFFERSON COUNTY, Aboriginal remains 
HEARTHS, Aboriginal, at Ruffner place... - Be RTs oes Pe ee hea eet es ke a 64 
Hematite, Burialof, withhumanremains. 40,41 | JEFFERSON, THOMAS, Location of Rasau 
HERRIOTT FARM, Village site and ceme- RCT Ol Oi peenine Bete Semone Ancien sea 11 

DETAR Be ee aS eho ee Sher a agananee 65 | =, Mound exploration by... -2585-.225 o= § 
Hewitt, J.N.B.,on etymology of Ken- | — cited on historic use of mounds ....--. 70, 71 

ULE BR ose nae pe obese ee ae Ot eee 73 | — on early Monacan habitat ......-..-..- 
HIGHLAND county, Archeology of .-.---- 31 | —on early Virginia tribes ..:.....--.---- 33 
Hogs, Occurrence of, on Koontz place... - 58 | —on application of Iroquoian tribal 
a NELSON COWNLY <2 js 5 < -ta-s0' - « 15 MATRON Sate OS, Aeeites soa ase 72 
Hocmes, W. H., Exploration by ..-....-.- 53 | JENKINS FARM, Mound on..........-....- 61 
—, Introductory note by........--..------ re 
HOOK MILL, Aboriginal remains at .....-- 23 | KENTUCKY, Derivation of ....--..2..----3 73 
HOOPER ROCK, Quarry near ....--..-..--- 12 | KERCHEVAL, 8., Location of the Senedo 
Horn, JACOB, Mound on farm of-..-..-..- GS We cDY: scan sesse~ 5S o-5 se a eee ae 59 
HvurrMan, F. M., Mound on farm of.....-- 55 | — , Mention of mounds by-.....-.--...----- 45 
HuMmaNremains, Absence of, in Williams- — on early Indian battles. ......-....-..- 65 

ULNA OU i= aces <miaietie ee see ae waco 30 | —on former Indian town on Haynie 
= Orenmuteusin Drinpackmound > 49.5152") efarm: 2s5...ssc<dqcec'soasltwes ae cadens oa 61 
VO OIE Cla. orate aru Sts 38, 39,43 | — on Shawnee settlements............-.. 71 
eres GENT bLO ll Olse = stasis the aide adine Aas 99-94-40; |. — on old. Indian trail. ...-os.2scees0eece<c 60, 64 
— —, Indications of wounds in........... 26: |) JERVSER: FARM. Cave@on...s25-5.-bodeu5. 57 
— —, Promiscuous burial of. 29, 31, 34,36, 38,39,41 | Kite PLACE, Aboriginal remains at...... 44 


78 


Page 
KLEEK MOUND, Description of .--....----- 29 
Knives, Occurrence of, with human re- 

WAIN Stow. sense oe sie eh hasan 23, 40, 50, 58 
SS — mMonounuse- saeco 28, 46, 54. 55, 57, 59, 69 
Koontz PLACE, Aboriginal remains on... 58 
LINVILLE, Aboriginal remains near .-.-.-- 37 
Lone Les, ‘Cairn on farm of=)-..5--.---. 45 
—, M., Stone mounds on farm of..-...---- 57 
—, Puitir, Mounds on farm of.-.......--- 45 
MCALLISTER FARM, Stone mound on..... 69 
McCoy mMILts, Location of mound at-..-.-.-. 70 
McGEE, W J,.Exploration by.-....------- 53 
MCNEILL FARM, Occurrence of cairn on- - 68 
McQUILKEN FARM, Cairns on..-...------ 64 
MADISON COUNTY, Steatite quarry in .-.-- 36 
MANAHOAC, Former habitat of. --.- Se HR 3 
= Mortuary, Customs Of), =<. --seeee-- ee 71 
Magquva, Application of term...--..----.- 72 
Massawomec, Application of term ..-..-- 72 
NEASSINAGAKS SilO Ole os 4- ee eee see 9,10 
Mayo, EpwaArpb, Remains on farm of.... 12 
MAYSVILLE, Stone mounds near ...-----.-. 66 
Meneawe, Application of term.-.....----- 72 
Mica, Occurrence of, with human re- 

MAINS 2 eee se oe ee ie ela eee rier 44,58 
Bees Se SHINTO ode seen ooEbecereoue 16, 


27, 28, 31, 46, 48, 53, 54, 56, 57, 58, 68, 69 


— mines in Amelia county..-.-..--.-------. 10 
MINERAL CouNTY, Occurrence of stone 

PRB Osea oS enocse es Sees aosoosacsuaeS 66 
Mingo, Application of term..-.-......-.-. 72 
MOHENANCO, a Monacan village....-...-. 9 
MONAGAN. -Habitatcofices cee rsere cee ser 9 
—, Alliance of, against the Powhatan ---. 33 
= MOTERATY CuSO S Oh esieiee eee ee eee 71 
= jRasannwwealk: village On -sacer cease oe 11 
= SSite lots ChiGi tOWmlOle cs: ieee eee 14 
Mortar, Occurrence of, near human re- 

MOPBINY «bec Ose eee socnomsobe toesesoer 3006 43 
--,-- --, in Orange county mound.......-. 35 
— STONES found near Gala .-.-------.--.- 17 
Mortuary customs of historic tribes. - . 71 
MOUNDS, HAigeioh ss. Scethoe. =sacese cee see 70 
= Burin mean und sme raters sees ee 26, 27 
—— yah Kitevelace,..-ceee=< ase ee oe ae 44 
Soe aietae Ibheg alle og eee ee, 2k 37 
—-,—, in Orange county ..-.-.-----.---..- 33 
=o Near Mim DEENdl Le eee ane ee ee ee ee 37 
—, Occurrence of, on Alger farm .......-. 54 
—, — —, in Augusta,county........-..--- 37 
--, Description of, on Bowers farm....-... 47 
—, Dickinson, Description of ....-....... oT 
—, Former existence of, on Brubaker farm 46 
—. Occurrence of, on H. Brumback farm . 49 
—— —,— Cullers farms. 2-4-2 ee 53 
eS. el) Cal ee oe ee ee eee ee 48 
—i— =. — Horm ianm sete oseee ene ene 16 
—,— —,— Huffman farm:..-..2.--......- 55 
—,—— =, —= Long farm 23-2. eee - 45 
=; ==, near Limay 222s sehee sete ee 58 
— + — 7 -—— N@wmarketeeneeeeneeee Sapo 
— ———— On, Price tarmereee se eee cee ee 45 
—— = — —- INEVOLCOMD ALIN ae ae eee een 31 
—, — —, in Romney cemetery..--.--....-.- 64 
—,——, on Veeny farm ................- 48 


JAMES AND POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY 


Ee UREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 

. Page 

Movunps, Occurrence of, in Warren county 6) 

——— mear’ Walliams valloes- seme ae 3) 

—, Description of, in Washington county 63 
—, stone, Desiderata in selection of sites 

Of 225.2350 022 25-2 occ eee es eee eee 73 

=. near Culler farm! -oe-- eae 54 
—, —, on Gander place.-.:-.--- BESSA csc 47 
—, —, in Grant county-.-.-.-- ni tsdectoeeee 66 
—, —, in Hardy county .-.----..-.-- Feces 9 (ivinlile 
=, =, on ong farm’. 2:22. 2: 522 ee eee 5 57 
—, —, on Reardon farm --.-----25-2--s6 ae 62 
—. See CAIRN. 
MOoOWHEMENCHOUGH, @ Monacan village... 9 
MULLERS found near Gala.c----eeseeeeee 5 17 
Murpny FARM, Location of village site on 65 
MUSSELSHELLS, Occurrence of, in barbecue 

holes...2s32. 222 %2-3 ee 22, 62 
=, — —, about Revercom) mound cae BL 
=, — 4 Moar Galde- - seca eee 18 
= — —) with human remaiis=-----eeesee 41, 43 
NEEDLE, Bone, found near Gala.-.-.----- 18, 19 
—, Occurrence of, in barbecue hole-..---. 4 20 
—, — —, with human remains: =-.-2-- 22, 23, 41, 60 
—, Weaving, found in Linville mound... ~ 40 
—. See PERFORATOR. j 
NELSON county, Archeology of ...-.-.--- 1t 
New Hamppen, Aboriginal remains near 32 
NEWMAN PLACE, Occurrence of cairn on - 63 
NEWMARKET, Mounds in vicinity of----. 59 
Nortu BRANCH STATION, Occurrence of 

MOUNG at sc. ose oe a See ee GL 
OcHER, Occurrence of, with human re- 

MAINS «sso. 226261~ och elos eee eee 40. 41 
== In) Deal mMOun ters eee 48 
—, ——, — Long mound) 3. ..-e-— eee 45 
OLD FIELDs, Origin of name of..------.--- 67 
ORNAMENTS, Abundance of, near Iron 

Gate: esc sesces Sede se esc sa see 24 
—, Bone, with human remains ..-.------- 41, 51, 66 
—, —, Occurrence of, in mounds ..-...--- 40, 63 
—, brass, Occurrence of, on village site-. - 65 
—, copper, Oceurrence of, in Huffman 

MOUND «225582 occ se boa See Eee 55 
PaGE county, Archeology of.--.-...-..-- 4 
PArintT-cup Occurrence of, in burial 

TOWING Fe Sas orator ere eeia eee ES 6) 
= =, — Biiiimanimound ee eee 56 
PANCAKE PLACE, Village site on.......... §5, 66 
PARSON FARM, Occurrence Of cairn on . 68 _ 
=: = “mounds ont. 222252 23ee eee 64 
PANTHER CLAWS, Occurrence of, with 

human(remams-- 2-2-2. -- ==. eee 39, 40 
PAYTON cited on Virginia tribes ......--. 71 
PENDLETON CoUNTY, Aboriginal remains 

in 6.2 Seach Neos cee te nee 69 
PERFORATOR, Occurrence of, with human 

TOMAS)... -'.e eee Wee eee 21, 23 
—, ==, m- barbecue holes ce. peae eee 18,19 
PERIWINELES found with human remains. 20. 21 
— about Revercomb mound ....,--..--..- 31 
PETERSBURG, Description of mound at... 67 
Pry ron, J. L., Location of the Senedo by. 59 
PIEDMONT country, Archeology of -.---.- 33 
Pipers, Occurrence of, in cairn. ......---- 64 


’ 


OGY n 
eee INDEX 7 
Page | Page 
Pires, Occurrence of, in mounds.......-- 16 | QuARRy, Aboriginal, on Aylor farm....-. 37 
—, — —, with human remains...........-. 24,63 | —, —, — Brumback farm..............-.. 53 
—, Carved, from Hampshire county ; —, Flnt, near New Hampden ........-... 33 
MOUTMes oan as es ae oe asso os 65,66 — sites in Pendleton county ..-....-..---- 70 
—, clay, Fragment of, in Huffman mound. 57 | —, Steatite, in Amelia county.-.-....-.-. 10 
= Ire Bronback Mound. .2--2----4-.- Dy —~—, near Caledonia sx. jesetsut sc. ood he 12 
—, —. — —. with human remains .....--.- 39,43 | —, —, — Hooper rock...........-.------. 12 
—. — and steatite, found near Gala .----- 17 | —, —, in Madison county .......-...-..--- 36 
—. Monitor, in Williamsville mound...--- o0h) =. —yat Wayland milly sec. so00Jn0- 36 
—, platform, Finding of, 1n Grant county - 67 
—, —, Occurrence of, in grave.-.-.--.-. .--- 56,66 RANDOLPH PLACE, Occurrence of cairn on. 68 
ee = TCO NOUN. - =~ - erase ee 44 ; RASAUWEAK, Location of.......-.....-.- 11 
ee ong; Mound)... f= 45--2- 46 REARDON FARM, Occurrence of stone 
= =. — Newmarket mound..------ 59 MILOUMG! Olle eee ae ee sek shes cS 62 
=, —, found at Ruffner place .......-..-- 748 REJECTS, Occurrence of, on Brumback 
—, Sandstone, found in Long mound..... AGM ATTN EESe Ree oc eek cee ee ten an: 53 
—, Steatite, found with human remains.. 27,39 REVERCOMB, GEORGE, Mound on farm of- 31 
ine Brimbpack MOON —.. 2.2. == 51 | RIDDEL PLACE, Village site at ---.-.....-- 60 
—, —, Finding of, on the Conococheague. 63 | RIDDLE PLACE, Cairn at...-.-..-.--...... 70 
==) nl Titi ail Gant iii Ue aeeeee see sere 38 RILEYVILLE, Aborginal remains near.... 55 
—, —, found in Nelson county -.-.-...----- 15  Rosrxson, Russet, Remains on farm of- 4 
--, —, — — Revercomb mound .....:----: 32 ROCKBRIDGE COUNTY, Archeology of .-.-.- 15 
—, Stone, in Williamsville mound.....-.-. 30 | ROCKINGHAM CounTY, Aboriginal remains 
—, Tube, found in Brumback mound..-.. 52 Ly ee eR RA eee sree ee eee on ae an ei 37 
—, Abundance of, near Iron Gate .--..--- 24.) RUDOLPH FARM, Cairns on) _...--.-..5--:- 66 
—, Resemblance of, to these of Ohio-.-.-- 73 RUFFNER PLACE, Aborginal remains at.. 48 
—, @ccurrence of, in mounds.:...-....... 16 
—, — —, — Washington county mounds. 63 | ScapuL#, Perforated, found in grave.... 21 
SS Sy Ee (CF) PSS ee oeeeepesecics aoe 17 | ScrapERs, Occurrence of,in barbecue hole. 22 
Pits, Burial, in Alger MAO TIN Bee aa BER AS 54 | —,——, on Armouytanuls. cease oe eee 69 
=n bromback mound .-------...... oe | Mint tound near Galas. 92-2 sae eee 17 
—, —, — Linville mound..-....-.-..---- 41, 42,43 | Seneca, Location of early villages of the. 72 
—, —, — Newmarket: mound .....-------- 60 | _, Village site attributed to the........- 65 
—,—, om Naylor farm..-.--..-.-..----.-- 62 SENEDO, an unknown tribe.....-.---.---- 72 
PorInT PLEASANY, Reference to battle of -. SS) HonmenhabiontiOteen sees 59, 61, 71 
PouisHERs found near Gala ...--.-------- 18 SHARK teeth found with human remains. 52 
— Im gravemounds...-.....-....--------- 68 | SHAWNEE, Early habitat of.....-........ 71 
—, Bone, found with human remains.-.. 21,41 | — cabins, Origin of name of...--.--.----- 71 
POLLOCK PLACE, Village site near .....---. 64 — settlements on South branch .......-.. 72 
PorsHerps found with human remains -25, 26, 53,58 | — springs, Origin of name of...-....-.---- 71 
= Sth Ore eee ee eee 17 | SHELLS, Occurrence of, in certain mounds. 53 
— in Buckingham county-.....--.........- 14 | —, Marginella, found with human re- 
niger, (Gh hi ee ee ene ae 14 TAIN Meese: AAS es Sere eee oe = 38, 39, 41, 42, 43, 52 
= = (CEN eee cae pee Cee Sane ae Se Ope aes 17 | —, Periwinkle, found near Gala.--..-.-..- 17 
MC DUO TALUN (2 sf cnc 2 ay ciae cele en as. am 13 | SHENANDOAH, Derivation of.......-...-.. 72 
meariGander placq:......--.s-.0--.--+- 47 | — county, Archeology of ....,...-...-.-- 58 
sim Nelson. COUNtY:;5.-. se. sesecesec ee 14 | —vatury, Archeology of .--..--.------- 37 
— in Powhatan county........---=-.--.-- 10 | SHIPE FARM, Stone mounds on... --.----. 57 
Seer RTL OT PLAC) 25 .2)-etmte hinin) 1m esi «= 35 48 | Suive, F., Cairns on farm of..........--- 64 
=m barbecue Hole. sc-cscs-o-25-45-+n5ee 19, 22,62, | SmMPSON FARM, Cairns on .-.-.---.--.---..- 61 
= If JST iiscseodcgnpecde Beau godsedcngoo 66 | SirLineton, Aboriginal remais at-...--- 27 
SAM MOuUNAS =.= .- = 2222. eee 31, 32, 35, 43, 52,63 | SIX NATIONS, Country claimed by --...--. 72 
PoTTrERY, Absence of, in Williamsville in Renton OA Dy ERY OM. 2-9 ec eee 71 
TAC RNTG Vie 52 ARE eRe hae ee ee eee 80 | SKELETON burial.........--.. 26, 28, 35, 37, 42, 44, 51 
= CONSISTENCY Of. =. - <5 2-552 -es yo en 66 | SmiTH, JoHN, Massinacak village of...-.. 10 
—, Occurrence of, on the Conococheague. 63 | —, on location of Rasauweak...-.-...----. ll 
SS STN OTN ee Secs ee a At, 48-64 | —— the Imoquois in 1608 = -- 2-2 - cece noe n 3 72 
Bear NUR OTANI acs elt ieee acs e\eyece ota s 2 | —, Tuomas, Cairns on farmof......-..--- 64 
—, Steatite, on Elk island:-.......=...-.. 12 | SPALLs, Abundance of, on Koontz piace. - 58 
PowHATAN, Monacan allianceagainst the - 33 | —, -- — near New Hampden............. 33 
—, Mortuary customs of the......--....- 71 | —, Occurrence of, with human remains.. 21 
— county, Archeology of ........-...--- —, ——, In burial mounds ............-.. 69 
Price, C. D., Mound on farm of.......... 45, =. —— —-— M -Brumback mound---..-.. 49 
PRINTZ PLACE, Stone heap on...--.....-.- 58 | --, — —, at mouth of the Conococheague. 63 
UGH PACH, Calm Ons. 525. .<<s<ccc2-5-. CG 7 NEAR Gala ora nae tic=ncl cae ioe = 18 


80 JAMES AND 


SPALLS, Occurrence of, on Galt farm..... 
==, — —, — Harmon farm © 125-4205 sues 
—-,-- —-, at Huffman mound 
--, — —-, in Linville mound.........----- 
==) =, On Long farm: 23-5 see ane 
SPEARHEADS, Abundance of, on Koontz 


—, Occurrence of, with human remains. . 
= —, Jn Deal mound yeeeeueee ss ose 
—, Occurrence of, on Haynie farm.....--- 
—,-- —, in Nelson county........---...-- 
—, — —;.at Ruffner place...----...---.--: 
—, Quartzite, in Kite mound.......-..-.. 
STEATITE pipe found in Powhatan county. 
——— — Nelson county..-...-.-...-.--- 
— pottery on Blk island . .>.......s.-...- 
—— in Nelson county.-.-:-....-..-..---- 
— quarry in Amelia county...........--- 
— — near Hooper rock ...........--.--.-- 
— — in Nelson county 
--. See QUARRY. 
STONEHEAP, Occurrence of, on Brumback 
Mound 37. se a FAs eee ee me eee es 


—,—-—, In Bushong mound ...-........-- 
— = ON Cullens moun see a en. ae eeee 
—,— —, — Printz place ........-..---.-- 
—,— —, — Shipe farm..............-.--- 


—, Use.of, asttraibmarks —. .-----.. 
STRASBURG, Description of mound near. - 
STUMP FARM, Occurrence of cairn on-.--- 
SUSQUEHANNA, Early habitat of the....-- 


TABLET. See GORGET. 

TAYLOR, S. M., Remains on farm of....-. 

THOMAS, Cyrus, Association of author 
with 

TIMBERVILLE, Mound near .....-.-------- 

TORTOISE SHELL, Occurrence of, with hu- 
OD AE CR CULTS Gasper vet cee Bae at a too 


TRA, Indian near Galaje: 2-2 s.ceee sei 
—, —, in Allegheny county -.....-....--- 
— =, — Nesom COMNGy = seer = seme a 
—, —, — Rockbridge county ..-----.-----. 
—, —, — Shenandoah county ..--......... 


15, 16, 23, 


) BUREA 
POTOMAC ARCHEOLOGY allie 
Page | Page 
13 | TRAIL, Indian, in Warren COUDLY= case 61 
69 | TuBE, bone, Occurrence of, in grave ..... 19 
55,57 | TURKEY-BONE fragments in Reyercomb : 
44 ROTEL Oc: Se 2 ia cals ie See Se 32 
46 | Tuskarora, Early habitat of ...... osapee 71 
—, Monacan identified with..........-... 
58 | —, Mortuary customs of -.......... spe stee 71 
54, 63 
Cpe ec ae 
61 VEENY FARM, Mounds on...........-...-- 48 
15 | VILLAGE and cemetery site on Herriott 
48 | “OWarM octet meets eet eee 65 
Aa eas sites, Desiderata in selection of .....-. 73 
10° Bauserman farmeee—-- se eee 48 
ea ene ab Borner place: ----2- =. aoe eee s 47 
19 | — — near Clover creek" 24-2 see eee 31 
tet eens at mouth of the Conococheague..--. 63 
10.| = Near Hllerslie 2 <2 222) - 2. -=eae eee 6k 
nD ya at Riddel plate ?.2s5- 2... eee eee 6) 
15) | => #bove Romney-- 2-22 =~ 2. 2) eee 65 
— — ow Taylor farm). 222c0s. eee 61 
| — — on Woodisland: 22). 22ssseree see 23 
49, 51 - 
59 | WAb, Occurrence of, in Bushong mound. 60 
53 | —,—— — Wilhamsville mound ........ 30 
58 | WARREN county, Remains in...-..--.--- 60 
57 | WASHINGTON COUNTY, Remains in.-.-...-- 5 
61 | WAYLAND MILL, Steatite quarry at.....-- 35 
58 | WELTON FARM, Occurrence of cairns on -- 53 
67 | WHITE Post, Aboriginal remains near--:. 62 
71 | Wiaains, J. B., Steatite quarry on farm of 10 
WILLIAMSVILLE, Mounds near....-...---- 30 
| WIRGMAN FARM, Location of mounds on. OL 
61 | WITHROW MOUNDS, Description of ..---.. - 23 
| Wo tr skeieton, Occurrence of, im bar- 
7 |. becuo hiole. .....--22..02-0- 522 ee 29 
37.| Woop IsLanD, Aborigimalrewains on .-. 23 
| Woopsrock, Aboriginal remains near... 59 
42 | WoRKSHOP site on Gay place ..........-- 1k 
23 | —— in Hampshire county---..-.---5-- se 65 
64 | — — near hagerstown ........--..---.--- 63 
14 | — —on Koontz place .---------- = eee 58 
15 | — — near New Hampden -.--. 222.22 eeeee 33 
60 | — — in Pendleton county... -----~-2- === 70 


” 


Beene © avery’ ii-urSe oles 


gh Harper eee (ap harryi 4) 
t . 
? LF de ch gym wt yt Ree hae J 


‘ert 4 


a 


TL RVRRLIBONENT 


here: Yin aes ata iat 
aly PEL ey ek a e « ib 


=] dF ets jt Cae 
re Sayre sepetk ys ft ic 
jai toh 6) beetabhd tubes ure 


4 


ay? 
Yerbarl Gai ce 46 


D apf ab-8 47) 


+ | - sar 
b Oboe et 


Gece fuk Wy PVA aati 


ete ht ib oe *, 


rA 
4 


2 t*s, ieee 


} : Fad 7 times, Sl Fae), Sy 
iat 


: This ROER ihy t 2“ eee Ue 
ett yt ie ley ee 


5 z 
sGtS epi TiC at 


er eevee ata COURT HA, 9 7 Arti 


eae A 
spite t CaN vitae TT Cae) —¥F > ee } (tFipae 
wt a Pl eit 


: ¢ " 
Partti IN) seeticr YN bene bees 


0 Gesan } 


- 


hun ie ree eS 


rine aires oF 


rs 


i iil (Oem 
De he ee 
Lie Otte tee 
© ee Say POR, 
Mrat. 08 te 

es SN 


i Pes Ae 


ty ye 


. 
os) 
— 

7 


Te 


Sidhe - = ; ‘ 

‘d y a 
aaa Ph toes Fag AP i 
£ 2 a a a 

a > i Z 

. a te % » 
Pas: ri i ) ? 2 
OF es ; 7 : ' 
25S > ie ee . 
iv > : * 4 
“ . J i. _ = ) i ' 


ei Stake : . : . 
2 oe ‘ ' % 
oer & i é 
— y « P 
> ae e ‘ ¢ . 
ae P < 
Pelt ; 


te ll ee i We “> ph.’ ea Baan a 7 a> ee ~ ao. Te eee , vee & 


ADVERTISEMENT 


The work of the Bureau of American Ethnology is conducted under act of Con- 
gress ‘‘for continuing ethnologic researches among the American Indians under the 
direction of the Smithsonian Institution.” 

Two series of publications are issued by the Bureau under authority of Congress, 
viz, annual reports and bulletins. The annual reports are authorized by concurrent 
resolution from time to time and are published for the use of Congress and the 
Bureau; the publication of the series of bulletins was authorized by concurrent 
resolution first in 1886 and more definitely in 1888, and these also are issued for the 
use of Congress and the Bureau. In addition, the Bureau supervises the publication 
of a series of quarto volumes bearing the title, ‘‘ Contributions to North American 
Ethnology,” begun in 1877 by the United States Geographical Survey of the Rocky 
Mountain Region. 

These publications are distributed primarily by Congress, and the portions of the 
editions printed for the Bureau are used for exchange with libraries and scientific 
and educational institutions and with special investigators in anthropology who 
send their own publications regularly to the Bureau. 

The exchange list of the Bureau is large, and the product of the exchange forms 
a valuable ethnologic library independent of the general library of the Smithsonian 
Institution. This library is in constant use by the Bureau collaborators, as well as 
by other anthropologists resident in or visiting Washington. 

The earlier volumes of the annual reports and the first seven volumes of the ‘‘Con- 
tributions to North American Ethnology” are out of print. 

Exchanges and other contributions to the Bureau should be addressed, 

The DirEcTOR, 
Bureau of American Ethnology, 
Washingion, D. C., 
U.S.A. 


> 


he 
ue miGune rp: 


Ut me allleu ar, ) ‘ veolonmi nt nv iquey fee 


i 
mu 
Moe 
“4h 
Al 
riité 


tah} 


Todtipn Mhais veleigIt ald vt Hake bia naibee i coy Ye 


ja bs? crt wal ¥ 4 
A sal ntact nierioton bRatoe ie the ripiige 
? ; Wh RRS Lay AxS. Sh frugal Sine Ome 


ia Make @ elt [asertiedt os) Feist tse? fark ae by. 
tev 17 ve. of ove raieiicl muy “ra Pin aii? nf mak 
; . ha“ 
Detection (iim we afyed rads it i eu >) 444% ve at Len eGngy 
% f wis $347 vate Gurl ¢ +) tole me tiyeec: bor may fre et 
LT Geet ivine "i SPU tis ) sf 1 feted s ; ii wai Lends Frets 
u ot; bch enfietinlh! tt) Wad Serine’, esiniriu® 6 ronipete oe 
iyeciel Co fironee) aft holotl mbt (eh e tae 
j re f 
ite 
a . oa. et a at, out tad 
ng taifay Emr 9t 2 ee HT acu feptird iiiegh eta aro itlbee { 
‘a wwe’ ore ttt u7t lichis west Hie athi td) hued 
iain Ae Eat niga. Tbe fie eeeblineyt ieee ea 
. 
pet all of otyabhigy waite Siding ame a3 
Ay uit pada is 7 an ul aes cyert th -syet § erie 
> HED Bey 79 ti (nei wih hoy wl atil afyafon 
t viwfakloens watt Be ,¢ ST HiTi> -s uy ifil Tie 
j 7 Ae fae H ; ro oNey 
j madi bas ie Fasra r + a pertentene 
7 ra 
as ? Piet: 
& 
yw \ 
' Fp 


7 bal 
1 om © i tele, J 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS 


OF 'THE 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


WITH 


INDEX TO AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS 


BY 


FREDERICK WEBB HODGE 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1894 


en, 


PYOUP ASTID VE SEER eae ee 


‘? 


Ht 
{ 
f 
j 


BS ULE U 


CONTENTS 


PERIMENT RG POLUS 2S Saie a, Jae ke eae aia e ates i. Ses Re ie Se ane Ano Soe eee 
LEGTUIGUTTOR ics SE eG Se ee SE Oty tere eS ee eee ee i a a ae 
Contributions to North American Ethnology..-.-..---..-<----2..----------- 
Introductions 


MENcolaneou sau DUCA llOnSaas ss 2 $5 Seek e Sl a teal. Sys PS. oe bee ee 
nce MaLOLaub NOT and. SUD|CCUS. a2 25 2+. seenpaee neces a arene ae teeters os eee & 


3 


LIST OF PUBLICATIONS 


ANNUAL REPORTS. 


First annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary of 
the Smithsonian institution 1879-80 by J. W. Powell Director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1881 

Roy. 8°. xxxv, 603 p., 346 fig., 1 map. Out of print. 


Contents. 


Report of the Director. pp. XI-XXXIII. 

On the evolution of language, as exhibited in the specialization of grammatic 
processes, the differentiation of the parts of speech, and the integration of 
the sentence; from a study of Indian languages, by J. W. Powell. pp. 1-16. 

Sketch of the mythology of the North American Indians, by J. W. Powell. pp. 
17-56. 

Wyandot government: A short study of tribal society, by J. W. Powell. pp. 
57-69. On limitations to the use of some anthropologic data, by J. W. Powell. 
pp. 71-86. 

A further contribution to the study of the mortuary customs of the North 
American Indians, by H. C. Yarrow, act. asst. surg., U. S. A. pp. 87-203, 
figs. 1-47. 

Studies in Central American picture-writing, by Edward 8. Holden, professor 
of mathematics, U. 8. Naval Observatory. pp. 205-245, figs. 48-60. 

Cessions of land by Indian tribes to the United States: illustrated by those in 
the state of Indiana, by C. C. Royce. pp. 247-262 and map. 

Sign language among North American Indians compared with that among other 
peoples and deaf-mutes, by Garrick Mallery. pp. 263-552, figs. 61-346. 

Catalogue of linguistic manuscripts in the library of the Bureau of Ethnology, 
by James C. Pilling. pp. 553-577. 

Illustration of the method of recording Indian languages. From the manu- 
scripts of Messrs J. O. Dorsey, A. 8S. Gatschet, and S. R. Riggs. pp. 579-589. 

Index. pp. 591-603. 


Second annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary 
of the Smithsonian institution 1880-81 by J. W. Powell director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1883 [1884.] 

Roy. 8°. xxxvil, 477 p., 77 pl., figs. 1-35, 347-714, 2 maps. Out 
of print. 


Contents. 
Report of the Director. pp. XV-XXXVII. 
Zuni fetiches, by Frank Hamilton Cushing. pp. 3-45, pls. I-X1, figs. 1-3. 


Myths of the Iroquois, by Erminnie A. Smith. pp. 47-116, pls. x1-xv. 
5 


6 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS. aber 


Animal carvings from mounds of the Mississippi valley, by Henry W. Henshaw. 
pp. 117-166, figs. 4-35. 

Navajo silversmiths, by Dr Washington Matthews, U. S. A. pp. 167-178, pls. 
XVI-XX. 

Art in shell of the ancient Americans, by William H. Holmes. pp. 179-305, pls. 
XXI-LXXVI. 

Illustrated catalogue of the collections obtained from the Indians of New 
Mexico and Arizona in 1879, by James Stevenson. pp. 307-422, figs. 347-697, 
map. 

Illustrated catalogue of the collections obtained from the Indians of New 
Mexico in 1880, by James Stevenson. pp. 423-465, figs. 698-714, map. 

Index. pp. 467-477. 


Third annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary 
of the Smithsonian institution 188182 by J. W. Powell director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1884 [1885.] 

Roy. 8°. Lxxtv, 606 p., 44 pi., 200|+1] fig. Out of print. 


Contents. 


Report of the Director. pp. XUI-LXXxIv. 

Notes on certain Maya and Mexican manuscripts, by Prof. Cyrus Thomas. pp. 
3-65, pls. I-Iv, figs. 1-11 [-10]. 

On masks, labrets, and certain aboriginal customs, with an inquiry into the 
bearing of their geographical distribution, by William Healey Dall, asst. U.S. 
Coast Survey; honorary curator U. 8. National Museum. pp. 67-202, pls. 


V-XXIX. 
Omaha sociology, by Rev. J. Owen Dorsey. pp. 205-370, pls. XXX-XXXIII, figs. 
12-42. 


Navajo weavers, by Dr Washington Matthews, U. 8. A. pp. 371-391, pls. 
XXIV-XXXVIU, figs. 42 [sic]-59. 

Prehistoric textile fabrics of the United States, derived from impressions on 
pottery, by William H. Holmes. pp. 393-425, pl. xxx1x, figs. 60-115. 

Illustrated catalogue of a portion of the collections made by the Bureau of Eth- 
nology during the field season of 1881, by William H. Holmes. pp. 427-510, 
figs. 116-200. 

lilustrated catalogue of the collections obtained from the pueblos of Zuni, New 
Mexico, and Wolpi, Arizona, in 1881, by James Stevenson. pp. 511-594, pls. 
XL-XLIV. 

Index. pp. 595-60€. 


Fourth annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary 
of the Smithsonian institution 1882~83 by J. W. Powell director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1886 [1887.] 

Roy. 8°. Lx, 532 p., 83 pl, 564 fig. 


Contents. 


Report of the Director. pp. XXVII-LXIII. 

Pictographs of the North American Indians. A preliminary paper, by Garrick 
Mallery. pp. 3-256, pls. I-LXxx11J, figs. 1-209. 

Pottery of the ancient Pueblos, by William H. Holmes. pp. 257-360, figs. 210- 
360. 

Ancient pottery of the Mississippi valley, by William H. Holmes. pp. 361-436, 
figs. 361-463. 


APH 
Satins “ ANNUAL REPORTS. 7 


Origin and development of form and ornament in ceramic art, by William H. 
Holmes. pp. 437-465, figs. 464-489. 

A study of Pueblo pottery as illustrative of Zuni culture growth, by Frank 
Hamilton Cushing. pp. 467-521, figs. 490-564, 

Index. pp. 523a-532. 


Fifth annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary 
of the Smithsonian institution 1883-84 by J. W. Powell director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1887 [1888.] 

Roy. 8°. Li, 560 p., 25 pl. 77 fig. 


Contents. 


Report of the Director. pp. XVII-LIII. 

Burial mounds of the northern sections of the United States, by Prof. Cyrus 
Thomas. pp. 3-119, pls. 1-v1, figs. 1-49. 

The Cherokee nation of Indians: a narrative of their official relations with the 
colonial and federal governments, by Charles C. Royce. pp. 121-378, pls. vul- 
1x. (Pls. vut and 1x are pocket maps. ) 

The mountain chant: a Navajo ceremony, by Dr Washington Matthews, U.S.A. 
pp. 379-467, pls. x-xviu1, figs. 50-59. 

The Seminole Indians of Florida, by Clay MacCauley. pp. 469-531, pl. x1x, 
figs. 60-77. 

The religious life of the Zuni child, by Mrs Tilly E. Stevenson. pp. 533-555, 
pls. XX-XXIII. 

Index. pp. 557-560. 


Sixth annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary 
of the Smithsonian institution 188485 by J. W. Powell director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1888 [1889.| 

Roy. 8°. Lviit, 675 p. (inel. 15 pl. and 6 p. of music), 10 pl. (inel. 2 
pocket maps), 546 fig. 

Contents. 

Report of the Director. pp. XXUWI-LVIII. 

Ancient art of the province of Chiriqui, Colombia, by William H. Holmes. pp. 
3-187, pl. 1, figs. 1-285. 

A study of the textile art in its relation to the development of form and orna- 
ment, by William H. Holmes. pp. 189-252, figs. 286-358. 

Aids to the study of the Maya codices, by Prof. Cyrus Thomas. pp. 253-371, 
figs. 359-388. 

Osage traditions, by Rev. J. Owen Dorsey. pp. 373-397, fig. 389. 

The central Eskimo, by Dr Franz Boas. pp. 319-669, pls. 11-x, figs. 3890-546. 
(Pls. 11 and 111 are pocket maps. ) 

Index. pp. 671-675. 


Seventh annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary 
of the Smithsonian institution 1885-86 by J. W. Powell director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1891 [1892.| 

Roy. 8°. Xu“, 409 p., 27 pl. (incl. pocket map), 39 fig. 

Contents, 


Report of the Director. pp. XV—XLI. 
Indian lingnistie families of America north of Mexico, by J. W. Powell. pp. 
1-142, pl. 1 (pocket map). 


8 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS. BUREAU OF 


ETHNOLOGY 


The Midé’wiwin or ‘grand medicine society” of the Ojibwa, by W. J. Hoff- 
man. pp. 143-300, pls. u-xx111, figs. 1-39. 

The sacred formulas of the Cherokees, by James Mooney. pp. 301-397, pls. 
XXIV-XXVII. 

Index. pp. 399-409. 


Kighth annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary 
of the Smithsonian institution 1886-87 by J. W. Powell director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1891 [1893.] 

Roy. 8°. XXXVI, 298 p., 123 pl., 118 fig. 


Contents. 


Report of the Director. pp. XIII-XXXVI. 

A study of Pueblo architecture: Tusayan and Cibola, by Victor Mindeleff. pp. 
3-228, pls. I-cx1, figs. 1-114. 

Ceremonial of Hasjelti Dailjis and mythical sand painting of the Navajo Indians, 
by James Stevenson. pp. 229-285, pls. cx1I-cxxu11, figs. 115-118. 

Index. pp. 287-298. 


Ninth annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary of 
the Smithsonian institution 1887-88 by J. W. Powell director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1892 [1893.] 

Roy. 8°. xuvi,617p., Spl. 448 fig. 


Contents. 


Report of the Director. pp. XIX-XLVI. 

Ethnological results of the Point Barrow expedition, by John Murdoch, nat- 
uralist and observer, International polar expedition to Point Pe Alaska, 
1881-1883. pp. 3-441, pls. 1-01, figs. 1-428. 

The medicine-men of the ane by John G. Bourke, captain, fia cavalry, 
U.S. army. pp. 443-603, pls. ni-vin, figs. 429-448. 

Index. pp. 605-617. 


Tenth annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary 
of the Smithsonian institution 1888-89 by J. W. Powell director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1893 [1894.] 

Roy. 8°. xxx, 822 p., 54pl., 1290 fig. 


Contents. 


Report of the Director. pp. 11I-Xxx. 

Picture-writing of the American Indians, by Garrick Mallery. pp. 3-807, pls. 
I-LIV, figs. 1-1,290. 

Index. pp. 809-822. 


Eleventh annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secre- 
tary of the Smithsonian institution 1889-90 by J. W. Powell 
director [vignette] Washington Government printing office 1894 

Roy. 8°. xiv, 553 p., 50 pl., 200 fig. 

Contents. 
Report of the Director. pp. XX1II-XLVU. 
The Sia, by Matilda Coxe Stevenson. pp. 3-157, pls. I-xxxv, figs. 1-20. 
Ethnology of the Ungava district, Hudson Bay territory, by Lucien M. Turner, 
Edited by John Murdoch. pp. 159-350, pls. Xxx v1I-xLul, figs. 21-155. 


B 
BI rear ANNUAL REPORTS. 9 


A study of Siouan cults, by James Owen Dorsey. pp. 351-544, pls. xLiv-L, figs. 
156-200. 
Index. pp. 545-553. 


Twelfth annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secretary 
of the Smithsonian institution 1890-91 by J. W. Powell director 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1894 

Roy. 8°. XLvill, 742 p., 42 pl., 344 fig. 


Contents. 


Report of the Director. pp. XIX-XLVIII. 

Report on the mound explorations of the Bureau of Ethnology, by Cyrus 
Thomas. pp. 3-730, pls. I-XLi, figs. 1-344. 

Index. pp. 731-742. 


Thirteenth annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secre- 
tary of the Smithsonian institution 1891-92 by J. W. Powell 
director [vignette] Washington Government printing office 1894 

Roy. 8°. p., 60 pl., 330 fig. Jn press. 


Contents. 


Report of the Director. pp.— 

Prehistoric textile art of eastern United States, by William H. Holmes. pp. 
3-45, pls. I-IXx, figs. 1-28. 

Stone art, by Gerard Fowke. pp. 47-178, figs. 29-278. 

Aboriginalremains in Verde valley, Arizona, by Cosmos Mindeleff. pp. 179-261, 
pls. X-L, figs. 279-305. 

Omaha dwellings, furniture, and implements, by James Owen Dorsey. pp. 
263-288, figs. 306-327. 

Casa Grande ruin, by Cosmos Mindeleff. pp. 329- —— pls. LI-LX, figs. 328-330. 

Outlines of Zuni creation myths, by Frank Hamilton Cushing. pp. 


Fourteenth annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the sec- 
retary of the Smithsonian institution 1892-93 by J. W. Powell 
director [vignette] Washington Government printing office 189- 

In preparation. 


Fifteenth annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the secre- 

‘tary of the Smithsonian institution 1893-94 by J. W. Powell 

director [vignette] Washington Government printing office 189- 
In preparation. 


BULLETINS. 


(A=1). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—Bibliography of the Eskimo language by James Con- 
Stantine Pilling [vignette] Washington Government printing office - 
1887 

8°. v, 116 p. (inel. 8 p. of fac-similes.) 


(B=2). Smithsonian Institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—Perforated stones from California by Henry W. Hen- 
Shaw [vignette] Washington Government printing office 1887 

8°, 34p., 16 fig. 

(C=3). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—The use of gold and other metals among the aucient 
inhabitants of Chiriqui, [Isthmus of Darien by William H. Holmes 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1887 

3°. 27 p., 22 he. 


(D=4). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—Work in mound exploration of the Bureau of Eth- 
nology by Cyrus Thomas [vignette] Washington Government 
printing office 1887 

8°. 15 psa fig. 

(H=5). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—Bibliography of the Siouan languages by James Con- 
stantine Pilling [vignette] Washington Government printing office 
1887 

8°. -V, St p. 


(F=6). Smithsonianinstitution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—Bibliography of the Iroquoian languages by James Con- 
stantine Pilling [vignette] Washington Government printing office 
1888 [1889] 

8°. vI, 208 p. (inel. 4 p. fac-similes), 5 unnumbered fac-similes. 

(G=7). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—Textile fabrics of ancient Peru’ by William H. Holmes 
|vignette] Washington Government printing office 1889 

So... 1% p:, tio: 


(Hi=8). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—The problem of the Ohio mounds by Cyrus Thomas 
|vignette]| Washington Government printing office 18389 

3°....04 p., 3 fig: 

10 


BIBLIOGRAPHY + 
HODGE BULLETINS. 1 


(I=9). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director.—Bibliography of the Muskhogean languages by James 
Constantine Pilling [vignette] Washington Government printing 
office 1889 

$9. vv, LL p. 


(J=10). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Etimology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—The circular, square, and octagonal earthworks of Ohio 
by Cyrus Thomas [vignette] Washington Government printing 
office 1889 

8°. 30 p., 11 pl., 5 fig. 


(K=11). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J.W.Pow- 
ell, director—Omaha and Ponka letters by James Owen Dorsey 
[vignette] Washington Government printing office 1891 

ao. 127 p: 


(L=12). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—Catalogue of prehistoric works east of the Rocky 
mountains by Cyrus Thomas [vignette] Washington Government 
printing office 1891 

8°, 246 p., 17 pl. and maps. 


(M=13). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J.W. Pow- 
ell, director—Bibliography of the Algonquian languages by James 
Constantine Pilling [vignette] Washington Government printing 
office 1891 [1892] 

8°. x, 614 p., 82 fac-similes. 


(N=14). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J.W.Pow- 
ell, director—Bibliography of the Athapascan languages by James 
Constantine Pilling [vignette] Washington Government printing 
office 1892 

8°, xiII, 125 p. (incl. 4 p. fac-similes). 


(O=15). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J.W. Pow- 
ell, director—Bibliography of the Chinookan languages (including the 
Chinook jargon) by James Constantine Pilling [vignette] Wash- 
ington Government printing office 1893 

8°. Xxil, 8L p. (inel. 3 p. fac-similes). 


(P=16). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J.W. Pow- 
ell, director—Bibliography of the Salishan languages by James 
Constantine Pilling [vignette] Washington Government printing 
office 1893 

8°. XIII, 86 p. (incl. 4 p. fac-similes). 


(Q=17). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J.W. Pow- 
ell, director—The Pamunkey Indians of Virginia by Jno. Garland 
Pollard [vignette] Washington Government printing office 1894 

8°. 19p. 


+ yy A 
12 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS. TPRAGLOGe 


(R=18). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—The Maya year by Cyrus Thomas [vignette] Wash- 
ington Government printing office 1894 

8°, 64p., 1 pl. 


(S=19). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—Bibliography of the Wakashan languages by James 
Constantine Pilling [vignette] Washington Government printing 
office 1894 

8°. x1, 70p. (inel. 2 p. fac-similes). 


(T=20). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—Chinook texts by Franz Boas [vignette] Washing- 
ton Government printing office 1894 

8°. 278 p,, pl. 


(U=21). Smithsonianinstitution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—An ancient quarry in Indian territory by William Henry 
Holmes [vignette] Washington Government printing office 1894 

$9. 19) p, 12 pL, Tie: 


(V=22). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W.Pow- 
ell, director—Siouan tribes of the east by James Mooney [vignette] 
Washington Government printing office 1894 

8°. 92 p. and index, map. Jn press. 


(W=23). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J.W. Pow- 
ell, director—Archeologic investigations in James and Potomac val- 
leys by Gerard Fowke [vignette] Washington Government print- 
ing office 1894 

8°. —p.17 fig. In press. 


(X=24). Smithsonian institution Bureau of Ethnology: J. W. Pow- 
ell, director—List of the publications of the Bureau of Ethnology with 
index to authors and subjects by Frederick Webb Hodge [vignette] 
Washington Government printing office 1894 

8°, 25 p. 


CONTRIBUTIONS TO NORTH AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY. 


Department of the Interior U.S. geographical and geological survey 
of the Rocky mountain region J. W. Powell in charge—Contributions 
to North American ethnology volume I [-IX]|—{seal of the depart- 
ment] Washington Government printing office 1877 |-1893]. 


4°, 9 vols. 


Nore.—Volumes I to vit of this series are out of print. 


Contents. 


Vouums I, 1877: 
Parti. Tribes of the extreme northwest, by W. H. Dall. 156 p., 9 fig., 10 
pl., pocket map. 
1. On the distribution and nomenclature of the native tribes of Alaska and 
the adjacent territory. Withamap. pp. 7-40. 
2. On succession in the shell-heaps of the Aleutian islands. pp. 41-91. 
3. On the origin of the Innuit. pp. 93-106. 
Appendix to Parti. Linguistics. pp. 107-156. 
1. Notes on the natives of Alaska, by J. Furuhelm, [1862.] pp. 111-116. 
2. Terms of relationship used by the Innuit: aseries obtained from natives of 
Cumberland inlet, by W. H. Dall. pp. 117-119. 
3. Vocabularies, by Gibbs and Dall. pp. 121-153. 
4. Note on the use of numerals among the T’sim si-an’, by George Gibbs, 
M.D. pp. 155-156. 
Part u. Tribes of western Washington and northwestern Oregon, by George 
Gibbs, M.D. pp. 157-241; appendix, pp. 243-361, pocket map. 
Appendix to Part 11. Linguistics. pp. 247-361. 
1. Comparative vocabularies, by Gibbs, Tolmie, and Mengarini. pp. 247-283. 
2. Dictionary of the Niskwalli, by George Gibbs. pp. 285-361. 


VouuME II, 1890 [1891]: 
The Klamath Indians of southwestern Oregon, by Albert Samuel Gatschet. 
2 pts. evii, 711 p., map; iii, 711p. 


VouuME III, 1877: 
Tribes of California, by Stephen Powers. 635 p., 1 pl., 44 fig., 3 p. music, 
pocket map. 
Appendix [Linguistics], edited by J. W. Powell. pp. 439-613. 


VOLUME IV, 1881: 
Houses and house-life of the American aborigines, by Lewis H. Morgan. 
xiv, 281 p., 57 pl. and fig. 
13 


yy hl ia BUREAU OF 
14 LIS! OF PUBLICATIONS. oe 


VOLUME JV, 1881: 
Observations on cup-shaped and other lapidarian sculptures in the old world 
and in America, by Charles Rau. [1882.] 112 p., 61 fig. 
On prehistoric trephining and cranial amulets, by Robert Fletcher, M. R. C. 8. 
Eng. Act. asst. surgeon U. 8. army. [1882.] 32 p., 9 pl., 2 fig. i 
A study of the manuscript Troano, by Cyrus Thomas Ph. D. with an introdue- 
tion by D. G. Brinton M. D. [1882.] xxxvii, 237 p., 9 pl., 101 fig. 


VotuME VI, 1890 [1892]: 
The Gegiha language, by James Owen Dorsey. xviii, 794 p. 


VoLuME VII, 1890 [1892]. 
"A Dakota-English dictionary, by Stephen Return Riggs, edited by James Owen 
Dorsey. x, 665 p. 


VoLuME VIII, 189-: 
Pottery of eastern United States, by William H. Holmes. Jn press. 


VOLUME IX, 1893: 
Dakota grammar, texts, and ethnography, by 8. R. Riggs, edited by James 
Owen Dorsey. XXXII, 239 p. 


INTRODUCTIONS. 


(1). Introduction to the study of Indian languages, with words, 
phrases, and sentences to be collected. By J. W. Powell. [Seal of 
the Department of the Interior.| Washington: Government printing 
office. 1877. 

4°, 104 p., 10 blank leaves. Out of print. 

Second edition as follows: 


(2). Smithsonian institution—Bureau of Ethnology J. W. Powell 
director—Introduction to the study of Indian languages with words, 
_phrases and sentences to be collected—By J. W. Powell—Second edition 
—with charts—Washington Government printing office 1880 

4°, xi, 228 p., 10 blank leaves, kinship charts I-rv in pocket. A 
16° “alphabet” of 2 leaves accompanies the work. 


(3). Smithsonian institution—Bureau of Ethnology—Introduction to 
the study of sign language among the North American Indians as 
illustrating the gesture speech of mankind—By Garrick Mallery, bre- 
vet lieut. col., U. S. army—Washington Government printing office 
1880 

4°, iv, 72 p., 33 unnumbered figs. Out of print. 


(4). Smithsonian institution—Bureau of Ethnology J. W. Powell, 
director—Introduction to the study of mortuary customs among the 
North American Indians—By Dr. H. C. Yarrew act. asst. surg., 
U.S. A.—Washington: Government printing office 1880 

4°, ix, 114 p. Out of print. 


MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS. 


(1). Smithsonian institution—Bureau of Ethnology J. W. Powell, 
director—A. collection of gesture-signs and signals of the North Ameri- 
can Indians with some comparisons by Garrick Mallery. Brevet 
lieut. col. and formerly acting chief signal officer, U.S. army—Distrib- 
uted only to collaborators—Washington Government printing office. 
1880 


4°, 329 p. Out of print. 


Notr,—250 copies printed for use of collaborators only. 


(2.) Smithsonian institution—Bureau of Ethnology J. W. Powell 
director—Proof-sheets of a bibliography of the languages of the North 
American Indians by James Constantine Pilling—(Distributed only to 
collaborators)—Washington Government printing office 1885 

4°, xu, 1135 p., 29 pl. (fac-similes). Out of print. 

Norr.—Only 110 copies printed for the use of collaborators, 10 of them on one side. 
of the sheet. 

It was the intention to have this Bibliography form Volume x of ‘‘ Contributions 
to North American Ethnology,” but the work assumed such proportions that it was 


deemed advisable to publish it as apart of the series of Bulletins, devoting a Bulletin 
to each linguistic stock. 


(3). [Linguistic families of the Indian tribes north of Mexico with 
provisional list of the principal tribal names and synonyms. 

16°. 55 p. Out of print. 

NotTEr.—A few copies printed in 1885 for the use of the compilers of a Tribal Dic- 
tionary and Synonymy now in preparation. It is without title-page, name, or date, 
but was compiled from a manuscript list of Indian tribes by James Mooney. 


(4). [Map of] Linguistic stocks of American Indians north of Mexico 
by J. W. Powell. [1891.] 


Notr.—A limited edition of this map, which forms plate 1 of the Seventh Annual 
Report of the Director, has been issued on heavy paper, 19 by 22 inches, for the use 
of students. 

16 


INDEX TO AUTHORS AND SUBJECTS. 


A=Annual Report. B=Bulletin. C—Contributions to North American Ethnology. 
Int.=Introduction. M—=Miscellaneous publications. 


Alaska, Notes on the natives of (Furuhelm)...--..---..-------- (GC) asain 
Algonquian languages, Bibliography of the (Pilling) -......-... B. m==13: 
Amulets (cranial), Prehistoric trephining and (Fletcher) -...--. Cv (pt. 2). 
Animal carvings from mounds of the Mississippi valley (Henshaw)A ii, 117. 
Apache, Medicine-men of the (Bourke) .......-....--..----.---- A ix, 448, 
Archeologic investigations in James and Potomac yalleys 
(CSOT LEE) CoOL OS ie a ROP RE ar gen in oe Pa ee B w=23. 
Architecture of Tusayan and Cibola (V. Mindeleff) ........---- A viii, 3. 
Arizona, Aboriginal remains in Verde valley (C. Mindeleff)....A xiii, 179, 
Art, Ancient, of Chiriqui, Colombia (Holmes)....-.-----.-..-... AC vile oe 
(ceramic), Form and ornament in (Holmes)...-..-.--..-...A iv, 437. 
in shell of the ancient Americans (Holmes)....--...--..-..A ii, 179. 
HOMOH (HOWE) = 22 specie ose cee.- waste semet oct ae sees seek AY xiii, 47, 
(textile), Prehistoric, of eastern United States (Holmes)..A xiii, 3, 
MOXGHG) study OL (Holmes): 2 2o2 foe secs ots wee eed A vi, 189. 
Athapascan Janguages, Bibliography of the (Pilling) ---.-.----- Bo N=14: 
Bibliography of the Algonquian languages (Pilling). -.....-.---- B m=13. 
Athapascan languages (Pilling)...---..--- B oN=14, 
Chinookan languages, including the Chi- 
nook jargon (Piling) 2 2028 8s 20k B 015, 
Eskimo language (Pilling) ..---...--...--- Be Al 
Troquoian languages (Pilling)...---.-.-.--.- Bi oor 
languages of the North American Indians, 
Proot sheeus of (Pilling) 22 -- 8222. cc- ce My > 2: 
Muskhogean languages (Pilling) -...-..---. Dee i—oe 
Salishan languages (Pilling) .-.....-.-...-- Dee P—16: 
Siouan languages (Pilling)-.--.-.-.-.-.-..- By Et 
Wakashan languages (Pilling) ..-.--.. pee be S19" 
Boas branz: he Central Eskimo: -22 225 2225s --- so0c5- 2 == A vi, 399: 
Chin ooletestses cesses. cect as < gee eS Sse See ees 
Bourke, John G.; Medicine-men of the Apache _..........-----/ A ix, 448. 
Brinton, Daniel G.; The graphic system and ancient methods of 
PoltemMchVai ea sa iotae tes os ee Shien Basico tem aes wc See ee =. ene aes Cv (pt.3) xvii. 
Calitornira, ULES Of CEOWOLS))- saan chaccsas sass wee o ce oe (OY Manele 
Carvings, Animal, from mounds of the Mississippi valley (Hen- 
BUG) Were ralere  erreleionioe cnet cee sens oe Sees eee Na see J:\peah en he 
asa Granderuin (C. Mindéleff) 2.22. sess 222 ee ae 222A! xiii, 329 


Bie — 2 17 


18 : LIST OF PUBLICATIONS. 


‘Catalogue of collections from New Mexico and Arizona in 1879 


(J. Stevenson). tteseee. -o-o- os. eee A 
irom pueblos in 1881 (J. Stevenson).-.A 
madejin 188liG@lolmes)---..-2. essere A 
obtained from New Mexico in 1880 (J. 
Stevenson) Sseeecr atte ete Seta eee A 
linguistic manuscripts in the library of the Bu- 
reau of Ethnolory (Falling)... (5. -)--22--e---n A 
prehistoric works east of the Rocky mountains 
(thomas) eseeer ese a) he eae ee eae eee eee B 
(@egiha language (Dorsey)-.. 2 22g---- 2-22. <2 en=- alee renee G 
Central American picture-writing, Studies in (Holden) ....---. A 


Ceremonial of Hasjelti Dailjis and mythical sand painting of the 
Navajo (J. Stevenson) 


Cessions of land by Indian tribes to the United States (Royce) .A 

Cherokee nation of Indians-(Royce) ------.------3.--------.--.. A 

sackea formas (Mooney) por ee eee eee eee ee eee A 

Chincok texts((Boas) eerescsr. soe eae east ner eee eee eee B 

Chinookan languages, Bibliography of (Pilling)...---.-------- B 

Chiriqui, Ancient art of (Holmes). ...----.---.--...+-.-------- A 
Use of gold and other metals among the ancient inhab- 

itants of.(Holmes) «<2 2 epee somes poe e e Pe ee B 

Cibola (Tusayan and), Architecture of (V. Mindeleff)..--..---. A 


Collections, Catalogue of, from New Mexico and Arizona in 1879 
(J. Stevenson) 
from pueblos in 1881 (J. Stevenson) 


obtained from New Mexico in 1880 (J. Stevenson).A 
madennu.Ssi (Holmes) seeense=se- eee eee == ee A 
Cults (Siouan), Study of (Dorsey). .---------------------.----- A 
Cup-shaped and other lapidarian sculptures (Rau) -...-------- C 
Cushing, I. 3.5, Zuni fetiches 5-5. -°:4-- S-cespepet-ea5--e ee 


A study of Pueblo pottery as illustrative of 


Fond Culpure STO Wi See oa ee eee A 

Outlines of Zuti creation myths -----.---.---- A 

Dakota-English dictionary (Riggs) .-...-.-.-.--.---------------- 6 
grammar, texts, and ethnography (Riggs)..----.------ C 

Tribes of the extreme northwest ....-...---- Cc 


Dall, William H.; 
Terms of relationship used by the Innuit- -.C 
On masks, labrets, and certain aboriginal 
CUAStONIS: --2o2 02-2 ee ae ae ee ee ee eee A 
Dall, William H., and Gibbs, George. Vocabularies of tribes 
of the extreme northwest 
Dictionary, Dakota-English (Riggs). .-.---..------------------- Cc 
Dorsey, J. Owen; Illustration of the method of recording In- 
dian languages % 
A study of Siouan cults: -2-=-=->-------- 4-55 A 
Omaha and Ponka letters ; 
Omaha dwellings, furniture, and implements A 


Omaha soctolotys—os: spose see: eee A 
Osage tradifiens\:- 2-2. -2=--2 eae ee eee A 


The Gegiha language .......---- ..<=-n= eons © 

Dorsey J. Owen, editor; A Dakota-English dictionary, by 
Stephen Return Riggs 

Dakota grammar, texts, and ethnography, by 
Sho) Ried ag US ee aera eb aes seu C 


BUREAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 


ii, 307. 
iii, 511. 
iii, 427. 


ii, 423. 
i, 553. 
L112. 


Vi. 


viii, 229. 
i, 247. 

y, 121. 
vii, 301. 


TJs 


o=15, 
vi, 3. 


C=3. 
Vili, 3. 


ii, 307. 
iii, 511. 
li, 423. 
iii, 427. 
xi, 351. 
Vi idle 

ii, 3, 


iv, 467. 
xiii. 
vii. 

Lk. 

Teale 
Avalele 


iii, 67. 


i, 121. 
Vii. 


1, 579. 

xi, 351. 
Ks 
xiii, 263. 
ili, 205. 
vi, 373. 


Vi. 
vii. 


Tx, 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 
ee INDEX. 


Dwellings, furniture, and implements of the Omaha (Dorsey). ..A 


Eskimo language, Bibliography of the (Pilling).--...-.--...--..-. B 
MherGermirale (HOt ys sae sae cats ac Sahies go's a5 seas ea A 
Ethnography, Grammar, texts, a of the Dakota (Riggs)-....C 
Ethnology of the Ungava district (Turner). .....--.--.--.---.-A 
Eivaluion of language (Powell). -...-.2--.---<.------+--++i---A 
eimoheve um) (G@USHINM)= - sess. 226 cos ets 2 =n i a see n= wt A 
Fletcher, Robert; On prehistoric trephining and cranial amulets .C 
Fowke, Gerard; USE Bi beens Macc e ae Soe see aoe sociies | asin ag A 
Archeologic investigations in James and Poto- 
Mie AEN Cee wssad boaeiesap Eedeee ae BECOSE OE B 
Furniture, dwellings, and implements of the Omaha (Dorsey) .-A 
Furuhelm, J.; Notes on the natives of Alaska....-...-...-.-.--- C 
Gatschet, Albert S.; Illustration of the method of recording 
Indian Janenares 3.2. 2-25 2--seo= coe ceel A 
The Klamath Indians of southwestern 
OTreconiseeetss ceases soo eats ashes Hoses 3 C 
Gesture signs and signals of the North American Indians (Mal- 
sieve ete are scars ean a ene ot. ie SU e toe ae ae oee ook a M 
Gesture speech, Introduction to the study of sign language as 
Basins (Malleny soe. eas aa acho ss Soa sees = sce tacos e Int. 
Gibbs, George; Notes on the use of numerals among the T’sim 
UE le ao ee teh a Sa eee as) sissies aes C 
Tribes of western Washington and northwest- 
ern Oresone fee esses oes eae oe = ses cede aac C 
Gibbs, George, and Dall, W.H.; Vocabularies of tribes of the 
extreme Northwest ’.2222--2242- +=2225=2--5 --55 C 
Gold, Use of, and other metals among the ancient inhabitants 
Os Ghee (ELOMNES)) Sesaae Soe se oases casas seks sew ccaein ese B 
Grammar, texts, and ethnography of the Dakota (Riggs) .----- C 
Grand Medicine society of the Ojibwa (Hoffman) ........-..--- A 
Graphic system and ancient methods of the Mayas (Brinton).-..C 
Hasjelti Dailjis, Ceremonial of the Navajo (J. Stevenson) .----. A 
Henshaw, H. W.; Animal carvings from mounds of the Missis- 
SUP pI Walley eee tas aye a= alee alae eaten s A 
Perforated stones from California...-.....---. B 
Hodge, F. W.; List of publications of the Bureau of Ethnology 
with index to authors and subjects .......-.--.-.---...----- B 
Hoffman, W.J.; The Mideée’wiwin or ‘Grand Medicine society” 
OVER COTTIEN ED Giles Sted cP Rae DEBE EE eDOCS DONE oe eon EOC oOEre A 
Holden, E. S.; Studies in Central American picture writing. ..A 
Holmes, W. H.; An ancient quarry in Indian territory .-....-.-. B 
Ancient art of the province of Chiriqui, Co- 
lomibiay sas ee sae 6 teres costa aae west an Fone A 
Art in shell of the ancient Americans..--..---- A 


illustrated catalogue of a portion of the collec- 
tions made by the Bureau of Ethnology dur- 


ing the field season of 1881 ..............-.-./ A 
Origin and development of form and ornament 

INE CELAINIG ANGE sa os ae as aad Soa A 
Ancient pottery of the Mississippi valley. ----- A 


Pottery of the ancient pueblos -...-....--...-.- A 


13 
xiii, 263. 


s=F, 
vi, 399. 
see 

=, 159: 
Mode 


rN oe 
Vv (pt. 2). 
xiii, 47. 


w=23. 
xili, 263. 
reals 


C= 

LX. 

vil, 143. 

v (pt. 3), xvii. 


viii, 229. 


ii, 14%, 
Bs 


x24 
vii, 143. 


i, 205. 
G25 


20 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS. pens 
Holmes, W.H.; The use of gold and other metals among the 
Pottery of eastern United States. ......-...---. C viii. 
Prehistoric textile art of eastern United States.A  xili, 3. 
A study of the textile art in its relation to the 
development of form and ornament--..-.-.---- A vi, 189. 
Prehistoric textile fabrics of the United States, 
derived from impressions on pottery. -------- A iii, 393. 
Textile fabrics of ancient Peru --..-.......---- B Ge 
ancient inhabitants of Chiriqui, Isthmus of 
Darien aaeetes ce ee eee e teen oe cher eter BGs: 
Introductory to archeologic investigations in 
James and Potomac valleys (Fowke) .....--- B w=23 
Houses and house-life of the American aborigines (Morgan) ....C iv. 
Hudson Bay territory, ethnology of the Ungava district 
(GUN er) Cees ee oe ee ie ho cltetie acer ce Mette ee terse tel nenere A xi, 159. 
Illustrated catalogue of collections from New Mexico and Ari- 
zona in 1879 (J. Steven- 
SOI). Sate e eee oe eee AD eit SORE 
from pueblos in 1881 (J. 
Stevenson)! lose sees AS en ila 
made in 1881 (Holmes)--..A 111, 427. 
obtained from New Mexico 
in 1880 (J. Stevenson)-.A ii, 423. 
Tilustration of the method of recording Indian languages 
(Dorsey, Gatschet RIG SS) ie ae mare = ete ee A 1,979: 
Implements, Omaha dwellings, furniture, and (Dorsey) ee Rts A xiii, 263. 
Indian territory, Ancient quarry in (Holmes)..-.--..----.------ By wai 
Innuit, Terms of relationship used by the (Dall)-..--.-..-.-.---- Cae 
Iroquoian languages, Bibliography of the (Pilling) -.-....----- Ben—6. 
Iroquois, Myths .of the (Sm) <2. 2.0. t cess eee eee oer A ne 
James and Potomac valleys, Archeologic investigations in 
(Rowk6) Se onshe fa ssee se as eek ote Ree on eects 1. 23 Br “Wize 
Klamath Indians of southwestern Oregon (Gatschet).-..-...---- Ca 
Labrets, masks, and certain aboriginal customs (Dall). --.----- A ili, 67. 
Language, Evolution of (Powell)-225-2 2-22-2202 e oe eee AS ata 
Languages, Indian, Illustration of the method of recording 
(Dorsey? Gatsehet, hiees) peer aa. a= alee eee eee eee A. Ao 
Languages, Indian, Introduction to the study of (Powell)-.----. Int. 1, 2. 
Languages of the North American Indians, Proof sheets of a 
biblipceapity Of tite \(hinine) pt ce ee eee eee ee M 2. 
Limitations to the use of some anthropologic data (Powell) --..A i, 71. 
Linguistic families of America north of Mexico (Powell). -..---- AP wig 
tribes mort OfMWexicOs jase eee See eee M 3. 
manuscripts in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 
nolopy( Pullin’) eo eee. - eee eee ea cere A i, 553. 
stocks north of Mexico, map of (Powell)-..---..----- M 4. 
List of publications of the Bureau of Ethnology (Hodge).....- BY xe 
MacCauley, Clay; The Seminole Indians of Florida....-...--.- A vy, 469. 
McGee, W J; Preface to the Pamunkey Indians of Virginia 
(Pollard): 22323 a2s8 See =e Bethe eee eee Baro lig 
Prefatory note to the Maya year (Thomas). -... Bs—19 


‘BIBLIOGRAPHY 
een ODGE INDEX. 


Mallery, Garrick; A collection of gesture-signs and signals of 
the North American Indians, with some 
COMP OMINOUS saree tatatal of taint aati oe = alone) si= M i. 
Introduction to the study of sign language 
among the North American Indians as illus- 


trating the gesture speech of mankind -.-..Int. 3. 
Pictographs of the North American Indians: 

A PReMMMMAry Papell so... cs < nn << --4~ 5 iain eey 
Picture-writing of the American Indians --..A x, 3. 


Sign language among North American Indi- 
ans compared with that among other peo- 


Muskhogean languages, Bibliography of the (Pilling)........- By b—=9: 


21 


ples and deaf-mutes .....-..---..--------- A. i, 263. 
Manuscripts, Linguistic, in the library of the Bureau of Eth- 
TiaLOM CE MLE) ee foe ere oa sta aie ie a oa A i, 558. 
Notes on certain Maya and Mexican (Thomas).-.-A iii, 3. 
Manuscript Troano, Study of the (Thomas) -..-.-..------------ C’ Vv (pt. 3), 1. 
Map of linguistic stocks north of Mexico (Powell) ---..-.---.---- M 4. 
Masks, labrets, and certain aboriginal customs (Dall).-..... SEY ah OTe 
Matthews, W.; Navajo silversmiths -......----.--------------- AD isl Gf 
NaWajO WeRVOES!: sa. i562 8 ee Saa asctne a etd aoe A iii, 371. 
The mountain chant: a Navajo ceremony..---.A v, 379. 
Maya codices, Aids to the study of (Thomas). -.-...-.-.--------- A vi, 253. 
and Mexican manuscripts, Notes on (Thomas) -..-.-------- A ili, 3. 
Graphic system and ancient methods of the (Brinton) ---.C v (pt.3), xvii. 
VORA ROMMiGs) oa 5 yas hoes untae an 3a ee oo ae rien 13)) Weise dle 
Medicine-men of the Apache (Bourke).-.--......--.------------/ A ix, 443. 
Mexican and Maya manuscripts, Notes on (Thomas) -.-.-.--. -- 52 AS iinkios 
Midé’wiwin or ‘‘Grand Medicine society” of the Opiws 
(EIMENTAE Tig eepoUiasor aceSbo SERGE ECE COORD SoOC pean eee coe Boose A vii, 143. 
Mindeleff, C.; Aboriginal remains in Verde valley, Arizona....A xiii, 179. 
Gaga Grande ruin ese 3 52 a2 ees oso essa sae A xiii, 329. 
Mindeleff, V.; A study of pueblo architecture: Tusayan and 
(OR oan ee ieee, Seen ce ea ee Se ee re ee ea AY NAM os 
Mooney, James; Linguistic families of Indian tribes north of 
MexiGot ss 456 Secreta ose aa eeeeaas sSaiceecias M 3. 
The sacred formulas of the Cherokees ....-.--- A vii, 301. 
Siouam tribes of the,east...-.<-2-.-:.-.--. +. 4 BY Vv =22. 
Morgan, Lewis H.; Houses and house-life of the American abo- 
DEG. tic Ree ape ae See akeyne CEE Bee CPE hae Pee me nee Bo ae OPIS oe: Gy alive 
Mortuary customs, Introduction to the study of (Yarrow). -.-.-- Int. 4. 

; of the North American Indians (Yarrow) ..-A 1, 87. 
Mound explorations of the Bureau of Ethnology (‘Thomas) ---- - A. xii,33 B.D =k. 
Mounds, Burial, of the northern sections of the United States 

CO Se EE ee ee ee Sen IE ey Earns AOE DEERE See ay A» y,3. 
Mounds of the Mississippi valley, Animal carvings from (Hen- 
cg OS ee ye a Se te RY Pe ee ee yen Og erae ae Ay Ath d07, 
Mounds (Ohio), the problem of the (Thomas).-..-.-..----------- B A=8. 
Mounds, Prehistoric, east of the Rocky mountains (Thomas).-.B L=12. 
Mountain chant: A Navajo ceremony (Matthews) ...-.----.---- A v, 379. 
Murdoch, John; Ethnological results of the Point Barrow expe- 
GT es Se ge ee oe ee eee ae Bee ath a Cnr Exerc 
Murdoch, John, editor; Ethnology of the Ungava district, Hud- 
son Bay territory, by Lucien M. Turner ...-- A. xi, 159 


22 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS. 


Mythology of the North American Indians (Powell).......-.--. A 
Myths of creation (Zuni), Outlines of (Cushing).............-- A 
the Troquois.(Smuith) 2.222 220 eee pee ee cee See A 


Navajo ceremonial of Hasjelti Dailjis and mythical sand paint- 


BUREAU OF 
ETHNOLOGY 
ibe 
PRATT 
li. 47 


ing {J -Sievenson) oi) pec ee eee meer L ab ic Ee eee A viii, 229. 
ceremony, The mountain chant (Matthews) -..........- Av, 379. 
silversmiths (Matthews) crs: ose t<Pbes =. 2.se ni cae eee A - ii, 167. 
weavers (Matthews) iene -resea) eset te ee eens A iii, 371 

Numerals, Notes on the use of, among the T’sim si-an’ (Gibbs)..C i, 155. 
Ohio Mounds, The problem of the (Thomas).............------ B 48 
Ojibwa, Midé’wiwin or ‘“‘Grand Medicine society” of the ( Hoff- 
MY See pt pene 25 oh ST SESE EE ree: o Mee bes AOE. eee en aes 
Omaha and Ponka letters (Dorsey). ..2..2 22-2. 2LL 6. pees e ee Bye 
dwellings, furniture, and implements (Dorsey) .--...--- A xiii, 263. 
pocidlory. { Dotsey) teste a eee. oak ee eee See AY i, 205e 
Oregon, northwestern, Tribes of (Gibbs)............-.-..----- Cn tot 
Osare traditions (Dorsey). .25..so. st ocee hese ae eee SN lV Epuad Weds 
Pamunkey Indians of Virginia (Pollard) ..............-.------ Bo 
Perforated stones from California (Henshaw).............----- Be 32 
Peru (ancient) Textile fabrics of (Holmes) ...........-...----- Bi Gar 
Pictographs of the North American Indians (Mallery) .....-.-- AY “iv, 3: 
Picture-writing of the American Indians (Mallery) .........-.- IAPS Ot 
Studies in Central American (Holden)......--- A i, 205. 
Pilling, J. C.; Bibliography of the Algonquian languages. -... B “Mw =13: 
Athapascam=. cee s22--2 eee BONS" 
Chmockangsssses2- eee B O15: 
Kskimo language..---.---. Bae 
Troquoian languages. ..---. Beat —(6; 
Musihoreaties sees eee eeees Bee oe 
palishan W'2 occ, ae eB ieee 
NlOUALE LSE NEARER SAE Rete BASE =. 
Wiakashameys sO. One en saat Bes sue 
Catalogue of linguistic manuscripts in the library 
of the Bureau of Ethnology ........-...-...-. A i, 553. 
Proof-sheets of a bibliography of the languages 
of the North American Indians................ M 2: 
Point Barrow expedition, Ethnological results of the (Murdoch) A_ ix, 3. 
Pollard, John Garland; Pamunkey Indians of Virginia....._.. Bo ie 
Ponka and Omaha letters (Dorsey) ..........-..--------------- Be Keele 
Potomac and James valleys, Archeologic investigations in 
(Fowke) ico. 2 232i5 Sot SAS oe oe SiS Bee e ete. Oe B w=23. 
Pottery, Ancient, of the Mississippi valley (Holmes)....-..---- A iv, 361 
of the ancient pueblos (Holmes).......-....-...------ A iv, 257 
of eastern United States (Holmes)..................-- Cy vale 
Pueblo, illustrative of Zuni culture growth (Cushing).A iv, 467 
Poweil, J. W.; Indian linguistic families of America north of 
Mexien 225 cc nt ELC EE er eee ae A vii,1 
Introduction to the study of Indian languages, 
with words, phrases, and sentences to be col- 
lected “22h: We Le RE BEE EN ee ae iat ele 
Map of linguistic stocks north of Mexico..-.--. M 4. 


On limitations to the use of some anthropologic 
data 


as INDEX. 
Powell, J. W.; The evolution of language..............--.---- Ag Tele 
Sketch of the mythology of the North American 
MMOs ia tatas aos sss ot oysc 2.5 eae =e tt Bees 171% 
Powell, J. W., editor; Linguistics (of the tribes of California)...C iii, 439. 
Powers, Stephen; Tribes of California. .......--.---..--------- Cy ik 1 
iPproplem: ofthe Ohio mounds: (Thomas). =... -.2\2.: <2 ¢-b..2<-s2 By hc, 
Proof-sheets of a bibliography of the languages of the North 
AIMS nT Caml ams) (PUM Oy 2 oe ope toys eae vio neta ace aa 55'5n/=% Mer. 
Publications of the Bureau of Ethnology, List of (Hodge) ..-.--- Bios 324" 
Pueblo architecture: Tusayan and Cibola (V. Mindeleff)-..-.---. A viii, 3. 
pottery as illustrative of Zuni culture growth (Cushing)-A iv, 467. 
Pueblos, ancient, Pottery of the (Holmes)............---..--.- A iv, 257. 
Quarry, Ancient, in Indian territory (Holmes) .........-...---- Baul 


Rau, Charles; Observations on cup-shaped and other lapidarian 
sculptures in the old world and in America....C vy, 1. 
Relationship, Terms of, used by the Innuit (Dall)..-.-..---.---. Cee ny: 
Riggs, Stephen R.; Dakota-English dictionary...-......-.---- C vii. 
Dakota grammar, texts, and ethnography.-C ix. 
Illustration of the method of recording In- 
CranMlams UAC eS sas ee aoc mes eae te Sas AUT OG: 
Royce, C.C.; Cessions of land by Indian tribes to the United 
States; illustrated by those in the state of 


Imiianays Sass eas cers ss abs ke ie AEE a eas con ALi, 247. 
The; Cherokee nation: of Indians $l: =... ..2. 2-2: Ae ee TOT 
Sacred formulas of the Cherokees (Mooney) .....-.---- We Bc A. vii, 301. 
Salishan languages, Bibliography of the (Pilling) -.----...---- By r— 6: 
Sand painting of the Navajo (J. Stevenson) -...--.-...-------- A. viii, 229. 
Seminole Indians of Florida (MacCauley) -..--..---.---------- Av, 469. 
Shell, Art in, of the ancient Americans (Holmes) ......--.----- AG il Lis 
Seton (VL CAS LOMONSON) )) San =efassie ect te ee ls Se Se AVS sci, St 
Sign language among North American Indians (Mallery).-..-.-- A i, 263. 
Sign language, Introduction to the study of (Mallery).....--.-. Int: 33: 
Signals, gesture-signs and, of the North American Indians 
ReSciilennys) pee tre es ne See oad | Saban Stages Ven at. MuteieT hy 
Silversmiths, Navajo (Matthews) ........:...---22..-2.2...-22- A ii, 167. 
Pananeculis, Study of (Dorsey). ...26. 22.5.2 .2.2<-4 228s 20s5 AGeX nol 
languages, Bibliography of the (Pilling)..... ......-...B E=5. 
cubes, of theieast; (Mooney)! oss52e5- = 22:33 2532 222 te! - Bi svie= 22! 
Smith, Erminnie A.; Myths of the Iroquois .................-- AG eA. 
SHciolosy Omaha (WOLSeY,)).-225 /-4-< ~.4aesaac- 23 ook be esi. AL iit, 205: 


Stevenson, James; Illustrated catalogue of collections obtained 
from the Indians of New Mexico and 


PSurAayiv ahi ae ie cee ee ey eee ee eee A ii, 307. 
Catalogue of collections obtained from the 
Indians of New Mexico in 1880....--.-...A ii, 423. 


Catalogue of collections obtained from the 

Pueblos of Zuni, New Mexico, and Wolpi, 

ATID INE LOS 1 othe aja ee. D. NE ee Se AS iar bllt: 
Ceremonial of Hasjelti Dailjis and mythical 


sand painting of the Navajo Indians .....A viii, 229. 


Stevenson, Matilda C.; The religious life of the Zuni child. .--- A v, 533. 
PONG Sa) tas ayaa ee eer as Spe ote IS SE A xi, 3. 
Stevenson, Tilly E. (See Stevenson, Matilda C.) 


23 


24 LIST OF PUBLICATIONS. Ee ee 
Stone art (Eowke) ¢..: <224: 2.22¢222222 See 0 eee A xiii, 47. 
Stones, Perforated, from California (Henshaw) .......--.....-- Done — 2. 
Studies in Central American picture-writing (Holden) .....---- A i, 205. 
Study of Pueblo architecture: Tusayan and Cibola (V. Min- 
Gelef) Ms SLe ah Drs BAERS ees ied: OLE EE ee A) “yili, 3. 
Indian languages, Introduction to the (Powell)...... int. aly: 
mortuary customs, Introduction to the (Yarrow) --.-Int. 4. 
sign language, Introduction to the (Mallery)---...-. Int. 3. 
Siouan ‘cults (Domsey) «622 fc. ele BE AU Pox ale 
the manuscript Troano (Thomas)................---- Cv (pt. 3), 1 
tribal society (Powell) .'22.2. 2022/0242 ee 
Maya codices, ais to the CEnOHaH) Ct: San tae Joc © Ny oes 
Textile art, Form and ornament in (Holmes) ..............---. A. ‘vi, 189: 
Prehistoric, of the United States (Holmes) ....-..-.. --A iii, 393. 
Prehistoric, of eastern United States (Holmes). -... Ay Xa 
fabricsiof ancient Peru (Holmes); ~ 22-2 285-4 eee. see BiG=t 
Texts, grammar, and ethnography of the Dakota (Riggs) ..---- CWixs 
Thomas, Cyrus; Aids to the study of the Maya codices-.-..._..- A vi, 253. 
A study of the manuscript Troano........-... C v (pt.3), 1 
Burial mounds of the northern sections of the 
‘United Niates\. .. 1258-2555. 8 Pee A. 18) 
Catalogue of prehistoric works east of the 
RO Ckey eM OUM base eee ee ee ee 1B ioe 11 
Notes on certain Maya and Mexican manu- 
BCTIPUS of cost ot ene es ee te Me Oe A> Iie. 
Report on the mound explorations of the 
Bureauiok Hthnolory.).655-.c- a2) eee ees A xii, 3 
The circular, square, and octagonal earthworks 
OF OU10 << ccc- awsteenn $y ee ses MU NMIOR ee B s=10: 
Lhe, Maya year... e--ece. ? BEER els Sie B R13; 
The problem of the Ohio mounds .-.....-..---- Bn, 
Work in mound exploration of the Bureau of 
Pthnology tei see seen Wee RE es eee Bi p=4. 
Draditions of, the Osage @Dorsey))s-o2-- 622-8 - eee eee eee ee JA) “valeoree 
Trephining, Prehistoric, and cranial amulets (Fletcher) ...-.-. Cv (pt. 2) 
Tribalsociety, Shortistudy, of (Rowell) 222--2---s ee oe eee ALY a adits 
Pribes of icaliteria (Bowers) o22eeces- fee eee + eee eee Can, al 
the extreme northwest (Dall).--.......:.2..........- C Grete 
western Washington and northwestern Oregon 
(Gibbs) 2s Sos 2 ooo eee nee SACRE eee oe ee eee C. a, dr 
Troano manuscript, Study of the (Thomas)-................---- C v(pt.3), 
T’sim si-an’, Notes on the use of numerals among the (Gibbs) -.C i, 155. 
Turner, Lucien M.; Ethnology of the Ungava district, Hudson 
Bay territory nsf. oosee oss 22 ces eeees ce ae eae eee A sxipeta os 
Tusayan and Cibola, Architecture of (V. Mindeleff) .........-.A viii, 3 
Ungava district, Ethnology of the (Turner). .......-..---.---- A xi, 159 
Vocabularies of tribes of the extreme northwest (Gibbs and 
Dall) . ~~. 2 sai ~enfhtactnik Bae aed Ae Behe me be eee eee, C adar 
Wakashan languages, Bibliography of the Brice s Saeee te Sots By s==19: 
Washington, western. Tribes of (Gibbs) . Res ae A Osh T53i)- 
Weavers, Nav ajo (Matthews) seed eden andatawe & @ekkeeeios sees A ili, 871. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 
HODGE IN DEX. 25 


Wyandot government: A short study of tribal society (Powell).A i, 57, 
e 


Yarrow, H. C.; Introduction to the study of mortuary customs 
among the North American Indians..___.__-. Int. 4, 

A further contribution to the study of the mor- 
tuary customs of the North American Indians.A i, 87. 


Zuni child, Religious life of the (T. E. Stevenson) ....-.......- i ai BBY 
creation myths, Outlines of (Cushing) .-.-................ Ae exit: 
culture growth, Pueblo pottery as illustrative of (Cushing)A iv, 467. 
Oo LTES QOS CU Sa oe Oe eee ee Ae iis 3, 


ie ran 
‘; bye St iin oe ES TS entree Wits 


22) ee wake A, te ee ae ed os ail, 
Meet eee ieee MA eT aie ee ots 
side Sis ih at cee fees sbertaibien? tn caeriey ine: 

« ARATEEYY Berri saa Fane ee lee Oe Zi 5 


fi AD tie etd “~ ‘ 3 eet 
> Se as ¢ . * . as . v* iovateanweue © 
va ef fs 
- ait , 
=> — 
ar 
. 
‘ 
: ” 
: 
ae 
; 
ad % 
? 
= 
de 
z 
4 ‘e 
. 


+ 


fo aie Lia 


OHINOOKAN LANGUAGES 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


OF THE 


(INCLUDING THE CHINOOK JARGON) 


BY 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1893 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 
/ 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 


OF THE 


SALISHAN LANGUAGES 


JAMES CONSTANTINE PILLING 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1893 


re net ee 
Lassa fe 


Jno. GARLAND POLLARD. 


WASHINGTON 
“GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
(1894 


Ay 


W. PO} 


-$ ay, 


| WASHINGTON ~ 


iP series % 5 RAS et } aM a te 1 : 7 
_ GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 


t ein y 
ae ot a 


1894 


Pe 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 
-WAKASHAN LANGUAGES 


JAMES CONSTANTINE. PILLING 


3 WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
| 1894 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


BY 


BW ReA IN Aas OAS 


WASHINGTON , 
SB “GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 


1894 


my cy Ue 


say ws 


SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION 


. 


a2 3 BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


AN ANCIENT QUARRY 


IN 


INDIAN TERRITORY 


WILLIAM HENRY HOLMES 


WASHINGTON 
‘GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1894 


SMITIESONIAN INSTITUTION 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


BY 


JAMES MOONEY 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENY PRINTING OFFICE 
1894 


at SL 
vs Fite 


4 
oy 


ia 


= 


t \ A , 


‘POWELL, DIRECTOR 


* ARCITEOLOGIC. 


Sas 


_ GERARD FOWKE _ 


$i 


iO NCIS FEN OLN 8 
" GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFIOE| 
SA inary ie Baas se ae i 


5, BS SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY: J. W. POWELL, DIRECTOR 


LIST OF THE PUBLICATIONS 


OF ‘THE 


BUREAU OF ETHNOLOGY 


BY 


FREDERICK WEBB HODGE 


WASHINGTON 
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
1894 


SG 
& 


Dabh Cie fie 
ee 


nN 


b RS Fe 
AY Palin, ’ 


Vie: 


y 


‘ ele 
Set, | ' +f 
- - 
se 
x 
' 
. fs 
. 
4 
A Sy 
‘ ‘ 
. 
. 
Ms 
‘ 
* 
‘ 
4 
‘a 
4 
ae 
u 
‘ 
\ 
= 
r y 
‘ 
bale 
Winey